PUB.

(ENROUTE)

SAILING DIRECTIONS

★

★

2010

127

EAST COAST OF AUSTRALIA 

AND 

NEW ZEALAND

Prepared and published by the

NATIONAL GEOSPATIAL-INTELLIGENCE AGENCY

Bethesda, Maryland

© COPYRIGHT 2010 BY THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

NO COPYRIGHT CLAIMED UNDER TITLE 17 U.S.C.

ELEVENTH EDITION

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office

Internet: http://bookstore.gpo.gov Phone: toll free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800

Fax: (202) 512-2250 Mail Stop: SSOP, Washington, DC 20402-0001
II

Pub. 127

Preface

0.0 Pub. 127, Sailing Directions (Enroute) East Coast of Australia and New Zealand, Eleventh Edition, 2010, is issued for use

in conjunction with Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Pacific and Southeast Asia. Companion volumes are

Pubs. 125 and 126.

0.0 Digital Nautical Charts 5 and 6 provide electronic chart coverage for the area covered by this publication. 

0.0 This publication has been corrected to 23 October 2010, including Notice to Mariners No. 43 of 2010.

Explanatory Remarks

0.0 Sailing Directions are published by the National GeospatialIntelligence Agency (NGA), under the authority of Department

of Defense Directive 5105.40, dated 12 December 1988, and

pursuant to the authority contained in U. S. Code Title 10,

Sections 2791 and 2792 and Title 44, Section 1336. Sailing

Directions, covering the harbors, coasts, and waters of the

world, provide information that cannot be shown graphically

on nautical charts and is not readily available elsewhere.

0.0 Sailing Directions (Enroute) include detailed coastal and

port approach information which supplements the largest scale

chart produced by the National Geospatial-Intelligence

Agency. This publication is divided into geographic areas

called “Sectors.”

0.0 Bearings.—Bearings are true, and are expressed in degrees

from 000° (north) to 360°, measured clockwise. General

bearings are expressed by initial letters of points of the compass (e.g. N, NNE, NE, etc.). Adjective and adverb endings

have been discarded. Wherever precise bearings are intended

degrees are used.

0.0 Charts.—Reference to charts made throughout this publication refer to both the paper chart and the Digital Nautical

Chart (DNC).

0.0 Coastal Features.—It is assumed that the majority of ships

have radar. Available coastal descriptions and views, useful for

radar and visual piloting are included in geographic sequence

in each Sector.

0.0 Corrective Information.—Users should refer corrections,

additions, and comments to NGA’s Maritime Operations Desk,

as follows: 

0.0 1. Toll free: 1-800-362-6289

0.0 2. Commercial: 301-227-3147

0.0 3. DSN: 287-3147

0.0 4. DNC web site: http://www.nga.mil/NGAPortal/

DNC.portal

0.0 5. Maritime Do0.0 main web site: http://www.nga.mil/NGAPortal/

MSI.portal

0.0 6. E-mail: navsafety@nga.mil

0.0 7. Mailing address: Maritime Domain

0.0 National Geospatial-Intelligence

0.0 Agency

Mail Stop D-44

0.0 4600 Sangamore Road

0.0 Bethesda MD 20816-5003

0.0 New editions of Sailing Directions are corrected through the

date of the publication shown above. Important information to

amend material in the publication is available as a Publication

Digital Update (PDU) from the NGA Maritime Domain website.

0.0NGA Maritime Domain Website

http://www.nga.mil/NGAPortal/MSI.portal

0.0

0.0 Courses.—Courses are true, and are expressed in the same

manner as bearings. The directives “steer” and “make good” a

course mean, without exception, to proceed from a point of

origin along a track having the identical meridianal angle as the

designated course. Vessels following the directives must allow

for every influence tending to cause deviation from such track,

and navigate so that the designated course is continuously

being made good.

0.0 Currents.—Current directions are the true directions toward

which currents set.

0.0 Dangers.—As a rule outer dangers are fully described, but

inner dangers which are well-charted are, for the most part,

omitted. Numerous offshore dangers, grouped together, are

mentioned only in general terms. Dangers adjacent to a coastal

passage or fairway are described.

0.0 Distances.—Distances are expressed in nautical miles of 1

minute of latitude. Distances of less than 1 mile are expressed

in meters, or tenths of miles.

0.0 Geographic Names.—Geographic names are generally

those used by the nation having sovereignty. Names in parentheses following another name are alternate names that may

appear on some charts. In general, alternate names are quoted

only in the principal description of the place. Diacritical marks,

such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to

specific letters in certain foreign languages, are not used in the

interest of typographical simplicity. Geographic names or their

spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political

status of an area by the United States Government.

0.0 Heights.—Heights are referred to the plane of reference

used for that purpose on the charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Index-Gazetteer.—Navigational features and place-names

are listed alphabetically in the back of the book. The approximate position, along with the Sector and paragraph numbers

(e.g. 1.1), facilitate location in the text.

0.0 Internet Links.—This publication provides internet links to

web sites concerned with maritime navigational safety, including but not limited to, Federal government sites, foreign Hydrographic Offices, and foreign public/private port facilities.

NGA makes no claims, promises, or guarantees concerning the

accuracy, completeness, or adequacy of the contents of the web

sites and expressly disclaims any liability for errors and omissions of these web sites.

0.0 Light and Fog Signals.—Lights and fog signals are not described, and light sectors are not usually defined. The Light

Lists should be consulted for complete information.

0.0 Ports.—Directions for entering ports are depicted where

appropriate by means of chartlets, sketches, and photos, which

facilitate positive identification of landmarks and navigational

aids. These chartlets and sketches are not always to scale, how-
III

 Pub. 127

ever, and should be used only as a general informational guide

in conjunction with the best scale chart. Specific port facilities

are omitted from the standard format. They are tabulated in

Pub. 150, World Port Index.

0.0 Radio Navigational Aids.—Radio navigational aids are not

described in detail. Publication No. 117 Radio Navigational

Aids and NOAA Publication, Selected Worldwide Marine

Broadcasts, should be consulted.

0.0 Soundings.—Soundings are referred to the datum of the

charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Special Warnings.—A Special Warning may be in force for

the geographic area covered by this publication. Special

Warnings are printed in the weekly Notice to Mariners upon

promulgation and are reprinted annually in Notice to Mariners

No. 1. A listing of Special Warnings currently in force is

printed in each weekly Notice to Mariners, Section III, Broadcast Warnings, along with the notice number of promulgation.

Special Warnings are also available on the Maritime Division

website.

0.0 Wind Directions.—Wind directions are the true directions

from which winds blow.

Reference List

0.0 The principal sources examined in the preparation of this

publication were:

0.0 British Hydrographic Department Sailing Directions.

0.0 Various port handbooks. 

0.0 Reports from United States Naval and merchant vessels and

various shipping companies.

0.0 Other U.S. Government publications, reports, and documents.

0.0 Charts, light lists, tide and current tables, and other documents in possession of the Agency.

0.0 Internet Web site, as follows:

1. Auckland, Ports of

http://poal.co.nz

2. Australian Maritime Safety Authority

http://www.amsa.gov.au

3. Australian Reef Pilots

http://www.reefpilots.com.au

4. Brisbane Corporation, Port of

http://www.portbris.com.au

5. Brisbane Marine Pilots

http://www.brisbanepilots.com.au

6. Burnie Port Corporation

http://www.burnieport.com.au

7. Cairns Port Authority 

http://www.cairnsport.com.au

8. CentrePort, New Zealand (Wellington)

http://www.centreport.co.nz/centreport

9. Devonport, Port of

http://www.portdev.com.au

10. Eden, Port of

http://www.eden.nsw.gov.au

11. Gladstone Port Authority

http://www.gpa.org.au

12. Hobart Ports Corporation

http://www.hpc.com.au

13. Lyttelton Port Company Limited

http://www.lpc.co.nz

14. Marine and Safety Tasmania

http://www.mast.tas.gov.au

15. Marquis’ Web

http://users.mcmedia.com.au/~rca

Views of Port Phillip Entrance

Photos by courtesy of Rod Cairns

rca@echuca.net.au

16. Melbourne Port Corporation

http://www.melbport.com.au

17. Napier, Port of

http://www.portofnapier.co.nz

18. Newcastle Port Corporation

http://www.newportcorp.com

19. Northland Port Corporation

http://www.northlandportcorp.co.nz

20. Port Kembla Port Corporation

http://www.kemblaport.com.au

21. Port Marlborough

http://www.portmarlborough.co.nz

22. Port Nelson

http://portnelson.com

23. Port Otago Limited

http://www.portotago.co.nz

24. Port Taranaki (Westgate)

http://www.westgate.co.nz

25. Portland, Port of

http://www.portofportland.com.au

26. PrimePort Timaru

http://www.primeport.co.nz

27. Queensland Ports Corporation

http://www.pcq.com.au/html/02_ports.htm

28. Rockhampton Port Authority

http://www.rpa.qld.gov.au

29. Sydney Pilot Service

http://www.sydneypilotservice.com.au

30. Sydney Ports 

http://www.sydneyports.com.au

31. Sydney Sea Pilots 

http://www.sydneyseapilots.com.au

32. Tauranga, Port of

http://www.port-tauranga.co.nz

33. Torres Pilots

http://www.torrespilots.com.au

34. Townsville Port Authority

http://www.townsville-port.com.au

35. Transpower New Zealand

http://www.transpower.co.nz

36. Victorian Channels Authority

http://www.vicchannels.vic.gov.au

37. Westport Harbor 

http://www.westportharbour.co.nz
Pub. 154 V

0.0SECTOR LIMITS — PUB. 127
Pub. 127 VI

Conversion Tables

Feet to Meters

Feet 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.30 0.61 0.91 1.22 1.52 1.83 2.13 2.44 2.74

 10 3.05 3.35 3.66 3.96 4.27 4.57 4.88 5.18 5.49 5.79

 20 6.10 6.40 6.71 7.01 7.32 7.62 7.92 8.23 8.53 8.84

 30 9.14 9.45 9.75 10.06 10.36 10.67 10.97 11.28 11.58 11.89

 40 12.19 12.50 12.80 13.11 13.41 13.72 14.02 14.33 14.63 14.93

 50 15.24 15.54 15.85 16.15 16.46 16.76 17.07 17.37 17.68 17.98

 60 18.29 18.59 18.90 19.20 19.51 19.81 20.12 20.42 20.73 21.03

 70 21.34 21.64 21.95 22.25 22.55 22.86 23.16 23.47 23.77 24.08

 80 24.38 24.69 24.99 25.30 25.60 25.91 26.21 26.52 26.82 27.13

 90 27.43 27.74 28.04 28.35 28.65 28.96 29.26 29.57 29.87 30.17

Fathoms to Meters

Fathoms 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 1.83 3.66 5.49 7.32 9.14 10.97 12.80 14.63 16.46

 10 18.29 20.12 21.95 23.77 25.60 27.43 29.26 31.09 32.92 34.75

 20 36.58 38.40 40.23 42.06 43.89 45.72 47.55 49.38 51.21 53.03

 30 54.86 56.69 58.52 60.35 62.18 64.01 65.84 67.67 69.49 71.32

 40 73.15 74.98 76.81 78.64 80.47 82.30 84.12 85.95 87.78 89.61

 50 91.44 93.27 95.10 96.93 98.75 100.58 102.41 104.24 106.07 107.90

 60 109.73 111.56 113.39 115.21 117.04 118.87 120.70 122.53 124.36 126.19

 70 128.02 129.85 131.67 133.50 135.33 137.16 138.99 140.82 142.65 144.47

 80 146.30 148.13 149.96 151.79 153.62 155.45 157.28 159.11 160.93 162.76

 90 164.59 166.42 168.25 170.08 171.91 173.74 175.56 177.39 179.22 181.05

Meters to Feet

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 3.28 6.56 9.84 13.12 16.40 19.68 22.97 26.25 29.53

 10 32.81 36.09 39.37 42.65 45.93 49.21 52.49 55.77 59.06 62.34

 20 65.62 68.90 72.18 75.46 78.74 82.02 85.30 88.58 91.86 95.14

 30 98.42 101.71 104.99 108.27 111.55 114.83 118.11 121.39 124.67 127.95

 40 131.23 134.51 137.80 141.08 144.36 147.64 150.92 154.20 157.48 160.76

 50 164.04 167.32 170.60 173.88 177.16 180.45 183.73 187.01 190.29 193.57

 60 196.85 200.13 203.41 206.69 209.97 213.25 216.54 219.82 223.10 226.38

 70 229.66 232.94 236.22 239.50 242.78 246.06 249.34 252.62 255.90 259.19

 80 262.47 265.75 269.03 272.31 275.59 278.87 282.15 285.43 288.71 291.99

 90 295.28 298.56 301.84 305.12 308.40 311.68 314.96 318.24 321.52 324.80

Meters to Fathoms

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.55 1.09 1.64 2.19 2.73 3.28 3.83 4.37 4.92

 10 5.47 6.01 6.56 7.11 7.66 8.20 8.75 9.30 9.84 10.39

 20 10.94 11.48 12.03 12.58 13.12 13.67 14.22 14.76 15.31 15.86

 30 16.40 16.95 17.50 18.04 18.59 19.14 19.68 20.23 20.78 21.33

 40 21.87 22.42 22.97 23.51 24.06 24.61 25.15 25.70 26.25 26.79

 50 27.34 27.89 28.43 28.98 29.53 30.07 30.62 31.17 31.71 32.26

 60 32.81 33.36 33.90 34.45 35.00 35.54 36.09 36.64 37.18 37.73

 70 38.28 38.82 39.37 39.92 40.46 41.01 41.56 42.10 42.65 43.20

 80 43.74 44.29 44.84 45.38 45.93 46.48 47.03 47.57 48.12 48.67

 90 49.21 49.76 50.31 50.85 51.40 51.95 52.49 53.04 53.59 54.13
VII Pub. 127

Abbreviations

The following abbreviations may be used in the text:

Units

°C degree(s) Centigrade km kilometer(s)

cm centimeter(s) m meter(s)

cu.m. cubic meter(s) mb millibars

dwt deadweight tons MHz megahertz

FEU forty-foot equivalent units mm millimeter(s)

grt gross registered tons nrt net registered tons

kHz kilohertz TEU twenty-foot equivalent units

Directions

N north S south

NNE northnortheast SSW southsouthwest

NE northeast SW southwest

ENE eastnortheast WSW westsouthwest

E east W west

ESE eastsoutheast WNW westnorthwest

SE southeast NW northwest

SSE southsoutheast NNW northnorthwest

Vessel types

LASH Lighter Aboard Ship ro-ro Roll-on Roll-off

LNG Liquified Natural Gas ULCC Ultra Large Crude Carrier

LPG Liquified Petroleum Gas VLCC Very Large Crude Carrier

OBO Ore/Bulk/Oil

Time

ETA estimated time of arrival GMT Greenwich Mean Time

ETD estimated time of departure UTC Coordinated Universal Time

Water level

MSL mean sea level LWS low water springs

HW high water MHWN mean high water neaps

LW low water MHWS mean high water springs

MHW mean high water MLWN mean low water neaps

MLW mean low water MLWS mean low water springs

HWN high water neaps HAT highest astronomical tide

HWS high water springs LAT lowest astronomical tide

LWN low water neaps

Communications

D/F direction finder MF medium frequency

R/T radiotelephone HF high frequency

GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System VHF very high frequency

LF low frequency UHF ultra high frequency

Navigation

LANBY Large Automatic Navigation Buoy SPM Single Point Mooring

NAVSAT Navigation Satellite TSS Traffic Separation Scheme

ODAS Ocean Data Acquisition System VTC Vessel Traffic Center

SBM Single Buoy Mooring VTS Vessel Traffic Service

Miscellaneous

COLREGS Collision Regulations

IALA International Association of Lighthouse

Authorities

No./Nos.

PA

Number/Numbers

Position approximate

IHO International Hydrographic Office PD Position doubtful

IMO International Maritime Organization Pub. Publication

loa length overall St./Ste. Saint/Sainte
Pub. 127 IX

Contents

Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II

Chartlet—Sector Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

Conversion Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII

Sector 1

Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip, including the Western Entrance of Bass Strait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Sector 2

Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe, including the Eastern Entrance of Bass Strait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Sector 3

Australia—Coasts of Tasmania . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Sector 4

Australia—Coast of New South Wales—Cape Howe to Port Jackson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Sector 5

Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Sector 6

Australia—Coral Sea—Islands and Dangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Sector 7

Australia—Cape Townshend to Cape Grafton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Sector 8

Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Sector 9

Australia—Torres Strait and Great North East Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Sector 10

New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Sector 11

New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Sector 12

New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Sector 13

New Zealand—Off-lying Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Index—Gazetteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
1

Pub. 127

1. 

Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip, including the 

Western Entrance of Bass Strait

1.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 1 — CHART INFORMATION
3

Pub. 127

SECTOR 1 

AUSTRALIA—CAPE NORTHUMBERLAND TO PORT PHILLIP, INCLUDING THE WESTERN 

ENTRANCE OF BASS STRAIT

1.0 Plan.—This sector first describes the S coast of Australia

from Cape Northumberland to Cape Otway, followed by a description of the western entrance of Bass Strait, including King

Island. The S coast of Australia from Cape Otway to Port Phillip, which includes the ports of Melbourne and Geelong, is

then described. The arrangement of the sector is from W to E.

Cape Northumberland to Portland Bay

1.1 Cape Northumberland (38°04'S., 140°40'E.), about

30m high, is rugged and cliffy, with a hill rising to an elevation

of 41m behind it. It may be easily identified by Mount Gambier

and Mount Schanck, each of which are extinct volcanoes, and

are conspicuous about 14 and 8 miles NNE, respectively, of the

cape. Mount Gambier is a peak, 189m high, with a tableland

extending E of it. Mount Schanck is a truncated cone, 122m

high.

1.1 A light is shown from a white tower with a red band on a

knoll, about 0.4 mile NE of the S extremity of the cape. The

light is connected to the telephone system.

1.1 The cape has been reported to be a good radar target at 20

miles.

1.1 West of Cape Northumberland, for 1 to 4 miles offshore,

there are fields of kelp, the tops of the kelp trailing a long distance on the surface of the water. The kelp does not appear to

grow in depths greater than 30m.

1.1 The coast between Cape Northumberland and Cape Otway,

about 140 miles ESE, is generally of moderate elevation,

wooded in places, and backed by higher wooded land.

1.1 Winds—Weather.—On the S coast of Australia, a large

range of temperature is experienced. In a normal year, extreme

temperatures of more than 38°C are experienced at Melbourne

in January and February, while occasional values of around

0°C may be experienced in July.

1.1 Rainfall on this coast is adequate and fairly reliable. To the

W of Melbourne, winter is the wet season and summer is relatively dry. Most places on the coast find August to be the wettest month and January the driest. In Melbourne, October is the

wettest month, with an average rainfall of 76mm, and January

is the driest month, with an average rainfall of 44mcm.

1.1 Fog is infrequent at sea and is only moderately frequent as

well as short lived at some of the larger Australian ports. 

1.1 Gales of force 8 and over are moderately frequent at sea off

the S coast. Much of the bad weather experienced occurs at

fronts associated with E moving lows.

1.1 There is a high frequency of gales in the Bass Strait due to

the channalization of E and W winds.

1.1 At Warrnambool, the afternoon winds are predominantly SW

in most months of the year, but are variable in July. The early

morning winds are SW in summer, but are between the NE and

NW in winter. The average wind speed varies from 7 to 11

knots.

1.1 At Melbourne, at 0900, N winds predominate in the winter

months. In summer, the winds are rather variable, but S and

SW winds are the most frequent. At 1500, N winds predominate in winter and S winds in summer. The afternoon winds average about 10 to 12 knots in summer and drop to 8 to 9 knots

from April to August. The morning winds are a few knots

lighter on the average.

1.1 Caution.—Crayfish and shark fishing vessels operate up to

90 miles from the coast between Cape Northumberland and

Cape Otway. Vessels should keep a good lookout for them.

1.1 Between the months of November to June, inclusive, extensive lobster fishing takes place on the continental shelf W of

Cape Nelson (38°26'S., 141°33'E.) and inshore of the 150m

curve. 

1.1 Mariners are requested, when passage permits, to transit outside the 200m curve in this area.

1.2 The coast between Cape Northumberland and Flint

Point, about 5 miles E, is a low, sandy beach, with a bank behind it, and it is fronted by extensive drying ledges. A low,

wooded range of hills extends 1.5 miles NE from Cape

Northumberland; elsewhere the country is swampy for more

than 1 mile inland. Flint Point is low and covered with heaps of

stones.

1.2 Breaksea Reef, with depths of less than 4.9m, extends about

1.5 miles offshore, about 1.5 miles E of Cape Northumberland.

The reef is steep-to on its W side, and the sea generally breaks

over it with great violence.

1.2 Port Macdonnel, used by fishing vessels and pleasure craft

with a draft of less than 1.5m, lies about 2 miles E of Cape

Northumberland, and is situated on the shores of Macdonnel

Bay, a slight indentation in the coast.

1.2 Danger Point (38°03'S., 140°48'E.), about 1.7 miles E of

Flint Point, is low, with swamps inland of the point; a reef, with

depths of less than 5.5m, extends about 1.5 miles S of the

point.

1.2 A range of hills, attaining an elevation of 38m at its W extremity, begins about 3 miles NW of Danger Point and extends

about 10 miles E to the Glenelg River. Mount Ruskin, 37m

high, is located in this range, about 1.5 miles WNW of the

mouth of the Glenelg River.

1.2 Green Point, about 3 miles E of Danger Point, is 15m high

and so named from its verdant appearance. Ruby Rock, with a

depth of 0.9m, lies about 2.5 miles SE of Green Point; during

SE and E winds, the sea seldom breaks on this rock.

1.2 The coast between Green Point and the mouth of the Glenelg

River, about 5.5 miles E, is a sandy beach backed by low sand

hills. At the mouth of the river there is a sandy bar which is

fordable at LW when the sea is smooth. Inside the bar the river

is broad and deep.

1.2 The coast between the Glenelg River (38°04'S., 140°59'E.)

and Cape Bridgewater, about 28 miles SE, is a succession of

sand hummocks, about 46m high, partially covered with bushes, with the sand in many places showing and reaching to their
4 Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 

Pub. 127

summits.

1.2 For about 14 miles from the Glenelg River, there are thicklywooded tracts of rising ground, about 91m high, between 2 and

3 miles inland.

1.2 About 12 miles NW of Cape Bridgewater, a range of hills up

to 158m high and heavily wooded lies about 2 miles inland of

the coast hummocks. A group of high bare sand hummocks lies

at the NW end of the range, between it and the coast. A large

tract of sand lies from 7 to 4 miles from the cape.

1.2 Discovery Bay, between Cape Northumberland and the W

side of Cape Bridgewater promontory, is rendered dangerous

by an inward setting tide, and a heavy swell rolls in over the E

part of the bay.

1.3 Mount Kincaid (38°11'S., 141°22'E.), 211m high,

lies about 12 miles N of Cape Bridgewater, and about 4 miles

from the coast. It is scarcely visible from seaward, its position

being indicated by a few trees slightly elevated above the surrounding country.

1.3 Mount Richmond, 229m high, the most conspicuous landmark on this stretch of coast, lies about 7 miles N of Cape

Bridgewater. It has a broad, flat top, and is thickly wooded, except on its SW side. A metal beacon, on a concrete pillar, 4.6m

high, stands on its summit.

Cape Bridgewater (38°24'S., 141°24'E.) rises to a flat summit, 134m high, on the SE end of the promontory. The fall to

Bridgewater Bay on its E side and to the S is sheer, but to the

W and N, the downward slope is gradual to the 61m contour

over pasture land. A stone cairn stands on the summit of the

cape. The cape is visible at 25 miles in clear weather, and has

been reported to give good radar returns at 18 miles.

1.3 Anchorage.—During E gales, which usually last about 3

days, small vessels may obtain temporary anchorage in Descartes Bay, in 11m, sand, about 0.7 mile W of Mount Dryden.

The latter, 70m high and grass-covered, is located close to the

coast, about 3.5 miles N of Cape Bridgewater. A watch should

always be kept for a change to the prevailing W winds.

1.3 Bridgewater Bay is entered between Cape Bridgewater and

Cape Nelson, about 6.5 miles ESE. A heavy swell rolls in during S and SW breezes, and, except under favorable circumstances, vessels ride uneasily. The swell threatens to break in a

depth of 37m on a line between Cape Bridgewater and Cape

Nelson, and actually does break nearly 1 mile offshore. 

1.3 Mount Chaucer, about 3 miles NNW of Cape Nelson, is a

small peaked hill, 123m high, on which stands a beacon. A

conspicuous mass of drift sand lies close W of Mount Chaucer.

1.4 Cape Nelson (38°26'S., 141°33'E.) is an irregular

cape of jagged cliffs, 61m high, rising at the back and center to

lightly timbered and grassy hummocks, the highest of which,

Picnic Hill, is 118m high. The cape is bold on its SE side. A

house and water tank are conspicuous on the cape. Cape Nelson has been reported to give good radar returns at 19 miles.

1.4 A light is shown from a white stone tower, 24m high, on

Cape Nelson. The light is connected by telephone with Portland.

1.4 Nelson Bay, entered between Cape Nelson and Cape Sir William Grant, about 4 miles ENE, has a coast faced with limestone and basaltic cliffs, 30 to 61m high.

1.4 Cape Sir William Grant, rising to an elevation of 62m, is

conspicuous, crowned with trees, and is shaped like a helmet.

A 10m shoal lies close off the cape.

1.4 Bald Hill, 65m high, stands about 1.5 miles NW of the cape.

The E side of the cape is scarred by quarry excavations.

1.4 Point Danger (38°24'S., 141°39'E.), about 1.5 miles ENE of

Cape Sir William Grant, is 16m high and abrupt.

1.4 Big Reef, with a depth of 3.9m, and on which the sea breaks

heavily, lies about 0.8 mile S of the point.

1.4 Little Reef, with a least depth of 3.9m over its outer end, extends about 0.5 mile SE of Point Danger.

1.4 Lawrence Rocks, about 1.5 miles SE of Point Danger, consist of two conspicuous islets. The outer islet has two summits,

the S and slightly higher islet is 35m high, with a flat summit.

The inner islet, separated from the outer islet by a boat passage,

is 22m high. Lawrence Rocks are steep-to, except NW of the

inner islet. A 14m rocky patch lies about 0.3 mile S of

Lawrence Rocks.

1.4 The passage between Point Danger and Lawrence Rocks is

not safe. With strong winds from seaward, a current sets out

through this passage, sometimes attaining a velocity of 3 knots,

and during heavy S gales breaks across.

Portland Bay is entered between Point Danger and the entrance of the Fitzroy River, about 12.5 miles NE. Portland, on

the W side of the bay, is the only large port on this stretch of

coast, and is the natural outlet for the large agricultural and

pastoral country of western Victoria.

1.4 Aspect.—In clear weather, when off Portland Bay, the lower

volcanic peaks of Mount Eccles, 179m high, and Mount Napier, 443m high, located about 29 and 42 miles NE, respectively,

of Cape Nelson, together with Mount Clay, 187m high, located

about 7 miles WNW of the entrance to the Fitzroy River, will

assist a vessel in identifying the coast. Mount Clay, with a fire

watch tower, 16m high on its summit, is a flat-topped hill, with

a notch in its center; except for the notch, it would resemble

Mount Richmond, about 14 miles WSW.

1.4 Anchorage.—Portland Bay affords good anchorage, in a

depth of 15m, 0.7 mile ENE of the harbor entrance. The anchorage is sheltered from all winds except from the SE.

Portland (38°21'S., 141°37'E.)

World Port Index No. 54140

1.5 The port of Portland lies in Portland Cove, W of Observatory Point, which is located about 3 miles NNW of Point

Danger. The harbor is formed by two rubble breakwaters; Main

Breakwater extends N and NNE from Observatory Point, and

Lee Breakwater extends ESE from the W side of the harbor.

Major exports include grain and woodchips.

1.5 Whaler Point, the N entrance point of Portland Cove, lies

about 1 mile NW of Observatory Point, and is a limestone cliff,

32m high. Anderson’s Point lies about 0.3 mile farther N.

1.5 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Portland is 0.8m at

MHHW, and 0.2m at MLLW. The tide in Portland Bay, as regards its rise and fall, is greatly dependent on the winds.

 The Port of Portland 

http://www.portofportland.com.au
Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 5

Pub. 127

1.5 Depths—Limitations.—Whaler Reef, a detached shoal lying 0.2 to 0.3 mile E of Whaler Point, has a least depth of 3m.

1.5 There are depths of 14.2m in the harbor entrance, and over

13m in the approach. There are six shipping berths in the port.

1.5 The K.S. Anderson Wharf, which is 396m long, and includes Berth No. 1 and Berth No. 2, lies on the W side of the

root of Main Breakwater. These berths have alongside depths

of 12.2 and 11.2m, respectively. Two 27.4m high traversing

loaders, for handling bulk grain, are available at K.S. Anderson

Wharf.

1.5 Berth No. 5 and Berth No. 6 lie across the basin from Berth

No. 1 and have alongside depths of 12.2 and 12.0m respectively. A trawler wharf and slipways lay adjacent to the marina and

yacht club.

1.5 The Smelter Berth, on the W side of the Main Breakwater, is

205m long, with a depth of 12.2m alongside. It is used for alumina.

1.5 The S.L. Patterson Tanker Berth, on the S side of Lee Breakwater, is 76m long, with a depth of 10.5m alongside. 

1.5 Aspect.—Observatory Hill, about 26m high, lies close SW

of Observatory Point, and a chimney, with an elevation of 76m,

lies about 0.2 mile SSW of the point.

1.5 A light is shown from a white stone tower, 12m high, on

Whaler Point.

1.5 There are several silos near the S end of No. 1 Dock. The

Catholic Church spire is conspicuous about 0.2 mile SSW of

the root of Lee Breakwater.

1.5 A chimney is conspicuous about 0.2 mile W of Whaler

Point; a water tower, 58m high, lies about 0.1 mile W of

Andersons Point.

1.5 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and available 24 hours

for any vessels over 35m in length and/or over 350 grt, except

for vessels exempted by law. Vessels should send their ETA

and request for pilots at least 24 hours in advance to the Harbor

Master. Pilots board vessels in position 38°20'S, 141°40'E. 

1.5 Regulations.—The port limits are defined by a line extending N from Danger Point to the opposite shore of the bay. Departure drafts of 12.7m are allowed for Berth No. 1 and Berth

No. 5 with written approval from the Harbor Master.

1.5 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained, in 14.6 to 16.5m,

about 0.5 to 0.7 mile ENE of the entrance to the harbor.

1.5 The quarantine anchorage, in a depth of 12.8m, lies E of

Main Breakwater. The quarantine line runs N-S through the

head of this breakwater.

1.5 The explosives anchorage is E of a line drawn 020° from Observatory Point and exceeding a distance of 0.8 mile from the

shore.

1.5 Directions.—Approaching Portland Bay from the W, a vessel should endeavor to sight the high land of Cape Bridgewater,

which, when seen from a distance of 12 or 15 miles SW, appears covered with white sand patches. After identifying Cape

Nelson, steer a prudent distance off it and Lawrence Rocks.

When Mount Clay is open E of Lawrence Rocks, alter course

N and proceed to the anchorage or the harbor as convenient.

1.5 From the E, a vessel should pass about 0.5 mile S of Lady

Julia Percy Island (38°25'S., 142°00'E.), then shape a course

for the anchorage and harbor.

1.5 At night, from the W, vessels should not round Lawrence

Rocks until Whaler Point Light is visible; then course may be

altered N until in the white sector of Whaler Point Light.

1.6 Minerva Reef, with depths of less than 5.5m, extends

about 0.7 mile from the greater part of the NW shore of Portland Bay, from about 1 mile N of Anderson Point to the entrance of the Surrey River. The whole area forms an uneven

bottom, over which the sea breaks heavily at times.

1.6 The entrance of the Surrey River (38°16'S., 141°42'E.) is

fronted by a bar and is spanned by a road bridge about 0.3 mile

above its entrance.

1.6 The entrance of the Fitzroy River, about 7 miles E, shows up

well as a break in the regular coastline. Julia Hill, 20m high,

and surmounted by a white beacon, lies about 2 miles W of the

entrance of the river. A prominent stranded wreck lies on the

beach S of Julia Hill. 

1.6 Julia Reef, with a least depth of 7.3m, is a large irregular area of ground on which the sea breaks in S gales, about 1.5

miles S of Julia Hill.

1.6 The entrance of Lake Yambuk lies about 10.5 miles ESE of

the entrance of the Fitzroy River; the Shaw River enters its N

end. Mount Hummock, 65m high, with a red conical beacon on

its summit, lies about 3 miles SE of Lake Yambuk.

1.6 Mills Reef, about 1.5 miles W of Mount Hummock, consists

of several rocks which dry about 0.9m and are covered with

masses of kelp.

1.6 Boulder Point (38°24'S., 142°09'E.), about 6 miles ESE of

Lake Yambuk, is backed by The Sands, conspicuous white

sand dunes, 91m high, and one of best landmarks for making

the low land of Port Fairy.

1.6 The coast from Boulder Point to the S end of Griffith Island,

about 4.7 miles E, is low and covered with grass, with a few

scattered trees. A water tower, with a dome top, is conspicuous

about 3.2 miles E of The Sands.

1.6 A rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies about 0.2 mile S

of Boulder Point. A narrow strip of basaltic boulders, 3.7m

high, about 1.5 miles E of The Sands, lies about 0.2 mile offshore; this projection is always indicated by breakers.

1.6 Lady Julia Percy Island (38°25'S., 142°00'E.), about 21

miles E of Cape Nelson and 4.5 miles offshore, is 53m high,

flat-topped, and cliffy on all sides. The island has been reported to give good radar returns at 20 miles. It presents the same

appearance from all directions, with the exception that its S

Portland
6 Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 

Pub. 127

end is somewhat higher than its other parts. A white cairn, 3m

high, stands on the W point of the island.

1.6 Landing may be made, except in N winds, in a small cove on

the N side of the island at some steps cut in the rock face.

1.6 The passage, about 3 miles wide between Lady Julia Percy

Island and Mills Reef, is used by vessels with local knowledge

in N winds. Vessels are cautioned that a heavy swell sets in

from the SW, with winds from the SE to SW.

1.7 Port Fairy lies at the SW end of Port Fairy Bay, which

is entered between Griffith Island and Reef Point, about 2.3

miles NE. Back Passage, on the W side of Griffith Island, is

shallow, rocky, and closed by a rubble wall extending across it.

1.7 The Moyne River enters Moyne Lagoon at its N end and

then flows through a narrow channel, with the town of Port

Fairy on its W bank, to the sea. The entrance of the river lies

between two stone training walls. Port Fairy is now principally

a fishing port.

1.7 Depths—Limitations.—A drying reef extends about 0.1

mile E, and rocky ground, with depths of less than 5.5m, extends about 0.2 mile E and 0.3 mile N of the NE end of Griffith

Island. 

1.7 In 1976, a least depth of 2m could be carried from the entrance of the Moyne River to the N end of the wharves at Port

Fairy, but due to freshets, this depth cannot be relied on.

1.7 Off Reef Point, volcanic boulders from 0.6 to 2.7m high, extend about 0.2 mile, and sunken rocks extend about 90m farther S.

1.7 Mariners are advised that depths at and along the river entrance are constantly changing. Dredging is carried out periodically. Less than charted depths may exist and local knowledge

is required to enter the port.

1.7 Aspect.—Griffith Island is low, with its NE point about

4.6m high. A double-peaked hummock, 19m high, with a conspicuous red beacon on its N peak, lies near the S end of the island.

1.7 Griffith Island Light is shown from a tower, 11m high, at the

NE extremity of Griffith Island.

1.7 Battery Hill, 15.8m high, lies about 0.3 mile W of the head

of the SE training wall.

1.7 Tower Hill (38°19'S., 142°23'E.), about 7.5 miles NE of

Griffith Island Light, is 98m high, and the most remarkable

landmark seen when approaching Port Fairy from the S. A conspicuous tower stands close NE of Tower Hill. Tower Hill

Lake lies about 1 mile W of Tower Hill. Viewed from the W,

Tower Hill is not clearly visible, except in clear weather, due to

a higher tableland E of it. From the S, it appears W of this tableland as a conical peak. From the tableland, the land E and W

is higher than the general coast line, and it slopes to about the

same elevation at either side, with the land W appearing to be

joined to Tower Hill.

1.7 Regulations.—The S limit of Port Fairy is a line drawn

across the S entrance points of Back Passage, and the SE limit

is a line joining Griffith Island Light and Tower Hill.

1.7 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in about 9.1m,

sand, about 0.8 mile NE of Battery Hill. Small vessels anchor,

in about 5.5m, about 0.2 mile closer inshore. Vessels anchoring

during the continuance of a SW gale may get as close in as

their draft will permit.

1.7 The explosives anchorage is within a circle with a radius of

300m, centered 017°, 1,300m from Griffith Island Light.

1.7 These anchorages are bad with E winds, and vessels are recommended not to try to ride out a SE gale.

1.7 Directions.—After identifying the water tower about 2 miles

W of Griffith Island, the double-peaked hummock and lighthouse on the island, and Tower Hill, steer to pass a prudent distance from the reef and foul ground extending from the NE end

of Griffith Island. Then steer for the anchorage. At night, a vessel should not anchor until Battery Hill Light is opened.

1.7 If bound for the wharves at Port Fairy, pass N of the buoy,

moored about 0.4 mile N of Griffith Island Light, then proceed

to the entrance of the Moyne River. From the entrance, steer a

mid-channel course to the wharves.

1.7 Caution.—Submerged pilings of an old jetty extend about

0.2 mile offshore abreast Battery Hill.

Coastal Features

1.8 The coast from Reef Point to Sisters Point (38°22'S.,

142°19'E.), about 1.5 miles ENE, is a succession of bare sand

hummocks, about 15.2m high, fringed by rocks, some of which

dry and some of which are sunken, extending about 0.5 mile

offshore. Sisters Point is conspicuous, having immediately

over it two hummocks, 20m high, and so named from their

similar appearance.

1.8 A small sandy point, fringed with boulders, lies one mile E

of Sisters Point. Armstrong Bay, E of this point, is nearly

filled with sunken rocks. Helen Rock, about 1.5 miles ESE of

the sandy point, is a pinnacle with a depth of 1.8m; it is steepto and the sea rarely breaks over it.

1.8 The coast from Armstrong Bay to Pickering Point

(38°24'S., 142°28'E.), about 6 miles ESE, is sandy and backed

by grassy hummocks, 30 to 49m high. A tract of bare sand lies

between 1 and 2 miles W of Pickering Point. The coast for

about 0.7 mile WNW of Pickering Point consists of sandstone

cliffs, having numerous indentations, and with rocks, which

dry 0.6m, and sunken rocks lying off it, in some places up to

0.3 mile offshore.

Warrnambool Harbor (38°24'S., 142°29'E.)

World Port Index No. 54120

1.9 Lady Bay, in which is included the port of Warrnambool, is an indentation extending from a reef S of Warrnambool

Breakwater to the Hopkins River, about 1.5 miles ENE.

1.9 Warrnambool Harbor, located on the banks of the Merri River that lies on the W side of Lady Bay, is partially sheltered by

the breakwater, and lies inside several islets. Numerous rocks

extend SE from Pickering Point. The harbor is considered the

best shelter, during SE gales, of any of the W ports of Victoria,

due to the outer swell being broken by shoal rocky ground

which extends from the mouth of the Hopkins River. It is not

safe to enter or leave this harbor during SW or S gales, as the

sea then breaks across the entrance with great violence; a vessel approaching the harbor under such conditions should make

for Portland Bay. The harbor is only used by fishing vessels. 

1.9 Depths.—Limitations.—South Channel, leading to Warrnambool Harbor, lies between Annabella Reef and the shoal

rocky ground, with depths of less than 9.1m, which extends to
Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 7

Pub. 127

about 1 mile S and 1.2 miles SW from the entrance of the Hopkins River. A large amount of kelp is found in this channel and

the channel was reported to have a least depth of 8.5m on the

range line. This channel is unsafe in S and SW gales. The

rocky ground on the E side of South Channel breaks in bad

weather and in a heavy swell; in calm weather, a vessel may

cross it in any direction, but when approaching from the SE, a

vessel will be beamto the swell.

1.9 Aspect.—Middle Island (38°24'S., 142°28'E.), 21m high

and surmounted by a white beacon, and Merri Island, 14m

high, close NW, lie in the entrance to the Merri River in an area

of foul ground extending about 0.4 mile S of Pickering Point.

1.9 The Merri River enters the sea through Merri River Cutting

close E of Pickering Point. The mouth of the river is usually

closed, but floods wash the sands from its mouth, allowing the

flow of a large body of water.

1.9 Breakwater Rock, 5m high, lies about 0.1 mile E of Middle

Island, and close S of the root of Warrnambool Breakwater.

The breakwater, built of concrete blocks, extends about 0.3

mile ENE of Breakwater Rock, and is connected by a wooden

viaduct to the shore at the E side of the mouth of the Merri River. The N side of the breakwater is a wooden wharf, fitted with

spring buffer piles; the depth alongside is subject to variation,

especially at its outer end. In 1961, there were depths of 2.4 to

5.5m alongside its outer part.

1.9 Inner Reef and Annabella Reef, both of which dry, lie about

0.1 and 0.2 mile SE, respectively, of Breakwater Rock. Rocks,

awash, extend about 0.1 mile SE of Annabella Reef; the sea

breaks heavily in this area.

1.9 The N shore of Lady Bay is a low sandy ridge, backed by

higher and well-wooded land and the town of Warrnambool. A

hotel lies about 0.3 mile NNW of the root of the breakwater

and a chimney lies about 0.1 mile farther NNE.

1.9 The entrance of the Hopkins River is rock-bound and shallow, but within there are depths of 5.5m for several miles. Hopkins Reef, which dries 0.9m at its seaward end, extends about

0.3 mile S from the river entrance.

1.9 East of the river, the land is open rising gradually from the

shore and terminating in a grassy hill, 67m high. A hill known

locally as Hopkins Hill, 37m high, and on which there is a

white beacon, lies about 0.2 mile E of the river entrance.

1.9 Mount Warrnambool (38°19'S., 142°44'E.), about 11 miles

inland and 14 miles ENE of Middle Island, is visible, in clear

weather, from a vessel 5 miles offshore between Port Fairy and

Warrnambool. It has a rounded, but not even summit, 217m

high; a low spur of the same hill lies about 3 miles W.

1.9 Lights, in line bearing 008.3°, lead through South Channel.

The front light is shown from a white stone tower in front of

the town, and the rear light is shown from a white stone structure about 0.1 mile N of the front light.

1.9 A conspicuous round stone water tower, with a flat top, 65m

high, lies about 1 mile N of the range lights.

1.9 Signals.—The port limits of Warrnambool Harbor is the area

within a circle of 1 mile radius, centered on the rear range light.

1.9 A black ball by day, or a red light at night, shown at the

masthead of a flagstaff near the rear range light, indicates that

it is unsafe for vessels to enter the harbor. This station is unattended at night, and when a red light is shown at night, it will

indicate the condition at sunset; changes during the night will

not be indicated.

1.9 Anchorage.—Warrnambool Harbor is not suitable for large

vessels. Anchorage can be taken where most convenient according to the draft and prevailing weather conditions; a good

scope of chain should be used, as there is a heavy scend even in

the finest weather. The anchorage area inside the breakwater

for small vessels has been reduced due to silting, so that shelter

from the breakwater is not as effective.

1.9 The quarantine anchorage lies E of the meridian drawn

through the head of the breakwater.

1.9 The explosives anchorage lies within a circle with a radius of

300m, bearing 167°, 1,550m from the rear leading light.

1.9 Directions.—Tower Hill, previously described in paragraph

1.7, is the best guide to the locality. Mount Warrnambool, more

than 10 miles inland, is often obscured by mist, and within 4

miles of the coast it is obscured by the land in front of it.

1.9 Warrnambool Harbor should be entered through South

Channel with the range lights in line, bearing 008.3°. A depth

of 10m can be carried through this channel by keeping the rear

light structure a little more than its own width open W of the

front light structure, but this leads very close to Annabella

Reef. When the sun is near the meridian, the rear light structure

is difficult to identify, but the front light structure in line with

the W side of the water tower on the N side of the town may be

taken as in line with the rear light structure.

1.9 Vessels entering the harbor through South Channel at night

should alter course E off the range line when the light on the

head of the breakwater is abeam.

1.9 Caution.—Vessels approaching from the SE at night should

note that the rear range light is obscured when bearing less than

322°.

Warrnambool Harbor to Cape Otway

1.10 The coast from about 4 miles ESE of Warrnambool to

Moonlight Head, about 38 miles SE, is cliffy and presents an

almost level appearance; the only break to its uniformity is the

broad-topped hill, 67.4m high, over the E bank of the Hopkins

River, and a fall in the land 9 miles E of Warrnambool. The

cliffs become higher as Moonlight Head is approached.

1.10 The coast from the Hopkins River to Flaxman Hill, about 14

miles SE, is apparently bold, but a heavy swell constantly rolls

in and breaks in depths of about 9.1m. Flaxman Hill (38°33'S.,

142°55'E.) is 79m high, with a stone cairn, 1.8m high, on its

summit. Another hill, about 0.3 mile NW of Flaxman Hill, is

not as high, but is sometimes more conspicuous due to its

sandy appearance. The two hills are a good guide to the localty

of this part of the coast, which otherwise appears the same.

About midway between the Hopkins River and Flaxman Hill,

the coastal range immediately over the cliffs is 74m high, and

higher than the adjacent land on either side.

1.10 The coast from Flaxman Hill to the Bay of Islands, about 4

miles SE, is known as the Bold Projection due to its bold, indented and rugged nature. The Bay of Islands may be identified

by its white cliffy appearance, varied by numerous islets, all of

the same character, presenting a striking appearance.

1.10 A bay, in which there are many rocky islets, lies between the

Bay of Islands and Curdie Inlet, about 4 miles ESE. The sea

breaks heavily 0.5 mile offshore, and it is probable that sunken

rocks fringe all of this stretch of coast.

1.10 Curdie Inlet is conspicuous due to the sandy nature of its en-
8 Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 

Pub. 127

trance, which is often closed. There are many drying reefs in its

mouth. A conspicuous patch of sand is at the W point of the inlet, on the highest part of the coast, and E there are other sandhills or patches; these are more conspicuous from their

contrast with the cliffy coast on either side. Limestone rocks lie

off the W and E entrance point of Curdie Inlet, those off the E

entrance point are about 0.3 mile from it and are joined to it by

a narrow neck of sand. A conspicuous silo stands on the W entrance point of the inlet. Schomburg Rock, 5.2m high, is the

highest of the E rocks, and a ledge extends NW and SE. The

sea breaks heavily E and S, and across the mouth of the inlet

from the ledge to the rocks off the W entrance point.

1.10 The village of Peterborough, a popular beach resort, stands

on the W entrance point of Curdie Inlet. A road bridge spans

the entrance of the inlet.

1.10 The coast from Curdie Inlet to Hesse Point, about 3 miles

ESE, then to the entrance to Port Campbell, about 2 miles farther E, is irregular and cliffy. At Curdie Inlet the appearance of

the coast begins to change due to the cliffs being backed by

high land.

1.11 Port Campbell (38°37'S., 142°59'E.) (World Port Index No. 54110) is only suitable for small craft with local

knowledge, and is directly open SW. It is entered between two

headlands, and is easily identified by Hesse Point, also by a remarkable rock, 72m high, lying about 1.5 miles E and about

0.2 mile offshore.

1.11 A reef, over which the sea breaks heavily, extends about 0.8

mile SW of the E headland, and a reef, over which the sea

breaks occasionally, extends about 0.2 mile SW of the W headland. The entrance channel, between the reefs, has a least depth

of 5.5m for a width of 61m.

1.11 The channel leading to the jetty at Port Campbell is marked

by beacons; the T-head jetty has a depth of 2.7m alongside its

head. The anchorage has depths of 1.8 to 11m, sand, with

patches of limestone rock. In heavy weather, there is a great

backwash off the beach, causing vessels to surge considerably

at their anchors, necessitating a spring being run out to the

shore. In the summer months (December to March), there is

smooth water at the anchorage.

1.11 The current sets principally SE, or outward across the E

breakers, but is much influenced by the wind.

The Sherbrook River, closed in the dry season, lies about 3

miles ESE of Port Campbell. Sow and Pigs, consisting of a few

islets and rocks, lie between 1 and 2 miles ESE of the mouth of

the Sherbrook River. A rock, 64m high, lies about 0.7 mile farther ESE.

1.12 Point Ronald (38°43'S., 143°09'E.) is a bluff, 78m

high, made conspicuous by a large body of drift sand on its E

side. Oliver Hill, 141m high, rises near the coast midway between Point Ronald and Moonlight Head.

1.12 Moonlight Head is bold, rounded, and thickly wooded. The

hills immediately over this part of the coast rise to elevations of

about 152m, the highest being 166m high. These hills form

spurs of the Otway Ranges, which rise gradually behind the

coast, until from 2 to 3 miles inland they attain an elevation of

over 305m, Mount Chapple, 549m high, with a rounded summit, is the highest mountain of the Otway Range NNW of Cape

Otway, and rises about 10 miles NE of Moonlight Head.

1.12 Several drying ledges, skirted by a few sunken rocks, about

0.2 mile offshore, lie from 1 to 3 miles WNW of Moonlight

Head. Several above-water rocks lie off Moonlight Head.

1.12 Reginald Point (38°46'S., 143°16'E.), with an islet close off

it, lies about 0.3 mile NE of Moonlight Head. A radio mast,

23m high, with an elevation of 311m, lies about 2 miles NE of

Reginald Point. In 1983, a shoal, with a depth of 10m, was reported 5 miles SSE of Reginald Point.

1.12 Caution.—A bank, with a depth of 10m, lies about 4.2 miles

SSE of Moonlight Head. A historic wreck, with an associated

restricted area, lies 10 miles WSW of Moonlight Head and can

best be seen on the chart. 

1.12 Lion Headland, about 3.2 miles ENE of Moonlight Head, is

formed of bold high cliffs, believed to be the highest on the

coast of Victoria; the Otway Ranges have the greatest elevation

when near the coast.

1.12 Rotten Point, about 4 miles farther ESE, is rocky, with a

rock, awash at HW, about 0.2 mile S of it. The Joanna River,

with a sand islet in its mouth, enters the sea about 1 mile NW

of Rotten Point; there are several conspicuous patches of sand

about the mouth of the river and the point.

1.12 The coast between Rotten Point and Cape Otway is rocky,

and the sea generally breaks in depths of 9.1m. Midway along

this coast, a conspicuous mass of drift sand lies close E of the

mouth of the Ayr River. Behind this stretch of coast are sand

hills, 107m high, covered with stunted brush.

1.12 A conspicuous conical peak, 503m high, with a range of

about the same elevation close NE, lies about 10 miles NNE of

Cape Otway.

1.12

1.13 Cape Otway (38°52'S., 143°31'E.), the N point of the

W entrance to Bass Strait, is a bluff, cliffy projection, 76m

high, of dark-brown color, with patches of coarse sandstone,

rising to sparsely wooded grassy hummocks, not exceeding

107m high.

1.13 Otway Reef, with a depth of 3m, lies on a bank, with depths

of less than 9.1m, extending about 1 mile S of Cape Otway. A

heavy tide rip extends about 2 miles S of the cape.

1.13 Cape Otway Light is shown at an elevation of 91m, from a

round tower, 19m high. A radiobeacon mast, 21m high, and

buildings are near the light structure.

1.13 Cape Otway has been reported to be a good radar target at 21

miles.

1.13 Caution.—Cape Otway should not be approached within a

distance of 3 miles, nor rounded at less than that distance. A

detached shoal, with a depth of 16.4m, was reported 1.7 miles

SSW of Cape Otway.

Bass Strait

1.14 Bass Strait separates Australia from Tasmania. Its N

side lies between Cape Otway and Wilson Promontory, about

134 miles E; its S side lies between Cape Grim (40°41'S.,

144°41'E.), the NW extremity of Tasmania, and Eddystone

Point (41°00'S., 148°21'E.), the NE extremity of Tasmania.

1.14 King Island lies in the middle of the W entrance to Bass

Strait; in its E entrance are numerous islands and rocks, the

principal being the Furneaux Group, which lies in the SE part

of the E entrance. The Furneaux Group is separated from the
Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 9

Pub. 127

NE part of Tasmania by Banks Strait, which will be described

in paragraph 3.4. The bottom in Bass Strait consists mostly of

sand and shells in the NW and greater part, and mud, marl, and

ooze in its SE part.

1.14 The best route to enter Bass Strait from the W is between

King Island and Cape Otway. The best route to enter Bass

Strait from the E is by means of the Traffic Separation Scheme

immediately S of Wilson’s Promontory. The fairway between

these routes is wide and deep.

1.14 Above and below-water rocks and islands exist in other

routes through Bass Strait, making navigation through more

difficult.

1.14 Caution.—An IMO-adopted traffic separation scheme has

been established S of Wilson’s Promontory and is best seen on

the chart.

1.14 An Inshore Traffic Zone is situated between the traffic lane

for westbound traffic and Wilson’s Promontory.

1.14 An IMO-adopted Area to be Avoided has been established N

of the Traffic Separation Scheme in the Bass Strait. This area is

best shown on the chart.

1.14 Vessels approaching Bass Strait from the W should make

landfall off Moonlight Head or Cape Otway. In approaching

the strait, due allowance should be made for winds and currents, particularly during the prevalence of SW or S gales. In

thick weather a vessel should keep in depths of over 73m. 

1.14 The channel between King Island and Cape Otway is clear of

dangers.

1.14 Shark and crayfish fishing fleets operate in Bass Strait. Shark

fishing vessels operate with long lines, the ends of which are

marked by flagged buoys.

1.14 Oil exploration rigs and oil production platforms may be encountered off the Australian coast. Vessels should not approach

oil platforms in Bass Strait within 2.5 miles.

1.14 A undersea gas pipeline runs between Australia and Tasmania across Bass Strait.

Bass Strait—Western Entrance

1.15 The W entrance to Bass Strait, between Cape Otway

and Cape Grim, about 120 miles SSE, is divided by King Island into two channels. The NW channel is safer. The SE channel is obstructed by numerous dangers and should not be used

by vessels without local knowledge except in cases of emergency.

King Island

1.16 Cape Wickham (39°35'S., 143°57'E.), the N extremity of King Island, lies about 48 miles SSE of Cape Otway. The

cape is formed of granite cliffs, 61m high, behind which the

ground rises slowly to a hill, about 91m high, about 1 mile S.

1.16 Cape Wickham Light is shown from a round tower, 48m

high, about 0.6 mile SW of the cape. Cape Wickham has been

reported to give good radar returns at 20 miles.

1.16 Navarin Reef, awash at HW, lies about 2.2 miles NE of Cape

Wickham Light. A rock, awash, and a shoal, with a least depth

of 12.8m, lie about 0.1 mile E and 1.2 miles ENE, respectively,

of its shallowest part. The sea always breaks on Navarin Reef.

1.16 Harbinger Rocks are two groups of rocks, about 1.2 miles

apart. West Harbinger, about 4.2 miles WNW of Cape Wickham Light, dries about 1.2m, and has the appearance of a flattopped boulder, over which the sea always breaks; a sunken

rock, over which the sea does not break, lies about 0.1 mile

SW. East Harbinger, about 3.8 miles NW of Cape Wickham

Light, is a group of rocks over which the sea generally breaks.

Both groups are steep-to, with deep water between them.

1.16 Tides—Currents.—Off Cape Wickham, very strong tidal

currents are occasionally encountered; they are considerably

affected by the wind. With W gales the rate of the E current,

which is normally about 2 knots at springs, may be increased to

5 knots close inshore. Its strength decreases as its distance offshore increases. Easterly gales have the effect of increasing the

W tidal current.

1.16 The tidal currents SW of King Island are irregular and are

sometimes very strong. The wind also has considerable effect

on the currents S and W of King Island, and with strong or prolonged W winds, the resultant of the current and the E tidal

current may produce a SE onshore set with velocities up to

about 2.5 knots.

1.16 Caution.—In approaching King Island from the W, especially during thick or hazy weather, vessels should exercise

caution and sound frequently. Many fatal wrecks have occurred

on this island, from errors in reckoning, and in consequence of

not making the land near Cape Otway.

1.17 West coast of King Island.—The W coast of King

Island, from Cape Wickham to Stokes Point, about 35 miles S,

is backed by densely-wooded hills, 91 to 122m high.

1.17 Phoques Bay is formed between Cape Farewell, about 1.5

miles SW of Cape Wickham, and New Year Island, about 6

miles SW. Sunken rocks, on which the sea breaks, extend about

0.7 mile offshore, about 2 miles S of Cape Farewell.

1.17 New Year Island (39°40'S., 143°50'E.) is about 37m high

near its S end, with a cairn on its summit. Rocks, some of

which dry, extend about 0.4 mile from its SW and S sides, and

a detached rock, 2m high, lies about 0.3 mile off its W side.

Christmas Island, close S of New Year Island and separated

from it by a narrow channel, is less than 30m high. A rock,

1.5m high, lies on a shoal, with depths of less than 5.5m, which

extends about 1 mile from the E side of Christmas Island; a

rock, 1.2m high, lies on the seaward end of foul ground extending about 0.3 mile from the W side of the island.

1.17 Whistler Point lies about 1.2 miles SSE of Christmas Island,

from which it is separated by above-water rocks, reefs, and

sunken rocks, covered with kelp, and separated by narrow

channels. The land rises to an elevation of 81m about 1 mile SE

of Whistler Point.

1.17 Anchorage.—Franklin Road, E of New Year Island and

Christmas Island, provides anchorage for vessels with local

knowledge, in a depth of about 12.8m, but the anchorage is exposed to W winds.

1.17 The coast between Whistler Point and Netherby Point, about

12 miles S, presents a uniform appearance, broken at intervals

of about 3 miles by small rivers. A conspicuous patch of sand

lies about 1.5 miles S of Whistler Point, and a conspicuous

long and bare sandhill, with a sandy beach at its foot, lies about

5.5 miles farther S. This coast is broken by bays with off-lying

rocks, some drying and others above water; sunken rocks extend about 0.7 mile offshore, and outside them there is foul

ground, which, with tidal currents and a W swell, often cause a
10 Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 

Pub. 127

breaking sea, leading anyone unacquainted with the coast to

imagine rocks everywhere.

1.17 An 11m rocky patch, which breaks occasionally, lies on the

seaward side of a bank, with depths of less than 20m, about 4

miles NNW of Netherby Point. A rock, awash, which breaks

heavily, and a 5.5m rocky patch lie about 2 miles NW and 2

miles SW, respectively, of the same point.

1.17 An aviation light is shown occasionally, at a height of 79m,

from a metal tower, 9m high, about 2.5 miles NE of Netherby

Point.

1.17 Currie Harbor, about 1 mile S of Netherby Point, affords

shelter to small craft with local knowledge. A light is shown on

the S side of the harbor. Tidal signals are shown near the light

structure. The entrance channels into the harbor are marked by

range beacons. There is a jetty, 168m long, with depths of 1.8

to 3m alongside in the SE part of the harbor.

1.18 Waterwitch Point (39°57'S., 143°51'E.) lies about 1

mile SSE of Currie Harbor. This point is a rocky spit, with

depths of less than 11m. The spit extends 1.2 miles SW of the

point. In 1995, a depth of 2.7m was reported in position

39°55.7'S, 143°49.7'E. Caution should be exercised while navigating in the vicinity of Waterwitch Point 

1.18 Waterwitch Reef is located on a bank of foul ground about 1

mile in extent. It lies about 4 miles NNW of Waterwitch Point.

A 5.5m patch lies 0.3 mile NW of the reef. A drying rock lies

between the reef and the shore.

1.18 A conspicuous long sandhill lies about 2 miles SE of Waterwitch Point. British Admiral Reef lies 2 miles SW of Waterwitch Point. 

1.18 Cataraque Point, about 7 miles S of Waterwitch Point, is

bold and cliffy, with a 51m hill close within it.

1.18 Anchorage.—Fitzmaurice Bay, about 1.5 miles E of Cataraque Point, affords good shelter in E winds, in about 18.3m,

off a sandy beach, on which there is generally a heavy surf. As

the wind usually shifts from the E through N, to NW and W,

and as the W change is often very sudden, this bay should be

used with caution.

1.18 The coast between Cataraque Point and Surprise Point, the

NW entrance point of Surprise Bay, about 3.5 miles SSE, continues bold and cliffy. Rocks, above and below-water, extend

about 0.3 mile off the N shore of the bay. Between Surprise

Point and the S entrance point of the bay, there is an above-water rock with sunken rocks around it, over which the sea

breaks.

1.18 Surprise Bay is used as an anchorage by small coasters and

crayfish vessels with local knowledge. It affords good protection in all weather, the sea being broken on the group of rocks

in the entrance. The bay should not be entered in strong W

winds.

1.18 The coast between Surprise Bay and Stokes Point, about 2

miles SE, decreases in height to about 30m. Foul ground, on

which the sea breaks heavily, extends up to 0.4 mile off this

coast.

1.18 Stokes Point (40°10'S., 143°55'E.), the S extremity of King

Island, is only a few meters high and has the appearance of a

group of boulders, over and outside of which the sea constantly

breaks. A hill, about 44m high, lies about 0.7 mile N of the

point. A few sunken rocks extend about 0.1 mile S of the point.

1.18 Stokes Point Light is shown from a white concrete tower, 9m

high, about 0.5 mile N of the point.

1.18 Caution.—A rocky bank, with a least depth of 18.3m, lies

with its shallowest part about 6 miles W of Stokes Point. The

sea probably breaks over it in bad weather.

1.18 In rounding Stokes Point, care should be taken to give it a

good wide berth; the low point and the rocks lying off it appear

more distant than they are in reality.

1.18 Stanley Rocks and Seal Rock lie on the E and W ends, respectively, of a bank, with depths of less than 20m. Stanley

Rocks, about 2.7 miles E of Stokes Point, consists of several

rocky patches, some with depths of less than 1.8m. Seal Rock,

3m high, lies about 1.2 miles ENE of Stokes Point. Rocks, the

outermost drying and the others sunken, extend about 0.2 mile

S of Seal Rock. The ground between Stanley Rocks and Seal

Rock is foul, and in stormy weather the sea breaks over the entire area between them.

1.19 East coast of King Island.—Seal Bay is entered between Stokes Point and Seal Point (40°07'S., 143°58'E.), about

3 miles NW. The latter point is a black rock, about 9m high,

with a hummock, 34m high over it; the coast N is backed by a

higher range of conspicuous sandy hummocks. An above-water rock, with sunken rocks between it and the coast, lies about

0.5 mile E of Seal Point. A rock, with a depth of 9m, lies about

1.5 miles E of Seal Point. Rocks, which dry about 0.6m, and

sunken rocks extend about 1 mile ESE of Middle Point in the

center of the bay.

1.19 Anchorage.—Seal Bay is exposed to E winds; small coasting vessels never use it as they prefer the safer anchorage in

Surprise Bay. The anchorage is in 12.8 to 14.6m, over coarse

sand of a loose nature, in the SW part of the bay. There is good

shelter in the NE end of the bay for small vessels during N

winds, but they should get underway at the first sign of the

wind shifting SW. A swell setting into the bay, or indications of

an E wind, should be the sign for a vessel to get under way.

1.19 A small point, about 2 miles NE of Seal Point, has an abovewater rock about 0.2 mile SE of it. The land behind this point

rises to Mount Stanley, 213m high, about 3 miles NNW, where

King Island attains its greatest elevation.

1.19 Brig Rock and South Brig Rock (Brig Rocks) (40°06'S.,

144°02'E.) lie on a shoal which extends about 0.2 to 0.7 mile

SSE of a smaller point, about 1 mile farther ENE. Brig Rock,

14m high, and so called from its resemblance to a brig under

sail, lies on the N part of the shoal. South Brig Rock, 12m high

and remarkable for its black appearance, lies in the S part of

the shoal; a few detached rocks lie S of it and the sea breaks

about 0.1 mile off its S side.

1.19 The coast between Brig Rock and Sandblow Point, about 1.5

miles NE, has several rocks, most above-water, lying about 0.3

mile offshore.

1.19 Little Grassy Bay (40°04'S., 144°04'E.) lies between Sandblow Point and Jetty Point, nearly 1 mile NE. Main Breakwater

extends from Jetty Point to Grassy Island, 4m high, about 0.3

mile SSW; a light is shown from Grassy Island. Inner Harbor,

in the NE part of the bay, is sheltered W by Inner Breakwater,

which extends about 275m SSE from the shore NNW of

Grassy Island.

1.19 Omagh Reef, with a least depth of 4.2m, lies in the middle of

the entrance between Sandblow Point and Grassy Island. Frog
Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 11

Pub. 127

Rock, above-water, lies about 0.2 mile WNW of Grassy Island.

1.19 There is turning circle, 304.8m in diameter, with a least

depth of 9.1m, between Frog Rock, Grassy Island, and the entrance to Inner Harbor. There is a least depth of 10m in the entrance to Inner Harbor, shoaling rapidly within; a turning

circle, with a diameter of 183m and a least depth of 6.1m, lies

close within the entrance.

1.19 Little Grassy Bay can be entered on either side of Omagh

Reef. Two beacons, in line bearing 310°, from which lights are

shown as required, lead in a depth over 10m through the E entrance; two beacons, in line bearing 011° and from which lights

are shown as required, lead through the W entrance in a depth

of about 7.4m. It is reported the Grassy Island Light and both

pairs of leading beacons can only be seen from about 1 mile.

1.20 Bold Head (40°03'S., 144°06'E.), about 2 miles ENE

of Jetty Point, is backed by a coastal range, 192m high and

thickly wooded. A point, about 0.7 mile SW of Bald Head, has

a small detached rock off its extremity; there are a few sunken

rocks within 0.1 mile of this point.

1.20 Grassy Bay is entered between the latter point and Jetty

Point, about 1.5 miles WSW. A hill, 124m high, rises about 0.3

mile within the head of the bay.

1.20 Anchorage.—Small coasting vessels, with local knowledge,

anchor in Grassy Bay. The village of Grassy lies at the head of

the bay.

1.20 The coast from Bold Head to the S entrance point of Sea Elephant Bay, about 7 miles N, is almost steep-to. Small sandy

beaches vary its rocky character and it is backed by thicklywooded ranges, about 123m high, which trend NW at the S entrance point of Elephant Bay. A light is shown from the top of a

bluff, about 4 miles NNE of Bold Head.

1.20 Sea Elephant Bay is entered between Cowper Point

(39°50'S., 144°08'E.) and a point about 6 miles S. Councillor

Island (Sea Elephant Rock), 23m high, lies about 1.5 miles E

of Cowper Point, at the outer end of a bank, with depths of less

than 9.1m; a light is shown from the summit of the island. Sea

Elephant Reef, which dries 0.9m, extends about 1.2 miles NNE

of Councillor Island.

1.20 Caution.—Elephant Shoal, about 3.5 miles long N-S, has a

least depth of 5.5m near its N end, about 5.7 miles ESE of

Cowper Point. The shoal should be given a wide berth, as the

sea breaks heavily on it in strong winds.

1.20 A 10m unexamined shoal was reported to lie about 4.5 miles

E of the S entrance point of Sea Elephant Bay; an 11m shoal

lies about 4 miles ESE of the same point.

1.20 A 9.1m shoal was reported about 1 mile E of the S entrance

point of Sea Elephant Bay.

1.21 A T-head pier, 223m long, is situated at Naracoopa,

about 1 mile NW of the S entrance point of the bay. The head

of the pier is 61m long, with depths of 4.9 to 6.7m alongside.

Two aluminum-colored oil tanks are conspicuous close S of the

root of the pier.

1.21 Anchorage.—Sea Elephant Bay provides anchorage during

W gales; the wind generally shifts S when the weather is clearing. The bottom throughout the bay is sand, or sand and shells;

there is anchorage anywhere, in a depth of about 16.5m. Take

care to avoid two disused submarine cables crossing the bay;

the cables land about 1 mile N of the pier. In the summer

months, there is much E weather, when a swell rolls in.

1.21 The coast between Cowper Point and Lavinia Point, about

9.5 miles N, consists of low sand hummocks. Sea Elephant

Hill, a double-topped hill, 103m high, and thickly wooded, lies

midway along this coast, about 2 miles from the coast. The Sea

Elephant River, about 1 mile NW of Cowper Point, is a small

stream, accessible at HW to small craft drawing up to 0.9m.

1.21 Lavinia Point (39°40'S., 144°06'E.), the NE extremity of

King Island, is low and sandy. A conspicuous patch of sand lies

about 1.5 miles NW of Lavinia Point.

1.21 Boulder Point, about 3.7 miles NW of Lavinia Point, is

formed from a large granite boulder . Rocks fringe the point; a

spit, with a depth of 3.2m, extends about 0.7 mile N.

1.21 Anchorage.—A bank has been formed in the vicinity of

Boulder Point by the heaping up of sand caused by the meeting

of the tidal currents. Coastal vessels often anchor, in about

16.5m, on this bank in W gales. If the gale settles into a W direction, this anchorage is as safe as Sea Elephant Bay, and it is

handier for proceeding W when the weather clears.

1.21 A conspicuous sand patch lies about 1 mile W of Boulder

Point; it is more conspicuous than the one NW of Lavinia

Point.

1.21 The point, about 2.7 miles NW of Boulder Point, is fringed

with rocks, and a hill, 40m high, rises about 0.5 mile SSW of it.

1.21 The Doughboy (39°35'S., 143°58'E.) lies about 1.7 miles

farther NW, and about 1 mile E of Cape Wickham, the N extremity of King Island. It is an above-water rock on the outer

end of a drying reef extending about 0.3 mile offshore. The

passage between The Doughboy and Navarin Reef, about 1.5

miles N, has irregular depths of 20 to 37m, and is not recommended, as the tidal currents are often strong and cause a race.

Channel between King Island and Tasmania

1.22 The channel between King Island and the Fleurieu

Group, about 38 miles ESE, should not be used by vessels

without local knowledge except in cases of emergency. The

Fleurieu Group is a group of islands, islets, and rocks fronting

the NW coast of Tasmania. Only the aspect of Hunter Island

and Three Hummock Island, together with the lights on them

and the outer dangers off the W side of Hunter Island, will be

described.

1.22 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents set NE with the flood

and SW with the ebb in mid-channel between King Island and

the Fleurieu Group, at velocities of 1 to 3 knots.

1.22 Hunter Island, with Cape Keraudren (40°24'S., 144°47'E.)

at its N extremity, is moderately elevated. Chase Hill, 91m

high, its highest point, lies about 3.5 miles S of Cape Keraudren. Its S coast is backed by wooded hills, but the N part of

the island has a barren appearance.

1.22 Hunter Island Light is shown from a 62m hill, about 6 miles

SSW of Cape Keraudren.

1.22 Three Hummock Island, with its W extremity about 3.5 miles

SE of Cape Keraudren, has a coastal ridge of partially bare and

moderately elevated land extending from Hummock Head, its S

extremity, to Cape Rochon, its NE extremity. Three hills, from

which this island derives its name, rise gradually from this ridge.

The S hill, about 1 mile N of Hummock Head, is a conical peak,

236m high, with a conspicuous tower on its summit, and is the

most elevated part of the island. The N hill, 168m high and
12 Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 

Pub. 127

thickly wooded, lies about 1 mile SSW of Cape Rochon, and the

third hill, 115m high, lies about 1 mile farther S.

1.22 A light is shown about 0.4 mile S of Cape Rochon.

1.22 Reid Rocks (40°15'S., 144°10'E.) lie on a bank of foul

ground, with its center about 12.5 miles ESE of Stokes Point.

Reid Rock, the NW and highest rock, is a small dark mass,

12m high, with a drying rock about 0.5 mile E of it. South Reid

Rock, 2m high, lies on a patch near the S end of the bank,

about 1.7 miles S of Reid Rock.

1.22 Bell Reef (40°23'S., 144°05'E.), with a depth of about 14m,

lies about 15 miles SE of Stokes Point. Bell Reef lies in the

way of vessels using the passage S of King Island, and is the

more dangerous as the sea only breaks at intervals on it, even

with a heavy swell. A shoal, with a depth of 25m, is reported

(1983) to lie 7.5 miles SE of Bell Reef.

1.22 Black Pyramid, bearing 098°, leads about 3 miles S of Bell

Reef, and Reid Rock, bearing 008°, leads about 2 miles E of

Bell Reef. 

1.23 Black Pyramid (40°29'S., 144°21'E.), a dark-looking

islet with a rounded summit, 73m high, lies about 17 miles W

of Hunter Island Light. It is the most prominent of the smaller

islets of the Fleurieu Group, and is the first seen by a vessel approaching from the W. Black Pyramid appears to have no offlying dangers, being steep-to within 1 mile S, E, and N of it.

1.23 Albatross Islet, about 6 miles WNW of Cape Keraudren, is

the NW of the Fleurieu Group; it is 38m high and is visible at a

distance of about 16 miles in clear weather. The E side is almost a vertical cliff; both sides are steep-to, but a rock with a

depth of less than 1.8m, and a rocky patch, with a depth of

4.1m, lie 0.2 mile W and 0.2 mile SSE, respectively, of its S

end. Viewed from the NE or SW, a deep notch in the middle of

the islet appears to divide it. There are strong tide rips over

both ends of the islet during the strength of the tidal currents.

1.23 North Black Rock, 10m high and steep-to, lies about 3.5

miles W of Hunter Island Light.

1.23 South Black Rock, about 5.5 miles SSW of North Black

Rock, is a round mass, 39m high, with a rock, which dries

2.1m, lying about 0.5 mile SW of it; South Black Rock is

steep-to except for this rock.

1.23 Directions.—The channel between King Island and the

Fleurieu Group is not recommended, as there may be undiscovered dangers in it, and the safer passage between King Island and Cape Otway should be preferred. Numerous

unexamined detached shoals have been reported in this channel. The sea bed between King Island and the Fleurieu Group

is so uniformly level that soundings give no indication of the

approach to the dangers, so that at night or in thick weather, the

channel between should be approached with extreme caution.

1.23 Should it be necessary to enter Bass Strait by this channel, a

vessel should keep well S of Bell Reef, observing the clearing

marks, and should pass close to Black Pyramid.

Cape Otway to Port Phillip

1.24 The coast from Cape Otway (38°52'S., 143°31'E.),

previously described in paragraph 1.13, to Franklin Point,

about 2 miles E, is low and sandy, with some rocks close off it.

1.24 The coast from Franklin Point to Addis Point, about 43 miles

NE, consists of high dark-colored cliffs backed by thicklywooded hills extending to within 5 miles of Addis Point. The

conspicuous conical peak about 10 miles NE of Cape Otway

was previously described in paragraph 1.12. Mount Crowley,

about 640m high and surmounted by a radio mast with an elevation of 688m, lies about 25 miles NE of Cape Otway, and is

the highest point on this stretch of coast.

1.24 Hayley Point, about 7 miles NE of Franklin Point, lies midway between Storm Point and Point Bunbury. Hayley Point is

only 8.2m high, but close within is a conspicuous green hill,

36m high, on which are the white houses of a town. Little Henty Reef extends about 0.4 mile E of Hayley Point. A rock, 2.7m

high lies on both the NW and SE ends of the reef.

1.24 Caution.—Henty Reef, with a depth of 5.8m and steep-to,

lies about 1.7 miles ESE of Hayley Point. The sea breaks

heavily over it in moderate weather.

1.24 The position of the reef is indicated by the intersection of the

alignment of two pairs of beacons. The SW pair, about 0.3 mile

SW of Hayley Point, are in line bearing 277°; the NE pair, on

Point Bunbury, are in line bearing 325°.

1.25 Apollo Bay (38°45'S., 143°41'E.) lies N of Point Bunbury, under a high part of the Otway Range, and extends to the

entrance of Skenes Creek, about 2.7 miles NE of Point Bunbury. The bay may be identified by the red buildings of the

town of Apollo Bay in its SW part. Point Bunbury, 16m high, is

a sandstone formation; reefs extend about 0.3 mile E of the

point. A small boat harbor, formed by two breakwaters, lies on

the N side of Point Bunbury. 

1.25 Lights, in line bearing 016.5°, situated about 0.5 mile W of

the entrance to Skenes Creek, lead W of Henty Reef and E of

the dangers off Hayley Point and Point Bunbury.

1.25 The limits of the port of Apollo Bay are bounded on the S by

the alignment of the Hayley Point beacons extended about 1.5

miles from the coast and on the E by a line drawn 016.5° from

the offshore end of the S limit to the entrance of Skenes Creek.

1.25 Anchorage.—There is anchorage, during W or SW gales, in

Apollo Bay, in about 11m, from 0.6 to 0.8 mile offshore, with

good holding ground of shale with holes filled with sand.

There is usually a swell in the bay, which is especially heavy

during E or S winds. Vessels must be prepared for a change of

wind to the S or SE.

1.25 Exercise caution when anchoring in the N portion of the bay,

as a disused submarine cable lies here.

1.25 An explosives anchorage is established within a circle with a

radius of 300m, centered 202°, 1.7 miles from the front approach leading light.

1.26 Cape Patton (38°42'S., 143°50'E.), about 8.5 miles

ENE of Point Bunbury, is bold, dark-looking, and wooded, except on its W side. Mount Sabine, 583m high, about 6.5 miles

NW of Cape Patton, is the second highest peak on this coast. A

tower, 38m high, stands on a summit about 3 miles S of Mount

Sabine.

1.26 Point Grey, a low, grassy projection, lies about 11 miles NE

of Cape Patton. A radio tower, 30m high, with an elevation of

152m, lies about 0.7 mile W of Point Grey. Mount St. George,

a prominent conical hill, 200m high, lies about 1 mile SW of

Point Grey.

1.26 A drying reef extends about 0.2 mile E of Grey Point; Loutit

Bank, with a least depth of 11m, extends about 1 mile farther
Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 13

Pub. 127

E.

1.26 Loutit Bay lies N of Point Gray; the town of Lorne borders

the shore of the bay. Lorne Pier, marked by a light at its head,

extends NE from the shore on the NE side of Point Grey.

1.26 The port of Lorne (38°33'S., 143°59'E.) (World Port Index

No. 54090) is bounded by a circle of 1 mile radius, centered on

the head of the pier.

1.26 Depths of less than 5.5m extend up to 0.3 mile off the shore

of the bay.

1.26 Anchorage.—Anchorage, during SW or W gales, may be

obtained in Loutit Bay, NW of Loutit Bank, in 9.1m, about 0.6

mile offshore. The anchorage in this bay is preferable to that in

Apollo Bay, as there is less swell due to the protection afforded

by Loutit Bank. During W gales, vessels should be prepared

for a change of wind, as it often backs to a S direction.

1.26 An explosives anchorage is established within a circle with a

radius of 300m, centered 015°, 1,500m from Lorne Pier Light.

1.27 Split Point (38°28'S., 144°06'E.), about 7.5 miles NE

of Point Grey, is of a reddish-brown color and appears like

three cliffs close together, divided by dark ravines. A light is

shown from Split Point. A depth of 18m lies 1.2 miles SW of

Split Point.

1.27 Eagle Nest Reef, awash, extends about 0.5 mile offshore,

about 0.6 mile NE of Split Point.

1.27 The coast between Split Point and Addis Point, about 8.5

miles ENE, consists of two bights separated by Roadknight

Point, which is low. Mount Inglesby, 121m high, lies about 1.5

miles NW of Roadknight Point; a radio tower, 30m high, lies

0.2 mile ESE of Mount Inglesby. A chimney, with an elevation

of 118m, is conspicuous about 2.5 miles N of Roadknight

Point. Addis Point lies at the E end of a conspicuous yellow

bluff, about 30m high.

1.27 Ingoldsby Reefs, between Roadknight Point and Addis

Point, are two drying reefs surrounded by sunken rocks, over

which the sea breaks heavily. These reefs are steep-to on their

seaward side, and lie about 0.7 mile offshore. Black Rock,

which dries, lies about 0.6 mile SW of Addis Point, and is

steep-to on its seaward side.

1.27 The coast for about 2 miles NE of Addis Point is fronted by

cliffs, about 61m high, then for about 1.2 miles farther NE by

cliffs, about 30m high.

1.27 Point Danger, about 5 miles NE of Addis Point, has a reef,

with depths of less than 1.8m, extending about 0.3 mile E and

S of it. The town of Torquay, its houses are visible from seaward, lies close N of Danger Point.

1.27 The coast between Danger Point and Barwon Head, about 9

miles ENE, consists of low sand hills, backed by undulating

hills. This coast is fronted by reefs over which the sea breaks

heavily, and by a shoal extending up to 1 mile offshore.

1.27 Victoria Reef, with a depth of 4.6m, lies about 1.2 miles ESE

of Point Danger.

1.27 Ant Spit, with a depth of 4.6m, lies about 2.5 miles W of

Barwon Head.

1.27 Claremont Reef, a detached 2.7m patch, lies about one mile

SW of Barwon Head. The sea breaks heavily over the above

shoals.

1.27 An area of foul ground, due to sunken vessels, is centered

about 5 miles SW of Barwon Head. The area is 3 miles in diameter and is known locally as The Graveyard.

1.27 Barwon Head (38°18'S., 144°30'E.) is a saddle-shaped summit, 37m high, scrub-covered, with a metal beacon, 4.6m high,

on its summit. The town of Barwon Head lies close NW of the

headland, and on the W bank of the Barwon River. The town

and headland appear as an island from seaward due to the low

land in the vicinity. The river, accessible to boats, has rocky

ground extending across its entrance, from which a spit, with a

depth of 2.7m, extends about 0.7 mile E. A conspicuous tower,

visible at a distance of 15 miles, lies about 2 miles NE of Barwon Head.

1.27 An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 22m,

spans the river near Barwon Jetty, and a submarine cable crosses the river close N of a bridge. The bridge is situated about 0.5

mile N of Barwon Head.

1.27 The coast from Barwon Head to Point Lonsdale, about 5.5

miles E, forms a bight, known locally as Abrahams Bosom,

where vessels standing off Port Phillip seek shelter during W

gales. The bight is fronted by sand dunes, 26m high, and a continuous rocky bank extends up to 0.5 mile offshore. From the

outer edge of the latter bank, the depths increase gradually to

depths of 20m about 1 mile offshore. A reef, with rocks above

and below water, extends about 0.5 mile offshore from a point

about 1.7 miles WNW of Point Lonsdale.

Ф Rod Cairns 2000, printed with permission

Port Phillip Heads
14 Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 

Pub. 127

Port Phillip

1.28 Port Phillip (38°18'S., 144°38'E.) is an extensive bay,

with a length of 31 miles to its N end, where it contracts, forming Hobsons Bay, in which is located the important port of

Melbourne. On the W side of Port Phillip is Western Arm, in

which is the port of Geelong. The outer part of the entrance to

Port Phillip, or The Heads, is bounded by Point Lonsdale and

Shortland Bluff, about 2.5 miles ENE, on the NW side, and by

Point Nepean, about 2 miles ESE of Port Lonsdale, on the SE

side.

1.28 Port Phillip is bounded seaward by a circle, with a radius of 3

miles, centered on Point Lonsdale, and within The Heads, by

the navigable rivers and creeks flowing into Port Phillip, other

than those comprising the limits of the ports of Melbourne and

Geelong.

1.28 Within Point Nepean, the entrance to Port Phillip is deep and

free from dangers for about 2 miles, then it widens and is filled

with numerous sandbanks and shoals, extending about 7 miles

NE and 11 miles ESE. Four navigable channels lead between

the banks and shoals; in order of importance they are South

Channel, West Channel, Coles Channel, and Sorrento Channel.

Symonds Channel is only available to vessels with local

knowledge.

1.28 Vessels with a draft of 11.6m can be navigated through The

Heads and South Channel at all stages of the tide.

1.28 Vessels with a maximum draft of 12.1m may be navigated

through The Heads when tide and weather conditions are suitable to insure a minimum under keel clearance of 0.9m. Caution is necessary during periods of high and long period swells

from S, as these swells may considerably reduce a vessel’s underkeel clearance when passing over Rip Bank and Nepean

Bank.

1.28 Vessels with a maximum draft of 12.1m may be navigated

through South Channel when the tidal rise is sufficient to provide the vessel with an underkeel clearance of 1.5m.

1.28 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at The Heads is 1.4m at

MHHW, and 1.3m at MLHW.

1.28 Due to the narrow entrance and the large area of Port Phillip,

the range of tides within The Heads is small in comparison

with that at the entrance; water level within the port is affected

by winds blowing for a long period in one direction, and may

remain above mean level continuously for some time after S

gales, or below mean level continuously for some time after N

gales.

1.28 The tidal currents in the entrance depend on the relative water levels inside and outside Port Phillip. The greatest difference in water levels occurs at about the time of HW and LW in

the entrance, and the tidal current therefore runs at its strongest, 5 to 8 knots, at these times. Slack water occurs at about 3

hours before and after HW in the entrance when there is no difference in the levels; the tidal current runs, as follows:

1. Flood—From about 3 hours before until 3 hours after

HW.

2. Ebb—All other times.

1.28 However, as the levels depend partly on wind, the times of

slack water and the velocity of the tidal current are also affected by the wind; freshets may also affect the tidal current. On an

average, it is HW at The Heads about 3.3 hours before that at

Williamstown, but due to weather conditions this interval may

vary from 3 to 4 hours. It will therefore be approximately slack

water following the flood current at The Heads when it is HW

at Williamstown.

1.28 The flood current from the S and E increases in strength as it

nears The Heads; it sets right into the entrance, across and

through the reefs, with great force, and spreads towards Shortland Bluff and Point King.

1.28 The ebb current sets toward Victory Bight between Point

Lonsdale and Shortland Bluff, and then out the entrance at a

great rate. The body of this current sets athwart the entrance towards Point Nepean, and away SE along the land and into the

shore between Point Nepean and Cape Schanck (38°30'S.,

144°53'E.).

1.28 In South Channel, the flood current sets through at a rate of

from 1 to 1.2 knots, and strongly over the N banks; the outgoing current sets through at a rate of from 0.7 to 2 knots, and

strongly over the S banks. In the dredged area, the tidal currents follow the direction of its axis, but immediately outside

its ends they set obliquely to the direction of its axis.

Aspect.—Flinders Peak (37°57'S., 144°25'E.), 335m high,

about 22.5 miles NNE of Point Lonsdale, is the most conspicuous feature on the W side of Port Phillip. The peak, cone

shaped and of granite formation, is the highest of four peaks of

The You Yangs, a range overlooking the port of Geelong; a red

flashing obstruction light is shown from its summit. From SW,

the peak may be seen after passing Split Point, and with

Arthurs Seat (38°21'S., 144°57'E.), about 15 miles ESE of

Point Nepean, forms a good guide for identifying the entrance

to Port Phillip. Arthurs Seat, 319m high, with a tower on its

summit, is a conspicuous mountain, which shows up for a considerable distance outside The Heads.

1.28 Point Lonsdale (38°18'S., 144°37'E.), the W entrance point

of Port Phillip, is a dark, rocky point, 12m high. A light is

shown from the point. The signal station at the light is

equipped with radiotelephone. Point Lonsdale has been reported to give good radar returns at 14 miles. A Port Information

Service is maintained at Point Lonsdale.

1.28 Lonsdale Reef, drying in places, extends about 0.3 mile SE

of Point Lonsdale. Lonsdale Rock, with a least depth of 6.7m,

lies about 0.6 mile SE of the same point; the position of the

rock is discernible by the oily appearance of the water due to

kelp growing on it.

1.28 Shortland Bluff, about 2.5 miles ENE of Point Lonsdale, is

formed of yellow sandstone and is 20m high; it can be recognized by the lighthouses and towers on it, and by the buildings

of the town of Queenscliff. A drying reef extends about 0.1

mile SE of the bluff, and is marked at its outer end by Ball Beacon, 1.8m high.

1.28 Victory Shoal, with a least depth of 3m, lies in the middle of

the bight between Point Lonsdale and Shortland Bluff. There

are other dangers in the bight and it should be avoided.

1.28 Point Nepean (38°18'S., 144°39'E.), nearly 2 miles ESE of

Point Lonsdale, is 33m high, and the W termination of a peninsula extending WNW from Arthurs Seat. It may be recognized

by the buildings on it and by a white triangular beacon with a

red top, 6.1m high, on its W fall. Point Nepean has been reported to give good radar returns at 19 miles.

1.28 Monash Light is shown at an elevation of 48m, about 1.5

miles SE of Point Nepean.

1.28 A drying reef, marked near its outer end by Nepean Rock
Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 15

Pub. 127

Beacon, extends about 0.2 mile WNW of Point Nepean. Nepean Reef, with Big Rock, a drying rock, at its extremity, extends about 0.2 mile farther WNW.

1.28 Corsair Rock, with a depth of 2.4m, lies about 0.3 mile W of

Nepean Rock Beacon. Corsair Rock is marked by an eddy on

the flood current, and by a short breaking sea on the ebb, from

which a tide spume extends about 1 mile SE.

1.28 Depths of less than 10m extend about 0.6 mile WNW of

Point Nepean.

1.28 Two shoals, known as Five Fathom Banks, with depths of 9.1

and 10.6m, on which the sea breaks heavily, lie about 0.7 mile

and 1.7 miles SSE, respectively, of Corsair Rock.

1.28 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels, except those specially exempted.

1.28 All pilotage within Port Phillip is supplied by the Port Phillip

Sea Pilot Service. A pilot station, equipped with radar, is situated at Queenscliff (close to Port Phillip Heads) and pilots board

vessels direct from fast launches, 3 to 5 miles SW of Point

Lonsdale.

1.28 Vessels exempt from pilotage, on reaching pilotage waters,

display a large white flag at the mainmast head.

1.28 Low-powered vessels and vessels with a draft exceeding

10.4m should radio the pilot vessel as to a suitable time to arrive at the boarding ground as passage through the entrance is

governed by the tidal currents.

1.28 Vessels requiring pratique or quarantine service should radio

the quarantine officer not more than 24 hours and not less than

12 hours before arrival, with the following information: Name

of vessel, ETA, number of passengers and crew, passengers

disembarking, port of departure and date, and any disease on

board.

1.28 The Health Department will clear vessels between 0600 and

2200. The appropriate signal should be displayed.

1.28 The quarantine station extends along the S shore of Port

Phillip between Observatory Point and Police Point, about 1.2

and 2.2 miles ESE, respectively, of Point Nepean, with its

boundaries marked at each end by a flagstaff. 

1.28 Signals.—The “Port Closed” signal, described in Pub. 120,

Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia, is displayed by day from the masthead of the flagstaff at Point Lonsdale, and is shown at night from Point

Lonsdale Light below the main light.

1.28 The following additional signals are used, when required, to

indicate that entrance to Port Phillip is temporarily closed.:

1. By day—A red pennant above a black ball at the

masthead of the Point Lonsdale Signal Station

2. At night—Three green lights, vertically disposed, at

Point Lonsdale Light.

1.28 The following are extracts from the port rules:

1. To avoid risk of collision and danger at The Heads,

traffic will be regulated in certain circumstances by means of

the following signals shown from the Point Lonsdale Signal

Station:

a. By day—Three drums at the yardarm of the mast,

vertically disposed, means the entrance is closed to inbound traffic and to outbound traffic from the West Channel.

b. At night—Green flashing light on tower of lighthouse means the entrance is closed to inbound traffic and

to outbound traffic from the West Channel.

c. By day—Fourteen drums at the yardarm of the

mast, vertically disposed, means the entrance is closed to

outbound traffic.

d. At night—Red flashing light on tower of lighthouse

means the entrance is closed to outbound traffic.

2. During the display of the first day-night signal, no

vessel shall enter the port from sea, and no outbound vessel

from the West Channel shall proceed S of a line bearing 109°

from Shortland Bluff Low Light.

3. An inbound vessel shall not shape a course for South

Channel dredged cut while an inbound tanker is navigating

between Lighted Buoy No. 5 and Buoy No. 16.

4. An inbound vessel shall not shape a course for South

Channel dredged cut while an outbound tanker is navigating

between Hovell Pile Light and Lighted Beacon No. 10.

1.28 Tidal current signals are shown at night from Point Lonsdale

Light, as follows:

1.28 Regulations.—The Victorian Channels Authority (VCA) is

responsible for the provision and management of channels for

commercial shipping in the waters of Port Phillip including the

channels of Melbourne and Geelong, Port of Portland and the

Port of Hastings. It is also responsible for ensuring the safe and

efficient passage of vessels through its harbor control function.

Mariners should consult the VCA Port Operations Handbook

and Harbor Master’s Directions publications, which can be

found online, for the very latest information.

1.28 The following regulations are in effect for the navigation of

Monash Light

Signal Meaning

Green light Flood current from end of slack water 

to HW

Two green 

lights, vertically 

disposed

Flood current continuing after HW to 

beginning of slack water

Red light Ebb current from end of HW slack to 

LW

Two red lights, 

vertically 

disposed

Ebb current continuing after LW to beginning of LW slack

 Victorian Channels Authority 

http://www.vicchannels.vic.gov.au
16 Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 

Pub. 127

outbound deep-draft vessels:

1. Outbound deep-draft vessels (vessels with a draft over

8.8m) shall:

a. Prior to, or upon departure from the berth or anchorage, advise Point Lonsdale Radio Station by VHF or

other suitable means of the vessel’s ETA at The Heads,

and, during the course of the voyage, advise of any changes to the estimated ETA.

b. Upon arrival at South Channel Lighted Buoy No. 5,

display, by day, a black cylinder, not less than 0.6m in diameter and not less than 1.1m high where it can best be

seen, and at night, three red lights, vertically disposed, and

1.8m apart, where they can best be seen, visible all round

the horizon at a distance of at least 5 miles.

2. The Point Lonsdale Signal Station, as soon as circumstances permit, will exhibit the “Port Closed” signal meaning, the entrance is closed to inbound traffic and to outbound

traffic from West Channel.

3. Outbound deep-draft vessels shall not proceed beyond

the West Entrance range line until the signal in 2 is displayed

from the Point Lonsdale Signal Station.

4. Any vessel proceeding into Port Phillip, and which

has reached a position within The Heads, at a time when the

signal in 2 is shown at the Point Lonsdale Signal Station,

shall not proceed beyond West Channel Range Line until

such time as any outbound deep-draft vessel, showing the

signal prescribed in 1b, has reached a position W of Lighted

Buoy No. 1.

5. Outbound deep-draft vessels, having cleared The

Heads, shall cease to exhibit the signal prescribed in 1b, and

the Point Lonsdale Signal Station shall cease to exhibit the

signal prescribed in 2 as soon as the passage of outbound

deep-draft vessels permit.

1.28 To avoid the risk of collision and other dangers due to the necessity of passing close to oil tankers in confined waters, vessels shall not attempt the navigation of The Heads while an oil

tanker is passing through. To aid in the observation of this rule,

the precautions represented by the following signals must be

strictly adhered to:

1. Oil tankers inbound through The Heads by day or at

night, before shaping a course for the fairway through The

Heads shall:

a. Advise the Point Lonsdale Signal Station that it is

ready to proceed and shall not proceed until the station, by

day, displays a signal of four drums, vertically disposed, or

at night, exhibits a red flashing light; these signals indicate

the entrance is closed to outbound traffic.

b. Display, by day, flag “B” of the International Code,

and at night, exhibit a red light, not less than 6.1m above

the deck and visible all round the horizon at a distance of

at least 5 miles.

2. Oil tankers outbound through The Heads by day or at

night shall:

a. Prior to, or upon departure from the anchorage or

berth, advise Point Lonsdale by VHF or other suitable

means of the vessel’s ETA at The Heads, and, during the

course of the voyage, advise of any change to such ETA.

b. While in the waters of the port of Port Phillip, display the signal described in paragraph 1b. Upon arrival at

South Channel Lighted Buoy No. 5, the vessel shall advise

the Point Lonsdale Signal Station of its readiness to proceed, and shall not proceed W of West Channel range line

until the station, by day, displays a signal of three drums,

vertically disposed, or at night exhibits a green flashing

light; these signals indicate the entrance to the port is

closed to inbound traffic, and to outbound traffic from

West Channel.

3. The entrance is open to normal traffic when the Point

Lonsdale Signal Station ceases to display the signals mentioned above.

1.28 Mariners are cautioned to avoid vessels employed in blasting

and sweeping opeations that are deepening the fairway at the

entrance to Port Phillip. The following flags of the International Code of Signals will be displayed at the masthead of the attendant vessel:

1. B—On blasting work.

2. HF—On sweeping and survey work.

3. OW—Approaching vessels should stop for a few minutes until the charge has been exploded and watch for instructions.

1.28 If the above flag signals are not clearly visible, the attendant

vessel will make the following by signal lamp:

1. WAIT—the equivalent of the flag signal OW.

2. PROCEED—the equivalent of lowering of all flag

signals.

1.28 No vessel shall approach the attendant or blasting vessels

nearer than 1 mile.

1.28 The speed of navigating the dredged portion of South Channel must not exceed the minimum to preserve steerageway.

Port Phillip—Entrance Channel and Ranges

1.29 The entrance channel at The Heads is nearly 2 miles

wide, but reefs and shoals reduce the navigable width to about

0.6 mile.

1.29 Vessels with a draft of 11.6m can navigate through The

Heads and South Channel at all stages of the tide. Vessels with

drafts between 11.6 and 12.1m may navigate through The

Heads and South Channel, which are described in paragraph

1.31, when the tide, swell, and weather conditions are such to

provide the necessary underkeel clearance of 0.9m. 

1.29 Caution.—A provisional limiting depth of 10.3m was declared in 1992 for Port Phillip for favorable entry and departure. For latest details on depths, vessels should contact the

port authority.

1.29 Rip Bank, a rocky flat with depths of 8.8 to 18m, extends

across the entrance close outside The Heads. The depths increase outside the bank, and on the inner side of the Rip is Entrance Deep, a trench that runs across has depths of 47 to 94m

and extends onto the range line of Great Ship Channel, about

0.9 mile WNW of Point Nepean. This inequality of depth,

combined with tidal currents, which at times have a rate of 5 to

8 knots, cause a race, known as The Rip, which, during or immediately after a SW gale, breaks so heavily as to be dangerous

to small vessels. 

1.29 There are four channels into Port Phillip, between The

Heads, and a channel, known locally as Clarkes Channel,

which leads from the SE, as follows:

1. Great Ship Channel, the main channel, has a provisional declared depth in 1999 of 14m. Vessels of maximum
Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 17

Pub. 127

drafts up to 11.6m may navigate the Great Ship Channel at

all stages of the tide and up to 12.1m with sufficient tide.

Shortland Bluff Low Light, in line bearing 042.5° with

Shortland Bluff High Light, leads through Great Ship Channel. A conspicuous green water tower lies close N of Shortland Bluff High Light. 

2. Western Channel had provisional declared depths, in

1999, of 11.4m on its E side and 10.3m on its W side. The W

limit is marked by Hume Tower Light, in line with Shortland

Bluff High Light, bearing 046°. A flagstaff, in line with

Shortland Bluff High Light, bearing 044°, marks the E limit

of the channel. 

3. 13.1m Channel is located on the E side of Great Ship

Channel. Its W limit is marked by the alignment of Shortland

Bluff High Light with a beacon standing close S of Shortland

Bluff Low Light, bearing 041°. 

4. Eastern Channel has a declared depth of 11.9m in

1999. The port authorities should be consulted for the latest

details on channel depths. The W limit is marked by Murray

Tower Light and Shortland Bluff High Light, in line bearing

about 039°. Its E limit is marked by Murray Tower, in line

with Lookout House, bearing about 035°; Lookout House

lies close W of Shortland Bluff High Light. Shoal depths of

10m exist on Nepean Bank, W of this transit. These shoals

can be cleared, by day, by keeping the W edges of Low Light

in transit with the E edge of Queenscliff water tower, bearing

036.2°. There is no night time demarcation of the W edge of

the shoal area. 

5. Clarkes Channel, marked by Clarkes Beacon and

Marcus Hill Beacon, in line bearing about 339.5°, has a least

depth of 12.8m, but leads close W of Five Fathom Banks.

Clarkes Beacon lies about 1.2 miles NNE of Point Lonsdale.

Marcus Hill Beacon stands about 2 miles NNW of Clarkes

Beacon. A radio mast stands about 0.2 mile WSW of Clarkes

Beacon.

Clarkes Channel should only be used when the fairway between The Heads is clear of traffic. Inbound vessel on a

flood will experience an onshore set. An outbound deep draft

vessel should not use Clarkes Channel but the Great Ship

Channel. 

1.29 Directions.—A vessel should not attempt to enter The

Heads at night without a pilot or against the outgoing current,

which sets across the entrance and at springs attains a velocity

of 7 to 8 knots, causing a high, short, confused sea. In S or W

gales, the sea breaks right across the entrance between The

Heads.

1.29 A vessel may scend or dip below the ordinary water level

during high seas, and great caution should be used by outbound

deep-draft vessels; under these conditions it is recommended to

leave only on the last quarter of the incoming current or at the

SW following.

1.29 From the SW, vessels usually make the high, bold land of

Cape Otway, which it is desirable to round at a distance of not

less than 3 miles. Then course may be set for Port Phillip

Heads, passing about 3.5 miles outside Henty Reef. All other

dangers are cleared by giving the coast a berth of not less than

3 miles.

1.29 If Cape Otway should be rounded early in the evening with a

fresh S wind, beware of overrunning the distance, as a strong

current after a prevalence of S gales often sets NE along the

coast. Bearings of Split Point give a good check.

1.29 After passing Split Point, if the weather is at all clear,

Arthurs Seat will be seen rising inland before the lower and

nearer land in that direction becomes visible; this mountain, in

conjunction with Flinders Peak, should enable the vessel to

identify the entrance to Port Phillip. Proceeding onward, the

land about Cape Schanck will be seen E, appearing at first like

a long low island trending SE. On nearing the entrance, Barwon Head will open out on the port bow. This headland is a

good mark for making Port Phillip, but in poor visibility care

should be taken not to mistake it for The Heads, vessels doing

so have gone ashore.

1.29 When the lighthouses on Shortland Bluff are sighted, a

deep-draft vessel should shape course for the entrance of Great

Ship Channel and enter on the previously-described range line.

When the beacon on Point Nepean bears about 140°; or when

Ф Rod Cairns 2000, printed with permission

Port Phillip Bay
18 Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 

Pub. 127

Barwon Head is just open of Point Lonsdale, bearing 271°,

course may be altered for South Channel or West Channel.

1.29 From the S and E, vessels usually make the land about Cape

Schanck, which cannot be mistaken due to its bold character

and the lighthouse on its summit. It is recommended to sight

Cape Schanck before getting far into the bight of Port Phillip,

and should the wind blow strong from the S, it is not safe to

proceed without sighting the cape. Having passed, a good offing should be given in approaching The Heads until Shortland

Bluff lighthouses open out, the intervening land near Point Nepean preventing their being seen before Shortland Bluff High

Light bears 014°, and Shortland Bluff Low Light bears 011°.

Then enter Great Ship Channel, as previously directed.

1.29 A vessel from the E may enter through Clarkes Channel,

with Clarke Beacon in line with Marcus Hill Beacon, bearing

339.5°. This alignment leads very close W of Five Fathom

Banks. This channel may only be used when the fairway between The Heads is clear of traffic. A vessel of deep-draft

should not leave by Clarkes Channel, but should proceed

through Great Ship Channel. A vessel entering Clarkes Channel on the flood should guard against the onshore set.

1.29 At night, having passed 3 to 4 miles off Cape Schanck Light,

a vessel should steer to make the white sector of Point Lonsdale Light, and keep in that sector until Shortland Bluff range

lights are sighted. The vessel then should proceed through

Great Ship Channel as previously directed.

Port Phillip—South Shore

1.30 Two shoals, with depths of 4.2m and 7.6m, lie about

0.3 mile and 0.7 mile ENE, respectively, of Point Nepean

(38°18'S., 144°39'E.).

1.30 Observatory Point, about 1.2 miles E of Point Nepean, is

marked close SE by a white beacon, 10.7m high. A radar tower

stands at the head of Nepean Bay. Cheviot Hill, about 0.7 mile

SW of Observatory Point, consists of bare limestone.

1.30 The coast between Observatory Point and Police Point,

about 1.2 miles ESE, is steep-to. The quarantine station is situated about midway along this section of coast. A red brick

chimney, 24.4m high, and a light are situated close E of the

quarantine buildings.

1.30 A conspicuous flagstaff, with a group of green-roofed buildings E, stands on Point Franklin, about 0.7 mile ESE of Police

Point. Point Macarthur, about 0.7 mile farther ESE, is sheer

and 24m high. Point King, about 0.2 mile farther ESE, is

fringed by rocks, and a white beacon, 5m high, stands on it.

1.30 The Sisters, about 1.7 miles SE of Point King, is a conspicuous double point of limestone, 18.3m high, with a sandy beach

between. The town of Sorrento lies midway along this coast.

1.30 White Cliffs (38°22'S., 144°49'E.), about 2.5 miles ESE of

The Sisters, is a white cliff, 24m high, and the most remarkable

feature on this coast.

1.30 Sorrento Channel forms the approach to the jetty at Sorrento,

and lies between the S shore and South Sand, the extensive

bank E of Point King. The passage is marked by a range light

and by pile beacons. Its NW entrance is obstructed by a bar,

with a depth of 2.4 to 3m, and a vessel approaching the entrance should pass between two beacons moored 275m E and

450m ESE, respectively, of Point King.

1.30 A disused light, 34m high, stands in McCrae (38°21'S.,

144°56'E.), at the foot of Arthurs Seat.

1.30 Eastern Light (38°21'S., 144°56'E.), about 5.5 miles ENE

of White Cliffs, is shown from a white metal tower, 34m high,

at the foot of Arthurs Seat.

1.30 The shore bank, from about 1.5 miles W of White Cliffs to

about 1.5 miles ENE of Eastern Light, is marked by numerous

white beacons lying between 0.2m and 0.4 mile offshore.

1.30 Martha Point (38°18'S., 144°59'E.) lies about 5 miles NE of

Eastern Light. Mount Martha, 159m high, about 1 mile E of the

point, is the highest summit of a wooded flat-topped ridge extending about 3 miles NE of the point.

South Channel

1.31 South Channel, a continuation of Great Ship Channel,

lies between Great Sand and Middle Ground, on the N side,

and South Sand, on the S side. The channel is marked by lights,

lighted buoys, and unlighted buoys. Work was in progress on

dredging and realigning the South Channel. Buoys will be removed from within the new channel alignment as works

progress. Until the lights have been established, the pile will be

marked by temporary lights.

1.31 Popes Eye Bank, with a least depth of 2.4m, lies about 2

miles E of Shortland Bluff. Wedge Light is shown from the

center of the shoal. A spit, with depths of less than 10m, extends about 0.7 mile SW of Popes Eye Bank; Popes Eye Buoy

is moored at the SW end of the spit. 

1.31 A wreck, with a depth of 13.4m, lies about 1.1 miles SSW of

Lighted Beacon No. 2; a second wreck, with a depth of 18.3m,

lies about 1.6 miles ESE of the same light.

1.31 Nicholson Shoal, with a least depth of 6.1m, extends to

about 1 mile N of Police Point. It is marked NE by Lighted

Buoy No. 1.

1.31 Great Sand lies with its SW extremity about 1 mile SE of

Wedge Light; from this position it extends about 9 miles ESE

and 5.5 miles NE. The Mud Islands, 1.8m high, are a group of

three islands lying near the middle of the NW side of Great

Sands. The middle island of the three is a bird sanctuary, a

breeding ground where petrels are matured. Caisson M, a conspicuous concrete structure, on which is a wooden hut, stands

about 0.4 mile E of the SW end of Great Sands. 

1.31 Depths of less than 10m extend about 0.7 mile SSW and 1

mile SE of Caisson M. Dredging takes place periodically over

these shoals. 

1.31 A dredged channel, with a depth of 12.5m, is entered between Lighted Beacon No. 1 and Lighted Beacon No. 2.

1.31 Middle Ground is the E part of Great Sand, E of Pinnace

Channel. South Channel Fort, with an elevation of 7m, lies

about 3.7 miles ESE of Caisson M.

1.31 South Channel Pile (38°20'S., 144°51'E.) is a white round

house on piles, 8.2m high, on the S side of South Channel,

about 0.5 mile E of the E end of South Sand. A 5.2m patch lies

about 0.1 mile NNE.

1.31 A dredged channel, with a depth of 12.5m, is entered between Lighted Beacon No. 15 and Lighted Beacon No. 16 and

extends E to Lighted Beacon No. 18.

1.31 Hovell Pile Light, situated about 2.2 miles E of South Channel Pile Light, marks the E end of Middle Ground. The new

light is shown from a structure situated about 275m E of the

old structure.
Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 19

Pub. 127

1.31 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained off Queenscliff

outside the prohibited area described below, and as close as

possible to the NW side of the channel in order to keep the fairway to West Channel clear. The best berth is in about 10.6m,

about 0.5 mile E of Shortland Bluff High Light and within the

red sector of Low Light.

1.31 When compelled to anchor off the quarantine station due to

quarantine regulations, S gales, or other causes, a vessel drawing more than 6.1m should anchor N of the station, in 12 to

15m, from about 0.3 to 0.6 mile N of the Quarantine Station

Light. At night, a vessel should anchor in the white sector of

the Quarantine Station Light, preferably with that light bearing

180°.

1.31 Good anchorage, clear of the fairway, may be obtained, in

11.3 to 13.1m, at the S end of Symonds Channel, about 0.5

mile SE of Wedge Light (38°17'S., 144°42'E.).

1.31 It is not advisable in bad weather to anchor in either South

Channel or West Channel, due to the strength of the tidal currents and the loose nature of the bottom. 

1.31 Capel Sound, S of the E end of South Channel, affords safe

anchorage, about 0.7 mile SSE of South Channel Pile Light,

and clear of the prohibited area. The anchorage offers a of

depth of 12m, sand, and is covered by the green sector of South

Channel Pile Light.

1.31 A charted prohibited anchorage area, excluding the anchorage of small boats, encompasses the E terminus of S channel;

the area is marked by buoys. A mussel bed lies 3.6 miles ENE

of Hovell Pile Light.

1.31 Caution.—The speed of a vessel through the dredged cut

must not exceed the minimum for safe steerageway. Caution is

necessary here as the tidal currents immediately W of the

dredged area set obliquely to its axis. Dredges may frequently

be found at the E end of the dredged cut. 

Port Phillip—West Shore 

1.32 Drapers Reef, with a least depth of 0.6m, extends

about 0.4 mile NE of Shortland Bluff (38°17'S., 144°39'E.),

and is marked by a buoy. About 0.5 mile farther NE, a dredged

channel leads to a boat haven N of Queenscliff. The boat haven

is bounded on its W side by a bridge connecting Queenscliff to

Rabbit Island, and then by another bridge to the SW end of

Swan Island.

1.32 Swan Island (38°15'S., 144°41'E.) is low and marshy in its

central part, with wooded ridges about 12.2m high, E and W.

Depths of less than 5m extend up to 0.7 mile off the SE side of

the island. Swan Spit, with depths of less than 1.8m, extends

about 0.7 mile S of Swan Point, the NE extremity of Swan Island. Swan Bank, with depths of less than 5m, extends about

0.3 mile E of Swan Spit; the edge of this bank is subject to frequent change. Swan Beacon stands about 0.7 mile SW of Swan

Point.

1.32 A charted area encompassing Swan Island has been designated as Naval Waters by the Commonwealth of Australia. 

1.32 Swan Bay, NW of Swan Island, is mainly filled with mud

flats.

1.32 From Edwards Point, the N entrance point of Swan Bay, to

South Red Bluff, about 2.2 miles NNE, the shore is wooded,

with lagoons close within it.

1.32 South Red Bluff, about 12.2m high, is conspicuous because

of its reddish color; a beacon is shown from the summit.

1.32 A jetty, fronting the town of St. Leonards, about 1 mile farther NNE, has a berth, 119m long, with a depth of 3m at the

outer end on its N side. A curved breakwater extends S from

the head of the jetty and affords shelter for small craft.

1.32 Indented Head, about 1.5 miles N of St. Leonards, is a wooded point, 3m high. Governor Reef, which dries, lies about 0.5

mile SE of Indented Head. 

1.32 The coast between Indented Head and Point George, about

1.2 miles NW, is low and wooded, above which the roofs of

houses may be seen.

1.32 Point George (38°08'S., 144°42'E.) is low and grass-covered; it may be recognized by a solitary beacon on its summit.

White Woman Rock, a basalt boulder, 1.2m high, lies close off

the point.

1.32 Prince George Bank, with depths of less than 1.5m, fronts

the coast from St. Leonards to Point George, and extends about

2 miles NE of the latter point. A light is shown from the NE extremity of the bank; a racon is situated at the light.

West Channel

1.33 West Channel had a least depth of 5m, sand and

shells, in 1998, but during spells of E or N winds the depths

may be less. The banks and shoals in West Channel are subject

to frequent change, and the latest information should be obtained from the Department of Ports and Harbors before proceeding through this channel. 

1.33 West Channel is marked by odd-numbered lights and buoys

on its SE side and by even-numbered lights, beacons, and

buoys on its NW side.

1.33 West Channel is entered in an ENE direction, passing N of

Popes Eye Bank, and passing either N or S of Royal George

Shoal (38°16'S., 144°42'E.). The latter shoal, with a least depth

of 4m, lies about 1 mile SSE of Swan Beacon. The channel

then continues in the same direction until Wedge Light, on

Popes Eye Bank, bears 204.5° astern, and in line with Monash

Light. This range leads W of the SW end of West Middle Sand,

which is marked by a buoy, and leads E of a 4m shoal located

nearly 1 mile SE of Swan Beacon. The range then leads between William Sand and West Sand. No. 9 Light and No.11

Light are situated on the NW side of William Sand, about 1.4

miles NE and 2.2 miles NNE, respectively, of Swan Point.

Grimes No. 10 Light, about 2.9 miles NE of Swan Point is located on the E side of West Sand. Keep Swan Point, in line

with a beacon about 0.3 mile SW, and with Shortland Bluff

High Light bearing 226° astern; this range leads through the N

part of West Channel. West Channel Pile Light lies at the NE

end of West Sand, on the W side of the N entrance to the channel. 

1.33 Inbound vessels are recommended to enter West Channel S

of Royal George Shoal, and outbound vessels N of the shoal.

1.33 Attention must be paid to the tidal currents which do not set

evenly through the channel, particularly off Swan Bank and the

N end of the channel. 

Coles Channel

1.34 Coles Channel lies between West Sand and the shore

between Swan Point (38°15'S., 144°42'E.) and The Bluff,
20 Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 

Pub. 127

about 3.5 miles NNE. The channel has a least depth of 3.4m on

the range line, and is used by coasters.

1.34 Coles Channel is approached from West Channel in a NW

direction. When Coles Light, about 0.3 mile NNE of Swan

Point, bears 195° astern, and in line with Monash Light, the

vessel should alter course N with these lights in range astern,

passing W of the beacons on the E side of the channel. It

should be noted that the range line passes close W of the S part

of West Sand, with a least depth of 0.3m. When abreast of St.

Leonards, course should be altered NE to pass SE of Prince

George Bank.

Port Phillip—East Shore

1.35 The coast between Martha Point (38°18'S.,

144°59'E.) and Davey Point, about 9.5 miles NE, is wooded,

with numerous buildings amongst the trees; then to Ricketts

Point, about 10.5 miles farther N, it is low, fringed with trees,

behind which there are numerous buildings and cultivated

ground.

1.35 The shore between Martha Point and Fisherman Point, about

3 miles NNE Martha Cliff, about 2 miles NNE, is cliffy; behind it the land rises to a flat-topped ridge, with Mount Martha

at its SW extremity.

1.35 Balcombe Bay, between Martha Cliff and Fisherman Point,

about 3 miles NNE, is fronted by rocks and backed by a red

granite rocky coast. Shag Rock, which is conspicuous, lies

close offshore, at the head of the bay, close S of a cement

works. Fishermans Bay Reef, extending about 0.3 mile N from

Fisherman Point, is marked by a beacon.

1.35 Schnapper Point, about 1 mile NNE of Fisherman Point, is a

narrow projection about 15.2m high, and is fronted by red

granite boulders on its W side. A jetty, extending about 198m

NE from the point, has depths of 7.6m at its head, decreasing to

4.9m at 106m in from its head.

1.35 The coast between Schnapper Point and Davey Point, about

4 miles NE, is bold, being formed by hills; the highest and

most conspicuous hill is Mount Eliza, 160m high, lying about

1.5 miles inland and 3 miles E of Schnapper Point. Wooley

Reef, with a depth of 1.4m, lies about 0.6 mile NNE of Davey

Point, at the outer end of a spit of sand and rock. It is marked

by two beacons. A dangerous wreck lies 1 mile NW.

1.35 A T-head jetty at Frankston, about 1.5 miles NE of Davey

Point, has a depth of 4.3m alongside its outer face.

1.35 The E shore N of Frankston is built over. A light, marking

the S bank of the Patterson River, lies about 4 miles N of the

jetty at Frankston. A gasometer is conspicuous about 2 miles

farther N. The suburb of Mordialloc, where there is a jetty, lies

about 8 miles N of Frankston.

1.35 Beaumaris Bay lies between Mordialloc and Table Rock

Point, about 2.5 miles WNW. The latter point is formed of yellow cliffs, 12m high. A marine farm used for mussel cultivation

lies on the W side of the bay.

1.36 Ricketts Point (38°00'S., 145°02'E.), about 0.4 mile

WNW of Table Rock Point, is flat and 9.1m high. A drying

rock lies midway along a spit, with depths of less than 5m, extending about 0.4 mile S of Ricketts Point. A beacon stands on

the SW side of the rock.

The coast from Ricketts Point to Half Moon Bay, about 2

miles NW, is bordered by rocks and foul ground extending up

to 0.5 mile offshore. Quiet Corner, a cliffy point, about 15m

high, lies midway between the points. Black Rock, detached

and awash, lies about 0.2 mile off Quiet Corner.

1.36 The S entrance point of Half Moon Bay is 12m high, and a

reef, with a depth of 1.5m over its outer end, extends about 0.4

mile NW of the point. Black Rock Breakwater lies about 275m

NW of the same point and is composed partly of timber and

partly of a hulk. Red Bluff, at the N end of Half Moon Bay, is

34m high, reddish in color, and conspicuous; it is the only bare

cliff in the vicinity. A conspicuous concrete building, 73m

high, stands 1.2 miles ENE of Red Bluff.

1.36 Picnic Point, nearly 1.5 miles NW of Red Bluff, is a well-defined grassy point with a green-roofed building on it; depths of

less than 5m extend about 0.5 mile SW of the point. A breakwater extends about 0.2 mile NNW of the point and shelters

Sandringham anchorage.

1.36 Anonyma Shoal, about 0.8 mile SW of Picnic Point, has a

least depth of 1.2m and is steep-to on its SW side; a black can

buoy is moored close W of its least depth. Yorkies Rock, with a

depth of 0.6m, and a 7m depth lie about 0.4 mile S and 1.3

miles W, respectively, of Picnic Point.

1.36 The shore from about 0.3 mile NE of Picnic Point to Green

Point, about 1.2 miles NW, is formed by yellow bluffs, 12 to

15m high. A Dumping Area is established 0.6 mile SW of Green

Point and is marked by buoys. Shoaling is to be expected within

this area. Green Point may be recognized by the yellow memorial on it, and by Middle Brighton Pier, about 0.2 mile SE.

1.36 Depths of less than 5m extend up to 0.5 mile offshore between Green Point and Point Cole, about 1.3 miles N. Middle

Brighton Pier lies about 1 mile N of Green Point. Bonnet Rock,

which dries 0.6m, lies about 0.2 mile S of Middle Brighton

Pier and about 0.2 mile offshore; a beacon is moored W of the

rock. A rock, with a depth of 0.6m, lies about 0.3 mile S of

Bonnet Rock. Point Cole is low, with a conspicuous yellow

building on it. Schnapper Rocks, with a depth of 3.3m, lies

about 0.4 mile WNW of Point Cole.

1.36 Point Ormond (37°50'S., 144°56'E.), about 1.2 miles NNW

of Point Cole, is a round, grassy point, about 12.2m high, with

a white beacon on it. Pile beacons mark rocks lying about 0.2

mile offshore for about 0.4 mile N of Point Ormond.

1.36 St. Kilda Pier lies about 1 mile NNW of Point Ormond; and

provides berthing for small craft; the pier extends about 0.2

mile offshore, then a rubble breakwater extends about 0.3 mile

NNW.

Melbourne (37°50'S., 144°56'E.)

World Port Index No. 54030

1.37 The port of Melbourne lies at the N end of Port Phillip, and is one of Australia’s principal ports, and one of the

world’s major container ports in volume of cargo handled.

Melbourne Channel, entered about 4 miles SSE of Point Gellibrand (37°52'S., 144°54'E.), leads to the port, this dredged

channel leads between the shoal banks on either side of Hobsons Bay. The latter bay is entered between Point Gellibrand

and Point Ormond, about 3.5 miles WSW. Melbourne Channel

leads N to Princes Pier and Station Piers; the latter pier is double-decked and the main overseas passenger terminal.
Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 21

Pub. 127

1.37 About 1 mile E of Point Gellibrand, a channel branches NW

from Melbourne Channel and leads to Gellibrand Swinging

Basin off the piers at Williamstown. Then this channel leads

about 0.4 mile farther NW to the approach to Webb Dock and

the channel leading to the entrance of the River Yarra.

1.37 The River Yarra enters the NW part of Hobsons Bay between

breakwaters on each side of its entrance. The river then extends

about 1 mile NW and 1 mile NNE to where the Maribyrnong

River enters on its N side. From this junction the river leads E

to Swanson Dock, Appleton Dock, and Victoria Dock. Construction of the Bolte Bridge was completed in 2002. The vertical clearance of the Bolte Bridge is 25m. The bridge is situated

at the entrance to Victoria Dock. The river continues on to the

Charles Grimes Bridge, which crosses the river about 0.7 mile

ESE of the entrance to Victoria Dock. Navigation ends at the

Charles Grimes Bridge, which has a vertical clearance of 3.2m.

1.37 The city of Melbourne (37°50'S., 144°58'E.) lies on either

side of the River Yarra, surrounded by numerous suburbs. The

city rises gradually from the River Yarra, and does not exceed

an elevation of 91m. Its secure port and central position, with a

network of railways and roads connecting with a large portion

of Australia, command export and import trade.

Tides—Currents

1.37 The tidal rise at Melbourne is 0.8m at MHHW, and 0.8m at

MLHW.

1.37 The tidal currents in Hobsons Bay are weak and their direction is mostly dominated by the prevailing winds. 

1.37 The waters of the River Yarra are almost continually running

outward. Even during the incoming tidal current, the water,

from the surface to a depth of about 3.7m, is running out. Under the influence of strong S to W winds, however, an upstream

current is caused. The normal rate of outflow is from 0.2 to 0.5

knot, but this is accelerated during heavy rains when its rate

may attain 4 knots. The river has, on occasions during severe

floods, overflowed its banks and caused damage to property.

Melbourine Harbor 

Melbourne Port Corporation 

http://www.melbport.com.au
22 Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 

Pub. 127

Depths—Limitations

1.37 A submarine pipeline, containing flammable gas under high

pressure, is laid in the N part of Port Phillip, and in the approach to Melbourne Channel. The pipeline extends from Mordialloc (38°01'S., 145°05'E.) to the vicinity of Kororoit Creek

(37°52'S., 144°52'E.), and is marked in its NW part by lighted

special buoys, painted yellow. Any vessel damaging the pipeline would face an immediate fire hazard. Vessels are cautioned

not to anchor within 155m of the pipeline.

1.37 Channels.—There is a dredged depth of 13.1m in the approach channel to the port, 10m in the channel to Princes Pier

and Station Pier, and 13.1m to the River Yarra, including Gellibrand Swinging Basin.

1.37 There is a dredged depth of 13.1m from the entrance of the

River Yarra to Swanson Dock; then 10.3 to 11m to Victoria Basin, including the swinging basin in Victoria Basin.

1.37 Note.—Maintenance dredging is continuous in Port

Melbourne.

1.37 All vessels are required to have an underkeel clearance of at

least 0.6m at all times. Vessels over 183m in length, proceeding

to Webb Dock or navigating the River Yarra, must have an

underkeel clearance of 10 per cent of their draft.

1.37 Berthing limitations in Melbourne are given in the accompanying table.

1.37 Bridges.—Westgate Bridge, about 1.3 miles above the

entrance to the River Yarra, has a vertical clearance of 59m.

1.37 Bolte Bridge, with a vertical clearance of 22.9m, runs across

the River Yarra close E of the overhead cable mentioned below.

In 1997, commercial shipping had ceased E of the bridge. 

1.37 Overhead power cables.—An overhead power cable, with a

vertical clearance of 56m, crosses the River Yarra between two

towers on opposite sides of the river, close W of the entrance to

Victoria Dock. 

1.37 Precautionary area.—A precautionary area has been established in the waters encompassing the Port Melbourne Channel, and is best seen on the appropriate chart. See Signals and

Regulations for further details.

Melbourne Berthing Facilities

Berth Length Depth

Maximum vessel

Remarks

Length Draft

South Wharf

No. 26 266m 11.0m 215m 10.4m Bulk cement.

No. 27 146m 9.4m — 8.8m Lay-up berth

No. 28 146m 9.4m 215m 8.8m General cargo.

No. 29 146m 9.4m 215m 8.8m General cargo.

No. 33 210m 11.6m — 11.0m Bulk cement.

Appleton Dock

Berth B 192m 10.7m Vessels 

with a maximum 

length of 

250m can 

be handled.

10.1m Containers, general cargo, and 

vehicles.

Berth C 192m 10.7m 10.1m Containers, general cargo, and 

vehicles.

Berth D 200m 10.7m 10.1m Steel products & bulk cargo.

Berth E 137m 10.7m 10.1m Bulk cargo.

Berth F 263m 11.4m 10.8m Bulk cargo.

Swanson Dock

No. 1W Total

berthing

length of

844m.

13.1m Vessels 

with a maximum 

length of 

290m can 

be handled 

in the basin.

12.1m Containers.

No. 2W 13.1m 12.1m Containers.

No. 3W 12.7m 12.1m Containers.

No. 4W 13.1m 12.1m Containers.

No. 1E Total 

berthing 

length of 

884m.

12.9m 12.1m Containers.

No. 2E 13.1m 12.1m Containers.

No. 3E 13.1m 12.1m Containers.

No. 4E 12.7m 12.1m Containers.
Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 23

Pub. 127

1.37 Spoil area.—A spoil area, in which there are depths of 12m,

lies between 6.5 and 10 miles S of Point Gellibrand. Less water

than charted, with depths of 12m, were reported close N of the

spoil area.

Aspect

The E approach to Melbourne lies between Martha Point

(38°18'S., 144°59'E.) and Point Ormond, about 25 miles N;

this coast was previously described in paragraph 1.35 and paragraph 1.36. Flinders Peak (37°57'S., 144°25'E.), of The You

Yangs, on the W side of Port Phillip, was previously described

in paragraph 1.28, and is a good landmark.

1.37 In the near approach to Melbourne, the following marks are

conspicuous:

1. Red Bluff (37°58'S., 145°01'E.), a bare cliff, with

conspicuous tanks about 1.7 miles ENE

2. A refinery tower, marked by red obstruction lights,

Victoria Dock

No. 22 261m 9.4m 215m 8.8m General cargo.

No. 24 200m 9.4m 215m 8.8m General & bulk cargo.

Yarraville

No. 5 148m 9.4m 180m 8.8m Dry bulk.

No. 6 205m 10.2m 190m 9.6m Dry bulk. 

Station Pier

Outer East 223m 10.2m 305m 10.0m Passenger vessels.

Outer West 257m 10.9m 305m 10.0m Passenger vessels.

Inner East 220m 10.9m 305m 10.0m Passenger vessels.

Webb Dock

East No. 1 155m 7.0m 140m 6.4m General cargo.

East No. 2 150m 7.0m 140m 6.4m General cargo.

East No. 3 210m 10.0m 185m 9.4m Containers, general cargo, and 

vehicles.

East No. 4 280m 12.5m 250m 11.9m Containers, general cargo, and 

vehicles.

East No. 5 250m 12.5m 250m 11.9m Containers, general cargo, and 

vehicles.

West No. 2 240m 9.1m — 8.5m Ro-ro.

Tanker Berths

Breakwater Pier 213m 9.0m 230m 8.4m

Bulk liquids. Vessels over 215m 

long are allowed a maximum draft 

of 7.6m and may berth during 

daylight hours only.

Gellibrand Pier 289m 12.1m 290m 11.2m

Bulk liquids. Vessels with a length 

of over 250m may berth during 

daylight hours only, but may sail 

at any time, subject to weather 

conditions.

Maribyrnong No. 1 185m 10.0m 180m 9.4m Bulk liquids.

Holden Oil Dock 200m 13.1m 185m 12.1m Bulk liquids.

Melbourne Berthing Facilities

Berth Length Depth

Maximum vessel

Remarks

Length Draft
24 Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 

Pub. 127

about 3 miles WNW of Point Gellibrand

3. Government House (37°50'S., 144°59'E.), a white

stone building, with a tall, square tower, on rising ground,

about 4.5 miles NE of Point Gellibrand

1.37 Other conspicuous landmarks include Timeball Tower, constructed of white stone and bricks, 30m high, about 0.5 mile

NE of Point Gellibrand; oil tanks, close NE of Timeball Tower;

a conspicuous building, 46m high, about 0.7 mile N of Point

Gellibrand; A.P.A. yellow dome, floodlit at night, and one of

the highest buildings in Melbourne, about 4.5 miles NE of

Point Gellibrand; and Point Cook, about 6 miles SW of Point

Gellibrand, a low and rocky point, with a conspicuous pine

plantation on it, and marked by a beacon on its SW end. 

1.37 The entrance to Melbourne Channel is marked on its E side

by Fawkner Light, shown from a pile structure about 4.5 miles

SSE of Point Gellibrand. The channel is then marked by lighted beacons numbered from seaward.

1.37 Gellibrand Shoal, with a least depth of 2.3m, is the remains

of a demolished light, and lies about 0.5 mile ESE of Gellibrand. 

1.37 Port Melbourne Channel Direction Light is shown from a

white concrete tower about 0.3 mile NW of the base of Station

Pier. The light is visible over a narrow tri-color sector. A vessel

is on the leading line when in the white sector. The red sector

indicates W of the line; the green sector indicates E of the line.

1.37 The dredged channel, which leads from Melbourne Channel

to the piers at Williamstown, the approach to Webb Dock, and

the entrance to the River Yarra, is marked by a directional light

shown from the W side of the entrance to Webb Dock.

1.37 Lighted beacons mark the E side of Gellibrand Swinging Basin, the E side of the approach to Webb Dock, and the E and S

sides of the River Yarra. Lighted beacons also mark the W side

of the approach to Webb Dock, and W and N sides of the River

Yarra.

1.37 Two lighted beacons stand on the Warm of Webb Dock.

These lights, in line bearing 321°, have been set up for container ships with high bridge structures.

1.37 Two pair of range lights are shown at the E entrance and the

head of Swanson Dock to assist the navigation of container

vessels. The first pair is in line bearing 064.8°, and the range

lights at the head are in line bearing 001.8°.

Pilotage

1.37 Pilotage is compulsory. See Port Phillip, in paragraph 1.28,

for pilotage information.

1.37 Signal Station—Signal Control Center.—Signal stations,

from which traffic signals are shown, are situated on the head

of Breakwater Pier, at Williamstown, and at the Shipping Control Center, on the S entrance point of Victoria Dock.

1.37 The Shipping Control Center is a two-story structure supported on a rectangular tower, with an overall height of 40m.

The control center is equipped with radar and radiotelephone.

All shipping entering or leaving the harbor is under the control

of the center, which also dispatches tugs, docking pilots, mooring crews, and customs agents to the vessel involved. Contact

can be made on VHF channel 16 (call sign: Harbor Control).

1.37 Radio reporting points.—Both inbound and outbound vessels

are required to communicate with Harbor Control at specific radio

reporting points, best seen on the appropriate chart.

1.37 A Port Information Service is provided at Melbourne. See

Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific Ocean

and Southeast Asia for general signals in use at all Australian

Ports. All movements are controlled on a 24-hour basis. No

vessel (except for small craft under 20m in length not engaged

in towing or licensed to carry passengers) should enter the port

or proceed from her berth or anchorage without permission

from Harbor Control.

1.37 Radio Calling Points are established in the harbor and vessels should check the chart for details.

Regulations

1.37 The following information is derived from the Port of Melbourne Authority regulations, a copy of which should be obtained on arrival.

1.37 Vessels approaching or leaving the River Yarra when passing

Williamstown must proceed at the lowest speed consistent with

safe navigation.

1.37 Vessels navigating the port must not exceed a speed of 7

knots, from the entrance to the River Yarra to the W end to the

junction with the Maribyrnong River; 5 knots then to the W

side of the entrance to Appleton Dock; 4 knots then to Johnson

St. Bridge; 8 knots, within any other part of the port. When

passing works in progress on the banks of the river, sunken

vessels, vessels aground or at anchor, tugs with train in tow, or

vessels moored at any wharf, speed must not exceed 4 knots.

1.37 A vessel approaching another proceeding in the opposite direction shall, at a distance of not less than 100m, reduce speed

and keep on that side of the fairway which lies on the starboard

side of such vessel.

1.37 Vessels proceeding up the rivers within the port shall give

way to vessels proceeding down such rivers.

1.37 A vessel shall, at least 0.2 mile from any dredging machine,

diving punt, or rock-breaking machine, go dead slow; and prior

to passing over or along the mooring chains of such dredging

or rock-breaking machine or punt, the engine of such vessel

shall be stopped until the vessel has passed clear of the mooring chains.

1.37 In the Precautionary Area, it is recommended that when entering, transiting, and leaving the Precautionary Area, vessels

at all times should keep to the E when inbound, and to the W

when outbound. Any inbound vessel shall not hinder any vessel using the Port Melbourne Channel or the Williamstown

Channel or any vessel which is outbound, which is within or

which is about to enter, the Precautionary Area. It is essential

for vessels navigating within the port to maintain radio contact

with Harbor Control and directly with one another. Vessels

when inbound may use the area to the E of the Port Melbourne

Channel. Yachts and other pleasure craft should keep to the E

of the Port Melbourne Channel as far as possible and avoid at

all times hindering the movement of larger vessels, particularly

those constrained by size and draft to the shipping channels.

1.37 No oil or refuse of any kind may be discharged from any vessel while in the port, and all steam pipes must be effectively

screened. No ballast may be discharged in the port except at

such places as may be approved by the Commissioners.

1.37 Quarantine.—Vessels subject to quarantine must not proceed N of a line drawn about 085° from a point close S of

Timeball Tower Light to St. Kilda Pier.
Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 25

Pub. 127

Vessel Traffic Service

1.37 Area.—The port of Melbourne VTS Authority area is the

port waters of Melbourne. The waters are bound to seaward by

the arc of a circle with a radius of 3 miles centered on position

38°17'33.6''S, 144°36'50.4''E (Point Lonsdale Signal Station),

and encompasses the waters of Port Phillip Heads, South

Channel, and the waters of Port Phillip Bay enclosed by the

follow positions: 

a. 38°19'42.0''S, 144°53'48.6''E.

b. 38°13'42.6''S, 144°50'46.2''E.

c. 38°06'21.6''S, 144°44'14.2''E.

d. 38°05'37.8''S, 144°40'04.8''E.

e. 38°03'37.8''S, 144°40'04.8''E.

f. 37°55'25.2''S, 144°49'48.6''E.

g. 37°52'40.8''S, 144°54'51.6''E.

h. 38°19'42.0''S, 144°53'48.6''E.

i. North to the shore line

j. From Boyds Jetty NE to

k. 37°51'23.4''S, 144°54'40.8''E.

l. 37°50'49.8''S, 144°55'01.2''E.

m. NE to Princes Pier

n. 37°50'29.4''S, 144°55'37.8''E.

o. East to Station Pier

p. 37°50'37.2''S, 144°56'00.6''E.

q. 37°50'51.6''S, 144°55'59.4''E.

r. 38°04'27.6''S, 144°52'18.6''E.

s. 38°18'26.4''S, 144°57'07.8''E.

t. 38°20'00.6''S, 144°55'12.6''E.

u. The River Yarra downstream of Bolte Bridge including Williamstown Channel and the Maribyrnong River

downstream of Shepherd Bridge.

1.37 The port of Melbourne VTS area is divided into two sections

at latitude 38°05'00''S, as follows:

1. Northern Sector.—Melbourne VTS, located at the

Shipping Management Center, Fisherman’s Bend, monitors

and controls vessel traffic movement N of latitude

38°05'00''S, as well as coordinating the delivery of essential

services provided by the private sector to port users.

2. Southern Sector.—Lonsdale VTS, located at Point

Lonsdale Signal Station, monitors and controls vessel trafic

movement in Port Phillip S of latitude 38°05'00''S, including

movements at Port Phillip Heads and South Channel.

1.37 Traffic Procedues.—General traffic procedures are, as follows:

1. The master of every vessel to which these rules apply,

bound to or from Melbourne or Geelong, and every vessel in

transit through the Port of Melbourne VTS area must comply

with the following procedures:

a. The procedures are mandatory for all commercial

vessels.

b. Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 35m loa

unless exempt.

c. All times should be given in local time.

d. Vessels in the port should maintain contact with the

Port of Melbourne VTS whether underway or at anchor

and keep continuous listening watch on VHF channel 12.

In addition, vessels at anchor must maintain a continuous

listening watch on VHF channel 16.

2. Clearance to navigate:

a. Clearance to navigate given by Melbourne VTS or

Lonsdale VTS for a vessel to leave a berth, mooring or

navigate within the port of Melbourne VTS area is clearance to commence navigation only. It does not relieve the

master from the responsibility for the conduct and safe

navigation of the vessel.

b. Expiry of Clearance—Where a vessel, for which

clearance has been given, does not start navigating within

15 minutes of the clearance time, the master of the vessel

must obtain further clearance before the vessel starts to

navigate within the Port of Melbourne VTS area.

c. Any vessel not ready to shift or depart within 15

minutes of its ordered time may lose its priority and the attending resources and services may be directed to another

vessel that is ready.

1.37 Traffice procedures for Lonsdale VTS—Southern Sector

are, as follows:

1. Inbound vessels should report to Lonsdale VTS at

least 2 hours prior to arriving at the fairway through Port

Phillip Heads or, if taking a pilot at the Pilot Boarding

Ground, advising:

a. ETA at the port limits or at the Pilot Boarding

Ground.

b. Vessel type and maximum draft.

c. Any defects or circumstances that may affect the

vessels ability to manuver.

d. If the vessel is constrained by draft.

e. If navigating under the control of Pilot Exempt

Master, give the name of of the master.

2. When 3 miles from the entrance, vessels should:

a. Advise Lonsdale VTS by which channel within the

fairway through Port Phillip Heads it is intended to navigate.

b. Seek clearance from Lonsdale VTS to enter fairway.

c. Not allow the vessel to proceed until Lonsdale VTS

has given clearance to do so.

3. On arrival at Port Phillip Heads, advise Lonsdale VTS

of the ETA at:

a. Hovell Pile.

b. Fawkner Beacon or Point Richards Channel Entrance Beacon (if proceeding to Geelong).

4. Vessels bound for Geelong, advise Lonsdale VTS

when passing Point Richards Channel Entrance Beacon.

5. Advise, during the course of the passage, of any

changes to the ETA at Hovell Pile and Fawkner Beacon or

Point Richards Channel Entrance Beacon.

6. Not allow the vessel to shape a course for the South

Channel Dredged Cut (i.e. that section of the South Channel

between Beacon 12 and Beacon 14) while an outbound hampered vessel is navigating between Hovell Pile and Beacon

10.

7. Inbound vessels must report to Lonsdale VTS when

departing from Geelong on passing Point Richards Channel

Entrance Beacon advising ETA at:

a. Hovell Pile.

b. Port Phillip Heads, advising if the vessel intends to

transit the Great Ship Channel.

8. Advise Lonsdale VTS during the course for the South

Channel Dredged Cut (i.e. that section of the South Channel
26 Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 

Pub. 127

between Beacon 12 and Beacon 14) while an inbound hampered vessel is navigating between Beacon 8 and Beacon 16.

9. When passing Beacon 6 in the South Channel, report

to Lonsdale VTS advising which channel within the fairway

through Port Phillip Heads it is intended to navigate. Tankers

and hampered vessels must advise Point Lonsdale VTS on

arrival at Beacon 6 that the vessel is ready to proceed, and

must not allow the vessel to proceed W of the imaginary line

joining Popes Eye Beacon and South Channel Entrance Beacon until Lonsdale VTS has granted clearance to do so.

10. Advise Lonsdale VTS on leaving the Lonsdale VTS

sector to sea.

1.37 Traffice procedures for Melbourne VTS—Northern Sector

are, as follows:

1. Inbound vessels should send ETA 48 hours in advance.

2. Thirty (30) minutes prior to arrival at Fawkner Beacon or, if arriving from Geelong when passing Point Richards Channel Entrance Beacon, obtain clearance from

Melbourne VTS to pass N of Fawkner Beacon or proceed to

anchor.

3. Obtain clearance from Melbourne VTS before getting

underway from anchorage

4. Vessels proceeding in accordance with 1 and 2 above,

must advise Melbourne VTS whether it is intended to use the

Port Melbourne Channel, the Eastern By-Pass Channel, or

proceed to the W of the Port Melbourne Channel. Vessels

proceeding in accordance with 3 above must advise all shipping when departing the anchorage on VHF channel 12.

5. Vessels should report when passing:

a. Position 38°05'00.0''S, 144°55'15.0''E.

b. Fawkner Beacon (37°57'09.0''S, 144°55'28.8''E).

c. Breakwater Pier (37°51'54.0''S, 144°55'06.0''E) or,

if proceeding to Station Pier, Beacon No. 70

(37°52'04.2''S, 144°55'39.6''E).

d. West Gate Bridge (37°49'49.8''S, 144°53'54.6''E).

e. If proceeding to anchorage report when anchored

advising position and time of anchoring.

6. Outbound vessels (prior to departing from a berth)

should:

a. Advise Melbourne VTS of the vessels maximum

draft and whether it is intended to use the Port Melbourne

Channel, the Eastern By-Pass Channel or proceed to the W

of the Port Melbourne Channel.

b. Not depart until Melbourne VTS has granted clearance.

c. Advise all shipping when departing the berth on

VHF channel 12.

7. Vessels should report when passing:

a. West Gate Bridge (37°49'49.8''S, 144°53'54.6''E).

b. Breakwater Pier (37°51'54.0''S, 144°55'06.0''E) or,

if proceeding to Station Pier, Beacon No. 70

(37°52'04.2''S, 144°55'39.6''E).

c. Fawkner Beacon (37°57'09.0''S, 144°55'28.8''E),

advising ETA at Hovell Pile and Port Phillip Heads and if

the vessel intends to transit the Great Ship Channel or, if

on passage to Geelong, ETA at Point Richards Channel

entrance beacon.

d. If bound for Geelong, when passing Point Richards

Channel entrance beacon.

e. Advise Lonsdale VTS during the course of the passage, of any changes to the ETAs provided in 7c above.

8. Outbound vessels (prior to departing from anchorage)

should:

a. Advise Melbourne VTS of the vessel’s maximum

draft.

b. Not depart until Melbourne VTS has granted clearance.

c. Advise all shipping when departing the anchorage

on VHF channel 12.

9. Vessels should report when passing:

a. Fawkner Beacon (37°57'09.0''S, 144°55'28.8''E),

advising ETA at Hovell Pile and Port Phillip Heads and if

the vessel intends to transit the Great Ship Channel or, if

on a pasage to Geelong, ETA at Point Richards Channel

Entrance Beacon.

b. If bound for Geelong, when passing Point Richards

Channel Entrance Beacon.

c. Advise Lonsdale VTS during the course of the passage, of any changes to the ETA’s provided in 9a above.

10. The master of all barges (bunker barge, dumb towage,

pontoon barge) must obtain clearance from Melbourne VTS

before proceeding anywhere within port areas. 

Anchorage

1.37 Anchorage in convenient depths, over a bottom of mud and

shells, may be taken anywhere along the routes leading to the

port of Melbourne from the E end of South Channel, the N

ends of Coles Channel and West Channel, or from Geelong, remaining clear of the spoil area and gas pipeline, in the approach to Melbourne Channel.

1.37 Hobsons Bay is open to S gales which send in short, choppy

and treacherous seas. Vessels must select anchorage according

to draft and where they can swing well clear of channels and

fairways. Small vessels whose draft permits can find shelter

NW of Nelson Pier, at Williamstown. Vessels intending to remain at anchor in Hobsons Bay for over 48 hours must moor.

1.37 Prohibited anchorage.—Anchorage is prohibited in the area indicated on the chart SE of Breakwater Pier.

1.37 Anchorage is prohibited on the Yarra River S of the West

Gate Bridge abeam of the BP Jetty, the Shell Jetty, and the Caltex Jetty.

1.37 Anchoring and fishing are prohibited within an area 4 miles

SSE of Point Gillibrand (37°52'S., 144°54'E.), in the approaches to Port Melbourne Channel, as shown on the chart.

1.37 Anchorage is prohibited in any fairway or channel or near

the middle of any river.

1.37 For the explosive anchorages, see the description of the N

shore of Port Phillip in paragraph 1.38.

Directions

1.37 From the E end of South Channel, a course of 002° for about

25 miles leads to the entrance of Melbourne Channel.

1.37 From the N end of West Channel, a course of 025° for about

18.5 miles leads to the entrance of Melbourne Channel.

1.37 With the exception of the spoil area and the gas pipeline,

there are no dangers in the approach to Melbourne from South

Channel and West Channel.
Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 27

Pub. 127

Port Phillip—North Shore

1.38 Altona Bay, between Point Gellibrand (37°52'S.,

144°54'E.) and Point Cook, about 6 miles SW, is backed by

low land and swampy ground, and is largely filled by a bank

with depths of less than 5m, extending up to 1.2 miles offshore.

1.38 The mouth of Kororoit Creek lies about 2 miles WNW of

Point Gellibrand. A refinery tower, marked by a red obstruction

light, is conspicuous about 1 mile WNW of the river mouth.

1.38 Laverton Jetty, with a depth of 3m at its head, lies about 2

miles WSW of the mouth of Kororoit Creek; submerged piles

extend about 150m S of the jetty. Altona Reef, with depths of

less than 5m, extends about 1.2 miles SE from a position about

0.8 mile E of Laverton Jetty. Four lighted beacons mark the

limits of a firing danger area E of Altona Reef.

1.38 Truganina Jetty, in ruins, lies about 1 mile SW of Laverton

Jetty, and the entrance to Skeleton Creek lies about 1 mile farther SSW. Close N of the entrance to Skeleton Creek, and extending for about 1 mile the shore is backed by the state

powder magazines, which can be recognized by the regular

rows of buildings on it, and the high fence surrounding it. 

1.38 Point Cook (37°56'S., 144°48'E.), about 1.7 miles S of the

mouth of Skeleton Creek, is low and rocky, a beacon, 5m high,

stands 300m NW, and a conspicuous pine plantation, about

600m SW of Point Cook. A rocky spit, with a least depth of

0.9m, extends about 1 mile E of Point Cook. Dumb Joe Buoy is

moored close SE of the end of the spit.

1.38 The Explosives Anchorage, the center of which is marked by

a lighted buoy, lies 2.5 miles ESE of Point Cook.

1.38 The coast from Point Cook to the entrance of the Werribee

River, about 6 miles SW, is low and backed by Werribee Plain,

and has depths of less than 5m extending about 1 mile offshore.

1.38 A target buoy area, where buoys are moored when required,

is centered about 1.5 miles SW of Point Cook.

1.38 Two red lights, for the use of aircraft, vertically disposed, are

shown at an elevation of 31m, about 2.5 miles W of Point

Cook. A firing area, the limits of which are best seen on the

chart, lies 0.7 mile SW of the lights.

Western Arm of Port Phillip and the Port of

Geelong

1.39 The Western Arm of Port Phillip, which includes the

port of Geelong, is entered between Point George (38°08'S.,

144°42'E.), on the S side, and the mouth of Werribee River,

about 9 miles N, on the N side. The arm then extends about 16

miles WSW to the port of Geelong at its head.

1.39 West of Point Wilson (38°06'S., 144°30'E.), on the N shore,

the port of Geelong is divided into an outer harbor and an inner

harbor by two shallow banks. The outer harbor is enclosed by

the bank and Wilson Spit, extending about 3 miles S of Point

Wilson, and the bank which crosses the port from Point Lillias,

about 3 miles W of Point Wilson, to Point Henry, about 2.5

miles WSW. The latter bank encloses Corio Bay, the inner harbor. Spacious and secure anchorage may be obtained in the

outer harbor, in depths of 7.3 to 9.1m.

1.39 The main route to Corio Bay leads through Point Richards

Channel, Wilson Spit Channel and Hopetoun Channel, dredged

through the banks which obstruct the port.

Western Arm—North Shore

1.40 The entrance of the Werribee River (37°59'S.,

144°41'E.) may be recognized by the tower of Corpus Christi

College on the E side of the river, about 3 miles NNW of the

entrance, and by a prominent water tower standing at an elevation of 37m on the N side of the river entrance. The river entrance is fronted by a shallow bar, and a light is shown on the

NE side.

1.40 The coast between Werribee River entrance and Point Lillias, about 13.5 miles SW, is low, flat, and dominated inland by

Flinders Peak (37°57'S., 144°25'E.).

1.40 Plantations of cypress trees border the shore from Werribee

River entrance to Wedge Point, about 2.5 miles SW. Wedge

Spit, with depths of less than 1.8m, extends about 1 mile S of

Wedge Point. A pile beacon marks the 5m curve about 1 mile

SSW of the outer end of Wedge Spit. An artificial reef, with a

depth of 6.4m, lies about 1 mile SSW of the pile beacon.

1.40 Beacon Point lies about 3.5 miles WSW of Wedge Point.

Long Reef, with a rock awash and a rock, with a depth of 0.3m,

near its outer end, extends about 1 mile SE of Beacon Point. A

pile beacon lies close N of the 0.3m rock.

1.40 Kirk Point, marked by a beacon, lies about 1.2 miles SW of

Beacon Point. Between Kirk Point and Point Wilson, about 4

miles SSW, there is a mangrove-fringed lagoon, separated from

the sea by The Sand Hummocks, two narrow sandy promontories. Arthur the Great Spit, with a depth of 4.9m near its outer

end, extends about 2.3 miles SE from The Sand Hummocks. A

buoy is moored near the outer end of the spit.

1.41 Point Wilson (38°06'S., 144°30'E.) is marked by a

beacon; a tank lies about 0.3 mile NNW of the point. Avalon

Air Control Tower, 35m high, with hangars and buildings, is

conspicuous about 3 miles NNW of Point Wilson. Point Wilson Bank, with depths of less than 5m, extends about 1.3 miles

SSE of Point Wilson and is marked close within its seaward

end by Steamboat Beacon, a pile beacon with a triangular topmark. Wilson Spit, a continuation of Point Wilson Bank, with

depths of 3.6 to 5.5m, extends about 2 miles SSW of Steamboat Beacon to within 1.2 miles of the S shore of Western Arm.

Wilson Spit Beacon, a pile beacon, 7.9m high, marks the S end

of Wilson Spit.

1.41 Commonwealth Explosives Pier extends about 1.5 miles ESE

from a position about 0.3 mile N of Point Wilson. Berths, 168m

long, on each side of the head of the pier, have depths of 9.1m

alongside, with a maximum permissible draft of 8.4m. The area

around the head of the pier is dredged to 9.1m. A rocky patch,

with a depth of 8.2m, and marked S by a buoy, lies about 0.1

mile NNE of the head of the pier. The channel, extending from

Point Richards Channel to the pier, has a depth of 9.1m.

1.41 Lights, in line bearing 273.5°, on the outer end of the pier, lead

through the approach channel to the pier. Two lighted beacons

mark the N limit of the dredged channel in the pier approach.

1.41 Explosives anchorage.—Vessels carrying explosives, when

required to anchor, may anchor in the explosives anchorage

centered about 0.7 mile NNE of the head of Commonwealth

Explosives Pier. This small anchorage is limited to the use of

vessels carrying less than 300 tons of explosives.

1.41 Snake Island (38°05'S., 144°28'E.) lies midway along the

coast between Point Wilson and Point Lillias, about 3 miles W.
28 Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 

Pub. 127

The island, connected to the mainland by salt flats, separates

two shallow bays. Snipe Hill, a grassy hummock, 18.3m high,

lies about 0.2 mile inland at the head of the E bay. A rocky spit,

with a depth of 1.5m over its outer end, and an exposed wreck

extends about 0.5 mile S of the S end of Snake Island.

1.41 Point Lillias (38°06'S., 144°27'E.), the N entrance point of

Corio Bay, is a grassy point, 6.1m high, and fringed with rocks.

A white beacon stands about 0.2 mile NW of the point. Bird

Rock, 1.5m high and marked by a beacon, stands on a reef extending about 0.5 mile SSE of Point Lillias.

1.41 Between Point Lillias and Point Henry, about 2.3 miles SSW,

Corio Bay is fronted by a bar, with depths of 5m, and which

dries 0.3m in places. A beacon stands on the E side of the bar,

about 0.7 mile SE of Point Lillias.

Western Arm—South Shore

1.42 Point George (38°08'S., 144°42'E.) and Prince

George Bank have been previously described in paragraph

1.32.

1.42 The coast between Point George and Harding Reach, about 2

miles NW, is low; then to Portarlington, about 0.7 mile W, it is

formed by yellow bluffs, 18m high. Grassy Point Beacon, 4.9m

high, and a similar beacon, stand about 1 mile NW of Point

George and on Harding Reach, respectively. A jetty fronts the

town of Portarlington, and the white tower of a hotel, about 0.2

mile S of the root of the jetty, is visible for about 15 miles from

the NE.

1.42 From Portarlington, a low and bare shore extends about 1

mile WNW to Point Richards; a white beacon, 4.9m high, lies

about 0.1 mile SW of Point Richards. Point Richards Bank,

with depths of less than 5m, extends about 0.5 mile NW and

1.2 miles W of Point Richards; two piles mark the outer part of

the bank W of the point.

1.42 The coast for about 1.5 miles SW of Point Richards is low,

and then for about 5 miles WSW it is formed by bold yellow

bluffs, 27m high. Spray Farm Beacon, white and 5m high,

stands about 2 miles SW of Point Richards, with a conspicuous

farm standing in a grove of trees about 0.2 mile SW. The town

of Clifton Springs, about 2.5 miles farther SW, is fronted by

three jetties in ruins. Curlewis Beacon marks the W end of the

yellow bluffs. Bellarine Beacon, 4.9 high, lies about 1 mile farther W. Depths of less than 5m extend about 0.5 mile offshore

along this coast, and a spoil ground extends about 1 mile offshore abreast of Curlewis Beacon.

1.42 The bay between Bellarine Beacon and Point Henry, about 4

miles WNW, is mostly occupied by a spoil ground.

1.43 Point Henry (38°08'S., 144°25'E.), the N entrance of

Corio Bay, is the N end of a promontory which rises as a steep

ridge, 9m high, along its axis. A beacon, 5m high, stands close

within the point. The water tower of the Alcoa Aluminum

Works is conspicuous about 0.3 mile SSW of the beacon. A

bank, which dries 0.3m, extends about 0.3 mile NNW of Point

Henry.

1.43 Point Henry Operations Control Center.—About 0.2 mile

SSW of Point Henry is a cream-colored tower, 11m high, surmounted by a white mast. The signal station is equipped with

VHF radiotelephone and is connected to the telephone system.

All traffic entering and leaving the port of Geelong is controlled from this post.

1.43 Point Henry Pier, for the unloading of alumina, extends

about 0.6 mile ENE from a position about 0.3 mile SSE of

Point Henry. The berth on the N side of the outer end of the

pier and Point Henry Channel, which leads from the W end of

Wilson Spit Channel, were dredged to 12m. A turning basin,

dredged to 8.2m, lies E of the head of the pier. The berth can

accommodate vessels up to a maximum length of 183m.

1.43 Lights, in line bearing about 233.8°, lead through Point Henry Channel. Lighted beacons mark the SE sides of Point Henry

Channel and the turning basin.

Geelong (38°09'S., 144°22'E.)

World Port Index No. 54050

1.44 The port of Geelong is situated in Corio Bay, the inner harbor of the Western Arm of Port Phillip. The major portion of the trade of the port is of a bulk nature, both dry and

liquid. The city of Geelong is situated on the SW and W sides

of Corio Bay.

Tides—Currents

1.44 The tidal rise at Geelong is 0.8m at MHHW, and 0.7m at

MLHW.

1.44 The tidal currents in Western Arm are at all times weak and

irregular, except between Lighted Beacon No. 5 and Lighted

Beacon No. 6 in Hopetoun Channel, where it crosses the bar

between Point Henry and Point Lillias; the outgoing current

here has a rate, during its second quarter, of 1 knot. At the E

end of Wilson Spit Channel, a slight cross set of the tidal current is perceptible.

Depths—Limitations

1.44 The main approach to Corio Bay leads through Point Richards Channel, Wilson Spit Channel, and Hopetoun Channel.

Each of the above channels are marked by lighted beacons,

numbered from seaward in accordance with IALA Maritime

Buoyage System A. The channels are 122m wide and are

maintained to a depth of 12.3m.

1.44 Point Richards Channel is entered about 1.5 miles NNE of

Point Richards (38°07'S., 144°38'E.), and extends in a WSW

direction for about 6 miles to its junction with Wilson Spit

Channel.

1.44 Wilson Spit Channel, with its entrance about 2.5 miles SSE

of Point Wilson, extends in a WNW direction for about 4 miles

to its junction with Hopetoun Channel, about 1.5 miles ENE of

Point Henry. In 1998, a declared depth of 11m applied to all of

Wilson Spit Channel.

1.44 Hopetoun Channel extends in a WSW direction for about 4

miles, passing across the bar which encloses Corio Bay, and

passing about 0.3 mile N of Point Henry.

1.44 From the W end of Hopetoun Channel, City Channel leads S

to Cunningham Pier, and Corio Channel leads N to Bulk Grain

Pier, Corio Quay, Lascelles Wharf, and Refinery Pier. City

Channel was dredged to 9.7m in 1990, and lighted beacons

mark its N entrance. 

1.44 The maximum draft permissible in the approach channels
Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 29

Pub. 127

and to the berths at Bulk Wheat Pier, Lascelles Wharf, and Refinery Pier is 10.5m; to Corio Quay and Cunningham Pier,

9.3m.

1.44 Vessels drawing less than 8.4m may proceed direct to and

from their berth W of Lighted Beacon No. 14 of Hopetoun

Channel.

1.44 Piers.—The Bulk Grain Piers have alongside lengths and

dredged depths, as follows:

1.44 Within Corio Quay contains four berths, South Wharf Berth

No. 1, in the SW corner, has ro-ro facilities. North Wharf, with

Berth No. 1, Berth No. 2, and Berth No. 3, is on the N side. All

berths have an alongside dredged depth of 11m.

1.44 Lascelles Wharf, a container terminal, has an alongside

dredged depth of 12.3m.

1.44 Refinery Pier has a dredged depth of 12.3m alongside all

berths. The largest berth will accommodate vessels up to 275m

in length.

1.44 Cunningham Pier has a depth of 9.7m alongside.

Aspect

1.44 Stingaree Bay, between Point Henry and Limeburners

Point (38°09'S., 144°23'E.), about 2.3 miles SW, is shallow;

the shore is low and backed by salt flats, except in the vicinity

of Limeburners Point, where there are low cliffs. The red building of a salt works is situated 2.5 miles SSW of Point Henry. A

tower, 64m high, stands about 0.4 mile SE of Limeburner’s

Point.

1.44 Rippleside Pier, about 1.5 miles NW of Limeburners Point,

is the berth and depot of the Geelong Harbor Trust.

1.44 The most conspicuous objects in Corio Bay are the wheat silos,

close W of the root of Bulk Grain Pier, about 1 mile N of Rippleside Pier. About 1 mile NNW of the silos, the conspicuous chimney of a freezing works lies close S of Corio Quay.

1.44 Refinery Pier lies about 1.5 miles NE of Corio Quay. Refinery

tanks and a conspicuous chimney, painted in orange and white

bands, lie about 0.4 mile N of the root of Refinery Pier.

1.44 Lights, in line bearing 315°, close off the NE side of Refinery Pier, are occasionally shown for the approach to Berth No.

1.

1.44 The N shore of Corio Bay lies between Point Lillias and

Point Abeona (38°05'S., 144°24'E.), about 2 miles WNW; the

E part of this stretch of coast is backed by salt flats. The shore

for about 0.5 mile SE of Point Abeona is fronted by trees. The

conspicuous red brick clock tower of Geelong Grammar

School is situated about 0.5 mile NW of Point Abeona.

Pilotage

1.44 Pilotage is compulsory. See Port Phillip, in paragraph 1.28,

for pilotage information.

1.44 Point Henry Operations Control Center, on Point Henry, is

manned continuously, equipped with VHF radiotelephone, and

connected to the telephone system. All traffic entering and

leaving the port is controlled from the center.

1.44 The following signals are made from the center for the control of traffic through Point Richards Channel, Wilson Spit

Channel, and Hopetoun Channel:

1. N—Stop, or word STOP in Morse Code.

2. V—Proceed, or word PROCEED in Morse Code.

3. SW—I wish to proceed through the channels, by outbound vessels. If at a pier or wharf, permission can be obtained by telephone; if at anchor, by displaying flags SW by

day, by lamp at night, or by radiotelephone.

1.44 All instructions from the signal station must be strictly and

promptly obeyed.

Regulations

1.44 The master of a vessel navigating any channel within the

port shall cause such vessel to be navigated at the lowest speed

consistent with safety; provided that in respect of any portion

of the port W of Beacon No. 14, Hopetoun Channel, the maximum speed over the ground shall not exceed 7 knots or such

lower speed as is necessary to prevent damage to any other vessel or to the property of the Commissioners.

1.44 The master of a vessel shall not permit his vessel to enter any

channel within the port, and if inbound, shall not permit the

vessel to approach within 1 mile of the entrance to Point Richards Channel unless special permission has been granted by the

harbormaster or from Point Henry Operations Control Center.

1.44 The master of any oil tanker inbound, by day or at night, before shaping a course for Point Richards Channel, shall use every endeavor to notify Point Henry Operations Control Center

by signal that such vessel is ready to proceed and shall show

the following signals:

1. By day—Flag B of the International Code of Signals

over a black ball.

2. At night—A red light at the masthead or where it can

best be seen, but not less than 6.1m above the deck, and of

such character as to be visible all round the horizon.

1.44 The master, owner, or agent of any oil tanker which is intended to put to sea (by day or at night) shall:

1. Notify Point Henry Operations Control Center of such

intention before the departure of such vessel from berth or

anchorage.

2. Immediately on departure show the day or night signal prescribed above.

1.44 No vessel in which there has been a fire on board within 24

hours previously or being in an unseaworthy condition as may

in the opinion of the harbormaster endanger the safety or navigation of the port, shall enter any channel within the port without the special permission in writing of the harbormaster. On

arrival in the port, the master shall notify the harbormaster

through the signal station of such fire or unseaworthy condition.

1.44 Quarantine.—Geelong is a first port of entry. The quarantine line is a line drawn from Limeburners Point to the mouth

of Limeburners Creek (38°05'S., 144°24'E.).

Berth Length Depth

Berth No. 1 201m 10.5m

Berth No. 2 201m 12.3m

Berth No. 3 168m 12.3m
30 Sector 1. Australia—Cape Northumberland to Port Phillip 

Pub. 127

Anchorage

1.44 Vessels over 9.1m draft anchor, in a least depth of 12.5m,

outside the entrance to Point Richards Channel, and S of its

prolongation.

1.44 Vessels over 8.4m draft anchor, in a least depth of 9.4m, E of

and within 1 mile of Lighted Beacon No. 17, Point Richards

Channel.

1.44 In Corio Bay, the bottom is soft mud and the holding ground

is not good. Main engines may not be immobilized without the

permission of the harbormaster. Anchorage is only permitted in

the following positions; distances and bearings from the light

structure on the head of Bulk Grain Pier (38°07'S., 144°22'E.):

1. In 8.8m, 067°, distant about 0.9 mile.

2. In 8.8m, 092°, distant about 0.8 mile.

3. In 8.8m, 117°, distant about 0.9 mile.

4. In 7.9m, 133°, distant about 1.4 miles.

5. In 7.9m, 147°, distant about 1.4 miles.

1.44 Vessels in quarantine should anchor as required by the harbormaster.

1.44 For explosives anchorage, see Commonwealth Explosives

Pier off Point Wilson in paragraph 1.41. Vessels with explosives aboard, while within the port, must anchor only as and

where the harbormaster shall direct.

Directions

1.44 After clearing South Channel or West Channel, steer to pass

a safe distance E of Prince George Light, at the NE end of

Prince George Bank.

1.44 Note.—At night, keep in the white sector of Eastern Light, at

the E end of South Channel, or in the white sector of West

Channel Pile Light, at the N end of West Channel, to clear

Prince George Bank.

1.44 When clear of Prince George Bank, use the safe water lighted buoy, moored about 3.2 miles N of Point George as a guide,

and approach and enter Point Richards Channel entrance on a

course of about 260°. Then steer a mid-channel course through

Point Richards Channel, Wilson Spit Channel and Hopetoun

Channel to Corio Bay. Careful steering is necessary when the

tidal influence is felt, especially in the E approach to Wilson

Spit Channel, and between Lighted Beacon No. 5 and Lighted

Beacon No. 6 of Hopetoun Channel.

1.44 Having passed Lighted Beacon No. 16 at the W end of Hopetoun Channel, course may be shaped as convenient for one

of the anchorage berths or for any of the wharves or piers in

Corio Bay. A vessel of deep draft should continue in the

dredged channel as far as Lighted Beacon No. 15 or Lighted

Beacon No. 18; the vessel then may proceed by Corio Channel

or City Channel to the desired berth.
Pub. 127

2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe, including the Eastern Entrance of Bass 

Strait

2.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 2 — CHART INFORMATION
33

Pub. 127

SECTOR 2 

AUSTRALIA—PORT PHILLIP TO CAPE HOWE, INCLUDING THE EASTERN ENTRANCE OF 

BASS STRAIT

2.0 Plan.—This sector first describes the S coast of Australia

from Port Phillip to Wilsons Promontory, followed by a description of the E entrance of Bass Strait and the islands in the

entrance, including the Furneaux Group; Banks Strait is described in paragraph 3.4. The SE coast of Australia, from Wilsons Promontory to Cape Howe, is then described. The

arrangement of the sector is from W to E for the coastal description, and from NW to SE for the description of the islands.

General Remarks

2.1 Winds—Weather.—In Bass Strait, the strongest

gales are frequently from the S and SE, accompanied by thick

weather and often by heavy rain. Northerly winds are common

both in summer and winter, and predominate over all others

winds in frequency and force, particularly during the winter

months; these winds, being off the land, are not especially remarkable or destructive.

2.1 In good weather, a light N wind is frequently encountered

near the shore, and a light S wind is experienced offshore. The

N wind of the coast of Victoria is generally a NW wind in the

vicinity of Cape Howe. In January, February and March, E

winds with good weather are not uncommon; however, these

conditions can not be depended upon in any other season. On

the E sides of the strait and of Tasmania, NE winds are prevalent, though they are seldom forceful.

2.1 As the W part of Ninety Mile Beach is approached, E gales

are common; Wilson Promontory appears to mark the dividing

line.

2.1 January and February are the best months for making a passage to the W through Bass Strait. The gales that prevail in the

strait begin in the NNW and gradually veer to the W and SW,

at which point the wind generally subsides. Thick weather accompanying a breeze from the SE, particularly from May to

September, is generally the precursor of a gale.

2.1 Within 100 miles of the S coast of Australia the most stable

weather prevails during January, February, March, and April.

The wind is generally SE and of the nature of land and sea

breezes, being more E during the night and early morning and

more S during the day and afternoon. The E wind in this season

is light after sunrise, freshening in the morning from the SSE to

a force of 5 or 6, and often developing a haze if the morning

has been hot; the sea breeze attains its greatest force during the

afternoon, becoming lighter nearer sunset as its direction

changes toward the land.

2.1 Should the barometer fall, the winds, instead of shifting to

the S in the morning, may turn to the N, resulting in a very hot,

dry wind for one to three days. When the N wind is light, a

moderate gale from the W to SW usually springs up, seldom

lasting more than 24 hours, after which a period of good

weather again ensues with SE winds.

2.1 At the end of April, the SE winds cease almost entirely,

though they may resume at intervals during the month of May;

at this time there are occasionally fresh NE winds. From the

middle of May until the end of October, W winds prevail, the

gales from that direction quickly raising a heavy sea and equally forceful near the land as farther seaward.

Port Phillip to Western Port

2.2 Point Nepean (38°18'S., 144°39'E.) was previously

described with Port Phillip in paragraph 1.28.

2.2 The coast between Cape Nepean and Cape Schanck, about

16 miles SE, has depths of not less 20m within 1 mile of the

coast, with the exception of Five Fathom Banks, which were

described with the entrance to Port Phillip in paragraph 1.28.

The highest hill along this coast is 154m high and lies about

2.2 miles NNE of Cape Schanck.

2.2 Cape Schanck (38°30'S., 144°53'E.) is a cliffy headland,

84m high, with conspicuous Pulpit Rock, 12m high, close S,

and smaller rock, 1.2m high, about 0.2 mile S of the cape. Cape

Schanck has been reported to give good radar returns at 19

miles. 

2.2 Cape Schanck Light is shown from the summit of Cape

Schanck, about 0.5 mile NNW of the cape. During brush fires,

which occur during the summer months, the smoke has been

observed to give the light a red appearance. The lighthouse is

connected by telephone with Dromona (38°20'S., 143°57'E.).

2.2 Picnic Point, about 1.5 miles E of Cape Schanck, is a bold,

sheer bluff, 75m high. The coast from Picnic Point to West

Head, about 5.5 miles E, is closely bordered by rocks.

2.2 West Head (38°29'S., 145°02'E.), the W entrance point of

Western Port, is a cliffy projection, 26m high, fringed by reefs

and sunken rocks. Bismark Reef extends about 0.7 mile offshore from a position about 0.7 mile W of West Head. A spit,

with a depth of 0.6m near its outer end, extends about 0.2 mile

SE of West Head, and Flinders Rock, with a depth of 3m, lies

about 0.2 mile S of the outer end of the spit. 

Western Port (Hastings) (38°21'S., 145°4'E.)

World Port Index No. 53930

2.3 Western Port is an extensive bay fronted by Phillip Island; its two entrances lie W and E of Phillip Island. The W

and main entrance, between West Head and Point Grant

(38°31'S., 145°07'E.), about 4.5 miles ESE, is easy of access

and available to vessels of deep draft. The eastern entrance, between Cape Woolamai (38°34'S., 145°21'E.), the SE extremity of Phillip Island, and Griffith Point, nearly 2 miles NNE, on

the mainland, is a narrow channel available only to small vessels. 

2.3 French Island, in the middle of the bay, N of Phillip Island,

divides Western Port into two arms; East Arm lies S and E of

French Island, and North Arm lies W and N of the same island.

2.3 The dredged Western Channel extends in a NE direction off
34 Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 

Pub. 127

the NW side of Phillip Island; then a dredged channel leads in a

N direction to the berthing facilities on the W side of North

Arm. Crib Point Oil Terminal Jetty can accommodate tankers

up to 165,000 grt.

2.3 Port limits.—The port of Western Port includes all inlets,

rivers, bays, harbors and navigable waters bounded W by a line

joining West Head and Point Grant, and E by a line drawn 045°

from Cape Woolamai. 

Tides—Currents

2.3 The tidal rise at Stony Point is 2.8m at MHHW, and 2.5m at

MLHW.

2.3 The tidal currents attain a rate of about 3.7 knots in the western entrance to Western Port, between Middle Bank and Grossard Point; a rate of about 2 knots in North and East Arms;

rates of from 2 to 3 knots usually in the Eastern Entrance; and

rates of from 5 to 6 knots in The Narrows.

Depths—Limitations 

2.3 Western Entrance.—Western Channel is dredged to 14.9m

from its seaward end to about 1.5 miles SSW of Sandy Point.

Then a channel dredged to 14.3m extends to abreast Sandy

Point. A channel dredged to 14.1m extends between the drying

mud flats on the W and E sides of North Arm to abreast Long

Island Point. 

2.3 Crib Point Jetty is a decommissioned oil terminal, with two

berths, now used for ship repairs. No. 1 Berth, the N berth, is

366m long, and can accommodate vessels of 165,000 dwt, in a

dredged depth of 15.8m alongside. There is a swinging basin

with a diameter of 610m in a depth of 14.3m.The berthing head

is 38m long, and the maximum permissible length of a vessel

berthing is 280m. No. 2 Berth, the S berth, is 274m long, and

can accommodate tankers up to 95,000 dwt, in dredged depths

of 12.8m alongside. The berthing head is 38m long, and the

maximum permissible length of a vessel berthing is 216m.

2.3 Long Island Point Liquids Pier has a berthing head 105m in

length, and can accommodate tankers up to 165,000 dwt with a

maximum length of 300m. There are dredged depths of 15.8m

in the berth, and dredged depths of 14.3m in the swinging area

E of the berth.

2.3 Steel Industry Wharf is approached by a channel, dredged to

9.1m, leading from the swinging area off Long Island Point

Liquids Pier. No. 1 Berth, the S berth, is a ro-ro berth and has

an alongside depth of 12.1m. No. 2 Berth, with alongside

depths of 10 to 12.1m, is 152m long and can accommodate a

vessel up to 200m in length.

2.3 Caution.—Due to shoaling, a least depth of 14m exists in

the channel between Buoy No. 19 and Buoy No. 21, just E of

Stony Point.

2.3 Eastern Entrance.—The Eastern Entrance to Western Port

lies between Cape Woolamai (38°34'S., 145°21'E.) and Griffith Point, nearly 2 miles NNE. The entrance is narrow and tortuous, and the tidal currents run with great force through The

Narrows, attaining a velocity of 5 to 6 knots at times.

2.3 The Eastern Channel entrance is available at HW for a vessel

drawing less than 3.7m as far as San Remo, and for a vessel

drawing less than 3m through the inner passage to Western

Port. The inner passage, N of Daxis Point and Woody Point,

extends about 1.2 miles NNE through shoal banks, parts of

which dry, to East Arm. 

2.3 The Eastern Entrance Bridge spans The Narrows, between

Woody Point and San Remo. The center span is 61m wide,

with a vertical clearance of 12.2m, and is marked by lights on

its up and downstream sides. The pylons of the center span are

illuminated by floodlights. Overhead power cables, with a vertical clearance of 18.3m, span The Narrows, close SW of the

bridge.

2.3 An L-shaped jetty, off San Remo, has a head 25.3m long,

outside of which there is a depth of 9.1m.

2.3 Off Woody Point is a jetty, with an alongside depth of 3m.

Aspect

Western Entrance.—Point Grant (38°31'S., 145°07'E.),

the W extremity of West Entrance is a craggy headland, 34m

high, from which a reef extends about 0.5 mile WSW. The

Nobbies, consisting of two islets, lie on this reef; Round Islet,

30m high, sheer on all sides and is marked by a light, and the

other islet is 6m high. Black Rock, 10m high, about 0.7 mile

SW of Round Islet, and close S of Seal Rocks, lies on a reef on

which the sea breaks heavily in a S swell. Point Grant has been

reported to give good radar returns at 18 miles. 

2.3 A shoal, with a depth of 13.7m, lies about 1 mile WNW of

Black Rock. Flinders Bank, with a depth of 22m, lies about 2

miles SSW of Black Rock.

2.3 The S coast of Phillip Island, from Point Grant to Cape

Woolamai, about 12 miles ESE, has depths of over 20m from

0.5 to 0.7 mile offshore.

2.3 Caution.—A framework observation tower, 26m high, on

the summit of the largest of the Seal Rocks, should not be confused in poor visibility with the light structure on Point Grant.

2.3 Cape Woolamai, a remarkable helmet-shaped granite headland, of reddish color and marked by a light, rises abruptly

from the sea; the cape, 109m high, is the SE extremity of Phillip Island and its highest point. The cape is fringed by drying

and sunken rocks, none of which extend more than 0.2 mile

offshore. Quoion Hill, 68m high, lies on the W side of Phillip

Island, about 3.5 miles ENE of Point Grant. Pyramid Rock,

high, needle-shaped, and steep-to on its seaward side, lies

about 0.2 mile S of a point about 5 miles E of Point Grant; behind the point the ground slopes gradually to McGregor Hill,

about 1.2 miles N.

2.3 Cape Woolamai has been reported to give good radar returns

at 19 miles.

2.3 Northwest side of the entrance.—Flinders Breakwater Jetty lies about 0.7 mile N of West Head (38°29'S., 145°02'E.),

which was previously described in paragraph 2.2.

2.3 The NE and greater part of the bight between West Head and

Sandy Point, about 11 miles ENE, is filled with shallows and

foul ground. Middle Bank, with depths of less than 10m, and

which dries in places, extends about 7 miles SW from the coast

W of Sandy Point. The outer part of Middle Bank, over which

the sea breaks in a heavy swell, has depths of 5.2 to 8.2m.

2.3 Western Hill, 47m high, and conspicuous Coolart Tower lie

about 3 and 4.5 miles WNW, respectively, of Sandy Point

(38°25'S., 145°14'E.). The land from Western Hill to Sandy
Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 35

Pub. 127

Point is low and marshy. A beacon, 1.2m high, stands on Sandy

Point.

2.3 Phillip Island—Southeast side of the entrance and N

coast.—The coast between Point Grant and the SW entrance

point of Cat Bay, about 1 mile NE, is fronted by reefs and a

shoal bank which extends up to 1 mile offshore.

2.3 McHaffie Point (38°28'S., 145°10'E.), about 4 miles NE of

Point Grant, may be recognized by the red-colored razorbacked

ridge, 9 to 12m high, close SW. A light is shown on the point.

McHaffie Reef, with a depth of 4.6m over its outer end, extends about 0.3 mile NW of McHaffie Point. Hen and Chickens

Reef, which dries, lies about 0.2 mile W of McHaffie Point.

2.3 Red Rock Point, marked by a white triangular beacon, 4.3m

high, lies about 2 miles ENE of McHaffie Point. Penguin Rock

and a remarkable red cliff, 12m high, lie close SW of Red Rock

Point.

2.3 There is an L-shaped jetty at Cowes, about 2 miles E of Red

Rock Point; the head of the jetty is 105m long, with a depth of

6.4m alongside its outer face.

2.3 The coast between Cowes and Observation Point, about 2.7

miles E, is formed by a steep sandy beach, backed by tall dense

trees. Observation Point is a low, narrow sand spit, wooded at

its inner end. 

Tortoise Head (38°25'S., 145°16'E.), the SW extremity of

French Island, is a low flat-topped promontory. A white beacon

is shown from the summit of Tortoise Head, which is 35m

high. A reef extends about 0.2 mile from Tortoise Head and

from a low point projecting from the W side of the promontory.

A spit, with depths of 4m, extends about 0.7 mile SW from

Tortoise Head. The W end of a shallow bank, parts of which

dry, lies about 1 mile SW of Tortoise Head. Channels, available

to small vessels with local knowledge, separate the above bank

from the SW side of French Island.

2.3 East Arm, between the N side of Phillip Island and the bank

off the SW side of French Island, is about 1 mile wide, with

depths of 9.7 to 20m, but E of Phillip Island it is filled by Eastern Flat, which terminates in a narrow spit, about 1 mile NNE

of Observation Point. A channel, between Eastern Flat and the

S and SE sides of French Island to Stockyard Point, about 5.5

miles E of Tortoise Head, has a least depth of 7.3m in the fairway.

2.3 North Arm—West side.—The coast from Sandy Point

(38°25'S., 145°14'E.) to the entrance of Watson Inlet, about 9

miles NNE, is low, marshy, and fronted by mud banks.

2.3 Hanns Inlet, entered between Sandy Point and Stony Point,

about 2.2 miles N, is filled by a drying flat; a red beacon, about

0.6 mile N of Stony Point, marks the edge of the flat. A tortuous channel, with a least depth of 2.1m over a least width of

about 51.8m, winds through the flat to Flinders Naval Depot, at

the head of the inlet. The N and S entrance points of the channel are marked by lights.

2.3 There is a wooden naval wharf, 241m long, at the head of the

inlet; it is available for vessels drawing less than 4.6m.

2.3 Caution.—Navigation of the inlet presents some difficulty

due to a right-angled bend in the channel, where the assistance

of a tug for a single screw vessel is essential. Navigation

should only be attempted within 1 hour of HW, when the tidal

currents, which attain a considerable rate in the inlet, no longer

set across the channel over the mud banks. Favorable weather

conditions are also essential. A set across the entrance to the

channel should be guarded against. The mud banks on the sides

of the channel are steep-to. 

2.3 Stony Point, marked by a beacon, 4.6m high, is a railway terminus. An L-shaped jetty, extending NE from the point, has a

head, 134m long, with depths of 6.2m alongside its NW 61m

front, and 2.1m alongside the remaining length.

2.3 Lights, in line bearing 288°, lead to the jetty. A shoal, with

depths of 1.5 to 2.7m, and marked SW by pile beacons, lies

close NE of the jetty.

2.3 Crib Point (38°21'S., 145°13'E.), the site of a large oil refinery, lies about 1.5 miles N of Stony Point. A chimney, 91m

high, lies about 0.2 mile NW of the point. Crib Point Oil Terminal Jetty extend E from the point. Lights, in line bearing

about 320.5°, lead to the N berth.

2.3 Hastings Bight, between Crib Point and Long Island Point,

about 2.5 miles N, is mainly filled with a mud flat, with Sandstone Island in its S part. Hastings Channel, with a least depth

of 1.8m and marked by beacons, leads to a jetty at the town of

Hastings in the NW part of the bight.

2.3 Long Island Liquids Pier lies close E of Long Island Point.

Flare chimneys of a large refinery lie about 0.4 mile W of the

pier. Two sets of range lights, sharing a common rear range

light, are shown from the pier and mark the limits of the swinging basin.

2.3 Steel Industry Wharf lies close offshore about 1 mile N of

Long Island Point.

North Arm—East side.—The coast from Tortoise Head

(38°25'S., 145°16'E.), previously described above, to Scrub

Point, about 7.5 miles N, is fronted by a drying mud bank extending up to 0.5 mile offshore.

2.3 A drying mud bank, between Tea Tree Point and Scrub

Point, lies parallel with the coast and separated from it by a

passage, through which a depth of about 6.1m can be carried,

but it is encumbered with shallow patches. Middle Spit,

marked on its E side by two beacons, is separated from the N

part by a narrow channel. Two shoals known locally as Middle

Bank, with depths of 0.6m and 0.3m, respectively, lie about 0.2

mile W of the above drying mud bank. The S part of Middle

Bank is marked at each end by a pile beacon, and a beacon

marks the N end of the N part.

2.3 North Arm—North part.—Scrub Point (38°17'S.,

145°17'E.) is wooded, 6.1m high, with a beacon, 3m high, on

it. Quail Island, about 2 miles N of Scrub Point, is low, wooded, and bordered by thick mangroves on its W side.

2.3 Bagge Harbor lies between the mud flats fronting Scrub

Point and Quail Island. Bagge Harbor has depths of 10m in

mid-channel, but in it are two rocks; Eagle Rock, awash, and

Crawfish Rock, which dries about 3m, lie about 1.2 miles

NNW and 1 mile NNE, respectively, of Scrub Point. Lights are

shown from Eagle Rock and Crawfish Rock. There is a least

depth of 10.6m in the fairway from Long Island Liquids Pier to

Bagge Harbor.

2.3 The N part of North Arm extends about 9 miles E from

Bagge Harbors and is filled with drying mud flats, intersected

by several channels, some of which lead to the creeks and inlets on the N coast, and others wind E and terminate about 1

mile off the E coast. 

Eastern Entrance.—West side.—The coast from Cape

Woolamai to Red Point (38°33'S., 145°22'E.), about 1 mile N,

is faced with cliffs. Red Point is formed by red granite boul-
36 Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 

Pub. 127

ders, 15.2m high; a white beacon stands on the point.

2.3 A bight between Red Point and Woody Point, about 2 miles

N, is formed of rocky points and sandy beaches, and is bordered by a bank, with depths of less than 5.5m, extending from

0.1 to 0.5 mile offshore. A red beacon marks the N end of

Black Reef, on the SW side of the entrance channel, about 0.6

mile NW of Red Point. Woody Point, on the NW side of The

Narrows, is low and fringed with reefs; a red beacon stands on

the outer rock. The town of Newhaven stands on Woody Point.

Lights, in line bearing about 306°, situated about 1.5 miles NW

of Red Point, lead through the outer part of the channel entrance.

2.3 A light is shown on the N shore, about 0.4 mile WSW of

Woody Point.

2.3 A red beacon, about 0.3 mile SSW of Woody Point, marks

the W side of the channel.

2.3 Eastern Entrance.—East side.—Griffith Point, about 1

mile NE of Red Point, is a bold sandstone bluff, 21m high, bare

of trees for some distance inland, and fringed by reefs. A range

of sparsely-wooded hills, with prominent plantations around

homesteads on its slopes, extends E and NE. Bass Hill, 284m

high, one of the summits of the range, lies about 10 miles ENE

of Cape Woolamai.

2.3 Between Griffith Point and Davis Point, about 1.2 miles

NNW, Middle Sand, on which are patches of sand and rock

which dry, extend about 1 mile offshore, almost completely obstructing the Eastern Entrance; in bad weather, especially during the outgoing current, the sea breaks over the edge of this

bank. Davis Point, low and sandy, lies on the SE side of The

Narrows. San Remo lies just inside Davis Point.

Pilotage

2.3 Pilotage is compulsory in Western Port except for vessels

specially exempted. Vessels requiring a pilot should notify

“Seapilots Melbourne” of their ETA at Western Port 24 hours

in advance. Changes in the ETA of more than 1 hour should be

notified immediately, and the time should be confirmed 4 hours

before arrival or, if the vessel is delayed, 4 hours before the

original ETA. The pilot boarding place is 3.5 miles S of West

Head (38°29'S., 145°02'E.). If the pilot launch is unable to

maintain its position due to the weather, vessels drawing up to

9.7m may embark a pilot about 2 miles E of Flinders Breakwater Jetty.

Anchorage

2.3 Western Port Harbor Control, established at Stony Point, directs all port operations and can be contacted on VHF radio.

2.3 Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 15m, in East Arm,

from 0.5 to 1 mile E of Cowes Jetty, and about 0.5 mile offshore. There is also good anchorage, in a depth of 14.6m, sand

and shells, about 0.5 mile offshore, abreast Observation Point.

2.3 Vessels carrying explosives must anchor at a distance exceeding 0.2 mile from any jetty or wharf in Western Port.

2.3 An anchorage area, with a least depth of 8.5m, lies about 0.5

mile NE of Long Island Liquids Pier.

2.3 Good anchorage for small vessels may be obtained, in 5m,

off the head of Flinders Breakwater Jetty (38°29'S., 145°02'E.).

2.3 Anchorage may be obtained, in 7.3 to 14.6m, about 1 mile

NE of Pyramid Rock (38°32'S., 145°13'E.), sheltered from N

and NW winds. Care must be taken to avoid a wreck, with a

depth of 5m, about 1.2 miles NE of Pyramid Rock; this wreck

is a scuttled dredge providing an artificial fishing reef.

2.3 A small vessel drawing 4.6m can obtain anchorage, sheltered

from all winds except SE gales, about 0.2 mile NE of Red

Point (38°33'S., 145°22'E.), off Eastern Entrance.

Directions

2.3 Crib Point is a first port of entry. Vessels subject to quarantine must not proceed N of a line joining Sandy Point, Tortoise

Head, and Cobb Bluff (38°27'S., 145°26'E.), or through the area 1 mile S of a line joining Sandy Head and Tortoise Head.

2.3 Western Entrance.—Vessels entering should pass about 1.5

miles NW of Seal Rocks, steering for McHaffies Point Light

bearing 057°. When Fairway Lighted Buoy is abeam to port,

the buoyed channel should be followed to the berthing facilities

in North Arm. Vessels bound for the anchorage in East Arm

can leave the buoyed channel N of Red Rock Point. The spit

extending from Eastern Flat can be avoided by keeping 0.5

mile off the N side of Phillip Island until the anchorage N of

Observation Point has been reached. Caution should be exercised when off the N side of Phillip Island, as the tidal currents

set strongly along that shore.

2.3 At night, approaching from the W, after having rounded

Cape Schanck, keep Point Grant bearing less than 090° until

the white sector of McHaffie Point Light is entered, when

course should be altered to 057° with that light ahead. When

Fairway Lighted Buoy is abeam to port and McHaffies Point

Light changes from white to red, alter course NE to pass

through the buoyed channel. 

2.3 Approaching from the E by day, a vessel should pass about

3.2 miles SW of Point Grant, steering about 304°. When Seal

Rocks are in line with Point Grant, bearing 059°, the vessel

should alter course to 000°. When Point Gossard Light bears

057°, course should be altered NE and the light structure

steered for on that bearing. Then the directions given above

should be followed.

2.3 Approaching from the E at night, a vessel should proceed as

above. When McHaffies Light changes from red to green, alter

course to 000°. Then the directions given above should be followed.

2.3 Eastern Entrance.—A vessel may enter Western Port by

the Eastern Entrance on the top of HW, drawing less than 3m

with an ordinary rise of tide, and drawing less than 3.7m on a

good spring tide. It should be remembered that the tidal currents are very strong in The Narrows, and a vessel drawing

nearly 3.7m should wait at the inner anchorage about 0.5 mile

ENE of the front light of the entrance range, N of the lighted

buoy at the W end of Middle Sand, until nearly slack high water. Local knowledge is necessary.

2.3 A vessel should pass through the outer part of the Eastern

Entrance, with the entrance range lights in line bearing about

306°. If desired, anchorage may be taken between Red Point

and the beacon marking Black Reef.

2.3 From this outer anchorage a vessel should pass N of the beacon marking Black Reef, where the channel is only about 50m

wide, then steer to keep the lighted buoy marking the W end of

Middle Sand on the starboard bow, giving it a berth of about
Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 37

Pub. 127

100m. Then, if the vessel does not intend to anchor N of the

latter lighted buoy, proceed N and NE, passing W of the lighted

buoy off the NW end of Middle Sand, then pass E of the beacon about 0.3 mile SSW of Woody Point, and NW of Davis

Point, into The Narrows.

Western Port to Wilson Promontory

2.4 The coast from the E entrance point of Western Port

to Black Head (38°33'S., 145°28'E.), about 4.2 miles E, is

fronted by cliffs, with depths of over 11m about 0.2 mile offshore. Anderson Hill, 153m high and grassy-topped, lies about

1.7 miles N of Black Head, with the small town of Anderson

conspicuous on its W fall.

2.4 From Black Head to Coal Point, about 8 miles SE, the coast

is a succession of sandy hillocks, 30 to 43m high. Numerous

rocks, one of which dries, extend about 1 mile S of Coal Point;

the sea breaking heavily on these rocks shows this point to be

dangerous on approach.

2.4 Cape Patterson (38°41'S., 145°36'E.), about 2.2 miles SE of

Coal Point, is low, ill-defined, and the least conspicuous point

along this part of the coast. A conspicuous tower, which is also

radar conspicuous, stands nearly 1 mile NNE of the cape. Eagles Nest, a conspicuous rock, 18m high, about 3 miles E of the

cape and about 100m offshore, is a useful mark for identifying

the cape; the coast in the vicinity of the rock is cliffy.

2.4 The highest land within 2 miles of the cape is Honeysuckle

Hill, 43m high, about 2 miles E of the cape, and this elevation

scarcely increases until it joins the range of hills, over 274m

high, which extends E and NE of Bass Hill (38°29'S.,

145°33'E.). The cape has been reported to give good radar returns up to 14 miles.

2.4 A reef, steep-to on its seaward side, extends about 0.3 mile S

of Cape Patterson. Depths of 9.1 to 11m lie up to 1 mile SE of

Eagles Nest.

2.4 Cody Bank, with a least depth of 22m, lies about 8 miles

SSW of Cape Patterson.

2.4 Petril Rock, 0.6m high, lies about 0.4 mile offshore on a

bank with depths of less than 9.1m, extending about 1 mile offshore between Eagles Nest and Point Smythe (38°39'S.,

145°44'E.), the W entrance point of Anderson Inlet.

Anderson Inlet is mostly filled by drying mud flats, intersected by shallow channels. It is only available for small vessels of about 1.5 to 1.8m draft, according to the condition of

the bar and the state of the tide.

2.4 The coast from Point Smythe to Ten Whites Creek (Ten Mile

Creek) (Watercross Creek), about 13.5 miles SE, is formed of

bare sandhills, 30m high. A small sandstone rock, 4.6m high,

lies close offshore, about 0.7 mile NNW of the creek entrance;

sunken rocks extend about 0.4 mile seaward of the rock.

2.4 The coast for about 2 miles S of Ten Whites Creek consists

of overhanging sandstone cliffs with above-water and sunken

rocks extending up to 0.5 mile offshore. Arch Rock, 25m high,

with a natural arch on its E side, lies midway along this part of

the coast and about 0.2 mile offshore; a rock, which dries, lies

about 100m WSW.

2.4 The coast trends about 3 miles SSE to a conspicuous islet,

19m high, close offshore nearly 1 mile NNW of Cape Liptrap.

Sunken rocks extend up to 0.3 mile offshore between the islet

and the cape.

2.5 Cape Liptrap (38°55'S., 145°55'E.), 90m high and

nearly vertical, forms the SW extremity of a table-topped

promontory which attains an elevation of 168m at Liptrap Hill,

about 2.5 miles NE of the cape. A light is shown from the cape.

Cape Liptrap has been reported to give good radar returns at 18

miles.

2.5 The coast between Cape Liptrap and Grinder Point, about 2

miles ENE, forms a bight; then to Bell Point, about 2.5 miles

farther ENE, the land is lower and fronted by rocks from 1.5 to

9.1m high, none of which extending more than 0.2 mile offshore. Bell Point may be identified by a large broad-topped

rock, 12.2m high, lying about 0.1 mile E of it.

2.5 Caution.—The coast between Cape Liptrap and Bell Point

is fringed by drying and sunken rocks, and the sea breaks

heavily for 0.5 mile offshore. Vessels are cautioned to keep at

least 1 mile off this part of the coast where shoal water was reported in 1964. 

2.5 Waratah Bay, formed between Bell Point (38°53'S.,

146°00'E.) and Shallow Inlet, about 8 miles E, affords good anchorage except during S and SE gales.

2.5 An islet, 18m high, lies close off the W shore of the bay,

about 0.3 mile N of Bell Point. Bird Rock, 12m high, and the

highest of a group of rocks within 0.2 mile of the shore, lies

about 0.6 mile farther N, E of the village of Walkerville. A

light is shown about 0.2 mile SW of Bird Rock.

2.5 From Bird Rock the coast is faced with cliffs and fringed

with rocks for about 3 miles NE; then the land decreases in elevation to about 30m and the ordinary feature of sandhills recurs

until the entrance of Shallow Inlet.

2.5 Anchorage may be taken in the white or green sectors of the

light SW of Bird Rock, with good shelter from SW gales, but a

good lookout should be kept for a sudden change of the wind

from the E. A good berth is in 11m, sand, about 0.7 mile NE of

the light structure near Bird Rock, or about 1 mile off the head

of the bay in a depth of about 13m.

Wilson Promontory

2.6 Wilson Promontory is a lofty promontory, with South

Point, its S extremity, about 25 miles SE of Cape Liptrap. The

promontory is connected with the mainland NW by a low,

sandy neck, which separates Waratah Bay from Corner Basin

to the NE.

2.6 Rugged mountain ranges on Wilson Promontory are wooded

on the upper and less exposed parts, but are nearly destitute of

vegetation and descend abruptly to the sea towards the sides of

the promontory. The principal mountains are Mount Vereker

(38°58'S., 146°22'E.), 637m high, the NW mountain, with a

spur extending NNW of it. From the summit of this spur, 504m

high, there is a gradual slope WNW to the NW termination of

the high and of the promontory. In the central part of Wilson

Promontory, Mount Latrobe, 758m high, and Mount Ramsay,

683m high, recognized easily by its flat top. Mount Wilson

stands about 2 miles SSE of Mount Ramsay, with an elevation

of 708m. The mountain ranges are of granite with immense

boulders; these boulders are particularly noticeable in the

Boulder Range, which lies at the SE end of Wilson Promontory, and is separated from the Wilson Range by a low valley extending E-W across the promontory.
38 Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 

Pub. 127

2.7 Wilson Promontory—West side.—The coast between the entrance of Shallow Creek and Black Rock, 9m high,

about 6 miles SSE, is formed of sand dunes.

2.7 Shellback Island (38°58'S., 146°14'E.), about 1.5 miles SW

of Black Rock, is 109m high, steep-to, and conspicuous over

the land from Corner Basin. It is the N island of the group on

the W coast of Wilson Promontory.

2.7 Tongue Point, about 1.7 miles SE of Shellback Island, is

51m high, with a conspicuous conical rock, 9.1m high, close W

of it, and projects about 1 mile from the coast. The land inland

of the point is high, rising to the Latrobe Range. 

2.7 Norman Island, about 1.5 miles SSW of Tongue Point, can

be recognized by its two peaks, the N and higher of which is

96m high.

2.7 Anchorage, during SW winds, may be taken, in 16.4 to 20m,

from 0.1 to 0.2 mile off the E side of the island. Coastal vessel

of low power bound W and meeting a SW gale, after rounding

Wilson Promontory, might find it convenient to anchor here in

preference to running back and anchoring in Waterloo Bay, E

of the promontory.

2.7 Four bays, separated by Leonard Point, Pillar Point, and Norman Point, lie SE of Tongue Point. Oberon Bay is entered between Oberon Point (39°05'S., 146°19'E.) and Norman Point,

about 1.5 miles N, and affords the best anchorage; it lies at the

W end of the valley between Wilson Range and Boulder

Range. None of the bays can be recommended due to the prevalence of SW winds, and a SW gale may spring up suddenly.

Oberon Bay has a broad sandy beach upon which the sea

breaks heavily.

2.7 Anchorage.—Good shelter has been found in Oberon Bay

during E gales, about 0.7 mile NNE of Oberon Point.

2.7 The coast between Oberon Point and Southwest Point, about

3 miles SSE, is steep-to, bold, and cliffy, the cliffs being several hundred meters high in places. Mount Norgate, 417m high,

the W summit of the Boulder Range, lies about 1.2 miles SE of

Oberon Point.

The Glennie Group, consisting of four islands, lie about 4

miles W of Oberon Point, and are steep-to on the W side. Great

Glennie Island, the largest island, is saddle-shaped and 138m

high near its S end; it is composed of granite, large blocks of

which are strewn over it, giving it a castellated appearance.

Ramsbotham Rocks, 1m high, over which the sea generally

breaks heavily, and another somewhat larger rock, 4.6m high,

lie about 0.2 mile N and 0.2 mile E, respectively, of the N end

of Great Glennie Island. Dannevig Island, 76m high, lies close

S of Great Glennie Island. Citadel Island, 109.4m high, lies

close S of Dannevig Island, and is so-named due to its resemblance to an ancient fortress. McHugh Island, 65m high, lies

close SE of Citadel Island.

2.7 Citadel Island has been reported to give good returns at 17

miles.

2.7 Citadel Island Light is shown from the summit of Citadel Island. A tank stands close N of the light structure, and a monolith stands near the N end of the island. The light is obscured

from 270° to 360°.

2.7 Anchorage can be taken, in 18.3m, off the E side of Citadel

Island, about 0.2 mile E of the monolith.

2.8 Wilson Promontory—South side.—The S coast of

Wilson Promontory, from Southwest Point to South East

Point (39°08'S., 146°25'E.), about 3.7 miles E, rises abruptly

to an elevation of about 300m.

2.8 South Point, about 1.5 miles ESE of Southwest Point, is a

low, projecting, and stony point; it is also the S point of Australia. A rock, 4.6m high, lies about 0.1 mile WSW of South

Point.

2.8 Wilson Promontory Light is shown from South East Point.

The lighthouse is connected by radiotelephone with the lighthouses on Cliffy Island (38°55'S., 146°42'E.), Deal Island

(38°30'S., 147°19'E.), and Swan Island (40°44'S., 148°06'E.).

2.8 Wattle Island, 82m high, lies with its E extremity about 0.4

mile WSW of South Point; the island, being so close offshore,

from the S appears to be connected to Wilson Promontory. A

rock, awash, lies about 0.1 mile SW of the W end of the island,

and a rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies about 0.1 mile

SE of the E end of the island.

2.8 Wilson Promontory has been reported to give good radar returns at 24 miles. 

2.9 Off-lying islands and dangers.—The Anser Group

lies from 1 to 3 miles SW of Southwest Point. Anser Island, the

NE island of the group, rises to a nipple-pointed summit, 152m

high; it is cliffy in all directions, but least so on its N side.

2.9 Cleft Island (39°10'S., 146°18'E.), the SW and most remarkable of the group, is 113m high, sheer, and may be identified by its white appearance, also by its having a large slice out

of its NW side, which gives it a cavern-like appearance. 

2.9 Kanowna Island, 95m high, lies in the middle of the group.

Anderson Islets, three in number and rocky, lie between the

NW end of Kanowna Island and the NE end of Cleft Island; the

two S islets are 12.2 to 15.2m high, with the N islet not as high.

2.9 Carpentaria Rock, with a depth of 1.8m, lies about 0.7 mile

N of Cleft Island. The Anser Group has been reported to give

good radar returns at 16 miles. 

2.9 Forty Foot Rocks, about 4 miles S of Wilson Promontory

Light, consists of three separate and distinct islets of granite.

The W and largest is 6.1m high, with a granite boulder, 6.1m

high, on its S extremity, making this islet 12.2m high; when the

sea is breaking over these rocks, this boulder is probably the

only part visible. Forty Foot Rocks are steep-to. They are reported to give good radar returns at 13 miles.

2.10 Rodondo Island (39°14'S., 146°23'E.), about 6 miles

Cleft Island from NW
Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 39

Pub. 127

SSW of Wilson Promontory Light, is a conspicuous conical

mass of granite, rising to a distinct peak, 350m high; the peak

is visible in clear weather for 30 miles, and is reported to give

good radar returns at 19 miles. The island is steep-to and has

high cliffs on all sides.

2.10 As the tidal currents about Rodondo Island are strong, sometimes having a velocity of from 4 to 5 knots, the neighborhood

should be avoided.

2.10 West Moncoeur Island, 97m high, and East Moncoeur Island, 101m high, lie about 5 and 6.5 miles E, respectively, of

Rodondo Island. The islands are almost bare, steep-to and apparently free of dangers; islets lie close N and S of West Moncoeur Island.

2.10 Traffic Separation Scheme.—A Traffic Separation Scheme

has been established S of Wilson Promontory and is best seen

on the chart.

2.10 An Inshore Traffic Zone is situated between the traffic lane

for westbound traffic and Wilson Promontory.

2.10 Tides—Currents.—Off the S side of Wilson Promontory

the tidal currents set E and W, but their direction is influenced

by the wind. The tidal currents normally turn at about HW and

LW.

2.10 Heavy E or W weather sets up an opposite current which

continues after the storm has ceased. Near the promontory, after an E gale, the E current, which has been checked during this

gale, continues to set E when the W current should have made;

and the W current, at its strength, sets N, except inshore, where

the tidal currents are little influenced by the wind. A SW gale

has the opposite effect.

2.10 The velocity of the tidal currents off the S side of the promontory, where they are strongest, does not exceed 2.5 knots.

2.10 Caution.—Off the S side of Wilson Promontory the soundings afford no guide, as there is deep water close to the coast,

between it and the off-lying islands, and between the groups of

islands.

2.10 Approaching the promontory at night from the W, the Anser

Group does not show up against the higher land of the mainland.

The E entrance to Bass Strait lies between Wilson Promontory and the NE end of Tasmania, about 120 miles SE, and is obstructed by numerous islands and dangers. The Furneaux

Group of islands lies across the SE part of the entrance and is

separated from Tasmania by Banks Strait.

2.10 Banks Strait will be described beginning in paragraph 3.4.

2.10 Tides—Currents.—In the E entrance to Bass Strait, the

flood sets SW and the ebb current sets NE.

The Curtis Group

2.11 Curtis Island (39°28'S., 146°39'E.), about 18.5 miles

SE of Rodondo Island, is the largest of the Curtis Group, and

the most remarkable feature of Bass Strait. It rises in two

peaks; the S peak is square-shaped and 335m high, and the N

peak is 224m high, with a bare granite summit. The sides of the

island are precipitous, especially at the S end. Clarendon Rock,

with a depth of less than 2m and steep-to, lies about 0.7 mile

ESE of the N end of Curtis Island; the sea breaks over it in

heavy weather, but it is generally difficult to distinguish.

2.11 Caution.—This area is subject to continued volcanic uplift

and shallower depths than charted may be encountered.

2.11 Cone Island, rocky and 112m high, lies about 1.2 miles SE

of the S end of Curtis Island. Two rocks, close together, lie

about 0.2 mile N of Cone Island; Passage Rock, the inner rock,

is 2m high and the outer rock dries. A remarkable leaning pinnacle rock, 25m high, lies among other rocks close off the S

side of Cone Island.

2.11 Sugarloaf Rock, the S of the group, is 94m high and lies

about 1.5 miles S of Cone Island.

2.11 Crocodile Rock, about 9 miles NW of Curtis Island, is a

large smooth granite boulder, 0.6m high and one of a small

group of rocks. It lies almost in mid-channel between Rodondo

Island and the Moncoeur Islands to the N and Curtis Island to

the S. The sea almost continuously sweeps over it, so that the

rock itself is seldom visible; as a general rule, it is well-marked

by breakers.

2.11 Cutter Rock, about 1.5 miles NE of Crocodile Rock, has a

depth of 7.3m and is steep-to. The sea does not often break

over the rock, but in rough weather there is a lumpy sea in its

vicinity.

2.11 Devils Tower, a rugged islet, 111m high, lies about 6.5 miles

NE of the NE end of Curtis Island. It is steep-to except for a

few detached rocks close off its SW side. Viewed from the NW

or SE, Devils Tower shows a double summit, the NE being the

higher.

The Hogan Group

2.12 Hogan Island (39°13'S., 146°59'E.), the largest of the

group, is 130m high and lies about 21 miles NE of Curtis Island; its S and W sides are sheer. A light is shown close NW of

the summit of the island.

2.12 Hogan Island has been reported to give good radar returns at

23 miles.

2.12 The Twin Islands, 46m and 33m high, respectively, lie about

0.3 and 0.4 mile N of Hogan Island. Long Island, 66m high and

sheer, lies close off the NE end of Hogan Island. North East Islet, 20m high, and Seal Rock, 4m high, lie nearly 1 mile and

1.5 miles ENE, respectively, of Long Island. East Island, 50m

high, lies about 1 mile SE of Long Island. Round Island, 47m

high, lies close off the SE side of Hogan Island. 

2.12 A rock, with a depth of 8.8m and which breaks occasionally,

lies nearly 0.75 mile E of Round Island. 

2.12 Two miles S of Round Island lies a shoal with a depth of

7.2m. 

2.12 A depth of 16.4m was reported (1969) about 4 miles SE of

Round Island. A depth of 18.3m, position approximate, lies

about 2 miles NE of the latter depth. 

2.12 Anchorage.—Sheltered anchorage in strong S winds may be

obtained on the NE side of Hogan Island, in 18.3 to 37m, good

holding ground, between the Twin Islands and Long Island.

2.12 With W gales better anchorage may be obtained in a bay on

the E side of Hogan Island, S of Long Island, in 11 to 28m,

sand, stones, and rock; shoals and submerged rock extend

about 0.1 mile offshore in the bay.

2.12 Directions.—At night or in hazy weather, it is prudent for a

vessel, without local knowledge, and desirous of clearing the

strait, to sight Curtis Island and pass S of Sugarloaf Rock and

the Hogan Group. The summit of Curtis Island, Cone Island,

and Sugarloaf Rock are remarkable features whose identity

cannot be mistaken.
40 Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 

Pub. 127

2.12 Having cleared the Traffic Separation Scheme S of Wilson

Promontory, a course should be set to pass N of the Hogan

Group and SE of the Area to be Avoided SE of Lakes Entrance.

This should be done by way of the Traffic Separation Scheme

that has been established S of the Area to be Avoided.

The Kent Group

2.13 The Kent Group, consisting of four islands and several above-water rocks, lies about 18 miles SE of the Hogan

Group.

2.13 Erith Island (39°27'S., 147°18'E.), the N island, rises to an

elevation of 142m on its N side.

2.13 North Rock, 8m high, lies about 0.5 mile NNE of the NW

end of the island; two smaller rocks lie about 100m S of North

Rock.

2.13 Dover Island lies close S of Erith Island, to which it is connected at LW. Dover Island rises abruptly to an elevation of

237m on its S side.

2.13 Deal Island, the largest of the Kent Group, is separated from

Erith Island and Dover Island by Murray Pass, which is about

0.5 mile wide, with a least depth of 31m. Deal Island rises to

conical granite hills, some of which are clothed to their summits with an impervious scrub. The coast is generally precipitous, especially on its S side.

2.13 Deal Island Light is shown near the summit of Deal Island,

which rises from South Bluff, the S end of the island, to an elevation of 288m. There is a radiotelephone at this lighthouse

which can communicate with Wilson Promontory.

2.13 North East Island, 104m high lies about 1 mile NNE of the E

end of Deal Island. A light is shown from the NW extremity of

North East Island. Anise Rock a remarkable rock, 6m high, lies

about 0.2 mile NW of the N end of the island. A 2.4m patch

was reported (1959) about 0.7 mile NE of the island. A 9.7m

shoal lies about 0.5 mile SE of the island, and a steep-to coral

shoal, with a depth of 10.9m, lies about 2 miles farther SE.

2.13 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in Murray Pass attain

a velocity of 2 to 5 knots, frequently causing a turbulent sea. In

bad weather there are heavy tide rips off the salient points of

the Kent Group, and especially at the entrances to Murray Pass.

2.13 Anchorage.—Of the numerous bays indenting the coasts of

the Kent Group, there are only two in which it is at all safe to

anchor, and both of these are in Murray Pass.

2.13 East Cove, on the W coast of Deal Island, about 2 miles

NNW of South Bluff, affords good shelter in E and S winds,

but is dangerous in a SW gale; the bottom is uneven, the holding ground not good, and during the strength of the tidal currents the swirls and eddies come well into the cove. At the head

of the cove there is a sandy beach and a jetty, with a depth of

3.7m at its head.

2.13 West Cove, on the SE side of Erith Island, gives protection

from all but NE gales, and as an anchorage is preferred to East

Cove.

2.13 Judgement Rocks, the N and largest of which is Big Rock,

32m high, lies about 9 miles W of South Bluff of Deal Island.

2.13 South West Island (39°32'S., 147°08'E.), 98m high, lies

about 0.7 mile S of Big Rock. A light is shown from the S side

of the Island. Depths of less than 10m or less extend nearly 0.4

mile S of South West Island.

2.13 The passage between Judgement Rocks and South West Island should not be used.

Islets and Dangers between the Kent Group and

the Furneaux Group

2.14 Bass Pyramid (39°49'S., 147°15'E.), about 19 miles

S of South Bluff (Deal Island), is a bare square-topped mass of

granite, 72m high; it has frequently been mistaken for a vessel

under sail. Shoal water extends about 0.5 mile SW, and an

18.3m patch lies about 1.5 miles SW of the rock. Depths of 20

to 37m lie about 0.5 mile from its E side. Bass Pyramid is usually surrounded by tide rips, except when there is no wind.

2.14 Warrego Rock, about 13 miles SE of Bass Pyramid, has a

least depth of 2.4m, and is steep-to. A rock, with a depth of

9.8m, lies about 1.5 miles SSW of Warrego Rock.

2.14 Wright Rock (39°36'S., 147°32'E.), 40m high, about 11.2

miles ESE of the S extremity of Deal Island, is a remarkable

granite rock resembling a huge head and shoulders. It should

be given a berth of at least 1 mile, as the depths are irregular

within that distance. Rocks lie close N and S of Wright Rock,

and a depth of 10m lies about 1 mile NNW of it. Tide rips mark

the vicinity of the rock.

2.14 Endeavor Reef, about 2.5 miles ESE of Wright Rock, dries

0.6m, and is usually marked by heavy breakers.

2.14 Beagle Rock, about 5.5 miles ESE of Wright Rock, is 2m

high and steep-to.

2.14 Craggy Island (39°41'S., 147°41'E.), bare and rocky, lies about

4 miles SSE of Beagle Rock. It rises to an elevation of 113m at its

The Hogan Group from NW

Bass Pyramid from E
Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 41

Pub. 127

W end. Rocks extend about 0.2 mile from the W end of the island,

and depths of 20 to 37m extend about 3 miles SW of the same

point. An above-water rock lies on the N side of a shoal, with a

depth of 3.9m, about 0.2 mile E of the E end of the island; an 8.5m

patch lies about 1 mile NE of the same end. 

2.14 Rocks, with depths of less than 1.8m, and Craggy Rock,

with a depth of 5.2m, lie about 1 mile E and 2.5 miles SE, respectively, of Craggy Island. The depths are irregular between

these two dangers.

2.14 The dangers in this vicinity break heavily in bad weather;

Craggy Island and the two dangers are surrounded by tide rips.

2.14 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents attain a velocity of

about 2 knots in the channels between Endeavor Reef and Beagle Rock, Craggy Island, and Craggy Rock. In strong breezes

there are generally heavy tide rips in the vicinity of the reefs.

The Furneaux Group

2.15 The Furneaux Group consists of Flinders Island, Cape

Barren Island, Clarke Island, and some smaller islands, rocks,

and shoals. The group extends from The Sisters, off North

Point, the N end of Flinders Island, for about 60 miles SSE to

the dangers off Moriarty Point, the SE end of Clark Island.

2.15 The Sisters have rather uneven surfaces, with small patches

of light scrub, and are heavily grassed. The depths are very irregular around The Sisters and the N part of Flinders Island.

2.15 The Sisters are visible from 30 miles in clear weather.

2.15 West Sister Island (39°42'S., 147°55'E.) is almost divided

in the middle by a deep valley; the W part is 165m high, while

the E part is 197m high. An 8.2m depth lies about 1 mile NW

of the NE end of the island, to which it is connected by a shallow sandy spit. A 5.5m shoal lies about 0.7 mile N of the E end

of the island. 

2.15 East Sister Island, about 2.5 miles NE of West Sister Island,

is 192m high on its SW side. A rock, 0.6m high, lies close off

the N end of the island; a 5.9m rocky ridge, over which there is

a confused sea caused by the tide race, and a depth of 16.1m,

lie about 1.2 miles W and 2.7 miles WNW, respectively, of the

rock. A rock, 3m high, lies about 0.5 mile S of the middle of

the S side of East Sister Island; a spit, with a depth of 2.7m, extends about 1.5 miles E of the rock. 

Flinders Island

2.16 Flinders Island is mountainous on its W side, with the

range extending from Mount Killiecranke, 317m high, about 7

miles SSW of North Point (39°43'S., 148°56'E.), to Strzelecki

Peaks, 777m high, about 5 miles NW of Pigs Head Point, the S

end of the island. The mountains are bold and abrupt on their

W side, but slope gradually to the lowland on the E side of the

island, which is fronted by a sandy beach. The W side of

Flinders Island is fronted by several islands and islets, under

the E side of which vessels may find shelter from W winds.

2.16 Flinders Island—West coast.—Bligh Point (39°45'S.,

147°51'E.), about 5 miles WSW of North Point, is bordered by

rocks. A shoal, with a least depth of 8.5m, lies about 1.5 miles

SSW of Bligh Point.

2.16 Killiecrankie Bay, about 4.5 miles S of Bligh Point and SW

of Mount Killiecrankie, is exposed NW, but it affords protection from SW gales, the violence of the sea being broken by

Sentinel Island, 22m high, and the surrounding rocks, about 3

miles W of the bay. Only a moderate swell enters the bay, and

although the bottom is sand, the holding ground is good. When

entering and leaving this bay, a vessel should pass NE of the

rocky islet, 7m high, in the middle of the entrance to the bay, in

order to avoid a sunken rock lying about 0.3 mile SW of the islet.

2.16 Cape Frankland (39°52'S., 147°45'E.), the W extremity of

a hilly peninsula extending from the W coast of Flinders Island, is fringed by a reef and an islet lies about 0.5 mile N of it.

North West Peak, about 2.5 miles E of the cape, rises to an elevation of 332m, with a conspicuous radio mast on its summit.

2.16 Frankland Rock, about 4 miles W of Cape Frankland, is a

double rock which dries 1.5m, and is steep-to except on its E

side, where a bank with a depth of 12.8m, extends about 0.5

mile E.

2.16 Roydon Island and Pasco Island, mostly connected by rocks

above and below-water, extend about 4 miles from the shore,

about 2 miles SE of Cape Frankland. Roydon Island is 74m

high, and South Pasco Island is 11m high. The channel between North Pasco Island and Mid Pasco Island is about 0.5

mile wide, with a depth of 15.5m in the fairway.

2.16 Marshall Bay, entered between the S extremity of Cape

Frankland and Settlement Point, about 6.5 miles SSE, has

depths of 11 to 18.3m, but affords no shelter in W winds. Marriot Reef extends about 1.2 miles SW from the NE corner of

the bay.

2.16 Settlement Point (40°01'S., 147°52'E.) is hilly, abrupt, and

bordered by rocks. Wybalena Island and an islet close SW lie

on the NW side of a bank, with depths of less than 5m, about

0.7 mile SW of Settlement Point.

2.17 Prime Seal Island lies with Prime Seal Point

(40°02'S., 147°46'E.), its N extremity, about 3.7 miles W of

Settlement Point. Its two higher hills, at the N and S ends, respectively, of the island, are 147m and 176m high. A reef, on

which rocks dry 2.4m, extends about 0.7 mile N of Prime Seal

Point; the reef was reported to have extended about 0.2 mile

NE. Depths of less than 5.5m extend up to 0.5 mile off the NE

Wright Rock from S

Craggy Island from S
42 Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 

Pub. 127

side of the island.

2.17 Koh-i-noor Rock, about 2.5 miles SSW of the NE extremity

of Prime Seal Island and about 0.2 mile offshore, is nearly

awash at the SE end of a reef; an above-water rock lies at the

NW end of the reef.

2.17 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage, in 11m, on the E

side of Prime Seal Island, about 0.7 mile N of Koh-i-noor Rock

and 0.5 mile offshore. Care should be taken to avoid Koh-inoor Rock when approaching the anchorage from the S.

2.17 The reef bordering the E side of the S end of Prime Seal Island was reported to have extended about 0.3 mile SE.

2.17 Low Islets consist of three islets which lie on a reef extending from 0.7 mile to 2 miles S of the S extremity of Prime Seal

Island. The N islet is 9.1m high, and the S islet is 12.5m high.

An 11m patch lies about 0.7 mile SE of the S islet.

2.17 Safe passage, about 0.5 mile wide, with depths of 24 to 28m

in the fairway, lies between the S end of Prime Seal Island and

the N end of Low Islets.

2.17 Swires Patch, with a depth of 9.1m, lies about 1.7 miles NW

of the S end of Prime Seal Island.

2.17 Myrmidon Rock, with a depth of 2.7m, lies about 1.7 miles

W of Prime Seal Point.

2.17 A clear channel, with a depth of not less than 11.9m, lies between Prime Seal Island and the islets off the W side of

Flinders Island. A 10.9m patch lies about 1 mile SW of Wybalena Island.

2.17 Arthur Bay is entered between a point about 2 miles ESE of

Settlement Point and Blue Rocks Point (40°06'S., 147°57'E.), a

low peninsula, about 4.5 miles farther SSE. Brougham Sugarloaf, 451m high, is the summit of a range of hills backing the

bay.

2.17 Chalky Island, 24m high, lies about 3 miles W of Blue Rocks

Point. Islands and rocks, above and below-water, extend to

about 3 miles S of Chalky Island. Isabella Island, 9.8m high,

lies about 2.5 miles SE of Chalky Island. Chalky Island and the

above islands and rocks lie on or near the edge of the coastal

bank, with depths of less than 5m.

2.17 Between Blue Rocks Point and Trousers Point (40°13'S.,

148°01'E.), about 8 miles SSE, are Parrys Bay and Fotheringate Bay, separated by a drying sandspit on the outer end of

which is Big Green Island, about 2 miles offshore. Parrys Bay

is fronted by a drying sandbank extending up to 1 mile offshore

in its N part. An airfield lies about 2 miles E of Blue Rocks

Point. Parrys Rock lies near the N end of a reef extending about

1 mile N of Big Green Island.

2.17 Anchorage.—There is anchorage, in 7.3m, about 0.3 mile

off the SE side of Big Green Island.

2.17 East Kangaroo Island (Kangaroo Island), 30m high, lies

about 2.5 miles W of Big Green Island. It is steep-to on its W

side, except for a rock, which dries 2.4m, about 275m off its

NW end. Two above-water rocks lie about 0.5 mile S of its S

point. A rock, 4.6m high, lies at the S end of a group of abovewater rocks extending about 1 mile N of the island.

2.17 A light is shown from the SE extremity of East Kangaroo Island.

2.17 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 12.8m,

about 0.5 mile off the NE side of East Kangaroo Island.

The Chappell Islands

2.18 The Chappell Islands consist of three islands and numerous islets and rocks lying from 5 to 12 miles SW of Trousers Point (40°13'S., 148°01'E.), in the W approach to Franklin

Sound.

2.18 Goose Island (40°18'S., 147°48'E.), the W island, is 16.5m

high in its N part and consists of granite boulders. Little Goose

Islet lies close off its NW end. A light is shown near the SE end

of Goose Island.

2.18 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in about 18.3m,

sand, E of the middle of Goose Island. This anchorage is good

during E winds, but being so close to the shore it is unsafe

should the wind shift to the SE.

2.18 Badger Island, the largest of the Chappell Islands, is flat,

sparsely covered with timber, and 33m high at its NE end. A

conspicuous granite boulder stands above Unicorn Point, the

SW extremity of the island. A deep channel, about 1.5 miles

wide, separates Badger Island from Goose Island.

2.18 A rocky spit, with a depth of 2.7m near its outer end, extends

about 1.5 miles N from the NW end of Badger Island. Ena

Shoal, with a depth of 6.1m and steep-to, lies about 2.5 miles

NNE of the NW end of Badger Island.

2.18 Little Badger Islet, 5.2m high, lies on the N side of a reef

which extends about 0.5 mile E of the E end of Badger Island.

A chain of rocks, drying 1.8m, lies on the N edge of a bank

with depths of less than 11m extending about 0.5 mile NE and

NW of the islet. A shoal, with a depth of 7m, sand and shell,

lies about 1 mile E of the islet.

2.18 A rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, was reported (1960)

about 0.2 mile SE of the SE end of Badger Island.

2.18 Beagle Island, 6.4m high, and another islet close N, lie about

1.2 miles SE of the SE end of Badger Island, on a bank with

depths of less than 9.1m. A chain of above-water rocks lies on

the NW edge of the bank, about 0.5 mile N of Beagle Island.

2.18 Rochfort Rock, with a depth of 1.8m, lies about 1 mile SSW

of Beagle Island; the sea breaks over it during W winds near

LW.

2.18 Anchorage.—Good anchorage may be obtained, in about

11m, E of Badger Island, about 0.7 mile SSW of Little Badger

Islet.

2.18 Double Rock, 10.4m high, and Boxen Island, 6.7m high, lie

about 3 and 4 miles SE, respectively, of Unicorn Point, the SW

extremity of Badger Island, near the N and S ends, respectively, of a bank, with depths of less than 9.1m. They are almost

connected by rocks and foul ground, with which Boxen Island

is surrounded. A drying rock lies about 0.3 mile NNW of Double Rock.

2.18 Mount Chappell Island (40°16'S., 147°56'E.), about 0.7

mile NE of Badger Island, rises to a rounded summit, 199m

high. A rock, which dries 0.9m, lies midway between Badger

Island and Mount Chappell Island.

2.18 A spit, with a depth of 9.1m over its outer end, and on which

there are several above-water rocks, extends about 0.4 mile W

of the SW end of Mount Chappell Island. A bank, with depths

of less than 5.5m, and on which there are above-water rocks

and drying reefs, extends about 1.2 miles NNE from a position

about 1 mile WNW of the SW end of Mount Chappell Island.
Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 43

Pub. 127

2.18 A rock, which dries 2.1m, and an above-water rock lie on a

bank with depths of less than 5.5m about 1 mile WNW of the

N end of Mount Chappell Island.

2.18 Ann Islet and a rock, 4.6m high, each lie on banks, with

depths of less than 5.5m, about 1.2 miles NNW and 0.5 mile

ENE, respectively, of the N end of Mount Chappell Island.

2.18 Bet Shoal, with a depth of 4m, and which breaks in W

weather, lies about 1.5 miles ENE of the N end of Mount

Chappell Island.

Franklin Sound

2.19 Franklin Sound, between Flinders Island and Cape

Barren Island, is about 4 miles wide. It is encumbered by islands and shallow banks, between which there are tortuous and

narrow channels available only to vessels with local knowledge.

2.19 Kilt Shoal (40°14'S., 148°01'E.), with a depth of 3.4m and

with a depth of 6.7m about 0.5 mile SE, lies about 1.5 miles S

of Trousers Point, on the N side of the W entrance to Franklin

Sound.

2.19 Entrance Rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, and an 8.8m

patch, lie about 0.7 mile and 1.5 miles S, respectively, of Kilt

Shoal.

2.19 A 5.2m patch lies close off Pig Head Point (40°16'S.,

148°07'E.), the S extremity of Flinders Island.

2.19 Oyster Rocks (Isabella Islets), two in number, the NE, 11m

high, lie about 2.5 miles WSW of Pig Head Point. These islets

lie on a sandbank which dries in places and extends about 2

miles WNW and 5 miles E from the islets.

2.19 Little Anderson Islet, bold and steep-to on its N side, lies on

this bank about 1 mile S of Pig Head Point, and is connected to

Anderson Island (Woody Island), 58m high, close S, by a drying sandbank.

2.19 Tin Kettle Island, 31m high near its center, lies about 0.7

mile E of Anderson Island, to which it is connected by a flat

which dries in places. A rock drying 1.5m lies at the outer end

of a reef extending about 0.4 mile NE of the E end of Tin Kettle Island. A spit, with a least depth of 1.8m, extends about 1.5

miles W from the drying rock, and depths of less than 9.1m extend about 1 mile farther W.

2.19 Long Island (40°22'S., 148°00'E.), on the S side of the W

entrance to Franklin Sound, is bordered by rocks and is connected at its E end to Cape Barren Island, about 0.5 mile SE.

The island is 50m high in its N part where there is a conspicuous granite boulder, and near its W end, 30m high, is another

granite boulder.

2.19 Dough Bay Islet (Doughboy Islet) lies about 1 mile ENE of

Long Island. From Ned Point, about 1.2 miles farther ENE,

rocks extend N nearly to a rocky islet, about 0.5 mile offshore;

a rock, with depths of less than 1.8m, was reported (1972)

about 0.2 mile NW of the islet.

2.19 The S shore of Franklin Sound, from Long Island to Apple

Orchard Point, about 9 miles ENE, is mostly fronted by banks

with depths of less than 5.5m.

2.20 West Entrance Channels.—A bar, with depths of 3.7

to 6.7m, lies across the entrance of the N or main channel between the outer end of the spit extending WNW from Oyster

Rocks and the SW point of Flinders Island. Pig’s Head Point,

bearing 090°, and open N of the summit of Vansittart Island

(40°16'S., 148°18'E.) leads over the bar in a least depth of

6.7m. After clearing the bar, ease S to pass about 0.5 mile N of

Oyster Rocks to clear several depths of 4.9 and 5.2m. Then

steer E to pass about 0.3 mile off Pigs Head Point, and N of the

spit N of Tin Kettle Island.

2.20 A bar, with depths of less than 1m, lies about 2 miles WNW

of Ned Point at the entrance of the S channel. The channel then

leads N of the rocks off Ned Point, and S of the spit extending

about 0.7 mile S of Anderson Island, and then S of Tin Kettle

Island where it joins the N channel.

2.20 Little Dog Island (40°15'S., 148°18'E.), 36m high, and

Great Dog Island, about 1 mile E, front a shallow bay in the NE

part of Franklin Sound. A conspicuous hill, 49m high, rises

near the center, and a prominent flat-topped hill, 75m high,

stands near the W end of Great Dog Island. A spit, with depths

of less than 5.5m and a least depth of 0.6m, extends about 1.5

WSW from the W end of Little Dog Island; a rock, 0.9m high,

lies about 0.2 mile S of its S extremity. A rock, 0.6m high, lies

about 0.7 mile SE of the SW end of Great Dog Island; a bank,

with depths of less 5.5m, extends about 0.4 mile ESE of the

rock. Another bank, with depths of less than 5.5m, extends

nearly 3.5 miles WSW from a position about 0.4 mile SE of the

0.6m high rock.

2.20 A direction light is shown from a beacon on the NE shore of

Great Dog Island. A beacon stands 180m WSW. When aligned,

and with the middle of the white sector bearing 258°, lead

through the sound between the shoals NE of Vansittart Island

and Flinders Island.

2.20 Vansittart Island (40°16'S., 148°18'E.) rises to a conspicuous broad summit, 167.6m high. A 5.2m patch lies about 0.7

mile W of the W end of Vansittart Island. A 5.5m patch lies

about 0.2 mile S of the S end of Great Dog Island.

2.20 Briggs Islet, 8.8m high, lies at the SW end of a bank, with

depths of less than 5.5m, about midway between Great Dog Island and the N end of Vansittart Island. A rock, with a depth of

less than 1.8m, lies about 0.2 mile NNW of Briggs Islet.

2.20 Pot Boil, with a depth of 0.6m, and Vansittart Shoals, with

depths of 1.2m, lie on a spit with depths of less than 5.5m, extending about 3.7 miles E and then 5.5 miles S from the SE

point of Flinders Island. The sea breaks heavily on this spit in

E winds and the depths over it are subject to change.

2.20 A bank, with depths of less than 5.5m, which dries in places

on its N edge and over which the sea breaks heavily, extends

about 4 miles E from the N end and 3 miles E from the E side

of Vansittart Island.

2.20 From a position about 1 mile NW of the E end of Tin Kettle

Island, the main channel divides. The main channel leads SE

between the drying rock off the E end of Tin Kettle Island and

the W end of the bank which extends WSW from a position

about 0.4 mile SE of the 0.6m high rock off the S side of Great

Dog Island. The main channel joins the S channel SE of Tin

Kettle Island. Then the main channel leads NE towards Briggs

Islet, which may be passed on either side.

2.20 From a position about 1 mile NW of the E end of Tin Kettle

Island, another channel extends about 4 miles ENE towards the

S end of Great Dog Island, bounded N by the spit extending

SW from Little Dog Island, and S by the bank which extends

WSW from a position about 0.4 mile SSE of the 0.6m rock off

the S side of Great Dog Island. The channel passes S of this
44 Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 

Pub. 127

rock and leads in a SE direction through a narrow channel between shoal banks to join the main channel.

2.21 East Entrance Channel.—The E entrance channel to

Franklin Sound lies between Vansittart Shoals and the bank extending from the E side of Vansittart Island. The channel had a

depth of 7.3m in the fairway in 1968, except for a shoal with a

depth of 5.2m at its N end. The depths in the channel are liable

to change after E winds.

2.21 Tides—Currents.—At the E entrance of Franklin Sound the

flood currents meet, one coming from NNE and the other from

SE. The flood current sets W through the sound, and then about

WNW on the N side and WSW on the S side of the Chappell

Islands. The ebb current sets in the opposite direction. In the

sound the tidal currents attain a rate of from 2 to 2.5 knots.

2.21 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in 8.2 to 9.1m, S

of Tin Kettle Island.

2.21 Caution.—Vessels drawing in excess of 1.8m should not use

the entrance marked by the white sector of Pot Boil Direction

Light except in calm directions.

Flinders Island—East Coast

2.22 The E coast of Flinders Island, in contrast to its W

coast, is generally low and fronted by a sandy beach.

2.22 Holloway Point, marked by a light, lies about 1.2 miles SE of

North Point. Northeast Rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m,

lies close off Holloway Point.

2.22 Beagle Spit, with depths of less than 11m and a least depth

of 3m about 2 miles within its outer end, extends about 7.5

miles E from a position about 2.5 miles SE of Holloway Point.

Depths of less than 18.3m extend about 3 miles farther E from

the outer end of the spit.

2.22 The Patriarch Hills, three remarkable peaks, rise from low

sandy land behind Sellar Point, the E extremity of the island.

The peaks are separated from the mountains W by Heather Valley. The NE and highest peak, 235m high, lies about 4.5 miles

W of Sellar Point; it has a sharp appearance and shows up well

from the SE.

2.22 Babel Island (39°57'S., 148°20'E.), about 0.7 mile ENE of

Sellar Point, rises to a flat-topped peak, 196m high, and a remarkable pyramidal hill, 136m high, lies near its W end. Foul

ground was reported (1983) about 8 miles NNE of Babel Island. Cat Islet, 32m high and marked by a light, lies close E of

Babel Island. Storehouse Islet, 16.8m high, lies close S of Cat

Islet.

2.22 Several small rocks lie off the N side of Sellar Point. A rock,

1.2m high, and a rock, which dries about 2.1m, lie about 1.2

miles and 0.5 mile NW, respectively, of the W end of Babel Island. About 2 miles W of Sellar Point and 1 mile offshore, are

two small groups of above-water and sunken rocks.

2.22 Tides—Currents.—North of Babel Island the flood current

sets N and the ebb current sets S, parallel to the coast; they are

generally regular, especially near the shore. South of Babel Island, the tidal currents are weak and irregular.

2.22 Anchorage.—With W winds, there is anchorage, over a

sandy bottom, either N or S of the sandy spit connecting Babel

Island with Flinders Island, taking care to avoid the above-described rocks. With winds E of N or S, no vessel should anchor

in this neighborhood.

2.22 Caution.—Minnie Carmichael Shoal, about 11 miles ESE of

the summit of Babel Island, was reported to have a depth of

6.4m.

2.22 A rock, known locally as Lawrence Rock, the position of

which is doubtful, was reported to lie about 8 miles S of Minnie Carmichael Shoal.

2.22 An obstruction was reported to lie about 10.5 miles S of

Minnie Carmichael Shoal.

2.22 In view of the doubtful nature of the above-mentioned reported dangers, as several vessels are reported to have been

wrecked on detached dangers off the E coast of Flinders Island

when seeking shelter from W gales, mariners are urged to use

caution.

Cape Barren Island

2.23 Cape Barren Island is formed of granite peaks, the

highest of which is Mount Munro (40°22'S., 148°07'E.),

716m high, round-topped and timbered, about 6.5 miles ENE

of Cape Sir John, the SW extremity of the island. Mount Kerford, 501m high, a prominent peak, rises about 5.5 miles W of

Cape Barren, the E extremity of Cape Barren Island.

2.23 Cape Sir John (40°25'S., 147°59'E.) is backed by a conspicuous round-topped hill, 162m high, about 1 mile NNE of it.

The coast for about 2 miles N of the cape is rock-bound and

foul in places up to 0.5 mile offshore. A rock, 2.1m high, from

which foul ground extends about 0.5 mile NW and SW, lies

about 2 miles NW of Cape Sir John. Another rock, 2.1m high,

lies about 0.7 mile SW of the cape.

2.23 Thunder and Lightning Bay, entered between Cape Sir John

and a point about 1.2 miles ESE, has a rock, 1.8m high, midway between its entrance points. A conspicuous boulder stands

on the summit of a 239m hill, about 1 mile NE of the head of

the bay. Yellow Rock, 2.4m high, and Key Island, 17.7m high,

lie about 1.2 miles W and 0.2 mile SE, respectively, of the E

entrance point of the bay.

2.23 Numerous rocks extend up to 0.2 mile offshore of the coast

between Key Island and a point about 3 miles ESE. Malms

Rock, which dries, lies about 0.3 mile S of the latter point.

2.23 Wombat Point (40°27'S., 148°08'E.) lies about 2.5 miles E

of Malms Rock; close S of the point is a granite islet, 23m

high, with an above-water rock about 0.1 mile E.

2.23 Sloping Point lies about 4 miles E of Wombat Point, with

Battery Islet, about 6.1m high, midway between the points. A

rock, awash, lies about 0.1 mile S of Sloping Point, with an

above-water rock closer inshore.

2.23 Kent Bay is entered between Sloping Point and Passage

Point, about 5.5 miles E. The bay is encumbered with shoals,

the outermost of which is a sandy shoal with a least depth of

0.6m lying across the entrance, from about 1.7 to 3.7 miles E of

Sloping Point.

2.23 Cone Point, about 2 miles E of Passage Point, is so named

from two remarkable cone-shaped rocks on it.

2.23 A headland, marked by conspicuous sandhills and separating

two bays, lies midway between Cone Point and Cape Barren,

about 5 miles NE.

2.24 Cape Barren (40°26'S., 148°29'E.), the E extremity

of Cape Barren Island, is a rocky point, with numerous hillocks

over it. Gull Islet, rocky and 12.2m high, lies in the middle of
Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 45

Pub. 127

foul ground extending about 1 mile E of the cape. Gull Rock,

3.7m high, lies on the outer part of the foul ground at the S end

of a reef of above-water and sunken rocks extending about 0.5

mile N of Gull Rock; the reef is steep-to on its E side, but there

are strong tide rips near it. A light is shown from the SE side of

Cape Barren.

2.24 An obstruction, with a depth of 7.3m, was reported (1973)

about 3.2 miles ESE of Cape Barren. A bank, with a depth of

12.2m, lies about 1.2 miles SE of the cape.

2.24 Harley Point, about 4 miles NNW of Cape Barren, has several above-water and sunken rocks extending about 0.5 mile SE

of it. Flat Rock, 0.9m high, lies about 0.7 mile farther SE, with

a few sunken rocks extending about 0.2 mile NNW of it.

2.24 Several rocky points with intermediate sandy beaches lie between Harley Point and Puncheon Point, about 7.5 miles NW.

Armstrong Channel

2.25 Armstrong Channel, between Cape Barren Island and

Clarke Island, is seldom used due to the numerous banks and

strong tidal currents in it. A passage of sufficient width and

depth for small vessels with local knowledge is swept out by

the tidal currents. There was a least depth of 6.4m in the E entrance between the S extremities of Forsyth Island and Passage

Island.

2.25 The W entrance to Armstrong Channel is obstructed and divided into two passages by Preservation Island, islets, and

rocks; the S passage is wider and straighter.

2.25 Night Islet (40°29'S., 148°01'E.), the W islet, lies about 4

miles SSE of Cape Sir John and is 14m high. Above-water and

sunken rocks extend about 0.7 mile NE of Night Islet. Little

Night Islet lies about 0.5 mile S of Night Islet. A spit, with

depths of 9.1m over its outer part, extends about 0.7 mile SE of

Night Islet. An 11m patch lies about 0.7 mile ESE of Little

Night Islet. A 15.8m shoal lies about 4.5 miles SW of Little

Night Islet; overfalls occur about 3 miles SE of this shoal.

2.25 Preservation Island, 25m high, lies with its NW extremity

about 1.5 miles ENE of Night Islet. Islets and rocks extend

about 0.5 mile NW from its NW end, and a spit, with depths of

less than 5.5m, extends about 2 miles E from its E side. A 5.2m

patch lies about 0.5 mile E of the SE extremity of Preservation

Island.

2.25 Rum Islet, close off the S end of Preservation Island, has a

reef extending about 0.2 mile S of it. A rock, with a depth of

3.4m, and a 5.8m patch, lie about 0.4 mile and 1 mile E, respectively, of its S end.

2.25 Anchorage.—Hamilton Road affords anchorage, in 7.3m,

about 0.3 mile E of the SE end of Preservation Island; there are

patches with depths of 5.5m in the vicinity. After a continuance

of heavy W gales, a long swell rolls around the S end of Rum

Islet; this swell does not gradually increase, but sets in suddenly and may compel a vessel to get under way.

2.25 A bank, with a least depth of 4.3m, known locally as Preservation Bank, lies between positions about 1 mile SSW and 0.7

mile S, respectively, of Wombat Point.

2.25 Eclipse Rock, with a depth of 3m, around which there is always a confused sea, lies about 0.5 mile W of the W extremity

of Clarke Island, and a rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies

about 1 mile N of the same extremity.

2.25 The N shore of Clarke Island, W of Kangaroo Bay, is fronted

by a bank with depths of less than 5.5m, extending up to 0.7

mile offshore.

2.25 The better side of Armstrong Channel lies along the Clarke

Island shore, care being taken to avoid the above bank. Then

the channel lies between the W entrance of Kangaroo Bay and

Middle Bank, which, with a least depth of 0.6m, lies between

positions about 1.2 miles S and 1.7 miles SE of Battery Islet

(40°27'S., 148°11'E.).

2.25 Seal Rocks, which dry 2.4m, extend about 0.2 mile N of Seal

Point, the NE extremity of Clarke Island. The channel lies between Seal Point and Sloping Point, about 1.2 miles NE.

2.25 Armstrong Channel then leads about 3.5 miles E, passing N

of a shallow sandbank, parts of which dry and which extends

from the NE side of Clarke Island to Forsyth Island, about 3

miles E and 30m high. The sandy shoal lying across the entrance to Kent Bay lies in the center of this part of the channel

which terminates S in a passage between Forsyth Island and

Passage Island, 54m high, about 0.5 mile E. The latter passage

is narrow and lies between the banks, with depths of less than

5.5m, extending from these islands; at the S end is a bar, with a

least depth of 6.4m and over which the sea breaks, between the

S extremities of the islands. Rocks, with depths of less than

1.8m, extend about 0.3 mile SE from the SE end of Passage Island, off which there are strong tide rips.

2.25 The narrow passage between Passage Island and Passage

Point should only be used in case of necessity, as the tidal currents attain velocities of from 5 to 6 knots. Several above-water

rocks lie about 0.2 mile N of the N end of Passage Island, and a

rock, which dries 0.6m, lies in mid-channel.

2.25 A rock, which dries 0.9m and over which the sea breaks

heavily, lies about 1 mile SW of the S end of Forsyth Island.

Clarke Island

2.26 Clarke Island, the S island of the Furneaux Group, rises to a peaked hill (40°31'S., 148°09'E.), 206m high, near its

NW side. A flat-topped hill, 160m high, rises in its SW part.

The S coast of the island is backed by a plateau from which rise

two conical hills, the higher near the middle of the plateau,

from where the land falls gradually to Seal Point.

2.26 Snug Cove, entered between Lookout Head (40°34'S.,

148°07'E.) and a point about 1.7 miles NNW, has several islets

and rocks off its SE side, and although deep, it cannot be recommended. Lookout Rock, 18m high, lies on a bank with

depths of less than 18.3m, about 0.7 mile NW of the NW end

of Lookout Head; an above-water rock lies about 0.3 mile N of

Lookout Rock, on the N end of the bank. Napper Rock, two

rocks which dry 1.8m, lie between Lookout Rock and the NW

end of Lookout Head.

2.26 A rock, 0.6m high, lies about 0.3 mile SE of the SE end of

Lookout Head, and is the outermost of rocks extending SE of

the point. Rocks, which dry, lie about 0.5 mile E of the 0.6m

rock.

2.26 Depths of less than 9.1m extend about 0.3 mile S from the S

extremity of Clarke Island.

2.26 Moriarty Bay, N of Moriarty Point, the SE extremity of Clarke Island, has bad holding ground, over an irregular rocky bottom.

2.26 Off-lying dangers.—Moriarty Rocks (40°35'S., 148°17'E.)

consist of two rocks, 7.6 and 6.1m high, lying about 3.2 and 3.7
46 Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 

Pub. 127

miles E, respectively, of Moriarty Point. They lie on a bank

with depths of less than 18.3m, extending from 1 mile SE to 9

miles E of Moriarty Point. Moriarty Bank, marked by heavy

breakers, extends about 2.5 miles WSW from the NW rock.

East Bank, with a depth of 1.5m, and another bank, with a

depth of 3.4m, lie about 2 miles SE and one mile SSE of the

same rock. Depths of less than 11m extend about 2 miles E of

East Bank. The sea breaks heavily over East Bank and the 3.4m

bank.

2.26 Mount William (40°55'S., 148°11'E.), near the NE coast of

Tasmania, bearing 204°, leads E of the above dangers, and the

S extremity of Clarke Island, bearing more than 290°, leads S

of the dangers.

2.26 Low Islets, 6.1m and 4.6m high, lie on a shoal, with depths

of less than 11m, which extends about 1.7 miles SW and 0.7

mile NW of them. Above-water rocks and a sunken rock lie at

the NE end of this shoal. A rock, which dries 1.2m, lies about

midway between Low Islets and the E side of Clarke Island.

2.26 Caution.—The whole area between the E side of Clarke Island, Moriarty Bank, and Passage Island is either foul ground,

or the strong tidal currents cause such a race and the sea to

break so heavily as to make this vicinity dangerous.

Wilson Promontory to Cape Howe

2.27 The coast between South East Point (Wilson Point)

(39°08'S., 146°25'E.) and entrance to Gipps Land Lakes

(37°53'S., 147°58'E.), about 105 miles NE, is low and consists

mostly of hummocks less than 30m high, except for the high

land on the E side of Wilson Promontory. Then to Cape Howe

(37°30'S., 149°58'E.), about 100 miles farther ENE, the coast

is higher, rising in places to an elevation of about 91m. Numerous mountains and hills are inland, many of these behind the E

part of this coast forming good landmarks due to their close

proximity to the coast.

2.27 There are few anchorages for deep-draft vessels on this

coast. The principal ones are Waterloo Bay and Refuge Cove,

on the E side of Wilson Promontory.

2.27 An area to be avoided is centered about 40 miles SE of Lakes

Entrance, covering a major offshore oil and gas production

field.

South East Point to Corner Inlet and Port Albert

2.28 South East Point (39°08'S., 146°25'E.) was previously described in paragraph 2.8 with Wilson Promontory.

2.28 South Peak, 379m high, rises about 0.7 mile NW of South

East Point. An islet, almost connected to the shore by boulders,

lies about 1 mile NNE of the point.

2.28 Waterloo Bay is entered between Waterloo Point, about 2.5

miles NNE of South East Point, and Cape Wellington, about

2.2 miles farther NE. A light is shown from Waterloo Point.

The bay has a depth of 26m in its center, decreasing gradually

to 11m about 0.2 mile off its head, but increasing towards its

outer points. The SW shore of the bay forms the E end of the

valley crossing the promontory, and makes a conspicuous

break between the high lands of Boulder Range and Wilson

Range.

2.28 Anchorage.—The best anchorage is in about 22m, about 0.4

mile from the SW shore. Small vessels bound W and met by a

SW gale may anchor close inshore in a small cove under Waterloo Point. The holding ground is good, but the anchorage is

not recommended, because it is immediately under the high

land of Wilson Promontory and exposed to the swell from both

sides of Bass Strait. The bay, from 0.5 mile N of Waterloo

Point, is open to severe W winds that sweep through the valley

at the head of the bay.

2.28 Caution.—There is a marine farm, marked by lighted buoys,

approximately 3 miles SE of Waterloo Point. 

2.29 Cape Wellington (39°04'S., 146°29'E.), a hilly headland, 78m high at its SE extremity, rises to an elevation of

135m about 0.5 mile inland, and to Kersop Peak, 222m, its

highest part, about 1 mile inland. A stone cairn stands on the

extremity of the cape, and on Kersop Peak.

2.29 Cape Wellington has been reported to give good radar returns at 18 miles.

2.29 Tides—Currents.—Off Cape Wellington the flood tidal

currents appear to meet and set in opposite directions, one portion of the current which comes from NE turning and setting

along the shore N, while the outer portion of the same current

sets round the promontory S and W. The ebb current from the

SW sets in an opposite manner. These conditions cause a considerable tidal rip and race off Cape Wellington.

2.29 Refuge Cove is the central of three indentations lying between Brown Head, about 1.3 miles N of Cape Wellington, and

Horn Point, 40m high, about 1 mile farther N. The cove is easily identified, being midway between Kersop Peak and Horn

Point, and from its having the first sandy beach which opens N

of Cape Wellington.

2.29 The entrance to the cove, S of Hobbs Head, is about 275m

wide, with depths of 14.6m in it. The depths decrease gradually

from 7.3 to 5.5m close inshore. A round-topped hill with a

wooded summit, 61m high, surmounts Hobbs Head. A light is

shown on the E side of the S entrance to Refuge Cove.

2.29 Anchorage.—Refuge Cove is the only anchorage on the W

side of Wilson Promontory sheltered from the E. The anchorage is in its S part.

2.30 Sealers Cove (39°01'S., 146°27'E.) is entered about

1.7 miles WNW of Horn Point. There are depths of 7.3 to 9.1m

in the entrance to the cove, which is about 0.6 mile wide; the

depths decrease to 5.5m about 0.2 mile within its entrance. A

heavy swell often rolls into the cove.

Sealers Cove Light is shown about 0.7 mile E of the N entrance point of Sealers Cove.

2.30 The coast from the N end of Sealers Cove to the S end of

Five Mile Beach, about 1.7 miles NNW, is bold and steep-to.

The latter beach extends about 4 miles NNE, and may be approached to a distance of about 0.7 mile in depths of 9.1 to

11m. The beach consists of reddish-colored sand and is backed

by swampy ground extending about 2 miles W to the Vereker

Range.

2.30 Rabbit Rock, 15.2m high, lies about 0.2 mile SE of Monkey

Point, a bold point about 0.7 mile ENE of the N end of Five

Mile Beach.

2.30 Rabbit Island (38°55'S., 146°30'E.), 59m high, bare of trees

and covered with high grass, lies about 1 mile E of Monkey

Point. It is an excellent mark for vessels proceeding N to Corner Inlet.
Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 47

Pub. 127

2.30 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage in all but SE or E

gales, in 8.2 to 9.1m, about 1 mile NE of Rabbit Island. Coasters bound W will find this a convenient anchorage during SW

gales.

2.31 Lighthouse Point (38°51'S., 146°29'E.), about 4.5

miles NNW of Rabbit Island, is 11m high, heath-covered, with

a conspicuous bare granite face, above which is a beacon, 4.9m

high. A light is shown on the point.

2.31 Mount Roundback, 313m high, rises about 2.5 miles SSW of

Lighthouse Point. Mount Hunter, a double-peaked wooded

mountain, 351m high, lies about 3.5 miles N of Mount Roundback; a conspicuous peak, 237m high, lies on the E spur of

Hunter Range, about 0.5 mile E. Mount Margaret, 218m high,

lies about midway between Mount Roundback and Mount

Hunter.

2.31 Entrance Point, the SW entrance point of Corner Basin, lies

about 3.7 miles N of Lighthouse Point, and is a low tree-covered point; a beacon, 4.9m high, stands on the point. Mount

Singapore, the N point of Wilson Promontory, lies about 1 mile

W of Entrance Point; it is cone-shaped and 144m high.

2.32 Off-lying islands and dangers.—The Seal Islands

(Direction Islands) consist of a group of islands, islets, and

rocks lying from about 6 miles E to 9 miles ESE of Rabbit Island.

2.32 Cliffy Island (38°55'S., 146°42'E.), the SE island of the

group, is 44m high, with rocks awash extending about 0.1 mile

off its NE end. A light is shown from the S side of the island;

the lighthouse is in communication with Wilson Promontory.

Cliffy Island has been reported to give good radar returns up to

18 miles. 

2.32 Rag Island, 29m high, lies about 1.2 miles WSW of Cliffy

Island. Rocks, awash, extend about 0.1 mile W and 0.3 mile

NW of the island, and two conspicuous rocks, about 6.1m high,

lie about 0.2 mile E of the island.

2.32 Notch Island, 37m high and steep-to, lies about 0.7 mile N of

Rag Island. It has two hills on it and the valley between them

gives it a notched appearance.

2.32 Seal Island (Direction Island), nearly 1 mile NW of Notch

Island, is 47m high and covered with tufts of coarse grass. Two

rocks lie about 0.1 mile and 0.4 mile NW, respectively, of Seal

Island; the outer rock is 2.4m high, with a rock awash close N;

the inner rock has a rock awash close NW of it.

2.32 White Rock, 10m high, lies about 1.2 miles NNW of Seal Island. A rock, with a depth of 5.5m, lies close S of it and a rock,

with a depth of 5.8m, lies about 0.2 mile NW.

Corner Inlet and Port Albert

2.33 The ports of Corner Inlet and Port Albert include all

waters of Corner Inlet, Corner Basin, and Port Albert, together

with the navigable rivers and creeks flowing into them, NW of

a line drawn 050° from the summit of Rabbit Island (38°55'S.,

146°30'E.) for 22 miles, and then N to the coast.

2.33 Corner Inlet leads into Corner Basin and lies between the E

side of Wilson Promontory, N of Rabbit Island and Snake Island (La Trobe Island), with Townsend Point, its S extremity,

about 3 miles E of Entrance Point. About 2 miles within the entrance to Corner Basin, the waters branch into several channels

intersecting extensive sand and mud flats which mostly fill the

basin.

2.33 Snake Island (La Trobe Island), separating Corner Inlet from

Port Albert, is low, but the trees on it give it an apparent elevation of 12.2 to 18.3m.

2.33 Port Welshpool and Port Franklin, in the NE and NW corners, respectively, of Corner Basin, are approached by Lewis

Channel and Franklin Channel, respectively; they are the main

ports for the Bass Strait fishing fleets. The town of Port Albert,

at the head of Port Albert, about 11 miles E of Port Welshpool,

is also a port for the Bass Strait fishing fleets.

2.33 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Rabbit Island is 2m at

MHHW and at MLHW.

2.33 The tides in Port Albert are generally influenced by the

winds, and no reliance can be placed on calculated times of

HW during unsettled weather.

2.33 Strong W to SW winds cause the incoming tidal current to

run from 1 hour to 1 hour 30 minutes after, and E winds cause

it to cease running 40 minutes before the predicted time of high

water.

2.33 Tidal currents on the NE side of Corner Inlet set with considerable force, sometimes at a rate of over 2 knots.

2.33 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not available. A Certificate of Local

Knowledge is compulsory for all trading vessels over 12m long

and all fishing vessels over 35m long. Further information can

be obtained from Gippsland Ports Authority or Marine Safety

Victoria.

Corner Inlet (Welshpool) (38°51'S., 146°34'E.)

World Port Index No. 53840

2.34 Entrance Channel.—The entrance to Corner Inlet

should not be attempted without local knowledge. The channel

lies between sandbanks, with depths of less than 5.5m. The

seaward part of the SW bank lies about 4 miles NW of Rabbit

Island; it dries in places close to its NE edge between positions

0.7 to 2 miles SE of the entrance point. The NE bank extends

about 6 miles SE from Bentley Point, which lies about 1 mile

ENE of the entrance point; the bank then extends about 1.5

miles W.

2.34 The approach to this channel, between the outer ends of the

above banks, is from the E. There are depths of 5.5m on the

line of the directional light in the approach. However, in 1985,

depths of 5m existed 50m N of the edge of the white sector between Buoy No. 1 and Buoy No. 3 and close SW of the line

joining Buoy No. 3 and Buoy No. 5. Then the channel leads

NW with ample width and increasing depths between the

banks into Corner Basin.

2.34 The sea breaks at times on the banks at the approach to the

channel, but rarely in the approach itself, which, in heavy

weather, can be located between the breakers on either side. On

the NE bank, between the channel and Bentley Harbor, the sea

breaks heavily over the W 3 miles of that bank.

2.34 The white sector of a directional light shown from Lighthouse Point Light leads to the entrance channel.

 Gippsland Ports Authority 

http://www.gippslandports.vic.gov.au
48 Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 

Pub. 127

2.34 Port Welshpool.—Lewis Channel, the E channel on the N

side of Corner Basin, curves about 4 miles N and E, with a

least depth of 5.2m to Port Welshpool Jetty. The channel is

marked by lighted and unlighted beacons. Above the pier, the

channel is marked by lighted buoys. In 1985, the least depth

between No. 1 Lighted Beacon and No. 2 Lighted Beacon was

4.3m. A depth of 4.4m could be carried into the channel by

passing 50m E of No. 2 Lighted Beacon.

2.34 Port Welshpool Pier has a berth, 150m long on its S side,

with depths of 6.0m alongside; there is a berth 110m long on

its N side, with depths of 4.6 to 6.6m alongside.

2.34 Port Welshpool Jetty, with a T-head, lies about 0.7 mile E of

Port Welshpool Pier. In its outer face is a berth, 150m long,

with depths of 3 to 6m alongside. The channel between the jetty and pier has a least depth of 2.1m. A boat harbor is bounded

on the W by a breakwater and on the E by the Port Welshpool

Jetty. 

2.34 Franklin Channel is entered about 2 miles NW of Entrance

Point, between a shoal with a depth of 1.8m on the S side, and

the E end of a drying sandy ridge extending 3.2 miles W on the

N side. The channel extends about 5 miles W and then branches into three minor channels. The N branch extends N and NW

for about 4 miles to the entrance to the Franklin River, where it

is shoal.

2.34 Benison Channel, a blind channel, and Middle Channel lie in

the SW part of Corner Basin.

2.34 Anchorage.—Bentley Harbor is bounded N by Bentley

Point, located about 2.5 miles WNW of Townsend Point, and a

point about 1.5 miles NE of Townsend Point, and on the S side

by the N side of the NE bank extending from Corner Inlet. The

harbor is about 1 mile wide at its E end decreasing to about 0.1

mile off the coast between Townsend Point and Bentley Point.

There are depths of 8m at its entrance, decreasing to 5.5m in its

narrowest part. Good anchorage may be obtained by small vessels in the narrow part of the harbor with shelter from all

winds.

2.34 Mount Singapore (38°47'S., 146°27'E.), bearing 276° and

open S of Townsend Point, leads toward Bentley Harbor. When

abreast Townsend Point a vessel should keep along the shore

and anchor as convenient.

2.34 Anchorage may also obtained, in 11 to 26m, S of the sandy

ridge on the N side of Franklin Channel.

2.35 Port Albert, one of the oldest ports in Victoria, is the

main fishing port of Bass Strait. The entrance channel and bar

are liable to changes in position and depths, and the buoys

marking the entrance are liable to be washed away due to their

exposed position. The greatest care should be exercised by vessels with local knowledge, and those without local knowledge

should not attempt to enter.

2.35 Entrance Channel.—The main entrance to Port Albert is

about 0.5 mile wide, and lies between the E extremity of Snake

Island (La Trobe Island) and the SW extremity of Clonmel Island (38°45'S., 146°40'E.), Bar Bank, which dries, extends

about 1 mile SSE from the E end of Snake Island. Depths of

less than 5.5m extend about 0.5 mile SW, S, and E, respectively, from the outer end of the bar. A bar, with a depth of 2.5m,

extends across the entrance between the E end of Snake Island

and the SW extremity of Clonmel Island.

2.35 The fairway lighted buoy is moored 4 miles SSE of the W

extremity of Drum Island. Another lighted buoy is moored

about 2.2 miles SE of the same point. 

2.35 Inner Channels.—Within the entrance there are two channels. The E or main channel extends about 4 miles NNE to Port

Albert from the inner end of the entrance channel. It passes E

of the E end of Sunday Island and W of the chain of islands

extending N from the middle of Clonmel Island to Port Albert.

The least depth in this channel in 1964 was 1.8m. The channel

is marked by lighted and unlighted beacons.

2.35 The W channel leads round the W end of Sunday Island, and

through Midge Channel off the NE end of that island, joining

the E channel off the NE extremity of Sunday Island. The

channel S and W of Sunday Island is unmarked. Midge Channel and the channel for about 1 mile W on the N side of Sunday

Island is marked by a pile beacon on its N side and by seven

piles on its S side. A three-pile beacon, 3.7m high, stands about

2.5 miles WNW of the NE extremity of Sunday Island Beacon.

A jetty extends 500m N from the NE point of Sunday Island. A

light is occasionally shown from its head.

2.35 Kate Kearney Entrance lies about 4.5 miles NE of the entrance to Port Arthur and at the NE end of Clonmel Island; the

latter island is 4.3m high and covered with verdure. The entrance is fronted by breakers off its SW side, and a bar, with a

depth of 2.4m, extends across the entrance. A shoal channel

then leads W to join the E channel to Port Albert.

2.35 Shoal Inlet lies about 4 miles farther ENE, at the E end of a

low, sandy island similar to Clonmel Island. Sandspits, marked

by breakers, extend up to 0.7 mile seaward from its entrance

points. The entrance has a depth of 0.9m and is passable by

small vessels with local knowledge. A light is shown from the

E side of Shoal Inlet.

2.35 Port Albert Wharf (38°40'S., 146°41'E.) is an L-shaped jetty

with a berth, 120m long, on its outer face, with a depth of 2m

alongside. On the inner side of the head is a berth 59m long.

The Hotel Jetty, about 100m NW of the wharf, has a length of

90m long, with depths of 1 to 4m alongside. The Boat Harbor

Jetty lies just NW of the Hotel Jetty. It is T-shaped with a berth

of 25m in length and a depth of 3m alongside. Vessels carrying

explosives should anchor in the explosives anchorage established in Corner Inlet.

2.35 Directions.—Vessels bound for Corner Inlet or Port Albert

from the W should, after rounding Wilson Promontory, steer

for Cape Wellington, which after passing, the vessel should

steer with Cape Wellington bearing 215° astern, in line with

Wilson Promontory Light, to a position about 1 mile NW of

White Rock. From a position 4 miles N of Seal Island steer for

Lighthouse Point Light bearing 276.5°, passing SW of No. 3

Lighted Buoy, then alter course to 313° with Cliffy Island

Light astern in order to follow the buoyed main channel into

Corner Inlet. Course should then be altered for Lewis or Toora

Channels when abeam of Latrobe Lighted Buoy moored 1.4

miles NNW of Mount Singapore. From the E, steer to pass

about 5.2 miles N of Cliffy Island, then proceed as above. 

2.35 Vessels without local knowledge are recommended to proceed as above and anchor, in a depth of 20m, with the directional light bearing 275° until daylight, when they should

proceed as above.

2.35 A vessel bound for Port Albert from the W should proceed as

directed above to a position about 1 mile NW of White Rock.

Then steer NNE for about 7.5 miles, passing close to Port Al-
Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 49

Pub. 127

bert Fairway Lighted Buoy, then change course N through the

outer part of Port Albert Entrance, passing close W of the lighted buoy, situated 2.5 miles SE of Drum Island Front Leading

Lighted Beacon, before altering course NW and then NE into

the channel leading to the berths at Port Albert.

2.35 Vessels are recommended not to approach Port Albert at

night without local knowledge, but should keep a good offing

until daylight, sounding frequently.

Port Albert Entrance to Cape Howe

2.36 From Port Albert Entrance, the coast extends about 80

miles NE to Lake Entrance. The portion of the coast between

Shoal Inlet and Red Bluff (37°52'S., 148°04'E.) is generally

known as Ninety Mile Beach. This coast is a continuous steepto sandy beach, backed by lakes and low wooded ground intersected by inlets and small streams, the latter breaking through

the narrow strip of sand after a heavy rainfall. Landing on

Ninety Mile Beach is possible but very dangerous.

2.36 In the offing off the SW part of Ninety Mile Beach, nothing

can be seen but the back ranges of mountains. These mountains

extend about 27 miles SW from Toms Cap (38°20'S.,

146°48'E.), 363m high, which lies about 22 miles N of Shoal

Inlet.

2.36 The coast from Shoal Inlet to the town of Seaspray, at the

mouth of Merriman Creek, about 25 miles NE, is nearly separated from the land behind it, which is somewhat higher and

thickly wooded by fresh and salt water lagoons or ti-tree

swamps. The land is low, having an elevation of about 15m on

the W side of Merriman Creek, and about 7.6m E of the creek.

In places between the hummocks the coast is scarcely above

HW, while the waters of Lake Denison break through the coast

during the floods. Apart from Buckleys Station, a group of

houses close N of Seaspray and the buildings of that town,

there are no objects easy of identification on this stretch of

coast.

2.36 The coast from Seaspray to Lake Entrance, about 47 miles

NE, is uniform and monotonous in appearance, and continues

low, from 12 to 26m high, and covered with ti-trees in places.

Lakes lie behind this narrow, sandy stretch of coast; the lakes

are separated from each other and surrounded by thickly wooded country, much of it subject to flooding.

2.36 Deadman Hill, 64m high, rises about 11 miles N of the

mouth of Merriman Creek. Two conspicuous flares, visible for

a considerable distance at night, are situated about 2.2 miles

SSW of Deadman Hill. Three hummocks, the SW 22m high,

the middle covered with ti-trees, and the NE Stockyard Hill,

20m high, lie about 18 miles, 24 miles, and 28 miles NE,

respectively, of the mouth of Merriman Creek.

2.37 Sperm Whale Head (37°59'S., 147°43'E.), 29m high,

about 7.5 miles NE of Stockyard Hill, is the NE extremity of a

peninsula separating Lake Reeve from Lake Victoria.

2.37 About 7 miles W of Lake Entrance and about 3 miles inland

is Metung Hill, 75m high, from which comparatively high

wooded land continues to Mount Barkly at Lake Entrance, and

then to Red Bluff, about 4.5 miles farther E; high ground then

skirts the arms and streams of Lake Tyers, and following the

line of the coast about 2 miles inland, it gives a higher appearance to the coastline, clearly marking the difference between

the land E and that W of Lake Entrance.

2.37 Mount Barkly (37°53'S., 147°58'E.) lies 0.5 mile from the

outer line of coast and is the most prominent object on the

coast just described. It is 62m high, but the trees on it give it an

apparent elevation of 71m; it forms a useful mark for making

Lake Entrance.

2.37 Caution.—Numerous offshore oil and gas platforms, best

seen on the chart, are situated in Bass Strait between Wilsons

Promontory and Point Hicks, about 150 miles NE; they extend

S with less concentration almost to Flinders Island and are

marked by lights and fog signals. Several submerged pipelines

extend offshore and terminate in lighted production platforms.

2.37 A charted area encompassing the Bass Straight Oil Fields

has been designated as an Area to be Avoided; vessels of more

than 200 grt should avoid the area. The main oil and gas producing field lies between 27 miles SE and 40 miles S of the

Lakes Entrance. Vessels should maintain a listening watch on

VHF channel 16 while in this vicinity.

2.37 A gas pipeline, best seen on the chart, has been constructed

between Ninety Mile Beach and Tasmania. The N terminus is

situated one mile E of Seaspray, then S into Bass Strait between the Hogan Group and Kent Group. The S terminus is situated at Five Mile Bluff which is located 5 miles E of Port

Dalrymple. Gas pipelines contain flammable gas under high

pressure. Any ship damaging the pipeline would face an immediate fire hazard. Mariners are cautioned not to anchor or trawl

in the vicinity of the pipeline.

2.37 Mariners are also cautioned to the existence of submarine

power cables in the vicinity of Five Mile Bluff.

2.37 Surveillance operations are carried out within a radius of 40

miles of position 38°20'S, 148°00'E by military vessels and aircraft, which may illuminate and approach close to vessels to

verify identification.

2.37 An IMO-approved Traffic Separation Scheme lies in the waters SE of the Area to be Avoided; two light floats mark the E

and W terminus of the charted Traffic Separation Zone. Vessels

are cautioned that Rule 10 of the International Regulations for

Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972 (COLREGS 72) applies to

vessels utilizing the Traffic Separation Scheme, and that vessels not using a Traffic Separation Scheme shall avoid it by as

wide a margin as is practicable.

2.38 Lakes Entrance (37°54'S., 147°58'E.) is the dredged

channel which provides access to the extensive inland waterways system encompassing Lake Wellington, Lake Victoria,

Lake King, and Lake Bonga. The large fishing fleets that work

off this portion of the Australian coast operate from the many

ports served by Lakes Entrance. 

2.38 The channel depth here is usually maintained between 3m

and 5m, but the bar that fronts the entrance is treacherous. In

1978, three vessels were lost attempting to cross it. Local

knowledge is essential, and local authorities should be consulted before planning a voyage here. Details of the channels and

ports of the various lakes are given in a publication of the Department of Harbours and Marine, Victoria.

2.38 Caution.—Mariners are advised that shoaling has occurred

in Lakes Entrance fairway. Mariners are further advised to seek

the latest information on the bar conditions before attempting a

bar crossing by phoning Gippsland Ports on 3-5152-1974 (BH)
50 Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 

Pub. 127

or 418-381-366 (AH).

2.38 Mariners are cautioned to exercise special care when navigating these waters due to production wells and gas pipelines. 

2.38 Red Bluff (37°52'S., 148°04'E.), conspicuous from its color,

rises gradually to a height of 49m and is wooded, though not so

much near the coast as inland. The bluff has a few rocks off it

which do not extend far to seaward.

2.38 Mount Tara, about 19 miles NNE of Red Bluff, has two

conspicuous summits with other smaller summits. The principal summit is flat-topped and has been cleared of trees.

2.38 From Mount Tara, E and NE, the country is mountainous,

with some of the ranges approaching within a few miles of the

coast.

2.38 The coast from the entrance to Lake Tyers trends with a

curve ENE 21 miles to the Snowy River entrance and is similar

to that W of the entrance to the lakes, though the sand hummocks are higher, especially toward the Snowy River, near

which they attain a height of 52m. Immediately at the back of

the coast, extending the whole distance, is a freshwater morass,

and generally 0.5 mile from its margin is the higher back country, which along this part of the coast is about 61m high and

densely timbered. The hummocky coast is faced with sand

cliffs or patches, but they are uniform in appearance.

2.38 A beacon stands on a sand hummock about 1.2 miles W of

the Snowy River entrance.

2.38 About 4 miles SSW of the Snowy River entrance is a patch

of uneven rock bottom, upon which the least depth found was

15.5m.

2.39 Point Ricardo (37°49'S., 148°38'E.) is rocky. Hummocks on the point are about 31m high. Mount Raymond, located 6 miles N of Point Ricardo, is a conspicuous hill, 293m

high at its N elevation; mountain spurs extend in a S and SE direction.

2.39 Cape Conran, about 5 miles E of Point Ricardo, is 58m high,

but is not prominent. The land about the point is flat and covered with a dense dwarf scrub. The coast between Point Ricardo and Cape Conran forms a sandy bight, skirted with grassy

hummocks over 30m high. In the center is one conspicuous

hummock 50m high, with a sand patch near its summit, over

which is a grove of tea trees. Under the E part of Cape Conran,

extending 0.4 mile offshore, are numerous sunken rocks upon

which the sea breaks heavily at times. At 1.5 miles inland from

Cape Conran, and extending at that distance from the coast to

the Snowy River, higher ground is densely timbered, with an

average height of about 91m.

2.39 Beware Reef lies about 3 miles E of Cape Conran. The reef

is 2m above HW, and has sunken rocks, upon which the depth

is uncertain, lying E and SE of it to a distance of 0.4 mile.

2.39 Caution.—Two production wells with associated pipelines

and restricted areas are situated 15 miles SSW of Point Ricardo.

2.40 Pearl Point (37°47'S., 148°53'E.) can be identified by

two conspicuous conical sand cliffs that are located close E.

2.40 Point Hicks (37°48'S., 149°16'E.) is easily recognized by a

sandy peak, 164m high, lying about 1 mile N of the cape. This

summit has a gradual fall to the W of bare sand and is more remarkable when viewed from that direction. Point Hicks has

four points, the S of which projects nearly 1.5 miles from the

line of the coast. The cape is composed of granite, with boulders strewn over the whole face. A stone obelisk stands on the

point. Everard Hill, 5 miles N of Point Hicks, is wooded and

conspicuous. The hill is reported to give a good radar return up

to 21 miles.

2.40 Petrel Point, about 7 miles E of Point Hicks, is 71m high

and bordered by half tide and sunken rocks for more than 0.1

mile off. A rock, 9.1m high, lies close E of the point. About 0.2

mile S of the point is a small rock only 0.3m above HW. The

coast between Point Hicks and Petrel Point consists of sandy

beaches with rocky points having reefs lying off them for 0.2

mile. About midway along, and close to the coast, is a group of

conspicuous bare sand hummocks, and to the E of this group

are several sand patches.

2.41 Rame Head (37°47'S., 149°28'E.), a granite formation, rises to 113m on its E side; another summit of the same

elevation rises close to the SW. To the N the land falls, but

again rises gradually, until at 4 miles distant it attains an elevation of 287m. The W part of the head is fringed with rocks and

a rock, awash, lies close to the SE of the extreme point.

2.41 Rame Head is reported to give a good radar return up to 22

miles.

2.41 From Rame Head the coast trends in a N direction for 1.5

miles as far as a sandy beach; then in a NE direction for nearly

1 mile to Wingan Point. Over the sandy beach, and near its W

part, is a sand cliff 62m high.

2.41 The Skerries, three in number, lie close S of Wingan Point. The

highest and central rock is 12.8m above HW. Close to The Skerries are several detached rocks, some above HW; the outer of

these, which is covered at HW, is 0.5 mile from Wingan Point.

2.41 Sand Patch Point (37°44'S., 149°36'E.) is made conspicuous by a large body of drift sand. Nearly 0.5 mile S of the point

is a pinnacle rock with a depth of 2.1m at LW, known as the

Long Reef. It is a dangerous rock on which the sea breaks occasionally.

Little Rame Head lies about 4.5 miles NE of Sand Patch

Point. The coast between is about 91m high and forms a rocky

bight with a few sandy beaches. 

2.42 New Zealand Star Bank (37°47'S., 149°44'E.), with

a least depth of 15m, lies about 6 miles SE of Little Rame

Head. The bank stands on an area of uneven bottom, which

tends to generate a confused sea in heavy weather. A depth of

20m lies 2 miles NNW of the bank, and a depth of 37m lies 1.2

miles W of the same bank. Depths of 9.4 and 12m have been

reported to lie 0.7 mile S and 1.2 miles W, respectively, of New

Zealand Star Bank. Mariners are advised to give this area a

wide berth.

2.42 From November to April, lobster fishing pots may be present

within 3 miles of New Zealand Star Bank. They are marked by

small spherical floats and occasionally by flagged buoys. Mariners are requested to keep clear of the area. From Little Rame

Head the coast trends 8 miles NNE to Bastion Point, the coast

between is about 91m high. As a continuous heavy swell rolls

on this coast it should not be approached nearer than 1 mile; it

is also fringed with sunken rocks. A conspicuous sand patch

lies 1 mile SW of Bastion Point.

2.42 Bastion Point (37°34'S., 149°45'E.) is comparatively low,
Sector 2. Australia—Port Phillip to Cape Howe 51

Pub. 127

being only 25m high. The land behind the point, and between it

and Little Rame Head, is densely wooded. A rock, 0.9m high,

and a second rock, with a depth of 2.7m, lie 0.3 mile SW and

0.2 mile SE, respectively, of Bastion Point.

2.42 Tullaburga Island, about 4 miles ENE of Bastion Point, is a

rock with little soil and a few bushes on the NE part.

2.42 Gabo Island (37°34'S., 149°55'E.) is composed of red granite and has a fairly prominent monument near its center. The N

end of the island tapers gradually to a point, which consists of

low granite boulders. The W side of the island is covered with

grass and dwarf bushes. Near the center are a few sand hills

whose bare sides face the SE, and only show as sand hills in

that direction; the highest of these hills has an elevation of

52m.

2.42 Gabo Island is reported to give a good radar return up to 14

miles.

2.42 Anchorage.—On the NW side of the island is a small sandy

bay, with 9.1m of water in the central part, where there is good

anchorage for one vessel, except in SW gales. There is a submerged rocky ledge on the E shore. Several moderate SW gales

have been ridden out in this bay. It is probable that a gale of

some continuance would have to blow direct in before the

swell would make the anchorage unsafe. Though there is often

a heavy swell outside, scarcely any is felt at this anchorage.

2.42 From Telegraph Point (37°33'S., 149°54'E.) the coast,

which consists of bare white sand hillocks, the highest being

44m, trends NE 3.7 miles to a sandy point, with a ledge of dry

and sunken rocks extending 0.5 mile to the S, on which the sea

nearly always breaks. This point may be mistaken for Cape

Howe, as its bare sand hills make it much more conspicuous

than the cape.

2.43 Cape Howe (37°30'S., 149°58'E.) is a low point,

composed of stones and sand, covered with tea trees. The land

to the W is almost level for 4 miles to the foot of Howe Hill and

the Howe Range of mountains which extends nearly NNW.

North of the Howe Range is another range called Table Hills,

so that the whole aspect of the country about Cape Howe is that

of a mountainous district.

2.43 Howe Hill is conspicuous, rising abruptly from the adjacent

lowland, its S aspect exhibiting a steep fall and its summit being shaped like a haystack. 
53

Pub. 127

3. 

Australia—Coasts of Tasmania

3.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 3 — CHART INFORMATION
55

Pub. 127

SECTOR 3 

AUSTRALIA—COASTS OF TASMANIA

3.0 Plan.—This sector describes the coasts of Tasmania beginning with the N coast from E to W, followed by the W coast

from N to S, and the E coast from S to N.

General Remarks

3.1 Tasmania is the most thoroughly mountainous island

on the globe, being one continuous series of mountains, valleys, peaks, and glens. The highest mountains just exceed

1,524m. The S and W parts of the island are particularly remarkable for bold and commanding scenery. The coast, which

is rocky and bold in its outlines, is broken by numerous inlets,

many of which constitute good natural harbors. Rivers are numerous, and a few of them are navigable for a portion of their

course. There are also several mountain lakes near the sources

of the rivers; the largest, Great Lake, 1,164m above the sea, is

about 12 miles long, and has an area of 11,200 hectares.

3.1 The whole N coast lies generally in very smooth water,with

the prevailing winds being off the land and the long SW swell

outside being interrupted by the islands at the W entrance of

the strait.

3.1 The W coast of Tasmania is mostly rocky, of sterile aspect,

with reefs fronting it to the distance of 3 or 4 miles in some

places and a heavy swell usually rolling in upon it from the

SW. The prevailing winds are from the same quarter and bring

much bad weather, especially in the winter months of June, July, and August.

3.1 The S coast of Tasmania is rugged, abrupt, and barren. Some

small islands lie from 3 to 12 miles off it. The projecting heads

of land are supported by basaltic columns, like the Giants

Causeway of Ireland, and it is without any known places of

shelter from onshore winds, although it contains two or three

sandy bays.

3.1 The E coast of Tasmania extends about 133 miles N from

Cape Pillar to Eddystone Point. It contains numerous indentations, although few provide good anchorage. Mariners are cautioned that the inshore waters off the E coast of Tasmania have

not been surveyed and less water than charted may exist.

3.1 Winds—Weather.—The climate, though differing in the E

and W portions, the former being dry and the latter very wet, is

generally favorable. Although the hot N winds of Australia do

occasionally reach the island, they are greatly subdued in temperature by their passage over Bass Strait. The climate possesses the full summer heat due to its latitude, but the nights are

always cool and refreshing. 

3.1 The mean temperature at Hobart is 12°C. The maximum

temperature of Hobart in summer is 41°C, which is rarely

reached; in winter, it seldom falls below -2°C, though in the

uplands it often falls to -8°C, producing ice of considerable

thickness. The rainfall at Hobart averages 600mm annually, at

Launceston it averages 700mm, and at Macquarie Harbor, on

the W coast, the average is over 2,500mm. This area of the

coast is very windy and often violent, but thunderstorms are

rare.

3.1 The signs of the approach of a W gale on the S coast of Australia are so well marked that no vessel need encounter one unprepared. From May to October, if the barometer falls rapidly

below standard atmospheric pressure, with a fresh and gusty N

wind and heavy storm clouds gathering to the NW, a W gale is

approaching. The N wind is usually light as the sky to the NW

becomes overcast and the wind then shifts to NW in a heavy

squall. In the lull before this squall, St. Elmo’s fire is often seen

on the ironwork of the masts and yards.

3.1 When the barometer rises and the wind shifts to the W and

SW, the weather will begin to clear when the winds are well S

of SW. Frequently the barometer remains nearly stationary or

falls as the gales set in, and the force of the wind remains high

for a week or 10 days, though the average of these winter gales

is 3 to 4 days.

3.1 The months of October, November, and December have occasionally settled weather, with a preponderance of SE winds,

though the W gales of October are frequently as severe as those

experienced during the winter. An occasional gale is likely to

be experienced in November, may be experienced in December, and sometimes, but rarely, may be experienced in the early

months of the year.

3.1 The force of the SE wind in summer has been known to increase to a strong gale, about 48 hours in duration, which raises

a very irregular cross sea as the constant SW swell does not

subside with the SE wind. The gales are accompanied by a red

haze and the barometer remains steady, but below average

pressure for the time of year. The wind continues from the SE

while the gale lasts, not changing its direction seaward or landward as in good weather. These gales are infrequent.

3.1 Fog is extremely rare on the S coast of Australia; the haze

which comes with the sea breeze in the summer is occasionally

sufficient to reduce visibility to a distance of 3 or 4 miles.

3.1 The prevailing winds on the W coast of Tasmania are from

the SW and are accompanied by foul weather, particularly in

the months of June, July, and August. Northwest and W gales

are frequent.

3.1 In the bight of the N coast of Tasmania, between Circular

Head and Cape Portland, there is almost a constant current to

the E during the greater part of the year.

3.1 On the E coast, the set is generally to the S. On the W coast,

the current generally sets to the N, particularly during the prevalence of SW and S winds.

3.1 Ice.—In addition to the severity of the climate which may be

experienced in high latitudes, there is the danger of disrupted

masses of ice and icebergs. The absence of these dangers can

not be relied upon in any season of the year, they are, however,

rarely encountered N of latitude 40°S. Between 40° and 45°S

icebergs have been occasionally met with as far as 65°E; at

45°S as far as 135°E; and at 50°S as far as 140°E. Icebergs are

seldom sighted between the meridians of 130°E and 170°W

along the shipping routes.

3.1 Southeast of the Cape of Good Hope, midway between Kerguelen Island and the meridian of Cape Leeuwin, and midway
56 Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 

Pub. 127

between New Zealand and Cape Horn, icebergs are most numerous. The periods of maximum and minimum frequency

vary. It may also happen that while icebergs are being reported

in the lower latitudes, the ocean in the higher latitudes is free of

ice.

3.1 The dimensions of many of the ocean icebergs are remarkable. Icebergs of 5 to 20 miles in length are frequently sighted

S of the 40th parallel and icebergs of 20 to 50 miles in length

are not uncommon. As many as 4,500 bergs have been reported

in a run of 2,000 miles, some with heights of 245 to 520m and

lengths of 6 to 82 miles.

3.1 Caution.—Marine farms, some of which may not be charted, may be encountered in the sounds, bays, harbors, coves,

and tidal rivers of Tasmania and should be avoided.

Eddystone Point to Port Dalrymple

3.2 Eddystone Point (41°00'S., 148°21'E.), 25m high,

forms the N point of Bay of Fires. The point is reported to give

a good radar return up to 18 miles.

3.2 The coast from Eddystone Point trends NW 10 miles to Cape

Naturaliste, with several small points and bays between. Off

the points are numerous granite boulders, some of which are

6.1m high.

3.2 Cape Naturaliste (40°51'S., 148°13'E.), 22m high, is faced

by sand cliffs, but the coast about it is lower than that of Eddystone Point.

3.2 Mount Cameron, Mount William, and Bayley’s Hill are the

only remarkable hills in this vicinity. The highest peak of

Mount Cameron lies 18 miles W of Eddystone Point. It is one

of several peaks and the summit is conical; the ridge, of which

Mount Cameron is the highest part, is over 3 miles in length in

a NE-SW direction. Mount William, 9 miles NW of Eddystone

Point, rises gradually to a rounded summit. Bayley’s Hill,

about 5 miles W of Eddystone Point, is broad and flat-topped.

3.2 George Rocks, a group of granite boulders, the highest of

which is 20m, lies 4 miles NNW of Eddystone Point. These

rocks occupy a space of 1.5 miles and, with the exception of

the largest two, are quite barren. Scattered through the group

are a few rocks that dry, but most of the rocks are from 3 to

9.1m high.

3.2 Caution.—Passage between George Rocks and the mainland is not recommended, due to the presence of above and below-water rocks scattered in the vicinity of George Rocks.

3.2 Eucalyptus Rock, which rarely breaks, lies about 8 miles

NNW of Eddystone Point. Salamander Rock lies about 3.5

miles ENE of Eucalyptus Rock. No distinct break has been

seen on this rock. The rock lies in the direct track of vessels

plying between Melbourne and Hobart.

3.2 A depth of 27.4m has been reported to lie about 4.8 miles E

of Salamander Rock.

3.2 Anchorage.—Musselroe Bay (40°49'S., 148°09'E.) affords

good anchorage, in about 12m, about 1 mile NW of Cockle

Bank (40°48'S., 148°11'E.).

3.2 Caution.—It is recommended that vessels unfamiliar with

this area keep at least 3 miles outside Salamander Rock when

proceeding to or from Banks Strait. 

3.3 Swan Island (40°44'S., 148°06'E.) is of gray granite,

but sand hills covering the granite give it the appearance of being nearly all sand. Swan Island Light is obscured from the

SW.

3.3 Tides—Currents.—Spring tides rise 2m. The flood current

sets to the NW; the ebb current sets to the SE at a velocity of 3

knots at spring tides, influenced however, by the wind.

3.3 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off a small sandy bay

on the SE side of Swan Island. The bottom is rock, or sand over

rock; the holding ground is bad. It is not advisable to anchor at

Swan Island if W gales are expected, as it is not uncommon for

the wind to shift to the SE.

3.3 Caution.—Due to the strength of the tidal currents, vessels

using the passage between Swan Island and the mainland

should give a wide berth to the foul ground on each side.

3.4 Banks Strait, which separates the Furneaux Group

from Tasmania, may be said to extend between Goose Island to

the NW and Eddystone Point to the SE.

3.4 In the strait, with a head wind, it is generally impossible for

sailing vessels to work to the W during the ebb current; the

custom is to anchor either under Swan Island or in Musselroe

Bay. Occasionally, small vessels anchor off the Little Mussel

Roe River, the water there being shallower.

3.4 Numerous unmarked shoals frequent the NE coast of Tasmania, and the navigation of Banks Strait consequently requires

care. The bottom consists of sand and in some parts rocks.

3.4 Winds—Weather.—During the survey of Banks Strait, the

heaviest and most frequent gales (generally from the W) were

experienced in the months of September, October, and November.

3.4 On the termination of a W gale, the wind in the vicinity of

Banks Strait sometimes shifts to the SW, the barometer reading

a little above 1003mb. The wind seldom blows home with

much strength, but sufficiently so, with the swell rolling in simultaneously to necessitate leaving the anchorages, which are

open to the SE. All anchorages in Banks Strait which are exposed to the SE require great caution in their use, owing to the

uncertain nature of the winds.

3.4 Tides—Currents.—The flood current is the W current and

the ebb the E; the currents are each of 6 hours 12 minutes duration at springs; but during neaps the flood runs 7 hours and the

ebb 5 hours 30 minutes.

3.4 In the narrowest part of the strait (8.5 miles wide), between

the Swan Islands and Clarke Island, the tidal currents run at the

velocity of 3 knots at springs; W winds accelerate the E current, which occasionally attains a velocity of 5 or 6 knots.

3.4 At springs, in the middle of Banks Strait, the E is the stronger of the tidal currents. At such times, either current, when opposed to the wind, causes a high topping sea, somewhat

dangerous for small craft.

3.5 Cape Portland (40°44'S., 147°56'E.) is low and

rocky. Anchorage with holding ground reported good, is available in Foster Inlet. The anchorage in the lee of Maclean Island

provides excellent protection in E gales.

3.5 The best channel into the bay is between Cape Portland and

the shoal area extending N from Maclean Island. There are no

dangers in the approach, but a careful watch should be kept on

the vessel until past Cape Portland owing to the strong tidal

currents in this vicinity. On one occasion during a survey, the
Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 57

Pub. 127

strength of the current was observed to be 5.5 knots, setting in

a NE direction. This causes very dangerous overfalls and tide

rips. The tidal currents inside the inlet are wek, seldom running

at more than 0.5 knot.

3.5 The rocks N of Maclean Island, which dry at LW, are nearly

always visible as they usually break.

3.5 Waterhouse Point (40°49'S., 147°40'E.) is the rocky termination of a range of hills descending from Hardwickes Hill,

about 3.2 miles SW. The point has a reef of rocks, pinnacles of

which dry at low water, projecting 0.3 mile to the N.

3.5 The coast from Waterhouse Point trends SW 1.5 miles to a

small point abreast Little Waterhouse Island. This part of the

coast has a sandy beach, with numerous dry and sunken rocks

extending 0.3 mile from the shore.

3.5 Waterhouse Island, about 1.7 miles W of Waterhouse Point,

has an even summit, and falls gradually at its N end. In some

parts there are a few trees, but the island is nearly cleared of

timber.

3.5 Tides—Currents.—Spring tides rise 2.4m. The flood is the

W current, and its velocity about 2 knots at the anchorage.

3.5 Anchorage.—The anchorage between Waterhouse Island

and Waterhouse Point, on the E side of the island, is a safe and

useful anchorage, affording shelter from E or W gales. Anchor

as convenient in the channel, either near the SW end in 9.1m,

about 0.3 mile off the only sandy beach on the SE side of the

island, or in the N part of the channel, over a sandy bottom, in

about the same depth, near a patch of 5.5m, with Croppies

Point (40°49'S., 147°36'E.) over the W extremity of Little Waterhouse Island, bearing 223°.

3.5 The N entrance to the anchorage is encumbered by shoals of

4.2 to 6.4m, and by the bank extending 0.5 mile E from Waterhouse Island.

3.6 Papanui Rock is a rocky patch about 0.5 mile in extent, located about 3.7 miles NW of the N extremity of Waterhouse Island. It has a depth of 2.7m over its shallowest part,

with 25.6 to 34.7m close around it.

3.6 South Croppies Point lies nearly 1 mile SSW of Croppies

Point, with two small points and exposed sandy bays between.

Croppie Rock, with a depth of 3.3m, lies 0.5 mile bearing 307°

from South Croppies Point.

3.6 About 2.2 miles SW of South Croppies Point is a rock 2.7m

above HW, and about 0.5 mile further in the same direction a

rock 0.6m above HW. These rocks are about 1 mile offshore.

3.6 From South Croppies Point, the coast, a sandy beach backed

by sand hills which attain an elevation of 43m, trends in a SW

direction for about 11.5 miles to the head of Anderson Bay

(40°57'S., 147°27'E.), where the Great Forester River and the

Brid River discharge themselves into the sea. The coast then

trends in a NW direction for about 5 miles to East Sandy Point,

being of a rocky and broken nature.

3.6 The mouth of the Great Forester River is blocked by a sandy

bar, which dries at LWS. The outermost rocks in this vicinity

are always above water.

3.6 Southern Cross Reef, with a least depth of 1.8m and which is

steep-to on the N side, lies nearly in the middle of the bay.

3.6 Anchorage.—Anderson Bay generally affords shelter only

with S winds, but fair shelter has been obtained in W gales, 0.5

mile SE of East Sandy Point, in 9m, sand, good holding

ground. In approaching this anchorage care must be taken to

avoid a rocky ledge projecting from a point located about 1

mile SE of East Sandy Point, and the reef near the center of the

bay, mentioned above. 

3.6 East Sandy Point (40°56'S., 147°21'E.) is formed by a long

low ridge extending in a N direction from the high ground inland. The cape terminates in a conspicuous sand hill, 38m high,

which shows a bare face to seaward except in a W direction. A

ledge of rocks, which covers and uncovers, with no outlying

dangers, stretches 0.2 mile N from the cape.

3.6 West Sandy Point, about 3 miles W of East Sandy Point, is

formed by a series of low sand hills fronted by shelving rocks.

3.6 Caution.—A rocky patch, which breaks heavily in bad

weather and has a depth of less than 1.8m at LW, lies 0.8 mile

N of West Sandy Point. Two miles W of the point, Flat Rocks

Reef, detached ledges which mostly cover at about three-quarter flood, extend 1 mile from the shore. The soundings off this

coast are irregular and it should not be approached nearer than

2.5 miles.

3.7 Ninth Island (40°50'S., 147°16'E.) is flat-topped, devoid of trees, and nearly covered with grass. The depths around

the island are irregular, especially N and E of it, where there

are patches of 9.6m at 1.2 mile distants.

3.7 From West Sandy Point, the coast trends SW for about 7

miles, then W about 7 miles to Stony Head. Noland Bay is the

E part of this indentation. Its shore is sandy, with sand hills 9.1

to 21.3m high, and fronted by ledges of rocks which cover and

uncover. Nearer Stony Head, the land becomes more elevated

and is faced by cliffs 12.2 to 30m high.

3.7 Stony Head is a conspicuous headland, 98m high, with cliffs

and broken ground, 37m high, seaward of its summit. This

headland is the extremity of a range of hills sloping down from

the inland mountains, the most conspicuous of which is Ryans

Hill, 229m high, about 2.5 miles S of the head.

3.7 Tides—Currents.—Spring tides rise about 3m. The flood is

the W current and sets parallel to the shore; the ebb is the E

current. In the channel between Stony Head and Tenth Islet,

about 2.7 miles NW and near salient points, the currents attain

a velocity of about 1 knot. As the distance from the shore increases, the tidal currents become weaker and affected by prevailing winds.

3.8 Five Mile Bluff (41°01'S., 146°52'E.) lies about 7

miles WSW of Stony Head.About 1 mile W of Stony Head,

there is a slight projection fronted by shelving rocks and shallow water, which should be given a berth of 1 mile.

3.8 Two Mile Reef lies about midway between Five Mile Bluff

and Low Head (41°03'S., 146°47'E.), the E entrance point of

Port Dalrymple. The reef extends from the shore in a NW direction for 0.8 mile, and shoal water extends for 0.5 mile farther in the same direction. This reef covers at half tide.

3.8 Vessels are liable to be set by the ebb current into the bay between the Two Mile Reef and Low Head. Between Five Mile

Bluff and Low Head a vessel should keep offshore at least 2

miles, as inside this limit the sea breaks heavily with onshore

gales.

3.8 Caution.—A gas pipeline, best seen on the chart, has been

constructed and extends from Five Mile Bluff, N across Bass

Strait, to Ninety Mile Beach on the mainland.

3.8 Gas pipelines contain flammable gas under high pressure.
58 Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 

Pub. 127

Any ship damaging the pipeline would face an immediate fire

hazard. Mariners are cautioned not to anchor or trawl in the vicinity of the pipeline.

3.8

3.9 Hebe Reef (41°03'S., 146°45'E.), the outermost danger off the entrance of Port Dalrymple, is about 0.5 mile in extent, mostly in an E and W direction. The small portion of its

center, which covers at half-tide and is marked by a light, lies

about 2.2 miles W of Low Head. A bank, with a depth of 5.5 to

6.4m, extends 0.5 mile E from the reef, but there are 11m and

12.8m depths at less than 0.3 mile N and S of the reef. In good

weather the sea runs over the reef without breaking. Two

10.1m patches lie 0.5 mile W and SW, respectively, of the drying portion of Hebe Reef. 

3.9 West Head (41°04'S., 146°42'E.), the W entrance point of

Port Dalrymple, projects 0.7 mile from the line of coast and is

nearly 0.5 mile broad. Rocks, which dry 0.6m, extend 0.3 mile

N from the point.

Port Dalrymple to Launceston

3.10 Port Dalrymple lies at the mouth of the River Tamar,

which flows through a valley between two irregular chains of

hills that project out NW from the great body of inland mountains. In some places, these hills are wide apart and the river

then widens to a considerable extent; in others, they nearly

meet and contract it to narrow limits. Of the two chains of hills

which bound the valley, the E one terminates at Low Head. The

other chain descends to Badger Head, about 6.5 miles WSW of

Low Head. 

3.10 The ends of these chains, when seen from directly off the entrance, appear as two clusters of hills having some resemblance

to each other. In good weather the distant blue heads of the

black mountains are seen over the tops of both clusters.

The port limits are a line drawn from the N extremity of

West Head, NE to the highest part of Hebe Reef, then ESE to

the N extremity of Low Head. 

3.10 Tides—Currents.—At the pilot station, springs rise 3.1m,

neaps 2.8m. The rise is irregular, the greatest observed being

3.1m and the least 1.2m. The highest tide noticed was during

the neaps, caused by a strong NW gale. The flood current runs

at a velocity varying from 2 to 5 knots, according to whether

the river is in a confined or open area. The ebb current setting

around Low Head into the bay to the E drifts vessels in that direction. At 3 miles in the offing, the flood current runs WNW

at 1 to 2 knots. 

3.10 At Low Head, the flood current runs for 50 minutes; at Georgetown it runs for 40 minutes, after HW by the shore; springs

rise 3m.

3.10 At Launceston, springs rise 4m. During winter, after rains,

the current sets down for several days at a velocity of 1 to 3

knots. 

3.10 Depths—Limitations.—Sea Reach Channel has a least

depth of 10m (1999). This is the controlling depth for Bell Bay

and Beauty Point. Vessels are required to have an underkeel

clearance of 1.4m. The maximum permissible draft is 9m at

LW and 11.1m at HW. Vessels up to 168m in length can enter

the port at any time, draft permitting. Vessels over 168m in

length may enter only during the flood current and may enter at

night only at the discretion of the pilot.

3.10 The channel between Rosevears (41°19'S., 147°00'E.) and

Launceston had a least depth of 3m (1998) as far as Kings

Wharf, 38 miles from the entrance, to which vessels of 100m in

length with a maximum draft of 5.5m can proceed at HW.

3.10 In the lower reach of the Tamar, the channels along Beauty

Point, Bell Bay, and Long Reach have least depth of 10.8m. A

marine farm has been established along the S bank of Long

Reach 0.5 miles W of Middle Point.

3.10 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels 35m long or

over, unless an exemption certificate for the port is held. Vessels making appropriate signals should wait in the offing about

0.5 mile E of the range or, if necessary, at the anchorage until

instructed by the pilot station to proceed to pick up the pilot.

Pilots usually board 3.3 miles NW of Low Head Light in position 41°00.7'S, 146°44.4'E. Vessels requiring a pilot to enter

Port Dalrymple should not proceed S of 41°02'S. 

3.10 The pilot boat, painted blue and orange, displays the sign

“PILOT.” The pilot station is about 0.5 mile SSE of Low Head.

3.10 The pilot station, pilot launch, and tugs are equipped with

VHF channels 12 and 16; the call sign is “Tamar Pilot.” The pilot station is on the air about 1 hour prior to a ship’s arrival if

notified of the arrival time. If contact is required earlier,

Launceston Radio may be called and the pilot station will be

notified by telephone.

3.10 Vessels of less than 107m in length may, when during heavy

weather and so instructed by the pilot station, proceed into the

harbor just within Shear Rock, located about 0.3 mile W of the

pilot station. Larger vessels, when unable to board the pilot,

may be instructed to remain outside until the weather moderates. Vessels above 170m in length overall are only taken in

during flood tide. Vessels exceeding 250m loa or 45m beam

must contact the harbormaster for instructions. 

3.10 Entry is dependent on the vessel’s draft coordinating with

tide cycle at George Town. A vessel would enter during a period between LW and 30 minutes after HW at George Town;

usually the pilot boards 15 minutes before such time. 

3.10 Regulations.—The vessel’s ETA should be advised by radio

24 hours before arrival. Vessels should maintain a listening

watch on VHF channels 12 and 16 while at anchor or transiting

the river. 

3.10 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available outside the harbor entrance, in 16.5 to 18.3m, with good holding ground, 1.5 to 2

miles NW of Low Head. Care should be taken to avoid the

8.7m patch reported NNE of the anchorage although its existence is extremely doubtful. This anchorage is not recommended in N winds in excess of force 5, as vessels are liable to drag

their anchors. 

3.10 Caution.—Considerable effect of local magnetic anomalies

cause the compass unusable at the approaches and in various

stretches of the River Tamar. 

3.10 There are unsurveyed areas and inadequately surveyed areas

at the approaches and inside the River Tamar where reefs and

shoals are present. 

3.10 The E shore of Port Dalrymple, from Low Head, trends 1.7

miles in a SE direction to She-Oak Point, and consists of alternate points and small bights, bordered by a shoal, the 5.5m

edge of which projects 0.1 to 0.4 mile from the LW line. The

shoal extends as a spit 0.1 mile NW from Low Head; off Dotterell Point, 0.3 mile S of the light, it projects 0.4 mile W, nearly to Middle Bank. 
Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 59

Pub. 127

3.11 Middle Channel, the main entrance, lies between the

Middle Bank, on the NE, and Yellow Rock, on the SW side. It

is nearly 0.2 mile wide, with a least depth of 15.8m on the entrance range. Middle Bank (41°03'S., 146°47'E.), the most dangerous shoal in the entrance of Port Dalrymple, is a rocky

patch 0.3 mile long and 0.2 mile wide, located 0.5 mile WSW

from Low Head, with depths of 2.1 to 3.7m over its outer part.

The sea breaks heavily over this bank in bad weather; and there

are always heavy tide ripples on the ebb and flood. A light

stands on the SW extremity of the bank.

3.11 Barrel Rock, which uncovers at half ebb, is marked by a beacon and lies about 0.7 mile S of the light structure on Low

Head.

3.11 Barrel Spit, a rocky ledge with less than 3.7m at LW, extends

from the beacon 0.2 mile in a S direction, the S extremity of

which, with 4.1m of water, is marked by a lighted beacon. 

3.11 Range lights are shown from two towers, painted white with

a vertical red stripe, on She Oak Point, about 1.7 miles SSE of

Low Head. The lights are 0.2 mile apart and kept in line bearing 128° lead through Middle Channel. 

3.11 For vessels approaching from the NE, these lights will be

seen showing white and red across the neck connecting Low

Head with the mainland, but farther W they will be shut out by

the high land of Low Head until the entrance to the river opens

to the SE, when both lights will be seen showing red.

3.11 The inner reach of Middle Channel, from Middle Bank to

just inside of Shear Rock, is marked by two lighted beacons

standing about 0.3 mile N of She Oak Point, and in line bearing

123°, lead about 0.1 mile NE of Shear Rock.

3.11 On the S side of the middle channel, about 0.7 mile SW of

Low Head, is Yellow Rock, marked by a lighted beacon, an extensive patch of kelp with a double-headed rock, on which the

least depth is 2.7m. This rock forms the E extremity of West

Reef, the N edge of which extends from it nearly 0.8 mile in a

W direction. This reef is about 0.3 mile wide, but the only part

of it uncovered at HW is Black Reef, which is 0.6m high, near

the center, about 1 mile SW of Low Head. 

3.11 Shear Reef, marked by a beacon, dries 2.1m and is connected with West Reef by shoal water where the greatest depth does

not exceed 4.6m. A spit, with a depth of 2.7m on its extremity,

projects 0.1 mile NE from Shear Reef. Shear Rock, with a

depth of 0.3m, lies just within the end of the spit.

3.11 A light is shown from the S side of the channel, close E of

Shear Rock, in a position about 0.8 mile S of Low Head. 

3.12 Sea Reach Channel has a least depth of 10.4m over

the outer edge of Honduras Bank. Toroa Patch, with a dredged

depth of 10.4m on the range line, lies about 1 mile S of She

Oak Point. The patch has a least depth of 7.6m close E of the

channel and must be avoided by deep-draft vessels. Honduras

Bank lies about 1 mile S of She Oak Point, with a depth of

3.3m on its E part, extends about 0.4 mile from the W shore

and is marked by a lighted beacon. 

3.12 The W side of Sea Reach Channel is marked by a lighted

beacon on Northwest Bank in a position about 0.4 mile WNW

of She Oak Point, and by a lighted beacon standing on Elbow

Spit about 0.6 mile SSW of She Oak Point.

3.12 A light shown from a position about 0.3 mile SSE of the

light structure on Low Head forms a range of 345.5° with that

light, to lead through Sea Reach Channel to Elbow Spit. 

3.12 Simmons Mistake is a reef extending out from the E shore in

a position about 0.5 mile S of She Oak Point. The W edge is

marked by a lighted beacon.

3.12 A lighted beacon stands about 1.2 miles S of Simmons Mistake. It marks the edge of a flat extending W from George

Town.

3.12 Bombay Rock (41°06'S., 146°48'E) located 0.3 mile NW

from the above beacon, has a depth of 3.6m and is marked on

its NW edge by a lighted beacon.

3.12 Two lighted beacons, situated on the S shore of Kelso Bay on

the W side of the channel, in line bearing 182.2°, give the line

of the channel past Honduras Bank and Bombay Rock.

3.12 Kelso Bay is filled with a flat that extends about halfway

across the river towards George Town. The N extremity of this

flat forms a spit, with a depth of 0.9m, marked on its NW edge

by a lighted beacon. 

3.12 Garden Island is a small island located on the W side of the

channel, SSW of George Town. Three lights are shown along

the E shore of Garden Island. A beacon stands on the NE side

of the bank, 0.3 mile NW of the SW extremity of Garden Island, and a lighted beacon stands 0.2 mile farther NW.

3.12 Range lights stand on the E shore about 0.5 mile S of George

Town, and in line bearing 126°, show the line of the channel to

Garden Island; a reciprocal pair of range lights, bearing 306°,

stands on the opposite shore. 

3.12 Power cables cross the river in an E-W direction from a position about 0.1 mile S of Saltpan Point. The cables are marked

on both shores by two beacons; anchorage is prohibited within

0.1 mile either side of the beacons.

3.12 A light is shown from Point Effingham in a position about 1

mile SSE of Saltpan Point. Tugs usually meet vessels off this

point. 

3.12 Shag Rock, about 0.3 mile SW of Point Effingham, is just

covered at HW. There is deep water close around the rock, and

34.7m between it and the shore. A beacon marks the rock and a

light is shown about 100m SE of the rock.

3.13 Beauty Point (41°09'S., 146°49'E.) (World Port Index

No. 54943) stands on the W shore of the River Tamar. The

Beauty Point Wharf extends about 150m from Beauty Point,

0.5 mile S of Inspection Head. Five dolphins lie NNW and two

dolphins SSE on the line of the end of the wharf. A marina is

situated NW of the wharf. A charted area, prohibited to navigation, lies off the pier.

3.13 Inspection Head Wharf, with two berths, lies about 0.5 mile

N of Beauty Point and close S of Inspection Head. The wharf

has a length of 335m and a depth of 9.9m alongside. There is

swinging room of 259m, with a least depth of 11m, abreast the

N end of the wharf. A light is shown from the N extremity of

the wharf.

3.13 The channel leading to Inspection Head Wharf has a least

depth of 18.3m, and is marked by beacons and lighted beacons.

A light stands on Orari Bank, a 3.9m patch, that lies on the E

side of the entrance. A pile beacon, showing a light, stands in

4.6m, 0.1 mile E of Inspection Head Wharf and marks the W

edge of the shoals E of the channel.

3.13 The channel from Inspection Head to the wharf at Beauty

Point has a least depth of 12.2m in the fairway.

3.13 From the entrance to Beauty Point the channel trends E,

passing N of Middle Island to Bell Bay. The channel is marked
60 Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 

Pub. 127

on each side by lighted beacons. 

3.14 Port Dalrymple (41°08'S., 146°52'E.) (World Port

Index No. 54940), also known as Bell Bay, is the largest port in

Tasmania and lies on the N shore of the River Tamar. The port

is sheltered from prevailing winds and has ample space and

depth to allow large vessels to swing and berth under their own

power. The industrial complex of Bell Bay stands on the W

shore. The Comalco Works is a prominent feature. The channel

leading to Bell Bay has a least depth of 10.8m and is marked

by lighted beacons. An underkeel clearance of 1.4m is required

by vessels, with a maximum allowable draft of 9m at LW and

11.5m at HW. Local knowledge is necessary. 

3.14 The quarantine lines for Port Dalrymple are, as follows:

1. A line drawn 152° through Saltpan Point (41°06.4'S.,

143°48.9'E.) and Point Effingham to the S shore. This line

affects vessels approaching Bell Bay and Launceston.

2. A line drawn from Inspection Head 079° to Middle Island. The line affects vessels approaching Beauty Point Harbor.

3.14 Quarantine clearance can be obtained at any time, day or

night. 

3.14 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be taken in 8m about 0.2

mile NW of Bell Bay No. 2 Light, with soft regular bottom,

and out of the strength of the current, where a vessel not having

a docking pilot or berth is recommended to wait before proceeding to Bell Bay or Launceston. 

3.14 Anchorage is prohibited in the vicinity of submarine cables

and pipelines as portrayed on the chart in the area between

Clarance Point and Saltpan Point, Anchor Point and Deceitful

Cove, NW of Point Effingham, and at the entrance to West

Arm. 

3.14 An extensive bank, with depths of less than 5.5m, fronts the

SW shore of Long Reach. The bank, extending up to 0.6 mile

offshore, congests the channel from Bell Bay to Little Dragon

Beacon (41°10'S., 146°54'E.), and includes West Olverine

Shoal. A marine farm lies just W of Great DragonBeacon.

3.14 Shoals, with depths of 4 to 5.2m, lie about 0.2 to 0.3 mile N

from Point Rapid, nearer to the S than the N shore. The main

channel is to the E of the shoals.

3.14 From Point Rapid, the W shore of Moriarty Reach trends

SW 1 mile to Ruffins Bay, off the S point of which there are

some rocks marked by a beacon, and then sweeps around in a

SSW direction about 1.2 miles to a point close off which is

Drumstick Islet, with sunken rocks along its SE side marked by

beacons. 

3.14 The E shore of Moriarty Reach from Long Reach trends SW

1 mile to Sheep Tail Point, then 0.5 mile S to another point. Between this point and Rockey Point, 0.7 mile SSW, lies Redwood Bay.

3.14 At the entrance of this bay is Reids Rock, which uncovers at

half-ebb and is 0.2 mile long, NNE-SSW, with a red beacon on

it. The channel between Reids Rock and the W shore is 0.1

mile wide, with a least depth of 14.6m.

3.14 Redwood Islet lies 0.1 mile SW of the SW point of the bay

just described, from which point the shore trends SSW 0.5 mile

to the E point of the NW entrance of Whirlpool Reach; the

channel between Redwood Islet and Drumstick Islet is 0.1 mile

wide, with a least depth of 21.9m.

3.15 Whirlpool Reach, from its NW entrance, trends SE

nearly 1 mile and is less than 0.1 mile wide, with irregular

depths of 12.8 to 36.6m.

3.15 Whirlpool Rock is just within the NW entrance of Whirlpool

Reach. It is composed of numerous pinnacles of blue stone, intermingled with thick clay, and is about 36.6m by 27.4m in extent at LWS. It lies nearly in the center of the channel and

150m from the E shore, and has a depth of 4.6m. This rock narrows the main channel, which lies to the W, to about 100m.

3.15 Two white beacons on the E shore, when in line, show when

a vessel is abreast of the rock. The alignment of two beacons

on Oak Bluff clears close SW of the rock.

3.15 The Batman Bridge crosses Whirlpool Reach, at the narrowest part, from Oak Bluff to the E shore. The bridge, with a vertical clearance of 27.7m, is marked by lights at each side of the

span and at the E tower.

3.15 From the SW side of the SE entrance of Whirlpool Reach,

the SW shore trends SE nearly 1.5 miles and then SSE 1.2

miles to the Supply River.

3.15 Spring Bay, a bight which indents the shoreline about 1.5

miles, is located between the SE entrance to Whirlpool Reach

and Mowbray Point, about 1.2 miles farther SE. At 0.3 mile

within the entrance is Middle Bank, with a depth of 1.2 to

5.5m. There is a channel with 11 to 20.1m all around the bank.

3.15 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 9.1 to 14.6m, sand

and shell, between the SE entrance to Whirlpool Reach and

Middle Bank.

3.15 From Whirlpool Reach to Mowbray Point, the depths in the

fairway are 14.6 to 31.1m. About 1 mile SSE of Mowbray

Point, a shoal bank, with depths of 6.9 to 7.8m, extends across

the channel to a drying spit that extends NW from Egg Islet.

3.15 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 11.4m, about 0.4

mile SW of Egg Islet. 

3.16 Hillwood Explosives Wharf is situated on the N shore

about 0.5 mile E of Egg Islet. The timber-berthing head is

about 20m long, with a depth of 4.6m at the outer end of the

wharf.

3.16 From Egg Islet, the channel trends ESE 1.5 miles past Swan

Point and is 0.3 mile wide, with depths of 14.6 to 25.6m between the NE shore and the shoals which extend from Swan

Point. A submarine cable is laid from Swan Point in a NNE direction to the opposite shore. A beacon stands on the shore at

each cable landing.

3.16 The river then increases to 1 mile in width, but the channel is

only 400m wide or less, with depths varying from 8.8 to

19.2m. South from Stony Creek, about 2.5 miles S of Swan

Point, the river contracts to 0.3 mile in width, the channel here

being only 200m wide.

3.16 Gem Rock, at the entrance to Stony Creek, is dry at LW and

marked by a beacon.

3.16 About 0.5 mile S of Stony Creek, there is a jett,y with a

depth of 3.4m alongside its outer end.

3.16 From Stony Creek the river sweeps around E 2.7 miles to

Cimitiere Point and is generally about 600m across. The channel being 150 to 200m wide, with depths of 5.5 to 17m in the

fairway.

3.16 From Cimitiere Point to Launceston, the channel, with a

least depth of 3m, is indicated by numerous lighted beacons,

but it is unnecessary to describe it, as a pilot or local knowl-
Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 61

Pub. 127
62 Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 

Pub. 127

edge is absolutely necessary.

3.16 Caution.—An overhead cable, crossing the river about 0.5

mile above Launceston, limits the masthead height to 28m.

3.17 Launceston (41°27'S., 147°07'E.) (World Port Index

No. 54970), the second city in Tasmania, is situated at the head

of the River Tamar, which, following the winding course of the

river, is 38 miles from the sea. It lies in a valley enclosed with

hills.

3.17 Vessels of up to 106m in length and a draft of up to 5.3m can

proceed to Launceston. The Town Pier at Launceston has a berthing length of 135m with a depth of less than 3m alongside

and is subject to silting. There is a swinging basin opposite the

wharf with the same depth. The Synchrolift berth is situated at

the N end of the disused King’s Wharf. It has a length of 105m

and a depth of 4.5m alongside. The width of the channel in the

approach is about 122m. Owing to the narrowness of the channel, passing vessels cause a considerable scend rendering it

necessary for those in charge of vessels lying alongside the

wharves to keep a careful lookout on the moorings.

3.17 Pilotage.—See paragraph 3.10.

Launceton to Devonport

3.18 Badger Head (41°06'S., 146°39'E.) and another projection 1.5 miles S of Badger Head, are rocky and the NW termination of the Asbestos Hills, in which the mineral of that

name is found. The hills are from 289 to 396m high, and in

clear weather are conspicuous from seaward. From the rocky

projection S of Badger Head, a low coast curves in a SW direction 4 miles to a spit forming the SE side of the entrance of

Port Sorell.

3.18 Port Sorell (41°08'S., 146°33'E.) is only available for small

craft and boats.

3.18 From the NW entrance to Port Sorell, the coast trends 7.5

miles SW to the entrance of the River Mersey, and may be approached within 1 mile in from 7.3 to 12.8m, except at about

4.5 miles W of Port Sorell, where Horseshoe Reef extends 1.5

miles from the shore.

3.18 Egg Islet and Wright Islet are two rocks, one on the N and

the other on the SW part of Horseshoe Reef, which consists of

detached dry and sunken rocks.

Devonport (41°11'S., 146°22'E.)

World Port Index No. 54920

3.19 Devonport has, next to Port Dalrymple, the best and

most secure anchorage on the N coast of Tasmania. The entrance to Devonport may be easily recognized by its W head,

Mersey Bluff, high land with a light on it. A reef, discernible

from the broken water on it, projects 0.1 mile from the shore

between the bluff and the river entrance.

Port of Devonport

http://www.portdev.com.au

Devonport 
Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 63

Pub. 127

The River Mersey, which flows into Devonport, is navigable

for a distance of about 1.5 miles. A training wall, situated on

the E side of the entrance channel, is awash at HW in two places and the outer end is submerged. 

3.19 Tides—Currents.—Both the flood and ebb currents attain a

velocity of 1 to 2 knots inside the river, but after heavy rains

the ebb has been known to run 4 knots.

3.19 There is always an eddy off the wharf on the W side of the

channel. This ceases for an interval of about 10 minutes at SW.

On the flood, this eddy, which runs parallel to the wharf, is

only felt at a distance of about 30m. On the ebb the eddy sets

onto the wharf.

3.19 Outside the port, the flood is the W current and is not felt beyond 5 miles from the coast.

3.19 The average range of the tide has been observed to be 3m.

3.19 Depths—Limitations.—There is a bar across the entrance

consisting of sand, which does not alter, except during a NW

gale, when it may silt up slightly. 

3.19 A dredged channel, about 76m wide, leads through the entrance of the harbor to a 300m wide turning basin, about 1 mile

above the entrance. The entrance channel is maintained to a

depth of 9.5m; the turning basin is maintained to a depth of

9.2m. There are no air draft restrictions in the port area. 

3.19 There are four berths on the W bank of the River Mersey and

three berths on the E bank.

3.19 Berth No. 1 East is used for passenger and freight ferries. It

can accommodate vessels up to 170m in length and has a depth

of 6.7m alongside. This berth also has a stern ramp 11.4m in

width.

3.19 Berth No. 2 East is dedicated to ro-ro vessels. It can accommodate vessels up to 180m in length and has a depth of 6.7m

alongside. This berth also has a stearn ramp 23m in width.

3.19 Berth No. 3 East is used for general purpose including containers, general cargo, bulk clay, gypsum and fertilizer. It can

accommodate vessels up to 225m and has a depth 11.7m

alongside.

3.19 Berth No. 1 West handles bulk cement. It can accommodate

vessels up to 185m with a depth of 9.2m alongside.

3.19 Berth No. 3 West handles general cargo and bulk tallow. It

can accommodate vessels up to 180m in length and has a depth

ranging from 5.2 to 7.2m alongside.

3.19 Berth No. 4 West handles oil products, bulk tallow, containers, livetock and general cargoes. It can accommodate vessels

up to 225m in length and has a depth of 10.3m alongside.

3.19 Berth No. 5 West is used by tankers and passenger vessels. It

can accommodate vessels up to 110m in length with a depth of

6.2m alongside.

3.19 The largest vessel to have used the port was 225m long, with

a draft of 10.5m.

3.19 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels and

any vessel exceeding 35m length. The pilot boards all vessels,

weather permitting, in an area about 3 miles NE of Mersey

Bluff.

3.19 Vessels requiring the services of a pilot are advised to radio

their ETA and draft 12 hours prior to arrival. 

3.19 Signals.—A fixed blue light by night, and an orange-colored

shape displayed by day, shown at the masthead of the pilot station flagstaff, indicate that a vessel is leaving the port, when the

channel is closed to incoming vessels.

3.19 Regulations.—The quarantine line for the port is drawn

090°-270° through Mersey Bluff Light.

3.19 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken 2 miles NNE of Mersey Bluff Light. Caution should be exercised when anchoring

in NW winds. 

Devonport to Burnie

3.20 The River Don (41°10'S., 146°20'E.), about 1.5 miles

W of Devonport, is narrow and shallow with two or three villages within. Don Bluff is higher than Mersey Bluff, and has

cultivated land and dead trees upon it. A reef, which projects

0.3 mile from Don Bluff, serves to break the sea from the immediate entrance.

3.20 A radio mast stands on Don Hill, about 1 mile W of Don

Bluff; another radio mast stands on a 79m hill, about 0.5 mile S

of the first.

3.20 The Forth River (41°09'S., 146°15'E.), the mouth of which

forms Port Fenton, lies 4 miles W of the River Don and has a

bar at the entrance which nearly dries at LW. A reef projects

from the headland on each side of the entrance. About 1 mile N

of the mouth of the river there is a bank, with depths of less

than 3.7m, upon which the sea breaks at LW.

3.20 A rock, with a depth of 4.1m, lies 5.7 miles WNW of Mersey

Bluff.

3.21 Ulverstone (41°10'S., 146°10'E.) is situated on the E

bank of the River Leven, a short distance within the entrance.

The entrance of the river, which is open to the NE, lies between

masses of irregular and pinnacle-shaped rocks and ledges, with

a bar across it. The mouth is wide and well-sheltered from the

prevailing W winds by the reefs extending N from Picnic Point,

the W entrance head, under the lee of which there is good temporary anchorage outside the bar, in moderate weather, for vessels awaiting the tide. The coarse sandy bar at the entrance of

the River Leven has a dredged channel across it, with a depth

of about 1.2m. 

3.21 Channel Rock, which dries 0.3m, lies 0.5 mile NE of the E

breakwater head and is the principal danger in the entrance to

the River Leven. Half-Tide Rock lies about 0.5 mile E of Channel Rock. This rock is sufficiently distant from the entrance not

to form a danger if its position is known. Black Jack Rock,

Devonport—No. 3 Berth West and No. 4 Berth West
64 Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 

Pub. 127

which also dries, lies at the elbow of the W breakwater and extends SE toward the entrance channel.

3.21 A beacon, 4.5m high, stands on the E breakwater at the entrance.

3.21 There is a wharf, 137m in length, with a depth of 2.1m

alongside. The harbor is now used by recreational craft only.

3.21 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but a pilot is available and should be employed by vessels without local knowledge.

3.22 Dial Range is a ridge of mountains, 485m high, some

5 miles W of the mouth of the River Leven, and terminating to

the N in two headlands lying NW and SE, 2.5 miles from each

other; the SE projection is Dial Point. Both heads are fronted

by dry and covered rocks.

3.22 Round Hill Point (41°04'S., 145°57'E.) is backed by Round

Hill. A light stands on Round Hill Point, which has been reported to give a good radar return up to 23 miles. Another beacon stands about 0.1 mile SE of this beacon. These beacons, in

line bearing 138°, are useful as cross bearings in the approach

to the harbor of Burnie. Between Round Hill Point and Blackman Point, 2.2 miles W of it, is Emu Bay, into which flows the

small Emu River.

3.22 Caution.—An isolated 11m patch lies about 1 mile NNE of

Round Hill Point. Several isolated rocky patches, best seen on

the chart, lie N of Blackman Point. Vessels should round

Blackman Point at a distance of not less than 1.2 miles and,

when approaching the bay, should remain in depths of 20m or

greater until alignment on the entrance range is negotiated.

Burnie (41°03'S., 145°55'E.)

World Port Index No. 54880

3.23 Burnie occupies the W portion of Emu Bay. The bay

is 2 miles wide W to E and stretches 1 mile N from Parsonage

Point, 0.5 mile NW of Blackman Point. Vessels approaching

from the W should keep within the safe sector of Round Hill

Point Light and in depths of no less than 20m to the pilot station. Vessels approaching from the E shoul keep 2 miles off

Round Hill Point to the pilot station. The port is fog free and

has no restriction on night movements. From the approaches to

the berth, the port has a least depth of 10m.

3.23 Depths—Limitations.—Berthing information is given in

the accompanying table titled Burnie—Berthing Information. The port is protected by two breakwaters. The port has

deep water, with 10m in the approaches to the berths. 

3.23 Aspect.—Saint Valentines Peak, about 19 miles SSW of

Burnie, is a bare mass of granite. As it glistens in the first

beams of the morning sun like an immense spire, it becomes

the most remarkable hill feature on the N coast of Tasmania.

The peak can be seen on a clear day from 60 miles.

3.23 A conspicuous chimney and a water tower stand 0.5 mile S

and about 1 mile SSW, respectively, of the Emu River entrance.

3.23 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 35m

long. Vessels are advised to provide ETA at the boarding position 24h in advance. The pilot boards about 2 miles NE of the

breakwater. If a pilot is not employed, berthing instructions

will be transmitted on VHF radiotelephone, or if necessary by

flashing light from the signal station. The pilot boat is

equipped with VHF radiotelephone.

3.23 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in the ba,y but as a

swell is nearly always setting in around the reef off Blackman

Point, it is advisable to anchor in a position about 2 miles NE

of Blackman Point in the vicinity of pilot boarding place, preferably in alignment with the leading line on 224°, sand and

clay bottom. A vessel should not anchor in a depth of less than

13m.

3.23 Caution.—Vessels should keep clear of the breakwater because of the possibility of a strong set to the N.

3.23 Unless vessels are equipped with synthetic mooring lines,

shore springs are required, as some surging occurs alongside

the piers.

3.23 Due to the narrowness of berthing slips, tugs are required for

single screw and cargo vessels.

Burnie to Stanley

3.24 The mouth of the River Inglis (40°59'S., 145°44'E.)

is open to the NE and is protected from all winds W of NNW

by Table Cape. It is further protected by a ledge of rocks extending to the NE from the left bank of the river, upon which

ledge an embankment of stones has been formed. This ledge is

marked by a lighted beacon. It is also protected from the E by

ledges of rocks extending from the shore in that direction.

There is said to be no outer bar at the River Inglis. The depth

over the inner bar is about 2.4m.

3.24 Table Cape (40°57'S., 145°44'E.) is the cliffy extremity of

woody flat-topped land. The cape is reported to give a good radar return up to 28 miles. A red obstruction light is shown from

a hill in a position about 6.5 miles SW of Table Cape.

3.24 From Table Cape, the coast extends W about 7 miles to a low

point surmounted by The Sisters, two remarkable round hills.

A reef, with a small islet on it, projects N nearly 1 mile from

the point. A detached patch lies ENE about 0.5 mile from the

islet.

3.24 On the W side of the reef is a sandy bay, with a depth of

3.7m near the shore. This bay is apparently protected from the

Burnie Port Corporation

http://www.burnieport.com.au

Burnie—Berthing Information

Berth Length Depth 

alongside Remarks

1 85m 10.0m Former tanker berth. No 

longer used.

4 183m 10.5m

5 213m 11.0m

Bulk cargo and petroleum 

discharge. Maximum 

vessel length of 250m.

6 198m 11.5m Maximum vessel length 

of 280m.

7 219m 11.5m Ro-ro. Maximum vessel 

length of 250m.
Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 65

Pub. 127

E by the reef, with the islet on it, which projects from the point.

The coast from the point to Rocky Cape, about 4.5 miles NW

of it, is bordered with rocks.

3.24 Rocky Cape (40°51'S., 145°31'E.) has a high pointed summit, with other peaks inland, rising to a height of 330m. The

head is bordered with rocks. A rock, that dries 0.6m, surrounded by a reef, lies about 1 mile NE of the head. Foul ground extends about 1.5 miles N from Rocky Cape.

3.24 Sawyer Bay extends from Rocky Cape WNW for 11 miles to

Circular Head. It has low sandy shores, except between the Detention River, 3 miles SW from Rocky Cape, and the Black

River, 5 miles S from Circular Head, where the shore is rocky

with hills rising behind it.

3.24 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in the roads of Stanley Harbor, in a depth of 11m, sand and clay. In E winds, anchorage should be taken, in a depth of 8.5m, about 0.1 mile

WSW of the main berth of the port. This anchorage avoids the

swell that E winds set into the bay.

3.25 Port Latta (40°51'S., 145°23'E.) (World Port Index

No. 54875) is an open sea loading terminal. The pier, which is

equipped with a conveyor, has an ore berth at its head that can

accommodate vessels up to 245m in length, with an alongside

depth of about 15.2m. Ore carriers of more than 100,000 dwt

and tankers are only berthed in daylight.

3.25 The use of a mooring master is compulsory. The mooring

master will board about 2 miles N of the facility and will generally remain on board until departure. A VHF radiotelephone

is available.

3.25 Aspect.—A large conspicuous pellet plant stands on the

shore close to the main facility. In thick weather Circular Head,

Rocky Cape, and the ship loader facilities are reported to give

good radar returns.

3.25 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 35m in

length. The pilot boards 2 miles NE of the jetty head and remains on board throughout the stay of the vessel.

3.25 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor in the vicinity of the pilot

boarding place, in a depth of 29m.

3.26 Circular Head (40°46'S., 145°18'E.) is the E point of

a peninsula which projects N from the coast and is 0.5 to 1.5

miles wide. The isthmus, which connects this peninsula with

the mainland, is low and narrow with an inlet on either side.

The Nut, which appears from the E like a small flat-topped island, is a singular mass of trappean rock rising abruptly from

the sea to the height of 151m and is visible in clear weather

from 30 miles. A slight covering of grass, with some bushes,

gives it a smooth appearance. The head, which is reported to

give a good radar return, is connected with the peninsula by a

narrow neck of lower land.

3.27 Stanley (40°46'S., 145°17'E.) (World Port Index No.

54870) is situated on the S shore of Circular Head and is protected by a breakwater on its E side. The Breakwater Pier has a

length of 161m and offers an alongside depth of 8m. A ro-ro

berth, with a mooring dolphin at its end, is 100m in long, with

depths of 8.8 to 5.8 at the inner end. Adjacent to the ro-ro berth

is Foreshore Wharf, which is 70m in length, with a depth of

4.9m alongside. The Fishermans’ Dock lies just to the W and is

formed by two breakwaters. Eight finger piers extend from the

S breakwater.

3.27 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot boards about 1

mile SE of the breakwater head. The harbormaster’s office is

equipped with VHF radiotelephone.

3.27 Caution.—There is a strong set running E at the S end of the

breakwater. It is especially strong during W and NW winds.

Stanley to the Fleurieu Group

3.28 Highfield Point (40°45'S., 145°18'E.) is a rocky

point, 41m high, with drying rocks lying close offshore.

3.28 North Point, about 2.5 miles NW of Highfield Point, is a low

shingle point with a dangerous rocky ledge, drying 0.9m at

LW, extending ENE 0.8 mile from it.

3.28 A beacon stands 0.1 mile from the E extremity of the reef extending from North Point.

3.28 There are heavy tide rips off this reef with E winds. Shoals

also extend about 1 mile NW from North Point.

3.28 Tides—Currents.—Both the flood and ebb set over the reef

E of North Point at a velocity of 2 to 3 knots.

3.28 From the W side of North Point the coast, with a beach of

sand and shingle, trends S 4 miles to West Inlet; then W, with a

sandy beach, 6 miles to the opening to Duck Bay. Westward of

the opening is Perkins Isle, the sandy coast trends NW 3.5

miles to Robbins Passage. Cape Elie, on the N side of Robbins

Passage, is 2.5 miles NNE of Perkins Isle.

3.28 Perkins Bay (40°46'S., 145°10'E.), between North Point and

Cape Elie, has a bottom of sand over clay and affords good

holding ground and good anchorage with E winds. A heavy

swell runs into this bay with strong N and NW winds. A disused submarine cable enters the bay on the NE side.

3.28 Robbins Passage, which separates Robbins Island from the

mainland, is bounded to the S by Perkins Isle and the coast, and

to the N by Robbins Island. The E entrance to Robbins Passage, which appears like the mouth of a river, is 2 miles wide

between the N point of Perkins Isle and Cape Elie, the SE point

of Robbins Island. The entrance to Robbins Passage is fronted

by a bank, with depths of less than 5m, extending up to 2 miles

offshore. The channel through the passage is suited for small

craft only.

3.28 Woolnorth Point (40°38'S., 144°44'E.), the NW extremity

of Tasmania, is low and rocky, with low sand hills partially

overgrown with coarse grass and scrub. Two miles SW from

the point, the land rises to a height of 82m and trends toward

the W coast of the island, which consists of open undulating

land from 91 to 122m high.

The Fleurieu Group

3.29 The Fleurieu Group consists of three principal and

many small conspicuous islands.

3.29 Robbins Island, the SE and second in size of the Fleurieu

Group, is a sandy island of a triangular form. The island is generally flat and swampy, but a ridge of hills, the summits of

which are bare and 51 to 70m high, lies at the SW end of the island, and a ridge of timbered hills, 76m high, lies near the E

point of the island. A belt of thick timber extends for 0.8 mile

from the S shore of Robbins Island.

3.29 Cape Elie (40°43'S., 145°04'E.), the SE extremity of Robbins Island, is low and sandy. Guyton Point, about 2 miles
66 Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 

Pub. 127

NNW of Cape Elie, divides the E side of Robbins Island into

two sandy beaches, the NW and more extensive of which

forms a slight indentation, called Ransonnet Bay, with a depth

of over 5.5m at a distance of 0.5 mile off it. Between Guyton

Point and Cape Elie, the bottom is foul for a distance of 0.6

mile offshore, but depths of 9.1m and over will be found at 1.5

miles off it.

3.29 Walker Island (40°36'S., 144°56'E.) is separated from Robbins Island by a narrow winding channel which dries in places

at LWS. A fringe of low hills borders the E and W sides of the

island, rising to a height of 27m at its SE point.

3.29 A chain of small islets and rocks, the highest 18m, extends E

for 0.3 mile from the N point of Walker Island, and a small

rock, 4.5m high, lies 0.6 mile SW from the same point and 0.2

mile offshore.

3.29 The Petrel Islets, a cluster of four principal islets, extend 1.5

miles N of Walker Island. The largest islet lies 0.5 mile N of

the N extremity of Walker Island and rises in a sand hill, the

top of which is covered with scrub to a height of 22m. The outer and NE islet is a reddish-colored rock and lies about 0.5 mile

NE of the last-mentioned islet; a rock, 0.3m high, lies off its N

end. The other two islets lie close NW and SW, respectively, of

the main islet, to which they are almost joined at LW. They are

of the same character as the NE islet, and are 21m and 19.8m

high, respectively.

3.29 Petrel Bank, mud and sand, with a least depth of 2.3m, extends to the E of the NE Petrel Islet. The E extremity of this

shoal, as defined by the 5.5m curve, is located in a position 3.5

miles, bearing 100°, from the NE Petrel Islet; the N edge of the

same shoal, which is steep-to, is located 1.5 miles, bearing

066°, from the NE Petrel Islet. The shoal is dangerous to vessels rounding the Petrel Islets, as no clearing marks can be given and the tidal currents are strong.

3.29 Walker Channel, on the W side of Walker Island, has a least

width of 0.3 mile and a least depth of 11.9m in the fairway.

This channel is considered dangerous without local knowledge.

3.30 Three Hummock Island (40°25'S., 144°55'E.) is the

NE island of the Fleurieu Group. It is of an oval form, with a

bay on its NW side, and a coastal ridge of moderately-elevated

land, partly bare of vegetation, extending from the S to the NE

point of the island. Three hills, from which the island derives

its name, rise gradually from this ridge; the S hill, a conical

peak 239m high, 1 mile NE of the S extremity, is the highest

part of the island. A conspicuous tower stands on this peak.

The N hill, 168m high and densely wooded, lies 1 mile SW of

Cape Rochon, the NE extremity of the island. About 1.5 miles

S of this hill is the third and intermediate hummock, 116m

high. The island has been reported to give a good radar return

up to 18 miles.

3.30 Between the S and NE extremities of Three Hummock Island, the coast consists of sandy bays and rocky points. On the

NW side is Coulomb Bay, a broad shallow bay, with a long

sandy beach. The shores of the island generally consist of a

number of rocky points with several off-lying boulders; one,

3m high, lies 0.1 mile off the S point of the island, with a depth

of 27.4m at a short distance. The largest and most conspicuous

of the several boulders on the W point of the island is 7.6m

high. The tidal currents are strong on the S side.

3.30 Taniwha Rock, with a depth of 1.5m, is located 0.5 mile,

bearing 074°, from the E extremity of Three Hummock Island,

with deep water around it. A rock, with a depth of 2.1m, lies

about 0.2 mile NW of Taniwha Rock. Some rocks, 0.3 to 0.9m

above water, lie between it and the shore.

3.30 A shoal of 2.7m is located about 1 mile E of the E extremity

of Three Hummock Island. A shoal, with a depth of 12.3m, lies

about 2.5 miles NNW of the NW extremity of the island.

3.30 Mermaid Rock, with depths of less than 1.8m, lies about 0.5

mile N of Cape Rochon. A rock, with a depth of 4.6m, was reported to lie 0.3 mile N of Mermaid Rock. There is deep water

close to Mermaid Rock, and a passage of a little more than 0.1

mile wide between it and the shore.

3.30 From Cape Rochon the rocky coast trends W 3.5 miles to the

NW extremity of the island, and then SE 1 mile to the NE point

of Coulomb Bay. There are depths of 8.2 to 12.8m in the bay. A

projection, 0.8 mile S of the SW point of the bay, forms the W

extremity of the island which, although rocky, may be rounded

at a distance of 0.5 mile in depths of 12.8 to 20.1m. A jetty,

with a few buildings standing nearby, projects from the shore

about 0.4 mile SE of the W extremity of the island.

3.31 Hunter Island (40°30'S., 144°45'E.), the W and largest of the Fleurieu Group, has a small rocky bight on the W

side. It is moderately elevated; the highest part, Chase Hill, lies

about 3.5 miles S of Cape Keraudren, a low, sloping, rocky

point, and the N extremity of the island. Its N part has a most

barren and sterile appearance, but its S coasts are formed by

wooded hills of moderate height.

3.31 A rock, which dries about 2.4m, lies 0.2 mile offshore, 1.2

miles SSW of Cape Keraudren.

3.31 The E side of Hunter Island has small sandy bays between its

slightly projecting points, off which there is a good anchorage,

in a moderate depth, with shelter from all but E winds.

3.31 Anchorage.—The best anchorage on the E side of Hunter

Island is in about 14.6 to 18.3m, from 1 to 1.5 miles offshore,

with the W extremity of Three Hummock Island bearing 019°

distant 3.5 miles. The approach to this anchorage between

Hunter Island and Three Hummock Island has a depth of

14.6m.

3.31 Dangerous Bank, upon which the sea breaks mainly with a

moderate swell, lies W of Cape Keraudren, with its shallowest

spot about 2 miles WSW of the cape. There is deep water between the cape and the bank, but the channel is not recommended.

3.32 Cuvier Bay (40°28'S., 144°45'E.), on the W side of

Hunter Island, cannot provide a desirable anchorage as it is exposed to W winds. Temporary anchorage can be taken during S

and E winds in the S part, in 14.6 to 18.3m, mud, 0.8 mile offshore. The coast in the bay is steep, except near the N part, and

rocks extend 0.5 mile N from the W point of the bay, which

should be given a berth of 1 mile.

Cutter Rock, with a depth of 5.5m, is located 0.7 mile W of

the W extremity of Hunter Island. A rock, which dries 0.3m,

lies about 0.5 mile S of Cutter Rock. These should be given a

wide berth.

3.32 Caution.—The W side of Hunter Island is rocky and, as

dangerous rocks and breakers extend considerably to seaward

from the W extremity of the island, it should be carefully

avoided.
Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 67

Pub. 127

3.33 Albatross Islet (40°23'S., 144°39'E.), 0.8 mile long,

N-S, and 0.3 mile wide, lies about 6 miles W of Cape Keraudren. The E side is an almost perpendicular cliff with deep water close-to. Both sides are steep, but rocks extend 0.2 mile

from the S extremity of the island. When seen from a SW by W

or NE by E direction, a deep notch in the middle of the island

appears to divide it.

3.33 There are strong tide rips over both ends of the island during

the strength of the currents.

3.33 North Black Rock, about 50m in extent and steep-to, lies

about 6 miles S of Albatross Islet.

3.33 South Black Rock, about 5.5 miles SSW of North Black

Rock, is a round mass about 0.1 mile in extent. A rock, which

dries 2.1m, lies about 0.5 mile SW of South Black Rock.

3.33 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents W of these islets and

reefs run at a velocity of 2 to 3 knots, the flood to the NE.

3.33 Steep Islet, about 4 miles E of South Black Rock, is 0.3 mile

wide and its summit is covered with grass. Its coasts are mostly

steep cliffs. Rocky ledges extend off its N and S sides and a

bank extends 0.3 mile off the E side. A rock, 3m high, lies 0.2

mile SW of its W extremity.

3.33 A rock, with a depth of 2.3m, lies about 1.5 miles E of the N

extremity of Steep Islet.

3.33 Nares Rocks (40°35'S., 144°41'E.) lie nearly 1 mile S of

Steep Islet and consist of four small rocky islets, the largest of

which is 8.8m high. A rock, which dries 1.8m, lies 0.4 mile

WNW, and another drying 2.4m, 0.1 mile E of the highest rock.

3.33 Delius Islet, 6.4m high, is the largest of a group of small

rocks located 1.2 miles E of Nares Rocks, on a reef about 0.2

mile in extent. Rocks lie 100m to the S and to the W of the reef.

A rock, which dries 2.1m, lies 0.3 mile N of the islet. Two other rocks lie between it and the islet. A shoal, with a depth of

7.3m, lies 0.8 mile NW of Delius Islet.

Bird Islet, about 1 mile S of Delius Islet, is 0.6 mile long, NS, and 15.2m high at its S end, with a channel 0.5 mile wide

between it and Keafer Point, the SW extremity of Hunter Island, in which the depths vary from 12.8 to 42m. A cairn

stands on the islets N extremity.

3.33 Brown Rocks, 8.5m high, are located about 1.5 miles W of

Bird Islet. They are a chain of bare rocks extending for 0.3 mile

E-W. A rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies 0.1 mile N of

the easternmost of the Brown Rocks.

3.34 Trefoil Island (40°38'S., 144°41'E.) is nearly 1 mile

in extent and receives its name from its resemblance to a clover

leaf. The S and W sides are abrupt cliffs; it is covered with

grass, but is bare of trees. The highest part of the island is over

the S extremity. Reefs extend from its NW and S sides.

3.34 A bank of sand, with depths of 2.7 to 5.5m, joins Trefoil Island with the mainland. It breaks heavily with W winds. Trefoil

Rock lies nearly midway between Trefoil Island and the W

side of Woolnorth Point, about 1.2 miles ESE of Trefoil Island.

3.34 The Henderson Islets, located about 1.5 miles NNE of Woolnorth Point, consist of a group of small islets and rocks occupying a space 0.8 mile long, N-S; the N islet is 4.5m high. They

are located on the foul ground which extends from Woolnorth

Point to Bird Islet.

3.34 A stone cairn stands on an islet, near the S end of this group,

about 0.4 mile SSW of the N and highest islet.

3.34 Crescent Bank is 4.5 miles long and about 0.5 mile wide. It

extends E from a position about 2 miles E of Woolnorth Point.

Its shallowest part is near the W end, 4.6m deep; the E part has

depths of 5.5 to 8.2m.

3.34 Tides—Currents.—East of Hunter Island, the W or flood

current begins at 4 hours 30 minutes to 3 hours 30 minutes before HW. It sets to the W between the Petrel Islets and Three

Hummock Island, when it divides, part running to the SW

through the channels between Walker Island and Hunter Island,

and then W between the islets S of the latter; the other part sets

N up Hope Channel, turning sharply to the W and SW around

Cape Keraudren and racing with great strength over Dangerous

Bank. The E or ebb current begins 3 to 3.5 hours after HW and

sets in the opposite direction.

3.34 West of Hunter Island, the flood or W current is met by the

flood current setting to the N up the W coast of Tasmania. In

general, within a distance of a few miles W of Hunter Island,

the current runs in accordance with the currents on the E side

of the island. These currents, however, are complicated by the

currents on the W coast of Tasmania, which often results in a

preponderance of set to the NE. The W and SW gales of winter

also greatly affect the currents W of Hunter Island.

3.34 The tidal currents set with great strength through Hunter Passage and the chain of islets and rocks between Hunter Island

and Woolnorth Point, attaining a velocity of 5 knots in places at

springs and forming heavy races off the points of the islands

and many swirls and eddies in the channel.

3.34 Reid Rocks (40°15'S., 144°10'E.) is a cluster of small rocks

located in an area of foul and dangerous ground was previously

described in paragraph 1.22.

3.34 Note.—Other dangers S and E of Reid Rocks are described

in paragraph 1.22.

Fleurieu Group to Macquarie Harbor

3.35 The waters off the W coast of Tasmania have been little surveyed, therefore, caution should be exercised when sailing this area. Lesser depths of water and unreported dangers

may exist in addition to what is described.

3.35 Cape Grim (40°41'S., 144°41'E.), the NW cape of Tasmania, is a bold grass-topped headland of dark-colored rock, with

an almost perpendicular front. A radio tower, approximately

90m high, reported conspicuous, stands on the headland. Steeple Rock, a fallen fragment from the cliffs above, lies close S

of it and is 43m high.

3.35 The Doughboys are two remarkable islets, with almost perpendicular sides, lying E and W of each other and close off

Cape Grim; their tops are covered with coarse grass. The W

doughboy lies 0.8 mile W of Cape Grim. There is deep water

close seaward of them.

3.35 The coast between Woolnorth Point and Cape Grim consists

of a sandy beach and a rocky point, fronted by dry and covered

rocks.

3.35 Tides—Currents.—At Cape Grim, the SW current has a velocity at springs of 5 knots and at neaps of 3 knots.

3.35 From Cape Grim, the coast, consisting of black cliffs, trends

about 4.5 miles S to Bluff Point, on the E side of which is Studland Bay, a small exposed sandy bight with an islet in it.

3.36 Hally Bayley Shoal (40°49'S., 144°23'E.), the position of which is approximate, lies about 13 miles NW of West
68 Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 

Pub. 127

Point. The area has a depth of 5.5m; the sea occasionally

breaks over the obstruction.

3.36 Porpoise Shoal lies about 7 miles W of West Point and has a

depth of 5.7m. The sea breaks over this shoal occasionally;

deep-water soundings have been obtained between it and the

coast.

3.36 West Point (40°57'S., 144°38'E.), about 16 miles S of Cape

Grim, is a sandy projection enclosed by dry and covered rocks.

3.36 Church Rock (40°49'S., 144°35'E.), the position of which is

approximate, lies about 3 miles S of West Point.

3.36 Sandy Cape (41°25'S., 144°45'E.) projects 2 miles from the

line of the coast and is reported to give a good radar return up

to 18 miles.

3.36 Between Sandy Cape and another projection, 18 miles SE

from it, the coast forms an exposed bight. The Pieman River

entrance is about 16.5 miles SSE of Sandy Cape.

3.36 There is a patch of dry and covered rocks close off the mouth

of the Pieman River; 1 mile to the S of it are two conical rocks

standing on a reef of dry and covered rocks extending along a

projecting part of the coast.

3.36 There are three bare rocks on the N side of the entrance to

the Pieman River. The least water on the bar is 3 to 3.6m, located S of the E rock. The sand forming the bar is continually

shifting; in good weather the entrance to the river is contracted

both in width and depth; after heavy rains the scour of the current deepens and widens the channel.

3.36 With S winds, the conical rocks S of the river entrance partly

break the sea on the bar; with NW or W winds the bar is very

dangerous with heavy breaking rollers.

3.36 From the Pieman River, the coast is rocky with a large projection, about 3 miles across, lying immediately S and rising to

Yarrana Hill. From the two previously-mentioned conical

rocks, the coast trends S for 19 miles to Trial Harbor and then

16 miles S, with a long sandy beach, to the entrance of Macquarie Harbor.

3.36 Trial Harbor is a small bight, sheltered from winds N of NW

by Heemskerk Point, and from the S by a low reef of rocks that

extends in a SW direction, but the harbor is wholly exposed between the NW and SW. It is a dangerous place is necessary.

Trial Harbor should only be approached during good weather.

3.36 Aspect.—From West Point to about 60 miles S of it, the

country is low for 2 or 3 miles inland. The land then rises gently to a chain of low barren hills, behind which there is a second chain much higher and better wooded than the first. Mount

Norfolk is located about 10 miles E of Sandy Cape and is the

middle and higher of a chain of hills which are conspicuous

from the offing and in clear weather are visible before the coast

abreast of them.

3.37 Cape Sorell (42°12'S., 145°10'E.) is a rocky projection of moderate height, forming an extensive bay between it

and the N end of the long sandy beach, in the S part of which is

the entrance of Macquarie Harbor. Cape Sorell is the W head

of the entrance.

3.37 Its extremity is low, terminating in straggling bare rocks of

brown appearance; the coast on each side is very rocky and

sterile. Many patches of breakers and above-water rocks lie detached from the shore. There is one small rock, just above the

water’s surface, lying 0.2 mile NW of the cape, with apparently

no safe channel inshore of it.

3.37 Watts Hill, about 1.5 miles E of Cape Sorell, is a conspicuous lump of rock on the NE part of the cape. An above-water

rock, connected with the coast by a reef, lies 0.1 mile NW of

the foot of the hill. There is a small rocky islet E of the hill

about 100m from the coast.

3.38 Macquarie Harbor (42°13'S., 145°14'E.) is an extensive sheet of water trending from its entrance 19 miles SE, and

is from 2 to 4 miles wide, with regular depths within the entrance ranging from 9.1 to 36.6m. It is the second-largest harbor in the southern hemisphere after Sydney

3.38 Pilot Bay extends from the foot of Watts Hill SE about 1

mile to the W entrance point of Macquarie Harbor and has a

sandy beach in the W bight. This bay is only accessible to

boats as it is being filled by the W sands of the bar. A light is

shown from the W entrance point.

3.38 Mount Antill, about 1 mile S of Watts Hill, is similar to it,

but has a remarkable double summit.

3.38 Entrance Island lies about 85m E of the steep rocky projection which forms the W entrance point of Macquarie Harbor.

The island is a mass of rock, having some small detached rocks

extending about 100m from its N point. The proper channel into Macquarie Harbor is between this island and the W entrance

point. A light is shown from the W side of Entrance Island. A

beacon stands about 40m SE of the light.

3.38 The channels are liable to alter in position and depth, owing

to the occasional great rush of water out through the banks and

shoals which, being composed of sand, are of a shifting nature.

It is not advisable to enter without local knowledge.

3.38 From a point located about 0.3 mile W of Entrance Island, a

breakwater extends from the shore in a 359° direction for a distance of 0.5 mile, then for a further distance of 0.2 mile in a

Copyright Commonwealth of Australia 2000, Bureau of Meteorology

Cape Gri from S
Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 69

Pub. 127

336° direction.

3.38 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at MHHW is 0.9m, at

MLHW it is 0.7m, but the height of tide is influenced by W and

NW gales, and by great freshets that, during the prevalence of

rainy or thick, cloudy weather, flow into the harbor from the

high mountains in the interior, at which periods the channels

between the shoals are deeper than usual. During a two week

observation, the tides were irregular, making HW sometimes

twice, and at other times only once in 24 hours, and in both

cases the ebb ran twice as long as the flood, producing a difference in the level of the water, which on several occasions did

not exceed the average fall of 0.5m.

3.38 An ebb for 9 days together, without the water rising or falling so much as 0.3m, has been experienced, although at other

times, during NW gales, the inundations were great, frequently

overflowing the adjoining lowlands.

3.38 The tides at Macquarie Harbor are very irregular, partly owing to their being disturbed by the winds, which have an extraordinary influence on the height of the water in the harbor.

The extreme range of tide seems to vary from 0.5 to 0.9m, but

this is so irregular that it is impossible to predict anything

about the tides, except that in good weather and with SW

winds the tides are low, but with strong N winds the tides are

highest. An onshore gale, or even a fresh breeze, may raise the

level of the lagoon to the extent of completely masking the

tides.

3.38 At the entrance, there is usually only one tide in 24 hours,

but a false tide often follows a short time after HW, the effect

of which is that after the water has begun to ebb strongly the

tide again rises, the ebb slackens for an hour or more, then finally the tide begins to fall, and the strong ebb sets out again.

The extensive shoals which obstruct the entrance prevent the

full effect of the sea tide reaching into the lagoons; thus, in fine

weather, with a range of tide up to 0.6m, there is a strong flood

and ebb tide into and out of the harbor, the effect of which extends even 20 miles up the Gordon River; but this range of 0.5

or 0.6m causes a range of only 23 to 38cm at Strahan, and the

same at the mouth of the Gordon River.

3.38 The tides are higher in winter than in summer to the extent of

nearly 0.3m; about the time of HW and LW the tide is slack for

more than an hour, while the water slowly rises for some time

before the flood tide; this phenomenon is said to account for

the extraordinary difference observed in the length of the ebb

as compared with the flood tide, the ebb being frequently 18

hours and the flood only 6 hours. With a N gale coming on, the

tide flows into the harbor very strongly, and often for 24 hours

continuously; the harbor then fills up 1 to 1.2m, and even 1.5m

above LW. As soon as the gale begins to abate, or even during

its height, if it shifts to the W, the water of the harbor ebbs out

with great force, the duration of the ebb being often 18 hours,

and only checked for 5 or 6 hours as the tide rises at sea. In

good weather there are often days when there are no tidal currents either in or out; on the other hand, the flood tide is longer

and the ebb shorter in good weather. In good weather, undisturbed by approaching bad weather or by floods in the rivers,

the flood and ebb tides are or nearly equal in duration; occasionally the flood tide attains a velocity of 4.2 knots, and this

generally indicates the approach of bad weather.

3.38 During a very heavy gale from the W, the range of tide varied

from 3 to 4m on the bar; the tide ebbed and flowed all through

the gale, with very a short flood, about 7 hours, and a long ebb,

about 17 hours.

3.38 Tidal signals are displayed from the port signal station situated on the W entrance point.

3.38 Great attention must be paid, not only to the ranges and to

obtaining quick soundings, but to the tidal currents, which run

here with great strength, and during freshets, sometimes at a

velocity of 5 and 6 knots.

3.38 In the narrow channel between Entrance Island and the W

rocky shore, the ebb tide runs at times like a cataract, with a velocity of 10 knots. In sailing against the ebb between Entrance

Island and the steep rocky point to the W of it, favor the W

shore while passing the island, as the tidal current sets strongly

out of a bight just within it, and is likely to set a vessel upon the

island.

3.38 Depths—Limitations.—The outer bar is located opposite

the center of the W breakwater. The bar had a reported depth

(2001) of less than 4.0m. Entering vessels are limited to a

length of 72m, and a draft of 3.6m. The depths in Macquarie

Harbor, between the spit off River Point and the reef projecting

from Headquarters Island, range from 7.3 to 36.6m in midchannel, and then generally decrease to 11 and 18.3m within

0.5 mile of the shore on either side. From at depth of 14.6m,

about 1 mile SE of Headquarters Island, the depths decrease to

3.7m on the bar of the Gordon River.

3.38 Pilotage.—Vessels bound for Strahan, in Macquarie Harbor,

should advise the Harbormaster, Hobart, of their ETA at the bar

at least 72 hours in advance, confirming or amending the time

as early as practicable. When within range, about 30 miles, a

vessel should contact the pilot station at the W entrance point

by VHF. Watch is kept when a vessel is expected. On receipt of

this information, the harbormaster will communicate to them

information regarding the bar conditions and local tides.

3.38 Vessels are to reduce speed to a minimum consistent with

safe navigation in the vicinity of Macquarie Heads. Vessels are

not to exceed 8 knots E of the 005° lead into Strahan Harbor.

3.38 As a rule, the pilot will board vessels from a wooden motor

launch, 0.1 mile N of the head of the W breakwater. In approaching this position, vessels should keep Bonnet Island

light more nearly in line with the W entrance point light structure than with that of Entrance Island. Pilotage is compulsory.

3.38 Regulations.—Landing is prohibited, without special permission, on Entrance Island and Bonnet Island.

3.38 From about 0.5 mile E of Entrance Island, the sandy beach,

which forms the E side of the entrance to Macquarie Harbor,

trends SW about 0.4 mile to Braddon Point, on each side of

which the land is low and sandy for several miles, and covered

with shrubs. The land which forms the W side of the channel is

steep and rises to irregular ranges of rocky hills of quartzite

and sandstone.

3.38 The W side of Braddon Point is fronted by a bank, the outer

edge of which extends W about 0.3 mile off the point nearly to

the opposite shore, then passing close to Entrance Island, and

0.5 mile N to a spit which always breaks, forming the E part of

the bar. From this spit, the NE edge of this bank trends SE to

within 0.3 mile of the beach.

3.38 Anchorage.—In the approach to the harbor entrance, there

is no shelter from winds between the N and W for anything except small vessels. Gales from the W and NW are frequent and

violent; when wind is expected from these quarters, anchorage
70 Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 

Pub. 127

outside the bar is unsafe.

3.38 In good weather, anchorage may be taken, in 22m, about 1.5

miles NW of the breakwater, while awaiting the pilot or the

tide.

3.38 Vessels carrying explosives must anchor S of a line drawn

from Regatta Point to Magazine Point.

3.38 A telegraph cable has been laid across Macquarie Harbor,

0.4 mile S of the W entrance point of the harbor, to a position

about 0.1 mile SE of Sandy Point. Two beacons, the positions

of which are approximate, mark the W end and there is a hut

between them and the shore. Vessels are cautioned against anchoring in the vicinity of the cable.

3.39 From the W entrance point, the W coast of the bay

trends S 0.5 mile and then SE 0.8 mile to Wellington Head, a

conspicuous hill, located 0.7 mile S of Braddon Point. This

head rises rather abruptly from the W side of the harbor, and is

easily distinguished by its table top, which is 76m above the

level of the sea and is separated from the other hills to the W by

a deep notch that gives it the appearance of being isolated before the connecting land becomes visible. There is a white

mark about halfway up the hills on the S side of the head.

3.39 Bonnet Island (42°13'S., 145°14'E.) lies close to the shore,

0.3 mile N of Wellington Head. It is small, with a round bushy

summit. The Cap is a small rock about 100m SSE of Bonnet Island.

3.39 Bowra Rock, with a depth of 0.9m, is located on the N side

of the channel about 0.1 mile NNE of the N extremity of Bonnet Island. A light is shown from the N side of Bonnet Island.

3.39 Channel Bay (42°15'S., 145°14'E.) extends from Wellington

Head 1 mile SE to Spur Point and recedes 0.5 mile. Its N entrance is blocked by the training wall built from Wellington

Head across the N entrance to Channel Bay and on the extensive shoal fronting Channel Bay. The wall extends 1.5 miles in

a curve, parallel to the sand banks about 0.2 mile distant.

3.39 Round Hill is a 95m high, steep projection, with Spur Point,

its N extremity, about 0.7 mile SSE of Wellington Head.

3.39 The N shore of Macquarie Harbor from Braddon Point

trends ESE 2.2 miles to River Point, and then sweeps around in

a NE direction about 1 mile to Yellow Bluff, and is fronted by

extensive sand banks, nearly dry at LW, which form the E and

N sides of the channel leading to the port of Strahan.

3.39 Kelly Channel is marked by beacons and buoys as far as the

deep-water portion of Macquarie Harbor. 

3.39 From Round Hill the SW shore forms a bight extending 1.5

miles SE to Backagain Point, a high projection, having 8.2m of

water close to it. The steep elevated shore of this bight is separated from the S extensive sandbanks in front of it by a narrow

channel, which is said to be finally lost among the shoals to the

E.

3.39 Between Backagain Point and Liberty Point, the N extremity

of a narrow sharp ridge of moderate elevation, lying 2.5 miles

ESE of Backagain Point, the coast forms two bights separated

by Table Head, a high steep flat-topped point, 1.5 miles ESE of

Backagain Point. Each of these two bights is about 0.8 mile in

extent, very shallow, the 3.7m curve being some 2 miles N of

the point.

3.39 Betsy Island and Bird Islet lie 0.7 and 0.6 mile E, respectively, of Backagain Point; the former, though little more than 0.1

mile in extent, is conspicuous, but the latter is a mere rock.

Both islets, together with the rocks about them, are connected

with and surrounded by the extensive sandbanks which stretch

2 miles to the N and NE from Table Head. These sand banks

are usually covered.

3.39 Kelly Channel, the passage from the entrance channel into

the deep water of Macquarie Harbor, is about 0.1 mile wide,

with from 3.7 to 5.5m of water at its W end, N of Round Hill.

The channel then trends E between the sand banks for 1.5

miles, with depths of 1.8 to 5.5m. Kelly Channel then gradually widens in an ENE direction to more than 1 mile at its E entrance between the sands, where the depths increase to more

than 21.9m.

The intensified sector of Bonnet Island Light leads over the

outer bar to a point abreast Entrance Island. Range beacons

shown from a point about 0.5 mile S of Entrance Island and

bearing 117.5°, lead from Entrance Island to the next set of

ranges. The second set of range beacons, bearing 322.5° astern,

lead to Bonnet Island, where the third set of range beacons are

intersected. The front beacon of this third set is shown from the

training wall about 0.3 mile SSE of Wellington Head, in line

bearing 156° with a beacon shown from Round Hill Point. The

fourth set of ranges, in line astern bearing 318.5°, lead parallel

to the training wall on the W side of the channel. The last set of

range beacons, in line astern bearing 295.7°, leads from abreast

a beacon on the training wall to the entrance for Kelley Channel. Care should be taken to properly identify this range as four

beacons stand on this bearing. 

3.40 Strahan (42°10'S., 145°20'E.) is situated in the N

portion of Long Bay. The port is mainly used by local craft and

fishing boats. A vessel with a maximum length of 72m and a

draft of 4.1m can be taken to berth. 

3.40 A conspicuous radio mast, painted in orange and white

bands, stands close SE of Strahan at an elevation of 22m

3.40 The N arm of Macquarie Harbor, which forms the approach

to Strahan, extends N of an imaginary line joining Yellow Bluff

to Sophia Point, about 3.5 miles ESE. A deep channel extends

through this arm between the shore banks on either side to

Strahan
Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 71

Pub. 127

Strahan. This channel is wide for the first 3.5 miles to the entrance to Long Bay, between Town Point, on the W, and Dead

Horse Point, on the E, above which it has a width of about 0.2

mile. Magazine Point is located about 1 mile N of Town Point

on the W side of Long Bay; Regatta Point lies about 0.7 mile N

of Dead Horse Point on the E side of Long Bay. The general

depths range from 27.4 to 50m in Long Bay, shoaling to 20.1m

at the N end.

3.40 Two lights, in line bearing 005°, with the forward shown

from Regatta Point and the rear 0.4 mile N, lead into Long Bay

on a course between Dead Horse Point and dangers lying off

Town Point.

3.40 Pine Cove (42°12'S., 145°22'E.) is a bight in the E shore of

the N arm of Macquarie Harbor. In proceeding from Kelly

Channel to Pine Cove the shoals and rocks extend about 0.5

mile S of King Point, close NW of the cove. They are marked

by a beacon and must be approached with caution. Depths

gradually decrease to 5.5m within the cove, where there is

good anchorage for small vessels, with mud bottom. A submerged rock, dangerous to navigation, is located about 0.5 mile

E of the beacon.

3.40 Tides—Currents.—There is little or no tidal current in Pine

Cove, and the rise and fall does not usually exceed 0.4m.

3.40 Sophia Point, a low projection of the NE shore of Macquarie

Harbor, about 3 miles NE of Liberty Point, is enclosed by a

reef, with straggling rocks extending about 0.4 mile from it.

3.40 The SW shore of Macquarie Harbor from Liberty Point

trends S 2.2 miles, and E 0.8 mile to a projecting head, forming

the NW entrance point of Double Cove.

3.40 The remainder of Macquarie Harbor is not completely surveyed and should not be entered without local knowledge.

Macquarie Harbor to Port Davey

3.41 The waters off the W coast of Tasmania have not been

fully surveyed and uncharted dangers may exist.

3.41 From Cape Sorell, the coast extends SSE about 25 miles and

then SW about 3 miles to Point Hibbs. The coast consists of a

series of rocky bights and projections. For the first 12 miles

from the cape, the coast is fronted by rocky ledges and abovewater rocks, generally extending about 1.5 miles from it. The

land behind the this coast rises by a gentle ascent, for a distance of 2 or 3 miles, and is apparently smooth and uniform,

but barren of timber and most other vegetation.

3.41 Sloop Rock (42°17'S., 145°11'E.), a small islet, lies about

5.5 miles S of Cape Sorell. A line of above and below-water

rocks lies between Sloop Rock and Cape Sorell. A group of

rocks lies about 1 mile S of Sloop Rock. An above-water rock

was reported (1981) to exist about 2.6 miles SSE of Sloop

Rock.

3.41 Breakers are reported to exist in two places between Sloop

Rock and Point Hibbs. Rocks, awash, lie about 3 and 5 miles

N, respectively, from Point Hibbs.

3.41 Point Hibbs (42°37'S., 145°15'E.) projects SW about 3

miles from the coast and is higher than the neck by which it is

joined to the back land. A remarkable pyramidal rock lies

about 1 mile NE of Point Hibbs. The rock may resemble the

crown of a hat when bearing NNE over the extremity of the

point. A ledge of rocks projects about 1.5 miles from Point

Hibbs and along the S side of the point. Some of the rocks on

the E part of the ledge are above-water.

3.41 Between Point Hibbs and Low Rocky Point, about 25 miles

SSE, the land is somewhat more elevated and not so destitute

of timber as that N of Point Hibbs.

3.41 Svenor Point (43°12'S., 145°45'E.) is a flat point of land

with several rocks off it. Hobbs Island, round and small, is located about 2 miles SE of the point.

3.41 From Svenor Point, the coast trends 8 miles farther SSE to

Cape St. Vincent, the land between forming several small

bights with islets occasionally close offshore.

3.41 Aspect.—The coast for about 18 miles to the SE of Low

Rocky Point is high, and at the back are several bare white

peaks, as if covered with snow.

3.42 Cape St. Vincent (43°19'S., 145°50'E.), a narrow

projection fronted by a reef and drying rocks, lies about 1.5

miles NW of North Head, the N entrance point of Port Davey.

West Pyramid, an islet, lies about 1.5 miles NW of Cape St.

Vincent. From North Head the coast trends ENE 1.2 miles to

Pollard Head, and then 1.5 miles in the same direction to Garden Point. There are some sunken rocks close to Pollard Head.

3.42 Dangerous sunken rocks exist at the following distances and

bearings from Garden Point Light: 

a. 17.9 miles, 302.5°.

b. 17.7 miles, 302°.

c. 17.5 miles, 301°.

d. 15.3 miles, 284°.

e. 15.1 miles, 268°.

f. 14.9 miles, 264°.

3.42 Caution.—Caution is required in the approach to Port Davey, as hydrographic surveys in the area are incomplete and uncharted dangers may exist.

3.42 Port Davey extends 10 miles from its SE to its NW extremity

and has several branches. When nearing this port, the land on

either side appears rugged and barren, and is steep and mountainous to the E. The entrance is 3.7 miles wide between North

Head and Hilliard Head SE of it.

3.42 Stokes Rock, with a depth of 15.8m, lies about 3.2 miles NW

of Hilliard Head and usually, but not always, breaks.

3.43 Hilliard Head (43°23'S., 145°55'E.), the S point of the

entrance to Port Davey, is a high craggy projecting point, with

some sunken rocks close to, and a group of islets and rocks SE of

it.

3.43 East Pyramid, a group of peaked islets, extends about 3.5

miles SE from Hilliard Head. Sugarloaf Rock, about 76m high,

the SW and highest of the islets, is somewhat similar in appearance to Big Caroline Islet.

3.43 Mutton Bird Island, 3 miles SE of Hilliard Head, is low, with

no definite summit; from seaward it looks like part of the coast.

There are several islets and sunken rocks between it and East

Pyramid.

3.43 Big Caroline Islet, about 76m high, is located about 1 mile

NNW of Hilliard Head and is a conspicuous pyramidal rock.

From Hilliard Head to Forbes Point, about 0.8 mile NE, the

SE shore of Port Davey forms a bay, between which and Big

Caroline Islet is Swainson Islet, about 61m high, with some

sunken rocks close around it and a dry rock near its NW extremity. There are depths of 12.8 to 18.3m between Hilliard

Head and Swainson Islet, and from 14.6 to 27.4m between the
72 Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 

Pub. 127

head and Big Caroline Islet.

3.43 On the E side of Forbes Point is Norman Cove (43°22'S.,

145°57'E.), about 0.3 mile in extent, having from 7.3 to 9.1m

of water in it, from the E side of which the shore sweeps

around 0.3 mile to Knapp Point, close off which is Hay Islet,

lying about 0.5 mile NE of Forbes Point. Knapp Point has been

reported to give a good radar return up to 11 miles.

3.43 Hannant Point, which lies in line with Hay Islet and Forbes

Point, is a narrow projection separating Spain Bay on the SW

side from Hannant Inlet on the NE side of the point. Spain Bay

has depths of 14.6 to 20.1m across its entrance, close within

which there are two small rocks. This bay, which runs in about

0.8 mile from its entrance has not been sounded inside the

small rocks.

3.43 Nares Rock, awash at LW, lies about 0.5 mile NW of Knapp

Point. There are depths of more than 31.1m between Swainson

Islet and Nares Rock, and from 12.8 to 32.9m between the rock

and Norman Cove.

3.44 The Shanks Islets (43°21'S., 145°57'E.), eight in

number, the highest and largest of which is about 61m high, lie

0.8 mile NW of Hannant Point. These islets, which extend 0.4

mile N and S, have sunken rocks close about them, but there is

a clear channel, with depths of 11 to 33m between the shore,

about Knapp Point and a line from Nares Rock to the Shanks

Islets, and depths of 16.5 to 21.9m from Spain Bay to within

0.2 mile E of the Shanks Islets. A 5.5m patch lies about 0.2

mile N of the summit of the largest islet.

3.44 Tides—Currents.—From what was observed during a short

period in Port Davey, there appears to be no uniform motion in

the tides, neither in their ebbing nor flowing, nor in their rise. It

seems that they are greatly influenced by the force and direction of the winds. A range of about 0.6m was observed under

normal conditions.

3.44 Depths—Limitations.—The soundings across the entrance

gradually increase from 9.1m off North Head to 50m in the

middle, and then decreasing to 16.5m close to Big Caroline Islet. From a 46m depth midway between Big Caroline Islet and

Garden Point, the soundings gradually decrease to 21.9m within 0.1 mile of the islet, and to 16.5m 0.3 mile from Garden

Point. From 9.1m close to Nares Rock, the soundings increase

to 42m 1.3 miles in a N direction, and then decrease to 18.3m

at 1 mile E of Garden Point.

3.44 From O’Brien Point, about 1 mile NE of Knapp Point, the E

shore of Port Davey trends NNE 1.5 miles to Turnbull Head,

which forms the SE side of the entrance to Bramble Cove.

There are depths of 11 to 18.3m about 0.1 mile offshore, except

between the Shanks Islets and the mainland, where there is a

depth of 8.7m about 0.2 mile from the shore, and at nearly 0.5

mile S of Turnbull Head, where a rocky ledge projects nearly

0.1 mile from the shore.

The Breaksea Islands extend from 0.5 mile N of the Shanks

Islets to nearly 1 mile WNW of Turnbull Head. They are three

in number, the middle and longest island being 76m high near

the center and over 0.5 mile long, the N island is over 0.3 mile

long and 78m high while the southern, which is almost joined

to the middle island, is about 0.2 mile long and 53m high, but

neither of them exceeds 0.2 mile in width.

3.44 There is a rock, 3.9m high, near the S end of the S island; the

coasts of all have dry and sunken rocks close along them, but

there are depths of 16.5 to 24m within 0.1 mile of their W

sides, and 5.5 to 24m at the same distance from their E sides,

between which and the mainland there are depths of 9.1 to

20.1m.

3.44 These islands are joined to the mainland near Milner Head,

about 0.4 mile N of Turnbull Head, by a 9.1m bank.

3.44 South Passage, the channel between the Shanks Islets and

the Breaksea Islands, is 0.3 mile wide, with depths of 18.3 to

29.3m. There are depths of 10.1 to 25.6m from the middle of

the passage to within 0.1 mile of the ledge of rocks S of Turnbull Head. Drafts of up to 11m may be carried through this passage to the anchorage in Bramble Cove.

3.44 North Passage lies between the Breaksea Islands and Boil

Rock, 1.5m high, about 0.3 mile N, with a least depth of 9.1m.

3.45 Bramble Cove (43°20'S., 146°00'E.) is a safe and

commodious harbor within Port Davey, having an entrance 0.3

mile wide, with depths of 7.3 to 21.9m, between Turnbull Head

and Milner Head. There is a rock 1.8m high close to Turnbull

Head, and the edge of the 9.1m bank extends 0.1 mile N of the

head.

3.45 Within the entrance, Bramble Cove forms a basin extending

1 mile E-W and about 0.8 mile N-S, with regular soundings decreasing from 25.6m in the entrance to about 7.3m about 0.1

mile off the shores, except to the E of Sarah Island, where 7.3m

will be found 0.1 mile from the shore, and to the E of Turnbull

Head, where there are depths of 21.9 to 40m.

3.45 There is a rock, 0.6m high, with some sunken rocks close to

the E shore.

3.45 Sarah Island, 30m high, lies on the S side of Bramble Cove.

It is cleared of trees to seaward and has a cairn on its summit.

A rocky ledge, with a depth of 3.7m, extends to a distance of

150m from its N end.

3.45 Mount Misery, which is 478m high and very precipitous on

its S side, directly overlooks Bramble Cove. It is the S summit

of a conspicuous range running about N-S. Mount Berry, 646m

high, is the central or highest part of this range and is completely hidden from Bramble Cove by Mount Misery.

3.45 The tides in Bramble cove are very irregular. The tidal rise at

Bramble Cove is 1.7m at MHHW.

3.45 Anchorage.—In Bramble Cove, the best anchorage is with

the N end of the Breaksea Islands in line with the S extremity

of Milner Head, and the W end of Sarah Island bearing 190°.

This position gives good shelter from NW winds, which are reported to be the strongest. The bottom is hard sand. Anchorage

anywhere seaward of Bramble Cove is to be avoided if possible, as a shift of wind from the S or SW will bring a heavy sea

right into and up the port. 

3.45 Caution.—It was reported (1994) that a stranded wreck lies

1.5 miles NW of Sarah Island.

3.45 Bathurst Channel is a narrow, but deep fairway connecting

Port Davey to Bathurst Harbor. The channel has a width of less

than 100m in places and should not be attempted without local

knowledge. Bathurst Harbor, an extensive sheet of water, is of

shoal depth and of no commercial significance.

Port Davey to Southeast Cape

3.46 From Hilliard Head, the coast trends SSE about 13
Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 73

Pub. 127

miles to South West Cape. The land is mountainous and presents a barren and desolate appearance.

3.46 South West Cape (43°35'S., 146°02'E.) is bold and remarkable, with a sharp and rugged outline. When approaching from

the E, the cape should be given a wide berth, as the prevailing

winds are from the W, and the long W swell which rolls in with

great force, in conjunction with the current which generally

sets to the E and toward the cape, may set a vessel toward the

cape.

3.46 Caution.—On occasion, there appears to be broken water

and evidence of breakers about 0.5 mile S of South West Cape,

which might indicate the presence of a sunken rock.

3.46 Between two steep rocky heads, about 3.5 and 7 miles ENE

of South West Cape, lies a sandy bay divided into two bights

by a rocky point, with two clumps of rocks in the entrance.

3.46 Cox Bight (43°30'S., 146°15'E.) is a deep, sandy, but exposed bay. From Cox Bight to Louisa Bay, about 4 miles E, the

coast rises to Bathurst Range, which attains an elevation of

800m.

3.46 Maatsuyker Group (43°38'S., 146°19'E.) consists of two

large and several small isles. Maatsuyker Island, the SW of the

two principal islands, has a reef projecting to the SW, on which

are Needle Rocks. There are several islets and rocks on a reef

which extends N from the island. De Witt Island is the NE

principal island in the group. There is a sunken reef extending

N from De Witt Island midway to Louisa Bay. In 1986, a shoal

with a depth of 11m was found midway between the NE point

of Flat Witch Island and the SW point of De Witt Island.

3.46 About 2.5 miles S of De Witt Island are Flat Top Island and

Round Top Island, the highest, with an elevation of 286m.

3.46 Mewstone, a cliffy islet, lies about 5.5 miles S of Round Top

Island. There are rocks close E and W of it. The Mewstone

swarms with birds.

3.46 Caution.—On some charts the Maatsuyker Group is charted

nearly 2 miles SE of its actual position. Hydrographic surveys

in this area are incomplete and uncharted dangers may exist.

3.47 Mount La Perouse (43°30'S., 146°46'E.) is a remarkable table-topped summit with precipitous cliffs along its S and

SE sides. Pinders Peak, about 3 miles WSW of Mount La Perouse, is a conspicuous thumb-shaped peak. A sharp remarkable

conical apex, 802m high, rises from a spur trending SE from

Mount La Perouse toward Recherche Bay. This apex usually

shows out clearly when the higher mountains to the W are obscured.

3.47 Another spur trends ESE toward the hills above Whale Head.

On this spur the most remarkable part is a dome-shaped, wooded, summit, 488m high, which rises abruptly from the flat

country surrounding it. The higher portions of the mountain

ranges above 914m elevation are usually rocky and precipitous,

but below that altitude the mountain sides and valleys are very

thickly wooded.

3.47 South Cape Bay lies between South Cape and South East

Cape, about 5 miles E. The bay is open and exposed.

Southeast Cape to South Port

3.48 South East Cape (43°38'S., 146°52'E.) is formed by

Three Hillock Point on its SW extremity. The cape is a broad

projection terminating E at Whale Head; 2 miles N of South

East Cape, the land rises to Bare Hill, which is 276m high.

3.48 Pedra Blanca (43°52'S., 146°59'E.) and Eddystone are two

cliffy islets lying about 15 miles SSE of the cape. The two islets lie on a reef about 1.2 miles apart. 

3.48 Flying Scud Rock (43°53'S., 146°59'E.), with a depth of

9.1m, lies about 2.7 miles S of Pedra Blanca. Sidmouth Rock,

which dries, lies about 1.2 miles ENE of Eddystone Islet.

3.48 D’Entrecasteaux Channel (43°36'S., 147°09'E.) is a

smooth water passage between the SE coast of Tasmania and

Bruny Island, leading from the SW to the Derwent River. The S

entrance of this channel extends from South East Cape, 20

miles ENE to Tasman Head, the S point of Bruny Island, with

depths of 64m to 82m for the greater part of the distance

across. The channel, about 35 miles long, is slightly winding,

with the general direction being NNE. The width is irregular,

varying from 5 miles within the S entrance to a little more than

0.5 mile in the N entrance. There is a least depth of 9.1m in the

channel and 11m in the fairway.

3.48 The coast from Whale Head trends NE for 3.3 miles to Second Lookout Point, a rocky projection, on the N side of which

is a landing place. Fishers Point, which shows a light, lies

about 1.7 miles N of Second Lookout Point and forms the S entrance point of Recherche Bay.

3.48 Recherche Bay (43°33'S., 146°55'E.) is entered between

Fisher Point and Sullivan Point, 2.5 miles to the NNE. The bay

is divided into two arms; Rocky Bay is the S arm and The Pigsties is the N arm. Between these two arms, the Catamaran

River, spanned by a bridge, enters the sea.

3.48 Rocky Bay is entered between Fishers Point and Needle

Point, about 1 mile NNW. Denmark Reef, a 40m patch marked

by kelp, lies about 0.4 mile E, with Kelly Rocks, some of

which are above-water, between this reef and Needle Point. It

was reported (1992) that dangerous underwater rocks lie 300m

NW of Needle Point. Rocky Bay is an unsafe anchorage with

heavy swells. With S winds a vessel may anchor, in a depth of

6.4m, 0.3 mile E of the Waterhole.

3.48 The Pigsties (43°33'S., 146°54'E.) is entered between Ryans

Point and Bennetts Point, 0.5 mile to the ENE. Shag Rock,

awash at low water, lies in the entrance to The Pigsties.

3.48 Anchorage.—An excellent anchorage is afforded in The

Pigsties for small vessels with local knowledge. The bottom is

such soft mud that a vessel is not injured by it if aground.

3.49 The Actaeon Isles, which lie about 3 miles NE of Recherche Bay, are two isles with numerous rocks and a reef extending out from them. Sterile Isle, the S Actaeon Isle, lies

nearly 3.5 miles E from the entrance to Recherche Bay and is

covered with grass and bushes. Actaeon Isle, the N of the Actaeon Isles is covered with scrub and grass. A light is shown

from the N summit of the island. A number of rocks and shoals

lie to the S and W of the isles and can best be seen on the chart.

3.49 South Port Lagoon (43°29'S., 146°58'E.) lies with its entrance 2.2 miles NNW of Actaeon Light. The entrance to the

lagoon is upwards of 0.1 mile wide, and generally has a heavy

surf across it. South Port Bluff lies 1 mile NE of the entrance to

the lagoon. A conspicuous tomb stands on the bluff.

3.49 South Port Isle, nearly 0.5 mile NE of South Port Bluff, is

flat-topped, with a cliffy coast. A small islet lies about halfway

between it and the shore. A shoal, with a depth of about 12.8m,
74 Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 

Pub. 127

lies 0.7 mile NNE of South Port Isle.

South Port (43°27'S., 146°58'E.) lies on the W side of

D’Entrecasteaux Channel, and is entered between the rocky

point about 1 mile N of South Port Bluff and Rossel Point,

about 1.5 miles to the NE. Stack of Bricks, a rock 9.4m high

and steep-to on its S side, lies close off Rossel Point. The land

on the S shore of South Port is thickly wooded and high. The N

shore consists of two bays separated by Burying Ground Point.

The village of South Port lies behind the E end of the W bay.

There is a jetty at the head of The Deep Hole in the SW corner

of South Port.

3.49 South Port Narrows, a shallow muddy inlet, is marked at its

entrance by buoys. At the W end of the narrows is Major Honners Bay, which opens into two branches, Ida Bay and Hastings

Bay. The village of Hastings stands at the head of Hastings

Bay.

3.50 Hythe (43°26'S., 146°59'E.) lies at the head of the inner bay of South Port. There is a small pier used mainly by

coastal steamers. A conspicuous church in the village is a good

landmark. 

3.50 Anchorage.—The W bay on the N side of South Port affords anchorage, in a depth of 6.4m, sand and mud, but is exposed to S and SE gales. The best berth is in a depth of 6.4m,

about 0.4 mile S of Hythe pier. A second berth is in a depth of

11m, about 0.2 mile SSW of Pelican Islet (43°27'S.,

146°58'E.).

South Port to Dover

3.51 Burnett Point (43°26'S., 147°02'E.) lies 1.5 miles

NNE of the entrance to South Port. The coast in this vicinity

consists of cliffs about 30.5m high. Sister Bay and Lady Bay

are two indentations, in which the depths range from 5.5 to

18.3m, sand. From the S entrance point of Sister Bay, a reef

with a rocky islet extends about 0.2 mile to the E.

3.51 Marinefarms may be encountered in the vicinity of Sister

Bay and Lady Bay, as well as other areas to the NW.

3.51 Port Esperance (43°20'S., 147°03'E.) is entered between

Scott Point and Esperance Point, about 1.7 miles to the N. Its

navigable width is reduced by a rocky bank, with depths of less

than 11m, which extends about 0.4 mile N of the N side of

Scott Point. 

3.51 Anchorage.—The area in this port which is available for anchoring is restricted by Hope Island (43°20'S., 147°03'E.),

which lies close to the S edge of a bank, with depths of less

than 9.1m, extending about 1.5 miles S from a position about

1.2 miles NE of Esperance Point. A light is shown from the E

end of Hope Island.

3.51 The main anchorage for the port lies 1 mile WNW of Hope

Island, in a depth of 25m. A sheltered anchorage, 0.3 mile

wide, lies in the channel, in depths of 13 to 40m S of Hope Island. Another anchorage lies in a depth of 11 to 15m, 0.2 mile

NNE of Hope Island Light. 

3.52 Dover (43°19'S., 147°01'E.) (World Port Index No.

54830) lies in the NW part of Port Esperance. There is a wharf,

marked by a light, with a frontage of 31m and a depth alongside of 6.1m, available for vessels drawing up to 5.5m.

3.52 Huon Island lies 4 miles NE of Esperance Point and about

1.7 miles E of Huon Point. The island is wooded and conspicuously green. There are some houses and a small pier on its N

side. A light is shown on the SE side of the island. A light is also shown from a position 1 mile N of Huon Island Light, near

Charlotte Cove (43°16'S., 147°09'E.).

The Huon River (43°15'S., 147°05'E.) is about 2.7 miles

wide at its entrance between Huon Point and Ninepin Point, 2.7

miles to the E. The river entrance W of Huon Island has depths

up to 46m. Off Cygnet Point, 3 miles above the entrance, on

the E side of the river, there are depths of 28 to 29m. Off One

Tree Point Light, 8 miles above the entrance, there are depths

of 18.3 to 20.1m, decreasing to 7m about 1.5 miles above the

light on One Tree Point.

3.52 Garden Island lies on the E side of the Huon River just inside

the entrance. The island about 0.7 mile in length, N-S, and

shows a light on its SW side. The N part of the island lies in

Garden Island Bay.

3.52 Cygnet Point lies 2 miles NW of Garden Island Light. The

point is the SE entrance point to Port Cygnet. The port extends

4 miles N from the point. The E shore of Port Cygnet is broken

and irregular, consisting of points and bights. There are several

small jetties on the W side of Port Cygnet, in which the general

depths are 11 to 20.1m. The head of the port dries. Beaupre

Point, the NW entrance point to the port, shows a light. The

town of Cygnet lies at the head of the port.

3.52 A marine farm has been established approximately 1 mile S

of Port Huon, along the W side of the Huon River, just S of

Pillings Bay.

3.53 Port Huon (43°10'S., 146°59'E.) (World Port Index

No. 54810) lies on the N side of Hospital Bay, about 0.2 mile

W of Shipwrights Point. The port consists of a pier, the E side

of which is 173m in length with a depth of 7.6m alongside, and

the W side is 203m in length with a depth of 9.7m alongside.

The least depth in the approach channel is 9m. There is a jetty

for small vessels about 0.3 mile W of the pier. A light is shown

from the head of the pier.

3.53 A T-head jetty, extending about 0.1 mile offshore, is situated

on the S shore of Hospital Bay. It has a length of 82.3m alongside the outer face, with a depth of 8.2m (1995) alongside.

Mooring buoys and dolphins are situated close off each end of

the T-head and lights are shown from the head of the jetty. The

ruins of a jetty lies close SE of the above jetty. 

3.53 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of over 35m in

length, unless exempted. Requests for pilots, giving the ship’s

ETA at the pilot station, should be made to the Harbormaster,

Hobart, at least 24 hours in advance.

3.53 Pilots board, as follows:

1. If approaching from the N—1.5 miles E of Kellys

Point. Confirmation or amendment of ETA should be made 2

hours in advance.

2. If approaching from the S—1.5 miles ESE of Burnett

Point. Confirmation or amendment of ETA should be made 7

hours in advance.

3.53 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage in Hospital Bay,

with plenty of room for small vessels, in a depth of 9.1m, at a

distance of 0.3 mile, bearing 235° from Shipwright Point, soft

mud. Large vessels can take anchorage about 0.3 mile W of

Bullock Point (43°11'S., 146°59'E.), in a depth of 12.8m, mud.
Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 75

Pub. 127

Huon Island to North West Bay

3.54 Arch Islet (43°17'S., 147°11'E.) is a perforated rock,

15.3m high, lying 1.5 miles E of Huon Island and 0.5 mile offshore. 

3.54 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken, in a depth of 10.9m,

about 0.2 mile NE of Arch Islet.

3.54 Three Hut Point lies 3 miles NE of Arch Islet. The village of

Gordon lies close behind the point. There is a pier off the village that is available to vessels of 2.4m drafts.

3.54 During W and NW winds, an anchorage is afforded, in a

depth of 8.3m, good holding ground, off Three Hut Point.

3.54 Middleton (43°14'S., 147°16'E.) lies 2.5 miles NNE of Gordon. A lighted beacon stands at the end of a submarine cable

0.5 mile SSE of Middleton. 

3.54 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 8.2m, 0.5 mile N

of the lighted beacon and 0.3 mile offshore. A beacon is

moored close W of the anchorage. 

3.54 Green Islet, which is grass-covered, lies in the middle of

D’Entrecasteaux Channel, about 2.5 miles NNE of Middleton.

Depths of less than 11m extend about 0.3 mile E of this islet. A

light is shown on the W side of the islet.

3.54 Woodbridge (43°10'S., 147°15'E.) is a village that stands on

the cliffs at the head of Peppermint Bay. A small jetty fronts

the village.

3.54 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

about 11m, mud, about 0.4 mile off the village. A light is

shown from the jetty.

3.54 Little Oyster Cove lies 2 miles N of Peppermint Bay. The

cove is 0.3 mile across the entrance and recedes 0.8 mile, with

depths of 9.1 to 14.6m in the outer portion. The inner part, with

depths of 5.5 to 6.4m, has several jetties on the S side with

depths up to 3.6m alongside. A light is shown from a ferry

wharf near the W end of the cove.

3.54 Channel Rock (43°07'S., 147°17'E.) is a small rocky patch

0.1 mile in extent and having a depth of 3.7m. The rock lies 0.2

mile S of Simmonds Point beacon. When approaching this area

vessels should keep well to the E of the rock. A submarine cable is laid across the channel in an E direction from Simmonds

Point to Woodcutters Point on North Bruny Island. The shore

landings are marked by beacons on both points and anchorage

is prohibited within 0.1 mile of the line of these marks.

3.54 North West Bay (43°03'S., 147°17'E.) is entered between

Snug Point and a point about 1.5 miles to the NNE. Within its

entrance the bay extends 4 miles in a N direction and 2 miles

from its entrance to its W shore. A number of villages dot the

shores of the bay. A T-shaped jetty for explosives is situated on

the E shore of the bay. Marine farms have been established in

the bay.

3.55 Electrona (43°04'S., 147°16'E.) lies on the W side of

the bay, about 2.2 miles NW of Snug Point. 

3.55 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 35m

in length. Vessels bound for Electrona Jetty embark the pilot

1.5 miles E of Kelly Point, the N extremity of North Bruny Island.

3.55 Requests for pilots, giving the ship’s ETA at the pilot station,

should be made to the Harbormaster, Hobart, at least 24 hours

in advance; confirmation or amendment of the time should be

made at least 2 hours before arrival in the case of ships embarking a pilot off Kelly Point.

3.55 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

12.8m, about 0.6 mile NW of Hurst Point.

3.55 Margate (43°02'S., 147°16'E.) is a small town which lies

about 1.5 miles N of Electrona. There is a small jetty, with a

depth of about 3.6m at its head, situated at the fish cannery

about 1 mile S of Margate. A light is shown from the jetty. 

3.55 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 11

to 12.8m, about 0.6 mile SE of Dru Point (43°02'S.,

147°17'E.).

3.55 Pierson Point (43°03'S., 147°21'E.) lies 1.5 miles ENE of

the N entrance point to North West Bay. The point is high and

cliffy and forms the NW side of the N entrance of D’Entrecasteaux Channel. A light is shown from Pierson Point. 

3.55 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained in Tinderbox

Bay, 0.7 mile SW of Pierson Point, in a depth of 14.6m, mud

bottom.

Bruny Island

3.56 Bruny Island (43°18'N., 147°18'E.) is 27 miles long

from Tasman Head to Kelly Point in a S-N direction. The island is 9 miles wide across its S side. The W coast of the island

forms the E shore of D’Entrecasteaux Channel. Bruny Island

consists of South Bruny Island and North Bruny Island, which

are connected by a narrow sandy isthmus lying between Isthmus Bay to the W and Adventure Bay to the E.

Bruny Island—South and West Coasts

3.57 Tasman Head (43°31'S., 147°18'E.), the S point of

South Bruny Island, forms the NE point of the S entrance point

of D’Entrecasteaux Channel. The headland is high, abrupt, and

composed of basaltic pillars. Bridge Rock (Arched Rock), 52m

high, lies about 0.1 mile offshore, SE of Tasman Head.

3.57 Friar Rocks lie from 0.5 mile to 1.2 miles S of Tasman Head.

Passage between the N rocks and Tasman Head is reported to

be free of dangers, but passage between the rocks should not be

attempted. The sea breaks over the S rock of the group.

3.57 Cloudy Bay (43°29'S., 147°13'E.), a bight in the S end of

South Bruny Island, exposed to all the fury of SW gales, is 3

miles wide at its entrance between East and West Heads. The

bay extends 3.2 miles to the N to a long narrow tongue of land

which separates the bay from Cloudy Lagoon. With the exception of small craft, no vessel should anchor in Cloudy Bay unless it is absolutely necessary to do so, in which case the best

position is in Mabel Bay (Half Moon Bay).

3.57 Cape Bruny (43°30'S., 147°09'E.), the SW point of South

Bruny Island, lies 1.5 miles SSW of West Cloudy Head. A light

is shown on Cape Bruny. The land near the cape is covered

with grass and scrub, and about 0.7 mile NNW of the cape is

Mount Barren, a good landmark. Courts Isle extends from a

few meters to 0.5 mile S of the cape. 

3.57 A rocky bank, with depths of 22 to 33m, extends about 2.2

miles SW from Cape Bruny. The sea breaks over this bank in

heavy weather.

3.57 Standaway Bay extends from Cape Bruny NW 4 miles to

Point Labillardiere, 1 mile S of Hopwood Point, which shows a

light. Mount Bleak, 155m high, rises close E of Point Labillardiere. This point has been reported to give good radar re-
76 Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 

Pub. 127

turns up to 16 miles.

3.58 Partridge Isle (43°24'S., 147°06'E.) lies 0.7 mile

NNE of Hopwood Light.

3.58 There is anchorage, in 18.3m, mud bottom, with Hopwood

Point in line with the S extremity of Partridge Isle, bearing

216°, and the N extremity of the island bearing 317°.

3.58 Pilotage.—Pilots for ports in D’Entrecasteaux Channel or

the Huon River board vessels from a motor boat between the S

end of Partridge Isle and the E end of South Port Isle. Vessels

bound for Hobart or Port Huon requiring a pilot off Partridge

Isle should notify the harbormaster at least 24 hours prior to the

ETA off the isle.

3.58 Great Taylor Bay (43°25'S., 147°09'E.) is 2.5 miles wide at

its entrance and 3.5 miles long in a S direction. Partridge Isle

forms the W entrance point of the bay. Depths in the bay range

from 31m at the entrance to 14.6 and 16.4m 1 mile from the

head of the bay, then gradually shoaling. A small pier is situated on the W side of the head of the bay.

3.58 Great Taylor Bay is too large to afford shelter from gales at all

times, although the bottom is black mud, it is hard and vessels

have dragged their anchors, even with a long scope of chain. 

3.58 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken off the E side of Partridge Isle, in a depth of 18.3m, mud and sand, about 0.3 mile E

of its E extremity (43°24'S., 147°07'E.).

3.59 Ventenat Point (43°21'S., 147°12'E.) lies 4.5 miles

NE of the N extremity of Partridge Isle and forms the W side of

the entrance to Little Taylor Bay. There are shoal patches 8 and

10m lying 1 mile N and NW, respectively, of Ventenat Point,

and a reef marked by a beacon extends about 0.1 mile N from

the point.

3.59 Zuidpool Rock (43°20'S., 147°10'E.), which is steep-to, lies

near the middle of D’Entrecasteaux Channel, 1.7 miles NW of

Ventenat Point. A light is shown on Zuidpool Rock.

3.59 Little Taylor Bay lies on the SE side of D’Entrecasteaux

Channel and is entered between Ventenat Point and a point

about 1.5 miles ENE.

3.59 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 7.3

to 9.1m, sand and mud, between 0.5 mile and 0.7 mile SE of

Ventenat Point, sheltered from S and W winds. The bay is

available for large vessels, but the anchorage cannot be considered good. Daniels Bay is a shallow bight on the E side of the

bay and is not recommended as an anchorage.

3.60 Satellite Island (43°19'S., 147°13'E.) lies about 1

mile N of the E entrance point of Little Taylor Bay. The island

is cultivated and has a thick grove of trees on its W side. There

is a pier, with a depth of 2.4m, on the NE side of the island.

About 0.7 mile ENE of the island stands the village of Alonnah, at which there is a breakwater. A light is shown on each

corner of the seaward end of the breakwater. A stranded wreck,

marked by a light, lies about 0.3 mile SW of the breakwater. A

light is shown from the shore about 1 mile NNE of Alonnah

Breakwater.

Isthmus Bay (43°15'S., 147°19'E.) is entered between Simpsons Point, the N extremity of South Bruny Island, and The

Bluff, 2.5 miles E of Simpsons Point. The E shore of the bay

consists of a narrow isthmus, which is bordered by a flat on its

W side, and which joins South Bruny Island to North Bruny Island in its center and separates the waters of D’Entrecasteaux

Channel from those of Adventure Bay. The village of Simpsons Bay lies on the W side of the bay. There is a small pier,

for vessels drawing 2.4m, close off the village.

3.60 Great Bay is entered between the N entrance point of Little

Fancy Bay and Stockyard Point, about 1.7 miles to the NW.

Depths in the bay are 9.1m at the entrance, shoaling gradually

to 5.5m at 0.5 mile from the head of the bay. Adams Bay,

which is mostly shallow, lies in the NE portion of Great Bay,

and Ford Bay, also shallow, lies in the S part of the bay.

3.60 Missionary Bay (43°11'S., 147°19'E.) lies between Stockyard Point and Soldier Point, 1.5 miles to the W. Depths in the

bay range from 8m in the entrance to about 2m at the head of

the bay. Snake Islet lies 0.5 mile NW of Soldier Point and is

grass covered. A rocky patch extends 0.2 mile SW from the S

side of the islet. A beacon marks the SW edge of the patch.

3.60 Kinghorne Point, which shows a light, lies about 0.7 mile

NW of Snake Islet. Roberts Point which also shows a light, lies

1.5 miles N of Kinghorne Point and forms the N entrance point

to Apollo Bay, which has depths of 9.1 to 16.5m. Leading

lights, in line bearing 194°, are established 0.6 mile ENE of

Roberts Point.

3.61 Barnes Bay (43°08'S., 147°20'E.) lies between Lennonville Point, which shows a light, and a rounded projection

0.9 mile to the ENE. Immediately S of Lennonville Point is a

small cove in which small vessels may anchor, in a depth of

about 12.8m. Sykes Cove forms the S part of the bay. In the NE

corner of the bay is a narrow channel leading into Simmonds

Bay, an inlet extending N-S with depths of 5.5 to 7.3m in either

end. A light is shown on the S side of the inlet. Shelter Cove

lies on the NW side of Barnes Bay and on its E side stands the

quarantine station. There is a small pier for boats off the quarantine station; a light is shown from Quarantine Point, about

0.7 mile S of the small pier.

3.61 There is anchorage, in a depth of 18.3m, mud, at the entrance

to Shelter Cove, partially sheltered from NW winds.

3.61 Bligh Point, which shows a light, lies 2.5 miles N of the entrance to Barnes Bay. In the bights on both sides of Bligh Point

there is shoal water. From this point, the coast trends about 2

miles in a NE direction to Kelly Point, which forms the SE side

of the N entrance of D’Entrecasteaux Channel. 

3.61 The channel entrance has depths of 10.9 to 14.6m in the fairway. There is a considerable amount of kelp off Kelly Point;

shoal water extends for 0.1 mile to the N and 0.1 mile to the W

of the point.

Bruny Island—East Coast

3.62 Bull Bay (43°05'S., 147°22'E.) lies about 1.2 miles

SSE of Kelly Point and is entered between Cape de la Sortie

and Bull Bay Point, 1.2 miles to the SSE.

3.62 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

about 12.8m, sand, about 0.3 mile N of Bull Bay Point.

3.62 Yellow Bluff (43°08'S., 147°24'E.) which may be identified

by its conspicuous yellow cliffs, lies 2.5 miles SSE of Bull Bay

Point. Trumpeter Bay lies 1.5 miles S of Yellow Bluff and is

opened to SE winds. There are a few houses near the shore, as

well as a landing place on the sandy beach near the center of

the head of the bay, off which is the best anchorage, in depths
Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 77

Pub. 127

of 14.6 to 18.3m.

3.62 Variety Bay lies 2.5 miles SSE of Trumpeter Bay. The shores

of the bay are thickly bordered with kelp extending up to 0.2

mile offshore. In the S part of the bay, a small vessel may obtain some shelter from SE winds in a depth of about 18.3m,

about 0.1 mile outside the kelp.

3.62 Cape Queen Elizabeth (43°15'S., 147°26'E.) is a precipitous grassy bluff which lies 3 miles S of Variety Bay. The

Hounds Tooth, a bare rock of conical shape, lies close off the

cape. The cape forms the SE extremity of North Bruny Island.

3.62 Adventure Bay is entered between Cape Queen Elizabeth and

Penguin Islet, about 6.2 miles SSW. The W side of the bay is

formed by the sandy isthmus that connects North Bruny Island

with South Bruny Island. The SW part of the isthmus is flat with

scattered trees, and the NE part is composed of sand hills.

3.62 The depths in the bay are regular, over a sandy bottom,

depths of 18.3m being generally found about 0.5 mile offshore.

Vessels should avoid anchoring in the vicinity of Moorina Bay,

as the bottom is rocky and uneven.

3.62 The best berth is off a small sandy bight about 0.7 mile

WSW of Penguin Island in a depth of 18.3m, with good holding ground and protected from all but N and NE winds.

3.62 Fluted Cape (43°22'S., 147°23'E.) lies about 1 mile SE of

Penguin Island. The cliffs of the cape are composed of basaltic

columns and are from 213 to 235m high. The summit of the

cape, which is well-marked, is 290m high, and like the neighboring country is thickly wooded. Cape Connella, a bold bluff,

lies about 1.5 miles S of Fluted Cape.

3.62 Mangana Bluff, a bold headland, lies about 3 miles SSW of

Cape Connella. Close S of the bluff lies Arched Islet, flattopped and 24.4m high. Boreel Head lies 1.5 miles NE of Tasman Head and consists of a double-headed point, which forms

a bold headland rising to an elevation of 232m at its N end.

The Derwent River 

3.63 The Derwent River (43°00'S., 147°02'E.) from its entrance between Cape de la Sortie and Iron Pot Islet, which

shows a light, trends N about 11 miles to Hobart, above which

it extends 120 miles to its source. The river has a width of

about 2 miles from its entrance to the SE part of Hobart and a

least depth of about 15.2m in the fairway.

3.63 A submarine cable is laid across the river from a position

about 3 miles N of Iron Pot Islet. Anchorage is prohibited within 0.5 mile of the cable; the landing places are marked by a

beacon on each shore.

The Derwent River—West Shore

3.64 The W shore of the river from Peirson Point trends 2.5

miles NNW to the S point of Blackman Bay. The bay extends

N-S for 0.5 mile and indents the coast for about 0.3 mile.

Depths in the bay range from 10.9m at the entrance to 1.8m at

its head.

3.64 Kingston Bay (42°59'S., 147°19'E.) lies about 1.5 miles N

of Blackman Bay. Depths in the bay range from 16.4 to 21.9m

in the entrance, to 1.8 to 2.7m at its head. Browns River Entrance is located on the NW side of the bay and the town of

Kingston Beach stands on its S shore.

3.64 Alum Cliffs, which are conspicuous, extend from the N side

of the entrance to the Browns River, to the SW end of Taroona

Beach, about 0.5 mile SW of Crayfish Point (42°57'S.,

147°21'E.). A red beacon stands close off Crayfish Point.

3.64 Blinking Billy Point (42°55'S., 147°22'E.) lies 2.2 miles N

of Crayfish Point. The point is rocky, and from it, John Garrow

Shoal, with depths of less than 11m, extends about 0.3 mile to

the E. A light is shown inside the shoal from a position about

0.3 mile E of Blinking Billy Point. A light is shown 0.5 mile

SW of Blinking Billy Point. Little Sandy Bay lies between

Blinking Billy Point and Sandy Bay Point, about 0.3 mile

NNW. A dolphin stands close inshore at the S end of the bay.

3.64 Submarine pipelines extend E and ESE from Blinking Billy

Point, terminating at the 5m and 20m depth curves, respectively.

3.64 Sandy Bay (42°54'S., 147°20'E.) is entered between Sandy

Bay Point and Battery Point, about 1.5 miles NW, and is

backed by the suburb of Sandy Bay. A conspicuous casino and

hotel stand on Wrest Point; a radio mast stands about 1 mile

SW of the casino. A T-headed pier, with a depth of 2m alongside, lies about 100m W of Wrest Point.

The Derwent River—East Shore

3.65 The E shore of the river from Cape Direction to Gellibrand Point, about 5 miles N, is formed by a peninsula, mostly

covered with trees, which separates the S portion of Ralph Bay

from the Derwent River. The peninsula is mostly low land, but

there are two fair size hills; the higher stands about 0.5 mile

NW of Cape Direction while the smaller lies 2 miles S of Gellibrand Point.

3.65 Half Moon Bay (43°01'S., 147°24'E.) is entered between

Johns Point and The Pigeon Holes, about 1.7 miles to the N.

The head of the bay consists of a sandy beach and has depths of

5.5m, about 0.1 mile off the beach. The town of South Arm, off

which there is a small pier, stands on the SE shore of the bay.

3.65 It was reported (1994) that a buoy, marking foul ground, has

been established in approximate position 43°01.5'S,

147°22.5'E. Mariners are advised to steer well clear of this area.

3.65 Opossum Bay, which has a sandy beach, lies between a point

about 1 mile N of The Pigeon Hole and White Rock Point,

about 1 mile farther N. Depths of 5.5m extend about 0.1 mile

offshore, and the town of Opossum Bay stands at the S end of

the bay. A light is shown on White Rock Point.

3.65 Ralph Bay (42°57'S., 147°26'E.) is entered between Gellibrand Point and Trywork Point, 1.5 miles N. The entrance to

the bay between the two points is about 1.2 miles wide and has

a depth of from 12.8 to 26m, but inside the bay the water is

mostly shallow.

3.65 Mortimer Bay is an indentation of the E shore of Ralph Bay,

between 2 and 3 miles ESE of Gellibrand Point. From Maria

Point, the NW extremity of Mortimer Bay, the E shore of Ralph Bay trends N 3.5 miles to the foot of Mount Mather.

3.65 Tranmere (42°55'S., 147°25'E.), the SE suburb of Hobart,

lies at the foot of a narrow peninsula and about 2 miles N of

Trywork Point. About 1 mile N of Tranmere Point is Punchs

Reef, with depths of less than 11m.

3.65 Kangaroo Bluff lies about 2 miles WNW of Punchs Reef.

The bluff forms the S entrance point of Kangaroo Bay and the
78 Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 

Pub. 127

NW point of the quarantine anchorage for Hobart. A light is

shown on Rosny Point, the W entrance point to Kangaroo Bay.

Hobart (42°53'S., 147°20'E.)

World Port Index No. 54760

3.66 Hobart, the capital city of Tasmania, situated on the

Derwent River, also serves as a principal port and maintains a

port control station. Contact on VHF channel 16 (listening frequency) and VHF channel 12 (working frequency) with the

port may be established at a range exceeding 50 miles. This extended range enables passing vessels to establish contact with

Hobart Port Control. 

3.66 Tides—Currents.—The tides at Hobart are irregular; the

maximum rise and fall is 1.4m. The flood current is barely perceptible between Iron Pot Islet and Kelly Point, but from this

point to Hobart it attains a rate of 0.5 knot. Between Macquarie

Point and Rosny Point, the ebb current runs 1.5 knots at half

tide; off Battery Point it runs about 170°, sweeping around

Sandy Bay at the rate of 0.8 knot, and after passing Sandy

Point, its strength gradually decreases to 0.5 knot at the entrance to the river.

3.66 Depths—Limitations.—The Tasman Bridge spans the Derwent River about 1 mile N of Rosny Point. The center span,

with a navigable width of 73m and a vertical clearance of 45m,

is authorized for use by vessels over 25m in length. The two

adjacent spans, each with a navigable width of 44m and a vertical clearance of 44m, are authorized for vessels between 25

and 15m in length. Vessels 15m long and less may use the

spans outside the spans mentioned above. Vessels more than

50m may not approach within 0.2 mile of the bridge when visibility is less than 1.5 miles. A height restriction of 47.0m exists

between the center span.

3.66

3.66 Heading S on the Derwent River, past Macquarie Point, the

Macquarie Wharf complex lies on the W bank. At the head of

Sullivans Cove lies the Elizabeth Street Pier. The Prince’s

Wharf lies on the S side of Sullivan Cove. Risdon Wharfs,

which are privately owned, are situated about 2 miles above the

Tasman Bridge. Vessels proceeding to Self’s Point Oil Berth

must also pass under the bridge.

3.66 Pilotage.—Pilotage for Hobart is compulsory for vessels

over 35m in length, unless the master holds a current Pilotage

Exemption Certificate.

3.66 Requests for pilotage should be made through the Harbormaster, Hobart, at least 24 hours in advance; the vessel’s ETA

should be confirmed or amended 3 hours in advance.

3.66 Vessels bound for Port Huon and Spring Bay should confirm

their ETA 6 hours in advance. 

3.66 When within 6 miles of Iron Pot Light, vessels must display

the appropriate signals.

3.66 Vessels awaiting pilot should anchor S of 42°55'S, in a depth

of 22m, good holding ground. 

3.66 The port of Hobart includes all waters of D’Entrecasteaux

Channel and Storm Bay N of a line joining Southport Islet

(43°29'S., 147°01'E.), 15 miles NE of South East Cape to Cape

Raoul (43°14'S., 147°48'E.), 37 miles NE and of all bays and

estuaries opening either into the channel or the bay.

3.66 Regulations.—No vessel may anchor or weigh anchor, except in case of necessity, above a line drawn from Sandy Bay

Point to Kangaroo Bluff, except under the direction or by permission of the harbormaster. This rule does not apply to vessels

anchored out of the fairway and not interfering at all with navigation.

3.66 Vessels are forbidden to sound sirens or whistles above a line

drawn from Secheron Point to Kangaroo Bluff, except to prevent collision, when short blasts may be sounded as required.

3.66 Vessels must not be navigated at such speed as to damage, or

be likely to damage, any wharf, shore, or bank, or any other

Hobart Ports Corporation

http://www.hpc.com.au

Hobart Port Facilities

Berth Length Depth Remarks

Prince’s Wharf

Inner 73m 7.5m

1 138m 7.9m Ro-ro.

2 95m 7.9m

3 85m 8.4m

4 120m 6.6m Ro-ro.

Elizabeth Street Pier

South 157m 7.8m

North 153m 7.2m

Macquarie Wharf Complex

1 169m 6.0m Containers.

2 154m 8.8m

3 175m 10.0m

4 244m 12.0m

5 135m 11.0m Ro-ro 

6 189m 10.5m Ro-ro 

Self’s Point Petroleum Product Wharf

1 100m 14.0m T-head wharf, 258m

between dolphins.

Risdon Wharfs

Acid 158m 9.8m Zinc and phosphate

1 156m 9.8m Potash.

2 152m 9.8m Cadmium.

3 91m 9.8m Sulphate.

Shag Bay

6.5m 150m into bay.

Hobart Port Facilities

Berth Length Depth Remarks
Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 79

Pub. 127

vessel, or to interfere with the navigation of any other vessel,

except by permission in writing from the harbormaster.

3.66 Vessels entering the harbor are to indicate their intended

berth by displaying the appropriate numeral pendant together

with the pilot flag. Outbound vessels are to display the International Code answering pendant below the pilot flag.

3.66 A copy of the “Rules and Regulations of the Port of Hobart”

may be obtained from the harbormaster.

3.66 Vessels greater than 35m in length may not pass under the

Taman Bridge on Monday through Friday, from 0700 to 0915

and from 1600 to 1830. A vessel intending to pass under the

bridge shall sound one long blast upon entering the main navigation channel.

3.66 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained in almost any

part of the Derwent River. The safest part on all occasions is on

the W side of the river. There are a number of prohibited anchorages which are clearly indicated on the chart.

3.66 Merchant vessels with explosives aboard may not anchor N

of a line joining Battery Point (42°53'S., 147°20'E.) and Rosney Point, nor within 0.2 mile of the shore without the written

permission of the harbormaster. Those vessels carrying explosives may anchor off Powder Jetty, about 0.4 mile NNW of

Macquarie Point.

3.66 The Quarantine Anchorage lies between the latitudes of the

John Garrow Shoal Light to the N and White Rock Point to the

S, excluding Ralph’s Bay. In the anchorage there is a depth of

20m, soft mud.

The Derwent River above the Tasman Bridge

3.67 Cornelian Bay (42°51'S., 147°19'E.) lies on the W

side of the river, about 0.7 mile above the bridge. The bay affords anchorage for moderate size vessels, in 8.2m, mud bottom, 0.2 mile from Cornelian Bay Point, bearing 359°. A

Hobart 
80 Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 

Pub. 127

beacon marks the S end of a shoal projecting from Cornelian

Bay Point.

3.67 New Town Bay lies on the W side of the river, about 0.7 mile

N of Cornelian Bay. The bay is entered between the NE extremity of a peninsula which separates it from Cornelian Bay,

and Woodman Point, about 0.5 mile NNW.

3.67 Anchorage.—Anchorage for small vessels may be obtained,

in a depth of about 5.5m, about 0.2 mile S of Rock Cod Point

(42°50'S., 147°19'E.). A beacon marks the edge of a bank 0.1

mile E of Rock Cod Point.

3.67 Lindisfarne Bay (42°51'S., 147°21'E.) lies on the E side of

the river, about 0.5 mile NE of the Tasman Bridge. A beacon

marks the edge of the coastal bank close S of Lindisfarne

Point, on which there is a monument. A marina lies close NE

of the point. A beacon stands on the edge of the coastal bank

on the E side of the bay, 0.2 mile E of Lindisfarne Point. 

3.67 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained by a moderatesized vessel, in a depth of about 9.8m, about 0.1 mile S of

Lindisfarne Point, but it is not recommended. A number of

small piers stand on each side of the bay.

3.67 Geilston Bay is located on the E side of the river, about 1

mile NW of Lindisfarne Bay, and is entered between Limekiln

Point and Bedlam Walls Point. The bay is mostly shoal. Shag

Bay, a small inlet, lies about 0.5 mile NW of Geilston Bay.

3.67 Prince of Wales Bay (42°50'S., 147°18'E.) is a large, but

shallow, inlet divided into three arms, with a common entrance

on the W side of the river, on the S side of Dowsing Point. A

wharf extends from Doss Point, 0.2 mile inside the entrance to

the bay. A tower stands on a hill about 0.3 mile W of Doss

Point. 

3.67 There is anchorage, in a depth of about 15.5m, about 0.2

mile E of Dowsing Point.

Cape Direction to Cape Pillar

3.68 Hope Beach (43°02'S., 147°27'E.) forms a slight

curve extending from Cape Direction in a ENE direction for 3

miles to Goat Bluff, a small cliffy point, on which there is a

small hillock. The beach, which is low and narrow, is the only

barrier between Ralph Bay and the sea.

3.68 Betsys Island, about 1.2 miles long and 0.5 mile wide, lies

about 1 mile S of Goat Bluff. The island is bold and precipitous; landing can only be made on the N side on a cobblestone

beach near a ruined hut. Little Betsy Islet lies about 0.2 mile to

the S. A number of rocks on which the sea breaks lie about 0.3

mile SSE of Little Betsy Islet.

3.68 Black Jack Rocks (43°02'S., 147°29'E.) lie in the middle of

the passage between Goat Bluff and Betsy Island. The passage

forms a convenient short cut for small vessels proceeding between Hobart and Frederick Henry Bay. A light is shown from

the rocks.

3.68 Frederick Henry Bay (42°55'S., 147°35'E.) is entered between Cape Deslacs and North West Head, 3 miles E. The bay

indents the coast 9 miles from its entrance to its head and is

from 5 to 6 miles wide. The bay is fairly clear of dangers and

has depths of 18.3 to 20.1m at its entrance and 7.3m about 0.5

mile off its head.

3.68 Pipe Clay Lagoon lies in the SW part of the bay, about 1.7

miles NW of Cape Deslacs. Single Hill lies on the NW side of

the bay and shows an aero light from its summit.

3.68 Mount Rumney (42°52'S., 147°27'E.), 2.2 miles WNW of

Single Hill, also shows an aero light. Aero lights are also

shown 5.2 and 5.5 miles NNE of the summit of Mount Rumney.

3.69 Seven Mile Beach (42°51'S., 147°33'E.) forms the head

of Frederick Henry Bay. At the E end of the beach is a narrow

opening which leads into Pitt Water, a shallow lagoon. Spectacle

Island lies 1.2 miles S of the entrance to Pitt Water and close W of

Spectacle Head. Carlton Bluff lies 2 miles ESE of Spectacle Island

and looks like an island from the bay. On its N side is the entrance

to the Carlton River, used by ketches at HW.

3.69 Bass Shoal, with depths of less than 11m and a least depth of

5.8m near its SE corner, lies across the approach to Norfolk

Bay, between the N end of Sloping Island and Carlton Bluff.

Isle of Caves lies on the NE corner of Bass Shoal and derives

its name from two caves in the cliff at its SW corner.

3.69 The E side of the approach to Frederick Henry Bay, extending from Outer North Head 4.5 miles N to North West Head, is

a bold, broken up shore, on which the sea always breaks heavily, rendering landing practically impossible. It is steep-to all

along and in places lined with kelp.

3.69 Outer North Head (43°04'S., 147°38'E.) is a yellow, bold,

cliffy point. Flat Rock, on which the sea always breaks, lies

about 0.2 mile SW of the head. Foster Rock, which breaks in

heavy weather, lies 0.3 mile W of Outer North Head. Storm

Cove lies 2.7 miles N of the head and is surrounded with kelp,

behind which fishing boats obtain shelter from W winds.

3.69 North West Head (43°00'S., 147°38'E.) lies 4.5 miles N of

Courtesy Hobart Ports Corporation

Elizabeth Street Pier, with Prince’s Wharf in background
Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 81

Pub. 127

Outer North Head and forms the E entrance point to Frederick

Henry Bay. Sloping Main, a white sandy beach with a small

pier near its S end, lies about 2.5 miles NE of North West

Head. Sloping Island lies 2.5 miles NNW of Sloping Main.

The island is about 1 mile long and partly wooded. A small islet lies off its SW side.

3.69 Green Head (42°56'S., 147°40'E.), a yellowish cliffy point,

forms the N extremity of the Tasman Peninsula. The approach

to Norfolk Bay lies between Green Head and Renard Point,

about 2.2 miles N. Hog Islet lies about 0.5 mile SW of Green

Head.

3.69 Flinders Channel, the main channel into Norfolk Bay, is entered from Frederick Henry Bay close N of Sloping Island and

S of Bass Shoal. The channel is about 0.5 mile wide and contains no known dangers. The channel between the N end of

Bass Shoal and Carlton Bluff has a least depth of 11.3m; to the

E it joins Flinders Channel.

3.70 Norfolk Bay (42°58'S., 147°47'E.) is bound on the W

and S sides by the Tasman Peninsula and on the E side by the

Forestier Peninsula. It is perfectly landlocked, clear of dangers,

and affords anchorage, in depths of 12.8 to 18.3m, good holding ground. A marine farm, best seen on the chart, has been established in Norfolk Bay.

3.70 From Renard Point, the coast extends to the E in a succession of small bays and low grassy points for 5 miles to Dunalley Bay. A range of well-wooded hills extends along the coast

with occasional cleared patches and farm houses. Fulham Island lies on the W side of Dunalley Bay and has been reported

to be a good radar target for up to 18 miles.

3.70 Dunalley Bay (42°55'S., 147°47'E.), which is fronted by a

drying sand bank, lies between the point about 0.4 mile NNE

of Fulham Island, and Dunhabin Point, about 2.2 miles SSE,

and has depths of less than 5.5m extending about 1.5 miles offshore. Smooth Island lies on the SW end of the shore bank in

Dunalley Bay. 

3.70 There is good anchorage, in depths of 7.3 to 9.1m, under the

SE part of Smooth Island.

3.70 The Denison Canal (42°54'S., 147°48'E.), which is spanned

by a swing bridge near its SW entrance, is only used by small

vessels with local knowledge. The canal should be transited

only at high tide. A superintendent is in charge of all traffic

passing through the canal. The canal will only be used between

the hours of 0800 and 1445. There is a minimum depth of 2.2m

in the canal. A depth of 1.4m exists over a shallow area, close

NE of the E entrance. 

3.70 Traffic signals are shown on the W side of the canal, about

0.1 mile within the SW entrance. Green or red leading lights

are shown on the W side of the SW entrance, and in line bearing 024°, lead through the SW approach channel.

3.70 The approach channels to the canal and the dredged cut are

all marked by beacons.

3.70 Traffic signals for outbound vessels are shown from the N

side of the canal. Two red lights, disposed horizontally, indicate the channel is obstructed. A green directional light bearing

264° indicates that vessels may proceed, and marks the channel.

3.70 Information regarding the Denison Canal and the Marion

Narrows can be found in the Publications section of the Marine

and Safety Tasmania web site.

3.71 Dunalley (42°53'S., 147°49'E.), a small town, is situated close N of the NE entrance to the canal. Two piers front

the town, and two small piers lie 0.2 mile NE. The piers are

used mainly by fishing boats.

3.71 King George Island lies on the E shore of Norfolk Bay, about

1.5 miles E of Smooth Island. Between the island and Chronicle Point, about 0.5 mile SW, is the entrance to King George

Sound, a shallow inlet at the head of which is the village of

Murdunna. There is a ruined jetty about 0.4 mile NW of the

village; several small jetties front the shore to the W.

3.71 Flinders Bay (42°59'S., 147°50'E.) lies 1 mile S of King

George Sound. There are depths of 12.8m in the entrance; the

depths gradually decrease to the head of the bay. From about

0.7 mile S of the S entrance point of the bay, Flinders Reef

(43°01'S., 147°50'E.), a foul spit, extends about 0.3 mile SW.

3.71 Eaglehawk Bay lies about 2 miles SSE of Flinders Bay and

is entered between Heather Point and Dart Island. The bay narrows from its entrance into a long inlet; its inner 1.5 miles is

shallow. At its head is Eaglehawk Neck, a narrow isthmus,

which is only about 20m wide in one place. This neck connects

the Forestier Peninsula with the Tasman Peninsula and separates Eaglehawk Bay from Pirates Bay, on the E coast of Tasmania. There is a ruined jetty on the N shore near Eaglehawk

Neck.

3.71 Little Norfolk Bay (43°02'S., 147°51'E.) is entered between

Dart Island and Mason Point and lies on the S side of Eaglehawk Bay. The bay is a shallow inlet, apart from a narrow

channel in its center of somewhat deeper water. There is good

shelter for one vessel, in a depth of 7.3 to 9.1m, during heavy

NW weather, under Dart Island. On its E shore near the head of

the bay is the village of Taranna (43°03'S., 147°52'E.), off

which there is a ruined pier. Another ruined jetty lies on the W

side of the bay.

3.71 Cascades Bay lies about 1.5 miles SW of Little Norfolk Bay.

The village of Koonya stands in a shallow cove in the SW part

of the bay. The village is fronted by a ruined jetty. Impression

Bay lies 2 miles W of Cascades Bay. Prices Bay lies close NW

of Impression Bay. Two jetties stand at the head of Prices Bay.

Ironstone Point (42°58'S., 147°45'E.), a low point covered

with trees, lies about 1.2 miles SSE of Whitehouse Point.

3.72 Storm Bay (43°08'S., 147°31'E.) is bounded W by

the E side of North Bruny Island from Cape Queen Elizabeth to

Cape de la Sortie. Cape Direction to North West Head forms

the N end of the bay; Outer North Head to Cape Raoul forms

the E coast of the bay.

3.72 Wedge Bay (43°07'S., 147°42'E.) lies about 3.5 miles SE of

Outer North Head and is entered between Lory Point and Low

Point, about 2.2 miles S. The head of Wedge Bay is divided into two smaller bays by Apex Point, located about 2.5 miles NE

of Low Point. At the head of the S bay is White Beach, behind

which are thickly-wooded hills. Brother and Sister, two islets,

lies close off the beach.

Marine and Safety Tasmania

http://www.mast.tas.gov.au
82 Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 

Pub. 127

3.72 Small vessels can find secure anchorage, in depths of 5.5 to

7.3m, about 0.5 mile S of Brother and Sister.

3.72 Parsons Bay, the N bay in Wedge Bay, is entered between

Apex Point and a point about 0.5 mile NW. There is well-sheltered anchorage for small vessels in the inner part of the bay, in

depths of 7.3 to 14.6m.

3.72 Nubeena (43°06'S., 147°45'E.), a small village, lies at the

head of the bay. There is a pier off the village available to small

vessels drawing up to 3m.

3.72 Wedge Island (43°08'S., 147°40'E.) lies about 0.5 mile

WNW of Low Point. The W side of the island is composed of

sheer basaltic cliffs rising to an elevation of 95m.

3.72 Quoin Channel, between Wedge Island and the mainland,

has a fairway with a least depth of 10m over a width of about

0.2 mile and is clear of dangers, but during heavy S gales the

sea often breaks across it.

3.72 Dart Bank (43°12'S., 147°42'E.) lies about 4.5 miles SSE of

the S extremity of Wedge Island. The bank has a least depth of

21.9m near its center. With a S wind there is always a heavy

swell over the bank.

3.72 Three Beach Bay is 0.6 mile wide and recedes 0.5 mile, with

depths in the entrance of 29 to 33m and a depth of 14.6m about

0.1 mile off its shores and 0.2 mile off a pebble beach at its

head. There are two more pebble beaches on the SE side of the

bay. The SE shore is cliffy and kelp extends out to depths of

9.1m off the beaches.

3.72 Tunnel Bay (43°12'S., 147°44'E.) is entered between Tunnel

Point and a bold, yellow, cliffy point about 0.5 mile to the NW.

There are depths of 25.6m in its entrance and 18.3m midway

inside, then the depths decrease gradually toward its head,

which is formed by a number of large boulders. Midway between the beach and the N entrance point, which is a round

bold yellow cliff, is a point, 100m SW of which is a rock that

always breaks.

3.73 Raoul Bay (43°13'S., 147°46'E.) is entered between

South West Point and Hill Rock, 2 miles SE. There are depths

across the bay of more than 36.6m off Hill Rock, decreasing

gradually to 23.8m off South West Point. Bartlet Rock and

Burton Islet lie in the S part of the bay about 0.1 mile offshore.

3.73 Cape Raoul (43°14'S., 147°48'E.) is a cliffy headland that

forms the S extremity of the Tasman Peninsula. Mount Raoul,

a good landmark, rises about 2 miles N of the cape. Formed of

high basaltic columns, the cape presents a very remarkable appearance; it falls in sheer cliffs from a plateau covered with

dense scrub. About 0.2 mile NW of the cape these basaltic columns are separated from the cliff by a deep crevasse. Between

the first column and Cape Raoul, there is a narrow neck of land

composed of more columns which become more separated towards the cape. North of Burton Islet, the basaltic formation of

the cliffs ceases.

3.73 Basket Bay (43°12'S., 147°51'E.) lies 3.5 miles NE of Cape

Raoul and on the NW side of Maingon Bay. On the SW side of

the W entrance point of the bay, there is a square cave which is

conspicuous from the S and SW. From this point, a cliffy shore

trends about 2 miles SW to a point, immediately S of which is

a cliffy gully with caves at its head; about midway between

these two points is a remarkable waterfall.

3.73 Black Rock, 9.1m high and steep-to, lies about 0.2 mile S of

a point 0.5 mile W of West Arthur Head. Between Black Rock

and the above unnamed point is an isolated rock, which always

breaks.

3.74 Port Arthur (43°09'S., 147°52'E.), at the head of

Maingon Bay, is entered between West Arthur Head and Budget Head, about 1.2 miles NE. Kelp extends off most of the

points inside Port Arthur to depths up to 18.3m; it always

grows from a rocky bottom.

3.74 The E shore of the inlet is generally steep-to, but the W shore

is indented by bays and coves, most of which afforded anchorage.

3.74 The entrance to the port is easily identified by Mount Brown,

a long, flat, precipitous hill above West Arthur Head, which appears as an island against the land behind. On Budget Head,

there is a remarkable pillar rock, which stands out alone when

seen from the S, and above it is Arthurs Peak. The Budget, a

small rock, 1.5m high, lies close offshore about 0.1 mile NW

of the pillar rock.

3.74 Crescent Bay, on the W side of the entrance between West

Arthur Head and Welch Point, about 0.5 mile N, always has too

much swell in it to permit anchoring. Safety Cove lies about 1

mile NW of Welsh Point. 

3.74 Anchorage may be obtained in the middle of the cove, in

depths of 9.1 to 21.9m, but there is always a certain amount of

swell.

3.74 The town of Port Arthur stands at the head of Mason Cove.

There are two jetties and a slipway on the N side of the cove;

another jetty is situated about 0.5 mile SSW of Commandants

Point. A seaplane pontoon is also situated in the cove.

Carnarvon Bay (43°09'S., 147°51'E.), the best anchorage in

Port Arthur, lies between Isle of the Dead and Frying Pan

Point, about 0.5 mile NW. The bay has depths of 11 to 21.9m,

sand and mud. Vessels anchor, in depths of 12.8 to 21.9m, off

Mason Cove, a shallow inlet on the N side of Commandants

Point.

3.74 Stewarts Bay lies between Frying Pan Point and Garden

Point, the extremity of a peninsula with a long, flat, cleared

top, about 0.4 mile NE.

3.74 A small vessel could find anchorage in this bay, in depths of

11 to 14.6m, but a rocky ledge and a shoal bank extend about

0.1 mile NNE from Frying Pan Point.

3.74 A submarine cable crosses the bay N from a point 0.1 mile

W of Frying Pan Point. Its landing place on each shore is

marked by a beacon.

3.75 Long Bay (43°08'S., 147°52'E.), at the head of Port

Arthur, is entered between Garden Point and Evandons Point,

and extends N for about 1.5 miles. For about 0.7 mile above its

entrance, Long Bay has depths of not less than 9.1m; above

this distance it becomes shallow and its head dries. Small craft

can get within 0.5 mile of its head, where the village of Oakwood stands.

3.75 Denmans Cove lies on the E side of Port Arthur, about 3

miles N of Budget Head. Stinking Bay, at the head of which is

a sandy beach, is entered between the N entrance to Denmans

Cove and Evandons Point about 1 mile WNW. Stingaree Bay

lies on the W side of Port Arthur, 1.2 miles W of Denmans

Cove.

3.75 Cape Pillar (43°14'S., 148°02'E.) lies 10 miles ENE of Cape

Raoul. The cape forms the SE extremity of the Tasman Penin-
Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 83

Pub. 127

sula and is the most remarkable headland on this coast, being

formed of vertical columns of basalt rising to an elevation of

278m, and there forming a flat surface, the high land near the

cape being for the most part without trees. According to determinations obtained in 1968, the coastline and topography in

the vicinity of Cape Pillar lie about 2 miles W of their charted

positions.

3.75 Tasman Island, close S of Cape Pillar, is rocky, bare, rugged,

and flat-topped. At its SW end is a remarkable semi-detached

rock with two peaks, the gap between this rock and the island

being perfectly straight and square. On one of the peaks is a

large stone resembling a lighthouse on an E or W bearing. A

light is shown on the SE side of Tasman Island.

Cape Pillar to Cape Tourville

3.76 The N side of Cape Pillar is cliffy, and cliffs continue

round Munroe Bight, an indentation that is entered between

Cape Pillar and Cape Hauy, about 5 miles to the N. Cathedral

Rock lies close off the former cape. The Lanterns, a group of

prominent rocks off the latter cape.

3.76 Hippolyte Rocks (Hippolite Rocks) (43°08'S., 148°03'E.)

lie about 2.2 miles ENE of Cape Hauy. They are comprised of

two above-water rocks and some sunken patches. The passage

between these rocks and between them and the coast is foul

and should not be attempted.

3.76 Fortescue Bay, entered between Cape Hauy and a point

about 1.5 miles NNW, recedes about 1.5 miles to a white sandy

beach. It affords shelter only with offshore winds, as the Hippolyte Rocks in its approach are insufficient to protect it from

seaward.

3.76 Pirates Bay (43°01'S., 147°56'E.) lies 6.5 miles NNW of

Fortescue Bay. The bay recedes about 0.7 mile and has two

sandy beaches, a small one in its S bight and a larger one along

its W shore, the latter beach forming the E side of Eaglehawk

Neck. The Clyde Islets lie about 1.5 miles NE of the neck.

3.76 From the N entrance point of Pirates Bay, the coast trends

about 3.7 miles NE to Cape Surville (42°57'S., 148°00'E.).

About 0.5 mile SE of this cape are The Sisters, a group of

rocky islets. Mount Macgregor, with its double summit, lies

behind this coast about 3 miles SW of Cape Surville. Between

Cape Surville and High Yellow Bluff, about 1.7 miles N, the

coast is steep and bordered by high rocks, and then for about 2

miles NW to Humper Bluff, it is bordered by above-water

rocks and sunken rocks, and affords neither anchorage nor

shelter as the sea breaks heavily on every part of it.

Lagoon Bay (Wilmot Cove) (42°53'S., 147°58'E.), which

extends about 1.2 miles to the W, is entered between Humper

Bluff and Cape Frederick Hendrick, about 0.7 mile to the N.

The S shore of the bay is fronted by several rocks and islets, the

largest and farthest offshore being the Kelly Islets, which lie

off Humper Bluff. Rocks also extend E from Cape Frederick

Hendrick.

3.76 North Bay is entered between Cape Frederick Hendrick and

Cape Paul Lamanon, about 2.5 miles N. The bay recedes about

1.2 miles to a lagoon at its head. Visscher Island, which lies in

the entrance to the bay, is too small to afford any protection

from seaward.

3.77 Blackman Bay (42°52'S., 147°51'E.) is an extensive

but shallow inlet which almost separates the Forestier Peninsula from the mainland and which is connected with Norfolk Bay

by the Denison Canal.

3.77 The bay is entered by way of Marion Narrows, on a lighted

range bearing 207.5°; these beacons may not necessarily indicate the deepest water. The channel from Marion Bay to Blackman Bay is marked by beacons. Important places in the

channel are marked by lighted beacons. Local knowledge of

the channel is necessary. The channel from Marion Bay

through Blackman Bay to the E end of Denison Canal had a

least depth of 1.0m in 1998 in the vicinity of the No. 4 Beacon.

3.77 Cape Bernier (42°44'S., 147°57'E.) forms the N entrance

point to Marion Bay. The cape is high and is remarkable on account of its conical shape. The S and E sides of the cape are

steep-to.

3.77 Maria Island (42°40'S., 148°04'E.) lies off the mainland between Cape Bernier and Cape Bougainville, about 13 miles N,

with Cape Peron, its S extremity, located about 3.5 miles E of

Cape Bernier. The island is about 11 miles long and is nearly

divided into two parts by Riedle Bay on the E side and Oyster

Bay on the W, with only a low sandy isthmus between them.

The village of Darlington stands at the N end of the island.

3.77 Cape Peron, the SW extremity of Maria Island, is a bold

headland, off of which lies three rocks. The outer rock, known

locally as the Boy in the Boat, is a small steep-to pinnacle,

0.6m high, lying about 0.4 mile S of Cape Peron; the middle

rock is 1.8m high. Pyramid Rock, the inner rock, is 36m high

and lies close to the cape.

3.77 Riedle Bay (42°41'S., 148°05'E.) is about 2 miles wide at its

entrance, from which it recedes about 1 mile.

3.77 The bay affords anchorage for vessels remaining any length

of time, being entirely exposed to the wind and sea from NE to

S. There are depths of 16.5 to 27.4m in its SW part; in its NE

part, the depths are from 9.1 to 11m.

3.77 Mistaken Cape forms the E extremity of Maria Island and

lies about 3.5 miles ENE of Riedle Bay. According to determinations made in 1968, the cape lies about 2 miles W of its

charted position. The cape has been reported to give good radar

Courtesy of http://www.adagiomarine.com

Tasman Island and Point Pillar from NE
84 Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 

Pub. 127

returns up to 13 miles.

3.78 North Islet (42°34'S., 148°04'E.) lies about 0.5 mile

N of the N extremity of Maria Island. Bird Rock and foul

ground lie between the islet and the island. A light is shown

from the summit of North Islet.

3.78 Oyster Bay lies on the W side of Maria Island and is about

1.2 miles wide at its entrance. The greatest depth in the bay is

not more than 6.4m and it generally does not exceed 3.6 to

5.5m. The bay is separated from Riedle Bay by a narrow isthmus.

3.78 Mercury Passage (42°40'S., 148°00'E.), between Maria Island and the mainland, is only available to vessels with local

knowledge whose draft does not exceed 6.4m. The passage is

about 3.5 miles wide at both its S and N entrance, but midway

it is narrowed to a width of about 1 mile between Lachlan Islet

and the rocks around it. There are depths of 14.6 to 16.5m in

midchannel off Oyster Bay, 12.8m about 2 miles N of Lachlan

Islet, and 34.7m in the N entrance channel.

3.78 Lachlan Islet (42°39'S., 147°58'E.) lies in the middle of

Mercury Passage, near its N entrance. The islet is triangular in

shape and covered with grass. There is a small reef of rocks

about 0.1 mile to the NW of the island. The channel W of the

islet has a least depth of 2.1m and only small vessels should attempt it. A light is shown on the summit of the islet.

3.78 Prosser Bay indents the mainland for 1.2 miles between

Luther Point and Meredith Point (42°33'S., 148°55'E.), about

1 mile NNE. The bay is shallow and useless for any but small

vessels. 

3.78 A vessel may find anchorage off its entrance, in a depth of

14.6m, but would not be sheltered from S winds which, in this

locality, are violent. East gales cause a dangerous sea in this

bay.

3.78 There is a jetty, with a depth of 2.4m at its head, on the S side

of the bay about 0.5 mile WSW of Luther Point.

3.78 The Prosser River, which flows into the middle of the head

of the bay, is obstructed at its mouth by a bar with a depth of

0.6m. On the S side of the entrance to this river is the village of

Orford. A bridge spans the river about 0.4 mile above its entrance.

3.79 Spring Bay (42°33'S., 147°56'E.) (World Port Index

No. 54725), so called from a spring on its E side, is entered between Meredith Point and Freestone Point, about 1 mile E.

There are depths in the bay of over 11m from its entrance to

nearly 1.5 miles within the bay, which has good holding

ground of mud and is completely sheltered from wind and sea.

A light is shown from the head of a jetty, situated about 0.4

mile N of Meredith Point.

3.79 Spring Bay Wharf is situated about 0.2 mile NNW of Freestone Point. It extends 137m WSW to a T-head, 244m in

length, with a least depth of 10.6m alongside. It is used exclusively to load wood chips.

3.79 Pilotage.—Pilots board incoming vessels 1.5 mile S of

Point Home Lookout (42°33'S., 147°57'E.) in 23m of water.

Pilotage is compulsory for ships 35m in length or over. Ships

requiring a pilot should notify the Harbormaster, Hobart, at

least 24 hours in advance, confirming or amending the ETA at

least 7 hours before arrival at the pilot boarding position.

3.79 Regulations.—A restricted area, with a radius of 300m, is

declared around any vessel engaged in, or assisting with, the

shipment of wood chips, when within the limits of the port of

Spring Bay. 

3.79 Spring Bay is a first port of entry. The quarantine line lies

across the entrance to the bay; the quarantine anchorage is

within 0.3 mile of a position 0.5 mile W of Freestone Point.

3.79 Anchorage.—There is a very good anchorage at the entrance to Spring Bay, in depths of 11 to 14.6m, sand. Lights, in

line bearing 359°, lead up the bay to the wharf. The channel to

the N end of the bay requires local knowledge.

3.79 A submarine pipeline crosses the bay from close N of Aliginates Jetty to Paddy’s Point. Anchoring is prohibited 50m on

either side of the pipeline.

3.80 Okehampton Bay (42°32'S., 147°58'E.) lies 2.5

miles E of Spring Bay and is entered between Point Home

Lookout and Lords Bluff, 2.2 miles NE. Sunken rocks extend

about 0.7 mile from the bluff. A light is shown on Point Home

Lookout.

3.80 Cape Bougainville (42°31'S., 148°00'E.) lies 3 miles NE of

Point Home Lookout. The cape is a double point about 1 mile

wide, projecting 1 mile to the SE from the coastline.

3.80 From Cape Bougainville, the coast trends N for about 5

miles to the SE entrance point of Grindstone Bay, a small inlet

trending to the W. Between the bay and Point Bailly (42°21'S.,

148°01'E.), about 6 miles N, the coast forms a bight across

which there are depths of from 25.6 to 29.3m. On the S side of

Point Bailly are some above-water rocks extending about 0.7

mile SE, with depths of 18.3m close outside them.

Iles Des Phoques (White Rock) (42°25'S., 148°10'E.), lying

about 7 miles ENE of Grindstone Bay, is a sterile rock with

depths of 21.9m close S of it and from 43.9 to 47.5m between

it and the shore. Schouten Island lies about 11 miles E of Point

Bailly. A light is shown on the S side of the island.

3.80 Schouten Passage, which separates Schouten Island from the

S point of the Freycinet Peninsula to the N of it, is about 0.5

mile wide across its narrowest part, with apparently no dangers

other than a small above-water rock, close off the S point of the

peninsula. A shoal, with a depth of 9.1m, was reported to lie

1.5 miles WNW of the S extremity of the peninsula.

3.81 Great Oyster Bay (42°12'S., 148°10'E.) is formed on

the E side by Schouten Island and the Freycinet Peninsula and

on the W side by the coast extending N from Point Bailly.

Depths in the bay are from 12.9 to 20.1m. Little Swanport, the

entrance to which lies on the W side of the bay about 2 miles N

of Point Bailly, is only available to boats.

3.81 Swansea (42°09'S., 148°05'E.) lies on the W side of Great

Oyster Bay, about 1.5 miles S of the head of the bay. The port

consists of a jetty, with a depth of 2.4m alongside its head. The

head of the bay is made up of a low tongue of land, with an

opening at its E end, which leads into a shallow lagoon.

3.81 Promise Bay (42°11'S., 148°16'E.) lies on the E side of

Great Oyster Bay and is entered between Weatherhead Point,

the W extremity of the Freycinet Peninsula, and Fleuieu Point,

about 4 miles N. Refuge Islet lies about 0.7 mile S of Fleuieu

Point on the edge of a spit of foul ground. Good anchorage

may be found S of the islet.

3.81 The Freycinet Peninsula is 6 miles long, S to N, and 3.5

miles wide at its broadest part; it then gradually narrows to
Sector 3. Australia—Coasts of Tasmania 85

Pub. 127

Cape Degerando, its S point. Cape Forestier, the N end of the

peninsula, has been reported to give good radar returns up to 18

miles. An isthmus connects the Freycinet Peninsula to a small

one called The Hazards, about 1 mile NNW.

3.81 Cape Tourville (42°07'S., 148°21'E.) lies 3.5 miles N of

Cape Forestier and shows a light. The cape is high and projects

0.5 mile SE from the coast. Sleepy Bay lies on its S side and

The Nuggets, a group of islets and rocks, extend about 1 mile

NE of it.

Cape Tourville to St. Helens Point

3.82 Bluestone Bay is an indentation about 2 miles NNW

of Cape Tourville. About 3 miles NNW of this bay there is a

double headland with a small islet on its W side, and about 1.2

miles NW of this islet there is a larger islet, between which the

latter and Moulting Lagoon the land rises to Mount Peter.

About 5 miles N of the above N islet, Butler Point projects

about 0.5 mile SE from the coast and between this point and

Cape Lodi is Courland Bay.

3.82 Bicheno (41°52'S., 148°18'E.), a small town, lies about 2.5

miles NNW of Cape Lodi. There is a wooden jetty off the

town, with a depth of 2.4m alongside. Waubs Harbor lies close

N of the town and Diamond Islet lies about 1 mile farther

NNW.

3.82 Maclean Bay is entered between the E entrance point of

Waubs Harbor and Long Point, about 7.2 miles N. The Douglas

River enters the sea about 2.5 miles SSW of Long Point.

3.82 Long Point (41°45'S., 148°18'E.) is a small peninsula with a

small bight on either side of the isthmus which connects it with

the mainland; about 0.5 mile NW of the extremity of this peninsula there is an inlet which has a narrow entrance and which

trends N parallel with the coast. The village of Seymour is situated at the point. There is a coaling jetty here, with a least

depth of 7.3m alongside.

3.82 Between Long Point and St. Patricks Foreland (41°35'S.,

148°20'E.), about 10 miles N, are Picaninny Point and Saltwater Inlet, about 3 and 5 miles N of Long Point. St. Patricks

Foreland and the coast for about 2 miles N of it are bordered by

a reef. There are depths of 18.3m close N of the foreland. St.

Patricks Head, 678m high, is a conspicuous mountain.

3.83 Paddys Islet (41°24'S., 148°18'E.) lies about 10 miles

N of St. Patricks Foreland and 0.5 mile offshore. Depths of less

than 9.1m extend about 0.7 mile E from the islet. Pulfers Bank,

with a depth of 7.3m, lies about 3.5 miles SE of Paddys Islet.

St. Helens Island lies about 3.5 miles NNE of Paddys Islet.

Rocks, awash, lie close N and S of its E extremity. In case of

necessity, a vessel might anchor, in a depth of 21.9m, between

this island and the coast. Middle Ground, with a depth of 8.8m,

lies 1 mile S of St. Helen’s southernmost rocks.

3.83 St. Helens Point (41°17'S., 148°21'E.) is the N end of a long

and comparatively narrow tongue of land, on which there is a

continuous ridge of hills, extending NNE to Bare Top Hill,

which is about 0.5 mile within the point. Brooker Rocks lie on

the seaward end of a spit of foul ground which extends about

1.2 miles SE from St. Helens Point. Merrick Rock, with a

depth of 3.7m, lies about 1 mile E of the point. A buoy is

moored 1.5 miles SE of Merrick Rock. A light is shown on

Bare Top Hill.

3.83 Georges Bay (41°19'S., 148°17'E.) is an extensive harbor

with deep water inside a shallow entrance channel, which lies

on the W side of a tongue of land terminating in St. Helens

Point. The outer part of this channel is mostly obstructed by

shallow banks which extend from either shore and form a bar,

the channel across which is liable to change and is only available to small vessels with local knowledge. The channel is

marked by beacons and buoys, which are moved as the bar

changes. Georges Bay is divided into three parts. Its main basin

lies immediately W and S of the inner end of the entrance

channel, and into its W side, N of McDonald Point, about 2

miles SW of Atkins Point, flows the Georges River, a shallow

stream. Moulting Bay, the N arm of the bay, extends N from W

of the inner end of the entrance channel. The SW arm of the

bay extends about 2 miles W of the SW end of the main basin

to the Jasons Gate Bridge. Drying mud flats front the shores of

these water areas, and Oyster Patch, with a least depth of 1.8m,

lies in the SW arm, about 1 mile SSW of McDonald Point. The

existence of this patch is doubtful.

3.83 St. Helens (41°19'S., 148°15'E.) lies on the N side of the SW

arm of the bay. A wharf and two small T-headed jetties front

the village, and another T-headed jetty is situated about 0.2

mile E of the Jasons Gate Bridge.

St. Helens Point to Eddystone Point

3.84 Grant Point (41°16'S., 148°20'E.) lies about 1.5

miles NW of St. Helens Point and forms the N entrance point

of Georges Bay. The point is rocky and about 0.3 mile NE of it

is Elephant Rock. From Grant Point, the coast trends about 3.5

miles W and N to a point, close off of which lies an above-water rock. The entrance to Binalong Bay, which branches SW

and W, lies about 1.7 miles W of Grant Point, with Skeleton

Bay between it and that point.

3.84 The Gardens are some sunken patches lying near the coast

and about 5 miles N of Binalong Bay. Garden Lagoon, a small

inlet, lies about 1 mile NNW of The Gardens. From the lagoon,

the coast trends about 5 miles N to the entrance to Anson Lake,

in the S part of Bay of Fires. Depths of less than 9.1m extend

about 0.6 mile ENE from the entrance to the lake. The entrance

to the lake is so narrow that it cannot be seen from seaward and

it scarcely permits passage of a boat at HW. Outside the entrance to the lake, a heavy dangerous surf generally pounds the

beach.

3.84 Bay of Fires (41°02'S., 148°20'E.), with a depth of 9.1m

about 0.3 mile offshore, extends from the entrance to Anson

Lake to Eddystone Point, about 4.5 miles NNE. An 11.9m

rocky patch lies about 1.2 miles SSE of Eddystone Point. 

3.84 Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 18.3m, near the

center of the Bay of Fires, which affords good shelter when the

wind is steady from the W, but should be left immediately if

the wind shifts to the SE.
87

Pub. 127

4. 

Australia—Coast of New South Wales—Cape Howe to Port 

Jackson

4.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 4 — CHART INFORMATION
89

Pub. 127

SECTOR 4 

AUSTRALIA—COAST OF NEW SOUTH WALES—CAPE HOWE TO PORT JACKSON

4.0 Plan.—This sector describes the E coast of New South

Wales between Cape Howe, which is located approximately on

the boundary between the States of Victoria and New South

Wales and Port Jackson, NNE. The sector includes the ports of

Kembla, Botany Bay, and Sydney, the principal Australian

port. The descriptive sequence is from S to N.

General Remarks

4.1 The coast of New South Wales between Cape Howe

and Port Jackson is penetrated with a series of recesses. This

coastal region is well-watered by rivers, although many are

short, swift, and unnavigable. Moderate-sized vessels may find

shelter in Twofold Bay and Batemans Bay. Deep-draft vessels

will find anchorage along the coast, but the more important is

at Port Kembla, Botany Bay, and Port Jackson.

4.1 There are some areas within 1 mile of the coast of New

South Wales that lack detailed surveys. It is also possible there

may be uncharted obstructions.

4.1 Caution is also advised when in the vicinity of Jervis Bay,

where submarines exercise frequently in the approaches. A

good lookout must prevail in this area, as firing practices and

other naval exercises also take place.

4.1 Winds—Weather.—The section of the Australian coast described in this sector is dominated by an area of high pressure.

4.1 The prevailing winds between Cape Howe and Port Jackson

are from the NE from October to April and from the W from

May to September. Very oppressive hot winds from the NW

sometimes prevail from November to February, and are usually

followed by a sudden shift from between the SE and SSW, and

against which vessels near the coast should be particularly

guarded, as the gust is generally very violent. There are also

frequently sudden changes from the NW to S, from September

to February, without warning, and these are well-known as the

southerly busters. The effect is so great that the thermometer at

Port Jackson descends from 38° to 18°C in less than 30 minutes. These storms may last only a few hours or for several

days, and average 32 in number during the season. 

4.1 Land and sea breezes are frequent from November to February; the NE wind springs up from a calm in the morning and

subsides about midnight.

4.1 Fog is rare except in the summer months and then seldom

lasts longer than from dawn to mid-morning.

4.1 Tides—Currents.—The East Australian Coast Current sets

S throughout the year along the New South Wales coast from

the S coast of Queensland to the vicinity of Cape Howe. The

current here is less strong and constant than the N part. This effect occurs due to water branching off from the seaward side of

the current between 32°S, and 34°S, turning SE and passing into the open ocean.

Cape Howe to Bass Point

4.2 Cape Howe (37°30'S., 149°59'E.) is low and formed

of stones and sand; sunken rocks project 0.3 mile E from the

cape. The prominent feature on this part of the coastline is in

Howe Hill (37°31'S., 149°53'E.), 4 miles W of Cape Howe, rising abruptly from low land to a summit shaped like a haystack.

Northwest of Cape Howe, at about 5 miles on the tree-cleared

boundary between the States of Victoria and New South Wales,

is Mount Carlyle, rising to 362m, part of the Howe Range.

Generally, the whole aspect of the land about Cape Howe is

that of a mountainous district, as the Table Hills NNW of the

Howe Range runs to Disaster Bay, and similar hills border the

coast which consists of steep rocky spikes and indentations of

sand.

4.2 Disaster Bay (37°16'S., 149°58'E.) indents the coast, providing 3.5 miles of sandy beach. The NE side of the bay is

marked by a light at Green Cape, which is steep-to with no outlying dangers. There is a signal station at Green Cape providing a telephone communication link to Gabo Island and

Twofold Bay. Communication to Green Cape can be made by

International Code, but there is no special monitoring at night.

Green Cape has given good radar returns up to 18 miles.

4.2 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available, in depths of 21.9 to

31.1m,sand bottom, under Skelton Hill (Green Hill), during

NE winds.

4.2 The coastline from Green Cape to Twofold Bay is bold and

continues with rocky points and sandy beaches, where depths

of 27.4 to 36.5m can be found 0.5 mile off the shore. The back

country is hilly where Haycock Hill, 251m high, dominates,

but at about 11 miles W of Haycock Hill is the remarkable

wooded peak of Mount Imlay, 887m high. A feature which is

quite conspicuous from the S is Mowwarry Rock, lying close

in at Mowwarry Point.

4.3 Twofold Bay (37°04'S., 149°56'E.) is entered from

seaward between Red Point (37°06'S., 149°57'E.), on which

stands Boyds Tower, and Worang Point, about 2.5 miles further

N. The bay offers depths of 18.3 to 40.2m between the entrance

points, shoaling gradually towards its head. The bay is generally free of dangers, except for Seahorse Shoal a group of steepto patches, with depths of less than 6.4m, lying up to 0.6 mile

NNE of Red Point.

4.3 Mount Imlay, bearing 240°, is an excellent mark for entering

the bay.

4.3 The S shore of Twofold Bay between Red Point and Honeysuckle Point forms an exposed bay where depths of 7m will be

found off the points, but depths of 14 to 20m will exist between

them. Characteristic of the coastline between Honeysuckle

Point to Munganno Point (Munganoa Point), the NE point of

East Boyd Bay is that of a rather bold, cliffy shore which extends WSW for 0.6 mile. 

4.3 East Boyd Bay indents the coast about 2 miles S of Lookout

Point, and is entered between Munganno Point and Brierly

Point, about 1 mile SW.

4.3 Anchorage.—Vessels greater than 3,000 grt should not anchor inside the port limits, inshore of a line joining Worang

Point and Red Point, without the express permission of the harbormaster. 
90 Sector 4. Australia—Coast of New South Wales—Cape Howe to Port Jackson 

Pub. 127

4.3 Nullica Bay forms the W bight of Twofold Bay; it offers 7.9

to 9.3m of water throughout its extent, but shoals rapidly within 0.1 mile of the shore. From Nullica Bay to Snug Cove,

shoals and rocks extend up to 0.1 mile offshore.

Eden (37°04'S., 149°56'E.)

World Port Index No. 53810

4.4 Eden is situated on the N shore of Twofold Bay. It is

comprised of the jetties W of Lookout Point (Snug Cove), the

tanker mooring W of the same point, and the dry bulk berth situated on the S side of the bay at Munganno Point. The port

limits are designated by a line drawn from Worang Point S to

Red Point. 

4.4 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Eden is 1.3m at MHHW.

4.4 Depths—Limitations.—Eden East Breakwater, situated

about 0.3 mile WNW of Lookout Point, has a berth along its

inner face.

4.4 The Breakwater Wharf is 104m long, with depths of 3.0 to

8.5m.

4.4 Directly NW of the breakwater is the Eden Jetty (Multipurpose Jetty). The pier is 183m long with alongside depths of 4.9

to 7.3m.

4.4 The next pier directly NW is the Moorings Jetty and is used

exclusively by fishing vessels. It is a private jetty with a length

of 145m and depths of 2 to 5m alongside. 

4.4 The Munganno Point woodchip loading berth is T-shaped

and composed of five sets of mooring dolphins in addition to 5

mooring buoys. It can handle vessels up to 230m in length and

50,000 grt. The maximum draft is 11.3m.

4.4 Aspect.—A light is shown from Lookout Point and from the

end of the breakwater. Range lights, in line bearing 321.5°,

lead clear of the tanker mooring. 

4.4 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all commercial vessels over 30m long for Twofold Bay and should be requested in

advance. The pilot will board incoming vessels about 1.2 miles

E of Lookout Point. The pilot will respond to calls for “Eden

Maritime”on VHF channel 16.

4.4 Regulations.—The Quarantine Anchorage is best seen on

the chart. Vessels requiring medical or emergency assistance

should communicate with the pilot station via Radio Sydney,

giving ETA and requirements. The pilot acts as the customs

agent.

4.4 Signals.—The Signal Station is situated on Lookout Point.

No regular watch is kept, but signals will be answered if seen.

A VHF communication watch is kept only when a vessel is expected.

4.4 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off Snug Cove, in

about 10m, sand and mud, but the anchorage in East Boyd Bay

offers better protection in E and SE gales. Vessels over 3,000

grt are not allowed to anchor inside the port limits without the

expressed permission of the Harbor Master. 

4.4 Caution.—The quarantine anchorage is not safe for large

vessels in a strong E wind or heavy E swell.

4.5 Calle-Calle Bay (37°04'S., 149°56'E.) is entered between Lookout Point and West Orange Point, about 1.7 miles

NE. This bay is not desirable as an anchorage at any time, as a

ground swell almost always sets into it and is exposed to the S

and SE. 

The coast N of Worang Point passes Bullara Island (Lennard

Island), from which a reef projects a short distance from its N

extremity. From the island the coast curves to the red Quoraburagun Cliffs, then to Haycock Point. Haystack Rock, a remarkable rock 15m high, lies off Haycock Point and is

connected to the shore by a rocky reef. A succession of rocky

points from Haystack Rock sweeps around NW to the entrance

of Pambula Lake.

4.5 Good anchorage, sheltered from SW and S winds, is available off the entrance of the Pambula River, in 10.9m, with the

N part of Haycock Point bearing 100° and Merimbula Point

bearing 021°.

4.5 Merimbula Bay is a sandy indentation lying between Haycock Point and Merimbula Point. It penetrates the coast 1.8

miles, with depths of 29.3 to 31.1m, shoaling gradually to

14.6m within 0.3 mile of the beach. Merimbula Point is a steep,

cliffy headland.

4.5 The coast N forms a bight between Tura Head and Turingal

Point, which is divided midway by Bowinda Island. From Turingal Point, an uneven line of granite and pipe-clay cliffs, with

grassy land over them, extends to Tathra Head (36°43'S.,

149°59'E.).

4.5 Aspect.—The land between Mogareka Inlet and Bunga

Head N is generally poor, consisting of high scrubby hills.

Again, this part of the coast is well-watered by rivers. Inland, a

thickly timbered range of mountains rises N and S to Mount

Townsend (Mount Mumbula). This summit, 804m high, lies 10

miles W of Bunga Head. There is a peaked summit at Bunga

Head, 125m high, and sunken rocks fringe its base from 100 to

200m distant.

4.5 The coast to Barragga Point (36°30'S., 150°04'E.) from

Bunga Head appears to be a series of small rocky points

fringed with sunken rocks.

4.6 Bermagui Inlet (36°25'S., 150°04'E.) is a small,

sandy inlet into which flows the Bermagui River. A conspicuous tank stands on this coastal point and a light marks each side

of the Bermagui Inlet which is navigable for small craft only.

4.6 The coast in the vicinity of the Bermagui Inlet consists of

thick scrub and forest, and then breaks into a low sandy beach,

backed by a swamp curving N to Murunna Point. Close W of

the N part of Murunna Point is salty Walluga Lake. 

4.6 The coast from the lake area to Cape Dromedary (36°18'S.,

150°08'E.) consists of a sandy beach with good pasture and

plenty of fresh water. Shoal water extends over 0.5 mile off the

shore, 1.5 miles N of Murunna Point. Cape Dromedary lies

about 5 miles E from the mountain of the same name. Mount

Dromedary is the most remarkable mark on this part of the

coast. In clear weather, the mariner will sight this double

mountain from 60 miles. Its NW peak is 809m high, with the

SE summit rising to 794m. Between this mountain and Cape

Dromedary, Ajungagua Hill rises to 214m.

4.6 Caution.—A wreck lies about 3.2 miles E of Cape DromePort of Eden

http://www.eden.nsw.gov.au
Pub. 127 Eden
92 Sector 4. Australia—Coast of New South Wales—Cape Howe to Port Jackson 

Pub. 127

dary.

Montague Island (Barunguba Island)(36°15'S., 150°14'E.)

lies 3.8 miles ENE from Nugget Point. It is two islets, as a deep

rocky chasm divides its center through which the sea breaks

heavily with strong E winds. The island has been reported to

give good radar returns up to 22 miles.

4.6 A reef of rocks, with depths of 9.1 to 16.4m, extends from

the SW extremity of the island where the sea breaks frequently

in heavy weather. Auginish Rock, with a depth of 5.5m, lies

1.5 miles S of Montague Island Light; and two more rocks,

with depths of 4.6 and 4.9m, lie close together, about 2.5 miles

S of the light. Care should be taken to avoid the area, as other

dangers may exist.

4.6 A light is shown from the summit of Montague Island. The

light is in radiotelephone communication with Norah Head

Light at fixed intervals. Visual signals will be answered if seen,

but no special watch is kept.

4.6 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be found for small vessels,

with E and S winds, in a small bight on the W coast formed by

the two parts of the island, but it can not be recommended for

large vessels. Anchorage is prohibited within 100m of submarine cable laid across the Clyde River in close proximity of the

bridge in position 35°42.3'S, 150°10.7'E.

4.6 When navigating this part of the coast, vessels bound N are

recommended to keep inside Montague Island and about 2

miles off the mainland all the way N to avoid the S current usually found outside. 

4.6 Caution.—Caution should be exercised to clear the dangerous wreck charted E of Cape Dromedary.

4.7 The coast to Wagonga Head is a succession of granite

and ironstone points, all bordered with reefs, with sandy beaches in between. The promontory on the S side of the entrance to

Wagonga Inlet is marked by a signal station where a vessel can

communicate by International Code. The coast to Yellow

Head, and farther N to Marka Point, continues with high

points, reefs, and sandy beaches. A fire tower stands at about

2.5 miles WSW of Yellow Head.

4.7 Marka Point, 30m high, is fringed with rocks, and located

about 0.5 mile N of Jamisons Point, the N entrance point of

Lake Tarouga.

4.7 The coast to Tuross Inlet is formed by a low tongue of land.

There is a sunken rock about 0.2 mile off the mouth of the inlet. A sandy beach, with scrubby land behind it, near Tuross Inlet at Coila Lagoon continues to Binge-Binge Point (36°01'S.,

150°10'E.). From this point, the coast takes on a succession of

small bays and rocky points curving around N to Mullinburra

Point and on to Congar Point. 

4.7 The sea always breaks on Black Rock with strong SE gales,

and it breaks heavily on some patches of a ledge that extends N

to Congar Point from Petro Head.

4.7 From Congar Point, the beach continues in a N direction to

Yowaga Point and then to Moruya Head, the headland forming

the S side of the entrance of the Moruya River. On the W point

or inner S head of this peninsula, there is a signal station where

signals are made by International Code or Morse Code by

flashing lamp. From the NW side of the entrance to the

Moruya River, the coast consists of a sandy beach, backed by

dunes to a head with reefs projecting from it.

4.7 Broulee Island (35°52'S., 150°11'E.) lies about 0.3 mile E

of the coast and is enclosed by a reef of dry and covered rocks.

The N coast of the island forms a bay which provides good anchorage for small vessels as indicated on the chart.

4.7 Burrewarra Point is a rocky headland, 57m high, closely

fringed by a reef, and projects about 0.5 mile off the coastline.

The point has been reported to give good radar returns up to 19

miles. A light is shown from Burrewarra Point.

4.8 Batemans Bay (35°44'S., 150°12'E.) (World Port Index No. 53750) is entered between South Head and North

Head and runs in a NW direction from the Tollgate Islets to the

bar of the Clyde River.

4.8 Depths in Batemans Bay decrease gradually from 16m at

the entrance to 7m at a point 0.4 mile off Square Head, then

shoaling to the Clyde River.

4.8 The SW shoreline of Batemans Bay is made up a series of

rocky points and small sandy bays to Observation Head. The

remainder of this part of the coast consists of a series of reefs

as it meets the SW entrance point of the Clyde River.

4.8 North Head, the N entrance point of Batemans Bay, rises to

38m and is surrounded by rocks. Between North Head and

Three Islet Point, there is a sandy beach. Other bays appear W

of Three Islet Point with the projection of headlands between

Three Islet Point and Reef Point, where depths do not exceed

7.3m.

4.8 Tides—Currents.—The spring rises at Batemans Bay varies from 1.4 to 1.8m.

4.8 Anchorage.—The recommended anchorage for large vessels in Batemans Bay is in 9.1 to 10.9m, sand bottom, about 0.3

mile WSW of Acheron Ledge (35°44'S., 150°15'E.). Deepdraft vessels anchor, in 16.5m, about 2 miles N of South Head.

The mariner should be cautioned that a heavy ground swell

may be experienced at the anchorages, and the sea will break in

the bay under the influence of strong E of SE winds.

4.8 Caution.—The Tollgate Islands (35°45'S., 150°16'E.) are

connected by a ledge of rocks and reefs extending nearly 0.5

mile NE and SE, closely fringed with rocks, and having depths

of 11 to 16m about 0.1 mile outside these islands. From the

Tollgate Islands, a ledge of rocks with depths of 3.7 to 4.6m extends NW, N, and NE for about 0.2 mile. The bottom is rocky,

with depths of 5.5 to 9m, deepening suddenly to 16.5 to 18.3m,

sandy bottom.

4.8 Trennant Rock, with a depth of 4m, lies 0.3 mile S of the

Tollgate Islands.

4.8 Black Rock, about 1 mile SE of Trennant Rock, is 10m high

and has depths of 11 to 18m surrounding it.

4.9 The coast N from North Head to Point Upright consists of a series of small points and sandy beaches. Point Upright becomes the termination of a ridge of hills extending

from the W. The land recedes nearly 1 mile at the point, forming a bay about 2 miles long, concluding in a sandy beach.

Close above Point Upright, at Grasshopper Islet, there is a

ledge of sunken rocks on which the sea breaks heavily. The

coast forms a bay N of Grasshopper Islet at 1.5 miles. About

0.5 mile W of the N entrance point of this bay is Pebbly Beach,

off which small vessels can find shelter except with S and SE

winds, but the holding ground is very poor, being sand over

rock.

4.9 The coast curves N and NNE to a point at the base of Mount
Sector 4. Australia—Coast of New South Wales—Cape Howe to Port Jackson 93

Pub. 127

O’Hara, which rises close behind to a height of 338m.The

Dawson Islets (35°35'S., 150°21'E.), two in number and 3m

high, lie on the reef extending about 0.5 mile E of this last

mentioned point.

4.9 O’Hara Head is 2.2 miles NE from the Dawson Islets and

O’Hara Island, 4.5m high, lies near the shore at 0.5 mile N of

Dawson Islets. Robbie Shoal, with a depth of 5.5m, lies about

0.6 mile E of O’Hara Head. The 20m curve is seaward of the

shoal.

4.9 Brush Island (35°32'S., 150°25'E.), lying 0.1 mile off Murramarang Point (First Sandy Point), is 43m high and about 0.5

mile across. A light is shown from the summit of Brush Island.

4.9 About 0.4 mile NE from the E extremity of Brush Island is a

dangerous rock which breaks only with a heavy swell; in the

channel between the island and the mainland there is an abovewater rock. Vessels bound N and keeping inshore to avoid the

current should be careful when passing this island and give it a

berth of more than 1 mile.

4.9 Anchorage.—Anchorage, sheltered from S winds, may be

obtained off the NW side of Brush Island, in about 11m, sandy

bottom. The anchorage is made when O’Hara Head is in line

with Murramarang Point and the N end of Brush Island bears

100°.

4.9 Bawley Point is located near the above anchorage and is the

name of a small township. From this point, the coast extends

NW in and out to the narrow mouth of Muroo Lake.

4.9 Stokes Island, NE of Muroo Lake, is surrounded by reefs apparently connected with the shore to the N of the island.

Crampton Islet is located on a reef which extends across the

mouth of a narrow inlet trending N about 2 miles, and separated from the sea by a narrow tongue of land. Between Crampton

Islet and Lagoon Head NNE, there is a sandy beach nearly 0.5

mile long. The coast then becomes rocky with a bordering reef;

these characteristics continue to the narrow opening of Burril

Lake NW. A sandy beach extends NE from this lagoon to a

prominent rocky point off which a narrow ledge of rocks

projects 0.7 mile SE. The sea breaks all the way between the

outer rock and the shore. From this ledge, rocky points extend

NE to Warden Head, which has a reef projecting nearly 0.5

mile from its SE extremity.

4.9 Warden Head Light (35°22'S., 150°30'E.) is shown from a

circular white lighthouse.

4.9 Sullivan Reef lies nearly across the fairway of the entrance to

Ulladulla Harbor, forming a natural breakwater, and tends to

break the heavy sea rolling in toward the artificial breakwater

at the head of the harbor during E winds.

4.10 Ulladulla Harbor (35°22'S., 150°30'E.) (World Port

Index No. 53730) is 0.4 mile wide NW and SE between the

rocky shelf which projects 100m from Warden Head and the

detached rocks which extend nearly the same distance from

North Head. It is a fishing harbor for vessels up to 45m length,

with a draft of 3.6m. The shores are fringed with rocks which

extend about 0.1 mile offshore on the S side, but at its head

there is a sandy beach. 

4.10 The entrance is marked by two breakwaters, where lights

mark their seaward extremities. The width between the breakwater heads is 85m.

4.10 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Ulladulla Harbor is

1.2m at MHHW, and 1.1m at MLHW.

4.10 Depths—Limitations.—In mid-channel between the entrance heads, there are depths of about 10m, sand, which shoal

gradually toward the breakwater entrance. Depths of 3.6 to

5.5m extend up to 0.2 mile N from the S shore E of the breakwater head.

4.10 Range lights shown from on the beach at the head of the bay

lead into Ulladulla Harbor.

4.10 Pilotage.—An unlicensed pilot, with extensive local knowledge, employed by the Marine Services Board of New South

Wales is reported to be available if required. The harbor is not

easy to access and caution is advised when making the approach, as the heads are difficult to distinguish.

4.10 Directions.—The best mark for making Ulladulla Harbor is

the Pigeon House, a prominent isolated mountain, 730m high,

bearing 272°, which leads to the entrance of the harbor; when

within 5 to 6 miles, the white houses at the head of the harbor

and the sandy beach under them will be distinguished. When

abreast of North Head, the depths about 9m, Pigeon House will

be lost from sight and the leading marks will lead to abreast of

the inner harbor entrance.

4.11 Between the north head of Ulladulla Harbor and the

entrance of Narrawallee Inlet (Nurrawhirra Inlet), about 3

miles N, the coast divides into two sandy indentations, with

Bannister Point midway between the two. Care must be taken

to avoid the rock, with a depth of 1m at LW, lying N of the

point.

4.11 Preservation Rock lies on a reef about 0.2 mile E of the S entrance of Narrawallee Inlet. The N half of this bay, where the

inlet indents, is a sandy beach; the coast trending NE meets a

low point forming the SE side of the opening of Conjola Lake,

close in front of which is Green Island. It appears that Green

Island is fringed by a reef connected with the bar across the

mouth of Conjola Lake behind it.

4.11 Red Point, NE of Green Island, is fringed with rocks and

projects 0.7 mile E of the coastline. Above Red Point, the narrow mouth of Swan Lake indents the coast and there is a bay, 1

mile deep, the irregular shore of which is intersected by two

small streams. From the entrance to Swan Lake, a sandy beach

curves ENE to the W point of Wreck Bay, the point of which

forms the S side of the narrow mouth of Sussex Inlet. This inlet, following a N direction, travels into St. Georges Basin.

4.11 Overhead and submarine cables and pipes cross Sussex Inlet

at various points and are usually indicated by warning notices

on the shore. Caution should be exercised at all times while

navigating or anchoring in the vicinity of these crossings.

4.12 Wreck Bay (35°12'S., 150°42'E.), between Sussex

Inlet and St. George Head (35°12'S., 150°42'E.), is 5 miles in

length and recedes 2.3 miles in the E part. The N shore from

the mouth of Sussex Inlet consists of a sandy beach, fronted by

rocks, and backed by sand dunes for about 3.5 miles. This part

of the coast has depths of less than 11m extending out to about

0.5 mile. 

4.12 Anchorage.—Anchorage in Wreck Bay is restricted to the

summer season and the best anchorage then is in 13m, with the

S extreme of St. Georges Head bearing 145° and the center of

three rocky points (points of three small bays) in the NE corner

of the bay bearing 045°. This anchorage also insures immediate exit should a S squall come up.
94 Sector 4. Australia—Coast of New South Wales—Cape Howe to Port Jackson 

Pub. 127

4.12 Caution.—Vessels are cautioned of the dangers of navigating near this stretch of coast during bad weather with E or SE

winds, as there is a good possibility of being set into Wreck

Bay. To insure a vessel’s safety at night, the mariner should

keep Perpendicular Point Light in sight and ensure a position

well to the E of Wreck Bay.

4.12 Three areas off Wreck Bay, bounded in each case by a circle

with a radius of 0.5 mile, have been designated as dangerous

areas, and anchoring, trawling, or fishing is dangerous in their

vicinity. The centers of the circles lie bearing 207°, 3.5 miles,

bearing 232°, 5.6 miles, and bearing 270°, 4.4 miles from St.

Georges Head.

4.12 Between the headlands of St. George Head and Cape St.

George, there is a small exposed bay; the cape is surrounded

with numerous sunken rocks.

4.12 A cliffy coast trends N from Cape St. George to Governor

Head. Inclusive in this stretch of coast is a measured mile, the

start and finish of which is best seen on the chart.

4.13 Jervis Bay (35°07'S., 150°48'E.) (World Port Index

No. 53710) is entered between Bowen Island, which lies close

N of Governor Head, and Point Perpendicular.

4.13 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Jervis Bay is 1.5m at

MHHW, and 1.2m at MLHW. 

4.13 Depths—Limitations.—Within its entrance, Jervis Bay extends 8 miles N and S, and from 3 to 5.5 miles E and W, with

regular depths gradually decreasing from 36m in the entrance

to 16 to 11m within 0.5 mile of the greater portion of the shores

of the bay.

4.13 Middle Ground, consisting of a rocky patch about 100m

across, with a depth of 14m, lies about 0.7 mile N from the N

point of Bowen Island in the fairway of the entrance to Jervis

Bay.

The entire bay has been designated as Naval Waters, the limits of which are given below:

1. On the E—By a line drawn from Longnose Point to

the N end of Bowen Island.

2. On the S, W, and N—By the HW line of Jervis Bay.

4.13 The following areas are reserved for merchant shipping:

1. South part of the bay—That part of Darling Road enclosed by meridian of 150°46'00''E and the parallel of

35°06'50"S.

2. West part of the bay—Waters enclosed by the meridian of 150°43'30"E.

4.13 Aspect.—Bowen Island, rising to 40m, is fronted by a formation of high vertical cliffs, from which the land slopes gradually and irregularly towards the Jervis Bay.

4.13 Darling Road is located in bight in the S part of Jervis Bay

between Governor Head and Captain Point. In the bight a

sandy bay curves S and W to a low point fringed with a reef

close W of Governor Head, and continuing on to a conspicuous

white cliffy projection with an opening in it, known as Hole-inthe-Wall.

4.13 Captain Point is identified by red-tiled buildings; from this

point a breakwater runs out in a NW direction forming a small

boat harbor, within which is a small jetty.

4.13 There is a naval college situated at Captain Point.

4.13 Plantation Point (Lamb Point), about 3 miles N of Captain

Point, has some sunken rocks close-to, one of which breaks 0.2

mile E of the point and a 5.5m rocky patch, which breaks occasionally at 0.5 mile NE from it. Vessels should not pass between this patch and the point; inside the 4m curve the ground

is foul.

4.13 The W bight of Jervis Bay, from Plantation Point to Callala

Point (Flora Point), forms a bay, the S part of this coast fringed

with rocks and the W part, sandy beach. Dent Rock, a pinnacle

with depths of 0.6m, lies about 0.1 mile offshore and 0.8 mile

WNW of Plantation Point. An obstruction is charted 0.1 mile

NE. At a distance of 1.5 miles NW of Plantation Point, the

mouth of Moona Creek enters the bay, from which a ledge of

sunken rocks extends 0.1 mile, with shoal water about 0.5 mile

from it.

4.13 Currambene Creek enters the bay N of Moona Creek, with

the village of Huskisson just inside it. Shoal water extends 0.5

mile off these creeks. The entrance to Currambene Creek is

marked by leading beacons, which lead over the 1.2m bar. Callala Point and the shore for 0.5 mile to the W and 0.2 mile N is

bordered by rocks, with a depth of about 5.5m. 

4.13 Hare Bay, the N bight of Jervis Bay, is divided into two

bights by Red Point. Seaward of the 5.5m patch, nearly 0.5

mile off Flora Point (35°00'S., 150°43'E.) and the rocks off

Green Point, the bay has depths of 7.5 to 11m.

4.13 Anchorage.—Montagu Road, on the E side of Jervis Bay,

provides secure anchorage, in depths of 11 to 12.8m, hard

sand, about 0.9 mile S of Montagu Point. This is the limit at

which a large vessel should anchor off the shore, as with a

heavy S sea rolling in, the vessel would be exposed to its full

effect.

4.13 The shore between Longnose Point and Dart Point forms an

irregular bight, with a reef projecting nearly 0.3 mile from

Longnose Point and with Bumbora Rock, about 100m in extent

with a depth of 3.6m, on which the sea breaks in bad weather,

lying 0.3 mile S from the point. Between the reef off Longnose

Point and Bumbora Rock, there is a depth of 11m, with 20.3m

close to the rock.

4.13 Caution.—Naval gunnery, bomb, mine, and torpedo practices, along with submarine exercise may be carried out in the

Military Exercise Area within and adjacent to Jervis Bay.

4.14 Point Perpendicular (35°06'S., 150°49'E.) is a conspicuous feature of the coast, standing on a bold, cliffy headland without trees or scrub. This cliffy headland extends NE to

Crocodile Head (35°05'S., 150°51'E.), 110m high, and then to

a small bight in the coast, where there are three small islands

known as the Drum and Drumsticks Islands. From the N point

of this bight, a continuation of a line of cliffs reaches to Beecroft Head, the E extremity of Crookhaven Bight. There are

depths of about 55m within 1 mile of the shore between Point

Perpendicular and Beecroft Head.

Kiama

4.15 Sir John Young Banks, consisting of two rocky patches lying NE of Beecroft Head, should be given a wide berth as

the current, when it is strong, causes heavy overfalls, even during smooth water.

4.15 There is a channel between the SW end of Young Banks and

Beecroft Head, with depths of 20 to 36m, but in the vicinity of

these banks, as previously stated, strong currents cause a rip,

which even in smooth water has been observed to break. Point
Sector 4. Australia—Coast of New South Wales—Cape Howe to Port Jackson 95

Pub. 127

Perpendicular Light, bearing about 232° and open of Crocodile

Head or Point Perpendicular Light, leads SE of Young Banks

and the 642m summit of the Cambewarra range bearing 292°,

open S of Coolangatta Mount (34°51'S., 150°43'E.), 301m

high, an outstanding isolated conical hill on the low land NW

of the entrance to the Shoalhaven River, leads about 1 mile N

of the NE patch. In addition to serving as a mark for clearing

Sir John Young Banks, Mount Coolangatta, which is the highest land near the coast, is also a good guide when entering

Shoalhaven Bight.

4.15 Crookhaven Bight (35°00'S., 150°49'E.) provides good anchorage in Crookhaven Bight, after rounding the projecting

low rocky N point and avoiding a rock with a depth of 0.6m,

about 0.1 mile off the point and the shoal depth of 8.5m further

out. The anchorage is in 11m, sandy bottom, with the N extremity of Beecroft Head bearing 078°, distant 0.5 mile.

4.15 Vessels should, during the prevalence of bad weather, keep

outside Shoalhaven Bight, which extends from Beecroft Head

to Black Head. The strong outgoing tidal currents from the

Crookhaven River and the Shoalhaven River, setting across the

S The ocean current, cause heavy rips in Shoalhaven Bight.

4.15 Shoalhaven River, between which and Sydney there is communication by vessel three times a week, are separated from

each other by Comerong Island. With the exception of a hillock

on the N point of Comerong, this island appears to be low and

flat, with its S coast mostly lined with mangroves covered at

high tides.

4.15 A sandy beach extends from the Northern Shoalhaven River,

curving NNE to a small double creek at about 0.5 mile ESE to

Black Point (34°47'S., 150°51'E.) and Black Rock. From Black

Point to the S point of Geering Bay (Gerringong Bay), the

coast indents with a series of small bights and projecting reefs.

Geering Bay consists of a sandy beach at the N end, but reefs

extend out in the S portion. The bay is an open roadstead and it

is not recommended as an anchorage.

4.15 From Red Cliff, a small inlet at Geering Bay, the coast N to

the SE entrance point of Kiama Harbor is marked with small

bights, separated by rocky points, some of which have ledges

of sunken rocks projecting from them.

4.16 Kiama Harbor (34°40'S., 150°53'E.) (World Port Index No. 53700), a small port available only for vessels of light

draft, is sheltered by a peninsula. Any swell running off the

coast rounds the point and renders this harbor untenable.

4.16 The basin is about 140m long and 75m wide, with about

360m of berthing space available. Alongside depths range from

3.6 to 4.2m.

4.16 Pilotage.—There is no pilot or tug available.

The coast from Kiama curves irregularly N to a projecting

head, and then NNW to the Minamurra River, where close off

is Stack Islet, an island surrounded by a reef having a depth of

27m, gravel bottom, 0.5 mile SE of it, and a 18m patch 0.7 mile

ENE. Other reefs extend into the bay to the NW. From the

Minnamurra River, two small sandy bays extend 1.2 miles NE

to a line of cliffs running to Bass Point, which is 28m high.

4.16 The coastline to Shell Harbor from Bass Point is low in profile. There is a narrow entrance to this small cove, which is enclosed by an artificial breakwater. Range lights lead into this

harbor, which is fit for small craft only.

4.16 From the N point of Shell Harbor, the low coast makes into

two exposed bays to Windang Island (34°33'S., 150°53'E.),

where immediately behind this island is the shoal entrance to

Lake Illawarra. The entrance is spanned by a wood bridge, with

a vertical clearance of only 3.7m.

4.16 From the entrance to Lake Illawarra, the coast formed by

Perkins Beach turning NE is backed with sand hills, 15 to 18m

high and is cliffy, culminating in a point composed of four hillocks, which present the form of a saddle, dull red in color. This

coastal feature, known as Red Point, may also be readily identifies by Mount Kembla, a prominent hill rising to 534m, 6.5

miles NW.

4.16 Caution.—There are two groups of low rocky islets in the

approach to Port Kembla, the entrance to which lies 1.7 miles

N of Red Point. These groups are known collectively as the

Fine Islands and are best seen on the chart.

Port Kembla (34°28'S., 150°55'E.)

World Port Index No. 53690

4.17 Port Kembla, an artificial harbor situated about 1 mile

N of Red Point, provides good radar returns up to 19 miles.

With the construction of the N and E breakwaters and an inner

harbor, Port Kembla forms a commodious harbor with accommodations for large ocean-going vessels. It is a port of entry

and the third largest port in the state.

By the end of 2008, construction should be completed on

new general cargo wharves and automobile discharge facilities.

These services will be relocated from the Darling Harbor and

Glebe Island sites in Port Jackson, respectively.

4.17 Winds—Weather.—Coastal winds are complicated by local

topography and the land-sea breeze effect. In general, there is a

tendency toward S and E winds in summer, with N and NW

winds becoming frequent in the winter.

4.17 The port is well-sheltered from all winds, except those between the N and NNW. During the month of July and August,

prevailing winds are from NE to SW and W 

4.17 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Port Kembla is 1.5m at

MHHW and 1.2m at MLHW.

4.17 Depths—Limitations.—The Inner Harbor and the Outer

Harbor, although entered from the SW, are aligned on a NWSE axis. The Inner Harbor terminates into two extensions

known as Eastern Basin and Western Basin. The entrance

channel to the Outer Harbor has a depth of 16.7m and provides

access to the berths there. The channel transiting the Outer

Harbor for the Iinner Harbor is dredged to a depth of 15.7m. 

4.17 Situated in the Outer Harbor are the Inflammable Liquids

Berth and No. 3 Jetty, No. 4 Jetty, and No. 6 Jetty. The Bulk

Liquids Berth is situated at No. 4 Jetty, just W of the root of

East Breakwater. The Inflammable Liquids berth lies on the S

side of North Breakwater. This berth is also referred to as the

Oil Berth.

4.17 The Inner Harbor, dredged into the flat coastal land behind

the outer harbor, sports facilities and deep-water berths for the

handling of bulk commodities, and ro-ro traffic. The Product

Port Kembla Port Corporation

http://www.kemblaport.com.au
96 Sector 4. Australia—Coast of New South Wales—Cape Howe to Port Jackson 

Pub. 127

and Discharge Berths are also referred to as the BHP Berths.

The Eastern Basin has grain, a ro-ro, and bulk coal berths. 

4.17 The approach channels to the new Multi-Purpose Terminal

and coal-loading berth are dredged to 15.3m. An extension to

the Multi-Purpose Terminal was completed in June 2005, adding a third berth.

4.17 The largest vessel to entered the port was 232,000 dwt. The

port allows vessels with a maximum length of 295m. However,

vessels with a length between 290 and 295m, or a vessel with a

beam width that exceeds 45m, will require prior approval from

the harbormaster. 

4.17 Outbound vessels, with a length exceeding 265m and a draft

of less than 12m, will also require an approval from the harbormaster.

4.17 Aspect.—There are several chimneys and buildings which

provide for good landmarks. A chimney, with an elevation of

223m and illuminated at night, is situated about 1 mile S of the

N breakwater. There is a large conspicuous waterfall, near

Flagstaff Hill, located 2 miles W of the town. Close S of the

root of the East Breakwater is a signal station, situated on the

roof of a conspicuous building, which serves as a good landmark.

4.17 The channel is marked by two sets of ranges. Caution is necessary as the rear marker, an orange daymark appearing to be

on top of a red roof just to the right of a large satellite dish, of

the 213° range has been reported (1998) to be difficult to distinguish. 

4.17 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and available 24 hours.

The pilot boards, as follows: 

1. Pilot Boarding Station Outer B—(34°24.2'S.,

150°57.6'E.). Embarkation inbound for deep draft vessels,

and also for vessels arriving from the N or the anchorages.

Compulsory for vessels with of 226m loa and greater.

2. Pilot Boarding Station Inner A—(34°25.2'S.,

150°56.9'E.) Embarkation inbound for barge trains and small

vessels. Also used for disembarkation outbound. 

4.17 Regulations.—Vessels have arrived at Port Kembla once

they have crossed the arc, with a radius of 5 miles, centered on

position 34°24.7'S, 150°57.1'E. A VTS is in operation and is

controlled from the Port Kembla Vessel Traffic Center (VTC).

There are three reporting points which the VTC will instruct

vessels to pass through as they arrive or depart, as follows:

1. Vessels approaching from the N are to report in position 34°20.5'S, 151°00.5'E.

2. Vessels approaching from the E are to report in position 34°25.2'S, 151°03.2'E.

3. Vessels are approaching from the S are to report in position 34°29.4'S, 150°59.2'E.

4.17 Vessels may also be instructed to pass through the port limits

arc at some other point. 

4.17 Vessels should signal their ETA to Port Kembla Harbor on

VHF channel 16 at least 4 hours in advance, confirming the

ETA 2 hours before arrival. Vessels should utilize VHF channel

11 to advise their ETA to Port Kembla Signal Station 1 hour

prior to arrival at the 5-mile reporting arc. The center at the signal station is in continuous contact with the pilot, the pilot tender, tugs, and launches. 

4.17 Vessels are prohibited from passing in the harbor entrance.

Mariners are cautioned that outbound vessels have the right-ofway within the port limits.

4.17 Vessels are required to maintain an underkeel clearance of 10

per cent of the available water depth at all times.

4.17 Signals.—Signals are displayed from the signal station.

Storm signals should be watched for, and upon the hoisting of

the flag signal XT (heavy weather approaching) and at night

two red lights are displayed vertically, when vessels must be

ready to leave their berth with 1 hour’s notice. 

4.17 When the port is closed, the code flag UM is hoisted during

the day; at night, three red lights are displayed vertically.

4.17 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available, in 15 to 24m, well

clear of the main leads, between Flagstaff Point and North

Breakwater. Anchorage is prohibited within the harbor, except

to obtain practique.

4.17 There are two sets of anchorages. Anchorage W1 through

Anchorage W6 are positioned to the W of the approach channel; Anchorage E1 through Anchorage E9 are positioned to the

E of the channel. Anchorage W1 through Anchorage W5 are

Port Kembla—Berthing Information

Berth Berth 

Length

Max. 

LOA

Depth 

Alongside Remarks

Outer Harbor

201 200m 225m 10.5m Bulk liquids

202 210m 200m 10.7m Bulk and breakbulk cargo

203 210m 200m 10.1m Bulk and breakbulk cargo

204 100m 80m 6.1m Bulk and breakbulk cargo

205 90m 80m 10.7m Bulk and breakbulk cargo

205 90m 80m 10.7m Bulk and breakbulk cargo

206 80m 180m 11.2m Bulk liquids

Inner Harbor

101 215m 225m 11.5m Coal. Max. air 

draft of 17.4m

102 300m 300m 16.0m Coal. Max. air 

draft of 22.4m

103 Due for completion in mid-to-late 2008

104 290m 300m 16.3m Grain

105 215m 190m 15.7m Breakbulk cargo

106 215m 190m 13.9m RoRo

107 290m 260m 12.3m RoRo

109 220m 200m 12.2m Steel

110 180m 160m 11.4m Steel

111 310m 300m 15.6m Steel

112 278m 280m 12.8m Steel

113 192m 200m 11.0m Steel
Sector 4. Australia—Coast of New South Wales—Cape Howe to Port Jackson 97

Pub. 127

generally used by smaller coastal vessels. Anchorage W6 and

Anchorage E1 through Anchorage E9 are used by larger capesize and panamax vessels. 

4.17 Foul ground, with a radius of 0.4 mile, is centered in position

34°24.8'S, 150°57.2'E; anchorage is not recommended in this

area during strong SE winds due to poor holding ground and

the existence of old anchor chains

4.17 It has been reported that good anchorage can also be obtained outside the harbor, 6 miles NE of Flagstaff Point Light.

4.17 Anchoring is prohibited in the approach to Port Kembla.

4.17 Caution.—When making the port, care must be taken to reduce speed early, especially at night, as the lights of vessels at

anchor are difficult to distinguish against the many powerful

lights of the numerous factories, etc. Under no circumstances

should a vessel be anchored in such a position that it will be

across the line of the main leads.

4.17 Vessels are advised to pass at least 1 mile E of Bass Islet

(34°28'S., 150°57'E.), if approaching from the S, and follow

the ranges into port.

4.17 A waverider buoy has been established off East Breakwater.

4.17 Mariners are advised that silting occurs within the harbor.

Depth information is available from the harbormaster by contacting the Vessel Traffic Information Center on VHF channel

11 or by telephone at 2-4275-0159.

4.18 The coast forms a slight indentation N to Flagstaff

Point (formerly Wollongong Head) from the Port of Kembla.

The 200m curve, from 15 miles E of Black Point, extends N to

about 17 miles off Flagstaff Point, about 20 miles E of Kiama

Head, where there are depths of 510m, fine, dark sand bottom.

Flagstaff Point (34°25'S., 150°55'E.) is a rocky peninsula

projecting 0.2 mile E from the coast. The N side of the peninsula is fronted by a sea wall; on the summit of the headland

stands a signal station and lighthouse. The head has been reported to give good radar returns up to 17 miles.

4.18 Wollongong Harbor (32°45'S., 150°54'E.) lies about 3

miles N of Port Kembla and is used by smaller vessels only.

Depths in the fairway to the port range from 3.6 to 6m, and to

less than 3m at the docks. Range lights mark the entrance channel, which is generally free of dangers except for Para Reef, a

shoal on which the sea breaks. Para Reef lies about 0.3 mile N

of the W breakwater head and should be watched for when approaching the port. 

4.18 Pilotage is not available, but the Port Kembla signal station

will assist vessels as necessary; the signal station will bear no

responsibility for the actions of vessels assisted in this manner.

4.18 Caution.—In bad weather it is impossible to enter or leave

Wollongong Harbor.

4.18 From the W side of the entrance to Wollongong Harbor, a

sandy beach extends N to Towradgi Point (34°23'S.,

150°55'E.), whose conformation is that of blue stone boulders

and a rocky spit extending from it. From Para Creek behind the

point, a coast range of low sand hills extends close behind the

stretch of beach to Towradgi Point.

4.19 Bellambi Point (34°22'S., 150°56'E.) is low and consists of rock with a surface of sand. Bellambi Reef, which partially dries at LW and always breaks, extends nearly ESE 0.5

mile from Bellambi Point.

4.19 Flagstaff Hill (34°28'S., 150°52'E.), appearing as a long

double summit hill, barren at each end and thickly wooded in

the center, and in line with the center of Flagstaff Point bearing

218°, leads 0.5 mile E of the reef, in a depth of 14m. Wollongong Head Light shows red over Bellambi Reef. From 150m N

to 0.3 mile NW of Bellambi Point, there are depths of 5.5 to

10.9m, from which depths decrease somewhat irregularly to

3.8m, to within 100m of the shore in a little bight extending 0.3

mile W from Bellambi Point, and forming the sea frontage of

Bellambi village.

4.19 From Flat Rock, the NW point of Bellambi Bay, the coast

extends N to Bulli Point (34°20'S., 150°57'E.), which has a reef

of rocks, dry at LW, projecting from it. South from the point

about 1 mile stands the Bulli Coal Station. This N suburb of

Wollongong is a mining town. There is a jetty at Bulli and a

light is shown from the flagstaff on the jetty.

4.19 From Bulli Point, the coast which is low, works N to Brickyard Point. At Brickyard Point, the coast becomes faced with

cliffs to the village of Coal Cliff (34°15'S., 150°59'E.). These

cliffs form the NE extremity of the Crown Mountains. A mark

useful to the mariner on this part of the coast is the conspicuous

radio tower standing about 1.5 miles SW of Coal Cliff.

4.19 A sounding of 18.3m, with deep water all around, was obtained about 2.5 miles E of Coal Cliff.

4.19 The coast from Stanfield Bay, the bay being merely the N of

two small bights lying between Coal Cliff and a point 1.5 miles

N, consists of a line of cliffs, with the exception of a beach lying nearly midway between Coal Cliff and Wattamolla. Wattamolla serves as a boat harbor. with shelter from all winds

except those from the S and E.

4.19 Ranges of hills extend close along the coast from Bellambi

to Port Hacking Point, and diminish in elevation at Port Hacking Point. Southwest of the point, prominent Jibbon Hillock

(Table Hillock) rises to 90m.

4.19 From Wattamolla, the coast NE is irregular in and out to

Port Hacking Point (34°05'S., 151°10'E.), and is predominantly fringed with dry and sunken rocks not too far offshore.

Hacking Point protects Port Hacking from S and SE gales.

4.19 Jibbon Bumbora is a detached patch of rocks lying about 0.5

mile to the SE of Hacking Point. The sea will always break on

these rocks, which have depths of 27m 0.5 mile to the E and

13m close to the N of them.

4.20 Port Hacking (34°04'S., 151°09'E.) is entered between Hacking Point and Glaisher Point, and is 0.5 mile wide,

with depths of 5.5 to 7.3m between the ledges of rocks which

project from both points of the entrance. From Hacking Point,

the port extends nearly 1 mile in a WSW direction to a bar with

a depth of 0.9 to 1.8m, stretching across an opening between

two rocky points lying N and S about 0.4 mile from each other,

and forming an inner entrance, leading from Port Hacking into

the shallow, but extensive inlet to the W.

4.20 The S side of Port Hacking contains two small sandy bights

consisting of Jibbon Beach and Bundeena Bay.

4.20 From Glacier Point, the N shore tends SW for 0.5 mile to

Hungry Point, the S end of a Hilly Promontory. Depths in the

outer portion of the port range from 11 to 20m; but from a

depth of 9m in the entrance channel, the inner portion shoals

rapidly.

4.20 Overhead and submarine cables span Port Hacking at several

places, which are best seen on the chart.
98 Sector 4. Australia—Coast of New South Wales—Cape Howe to Port Jackson 

Pub. 127

4.20 Anchorage.—The best anchorage is in 7m, sand, with Port

Hacking Point bearing E, and the two points, lying 0.2 to 0.7

mile N of Gaisher Point, in line bearing N.

4.20 A light is shown on Burraneer Point; three beacons NE of the

point have been fitted with lights.

4.20 Glaisher Point Light is shown from a white mast on the

point.

4.21 Bate Bay (34°03'S., 151°11'E.), an exposed bight of

no value as an anchorage, is entered between Glaisher Point

and Potter Point, the S extremity of a peninsula which forms

the S side of Botany Bay. The W shore of Bate Bay winds irregularly nearly 1 mile N from Glaisher Point, and is cliffy to a

point fringed by a reef on the NW side of which is the S extremity of Curranulla Beach.

4.21 There are depths of 18.3m in the middle of the entrance of

Bate Bay, and 16.5m at a distance of 0.8 mile offshore; abreast

of it, there are irregular depths of 12.8 to 20.1m.

4.21 Osborn Shoal, with a depth of 8.7m, lies near the center of

Bate Bay.

4.21 A cliffy coast extends to Cape Baily from Potter Point,

where a more elevated line of cliffs extends to Cape Solander.

A sand hill is prominent N of Cape Baily as it stands over the

cliffs between Capes Baily and Solander. There is a light

shown from Cape Baily, and at about 0.7 mile W of Cape

Solander, an oil refinery gives off two conspicuous gas flares.

There are also a number of chimneys and towers in this refinery complex.

4.21 Caution.—Masters and others responsible for their vessels

are required, when passing the entrance to Botany Bay and not

intending to enter, to keep at least 1 mile to the E of an imaginary line drawn between Cape Banks and Cape Baily.

Botany Bay (34°00'S., 151°14'E.)

World Port Index No. 53655

4.22 Botany Bay (Port Botany) and Kurnell lie 12 miles S

of the entrance to Port Jackson. Port Botany, on the N side of

the bay, has been developed as a major port complex. On the N

side of the bay there are berths to serve the oil industry at Kurnell.

Winds—Weather

4.22 In Botany Bay, the sea breeze in summer and the land breeze

in the winter months are predominant during settled weather.

The “Southerly Buster,” of short duration and reaching gale

force in bursts is an important feature in the summer months.

In winter and early spring, Botany Bay will experience strong

W winds. The bay is also exposed to SE swells and rather

rough conditions may be raised by strong winds from any quarter.

4.22 Visibility is generally good, but fog and mist sometimes occur and occasionally dust or smoke may impair the field of

view.

4.22 Sudden changes in sea and weather conditions should put the

mariner on the alert, should it be necessary to vacate the port at

short notice.

Tides—Currents

4.22 The tidal rise at Botany Bay is 1.4m at MHHW, and 1.1m at

MLHW. The currents set in and out of the entrance at the rate

of 1.5 knots.

Depths—Limitations

4.22 The channel to the swinging basin and berths at Kurnell has

a minimum depth of 12.2m, sandy bottom. The channel to the

Port Botany area is 213m wide, with a minimum depth of 15m.

The swinging basin is dredged to 14.4m.

4.22 Bulk Liquids Berth, a T-head jetty situated near the entrance

to Brotherson Dock, has a piled approach roadway and pipe

support structure with mooring and berthing dolphins. The

depth at the berth is 18.3m and will accommodate vessels

230m long, up to 90,000 dwt; a maximum draft of 14m is allowed. Bulk liquid chemical cargoes are piped to nearby industry and to storage tanks in an adjacent tank farm area.

4.22 Brotherson Dock consists of North Terminal and South Terminal, both of which offer three berths, with a maximum

dredged depth of 14.3m.

4.22 Kurnell Oil Installations, on the S side of the bay, has a jetty

with two berths (Kurnell No. 1 and Kurnell No. 2) and a multibuoy mooring berth (Kurnell No. 3). Kurnell No. 1 has a length

of 183m, with an alongside depth of 11.5m; the maximum permissible vessel length is 183m. Kurnell No. 2 has a length of

200m, with an alongside depth of 11.2m; the maximum permissible vessel length is 198m. Kurnell No. 3 is a multi-buoy

mooring, with a submarine pipeline and a depth of 12.3m

alongside the berth; the maximum permissible vessel length is

238m.

Aspect

4.22 Botany Bay is entered between Cape Solander and Cape

Bank; from its entrance, the bay extends about 4 miles W. Its

shores are generally low and considerably built over. Botany

Bay is Australia’s premier oil port. Residential and commercial

buildings ring the bay. About 0.5 mile NW of La Perouse

Point, Bunnerong Electric Powerhouse, with its extensive

buildings and coal yards, is situated along the foreshore close

N of Bumbora Point. Two shallow sandy coves, from which

several submarine pipelines extend, indent the shore between

La Peronse Monument and Bumbora Point.

4.22 A conspicuous radar scanner is situated about 4 miles NW of

Henry Head and there are obstruction lights on the scanner.

4.22 The S shore of Botany Bay from Inscription Point

(34°00'S., 151°13'E.) sweeps around SW to Kurnell, taking in

a sandy beach to Bonna Point. The S shore of the bay is formed

by the N end of a low flat peninsula, named Towra Point, extending from the S and separating a shallow lagoon (Weeny

Bay) on its E side from the estuary of the Georges River on the

W.

Pilotage

4.22 Pilotage is compulsory for Botany Bay; pilots should be ordered through the ship’s agent in advance. Pilot boards in the

vicinity of position 34°01'S, 151°19'E, about 4 miles E of Cape
Sector 4. Australia—Coast of New South Wales—Cape Howe to Port Jackson 99

Pub. 127

Solander. Vessels should radio their ETA at least 4 hours in advance, confirming 2 hours before arrival.

4.22 Vessels may not proceed W of the pilot boarding ground

without the permission of the harbormaster. The pilot will remain on board vessels berthed at Kurnell No. 3.

Regulations

4.22 The port limits of Botany Bay are defined by the circumference of a circle about 4 miles in radius, centered on Endeavor

Light (34°00'S., 151°14'E.). The harbormaster exercises control over the movements of vessels in shore of this line and has

established traffic regulations for entry into the port. Foul

ground, with a radius of 0.4 mile, is centered in position

34°24.8'S, 150°57.2'E; anchorage is not recommended in this

area during strong SE winds due to poor holding ground and

the existence of old anchor chains.

4.22 Inbound vessels must not enter Area B or Area D; outbound

vessels must not enter Area A or Area C. All areas are best

seen on the chart.

4.22 Quarantine.—The quarantine line for the port is drawn

from the tip of Molineux Point (33°59'S., 151°13'E.) 210° to

the NW corner of the quarantine area N of Kurnell, then parallel to the W boundary of this area to its SW corner; then 151°

to the pier at Kurnell. Two quarantine areas have also been established in Botany Bay, the first of which has been identified.

The second is centered on the SPM. 

4.22 Traffic Regulations.—Anchorage is prohibited within the

limits of the port.

Signals

4.22 Radio communication may be established on VHF channel

12 with Sydney Maritime for vessels more than 5 miles from

Botany Bay. For vessels within 5 miles of the port, Harbor

Control may be contacted on VHF channel 13.

Anchorage

4.22 There are no recommended anchorages off the coast for vessels waiting to enter Botany Bay. Anchorage is prohibited

within the limits of the port.

Directions

4.22 A directional light, situated on the end of the runway extension, leads into the bay. This directional light leads clear of all

dangers to the quarantine anchorage. Range beacons WNW of

Courtesy of Sydney Ports Handbook

Botany Bay from N

Sydney Pilot Service

http://www.sydneypilotservice.com.au
100 Sector 4. Australia—Coast of New South Wales—Cape Howe to Port Jackson 

Pub. 127

the head of Kurnell Oil Pier lead into the dredged tanker terminal anchorage and turning basin. Also, ranges in the bay lead

from the entrance to the dredged area to the Kurnell Oil Pier

and for the approach to the Brotherson Dock Complex.

Cape Banks to Sydney

4.23 From Cape Banks, the coast, the N part of which is

cliffy, extends to Long Bay whose entrance is about 0.5 mile

wide. There are sunken rocks lying a short distance NE of the

head of the bay. Visible on this part of the coast, in addition to

the Bunnerong Power Station chimneys mentioned earlier, is

the Long Bay Penal Establishment and the Prince Henry Hospital, the latter at the head of Little Bay 0.5 mile off Long Bay.

4.23 From the projecting NE head of Long Bay, the cliffy coast

extends to Marouba Bay, indenting the coast for about 0.5 mile.

Between the cliffy headland which forms the N point of Marouba Bay and a projecting point 1.8 miles to the N of it is

Coogee Bay.

4.23 An aeronautical lighted beacon is occasionally shown from a

tower about 4 miles WSW of Coogee Bay. An aeronautical radiobeacon transmits from a radio tower about 1 mile W of the

bay.

4.23 From the N point of Coogee Bay, a double bight extends

NNE 1.5 miles to Ben Buckler (33°54'S., 151°17'E.). A point

0.5 mile SW of the bluff separates Grama Gramma Bay, on its

SW side, from Bondi Bay, NE of it.

4.23 A prominent tower, 184m high, stands about 1.5 miles WSW

of Ben Buckler. Two water towers exhibiting obstruction lights

are situated near Ben Buckler.

4.23 About 14 miles E of Port Hacking Point, there are depths of

165m, dark sand bottom, off which the 200m curve extends N

and NE to a position 19 miles E from the outer S head of Port

Jackson. From this 200m curve, the soundings decrease with

regularity toward the shore, which, from 4 miles S of Hacking

Point to the entrance of Port Jackson, may be generally approached to the distance of about 1 mile in 36.6 to 54.9m, the

bottom being sand. There are no detached dangers beyond 0.3

mile off this part of the coast.

4.23 Aspect.—The characteristic features of the coast N and S of

Port Jackson assume somewhat different aspects. North Head

and its immediate vicinity presents a high flat-topped precipitous appearance and the coast farther N of this point consists of

high undulating hills, thickly covered with trees. The striking

contrast is the sterile table-topped cliffs which extend S of the

port. If the lighthouses did not present a conspicuous feature,

the coastal description first mentioned would indicate whether

the land seen is to the N or S of the entrance to Port Jackson.

4.23 Approaching Port Jackson from the E, the summit to the N

of Sydney Heads will, in clear weather, be seen considerably

higher than the adjacent coast. Closer in, it will be identified by

the lighthouse and signal station on Dunbar Head and the bold,

perpendicular profile of Outer North Head.

4.23 On the E approach to the port, a naval vessel reported its radar landfall was not well defined until under 30 miles. Macquarie Light was visible from a great distance and was observed

after the vessel was well inside Sydney Harbor. The S portion

of the Sydney skyline was partially visible prior to entering the

harbor.

Sydney (33°52'S., 151°12'E.)

World Port Index No. 53650

4.24 The Port of Sydney is situated in Sydney Harbor (Port

Jackson) and is the premier port of Australia. The shores of the

port consist of a series of bays and coves which are harbors

themselves. This port, commodious and secure, is under the jurisdiction of the Maritime Services Board of New South Wales.

Vessels may enter or leave in complete safety at any state of the

tide, both day and night, being guided by the buoys and lights.

4.24 The limits of the greatest commercial activity extend, with

the exception of Farm Cove, from Woolloomooloo Bay to

Glebe Island; the great natural advantage of deep water, generally continuing to the shore, being fully utilized, and artificially

improved, so that from Bennelong Point W, the frontage is

skirted by an almost unbroken line of wharves and quays.

About half of Sydney’s general cargo traffic is containerized.

Winds—Weather

4.24 At Sydney, at 0900, W winds are predominant in the winter

months, but the winds are variable in summer. At 1500, they

are variable in winter but E or NE in summer. Mean wind

speeds are 6 to 7 knots in all months at 0900, but at 1500 the

average values vary from 7 knots in May and June to 12 knots

in December and January. Gales occur, on the average, on 2

days per month in July and from October to January, but less

frequent in other months.

4.24 The NE winds in summer, for the most part, are associated

with good weather. Stronger NE winds generated from a high

pressure system over the Tasman Sea and lower pressure inland, changes the weather to overcast conditions with rain and

is referred to as the “black northeaster.” Thunderstorms are

more frequent in the vicinity of Sydney than in any other coastal region of Australia.

4.24 Gales from the E raise a heavy sea upon this coast, breaking

with great violence not only upon Sydney Heads, but also occasionally right across the entrance and within the entrance on

to Middle Head. These gales are frequently attended by banks

of haze which might prevent the lights being seen at night.

4.24 When a heavy sea is running between Sydney Heads, a red

square flag with a diamond shape below it will be displayed at

Dunbar Head Signal Station and at the flagstaff at Fort Denison (33°51.4'S., 151°13.5'E.).

Tides—Currents

4.24 The mean spring range for Port Jackson is 1.3m. During the

summer months, the daytime tides are usually higher than the

nighttime tides; with the reverse occurring in the winter

months.

4.24 Offshore, in the vicinity of Port Jackson, the current sets parallel to the shore, with the ebb current setting to the S and the

flood setting to the N. Within the entrance channel, the current

sets across the sound, then close along the shore from Inner

Sydney Ports 

http://www.sydneyports.com.au
Sector 4. Australia—Coast of New South Wales—Cape Howe to Port Jackson 101

Pub. 127

North Head to Outer North Head. This tends to leave most of

the channel in SW on the ebb.

4.24 Between Bradley’s Head and South Head, the ebb and flood

current run generally parallel with the dredged channels, at a

drift approaching 1 knot. From Bradley’s Head to the Sydney

Harbor Bridge, the set of the current is generally E-W at less

than 1 knot; the current in this portion of the bay is affected by

the numerous coves and points that make up the coast of the area. These features create weak eddies at various places across

the bay.

Depths—Limitations

4.24 The bar, with Sow and Pigs Shoals, formerly extended nearly

across Port Jackson between South Head and George Head.

Western Channel, the main channel which is generally used by

vessels both entering and leaving, has a controlling depth of

13.7m deepening gradually to 15.8m at its NE end. Eastern

Channel is dredged to 12.2m on the range and it is reported the

depth in the harbor entrance is 24.3m. A wreck, with a least

depth of 12.1m, lies just SW of South Head in Eastern Channel.

4.24 At times, a heavy swell sets into the harbor, which requires

an allowance for a scend of 2m in the entrance; this must be

duly considered by vessels of deep draft.The Port Operations

and Communication Center is housed in a tower, 87m above

sea level, which is situated at Millers Point and provides for

port traffic management, operating and information services,

and radio navigational information services on a continuous

watch, maintained on VHF channel 16. Traffic movements and

approval to enter or leave a berth are controlled from this center.

4.24 The Sydney Harbor Bridge (33°51'S., 151°13'E.) spans the

channel just W of Sydney Cove. The vertical clearance at the

center of the span is 53.4m, reducing to 48.8m, 183m from

center. The center is marked by a diamond shape, which is bordered in red neon lights at night.

4.24 The Pyrmont Bridge (33°52'S., 151°12'E.) spans the S end

of Darling Harbor and is of a swing span type. The navigable

width is 21.3m through the spans. The bridge will open only on

special occasion or with prior arrangement. 

4.24 The Glebe Island Bridge (33°52'S., 151°11'E.) spans the

entrance to Rozelle Bay; it is a fixed span, with a vertical clearance of 27m. The old swing span, standing close N of the fixed

span, is permanently open to shipping and has a navigable

width of 18m in the E channel; the W channel is permanently

closed to shipping.

4.24 Garden Island and Woolloomooloo Bay have ten berths,

which includes the Fleet Base East. Together this forms Australia’s largest naval base. The Oil Wharf, the Cruiser Wharf,

the East Wall, Captain Cook Graving Dock, the West Wall, and

the Fitting Out Wharf are all situated here. 

Courtesy of Sydney Ports Handbook

Glebe Island from W
102 Sector 4. Australia—Coast of New South Wales—Cape Howe to Port Jackson 

Pub. 127

4.24 Sydney Cove, with three berths, is a passenger terminal. The

cove is a restricted area; unauthorized vessels are not permitted

to enter the restricted area, which is best seen on the chart.

4.24 Walsh Bay has nine berths; all have cargo sheds. The largest

is No. 8, with a length of 207m and alongside depths of 9.1 to

12.5m.

4.24 Darling Harbor has 21 berths and has undergone extensive

port development. The largest berths are Berth No. 4 and Berth

No. 5, with a lengths of 313m and 295m, respectively, and

depths at of 11m at Berth No. 4 and 10.8m at Berth No. 5.

Berth No. 39 is the location of Sydneys first inner city heliport.

4.24 The transfer of operations of the general cargo wharves in

Darling Harbor and the automobile carrier terminals at Glebe

Island to Port Kembla should be completed by the end of 2008.

4.24 Pyrmont has 14 berths.

4.24 Rozelle Bay has six berths, with 672m of total wharfage and

depths of 2.7 to 6.1m alongside.

4.24 Glebe Island Container Terminal Complex consists of two

berths, 468m long. Depths at the berths and in the approach

channels are 11.8m. At Glebe Island, Johnson’s Bay, wharves

have been constructed, with a length of 312m and depths of

11.6m alongside.

4.24 White Bay Container Complex has three berths. There are

depths of 11m in the approach channe to these facilities. Berth

No. 5 and Berth No. 6 are the largest berths, 405m long, with

depths of 11m alongside. In 1984, Berth No. 3 was under construction, which has a length of 186m and a depth of 11m

alongside.

4.24 The A.N.L. Terminal at Mort Bay contains two ro-ro berths,

with a length of 133m. There are depths of 6.8 to 9.7m alongside.

4.24 CalTex Oil, situated at Ballast Point, can accommodate a

vessel to 213m in length. There is a depth of 8.1m at the berth.

4.24 Snails Bay Dolphins has four berths, each with a length of

215m and depths alongside of 10 to 11m.

4.24 Gore Bay contains three Shell Oil berths. Berth No. 1 can accommodate vessels up to 259m long, with an alongside depth

of 13.7m, but a depth of 13.2m has been reported just NE of

the berth. Berth No. 2 and Berth No. 3 have depths of 8.5m in

the approaches, and will accept vessels up to 171m in length.

Depths at the berths range from 9.4 to 10.4m

4.24 Balls Head Coal Loading Jetty offers two berths; the N side

of the pier has a length of 146m, a depth of 6.6m, and is used as

a lay-up berth. The S side of the pier has a length of 146m and

alongside depths of 10.6m.

4.24 The Balmain Coal Loading Berth is 333m long, with a depth

of 11.6m. The maximum length of a vessel using this berth is

198m; the maximum beam allowed is 29.5m.

4.24 Berrys Bay contains two berths belonging to BP Australia.

No. 2 Berth can accommodate vessels up to 183m long. No. 1

Berth can accommodate vessels up to 160m long. Depths

alongside range from 9 to 10.1m.

4.24 Chowder Bay is a Naval Base. A fuel wharf is situated on its

NE side. There is a charted depth of 12.1m alongside. Naval

authorities should be consulted before attempting to berth here

Aspect

Outer North Head and its immediate vicinity appear high,

flat-topped, and precipitous, but the high, undulating, and

Courtesy of Sydney Ports Handbook

The Glebe Island Bridge, White Bay, and Blackwattle Bay from W
Sector 4. Australia—Coast of New South Wales—Cape Howe to Port Jackson 103

Pub. 127

thickly-wooded hills which rise from the coast farther N contrast strikingly with the bare table-topped cliffs extending S of

the port; thus these hills or cliffs, when sighted, will indicate

whether the land seen is N or S of the port, even if Macquarie

Light does not present a distinctive feature.

4.24 The entrance to Port Jackson and Sydney Harbor lies between Dunbar Head and South Head, 1 mile NNW, on the S

side and Outer North Head (33°49.5'S., 151°18.0'E.), 1.7 miles

NNE of Dunbar Head, and Inner North Head 0.7 mile WNW,

on the N side.

Pilotage

4.24 Pilotage is compulsory except for vessels holding exemption

certificates for the port. Vessels approaching Port Jackson are

advised to contact “Harbor Control” on VHF channel 13, and

listen for the pilot vessel, or to exchange visual signals with the

signal station just S of Hornby Light (33°50'S., 151°17'E.). 

4.24 The pilot boarding ground is situated 4 miles due E of Hornby Light; vessels are not permitted W of this position without

the consent of the harbormaster. Vessels are not to exceed the

speed over 8 knots while boarding or discharging the pilot.

Vessels are to maintain an underkeel clearance equivalent to 10

per cent of its draft. 

Regulations

4.24 The vessel’s ETA should be sent to Sydney Harbor Control

on VHF channel 12 at least 3 hours in advance, confirming 1

hour prior to arrival. When within 5 miles of the pilot boarding

ground, “Harbor Control” should be contacted for instructions. 

4.24 Port limits.—The port limits of Port Jackson are defined by

the arc of a circle 4 miles in radius, centered on Hornby Light.

4.24 Quarantine.—The quarantine line for the port is drawn

from Darling Point to Bradley’s Head; vessels are not to cross

this line until pratique is granted. The quarantine anchorage is

not defined, but is usually Spring Cove (33°49'S., 151°17'E.). 

4.24 Traffic regulations.—A Prohibited Anchorage and Restricted Area for the control of traffic within Sydney Heads has been

established, as follows:

1. A line drawn from Outer North Head 090° to the port

limit line.

2. A line drawn 130° from Hornby Light to the port limit

line.

4.24 Additionally, the entrance range has been designated as a

Traffic Separation Line. The body of water N of the line has

been designated Area A; the area S of the line has been designated Area B. Entering vessels may transit area A only, and departing vessels may transit Area B only.

4.24 Entering vessels must contact “Harbor Control,” as stated

previously, and may not proceed W of the pilot boarding

ground without the permission of the harbormaster.

4.24 Several areas within the approaches to, and the waters of

Port Jackson, have been designated as Prohibited Areas and

Naval Waters and are best seen on the chart.

4.24 Masters should procure a copy of the port regulations from

the Maritime Services Board of New South Wales upon arrival.

4.24 Speed limits.—Vessels must not exceed a speed of 12 knots

between Inner North Head and Bradleys Point, and a speed of

10 knots between Bradleys Point and Balls Head.

4.24 Fleet Base East.—Pilotage is compulsory for foreign warships. Naval Pilot is transferred via Sydney Sea Pilot launch.

The pilot boards in position 33°50'S, 151°21'E approximately

4 miles due E of Hornby Light.

4.24 Ships entering Sydney proceeding to Fleet Base East, Garden Island, or Man-of-War Anchorage should call Harbor Control when 5 miles from the port. Ships should maintain a

listening watch on VHF channel 13 and report when passing

North Head (inbound only), Junction Buoy, and Bradley’s

Head.

Anchorage

4.24 Merchant vessels can anchor N of a line joining Bradley

Head to Kirribilli Point, and in Double Bay clear of the Naval

anchorages which lie E of Garden Island and in Farm Cove.

The Sound is immediately within the entrance occupying almost 1.5 square miles, with regular soundings in 14.6 to

16.5m, branching N to Spring Cove North and Middle harbors,

but the area is exposed to the ocean swell and therefore offering only temporary anchorage with offshore winds. Vessels

may wait here for a tug or a favorable opportunity for entering

the port.

4.24 Anchorage is prohibited within 0.1 mile of any wharf, jetty,

bridge, or in such a position as shall obstruct the approach to

these facilitie,s including in the vicinity of a submarine cable

or a pipeline. 

4.24 Explosives anchorage.—Vessels with explosives aboard must

not anchor W of a line joining Darling Point and Bradley’s Head.

Sydney Pilot Service 

http://www.sydneypilotservice.com.au

Sydney Sea Pilots 

http://www.sydneyseapilots.com.au

Traffic Reporting Points

Place Name Position

North Head (inbound only) 33° 49.8'S, 151° 17.7'E

Junction Buoy 33° 49.8'S, 151° 16.3'E

Bradley’s Head 33° 51.4'S, 151° 14.9'E

Fort Denison 33° 51.3'S, 151° 13.5'E

Longnose Point 33° 50.8'S, 151° 11.2'E

Looking Glass Point 33° 50.7'S, 151° 07.4'E

Wentworth Point 33° 49.4'S, 151° 07.4'E

Traffic Reporting Points

Place Name Position
104 Sector 4. Australia—Coast of New South Wales—Cape Howe to Port Jackson 

Pub. 127

Directions

4.24 From the S.—Vessels approaching Sydney Heads from the

S will probably sight the entrance to Botany Bay, which lies 10

miles to the S.

4.24 From the N.—Macquarie Light should be left open of North

Head to clear Long Reef, 5 miles N of it. The suburb of Manly,

with its fringe of pine trees as well as the buildings of the Cardinal’s Palace, are prominent features before getting up with

the North Head.

4.24 Inbound—Western Channel.—From the pilot boarding

ground, enter the Heads just N of the entrance range line and

steering about 294°. Keeping along the N shore, about 400m

off, steer for Western Channel when nearly abreast of Inner

North Head. Keep to the starboard side of the channel until

Western Channel Light is astern, then alter course to pass between Bradley’s Head Light, and the buoy SE of it. Take care

to avoid a 10.3m patch about 0.3 mile E, and the wreck 0.3

mile SE of the light. Round Bradley’s Head, and steer for the N

pylon of the Sydney Harbor Bridge, keeping N of Fort Dennison (33°51'S., 151°13'E.).

4.24 Inbound—Eastern Channel.—From the pilot boarding

ground, enter the Heads as previously directed. When nearly

abreast of Inner North Head, change course gradually S to

bring the Eastern Channel Range Lights into alignment, and

enter the channel. When clear of the shoals on the W side of

the channel, steer for Bradley’s Head and proceed as previously directed.

4.24 Outbound—Western Channel.—Keeping a good lookout

for ferry traffic from Sydney Cove, pass S of Fort Dennison.

Steer to pass S of the buoy SE of Bradley’s Head. When clear

of the buoy, change course for Western Channel, keeping a

good lookout for inbound vessels using Eastern Channel.

When free of South Head, proceed to sea, keeping S of the entrance range.

4.24 Outbound—Eastern Channel.—Steering as previously directed, change course for Eastern Channel Light when clear of

the buoy off Bradley’s Head. Round the light about 200m off

and pick up Eastern Channel Range Lights in line astern. A

good mark in clear weather is to keep Manley Pier (33°48'S.,

151°17'E.) open of Manley Point (33°49'S., 151°17'E.). When

clear of the channel proceed to sea, keeping S of the range line.

Caution

4.24 Hazardous operations involving explosives are conducted

regularly in Naval Waters. Vessels are warned not to remain in

the vicinity of warships and ammunition barges displaying the

International Code Flag B. 
105

Pub. 127

5. 

Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend

5.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 5 — CHART INFORMATION
107

Pub. 127

SECTOR 5 

AUSTRALIA—NORTH POINT (SYDNEY HARBOR) TO CAPE TOWNSHEND

5.0 Plan.—This sector describes the E coast of Australia from

the N entrance point of Sydney Harbor to Cape Townshend, including the off-lying islands and dangers as far E as Norfolk Island. These islands and dangers are described first and are

arranged from E to W and from S to N. The arrangement of the

coastal description is N from Sydney Harbor.

General Remarks

5.1 From North Point, on the N side of the entrance of

Sydney Harbor, the E coast of Australia trends about 104 miles

NE to Sugarloaf Point and then about 95 miles NNE to Smoky

Cape. It then trends more to the N for about 141 miles to Cape

Byron, the easternmost point of Australia. From Cape Byron

the coast trends N and NNW for about 238 miles to Sandy

Cape.

5.1 Between Sandy Cape and South Head, about 47 miles W,

Hervey Bay indents the coast about 33 miles to the S. From

South Head the coast trends about 187 miles NW to Cape

Townshend, with Cape Capricorn lying a little more than halfway between. Bustard Head lies about 56 miles NW of South

Head.

5.1 A number of bays and bights indent the coast and numerous

rivers discharge from it. Much of this coast is low and sandy;

however there are numerous headlands and in the vicinity of

Cape Townshend the coast becomes high and rugged.

5.1 Newcastle and Brisbane are the important ports on this coast,

but vessels call at Port Stephens, Coffs Harbor, Clarence River,

Richmond River, Maryborough, Port Curtis for Gladstone, and

Rockhampton. Vessels also call at Bundaberg.

5.1 Norfolk Island is the easternmost of a number of off-lying islands and dangers located between about 210 and 790 miles E

of the coast described in this sector. Lord Howe Island and dangers S and to the W of it are the southwesternmost of these

dangers. Kelso Bank is the northwesternmost of these dangers.

5.1 The principal headlands and harbors are well lighted. Visibility may be reduced by occasional fog in the fall and winter

by haze which sometimes accompanies the SE trade winds and

occurs most often in September and October, or by heavy rains.

5.1 Restricted areas.—The Commonwealth of Australia has established a system of regulated zones within the waters comprising the Great Barrier Reef. These areas, established as the

Great Barrier Reef Marine Park, are designed to control the

movement of all vessels within specific size categories and

geographic locations. The limits of these areas, accompanied

by amplifying information, are seen on the appropriate chart. 

5.1 Furthur information can be found in Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia.

Complete information regarding the Great Barrier Reef Marine

Park Zonning Plan, which includes Designated Shipping Areas

and Particularly Sensitive Sea Areas, can be found on the Authority’s web site.

5.1 Regulations.—Information relating to the Australian Maritime Rescue Coordination Center (MRCC), Search and Rescue

(SAR), and the Australian Ship Reporting System (AUSREP)

may be found in Pub.120, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide)

Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia. 

5.1 For information regarding the mandatory ship reporting systems and vessel traffic service which cover the Torres Strait region and the Inner Route of the Great Barrier Reef, see

paragraph 7.2.

5.1 Fishing.—Commercial and recreational fishing vessels operate along the E coast throughout the year, especially between

Newcastle and the Evans River (29°08'S., 153°28'E). Trawler

fleets operate and are dominant, especially off the coast of New

South Wales. 

5.1 Winds—Weather.—The climate of this region is quite

warm, and because of the anticyclonic storms in summer and

thendepressions over the ocean during the winter, wind and

weather are variable. 

5.1 Offshore and S of 30°S, the winds tend to be from the SW

from June to August and from the E from January to March.

There is no predominating wind direction in any season. Gales

are most frequent from May to September, during which time

they occur on an average of about 6 days per month.

5.1 Offshore between 25°S and 30°S the winds are variable, but

from December to May, the Southeast Trade Winds predominate. West of 155°E, these trade winds are not well developed

until March and in May the wind tends to be from between the

SE and SW. In June, they tend to be S to SW. Gales are most

frequent from February to July, during which time they occur

about 3 days per month.

5.1 On the coast, land and sea breezes are well developed with

the sea breeze most prevalent in summer and early fall, when it

is strengthened by the Southeast Trade Winds. In the vicinity of

Brisbane and further S, the sea breeze is NE, usually occurring

between 1300 and 1900. The land breeze is prevalent in winter,

with its direction influenced by the coastal mountains. 

5.1 When W winds prevail at sea, strong squalls from the highlands may be expected on the coast.

5.1 Black Northeasters, strong NE winds which may be encountered on the coast and at sea, are associated with a steep pressure gradient between an anticyclone over the Tasman Sea and

a monsoonal low pressure over New South Wales. They are

sometimes accompanied by dense clouds, heavy rain squalls,

and occasionally by thunder.

5.1 When Black Northeasters are reinforced on the coast by the

NE sea breeze, a gale may result which usually reaches its

maximum velocity by mid-afternoon. These winds are sometimes persistent before a Southerly Buster.

5.1 Southerly Busters, heavy rain squalls with gusts of 17 to 35

knots, are particularly violent on the coast of New South Wales

S of Port Macquarie.

 Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority

http://www.gbrmpa.gov.au
108 Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 

Pub. 127

5.1 The Southeast Trade Winds prevail throughout the year off

this part of the coast. Southwest winds occur 4 to 5 days a

month from May to July; NW or N winds occur about 6 to 7

days a month from September to December. The wind is usually moderate, but attains force 7 or more about 20 or 30 days a

year. Brief squalls, sometimes of gale force, are fairly frequent

with the Southeast Trades.

5.1 Land and sea breezes, strengthened by the trade winds, are

often strong in the afternoon and may cause a considerable sea.

At such times, the wind often shifts to NE.

5.1 Tropical cyclones, called Queensland Hurricanes, occur

about 4 or 5 times a year. They are most frequent from December to April, but have occurred in every month except August.

5.1 Fog is almost unknown 20 miles or more off the coast, and

visibility is good except during heavy rain. At times, there may

be some haze with the trade winds. Along the coast, fog or mist

sometimes develops at night, but usually disperses soon after

sunrise. Such fogs occur 2 or 3 times a month from May to

September and sometimes in other months.

5.1 Storm warnings and weather information are broadcast by

radio.

5.1 Tides—Currents.—The East Australian Coast Current originates in the sea area E of Swain Reefs and flows S along the

Australian coast as far as Cape Howe. It occupies a broad belt

that extends 20 to 60 miles offshore and has a rate that varies

from about 0.5 knot to more than 3 knots. Its greatest strength

is found near the 200m curve, which varies in position from

about 10 to 30 miles offshore and near which, at 31°S, a rate of

about 4.5 knots was observed. The strength of current is first

felt in the vicinity of a position about 12 miles NE of Sandy

Cape.

5.1 The set of this current, which is mainly between SE and SW,

is not a very constant one. It is subject to interruptions throughout the year by sets in other directions, notably reverse sets,

and there is also a considerable seasonal variation, both in the S

and N flows.

5.1 Close inshore and in the bights, particularly N of Cape

Moreton, there is a N countercurrent with a rate of 0.2 to 1

knot. In general, the strongest S set is found between 26°S and

32°S, particularly between 28°S and 30°S, where several observations of about 4 knots were recorded in the months of

February to April. The current is apt to be strong off projecting

points; off Danger Point, a S set of about 4 knots was observed.

5.1 Between Danger Point and Sydney Harbor, during the

months of November to April, a considerable number of currents setting between SE and SW exceed the rate of 2 knots.

From February to April, the number of S currents exceeding a

rate of 2 knots increases to 12 per cent of all currents observed,

and currents exceeding a rate of 3 knots may be experienced.

The S current may sometimes cease and set N, but it lasts a day

or two and may be attributed to local causes, such as strong S

winds.

5.1 In the same area during the months of May to October, the

number of currents exceeding a rate of 2 knots occurs at less

frequent intervals than during the summer months. From August to October, a rate of 3 knots may be occasionally met.

From May to July, the S current is neither regular nor strong, as

during the remainder of the year. At this time, N currents reach

their greatest strength, approximately 1 knot, and increase in

frequency of occurrence.

5.1 Between Port Stephens and the coast S of Sydney Harbor,

the current sometimes sets toward the land. In a SE gale in December it has been known to set SW.

5.1 The outer part of this S current, when about abreast of Port

Stephens, curves to the E and ENE, sometimes running with

considerable velocity. Abreast of Sydney Harbor, the outer part

of this same current will be found diverted from its course to a

SE and E direction as it leaves the land, the rate being 1 to 2

knots; it has been found to completely reverse and run strongly

in the opposite direction.

5.1 Farther S, in the vicinity of Cape Howe, the current may set

in either direction at a rate of 1 to 1.5 knots.

Off-lying Islands and Dangers

5.2 Most of the off-lying islands and dangers lie within a

100 mile radius of a position about 30 miles N of Lord Howe

Island, which lies about 310 miles ESE of Smoky Cape. Norfolk Island and the dangers in its vicinity lie about 500 miles

ENE of Lord Howe Island.

5.2 Norfolk Island (29°02'S., 167°57'E.) lies about 900 miles

ENE of Sydney. It is about 4 miles long from N to S and about

the same distance wide. The island is not self-supporting and

relies on imports of supplies to augment its own resources. The

main source of revenue is tourism, with approximately 40,000

annual vistors. Mount Pitt and Mount Bates rise near the NW

end of the island. Aeronautical lights are shown from the summit of each mountain. The island is fairly steep-to, but fringing

reefs and rocks lie up to 0.5 mile offshore. 

5.2 Kingston (29°04'S., 167°57'E.) (World Port Index No.

55500) lies on the S side of Norfolk Island at the head of Sydney Bay. The harbor is fronted by an almost continuous detached reef, outside of which there are usually heavy breakers.

Pilots are not available. There are ficilities for mooring and the

port can be contacted on VHF channnel 16. 

5.2 A historic wreck, protected from unauthorized interference,

lies on the bank about 0.1 mile to seaward of the reef.

5.2 There is a boat harbor at the W end of Kingston, but the approach to it is sometimes dangerous, owing to the W end of the

off-lying reef, which must be rounded. There is a wharf, 183m

long, on the SE side of the boat harbor. 

5.2 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available, in depths of 18 to

22m, 0.5 mile WSW of Point Hunter. Vessels may also anchor

on the S part of Norfolk Island. Leading lighted beacons, each

with a white triangular daymark, point up, stand at the W end

of Kingston, and in line bearing 016°, lead to the anchorage.

5.2 There is no protected anchorage at Norfolk Island. Cascade

Bay, on the NE side of the island, is the normal winter anchorage and is moderately secure, even in strong SW winds. Vessels anchor 0.4 mile NNE of Landing Rock. Anchorage is also

afforded 1 mile N of Landing Rock, in depths of 31 to 37m.

Anchorages are clearly shown on the chart.

5.2 Anchorage is prohibited in Anson Bay. Submarine cables are

laid SW from a position 0.5 mile ESE of Anson Point. There

are tanker moorings in Ball Bay, with a pipeline to the storage

tank ashore. 

5.2 Nepean Island (29°07'S., 167°56'E.) lies about 0.5 mile S of

Norfolk Island. The island is about 0.2 mile in extent, and

fringed by reefs up to about 0.5 mile offshore. An obstruction,

the depth over which is unknown, was reported to lie about 0.2
Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 109

Pub. 127

mile SE of the SE extremity of the island.

5.2 Philip Island lies about 3 miles SSW of Nepean Island. The

island is about 1 mile in extent and fringed by reefs and rocks

up to 0.3 mile offshore. Landing is possible at times in a small

bay on the N side of the island. A number of above-water rocks

lie on the N side of the island.

Lord Howe Island

5.3 Lord Howe Island (31°33'S., 159°05'E.), crescentshaped, mountainous, and wooded, lies about 430 miles ENE

of Sydney Harbor. It is about 6 miles long and about 1 mile

wide. Mount Gower rises at the S end of the island and Mount

Lidgbird lies about 1.5 miles NNE of Mount Gower. The island

lies on and near the middle of a bank, about 22 miles long and

12 miles wide, with depths of less than 200m.

5.3 The N and E sides of the island, although fringed by foul

ground, rocks, and islets, are fairly steep-to. Most dangers are

contained within the 20m curve, which lies about 0.5 mile off

this part of the island.

5.3 The W side of the island is a bight formed by the crescent

shape of the island and indents it about 1.5 miles ENE. Coral

reefs, lying up to 1.2 miles offshore, extend across the bight

from the NW end of the island to a position about 1.2 miles N

of the S end of the island. The lagoon inside these reefs has

depths of 2.1 to 2.4m at HW, but it is barely navigable by boats.

5.3 Winds—Weather.—Sudden and violent squalls are common off the SE coast of the island. In summer, NE winds prevail, but during a thunderstorm the wind may shift to the S or

SE for a short time. In the winter, the wind is variable from the

W, but the SW wind prevails and is frequently strong. When

the mountains are capped with clouds, a NW wind may be expected. 

5.3 Tides—Currents.—The mean tidal range at Lord Howe Island is 1m; the spring range is 1.2m. The ebb current begins to

set S at HW; the flood sets N beginning at LW.

5.3 Pilotage.—Prior advice of intention to visit Lord Howe Island is advisable. Vessels anchoring in the open roadstead are

subject to pilotage advice and direction.

5.3 Signals.—Radio contact on VHF channel 16 can be established with the port and guidance for anchorage may be requested. The harbormaster maintains around the clock watch

on VHF.

5.3 Signals are made from a flagstaff on the SE side of Hunter

Bay as follows to indicate the assigned anchorage:

5.3 Anchorage.—Although there are moderate depths at convenient distances around the island, anchorage is not good due to

a bottom fouled by rocks and coral, and also because of violent

and shifting squalls. During SW gales, anchorage may be

found in Northeast Roadstead, between Mutton Bird Island and

Admiralty Islets, in 18 to 29m, coral, about 1 mile E of North

Peak, the NE end of the island. Anchorage may be taken closer

to shore, however, there are depths of 8.2m and less up to a little over 0.2 mile offshore, E of North Peak. Landing can be

made at Ned’s Beach, in a bight S of North Peak.

5.3 During NE and E gales, anchorage may be taken, in 18m, in

Southwest Roadstead, located off the reefs on the W side of the

island. In winter months, vessels using these anchorages

should be prepared to get underway at short notice. Landing

can be made in Hunter Bay, a small bight on the S side of the N

end of the island.

5.4 The Admiralty Islands (31°30'S., 159°05'E.) lie between 0.5 and 1.5 miles NNE of the NE extremity of Lord

Howe Island; all are cliff-faced. Two patches of 5.5m and 6m

lie about 0.2 mile S and about 0.3 mile SSW, respectively, of

the summit of North Islet.

5.4 Mutton Bird Island and Wolfe Rock, surrounded by foul

ground up to a distance of about 0.1 mile, lie about 0.7 mile

offshore N and E, respectively, of the E extremity of Lord

Howe Island.

5.4 Ball’s Pyramid (31°46'S., 159°14'E.) lies about 13 miles SE

of Lord Howe Island. This islet is about 0.5 mile in extent and

lies on and near the N central part of a bank, which is about 11

miles long, 5 to 10 miles wide, and has depths of less than

200m. A number of detached dangers fringe the islet. Observatory Rock and Wheatsheaf Islet lie about 0.5 mile WNW and

0.5 mile WSW, respectively, of the W extremity of Ball’s Pyramid.

5.4 Southeast Rock is a dangerous pinnacle lying about 2.2

miles SE of Ball’s Pyramid. A 16.4m patch is located 1.5 miles

S of the rock. A shoal, with a depth of 8.8m, lies 1.3 miles SSE

of the same point. Heavy breakers have been seen about 5

miles S of Ball’s Pyramid. Vessels should not approach within

7 miles of that side of the islet.

5.4 Caution.—In 1990, Ball’s Pyramid and Southeast Rock

were reported to lie 0.3 mile NE of their charted positions.

5.5 Elizabeth Reef (29°56'S., 159°02'E.), a dangerous,

oval-shaped reef about 5 miles long and 3 miles wide, lies

about 95 miles N of Lord Howe Island and 300 miles off the

Australian coast. In 1988, the reef was reported to extend 1.5

miles farther E than charted. Several shipping lanes pass close

to this vicinity. The reef, which encloses a lagoon, may under

favorable conditions, be seen at a distance of 5 miles, but most

of it covers at HW. In 1983, the stranded wreck on the W extremity of the reef was reported to be a good radar target.

5.5 At HW, with E and SE winds, there is little break on the W

and NW sides of the reef. When approaching from the W, great

care is necessary, especially in the morning, with the sun

ahead, when breakers on the E side may not be seen until too

close to avoid danger. A depth of 46m lies 3 miles SE of Elizabeth Reef.

5.5 The lagoon, with the exception of the center of the N part, is

studded with coral patches, most of which dry and none have a

depth of more than 2.7m. With an E wind, boats can cross the

reef at half-tide on either side of the sand cay.

5.5 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

18m, 0.4 mile NW of the sand cay, with shelter from the preSignal Anchorage

White flag Southwest Roadstead for 

Townside Anchorage.

Red flag Northeast Roadstead for 

Ned’s Beach.

Red flag and white 

flag No landing either side.
110 Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 

Pub. 127

vailing E and SE winds. Small vessels can anchor within the

entrance on the NE side of the reef, in depths of 4 to 7m, broken coral, with shelter from all but the NE winds. The entrance

is difficult and dangerous with E winds.

5.6 Middleton Reef (29°28'S., 159°04'E.), about 30

miles N of Elizabeth Reef, is crescent-shaped, about 5 miles

long, and about 3 miles wide. The entire perimeter dries at LW;

heavy breakers and surf mark the S and W sides. The relative

positions of several wrecks which lie stranded on the reef can

best be seen on the appropriate chart.

5.6 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in The Sound, which

indents the N side of the reef about 1 mile SSE. The best anchorage is in Herald Haven, about 0.2 mile S of the NW horn

of the reef, in depths of 9 to 11m, 0.1 mile S of the point, sheltered by the reefs. 

5.6 Gifford Tablemount, with depths of 261m and 330m, lies between 26°40'S and 27°00'S on the meridian of 159°20'E.

5.6 Capel Bank (25°16'S., 159°27'E.), about 250 miles N of

Middleton Reef, has depths of 46 to 144m, but it has not been

examined nor are its limits defined. A depth of 10m has been

reported in position 25°09'S, 159°45'E. There are depths of 60

to 80m about halfway between Capel Bank and Kelso Bank.

5.6 Kelso Bank (24°16'S., 159°27'E.), about 70 miles N of

Capel Bank, has been defined but not examined. There is a

least charted depth of 14.6m over its S end. The bank is sometimes marked by tide rips.

5.6 Argo Bank, with a depth of 263m, lies in position 23°10'S,

159°35'E. 

5.6 Nova Bank, with a depth of 22m, lies in position 22°34'S,

159°14'E. A depth of 30m lies 20 miles S of the 22m depth.

North Point to Newcastle

5.7 North Point (33°48'S., 151°19'E.) is the NE point of

the high precipitous North Head promontory on the N side of

the entrance to Sydney Harbor. The point is steep-to and clear

of dangers and has depths of 7.3 to 18.3m about 0.1 mile offshore. The Cardinal’s Palace, a large building on the NW end

of the promontory, is prominent.

5.7 Cabbage Tree Bay lies on the N side of the North Point headland. It indents the coast about 1 mile to the W. The bay provides anchorage for small craft, sheltered from S winds. A

conspicuous tower stands on the S shore of the bay.

5.7 Long Point (33°45'S., 151°19'E.) lies about 4 miles N of

North Point. The point is fringed by reefs up to about 0.5 mile

offshore, over which dangerous rollers sweep. A prominent

water tower stands about 1.2 miles NW of the point. Bungan

Head, also fringed by reefs up to about 0.5 mile offshore, lies

about 4.7 miles N of Long Point. A shoal, with a depth of

11.2m, lies 1 mile SE of Long Point.

5.7 Barranjoey Head, a promontory 103m high, lies at the N end

of a low neck of land and forms the S entrance point of Broken

Bay. A light is shown on the head. 

5.7 Broken Bay (33°34'S., 151°22'E.) is entered between Barranjoey Head and Box (Hawke) Head. About 1.5 miles within

the entrance, the bay narrows to a width of about 1.2 miles at

Middle Head, located on the N side of the bay, about 2 miles

WSW of Box Head. An inlet indents the N side of the bay

about 1.5 miles NNW between Box Head and Middle Head.

The town of Ettalong lies on the N end of this inlet, about 2

miles N of Box Head. Small craft may enter Brisbane Water, a

sheltered inlet off the town, but sometimes there are depths of

less than 1.2m over the bar. A bridge spans Brisbane Water.

5.7 Pitt Water, an inlet about 0.7 mile wide, indents the S side of

Broken Bay about 5 miles S between Barranjoey Head and

West Head (First Head), about 1 mile W. A bar, with a depth of

2.7m in the fairway, extends across the entrance, but within

there are depths of 12.8 to 18.3m. There are several small villages on the shore of the inlet.

5.7 The Hawkesbury River, the largest of the rivers on this coast,

discharges into Broken Bay between Juno Point and Eleanor

Bluffs, about 0.7 mile SW. The river is about 330 miles long

and navigable by small craft for 70 miles from the sea. The current runs at a rate of 4 knots in the mouth of the river.

5.7 Navigable channels and bays in the Hawkesbury River, Pitt

Water, and Brisbane Water are marked in places by lighted beacons.

5.7 Caution.—This area is frequently used by divers, by day and

night, undergoing diving instruction. Appropriate signals are

displayed when divers are in the water. Mariners should navigate with care when in the vicinity of Taylors Point

Ball’s Pyramid
Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 111

Pub. 127

5.7 Anchorage.—Inside Middle Bank, anchorage in Broken

Bay is protected. Good sheltered anchorage can be taken, in 11

to 13m, sand and mud, in Flint and Steel Bay, close SW of

Flint and Steel Point, with the point almost in line with Middle

Head and Juno Point, bearing 290°. The best anchorage in Broken Bay is reported to be in Cowan Creek, in about 8.2m, about

1 mile inside the entrance of the creek.

5.7 Anchorage can be taken in Refuge Bay, on the S side of

Challenger Head, in 4.5m. In the entrance of the Hawkesbury

River, anchorage can be taken E of the second sandy bay, in

12.8m, with Croppy Point bearing 005° and Juno Point bearing

086°.

5.7 Naval port.—The port lies W of a line between Barranjoey

Head and Box Head, and E of a line between West Head and

Middle Head. It includes Pitt Water, but not Brisbane Water.

The villages of Palm Beach and Newport have small craft piers

and a small pier lies just inside Pitt Water.

5.7 Submarine cables.—Cables are laid in Pitt Water across the

entrance and the central part of the inlet. A cable is laid across

Cowan Creek about 2.7 miles above the entrance, and also in

the Hawkesbury River from Dangar Island to the E bank. Additional cables are laid from time to time and are generally indicated by notice boards on the shore.

Broken Bay to Nobbys Head

5.8 Between Broken Bay and Nobbys Head, 45 miles

NNE, the coast is formed by sandy beaches, separated by rocky

points backed by Tuggerah Lake and Lake Macquarie, behind

which there is mountainous country. Warrawalong, a conspicuous peak, rises 20 miles W of the entrance to Lake Macquarie

(33°05'S., 151°40'E.).

5.8 First Point (33°29'S., 151°27'E.) lies about 8 miles NE of

Barranjoey Head. The point forms the NE extremity of Cape

Three Points. Two towers, each at an elevation of 260m, stand

5.5 miles NNW of First Point.

5.8 Tuggerah Reef, with a depth of 5.5m, lies about 2 miles offshore and 9 miles NNE of First Point. The narrow shallow entrance of Tuggerah Lake. The narrow shallow entrance of

Tuggerah Lake indents the coast WNW of Tuggerah Reef. The

entrance to the lake is frequently shoaled and the depth over

the bar is generally about 1m. A tower stands near the E shore

of the lake, about 1.5 miles SW of the entrance.

5.8 Norah Head (33°17'S., 151°35'E.) is a prominent point

which is fringed by dangers up to 0.1 mile offshore. A light

stands on the head. The point has been reported to be a good

radar target up to 16 miles. Several detached rocks lie awash

about 0.5 mile offshore and 3.2 miles NNE of Norah Head.

5.9 Catherine Hill Bay (33°09'S., 151°38'E.) lies about 8

miles NNE of Norah Head. The bay indents the coast for about

0.5 mile on the N side of Hales Bluff, a point about 0.7 mile N

of Flat Island. The coal mine was closed in 2002. 

5.9 A coaling jetty (disused as of 2002), with depths of 6.1 to

9.1m alongside at its head, extends about 325m ENE from the

SW shore. A mooring buoy lies NW of the jetty’s head. A 0.6m

patch and a 4.9m patch lie about 30m E and about 0.1 mile

ENE, respectively, from the head of the jetty. 

5.9 An old wreck, with a depth of 2.1m, lies 0.1 mile NW of the

head of the jetty.

5.9 Lake Macquarie, the entrance of which lies 4.5 miles NNE

of Catherine Hill Bay, is a coal exporting center. The bar at the

entrance, for which local knowledge is necessary, has depths of

1.2 to 1.8m, but is subject to change.

5.9 Moon Islet (33°05'S., 151°40'E.) lies 0.5 mile E of the entrance to Lake Macquarie and acts as a breakwater to it. A light

is shown from Moon Islet.

5.9 Between Moon Islet and the mainland there is a channel with

a depth of 4.3m. Local knowledge is necessary owing to the

rocks fringing the mainland and off the SW side of the islet.

5.9 Lake Macquarie is entered between two breakwaters, but the

channel is narrowed by sand banks on each side. The channel is

approximately 30m wide and has a depth of 1.7m as far as

Swansea Road Bridge, which spans the channel at the town of

Swansea, 1 mile within the entrance.

5.9 Tidal currents at Swansea and Pelican Islet (33°04'S.,

151°38'E.), at the inner end of the channel, attain a rate of 4 to

5 knots. 

5.9 There is no pilot, but the District Officer, Swansea, while

taking no responsibility, will assist. Entry or departure should

only be made on the flood tide, which will be indicated by signal at the signal station. A red light indicates that the bar is

dangerous and should not be approached. A green light indicates that the bar is safe to cross.

5.9 Swansea Road Bridge, with a navigable width of 14m, will

open for traffic. Two fixed red lights indicate the span is

closed; two fixed green lights indicate the bridge is open and

vessels may proceed.

5.10 Redhead (33°01'S., 151°44'E.), a high bluff, lies

about 5.5 miles NE of the entrance to Lake Macquarie and has

been reported to give good radar returns up to 27 miles. The intervening coast consists of a sandy beach backed by sand

dunes. A conspicuous water tower stands at an elevation of

136m at the N end of the town of Dudley, 1.7 miles NNW of

Redhead Point.

5.10 Nobbys Head, about 6.5 miles N of Redhead, rises abruptly

from a narrow peninsula extending about 0.5 mile NE from the

mainland. It lies on the S side of the entrance to Newcastle

Harbor and has been reported to give good radar returns up to

15 miles. The S breakwater extends about 0.3 mile NE from

this head. Reefs, rocks awash, and other dangers fringe Nobbys

Head up to about 200m off its SE side and 260m off its E side.

The N breakwater lies about 0.2 mile NW of and about parallel

to the S breakwater.

5.10 A light is shown from Nobby’s Head. A signal station stands

on the head. Lights are shown from the breakwater heads.

5.10 Flagstaff Hill, a prominent 35m high hummock, on which

there is a flagstaff, lies 0.6 mile SW of Nobbys Head. 

5.10 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken with Nobbys Head

light bearing 306°, distant 2.6 miles.

5.10 Caution.—A spoil ground, with sides approximately 1 mile

long, is centered 2.5 miles SE of Nobbys Head.

Newcastle Harbor (32°55'S., 151°47'E.)

World Port Index No. 53610

5.11 Newcastle Harbor, one of the important harbors in
112 Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 

Pub. 127

Australia, lies at the mouth of the Hunter River, which discharges between the breakwaters extending from Nobbys Head

and Pirate Point, about 0.5 mile to the W. The river is about

300 miles long and is navigable by smaller vessels for 23 miles

above the port. Although somewhat narrow, the harbor is well

protected and has excellent berthing and other facilities.

Winds—Weather

5.11 During severe SE winds, a confused sea builds up in Newcastle Bight. The port has been closed for up to 3 days by

heavy swells from the SE.

Tides—Currents

5.11 Signals describing the height of tide and direction of the current are displayed from the signal station on Nobbys Head.

Currents within the harbor generally flow at 1 or 2 knots, but

have been known to reach a speed of 6 knots on the ebb during

freshets. Strong cross currents can be expected in the Horseshoe, as well as on the outer range.

Depths—Limitations

5.11 Vessels up to 290m long and over 90,000 grt may be accommodated at Newcastle.

5.11 Mariners are warned of the heavy breakers during SE winds

on the 9.1m depth about 0.2 mile E of the N breakwater. A

rocky patch, with a depth of 5.2m, lies about 0.2 mile SSE of

the S breakwater head and is the easternmost of the dangers.

5.11 A wreck lies 2.4 miles NE of the head of the S breakwater.

Depths of 16.5m and 15.5m are located 3.4 miles bearing 043°,

and 3.1 miles bearing 056°, respectively, from the same breakwater head. A 15.1m depth is located 2.9 miles, bearing 063°,

from the same head.

5.11 As of 2005, the entrance channel to Newcastle Harbor had a

depth of 15m from seaward to the Horseshoe, a deep basin

from which all parts of the harbor are accessible. Basin Cut, the

channel leading W from the Horse Shoe to The Basin, has a

depth of 12.3m. The Steelworks Channel, leading N from the

Horseshoe, has a depth of 15m to the Swinging Basin. The

Swinging Basin has a depth of 15.1m.

5.11 Throsby No. 1 Berth, includes a transit shed and is designed

to accommodate heavy container-handling equipment. It has a

length of 183m and a depth of 11m. 

5.11 The Basin, just N of the Tug Company Wharves (charted as

Lee Wharf), is divided into Eastern Basin and Western Basin.

The Eastern Basin berths, No. 1 and No. 2, each have an alongside depth of 11.6m and service a variety of cargo, including

timber, aluminum and steel products.

5.11 The Western Basin offers three berths. No. 4 Berth is a roro/

container terminal, with a length of 250m and a depth of

11.6m. No. 3 Berth, with a length of 258m and a depth of

11.6m, handles bulk grain cargo. No. 1 Berth is used as a layup berth; it has a length of 155m and a depth of 9.1m alongside. 

5.11 The Dockyard Berths lie on the SW end of Steelworks Channel. The deepest berth provides a length of 262m and a depth

of 8.2m.

5.11 The area N of the Horse Shoe is known as the North Harbor.

The Dyke Berths, just N of the Dockyard Berths complex, are

five in number. No. 1 Berth is a tie up berth, with a length of

238m and a depth of 11.8m alongside. No. 2 Berth is a bulk

loading facility for ore concentrates; with a length of 238m and

a depth of 12.4m alongside. No. 4 Berth and No. 5 Berth function as a coal loading area, with a total length of 540m, and a

depth from 16.2 to 16.5m alongside. No. 6 Berth has a length

of 68m and a depth of 7.9m alongside; coal is landed at this

berth.

5.11 Port Warrath, the termination of Steelworks Channel, comprises a turning basin, and divides into two arms at its N end.

The E arm has the three Kooragang Berths, of which the bulk

berth offers facilities for handling liquid dangerous cargo. The

bulk berth (Kooragang 2) has a length of 274m and a depth of

11.6m. The alumina berth (Kooragang 3), also a bulk facility,

offers a length of 190m and a depth of 13.2m. Kooragang 5 and

Koorargang 6 have depths of 16.2 and 16.3m alongside respectively.

5.11 The W arm of Port Warrath offers six berths. BHP Steelworks No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, and No. 4 handle steel products in

bulk, the largest of which provides a length of 152m, with a

depth of 9.6m. BHP Steelworks No. 5, a bulk discharge berth,

will accept a vessel with a length of 274m and has an alongside

depth of 12.3m. BHP Steelworks No. 6, a coke-loading facility,

has a length of 213m and an alongside depth of 7.0m. BHP

Steelworks ceased production in 1999. The area is being considered for development as a multi-purpose terminal. 

Aspect

5.11 The approach to the harbor is easily identified, as it lies at

the SW end of a long sweep of beach and low sandhills trending to the NE, while the coast to the S is higher. The tall chimneys behind Redhead are very conspicuous. Nobbys Head and

Fort Scratchley, a high hill about 0.5 mile SW, are prominent

from offshore, and the city of Newcastle and ships in the harbor are obvious on closer approach. Nobbys Head has a flagpole on its summit. Shepherds Hill, near which there is a tall

water tower, lies about 1.5 miles SW of Nobbys Head and is

conspicuous. A conspicuous radio tower stands on a hill 13

miles W of Nobbys Head.

Pilotage

5.11 Pilotage for Newcastle Harbor is compulsory and available

24 hours. Pilots may be ordered through the signal station or

via VHF.

5.11 Vessels will be boarded by the pilot at the inner or outer pilot

station depending on the vessels size. Vessels of 90,000 dwt or

less are boarded 3 miles E of Nobbys Head Light (32°55'S.,

151°48'E.); vessels of 90,000 dwt or larger are boarded 5 miles

E of the same light.

5.11 Vessels should signal their ETA to the pilot station at least 4

hours before arrival, confirming or amending 2 hours before.

5.11 Vessels should maintain a continuous listen watch on VHF

 Newcastle Port Corporation

http://www.newportcorp.com
Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 113

Pub. 127

channels 9 and 16 and inform the Vessel Traffic Information

Center when the pilot boards.

Regulations

5.11 The Port Limits for Newcastle are delimited by the arc of a

circle, 3 miles in radius, centered on Nobbys Head Light.

5.11 Additionally, a Restricted Area and Prohibited Anchorage

has been established within the port area by a line drawn 057°

from North Breakwater Light to the Port Limit Line, and a line

drawn 127° from South Breakwater Light to the port limit line.

The Restricted Area represents a fairway for commercial shipping and vessels should neither anchor in this area or hamper

the navigation of commercial shipping in any way. Vessels

must not transit the area without the permission of the harbormaster.

5.11 Traffic is controlled via the signal station on Nobbys Head,

which may be contacted by VHF or visual signals. The station

should be contacted at least 30 minutes prior to a scheduled

movement. A vessel may not enter or leave berth unless granted permission.

5.11 Quarantine line.—The quarantine line for the port is drawn

from North Breakwater Light to South Breakwater Light.

There is no defined quarantine anchorage, but pratique is granted around the clock. 

Signals

5.11 Vessels proceeding E from The Basin must sound one prolonged blast of 4 to 6 seconds duration on the whistle or siren

immediately before entering the channel out of The Basin.

5.11 Traffic and general signals are made from the signal station

on Nobby’s Head.

5.11 The state of the tide is shown from the highest mast, as follows:

5.11 Flood tide is indicated by a black triangular shape by day, or

a green light by night. The ebb is shown from the mast as a

black circular shape by day, or a red light at night.

5.11 Depth signals are displayed in accordance with the uniform

signals for Commonwealth Ports. See Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia.

5.11 Unfavorable sea or swell conditions in the entrance channel

are indicated by signals shown from a shorter mast, as follows:

Anchorage

5.11 While no anchorage can be recommended that is secure in

all weathers, anchorage can be had in Newcastle Bight, 1 to 2

miles N of the N breakwater, or 2 to 3 miles S of the entrance

and clear of the Restricted Area.

Directions

5.11 Keep a sharp lookout for fishing vessels, particularly within

the anchorage areas in Newcastle Bight.

5.11 From a position about 2 miles E of the S breakwater, proceed

NE until the approach channel range is intersected. Steer on

this range, watching for a strong NW set in SE to S winds. In

moderate to heavy sea conditions, waves may build to twice

their normal height up to 0.8 mile off the entrance, causing

problems for deep-draft vessels and small craft alike.

5.11 Once within the breakwaters, vessels are guided by the

buoys and ranges to the various parts of the port.

Caution

5.11 Bombing and gunnery practice may be conducted by aircraft

or artillery in the approaches to the harbor.

5.11 Depths in Newcastle Harbor have been decreased by as

much as 0.6m during freshets and dredging is continually pursued throughout the harbor. Information on the latest promulgated depth for each area is available from the Harbor Master

Newcastle by contacting the Vessel Traffic Information Center

on VHF channel 9 or by telephoning 2-4985-8292.

5.11 An underkeel clearance of 10 per cent of the vessel’s draft

must be maintained while in the waters of the port; a clearance

of at least 0.3m must be maintained while at berth.

Newcastle to Port Stephens

5.12 Between Newcastle and Port Stephens, about 23 miles

ENE, the coast is indented about 2 miles NNW by Newcastle

Bight. The low sandy beach between these two points is

backed by sand hills. The surf breaks continually on this shore

and in bad weather heavy rollers extend a considerable distance seaward. Morna Point, 17 miles ENE of Nobbys Head,

has been reported to give good radar returns up to 10 miles.

5.12 A number of wrecks lie within Newcastle Bight, on the following bearings and distances from Nobbys Head Light:

a. 033°, 4.3 miles.

b. 043°, 2.4 miles.

c. 067°, 5.5 miles.

5.12 Telegraph Shoal, with a depth of 4.5m lies about 0.2 mile W

of Morna Point. A wreck, least depth 27m, lies 3 miles WSW

of Morna Point. A shoal, with a least depth of 14.6m, lies about

2.7 miles ENE of Nobbys Head. Vessels should avoid this area

during periods of heavy swell.

5.12 Point Stephens (32°45'S., 152°12'E.) lies about 5 miles NE

of Morna Point and shows a light. The point is fringed by foul

ground and detached shoal patches up to 0.3 mile offshore. The

light has been reported to give good radar returns up to 9 miles.

5.12 Caution.—A submarine cable is laid from a position 0.6

mile bearing 309° from Point Stephens Light in a 305° direction to the shore. A dangerous wreck lies almost 0.5 mile offTidal Signals

Tide Day Night

Flood Black triangle Green light

Ebb Black circle Red light 

Sea/Swell Conditions Signals

Day Night

Moderate Black triangle Green light

Heavy Black circle Red light 
114 Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 

Pub. 127

shore about 1 mile NW of Point Stephens.

5.12 South Head (Toomeree Head) lies on the S side to the entrance of Port Stephens. Three conspicuous hills mark the head

and a prominent tower stands 3 miles to the SW. North Head

(Yacaaba Head) lies about 1.2 miles NE of South Head and is

connected to the mainland. Three small islands lie to the E of

North Head.

5.13 Port Stephens (32°43'S., 152°12'E.), entered between

North Head and South Head, extends about 11 miles to the W.

The harbor is obstructed by sand banks, some of which dry in

patches. South Channel, on the S side of the harbor, is the only

passage through the banks for vessels other than small craft.

There are a few small towns and farms on the shores of the harbor. 

5.13 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be had in Fly Roads, S of

South Head, in a depth of about 20m. Beware of the 8m patches, and the wreck close by, lying about 1 mile WNW of Point

Stephens Light. With offshore winds and in calm weather, anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 11 to 27m, N of Nelson

Head, but with SE winds, a heavy swell breaks across the entrance of the harbor making the anchorage unsafe.

5.13 Nelson Bay is a convenient anchorage for weather bound

vessels. Coasters frequently take shelter in adverse weather

conditions in the bay, which has depths of 7 to 11m.

5.13 Caution.—Caution is advised when proceeding through S

channel, owing to the eddies occurring off the S shore. It is inadvisable for deep-draft vessels to enter Port Stephens at night.

Port Stephens to Sugarloaf Point

5.14 Between North Head and Sugarloaf Point, about 24

miles NE, the low sandy coast, on which there are numerous

sandhills, trends regularly in that direction. A number of high

hills stand about 8 miles inland. Most dangers are contained

within 1 mile offshore, except those in the vicinity of the

Broughton Islands and those off Sugarloaf Point.

5.14 The Broughton Islands (32°37'S., 152°19'E.), a group of islands and rocks, lie 8 miles NE of North Head. The outermost

island is steep and rocky, with patches of scrub on its summit.

This island is joined at LW by a chain of rocks to the larger and

inner island.

5.14 Small vessels with local knowledge, can obtain anchorage

sheltered from all winds between the islands. With S winds,

anchorage can be obtained on the N side of the larger island,

between the two reefs, 0.2 mile E of the NW end of the island,

in a depth of 9m, sand. During NE or E winds, good anchorage

may be taken, in depths of 11 to 20m, 0.3 mile SSW of the NW

end of the larger island.

5.14 Small craft may obtain anchorage in a cove on the SW side

of the larger island, 0.7 mile SSE of its NW end. A 1.5m rocky

patch lies in the middle of the entrance, and should be passed

on its N side when entering.

5.14 Sugarloaf Point (32°27'S., 152°32'E.) lies 15 miles NE of

the Broughton Islands. A light is shown from the SE extremity

of the point. A signal station situated on the point will answer

signals if observed. The point has been reported to give good

radar returns up to 21 miles. Seal Rocks, several steep-to rocky

islets, lie about 1.7 miles SSE of the point. Edith Breaker, a

4.9m rocky patch, lies about 3 miles SW of the point.

5.14 Sugarloaf Bay, a small bight on the N side of Sugarloaf

Point, affords shelter from SW and S winds. There is anchorage for small vessels, in 7.3m, about 0.2 mile WNW of the NE

end of Sugarloaf Point promontory.

Sugarloaf Point to Crowdy Head

5.15 Between Sugarloaf Point and Cape Hawke, 13 miles

N, the low coast trends regularly in that direction. The coast is

fairly steep-to and all dangers except Black Rocks are contained up to 0.5 mile offshore.

5.15 Cape Hawke (32°13'S., 152°34'E.) is reported to give good

radar returns up to 17 miles.

5.15 Between Cape Hawke and Crowdy Head, about 24 miles

NNE, a bight indents the coast about 5 miles WNW. Except for

a few points, this part of the coast is low. Most dangers are contained within 2 miles of the coast.

5.15 Black Rocks (Skeleton Rocks) (32°24'S., 152°32'E.), several detached above-water rocks less than 0.1 mile in extent, lie

about 0.7 mile offshore, and about 2 miles N of Sugarloaf

Point.

5.15 Charlotte Head lies about 6 miles N of Sugarloaf Point. Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels with local knowledge, in a depth of 7m, on the N side of Charlotte Head, with

shelter from S winds. Booti Hill rises 1.5 miles NW of Charlotte Head. Between the hill and Cape Hawke, the coast is

formed by a narrow sandy strip separating Wallis Lake from

the sea. The lake extends 9 miles N and enters the sea through

Cape Hawke Harbor.

5.16 Cape Hawke Harbor (32°10'S., 152°30'E.), about 4

miles NW of Cape Hawke, is in the shallow entrance of Wallis

Lake, a large body of water extending about 9 miles to the S.

The entrance, requiring local knowledge, is on the N side of a

breakwater extending 305m NE from the shore. There is a

depth of 2.1m over the bar. Lighted beacons and a lighted

range mark the entrance to the harbor. The village of Forster is

situated on the S side of the entrance.

5.16 Anchorage, in depths of 15 to 18m, may be found about 0.8

mile NE of the village at Forster.

5.16 There is no pilot, but the harbor officer in charge will assist

vessels, if necessary. There are several wharves with depths of

1 to 3m alongside.

5.16 Harrington Inlet (31°53'S., 152°41'E.) lies at the head of

the Manning River, about 20 miles NNE of Cape Hawke Harbor, and is no longer available to commercial traffic.

5.16 Crowdy Head (31°51'S., 152°45'E.) is a prominent headland on which a light is shown. Depths of less than 11m extend

0.5 mile E from the head. Crowdy Bay, a small bight on the N

side of Crowdy Head, affords shelter to small craft.

5.16 Anchorage may be taken off the boat harbor, in a depth of

7m. A lighted beacon stands on the shore of the boat harbor

and, in line with Crowdy Head Light, leads through the entrance. 

Crowdy Head to Port Macquarie

5.17 Between Crowdy Head and Port Macquarie, about 28

miles NNE, the low coast trends in that direction with several

prominent headlands between. Giles Shoal, with a depth of
Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 115

Pub. 127

9.8m, lies about 1.7 miles NNE of Crowdy Head. Curphey

Shoal, with a depth of 8.2m, lies 3 miles NE of Crowdy Head.

Mermaid Reef lies about 5.2 miles NE of Crowdy Head. All

the above shoals are covered by the red sector of Crowdy Head

Light.

Indian Head (Diamond Head) (31°44'S., 152°48'E.) lies

about 8 miles NNE of Crowdy Head. The head has been reported to give good radar returns up to 27 miles. Between Indian

Head and Camden Head, 5 miles NNE, the coast continues as a

sandy beach, backed by swampy ground. Camden Head terminates in Perpendicular Point.

5.17 Camden Haven, a narrow inlet in the estuary of the Camden

Haven River, lies about 1 mile W of Perpendicular Point. The

entrance channel is fronted by a bar of shoal depth, which is

sounded regularly. Local knowledge is necessary and local authorities should be consulted before planning a voyage here.

5.17 The channel, marked by beacons in range, leads to Laurieton, about 2 miles above the bar. A road bridge, with a vertical

clearance of 4.5m, spans the channel at Laurieton.

5.17 Tacking Point (31°29'S., 152°56'E.), from which a light is

shown, lies 11 miles NNE of Camden Head. All dangers are

contained within 0.2 mile off the point. Flat Rock, a dangerous

submerged rock about 0.2 mile offshore, lies about 2 miles N

of Tacking Point.

5.17 From Tacking Point to the entrance to Port Macquarie, 3

miles NNW, the coast is steep and fronted by rocks. An obelisk

stands on Nobby Head, midway along this stretch of coast.

5.18 Port Macquarie (31°26'S., 152°55'E.) (World Port

Index No. 53560), at the entrance of the Hastings River, is entered between Green Mound and Pelican Point. The town is situated on the S side of the entrance. Two towers, with elevations

of 75m and 61m, stand in the middle of the town. The wharves

in the port are no longer in use, and vessels berth at Hibbard, a

town on the S side of the river, 5 miles within the entrance.

5.18 Pontoon berths and other facilities for small craft are situated

at the NW side of the town, about 0.5 mile SW of Pelican

Point.

5.18 Port Macquarie is dangerous to enter, owing to the shifting

sandbanks, which are sounded regularly. Local knowledge is

necessary, and the local authorities should be consulted before

planning a voyage here.

5.18 A dangerous wreck, with a least depth of 2.5m, lies in midchannel in the entrance to the harbor, about midway between

the lights at the heads of the N and S breakwaters.

5.18 Red triangular lighted beacons stand on the S breakwater

and lead across the bar. The front light is moved as necessary to

reflect changes in the channel over the bar.

5.18 Good anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 11m, sand,

0.7 mile E of the entrance.

5.18 Bird Rock, 8m high, lies 0.8 miles SE of the harbor entrance

and about 0.4 mile offshore. Patches of reef lie inshore of Bird

Rock.

Port Macquarie to Coffs Harbor

5.19 The coast between Port Macquarie and Smoky Cape,

32 miles NNE, is mostly low, sandy, and covered with thick

scrub, and broken at intervals by rocky points, which from the

offing appear like islands. Behind the coast the land rises to

tree covered peaks. A heavy surf generally breaks on the

beaches.

5.19 Point Plomer (31°18'S., 152°59'E.) lies about 7.5 miles

NNE of the entrance to Port Macquarie and is fringed by rocks

and foul ground up to 0.2 mile offshore. A bank, with depths of

160m, was reported to lie 13 miles ESE of Point Plomer. Crescent Head lies about 7 miles N of Point Plomer.

5.19 Korogoro Point lies about 9.5 miles NNE of Crescent Head

and rises to a height of 153m. A conspicuous tower stands

about 6.5 miles WNW of this point. The tower shows three

lights at night and is a good radar return for about 14 miles.

5.19 Smoky Cape (30°56'S., 153°05'E.), on which a light is

shown, is at the SE end of a prominent headland of three hills,

the southernmost of which is South Smoky Peak. Smoky Cape

has been reported to give good radar returns up to 20 miles.

Lagger’s Point, about 2.7 miles N of Smoky Cape, is the N end

of the headland. A breakwater extends in a NW direction from

Lagger’s Point.

5.19 Trial Bay is entered between Lagger’s Point and Monument

Point, 1.5 miles WSW. The towns of Arakoon and South West

Rocks are located S of the entrance to the bay. A light stands

on Southwest Rocks.

5.19 Pilotage.—Pilotage may be arranged through Sydney Maritime and is compulsory. The pilot boards 1.5 miles NE of the

entrance to the Macleay River.

5.19 Anchorage.—The area behind the breakwater provides good

anchorage and shelter from winds from the SE through SW to

NW.

5.20 The Macleay River, which flows into the sea 2 miles

W of Lagger’s Point, is about 100 miles long and has several

towns on its banks. The river is navigable by small vessels with

local knowledge, to Smithton, 15 miles above the entrance.

The large town of Kempsey lies 10 miles farther upstream.

5.20 The bar, the position of which is liable to change, has a depth

of 1.5m. The best time to enter the river is on the last of the

flood.

5.20 Pilotage.—The pilot boards 1 mile NW of Laggers Point.

5.20 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 4m,

1 mile within the entrance.

5.20 Nambucca Heads (30°39'S., 153°01'E.), a low rocky point,

lies about 14 miles N of the Macleay River entrance. The Nambucca River discharges into the sea on the S side of Nambucca

Heads. The river is closed to commercial traffic.

5.20 Coffs Harbor (30°18'S., 153°08'E.) is a confined harbor

about 0.5 mile in extent, with a town of the same name on its

W side. It is formed by several islands and breakwaters and has

depths of about 6.5 to 7.3m. A jetty extends from the town into

the NW end of the harbor. It has been reported that the harbor

is no longer used by commercial traffic.

5.20 Fishing vessels and small craft use the boat harbor which is

contained within the inner breakwaters on the N side.

5.20 Depths—Limitations.—A disused commercial jetty, 460m

long, with a berth on each side of its outer end, is available for

vessels up to 4,000 grt. Depths alongside each berth are from

5.8 to 6.4m. A mast, on which there is a light, stands on the

head of the jetty.

5.20 Vessels berth bow to seaward. Small marker buoys off each

side of the head of the jetty indicate the position for letting go

the anchor in order to swing before berthing.
116 Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 

Pub. 127

5.20 A mooring buoy lies off the S side of the jetty for the use of

vessels mooring.

5.20 Those unacquainted with the harbor should not attempt to

enter at night. 

5.20 Aspect.—A conspicuous tower stands 6.5 miles NW of the

harbor entrance.

5.20 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory; the pilot boarding

ground is situated 0.5 mile E of the E breakwater light.

5.20 Signals.—A white flag shown from the mast indicates it is

safe to berth. A red flag indicates it is dangerous to berth.

5.20 Anchorage.—Anchorage, in good weather, can be had, in

7m, sand, on the entrance range, with the outer end of the jetty

bearing NNW. 

Coffs Harbor to Evans Head

5.21 Between Coffs Harbor and Evans Head, 72 miles

NNE, the land, although continuing low, is less regular in outline, and the coastal range of rocky hills approach near the sea.

Many rivers enter the sea on this stretch of coast, the most important of which is the Clarence River, which enters the sea on

the N side of Wooli Head. The off-lying islands and dangers

off the S part of this stretch of coast extend 6 miles offshore,

and lie within the 20m curve.

5.21 Split Solitary Island (30°14'S., 153°11'E.) lies about 4.5

miles NNE of Coffs Harbor entrance. The island is divided into

two parts by a cleft. Owing to the irregular depths between the

coast and the island, the passage between is not recommended.

5.21 The island is the SW island of the Solitary Islands, a scattered group of islands and rocks, which lie between 1 to 6

miles offshore, and extend 22 miles NNE of Split Solitary Island. Passage between the islands and the mainland should

only be used by small vessels with local knowledge.

5.21 South Solitary Island (30°12'S., 153°16'E.) shows a light

and is located about 5 miles NE of Split Solitary Island. Two

above-water rocks lie off its N end, and Arched Rock off its E

side. Black Rock, 1.8m high, lies 0.5 mile NW of the island.

5.21 South West Solitary Island (Grouper Islet) lies about 3.5

miles NW of South Solitary Island and 1 mile E of Bare Bluff

(30°10'S., 153°12'E.). A reef extends 0.5 mile SW, and another

the same distance S, respectively, from the island. Air bombing

practice takes place at times near the island.

5.21 Stack Rock lies close offshore midway between Bare Bluff

and Green Bluff (30°07'S., 153°13'E.). The town of Woolgoolga is situated on the latter bluff, which is a low saddleback

point. A conspicuous tank stands 0.2 mile SW of Green Bluff.

5.21 North West Solitary Island (30°01'S., 153°16'E.) lies 8.5

miles NNE of South West Solitary Island. A shoal, with a

depth of 2.4m and which breaks, lies 0.5 mile N of the island.

Chopper Rock, lies at the N end of a bank, with depths of less

than 5.5m.

5.21 Breaker Rocks lie 2.5 miles ENE of North West Solitary Island. There are depths of 15.8 and 16.5m over them. Vessels

are recommended to pass at least 1 mile E of them.

5.22 North Solitary Island (29°56'S., 153°24'E.) is an islet lying about 6.5 miles offshore and about 8 miles NNE of

North West Solitary Island. It consists of two above-water

rocks with a narrow opening between. A number of detached

rocks, some on which the sea breaks, lie N of the islet. North

West Rock lies in the middle of a bank with depths of less than

5.5m, 0.7 mile NNW of the islet. A below-water rock was reported to lie 1 mile N of North West Rock. A light is shown

from the NE side of the islet.

The Wooli River (Wooli Wooli River) (29°53'S., 153°16'E.),

which is only navigable by boats, lies about 1.5 miles N of Tree

Point. A dangerous submerged rock lies about 0.1 mile NE of

the S entrance point of the river. The entrance of the river is

protected by two breakwaters, which are lighted. A conspicuous tank stands about 1 mile NW of the breakwaters.

5.22 Sandon Bluffs (29°40'S., 153°20'E.), appear as white cliffs

and lie about 15 miles NNE of Tree Point. Sandon Shoals, a 7.5

to 9.1m patch over which the sea sometimes breaks, lies on a

bank about 2 miles SSE of Sandon Bluffs. The mouth of the

Sandon River, navigable only by boats, lies on the N side of

Sandon Bluffs. Plover Island is an islet in the river entrance.

5.22 Cakora Point (Brooms Head) lies about 4 miles N of Sandon

Bluffs. Buchanan Rock, a 4.2m rocky patch over which the sea

breaks, lies about 0.7 mile NE of Cakora Point. Freeburn Rock,

with a depth of 2.7m and over which the sea breaks, lies about

6 miles NE of Cakora Point.

5.22 The Clarence River (29°25'S., 153°23'E.) is entered between Clarence Head Breakwater (29°29'S., 153°22'E.) and

North Spit Breakwater. The river is 240 miles long and is navigable by vessels of 4m draft to the town of Grafton, 42 miles

above the entrance. Only light-draft vessels can proceed to

Copmanhurst, 26 miles farther upriver.

5.22 Tides—Currents.—The average rate of the tidal currents at

the river entrance is from 3 to 5 knots, but after heavy rains

they may attain a rate of 5 to 8 knots. For several days after

freshets, the ebb current is of 9 hours duration, and there is no

perceptible flood above Grafton. Slack water is usually 2 hours

after HW and 2 hours 30 minutes after LW.

5.22 Depths—Limitations.—The bar, which lies between the

breakwaters, is subject to frequent changes, and local knowledge is necessary for crossing it. The depth over the bar is 2.9m

at LW. The river is buoyed and beaconed.

5.22 The largest vessel to have entered the port was 3,484 grt with

a draft of 5m. 

5.22 Several towns along the river offer berthage. The most important berth is at Goodwood Island (29°24'S., 153°19'E.),

can will accommodate timber-loading vessels of up to 5.1m

Courtesy of Debra Fisher

Clarence River
Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 117

Pub. 127

draft.

5.22 Aspect.—Mount Doubleduke (29°17.4'S., 153°11.2'E.) and

Clarence Peak (29°34'S., 153°15'E.) are useful landmarks for

approaching the river entrance. The entrance itself is easily distinguished from seaward.

5.22 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory, and the pilot station on

Yamba Head may be contacted via VHF or visual signals. No

special watch is kept, but signals will be answered if seen. The

pilot boards about 0.7 mile E of the S breakwater head.

5.22 Regulations.—The port limits extend to 1 mile E of the seaward ends of the N breakwater and the S breakwater.

5.22 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be had, in a depth of 6m, off

several white piles at Iluka (29°25'S., 153°21'E.).

5.22 Directions.—Mount Doubleduke, steered for on a W bearing, is an excellent mark for making the river entrance from

seaward. The entrance and channel above the breakwaters require extensive local knowledge, therefore no directions are

given.

5.22 Between the entrance to the Clarence River and Evans Head,

18 miles NNE, the coast is formed by a low sandy beach,

backed by swampy ground, covered with grass and scrub.

Wooded Bluff, 3 miles N of the entrance to the Clarence River,

is reported to be a good radar target up to 14 miles. 

5.22 South Evans Reef (29°12'S., 153°26'E.) is comprised of a

number of shoal patches over which the sea sometimes breaks,

and lies about 5 miles SSW of Evans Head. North Evans Reef,

which dries, lies on a bank with depths of less than 11m, 2

miles SSE of Evans Head. Deep-draft vessels should not approach this part of the coast within 3 miles.

5.22 Evans Head (29°08'S., 153°28'E.) is a low, sandy point. Air

bombing and gunnery practice take place S and N of Evans

Head. A 33m patch lies 8.5 miles ENE of Evans Head. 

Evans Head to Danger Point

5.23 Between Evans Head and Danger Point, 58 miles N,

the coast is bold, and in parts has a rugged aspect from offshore, although much of the intervening coast is low and sandy.

Cape Byron, the E extremity of the Australian Continent, lies

midway along this stretch of coast.

5.23 The Evans River Entrance (29°07'S., 153°26'E.) lies 2

miles NW of Evans Head. The town of Evans Head stands on

the W entrance point to the river, with an airfield W of it. A

water tower stands 0.5 mile WNW, and water tanks 1 mile NW,

respectively, of the same point. A road bridge, with a vertical

clearance of 3m, spans the river, 0.7 mile above the entrance.

Breakwaters extend from each side of the entrance to the river.

Lights are shown from the head of both breakwaters. The channel within the entrance is marked by lighted beacons. No attempt should be made to enter the river at night without local

knowledge.

5.23 From the entrance to the Evans River, a barren, sandy, and

swampy coast, covered with low scrub and a few trees, extends

17 miles NNE to the entrance to the Richmond River. This river, for 12 miles SSW from its entrance, flows nearly parallel

with the coast, and is separated from the sea by a low strip of

land, 1 to 2 miles wide. Two conspicuous gray tanks stand 4

miles NW of the Evans River entrance.

5.24 South Riordan Shoal (29°00'S., 153°30'E.), with a

depth of 10.4m, lies 1.5 miles offshore, midway between Evans

Head and the Richmond River entrance. North Riordan Shoal,

with a depth of 9.1m, lies 2.5 miles NNE of South Riordan

Shoal.

5.24 The Richmond River is approximately 120 miles long and

navigable by small vessels to the town of Lismore, 70 miles

above the entrance. Several towns and villages are situated on

the river bank. The river is entered between two breakwaters

which show lights at their heads. 

5.24 Ballina Head, on the N side of the entrance, shows a light.

The pilot and signal station stands close to the light. A continuous watch is not kept: night watch is not maintained, but visual

signals will be answered if observed.

5.24 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents at the river entrance attain a rate of 3 to 3.5 knots, decreasing to the head of tidal influence, approximately 35 miles upriver. The flood current sets

into the river round the N breakwater in a S direction; the ebb

current sets out along the channel and round the N breakwater

in a NE direction.

5.24 Depths—Limitations.—All dangers E of the entrance are

contained within a distance of 0.5 mile offshore. Depths over

the sandy bar across the entrance are subject to change. In

1988, the minimum depth reported on the leading line over the

bar was reported to be 2.5m. The bar is sounded occasionally

and local authorities should be contacted for the latest information before planning a voyage here. Numerous shoals and sand

flats lie in the river.

5.24 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Vessels should pay strict

attention to the signals displayed at the signal station. Pilots

board 0.7 mile SE of Ballina Head.

5.25 Ballina (28°51'S., 153°34'E.) lies at the entrance to

the Richmond River and comprises Ballina and West Ballina,

on the N bank of the river, and South Ballina, on the S bank. It

is a first port of entry for vessels arriving from New Guinea,

New Zealand, and the Pacific Islands. 

5.25 Depths—Limitations.—There are several berths at Ballina.

Courtesy of Colin Cooksex

Ballina
118 Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 

Pub. 127

The Commercial Boat Harbor has a depth of 2.7m.

5.25 It is advised that vessels use caution, as the position of the

buoys can not be relied on due to tidal currents and other circumstances which may move them.

5.25 Regulations.—The port limits are defined by a line drawn

between the breakwater heads.

5.25 The quarantine line for the port is drawn N-S from the W

entrance point of the boat harbor at Ballina.

5.25 Vessels must not exceed a speed of 8 knots in the approaches

to, or in the channel of the Richmond River. Vessels should

sound a warning blast and reduce speed to slow when passing

the drydock. Overhead cables cross the river and care must be

taken when navigating near them.

Coastal Features

5.26 Between Ballina Head and Cape Byron, about 14

miles to the N, the coast trends about 1.5 miles ENE to Sand

Point, off which a reef extends about 0.4 mile E.

5.26 From Sand Point, the coast trends about 2.2 miles N to Lennox Head. A rock, with a least depth of 5m, lies about 0.2 mile

offshore E of Lennox Head. From Lennox Head the coast is

lower and trends about 10 miles N to Cape Byron. Broken

Head, with an above-water rock, known as Cocked Hat Rock,

lying close N, is located about 6 miles N of Lennox Head.

5.26 Cape Byron (28°38'S., 153°38'E.), is a steep head which appears as white cliffs from the E. The cape extends about 2

miles ENE from the foot of coastal hills, and in the approaches

from S or N it looks like an island. The cape has been reported

to give good radar returns up to 14 miles. Foul ground extends

0.1 mile off its E side and a reef extends about 0.3 mile N from

the NE end of the cape. A strong rip tide may be encountered

off the cape.

5.26 Cape Byron Light is shown from a tower situated on the E

side of the cape. A conspicuous water tank stands 1.2 miles

SW of the cape, and a tower stands 4.5 miles WSW of the

cape. Juan and Julia Rocks lie 1.5 miles NNW of Cape Byron.

A 10.4m patch lies about 0.2 mile N of the rocks.

5.26 Byron Bay (28°38'S., 153°37'E.) lies in a bight which indents the N side of Cape Byron. The bay is a first port of entry

for vessels from New Zealand only. A canning factory is situated at the W end of town, with two beacons standing close together E, and the remains of a demolished jetty 0.2 mile NW of

it, respectively. The flood tidal current sets E round the bay at a

rate of 0.5 knot. 

5.26 Anchorage may be obtained in Byron Bay, in a depth of

13m, midway between the demolished jetty and Juan and Julia

Rocks, but there is considerable swell.

5.26 From Cape Byron to the entrance to the Brunswick River,

7.5 miles NW, the coast is formed by a sandy beach, backed by

low grass covered hills.

5.26 Brunswick River Entrance (28°32'S., 153°32'E.) lies between two breakwaters on the heads of which are lights. A

rock, which dries 1.2m, lies close off the entrance. Inside the

entrance the river divides into three arms. Training walls extend on either side of the breakwaters. A boat harbor is situated

on the S side of middle arm, on the E entrance point of which

there is a light.

5.26 The town of Brunswick Heads is situated at the junction of

south and middle arms of the river. The village of New Brighton is situated on north arm, 1.7 miles N of the entrance to the

river.

5.26 Hastings Point (Cudgera Headland), with foul ground extending about 0.5 mile E from it, lies about 11 miles N of the

Brunswick River entrance. Mount Warning, 1,155m high and

about 17 miles W of Hastings Point, is a prominent peak visible for about 100 miles. A conspicuous tower stands about 4

miles WNW of Hastings Point. An 8.2m patch lies about 2.5

miles S of the point.

5.27 Fingal Head (28°12'S., 153°34'E.), on which a light

is shown, lies about 10 miles N of Hastings Point. Fingal Head

is reported to give good radar returns up to 18 miles. A white

28-story building stands about 1 mile W of Fingal Head. A

4.2m reef lies between the head and Cook Island, located about

0.5 mile to the ENE. Cook Island is also a good radar target up

to 15 miles. 

5.27 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

13m, off the NW side of Cook Island.

5.27 Danger Reefs, three rocky patches over which the sea

breaks, lie up to about 3.5 miles E of Fingal Head. Inner Reef,

with a depth of 2.7m and Outer Reef, with a depth of 5.2m, lie

about 1.5 miles and 3.5 miles E of Fingal Head. South Reef,

with a depth of 4.9m, lies about 2 miles ESE of the head. There

are several patches of shoals having depths of 9.1 to 13m between these reefs. Small craft with local knowledge use the

passage between Cook Island and Inner Reef.

5.27 Danger Point (28°09'S., 153°33'E.) lies about 2.2 miles

NNW of Fingal Head, on the N side of the mouth of the Tweed

River. A light is shown from the N side of the point. The point

is reported to give good radar returns up to 22 miles.

5.27 The Tweed River is entered between the NW end of a narrow

sandy peninsula, which extends 2 miles NNW from Fingal

Head, and Danger Point, 0.2 mile to the N. When waiting for

the tide to enter the river, good anchorage may be obtained, in a

depth of 15m, 1.2 miles NW of Danger Point. Two breakwaters, with a light shown from each head, form the entrance to

the Tweed River. Within the entrance, the banks are fronted by

training walls. A lighted beacon is shown from a crosswall, 0.5

mile within the entrance.

5.27 The town of Coolangatta is situated on the N side of the river

entrance, with the town of Tweed Heads SW of it. There are

several towns on the river banks above the entrance, but owing

to shoaling, only small vessels drawing 1.4m can reach the

town of Murwillumbah, 15 miles upriver.

5.27 A signal station stands on Danger Point; communications

can be made by visual signals. At night, a red light indicates

that the bar is dangerous and a green light indicates the bar is

safe.

5.27 Depths—Limitations.—The bar, which is subject to frequent change, is exposed to the ocean swell, and can be very

dangerous on the ebb tide, and in heavy weather. It should only

be crossed on the flood tide, and then only by vessels with local

knowledge, or advice from the District Officer. The bar, which

has a depth of 2.9m, is sounded regularly. Local authorities

should be consulted for the latest information before planning a

voyage here. 

5.27 After heavy weather, a narrow spit, know locally as Lettitia

Spit, extends N from the S shore, and reduces depth and the

width of the channel, which scours out again. When the chan-
Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 119

Pub. 127

nel is near Danger Point, the bar can only be crossed in a calm

sea.

5.27 Pilotage.—No pilotage is available. No attempt should be

made to enter the river without consulting the District Officer

who, while taking no responsibility, will assist and advise as

far as possible.

Danger Point to Moreton Island

5.28 The coast from Danger Point to Point Lookout, 44

miles N, may in good weather, be approached to a distance of 1

mile, except off the entrance to the Nerang River, 14.5 miles

NNW of Danger Point, where a 6.4m patch, was reported to lie

1 mile ENE of the river entrance. The depths off the entrance to

the river are subject to frequent changes. Jumpin Pin, between

South Stradbroke Island and North Stradbroke Island, 12 miles

N of the Nerang River entrance, has shoal depths extending 1

mile offshore, and is subject to frequent change.

5.28 Burleigh Heads (28°05'S., 153°27'E.), 6.5 miles NW of

Danger Point, is a prominent, bold, rocky headland that is bare

of trees on its seaward side. The towns of Palm Beach and Tugun front the coast for 4 miles SSE of the headland. A creek

enters the sea on the S side of Burleigh Heads.

5.28 The Nerang River enters the sea between Nerang Head on

the S side, and Porpoise Head (27°57'S., 153°26'E.), the S end

of South Stradbroke Island, on the N side. The ebb current sets

strongly out of the entrance, which is very shallow. Coastal

steamers call at Southport, 2 miles inside the river entrance.

There is a jetty at Southport with a depth of 3m alongside its

head.

5.28 From the Nerang River entrance to Point Lookout, the E

coasts of South Stradbroke Island and North Stradbroke Island,

and the N coast of the latter island between Point Lookout and

Amity Point, 6 miles WNW, are formed by sandy beaches.

Broadwater, separating the S island from the mainland, is filled

with low islands and sand banks, and is only navigable by

small craft.

5.28 Point Lookout (27°26'S., 153°33'E.) shows a light and

forms the NE extremity of North Stradbroke Island. Boat

Rock, 1.3m high, lies on the outer end of a reef, which extends

1 mile NE from Point Lookout. The point has been reported to

give good radar returns up to 15 miles. Shag Rock, 3m high,

lies 1 mile NW of the N end of Point Lookout.

5.28 Flat Rock, 3m high, with a rock awash off its S side, lies 2.5

miles N of Point Lookout. A 7.3m patch, over which the sea

breaks heavily during SE gales, lies about 0.2 mile NNE of Flat

Rock, and a 19.8m patch lies about 1.2 miles NE of the rock.

The passage between Boat Rock and Flat Rocks should not be

used without local knowledge.

5.29 Amity Point (27°24'S., 153°27'E.) forms the NW extremity of North Stradbroke Island. There is a jetty 0.3 mile S

of the point. 

5.29 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained off the coast between Amity Point and Point Lookout, in good weather or offshore winds, in depths of 11 to 15m, 0.5 to 1 mile WNW of

Shag Rock.

5.29 South Passage leads into Moreton Bay through the narrow

entrance between Amity Point and Reeders Point, the S extremity of Moreton Island. The entrance is considered dangerous as the bar and banks on either side are exposed to the sea.

The bar is subject to such frequent change in position and

depth that reliable directions cannot be given. Only light-draft

vessels with local knowledge use this passage. 

5.29 Tidal currents through the entrance to South Passage attain a

rate of 3 to 4.5 knots. Farther W of Amity Point the rate is reduced to 2 to 3 knots. South Passage merges with Rous Channel in Moreton Bay.

5.29 Rainbow Channel (27°27'S., 153°25'E.) lies between Amity Bank and a drying mud flat lying up to about 1 mile off the

W side of North Stradbroke Island. The channel is marked by

beacons and buoys. The channel trends about 7 miles S from

Amity Point to Peel Island, an islet about 7 miles SSW of Amity Point.

5.29 Moreton Island (27°12'S., 153°24'E.) extends about 20

miles N from South Passage. It is separated from the mainland,

about 15 miles W, by Moreton Bay. The S part of the island is

low and sandy, but it becomes quite hilly to the N. Mount Tempest, 310m high, lies near the middle of the island. Cape Moreton, the NE extremity of the island, shows a light. North Point

lies about 0.7 mile from Cape Moreton and shows a light. Cape

Moreton has been reported to give good radar returns up to 23

miles.

5.29 Henderson Rock, with a depth of 9.1m, lies about 6 miles

SSE of Cape Moreton. An 18.3m rocky patch lies 3.5 miles

SSE of the same cape. Roberts Shoal, with a depth of 12.2m,

lies 1 mile E of the cape. Hutchison Shoal, with a depth of

6.7m, lies 5.2 miles N of Cape Moreton.

5.29 Between Roberts Shoal and Hutchison Shoal is Brennan

Shoal, with a depth of 8.5m; Smith Rock, with a depth of 3m,

and which breaks occasionally; and Flinders Reef, with an

above-water rock on its NE end that dries 1 to 2m. The above

shoals and rocks are covered by the red sector of North Point

Light.

5.30 Moreton Bay (27°20'S., 153°15'E.), through which

the approach channel to Brisbane passes, is a large body of water lying between North Stradbroke Island and Moreton Island

and the mainland to the W. The bay is about 38 miles long from

N to S and from 9 to 17 miles wide, narrowing toward its S

end, where it is encumbered with numerous islets.

5.30 The main approach is from the N through the banks and

shoals encumbering the entrance, the most important channel

being Northwest Channel. Small vessels of light draft may enter from the E through South Passage. Local knowledge is required for this body of water.

5.30 An area through which surface navigation is permitted, but

anchorage is prohibited, exists in Moreton Bay; it lies centered

in position 27°14'36"S, 153°21'06"E, and is 1 mile in radius.

Caution should be exercised when transiting this area.

5.30 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents set obliquely across

the channels, necessitating great caution. The general set of the

flood current is S, and the ebb N, but in places the directions

are varied by the shoals.

5.30 The strength of the tidal current is much less near the middle

of the bay than along either shore. The tidal currents S of the

shoals encumbering the N entrance are weak until S of Mud

Island (27°20'S., 153°15'E.), located 15 miles S of Skirmish

Point (27°05'S., 153°12'E.).

5.30 On the W shore abreast Skirmish Point, the flood current at-
120 Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 

Pub. 127

tains a rate of 3.5 knots at springs. On the E shore abreast Cowan Point, the rate is 2.5 to 3.5 knots, causing a short sea, which

is dangerous to small craft during SW winds.

5.30 The flood current is felt as far S as Russell Island, which lies

off the W side of the S end of North Stradbroke Island. Abreast

the banks, which lie off the W side of Amity Point, the ebb sets

strongly NE through South Passage. The vicinity of shallow

water throughout Moreton Bay is often indicated by tide rips.

5.30 Depths—Limitations.—The 20m curve lies across the N

approach to the Port of Brisbane, from Flinders Reef to a position about 1 mile E of Caloundra Head. Shoals and banks, with

depths of less than 2m, extend from the NW end of Moreton Island to within about 1 mile of the coast about 1.5 miles S of

Caloundra Head.

5.30 Several channels lead into Moreton Bay through the abovementioned shoals and other shoals and banks S. The fairways

through the bay are subject to frequent change and the buoyage

marking these channels is altered accordingly. 

5.30 North West Channel, which is the main approach from seaward, has a maximum depth of 14.7m and extends about 14

miles to a point off the WSW extent of Spitfire Banks

(27°01'S., 153°16'E.). Spitfire Channel, with a depth of 14.7m,

leads from North West Channel to the NE terminus of Main

Channel. 

5.30 Main Channel offers deep water for most of its length, but

has a controlling depth of 9.7m in its SW leg. 

5.30 Deep-draft vessels normally use East Channel, entered

abreast of Cowan Cowan Point (27°08'S., 153°22'E.). East

Channel, leading between Middle Banks and Ridge Shoal, has

a dredged depth of 14.7m. North East Channel, which is entered about 6 miles NW of North Point Light (27°02'S.,

153°27'E.), has a depth of 5.5m and is used by local traffic

only. 

5.30 Underkeel clearances are required (2001) in the approach

channels, as follows:

1. North West Channel:

a. Vessels with a beam of less than 35m—1.6m.

b. Vessels with a beam of 35m and over—1.8m.

2. Spitfire Channel—1.2m.

3. East Channel—1.2m.

4. Brisbane Channel Entrance to Swing Basin—1.0m.

5. The Brisbane River above Swing Basin—0.6 to 0.9m.

5.30 A spoil ground, with a radius of 0.7 mile, is centered about

1.4 miles, bearing 139° from Lighted Beacon No. 3.

5.30 A spoil ground, with a radius of 0.7 mile, is centered a little

over 2 miles ENE of the water tower charted in position

27°04'18"S, 153°12'12"E.

5.30 A spoil ground, with a radius of 0.7 mile, is situated 8.5

miles, bearing 167° from the tower charted in position

26°48'00"S, 153°08'24"E. A spoil ground, with a radius of 0.7

mile, is centered about 5.5 miles, bearing 172° from the same

tower. A spoil ground, with a radius of 1 mile, is centered

about 4.8 miles, bearing 121° from the same tower.

5.30 Aspect.—The N approach to Moreton Bay can be easily

identified by Cape Moreton and Caloundra Head, both of

which are prominent. Mount Tempest is a conspicuous landmark on Moreton Island.

5.30 The Glass House Mountains are three adjacent peaks rising

abruptly from the coastal plain. 

5.31 Mount Beerwah (26°54'S., 152°53'E.), 553m high,

lies about 15 miles WSW of Caloundra Head and is visible for

about 50 miles. Coonowrin, 390m high and cylindrical in

shape, lies about 1.2 miles E of Mount Beerwah. Tibrogargan,

350m high, lies about 2.5 miles SE of Coonowrin.

5.31 Cowan Cowan Point (27°08'S., 153°22'E.), on the W side

of Moreton Island, shows a light and is easily identified. Tangalooma Point, S of Cowan Cowan Point, is prominent and

readily made out by Ship Patch, a sandy patch resembling a

vessel under sail.

5.31 Mud Island and the outer channel entrance lighted beacons,

about 2 miles WNW, are prominent marks for the Brisbane

River entrance channel. Several towns lie on the W side of the

central part of the bay. A conspicuous water tower stands at

Margate, about 7 miles NW of the outer beacons of the entrance channel. Cleveland Point Light, about 10 miles S of

Mud Island, is easily recognized by a pier extending N from

the point. Marine farms have been established just W of Mud

Island.

Brisbane (27°28'S., 153°04'E.)

World Port Index No. 53490

5.32 The port of Brisbane is situated at the entrance to the

Brisbane River, near the head of Moreton Bay. The port offers

facilities for the handling of container, bulk petroleum, and

bulk solid commodities, as well as general cargo.

Tides—Currents

5.32 The tidal rise in the Brisbane River is 2.1m. The tidal current

attains at springs a rate of about 2 knots in the upper reaches of

the river, and of about 3 knots below Hamilton Reach Cutting.

Strong tidal effects have been reported by vessels alongside

berths.

5.32 At South Brisbane Drydock, opposite Gardens Point, the

flood current runs for 5 hours and the ebb for 7 hours 30 minutes. Slack water occurs from 12 to 30 minutes after HW and

LW. Tidal influence is felt as far upstream as Ipswich. Freshets

in the river may make navigation dangerous.

Depths—Limitations

5.32 Brisbane Entrance Channel is entered from Brisbane Roads,

about 9 miles NE of Luggage Point. The channel is dredged to

a depth of 14m as far as the S edge of the turning basin S of

Luggage Point, then 9.1m to the ANL Wharf (27°27'S.,

153°03'E.), and 8m from the ANL Wharf to the Mercantile

Wharf, about 0.3 mile SE. It has been reported that all berths

upstream of the Mercantile Wharf have been closed to commercial traffic.

5.32 An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 48m,

spans the channel just S of the ANLWharf.

 Port of Brisbane Corporation

http://www.portbris.com.au
Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 121

Pub. 127

5.32 Submarine cables and pipelines, as well as ferry traffic, cross

the channel at various places along the river and are best seen

on the chart.

Pilotage

5.32 Pilotage for Brisbane and Moreton Bay is compulsory for

foreign vessels over 35m in length. Vessels should request a pilot via their agent at least 24 hours in advance, confirming 8

hours before arrival. Vessels should radio Brisbane Harbor on

VHF channel 12 to confirm ETA at pilot boarding ground at

least 2 hours prior to arrival. Pilotage is also available for the

Inner Route or other Queensland coastal ports from the Brisbane Pilotage Service by prior arrangement.

5.32 The pilot boarding ground is situated about 3 miles SE of

Point Cartwright, near Caloundra Head, but a vessel will be

met outside the boarding ground if the situation requires it.

5.32 Visual signals may be exchanged with the signal station on

Caloundra Head, or the station may be contacted via VHF.

Port of Brisbane Corporation

Brisbane—Fisherman Island

 Brisbane Marine Pilots

http://www.brisbanepilots.com.au

Brisbane—Berthing Facilities

Berth Length Depth 

alongside Remarks

Fisherman Island Terminal

Berth No. 1 200m 13.5m General cargo, ro-ro, and containers.

Berth No. 2 200m 12.9m General cargo, ro-ro, and containers.

Berth No. 3 300m 13.8m General cargo, ro-ro, and containers.

Berth No. 4 300m 13.1m General cargo, ro-ro, and containers.

Berth No. 5 250m 13.0m General cargo, ro-ro, and containers.

Berth No. 6 150m 13.1m General cargo, ro-ro, and containers.

Berth No. 7 210m 12.9m Containers.

Berth No. 8 — 12.7m

Berth No. 9 Under construction (2005).

Caltex Crude Berth 260m 14.3m Petroleum products.

Grain Wharf 240m 13.2m

Coal Wharf 240m 13.2m

P. and O. Terminal (Hamilton Terminal)

Cold Stores — 4.5m To be developed.

Berth No. 1 140m 10.4m General cargo, vehicles, and containers.

Berth No. 2 240m 9.8m General cargo, bulk, vehicles, and containers.

Berth No. 3 170m 10.4m Bulk liquid, general cargo, and vehicles.

Berth No. 4 210m 10.4m Bulk liquid, dry bulk, and general cargo.

Patrick Terminal (Maritime Terminal)

Berth No. 1 170m 9.1m Bulk liquids and vehicles.

Berth No. 2 255m 9.9m General cargo, ro-ro, vehicles, and 

containers.
122 Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 

Pub. 127

Regulations

5.32 The quarantine anchorage is situated just E of the Brisbane

River channel entrance. 

5.32 Vessels with explosives must not proceed SW of a line joining Woody Point, Outer Bar Entrance lighted beacons, St. Helena Island, and the N point of North Stradbroke Island.

5.32 Commercial explosives must not be brought into the Brisbane River if the quantity on board exceeds 9kg.

5.32 A Vessel Traffic Service operates in Brisbane. 

5.32 Inbound vessels should report to Brisbane Port Control on

VHF channel 12, as follows: 

1. When the pilot is onboard, give the vessel’s draft, the

ETAs at Fairway Light and Entrance Light, and the channels

used.

2. If at anchor,give anchor aweigh time.

3. When passing Fairway Light.

4. Not less than 30 minutes before entering Bar Cutting.

5. When passing Entrance Light, notify river traffic of

ETA at berth (name), and if berthing head-up, head-down, or

swinging (name basin).

6. After vessel alongside, give time of first line and time

all fast.

7. Vessels anchoring in Brisbane Roads are required to

give anchored position as a bearing and distance from Entrance Light.

5.32 Outbound vessels should report to Brisbane Port Control, as

follows:

1. One hour before departure for a radio check and ETD.

2. Five minutes prior to weighing anchor or departing

berth, with details of intented movement and pilot’s name..

3. When letting go or heaving anchor, give the time of

last line or anchor aweigh. Also give the ETA to Entrance

Light or next berth.

4. When passing Entrance Light, give ETA to pilot

boarding ground and/or Fairway Light, the channels to be

used, and next port.

5.32 Vessels over 35m long should not enter the port of Brisbane

without permission from the harbormaster

5.32 No tanker containing a cargo with a flash point below 66°C

may move in the river at night, except by express permission of

the harbormaster’s office. A tanker may not pass any other vessel in the dredged cuttings upriver of Luggage Point. Vessels,

except loaded crude oil tankers over 213m in length, may only

pass similar vessels in the 230m wide part of Inner Bar Cutting. Loaded crude oil tankers will be given a clear river at all

times. Only vessels under 153m long may be passed seaward

of Inner Bar Cutting, but those under 107m in length may pass

Berth No. 3 260m 10.2m General cargo, ro-ro, vehicles, and 

containers.

Other Facilities in Brisbane

BP Luggage Point 320m 14.3m Crude oil discharge. Maximum vessel 

length of 280m.

Caltex Products Wharf 180m 9.8m Petroleum products.

QCL Wharf 220m 9.4m Gypsum and bulk clinkers.

BP Products Wharf 240m 10.6m Petroleum products.

Shell Wharf 220m 11.0m Petroleum products.

Pacific Terminals 180m 9.1m Bulk tallow and bulk liquids.

INCITEC North Wharf 122m 9.7m Dry bulk.

INCITEC South Wharf 150m 10.4m Dry bulk and bulk liquids.

Pinkenba 1 256m 10.7m Grain, dry bulk, and general cargo.

Pinkenba 2 — 10.5m

Sugar Terminal 270m 10.1m

Mobil Products Wharf 190m 8.3m Petroleum products. (Wharf closed)

ANL Newstead — 7.4m Wharf closed.

Cairncross Breating — 7.1m

Cairncross Fitting Out 300m 9.1m Berths 1 and 2—Maximum size of 85,000 

dwt. 

Cairncross Fitting Out 4.9m Berth 3—Inboard W end of pier.

Note.—All berths require an underkeel clearance of 0.3m.

Brisbane—Berthing Facilities

Berth Length Depth 

alongside Remarks
Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 123

Pub. 127

in any part of the river cuttings.

5.32 There is a speed limit of 10 knots in the Brisbane River between the entrance and Luggage Point and 8 knots thereafter. A

minimum speed consistent with safe navigation should be used

when passing wharves, moored vessels, dredges or barges, and

in particular when passing the harbor oil fuel lighter, whether

moored or under tow.

5.32 As the slightest surging of a container vessel during cargo

operations could cause considerable damage, vessels should

approach at a minimum speed possible when the container

boom is in the lowered position, and, if possible stop engines

when passing. 

Signals

5.32 The Pilotage Control Signal and Radar Station, Caloundra

Head and Harbor Control Radar Station, Whyte Island, keep a

continuous watch and can be contacted on VHF channel 16.

5.32 Weather signals are displayed from the customhouse flagstaff on the W side of Town Reach. These signals are displayed

on weekdays from 1030 to 1630, and on Saturdays from 1030

to 1200.

5.32 Channel signals.—A deep-draft vessel, equipped with a radiotelephone and intending to use the dredged Northwest

Channel, Spitfire Channel, and East Channel should advise its

intention by radio.

5.32 Vessels, not equipped with radiotelephone, should fly the International Code Flags HI and in addition the Morse Signal HI

by flashing light directed towards approaching vessels (day or

night).

5.32 At night, a vessel of more than 40m in length, shall exhibit

two green lights, disposed vertically, when navigating in the

Brisbane River.

Anchorage

5.32 Anchorage may be obtained in any part of Moreton Bay

among the shoals, the bottom being sand, fine silt, and mud.

Caution is necessary as a heavy sea, caused by N to NE winds,

combined with the strong tidal currents experienced in parts of

the bay, can cause vessels much difficulty.

5.32 In Brisbane Road, anchorage, in 8.4 to 9.1m, mud, may be

anywhere up to about 4.5 miles WNW of Mud Island or N of a

line from the N end of that island to Woody Point. The exception is the prohibited anchorage area located NNW of Mud Island, which can best be seen on the chart. The quarantine

anchorage, situated 1 mile E of West Entrance Lighted Beacon

No. 1, has a least depth of 5.7m.

5.32 Yule Road (27°05'S., 153°20'E.) affords temporary anchorage in good weather with Cowan Cowan Light bearing 161°,

distance 3.7 miles. Small vessels may obtain anchorage in Tangaloona Roads, in depths of 11 to 16m. Some protection from

W gales is afforded by Sholl Bank, and in SE gales is the best

anchorage on the W coast of Moreton Island, where little current is felt.

5.32 Vessels may anchor, in 9.1 to 11m, with Cleveland Point

(27°31'S., 153°17'E.) bearing 242°, distance 1 mile, and the S

end of Peel Island bearing 110°. Anchorage, in not less than

5.5m, good holding ground, may be found about 0.7 mile NE

of Cleveland Point.

Directions

5.32 The channels through Moreton Bay, although well-marked,

require extensive local knowledge. Strong cross-channel sets

are experienced in many portions of the bay and must be

guarded against.

Caloundra to Sandy Cape

5.33 Raper Shoal (26°46'S., 153°10'E.), over which the

sea breaks, is a 3.6m shoal lying about 1 mile offshore and 3

miles N of Caloundra Head. Point Cartwright, from which a

light is shown, lies about 7.5 miles N of Caloundra Head. A

conspicuous water tower stands close E of Point Cartwright

Light.

5.33 Mooloolaba Harbor (26°41'S., 153°08'E.), at the entrance

to the Mooloolaba River, is entered between two breakwaters

and lies 0.3 mile W of Point Cartwright. There is a depth of

2.7m over the bar outside the entrance. Range lights mark the

center of the channel. 

5.33 A channel, dredged to 3m, leads to a mooring basin dredged

to a least depth of 2.1m, on the N side of the harbor close inside the entrance. Shoaling has been reported (1996) in this entrance. The channel is marked by lighted beacons. The W limit

of the channel is marked by a beacon. 

5.33 A prohibited anchorage extends 0.6 mile E from the coast 3

miles S of Point Cartwright.

5.33 The Maroochy River (26°39'S., 153°05'E.), which enters

the sea 3 miles NNW of Point Cartwright, can only be used by

small boats in good weather and local knowledge. The bar usually has a depth of 0.8m, but is subject to change.

5.33 Gneering Shoal, with a depth of 6.7m, lies 2.5 miles NNE of

Point Cartwright. The sea breaks over the shoal in bad weather.

A reef, with a depth of 10m, lies 3 miles NE of Point Cartwright. A rocky shoal, with a depth of 12.8m, lies 1 mile ESE

of Leach Shoal. A lighted buoy is moored about 0.2 mile ENE

of Leach Shoal. Broken water is reported to have been seen SE

of the rocky shoal and it is advisable to give this part of the

coast a wide berth. The sea breaks over the above shoals in bad

weather.

5.33 Arkwright Shoal (26°33'S., 53°07'E.), with a depth of 7.6m,

rock, lies on the outer end of a spit, which extends 1.2 miles E

from Arkwright Point. Hancock Shoal, with a depth of 9.1m,

lies 2.5 miles NNE of Arkwright Point.

5.33 Noosa Head, bold and rocky, is the N end of a ridge of sand

hills, partially covered with scrub, which runs parallel with the

coast and lies 9.5 miles N of Arkwright Point.

5.33 Laguna Bay, on the W side of Noosa Head, affords anchorage, close in, sheltered from the S and SE gales, in depths of 11

to 13m, 1.5 miles WNW of Noosa Head. This anchorage is not

recommended should the wind shift to the E. 

5.34 The Noosa River (26°25'S., 153°04'E.), which discharges into the SW part of Laguna Bay, about 2 miles W of

Noosa Head, has depths of 0.6 to 1.2m over a shifting entrance

bar. The channel is marked by buoys and beacons and, when

practicable, lights are shown which lead to the entrance. The

river connects with a series of shallow lagoons paralleling the

coast close inland for about 11 miles to the N.

5.34 Double Island Point (25°56'S., 153°12'E.) lies 28 miles N
124 Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 

Pub. 127

of Noosa Head. The point shows a light and has been reported

to give good radar returns up to 17 miles. There is a signal station at the lighthouse. A red pendant displayed at the lighthouse indicates a storm warning message has been received

and will be signaled on request. 

5.34 Wolf Rock, awash, lies 1.2 miles NNE of Double Island

Point, with a 4m rocky shoal between it and Double Island

Point.

5.34 Wide Bay lies between Double Island Point and Inskip

Point (25°49'S., 153°04'E.), 10.5 miles to the NW. The shore

of the bay is formed by a sandy beach, backed by sand hills.

The bay affords anchorage, as long as the wind is S of ESE, in

a depth of 11m, 2.5 miles W of Double Island Point.

5.34 Fraser Island (Great Sandy Island) (25°11'S., 153°10'E.),

which lies with Hook Point, its S extremity, 1.2 miles ENE of

Inskip Point, is formed by a range of barren sand hills and cliffs

with stunted trees. The E coast is an unbroken sandy beach,

which extends 50 miles to Indian Head. Boomerang Hill rises

19 miles SSW of Indian Head and is one of the few hills easily

identified. A conspicuous radio tower stands 6 miles NE of

Boomerang Hill.

5.34 Indian Head (25°00'S., 153°22'E.), the E extremity of Fraser Island, is a steep bluff promontory and when seen from N or

S appears as an island. Waddy Point, similar to Indian Head,

lies 3 miles N of the head. A conspicuous radio tower stands 2

miles W of Waddy Point.

5.34 Between Waddy Point and Sandy Cape, 17 miles NNW, the

coast continues as a sandy beach, off which anchorage may be

obtained in offshore winds.

5.35 Sandy Cape (24°42'S., 153°16'E.), the N extremity of

Fraser Island, is a prominent headland and an excellent landmark when proceeding by the Inner Route to Torres Strait. The

cape has been reported to give good radar returns up to 14

miles. Sandy Cape Light is situated 3.5 miles SW of the Cape.

There is a signal station at the light, equipped with a radiotelephone. A racon transmits from the light. A red pendant displayed at the light indicates a storm warning message has been

received and will be signaled on request.

5.35 The site of a historic wreck, protected from unauthorized interference, lies 6 miles S of Sandy Cape.

5.35 Breaksea Spit, which dries in places and is formed of dead

coral and sand, over which the sea breaks heavily, extends 19

miles NNW from Sandy Cape. Vessels should exercise caution

when approaching Breaksea Spit, as both the ebb and flood

currents set strongly across it. In daylight, during good weather, the broken water on the edge of the spit can generally be

seen at a distance of 5 to 6 miles.

5.35 Sandy Cape Shoal (24°35'S., 153°20'E.), with a depth of

2.7m, and over which the sea breaks in bad weather, lies 8

miles NE of Sandy Cape. Patches, with depths of 13.1m and

19.2m, lie 1.5 miles S and 4.5 miles SSE, respectively, of

Sandy Cape Shoal. Except in cases of necessity, vessels should

pass E of Sandy Cape Shoal, and at night, should keep in

depths of more than 65m.

5.35 Long Shoal, with a depth of 4m, and over which the sea

breaks in bad weather, lies 13 miles NNW of Sandy Cape.

Depths of less than 11m extend 1.2 miles N and 5 miles SW,

respectively, of Long Shoal.

5.35 Porpoise Shoal (24°38'S., 153°09'E.), with a depth of 5.5m,

lies 7.5 miles NW of Sandy Cape. Four patches, with depths of

11 to 16.5m, lie between 4 and 8 miles WNW of Porpoise

Shoal.

Great Sandy Strait

5.36 Great Sandy Strait (25°30'S., 152°59'E.) separates

Fraser Island from the mainland and is approximately 40 miles

long. From Wide Bay Harbor, which lies within the S entrance

of the strait, the channel leads N to the entrance of the Mary

River, and then N into Hervy Bay. Only those with local

knowledge can navigate the strait.

5.36 Pilotage.—If a pilot is required for Great Sandy Strait, notice should be given at the harbor office at the port of departure

at least 24 hours before sailing. The ETA and the ship’s draft

should be sent with the request for pilotage.

5.36 The quarantine anchorage for any part of the Port of Maryborough lies 1 mile N of the fairway entrance buoy.

5.37 South entrance to Great Sandy Strait.—The bar

across the entrance to Wide Bay Harbor, which leads into the S

part of the strait, can be seen by the discoloration of the water

or the sea breaking over it. The bar can only be crossed during

good weather, at or near HW, and by light-draft vessels with local knowledge.

5.37 There is a least charted depth of 4m over the bar in the channel entrance. The entrance between Hook Point and Inskip

Point has depths of 9.1 to 29m between steep-to shores, and inside the entrance there are depths of 7.5 to 21.9m. A light is

shown from a position about 0.7 mile N of Hook Point.

5.37 Depths—Limitations.—The channels through Great Sandy

Strait are marked by range beacons, buoys, and beacons, most

of which are lighted. The depths in the channels are subject to

frequent changes and the navigational aids are moved to meet

them. The least depth in the strait, through the banks between

South White Cliffs and Sheridan Flats 3 miles WSW, is normally from 0.6 to 1.4m. For the latest information regarding

the depths, contact the Port Officer, Brisbane, or the harbormaster, Maryborough; the Australian Notice to Mariners

should be obtained. 

5.37 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken, in 7.3 to 21.9m, in

the deep channel in Wide Bay Harbor. Good anchorage will be

found in 10 to 18.3m, about 0.2 mile off the SW side of Fraser

Island and about 1.5 miles NW of the W end of Inskip Point.

The latest available information should be sought from Tin Can

Bay Coast Guard.

Hervey Bay

5.38 Hervey Bay (24°55'S., 152°52'E.) is entered between

Sandy Cape and South Head, the S entrance point to the Burnett River, 47 miles W. During NW winds the bay offers little

shelter and as hazy visibility generally accompanies these

winds, those without local knowledge should proceed with

caution. If proceeding to Great Sandy Strait, keep in depths of

more than 13m until an accurate position is obtained. During

N, NE, and SE winds, good shelter is obtainable in Platypus

Bay on the E side of Hervey Bay.

5.38 Ferguson Spit, with depths of less than 11m, extends 3.5

miles NNW from Rooney Point (24°49'S., 153°07'E.). The
Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 125

Pub. 127

coastline in this area is low and sandy, backed by sand hills.

5.38 Platypus Bay (24°57'S., 153°09'E.) lies between Rooney

Point and Moon Point (Sandy Point), 25 miles SSW. The shore

is formed by a sandy beach, backed by wooded high land, with

several fresh water lagoons in its N part. 

5.38 The bay affords good anchorage, in depths of 13 to 24m,

sheltered from winds between SE and N, but there is a short

sea with inshore winds. Small vessels can anchor in Lagoon

Anchorage, 3 miles N of Triangle Cliff, in depths of 7 to 11m,

0.5 to 1.5 miles offshore.

5.38 The W shore of Hervey Bay between South Head, the Burnett River, and Vernon Point, 37 miles SE, is formed by sandy

beaches interspersed with rocky points. A conspicuous tower

stands 0.7 miles N of Elliot Heads (24°56'S., 152°30'E.). Burrum Point lies 15.5 miles SE of Elliot Heads, with the entrance

of the Burrum River 2 miles SSW of it, and appears as a thickly-wooded point from the vicinity of Great Sandy Strait Fairway Buoy.

5.38 The Burrum River (25°11'S., 152°35'E.), whose entrance is

easily recognized as it shows a well-defined opening in the

coast, is navigable by small vessels of 1.8m draft to Howard, a

mining town, 14 miles upriver. The bar and channel are marked

by beacons. Within the bar there is safe anchorage, in a depth

of 5m.

5.38 Vernon Point lies 11 miles SE of Burrum Point. The town of

Pialba is situated 3 miles SSE of Vernon Point. A radio mast,

marked by lights, stands midway between the point and the

town.

5.39 Port of Maryborough (25°53'S., 152°43'E.) (World

Port Index No. 53470) includes the oil port of Urangan

(25°18'S., 152°53'E.) and is accessible from sea via Hervey

Bay and Great Sand Strait.

The port is no longer used commercially except for fishing. 

5.39 Depths—Limitations.—Urangan Boat Harbor, marked by

lighted beacons, lies on the SE side of Dayman Point, but in

1990, depths in the entrance were reported to be uncertain and

the harbor should not be used without local knowledge.

5.39 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 35m

long. Vessels send ETA and pilotage request 24 hours in advance to Bundaberg. The pilot boards 2 miles NW of Fairway

Light in Hervey Bay.

Bundaberg (24°52'S., 152°21'E.)

World Port Index No. 53460

5.40 The Burnett River discharges into the sea on the N

side of South Head, which shows a light. The wharves of the

Port of Bundaberg are situated on the E bank of the river, 2

miles above the entrance, and at Fairymead, on the W bank, 3

miles farther upriver. The town of Bundaberg is situated 4

miles above Fairymead. Barubbra Island encumbers the mouth

of the river; the main entrance lies between the SE end of the

island and South Head. Training walls extend from the N bank

of the river to within about 0.2 mile of South Head.

5.40 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Bundaberg is 2.4m at

MHWS, and 1.9m at MHWN. The tidal currents have a rate of

2.5 to nearly 4 knots in the entrance, and are even stronger in

the entrance channel.

5.40 It is reported that a strong N set is frequently experienced

close seaward of South Head Light.

5.40 Depths—Limitations.—Sand flats, with depths of less than

3m, extend up to 2 miles NE from Barubbra Island and a shoal,

with a depth of 7.9m, lies about 4.5 miles from the SE extremity of the same island.

5.40 The three entrance reaches have depths (2005), as follows: 

1. Sea Reach—9.5m.

2. Middle Reach—9.5m.

3. Inner Reach—9.5m.

5.40 The Bulk Liquids Terminal at the John T. Fisher Wharf is

240m long, with an alongside depth of 9.8m. The terminal offers facilities for handling bulk petroleum, ammonia, and molasses. The turning basin off the terminal has a depth of 7.7m

alongside. 

5.40 The Bulk Sugar Terminal at the Sir Thomas Hiley Wharf is

191m long, with a dolphin connected by a catwalk at each end

and a depth of 11m alongside. 

5.40 Above the sugar berth, the river has a controlling depth of

1.6m.

5.40 Aspect.—The light on South Head, the pilot station on the

same point, and the white tower to the S, as well as the sugar

sheds are all excellent marks for making the port.

5.40 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory, and vessels are met

about 4.5 miles E of South Head. The pilot vessel is equipped

with a radiotelephone. Vessels should order pilots well in advance, radioing their ETA at least 24 hours in advance.

5.40 Regulations.—The port limits are described by the arc of a

circle 4 miles in radius, centered on South Head.

5.40 The quarantine line for the port is drawn N from South Head

for 1 mile, then W to the shore.

5.40 Entering vessels are restricted to a length of 183m and must

maintain an underkeel clearance of 0.9m at all times. Vessels

normally berth only in daylight hours on the outgoing tide,

with departures made on the incoming tide.

5.40 There is a 10 knot speed limit in the river from its entrance to

Bundaberg Creek, at the E end of the town, and of 4 knots

thereafter.

5.40 Signals.—The pilot station and harbormaster office may be

contacted via VHF.

5.40 Anchorage.—Vessels may take anchorage, in 7.3m, about

1.5 to 2 miles ENE of South Head Light. There is a spoil

ground centered 2 miles ESE of South Head. An additional anchorage area is located in a depth of 12m about 5 miles E of

South Head.

5.40 Directions.—Vessels bound for the Burnett River from the

N should keep at least 7 miles offshore until South Head Light

bears about 245°. Vessels bound from the S, after passing E of

Sloping Hummock (24°50'S., 152°25'E.), should keep more

than 2 miles offshore, until the approach can be made on the

entrance range.

Off-lying Islands and Reefs

5.41 Extensive off-lying detached reefs, islets, and shoal

patches lie between Sandy Cape and a position about 138 miles

NW. They parallel the coast between about 21 miles and 52

miles offshore, except at a position about 25 miles ESE of

Cape Capricorn, where they lie about 15 miles offshore. These

dangers are comprised of Lady Elliot Island, the Herald Patch-
126 Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 

Pub. 127

es, the Bunker Group, and the Capricorn Group. Several detached dangers lie up to about 78 miles NE of Sandy Cape.

5.41 Lady Elliot Islet (24°07'S., 152°43'E.), is a coral scrub-covered islet fringed by coral reefs. It is reported to give radar returns up to 15 miles. A light, equipped with a racon, and signal

station are situated here.

5.41 A marine park is established in the vicinity of Lady Elliot Island. This is an area to be avoided.

5.41 Anchorage, sheltered from SE winds may be taken in the lee

of the island, about 0.2 mile off the reef, in depths of 18 to

37m.

5.41 Herald Patches, a group of detached 10 to 18m coral and

sand patches, lie about 6 miles S of Lady Elliot Islet. They extend about 7 miles from E to W and are about 2.5 miles wide

with the shallowest water reported over the E end.

5.41 Bunker Group (23°50'S., 152°21'E.) comprises several coral islets and reefs which lie between 20 and 33 miles NW of

Lady Elliot Islet. Lady Musgrave Islet, the southernmost of the

group, from which a light is shown, has been reported to give

good radar returns up to 11 miles. A depth of 16.9m was reported to lie about 2.5 miles NE of the reef on which the islet

lies.

5.41 Caution.—An Area to be Avoided, best seen on the chart,

surrounds the Bunker Group. This area is to be avoided by all

unauthorized vessels greater than 500 gross tons, except in

emergencies.

5.42 Fairfax Islet, several islets in the center of a reef

which is about 2 miles long, lies about 3 miles NNW of Lady

Elliot Islet. Hoskyn Islet, two islets almost connected at LW,

lies on a reef about 1.5 miles long, about 5 miles NW of Fairfax Islet. 

5.42 Boult Reef (23°45'S., 152°17'E.), which dries, has a sand

cay on its SW end, which nearly covers at HW. Heavy breakers

occur on the NE end of the reef.

5.42 Patches, with depths of 14.6m and 17.4m, lie 1.7 miles apart,

16 miles W of Hoskyn Islets.

5.42 Capricorn Group consists of a number of coral islets and

steep-to coral reefs, lying between 5 and 41 miles NW of the

Bunker Group. Its NE side is formed by a line of islets and

reefs extending about 36 miles NNW from Llewellyn Reef to

North Reef, the S and N extremities, respectively, of the group.

From the middle of the NE side, the central part of the group

extends about 28 miles WSW to Rock Cod Shoal, about 15

miles ENE of the coast at Facing Island. The sea breaks heavily

over most of the reefs, parts of which dry or are awash. Large

areas of discolored water, caused by masses of plankton, have

been reported in the waters surrounding the Capricorn Group.

5.42 Llewellyn Reef (23°42'S., 152°11'E.), about 3.5 miles long

and 2 miles wide, is the southernmost of the Capricorn Group.

It lies about 5 miles NW of Boult Reef. A 9.1m coral patch,

and a 25.5m sand and coral patch lie 3 miles NW and 4 miles

WNW, respectively, of Llewellyn Reef.

5.42 North Reef (23°11'S., 151°54'E.), on which a light is shown,

is about 1.2 miles long and lies at the N end of the Capricorn

Group. North Reef has been reported to give good radar returns

up to 14 miles. Broomfield Reef, with a sandy cay on its W

side, lies about 5 miles SSE of North Reef. The channel between the two reefs has not been closely examined and should

not be used.

5.42 Guthrie Shoal (23°03'S., 151°51'E.), with a depth of 9.4m,

lies on the SE end of a bank with depths of less than 36.6m,

which lies 8 miles NNW of North Reef. Innamincka Shoal,

with a depth of 9.4m, lies about 2.5 miles N of Guthrie Shoal.

Haberfield Shoal, with a depth of 9.8m, lies from 4 to 6 miles

WNW of Guthrie Shoal.

5.42 Johnson Patch, with a depth of 11.9m, and steep-to, lies

about 9.5 miles WSW of the middle of Haberfield Shoal. Douglas Shoal, with a depth of 8.2m, lies about 3 miles ESE of

Johnson Patch. 

5.42 Goodwin Shoal (22°55'S., 151°44'E.), with a depth of 8.2m

and over which the sea breaks in bad weather, lies 8.5 miles

NW of Innamincka Shoal. Shoals, with depths of 16.2m and

18.3m, lie 6 miles W and 10 miles WSW, respectively, of

Goodwin Shoal.

5.43 Edgell Bank (22°53'S., 151°47'E.), with a depth of

15.5m, lies 3 miles NE of Goodwin Shoal. Moresby Bank, with

depths of less than 36.6m, and a least depth of 16.1m over its E

end, lies 3 miles NE of Edgell Bank. Both the E end of Moresby Bank and Edgell Bank have been reported to break in heavy

weather.

5.43 Barcoo Bank, with a depth of 17.7m, lies 1.5 miles WNW of

the W end of Moresby Bank.

5.43 Karamea Bank, with a depth of 18.3m, and which breaks in

heavy weather, lies 14.5 miles NW of the W end of Moresby

Bank. During calm weather the bottoms of all the above shoals

can clearly be seen. Their positions are indicated by slight tide

rips.

5.43 Northwest Islet lies on the W end of a reef and is about 6

miles long. It is located about 13 miles W of Broomfield Reef.

An abandoned cannery may be seen here.

5.43 The central islets and reefs of the Capricorn Group can best

be seen on the appropriate chart.

Burnett River Entrance to Bustard Head

5.44 The Kolan River (24°40'S., 152°12'E.) empties into

the sea 12.5 miles WNW of the entrance to the Burnett River.

The channel across the bar at the entrance is subject to frequent

changes, and local knowledge is essential. Camp Island, low

and sandy, lies off the NW entrance point. A lookout tower

stands N of a village fronting the entrance.

5.44 Baffle Creek (24°31'S., 152°04'E.) discharges into the sea

about 10 miles NW of the Kolan River entrance,; the mouth of

Mullet Creek lies about halfway between. A shifting unmarked

bar, with a least depth of 0.6m, obstructs the entrance to the

creek. Vessels with a draft of 2.1m can navigate the creek for a

distance of 6 miles above the entrance.

5.44 A dangerous wreck, with a depth of 10m over it, lies 10

miles NE of the entrance to Baffle Creek.

5.44 Anchorage.—Anchorage during offshore winds may be taken, in a depth of 10.9m, about 2.5 miles ENE of the entrance

with Double Sloping Hummock, bearing about 210°.

5.44 Round Hill Head (24°10'S., 151°53'E.) lies about 14.5

miles NNW of Toowong Hill, a conspicuous hill about 9.7

miles NNW of Baffle Creek entrance. A monument is situated

on the W side of this headland, about 0.7 mile S of its N end.

Round Hill Head has been reported to give good radar returns

up to 17 miles. A light is shown on Round Hill Head.
Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 127

Pub. 127

5.44 Bustard Bay indents the coast about 3.2 miles SW between

Round Hill Head and Bustard Head, about 10 miles NW. The

low coast on the W side of the bay is backed about 3.5 miles inland by the Munro Range, up to 323m high. The S end of the

bay has depths of less than 2m S of the 5.5m curve, which

trends W from the N end of Round Hill Head.

5.44 A narrow and shallow inlet, on the E side of which is a small

settlement, lies on the W side of Round Hill Head. Several beacons mark the entrance of a creek at the S end of Bustard Bay,

but there are only depths of 0.6 to 1m over the bar. Although

Bustard Bay affords shelter only during offshore winds, small

craft may find protection from SE winds in depths of 4.5 to

5.5m about 1.5 miles W of the N end of Round Hill Head.

5.44 Bustard Head (24°01'S., 151°46'E.) shows a light on its SE

point; another light is shown on Clews Point, on the NW point

of the head. Storm signals are also displayed from the station.

5.44 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents off Bustard Head set

NW during the rising tide and SE during the falling tide and

have a rate of about 2 knots.

5.44 Pancake Creek (24°01'S., 151°44'E.), the entrance to which

is narrow, has a least depth of 3.7m in the fairway. On the E

side, rock ledges, which dry 1.8m, extend 0.2 mile offshore.

The W side is formed by Shelter Spit, which dries 1.5m, and

extends 1 mile N from Pancake Creek. The edge of this spit is

easily seen. 

5.44 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained in the creek by

small vessels, with local knowledge, in a depth of 4m, good

shelter. Tidal currents in the creek attain a rate of 1.5 to 2 knots.

5.44 A reef of above and below-water rocks extends 1.7 miles

NNE from Bustard Head. Inner and Middle Rocks, each 0.3m

high, lie on the seaward end of the reef. Outer Rocks lie 1 mile

NNE of Middle Rocks. The reef and Outer Rocks are covered

by the red sector of Bustard Head Light. Outer Rocks are also

covered by the red sector of Clews Point Light.

5.45 Richards Point (23°59'S., 151°38'E.), a low point

fronted by a rocky ledge, lies near the NW end of the Rodds

Peninsula. Ethel Rocks, which uncover, lie up to a little over

0.2 mile N of this point.

5.45 Rodds Bay lies between Richards Point and Seal Rocks,

about 7.5 miles W. There are depths of less than 5.5m over

most of Rodds Bay, but a channel with depths of about 6.4 to

9.1m leads into Rodds Harbor, a confined anchorage at the SE

end of Rodds Bay.

5.45 Seal Rocks (23°57'S., 151°29'E.), a ridge of sand and rocks,

parts of which dry, extend about 4 miles NE from Tiber Point.

A rock, about 1.5m high, lies on this ridge about 0.5 mile from

its NE end. Depths of less than 5.5m extend up to about 1 mile

NNE from this rock. Seal Rock lies at the NW end of Rodds

Bay and separates it from Port Curtis.

5.45 Jenny Lind Bank, a 2.7 to 5.2m bank, extends about 1 mile

NE from a position about 1.5 miles NE of Seal Rocks. Several

drying rocks lie near the middle of this bank and rocks with

depths of less than 1.8m lie between the drying parts of Jenny

Lind and Seal Rocks.

Gladstone (Port Curtis) (23°55'S., 151°23'E.)

World Port Index No. 53450

5.46 Gladstone occupies the NW end of the bight indenting

the coast between Richards Point and Gatcombe Head, and extends about 22 miles NW between Facing Island and Curtis Island and the mainland. The port, one of the safest and most

commodious anchorages on the Queensland coast, is entered

through South Channel between the S end of East Banks and

Jenny Lind Bank. The town of Gladstone, where there are several wharves, lies on the SW side of Port Curtis, about 7 miles

WNW of Gatcombe Head. There are also wharves at South

Trees Point, Barney Point, and Clinton, all on the S side of the

channel.

5.46 Tides—Currents.—The tide at the Port of Gladstone has a

mean spring rise of 3.8m and a mean neap rise of 3m.

5.46 The tidal currents at the SE end of East Bank, in the channel

entrance, set WSW during the rising tide and NE during the

falling tide, at a rate of 2 to 3 knots. In the entrance channel between East Bank and the banks to the S, the tidal currents set

NW during the rising tide, and SE during the falling tide at a

rate of 2 to 3 knots. The current between South Trees Point and

Auckland Point set WNW during the rising tide and SE during

the falling tide, at a velocity of 2 to 3 knots. The prevailing

winds may considerably influence the set and rate of these currents.

5.46 Depths—Limitations.—It has been reported (2003) that the

approach channel for the Port of Gladstone has a limiting

dredged depth of 16.3m as far as South Trees Point Wharves, a

depth of 12.8m from South Trees Point to Auckland Point

(23°50'S., 151°15'E.), and a depth of 16m from Auckland Point

to Clinton Wharf. The three numbered berths at Clinton Wharf

have alongside depths of 18.8m. Above Clinton Wharf, the

channel has a depth of 8.9m. The Clinton swing basin has a reported depth of 10.6m. The Targinie Swing Basin has a reported depth of 8.9m.

5.46 The South Trees Island Wharf, situated about 4.5 miles NW

of Gatcombe Head (23°53'S., 151°23'E.), handles bulk aluminum products. East Wharf, with a depth of 12.8m, is a loading

berth. West Wharf, with a depth of 12.8m, is a discharge facility which handles bulk ore and petroleum products. Both berths

are limited to a length of 243m and a beam of 35.4m.

5.46 The Smelter Wharf, situated at Boyne Island (23°55'S.,

151°20'E.), has a length of 250m, an alongside depth of 15m,

and can handle bulk carriers up to 60,000 dwt.

5.46 The Barney Point Wharf is situated N of the South Trees Island Wharf and has facilities for handling bulk coal. The wharf

has an alongside depth of 15m and will accept vessels up to

245m in length.

 Gladstone Port Authority

http://www.gpa.org.au
128 Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 

Pub. 127

5.46 The Auckland Point Wharf is situated at the town of Gladstone itself, and provides a variety of facilities. Berth No. 1,

with an alongside depth of 11.3m, will accommodate vessels

loading bulk coal with lengths of up to 228m. 

5.46 Berth No. 2 is a bulk grain loading facility with an alongside

depth of 11.3m. Vessels up to 189m in length, and a beam of

30m, are accommodated. 

5.46 Berth No. 3, with alongside depths of 11.3m, is a general

purpose berth that will handle general cargo, bulk petroleum

products, bulk liquid, dangerous cargo, and heavy lifts.

5.46 Berth No. 4 has an alongside depth of 11.4m.

5.46 The Clinton Coal Facility Wharf has four berths, with a total

length of 1,490m and depths alongside of 18.8m. 

5.46 Fishermans Landing Wharves (Targinie Berths) have two

berths. Berth No. 4 is 228m long, with an alongside depth of

11.2m; vessels berth bow headed SE at Berth No. 4. Berth No.

5 has a length of 220m and a depth of 11.2m alongside.

5.46 Aspect.—Most of the coast of the Port of Gladstone is low, but

there are several prominent hills that are useful landmarks. In addition to Many Peak Range and the Edinburg Mountains S of the

port, a short range lies on the W side of the N end of the port.

5.46 Mount Stanley (Peak Hill) lies near the end of Many Peak

Range, about 12.5 miles SSW of Tiber Point. Mount Larcom,

628m high, is another prominent peak about 9.5 miles WNW

of Gladstone.

5.46 Hummock Hill is a prominent landmark on the S side of the

entrance, and Round Hill lies close S of Gladstone on the SW

side of the port. View Hill and Ship Hill lie on the S end of

Curtis Island; these hills provide useful landmarks when arriving at the port.

5.46 Gatcombe Head (23°53'S., 151°23'E.), the N entrance point

of the Port of Gladstone, is a bold prominent bluff at the S end

of Facing Island.

5.46 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and available 24 hours

for all foreign vessels of 35m loa or greater and Australian vessels of 50m loa or greater. Certain Australian vessels may be

exempt if they have the proper documentation.

5.46 Vessels should forward their ETA and maximum draft 24

hours and 2 hours in advance.

5.46 The pilot boards at the following positions: 

1. Alpha (23°51.0'S., 151°31.5'E.).

2. Bravo (23°51.9'S., 151°32.7'E.).

3. Charlie (23°53.0'S., 151°33.0'E.).

4. Delta (23°55.0'S., 151°31.0'E.).

5.46 The pilot working channels are VHF channels 10, 13, and

16; the call sign is “Gladstone Pilots.” Gladstone Harbor Control will advise which boarding station will be used. 

5.46 A helicopter pilot transfer service for vessels able to provide

landing facilities is available for the Port of Gladstone. The helicopters use VHF channel 13 for communications.

5.46 Vessels not able to accept a helicopter, due to physical restrictions or safety considerations, will be serviced by launch.

5.46 Vessels should advise in their ETA message whether the vessel is capable of accepting a helicopter, or if not, the impediment precluding the use of this service.

5.46 Regulations.—The Port Limit Line for Gladstone is best

seen on the chart. The quarantine line for the port is drawn

across the channel just S of the South Trees Island wharf. Pratique is usually granted at the wharf, but if the vessel is proceeding to an anchorage, it will be boarded there.

5.46 Vessels wishing to enter the port must advise harbor control

by VHF. Deep-draft vessels must not pass each other in South

Channel; an inflammable liquids tanker must not pass deepdraft vessels, or another tanker, in South Channel.

5.46 A Vessel Traffic Service, which is compulsory for all commercial vessels, is located at the port. All vessels arriving or

departing Gladstone should monitor VHF channel 13 when

within the VTS and Pilotage Area to monitor traffic conditions.

5.46 Inbound vessels of 10m loa or greater should call Gladstone

Harbor Control on VHF channel 13, as follows:

1. At least 2 hours before arrival and again on crossing a

line located a radius of 4 miles from Fairway Lighted Buoy.

2. When passing the starboard lighted beacon at Laird

Point.

3. When passing North Point for the N entrance.

4. When passing E2 Lighted Buoy for the E channel.

5. When passing Fairway Lighted Buoy for the S channel, main entrance. 

5.46 Outbound vessels should contact the VTS Center on VHF

channel 13 at least 15 minutes before departure, on departure,

and when outside the port limits.

5.46 Outbound deep-draft vessels and tankers may, provided there

is sufficient depth of water for safe navigation, pass inbound

deep-draft vessels or tankers between South Trees Lighted

Beacon and the inner end of South Channel.

5.46 Signals.—The Port Radio Station at Gladstone keeps a constant watch; a listening watch is maintained in the harbormaster’s office during office hours. Mobile stations are maintained

in the tugs, launches, pilot boat, and the main wharves.

5.46 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken, in a depth of 11m,

between Barney and Auckland Points. Several anchorage

berths are available clear of the range lines, and are best seen

on the chart.

Gatcombe Head to Cape Capricorn

5.47 Between Gatcombe Head and Cape Capricorn, about 26

miles NNW, the coast trends in that direction along the E side of

Facing Island and Capricorn Island. All dangers except the Rundle

Islands are contained within a distance of 2.7 miles offshore.

5.47 East Point Ledge (23°52'S., 151°24'E.), with depths of less

Courtesy of Major Metals Queensland

Gladstone—RG Tanna Coal Loading Wharf
Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 129

Pub. 127

than 2.7m, extends up to about 1.2 miles NE and NW from

East Point. Sable Chief Rocks, a small group of detached rocks

which dry, lies about 1 mile offshore about 3 miles N of East

Point.

5.47North Entrance lies between North Point and the SE end of

Curtis Island, about 0.7 mile to the W. This entrance into Port

Curtis is suitable only for small craft with local knowledge.

5.47 Caution.—Several dangerous wrecks, best seen on the chart,

exist approximately 5 miles NE of North Point.

5.47 From North Entrance to Cape Capricorn, about 17 miles to

the NNW, the coast is a series of rocky points and sandy beaches backed, less than 1 mile inland, by a ridge of hills.

5.47 The Rundle Islands (23°32'S., 151°17'E.) lie about 2.5

miles offshore and 4 miles SE of Cape Capricorn. The E islet

shows a light; the W islet is low, sandy, and rocky. The islets

are steep-to and lie on a bank, with depths of less than 10m.

5.47 Cape Capricorn (23°29'S., 151°14'E.), a bold headland, lies

on the NE end of Curtis Island and appears white and barren. A

wreck lies in about 24m, about 1.5 miles NNE of the cape. A

light is shown on the summit of the cape. A white house on

which there is a lantern, is situated on the N side of the cape.

Keppel Bay

5.48 Keppel Bay (23°22'S., 151°00'E.) indents the coast

about 12 miles SW between Cape Capricorn and Great Keppel

Island. The S end of the bay is formed by the N end of Curtis

Island and the W side is formed by the low mainland, which is

backed by hills up to about 488m high. The N end of the bay is

formed by the Keppel Islands and the shoals between them and

the mainland.

5.48 Tides—Currents.—In the outer part of the bay, the flood

current sets S, and the ebb N. From abreast Cape Capricorn, on

the S, and Hummocky Island, on the N, however, the direction

is reversed, probably due to an eddy, with the flood setting N

into the bay and the ebb S out of it. Close E of Cape Capricorn,

the N current runs for approximately 7 hours, from about 3

hours before LW at Mackay, to about 1 hour before HW at that

port. The current then turns, and the S current runs for approximately 4 hours, 42 minutes, the current turning again as stated

above. The flood current W of Cape Capricorn sets W past

Cottier Bank.

5.48 The strength of the tidal current in the outer part of the bay

has seldom been found to exceed 1.5 knots.

5.48 Caution should be exercised by mariners who may be deceived by discolored water. Muddy water is carried out by the

deep channels during the latter part of the falling tide, while the

water is clear over the shallower parts where the current does

not set at that time.

5.49 South end of Keppel Bay.—The coast between Cape

Capricorn and Cape Keppel (23°27'S., 151°03'E.) is formed

by a sandy beach, backed by low, swampy and mangrove-covered ground rising inland to the Ramsay Range. Between the

two above capes, a flat, with depths of less than 10m, extends

up to 4 miles offshore. 

5.49 Boat Rock, which dries 1.5m, lies 2.5 miles E, and Cottier

Bank, with a least depth of 1.2m, lies close inside the edge of

the flat, 2.2 miles NE of Cape Keppel. Cape Capricorn Light,

in line bearing 121°, leads NE of the bank.

5.49 Ship Rock (23°25'S., 151°11'E.) and Fairway Rock lie 5.2

miles NW and the same distance WNW, respectively, of Cape

Capricorn. Both rocks are good marks when entering Keppel

Bay from the S. There is deep water between them and between the rocks and Hummocky Island.

5.49 Hummocky Island (23°24'S., 151°09'E.) lies about 6.5

miles NW of Cape Capricorn. This small steep-to island consists of three conspicuous hills. A rock, awash, lies about 0.5

mile off the SW side of the island. Depths of less than 10m extend 0.6 mile W from the island. A spit, with depths of less

than 10m, extends 1 mile NW from the middle of the N side of

the island. A detached 9.4m patch lies 0.7 mile NW of the W

extremity of the island.

5.49 Sea Hill Point is the NW extremity of Curtis Island, and the

E entrance point to The Narrows at the N end. Sea Hill rises 1

mile ENE of the point. There is a village close SE of Sea Hill

Point. A light is shown on the point. 

5.49 Anchorage.—Anchorage, with good shelter from all but N

and NW winds, may be obtained, in a depth of 11.9m, 0.7 mile

WNW of Sea Hill Point. As the tidal currents set fairly strongly

through The Narrows, it is recommended that a longer scope of

anchor cable be used than is indicated by the water depth alone.

5.49 Timandra Bank (23°26'S., 151°00'E.), which dries in places, extends 3.5 miles W from the outermost of Keppel Rocks.

North West Bank, with depths of less than 5m, extends 1.5

miles offshore between Station and Sea Hill Points.

Off-lying Islands and Shoals

5.50 Jabiru Shoals (23°21'S., 151°05'E.), four patches

with depths of 7.9 to 10m, lie between 3 and 6 miles WNW of

Hummocky Island. Lisa Jane Shoals, three patches with depths

of 7.6 to 11.9m, lie 7.5 miles NW of the above island.

Peak Island (Second Lump) (23°21'S., 150°56'E.) is shaped

like a sugarloaf. Arch Rock lies on the outer end of a reef,

which extends 1 mile SSE from the island. A bank, with depths

of less than 5m, extends 1 mile W of the island and a rock lies

close off its N extremity. Split Rock lies 0.5 mile NW of Peak

Island.

5.50 Divided Island, 35m high, cliffy, and divided into two parts

at HW, lies 2.5 miles NNW of Peak Island. A rock, which

dries, lies on the outer end of a reef which extends 0.5 mile

NNW from the island. Wedge Island lies 2.5 miles WNW of

Divided Island.

5.50 Pelican Island (23°15'S., 150°52'E.) lies 2.5 miles NNW of

Wedge Island. Pelican Rock is joined to the island by a drying

reef. A bank, with a least depth of 2.7m, extends 1.2 miles

WNW from Pelican Island, and a 4m patch lies 0.3 mile S of

the same island.

5.50 Egg Rock (23°12'S., 151°06'E.), the E of the islands and

rocks which form the N side of Keppel Bay, is steep-to on its S

side. Two above-water rocks lie close off its E side. Barren Island (First Lump) lies 2.3 miles NW of Egg Rock. The Child, a

cliffy rock, 49m high, lies close off the NE side of the island.

Great Keppel Island (Wapparaburra) (23°10'S., 150°58'E.)

lies with its E extremity about 6 miles WNW of Egg Rock. The

island, the largest of the Keppel Isles, is inhabited and covered

with grass and a few trees. A bight is shown from the E side of

the island. A number of islets, rocks, and banks, lies off each

side of the island and can best be seen on the chart. A light hut
130 Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 

Pub. 127

stands on the E point of Great Keppel Island.

The Fitzroy River 

5.51 The Fitzroy River (23°30'S., 150°55'E.) flows into

the SW end of Keppel Bay between Sea Hill Point and Cattle

Point. The mouth of the river is about 6 miles wide and is encumbered by islets, shoals, and rocks. The shore is low within

the river entrance, where numerous creeks empty from its S

bank. Between Sea Hill Point and Cardigan Point a shallow inlet, separating the N part of Curtis Island from the mainland,

extends almost 9 miles SSE to The Narrows at the N extremity

of Port Curtis.

5.51 The river is entered through three channels. The main channel is through Sea Reach and then through South Channel.

Middle Channel is closed to navigation. North Passage can

only be used by small vessels with local knowledge.

5.51 Sea Reach and South Channel are marked by lighted beacons

and buoys. The lighted range markers can best be seen on the

chart.

5.51 Tides—Currents.—Inside the mouth of the river, the tidal

currents tend to parallel the channels. In the approach to Port

Alma and in the river channel off Broadmont, they may attain a

rate of 2 to 3 knots. At Port Alma, the flood current sets diagonally off the wharf and the ebb sets parallel to the wharf.

5.51 Depths—Limitations.—In 1993, there was a least depth of

7.3m in the approach channel to Port Alma. In the channel to

Rockhampton, which is about 30 miles upstream from Port Alma, there are depths of about 4.6m at LW; however, seasonal

variations may carry the level below this datum. 

5.51 The Rockhampton port limit extends from the E tip of Cattle

Point to the N tip of Arch Rock and then to the NW extremity

of Cape Keppel.

5.51 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Vessels shall send their

ETA and draft to the Rockhampton Harbormaster at least 6

hours in advance. As the time taken for the pilot boat to reach

the boarding ground in Timandra Bay is approximately 3

hours, the time of arrival should be confirmed or adjusted,as

necessary.

5.51 In bad weather, if the pilot is unable to board, proceed inbound on the range lights situated on the N end of Balaclava

Island (23°32'S., 150°56'E.), keeping them slightly open to the

W until past the lighted buoy marking the W end of Timandra

Bank, where the pilot will board. If the pilot is not at the buoy,

proceed to the anchorage off Sea Hill Point.

5.52 Port Alma (23°36'S., 150°52'E.) (World Port Index

No. 53440) is part of the Port of Rockhampton and lies 8 miles

SW of Sea Hill Point. The Rockhampton Port Authority administers Port Alma.

5.52 The port consists of three berths. Berth No. 1 is 168m long,

No. 2 berth is 137m long, and No. 3 berth, a dolphin berth, is

238m long. Berth No. 2 can handle containers. Berth No. 3 is

also used for tanker discharge. All three berths have depths of

9.5m.

5.52 Because of the limited depths in the river, only smaller vessels with local knowledge can proceed to Rockhampton. It has

been reported that all commercial shipping is now calling at

Port Alma.

5.52 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 12m, WNW of

Sea Hill Point and between Shell Point and Kazatch Point,

clear of the entrance range.

5.52 A vessel must not anchor in any of the cuttings, on any of the

range lines, nor in any position where the vessel’s lights might

be mistaken for channel range lights.

Double Head to Port Clinton

5.53 Double Head (23°10'S., 150°48'E.) is a prominent

headland at the N end of Keppel Bay. Although the head is

steep-to on its E side, an extensive shoal, with depths of less

than 3.6m, lies between a position about 1.5 miles E of the

head of Great Keppel Island.

5.53 North Keppel Island lies 7.5 miles NE of Double Head. The

island is inhabited and similar in formation to Great Keppel Island. Sloping Island lies near the outer end of a spit of foul

ground which extends 1.5 miles S from the S side of North

Keppel Island, with Pumpkin Island between.

5.53 Yeppoon Inlet (23°08'S., 150°45'E.) lies about 3 miles NW

of Double Head on the N side of the mouth of Yeppoon Creek

and is a harbor for small craft. A breakwater, on the head of

which stands a lighted beacon, extends from the E entrance

point. The entrance should not be attempted without recent local knowledge. Tidal currents in the inlet are strong.

5.53 An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 11m

spans the entrance to the inlet.

5.53 Cape Manifold (22°41'S., 150°50'E.) is composed of rocky

heads with sandy beaches between, behind which rise the Manifold Hills. An islet, sparsely covered with vegetation, lies 0.2

mile E of the cape, with an above-water rock between. Tide

rips occur N of the islet.

5.53 Flat Island and Peaked Island, both steep-to and bare, lie 9

miles ESE and 7 miles ENE, respectively, of Cape Manifold.

The latter is perforated and light can be seen through it from

the SE. Cliff Point lies 1.5 miles NW of Cape Manifold.

5.53 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken during offshore

winds, in 11 to 14.6m, in a position about 1.3 miles N of the N

side of Cape Manifold, and also in a position about 2.2 miles N

of Cliff Point.

5.53 Quoin Island (22°34'S., 150°48'E.) lies about 7.5 miles

NNW of Cape Manifold. Anchorage may be obtained during

offshore winds, in depths of 15 to 18m, 0.5 mile S of the island.

5.53 Cape Clinton (22°32'S., 150°48'E.) is the E point of a bold

headline on the S side of the entrance to Port Clinton. Mount

Flinders, a 160m peak, lies about 1.5 miles W of the cape. The

steep-to NE side of Cape Clinton headland trends about 1.5

miles NW from the cape to the N extremity of the headland. It

then trends about 0.3 mile W to Inner Head, the NW point of

the headland. Round Islet lies about 0.2 mile N of the N extremity of the headland with a drying reef between. Perforated

Point lies about 2.2 miles NNW of Round Islet. The entrance

of Port Clinton lies between the point and the islet.

5.54 Port Clinton (22°32'S., 150°46'E.) consists of an inlet which indents the coast about 4.5 miles SW between Round

 Rockhampton Port Authority

http://www.rpa.qld.gov.au
Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 131

Pub. 127

Islet and Perforated Point. This inlet, much of which dries or is

encumbered with shoals, offers sheltered though somewhat

confined anchorage, but is difficult to enter because of the bar.

Coasters frequently seek shelter here during bad weather. 

5.54 Tides—Currents.—The flood current sets W off the N end

of Round Islet at the rate of 1.5 to 2 knots, and then sets SSW

between Inner Head and Black Rock at a rate of 2.5 to 3 knots.

In the vicinity of Bullock Point the flood divides, one branch

sets S into South Arm at a rate of about 2 knots, and the other

branch sets W into the channel S of West Point at a rate of 1.5

to 2 knots. In the vicinity of Black Rock, the flood current sets

toward the sands off West Point. Between Entrance Island and

Perforated Point, the flood current sets to the N.

5.54 The ebb current sets in the opposite direction to the flood

current described above and attains about the same rate.

5.54 Depths—Limitations.—A bar, with depths of about 1.8 to

5.2m, lies across the entrance to Port Clinton. There are depths

of 7.3 to 14.6m on the approach to the bar. Inside the bar, there

are depths of about 9.1 to 28m in the fairway to the anchorage.

During a fresh breeze, the sea breaks over the shallower parts

of the bar; when the sea is calm, there are current rips over

them.

5.54 A 10 to 29m deep channel trends SW along the W side of the

entrance bar from a position about 0.5 mile NNE of Inner Head

to close off the W side of the head. Care must be taken to avoid

the shoal water from 0.2 to 0.3 mile SW of the islet off Bullock

Point. At Fish Rock, the channel narrows and trends SSE into

South Arm, a narrow inlet which extends about 5 miles to the

S. In South Arm, the channel has depths of about 5.5 to 7.3m

for a considerable distance.

5.54 A channel, with depths of about 7 to 10.9m, trends about 1.5

miles toward the W part of Port Clinton from a position about

1.5 miles SE of West Point.

5.54 Aspect.—The entrance of Port Clinton is easily distinguished from seaward as it is about midway between the high

hills at Cape Manifold and Mount Westall, about 16 miles NW

of Cape Clinton. The headlands on either side of the entrance

and the islets and rocks described above are prominent identifying features.

5.54 A remarkable sand cliff is located about 3 miles S of West

Point on the E side of the low point from which West Flats extends. The remains of a wharf, with a depth of 5.5m alongside,

is situated close S of Holtness Point.

5.54 Pilotage.—Pilots are not available at Port Clinton and vessel

intending to enter should obtain a pilot at Keppel Bay. Vessels

should not attempt to enter without local knowledge.

5.54 Anchorage.—An indentation outside the bar and immediately NW of Round Islet affords temporary anchorage, in

12.8m, for vessel waiting to cross the bar. The only secure anchorage in Port Clinton is in about 10.9 to 16.5m, close SW of

Fish Rock. Here a vessel will be sheltered from all winds and

from the heavy swell which occasionally sets over the bar. Anchorage may also be taken, in 10.9 to 16.5m, about 0.2 mile W

of Fish Rock. 

5.54 Care must be taken when anchoring in order to avoid Fish

Rock and Creek Rock and the shore bank close SW of the anchorages.

Port Clinton to Cape Townshend

5.55 Between Port Clinton and Reef Point, about 15 miles

NNW, the high rugged coast trends in that direction and is indented by a number of small bays and inlets. Hills rise abruptly

from the coast and a mountain range parallels the shore about 5

miles inland.

5.55 Caution.—Mariners are advised of the existence of the

Shoalwater Bay Military Training Area. The waters within this

area are closed to the public during the conduct of defense exercises; closures will be advised by Notice to Mariners. However, all creeks within the are a permanently closed to public

access. Shelter from storms or tempests may still be sought at

Freshwater Bay, Port Clinton and Pearl Bay.

5.55 Pearl Bay (22°25'S., 150°42'E.) lies about 5 miles NNW of

Port Clinton. The bay is entered between the S entrance point

and a point 5 miles NW. Prominent patches of sand are located

0.5 and 1.5 miles W of the S entrance point to the bay. A group

of islets, with shallow water between them and the mainland

SW, extends 1 mile NW from the S entrance point to Pearl Bay.

Depths of less than 5.5m extend 1 mile E from the middle of

the bay.

5.55 The Hervey Islands consists of two groups of rocks and islands. The S group lies 1.7 miles N of the S entrance point to

Pearl Bay. The Clara Group, the N group, lying 3 miles NE of

the N entrance point to Pearl Bay, consists of three islets and a

number of rocks. 

5.55 The S group is comprised of Dome Island (22°25'S.,

150°45'E.), Split Island, and a number of rocks.

5.55 Tides—Currents.—The flood current sets NW at a rate of

1.5 to 2 knots past the Hervey Islands; the ebb current sets SE.

5.55 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 6 to

13m, 1.5 miles WSW of Dome Island.

5.56 Island Head (22°20'S., 150°40'E.), an island, lies 3

miles W of the Clara Group. Island Head Creek extends 7 miles S

from its entrance and is obstructed by rocky shoals. Small craft,

with local knowledge, may enter the creek by keeping close to the

S shore.

5.56 Reef Point lies on the S side of the E entrance of Strong Tide

Passage. This reef-fringed point rises abruptly to the peak of

Mount Westall, about 2.7 miles to the S. 

5.56 Secure anchorage, out of the tidal currents and sheltered

from SE gales, may be obtained, in depths of 7 to 16m, 1 mile

NW of Pinetrees Point (22°20'S., 150°38'E.).

5.56 Strong Tide Passage (22°20'S., 150°32'E.) may be entered

between Reef Point and the SE end of Townshend Island, about

1 mile to the N. The passage trends about 5 miles SW into

Shoalwater Bay. There are depths of not less than 5.5m in the

channel, but the W end is obstructed by a bar with a least depth

of 3.6m. 

5.56 The tidal currents attain a rate of 5 to 6 knots in the passage,

and the ebb current causes strong overfalls which break at the

E entrance. This dangerous passage is not recommended for

any vessel.
132 Sector 5. Australia—North Point (Sydney Harbor) to Cape Townshend 

Pub. 127

5.56 Townshend Island, on the NW side of Strong Tide Passage,

is high, level, and sparsely wooded. Cape Townshend forms the

N extremity of the island. The cape marks the SE entrance to

Broad Sound Channel. Raynham Island lies 2.5 miles NW of

the SE extremity of Townshend Island. Cape Islet, a rock, lies

W of Cape Townshend, and is connected to it by a rocky ledge

at LW. A drying rock was reported (1990) to lie 0.9 mile W of

Cape Townshend.
Pub. 127

6. Australia—Coral Sea—Islands and Dangers

6.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 6 — CHART INFORMATION
135

Pub. 127

SECTOR 6 

AUSTRALIA—CORAL SEA—ISLANDS AND DANGERS

6.0 Plan.—This sector describes the islands and dangers in the

Coral Sea. The arrangement is from S to N and from W to E.

General Remarks

6.1 The Coral Sea lies between the E coast of Australia,

on the W, and New Caledonia and the New Hebrides, on the E.

The S limit is the parallel of 30°S; the N boundary is approximately the S extremity of the Solomon Islands and the S coast

of the E part of New Guinea. Numerous islands, reefs, and

sunken dangers, many of which have not been closely examined, are found in the Coral Sea. In general, the many islands in

this area are not inhabited, but some of the islands and reefs are

visited by local fishermen. There are some anchorages off the

leeward sides of some of the reefs.

6.1 The charts of the Coral Sea should be referred to by vessels

using the Outer Route from the parallel of Sandy Cape, N to

Torres Strait. Vessels proceeding N should cross the above parallel at about the meridian of 157°E.

6.1 All vessels are cautioned to exercise extreme care in navigating in the vicinity of the reefs and other dangers in the Coral

Sea. The usual set of the current is to the W, but it may be deflected or accelerated in the immediate vicinity of the reefs and

dangers. Some areas of the Coral Sea have only been partially

examined.

6.1 Winds—Weather.—The Southeast Trades are the prevailing

winds between the parallels of 20°S and 25°S west of the meridian of 155°E, however, winds from the N and NW are common from September to December, and winds from the SW are

common from May to August. Gales occur monthly from January to August W of the meridian of 155°E; and on an average

of 3 or 4 days per month E of the meridian of 160°E. This frequency is somewhat less from September to December.

6.1 Between the parallels of 15°S and 20°S, the Southeast

Trades are steady, and are fresh to strong. West of the meridian

of 150°E, the Northwest Monsoon may occur in January. Gales

are infrequent during the greater part of the year, but from June

to August a SE gale occurs on an average of about 1 day a

month, W of the meridian of 150°E, and on an average of 2 or

3 days per month farther E. Nearly all of these gales occur

while a well-developed anticyclone is crossing the N part of

Australia.

6.1 The Southeast Trades are very persistent N of the parallel of

15°S during the months of March to November and are often

fresh and strong. In December, they have a tendency to weaken

and are sometimes replaced by light NNW or W wind. In January and February, N and NW winds are about as frequent as the

Southeast Trades. As a general rule and apart from brief

squalls, gales do not occur on an average of more than one day

a year N of the parallel of 15°S. Those which do occur are generally associated with tropical storms.

6.1 Tides—Currents.—Little is known of the currents in the

Coral Sea except that they are variable and have a tendency to

set in a NW or W direction towards Torres Strait. In the vicinity of certain reefs in the Coral Sea, currents are sometimes deflected and their rate is often increased. These currents are

referred to later under detailed descriptions of the reefs.

6.1 Along the Outer Route, little or no current is generally experienced until within 50 or 60 miles of the Great Barrier Reef in

the direction of Torres Strait. In this area, a NW set becomes

evident and increases in strength as the edge of the reefs is approached. The current tends to set N within 10 miles of the outer edge of the reefs, and its rate depends to a great extent on the

strength and direction of the wind.

6.1 Pilot Charts for the South Pacific Ocean should be consulted

for the average current conditions of the Coral Sea area.

South Part of Coral Sea—South of Marion Reef

6.2 Cato Island (23°15'S., 155°32'E.) is a small ovalshaped island and lies about 152 miles NE of Sandy Cape. The

island is 5.8m high and formed of coral grit. An automatic

weather station, with two radio masts and a silver-painted hut,

stand on the NE end of the island. The island is almost entirely

surrounded by reefs. There are three narrow boat passages

through the reefs on the N side of the island. The best entrance

is the center entrance, located 0.2 mile N of the E end of Cato

Island, and has a conspicuous rock at half tide on its E side;

leading marks, in line bearing 154.5°, lead into the entrance

channel which is well defined. In 1989, this entrance was reported to lie almost 0.2 mile W of its charted position. The island lies on the W end of an oval-shaped reef enclosing a

lagoon. The lagoon contains numerous coral heads. The sea

breaks over the reef in all types of weather. The reef lies on Cato Bank and is steep-to on all sides. It has been reported the

NW side of Cato Bank extends farther W than charted.

6.2 Hutchison Rock (23°15'S., 155°36'E.), with a depth of

5.5m, lies 2.5 miles E of Cato Reef. Danger Patch, coral rocks,

with depths of less than 18.3m, lie near the outer end of the E

ledge of Cato Bank. A tidal race is found between the E end of

Cato Reef and Danger Patch. Tidal currents attain a rate of 1 to

3.5 knots during SE winds.

6.2 Anchorage.—The only suitable anchorage lies off the N

side of Cato Reef, in a depth of 29m, coral grit, with the E end

of Cato Island bearing 189°, distant 0.6 mile.

6.3 Wreck Reefs (22°11'S., 155°20'E.) lies with their W

extremity about 66 miles NNW of Cato Island and consists of a

narrow chain of reefs and several cays which cover an area of

about 18 miles, W to E. The sea always breaks over the cays.

Bird Islet, the E cay, is the only one known to produce vegetation. The wrecks contained within this area lie within a historic

wreck site and are protected from unauthorized interference.

6.3 The passage between Bird Islet (22°10'S., 155°28'E.) and a

reef 2.5 miles WSW has depths of 18 to 33m. This reef was reported to lie 0.5 mile SW of the charted position; a small reef,

1 mile in diameter, lies 0.5 mile W. A reef is reported to extend

0.8 mile NW of Bird Islet.
136 Sector 6. Australia—Coral Sea—Islands and Dangers 

Pub. 127

6.3 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained off the N side of

the reefs, in depths of 18 to 37m, but the bottom is very uneven. Without local knowledge the area should be avoided. Anchorage may also be obtained, in depths of 26 to 31m, about 1

mile WNW of Bird Islet.

6.4 Porpoise Cay, about 27m high, lies 6.2 miles W of

Bird Islet in the center of a shallow lagoon surrounded by a

reef. The reef partially uncovers at LW.

6.4 West Islet (22°12'S., 155°10'E.), 1.8m high and bare, lies

near the middle of the SE of three detached reefs at the W end

of Wreck Reefs. A below-water reef lies 0.5 mile SE of the reef

surrounding West Islet, with depths of 7.3 to 11m between

them.

6.4 Landing can be made on the NW end of West Islet. It should

be approached from the NW, following the shortest route

across the reef taking care to avoid the coral heads.

6.4 Tides—Currents.—In the vicinity of Wreck Reefs, the tidal

current sets SW during the rising tide and NE during the falling

tide at a rate of about 1 knot. The tides rise about 1.8m in the

area of Wreck Reefs.

6.4 Caution.—A bank, with depths of 25.5m, was reported to lie

68 miles E of Bird Islet,; a depth of 16.5m was reported to lie

76 miles ENE of the same islet. Reported depths of less than

200m indicate the presence of a ridge extending NNE from the

25.5m patch toward Selfridge Bank. A depth of 18.3m was reported 59 miles ENE of Bird Islet.

Kenn Reefs

6.5 Kenn Reefs (21°16'S., 155°48'E.) consists of four

separate reefs, and lies with Southwestern Extreme, the W end

of the SW reef, 56 miles NNE of Bird Islet. The W side of the

reefs forms a bay with depths of 9.1 to 68m, coral, sand, and

rock, outside which the depths increase suddenly to more than

183m. All the reefs dry at half-tide, and the sea breaks over all

of them except for the SW reef.

6.5 The Southwestern Extreme (21°17'S., 155°43'E.) has a conspicuous boulder, 1.8m high, on its NE side, which from a distance appears as part of a wreck. Landing can be made on the

SW side of the reef. An exposed wreck lies on the S side of the

reef. The reef is steep-to except on its N side, where it is

fringed by below-water rocks. The SW reef is separated from

the largest reef by an opening, 1.7 miles wide, which is unsafe

for other than small vessels, owing to foul ground with depths

of 7.3 to 9.1m in the middle of the fairway.

6.5 Eastern Projection (21°15'S., 155°50'E.) lies at the elbow

of the SE and largest reef, and on it lies High Reef Stone, a

large boulder. There are two sand cays on the SW part of the

reef. 

6.5 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

24m, 1.2 miles WNW of Observatory Cay, but care must be

taken to avoid the below-water rocks in the vicinity.

6.5 The N reef encloses a shallow lagoon, which is entered on its

W side near the S end. High Reef Stone and some other boulders lie close inside Northwestern Extreme, the N end of Kenn

Reef. There is a channel, 2.5 miles wide between the N reef

and the reef S of it, with depths of 18 to 60m.

6.5 Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 37 to 44m, coral

and sand, 0.5 mile SSW of Northwestern Extreme.

Saumarez Reefs

6.6 Saumarex Reefs (21°48'S., 153°42'E.) consists of

three main reefs and numerous smaller reefs.

Northeast Cay (21°38'S., 153°46'E.), a small sand cay lying

near the N extremity of Saumarez Reefs, is located about 86

miles NNW of West Islet of the Wreck Reefs. This 2.4m high

cay, which is enclosed by a coral reef, with an opening on the

SW side, is the northernmost of the Saumarez Reefs. A light,

from which a racon transmits, is shown from the N edge of the

cay. A clear channel, about 1.2 miles wide, lies between Northeast Cay and the next reef to the S.

6.6 Southeast Elbow (21°55'S., 153°35'E.), located about 20

miles SSW of Northeast Cay, forms the SE extremity of Saumarez Reefs. A conspicuous stranded wreck lies about 5.2

miles NE of Southeast Elbow. The wreck was reported to be a

good radar target up to 19 miles. Three reefs lie between 0.5 to

4.2 miles WNW of Southeast Elbow. These small reefs are separated from each other by unsurveyed channels with widths of

0.5 to 1.2 miles.

6.6 Southwest Cay (21°50'S., 153°30'E.), enclosed by a reef, 6

miles NW of Southeast Elbow, is the westernmost above-water

part of the Saumarez Reefs, and is 2.4m high. There is a channel, 2.2 mile wide, with depths of 27 to 46m, between the cay

and the reef SSE.

6.6 Anchorage.—Recommended anchorages are 1.7 miles NW

of Southeast Elbow, in a depth of 40m, and 2 miles E, 0.7 mile

N, and 0.7 mile W, respectively, of Southwest Cay, in depths of

37 to 49m. Anchorage can also be taken about 0.7 mile N of

Northeast Cay, in depths of 31 to 59m.

Fredrick Reefs

6.7 Observatory Cay (21°02'S., 154°23'E.), located

about 50 miles NE of the NE extremity of Saumarez Reefs and

75 miles W of the NW extremity of Kenn Reefs, lies near the S

end of Frederick Reefs (20°58'S., 154°24'E.). The reefs enclose a U-shaped body of water, known as Anchorage Sound,

which is protected on all sides except the N. 

6.7 Observatory Cay is 1.8m high; landing is possible on its N

side through a boat channel which leads from NE through the

reef. As the cay lies near the S edge of the reef, the surf sometimes breaks over it in heavy gales. In 1983, it was reported

that Observatory Cay lay about 0.5 mile W of the charted position.

6.7 In 1990, it was reported that Observatory Cay is the only one

of five cays on the S reef which does not cover.

6.7 A solitary remarkable leaning rock, 1.2m high, lies on the W

extremity of the S reef, 1.5 miles WNW of Observatory Cay.

6.7 From Observatory Cay the S reef extends NE and N for 3.5

miles. Off the SE side of this reef the bottom was reported to have

been seen at a distance of 1 mile from the reef, but no soundings

were obtained. The inner edge of the reef, which is always covered, has some below-water patches lying 0.5 mile off it.

6.7 Danger Ridge (21°00'S., 154°21'E.), which is narrow, lies

between the rock on the W end of the S reef and Ridge Rock,

on which the sea always breaks. There are general depths of

9.1 to 12.8m over the ridge, but below-water dangers lie on the

S end of the ridge, and near its middle. This passage should not

be attempted.
Sector 6. Australia—Coral Sea—Islands and Dangers 137

Pub. 127

6.7 North Reef Extreme, the N reef, is located with its S extremity about 1.7 miles N of the NE extremity of the S reef. It is

about 1.5 miles long and about 0.5 mile wide. A small cay,

from which Frederick Reef Light is shown and a racon transmits, is situated on this reef about 0.5 mile N of its S extremity.

Landing can be effected on the W side of the reef.

6.7 There is clear passage between the N and S reefs, with general depths of 11 to 16.5m. Tide rips occur across the passage.

6.7 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Anchorage Sound,

in depths of 18.3 to 31m, coral and sand. This anchorage is

sheltered to the E and S, and partially protected to the W by

Danger Ridge.

Marion Reef

6.8 Marion Reef (19°05'S., 152°17'E.), located about

150 miles NW of Frederick Reefs, is somewhat circular in

shape. The N, E, and S margins are marked by narrow coral

reefs, on the outer edges of which the sea always breaks. The

W side has three small isolated reefs. Long Reef forms the SE

side and Wansfell Reef the SW side of the group comprising

Marion Reef.

6.8 Carola Cay (19°06'S., 152°23'E.), 3.7m high, is located 2.5

miles S of the end of Long Reef, the SE reef of the group.

From this cay the reefs curve to the N and W for about 15 miles

and to the S, SW, and W for about 18 miles. Two partly examined openings lie in the NE part and one near the SW end of

Marion Reef. A white tower, conspicuous on radar, stands on

Carola Cay.

6.8 A shoal, with a depth of 3.7m, lies about 2.5 miles NW of

the N end of Carola Cay.

6.8 Paget Cay (19°15'S., 152°21'E.), 1.5m high, lies on the S

side of Long Reef in a position 7.5 miles SSW of Carola Cay.

A reef, which is reported to be extending S, lies about 1 mile

SW of Paget Cay. A wreck was reported to be 2 miles to the S

of its charted position on the reef. 

6.8 Brodie Cay, 3m high, lies on the SE end of Wansfell Reefs,

which form the SW side of Marion Reef. The sea breaks over

the N reef. The opening between Wansfell Reefs is foul and

overfalls occur on the S side. Brodie Cay was reported to lie

1.5 to 2 miles SW of its charted position. There are depths of

20 to 30m in the entrance between Brodie Cay and the W end

of Long Reef. Anchorage can be found, in 8m, 0.2 mile E of

Brodie Cay.

6.8 Two reefs, over which the sea breaks, lie on the W side of the

bank, 10 miles N and 14 miles NNW, respectively, of Brodie

Cay.

6.8 A S set of about 2 knots on the E of the reef may be experienced. Tides rise about 1.5m in the vicinity of Marion Reef.

Mellish Reef

6.9 Mellish Reef (17°22'S., 155°51'E.) encloses a lagoon,

with Herald’s Beacon Islet (17°25'S., 155°52'E.) 2 miles NNE

of its S end. The islet is a grass-covered sandy cay, 1.5m high.

Another sand cay, 0.6m high, was reported to lie 2.7 miles

NNW of Herald’s Beacon Islet. 

6.9 Mellish Reef, which is narrow and on which there are a few

above-water rocks, dries 0.9m. The remains of stranded wrecks

lie 2.5 and 3 miles NNW and 1.5 miles SSW of Herald’s Beacon Islet. The sea breaks heavily over the E side of the reef,

and slightly on other parts.

6.9 The lagoon within the reef has irregular depths of 1.8 to

14.6m, with below-water patches, the greater depths being N of

Heralds Beacon Islet. The entrance to the lagoon is through a

small boat passage, 0.3 mile SSW of the islet.

6.9 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained in an emergency

by vessels of moderate length, in a depth of 47m, 0.8 mile

WSW of Herald’s Beacon Islet, but the depths decrease rapidly

towards the reef. The anchorage should be approached with the

center of the islet bearing 065°, but caution is necessary as the

rocks and shoal patches are not easy to see. Discolored water

has been seen in the close proximity of the charted position of

the anchorage.

Bellona Reefs

6.10 South Bellona Reefs, located with West Point

(21°52'S., 159°25'E.), the W extremity, about 230 miles ENE

of Cato Island, is formed by two reefs, which dry about 1m,

and a detached cay. The cay lies on a drying reef which has a

boat entrance on its W side; in 1988, this cay was reported to

be non-existent. There are some below-water rocks off the SE

and NW sides of the reef.

6.10 Nigger Head Rock, 0.6m high and prominent, lies on the NE

end of the E reef, and is an unusually large, black coral rock.

There is a depth of 24m in the fairway between the sand cay

and the rock.

6.10 The E reef encloses a lagoon with many drying heads in its

SW part, but there appears to be no entrance to the lagoon. The

W reef, which also encloses a lagoon, is separated from the E

reef by a channel, 0.5 mile wide, with a depth of 12.8m in the

fairway. Several below-water rocks lie up to 0.5 mile off the N

side of the reef, and some off West Point, the W end of the reef.

A beacon stands on the reef.

6.10 A 24m ridge of foul ground, marked by overfalls, lies 3.5

miles NW of West Point; a depth of 11m lies 7 miles farther

NW. A depth of 26m was reported to lie 6.5 miles N of Nigger

Head Rock.

6.10 Anchorage.—There are regular depths of 37 to 51m, coral

sand, off the N side of the reefs, which affords anchorage sheltered from S and SE winds.

6.10 Middle Bellona Reefs (21°25'S., 158°25'E.) consists of

three reefs, the E of which lies 37 miles WNW of South Bellona Reefs, with navigable openings between. The E reef, which

dries 0.9m, encloses a lagoon. The sea always breaks over the

reef.

6.10 Observatory Cay (21°24'S., 158°51'E.), a bright coral sand

cay, 2.1m high, lies near the NW end of the middle reef, which

dries 0.9m and encloses a lagoon. There is a boat entrance on

the N side of the reef.

6.10 Western Breaker, 5 miles W of Observatory Cay, is a group

of steep-to below-water rocks, over which the sea breaks, but

only at long intervals. Western Breaker is dangerous as it lies

so far from the main reefs and in the direction of passing vessels.

6.10 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

20m, coral, sand and rocks, 0.5 mile N of Observatory Cay.

6.10 Northwest Bellona Reef (20°52'S., 158°28'E.) is about 5

miles long, 1 mile wide, and dries about 1m. The reef is steep-
138 Sector 6. Australia—Coral Sea—Islands and Dangers 

Pub. 127

to on its W side. There are a number of black coral rocks on the

reef. A patch, over which the sea breaks, lies 2.5 miles NW of

the reef.

6.10 Olry Reef (21°26'S., 159°34'E.) lies on the SE side of the

Bellona Reef Plateau.

6.10 Noel Bank (20°32'S., 158°34'E.) lies at the NW end of the

Bellona Reef Plateau.

6.10 Booby Reef (21°01'S., 158°34'E.) lies 6 miles S of Northwest Bellona Reef. The reef, which dries 1m and on which the

sea always breaks, extends about 7 miles NNW and is about 1

mile wide. The reef has some below-water patches off its SE

end, and a below-water rock, 1 mile N of its NW end. There are

some black coral rocks on the S side of the reef. The tidal current off the reef sets SW and NE, at a rate of 1.5 to 2 knots. 

6.10 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 8m,

0.2 mile off the NW end of the reef. Care must be taken to

avoid the below-water rock, 1 mile N of the reef.

6.10 Minerva Shoal (20°55'S., 159°22'E.), with a least charted

depth of 14.6m, lies 46 miles E of Bellona Shoal. Shallower

depths were observed SW of Minerva Shoal. A small drying

reef lies about 20 miles WNW of Minerva Shoal. A reef, 1 mile

in diameter, which never covers, lies about 10 miles NW of

Minerva Shoal. A below-water rock lies 33 miles ENE, and a

9.1m rocky patch lies 40 miles NE, respectively, of Northwest

Bellona Reef. Between the last two shoals mentioned above,

and the charted 200m curve 32 miles W, there is dangerous

ground, which has not been surveyed.

Chesterfield Reefs

6.11 Chesterfield Reefs, with Loop Islet (19°58'S., 158°

28'E.) near their S end, consists of three narrow reefs which extend 9 miles N and 27 miles NW, respectively, from South Elbow, their S extremity.

6.11 South Elbow (19°59'S., 158°29'E.), on which there is a meteorological station, is well marked by Loop Islet, a flat, tufted

islet, 3.4m high, just inside the reef. The inner edge of the reef

extending N from South Elbow is bordered by numerous shoal

patches, some of which are steep-to.

6.11 The Anchorage Islets (19°54'S., 158°28'E.) are a group of

islets on the inner edge of the reef, 5 miles N of Loop Islet. An

isolated underwater dangerous rock lies 1.2 miles NNW of

Loop Islet. The third islet from the N, the highest, is 11.6m

high. The islets and dry sand cays on the reef add to its elevation, and form a natural breakwater from E. There are numerous wrecks on the islets.

6.11 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage in convenient depths

inside Chesterfield Reefs in the SE part, sheltered from N

through E and S through W. The chief precaution in anchoring

is to select a sandy area on which to anchor with swinging

room, between the below-water coral patches.

6.11 The greater part of this area inside the reefs has regular

depths of 37 to 53m, but on the E side numerous steep-to

patches have been seen. A below-water reef, dark in color and

difficult to discern, and dangerous even to boats, lies 5 miles W

of the highest of the Anchorage Islets. A number of other

patches have been reported inside the reef and can best be seen

on the chart. The positions of the patches are approximate.

6.11 The best anchorage is 0.5 mile W of the highest of the Anchorage Islets.

6.12 Passage Islet (Bennett Islet) (19°55'S., 158°22'E.),

12.5m high, lies 7 miles NW of South Elbow, 0.2 mile SE of

the narrow passage from which it takes its name. The passage

is 0.2 mile wide, with a depth of 14.6m in the center of the fairway. Several sand cays lie on the reef SE of the islet. A strong 3

knot tidal current sets through it in a S or N direction.

6.12 From the above passage, the SW side of the reef extends 4.5

miles NW, and close within the NW end is Long Island. Three

small low islets lie on the reef between the passage and Long

Island. Shoals, with depths of 2.1 to 2.7m, lie 0.1 mile off the

reef on the NE side of Long Island.

6.12 Long Island (19°52'S., 158°19'E.), 6.1m high, is the largest

of Chesterfield Reefs. A monument stands near the middle of

the NE side of the island; a small bush-covered cone stands on

its NW end. A boat passage is available through the reef; in

good weather boats may pick their way past the dangers lying

NE of the monument.

6.12 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

27m, 0.6 mile NE of the monument, or in 24m, 0.7 mile NNE

of the monument on Long Island.

6.12 Long Island Passage (19°51'S., 158°17'E.), between Long

Island and the S end of the W reef, is 2.5 miles wide. The S

side of this passage has depths of 11 to 40m; the N side appears

to be deeper.

6.12 From Long Island Passage, the W side of Chesterfield Reefs

extends 14 miles NNW to Northwest Point and is steep-to on

its seaward side. The reef encloses a lagoon at its S end, between that point and a sand cay 2 miles N of it. Farther N there

are some small sand cays and boulders, mostly awash.

The Avon Isles

6.13 The Avon Isles (19°30'S., 158°15'E.), two in number,

lie between Northwest Point (19°37'S., 158°13'E.) and the S

end of Bampton Reefs, 9 miles N. The islets are 5.2m high and

densely covered with stunted trees and grass.

6.13 The opening between Northwest Point and the S of the Avon

Isles is 4 miles wide, with depths of 7 to 31m. The abrupt rise

of this shelf or below-water barrier causes a remarkable tide

rip.

6.13 The opening between the Avon Isles is 1.2 miles wide, with

depths of 16 to 24m; the opening between the N islet and the S

end of Bampton Reefs is also 1.2 miles wide, with a depth of

7.3m. The tidal currents in mid-channel between the Avon Isles

set SW and NE, and can attain a rate of 2 to 3 knots.

Bampton Reefs

6.14 Bampton Reefs (19°18'S., 158°40'E.) form a bank

which extends N from Chesterfield Reefs, the E limits of which

have only been partially examined. West Bampton Reef, a narrow barrier, extends 35 miles NNE from the Avon Isles to

North Elbow. An underwater rock lies about 3 miles W of

North Elbow.

6.14 The barrier is low, with groups of boulders, and some rocks,

1.8m high, which when first seen on the horizon have the appearance of sailboats. The rocks are conspicuous at a distance

of 6 to 8 miles, although if there is no swell breaking on the

barrier, they may not be seen until dangerously close. Small

sand cays can also be seen on the S part of the barrier, which
Sector 6. Australia—Coral Sea—Islands and Dangers 139

Pub. 127

also serves to indicate the leeward part of the reefs.

6.14 Bampton Island (19°07'S., 158°36'E.), located about 14

miles ESE of North Elbow, is of small extent and about 5.2m

high. A fringing reef extends 0.2 mile from its E side and up to

150m from the remaining sides. A sand cay, located 2 miles W

of Bampton Island, lies on the E edge of a small reef which has

an opening on its W side.

6.14 Depths of 31 to 73m are found in the channel between the island and the cay, but to the N they increase rapidly. The area S

of Bampton Island, for a distance of about 2 miles, has an average depth of 48m, but has only been partially surveyed.

6.14 North Bampton Reef (19°03'S., 158°43'E.) lies with its W

extremity 3 miles SW of Bampton Island and extends about 20

miles ENE to NE Cay. It extends E about 8 miles and curves

slightly to the N near its center. On the E extremity of this reef

is a small sand cay. A passage, 2 miles wide and having general

depths of 12.8 to 25.5m, lies E of the cay, between it and the S

extremity of another reef.

6.14 The last mentioned narrow reef extends about 7.5 miles N

and consists of broken patches. It terminates in an elbow at the

N extremity of Bampton Reefs; from the elbow the same reef

trends 8.5 miles in a S direction. A horseshoe-shaped reef lies 2

miles E of the SE end of the reef.

6.14 Northeast Bampton Reef (19°06'S., 159°03'E.) lies with its

NW end 1 mile SE of the above horseshoe-shaped reef. The

reef extends 2.7 miles SE, and then turns sharply for the same

distance SW, forming an elbow. Three small cays lie on the N

part of the reef; another small cay lies on the elbow.

6.14 Reynard Island (19°14'S., 158°58'E.) is 6.1m high, bushcovered, and fringed by a reef except on its W side. Southeast

Bampton Reef lies with its N end 3.5 miles SSE of Reynard Island and extends 10 miles S. There are drying sand cays on the

reef.

6.14 Skeleton Cay (19°27'S., 158°57'E.) is a coral patch with a

sand cay in its center.

6.14 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 11

to 18m, 1 mile SW of Bampton Island.

6.14 Fair anchorage has been obtained, in a depth of 25m, coral,

within the reef, 2.2 miles W of the sand cay on the elbow of

Northeast Bampton Reef. Foul ground extends 1.5 miles W

from the elbow.

6.14 Anchorage may be obtained off the NW or W side of Reynard Island, in depths of 16 to 26m, taking care to avoid a 2.7m

rocky patch 1 mile W of the island. This patch is often seen

from aloft.

Nereus Reef

6.15 Nereus Reef (20°07'S., 160°28'E.) is reported to have

a depth of 3.7m. Its position is doubtful. A shoal, with a depth

of 16m, lies 14 miles WNW of Nereus Reef. A depth of 46m

was reported to lie midway between them.

6.15 Two shoals were reported to lie 89 miles ENE and 82 miles

NE, respectively, of Nereus Reef.

North Part of Coral Sea—North of Marion Reef

Lihou Reef and Cays

6.16 Lihou Reef and Cays (17°22'S., 151°45'E.) are located with their SW extremity about 90 miles NW of the N extremity of Marion Reef. The reefs and cays extend about 56

miles NE from their SW extremity. Surveys have been made of

the SE side and the NE end of the group. A bank, with depths

of less than 200m, approximately 12 miles wide, was reported

to extend the whole length of the reef on its NW side. 

6.16 It has been reported that between the SW end of Lihou Reef,

and a sand cay, 20 miles NNE, there appeared to be no visual

signs of reefs or discolored water. A cay on a reef (17°36'30"S.,

151°25'00"E.) was reported to give a response on radar at 11

miles. The NW side of the reef, between the sand cay and Observatory Cay, appeared to be as charted.

6.16 From the SW extremity, the barrier consists of a chain of

reefs which extend in an ENE direction for about 40 miles to

the reef forming the W side of Herald Passage. About eight

cays lie on the barrier ; there are several openings between the

reefs which have not been examined. One of the cays lies about

6 miles WSW of the W side of Herald Passage and is about

2.4m high. A stranded wreck lies on a reef about 4 miles NE of

Herald Passage.

6.16 Herald Passage (17°24'S., 151°58'E.) is 1.5 miles wide,

with a ridge with depths of 7.3 to 9.1m. Inside the ridge there

are depths of 37 to 55m. From the entrance to Herald Passage,

the reef extends 18 miles NE, and then 9 miles W to Turtle Islet, forming a horseshoe bend. Within the bend the area has not

been closely sounded, but there are depths of 27.5 to 55m, and

patches with depths of 4.6m.

6.16 Observatory Cay (17°08'S., 152°06'E.) is 1.8m high and

covered with vegetation. Landing can be made on the W side

of the cay. From the cay a chain of reefs, with deep water close

inside them, extends 15 miles W and then 5 miles SW, and

continue in that direction along the NW side of Lihou Reef.

There are several prominent sand cays between Observatory

Cay, and Turtle Islet, 4 miles W, none of them more than 1.8m

high. A white hut and a tower, 14m high, are conspicuous on

Turtle Islet.

6.16 Anchorage.—Anchorage was reported within the SW end

of Lihou Reef, where there are depths of 14.6 to 51m, and also

in the entrance to Herald Passage, in a depth of 8m. Anchorage

may be obtained, in a depth of 27.5m, 0.7 mile S of Observatory Cay, with shelter from the swell.

The Diamond Islets

6.17 The Diamond Islets (17°25'S., 151°00'E.), four in

number, lie about 20 miles NW of the SW extremity of Lihou

Reef and Cays. They have broad sandy beaches and are covered with low trees and bushes. Central Diamond Islet lies in

position 17°27'S, 150°56'E; the other three islets lie 8 miles E,

9 miles W, and 15 miles SSW, respectively, of it. Shoal depths

of 9.1 and 10.9m were reported to lie 18 miles WSW and 13

miles W of West Diamond Islet.

6.17 East Diamond Islet is 8m high, with a reef extending 1.5

miles N and 1 mile elsewhere around its perimeter. Central Diamond Islet is 7.6m high, and surrounded by a reef similar to

the above reef. West Diamond Islet is 6.1m high, with a reef

extending 0.7 mile all around. South Diamond Islet is 21.5m

high and surrounded by a reef 0.7 mile all around. A shoal was

reported to lie about 4 miles W of Central Diamond Islet. 

6.17 Tregrosse Reefs (17°47'S., 150°37'E.), two small drying
140 Sector 6. Australia—Coral Sea—Islands and Dangers 

Pub. 127

reefs, lie 7 and 14 miles SW of South Diamond Islet, close inside the SE edge of a bank. Two below-water rocky patches lie

4 miles WNW and 7 miles W, respectively, of the SW part of

Tregrosse Reefs. The area comprising the Diamond Islets and

Tregrosse Reefs has only been partially examined.

6.17 Abington Reef (18°05'S., 149°37'E.) is nearly awash. The

reef is steep-to all around at a distance of 1 mile. Malay Reef,

18 miles WNW of Abington Reef, is difficult to see, not clearly

defined, and not steep-to. There is no discoloration of the water

and no line of breakers, which is typical of the reefs in the area.

The reef should be given a wide berth at all times.

The Coringa Islets

6.18 The Coringa Islets (16°58'S., 150°00'E.) consists of

two small reef-fringed islets. Southwest Islet (16°57'S.,

149°55'E.) lies at the SW extremity of the Coringa Islets in a

position about 93 miles NW of the SW extremity of Lihou

Reefs. Discolored water and foul ground extend up to 0.5 mile

N from the N side of the islet. A depth of 8.2m lies in an approximate position about 1 mile SW of the islet.

6.18 Chilcott Islet is located about 4.5 miles ENE of Southwest

Islet. It is fringed by reefs and foul ground to a distance of 0.7

mile. Both of the islets lie on drying reefs and are covered with

bushes. Depths of as little as 7.3m lie up to 2.5 miles NE and

1.5 miles NNE of Chilcott Islet. A depth of 11.9m lies about

0.8 mile NW of Chilcott Islet; a depth of 6.2m lies 6 miles NE

of the islet.

6.18 Southwest Islet was reported to lie 1 mile WSW of the charted position. The islet is infested with rats.

6.18 Anchorage.—Temporary anchorage may be obtained W of

Chilcott Islet and NNW of Southwest Islet, 0.2 mile off the

foul ground extending from the islets, but it must be noted that

the depths increase very rapidly outside the anchorages.

6.19 Magdelaine Cays (16°36'S., 150°20'E.) consist of an

islet and a sand cay. Magdelaine Islet, small and fringed by a

reef, lies about 26 miles NE of Chilcott Islet. The islet is 9.1m

high and covered with vegetation. The sand cay, located about

6 miles NNW of the islet, is reef fringed, and steep-to on all

sides. Landing can be effected on the W side of the cay where

there is a break in the reef, however, care must be taken to

avoid the numerous coral heads in the approach.

6.19 In 1989, Magdelaine Cays were reported to lie 2 miles E of

their charted position.

6.19 An 11m shoal, which has not yet been completely defined,

lies 4 miles W of Chilcott Islet. It was reported that the charted

soundings around the islet were incorrect. An unexamined

depth of 11m lies 1 mile NW of the islet.

6.19 An unexamined depth of 16.7m lies 26 miles SE of Magdelaine Cays; depths of 20m and 25.6m lie 3 miles NE and 4

miles S, respectively, of the 16.7m depth.

6.19 A depth of 10m was reported to lie 13 miles NE of Chilcott

Islet. A depth of 12m was reported to lie 12 miles WSW of

South West Islet.

6.19 Herald Cays (16°56'S., 149°13'E.) are two in number. The

NE cay lies 4 miles NE of the SW cay. The NE cay is 7m high

and the SW cay is 4.6m high; both are covered with vegetation

and lie on drying reefs.

6.19 Landings can be made on the NW side of both cays, through

breaks in the reefs, but care must be taken to avoid the numerous coral heads in the approaches.

6.19 A shoal, with a depth of 14.6m, lies between the two cays,

but it has not been examined; it is inadvisable to pass through

the passage. 

The Willis Islets

6.20 The Willis Islets (16°14'S., 150°00'E.) consists of

three islets lying on the E and N edges of a bank with general

depths of 24 to 49m. 

6.20 South Islet (16°18'S., 149°59'E.) lies 38 miles N of Chilcott

Island. South Islet, 6m high and covered with grass, lies at the

N end of a reef, which dries 0.9m, and extends 1 mile S. Buildings, surrounded by palms, and three radio masts stand near the

center of the island. A white radar dome atop a 20m lattice

tower and a large ground level radar dome are conspicuous.

Foul ground extends 0.7 mile W from the reef. 

6.20 Mid Islet, 5.8m high, 4 miles NNE of South Islet, lies on the

W edge of a reef, which dries 0.9m. Foul ground, with deep

water between patches, extends 0.7 mile S, 1 mile SW, and 0.7

mile N, respectively, of Mid Islet.

6.20 South Passage (16°16'S., 149°59'E.), with depths of 12.8 to

37m, lies between South Islet and Mid Islet. This passage may

be safely used with a good lookout aloft, passing midway between the islets. Tidal currents in the passage cause a dangerous overfall.

6.20 North Cay (16°09'S., 150°01'E.), a narrow sand cay, with a

small cay W of it which dries, lies 5 miles N of Mid Islet.

These sand cays lie on the NW part of a reef, which dries 0.9m,

and over which the sea always breaks. North Cay Reef is fronted by foul ground extending up to 1.5 miles from the inner side

of the S end of the reef.

6.20 The opening between Mid Islet and North Cay Reef is divided into two channels by a dangerous patch, on which there are

several shallow shoals, some of which are awash and break.

6.20 North Passage (16°13'S., 150°01'E.), between the dangerous patch and Mid Islet, is 1.2 miles wide, with depths of

14.6m. Within the entrance, the depths increase and are irregular.

6.20 The channel between the dangerous patch and the foul

ground, which extends S from North Cay Reef, is 0.6 mile

wide. Apart from the single line of soundings on the chart

across the entrance, it has not been surveyed.

6.20 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

49m, sand, 1 mile W of South Islet, and also in a depth of 46m,

coral, 0.7 mile WNW of Mid Islet. Before anchoring leeward

of the Willis Islets, a sufficient space of clear ground, which

will best be seen from aloft, should be found. This should allow for swinging room and for getting underway, without fouling the coral rocks, which rise abruptly to near the surface.

6.20 Caution.—The Willis Islets have been reported (1991) to lie

2 miles W of their charted position.

Diane Bank and Moore Reefs

6.21 Diane Bank (15°46'S., 149°43'E.), with a depth of

16.5m, lies near the N end of a bank with general depths of 22

to 51m, which extends 33 miles S. Depths of 14.6 to 18.3m lie

close inside the S end of the bank. A sand cay, 3m high, lies
Sector 6. Australia—Coral Sea—Islands and Dangers 141

Pub. 127

close inside the NW end of the bank. Depths of less than 18.3m

are reported to extend at least 3.5 miles NE from the sand cay.

6.21 Unexamined depths of 4m and 15m lie 1 mile SW and 2

miles ENE of the sand cay.

6.21 Moore Reefs (16°00'S., 149°09'E.), three coral reefs awash,

lie 32 miles WSW of Diane Bank. There are two sand cays on

the N reef; one is 2.4m high while the other dries 0.9m. Both

reefs are steep-to.

6.21 A reef lies 24 miles WSW of Diane Bank; a 3m shoal was

reported to lie 3 miles WNW of this reef. Numerous sharks

have been sighted in this vicinity.

6.21 A depth of 22m lies 15 miles SSW of South Islet.

Flinders Reefs

6.22 Flinders Reefs (17°35'S., 148°24'E.) consists of two

main groups and several adjacent reefs and shoal patches. The

S reef (17°55'S., 148°30'E.) of the S group lies with its S extremity about 220 miles WNW of the N extremity of Marion

Reef. These reefs have only been partially surveyed.

6.22 It has been reported that the positions of Dart Reef, North

Reef, and Herrald’s Surprise lie 1 to 2 miles further N than

charted.

6.22 South Flinders, the smaller S complex, is 8.5 miles long and

4 miles wide, lying SE-NW. The SE end of this S group is a

semi-circular reef, 4 miles wide, opening to the NW, which

dries in places with deeper water between. Rocks, both submerged and drying, extend 0.5 mile from the inner edge of this

reef.

6.22 Channel Reef, which dries, is the N part of South Flinders

group. In the center of the reef is a drying sand cay.

6.22 Entrance Reef (17°49'S., 148°25'E.), which dries, and lies 2

miles S of Channel Reef and 1 mile SSE of the W reef, is the

SW limit of the group. A patch of shoal water lies midway between Channel Reef and the W reef; it is reported that deep water lying either side of this patch is the preferred entrance into

the lagoon contained within the group of reefs. 

6.22 North Flinders Reef is a large group of reefs and shoal water,

21 miles N-S and 17 miles E-W, which enclose a lagoon. At

the SE corner of the group is East Ribbon Reef(17°40'S.,

148°35'E.), which is narrow, curving, and 11 miles long. A

sand cay was reported (1978) to lie on the N part of this reef.

6.22 Toe Reef (17°42'S., 148°31'E.) lies 0.8 mile W of the SW

point of East Ribbon Reef, with foul ground between. Main

Cay Reef lies 2 miles W of Toe Reef. Cod Reef, awash, lies 2.5

miles W of Main Cay Reef.

6.22 Victoria Cay (17°44'S., 148°27'E.) is a 2m high sand cay

that lies on Main Cay Reef. An automated weather station,

consisting of instruments, aerials, and a 15m high radio mast,

stands on the NW side of the cay.

6.22 South West Reef(17°43'S., 148°21'E.) lies awash and clearly visible, is the SW extremity of the N group of Flinders Reef

and it is separated from Cod Reef by a 1 mile wide passage that

is fouled by a number of coral heads. A boulder, 1m high, lies

on the W edge of this reef. Breakers on this reef were seen at 3

miles (1990).

6.22 Mid Reef (17°35'S., 148°20'E.), awash, lies 7 miles N of

South West Reef. Unexamined shoals lie 2.7, 4, 5.3, and 6.5

miles N of the boulder on South West Reef.

6.23 North West Reef (17°31'S., 148°18'E.), awash, is the

W edge of the N group of Flinders Reef. An unexamined shoal

lies 1.2 miles SE of North West Reef on the edge of the bank.

There are apparently several obstructions lying between this

shoal and Mid Reef, 2.5 miles SSE.

6.23 Anchorage may be obtained 1 mile SW of the N end of East

Ribbon Reef, in depths of 42 to 48m; a good lookout is essential. A reef, which dries 0.5m, and a coral head, 0.1m, lie 1

mile SSE and 0.9 mile S, respectively, from this anchorage.

6.23 Another anchorage lies 5 miles SSW of the above anchorage.

A single line of soundings leads to this anchorage, and a good

lookout from aloft must be kept as this course leads close E of

a drying patch midway between the two anchorages. Another

drying patch lies 1.2 miles ENE of the S anchorage, and two

more patches lie 3 miles WSW of it. A shoal, with a depth of

6.1m, was reported in position 17°24'S, 148°54'E.

6.23 North Reef (17°27'S., 148°20'E.), which dries 0.9m, lies

close inside the NW edge of the main bank. 

6.23 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained 0.5 mile W of

North Reef, in a depth of 46m.

6.24 The N danger of the group of Flinders Reefs is a bank

(17°24'S., 148°25'E.), with depths of less than 15m. The passage between North Reef and this bank is clear. From seaward,

depths rise steeply from 400m to less than 60m and deepen

very slightly.

6.24 The edge of the main bank between the N danger and the N

point of East Ribbon Reef, 10.5 miles SSE, has not been delineated but appears to be clear. Depths of less than 30m are indicated 5.5 miles NNW from the N point of East Ribbon Reef.

6.24 Dart Reef (17°24'S., 48°11'E.), a circular reef, about 2 miles

in diameter, lies about 7.5 miles WNW of North Reef. The

reef, which is steep-to, encloses a lagoon in which there are

many rocky heads. There is an opening to the lagoon on the

NW side of the reef. The reef is entirely covered at HW and in

calm weather is not always visible.

6.24 McDermott Bank, with a least known depth of 22m, lies

about 20 miles WNW of Dart Reef.

6.24 Herald’s Surprise (17°20'S., 148°26'E.) lies 8 miles NE of

North Reef and is circular in shape, with a diameter of about 2

miles. The reef, over which the sea breaks, dries in places, and

is steep-to. Some above-water rocks lie near the NW edge of

the reef.

6.24 In 1981, a shoal area 3 miles long and 1 mile wide, lying in a

NE-SW direction, was reported to exist in position 17°24'18"S,

148°53'48"E, about 25 miles E of Herald’s Surprise. The least

known depth over the shoal is 4.9m.

Flora Reef and Holmes Reef

6.25 Flora Reef (16°45'S., 147°45'E.), lying about 50

miles NW of Herald’s Surprise, was reported to have breakers

on its S side where the reef is about 4.5 miles long. The SE extremity of the reef may dry at LW. Discolored water extends

from the SW end of the reef.

6.25 Holmes Reef (16°28'S., 147°58'E.) lies with the S extremity

of the W group of reefs, 13 miles NNE of Flora Reef, and consists of two groups, separated by a 3.5 mile wide passage

which appears to be free of dangers. It is very deep N and S of

the reefs. The E group of reefs is awash and encloses a shallow
142 Sector 6. Australia—Coral Sea—Islands and Dangers 

Pub. 127

lagoon, which is entered on its W side. 

6.25 The W group of Holmes Reefs consists of three reefs, which

dry in places. Only the S and N ends of the E reef, and the N

side of the N reef, have been surveyed. A conspicuous tower

stands on the sand cay near the center of the W group. An underwater rock lies 7.7 miles NE of the conspicuous tower on

the W group.

6.25 Landings can be made on the W side of the two charted cays,

taking care to avoid the coral heads in the near approach. 

6.25 There is apparently a deep, but narrow passage between the

S and E reefs, but that between the E and N reefs is foul. Two

patches of discolored water were reported to lie 1 mile within

the W end of the N reef.

6.25 When approaching the W group of Holmes Reefs from SW,

care must be taken not to mistake the S sand cay for the 1.8m

high cay 2.5 miles NE of it.

6.25 A depth of 41m lies 40 miles W of the W group.

Bougainville Reef

6.26 Bougainville Reef (15°30'S., 147°07'E.) is located

about 69 miles NNW of the N extremity of Holmes Reefs. It is

about 2.5 miles in length and 1.5 miles wide. The reef dries at

half tide and, when covered, is difficult to see in calm weather.

Two stranded wrecks lie on this reef. It was reported that both

wrecks give good radar returns up to 14 miles. A light stands

on Bougainville Reef.

Osprey Reef

6.27 Osprey Reef (13°55'S., 146°36'E.) lies 97 miles

NNW of Bougainville Reef. The reef extends in a general

NNW direction for a distance of about 16 miles and encloses a

lagoon from 1.5 to 4.5 miles wide. North Horn, the N extremity

of the reef, is steep-to with great depths 0.5 mile N of it. Rapid

Horn (14°01'S., 146°42'E.) forms the S extremity of the reef.

The reef in most places is awash; during strong SE winds, the

sea breaks heavily on the SE side and moderately on the NE

side, but does not break on the W side.

6.27 The entrance to the lagoon is 0.5 mile wide, with depths of

9.1 to 18.3m. There are several detached reefs within 1 mile S

of the entrance. The entrance to the reef is reported (1989) to

be clearly defined from seaward. Depths immediately within

the entrance are generally 19 to 35m, although there are least

depths of 10m. The S side of the entrance is shoal and encumbered with coral. From just within the N side of the entrance, a

line of detached coral heads extends ESE for a distance of 0.7

mile; the deepest water is reportedly 50m S of this line.

6.27 There is anchorage in the middle of the entrance, in a depth

of 11m, but the depths increase very rapidly outside. 

6.27 Shark Reef (14°17'S., 146°56'E.), with a least depth of

7.8m, coral, and steep-to, lies 9 miles SE of Rapid Horn. A

bank, with a depth of 14.5m, lies 13 miles SE of Shark Reef,

while a 10m shoal lies 4 miles SSE of Shark Reef. 
143

Pub. 127

7. 

Australia—Cape Townshend to Cape Grafton

7.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 7 — CHART INFORMATION
145

Pub. 127

SECTOR 7 

AUSTRALIA—CAPE TOWNSEND TO CAPE GRAFTON

7.0 Plan.—This sector describes the E coast of Australia from

Cape Townshend NW to Cape Grafton and the inner and outer

parts of Great Barrier Reef from Swain Reefs NW to Grafton

Passage. The first part of the sector will describe the Great Barrier Reef, the latter part will describe the coastline from S to N,

and off-lying islands, islets, and dangers.

General Remarks

7.1 The Great Barrier Reef consists of a group of coral

reefs extending in a general NW direction from Swain Reefs to

Anchor Cay (9°22'S., 144°07'E.), a distance of about 1,000

miles. In general, the reefs follow the trend of the coast as far N

as Cape Direction (12°51'S., 143°32'E.), where the barrier diverges from the coast in a N direction to Anchor Cay.

The outer edge of the reefs varies in distance from the coast.

When viewed from the E, the outer edge appears as a series of

oval-shaped or circular patches clustered together. Few of the

reefs seem to exceed 2 miles in diameter and a second line of

breakers is generally seen inside. Little is known about the outer edge of the reefs between Swain Reefs and the parallel of

20°S. The inner edge of Great Barrier Reef consists of large

scattered reefs with deep channels between them. There are

many passages, seldom more than 3 miles wide, leading

through the reefs to the coast, but only a small portion of them

have been examined.

7.1 Winds—Weather.—The Southeast Trade Winds prevail

throughout the year off this part of the coast. Southwest winds

occur 4 to 5 days a month from May to July; NW or N winds

occur about 6 to 7 days a month from September to December.

The wind is usually moderate, but attains force 7 or more about

20 or 30 days a year. Brief squalls, sometimes of gale force, are

fairly frequent with the Southeast Trades.

7.1 Land and sea breezes, strengthened by the trade winds, are

often strong in the afternoon and may cause a considerable sea.

At such times, the wind often shifts to the NE.

7.1 Tropical cyclones, called Queensland Hurricanes, occur

about 4 or 5 times a year. They are most frequent from December to April, but have occurred in every month except August.

7.1 Fog is almost unknown 20 miles or more off the coast and

visibility is good, except during heavy rain. At times, there

may be some haze with the trade winds. Along the coast, fog or

mist sometimes develops at night, but usually disperses soon

after sunrise. Such fogs occur 2 or 3 times a month from May

to September and sometimes in other months.

7.1 Storm warnings and weather information are broadcast by

radio.

7.1 Tides—Currents.—The current appears to set N within 10

miles of the outer edge of Great Barrier Reef, the rate depending to a great extent on the strength of the wind. During the

months of the Southeast Trades (April to November), a continuous N set will be experienced, except in certain areas where

the tidal currents are predominant.

7.1 From May to November, close to the outer edge of the reefs

between Flinders Passage and One and a Half Mile Opening,

the current has always been found to set S, parallel with the

line of reefs. It appears to be little affected by the prevailing SE

winds. The rate of the current is diminished by the W flood

current and increased by the E ebb current; the greatest

strength being about 1.5 knots. In the former case, the water

sets through the reef openings in a SW direction towards the

coast.

7.1 Within the above-mentioned limits, 20 to 30 miles from the

outer edge of Great Barrier Reef, the current is very uncertain

and somewhat weaker. During the months of the Southeast

Trades, a surface drift varying in strength up to about 1 knot

will be found to set in a NW direction. Very often, when the

wind subsides, a reactionary flow in the opposite direction will

be experienced.

7.1 The tidal currents set through the openings in the Great Barrier Reef in a W or SW direction on the rising tide and in an E

or NE direction during the falling tide. In the wider openings

these tidal currents are only slight, but in the narrower openings their rates may be as high as 2 knots at springs, increasing

to 3 knots if the moon has a high declination at springs.

7.1 A nominal rise and fall of the tide will, when the sea is

smooth, entirely alter the appearance of the reefs. At LW, their

margins show clearly and large masses of rock occasionally appear. The interior, or lagoon part of the reef, is then of a light

green color, contrasting sharply with the darker blue of the

channels between them. As the tide rises, these characteristics

become less and less distinct.

7.1 Cays, composed of dead, bleached, coral fragments, form on

some of the reefs, but their position and extent are known to

shift considerably and at times they erode completely, only to

reappear some years later.

7.1 Vessels should use the main examined openings, even

though some of the other openings may appear to be clear of

dangers. As a general rule, the waters lying between the latter

and the Inner Route have not been examined. 

7.1 Caution.—Vessels navigating in the vicinity of the outer

edge of the Great Barrier Reef or through any of its passages

are cautioned to keep a good lookout and to take frequent

soundings. All passages from seaward through the Great Barrier Reef between 11°40'S and 19°07'S have been swept and are

open to surface navigation. Due to sunken mines, it is not safe

for anchoring, dredging, trawling, cable laying, or resting on

the bottom by submarines. Most of the area has been examined, but little is known of the outer edge of the reefs between

Swain Reefs and the parallel of 20°S.

7.1 Military exercises are conducted off this section of the Australian coastline. For further details, see Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia.

7.1 Restricted areas.—The Commonwealth of Australia has established a system of regulated zones within the waters comprising the Great Barrier Reef. 

7.1 These areas, established as the Great Barrier Reef Marine

Park, are designed to control the movement of all vessels with-
146 Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 

Pub. 127
Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 147

Pub. 127

in specific size categories and geographic locations.

7.1 Furthur information can be found in Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia.

7.1 The limits of these areas, accompanied by amplifying information, are seen on the appropriate chart. Complete information regarding the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Zonning

Plan, which includes Zoning Maps, Designated Shipping Areas, and Particularly Sensitive Sea Areas, can be found on the

Authority’s web site.

Navigation in the Great Barrier Reef

7.2 Compulsory pilotage.—The Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Act 1975 requires all vessels of 70m or greater in

length, including all oil tankers, chemical tankers, and liquefied gas carriers of any length are to carry a pilot for the inner

passage through the Great Barrier Reef (GBR). A pilot must be

licensed under Commonwealth, State, or Territory law, when

taking passage, as follows:

1. Through the inner route of the Great Barrier Reef between the parallels of Cape York (10°41'S) and Cairns Roads

(16°40'S).

2. Through Hydrographer’s Passage (19°47'S., 150°

24'E.).

3. Through Whitsunday Passage (20°20'S., 148°54'E.)

and in the vicinity of the Whitsunday Group and the Lindeman Group.

In addition to the legislation that applies to the Great Barrier

Reef Marine Park, the International Maritime Organization

(IMO) recommends that ships transiting Torres Strait and

Great North East Channel make use of the available pilotage

due to the navigational complexity and environmental sensitivity of the region. 

The Australian Maritime Safety Authority (AMSA) also recommends that Masters who are not familiar with the sections

of the Inner Routes of the Great Barrier Reef, Palm Passage,

and Grafton Passage, employ the services of licensed pilots.

Penalties.—It is an offense for a ship of the size and type

specified to navigate without a pilot in the compulsory area;

the master and owner each will be liable to a fine. Similarly, liabilities are also imposed on vessels that had entered an Australian port previously in the GBR area without a pilot, with a

3-year statute of limitations. 

7.2Queensland Coast and Torres Strait Pilot Services—

Draft limitations and service.—Licensed pilots will pilot vessels through Gannet Passage, Varzin Passage, Prince of Wales

Channel, and Torres Strait with a maximum draft up to 12.2m.

The draft limitation of 12.2m applies only to vessels transiting

the Great Barrier Reef Inner Route from Torres Strait (Booby

Island) to Cape Flattery or through the Great North East Channel to Dalrymple Island.

Vessels entering or leaving the Inner Route by way of

Grafton Passage, Palm Passage, and Hydrographer’s Passage

are restricted by draft limitations at the Australian port of call

or departure from it. The minimum underkeel clearances are,

as follows:

1. Gannet and Varzin Passages—1.0m.

2. Prince of Wales Channel—1.0m for vessels with a

draft less than 11.9m, or a clearance of 10 per cent of draft

for vessels that exceed 11.9m.

7.2Pilotage and boarding arrangements.—Pilot services in

the Torres Strait (including the Great North East Channel) and

the Great Barrier Reef are provided by three private companies, as follows:

1. Australian Reef Pilots (“Reef Pilots”).

2. Torres Pilots.

3. Hydropilots PIL (“Hydro Pilots Helicopter”)—Hydrographers Passage only.

7.2 For northbound vessels transiting Hydrographers Passage

(Hay Point and Dalrymple), “Reef Pilots” will remain on board

to pilot the vessel through Jomard Passage and disembark in

Papua New Guinea waters at the Torlesse Pilot Boarding

Ground N of the N entrance to Jomard Passage. Southbound

vessels will board “Reef Pilots” at the Torlesse Pilot Boarding

Ground in Papua New Guinea, who will remain on board to

Hay Point to pilot the vessel through Jomard Passage. Australian Reef Pilots are requesting 10 days notice to allow for the

relevant arrangements and formalities to be completed. The

other two piloting providers have advised no changes to their

services. 

7.2 Boarding by helicopter is used as an alternative to launch

services at some pilot boarding places (PBP) and for Hydrographers Passage. Boarding by helicopter, when used, is by landon operation only. Masters should consult Marine Orders Part

57 and the Australian Code of Safe Practice for Ship Helicopter Transfers or the International Chamber of Shipping Guide

to Helicopter/Ship Operations and confirm that the vessel is

suitable for a land-on operation when ordering a pilot at a

boarding place where this practice is an option.

7.2 A line will be required to lift aboard the pilot’s luggage and

equipment (usually two items). 

7.2 Requesting pilotage by inbound vessels.—Contact pilots,

preferably 5 days before arrival, informing the boarding place

with ETA (UTC+10 hours), vessel’s deepest draft, and the destination. All messages are acknowledged by the pilots, who

will also advise on ETA update requirements.

 Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority

http://www.gbrmpa.gov.au

Torres Strait Pilotage

Port and Pilot Boarding Place Position VHF 

channel Pilot boards by

Brisbane Point Cartwright 26°43'S, 153°11'E 16 Launch.

Gladstone North Point 23°44'S, 151°22'E 12 and 16 Launch or helicopter.

Whitsunday Penrith Island 21°00'S, 149°57'E 9 and 16 Helicopter.

Whitsunday Bailey Island 21°00S, 149°36'E 9 and 16 Helicopter.
148 Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 

Pub. 127

7.2 Helicopters are restricted to land-on operations under visually clear and moderate weather conditions. Winch-down transfers are not undertaken in Australia.

7.2 Requesting pilotage by outbound vessels.—Arrangements

are made directly with the Pilots Office or by the ship’s agent.

7.2 Pilotage for Torres Strait, including the Great Northeast

Channel.—Pilot boarding arrangement may be made for any

port in Queensland, New South Wales, Northern Territory, or

Papua New Guinea at any of the following pilot boarding places listed in the table titled “Torres Strait Pilotage.”

7.2 Deep Water Route.—A Deep Water Route has been established for deep draft vessels between the Barrow Islands

(14°22.5'S., 144°41.6'E) and Lizard Island (14°40.2'S.,

145°24.7'E). 

7.2 Two-Way Route.—A Two-Way Route has been established

between the Palm Isles (18o25'S., 145o31'E) and the Low Isles

(16o23'S., 145o33'E), continuing to Booby Island (10o36'S.,

141o55'E). The use is not mandatory, but it does indicate the

best and safest route.

7.2 Area to be Avoided.—The area of the Capricorn Group and

the Buker Groups in the S area of the Great Barrier Reef is designated an Area to be Avoided. Ships exceeding 500 grt should

avoid the area bounded by a line connecting the following positions:

a. 23°10'S, 151°56'E. 

b. 23°53'S, 152°28'E.

c. 23°55'S, 152°28'E.

d. 23°57'S, 152°26'E.

e. 23°57'S, 152°24'E.

f. 23°32'S, 152°55'E.

g. 23°36'S, 151°39'E.

h. 23°33'S, 151°35'E.

i. 23°30'S, 151°35'E.

j. 23°25'S, 151°53'E.

k. 23°20'S, 151°50'E.

l. 23°20'S, 151°40'E.

m. 23°15'S, 151°40'E.

n. 23°10'S, 151°52'E.

Mandatory Ship Reporting System

7.2 As of December 2004, the identifier REEFVTS has been

adopted for the Great Barrier Reef and Torres Strait Vessel

Traffic Service. This service has been established as a means of

enhancing navigational safety and enviormental protection in

these areas.

Palm Passage Pith Reef 18°13'S, 147°07'E 9 and 16 Helicopter.

Cairns Yorkeys Knob 16°44'S, 145°45'E 20 Launch or helicopter.

Grafton Passage Euston Reef 16°39'S, 146°14'E 20 Launch or helicopter.

Torres Strait Goods Island 10°34'S, 142°04'E 20 Launch or helicopter.

Torres Strait Booby Island 10°36'S, 141°50'E 20 Launch or helicopter.

Great North East Channel Dalrymple Island 9°34'S, 143°24'E 20 Launch.

Torres Strait Pilotage

Port and Pilot Boarding Place Position VHF 

channel Pilot boards by

Pilot Contact—Australian Reef Pilots 

Brisbane Head Office

Facsimile:

Telephone:

E-mail:

Internet:

Mobile:

61-7-3026-2666

61-7-3026-2660 (office hours) 

operations@reefpilots.com.au

http://www.reefpilots.com.au

6-(0)413-878792 (24 hours)

Mackay Pilot Station

Facsimile:

Telephone:

E-mail:

61-7-4953-0736

61-7-4957-4877

hydropil@tpgi.com.au

Cairns Pilot Station

Facsimile:

Telephone:

61-7-4055-7828

61-7-4055-8311 

Thursday Island Pilot Station

Facsimile:

Telephone:

E-mail:

61-7-4069-1570 

61-7-4069-1570 

arptis@bigpond.com.au

Note.—The VHF call sign for all of the above is REEFPILOTS.

Pilot Contact—Torres Pilots 

Brisbane Operations Offices

Facsimile:

Telephone:

E-mail:

Internet:

61-7-3217-9722

61-7-3217-9544 (24 hours)

operations@torrespilots.com.au

http://www.torrespilots.com.au

Pilot Base—Thursday Island

Facsimile:

Telephone:

E-mail:

61-7-4069-2252

61-7-4069-2251 (24 hours)

torresti@bigpond.com.au

Pilot Base—Great North East Channel

Facsimile:

Telephone:

Contact through Thursday Island 

Pilot Base

Pilot Base—Hamilton Island

Facsimile:

Telephone:

E-mail:

61-7-4946-8280 

61-7-4946-8249 

torres@whitsunday.net.au

Note.—The VHF call sign for all of the above is

TORRESPILOTS.
Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 149

Pub. 127

7.2 REEFVTS consists of two major component, as follows:

1. A mandatory Ship Reporting System (SRS) known as

the Great Barrier Reef and Torres Strait Ship Reporting System (REEFREP).

2. A traffic monitoring system including radar, AIS (Automated Identification System), and Automated Position Reporting (APS) via INMARSAT-C.

3. The system is manned and operated 24 hours by Maritime Safety Queensland personnel operating from the

REEFVTS Center, (call idenity: REEFVTS and call sign:

VZQ641) situated in Townsville.

4. Contact information is, as follows:

a. Telephone: 61-7-47211536

b. Facsimile: 61-7-47210633

c. E-mail: reefvts@rcs1.amsa.gov.au

7.2 Purpose.—REEFVTS compiles and maintains a traffic image of shipping using REEFRP information communicated by

ships and information received from other sensors. This image

allows REEFVTS to provide ship traffic information and other

navigational safety related information to shipping within the

REEFVTS waters.

7.2 The REEFVTS User Manual should be consulted for complete information and is available online at the following web

site:

REEFREP

1. Ships of the following general categories are required

to participate in the reporting system:

a. all ships of 50m or greater in overall length;.

b. all oil tankers, liquefied gas carriers, chemical tankers or ships coming within the INF Code, regardless of

length (See paragraph 2 below).

c. ships engaged in towing or pushing where the towing or pushing vessel or the towed or pushed vessel is a

vessel prescribed within the categories in paragraphs “a”

or “b” or where the length of the tow, measured from the

stern of the towing vessel to the after end of the tow, exceeds 150m. 

2. For the purposes of the requirement in sub-paragraph

1b “oil tanker” means ships defined at Regulation 1(4) of

Annex I to MARPOL 73/78 together with those ships other

than oil tankers to which Regulation 2(2) of Annex I to

MARPOL 73/78 applies, that is, ships “fitted with cargo

spaces which are constructed and utilized to carry oil in bulk

of aggregate capacity of 200 cubic meters or more.”

7.2 Purpose.—The purpose of the SRS is to enhance navigational safety, thereby minimizing the risk of a maritime accident and consequential pollution and major damage to the

marine environment. The areas covered by the SRS are internationally recognized as being of outstanding environmental and

social importance. 

7.2 System overview.—The SRS is based on a VHF voice reporting system employing a radio network, presently consisting of 14 sites (three of which are satellite VHF), along the

Queensland coast and on islands in the Torres Strait. There are

also four additional stand-by sites situated at High Peak,

Mount Mackay, Palfrey Island, and Hammond Island. 

7.2 Through this network certain categories of ships are required

to report their entry into, and progress through, the SRS area

with reference to a series of designated points.

7.2 There are also radar sites at selected focal points within the

SRS area. The radar stations monitor vessels entering the SRS

area and their compliance with the reporting requirement.

7.2 In the Torres Strait there are two radars, one at Cairns and

one in the S area of the inner route on Penrith Island.

7.2 The VHF radio sites are remotely controlled from a Ship Reporting Center (REEFCENTER), set up at Hay Point near

Mackay, as are the radars. REEFCENTER, staffed by operators

from Queensland Transport, manages the system on a 24-hour

basis.

Great Barrier Reef and Torres Strait Vessel Traffic 

Service

http://www.msq.qld.gov.au/qt/MSQ.nsf/ReferenceLookup/

reefvts_user_manual.pdf/$file/reefvts_user_manual.pdf

REEFREP—Torres Strait and Great Barrier Reef 

(Inner Route) Ship Reporting System

http://www.amsa.gov.au/Shipping_Safety/AUSREPand_REEFREP/REEFREP

REEFREP—Required Information

Field Meaning

A Name, call sign, and IMO/Lloyd’s Number.

C Name of Mandatory Reporting Point (MRP) at which they are reporting or the position in latitude and 

longitude if not at or in the vicinity of an MRP.

E Name of next MRP or course if not tracking between MRPs.

F ETA and next MRP or speed.

J Whether coastal pilot on board (“Yes” or “No”) and pilot details.

L Name of final MRP at which ship is expected to leave the SRS Area.

O Draft.

P Type of cargo being carried and whether it is classed as hazardous (“Yes” or “No”).
150 Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 

Pub. 127

7.2 Mandatory Reporting Procedure.—The SRS requires

ships to report certain information to REEFCENTER, radio

call sign “VZQ 641.” Full details of the SRS procedures, including message format, communications arrangements, and

reporting points, are provided in the publication AUSREP and

REEFREP Ship Reporting Systems—Ship Reporting Instructions for the Australian Area, available free of charge from:

1. Any office of the Australian Maritime Safety Authority (AMSA).

2. Queensland Transport (Maritime Division) in Brisbane.

3. Offices of the Regional Harbor Master in Queensland

ports.

7.2 Information required in REEFREP.—See the table titled

REEFREP—Required Information.

7.2 AUSREP/REEFREP Interface.—A two-way data exchange method is implemented between the SRS and the existing AUSREP system, operated from Australian Maritime

Safety Authority (AMSA) Rescue Coordination Center (RCC),

Canberra. Ships participating in both AUSREP and the REEFREP systems during their transit of the REEFREP SRS area

will be provided with a reporting service by the REEFCENTER and the RCC. That is, while in the SRS area, a ship

reports to the REEFCENTER and does not report to the RCC

for AUSREP, except when AUSREP participants are departing

a port in Queensland within the REEFREP area; in this instance, an AUSREP Sailing Plan (SP) is submitted to the RCC

(preferably via INMARSAT C or facsimile) prior to a departure from the port. The voyage details contained in the SP will

then be relayed to the REEFCENTER in readiness for the

ship’s VHF report at the first mandatory reporting point in the

REEFREP SRS. The reason for this procedure is to avoid long

detailed reports via VHF.

7.2 Entering the REEFREP SRS Area.—On first entering the

SRS operational area from outside the area or when sailing

from a port within the reporting area, ships are required to provide a position report (PR), including details such as identity,

position, intended route, cargo and other supplementary information, when at the first designated SRS Reporting Point. The

extent of the report will depend on whether the reporting vessel

has previously sent a Sailing Plan (SP) message into the AUSREP system (AUSREP SP). If a ship is already an AUSREP reporter on first entry to the SRS the REEFREP system will

require a brief PR from that vessel.

7.2 Ships reporting into the SRS are to use voice on VHF channel 5, 18 or 19 with REEFCENTRE. 

7.2 Masters who are concerned as to the security of providing

cargo details over VHF can provide this information separately

from the voice message by other means, such as telephone, prior to the first REEFREP report if so desired.

7.2 When, for any reason, communication is not possible, ships

are to pass the required report in a timely manner by alternative

means employing one of the following methods:

1. Other INMARSAT services.

2. Other satellite services.

3. Telephone: 61-7-4956-3581

4. Facsimile: 61-7-4956-3367

5. Telex: +7146483

6. E-mail: reefvts@rcsl.amsa.gov.au

7.2 If there is a failure with the ship’s primary or alternate communications equipment and prevents the relaying of any required reports, it should be recorded in the ship’s radio log or

the Official Log Book. 

Swain Reefs to Flinders Passage

7.3 Swain Reefs (22°00'S., 152°30'E.) lie with their S extremity about 120 miles E of Cape Townshend and 142 miles

NNW of Sandy Cape (24°42'S., 153°16'E.). The sea breaks

heavily on the outer edges of the reefs, and in good weather

may be seen from a distance of 6 to 7 miles. Reefs and cays, S

of latitude 21°34'S, and between the meridians 152°20'E and

152°42'E, have been reported.

7.3 Hixson Cay (22°21'S., 152°40'E.), near the S extremity of

Swain Reefs, is awash at HW. Another small cay, 3.7m high,

lies 1 mile SSW of Hixson Cay. Both Cays are bare of vegetation. When approaching Swain Reefs from the S, the bottom is

irregular and caution is necessary. Small vessels may obtain

anchorage, in a depth of 64m, coral, 1.5 miles SE of Hixson

Cay. Caution is necessary at all times as these cays have been

noted to disappear at certain tide conditions.

7.3 The reefs, which lie between 9 and 22 miles NNE of Hixson

Cay, were reported to lie 4 miles farther W than charted.

7.3 Two openings in the reefs, with anchorage just within, lie 10

miles NE and 31.5 miles N, respectively, of Hixson Cay. The S

opening is 0.7 mile wide, with depths 46 to 55m in mid-channel. As this opening lies obliquely to the general line of the

reefs, it is not easily seen until well open. The N opening is 1

mile wide, with depths of 33 to 37m in mid-channel. A depth

of 37m was reported to lie 10 miles E of the S opening. A

stranded wreck was reported to lie 4.5 miles N of the S openQ Any damage, defects, deficiencies, or other limitations affecting the ship when it enters the SRS Area or 

which arise while the ship is in the area.

R In the event of a Dangerous Goods (DG) incident, a Harmful Substances (HS) incident, or Marine 

Pollutants (MP) incident, the ship is required to report details. 

U Ship details comprising ship type, length, and gross tonnage.

X Any additional information considered relevant to navigational safety in the SRS Area.

REEFREP—Required Information

Field Meaning

Australian Maritime Safety Authority

http://www.amsa.gov.au
Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 151

Pub. 127

ing.

7.3 Drying reefs extend 7 miles WSW from Hixson Cay.

Howard Patch lies 5 miles WSW of Hixson Cay. Discolored

water has been reported S of Howard Patch and Hixson Cay.

7.3 Zodiac Cay (21°07'S., 152°40'E.), at the N extremity of

Swain Reefs, is 2.4m high, composed of lumps of coral and

sand, and lies on the middle of a reef. There are sand cays on

the reefs, which extend between 4.5 and 6 miles E of Zodiac

Cay. There are shoal patches in the area of Zodiac Cay, and extreme caution is necessary. 

7.3 Anchorage is afforded, in a depth of 42m, about 1 mile NW

of Zodiac Cay.

7.3 The inner edges of Swain Reefs extend NW from Howard

Patch and consist of Herald No. 1 Reef, Heralds Prong No. 2

Reef, Heralds Prong No. 3 Reef, and Heralds Reef Prong. All

the above reefs dry. A tower, conspicuous on radar, stands on

Gannet Cay, 14 miles ENE of Herald No. 1 Reef.

7.3 The SW edge of a line of submerged coral reefs and foul

ground extends NW for 7 miles from a position 11 miles W of

Heralds Prong No. 3 Reef. 

7.3 Bell Cay (21°46'S., 151°15'E.), a small sand cay near the N

edge of a drying reef, lies 11 miles SW of Heralds Prong No. 3

Reef. The cay is covered with a sparse growth of bushes. There

are large boulders on the E edge of the reef, on which the sea

breaks heavily. 

7.3 Anchorage may be obtained off the N side of the reef, in a

depth of 37m, but the bottom is hard and uneven.

Great Barrier Reef—Outer Edges

7.4 From the NE extremity of Swain Reefs, located about

80 miles N of Howard Patch, the outer edge of the reefs curve

abruptly in a WNW direction for about 150 miles to a position

about 100 miles E of the N extremity of Gloucester Island

(20°00'S., 148°27'E.). This area has been partially examined

and little is known about this portion of the outer edge of the

reefs. From the last position, the outer edge of the reefs continues in the same direction for a distance of about 140 miles to

the entrance to Flinders Passage, the first important passage

through the reefs from the S.

7.4 Numerous detached reefs exist from the outer edge of Great

Barrier Reef between Flinders Passage and Grafton Passage,

165 miles NW. None of these reefs are of very large extent and

nearly all the outer ones are awash or dry. Depths outside the

line of reefs for a distance of about 1 mile are less than 73m.

Farther outside, the depths increase sharply to more than 200m.

7.4 The principal passages through the reefs in this area are

Flinders Passage, Magnetic Passage, Palm Passage, Flora Pass

and Grafton Passage. Other openings are Geranium Passage

and Noggin Passage. These passages all lead into the Inner

Route and to the various ports on the NE coast of Australia.

Flinders Passage

7.5 The seaward entrance of Flinders Passage (18°55'S.,

148°00'E.) lies to the E of the reef located with its N extremity

in position 18°44'S, 147°58'E. The general direction of the

channel is nearly N and S. It is about 20 miles long and from

1.5 to 7.5 miles wide, and bounded on either side by reefs.

7.5 The inner or S entrance lies between the SE end of Bowden

Reef (19°03'S., 147°56'E.) and the W side of Mid Reef, 8 miles

to the ESE. Both of these reefs are marked by boulders and the

sea breaks over Mid Reef. Depths in the channel are irregular.

7.5 Flinders Passage, although frequently used, has not been

closely examined. Navigators should use the passage only under favorable conditions and it is imperative that a good lookout be maintained. The passage is not recommended for deepdraft vessels. The many reefs E and W of the passage can best

be seen on the chart.

Magnetic Passage and Palm Passage

7.6 Magnetic Passage (18°30'S., 147°15'E.) lies with its

N entrance about 50 miles NW of the N entrance to Flinders

Passage. The passage is entered from seaward between Myrmidon Reef (18°15'S., 147°22'E.) and Needle Reef, 11.5 miles

SW. Both reefs dry 2.7m. The passage extends in a S direction

for about 22 miles and then in a SSW direction for about 11

miles to its S entrance, which lies between Lodestone and

Keeper Reefs.

7.6 Thimble Shoal, with a depth of 7.9m, has been reported to lie

3 miles E of Needle Reef. Charts show the shoal close to the

recommended track, therefore, it is recommended deep-draft

vessels use Palm Passage.

7.6 The current sets ESE between the outer reefs, but its influence is generally lost after passing S of Needle Reef.

7.6 Palm Passage (18°19'S., 147°00'E.) lies with its seaward entrance about 8 miles WNW of Magnetic Passage. The passage

leads SW into the Inner Route in the vicinity of the Palm Isles.

The seaward entrance lies between Pith Reef and Urchin

Shoal (18°20'S., 147°05'E.), and the S entrance between Bramble Reef and Rib Reef.

7.6 Pith Reef (18°12'S., 147°02'E.), which dries, lies on the W

side of an area of foul ground on the W side of the seaward entrance. A light is shown on the SE side of the reef; a racon is

situated at the light. In 1983, Pith Reef was reported to lie 0.5

mile E of the charted position.

7.6 Rib Reef (18°28'S., 146°52'E.), which dries, lies in the middle of the SW end of Palm Passage. There is a navigable channel 4 miles wide on each side of the reef. A light is shown on

the NE side of Rib Reef.

7.6 Pilotage.—See paragraph 9.1 for applicable pilotage information.

7.6 When within the outer ends of the reefs, the tidal current, if

any, will be found to set in the direction of the channel. The area NW of Pith Reef, Trunk Reef, and Bramble Reef is unsurveyed. A vessel reported (1972) that when outbound through

the passage, the 191m summit on Fantome Island (18°42'S.,

146°31'E.), bearing 230° astern, was a useful mark for maintaining the recommended track and was visible for a distance

of 30 miles.

7.6 Between Pith Reef and the N entrance to Geranium Passage,

47 miles NW, the outer edge of the Great Barrier Reefs consists

of a large number of detached reefs which have not been surveyed.

Geranium Passage and Noggin Passage

7.7 Geranium Passage (17°42'S., 146°30'E.) lies about

48 miles NW of Palm Passage. The seaward entrance lies be-
152 Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 

Pub. 127

tween the N extremity of Potter Reef (17°40'S., 146°34'E.)

and the S extremity of Gilbey Reef, 4.5 miles NNE. The passage has a length of about 12 miles and extends in a general

SW direction. It is from 1.7 to 3 miles wide and leads into the

Inner Route in the vicinity of Mourilyan Harbor. Navigators

are cautioned that although this passage is apparently clear of

dangers, it has only been partially examined. Eddy Reef and

Ellison Reef form the SW entrance to Geranium Passage.

7.7 Between the N entrance to Geranium Passage and the NE entrance to Noggin Passage, 28 miles NNW, the outer edge of the

Great Barrier Reef consists of a number of detached reefs

which have not been surveyed.

7.7 Noggin Passage (17°13'S., 146°25'E.) is located about 28

miles N of Geranium Passage. The seaward entrance lies between Raaf Shoal and Noggin Reef, about 5 miles NW. The

passage trends in a WSW direction for a distance of about 13.5

miles to its inner entrance, which lies between Flora Reef and

Jackson Patches. The passage is from 2 to 3.5 miles wide and

leads to the Inner Route in the vicinity of Russell Island

(17°14'S., 146°06'E.). Depths of 16.4 to 69m are found in the

fairway of the passage, the least depth being found about 3

miles E of the E side of Coates Reef (17°12'S., 146°22'E.). A

9.1m shoal lies in the seaward approaches of Noggin Passage,

3 miles NNE of Raaf Shoal.

Flora Passage 

7.8 The seaward entrance to Flora Passage (17°00'S.,

146°21'E.), located about 17 miles NNW of the seaward entrance of Noggin Passage, lies between Channel Reef and

Northwest Reef, about 4.2 miles NNW. The passage extends

about 19 miles SW to its inner entrance, which lies between

Scott Reef, on the N, and the N side of Flora Reef, on the S.

The passage is from 3.7 to 6 miles wide and leads to the Inner

Route in the vicinity of Russell Island.

7.8 Great caution is necessary approaching Flora Passage from

seaward, as the mainland, though high, is often obscured by

haze, and should not be attempted unless the position is accurately known. A mid-channel course will lead a vessel clear of

dangers in Flora Passage.

Cape Townshend

7.9 The coast between Cape Townshend and West Hill Island, about 60 miles WNW, is indented SSE by two large bays,

each of which is about 30 miles long. Shoalwater Bay, the E of

the two, is separated from Broad Sound, the W bay, by a large

peninsula, the N end of which, Arthur Point, lies about 25

miles WNW of Cape Townshend. Several contiguous islands

lie up to about 8 miles NNW of this peninsula, and the entrances of both bays are somewhat encumbered by small groups of

islets.

7.9 There are depths of more than 10.9m in the N parts of the

above bays, but in their S parts there are depths of about 7.3 to

10.9m. The depths decrease toward the S end of both bays

where there are numerous dangers.

7.9 The tidal currents are strong on this part of the coast. In

Broad Sound Channel, the flood current sets W and the ebb E

at a rate of about 2 to 3 knots. In the entrances of the two above

bays, the currents tend to follow the trend of the channel and

attain a rate of 2 to 3 knots.

Shoalwater Bay 

7.10 Shoalwater Bay (22°23'S. 150°23'E.) indents the

coast about 30 miles SSE between Cape Townshend and

Arthur Point (22°08'S., 150°04'E.). The bay is fairly easy to

access through the deep channels on either side of the islands

in the entrance. There are depths of 12 to 30m in North Channel and 3.6 to 15m in Northwest Channel. In the central part of

the bay, there are depths of 0.3 to 12.5m. 

7.10 Caution is advised when entering the bay because recent

soundings indicate uncharted shoals exist in several areas.

7.10 Tides—Currents.—The flood current sets SW; the ebb current NE.

7.10 Pilotage.—No pilots are available for Shoalwater Bay.

7.10 Anchorage.—Anchorage, with shelter and good holding

ground, may be obtained, in a depth of 16m, 1.5 miles N of

White Rocks (22°12'S., 150°15'E.). Anchorage, with good

holding ground, may be obtained, in depths of 13 to 18m in the

blind channel, 2.5 miles SE of the NE extremity of Akens Island (22°21'S., 150°17'E.). Local knowledge is necessary for

this anchorage. There is anchorage, in depths of 13 to 18m, 1

mile N of Passage Patch (22°22'S., 150°23'E.).

7.10 Anchorage, sheltered from SE winds and easy of access,

may be taken 1.2 miles off the middle of the W side of Leicester Island (22°16'S., 150°27'E.), in depths of 13 to 18m.

7.10 Caution.—The flood currents set SW; the ebb currents set

NE. The currents may attain rates of 2 to 6 knots in the anchorage W of Leicester Island.

7.10 A military training area has been established within Shoalwater Bay. The waters within the area are closed to public access during training exercises.

7.10 All creeks within the area are closed to public access. Shelter

from storms may still be sought at Freshwater Bay, Port Clinton, Pearl Bay, and the mouth of Island Head Creek.

Broad Sound

7.11 Broad Sound (22°12'S. 149°45'E.) extends SSE for

approximately 22 miles between the peninsula, of which

Arthur Point is the N extremity, and the mainland W, and is entered between that point and West Hill Island (21°50'S.,

149°29'E.). A chain of islands, islets, and rocks extends across

the entrance, through which there are three main channels.

7.11 There are depths of 18m in the N part of the sound, decreasing gradually towards its head, but there are extensive banks

and flats off the E shore and at its head.

7.11 Broad Sound Channel (22°07'S., 150°17'E.), the S approach to Broad Sound, trends WNW from Cape Townshend to

the wide N entrance to the sound. This channel lies between

the S side of the Northumberland Isles and the islands and dangers in the entrance of Shoalwater Bay and Broad Sound. It is

about 10 miles wide between Cape Townshend and Steep Island, but it narrows to about 2.5 miles between the North Point

Islands and Boomerang Shoal and Lake Shoal.

7.11 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range in Broad Sound reaches

a maximum of 10.9m at the mouth of Herbert Creek and is

much greater than anywhere else on this part of the coast. In

the entrance to the sound the flood current follows the trend of
Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 153

Pub. 127

the channels and sets between W and S into the sound, and the

ebb sets in the opposite direction. They have a rate of 2.5 to 3

knots in the larger channels, where the channel is confined, as

in Race Passage, where they attain a rate of 3 to 4 knots at

springs.

7.11 In the sound, the tidal currents turn soon after HW and LW

by the shore, that is about 30 minutes after HW and LW at

Saint Bees Island. In the approaches, however, during strong

SE winds, the flood current setting W runs for nearly 2 hours

after the time of HW by the shore, that is 2 hours 30 minutes

after the time of HW at Saint Bees Island.

7.11 In the entrances of Saint Lawrence Creek and Waverly

Creek, the tide rises rapidly; the flood current runs for about 3

hours 30 minutes while the ebb current for about 8 hours 30

minutes. The wind considerably affects the tide, with N winds

retarding and lessening them and SE winds accelerating and increasing the tidal rise.

7.11 Depths—Limitations.—There are depths of 10.9 to 20.1m

over much of the N part of the sound. In the larger entrance

channels, there are depths of more that 10.9m, but in the smaller ones, there are depths of less than 1.8m.

7.12 North Point Passage (22°02'S., 149°53'E.), which

enters Broad Sound from the NE, lies between North Point and

the North Point Islands. It has a least depth in the fairway of

about 7.9m and a least width of about 0.5 miles between Gannet Rock and North Point Cays.

7.12 Main Channel, the best channel into Broad Sound, lies between the North Point Islands and Middle Shoals (21°57'S.,

149°44'E.). It has depths of 11 to 18.3m and is about 4.5 miles

wide. In 1974, a depth of 7.9m was reported in Main Channel,

2 miles ENE of the NE end of Middle Shoal.

7.12 Flat Island Passage (21°59'S., 149°37'E.) enters the sound

from the N through the Flat Islands. Although it has depths of

10.9m to 14.6m, it should not be attempted without local

knowledge.

7.12 Anchorage.—On the W side of the sound, the best anchorage, sheltered from all but N and NE winds, is in about 8.3 to

10.1m, about 1 mile NW of the N end of Aquila Islet

(21°58'S., 149°35'E.).

7.12 Anchorage may be obtained midway between Roundish Islet (22°03'S., 149°37'E.) and Flock Pigeon Islet, in a depth of

9.1 to 10.9m, but although the tidal currents are weak, the anchorage is exposed.

7.12 At the head of the sound, small vessels with local knowledge

may anchor, in 7.3 to 12.8m, close W of Turtle Islet. Anchorage may also be taken in the mouth of Herbert Creek, about 0.7

mile offshore and about 1 mile ESE of Charon Point

(22°23'S., 149°49'E.), in 5.5 to 7.3m.

7.12 On the E side of Broad Channel, the bottom is rocky N of

West Side Islet and unless vessels are able to anchor in Burkitt

Roads, they should not anchor in this area.

Off-lying Islands

7.13 The Northumberland Isles consists of a number of

groups of small islands and islets which lie between a position

about 12.5 miles ENE of Cape Townshend and a position about

21 miles E of Hay Point (21°17'S., 149°18'E.). Within these

limits there are many islands, islets, and dangers that are practically contiguous with some of the coastal islets and dangers.

7.13 The Northumberland Isles fall into two groups, the E group

and the W group. High Peak Island, with the islets and dangers

in its vicinity, and the Percy Isles make up the E groups. The W

groups from S to N, consist of the Duke Islands, the Bedwell

Group, theGuardfish Cluster, and the Beverly Group.

7.13 Several courses for the Inner Route pass between the E and

W groups. This makes it possible for the navigator to concern

himself only with the islands adjacent to his track and not necessarily with the coast itself. Many of the high, steep-to islands

are good navigation marks, and lights are shown from them.

The inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef lies about 20 to 31

miles NE of the E groups of the Northumberland Isles. The

rates and directions of the tidal currents are shown on the

charts.

The Northumberland Isles—East Groups

7.14 High Peak Island (21°57'S., 150°42'E.) lies about

18.5 miles NE of Cape Townshend. A conspicuous peak rises

to a height of 221m on the N end of the island. The island was

reported to give good radar returns up to 26 miles. A light is

shown on the summit of the innermost of two, high, conical

rocks, which lie close off the E end of the island. Berwick Island and Rothbury Island lie about 1.7 and 4 miles, respectively, SW of High Peak Island.

7.14 Anchorage, sheltered from SE winds, may be obtained with

local knowledge off a small sand and coral beach at the head of

the S cove on the W side of High Peak Island, in depths of 27

to 33m. Depths of less than 11m extend 0.4 mile from the

beach.

7.14 Cheviot Island (22°05'S., 150°40'E.) lies 7 miles S of High

Peak Island and 12 miles ENE of Cape Townshend. A drying

rock lies 0.1 mile N of the island, and there are tide rips off the

S side of the island. Cheviot Island is the SE island of the E

group.

7.14 Low Rock, 6m high, lies about 11.5 miles W of High Peak

Island. This dangerous rock lies close E of the track through

the Inner Route. A 17.3m patch lies approximately 1 mile,

bearing 211° from Low Rock. If Steep Island is identified,

there is no difficulty in avoiding this danger.

7.14 Steep Island (22°02'S., 150°27'E.), with a double summit

and thickly wooded, lies 12.5 miles WNW of Chevoit Island.

The island is an excellent landmark when approaching this part

of the Northumberland Isles and is easily distinguished at night

in clear weather.

7.14 The Percy Islets (21°39'S., 150°19'E.) extend about 20 miles

NW from the Southeast Islets to the Hotspur Islets. This distinct group of islands and islets consists of the Southeast Islets,

South Island, Middle Island, the Pine Islets, and a number of

rocks and shoals. A light is shown on the SW side of Pine Islets. Pine Peak Island lies 5.5 miles N of Middle Island and

shows a light on its W side.The Hotspur Islets (21°29'S.,

150°16'E.), two islets connected by a reef, lie 1.2 miles N of

Pine Peak Island.

7.14 Vernon Rocks (21°28'S., 150°19'E.) are a small group of

four low, rocky islets which lie about 1.7 miles ENE of the

Hotspur Islets. The group is about 0.5 mile long. The largest

and N islet, from which a light is shown, is 7.6m high. A detached drying rock lies about 0.1 mile E of this islet.
154 Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 

Pub. 127

7.14 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents set strongly through

the Percy Islands. 

7.14 At the anchorage on the W side of Middle Island, spring

tides rise 5.5m; neaps tides rise 4.2m.

7.14 Sphinx Islet, with a bare peak, lies 9.5 miles WSW of Vernon Rocks. Overfalls occur W of the N extremity of the islet.

The Northumberland Isles—West Group

7.15 The W groups consist of the islands and dangers on

the W side of that part of the Inner Route track. They extend

about 67 miles NW from Steep Island, which is 10 miles N of

Cape Townshend, to Overfall Rock (21°16'S., 149°38'E.).

7.15 The Duke Islands (21°58'S., 150°08'E.) lie between 19 and

29 miles NW of Cape Townshend, with the E islet about 6.5

miles WNW of Otterbourne Island (22°02'S., 150°18'E.).

The group is about 10 miles in length and almost the same distance in width. They are surrounded by rocks, shoals, or sand

bars, and unless necessary, vessels should avoid the area. 

7.15 The tidal currents are strong through the Duke Islands. A

rate of 5 knots has been experienced between the islands.

7.15 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained with the help of

local knowledge, 0.2 mile S of Iron Islet, off the W side of

Marble Island, in depths of 10 to 11m. The nearer the anchorage is to the shore, the less the tidal current will be felt. This is

the best anchorage in the Duke Islands.

7.15 Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage 1 mile

WNW of the W side of Tynemouth Island (22°00'S.,

150°08'E.), in depths of 7 to 9m, out of the strength of the tidal

current.

The Bedwell Group

7.16 The Bedwell Group (21°50'S., 149°48'E.) consists of

five bare-topped islands, rocks, and shoals which lie 25 miles

WSW of Pine Islets Light. Poynter Island (21°50'S.,

149°48'E.), 122m high, is the largest islet in the group. Innes

Island is the northernmost islet, George Island is the easternmost islet, and Calliope Island is the southernmost islet.

7.16 Smythe Shoals (21°44'S., 149°52'E.), with depths of less

than 1.8m, are on a narrow steep-to ridge that extends about 9

miles NE from a position almost 2 miles NE of Innes Island.

Emily Patches, the SW end of these shoals, is separated from

the rest of the ridge by a 10.9m channel about 1 mile wide. The

sea at times breaks over these dangers and they are usually

marked by current rips. The tidal currents set obliquely across

them at a rate of 1.5 to 2 knots.

Guardfish Cluster

7.17 The Guardfish Cluster (21°35'S., 149°51'E.) is a

group of islets and dangers almost 10 miles long and about 6

miles wide. The cluster is centered about 14 miles N of the

middle of the Bedwell Group.

7.17 Curlew Island (21°36'S., 149°48'E.), 458m high and the

largest of the cluster, lies about in the center of the group. Peak

Head, a prominent 138m hill at the N end of the island, is surmounted by a square boulder. The island is fringed by numerous islets, rocks, and shoal dangers.

7.17 Bluff Islet lies about 3 miles E of Curlew Island and is the

easternmost of the group. It is rocky, flat-topped, and has a remarkable overhanging bluff at its NW extremity. Tinonee Peak

Island, with a prominent 187m peak, lies about 3.5 miles ESE

of Bluff Islet.

7.17 Anchorage.—Vessels may obtain anchorage in Davidson

Bay, midway between Treble Islet (21°36'S., 149°50'E.) and

Peak Head, in depths of 9 to 15m. The anchorage is easy to access from the S, but is only recommended as a temporary anchorage.

7.17 Garfish Bay affords good anchorage, but it is restricted and

local knowledge is necessary. Vessels anchor, in depths of 7 to

15m, with shelter from E and SE winds. The anchorage is difficult of access owing to the shoals in the vicinity.

The Beverly Group

7.18 The Beverly Group (21°29'S., 149°53'E.), a chain of

small, high rocky islets, extends about 7.5 miles NE of Digby

Island, the southeasternmost of the group. Most of these islets

are steep-to on their NE sides, but shoal water extends SW

from some. Several extensive shoals lie up to 8 miles SW of

this group.

7.18 The tidal currents set through the group at a rate of 1.5 to 3

knots at springs. The flood current sets SW and the ebb NE,

and they cause heavy tide rips at each end of the group.

7.18 Digby Island (21°30'S., 149°54'E.) lies about 7.5 miles NE

of Curlew Island. A drying ledge extends about 0.1 mile N

from the N end of the island. Keelan Island, lies less than 0.2

mile NE of Digby Island, and the passage between them, is obstructed by shoals. Henderson Island lies about 0.2 mile N of

Digby Island, and Noel Island lies 0.5 mile W of Digby Island.

7.18 Sappho Roads lies between Noel Island and Henderson Island. Several islets lie up to 3.5 miles NW of Sappho Roads

and can best be seen on the chart. 

7.18 Sappho Roads affords a somewhat protected anchorage. The

best anchorage is in a depth of 20m close to Henderson Island.

Shoal water, with depths of 9 to 16m, are found in the middle

of the roads, but the tidal currents attain a rate of 2.5 to 3 knots

and it is not recommended.

7.18 The inner part of the roads affords anchorage, in a depth of

8m, near the center. Sappho Roads are easy to access and are

recommended for small craft unable to proceed S against

strong SE winds, which often occur in winter.

7.19 Prudhoe Island (21°19'S., 149°40'E.), the NW and

largest of Northumberland Isles, rises to a prominent peak,

331m high near its center. The W part of the island, a grassy

ridge, is separated from the main part by a low neck of swampy

ground. On the SW part of the neck there is a sandy beach

where landings can be made. Prudhoe Shoal (21°19'S.,

149°41'E.), with a least depth of 2.7m near its center, extends 1

mile S from the neck.

7.19 Anchorage may be obtained in a bay on the NE side of Prudhoe Island, and off the W side, in a depth of 26m, but the tidal

currents in the latter attain a rate of 3 knots at springs. Anchorage may also be obtained off the E side of Prudhoe Shoal. 

7.19 Caution must be exercised when seeking shelter on the SW

side of Prudhoe Island, as soundings are not a safe guide, and

greater depths lie close on each side of Prudhoe Shoal.

7.19 Prudhoe Channel (21°23'S., 149°43'E.) lies between Prud-
Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 155

Pub. 127

hoe Island and Double Island, on the NE side, and Beverley

Group and Reid Islet, on the SW side; there are depths of more

than 11m in the fairway. The narrowest part is at the W end

where it is 1.5 miles wide. Care must be taken to allow for the

tidal currents which set across it at a rate of 1.5 to 2 knots.

7.19 Viscount Shoals consists of a number of narrow sand banks,

with depths of less than 11m, which lie roughly parallel with

one another in a general N-S direction, W of a line joining Elamang Islet (21°28'S., 149°39'E.) and the Reid Islets. The W

shoal, with a least depth of 3.7m, lies between positions 4.5

miles W of Elamang Islet and 5 miles W of Reid Islet. The E

shoal, marked by overfalls on its W side, has a least depth of

4m, and lies 2 miles NW of Elamang Islet.

7.19 Caution.—Viscount Shoals form the NW termination of numerous dangers among the Northumberland Islets. Their origin

is to be traced to the silt deposits from Broad Sound as most of

the banks radiate from the entrance to that sound. Their configuration and general direction indicate that tidal currents are active agents in the formation of these narrow sand and mud

ridges, and it is highly probable that many changes will continue to take place in them.

Great Barrier Reef—Inner Edge

7.20 It must be remembered that the following reefs and islets are the prominent ones marking the limits of the inner edge

of the Great Barrier Reef, and vessels should keep SW of a line

joining them.

7.20 Alarm Reef (21°07'S., 150°15'E.), a steep-to reef that dries

0.3m, lies about 21 miles N of the Hotspur Islets. 

7.20 Prince Reef, which dries, is a steep-to patch about 3 miles

NNE of Alarm Reef. 

7.20 Sandpiper Reef lies about 10 miles WNW of Alarm Reef.

Redbill Islet lies about 3.2 miles NW of Sandpiper Reef.

7.20 Parker Reef (20°33'S., 149°45'E.), which dries 4.6m, lies on

the W side of a coral reef about 0.7 mile in diameter. This part

of the barrier reef between Alarm Reef and Parker Reef lies 8

to 19 miles E and NE of the E side of the S islets of the Cumberland Islands

7.20 Tideway Reef lies about 31 miles NNW of Parker Reef and

has rocks and shoal water lying up to about 1 mile W of it. Vessels are cautioned to keep at least 5 miles W of a line from

Parker Reef to Tideway Reef, as the area between them has not

been examined.

7.20 Bait Reef (19°49'S., 149°04'E.), which dries, lies about 35

miles WNW of Tideway Reef. The reef is about 1.7 miles long

and steep-to, with depths of over 37m close around, except on

the NW side where there is a depth of 12.8m. The W end of

Hook Reef, which extends about 8 miles E, lies about 1.5 miles

E of Bait Reef. Beacons stand on the SE and SW extremities of

the reef; two beacons stand on the NW extremity of the reef.

Hydrographer’s Passage

7.21 Hydrographer’s Passage (19°47'S., 150°24'E.)

through the Great Barrier Reef allows deep-draft vessels access

to the inner route. The passage, with a least depth of 25m, has a

total length of 83 miles from the pilot boarding station at the

seaward entrance to its junction with the Inner Route.

7.21 Pilotage.—See paragraph 7.2 for pilotage information following the heading "Navigation in the Great Barrier Reef."

7.21 Caution should be exercised when approaching the boarding

ground as a line of shoals lies about 2 miles to the SW. The

passage consists of a relatively narrow but well-surveyed corridor through the Great Barrier Reef, and extreme care should be

taken to maintain a position within this channel, as the bordering areas are unsurveyed.

7.21 Caution.—Extensive local knowledge is required for the approach to, and the navigation of, this passage, particularly at

the seaward entrance.

7.21 Vessels are strongly urged to contact local authorities before

attempting passage.

West Hill Island to Hay Point

7.22 West Hill Island (21°50'S., 149°29'E.), 300m high near

its E end, appears as a conspicuous detached wooded hill which

lies less than 0.5 mile off the mainland. The W side of the island is

low and connected to the mainland by a drying flat. 

7.22 Anchorage may be taken, in 7.3m, about 1 mile off the E

side of the island, with the summit of the island bearing about

277°.

7.22 Between West Hill Island and Cape Palmerston, about 18

miles N, the coast trends in that direction and is mostly low

with a number of rocky points. Mount Funnel, 351m high, lies

about 2.5 miles inland and about 7 miles SW of Cape Palmerston. This conspicuous mountain has been seen clearly for a

distance of 42 miles.

7.22 Notch Point (21°44'S., 149°29'E.) lies about 5 miles N of

West Hill Island, and the coast between these two features is

indented about 3 miles W of a bight, most of which dries.

Green Hill lies about 3 miles NNW of Notch Point. 

7.22 The Temple Islets, fringed by rocks and foul ground, lie up

to 2.5 miles offshore, about 7.5 miles N of Notch Point. These

islets are separated from the mainland by a narrow channel encumbered with drying rocks.

7.22 Cape Palmerston (21°32'S., 149°29'E.), 43m high and bare,

is a bluff, rocky headland, and the N extremity of a peninsula

which extends 3.7 miles N from Coconut Point (21°36'S.,

149°28'E.). The E side of the peninsula, fringed with rocks, an

above-water reef, and drying rocks on which there are several

stunted mangroves, extends 1.5 miles from the cape.

7.22 Between Cape Palmerston and Freshwater Point (21°25'S.,

149°20'E.), the coast is indented about 4.5 miles SW by two inlets. Glendower Point, which separates these inlets, lies about 5

miles NW of Cape Palmerston. Cullen Islet lies about 6.5 miles

N of Cape Palmerston. Phillips Reef, about 0.5 mile long, is a

drying patch about 2.5 miles S of Cullen Islet.

7.22 Coaster Channel (21°26'S., 149°32'E.) lies between Sandy

Shoals (21°50'S., 149°33'E.), Stony Shoals, Torch Shoals,

Yaralla Shoals, and Viscount Shoals on the E side, and the

mainland on the W side. The channel should not be used without local knowledge.

7.22 Hay Point (21°18'S., 149°18'E.), bare and rocky, lies about 9

miles NNW of Freshwater Point. A below-water rock lies 0.7

mile ESE of the point. Hay Reef, a coral ledge which dries

2.1m, extends 0.5 mile N from the point. A lighted buoy is

moored 0.1 mile N of the reef.

7.22 Mount Griffiths, 74m high, lies 1.5 miles SW of Hay Point.

7.22 A light is shown at the Harbormaster’s Office, a red brick
156 Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 

Pub. 127

building on Mount Griffiths.

7.23 Port of Hay Point (21°16'S., 149°19'E.) (World Port

Index No. 53405) consists of conveyor jetties which extend 1

mile ENE and 2 miles NE from the vicinity of Hay Point. Hay

Point Services (HPS) stands at the seaward end of the S conveyor, while Dalrymple Bay Coal Terminal stands at the end of

the N conveyor; both are conspicuous. Together they are the

largest coal export facility in the Southern Hemisphere.

7.23 Tides—Currents.—The tidal current sets 160° on the flood

tide and 340° on the ebb tide. The maximum rate is 2 knots.

Slack water occurs about 1 hour 30 minutes before HW and

LW.

7.23 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels in ballast can approach the

S wharf from any E direction. The approach to the N wharf

from the SE is dredged to 13m.

7.23 The Hay Point Services (HPS) berths are situated at the head

of the S conveyor jetty and consist of two dolphin berths. HPS

Berth No. 1 has a total length of 397m, with an alongside depth

of 16.2m. Vessels of up to 150,000 dwt can be accommodated.

HPS Berth No. 2 has a total length of 450m, with an alongside

depth of 16.1m.

7.23 Dalrymple Bay Coal Terminal is situated at the head of the N

conveyor jetty and has three berths. Berth No. 3, the northernmost berth of the three, has a charted depth of 18.9m. Berth

No. 1, located at the middle of the pier, has a length of 490m

between the dolphins and depths alongside of 18.1m. Berth

No. 2, just S of Berth No. 1, has a depth of 18.0m. The terminal

will accommodate vessels of up to 200,000 dwt. 

7.23 An expansion of the terminal is currently in progress. The

expansion is being done in three phases, with the first phase

having been completed in March 2008. The entire project is expected to be completed by the end of 2008, increasing capacity

by 44 per cent. 

7.23 The bottom at the berths is mud and silt.

7.23 Vessels should have an underkeel clearance of at least 1.5m

while berthed alongside. On departure, ships can proceed directly to sea. They are required to have an underkeel clearance

of 10 per cent of their draft plus 0.6m.

7.23 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory, available 24 hours, and

carried out by Maritime Safety Queensland (MSQ). Pilots usually board by helicopter, but there is a launch available if needed. Pilots are stationed at Hay Point and board vessels in the

following posisitons: 

1. Bravo—1°13.5'S, 149°20.7'E.

2. Charlie—21°17.3'S, 149°20.7'E.

7.23 Pilots can be contacted on VHF channels 14 and 16.

7.23 Regulations.—The ETA of a vessel is required 7 days, 48

hours, 24 hours, and 2 hours in advance.

7.23 There are two restricted areas located in the approaches to

the port. Restricted Area A and Restricted Area B prohibit the

mooring and anchoring of unauthorized vessels; Restricted Area A also prohibits the maneuvering of unauthorized vessels.

7.23 Vessels may transit Restricted Area B as long as no other

vessel is maneuvering in the area; they should also monitor

VHF channel 16. 

1. Restricted Area A is bound by lines joining the following positions: 

a. 21°16.6'S, 149°19.0'E.

b. 21°14.2'S, 149°17.8'E.

c. 21°13.6'S, 149°19.0'E.

d. 21°14.8'S, 149°19.8'E.

e. 21°16.2'S, 149°20.4'E.

2. Restricted Area B is bound by lines joining the following positions: 

a. 21°14.8'S., 149°19.8'E.

b. 21°13.2'S., 149°25.2'E.

c. 21°14.8'S., 149°25.6'E.

d. 21°16.2'S., 149°20.4'E. 

7.23 Signals.—A port radio station is maintained at Hay Point.

7.23 Anchorage.—Numbered anchor berths are charted N1

through N15; the S anchorage has seven berths S of the approach route from the ENE. Berths are assigned by Harbor

Control.

7.23 Caution.—A restricted area for ship loading, the limits of

which are shown on the chart, lies NE of the wharfs. Unauthorized vessels are prohibited from mooring, anchoring, or maneuvering in this area.

Hay Point to Slade Point

7.24 Between Hay Point and Slade Point, about 13 miles

NNW, the coast is indented about 4 miles WSW by a bight.

Dudgeon Point lies about 2.7 miles NW of Hay Point; there are

depths of less than 5.5m up to about 1 mile offshore between

them. In 1973, two shoals of approximately 11m were reported

to lie 3.5 and 4 miles NE of Hay Point.

7.24 Slade Point is described in paragraph 7.28

Mackay (21°09'S., 149°13'E.)

World Port Index No. 53400

7.25 Mackay Outer Harbor, the port facility for Mackay, is

situated about 2.5 miles S of Slade Point. The town of Mackay

lies on the S bank of the mouth of the Pioneer River, which is

so shallow that it dries.

7.25 Winds—Weather.—Mackay lies within the section of the

Queensland coast most frequently visited by typhoons. With

the exception of these severe tropical storms, pressure systems

usually pass without causing extremes in weather. Southeast

winds are very common in this area.

7.25 High winds will at times build up heavy seas outside the harbor, causing vessels to surge excessively at their berths. The

surge is generally accentuated during rising tides.

7.25 Tides—Currents.—At the entrance to Mackay Outer Harbor, the flood current sets S and the ebb current sets N, at a rate

of 2.5 knots at springs and 1 knot at neaps. It has been found

that vessels of 4,000 grt may enter safely when the rate of the

current does not exceed 1.5 knots. Large vessels should not attempt to enter port when there is more than 0.5 knot of tidal

current running at the entrance. Small vessels will have no difficulty entering at any time. Currents inside the harbor during

the ebb are very weak. During flood tide, the current inside the

harbor sweeps toward Breast Wharf and then veers W and edQueensland Ports Corporation

http://www.pcq.com.au/html/02_ports.htm
Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 157

Pub. 127

dies under the pier.

7.25 The tidal current in the river attains a rate of 3 to 4 knots.

Slack water occurs about 1.5 hours before HW and LW. The

ebb current reaches its maximum at about HW, but soon decreases.

7.25 The tidal rise is 5.5m at MHWS and 4.2m at MHWN.

7.25 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels utilizing the port enter at

slack water. Vessels are limited to a length of 155m and must

maintain an underkeel clearance of 0.6m.

7.25 The approach channel has a depth of 8.5m to the turning basin inside the breakwater, which has a maintained depth of

8.3m. Lesser depths may be encountered close to the Northern

(Lee) Breakwater within the Harbor Swing Basin.

7.25 Berth 1 to Berth 4 offer facilities for handling bulk liquid,

bulk solid, container, and general cargo. A molasses terminal is

located at Berth 1. Berth 2 is disused. 

7.25 Bulk Grain Wharf Berth 5, on the N side of the harbor, handles bulk grain cargo. Love’s Jetty, situated just W of Berth 1,

has a depth of 3.4m, and accommodates passenger and pleasure craft.

7.25 A number of large mooring buoys lie in the N part of the harbor.

7.25 Depths at the Mackay Marina range from 4.5 to 3.5m.

7.25 Aspect.—Flat Top Island, SE of East Point, is marked by a

light. Leading lights, in line bearing 288°, lead N of the Downward Patches to Mackay Outer Harbor.

7.25 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and should be requested

48 hours in advance. Pilots should be advised, via the agent,

whether pilot transfer can be accomplished by helicopter or if a

launch is required. Pilots board about 2 miles ESE of Southern

Breakwater. Vessels should contact Mackay VTS 2 hours prior

to arrival on VHF channel 14 or 16. 

7.25 Regulations.—Vessels should maintain a continuous listening watch on VHF channels 14 and 16 while at anchor or

alongside a berth.

7.25 Prior to berthing, vessels are required to have:

1. The propeller fully immersed.

2. A trim of not more than 2.5m by the stern. Trim by the

head is not permitted.

7.25 Vessels carrying more than 10kg of explosives shall not proceed past the anchorage.

7.25 An agent or master shall obtain a permit to handle dangerous

cargo at least 24 hours in advance of the cargo movement.

7.25 Masters are advised not to maneuver W of a line between

Slade Island and Flat Top Island.

7.25 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken, in depths of 12 to

14m, about 1.5 to 2 miles E of Slade Islet.

7.25 Vessels of light draft may anchor, in about 7.3m, about 0.5 to

0.7 mile NW of the NW side of Flat Top Island. 

7.25 Anchorage is prohibited in the area, best seen on the chart,

located S of Slade Island.

The Cumberland Islands—South Groups

7.26 The SE group of the Cumberland Islands is comprised

of the S group and the Sir James Smith Group, a chain of islands which extends from Snare Peak Island to Silversmith Island, 56 miles WNW. The islands are mostly high, rocky, and

thickly wooded, particularly with pine trees.

7.26 Snare Peak Island (21°06'S., 149°56'E.), the southernmost

of the Cumberland Islands, rises to a peak 88m high. Snare

Rocks, 1.2m high, lie 1.7 miles E of the island.

7.26 Penrith Island lies about 5 miles NNW of Snare Peak Island.

It is steep-to on its NE side, but a reef fringes the S and W sides

up to about 1 mile offshore. A light is shown on the summit of

the island. Derwent Island lies 5.5 miles WNW of Penrith Island.

7.26 Bailey Island (21°02'S., 149°33'E.) has two rocks, which

dry 1.2m, off its NW extremity. A light is shown from the summit of the islet.

7.26 Scawfell Island (20°52'S., 149°37'E.) rises to a peak, 397m

high, SE of Duddon Point, the N extremity of the island. 

7.26 Anchorage.—Anchorage with good shelter may be obtained, in a depth of 13m in Refuge Bay, on the NW side of the

island. Calder Island, 143m high, lies 4 miles N of Scawfell Island.

7.26 St. Bees Island (20°55'S., 149°27'E.) lies on the W side of

Cumberland Channel, about 8 miles WSW of Scawfell Island.

Keswick Island is separated from St. Bees Island by Egremont

Pass. 

7.26 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained in the N entrance

of the pass, in a depth of 16m, 0.5 mile W of Schooner Rock.

Small vessels with local knowledge can find shelter in the pass,

but care must be taken. 

7.26 Wigton Island (20°44'S., 149°28'E.), 127m high, wooded,

and cliff-faced on its NE side, lies 8 miles WNW of Calder Island. Cockermouth Island lies 3.7 miles SW of Wigton Island. 

7.26 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

27m, 0.5 mile N of the NW extremity of Cockermouth Island.

Silloth Rocks lie on the E side of a drying reef between Cockermouth Island and Wigton Island.

7.26 Carlisle Island (20°47'S., 149°17'E.) is wooded and rises to

Skiddaw Peak, 393m high, close within its N extremity.

Brampton Island lies SW of Carlisle Island and is connected to

it by a drying reef and sandbar. 

7.26 Anchorage.—Maryport Bay, on the W side of Carlisle Island, affords a sheltered anchorage, except in winds from between NE and W. A light is shown from a rock lying off the W

end of Brampton Island.

Mackay Port Facilities

Berth Length Depth Max. 

Length Remarks

1 123m 11.0m 210m

Petroleum, 

molasses, tallow, 

and ethanol.

2 190m 10.1m 188m

General cargo, 

fertilizer, iron, 

and bulk liquid 

chemicals.

3 315m 12.9m — Bulk raw sugar.

4 225m 10.8m —

Bulk refined 

sugar and 

general cargo.

5 165m 12.5m 270m Bulk grain.
158 Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 

Pub. 127

7.27 The Sir James Smith Group (20°38'S., 149°08'E.)

consists of several groups of small islands and dangers which

make up the northernmost of the S part of the Cumberland Islands.

7.27 Linne Island (20°40'S., 149°11'E.), 284m high near its N

extremity and wooded, lies 0.5 mile NW of Tinsmith Island

and is the highest and most remarkable of the Sir James Smith

Group. The S part of the island is joined to the main part of the

island by a low neck. A bank, with a least depth of 7.6m, lies

0.5 mile W of Linne Island.

7.27 Goldsmith Island (20°41'S., 149°09'E.), 194m high near its

N end, lies 0.5 mile W of Linne Island. An islet, 7.6m high, lies

close E of its N extremity. 

7.27 Anchorage.—Anchorage, sheltered from SE gales, may be

obtained off the NW side of Goldsmith Island.

7.27 Locksmith Island lies 0.5 mile N of Goldsmith Island.

Depths of less than 20m extend 0.5 mile NE and SW, respectively, from the island. Overfalls occur between Locksmith Island and Goldsmith Island.

7.27 The Ingot Islands (20°43'S., 149°08'E.) lie on a spit with

depths of less than 11m, which extends 1.5 miles S from Goldsmith Island. No attempt should be made to pass between the

islands or between the N island and Goldsmith Island. 

7.27 Anchorage.—Anchorage, with shelter from N winds, may

be obtained 0.5 mile E of the N Ingot Island, with good holding

ground.

7.27 Coppersmith Rock lies 3.7 miles NNW of Locksmith Island.

It is located on the S end of a drying reef which extends about

0.1 mile NW from the rock. A light is shown from the rock.

7.27 A number of islets, rocks, and shoals lie off the above-mentioned islands and can best be seen on the appropriate charts.

Slade Point to Cape Conway

7.28 Slade Point (21°04'S., 149°14'E.) lies 2.5 miles N of

Mackay Outer Harbor. The point consists of a hilly promontory

fringed by rocks within less than 0.2 mile offshore. The E side

of the point is fairly steep-to with depths of about 9.1 to 10.9m

close to shore.

7.28 Shoal Point, about 5.5 miles NW of Slade Point, is the rocky

extremity of a grassy projection that slopes down from the hills

backing the coast. Several drying patches lie about 1.2 miles

SE and SSE of the point. Green Islet lies about 1 mile N of the

point and is connected by a drying reef.

7.28 Llewellyn Shoal (21°00'S., 149°19'E.), with a least depth of

4.5m, lies about 6 miles NE of Slade Point. Hunt Shoal, an

8.2m patch, lies about 1.7 miles ENE of Llewellyn Shoal. 

7.28 Blackwood Shoals are a number of rocky patches, covered

with light sand, with depths of less than 10.9m and with a least

depth of 1.8m, extending about 8 or 9 miles off the coast between Slade Point and Cape Hillsborough. Vessels should not

navigate in this area without local knowledge.

7.28 Cape Hillsborough (20°54'S., 149°03'E.) is a conspicuous,

bold headland, 259m high, faced in places by steep sandstone

cliffs. Elsewhere, its seaward face is thickly wooded with large

pine trees, but its summit is bare. The cape is connected to the

mainland by a low scrub-covered isthmus. Pinnacle Rock, a

conspicuous peaked hill, rises 3 miles WSW of the cape.

7.28 The Red Cliff Islets, two in number, lie on a drying reef

which extends 1 mile N from Finlayson Point (20°53'S.,

148°57'E.). The islets are very conspicuous.

7.28 Port Newry (20°51'S., 148°56'E.) is entered between Mausoleum Islet and Outer Newry Island. A safe harbor for small

vessels lies between Outer Newry Island and Newry Island.

The fairway between these islands is narrow and the bottom is

soft mud. 

7.28 Anchorage.—Anchorage in the channel S of Newry Island

is exposed to E winds.

7.29 The Stewart Peninsula (20°47'S., 148°50'E.), 127m

high and wooded, forms the N side of St. Helens Bay. Dewars

Point, the SE extremity of the peninsula, forms the N entrance

point of the bay. The peninsula is separated from the mainland

by a mangrove swamp.

7.29 The Repulse Islands, a group of small rocky islands covered

with grass and a few trees, lies near the middle of the entrance

of Repulse Bay, 11 miles NNE of the Stewart Peninsula. 

7.29 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels

among the islands which afford good shelter if care is taken.

7.29 Repulse Bay (20°35'S., 148°48'E.) indents the coast between Midge Point and Cape Conway. The land is low and flat

on the W side of the bay and hilly on its N and NE sides. The

Proserpine River, navigable by small craft for about 9 miles,

lies at the head of the bay. The whole of Repulse Bay, with the

exception of the NE part, has depths of less than 11m. There

are depths of less than 5.5m extending up to 2.5 miles from the

W shore and the head of the bay.

The Cumberland Islands—The Lindeman Group

7.30 The Lindeman Group (20°30'S., 149°05'E.), the S

group of the N group of the Cumberland Islands, is comprised

of the islands between Thomas Island and Pentecost Island.

Thomas Island (20°33'S., 149°07'E.), 182m high and the S

island of the group, lies 9.5 miles E of Cape Conway. This

steep-to island has several smaller islets and foul ground fringing it up to a little over 0.2 mile offshore. 

7.30 Anchorage.—Small vessels with local knowledge may obtain anchorage, in a depth of 4m, inside the islet off the bay on

the N side of Thomas Island. Anchorage may also be obtained,

in a depth of 20m, 0.5 mile NE of the W extremity of the island, but it is open to N winds.

7.30 Keyser Island (20°32'S., 149°05'E.) lies 2 miles NW of Thomas Island and is 79m high and bare. Long Rock lies on a

drying reef, 0.2 mile SW of Keyser Island. Volskow Islet, with

its upper part covered with trees, lies 0.7 mile NE of Keyser Island. Triangle Island, bare and rocky, lies 1.5 miles NE of Volskow Islet.

7.30 Mansell Island (20°28'S., 149°08'E.) is 192m high with a

flat, grassy summit. Apart from the summit, the island is bare

and cliff-faced. An 8.2m patch lies 0.5 mile W of the S extremity of the island. Comston Island, low and cliffy, lies 0.7 mile

WNW of Mansell Island.

7.30 Shaw Island, with its SE end about 0.5 mile W of Keyser Island, is a narrow island about 6 miles long. Shaw Peak, 404m

high, lies near the N end of the island, and a 253m peak lies

near the S end. The E side of the island consists of cliffs and

sandy bays, mostly fringed by drying coral reefs. The W coast

forms the E side of Kennedy Sound. Shaw Island is reported to

be uninhabited.
Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 159

Pub. 127

7.30 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained in Neck Bay on

the W side of Shaw Island, 1.2 miles NE of Yellow Rock. 

7.30 The anchorage, sheltered from all except N winds, is in a

depth of 13m, but is susceptible to strong sudden squalls during SE winds. The anchorage lies in the strong tidal currents in

Kennedy Sound. 

7.30 Anchorage may also be obtained, in a depth of 20m, 0.7 mile

ENE of Burning Point, but it lies in the strong tidal current.

7.30 Lindeman Island (20°27'S., 149°02'E.) lies about 1.2 miles

W of the N end of Shaw Island. The island, which is 212m

high, is a tourist resort, and a hotel is situated near its S extremity. A light is shown from the SSW side of the island.

7.30 Seaforth Island (20°28'S., 149°02'E.), 51m high, lies 0.5

mile S of the S extremity of Lindeman Island. Spitfire Rock,

which dries, lies about 0.2 mile WSW of Seaforth Island. 

7.30 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

13m, about 0.5 mile E of the N extremity of Seaforth Island. It

is one of the better anchorages of the Lindeman Group. An alternative anchorage, in a depth of 8m, lies 0.3 mile SE of the N

extremity of Seaforth Island.

The Cumberland Islands—The Whitsunday

Group

7.31 The Whitsunday Group (20°15'S., 149°00'E.), the N

group of the N group of the Cumberland Islands, is comprised

of the islands between Dent Island and Hayman Island, 19

miles to the NNW.

Dent Island (20°22'S., 148°56'E.) lies on the E side of Whitsunday Passage at the SW extremity of the Whitsunday Group.

The island is steep-to on its S and W sides. Reefs and shoals almost connect the NE end of Dent Island with the S end and E

side of Henning Island, about 0.7 mile to the N. A light is

shown on the W side of Dent Island. 

7.31 Anchorage.—Anchorage, in depths of 15 to 27m, may be

obtained off the N end of Dent Island.

7.31 Anchorage is prohibited in most of Dent Passage.

7.31 Hamilton Island lies about 0.5 mile E of Dent Island from

which it is separated by Dent Passage, a narrow strait. Henning

Island (20°19'S., 148°56'E.) lies about 0.7 mile N of Dent Island. 

7.31 Aspect.—A conspicuous mast stands on a hill 0.5 mile SE of

the NW point of Hamilton Island. 

7.31 An airfield is situated S of a marina, which is situated 1 mile

S of the N point of the island. Vessels navigating Dent Passage

are advised to keep clear of the runway when aircraft are taking

off or landing.

7.31 A shoal depth of 2.4m lies close off the point 0.4 mile N of

the runway beacon.

7.31 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge may take sheltered anchorage about midway between Henning Island and

Whitsunday Island, in a depth of 29m.

7.31 Whitsunday Island (20°15'S., 149°00'E.), the largest of the

Cumberland Islands, lies with Reef Point, its W extremity,

about 1.5 miles N of Henning Island. The island is about 8.5

miles wide and 10.5 miles long. Most of the numerous bays

and inlets which indent the island are encumbered with shoal

water and reefs. Cid Island, which shows a light, lies about 0.5

mile N of Reef Point. 

7.31 Anchorage.—Cid Harbor affords anchorage, in depths of 11

to 15m, good holding ground. Anchorage can also be taken in

White Bay, on the E side of Whitsunday Island, in a depth of

13m, and, in a depth of 9m, 0.6 mile W of Tongue Point

(20°14'S., 149°01'E.). An anchorage area has been established

just E of Henning Island in Fitzalan Passage. 

7.32 Edward Island (20°15'S., 149°10'E.), the SE island

of the Whitsunday Group, is 106m high. Foul ground extends

0.7 mile E from the island, and near its outer end is a rock 6.1m

high, with another above-water rock between it and the island.

A light is shown from Edward Island. An isolated depth of

6.2m lies 19 miles ENE of the light.

7.32 Border Island, 228m high, lies 9 miles NW of Edward Island. 

7.32 Anchorage.—Anchorage with shelter from S winds, may be

obtained in Cataran Bay (20°10'S., 149°02'E.), on the N side

of the island, in depths of 15 to 20m, 0.5 mile W of the NE extremity of the island.

7.32 Hook Island (20°06'S., 148°55'E.) lies N of Whitsunday Island, from which it is separated by a narrow channel. There is a

least depth of 11m in the fairway of the channel, for which local knowledge is essential. Hook Island is wooded and rises to

Hook Peak (20°06'S., 148°56'E.), the highest summit in the

Cumberland Islands. The island is about 7 miles long and 3.5

miles wide.

7.32 The S coast of Hook Island is indented by Macona Inlet and

Nara Inlet, which are separated by a peninsula. Both inlets extend N for 2.7 miles, and are fringed by drying coral reefs. 

7.32 Macona Inlet is fronted by a bar, with depths of 3.7m in the

fairway. Nara Inlet has depths of 6.7 to 8.5m, but its entrance is

obstructed by a bank, with depths of less than 5.5m. In 1978, a

dangerous rock was reported to lie in the fairway across the bar

fronting Macona Inlet. A light is shown from the E entrance

point of Nara Inlet. A lighted beacon stands close off the entrance point of Macon Inlet.

7.32 Pinnacle Point (20°03'S., 148°58'E.), on which a light is

shown, rises to a height of 18m just within the NE extremity of

Hook Island. Several rocks above and below-water extend

about 0.2 mile NE from the point. There are tide rips E of these

rocks. 

7.32 Anchorage.—Butterfly Bay lies 1.5 miles WSW of Pinnacle

Point and affords anchorage to vessels with local knowledge;

the E side of the bay has the better anchorage.

7.33 Langford Islet lies about 5.5 miles WSW of Pinnacle

Point. A steep-to drying reef extends 1 mile SE and S of the islet. Bird Islet lies on the W side of this reef about 0.5 mile S of

Langford Islet. A light is shown from Bird Islet.

7.33 South Channel lies between Baird Point and the drying reef

1.1 miles NW. A detached shoal, with a depth of 7.3m, was reported (1990) to lie 0.2 mile NNE of Baird Point.

7.33 Hayman Island (20°03'S., 148°53'E.), 247m high, lies

about 0.7 mile NW of the NW end of Hook Island and is the

northernmost of the Cumberland Islands. A small harbor,

dredged to 4.5m, is situated at the SW end of Hayman Island at

the W end of a tourist resort.

7.33 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken, in 24m, with the S

end of the harbor pier bearing 046°, 0.3 mile.

7.33 Stonehaven Anchorage (20°06'S., 148°53'E.) lies S of Hayman Island, between Hook Island and the Langford Islet reef.
160 Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 

Pub. 127

There are depths of about 12.8 to 28m throughout most of

Stonehaven Anchorage and more than 18.3m in the fairways of

all the channels leading into it. Although any of the channels

may be used in entering, South Channel, between the SE end of

the Langford Islet reef and Hook Island, is wide and easy to enter.

7.33 The tidal currents are weak in Stonehaven Anchorage but

they may attain a rate of 1.5 knots in the narrower entrance

channels. At the anchorage, the flood current sets S and the ebb

current sets NW.

7.33 Vessels may take anchorage, with good holding ground, in

14.6m, about 0.4 mile NNW of Anchor Point. An aircraft

mooring buoy is moored E of the anchorage. Depths at the anchorage vary from 11 to 27m.

Cape Conway to Pioneer Point

7.34 Between Cape Conway and Pioneer Point, about 20

miles NNW, the bold hilly coast trends quite regularly in that

direction and rises abruptly to heights of 419m, about 0.5 mile

inland. Although most of this coast is rocky, some of the bays

and inlets have drying mud and sand flats bordered by mangroves. This part of the coast and its adjacent islands lie on the

W side of Whitsunday Passage.

7.34 Round Head (20°29'S., 148°54'E.) lies about 3.5 miles

NNW of Cape Conway and is the extremity of a peninsula that

extends about 1.5 miles E from the mainland. Genesta Bay indents the coast about 1.2 miles W on the S side of Round Head. 

7.34 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage in the bay, in depths

of 5 to 9m. Anchorage may also be obtained by vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 5 to 11m, in Puritan Bay on the N

side of the promontory of which Round Head is the SE extremity.

7.34 Long Shoal, composed of hard sand, which dries 0.6m near

its S end, lies with that end 1.5 miles NE of Cape Conway, and

extends 4 miles NNW. The shoal is steep-to, and the E and N

end are marked by overfalls and eddies. The channel inshore of

Long Shoal should not be used without local knowledge.

7.34 Long Island (20°22'S., 148°52'E.), 269m high, lies with its

S end about 5 miles NNW of Round Head. This narrow island

is about 5 miles long, S to N, and lies from about 0.2 mile to

1.2 miles offshore. East Rock, 10.4m high, lies a little over 0.2

mile off the E side of the island. Pine Island lies about 0.7 mile

ENE of the S end of Long Island. Strong eddies occur off both

ends of Pine Island and vessels should not approach within 0.5

mile of these points. Radio towers stand near the N end of

Long Island.

7.35 Port Molle (20°19'S., 148°51'E.) is suitable for large

vessels which use Whitsunday Passage or Molle Channel, entered between South Head (20°19'S., 148°52'E.) and Denman

Island, 2 miles N. Only high-powered vessels of moderate draft

should use Long Island Sound owing to the strong tidal currents. 

7.35 Anchorage.—Anchorage out of the strength of the tidal currents may be obtained, in depths of 13 to 15m, mud, 0.6 mile N

of Humpy Point (20°20'S., 148°51'E.).

7.35 Rooper Inlet lies between Stripe Point (20°19'S., 148°49'E.)

and The Beak, 2.5 miles NNW. The shores of the inlet are

fringed with mangroves and at its head is Shute Bay which is

shallow. The inlet is encumbered with shoal water and a number of islets and dangers lie in its entrance. Shute Islet, the largest of these dangers, lies about 1.5 miles NNW of Stripe Point.

A lighted beacon stands on the edge of the reef close off the N

extremity of the islet. Low Reef lies 0.2 mile NNE of Shute Islet. Low Rock lighted beacon stands on the E side of the reef.

Repair Island lies W of Shute Islet and shows a light. A light

stands on The Beak.

7.35 Vessels without local knowledge should not attempt to navigate between the islets in the entrance of Rooper Inlet. 

7.35 Anchorage.—Small vessels with local knowledge may take

anchorage in Rooper Inlet, in 5.5m.

7.35 Molle Island (20°16'S., 148°50'E.), 194m high and the

southernmost of the Molle Group, lies about 1.5 miles E of The

Beak. 

7.35 Anchorage.—Vessels may take anchorage on the W side of

Molle Island about 0.3 mile NNW of Roma Point (20°17'S.,

148°50'E.) and about 0.2 mile offshore, in depths of 18 to 24m,

good holding ground. During the ebb current an eddy sets S in

this anchorage. 

7.36 Mid Molle Island is a narrow islet at the N end of

Molle Island to which it is connected by a short causeway.

7.36 North Molle Island (20°13'S., 148°49'E.) lies 0.2 mile N of

Mid Molle Island. The two islands are separated by a narrow

channel, suitable only for boats, in which there is a strong tidal

race.

7.36 West Molle Island (20°15'S., 148°49'E.) lies 1 mile SW of

Mid Molle Island, and is 47m high and reef-fringed. There is a

village on the W side of the island near the S end. West Molle

Island and the dangers surrounding it are covered by the red

sector of The Beak Light. Leading lights are shown close together at the N end of West Molle Island. In line bearing

240.5°, they lead through Unsafe Passage. The passage E of the

island should not be used by low powered vessels.

7.36 Molle Channel, which lies between the Molle Islands on the

E side and the mainland from Stripe Point to Pioneer Point on

the W side, is deep and wide, the narrowest part being between

the reef extending S from West Molle Island and The Beak.

There are depths of more than 37m in the fairway.

7.36 Caution.—A submarine power cable and pipeline are laid

across Molle Channel from a position 0.8 mile W of The Beak

to West Molle Island. The submarine power cable then crosses

to SE to Molle Island.

7.36 Pioneer Point (20°14'S., 148°46'E.), a rocky tree-covered islet, is connected to the mainland S. Pioneer Rocks, which dry

3m, lie 0.5 mile NW of Pioneer Point, with below-water rocks

extending 0.1 mile S. A lighted beacon stands on the rocks. 

7.36 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

11m, W of Pioneer Point, sheltered from S winds.

Pioneer Point to Cape Edgecumbe

7.37 Pioneer Bay (20°14'S., 148°42'E.), entered between

Pioneer Point and Grimston Point, 6 miles NW, has depths of

less than 11m within a line joining the entrance points. Pigeon

Islet, 9.1m high, lies at the head of the bay on the edge of a drying bank. The villages of Cannonvale and Airlie, each with a

small jetty, lie 0.7 mile S and 1 mile E, respectively, of Pigeon
Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 161

Pub. 127

Islet. A marina, with a breakwater marked by lighted beacons,

is situated close N of Airlie.

7.37 Grimston Point is the N extremity of a narrow peninsula,

24m high and 2.7 miles long, which projects NNE from the

mainland, and is covered with rocks and grass. The point is

84m high; the E side is steep-to. 

7.37 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained in the lee of the

point during SW gales.

7.37 A series of small bays and inlets indent the coast between

Grimston Point and George Point, about 9 miles NW. Although

most of these are clear of dangers, some of them are fringed

with reefs, which can best be seen on the chart.

7.37 Grassy Island (20°09'S., 148°37'E.) lies about 3.7 miles N

of Grimston Point and about 1.2 miles offshore. A drying reef

fringes the S side of the island up to about 0.5 mile offshore. 

7.37 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 7m,

0.7 mile off the S side of the island. This anchorage is sheltered

from N winds.

7.37 Gumbrell Island (20°06'S., 148°36'E.), doubled-peaked and

91m high, lies about 2.2 miles N of Grassy Island. Depths of

less than 10.9m lie up to 0.5 mile N and S of the island; a reef

extends about 0.1 mile from its SW point. The Armit Islands

and Double Cone Island lie about 1.7 miles and 5.5 miles E of

Gumbrell Island, respectively. 

7.37 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

24m, mud, NW of Double Cone Island.

7.37 Eshelby Island lies 5 miles N of Gumbrell Island. Overfalls

occur off the NE side of the island during the flood tide. A light

is shown from the island. Rattray Island lies 4 miles WNW of

Eshelby Island. There are tide rips off the N extremity of Rattray Island. 

7.37 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

18m, off the W side of Rattray Island. There is also good anchorage off the S side, in depths of 11 to 15m, mud.

7.38 George Point (20°04'S., 148°34'E.) is the NE extremity of a cliffy promontory, which rises to a height of 296m

about 1.2 miles SSW. A bank, with a depth of 17.7m, lies 0.5

mile NE of George Point. 

7.38 Saddleback Island is doubled-peaked and lies 1 mile WNW

of George Point.

7.38 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained in SW winds in

the lee of George Point.

7.38 Cape Gloucester lies 5 miles W of Saddleback Island and is

the N termination of a range of hills and peaks. Gloucester Passage lies between Cape Gloucester and the S side of Gloucester

Island and has a least depth of 1.8m in the fairway at its W end.

The passage should only be used with great caution by small

vessels with recent local knowledge, and never at night.

7.38 Gloucester Island (20°00'S., 148°27'E.) extends about 5

miles N from Gloucester Passage to Gloucester Head, the N

extremity of the island. Mount Bertha, 577m high, lies in the

middle of the island. 

7.38 Anchorage.—Anchorage, with shelter from S and E winds,

may be obtained, in depths of 7 to 13m, in Bona Bay on the

SW side of the island. Anchorage may also be taken in the lee

of Cape Gloucester, in depths of 5 to 9m.

7.38 Middle Island, 55m high, lies in the middle of the entrance to

Edgecumbe Bay, between Gloucester Head and Cape

Edgecumbe. The island is rocky, reddish colored, flat-topped,

and sparsely wooded. A drying reef extends 0.2 mile S from

the island. Caution should be exercised approaching this reef as

it is steep-to.

7.38 Edgecumbe Bay (20°05'S., 148°22'E.) indents the coast between Middle Island and the head of the bay. The E side of the

bay rises abruptly, but the head of the bay is a low mangroved

shore. Ben Lomond, 438m high, is a remarkable sugarloaf hill

that rises at the SE end of the bay. The W side of the bay is low,

but is backed by a number of hills.

Port of Bowen (20°01'S., 148°15'E.), formerly a coal-exporting port, is no longer used by commercial vessels, its trade

having been taken over by Abbot Point Coal Wharf. The

wharves are run down and are only used by fishing vessels and

by tugs which service Abbot Point Coal Wharf.

Cape Edgecumbe to Cape Bowling Green

7.39 Cape Edgecumbe (19°59'S., 148°16'E.), the W entrance point of Edgecumbe Bay, is low and fringed with reefs

up to about 0.5 mile offshore. North Rock, 1m high, lies on the

NE edge of the reefs, almost 0.5 mile NNE of the cape.

Edgecumbe Heights is a short range of hills that extend about 1

mile S from the cape. A prominent boulder is located on the

highest summit of these hills.

7.39 Holbourne Island, 112m high, is covered with grass and

bushes on its S side and lies about 16 miles offshore, NNE of

Cape Edgecumbe. A light is shown from the island. 

7.39 Anchorage.—Temporary anchorage is afforded, in a depth

of 16m, on the W side of the island.

7.40 Abbot Bay (19°51'S., 147°57'E.) lies between Abbot

Point and the NE extremity of the peninsula of which Cape Upstart is the NW extremity, 16 miles NW. The shores of the bay

are low, sandy, and intersected by creeks, except on the E side

of the promontory, which is high and steep. A light is shown on

Bald Hill. 

7.40 There is a coal exporting terminal at Abbot Point. A trestle

jetty and coal conveyor extend 1.5 miles NNE from Abbot

Point, terminating at a wharf aligned 109°-289°. 

7.40 Winds—Weather.—Winds from the SE can average 20 to

30 knots for periods of as long as two continuous weeks.

Northeast to SE winds average 15 to 20 knots for much of the

year.

7.40 Depths—Limitations.—There is a depth of 17.1m in the approaches.

7.40 The trestle jetty has a berthing length of 264m, with dolphins

at each end and an alongside depth of 19.3m. 

7.40 The terminal accommodates vessels of up to 165,000 dwt.

7.40 Aspect.—Lights mark the E and W approaches to the wharf.

7.40 Leading lights, in line bearing approximately 225°, are

shown near Abbot Point; the rear light of this pair is Bald Hill

Light.

7.40 Range lights, in line bearing approximately 164°, are shown

near Abbot Point; the rear of this pair is the front light of the

225° alignment above. A lighted beacon stands 2 miles NNW

Queensland Ports Corporation

http://www.pcq.com.au/html/02_ports.htm
162 Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 

Pub. 127

of Abbot Point. 

7.40 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot boards about

3.7 miles NNW of the Abbot Point trestle jetty. The vessel’s

ETA should be forwarded 7 days, 48 hours, 24 hours, and 6

hours prior to arrival.

7.40 There is a port radio station at Abbot Point.

7.40 Anchorage.—The anchorage, in 19.3m, is situated 4.2 miles

NNE of Abbot Point.

7.40 Anchorage is afforded small vessels with local knowledge,

in a depth of 5m, 0.3 to 0.4 mile W of Mount Luce, but the

swell frequently causes a vessel to roll heavily.

7.41 Cape Upstart (19°42'S., 147°45'E.) is a hilly promontory that extends about 8 miles N from the mainland and rises abruptly to heights of 738m. The cape is conspicuous and

has been reported to give good radar returns up to 17 miles. 

7.41 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained by vessels with

local knowledge, in depths of 7 to 13m, off a small sandy

beach close S of Cape Upstart.

7.41 Upstart Bay is entered between Cape Upstart and Beach Hill

(19°44'S., 147°35'E.), 9.5 miles WSW. Depths of less than

5.5m extend up to 1 mile offshore for a distance of 3.5 miles S

of Cape Upstart. The SE and E part of the head of the bay are

formed by drying mud banks, which extend 1 mile offshore. A

number of shallow creeks and inlets intersect the low mangrove shore at the head of the bay. A light is shown from the E

side of the entrance to Molongle Creek located at the head of

the bay.

7.41 The Burdekin River, navigable only by boats with local

knowledge, flows into the sea about 3 miles N of Beach Hill.

Although the river mouth is about 1.5 miles wide, it is encumbered with sandbanks and bars that extend about 2 miles offshore. During E winds, the sea breaks heavily over these

dangers. A light is shown from the S entrance, about 9 miles

WSW of Cape Upstart.

7.41 Plantation Creek (19°32'S., 147°30'E.), about 7 miles

NNW of the Burdekin River mouth, is accessible by small craft

with local knowledge. This part of the coast is fronted by

shoals and partly drying sandbanks.

7.41 Cape Bowling Green (19°18'S., 147°26'E.), low and sandy,

is the N extremity of Russel Island. This island is located close

N of a low narrow neck that extends about 6.5 miles NNW

from the mainland close N of the mouth of Alva Creek. It

forms the E side of Bowling Green Bay. A light is shown near

the S end of Russel Island. The cape has been reported to give

good radar returns up to 14 miles.

7.41 Anchorage.—Small vessels with local knowledge can take

anchorage in the lee of Russel Island. Larger vessels may take

anchorage W of a shoal, located about 4 miles W of Cape

Bowling Green Light, in depths of 3.6 to 7.3m, mud and sand.

7.41 A wreck over which there is a depth of 11.4m lies about 13

miles due E from Cape Bowling Green.

Bowling Green Bay to Luncinda Point

7.42 Bowling Green Bay (19°22'S., 147°15'E.) indents the

coast about 10 miles S between Cape Bowling Green and Cape

Cleveland, about 25 miles WNW. Shoals, with irregular depths

of less than 1 to 5.5m, encumber much of the bay and lie up to

5 miles offshore in its E and central parts. In the W part of the

bay they lie up to 1.5 miles offshore.

7.42 Several high mountains back the low coast to about 4.5 miles

inland from the SW side of the bay. Saddle Mountain, 868m

high, lies about 15 miles S of Cape Cleveland. A conspicuous

tower stands on the N slope of this mountain. Mount Eliot

(19°29'S., 146°58'E.), a conspicuous level-topped mountain,

1,233m high, lies about 19 miles S of Cape Cleveland.

7.42 Chunda Bay lies about 7 miles SSE of Cape Cleveland. The

bay is filled by a drying sandbank and fringed with mangroves.

A lighted radio mast stands 3 miles WSW of the S entrance

point to the bay and a light is shown from a jetty on the N side

of the bay.

7.42 Cape Cleveland (19°11'S., 147°01'E.) is the N extremity of

a hilly peninsula that extends about 6 miles N from the mainland. The cape has been reported to give good radar returns up

to 23 miles. A light is shown on the N end of the cape and is an

excellent visual aid in approaching Townsville. There is a signal station at the light. Salamander Reef, which dries 1.2m, lies

about 3 miles E of Cape Cleveland.

7.42 Cleveland Bay indents the coast about 8 miles S between

Cape Cleveland and Cape Pallarenda, about 13.5 miles W. The

shores of the bay are fronted by sand and coral grit, or sand and

mud banks, which dry up to 2.1m, and are backed by mangroves. A number of creeks enter the bay through shallow entrances at the head of the bay. The port of Townsville lies on

the SW side of the bay. 

7.42 Anchorage.—Anchorage for small vessels may be obtained

off the W side of Cape Cleveland.

7.43 Magnetic Island (19°09'S., 146°50'E.) lies with Nobby Head, its S extremity, 3.5 miles E of Cape Pallarenda, and is

separated from it by West Channel. The island is studded with

peaks which are thickly wooded and covered with immense

granite boulders. Mount Cook, 495m high, the highest peak,

rises near the middle of the island and has a light, which is an

excellent visual aid in the approach to Townsville. The SE side

of the island forms the NW side of Cleveland Bay and is indented by a number of small bights. 

7.43 Bremner Point (19°09'S., 146°52'E.), with a jetty on its SW

side, lies about 2.5 miles SSW of the NE end of the island.

7.43 A conspicuous stranded wreck lies about 0.7 mile NW of

Nobby Head. 

7.43 Picnic Bay, which lies between Nobby Head and Hawkins

Point (19°11'S., 146°51'E.), is filled by a drying reef, near the

middle of which is a beacon which marks a submarine cable. A

jetty extends from the SW side of the bay. A lighted beacon

marks the E end of a spur of the coastal reef, about 0.5 mile

ESE of Nobby Head.

7.43 Bay Rock (19°07'S., 146°45'E.), on which a light is shown,

lies about 1.5 miles WNW of West Point, the W extremity of

Magnetic Island. It lies in the approach to West Channel and

the Port of Townsville.

Townsville (19°15'S., 146°50'E.)

World Port Index No. 53380

7.44 The port of Townsville, the principal port in northern

Queensland, includes all of Cleveland Bay, as well as Magnetic

Island. The port is relatively small but remains fairly busy, with
Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 163

Pub. 127

a rather high volume of merchant traffic. The harbor for the

port is located at the city of Townsville, on the SW side of

Cleveland Bay, about 11.5 miles WSW of Cape Cleveland. The

main approach is made through Cleveland Bay from the NE,

but light draft vessels from the N may use West Channel.

7.44 Winds—Weather.—The climate is dry and tropical. The region has a high summer rainfall, with an average annual total

of 1,134mm. July is the coolest month, with an average temperature of 20°C, while January is the warmest month, with an

average temperature of 28°C.

7.44 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at the wharves is 2.9m at

MHWS, and 1.9m at MHWN. The currents in the vicinity do

not appear to be a hindrance. Flood currents generally run

WSW, in the direction of Palm Passage, shifting to the S between Magnetic Island and the Great Barrier Reef. Ebb currents flow opposite, running N to Palm Passage, then turning

ENE through the passage. During the flood tide, it has been reported that there is a strong set to the W upon exiting the Eastern Breakwater.

7.44 Depths—Limitations.—Sea Reach Channel, the first leg of

the approach fairway, is entered 0.7 mile SE of Bremner Point.

Platypus Channel only allows traffic in one direction at a time.

Both Sea Reach Channel and Platypus Channel are extremely

well marked with large channel markers. The deepest water

lies in the centers of the channels and therefore critical for deep

draft vessels to use the fixed ranges (leads) to keep within the

center of the channels. The width of the channel averages only

about 68m.

7.44 The approach depths were reported (2005), as follows:

1. Sea Reach Channel—11.7m.

2. Platypus Channel—11.7m.

3. Outer Harbor Arrival Channel—8.1m.

4. Outer Harbor Departure Channel—11.7m.

7.44 West Channel, which lies between the shore bank extending

NE and NNW from Cape Pallarenda and the dangers fringing

the SW side of Magnetic Island, trends SE into Cleveland Bay.

The channel is about 1.2 miles wide between these dangers.

Middle Reef, marked by lighted beacons, lies about in the middle of the inner end of this channel. The channel has depths of

3.6 to 6.1m and is suitable only for shallow-draft vessels. It

should not be used at night without local knowledge.

7.44 Ross River Channel, which runs parallel to the W breakwater, trends SW from the harbor entrance and over a rocky bar

into the mouth of Ross Creek. The channel is marked and had a

least depth of 1.2m in 2004. After heavy rains, a considerable

amount of silt may be deposited in this channel.

7.44 The harbor complex offers nine berths, with the facilities to

handle a variety of cargo types.

7.44 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for the following vessels

unless operating under a Pilotage Exemption Certificate:

1. Vessels of 50m length and greater.

2. A vessel towing another vessel where the combined

length is greater than 50m.

3. A vessel whose owner or master requests the services

of a pilot. 

4. A vessel whose master is directed by the Regional

Harbormaster to use the services of a pilot.

7.44 Vessels requiring the services of a pilot are required to give a

minimum of 48 hours notice for arrivals and 24 hours notice

for departures. Pilots should be ordered via ship’s agent using

the internet-based Queensland Shipping Information Planning

System (QSHIPS).

7.44 Vessels with an arrival draft exceeding 8m should proceed to

Pilot Boarding Ground A. Vessels with a draft of between 7m

and 8m should seek advice from the duty pilot as to which pilot

boarding ground to use. Vessels with a draft less than 7m will

be accepted at Pilot Boarding Ground B. Pilot transfer instructions will be given prior to the pilot boarding by Townsville

VTS.

7.44 Pilots board, as follows:

1. Boarding Ground A—position 19°06'34.2''S,

146°54'09.6''E. 

2. Boarding Ground B—position 19°09'10''S,

146°55'30.0''E. 

7.44 Regulations.—The port limits line is best seen on the chart.

7.44 The quarantine line is drawn across the channel about 2

Townsville Port Authority

http://www.townsville-port.com.au

Townsville Port Facilities 

Berth Length Depth Max. 

Length Remarks

1 250m 12.2m 238m

Outer end of E 

breakwater. Bulk 

petroleum products.

2 281m 12.8m 238m General cargo.

3 283m 12.2m 238m Containers and 

ro-ro.

4 220m 10.4m 238m Ro-ro and 

molasses.

6 122m — — Condemned. Not 

in use.

7 183m 11.2m 195m West side of E 

pier. Bulk ore.

8 213m 10.3m 220m East side of W 

pier. Freezer.

9 230m 12.2m 228m West side of W 

pier. Bulk sugar.

10 160m 9.4m 152m Ro-Ro.

11 240m 11.7m 195m Bulk ore.

Note.—The following underkeel clearances are required:

1. All vessel movements—0.9m.

2. Alongside all berths—0.6m.

Townsville Port Facilities 

Berth Length Depth Max. 

Length Remarks
164 Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 

Pub. 127

miles NNE of the breakwater heads.

7.44 Explosives are usually discharged to lighters at the anchorage off Bremner Point.

7.44 Vessel Traffic Service.—This service is manatory for all

vessels 35m long nd greater.

7.44 Notice of ETA must be sent 48 hours prior to arrival with

further messages 24 hours and 12 hours if necessary.

1. Call sign: Townsville VTS

2. VHF: VHF channels 12 and 16

3. Telephone: 61-747263600

4. Facsimile: 61-747210633

5. E-mail: vtstownsville@msq.qld.gov.au

7.44 Vessels carrying dangerous cargo must give 48 hours minimum notice prior to arrival and 3 hours minimum notice prior

to departure.

7.44 Vessels are not to move within the pilotage area unless satisfactory two-way communications are maintained with Townsville VTS.

7.44 Vessels are to report to Townsville VTS to obtain clearance

and arrival information 2 hours before ETA at the pilotage area.

Pilotage exempt vessels are to report 2 hours prior to ETA at

the Fairway Lighted Beacon. The information required is, as

follows:

1. Vessel’s name.

2. Position.

3. Fore and aft draft.

4. Changes to vessel’s details.

5. Any defects.

6. ETA at pilot boarding ground.

7.44 Vessels are to report to Townsville VTS to obtain clearance

and removal information before commencing movement within the pilotage area.

7.44 Vessels are to report to Townsville VTS to obtain clearance

and departure information before commencing movement from

the pilotage area. The information required is, as follows:

1. Vessel’s name.

2. Radio check.

3. Destination port/anchorage.

4. Draft fore and aft.

5. Changes to vessel’s details.

7.44 Vessels are only to anchor in the area designated by Townsville VTS. Upon anchoring, vessels are to advise Townsville

VTS of their anchoring time and postion as a bearing and distance from the north cardinal lighted beacon (19°07'42"S.,

146°54'23"E.). Vessels at anchor in the pilotage area are to

maintain a continuous listening watch on VHF channel 16 and

report if dragging their anchor. Vessels departing the anchorage

are to advise Townsville VTS of the vessel’s name and time of

weighing anchor.

7.44 Changes requested by the master/agent to scheduled movements may be made via QSHIPS, telephone, or e-mail and are

to be communicated to Townsville VTS and the relevant marine services as soon as practicable, advising of the revised

schedule. Changes within 8 hours of the scheduled start time

must be reported by telephone (61-7-47263610).

7.44 Any marine incident, collision, grounding, or fire occurring

within the port should be reported to Townsville VTS immediately on VHF channel 12. 

7.44 Signals.—Berthing signals are displayed from the Port Control Tower on W pier. A green quick flashing light placed on

top of a vehicle on the pier indicates the final position of the

vessel’s bridge when docking.

7.44 The Port Closed signal is displayed from the tower and consists of the answering pennant, by day, or an occulting red

light, at night.

7.44Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

9.1m, good holding ground, 0.7 mile SSW of Bremner Point.

Small vessels using West Channel may obtain good anchorage

sheltered from NE winds, in a depth of 5m, 1.2 miles NNE of

Cape Pallarenda.

7.44Directions.—Cleveland Bay is easily distinguished and entered. The approach channels are well-marked by lighted ranges and lighted beacons.

7.44Caution.—Care is advised, as the channel and berths are

subject to silting. The latest Notice to Mariners, and the local

authorities, if possible, should be consulted for any changes in

depths.

7.44The beacons are situated 18 to 27m outside the limits of the

dredged channel.

7.44The pilot will call harbor control to turn on range lights

when necessary. The ranges are hard to distinguish when the

lights are not activated.

Cape Pallarenda to Lucinda Point

7.45 Between Cape Pallarenda and Lucinda Point, about

47 miles NNW, the coast recedes about 12 miles SW to form a

long bight known as Halifax Bay. This coast consists of a low

wooded shore from which numerous creeks empty. There are

numerous lagoons behind the coast at the head of Halifax Bay,

and there are mangrove swamps in the vicinity of Lucinda

Point.

7.45 Burdekin Rock (19°08'S., 146°42'E.) lies 5.2 miles NNW

of Cape Pallarenda. The rock is about 15m long and awash at

LWS. Paluma Shoals, consisting of a number of rocks, some of

which are awash, lies 9 miles WNW of Burdekin Rock. A submarine pipeline, marked at the shore end and the seaward end

by lights, extends about 1 mile NE from the shore, about 4.5

miles WSW of Burdekin Rock.

7.45 Eleanor Creek (18°52'S., 146°17'E.), navigable by boats for

about 6 miles, empties into the head of Halifax Bay. Lady Elliot Reef, with a depth of less than 1m, lies about 11 miles NNE

of the mouth of Eleanor Creek. Victoria Creek lies about 14

miles NNE of Eleanor Creek.

Off-lying Islands and Dangers

7.46 Rattlesnake Island (19°02'S., 146°37'E.) lies 13

miles NW of Cape Pallarenda. 

7.46 Anchorage.—Vessels can take anchorage during SE winds

in the W part of the bight on the N side of the island, in 7.3 to

9.1m, 0.7 mile NW of the summit of the island. Lorne Reef,

which dries 0.3m, lies 1 mile W of Rattlesnake Island.

7.46 Bramble Rock lies about 0.5 mile NE of the E end or Rattlesnake Island. Submerged rocks extend almost 0.2 mile from

the S and NW sides of Bramble Rock. Herald Island

(19°02'S., 146°38'E.) lies about 0.5 mile E of Rattlesnake Island. Reefs fringe the island up to 0.2 mile off its S and W

sides, but its E side is steep-to. There are depths of 1.8m between Herald Island and Rattlesnake Island.
Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 165

Pub. 127

7.46 In 1990, a rock, awash, was reported to lie 0.1 mile W of

Bramble Rock.

7.46 Cordelia Rocks (19°00'S., 146°41'E.), several rocks on a

steep-to coral reef, lie about 3.2 miles ENE of Herald Island.

Vessels should not pass within less than 0.5 mile of the W side

of Cordelia Rocks.

7.46 Acheron Island lies about 4 miles NNE of Rattlesnake Island. The N and W sides of the island are fringed with rocks.

Phillips Reef, a 1.8m patch, lies almost 1.2 miles SW of the W

end of this island.

7.46 A submerged wreck, with a depth of 9.1m, was reported in

1986 to lie 0.9 mile SE of the E end of Acheron Island. Havannah Island (18°50'S., 146°33'E.) lies about 8.5 miles NW of

Acheron Island. The island has two peaks separated by a low

gap. Rocks and reefs fringe the island up to about 0.2 mile offshore. Fly Islet lies 0.5 mile NW of Havannah Island.

Pandora Reef, almost 0.7 mile long E to W, lies about 5.5

miles W of Fly Islet. A coral cay on the E end and a sandbank

on the W end of the reef are awash at high water.

7.47 Great Palm Island (18°45'S., 146°38'E.), the largest

of the Palm Isles, is about 8.5 miles long. A ridge of hills,

which extend the length of the island, rises abruptly from the

coast to the 554m summit of Mount Bentley, in the middle of

the island. The S and NE sides of the island and its E end are

fringed by reefs and rocks up to almost 0.7 mile offshore.

Rocks and reefs fringe the W side up to 1 mile offshore. Barber

Islet lies off the S side of the island.

7.47 Albino Rock (White Rock) is a steep-to pinnacle that lies

about 1.5 miles SE of the SE end of Great Palm Island. A light

is shown on the summit of the rock; the light structure has been

reported to give good radar returns up to 10 miles.

7.47 Challenger Bay (18°44'S., 146°34'E.) lies on the W side of

Great Palm Island. The bay affords anchorage, in depths of 7.3

to 9.1m, sand.

7.47 Eclipse Island lies about 1 mile SW of Great Palm Island

from which it is separated by Steamer Passage, a clear deep

channel. Foul ground fringes this islet up to about 0.1 mile offshore; a drying coral reef extends 0.5 mile NW from the islet.

7.48 Curacoa Island (18°40'S., 146°33'E.) lies about 0.5

mile NW of the NW end of Great Palm Island. These two islands are separated by Calliope Channel. This channel is not

recommended, but may safely be used by favoring the E side of

Curacoa Island. Curacoa Channel lies on the W side of Curacoa Island, and separates Curacoa Island from Fantome Island.

7.48 Fantome Island (18°41'S., 146°31'E.) lies about 0.7 mile W

of Curacoa Island. The island has two wooded summits separated by a low, narrow neck of land. The N summit slopes

down to a low, sandy plain on which there is a hillock. A leprosy hospital is situated on the hillock. 

7.48 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained on the W side of

the island in Juno Bay, in depths of 11 to 15m, 1.2 miles SSW

of the NW extremity of Fantome Island.

7.48 A depth of 16.6m lies at the E extremity of a bank, with lesser depths W of it, extending NE for about 1.5 miles from the S

point of Fantome Island.

7.48 Orpheus Island is separated from the NW extremity of Fantome Island by a narrow channel, 0.2 mile wide, with a depth

of 2.7m. A jetty, 15m long, is situated on the W side of the island 2.2 miles N of Harrier Point. The channel to the jetty is

marked by small buoys.

7.48 Hazard Bay and Pioneer Bay on the W side of the island, afford good anchorage, in a depth of 13m, coral, 0.7 mile offshore.

Pelorus Island (North Palm Island) (18°33'S., 146°30'E.),

282m high and wooded, lies 0.5 mile N of Orpheus Island, and

is steep-to. In 1978, a depth of 14.6m was reported 1 mile W of

Pelorus Island. 

7.48 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in the channel between

Orpheus Island and Pelorus Island are strong, usually setting in

the opposite direction to that of the tidal current outside at that

time.

7.48 Caution.—An isolated depth of 15.4m lies 0.7 mile W of

Pelorus Island.

Lucinda Point to Double Point

7.49 Lucinda Point (18°31'S., 146°20'E.) on which a light

is shown, is a low point on the S side of the S entrance of

Hinchinbrook Channel. The town of Lucinda is situated close

W of the point. A pier and some conspicuous tanks and warehouses are situated in the town. Drying sandbanks extend about

2 miles E from Lucinda Point, and a shorebank, with depths of

less than 1.8m, extends about 2.7 miles ENE from the point.

7.49 Hinchinbrook Island (18°22'S., 146°15'E.), about 19 miles

long, S and N, and about 6 to 13 miles wide, is contiguous with

the coast, about 0.5 mile to 3 miles S and SW from which it is

separated by Hinchinbrook Channel. The island is high and

rugged and has a range of hills and mountains extending from

SE to NW across most of its length. Mount Bowen, about in

the middle of the island, is the most prominent peak.

7.49 Hinchinbrook Channel is composed of two entrances, N and

S. The S entrance lies between Lucinda and George Points and

is obstructed by a bar, which extends 3 miles offshore, across

the greater part of the entrance. There is a least depth of 3.3m

in the channel over the bar. Small vessels use this entrance, but

deep-draft vessels use the N entrance. A pair of leading lights

bearing 247° lead into the S entrance. 

7.49 During fresh NE winds, a heavy surf breaks over the bar. The

flood current sets through the N and S entrances at a rate of 1

to 3 knots. 

7.49 Within the bar, there are depths of more than 2.7m in the

channel to the wharf at Lucinda. 

7.49 After bad weather, some of the navigational aids may be out

of position or missing. 

7.49 The N entrance to Hinchinbrook Channel is obstructed by a

bar, which extends W from Goold Island to the mainland, and

SW from the island to the N shore of Hinchinbrook Island. In

1989, there was a least depth of 3.3m in Hinchinbrook Channel, and a 3.7m patch close E of the fairway, 0.6 mile WNW of

Lucinda inshore berth. Depths are liable to change and for the

latest information on depths in the Hinchinbrook Channel and

the berths, see the Australian Temporary Notices to Mariners.

7.49 The N entrance is sheltered from all winds except those from

the N.

7.50 Port of Lucinda (18°31'S., 146°20'E.) (World Port

Index No. 53370), formerly known as Hinchinbrook, is mainly
166 Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 

Pub. 127

used to export raw sugar. 

7.50 Depths—Limitations.—The inshore molasses wharf, which

lies in the town of Lucinda, is L-shaped with a 133m face and

an alongside depth of 9m. The pier is no longer in use and has

been in disrepair since 1989. 

7.50 Extending from the root of this wharf, a 3-mile long jetty extends seaward; at the outer end is a 213m long bulk sugar-loading facility. A vessel of up to 50,000 dwt can berth at this

wharf. The depth alongside the berth is 13.6m. An obstruction,

with a depth of 12m, lies close to the N end of the berth.

7.50 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and should be arranged

through Cairns in advance. Pilots for the bulk sugar facility are

boarded 4 miles ENE of Lucinda Point. Vessels using the N entrance to Hinchinbrook Channel board the pilot off Cardwell

(18°15'S., 146°02'E.).

7.50 Anchorage.—Vessels can take anchorage inside the N entrance of Hinchinbrook Channel, E of Cardwell and about 1.2

miles S of Hecate Point, in 7.3 to 14.6m. Small vessels may anchor, in a depth of 6m, 0.7 mile WSW of Hayman Point, the

NW extremity of Goold Island.

Rockingham Bay to Double Point

7.51 Rockingham Bay (18°08'S., 146°07'E.) is entered between Cape Sandwich and Dunk Island (17°57'S., 146°10'E.),

17 miles NNW. Although open to the E, shelter may be obtained W of Goold Island or W of Dunk Island. The Brook Islands, four in number, lie on the SE side of Rockingham Bay.

A light is shown on the S island of the group. 

7.51 A number of rivers and creeks empty into the bay. The Murray River (18°05'S., 146°02'E.) is navigable by small craft

with local knowledge and a draft of not more than 2.4m. 

7.51 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained in the Murray

River close S of the N entrance point, in a depth of 4m.

7.51 The Family Islands (18°02'S., 146°12'E.) form a line of seven high, rocky islets that extend about 5.5 miles SE from a position about 2 miles E of Tam O’Shanter Point. 

7.51 Dunk Island, about 3.2 miles long, lies with its SE end about

4.5 miles E of Tam O’Shanter Point. The island rises to a 270m

summit near its N end. The island has been reported to give

good radar returns up to 20 miles. A rock, 12.2m high, lies

close off the SE end of the island. 

7.51 Mound Islet lies about 0.5 mile W of the N end of Dunk Island. 

7.51 Anchorage.—Vessels can take anchorage about 1 mile W of

Mound Islet, in 9.1 to 14.6m, good holding ground. Small craft

can anchor SW of the islet.

7.51 Between Tam O’Shanter Point and Double Point, about 19

miles N, the coast trends in that direction and consists mostly

of sandy beaches. In places, it is closely backed by a number of

hills; higher mountains are farther inland.

7.51 Clump Point (17°52'S., 146°08'E.), a low rocky point that

extends about 1 mile NE from the coast, lies about 7.5 miles N

of Tam O’Shanter Point. Clump Mountain, about 716m high,

lies about 2 miles WNW of Clump Point.

7.51 Murdering Point (17°46'S., 146°07'E.), low and sandy, lies

about 5 miles N of Clump Point. Foul ground and coral heads,

awash at LW, fringe the point up to about 2 miles offshore and

extend E to King Reef.

7.51 King Reef (17°47'S., 146°10'E.), a number of rocks that dry

about 1.8m, lies almost 3 miles E of Murdering Point. Foul

ground lies between the reef and the coast. A current sets toward the land in the vicinity of King Reef during SE winds and

particularly with the rising tide.

7.51 The South Barnard Islands (17°45'S., 146°10'E.), two adjacent islets, lie on a reef about 3.5 miles ENE of Murdering

Point. Stephens Island is the N islet and has been reported to

give good radar returns up to 16 miles. 

7.51 Anchorage.—During SE winds, vessels of moderate draft

may take anchorage in the lee of Stephens Island, in a depth of

about 6m.

7.52 Double Point (17°39'S., 146°09'E.) rises abruptly

from the sea to an isolated hill and is prominent because of the

low flat country in its vicinity. Several rocks fringe the point

within about 0.2 mile offshore. Except for the North Barnard

Islands, the point is clear of dangers and is fairly steep-to.

7.52 The North Barnard Islands, several high and fairly steep-to

islets, form a line that extends about 2 miles SE from a position

about 0.5 mile SE of Double Point. Vessels without local

knowledge should not attempt to use some of the passages between the islets. Vessels should pass at least 1 mile E of Kent

Island.

7.52 Kent Island, 95m high and on which a light is shown, lies

about 2.5 miles SE of Double Point. The island has been reported to give good radar returns up to 18 miles. 

7.52 Jessie Island, 58m high, and Hutchison Island, 85m high, lie

almost 0.2 and 0.5 mile W, respectively, of Kent Island. Bresnahan Islet, 19.2m high, lies about 0.2 mile N of Hutchison Island.

7.52 Lindquist Island (17°39'S., 146°09'E.), 39m high, lies almost 0.7 mile NW of Bresnahan Islet and its NW end lies 0.5

mile SE of Double Point. A rock, awash, lies midway between

this island and Bresnahan Islet. Foul ground lies up to a little

over 0.2 mile W of Lindquist Island.

7.52 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can take anchorage, sheltered from SE winds, NW of Kent Island, in about

14.6m.

7.52 Between Double Point and a point 1.2 miles NNW, there is a

sandy beach, backed by land similar to that S of Double Point.

An islet, 25m high, lies close offshore, 0.5 mile NW of Double

Point. The coast to the entrance of Mourilyan Harbor, 1.7 miles

NNW, is steep and rock fringed.

7.53 Mourilyan Harbor (17°36'S., 146°08'E.) (World

Port Index No. 53360) lies just inside the estuary of the Moresby River and includes all navigable waters within the entrance

which lies between two headlands. The harbor lies just within

this entrance and is deep but confined. A wharf lies on the N

side just inside the entrance and is used to load sugar and molasses. Live cattle exports also take place.

Queensland Ports Corporation

http://www.pcq.com.au/html/02_ports.htm

Queensland Ports Corporation

http://www.pcq.com.au/html/02_ports.htm
Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 167

Pub. 127

7.53 Tides—Currents.—The tidal current at the harbor entrance

can attain a rate of 3 knots at springs. The stronger incoming

current sets towards the S between Hall Point and Camp Point,

then WNW across the harbor towards the berth.

7.53 The outgoing current from the Moresby River sets onto the

berth, turning E through the entrance channel, then N along

Hall Point.

7.53 Depths—Limitations.—The entrance channel (2002) has a

width of 91m and a depth of 9.6m. Vessels having a beam of up

to 28m are authorized to carry a draft of 8.5m; vessels of up to

32m of beam may carry a draft of 7.4m, according to the tide.

7.53 The swinging basin is 366m wide, with a depth of 6.7m. The

bottom of the entrance channel is rock, but the swinging basin

has a bottom of soft mud.

7.53 The Sugar Terminal consists of Government Wharf, a concrete pier running parallel to the shore. It is 193m long and has

a depth of 10.1m alongside. The maximum ship size accommodated had a length of 187m, a beam of 32m, and a draft of 10m.

7.53 Pilotage.—The pilot will make initial contact with the ship

about 30 minutes prior to boarding time. The pilot boards on

the range line, about 2 miles E of the harbor entrance, about 30

minutes prior to the predicted time of slack water.

7.53 Large vessels should only enter the harbor during daylight

hours. A minimum depth of 0.9m under the keel is required

when navigating through the entrance channel.

7.53 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained S of the entrance

lead in the swinging basin, in a depth of 7m.

Mourilyan Harbor to the Fitzroy Islands

7.54 The coast between the entrance to Mourilyan Harbor

and Thompson Point (17°32'S., 146°05'E.), 5 miles NW, is

formed by rocky points, with sandy beaches between, backed

by steeply rising hills of the Moresby Range. Etty Bay, a village, is situated on the coast, 1.7 miles SE of Thompson Point. 

7.54 Meaburn Rock (17°34'S., 146°10'E.), with a depth of 3m,

and steep-to except on its W side, lies about 2.5 miles NE of

the entrance of Mourilyan Harbor and almost 3 miles ENE of

Mount Leeper (17°35'S., 146°06'E.). This steep-to danger is

marked on its S side by a lighted buoy. Two wreck, with depths

of 16.2 and 8.5m, lie 0.5 mile NNE of Meaburn Rock.

7.54 From Thompson Point to the S entrance point of Gladys Inlet, about 1.5 miles NNW, a partly-drying shore bank extends

up to 1 mile offshore. 

7.54 Flying Fish Point (17°30'S., 146°05'E.), about 1.5 miles N

of Thompson Point, lies on the N side of the entrance of Gladys Inlet and the Port of Innisfail. A white lighted beacon is

shown from Flying Fish Point. A lighted buoy is moored about

0.1 mile E of the lighted beacon.

7.54 Port of Innisfail (17°31'S., 146°02'E.) includes all the navigable waters of Gladys Inlet and the Johnstone River inside the

7m curve off the entrance to the inlet. The entrance, less than

0.2 mile wide, lies between two points 0.7 mile W of Flying

Fish Point. The entrance and the river are encumbered with

sandbanks and are navigable only by small craft with recent local knowledge, and a draft of not more than 2.4m at springs,

and 1.2m at neaps, for a distance of 12 miles.

7.54 Range lights are situated on Flying Fish Point. These lights

are moved as necessary to indicate the deepest water available.

There are several small wharves in the river at the town of Innisfail, with depths alongside of 1.5 to 3.6m.

7.54 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels

with local knowledge off Croquette Point, in depths of 4 to 5m.

7.54 Between Flying Fish Point and Cooper Point (17°24'S.,

146°04'E.), about 6.5 miles to the N, a dangerous rock, with a

minimum depth over it of 1.8m, lies close NW of Cooper

Point. Heath Point, about 1.5 miles N of Flying Fish Point, rises abruptly to the summit of Mount Maria, about 0.5 mile to

the W. The rest of the coast is low, but backed by hills about 2

miles inland. A patch of rocks, which dries 1.2m, lies about 0.5

mile E of Heath Point.

7.54 Caution.—Because of the steep-to nature of the above shore

bank, which also extends offshore from the coast N of Cooper

Point, vessels should not approach the coast within 2.5 miles in

this vicinity.

7.55 Cooper Point rises abruptly from the sea to the conical

summit of Mount Cooper. A ridge of hills connects the point

with the summit of Mount Arthur. This mountain is the highest

of the coastal range in this vicinity.

7.55 Bramston Point (17°15'S., 145°59'E.), which is rocky, lies

about 10 miles NNW of Cooper Point. The land rises abruptly

to several summits up to 730m high, within 1.5 miles SSW of

the point. The estuary of the Mulgrave River indents the coast

about 1 mile W from its narrow entrance, about 1.7 miles

NNW of Bramston Point. The estuary and the rivers are navigable only by small craft with local knowledge.

7.55 The Frankland Islands (17°13'S., 146°05'E.) are a group of

islets that lie about 7 miles E of the estuary of the Mulgrave

River and the Russell River. 

7.55 Russell Island (17°14'S., 146°06'E.), which shows a light

from its summit, lies about 6.5 miles ENE of Bramston Point.

Russell Island has been reported to give good radar returns up

to 18 miles. A small islet lies close NE of the NE end of Russell Island, to which it is connected at LW. Foul ground extends

up to 0.5 mile NW from the island and elsewhere fringes the island for a distance of 0.2 mile.

7.55 Mabel Island and Normanby Island (17°12'S., 146°05'E.)

are two adjacent islets on a coral reef that lies about 1.7 miles

NW of Russell Island. Foul ground fringes both of the islets.

Grange Rock and Jones Patch lie up to 0.5 mile S of Mabel Island.

7.55 High Island (17°09'S., 146°01'E.) lies about 4.5 miles NW

of Normanby Island. The N and W coasts of the island are

fringed with rocks. 

7.55 Tobias Spit (17°08'S., 146°00'E.), with depths of less than

9.1m, sand and mud, extends 1.2 miles N from High Island. 

7.55 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained on Tobias Spit,

but with strong winds there is a rough sea. In S winds, anchorage may be made close to the island.

7.56 Palmer Point (17°10'S., 145°58'E.) is a rocky point at

the foot of a spur of the coastal range that attains a height of

791m about 2 miles inland and 3 miles WNW of the point. Between Palmer Point and Deception Point, about 13.5 miles

NNW, the coast forms a bight that recedes about 3 miles to the

W. The coastal range closely backs this part of the coast to a

position about 2.5 miles SW of Deception Point.

7.56 Fitzroy Island (16°56'S., 145°59'E.) lies about 3 miles ENE

of Deception Island. The island has been reported to give good
168 Sector 7. Australia—Cape Townsend to Cape Grafton 

Pub. 127

radar returns up to 21 miles. The dangers fringing the island

are contained within the 5m curve, which lies up to 0.2 mile

offshore. An islet lies close off the NE end of the island. A

light is shown from the NE side of the island. A signal station

is situated at the light. A light is also shown from the head of a

jetty on the W side of the island. The channel between the island and the mainland is about 2 miles in width and has depths

of about 26 to 33m. 

7.56 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken nearly 0.5 mile off

the NW side of the island, in 14.6 to 18.3m.

7.56 Caution.—A dangerous wreck, in 20m and best seen on the

chart, lies 5 miles S of Fitzroy Island.
169

Pub. 127

8. 

Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York

8.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 8 — CHART INFORMATION
171

Pub. 127

SECTOR 8 

AUSTRALIA—CAPE GRAFTON TO CAPE YORK

8.0 Plan.—This sector describes the E coast of Australia from

Cape Grafton NNW to Cape York. The dangers on the inner

and outer edges of the Great Barrier Reef and the islets and

dangers between them and the coast are described in the respective parts of the sector off which they lie. That part of the

Inner Route that lies within the limits of this sector is also described, and the passes through the Great Barrier Reef N of

Cape Grafton. 

General Remarks

8.1 The coast trends about 183 miles NNW from Cape

Grafton to Cape Melville, and consists of numerous small

bights separated by prominent points and headlands. Although

there are a number of short stretches of low coast, particularly

between Cape Flattery and Cape Melville, most of the coast is

high and rugged.

8.1 The coast recedes about 26 miles S between Cape Melville

and Claremont Point, about 50 miles WNW, and then it trends

somewhat irregularly NNW about 210 miles to Cape York. The

numerous bights that indent this section of the coast are almost

all separated by prominent headlands. Most of this coast consists of sandy beaches and low mangrove shores on which numerous creeks and minor rivers empty.

8.1 Most of the dangers fringing the coast are contained within the

10m curve which follows the coastal trend. From Cape Grafton

to Cape Melville, this line lies from 0.3 to 9 mile offshore, and

between Cape Melville and Cape York it lies between 0.3 mile

and 6.2 miles offshore, except that it lies up to 13 miles seaward

of the heads of some of the larger bays. Many steep-to islands

and other dangers lie between the 10m curve and the inner edge

of the barrier reef. The depth curves cannot be entirely relied on

to give adequate warning of the dangers.

8.1 The inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef lies 3.5 to 26 miles

offshore. Between Claremont Point and Cape Grenville, the inner edge of the reef lies 3.7 to 10 miles offshore, with many intervening dangers. Vessels proceeding along the coast should

follow the recommended two-way route (2004) as shown on

the chart.

8.1 Winds—Weather.—During the summer months along the

NE coast of Australia, S to the vicinity of Cooktown, the dominant wind is the Northwest Monsoon. It is sufficiently characteristic for the summer months to be termed the Northwest

Season. South of the monsoons lies the belt of the Southeast

Trades which are prominent as far S as Brisbane.

8.1 In winter, the monsoons have withdrawn and the region is

dominated by the trade winds. The winds are steady and are

occasionally of considerable strength, but as a rule are accompanied by fair weather.

8.1 The Coral Sea and the adjacent Australian coast comprise an

area over which tropical cyclones are well known and often destructive. The height of the hurricane season is reached during

the months of December through April.

8.1 Hurricanes affecting the coast normally approach from an E

or NE direction and frequently reach the mainland between

15°S and 20°S, or from the Cape Flattery area S to Gloucester

Head.

8.1 Hurricane damage may be caused in several ways. At sea the

winds, often reaching 50 to 80 knots, with gusts appreciably

higher, whip up mountainous waves. Along the coast, high

winds and storm tides occasionally reaching 3.7 to 4.6m, lash

vessels and pound and undermine shore installations. After the

passage inland of a severe hurricane, violent floods, often resulting in loss of life, may be expected along rivers of the affected region. As a rule, the diameter of the destructive winds

and seas is between 100 and 200 miles, although it is sometimes less.

8.1 Tides—Currents.—The currents between the coast and the

Great Barrier Reef are a result of the prevailing seasonal winds.

From April to November, the Southeast Trade Wind produces a

current setting N and NW, following the general direction of

the channels, at a rate of about 0.5 to 1.2 knots, depending on

the strength of the wind. From December to March, the wind

and the resulting currents are variable. The NW wind is more

prevalent, particularly N of Cape Flattery, and tends to produce

a current setting S at a rate of up to about 0.7 knot.

8.1 The tidal currents on that part of the coast contained within

the limits of this sector set N during the rising tide and S during

the falling tide, following the trend of channel between the

coast and the barrier reef. They have a rate of about 0.5 to 0.7

knot, except in the entrances of some of the inlets, where they

may be stronger.

8.1 The diurnal inequality of the tidal currents is relatively large.

When the moon has large a N or S declination, the rate of the

stronger tidal current of the day will be about 50 per cent more

than the average and that of the weaker current correspondingly less.

8.1 The effect of the tidal current is to increase or decrease the

prevailing wind-driven current. During the Southeast Trades,

the tidal current is less than the wind-driven current, except in a

few channels, and the resultant current sets N. During the NW

wind, from December to March, the rate of the wind-driven

current is less and the tidal current becomes more important.

8.1 Through the openings in the Great Barrier Reef, the flood

currents set W and SW, and the ebb currents set E and NE. The

rate of these currents is slight in the wider passages, but in the

narrower ones they attain a rate of 2 to 3 knots at springs.

8.1 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels of 70m in

length and longer. All loaded oil, chemical, and liquefied gas

tankers, regardless of length, are to carry a pilot when transiting the northern waters of the Great Barrier Reef, between latitude 10°41'S and 16°40'S, Whitsunday Passage, the

Whitsunday Group, and Hydrographers Passage. For more information, see paragraph 7.2 under the heading “Navigation in

the Great Barrier Reef.”

8.1 Restricted areas.—The Commonwealth of Australia has established a system of regulated zones within the waters comprising the Great Barrier Reef. 
172 Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 

Pub. 127

8.1 Furthur information can be found in Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia.

8.1 These areas, established as the Great Barrier Reef Marine

Park, are designed to control the movement of all vessels within specific size categories and geographic locations.

8.1 The limits of these areas, accompanied by amplifying information, are seen on the appropriate chart. Complete information regarding the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Zonning

Plan, which includes Designated Shipping Areas and Particularly Sensitive Sea Areas, can be found on the Authority’s website.

8.1 For information regarding the mandatory ship reporting systems and vessel traffic service which cover the Torres Strait region and the Inner Route of the Great Barrier Reef, see

paragraph 7.2.

Cape Grafton to Cape Tribulation

8.2 Cape Grafton (16°52'S., 145°55'E.) is the NW point

of a bold headland that extends about 3 miles NE from the

mainland; it is separated from the coastal hills by a low plain.

The cape rises abruptly to a height of 375m about 1 mile SE.

There are two other peaks, one SSE of the above peak and the

other SW. In clear weather the land around the cape may be

identified at a distance by its appearance as three lofty islands.

8.2 The cape is clear of danger on its NE side; the 11m curve lies

about 0.7 mile offshore, and the 20m curve lies about 1.5 miles

offshore.

8.2 Caution.—Caution should be exercised by vessels from the

N, particularly during hazy weather, in order that False Cape is

not mistaken for Cape Grafton.

8.2 The coast between Cape Grafton and Cape Tribulation,

about 54 miles NNW, forms a bight. Port Cairns lies at the S

end of the bight between False Cape, about 4 miles W of Cape

Grafton, and Ellie Point, about 4 miles farther N. From the latter point, the coast trends about 30 miles NNW to Island Point,

then about 12 miles N to Cape Kimberly. Cape Tribulation lies

12 miles N of Cape Kimberly.

8.2 The coast between Cape Grafton and Cape Tribulation consists of sandy beaches separated by rocky points and fronted in

some places by coral reefs and a few small islands. Many

creeks and rivulets empty from this coast.

8.2 Most of the coast rises abruptly to coastal ranges, which are

up to 783m high in the S part and up to 1,092m high in the N;

the range lies parallel to the coast within about 1 mile inland.

The coastal range is low SW of Cairns, in the vicinity of Island

Point, and between Island Point and Cape Kimberly there is

another low stretch. However, a range rises abruptly from the

sea about halfway between the point and the cape.

The Great Barrier Reef—Inner Edge—Green Island to Mackay Reef

8.3 The inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef trends about

47 miles NNW from Green Island, 6.7 miles NNE of Cape

Grafton, to a position 6.5 miles SE of the Low Islets and then

about 23 miles N to Mackay Reef. Vessels should keep SW and

W of a line connecting the following reefs which mark the edge

of the inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef. These dangers are

steep-to on their W sides with depths of 18.3m close off them.

8.3 Upolu Cay (16°40'S., 145°56'E.), 2.4m high, lies on the NW

edge of Arlington Reef, 11.5 miles N of Cape Grafton.

8.3 Oyster Reef, about 1.7 miles long, lies 1.5 miles N of Upolu

Cay. Detached heads lie up to 1.2 miles W of the main body of

the reef; the reef dries on its E side.

8.3 Trinity Opening lies with its inner entrance between Oyster

Reef and Batt Reef, about 11 miles NW.

8.3 Pixie Reef, a small drying pinnacle, lies in the middle of the

inner entrance of Trinity Opening, 6 miles NW of Oyster Reef.

8.3 Batt Reef, about 10 miles long, uncovers at half tide; it has

many large boulders on its SW side.

8.3 Satellite Reef (16°26'S., 145°41'E.), with a least depth of

2.7m, lies 2 miles off the W side of Batt Reef and 6.2 miles SE

of the Low Islets.

8.3 Caution.—Caution should be exercised in the vicinity of

Satellite Reef because of the current that frequently sets offshore from the coast toward Trinity Opening when the NW

winds prevail or during the rainy season.

8.4 Tongue Reef, an extensive partly drying reef, lies with

its W extremity 6 miles NNW of Batt Reef. A depth of 6.7m is

charted 3.5 miles NW of the N extremity of Batt Reef.

8.4 Rudder Reef is separated from Tongue Reef by a channel 3

miles wide. Foul ground, with a depth of 3m, lies 2.5 miles off

the W side of Rudder Reef.

8.4 Pratt Rock (16°09'S., 145°37'E.), with a least depth of

3.7m, lies 4 miles NNW of the SW extremity of Rudder Reef.

8.4 Undine Reef lies 2 miles NNE of Pratt Rock. A detached

patch, with a depth of 8.5m, lies 1 mile NNW of the W end of

Undine Reef.

8.4 Mackay Reef (16°03'S., 145°39'E.), which dries, lies 3.7

 Great Barrier Reef Marine Park Authority

http://www.gbrmpa.gov.au

Courtesy of the USS GERMANTOWN

Cape Grafton from N
Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 173

Pub. 127

miles N of the sand cay on Undine Reef. A sand cay, 1.2m

high, is located near the W end of the reef. Foul ground extends

1.2 miles S and 0.7 mile N from the reef.

The Great Barrier Reef—Outer Edge—Euston

Reef to Anderson Reef

8.5 The outer edge of the Great Barrier Reef, between

Grafton Passage and Trinity Opening, 24 miles NW, consists of a

broken and irregular barrier. Detached reefs and irregular depths

lie outside the general direction of its length. The same formation

continues for a distance of about 14 miles farther N.

8.5 Off Crispin Reef, 18 miles NNW of Trinity Opening, the outer

edge of the Great Barrier Reef assumes a uniform and well-defined character and continues N 18 miles to Anderson Reef.

Grafton Passage

8.6 Grafton Passage (16°40'S., 146°12'E.), a clear and

straight passage about 5 miles wide, lies with its seaward entrance between the NW extremity of Euston Reef and the SE

side of Fin Reef, about 6.5 miles NW. It is the best and most

used passage from New Guinea. The passage is well marked by

a series of lights and radar landfall.

8.6 Grafton Passage extends in a general SW direction for a distance of 20 miles and joins the recommended track of the Inner

Route in a position about 1.2 miles NE of Fitzroy Island.

8.7 Dangers on the SE side.—Euston Reef (16°41'S.,

146°15'E.), a small reef on which the sea always breaks, lies 22

miles NE of Cape Grafton. A light, equipped with racon, is situated on the reef.

8.7 Thetford Reef lies about 7.5 miles SSW of Euston Reef; the

S part dries 2.4m, and the N side is foul to a distance of 1.2

miles. This reef forms the SE side of the inner entrance of

Grafton Passage.

8.8 Dangers on the NW side.—Fin Reef (16°36'S.,

146°10'E.), a small patch with a least depth of 5.5m, lies 6.5

miles NW of Euston Reef. In 1968, depths of 6.1 to 9.1m were

reported about 12.5 miles NE of Fin Reef.

8.8 Arlington Reef, an extensive reef which uncovers at half

tide, lies with its N extremity 3.5 miles SW of Fin Reef. This

reef is steep-to on its E and S sides.

8.8 Green Island (16°46'S., 145°58'E.) is a wooded islet, 20m

high, located 3 miles SW of the SW side of Arlington Reef and

7 miles NNE of Cape Grafton.

8.8 Tides—Currents.—Currents setting SSE at a rate of 4.5 knots

have been observed off the seaward end of Grafton Passage.

8.8 Vessels transiting Grafton Passage, should refer to the chart.

8.8 From seaward in hazy weather it is better to keep slightly to

the S side of the channel, as the reefs in that direction are more

easily seen, and the changes in depths are less abrupt.

8.8 Pilotage.—See paragraph 9.4 for pilotage information.

8.8 Caution.—A reef has been reported to exist in the vicinity

of the pilot boarding ground. Vessels are urged to exercise caution when in the vicinity, and to contact local authorities for

further information.

8.9 Hope Reef (16°32'S., 146°08'E.), with a least depth

of 4.1m, lies about 5 miles NNW of Fin Reef. It is one of several small reefs and shoal patches which lie on the outer edge of

the Great Barrier Reef between the seaward entrances of

Grafton Passage and Trinity Opening.

8.9 Nicholas Reef, a small patch with a depth of less than 1.8m,

lies 2 miles NW of Hope Reef. Depths of 12.8 to 19.5m extend

0.8 mile SW from the reef.

8.9 Onyx Reef, small in area and with a least depth of 2.9m, lies

about 3.5 miles NNW of Nicholas Reef. A 12m patch lies 1

mile NE of Onyx Reef.

8.9 Spur Reef (16°24'S., 146°03'E.), located about 2 miles NW

of Onyx Reef, forms the SE side of the seaward entrance of

Trinity Opening. The reef has a least depth of 1.8m.

The Great Barrier Reef—Inner Edge—North

Warden Reef to Iris Reef

8.10 Trinity Opening is a wide, deep channel, but it has not

been closely examined; it lies between the N side of Spur Reef

and the E side of Tongue Reef, 7.5 miles NW. The opening

trends SW for a distance of about 20 miles.

8.11 Dangers on the SE side.—Norman Reef (16°25'S.,

146°00'E.), which dries, lies 2.5 miles WSW of Spur Reef. A

beacon is situated on the N side of the reef. Foul ground lies

between the two reefs. Saxon Reef, a small drying reef, lies 1.2

miles SSW of Norman Reef.

8.11 Hastings Reef, which dries in places, lies with its N extremity 2.7 miles SSE of Saxon Reef. A shoal, with a depth of 0.2m,

lies 2 miles WSW of its SW extremity. 

8.11 Michaelmas Reef dries 0.9 to 1.2m and lies with its NE extremity 2 miles SE of Hastings Reef. A cay, 2.4m high and

covered with vegetation, lies near the SW extremity of the reef.

Foul ground fringes the NW side of the reef to a distance of 1.7

miles NW.

8.11 Oyster Reef lies 1.7 miles SW of Michaelmas Reef; it forms

the SE side of the inner entrance of Trinity Opening.

8.12 Dangers on the NW side.—Linden Bank (16°18'S.,

146°00'E.), with a depth of 11m, restricts the channel entrance

about 6 miles N of the beacon on Norman Reef. Tongue Reef, a

large reef, of which only the seaward side has been surveyed,

lies on the NW side of Trinity Opening. There are many large

boulders on the SE side of the reef; this side of the reef is

steep-to.

8.12 Batt Reef, whose SE side dries from 0.9 to 1.2m, is separated

from the S extremity of Tongue Reef by a partially-surveyed

channel about 1 mile wide.

8.12 General depths of 33 to 69m are found in the fairway, which

is clear of dangers and passes between Pixie and Batt Reefs.

The channel between Pixie and Oyster Reefs is also clear of

dangers and has depths of 24 to 40m.

8.12 There are two submarine cables laid through Trinity Opening.

8.12 Tidal currents attain a rate of 0.5 knot on the springs between

Saxon and Batt Reefs. The flood sets SW; the ebb sets NE.

8.12 From seaward, care should be taken to approach Trinity

Opening from outside the 200m curve on the parallel of

16°20'S, then steer a mid-channel course as required.

8.12 Opal Reef (16°14'S., 145°53'E.), which dries, lies 7 miles
174 Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 

Pub. 127

NW of Linden Bank. A large boulder lies on the N part of the

reef. A beacon stands in the middle of a reef which lies 0.5

mile N of Opal Reef.

8.12 St. Crispin Reef, Agincourt Reef, and Escape Reef extend in

a N direction along the seaward edge of the barrier reef from a

position 4 miles NNW of the boulder on Opal Reef. These

three reefs are separated from the reefs forming the inner edge

of the barrier reef by an extensive area of unsurveyed water reported to be full of coral reefs.

8.12 Anderson Reef (15°47'S., 145°48'E.) lies 1 mile N of Escape Reef. Shoals, with a least depth of 2.7m, fringe the NW

side of the reef. A detached 3.7m patch lies 1.7 miles SW of

the reef, and a small reef lies 0.5 mile S of the detached patch.

Cape Grafton to Buchan Point

8.13 False Cape (16°52'S., 145°51'E.) lies 4 miles W of

Cape Grafton and rises abruptly to a height of 335m less than 1

mile S. A range of mountains trend S from the point. Mission

Bay, which is shallow, indents the coast 2.5 miles S between

the two capes. An island, 42m high, lies 1.7 miles SW of Cape

Grafton, on the N side of drying sand and mud flats.

8.13 Spoil grounds are situated 1.7 miles NE and 4.7 miles NNW,

respectively, from False Cape.

8.13 Ellie Point lies about 4 miles W of False Cape, and Taylor

Point lies 7.5 miles NW of Ellie Point. Taylor Point, a steep,

rocky point, marks the N limit of the Port of Cairns.

8.13 From Taylor Point, the coast trends 2.7 miles NNW to

Buchan Point. A small bight is formed on the W side of Taylor

Point.

8.13 Buchan Point (16°44'S., 145°40'E.) is a rocky point about

20m high and rises quickly to Mount Buchan, 671m high, 1.2

miles W.

8.13 Double Island, 0.7 mile NE of Buchan Point, rises to a height

of 82m on its W and 79m at its E end. Haycock Islet, 34m high,

lies 0.5 mile SE of Double Island.

Cairns (16°56'S., 145°47'E.)

World Port Index No. 53340

8.14 The main part of the port of Cairns lies in the narrow

entrance of Trinity Inlet, which is located at the S end of a shallow bay that indents the coast about 3 miles S between False

Cape and Ellie Point.

The city of Cairns and the berthing facilities lie on the W

side of the entrance to Trinity Inlet. The port of Cairns includes

all the navigable waters contained within a line from Cape

Grafton to a position about 2 miles N and then WNW to Taylor

Point.

8.14 Winds—Weather.—The winds at Cairns are predominantly

from the S throughout the year. As a result, the Murray Prior

Range, S of the city, acts as a wind shed with cumulus clouds

almost always apparent at the top of these mountains. These

rain clouds, which bring heavy rains along the higher slopes,

seldom reach across Cairns Harbor unless S or SE winds attain

velocities of 15 to 20 knots.

8.14 During the rainy season, Cairns is situated within the region

frequented by the equatorial front and experiences conditions

of low clouds, occasional poor visibility, and intermittent light

rain. In the rainy season, when an equatorial front has been established, such weather usually persists for periods of 2 or 3

days or until S winds reach sufficient force to cause a N displacement.

8.14 During the dry season, low pressure areas moving across the

continent to the S are too weak to have any appreciable effect

at Cairns. In anticyclonic conditions, if a high passes to the N,

the sky remains clear for several days with only a few fair

weather cumulus clouds forming in the afternoon and dissipating at night. The daily range of temperature is greater, and haze

accumulates with light to variable winds. When a high pressure

area passes to the S, it brings a strong SE flow of moist air

from the ocean. This condition may prevail for days at a time

and is the cause of winter rains in this area. Fogs are rare and

those that occur are usually associated with rain.

8.14 Tides—Currents.—The tides are influenced by the wind;

springs rise from 1.8 to 2.9m, and neaps from 1.2 to 2.1m.

8.14 The tidal currents change at the time of HW and LW and, at

springs, may attain a velocity of 2 knots. The flood current

sweeps around False Cape and sets W across the channel toward Ellie Point, then it gradually turns S into the line of the

channel. The ebb current sets in the opposite direction, as described above.

8.14 A 5 to 6 knot ebb current is encountered in the harbor during

the wet season and, after heavy rains, the flood water from the

Barron River, close N of Ellie Point, sets strongly E toward

False Cape.

8.14 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel, which had a

depth of 8.3m in 2003, leads from seaward to the harbor facilities at Trinity Inlet. It is well marked by leading lights. The

channel is extremely narrow at 90m of navigable width for approximately 7nm in length. Twelve berths for the handling of a

variety of cargo are available to ocean-going vessels.

8.14 The main wharf is a continuous quay, 595m in length, providing berths for vessels in excess of 200m loa. Berthing information can be seen in the accompanying table.

8.14 The Royal Australian Naval Berth is situated just S of Berth

10, the tanker berth.

8.14 Smith Creek Wharf No. 1, with an alongside depth of 5.5m,

handles general cargo and seafood. The berth can handle vessels up to 65m in length. 

8.14 There are two barge ramps situated about 1 mile upstream in

Smiths Creek. Both ramps accommodate vessels up to 55m in

length, with a maximum beam of 13.2m.

Cairns Port Authority 

http://www.cairnsport.com.au

Cairns Port Facilities

Berth Depth Max. 

Length Remarks

1 8.7m 200m Passenger.

2 8.4m 200m Passenger.

3 8.4m 200m Passenger and 

general cargo.
Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 175

Pub. 127

8.14 Aspect.—False Cape and Cape Grafton are prominent in the

approach to Cairns Harbor. Mount Sheridan, 633m high, and

Mount Whitfield, 381m high, lie 5 miles SW and 2.7 miles

WSW, respectively, from Ellie Point. Red Peak, 611m high,

lies 6 miles WNW of Ellie Point. Saddle Hill, 652m high, lies 2

miles N of Red Peak.

8.14 Cairns has been reported to give good radar returns up to 10

miles.

8.14 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels 35m or greater in length and is available 24 hours. Pilotage should be requested at least 48 hours in advance. Pilots will contact the

vessel 30 to 45 minutes prior to the designated boarding time.

8.14 Pilots board about 1.7 miles NNE of Entrance Lighted Beacon C1 and Entrance Lighted Beacon C2. Large deep-draft

vessels may be required to be boarded further out, on the range

line of the Entrance Lighted Beacons, about 4.3 miles NE of

these beacons. 

8.14 The pilot vessel is fitted with VHF. 

8.14 Regulations.—The quarantine line for the port is drawn

through the seaward beacons of the entrance channel. Vessels

are boarded seaward of this line.

8.14 Explosives are discharged at Berth 1 through Berth 8.

4 8.4m 200m General cargo and 

dry bulk.

5 8.4m 200m General cargo and 

dry bulk.

6 7.0 to 

8.4m 138m Containers and roro.

7 10.0m 250m General cargo and 

bulk fertilizer

8 9.6m 250m General cargo and 

bulk fertilizer.

10 8.8m 203m Tankers.

12 10.2m 183m Bulk sugar and 

molasses

Notes.

1. Berths 1-5—Nominal lengths of 91.5m.

2. Berths 1-3—May be used in conjunction

for longer vessels.

3. Berth 12—Maximum beam of 24.5m.

Courtesy of the USS GERMANTOWN

Cairns—Entrance Channel

Cairns Port Facilities

Berth Depth Max. 

Length Remarks

Courtesy of the USS GERMANTOWN

Cairns—Berth 7 and Berth 8

Courtesy of the USS GERMANTOWN

Cairns—Tanker Wharf
176 Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 

Pub. 127

8.14 There is a speed limit of 10 knots in the entrance channel, 8

knots in Trinity Inlet, and 4 knots in Smiths Creek.

8.14 Arriving vessels should contact Cairns Harbor on VHF channel 16 to advise of final ETA. All vessels transiting the port

must maintain a radio watch on VHF channel 16. All vessels

greater than 35m long should notify Cairns Harbor on VHF

channel 16 prior to departing or shifting berths.

8.14 Anchorage.—There are no prescribed anchorages for

Cairns. Vessel requiring anchorage must do so outside the

quarantine designation line. Anchorage may be taken about 1

mile NE of the outer pair of lighted beacons, off the entrance

channel, in 11m, mud.

Buchan Point to Cape Tribulation

8.15 From Buchan Point, the coast trends in a NW direction 20 miles to Island Point. In general, the range of coastal

mountains follow the trend of the coast. Most of the coast consists of sandy beaches with intervening rocky points. Except

for Egmont Reef, the dangers along this coast are contained

within the 10m curve.

8.15 White Cliff Point (16°39'S., 145°34'E.), 25m high, lies 8

miles NW of Buchan Point. The cliffs that form the point are

particularly conspicuous during the early part of the day.

8.15 Unity Reef, parts of which are awash, extend 1 mile ESE

from the coast, 1 mile S of White Cliff Point.

8.15 Mount Harris, 1,080m high, lies on the coastal range 4.5

miles W of White Cliff Point; it has been reported to give good

radar returns.

8.15 Yule Point (16°35'S., 145°31'E.), 5.2 miles NW of White

Cliff Point, rises abruptly to a hill, 102m high. Reefs, which

dry in parts, fringe the coast to 0.7 mile offshore, between the S

side of Yule Point and a position 4.5 miles NW. Korea Reef,

which partly dries, lies just inside the 10m curve, 2.5 miles NE

of Yule Point.

8.15 Egmont Reef (16°31'S., 145°32'E.), a small steep-to reef

which dries, lies just outside the 10m curve, 1.5 miles NNW of

Korea Reef.

8.15 The Mowbray River enters the sea about 2 miles NW of Yule

Point. Mangroves fringe the coast in the vicinity of the river. A

drying bar and reefs encumber the river and its approach, but

small craft with local knowledge can enter it.

8.15 Island Point (16°29'S., 145°28'E.), 4 miles NNW of the

Mowbray River, lies at the N end of a low, sandy, and mangrove-covered promontory. It rises to a height of 74m, 0.3 mile

SSE of its N extremity. From seaward, the point appears as an

island.

8.15 Morey Reef, which dries, lies 0.3 mile NW of Island Point,

on the W side of the entrance range to Port Douglas.

8.15 Port Douglas lies in the entrance to Dickson Inlet, on the W

side of Island Point. The port is available to small craft. 

8.15 Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels 35m long and

over, and is available 24 hours. Pilots are ordered through

Cairns; see paragraph 8.14 for further requirements. Pilots will

contact the vessel about 30 minutes prior to boarding time and

board on the range line about 0.4 mile NE of Entrance Lighted

Buoys. Vessels approaching and transiting the harbor should

maintain a listening watch on VHF channel 16.

8.15 Anchorage may be taken in 7 to 9m, mud, 0.5 mile N of Island Point.

8.16 Between Island Point and Cape Kimberley, 12 miles

N, the coast forms a bight that recedes about 4 miles; between

Cape Kimberley and Cape Tribulation, 12 miles farther N, a

similar bight is formed.

8.16 The 10m curve trends N from a position 1.7 miles NE of Island Point to a position close off Cape Kimberley. Most of the

dangers lie within the 10m curve.

8.16 From Island Point to Dayman Point (16°23'S., 145°25'E.), 6

miles NNW, the land is low, and several creeks empty into the

sea. A conspicuous water tower stands on the coast 2.2 miles S

of Dayman Point.

8.16 The Daintree River empties into the sea 6 miles NNE. An extensive bar, with a depth of 0.9m, encumbers the river mouth

and extends about 0.5 mile offshore.

8.16 The coast between the entrance to the Daintree River and

Cape Kimberley, a bold and steep promontory, 1.7 miles ENE,

is formed by a sandy beach fronted by below-water rocks, and

backed by low land covered with bush.

8.16 Off-lying islands.—The Low Islets (16°23'S., 145°34'E.)

lie 8.5 miles E of Dayman Point. The two islets are located on a

steep-to drying reef about 1 mile long. A light and a signal station are situated here. The islets have been reported to give

good radar returns up to 14 miles.

8.16 Anchorage.—Vessels may take anchorage, in 12.8 to 14.6m,

mud, good holding ground, 0.5 mile NNW of the Low Islets.

8.16 Snapper Island lies 1 mile SSE of Cape Kimberley, just inside the 20m curve. The island rises to a height of 115m in the

W part. A narrow reef fringes the island in places, and depths

of less than 10m extend 1.2 miles N from it.

8.16 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained off the NW end

of Snapper Island during SE winds, but the swell sets around

the island making it uncomfortable. With NE or SW winds

there is good anchorage in the lee of the island.

8.17 From Cape Kimberley (16°17'S., 145°29'E.) to Cape

Tribulation, the coast consists primarily of sandy beaches sepaCourtesy of the USS GERMANTOWN

Cairns—Berth 1 to Berth 6
Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 177

Pub. 127

rated by rocky points. The coastal range backs this part of the

coast, and several hills rise abruptly from the sea. Thornton

Peak, 1,374m high, lies 9 miles NW of Cape Kimberley; it has

been reported to give good radar returns.

8.17 The dangers fringing the coast between Cape Kimberley and

Cape Tribulation lie within the 5m curve which follows the

coastal trend up to about 0.7 mile offshore. The 10m curve follows the coastal trend from less than 0.5 mile to almost 2 miles

offshore.

8.17 Black Rock, 1.5m high, lies 0.4 mile offshore, 2 miles N of

Cape Kimberley.

8.17 Bailay Point, 4.2 miles NNW of Cape Kimberley, is the S

entrance point of Alexandra Bay. Bailay Hill, 293m high, rises

about 0.5 mile W of the point.

8.17 Alexandra Bay occupies the S part of a bight that indents the

coast about 1 mile W, between Bailay Point and a position on

the coast 5 miles N. The bay is shallow and affords no shelter.

8.17 Cape Tribulation (16°05'S., 145°29'E.) is a grassy hill,

102m high, 8 miles N of Bailay Point; it juts out from a bold

headland and is steep-to.

Caution.—There is a two-way route shown on the chart between Cape Kimberley and Cape Flattery. The route is not

mandatory and is not a traffic separation scheme; it indicates

the best route for vessels up to 9m having regard to the charted

depth and dangers. For more information, see paragraph 7.2

under the heading “Navigation in the Great Barrier Reef.”

Cape Tribulation to Cape Flattery

8.18 The coast between Cape Tribulation and Cape Flattery, about 67 miles N, consist of a series of bights that recede

up to 6 miles W. Most of the coast consists of sandy beaches

separated by rocky points, and in places is fronted by reefs.

The coast is bold and precipitous in several places.

8.18 Several coastal ranges rise abruptly from the coast between

Cape Tribulation and Archer Point, but there is a low 4.5 mile

stretch of coast about 12 miles NNW of Cape Tribulation. Between Archer Point and Cooktown Harbor, 9 miles farther N,

the coast is low, however, a peak rises to a height of 429m,

about 1 mile S of Cooktown Harbor. From the low land immediately N of Cooktown Harbor, a range of high hills rises

abruptly from the sea; between Cape Bedford and Cape Flattery, this range of hills is lower.

8.18 A number of reefs and islets lie between the coast and the inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef, which lies from 5.5 to 10

miles off this part of the coast.

8.18 Many of the steep-to islets and dangers off this coast are contained within the 20m curve, which irregularly follows the

coastal trend between 0.5 mile and 8 miles offshore. Some

parts of the inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef lie only about

2 miles outside the 20m curve.

The Great Barrier Reef—Inner Edge—Mackay

Reef to Heldson Reef

8.19 The inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef trends about

27 miles NNW from Mackay Reef to Bee Reef, and then about

40 miles N to Helsdon Reef, which lies about 7.5 miles E of

Cape Flattery. Vessels should keep W of a line connecting the

following reefs, which are the dangers marking the inner edge

of the Great Barrier Reef. These dangers are steep-to on their

W sides, with depths of over 20m close off them.

8.19 Spitfire Reefs (16°01'S., 145°38'E.), several detached reefs

with a least depth of 1.1m, lie with the W reef 2.5 miles NW of

the sand cay on Mackay Reef. Bonner Rock, with a depth of

5.6m, lies 1.7 miles N of Spitfire Reef.

8.19 Pickersgill Reef, about 3 miles long, lies 5 miles NNW of

Bonner Rock; a sand cay is located on the NW extremity of the

reef. A light stands on the NW extremity of the reef.

8.19 Papuan Pass and Cruiser Pass lie with their W entrances between Pickersgill Reef and Cairns Reef.

8.19 Endeavour Reef (15°47'S., 145°35'E.), in the middle of the

W entrances of Papuan Pass and Cruiser Pass, lies with its W

end 4 miles N of the W extremity of Pickersgill Reef.

8.19 Cairns Reef, a large coral reef shaped like a horseshoe, lies

2.5 miles N of the W extremity of Endeavour Reef. There are

boulders on its S and SW sides, which dry 1.5 to 2.4m. Malcolm Patch, with a depth of 8.2m, lies 0.7 mile N of the NW

extremity of Cairns Reef.

8.19 Bee Reef (15°38'S., 145°26'E.), which dries, lies about 0.7

mile W of the NW extremity of Cairns Reef, and about 6 miles

SE of the light on Archer Point. The reef is steep-to except for

shoal water off the N and S ends.

8.19 Egret Reef lies 8.5 miles N of Bee Reef; it is a partly drying

reef that is always visible because of discoloration or ripples.

This reef is steep-to, except for a number of coral patches that

lie within 0.5 mile of its NW side. There is a 4.3m patch which

lies close off its S side. A lighted beacon stands on the middle

of the W side of the reef.

8.19 Boulder Reef is a steep-to reef lying 1.5 mile N of Egret

Reef. The reef has some large black boulders on its E and SE

side and is always visible. 

8.19 Anchorage.—Good anchorage may be taken, in 24m, mud,

sand, and shells, about 0.5 mile NW of Boulder Reef.

8.19 Lark Reef, 7.2 miles NNE of Boulder Reef, is dangerous, as

it can only be seen in good weather at LW, when part of its SW

side dries. Several coral heads which lie off the W edge of the

reef are not visible until close to.

8.19 Lark Pass lies with its W entrance between Lark Reef and

Swinger Reef.

8.20 Swinger Reef (15°15'S., 145°32'E.), which dries, lies

1.2 miles NNE of Lark Reef. A detached 3.7m patch lies about

0.5 mile W of the NW end of the reef.

8.20 Startle Reefs, which are difficult to see, lie with their W extremity about 3 miles NW of Swinger Reef.

8.20 Forrester Reef (15°10'S., 145°30'E.), 1 mile NW of Startle

Reefs, is always visible and is steep-to except on its N side,

where there are several detached heads.

8.20 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

27m, mud and sand, in the lee of Forrester Reef, 0.5 mile offshore.

8.20 Strickland Reef lies about 5 miles NNE of Forrester Reef;

the reef does not show up well when submerged.

8.20 Pasco Reef, which has a patch of sand that uncovers 0.6m,

lies 1.2 miles NNE of Strickland Reef. Tilbrook Bank, a 14.6m

patch, lies 2.2 miles NNW of Pasco Reef.

8.20 Helsdon Reef (14°57'S., 145°29'E.), a well-defined reef

which dries in patches around its edge, lies 3 miles NNW of

Tilbrook Bank and 7.5 miles E of Cape Flattery. A depth of
178 Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 

Pub. 127

8.2m lies 4.5 miles NW of Helsdon Reef.

The Great Barrier Reef—Outer Edge—Anderson Reef to Ribbon Reef

8.21 From Anderson Reef, the outer edge of the Great Barrier Reef extends in a N direction about 51 miles to the S end of

Ribbon Reef (14°56'S., 145°42'E.). Ribbon Reef is 16 miles

long and about 0.7 mile wide. For more information, see paragraph 7.2 under the heading “Navigation in the Great Barrier

Reef.”

8.21 There are a great number of unnamed reefs in this area. The

reef has not been completely examined and adequate soundings are lacking.

8.21 Papuan Pass (15°46'S., 145°49'E.) is entered between

Anderson Reef, on the S, and Ruby Reef, 1.5 miles NW. The

navigable channel between the reefs is about 1 mile wide and

has depths of 24 to 48m. From the pass the deep-water channel

extends in a general W direction for a distance of about 20

miles to a position some 5 miles ESE of Rattlesnake Point, at a

junction point with the recommended track of the Inner Route.

8.21 The dangers in Papuan Pass, in addition to Anderson Reef,

are Ruby Reef, to the N of the seaward entrance, and Pickersgill Reef and Endeavour Reef on the S and N side, respectively,

of the inner entrance.

8.21 Ruby Reef is 1 to 2 miles wide and extends about 2.7 miles

NNE from its S extremity. The S and E sides of the reef are

steep-to, but the W side is foul to a distance of 1.5 miles W.

8.21 Pickersgill Reef, previously described in paragraph 8.19, lies

with its E extremity 12 miles WSW of the SW extremity of

Anderson Reef; from its E extremity it extends 3 miles WNW.

8.21 Endeavour Reef lies with its S extremity 4 miles N of Pickersgill Reef and 8.5 miles W of the E extremity of Ruby Reef.

A fringe of sunken coral encloses the reef, and at its E extremity; foul ground extends up to 1 mile from it.

8.21 The flood current sets WSW and the ebb current sets ENE.

The rate at springs is 1 knot.

8.21 Vessels may enter Papuan Pass midway between Anderson

Reef. and Ruby Reef. Steer to pass midway between Pickersgill Reef and Endeavour Reef, and join the Inner Route farther

W.

8.22 Pearl Reef (15°43'S., 145°48'E.), which is foul, lies

close N of Ruby Reef.

8.22 Cruiser Pass is entered between Ruby Reef and Lena Reef,

which dries, 3 miles N. Lena Reef is steep-to, with the 200m

curve less than 0.5 mile from it.

8.22 From its seaward entrance, Cruiser Pass trends in a general

WSW direction for about 24 miles to its intersection with the

Inner Route, SW of the Hope Islands. The fairway passes between the W extremity of Endeavour Reef and the S extremity

of Cairns Reef, 2.5 miles N. The fairway has general depths of

20 to 55m.

8.22 Irene Reef (15°39'S., 145°43'E.), a danger on the N side of

Cruiser Pass, lies 4.5 miles W of Lena Reef. The S side of the

reef is foul to a distance of 0.5 mile off. The E extremity of

Cairns Reef lies 8 miles WSW of Irene Reef.

8.22 Vessels approaching Cruiser Pass from seaward should pass

in mid-channel between Pearl and Lena Reefs, and then steer

to pass midway between Endeavou Reef and Cairns Reef, to a

position 2.2 miles SW of the Hope Islands.

8.22 The reefs from Lena Reef extend about 30 miles N to a reef

on the S side of the entrance to Lark Pass. They are a series of

drying reefs lying from 20 to 30 miles off the coast. The 200m

curve has not been delineated and the waters inside the reefs

are unsurveyed.

8.22 Lark Pass is entered between the N end of a drying reef in

position 15°08'S, 145°44'E, and a similar reef 1.2 miles NNW.

8.22 Harrier Reef (15°08'S., 145°42'E.), with a sand cay on it,

lies 1.5 miles W of the S entrance point of Lark Pass. A 4.6m

coral head lies 0.5 mile SE of the reef.

8.22 Marx Reef, which dries, lies on the N side of Lark Pass, 5

miles SW of Harrier Reef.

8.22 A steep-to drying reef lies 1 mile WSW of Marx Reef, with a

3m patch between them.

8.22 Startle Reefs lie 2.7 miles W of the drying reef WSW of

Marx Reef. They lie on the N side of Lark Pass at its SW end.

8.22 Pullen Reefs (15°15'S., 145°35'E.), which dry, lie on the S

side of the fairway, 3.2 miles SSW of Marx Reef.

8.23 Swinger Reef lies on the middle of the SW entrance

of Lark Pass. Foul ground extends 1 mile E from Swinger

Reef; a 4.6m patch lies 0.5 mile farther E.

8.23 Caution.—Mariners are cautioned that the reefs in Lark

Pass are difficult to make out at HW when the sea is smooth.

Several vessels have grounded on the N side of Lark Reef

where the below-water edge is difficult to see. Swinger Reef is

nearly always visible.

8.23 Vessels entering Lark Pass should steer a mid-channel course

through the entrance, then steer a course to the SW to pass SE

of the 4.6m patch of the SE side of Harrier Reef, then pass between Marx Reef and Pullen Reef on the S. Care must be taken

to clear the 4.6m patch E of Swinger Reef. When S of Swinger

Reef, steer for South Cape Bedford on a course of 264°. Continue on 264° until reaching the Inner Route, then steer N or S

as required.

8.23 The outer edge of the Great Barrier Reef continues in a general N direction from Lark Pass for 11.5 miles to the S extremity of Ribbon Reef. There are openings between the reefs, but

none of them have been examined.

Cape Bedford bearing 348°, distant 7 miles
Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 179

Pub. 127

Cape Tribulation to Archer Point

8.24 From Cape Tribulation to the S entrance of Weary

Bay, about 9 miles NNW, the coast trends in that direction and

consists mostly of a series of sandy beaches separated by rocky

points.

8.24 Donovan Point (16°01'S., 145°27'E.), with a rock 3m high

close off, lies 4 miles NNW of Cape Tribulation. Mount Owen,

914m high, lies 6.2 miles W of Donovan Point.

8.24 Cowie Point, bold and cliffy, lies about 2.5 miles NNW of

Donovan Point. From Cowie Point the coast trends about 2.5

miles NW to the S entrance point of Weary Bay. A dangerous

wreck lies 1.5 miles due N of Cowie Point.

8.24 Weary Bay indents the coast about 2 miles and extends 6

miles from its S entrance point to Rattlesnake Point at its N

end. Foul ground extends about 0.9 mile N of the S entrance

point, and Lake Reef, with a least depth of 0.7m, lies 0.7 mile

farther N. The Bloomfield River, navigable only by boats, empties into the head of the bay, about 2.5 miles WNW of the S entrance point.

8.24 Rattlesnake Point (15°50'S., 145°23'E.) a steep, bold bluff,

attains a height of 286m less than 0.5 mile inland. It is clear of

dangers, and the 10.9m line lies about 0.3 mile E.

Between Rattlesnake Point and Archer Point, about 15 miles

NNW, a range of mountains up to 871m high, backs the coast

within 1.7 miles inland. Coral reefs fringe most of this coast. In

some places, particularly between Obree Point and Forsberg

Point, the fringing reef is steep-to, with depths of 10.9m close

offshore.

8.24 Obree Point (15°46'S., 145°22'E.) lies about 4.5 miles N of

Rattlesnake Point. The intervening coast is mainly sandy in its

N and S parts, with rocky ledges in the middle, then to Thomas

Point, 4 miles NNW, it is fringed by drying coral reefs.

8.25 Off-lying dangers and islands.—The Hope Islands

(15°44'S., 145°28'E.) are two sand cays, 8.5m high, located on

drying reefs 4.2 to 6 miles ENE of Obree Point; the islands lie

E of the recommended course. The reefs on which the islands

lie are always visible, but the passage between them is not recommended. Tidal currents set through the passage between the

reefs sometimes causing a short confused sea.

8.25 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

15.8m in the lee of the Hope Islands, 1 mile NW of the NE island. Care must be taken not to anchor in the current and to

avoid the shoal patches off the N end of the passage between

the reefs and Stonor Patch.

8.25 Gubbins Reef, a narrow coral reef which dries 0.9 to 1.5m in

places, lies 2.7 miles SE of Thomas Point. Delius Patch, with a

depth of 4.9m, lies 0.5 mile E of Gubbins Reef. Ottaway Patch,

with a depth of 6.3m, lies 1 mile E of Delius Patch, and Stonor

Patch, with a depth of 5.5m, lies 0.4 mile farther E.

8.25 Forsberg Point (15°40'S., 145°20'E.), a rocky point with a

conspicuous knob, lies 2.2 miles NNW of Thomas Point.

8.25 Archer Point (15°36'S., 145°20'E.), 4 miles N of Forsberg

Point, is a prominent rocky point, 61m high. Archer Hill, 158m

high, lies 0.5 mile W of the point.

8.25 Rocky Islet, 50m high, lies 0.5 mile off the coast, 0.7 mile

SSE of Archer Point. The islet is steep-to off its E side, but

there is foul ground off the other sides.

Archer Point to Cape Flattery

8.26 From Archer Point, the coast trends in a NNW direction for 1.5 miles to Walker Point, then 2.7 miles farther NNW

to Grave Point. Walker Hill, 177m high, rises close inland, 0.5

mile NW of Walker Point.

8.26 Walker Bay indents the coast about 1.5 miles between Grave

Point and Monkhouse Point (15°30'S., 145°17'E.), 3.7 miles

NNW. The Annan River empties into the W side of Walker

Bay. Most of the bay is shallow and foul ground occupies its S

part.

8.26 Caution.—Cowlishaw Reef (15°32'S., 145°19'E.) lies 2.7

miles ENE of Grave Point; it has a sand cay on its N end which

dries 2.4m. Dawson Reef, which dries 1.5m, lies 1.7 miles NW

of Cowlishaw Reef.

8.27 Cooktown (15°28'S., 145°15'E.) lies on the E side of

the entrance to the Endeavour River, at the foot of Grassy Hill,

2.7 miles NNW of Monkhouse Point. 

The port is closed to commercial shipping and is only used

by small craft, fishing vessels operating off Cape York, and by

tourist craft operating from Cairns. The maximum size vessel

which can enter the port is 300 grt, with a draft of 2.5m.

8.27 A channel, marked by lighted beacons and maintained to a

depth of 3.1m, leads to the wharf at Cooktown. 

8.27 Vessels not having local knowledge are strongly advised

against entering the port. From the S, a pilot may be embarked

off Cairns. If approaching from the N, the harbormaster at

Cairns should be advised in sufficient time to allow a pilot to

proceed to Cooktown.

8.27 Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels 35m long and

over and is available 24 hours. Pilots will contact the vessel

about 30 minutes prior to boarding time and board 2.75 miles

ENE of Grassy Hill Light (15°28'S., 145°15'E.). Vessels approaching and transiting the harbor should maintain a listening

watch on VHF channel 16. 

8.27 Indian Head (15°23'S., 145°17'E.), 5.5 miles NNE of

Grassy Hill, rises to Rocky Mountain, 335m high, 0.7 mile W.

8.27 Nob Point, 60m high, lies 2.2 miles NNE of Indian Head,

and South Cape Bedford lies 5 miles farther NE.

8.27 Caution.—The dangerous wreck of a fishing vessel lies 0.5

mile SSE of Nob Point.

8.28 Cape Bedford (15°14'S., 145°20'E.), at the N end of

a headland 3.2 miles NNW of South Cape Bedford, rises almost perpendicularly to a 251m high flat-topped summit.

8.28 Although South Cape Bedford is steep-to and has depths of

more than 20m less than 0.2 mile SE, several 5.5m patches lie

up to 0.5 mile E of the headland and 1 and 1.5 miles NE, respectively, of South Cape Bedford. Petty Patch, a 5.5m patch,

lies 0.6 mile NE of Cape Bedford.

Between Cape Bedford and Cape Flattery, 16 miles N, a

bight indents the coast about 6 miles W. A series of scrubby

hills up to 171m high lie along this coast. The McIvor River

flows into the bight, 7.7 miles NW of Cape Bedford. A conspicuous white sand patch is located in a position less than 0.5

mile inland, 1.5 miles N of the mouth of the McIvor River. Casuarina Hill, 84m high, is located 6.5 miles NNE of the white

patch, and a conspicuous white sand hill, 72m high, is located

1.7 miles N of Casuarina Hill.
180 Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 

Pub. 127

8.28 Most of the dangers in the bight between Cape Bedford and

Cape Flattery lie within the 10m curve. 

8.28 Conical Rock (15°08'S., 145°20'E.), 12m high, is a black

rock located on the E end of a reef that lies on the edge of the

10m curve, 5.2 miles NNW of Cape Bedford.

8.28 The Three Isles (15°07'S., 145°25'E.), low and wooded, lies

on a reef 8 miles NNE of Cape Bedford. Low Wooded Isle lies

2 miles NW of the Three Isles. The Two Islets are located on a

reef 5.5 miles N of the Three Isles.

Cape Flattery to Cape Melville

8.29 Cape Flattery (14°57'S., 145°21'E.), a bold headland

formed by an isolated range of hills which stand out from the

low land in its vicinity, appears as an island when seen from a

distance. 

8.29 Caution.—The dangerous wreck of a fishing vessel lies 0.5

mile W of Cape Flattery.

8.29 The coast between Cape Flattery and Cape Melville, about

67 miles NW, is considerably broken by a series of bights that

recede as much as 6 miles SW.

8.29 From Cape Flattery to North Bay Point, much of the coast is

low and consists mostly of sandy beaches lined with mangroves. From North Bay Point to Cape Melville, the coast consists of sandy beaches that are separated by rocky points. It is

backed by a range of hills that rise abruptly to heights of more

than 305m, about 1.2 miles inland.

8.29 The inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef lies 2 to 17 miles

offshore. In the vicinity of Lookout Point, there are a number

of dangers that lie between the coast and the inner edge of the

barrier reef. In the vicinity of Murdoch Point, the recommended inner route is encumbered with islands and reefs.

The Great Barrier Reef—Inner Edge—Heldson

Reef to North Warden Reef

8.30 The inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef trends about

3 miles NW from Helsdon Reef and then about 10.5 miles

NNE to North Direction Island. Between North Direction Island and Fly Reef, about 24 miles NW, the inner edge of the

barrier reef forms a bight that recedes 12 miles NE. From Fly

Reef the inner edge of the barrier reef trends 25 miles WNW to

Switzer Reef, and then 14 miles NNW to North Warden Reef,

about 12 miles E of Cape Melville.

8.30 Caution.—Vessels are advised to keep W and SW of the

dangers described below; the exception to this is the bight

formed NE of Lizard Island. The dangers marking the inner

edge of the barrier reef are mostly steep-to and have depths of

more than 20m close to the sides adjacent to the Inner Route.

8.30 Foul ground and detached dangers, with depths of less than

1.8m, lie up to 3 miles NW of Helsdon Reef. A 10m patch lies

3.7 miles NNW of the reef; this patch lies less than 1 mile E of

the track through the Inner Route.

8.31 Eye Reef (14°54'S., 145°29'E.), with a rock on its S

end which dries 1.8m, lies 2 miles N of Helsdon Reef.

8.31 The Rocky Islets, three in number, lie on a reef 1.5 miles N

of Eye Reef. The largest islet rises to a height of 46m. A 2.9m

patch lies about 0.2 mile SSE of the 15m high rock.

8.31 South Direction Island (14°50'S., 145°31'E.), 177m high,

lies 3 miles NE of the Rocky Islets. The island is steep-to on its

S and W sides, but reefs extend 1.2 miles N.

8.31 High Rock, 52m high, lies 1.5 miles E of South Direction Island.

8.31 Kedge Reef, an area of foul ground, lies between 1.7 and 3.7

miles N of South Direction Island.

8.31 North Direction Island (14°45'S., 145°31'E.), a steep bare

dome-shaped island, 188m high, lies 4.7 miles N of South Direction Island. A reef fringes the island and extends about 0.1

mile offshore.

8.31 A submerged reef lies with its NW end about 2.5 miles NE

of North Direction Island. The limits of this reef are not certain

and vessels should stay N of a line drawn from the NW end to

the reef on the S side of Cormorant Pass, 8 miles ENE.

The Great Barrier Reef—Ribbon Reef to Jewell

Reef

8.32 Between the N end of Ribbon Reef and Jewell Reef

(14°23'S., 145°22'E.) 22 miles NW, the Great Barrier Reef is

formed by a single line of reefs, through which are a number of

passes.

8.32 Cormorant Pass lies with its seaward entrance 28 miles N of

Lark Pass and about 9.5 miles NE of North Direction Island.

The reefs on either side show clearly, but the pass is only about

0.3 mile wide. 

8.32 Tidal currents are reported to set through the pass at a considerable rate. 

8.32 Fishing, other than trolling, is prohibited in Cormorant Pass.

8.32 Yonge Reef (14°36'S., 145°37'E.) extends about 3.7 miles

NNW from a position 2 miles N of Cormorant Pass; a boulder

lies on its NW end.

8.32 Carter Reef lies 0.5 mile NNW of Yonge Reef, and extends

3.2 miles NNW from its S extremity.

8.32 Half Mile Opening, a small clear passage with a least depth

of 14.6m, is about 0.3 mile wide. The pass is entered between

Yonge Reef and Carter Reef. The summit of Lizard Island,

bearing 237.5°, leads to the entrance.

8.32 The inner approach to Half Mile Opening has only been partially examined.

8.32 Cooks Passage lies between the N end of Carter Reef and the

S extremity of Day Reef, 1 mile NW; both reefs are steep-to.

The depths in the passage vary from 12.8 to 42m. Immediately

outside the passage, the depths increase rapidly to more than

200m. The summit of Lizard Island, bearing 215.5°, leads

through the entrance. 

8.32 There is a heavy swell with SE winds and the reefs are welldefined by breakers.

8.32 The tidal currents off the SW entrance of Cooks Passage set

NE and SW and attain a rate of approximately 2 knots at

springs. Outside the entrance, the current sets NW at a rate of

1.5 knots.

8.33 One Mile Opening (14°28'S., 145°31'E.) is entered

between the NW extremity of Day Reef and the SE extremity

of Hicks Reef, 0.7 mile NW. Hicks Reef is a crescent-shaped

drying reef, with foul ground extending 1.5 miles from its SW

side. The seaward side is steep-to, though pinnacles up to

200m off the outer edge have depths of 13m, with lesser depths

likely. At the outer entrance, the SE edge of Hicks Reef breaks
Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 181

Pub. 127

heavily in SE winds. Both sides of the entrance are steep-to,

and there is a least depth of 12.2m off the S entrance, close N

of Day Reef.

8.33 The opening is approached with the summit of Lizard Island

bearing 195°. Vessels then alter course to 215° to proceed

through the center of the channel.

8.33 One and a Half Mile Opening is entered between a drying

rock on the NW end of Hicks Reef and the E side of Hilder

Reef (14°26'S., 145°24'E.), 1.2 miles W. Hilder Reef dries 0.9

to 1.8m and is steep-to on all sides except the SW sides. The

fairway is deep except for a 12.2m patch off the NW extremity

of Hicks Reef.

8.33 The tidal currents off the S entrance set N and S and attain a

rate of approximately 2 knots. During strong SE winds, a

heavy sea and strong irregular tidal currents are experienced.

8.33 Vessels approaching from seaward should steer for the summit of Lizard Island bearing 174°. Once clear of the opening,

vessels may join the Inner Route by passing W of the dangers

N of Lizard Island.

8.33 Two Mile Opening is entered between the N end of Hilder

Reef and the E end of Jewell Reef (14°24'S., 145°24'E.). The

latter reef dries 1.5 to 1.8m and its SE side is steep-to. A conspicuous boulder, 0.9m high, lies at the seaward edge of the

reef, 2 miles WNW of its E end. Parke Reef lies on the NW

side of the opening, 0.5 mile SW of Jewell Reef. Waining Reef,

which dries 1.5m in places, lies 0.5 mile farther SW and extends 8.5 miles WSW.

8.33 Vessels enter Two Mile Opening on a SW heading proceeding through the center of the channel; the reefs on either side

are normally visible.

The Great Barrier Reef—Inner Reef Northwest

of North Direction Island

8.34 Fly Reef (14°30'S., 145°10'E.) lies 1.5 miles W of the

W extremity of Waining Reef and 25 miles NW of North Direction Island. From this reef and from Jewell Reef, 10.5 miles

NE, the Great Barrier Reef resumes its inner and outer reef

characteristic.

8.34 Snake Reef, which dries, lies 6.5 miles WNW of Fly Reef. A

conspicuous rock, which dries 0.9m, lies on the E end of Snake

Reef and a sand cay, which dries, lies on the NW end of the

reef.

8.34 Mid Reef, which dries, lies 1.2 miles W of the W extremity

of Snake Reef. A depth of 8.2m lies 1.2 miles WSW of the NW

point of Mid Reef. It is steep-to, with foul ground that extends

0.5 mile off its W end.

8.34 Megaera Reef (14°29'S., 144°58'E.), which dries, lies 0.4

mile off the middle of the S side of Mid Reef.

8.34 The Beanley Islets, about 6.1m high, lie on the S side of a

steep-to reef, 2.5 miles NW of Mid Reef; they are part of the

Howick Group. Ingram Islet, a sand cay 9m high, lies on the N

extremity of the reef. Stapleton Islet, 4m high, lies on the NW

side of a reef, 6.5 miles NNW of Ingram Islet.

8.34 Ingram Island (14°24'S., 144°52'E.) is a wooded sand cay.

Anachorag Area II is situated 0.8 miles NW of Ingram Island,

in a depth of 20m. 

8.34 Switzer Reef (14°22'S., 144°45'E.), a steep-to reef which

dries 1.2m, lies on the W side of the S entrance to Waterwitch

Passage, 7 miles NW of Ingram Islet.

8.34 A shoal, with a least depth of 11m, lies 0.5 mile off the middle of the SW side of Switzer Reef, and 7m and 7.9m patches

lie between the outer and inner track, 2.2 miles SW of the same

reef.

8.34 Davy Patches (14°20'S., 144°43'E.) lie 1 to 2 miles NW of

Switzer Reef. There is a least depth of 1.8m at their NW end.

The Inner Route passes about 1.5 miles W of Davy Patches.

8.34 Munro Reef, which dries, lies 0.5 mile N of Switzer Reef.

Foul ground extends 0.5 mile from the SW side of Munro Reef.

8.34 Unison Reef (14°18'S., 144°41'E.) lies 1.5 miles NW of Munro Reef. A boulder, 1.5m high, lies on the N extremity of the

reef.

8.34 South Warden Reef is an extensive reef which is steep-to on

its W side. It is separated from Unison Reef by a channel 0.7

mile wide. Below-water reefs, which never dry but are always

visible, extend 2 miles N from South Warden Reef, and foul

ground extends 1 mile farther N.

8.34 Broomfield Rock (14°12'S., 144°39'E.), awash, lies 1.5

miles NNW of South Warden Reef, on the edge of the foul

ground which extends N from the reef.

8.34 North Warden Reef lies 2.7 miles N of Broomfield Rock and

7 miles E of Cape Melville. The reef is fouled with rocks on all

sides.

The Great Barrier Reef—Jewell Reef and Waterwitch Passage

8.35 Between Jewell Reef and Waterwitch Passage, 32

miles WNW, the outer edge of the Great Barrier Reef is formed

by reefs of various sizes and shapes, between which are many

narrow openings. None of these openings should be attempted

as the area between them and the Inner Route has not been

properly examined.

8.35 Waterwitch Passage (14°11'S., 144°53'E.) is entered between No. 1 Sandbank, which is 0.6m high, and a similar reef

1.2 miles NW.

8.35 A shoal, with depths of 5.5 to 8.5m, with a below-water rock

off its SW end, lies off the NW entrance point of the passage.

Heavy tide rips occur over this shoal. Another reef, with a

depth of 5.5m, lies 0.7 mile farther SW.

8.35 Vessels entering Waterwitch Passage should steer for Stapleton Islet bearing 190°. When about 4 miles N of Stapleton Islet, steer to pass 1 mile W of it, then to the Inner Route, passing

about 1.2 miles SE of Switzer Reef.

Cape Flattery to Lookout Point

8.36 From Cape Flattery, previously described in paragraph 8.29, the coast trends 9.5 miles NW to Lookout Point,

then 23 miles farther NW to Murdoch Point. The coast in the

first 9.5 miles consists of sandy beaches and low mangrove

shores. Northwest of Lookout Point, the coast consists of a low

mangrove shore with numerous creeks.

8.36 The 10m curve lies 3 miles offshore in the S part of this coast

and 7.5 miles off in the N part. There are numerous dangers inside and outside the 10m curve.

8.36 Cape Flattery Harbor (14°57'S., 145°21'E.) (World Port

Index No. 53318) is located on the W side of Cape Flattery,

which shows a light, and is an open roadstead. Cape Flattery

Inner Harbor is located on the W side of the spit extending 2
182 Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 

Pub. 127

miles NNW from the N extremity of Cape Flattery and consists

of a small jetty for local traffic. 

8.36 Cape Flattery Offshore Wharf extends about 400m from the

SE extremity of the cape. The port was developed for the export of silica sand.

8.36 Tides—Currents.—It is reported that the current normally

sets NE under the wharf at rates of up to 1 knot, but may be

stronger during the wet season, which is December to March.

Following N winds, the set is occasionally S or SW. Berthing

may be suspended in wind velocities exceeding 20 knots.

8.36 Depths—Limitations.—The offshore wharf and trestle jetty

has a berthing length of 230m and an alongside depth of 15m.

Vessels of up to 60,000 dwt and a maximum length of 250m

can be accommodated.

8.36 Vessels are usually berthed starboard side-to on the NE side

of the wharf using the ship’s anchor.

8.36 Aspect.—A beacon on the knuckle of the offshore wharf,

and a lighted beacon 90m NE, in line bearing 215°, lead to the

inshore end of the berth.

8.36 Lights are shown from the mooring dolphins.

8.36 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels berthing at

the offshore wharf and is arranged through Cairns. Notice

should be forwarded 48 hours prior to arrival and the ETA confirmed or amended 24 hours before arrival. Pilots board either

at the anchorage or about 3 miles N of the wharf.

8.36 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained by vessels of

suitable draft about 1.5 miles N of the inner harbor jetty, in

depths of 6 to 7m, locally known as No. 1 Anchorage Area.

The approach to this anchorage is made E of the dangerous

wreck lying 2.75 miles NNW of this jetty. Alternatively, No. 2

Anchorage Area can be used in good weather, in depths of

27m, in position 14°56.8'S, 145°22.2'E, lying on the W side of

the two-way route, about 2.5 miles NNE of the offshore wharf.

8.36 An anchorage, with a least depth of 8m, is established in the

lee NW of Cape Flattery within the area delimited by the following coordinates:

a. 14°52'48"S, 145°15'42"E.

b. 14°53'00"S, 146°16'42"E.

c. 14°54'30"S, 145°18'50"E.

d. 14°54'02"S, 145°16'42"E.

8.36 Vessels awaiting berthing instructions should proceed to the

above anchorage.

8.36 Vessels in ballast anchor on the range as convenient for their

draft, outside the 5m line.

8.37 Lookout Point (14°50'S., 145°14'E.) is a bare redcolored hill, 84m high, that appears as an islet from a distance.

The land in the vicinity of the point is low and has numerous

sandhills. A conspicuous white sandhill, 49m high, lies about 4

miles WSW of Lookout Point.

8.37 Although the point is closely fringed with foul ground, it is

fairly steep-to on its NE side, with the 10m curve less than 0.5

mile offshore. A detached patch, with a least depth of 1.2m,

lies 2.5 miles NW of Lookout Point.

8.37 Decapolis Reef (14°51'S., 145°16'E.), marked by a light,

dries 1.5m; it is a small reef which lies on a 9.1m patch, 2.7

miles SE of Lookout Point. 

8.37 Four Foot Rock, with a depth of 1.2m, lies 0.7 mile W of Decapolis Reef.

8.37 Sim Reef (14°49'S., 145°17'E.), with a depth of 0.6m, lies 2

miles NNE of Decapolis Reef, and is not easily seen unless

marked by tide rips. A coral head, with a depth of 4m, lies 0.7

miles SE of the reef, and a 6.4m patch lies 0.5 mile NW of the

reef. The alternative course for the Inner Route lies W of Sim

Reef.

8.38 Off-lying dangers and islands.—Linnet Reef

(14°47'S., 145°21'E.), which dries in places, lies 6.7 miles ENE

of Lookout Point. The reef is steep-to on its SW and SE sides.

A reef, with depths less than 1.5m, lies 1 mile W of Linnet

Reef and is difficult to make out.

8.38 Martin Reef, a drying reef, lies close N of Linnet Reef. Boulders, which dry, lie on the SE side of the reef and a drying sand

cay lies on its NW end.

8.38 Eagle Islet, low and covered with bushes, lies near the N end

of an extensive reef, 3.7 miles NNE of Martin Reef. The reef is

steep-to and has sand banks on it extending S from Eagle Islet,

which uncover at low water springs. Depths of 7.3m and 8.5m

are charted 6.5 miles WSW and 5.7 miles W, respectively, of

Eagle Islet.

8.38 Lizard Island (14°40'S., 145°28'E.), 359m high, with a bare

dome-shaped summit, lies 4 miles ENE of Eagle Islet. This

isand forms a good mark when approaching the passes in the

Great Barrier Reef that lie NE of it.

8.38 Palfrey Island, 137m high and South Islet 123m high, are located on reefs, 0.5 mile SSW and 1 mile S, respectively from

Lizard Island. The recommended Inner Route passes between

Palfrey Island and Eagle Islet, 3.5 miles W.

8.38 A reef, which dries in places, lies 2 miles E of the N extremity of Lizard Island.

8.38 Petricola Shoal (14°38'S., 145°28'E.), with a depth of 4.9m,

lies 1.5 miles NE of Lizard Island.

8.38 Stewart Shoal, with a least depth of 5.8m, lies 2 miles NNE

of Lizard Island. A 10.4m shoal lies 1 mile W of Stewart Shoal.

Cape Flattery bearing 297°, distant 4 miles

Queensland Ports Corporation

http://www.pcq.com.au/html/02_ports.htm
Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 183

Pub. 127

8.38 Underwood Shoal (14°35'S., 145°28'E.) has a charted depth

of 4.9m about 3.2 miles NNE of Lizard Island.

8.38 Caution.—The shoals charted N and E of Lizard Island lie

on an extension of the recommended courses through the Great

Barrier Reef.

Lookout Point to Murdoch Point

8.39 From Lookout Point to Murdoch Point, the coast recedes about 4.5 miles and is fronted by a mud bank which extends up to 1.2 miles offshore in places.

8.39 North Sand Hill, 59m high, rises 5.5 miles W of Lookout

Point. 

8.39 Round Hill (14°48'S., 145°01'E.), a distinctive dome-shaped

hill, 175m high, which is prominently in front of the rest of the

hills, lies 7.7 miles WNW of North Sand Hill.

8.39 The Pethebridge Islets (14°44'S., 144°06'E.), two wooded

islets about 6.1m high, lie about 9.5 miles NW of Lookout

Point. The E islet, marked by a light, lies outside the 5m curve.

These islets are located on the SW side of an alternative navigational track that passes between the islets and Turtle Reef,

about 3.7 miles ENE.

8.39 The Turtle Group (14°43'S., 145°12'E.), six low, wooded islets and shoals, lie between 5.5 and 10 miles NNW of Lookout

Point; all the islets are reef fringed. Depths of less than 2.7m lie

about 2 miles NE of the largest islet.

8.39 Gunga Shoal, a below-water coral patch, lies 9 miles NNW

of Lookout Point. A 2.7m patch lies 1 mile WNW of Gunga

Shoal. Both of these dangers are steep-to and as the water in

the vicinity is much discolored, they are difficult to distinguish

even when close to.

8.39 Nymph Island (14°39'S., 145°15'E.), a low, wooded island

fringed by reefs, lies 3.7 miles NE of the NE islet of the Turtle

Group. A 9.8m patch lies 2.7 miles N of Nymph Island. Patches, with depths of 8.6m and 11.7m, lie 2.7 miles N and 2.2

miles NNE of Nymph Island. These patches lie within 0.4 mile

N of the Two-way Route. The recommended Inner Route lies

1.5 miles NE of Nymph Island.

8.39 Turtle Reef lies 3.7 miles ENE of the light on Pethebridge Islet. A sand cay, sometimes awash at HW, but always visible,

lies on the NW end of the reef. A detached sandbank, which

dries at LWS, lies 0.5 mile SSW of Turtle Reef.

8.40 Murdoch Point (14°37'S., 144°55'E.) is a low, sandy,

ill-defined, and rounded projection fronted by a drying reef extending 0.7 mile offshore. A detached drying reef, 2.5 miles

long, lies parallel with the coast S of the point and 1.2 miles

from it.

8.40 Murdoch Island, a low island, lies on the N part of the detached reef, 1 mile ENE of Murdoch Point. From Murdoch

Point, the coast trends 22 miles NW to Barrow Point.

8.40 Beatrice Reef, 2 miles N of Murdoch Island, dries in places,

but is difficult to distinguish when covered.

8.40 Miles Reef (14°32'S., 144°55'E.), two steep-to reefs, 0.2

mile apart, lies 1.7 miles N of Beatrice Reef.

8.40 The Cole Islands, a groups of four islets, lies on the edge of a

bank, 3.5 miles NNW of Murdoch Point.

8.40 Sand Islet (14°31'S., 144°51'E.), 1.8m high, lies 2 miles

NNW of the NW islet of the Cole Islands.

Off-lying Islands

8.41 Howick Island (14°30'S., 144°58'E.), part of the

Howick Group, is the largest island of this group. Howick Island is 56m high and lies 7 miles NNE of Murdoch Point.

8.41 Houghton Island, 9.1m high, lies 0.5 mile S of Howick Island; it is steep-to and reef fringed, with depths of 10m within

0.3 mile of the shore. 

8.41 Anchorage.—Vessels may take good anchorage in a position a little over 0.3 mile N of the W end of the island, in a

depth of 16.5m.

8.41 Coquet Island (14°33'S., 144°59'E.), the farthest SE of the

Howick Group, is 16m high. A reef fringes the islet to 0.3 mile

distant. A light is shown from the W side of the island. A channel 0.7 mile wide separates this islet from Houghton Island. 

8.41 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor, in 12.8m, 0.3 mile NNW

of the light on the W end of the islet.

8.41 Wilson Rock, a detached pinnacle with a depth of 5.5m, lies

0.7 mile W of Houghton Island.

8.41 Newton Island (14°30'S., 144°55'E.), 2 miles W of Howick

Island, is fringed by a reef, and is mangrove fringed except on

its NW side, where there is a sandy point. The alternative route

lies 0.5 mile SW of this island.

8.41 Watson Island, 7m high, lies on the S end of a drying reef 2.2

miles NW of Newton Island. A light is shown from the island.

8.41 Bewick Island (14°26'S., 144°49'E.), 12m high, lies 4.5

miles WNW of Watson Island. 

8.41 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in 13 to 15m,

mud, close off the NW side of Bewick Island.

8.41 A wreck, with a depth of 8.7m, lies near the alternative track,

2 miles WSW of Bewick Island.

Murdoch Point to Barrow Point

8.42 Red Point (14°33'S., 144°46'E.), 9.1m high and

cliffy, lies 9 miles WNW of Murdoch Point. Brown Peak,

200m high, lies 1 mile inland, midway between these two

points. A range of hills extends 4 miles S of Red Point.

8.42 From Red Point to Barrow Point, the coastal dangers are

contained within the 10m curve, which lies up to 5.5 miles offshore N of Red Point. There are a number of detached dangers

off this coast.

8.42 Noble Island (14°30'S., 144°46'E.), 2.2 miles N of Red

Lizard Island
184 Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 

Pub. 127

Point, rises to a height 122m. A reef fringes the island.

8.42 Wooden Patch, a sand and mud patch with a depth of 6.4m,

lies on the edge of the 10m curve, 2.2 miles N of Noble Island.

8.42 Baron Reef, which dries at LW, lies 3.7 miles WSW of

Wooden Patch, and Weigall Reefs, which lie close offshore, lie

2.7 miles farther W. A patch, with a depth of 6.7m, lies 4.5

miles NNW of Baron Reef.

Cape Bowen (14°31'S., 144°40'E.), a cliffy ill-defined point,

6.1m high, lies 6.7 miles WNW of Red Point. It lies at the NE

end of a detached range of rocky hills that are remarkable for

the basaltic columns on them. Cone Peak, 534m high, the E

summit of the range, lies 1.5 miles SW of Cape Bowen; it is

conspicuous from the E and N.

8.42 Barrow Point (14°22'S., 144°39'E.), 8.7 miles NNW of

Cape Bowen, is the E extremity of a peninsula that extends NE

from the plain S of it. The point is 130m high and presents a

barren appearance.

8.42 A 7m patch, lying 4.7 miles SE of Barrow Point and close

SW of the Two Way Route, is covered by the red sector of

South Barrow Island Light.

8.42 The Barrow Islets are located 0.5 mile NE of the peninsula,

on a drying reef. The 20m curve lies about 0.3 mile off the SE

islet.

Barrow Point to Cape Melville

8.43 From Barrow Point, the coast trends NNW 14 miles to

Cape Melville. The coastline is irregular. Ninian Bay is formed

between Barrow Point and North Bay Point, 6 miles NNW, and

smaller indentations are formed between North Bay Point and

Cape Melville.

8.43 Ninian Bay is shallow, and formed by sandy beaches separated by rocky points, and backed by low, wooded ground. The

head of the bay is reef-fringed. A reef, which dries 1.2m, lies

off a cliffy point, 11m high, 3.7 miles WNW of the Barrow Islets.

8.43 Beabey Hill, 145m high and prominent, rises 3.5 miles SSW

of North Bay Point.

8.43 North Bay Point (14°16'S., 144°36'E.) rises abruptly to a

hill, 131m high, about 0.3 mile W. The 323m high summit of

Temple Hill, the highest in the vicinity, rises 2 miles W of

North Bay Point. The 10m curve lies 0.4 mile E of this point,

but depths shoal to less than 3.7m immediately within this

curve.

8.43 Between North Bay Point and Cape Melville, the coast

trends fairly regularly in a NNW direction and consists of

sandy beaches separated by rocky points. This section of the

coast rises abruptly to a range of hills about 0.5 mile inland,

with higher peaks, up to 414m, less than 2.5 miles inland. The

Melville Range rises to a summit of 613m, about 6 miles WSW

of North Bay Point.

8.43 The 10m curve, which contains the coastal dangers, lies 1 to

2 miles offshore on this coast.

8.43 A dangerous steep-to shore bank, with depths of less than

1.8m, extends about 3.2 miles NNW from North Bay Point.

This shore bank is just inside the 10m curve and there are

depths of more than 12.8m close off it.

8.43 Rocky Point Islet, 20m high, lies close to the shore, 2 miles

NW of North Bay Point.

8.43 Singleton Patch (14°10'S., 144°35'E.), a steep-to 8.3m pinnacle, lies on the N side of the Inner Route, 4 miles N of Rocky

Point Islet.

8.43 Hales Islet lies on a dangerous steep-to shore bank, 1 mile

SE of Cape Melville and about 0.3 mile offshore. An obstruction, with a depth of 9.9m, lies 1 mile NE of Hales Islet.

8.44 Cape Melville (14°10'S., 144°31'E.) rises to a height

of 118m a short distance SE; it lies at the N termination of the

high range of rocky hills that backs the coast N from North Bay

Point. The cape is remarkable for the immense granite blocks

on it.

8.44 Anchorage Area designated CM is situated 3.5 miles due W

of Cape Melville, in a depth of 6m. 

8.44 Wedge Rocks, 9.1m high, lies close off the NE extremity of

the cape. Several rocks fringe the N end of the cape and Cape

Rock, 14m high lies off the NW extremity of the cape.

8.44 Boulder Rock, 24m high, lies just inside the 10m curve, 1

mile NNW of the NW end of Cape Melville. A detached rock,

almost awash, lies less than 0.5 mile NE of Boulder Rock.

8.44 Channel Rock (14°08'S., 144°29'E.), which covers 0.9m,

lies 0.7 mile N of Boulder Rock, just inside the 20m curve.

Cape Melville to Claremont Point

8.45 The coast between Cape Melville and Claremont

Point, about 50 miles WNW, recedes S to form two bays,

Bathurst and Princess Charlotte. Bathurst Bay indents the coast

about 5 miles SSE between Cape Melville and Bathurst Head,

17 miles WSW. Princess Charlotte Bay indents the coast 20

miles SSW between Bathurst Head and Claremont Point, 34

miles WNW.

8.45 Several detached hills lie close to the coast between Cape

Melville and Bathurst Head, and the Bathurst Range rises

abruptly from the coast to a height of 329m, extending a short

distance S from the latter head. The land in the vicinity of Princess Charlotte Bay is low.

8.45 Many of the dangers fringing the coast are contained within

the 10m curve, which follows the coastal trend between 0.2

mile and 6.2 miles offshore, except that it lies 13 miles seaward

of the head of Princess Charlotte Bay. Several steep-to islands

and other dangers lie between the 10m curve and the inner

edge of the barrier reef. The depth curves cannot generally be

relied upon to give adequate warning of these dangers. The inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef lies from 3.7 to 26 miles offshore.

8.45 Tides—Currents.—In general, the N set of the flood current and S set of the ebb current that prevails on this coast is interrupted by the tidal flow in and out of Princess Charlotte Bay,

where there is a tidal rise of 3.2m.

8.45 Between Cape Melville and Claremont Point, the tidal currents set SW or S into Princess Charlotte Bay on the rising tide

and in an opposite direction on the falling tide. The ebb current

tends to set in a N direction out of the bay.

8.45 In the vicinity of Princess Charlotte Bay, from April to November, the Southeast Trades cause a current that sets N or NW

at rates of 0.5 to 1.2 knots. The resultant of this current and the

tidal current almost always sets N at a rate of 1.2 to 2 knots

during the falling tide and up to 0.5 knot during the rising tide.

During the Northwest Monsoon, December to March, the resultant set of the wind and tidal currents is more frequently to
Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 185

Pub. 127

the S than N. During this season, the flood current setting into

the bay is sometimes overcome by an outset from the bay that

is probably caused by fresh water discharged from the rivers

which empty into the bay. A drift of 2 knots has been reported

after heavy rains.

8.46 Except for the Flinders Group, the dangers inside the

10m curve are described with their related coastal features. The

Flinders Group and other islands and dangers between the 10m

curve and the inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef are described below.

8.46 The Pipon Islets (14°07'S., 144°31'E.), four in number, lie

on a drying reef, 2.5 miles N of Cape Melville. The S islet is

12m high and tree covered; a light is shown from this islet. The

reef is steep-to except for depths of 11m and less which lie 0.4

mile off its NW side.

8.46 Oswald Shoal lies 1.5 miles NW of the light on the Pipon Islets. It has a depth of 3.9m.

8.46 Pipon Shoals (14°06'S., 144°32'E.), with a least charted

depth of 0.9m lie about 0.5 mile NNE of the Pipon Islets. They

consist of shoal patches located on an 11m bank.

8.46 Aylen Patch, with a depth of 9.1m, lies 2.5 miles NW of Pipon Islets Light. There is a 12.9m patch 3.2 miles WNW of Aylen Patch. Anchorage Area PI is situated 1 mile WNW of

Pipon Island, in depths of 10 to 15m. 

8.46 King Island (14°06'S., 144°20'E.) is a low, wooded, and

reef-fringed island that lies 9.7 miles WNW of Cape Melville.

8.46 Atkinson Reef, a small coral reef with a depth of 2.7m, lies

on the outer end of a spit which extends 3 miles WSW from

King Island. The reef is not marked by tide rips.

8.46 Flinders Group (14°10'S., 144°15'E.) consists of five, high,

rugged islands, partially covered with stunted trees and scrub,

which lie between 1.5 and 7.5 miles N of Bathurst Head. Stanley Island is the farthest N of the group. 

8.47 Cape Flinders (14°08'S., 144°14'E.), a steep-to point

of land, is the N extremity of the island; it lies 3 miles W of Atkinson Reef. Two peaks rise to a height of 205m and 187m, respectively, 1.5 miles SE of Cape Flinders. A knob on the W

slope of the peaks is prominent from the NE and S. The W part

of the island has a table-topped summit with a height of 123m,

and is the only prominent feature on this part of the island. The

E and W parts of the island are connected by a low isthmus.

8.47 Flinders Rock, a 7.3m pinnacle marked by rips on the ebb,

lies 0.5 mile N of Cape Flinders.

8.47 Flinders Island (14°11'S., 144°15'E.), the largest island of

the group, is separated from the SE side of Stanley Island by

Owen Channel, which is about 0.6 mile wide. The island rises

to Flinders Peak, 317m high, in the S part of the island. Pirie

Head, 85m high, is a precipitous headland located on the SE

end of Flinders Island.

8.47 A reef fringes Flinders Island to about 0.3 mile offshore, except that it extends about 0.7 mile from the head of a bight on

the NW side of the island. A small detached reef that dries 3m,

lies 0.3 mile offshore, 0.7 mile SW of Pirie Head.

8.47 Owen Channel is only suitable for small vessels, although

there are depths of 5.8 to 16.5m; there are a number of 5.5m

patches in its NW part.

8.47 Fly Channel separates Flinders Island from the islands about

1 mile farther S. Although there are depths of 8.5 to 14.6m in

the fairway, the channel is not recommended because of the existence of dangerous rocks. 

8.47 Sentry Rock, a 3.6m pinnacle, lies in the middle of the channel about 1 mile SSW of Pirie Head. 

8.47 Stainer Rock, with a depth of 5.5m, lies on the S side of the

channel 0.9 mile WNW of Sentry Rock.

8.47 Maclear Island (14°13'S., 144°15'E.), on the S side of Fly

Channel, lies 2 miles WSW of Pirie Head. The island is 24m high,

with a rocky islet 6.1m high WNW of it. Both are fringed with

drying coral reefs, with a channel 150m wide between them.

8.47 Denham Island, the farthest SE of the Flinders Group, rises

to 201m near its SE extremity. Howard Bluff, 49m high, the

NE extremity of the island, is a cliff with an overhanging top.

The SE coast is bold, precipitous, and steep-to.

8.47 Blackwood Island, 1 mile WNW of Denham Island, rises to

a rounded summit, 178m high at its NE end. Pullen Point, 6m

high, lies at the SW extremity of the island, at the end of a long

narrow neck which has several mounds up to 44m high on it.

8.47 In 1989, it was reported that the dangerous wreck of a fishing vessel lies 0.5 mile W of the summit of Blackwood Island.

8.47 Anchorage.—During SE winds, vessels can take anchorage

0.5 mile offshore in Anchorage Area SB (Stokes Bay) located

on the W side of Stanley Island, in a depth of 16m. Anchorage

Area WB, situated halfway between Cape Flinders and Nares

Point, has depths ranging from 10 to 13m. 

8.47 Anchorage can be taken, in 11m, mud, off the W side of

Blackwood Island, 1 mile N of Pullen Point. This anchorage is

not recommended when the wind is N of E.

8.48 Clack Reef (14°04'S., 144°14'E.) lies 3 miles N of

Stanley Island, on the N side of the Inner Route. 

8.48 Clack Islet, 43m high, lies on the SE extremity of the reef.

An islet, 15m high, lies on the E end of the reef, just over 1

mile NNE of Clack Islet. A rock, which dries 1m, lies on the W

extremity of the reef, 2.5 miles WNW of Clack Islet. A depth

of 9.6m is charted 1.2 miles WSW of Clack Islet, close off the

reef.

8.48 Wharton Reef (14°08'S., 144°00'E.) is a steep-to reef that

lies 12 miles WSW of Clack Reef. It is located about 1.5 miles

S of the Inner Route, in the middle of the entrance to Princess

Charlotte Bay. A light is shown from the E end of the reef; drying rocks are located 0.8 mile WSW of the light on the W extremity of the reef.

8.48 Clark Shoal, a steep-to coral patch with a depth of 6.4m, lies

3.2 miles W of Wharton Reef.

8.48 Olive Patch, with a depth of 5.5m, lies about 4 miles SW of

Wharton Reef. A depth of 9.6m is charted 1.5 miles S of the

patch.

Claremont Point (14°00'S., 143°41'E.) is described in paragraph 8.55.

The Great Barrier Reef—Inner Edge—North

Warden Reef to Iris Reef

8.49 The inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef trends NW

from North Warden Reef to a position 5 miles NE of Cape

Melville at Melanie Rock, then about 8.5 miles N to the inner

end of North Broken Passage. It then trends about 44 miles W

to Fahey Reef and then 5.5 miles NNW to Iris Reef, which lies

9.5 miles ENE of Claremont Point. Vessels should keep W and
186 Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 

Pub. 127

S of a line connecting the following dangers, which mark the

inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef. For more information, see

paragraph 7.2 under the heading “Navigation in the Great Barrier Reef.”

8.49 Melanie Rock (14°06'S., 144°34'E.), with a least depth of

1m, lies about 4.5 miles NW of the N end of North Warden

Reef. Foul ground, with 4.9 to 9.1m patches, extends 2.5 miles

ESE from the rock. The area E and NE of Melanie Rock is

mostly unexamined.

8.49 Eves Reef (13°58'S., 144°34'E.) lies 8 miles N of Melanie

Rock. The waters E of a line drawn from Melanie Rock to Eves

Reef have not been examined sufficiently for safe navigation.

8.49 North Broken Pass lies E of Eves Reef and South Broken

Pass lies between Eves Reef and Tydeman Reef, 2 miles W.

Neither pass is recommended.

8.49 The line of reefs that trend W from Eves Reef to Lowry Passage, 11 miles distant, is not more than 2 miles wide and forms

both the inner and outer edges of the Great Barrier Reef.

8.50 Tydeman Reef (13°59'S., 144°31'E.), which dries,

lies 2 miles WSW of Eves Reef. A shoal, with a depth of 3.9m,

lies off the E end of the reef.

8.50 Melville Pass lies between the W end of Tydeman Reef and

Davie Reef, 1.7 miles W. There are boulders 0.6m high, on the

SW end of Davie Reef. Detached shoal patches, with depths of

4.9 to 16.5m, on either side of the channel, reduce the navigable width to 0.7 mile.

8.50 Tidal currents set N and S in Melville Pass and attain a rate

of 2 knots at springs, when eddies are formed and the water

discolored.

8.50 Pipon Islet Light bearing 167.5° leads through Melville Pass

from seaward, in depths of 22 to 30m.

8.50 West Melville Pass lies with its seaward entrance between

Davie Reef and Wilson Reef (13°57'S., 144°24'E.), which

dries, 1.5 miles W. There is a beacon on the SW extremity of

Wilson Reef.

8.50 Several shoal patches on the W side of the channel, with

depths of 8.8 to 10m, reduce the navigable width of the pass to

0.4 mile.

8.50 Tidal currents in West Melville Pass set NE and SW; they attain a rate of approximately 2 knots at springs.

8.50 West Melville Pass is a safe channel which leads directly

from seaward to the Inner Route.

8.50 Flinders Peak, 17 miles SW of West Melville Pass, bearing

218°, or at night, King Island Light bearing 221°, leads through

the pass in depths of 20 to 30m, however, the former leads

close to Davie Reef.

8.50 Joan Reef (13°57'S., 144°21'E.), which dries, lies 1.2 miles

W of Wilson Reef. The reef is steep-to except for depths of 5.8

and 6.1m lying close off its NE and SW ends, respectively.

8.50 Lowry Passage lies between Wilson Reef on the E and Joan

Reef on the W; it is deep and clear of dangers.

8.50 Tidal currents in Lowry Passage are strong and cause eddies

and discolored water, especially at springs.

8.50 Flinders Peak bearing 203°, or at night, King Island Light

bearing 195.5°, lead through Lowry Passage in a least depth of

29m.

8.50 Corbett Reef, on the inner edge of the barrier reef, extends

15 miles SW from a position 6.2 miles W of Joan Reef. The SE

side of the reef has not yet been clearly defined. The SW end is

steep-to and dries in patches, with rocks which dry to 2.2m.

8.51 Eden Reef (14°05'S., 143°55'E.), a steep-to reef

which dries 1.5m, lies 5 miles W of the W extremity of Corbett

Reef. A light is shown from the reef, which is located 1 mile N

of the Inner Route.

8.51 Taiwan Shoal, Cameron Shoal, and Keast Shoal, with depths

of 4.6m, 4.6m, and 7.3m, respectively, lie between Eden Reef

and Grub Reef, 2.2 miles NNE.

8.51 Fahey Reef (14°04'S., 143°51'E.), 3.2 miles WNW of Eden

Reef, dries 0.9 to 1.5m, and is steep-to. A light is shown from

the reef. A strong E set on the ebb at springs has been reported

in the vicinity of the reef.

8.51 Beabey Patches, a group of coral heads with a least depth of

5.5m, lie 3 miles NW of Fahey Reef. The Inner Route lies 1.2

mile SW of the 5.5m patch.

8.51 Iris Reef, which is steep-to on its W side, lies 2.5 miles N of

Beabey Patches. The reef dries 1.2m, and Stainer Islet, 2m

high, lies on its NW side. A lighted buoy is moored 1.8 miles

W of Iris Reef.

The Great Barrier Reef—Outer Edge—Waterwitch Passage to Lowry Passage

8.52 From the NW side of Waterwitch Passage, the outer

edge of the Great Barrier Reef trends about 21 miles NW in an

unbroken line with no apparent openings. It then turns abruptly

SW for 2 miles to North Broken Passage, an opening which

lies 13 miles NNE of Cape Melville. The passages and reefs W

of this passage, to Lowry Passage, 12 miles farther W, have

been described with the inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef.

8.52 Bathurst Bay is entered between the W extremity of Cape

Melville and the E extremity of Bathurst Head (14°15'S.,

144°15'E.), 17 miles WSW; the 5m curve lies 5.2 miles off the

head of the bay.

8.52 From the W extremity of Cape Melville to a point 10.5 miles

SW, the coast is formed by a sandy beach backed by sparselywooded ground.

8.52 Islets, with a few bushes on them, lie between 1 and 2.5

miles N of the point mentioned above.

8.52 Bathurst Head is a rugged projection which terminates in

three points; the central and N point is Combe Point (14°15'S.,

144°13'E.), with a small bay on each side. Within the three

points, the head is formed by a tableland covered with trees,

which fall abruptly near the coast.

8.52 Rattlesnake Channel lies between Bathurst Head, on one

side, and Denham Island and Blackwood Island of the Flinders

Group, on the other side. The channel is about 0.8 mile wide

between the 10m curve and is clear of dangers.

8.53 Princess Charlotte Bay, an extensive bay that lies between Bathurst Head and Claremont Point, 34 miles NW, has a

mud bank which extends 2 miles offshore at its head. The 10m

curve lies up to 12.5 miles from the head of the bay.

8.53 The E shore of the bay along Bathurst Head for a distance of

2.7 miles is steep and wooded. From this point to the mouth of

the North Kennedy River, at the head of the bay, a distance of

19 miles, the shore is fronted by mangroves and backed by tidal flats.
Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 187

Pub. 127

8.53 For a distance of 3 miles W of the North Kennedy River, the

shore is mangrove fringed; then for a distance of 15.5 miles

NW it is formed by swampy ground. From this point to Claremont Point, 13 miles N, the shore of the bay is devoid of any

remarkable features, except for a conspicuous clump of trees 6

miles S of Claremont Point.

8.53 Jane Table Hill (14°30'S., 144°08'E.), 161m high, and Jeannette Hill, 83m high, 1 mile SSE, are located 16 miles SSE of

Bathurst Head. Jane Table Hill is easily identified, owing to its

position in the low, flat ground in its vicinity.

8.53 June Reef, which dries 0.9m, lies within the 5m curve, 15

miles NW of theNorth Kennedy River.

8.53 The Cliff Islands (14°14'S., 143°47'E.) are a group of three

islets that lie close together between 3 and 4.5 miles off the W

side of Princess Charlotte Bay, in a position 3.2 miles N of

June Reef. The E islet is 15m high and the N islet is 23m high.

They are located within the 5m curve on the E end.

8.54 Port Stewart (14°05'S., 143°41'E.) (World Port Index

No. 53310) is a small settlement situated on the Stewart River,

10.5 miles NNW of the Cliff Islands. Claremont Point is located 3.7 miles farther N. Local knowledge is essential. 

8.54 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken anywhere in Princess Charlotte Bay outside the 5m curve, but care must be taken to avoid Olive Patch and the shoal patches in the vicinity.

Good anchorage during E winds can be taken, in 9.1m, mud

and shells, about 2 miles WSW of the NW extremity of

Bathurst Head. When the SE winds are strong off Cape

Flinders and Cape Melville, it is invariably light in the bay.

Claremont Point to Cape Direction

8.55 Claremont Point (14°00'S., 143°41'E.) is a low

wooded projection of the mainland that is relatively inconspicuous. A shore bank, with depths of less than 5.5m, extends

nearly 2.2 miles E from the point. Several detached coral

patches, with depths of less than 1.8m, lie 1.2 miles and 1.5

miles ENE of the point.

The coast trends fairly regularly about 71 miles NNW from

Claremont Point to Cape Direction and consists mostly of

sandy beaches along which numerous small rivers and creeks

empty.

8.55 Much of the coast is fringed with reefs; there are many detached reefs, shoal patches, and islets between the coast and the

inner edge of the barrier reef. These dangers are particularly

numerous between Campbell Point and Cape Direction. The

inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef lies 4 to 10 miles off this

coast.

8.55 Between Claremont Point and Campbell Point, 29 miles

NNW, the low coast recedes about 5.5 miles W and consists of

sandy beaches fringed with sandbanks and coral reefs. It is

backed by low land to a position 6 miles SSW of Campbell

Point, where the coastal range again begins to closely back the

coast.

8.55 The Embley Range is the only feature on this coast that is

notable. 

8.55 Round Mountain (13°34'S., 143°31'E.), 320m high and

rounded, rises on the N end of the range; Hobbs Hill, 208m

high, with a sharp sugar loaf top, rises near the S end of the

range.

8.55 The coastal dangers on this coast are contained within the

5m curve. Only the more prominent dangers within the 5m line

will be described.

8.55 Obree Reef (13°59'S., 143°41'E.) lies on the shorebank 2

miles N of Claremont Point.

8.55 Rattlesnake Reefs, which consist of a coral reef, awash, and

three reefs which dry between 0.6 and 1.2m, lies 4 miles NNW

of Obree Reef, close to the E edge of the coastal bank.

8.55 Colmer Point, about 17 miles NNW of Claremont Point, is a

low point that lies close S of the mouth of the Rocky River.

8.55 Holdsworth Rock (13°46'S., 143°36'E.), with a depth of

3.6m, lies outside the 5m curve, 4.2 miles ENE of Colmer

Point.

8.55 Frenchman Reef, which dries 2.4m, lies 2.2 miles NNE of

Colmer Point.

8.55 The Chester River (13°42'S., 143°33'E.) enters the sea 4

miles N of Colmer Point. This is the most important river in

this area. A ledge of coral rocks, which dry, lie on the edge of

the drying sand bank, which extends 0.4 mile from the entrance. Small vessels with a draft of 1.5m can enter the river at

HW.

8.56 Campbell Point (13°32'S., 143°35'E.) lies on the N

side of the Nesbit River, 10 miles NNE of the Chester River. A

hill rises to a height of 59m, 1.5 miles NW of the point.

Cape Direction bearing 182°, distant 8 miles

Cape Direction bearing 333°, distant 5 miles
188 Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 

Pub. 127

From Campbell Point, the coast trends N 1.7 miles to a red

sandstone cliff 18m high. Between the red cliff and Cape Sidmouth, 6 miles farther N, the coast is low and consists of a sand

beach. Several hills and a coastal range back this coast from 1

to 5 miles inland. 

8.56 Whale Hill (13°29'S., 143°32'E.), 306m high, is a table-topped

hill that lies 4.7 miles NNW of Campbell Point; it lies at the SE

end of the Macrossan Range, which extends 7 miles N.

8.56 This section of the coast continues to be fronted by a shore

bank, with the 5m curve lying 3 miles offshore.

8.56 Bell Bank (13°27'S., 143°37'E.), which dries 1.5m, is about

1 mile long and lies 2 miles offshore in a position 5 miles NNE

of Campbell Point. The E edge of this bank is coral.

8.56 Cape Sidmouth (13°25'S., 143°36'E.), a bare, rocky point

with a sandy beach, rises abruptly to two hummocks which

have a height of 62m. From a distance S or N, the cape appears

as an island.

8.56 Roskruge Reef, awash, lies 1.7 miles N of Bell Bank and 1.7

miles E of Cape Sidmouth.

8.57 Between Cape Sidmouth and Friendly Point, a low

sandy point 2.2 miles N, the coast is low and fronted by a

sandy beach.

8.57 A dangerous shorebank, with depths of less than 2m, extends

4 miles NE of Friendly Point. It shoals abruptly from the 10m

curve. Treat Reef, which dries 1.2m, lies on the N edge of the

shorebank, 2.7 miles NNE of Friendly Point.

8.57 From Friendly Point, the coast trends 4.5 miles NNW, then

8.5 miles N to Bobardt Point (13°11'S., 143°31'E.), a low

sandy point, with wooded land between it and the coastal range

2 miles W. The coast here is backed by a continuous line of

ranges between 274 and 458m high.

8.57 Voaden Point, 6.5 miles NNW of Friendly Point, is low and

tree covered. A reef, which dries 0.6m, lies on the outer end of

a spit of foul ground which extends 1 mile from the point.

8.57 Hangklip Peak, 412m high, lies 2.5 miles inland, 3 miles SW

of Voaden Point.

8.57 An extensive area of foul ground lies within the 5m curve,

NE, E, and SE of Bobardt Point.

8.57 Between Bobardt Point and Cape Direction, 20 miles N, the

coast continues to be primarily sandy beaches separated by

several rocky points. This part of the coast is backed by a line

of coastal ranges. Chester Peak, 329m high, lies 3.5 miles

NNW of Bobardt Point.

8.57 The 10m curve follows the coastal trend up to 3 miles offshore between Bobardt Point and First Red Rocky Point

(13°04'S., 143°31'E.), 7.2 miles N; the water shoals quickly inside the 10m curve.

8.57 First Red Rocky Point is 23m high and has red cliffs. High

Peak, 491m high, is a conical summit located 3 miles WNW of

the point.

8.57 A dangerous shore bank, with depths of less than 1.8m, extends up to 3.2 miles offshore between First Red Rocky Point

and Cape Direction. It lies just within the 5m curve, but the water shoals quickly within the 10m curve.

8.57 Wasp Reef (13°02'S., 143°33'E.), which dries 0.6m, lies on the

edge of the coastal bank, 2.2 miles NNE of First Red Rocky Point.

8.57 Round Point, 47m high, lies 3 miles N of First Red Rocky

Point and Second Red Rocky Point lies 3 miles farther N. Bare

Hill, 82m high, lies 0.3 mile W of Second Red Rocky point.

The shore bank extends 2.2 miles E of Second Red Rocky

Point;the 10m curve lies 0.2 mile farther E.

8.57 From Second Red Rocky Point to Cape Direction, 7 miles N,

the dangerous shore bank is encumbered with reefs and dangers.

8.58 Hammond Reef (12°56'S., 143°33'E.) lies on the

coastal bank 2.2 miles NE of Second Red Rocky Point. Numerous reefs lie NW of Hammond Reef.

8.58 Rocky Islet, 39m high, lies 2.5 miles SSE of Cape Direction.

Large boulders extend 0.1 mile E from the islet; the outer boulder is 6m high.

8.58 Cape Direction (12°51'S., 143°32'E.) is a remarkable

headand terminating in a rocky point. There are several welldefined round, bare hills, covered with boulders on the cape. 

8.58 Direction Hill, 146m high, the farthest S of these hills, appears as a sharp peak when seen from the N or S.

Off-lying Islands

8.59 There are numerous steep-to rocks, shoal patches,

reefs, and islets between this part of the coast and the inner

edge of the barrier reef. The 10m curve is so irregular off the

coast between Claremont Point and Cape Sidmouth that it cannot be depended on to give adequate warning of impending

danger. North of Cape Sidmouth to Cape Direction, most of the

dangers are contained within the 20m curve which follows the

coastal trend.

8.59 There are general depths of 12.8 to 27m in the fairway of the

recommended track through this part of the Inner Route.

8.59 The Claremont Islands is a group of three islets, consisting

of Burkitt Island, Hannah Island, and Wilkie Island, which lies

near the Inner Route between 5.7 miles NE and 14 miles NNW,

respectively, of Claremont Point.

8.59 Burkitt Islet (13°56'S., 143°45'E.), the farthest S of the

group, is 17m high; it lies on the N end of a steep-to reef which

dries. A dangerous wreck, best seen on the chart, lies 2 miles

NW.

8.59 Simpson Rock, with a depth of 10m, lies 2 miles NNE of

Burkitt Islet; Yule Rock, with a depth of 9.1m, lies 1 mile NW

of Simpson Rock. Olver Rock, with a depth of 7.3m, lies 0.7

mile NW of Yule Rock.

8.60 Hannah Islet (13°52'S., 143°43'E.), 20m high, is

fringed by a steep-to reef. It lies 8.5 miles NNE of Claremont

Point, 0.6 mile E of the Inner Route. A light is situated on the

NW extremity of the islet. The light is obscured SSE of Burkitt

Island by trees between the bearings of 328° and 332°.

8.60 Sullivan Shoal, a number of coral heads with a least depth of

3.6m, lies on the W side of the Inner Route, 1.7 miles NW of

the light on Hannah Islet.

8.60 Helby Rock, a 6.8m coral pinnacle, lies 2.2 miles N of Sullivan Shoal.

8.60 Wilkie Islet, 14m high, is located on a drying reef, 6.7 miles

NNW of Hannah Islet. Poulsen Rock, with a least depth of

7.3m, lies just inside the 10m curve, 2 miles NNW of Wilkie

Islet.

8.61 Hay Island (13°40'S., 143°41'E.), 15m high, is a conspicuous wooded island lying 6 miles NNE of Wilkie Islet. A
Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 189

Pub. 127

current rip sometimes extends from Hay Island to Fife Island,

1.5 miles NE. The Inner Route passes about midway between

these two islands, or to the W of Hay Island.

8.61 Fife Island (13°39'S., 143°43'E.) lies on the W end of a

steep-to reef, which dries 1.8m. A light is shown from the W

end of the island.

8.61 Macdonald Reef (13°33'S., 143°39'E.), which dries 0.9m

and is steep-to, lies 4 miles E of Campbell Point, and 7.2 miles

NNW of Fife Island.

8.61 Heath Reef (13°29'S., 143°41'E.), a steep-to dangerous reef,

is located on the E side of the Inner Route, 4.5 miles NNE

Macdonald Reef. A light is situated on the reef.

8.61 Quake Reef, which dries 1.2m, lies 2 miles NW of Heath

Reef.

8.61 South Khandalla Shoal, with a least depth of 5.2m, and

North Khandalla Shoal, with a least depth of 3.6m, lie 2.2 and

2.7 miles NNE, respectively, of Heath Reef.

8.61 Bow Reef (13°18'S., 143°40'E.), marked by a light, dries

0.9m; it lies on the E side of the Inner Route, 7 miles NNW of

North Khandalla Shoal.

8.61 Howard Rock, with a least depth of 8.2m, lies 2.5 miles NW

of Bow Reef. Chilcott Rock, Lowrie Islet, and Norman Rock

lie 0.7 mile NW, 1.7 miles WNW, and 2.2 miles WNW, respectively, of Howard Rock.

8.61 Parry Rock (13°15'S., 143°38'E.), a coral rock with a depth

of 10.3m, lies 2 miles N of Howard Rock.

8.61 Binstead Islet, 6m high, lies 3.7 miles NW of Parry Rock.

8.61 Night Island (13°10'S., 143°34'E.), about 14m high, lies 1.5

miles N of Binstead Islet and 3 miles E of Bobardt Point. The

island is fringed with a coral reef, which dries; the reef is steepto on its E and W sides, but depths of less than 9.1m extend 0.3

mile from the S extremity and 0.4 mile from the N extremity,

respectively. Tide rips occur over the latter depths, and also N

of them. A small coral reef, awash, lies 0.4 mile NW of the N

end of the island.

8.61 There is a clear passage, with depths of 7.3 to 11m, mud and

shell, between Night Island and the outer reefs off Bobardt

Point. There are no good marks and the passage should not be

used without local knowledge except at LW, when the edges of

the channel on both sides can be plainly seen.

8.61 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

11m, clay, in the N entrance to the channel. Tidal currents in

the channel are not strong. Anchorage Area NI lies 0.5 miles W

of the N most tip of Night Island. 

8.61 Caution.—The shore bank extends about 2 to 3.5 miles offshore between Night Island and Cape Direction. Because of a

strong W set of the current that may occur with strong E or SE

winds, vessels must guard against drifting W of the recommended track in this vicinity.

8.62 Waterwitch Reef (13°09'S., 143°37'E.) dries 1.2m; it

lies 2.5 miles NE of Night Island, and about 0.5 mile E of the

recommended track. A light is shown from the reef.

8.62 Sykes Reef, 4 miles NW of Waterwitch Reef, dries 0.3m.

8.62 Stork Reef, which dries 1.8m, lies 2 miles N of Sykes Reef.

The water is fouled by rocks 0.6 mile N of the reef and 0.4 mile

S., respectively.

8.62 Dugdale Rock, a coral pinnacle which dries at LW, lies on

the 20m curve, 2.2 miles NE of Stork Reef. This steep-to danger is located 0.9 mile W of the track through the Inner Route.

8.62 Chapman Islet (12°53'S., 143°36'E.), a sandy islet covered

with bushes and trees, lies on the NE end of a reef, 8.5 miles

NNE of Dugdale Rock. A light stands on the reef, 0.5 mile NW

of the islet. Current rips occur N of the light when the wind is

strong.

8.62 Ashton Rock, with a depth of 1.5m, lies 2 miles SW of

Chapman Islet. 

The Great Barrier Reef—Inner Edge—Iris Reef

to Wye Reef

8.63 The inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef trends about

70 miles NNW from Iris Reef to Wye Reef, about 4.2 miles NE

of Cape Direction. Vessels should keep W of a line connecting

the reefs and dangers described below, which mark the inner

edge of the Great Barrier Reef. Most of these dangers are

steep-to on their W sides and have depths of 14.9m or more

close off them.

8.63 Pelican Island (13°55'S., 143°50'E.) lies on the NW side of

a steep-to reef, which dries 0.9 to 1.2m, 2.5 miles N of Iris

Reef. Rocks, awash at HW, lie on the W side of the reef, S of

the island.

8.63 Magpie Reef, an extensive shoal, lies with its W extremity 8

miles NNW of Pelican Island. A light is situated on a sand cay,

on the W extremity of the reef. 

8.63 Ballerina Shoal, with a depth of 9.5m, lies 3 miles SSE of

Magpie Reef Light. Dayman Rock, steep-to, with a depth of

9.9m, lies 1.5 miles SW of Ballerina Shoal. Olver Rock, with a

depth of 7.1m, lies 1 mile SW of Dayman Rock. Yule Rock,

with a depth of 8.1m, lies 1 mile SE of Olver Rock.

8.63 Noddy Reef lies with its S extremity 4 miles NNE of the

light on Magpie Reef. Foul ground extends W from the SW extremity of the reef to the 10m line, 0.5 mile W. Fife Island, previously described in paragraph 8.61, lies 5.5 miles NNW of

Noddy Reef.

8.63 Ogilvie Reef lies with its W end 6 miles NNE of Fife Island

Light. The W part of the reef, which dries 0.6 to 0.9m, is the

only part which has been surveyed. A sand cay near the W end

of the reef dries 1.8m.

8.64 Morris Island (13°30'S., 143°43'E.) lies near the

middle of the W side of a reef which dries 1.8m, 3.7 miles N of

the W end of Ogilvie Reef. Claremont Rock, with a depth of

7.6m, lies 1 mile SW of Morris Island.

8.64 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 12.8 to 16.5m,

mud and sand, about 0.5 mile NNW of Morris Island, but care

must be taken to avoid Claremont Rock.

8.64 Blanchard Reef, which dries in patches, lies 3 miles NNE of

Morris Island. Shoal patches and foul ground, with depths of

less than 5m, lie within 0.5 mile of the W side of the island,

and dangers with depths of 1.2 to 8.2m lie within 1 mile of the

SW extremity of the same reef.

8.64 Drake Shoals (13°26'S., 143°42'E.) consists of a number of

coral heads, with depths of 6.4m, lying 1 mile W of the W extremity of Blanchard Reef.

8.64 Ellis Reef dries 1.5 to 2.4m; it lies 1.7 miles W of the N extremity of Blanchard Reef. The reef is steep-to on its W side. A

shoal, with a least depth of 7m, is charted 1.5 miles N of Ellis

Reef.

8.64 Celebration Reef (13°17'S., 143°42'E.), which dries 1.2m,
190 Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 

Pub. 127

lies 4 miles N of Ellis Reef. The SW side of the reef is steep-to,

but foul ground extends 0.5 mile off the N side. The Inner

Route lies 1.6 miles W of the reef.

8.64 Throne Shoals, a mass of detached reefs, lies between 1.5

and 4 miles N of Celebration Reef, on the S side of the SW end

of Second Three Mile Opening.

8.64 Gertrude Reef (13°10'S., 143°40'E.), which dries 0.6m, lies

on the N side of the SW entrance to Second Three Mile Opening, 2.7 miles N of Throne Shoals. Foul ground extends 0.4

mile NE and WSW, respectively, from the reef.

8.64 Glennie Reef, which dries 1.3m, lies 1.2 miles WNW of

Gertrude Reef. Foul ground, with a depth of 6.4m, extends 0.3

mile SW from the reef; depths of 10m extends 0.7 mile NW of

the same reef.

8.65 New Reef (13°06'S., 143°39'E.), which is about 2

miles long on its W side, lies 1.5 miles N of Glennie Reef. A

boulder, which dries 1.8m, lies at the S end of the reef. The W

side of the reef is encumbered with several small drying reefs.

A shoal patch, with a depth of 2.4m, is charted about 0.3 mile

off the NW end of the reef.

8.65 Morris Rock is a steep-to knoll with a depth of 10.6m, and

lies 1.2 miles NW of New Reef.

8.65 Osborne Reef (13°03'S., 143°38'E.), which dries 2.1m, lies

1.5 miles N of Morris Rock. A beacon stands on the S end of

the reef.

8.65 The Sherrard Islets (12°59'S., 143°37'E.) lie on the N end

of a reef, 3 miles N of the NW extremity of Osborne Reef. The

Inner Route passes about 1 mile W of the W islet. A 4.3m coral

patch lies 2 miles ESE of the E of the Sherrard Islets. A small

drying reef and an 8.2m patch lie 0.5 mile N of the 4.3m patch.

8.65 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in 24 to 26m, mud, 0.4

mile NW of the W Sherrard Islet. 

8.65 Frederick Patches, a number of shoal heads with a least

charted depth of 2.4m, lie 6 miles N of the Sherrard Islets.

Chapman Islet, previously described in paragraph 8.62, lies 1

mile W of the patches.

8.65 Sunk Reef lies 1 mile N of Frederick Patches; only its W side

has been surveyed. The W side of the reef is fringed by a narrow strip of drying sand. A depth of 4.2m is charted close off

the NW extremity of the reef.

8.65 Wye Reef (12°49'S., 143°37'E.) dries 1.5m. A lighted beacon is situated on the N end of the reef. Shoals, with depths of

less than 11m, extend 0.5 mile SE and 0.7 mile E, respectively,

from Wye Reef.

The Great Barrier Reef—Outer Edge—Lowry

Passage to Quoin Island Entrance

8.66 The outer edge of the Great Barrier Reef between

Rodda Reef (13°55'S., 144°21'E.), on the NW side of Lowry

Passage, and the entrance to First Three Mile Opening, 34

miles NW, is formed by a chain of drying reefs through which

there are a number of small openings.

8.66 A rock, which dries 2m, lies on a small reef 10 miles NNW

of Rodda Reef, and another rock, which dries 2.6m, lies on the

SW side of a reef 6.7 miles farther NW.

8.66 Creech Reef (13°38'S., 144°06'E.), 6.2 miles NW of the

rock above, which dries 2.6m, has a rock on its W extremity

which dries 3m. Annchorage Area CR is situated just W of the

westernmost tip of Creech Reef, in a depth of 23m. 

8.66 First Three Mile Opening (13°28'S., 144°01'E.) is entered

between a reef located 10 miles N of Creech Reef and a drying

reef, which has an above-water sand cay on its NW end, 4

miles WNW. Below-water rocks lie in the opening 1.7 miles

WNW of the reef on the S side of the opening. Depths of 9.1m

lie 0.4 mile SSE and 0.3 mile NNW, respectively, of the belowwater rocks. A charted depth of 7.2m lies on the N side of the

channel.

8.66 Fairway Channel, which has not been fully examined, extends SSE along the W side of the outer edge of the Great Barrier Reef, from First Three Mile Opening to the W extremity of

Rodda Reef, about 32 miles distant.

8.66 Tijou Reef (13°10'S., 143°57'E.), a long narrow drying reef,

lies with its S end 8 miles NNW of First Three Mile Opening;

its N end is 12 miles N and forms the E entrance point of Second Three Mile Opening. The outer side of Tijou Reef is dangerous to approach as the swell generally rolls in and breaks

heavily on it.

8.66 Black Rock, which is always above water, lies 1.5 miles SW

of the N extremity of Tijou Reef.

8.66 Second Three Mile Opening is entered at its NE end between

the N end of Tijou Reef and Ham Reef (13°02'S., 143°52'E.),

4.7 miles WNW. Franklin Reef, which dries 1.2m, lies in the

middle of the entrance.

8.66 Between Black Rock and Franklin Reef there is a small drying reef, and several shoals with depths of less than 5.5m.

8.66 Wilsen Shoal, with a depth of 2.3m, lies 0.5 mile S of Ham

Reef; a depth of 10.2m lies 0.5 mile SE of Wilsen Reef.

8.67 Jubilee Reef (13°10'S., 143°46'E.), which dries 0.3m,

lies on the S side of Second Three Mile Opening, 9 miles

WSW of Franklin Reef.

8.67 Dart Shoal, with a depth of 1.9m, lies in the middle of the

opening 2 miles NW of Jubilee Reef.

8.67 Diamond Reign Reefs are a continuation NE of Throne

Shoals. They consist of numerous detached reefs which have

some patches that dry 0.9m, and are joined to Jubilee Reef

ENE.

8.67 Colclough Reef (13°05'S., 143°44'E.), which dries 1.2m,

lies on the N side of Second Three Mile Opening, 7 miles

WSW of Ham Reef.

8.67 Gertrude Reef, previously described in paragraph 8.64, lies

on the N side of the opening, 5 miles SW of Colclough Reef.

8.67 The seaward entrance to Second Three Mile Opening, from

the N, is easily made out as Cape Direction is readily identified

from 5 miles outside the Great Barrier Reef. Hangklip Peak,

bearing 237°, is an excellent steering mark for clearing the

reefs in the entrance in a least depth of 10.2m, but Dart Shoal

lies on this same bearing farther SW.

Between Second Three Mile Opening and Quoin Island Entrance, 40 miles N, the outer edge of the Great Barrier Reef is

formed by a chain of narrow, drying reefs. 

8.67 Derry Reef (13°01'S., 143°51'E.), separated from Ham Reef

by a deep channel 0.5 mile wide, dries 1.2m. A sand cay lies on

its NW side. A sandbank lies at the NW extremity of the reef

that forms the S side of Bligh Boat Entrance, 10.5 miles N of

Derry Reef.

8.67 Bligh Boat Entrance lies between the sandbank and Bligh

Reef 0.2 mile N.
Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 191

Pub. 127

8.67 Hibernia Entrance is about 0.2 mile wide and lies 7.2 miles

N of Bligh Boat Entrance. Its seaward entrance lies 17 miles

ENE of Cape Direction.

8.68 Providential Channel (12°36'S., 143°49'E.) lies 7.2

miles N of Hibernia Entrance. A below-water rock lies nearly

in the middle of the entrance.

8.68 Southern Small Detached Reef, which breaks heavily, lies

2.5 miles NE of the entrance to Providential Channel.

8.68 Northern Small Detached Reef (12°25'S., 143°49'E.),

which also breaks heavily, lies 9 miles N of Southern Small

Detached Reef. The reef dries in patches.

8.68 Quoin Island Entrance lies 4 miles W of Northern Small Detached Reef and is entered between a drying reef on the S side

and Lagoon Reef on the N side; it is 0.4 mile wide, with depths

of 56 to 79m.

8.68 When approaching from seaward, it is best to identify Northern Small Detached Reef and pass N of it; the entrance will be

seen bearing 277° and vessels should steer a mid-channel

course to the clear water W of the reefs.

8.68 Vessels having cleared the entrance may proceed SW and

pass S of the small detached reef that lies 4 miles E of Eel

Reef, then WSW to pass midway between Eel Reef and Dolphin Reef, 1.7 miles S. When clear of Dolphin Reef, steer as

required to the Inner Route.

8.68 Caution.—The areas to the N and S of the line of soundings

from Quoin Island Entrance to Dolphin Reef have not been

thoroughly examined.

Cape Direction to Cape Grenville

8.69 The coast between Cape Direction and Cape Grenville, about 55 miles NNW, is indented by three bays which are

separated by prominent capes. Much of this coast consists of

sandy beaches and low mangrove shores, with an occasional

small river or creek flowing through them.

8.69 Tides—Currents.—The current has been found to set N

along the E side of Lansdown Reef during SE gales at a rate of

2 to 3 knots, but its normal rate during the Southeast Trades is

0.5 to 1.2 knots. North of Lansdown Reef, the current sets

more into Lloyd Bay.

8.69 In the vicinity of the Piper Islands, the surface current always

sets NW during the Southeast Trades when the wind is strong.

When the wind is light during the falling tide, the current may

sometimes cease or even flow SE.

8.69 During the Northwest Monsoon, the wind-driven current in

the vicinity of the Piper Islands sets mostly SE or with the

varying direction of wind. At springs, the flood current setting

NW usually predominates over the wind-driven current. At neaps, the SE set of the wind-driven current prevails and attains a

maximum rate of about 0.5 knot about the time of LW; the

minimum rate occurs about the time of HW.

8.69 Lloyd Bay is a deep indentation in the coast between Cape

Direction and Cape Weymouth, 15 miles NNW. Except for Edwards Shoals, all dangers in the bay are contained within to

10m line.

8.69 The S side of Lloyd Bay trends 11 miles W from Cape Direction to the head of the bay and consists mostly of a low

mangroved shore.

8.69 Orchid Point (12°51'S., 143°27'E.), which is bold, lies on

the S side of the bay, 5.5 miles W of Cape Direction. Orchid

Hill rises to a 123m summit about 0.7 miles S of the point.

8.69 The W side of Lloyd Bay trends about 15 miles NNE from

its head to Cape Weymouth and consists mostly of sandy

beaches. Several scattered hills, nearly 123m high, lie 0.5 to 2

miles inland in the S part of the W side. The N half of the W

shore is closely backed by sandhills and ridges, and attains a

height of 121m at Red Hill, 0.4 mile SW of Cape Griffith.

8.70 Cape Griffith (12°41'S., 143°25'E.), a bold rocky

headland, lies on the W side of Lloyd Bay, 12.5 miles NW of

Cape Direction; a rock, 2m high, lies less than 0.2 mile SE of

the cape.

8.70 Albatross Cove lies on the N side of Cape Griffith; a drying

sandbank, fringed with coral, extends nearly 0.5 mile from the

W side of the cove and continues NNE nearly to Cape Weymouth, 3.7 miles N of Cape Griffith.

8.70 Caution.—The dangers in the SE part of Lloyd Bay consist

of a number of steep-to reefs, which partly dry, and several

banks and rocks, whose positions may be seen on the chart.

8.70 Lansdown Reef (12°49'S., 143°33'E.), with a charted depth

of 1.8m, lies on the edge of the 10m curve, 2 miles NNW of

Cape Direction. A depth of 2.7m lies 1 mile NNW of Lansdown Reef; it is steep-to on its N and E sides. A 1.8m shoal lies

charted near the 10m curve, 1.5 miles NE of Cape Direction.

Tide rips occur close N of the 2.7m depth, N of Lansdown

Reef.

8.70 Hazelgrove Reefs, three detached reefs which dry 0.9m, lie

on the 10m curve, 5.5 miles NNW of Cape Direction.

8.70 Edwards Shoals consists of two patches 2 miles NE of Cape

Griffith. There is a depth of 1.5m over the S patch; the N patch

is awash.

8.71 Restoration Rock (12°37'S., 143°28'E.) lies 1.5

miles E of Cape Weymouth and is 33m high. The rock is steepto except on its N and NE sides, where foul ground extends a

short distance offshore. A light is shown from the summit of

the rock. Tide rips occur between 0.2 and 0.5 mile N of the

rock.

8.71 Cape Weymouth (12°37'S., 143°26'E.) is a prominent headland, with a double summit, 55m high. The land W of the cape

is low.

8.71 Weymouth Bay lies between Cape Weymouth and Fair Cape,

15.5 miles NW. Its S part is fringed by drying reefs for a distance of 9 miles NW of Cape Weymouth, then by a narrow drying sand bank about 2.7 miles N. The dangers fringing this part

of the coast are contained within the 5m curve which follows

the coastal trend from 0.2 to 1 mile offshore.

8.71 Aylen Hills, 119m high, rise 1.7 miles NW of Cape Weymouth. These hills appear as an island when seen from N or S.

8.71 Rocky Islet (12°35'S., 143°25'E.), 33m high, lies 2 miles

NW of Cape Weymouth. It is steep-to, but foul ground lies off

the SE side. There are tide rips N of the islet. 

8.71 Anchorage.—Portland Road lies in a small bight that indents the coast 0.5 mile W of Rocky Islet. During SE winds,

small vessels can take anchorage in the road 0.6 mile W of

Rocky Islet, in 8m, mud.

8.71 The flood current sets SW across the E end of Portland Road

at a rate of less than 1 knot, and the ebb, which is weak, sets in
192 Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 

Pub. 127

the opposite direction.

8.71 Round Back Hills rise from the coast, 2.5 miles W of Portland Road, to a height of 350m; when seen from a distance,

they appear as an island.

8.71 Kennedy Hill, 10 miles NNW of Round Back Hills, rises

abruptly from the coast to a height of 439m. Stanley Hill, 354m

high, rises 0.5 mile inland, 1.5 miles NNE of Kennedy Hill.

8.71 A shore bank, with depths of less than 0.3m, extends 1 mile

offshore, E of Stanley Hill.

8.71 Fair Cape (12°24'S., 143°16'E.), a rocky point, rises abruptly to a height of 148m and is closely backed by hills, 305m

high, that are a continuation N of the hills backing the W side

of Weymouth Bay.

8.71 Caution.—Most of the dangers between this part of the

coast and the inner edge of the barrier reef lie on the W side of

the Inner Route.

8.71 Middle Reef (12°31'S., 143°23'E.) is a narrow, coral ridge,

which dries 1.8m, lying 6 miles NNW of Cape Weymouth. A

depth of 4.9m is lies off the N end of the reef; the Inner Route

lies 1.2 miles E of the light on the S end of the reef.

8.71 Blue Bell Rocks consist of two pinnacles which lie 1 mile W

of Middle Reef. The N rock dries and the S has a depth of

2.1m.

8.71 Kemp Rocks (12°26'S., 143°22'E.) are two steep-to pinnacle

rocks, with a depth of 6.1m, that lie close inside the 20m curve,

4.5 miles NNW of Middle Reef.

8.72 From Fair Cape, the coast trends WNW about 11

miles, then 5 miles N to Bolt Head. Cape Grenville lies 19

miles NNE of Bolt Head. Temple Bay occupies the bight

formed between Fair Cape and Cape Grenville.

8.72 The dangers contained within the 10m curve, which lies up

to 5 miles off the SW extremity of Temple Bay, are charted and

are not discussed here.

8.72 Kangaroo Shoals extends 1 mile E of Fair Cape and terminates in a spit 2 miles N of the cape. There are patches on the

outer edge of the shoals with depths of 0.4 to 1.2m; the edge of

the bank is steep-to.

8.72 First Stony Point (12°23'S., 143°15'E.), with rocks which

dry 2.4m close off it, lies 2 miles NW of Fair Cape. Second

Stony Point and Mosquito Point lie 2.2 and 4.5 miles NW, respectively, of First Stony Point. Drying coral reefs and mud

flats fringe most of this section of coast to 0.5 mile offshore.

8.72 From Mosquito Point to the head of Temple Bay, 6 miles W,

the coast is low, with mangroves extending 3.5 miles inland,

and fronted by a mud bank 0.5 mile offshore.

8.72 From the head of Temple Bay, a sandy beach backed by low

land extends 5 miles N to Bolt Head (12°15'S., 143°06'E.), an

inconspicuous cliffy head that has a hill, 70m high, 0.8 mile W

of it.

8.72 A red cliff lies 2 miles N of Bolt Head; from the cliff the

coast trends about 16 miles NNE to Cape Grenville. A ridge of

low hills backs this shore to a position about 5 miles S of Cape

Grenville. From this position to the cape the shore is low and

swampy.

8.72 Caution.—Piper Reef (12°15'S., 143°14'E.) consists of two

reefs. The largest and farthest E of the two reefs lies 9.5 miles

NNW of Fair Cape; it dries 1.8m. A light is shown from the E

reef and the Inner Route passes 0.5 mile E of the light. 

8.72 The Piper Islands are four small islets located on Piper Reef.

Fisher Islet, the largest of the islets, is 14m high. It lies on the

reef, 0.7 mile SW of the light. Anchorage Area PIN is situated

just S of a line drawn between Baird and Farmer Islands. Anchorage Area PIS is situated 0.25 miles N of Farmer Island. 

8.72 Young Reef (12°08'S., 143°13'E.), which dries and is steepto, lies 8 miles NNW of the light on Piper Reef, and 1.2 miles

W of the recommended Inner Route. A beacon is situated on

the N extremity of the reef.

Cape Grenville (11°58'S., 143°14'E.) is described in paragraph 8.77.

The Great Barrier Reef—Inner Edge—Wye Reef

to Queue Reef

8.73 The inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef trends about

40 miles NNW from Wye Reef to the N end of Inset Reef. It

then trends N about 9 miles to Moody Reef, and then about 11

miles NE to Queue Reef, 7.5 miles NE of Cape Grenville. Vessels should keep W of a line connecting the following reefs,

which are the dangers on the inner edge of the Great Barrier

Reef.

8.73 Zenith Reef (12°46'S., 143°36'E.) dries 0.9m. A sand cay,

which dries 2.4m, lies on the N end of the reef. The reef lies

5.7 miles NE of Cape Direction. Halloran Rock, with a depth

of 14m, lies about 1.2 miles SSW of Zenith Reef and 1 mile

NNW of Wye Reef.

8.73 Ape Reef, parts of which dry 1.5m, lies 3.5 mile NNW of

Zenith Reef. Boulders, which dry, lie on the S end of the reef

and a sand cay, which dries, lies on the NW end.

8.73 Tannadice Rock (12°40'S., 143°31'E.), with a depth of

1.8m, and Tannadice Shoal, with a depth of 7.3m, lie 3.7 and

3.2 miles NW, respectively, of Ape Reef.

8.73 Burke Reef, an elongated U-shaped series of reefs, drying

between 0.6m and 0.9m, with many large drying boulders, lies

1.5 miles NE of Tannadice Rock. The shallow bay formed by

the E and W extremities of the reef has not been examined but

contains numerous isolated coral heads. Foul ground extends

nearly 0.5 mile N of the line joining the N ends of the reef.

There is a clear passage, about 1.2 miles wide, with depths of

33 to 38m, between Burke Reef and Curd Reef, allowing access to Quoin Island Entrance or Black Rock Entrance.

8.73 Caroline Rock (12°39'S., 143°32'E.), which dries 0.3m, is

the outermost of the foul ground which extends 0.5 mile W of

Burke Reef.

8.73 Curd Reef lies 2.2 miles NNW of Burke Reef, about 3.2

miles ENE of the light on Restoration Rock; it dries 0.9m. A

sand cay on the N extremity of the reef dries 2.7m. Curd Reef,

a series of drying reefs, extends 1.7 miles ESE from the sand

cay and then 1 mile E. Unexamined foul ground, about 2 miles

wide, extends 4.7 miles ENE from the same cay.

8.74 Dolphin Reef (12°34'S., 143°31'E.), a group of rocky

heads with a least depth of 0.1m, lies 1 mile N of Curd Reef.

Isolated shoals lie 4 miles ENE of the W extremity of the reef.

The channel between Dolphin Reef and Eel Reef, 2 miles N,

appears to be clear over a width of 1.5 miles. This passage is

the W entrance of Quoin Island Entrance.

8.74 Eel Reef (12°30'S., 143°26'E.) extends 11 miles NNW from

a position 2 miles N of Dolphin Reef. A light is situated near

the N extremity of the reef, about 5.5 miles ESE of Fair Cape.
Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 193

Pub. 127

The S edge of the reef has been examined only for a distance of

about 3.5 miles NE and appears to be steep-to. The SW edge of

the reef partly dries at springs but the reef is always visible

when the light is good.

8.74 Quoin Island, 18m high, lies on the unsurveyed part of the

barrier reef, 7 miles E of the light on the N end of Eel Reef.

8.74 Gallon Reef lies with its SW end 2 miles NE of Eel Reef

Light; the W side of the reef extends 9 miles NNW from this

position; parts of this reef dry.

8.74 The Forbes Islands lie about 3 miles NE of the center of the

W side of Gallon Reef. The islands, which are up to 88m high,

are prominent from the S and appear as several hummocks.

8.74 Hazel Reef (12°16'S., 143°18'E.), a steep-to reef which dries

1.5m, lies 2 miles SW of the NW end of Gallon Reef. The Inner Route lies 1 mile W of Hazel Reef.

8.74 Inset Reef (12°15'S., 143°16'E.), which shows a light, lies

0.7 mile NW of Hazel Reef. A group of rocks, which dry 2.4m,

lie on the S end of this steep-to reef, and a sand cay, which

dries 1.5m, lies on the N end. The Inner Route passes about

midway between Piper Reef and Inset Reef.

8.74 Kay Reef is a reef, which dries 1 to 2m, whose N extremity

lies 1 mile N of Inset Reef. Kay Islet, 1m high, is located on the

NW extremity of Kay Reef.

8.74 Laurel Reef, which dries and is steep-to, has a sand cay on

its NW end which dries 1.2m.

8.74 Moody Reef (12°05'S., 143°16'E.) lies about 0.7 mile N of

Laurel Reef and about 6 miles SSE of Cape Grenville. A sand

cay, which dries 1.7m, lies on the NW end of the reef. A light is

shown from the sand cay.

8.74 Haggerstone Island, 78m high, lies on the S end of a drying

reef, 3.2 miles NNE of the light on Moody Reef. Rocks, 2.8m

high, lie on the drying reef, about 1 mile N of Haggerstone Island.

8.74 Queue Reef (11°56'S., 143°22'E.), which dries 2.4m, lies 7

miles NNE of the N end of the reef on which Haggerstone Reef

lies. Foul ground extends 7 miles NE from Queue Reef along

the S side of Pollard Channel.

The Great Barrier Reef—Quoin Island Entrance

to Raine Island Entrance

8.75 The outer edge of the Great Barrier Reef trends NE

for 15 miles from Lagoon Reef, on the N side of Quoin Island

Entrance, to Black Rocks, which lie on the N extremity of an

extensive reef. Black Rocks marks the S entrance point to

Wreck Bay. The Great Barrier Reef, which forms the N entrance point of Wreck Bay, lies 6 miles NNE of Black Rocks.

From this point the Great Barrier Reef extends N about 27

miles to Raine Island Entrance. 

8.75 Yule Detached Reef and Great Detached Reef lie off the barrier reef, which is only about 1 mile wide in places. There are

several openings through the reef in this area.

8.75 Wreck Bay (12°08'S., 143°52'E.) is formed by a circular

bight in the outer edge of the Great Barrier Reef; it is entered

between Black Rocks (12°12'S., 143°55'E.) and the S extremity of a reef 6 miles NNE and extends 9.5 miles W. A broken

line of drying reefs forms the N and W sides of the bay, with

the S side consisting of isolated drying reefs and a number of

below-water patches There are general depths of 30 to 35m and

greater across the S part of the bay and off the reefs bordering

its W and N sides.

8.75 Black Rock Entrance is the farthest S of three passages

through the reef on the W side of Wreck Bay.

8.75 Directions for Black Rock Entrance.—Vessels should enter Wreck Bay on a W heading and, when Black Rocks bear

146°, 2 miles distant, steer 224°. When 2 miles NNW of Lagoon Reef, steer a course of 213° and follow the directions for

Quoin Island Entrance in paragraph 8.68. Vessels are cautioned

to keep a good lookout as there are several reefs and dangers in

this area.

8.75 Safe Entrance is a passage through the barrier reefs on the W

side of Wreck Bay, 8 miles W of Black Rocks. It leads to apparent deep water on the W side of the barrier. It should be noted that the waters between the inner and outer ranges of the

Great Barrier Reef have not been adequately surveyed and uncharted dangers may exist.

8.75 Nimrod Passage lies in the NW part of Wreck Bay, 10.5

miles NW of Black Rocks. This opening is about 0.3 mile

wide. 

8.75 Off the N entrance of Wreck Bay there is, at times, a heavy

confused swell.

8.75 From the reef forming the N side of Wreck Bay, the outer

edge of the barrier trends 3.5 miles N and then 3 miles NW to

Single Rock Entrance. 

8.75 Single Rock Entrance (12°01'S., 143°56'E.), a safe opening

0.3 mile wide, may be identified by a black rock on its SE side.

8.75 From the N side of the entrance to Single Rock Passage, a

chain of small reefs trends about 9 miles NW to Stead Passage.

8.75 Yule Detached Reef (11°58'S., 143°58'E.), which dries and

is steep-to, lies 3 miles NE of Single Rock Entrance.

8.75 Stead Passage is 0.3 mile wide and is difficult to make out, as

it lies at the head of a bight in the barrier reef.

8.75 For a distance of 3 miles N of Stead Passage, the barrier reef

is intersected by two or three narrow openings through Five

Reefs.

8.75 Between Five Reefs and Small Opening, 6 miles NNE, the

reefs are narrow and dry, with the sea nearly always breaking

over them.

8.75 Three Reefs, on the N side of Small Opening, dry, and a spit

with depths of less than 5.5m extends 0.2 mile N of them.

8.76 Great Detached Reef (11°45'S., 144°00'E.) lies with

its SW extremity 4.5 miles SE of Three Reefs. A detached drying reef lies close off its SW extremity. The W side of the reef,

for a distance of 6 miles N of the SW extremity, is formed by a

below-water reef, with a small drying reef on its N end. Elsewhere, the reef consists of a continuously drying reef. There

are several drying rocks on the E side of the reef. There are five

openings through the reef; two on the SW side, 2 miles E and

2.2 miles SE, respectively, of the SW extremity, which have not

been examined. There are two narrow safe channels on the N

side, the widest one being to the NW side of the reef.

8.76 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken within the NW entrance to Great Detached Reef, in depths of 33 to 37m, in the N

part.

8.76 Raine Island (11°36'S., 144°01'E.), 3m high, lies in the middle of the opening between Great Detached Reef and the projecting point of the Great Barrier Reef, 8 miles NE. A fringing

reef surrounds the island, except at its SE end where it extends

1.2 miles SE. A round stone tower stands on the E end of the
194 Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 

Pub. 127

island and is a good landmark.

8.76 Raine Island Entrance may be entered with local knowledge

by passing either N or S of Raine Island, however, the S side is

preferred. This entrance and Blackwood Channel, within the

barrier, are no longer used and only small vessels with local

knowledge should attempt them.

Cape Grenville to Cape York

8.77 Cape Grenville (11°58'S., 143°14'E.) is a peninsula

connected to the mainland by a low isthmus. The cape rises to a

height of 75m at the summit of Highgate Hill.

8.77 The Home Islands (11°59'S., 143°17'E.) are a group of seven islands which lie within 2.5 miles of Cape Grenville; each

island lies on a reef.

8.77 Clerke Island, the farthest E of the Home Islands, lies nearest

the recommended Inner Route. The island lies 2.5 miles E of

Cape Grenville on a drying reef which extends 0.5 mile N of

the island. A light is shown close off the SE extremity of the island.

8.77 The position of the other islands of the group may best be

seen on the chart.

8.77 Tidal currents set obliquely across the Inner Route between

the Home Islands and Haggerstone Island, 3 miles SSE.

The coast between Cape Grenville and Cape York, about 87

miles NNW, trends fairly regularly in that direction, except that

a large bight recedes 15 miles SW between Cape Grenville and

False Orford Ness, about 40 miles NNW. Most of the coast

consists of sandy beaches separated by rocky points. Except for

the SW sides of Shelburne Bay and Newcastle Bay, where low

mangrove shores are backed by low land, most of the coast is

closely backed by hills, ridges of hills, and sand hills that rise

abruptly from the sea to heights of 15 to 152m. A few rivers

and numerous small streams empty into the sea from this coast.

There are no towns or ports on this part of the coast.

8.77 Most of the dangers fringing the coast are contained within

the 10m curve, which follows the coastal trend about 0.5 to 2.7

miles offshore, except that it lies about 8 miles offshore at

Shelburne Bay, about 5.5 miles offshore at Bushy Islet, and

about 11.5 miles off the head of Newcastle Bay.

8.77 Caution.—Shelburne Bay and the waters immediately N of

it, as far as the Hannibal Islands, have not been completely surveyed inside a line from Round Point to the Bird Islands and

then to the Hannibal Islands. Vessels are advised to keep E of

the above limits.

8.78 Margaret Bay lies between a point 2 miles WNW of

Cape Grenville and Thorpe Point (11°55'S., 143°09'E.), 4.5

miles farther NW.

8.78 Sunday Island, 36m high, lies off the entrance off Margaret

Bay, 1.5 miles N of the E entrance point, and is reef-fringed on

its N and S side.

8.78 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor, in 12m, 1 mile W of Sunday Island.

8.78 Round Point, 3 miles NW of Thorpe Point, is the SE entrance point of Shelburne Bay. The 10m curve lies 1 mile N of

the point. A dangerous submerged rock lies about 0.7 mile NE

of the point.

8.78 Conical Hill, 69m high, rises 2 miles SE of Round Point.

8.78 Shelburne Bay indents the coast about 6 miles SW between

Round Point and the coast at Messum Hill, 86m high, about 17

miles NW.

8.78 The bay is only partly surveyed and vessels are advised to

keep outside the 20m curve.

8.78 Hunter Point (11°30'S., 142°50'E.), 14 miles N of Messum

Hill, rises to a height of 88m at the summit of Hunter Hill, 0.8

mile NW.

False Orford Ness, 13m high, is a hilly point 7 miles NNE of

Hunter Point. A reef extends about 0.3 mile E off the point.

8.78 Hunter Reefs lie just inside the 15m curve, 2.5 miles SE of

Hunter Point.

8.78 Between False Orford Ness and Sharp Point, about 27 miles

NNW, the coast consists of numerous small bights separated by

rocky points. This section of the coast is backed by a range of

mostly barren hills that rise abruptly from the sea. Much of the

N coast is cliffy. The 10m curve lies up to 5 miles offshore.

8.78 Orford Ness, a sandy point, lies 6 miles NNW of False Orford Ness. The coast between them is fronted by a shorebank,

with depths of less than 5.5m, that extends up to 1 mile offshore.

8.78 Orford Bay, a shallow exposed bay, is a small indentation on

the N side of Orford Ness.

8.79 Ussher Point (11°10'S., 142°48'E.) lies 8 miles N of

Orford Ness. Some well-defined red cliffs of moderate height

lie 0.5 mile S of the point. Left Hill, 115m high, rise 1.5 miles

SW of the same point.

8.79 Cliffs, flat-topped and reddish in color, rise abruptly from the

sea along most of the coast from Ussher Point to Shadwell

Point, 10 miles N.

8.79 Sharp Point (10°58'S., 142°43'E.), which rises sharply to

the 37m summit of Sharp Peak, lies 2.7 miles NNW of Shadwell Point.

8.79 Caution.—The coast from Orford Ness N should be approached with care, especially during the SE trades to which it

is exposed.

8.79 Turtle Head Island lies 0.7 mile NW of Sharp Point. The Escape River empties into the sea between Sharp Point and Turtle

Head Island. The river entrance is fronted by a bar with a least

charted depth of 1.8m, and lies up to 1.7 miles offshore

8.79 Newcastle Bay indents the coast 8.5 miles SW, between Turtle Head Island and Fly Point, 10 miles NNW. The bay is shallow and encumbered with numerous detached banks and

shoals, which may best be seen on the chart. These dangers are

contained within the 10m curve, including those extending SE

from Fly Point.

8.80 Fly Point (10°45'S., 142°36'E.), 6m high, is black and

rocky. There are some large anthills composed of red clay and

sand on the bare land within the point.

8.80 Between Fly Point and Cape York, about 6 miles NW, the

coast is indented by numerous small bights.

8.80 Albany Island, about 3 miles long, lies parallel to the coast

with its SE end 1 mile E of Fly Point. The island rises to a

height of 90m at its N end.

8.80 Albany Pass lies between the SW side of Albany Island and

the coast NW of Fly Point. The pass has depths of 11 to 26m,

but there is a shoal with a depth of 9.4m in the middle of the

channel, 0.6 mile S of the NW extremity of Albany Island. At
Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 195

Pub. 127

its NW end, the pass is obstructed by a bar, with depths of less

than 10m, which extends from Frederick Point to Eborac Island (10°41'S., 142°32'E.). The significant depth on this bar is

a 6.7m patch 0.5 mile NE of Ida Island. Vessels of more than

7m draft should not attempt to use this channel.

8.80 Cape York (10°41'S., 142°32'E.), the N extremity of Australia, lies on the W side of the N entrance of Adolphus Channel.

Mount Bremer, 113m high, is a prominent peaked summit located 0.7 mile SSE of the extremity of Cape York. Cape York

has been reported to give good radar returns up to 18 miles.

8.80 Eborac Island, 0.3 mile N of Cape York, is 34m high. A light

is shown from the summit of the island. York Island, close W

of Eborac Island, rises to a conspicuous peak, 84m high.

Off-lying Islands and Dangers

8.81 Paluma Shoal (11°55'S., 143°18'E.), a detached 4m

patch, lies 3.2 miles NNE of Clerke Island Light. It is located

about 1.5 miles E of the track through the Inner Route.

8.81 The Bird Islands lie on two drying reefs, which are always

visible, 6 miles N of Round Point. The N reef, which is nearest

to the Inner Route, lies on the edge of the 20m curve.

8.81 The Macarthur Islands, a number of small islands connected

by sand cays, lie 5.5 miles WNW of the Bird Islands.

8.81 The Hannibal Islands (11°35'S., 142°57'E.), consisting of

two low, wooded islands, are located on a steep-to reef, 8.5

miles NNW of thr Macarthur Islands. A light is shown from the

easternmost of the two islands. The track through the Inner

Route leads 0.7 mile NE of the light.

8.81 Pirie Islet, 11m high, lies on the E side of a reef, 2.5 miles

WNW of the light on the Hannibal Islands.

8.81 Pearn Rock (11°25'S., 142°56'E.), 10 miles N of the Hannibal Islands, has a charted depth of 3m. The rock is steep-to and

located 1.5 miles E of the Inner Route.

8.81 Halfway Islet lies on the NE side of a steep-to reef, 3 miles

NNE of Pearn Rock. The coral reef dries and is always visible.

8.82 The Cairncross Islets (11°15'S., 142°56'E.) are several wooded islets that lie on a drying reef, 8.5 miles NNW of

Halfway Islet. The W islet is 18m high and shows a light.

Bushy Islet, 5m high, lies 2.7 miles WSW of Cairncross Islets Light. The Inner Route passes about midway between

these two points.

8.82 Gilmour Bank lies 2 miles ESE of Ussher Point, and about

5.5 miles NNW of Bushy Islet. The reef, which dries 0.6m, is

difficult to see when it is covered.

8.82 Shortland Reef lies on the edge of the 20m curve, 15 miles

NNW of Gilmour Bank. The reef dries and is always visible.

8.82 Wyborn Reef (10°49'S., 142°45'E.), 3 miles N of Shortland

Reef, dries and is always visible. Shoal ground, with depths of

less than 10m, extends 1.5 miles NW from the reef. A 15.5m

shoal patch, lies on the recommended track, 2.7 miles NW of

the N end of Wyborn Reef. A light is shown on the E side of

the reef, 1.5 miles N of its S extremity.

The Great Barrier Reef—Inner Edge—Queue 

Reef to South Edge

8.83 The inner edge of the Great Barrier Reef trends about

30 miles NW from Queue Reef to Viking Reef and then about

20 miles NNW to the Cairncross Islets. It then trends 26 miles

N to an unnamed reef, which lies 8.7 miles E of Wyborn Reef,

and then 10 miles NW to South Ledge.

8.83 Vessels should keep SW and W of a line connecting the following reefs and islets which are dangers on the inner side of

the Great Barrier Reef. The S and W sides of these reefs are

steep-to.

Cockburn Reef (11°50'S., 143°19'E.) lies with its SW extremity 3.5 miles NW of Queue Reef. The reef extends 11

miles ENE and 8.5 miles NNW, respectively, from its SW extremity.

8.83 The Cockburn Islets are a group of islets that lie near the

middle of Cockburn Reef. Pig Islet, the farthest N of the group

is, 30m high.

8.83 Erlangen Patch, with a depth of 1.8m, and Cockburn Patch,

with a depth of 2.2m, lie 1.2 and 1.7 miles NW, respectively, of

Queue Reef.

8.83 Magra Islet lies on the N end of a reef, close off the W side

of Cockburn Reef.

8.83 Guthray Reef lies close off the W side of Cockburn Reef, 2.7

miles N of Magra Islet; the reef dries.

8.83 Chimmo Shoal (11°48'S., 143°15'E.), with a least depth of

1.4m, lies 1 mile W of Guthray Reef.

8.83 Fairway Reef, awash, lies 2.5 miles WNW of the N extremity of Cockburn Reef.

8.83 Thrush Reef (11°43'S., 143°11'E.) lies 2.5 miles NW of

Fairway Reef. Saunders Islet lies on the N end of this drying

reef.

8.84 Viking Reef (11°36'S., 143°00'E.), 11 miles NW of

Saunders Islet, dries and is always visible.

8.84 Wizard Reef, which dries and is always visible, lies 1 mile N

of Viking Reef.

8.84 Boydong Cays (11°28'S., 143°01'E.) consists of several islets and sand banks which lie between 1.2 and 5.5 miles NNE

of Viking Reef. Anchorage Area BC lies 0.5 miles N of Boydong Island. 

8.84 Pearn Rock, 7.2 miles NNW of Wizard Reef, and Halfway

Islet, 3.2 miles NE of Pearn Rock, have previously been described in paragraph 8.81.

8.84 The East Islets consists of Jardine Islet, 9 miles N of Wizard

Reef and Cholmondley Islet, 1.5 miles ENE of Jardine Islet.

Vessels are advised to keep W of Halfway Islet, which lies 3.5

miles E of Jardine Islet.

8.84 Douglas Islet lies on the NW end of a drying reef which is

usually visible. The islet lies 8.7 miles NNW of Jardine Islet;

there is a clump of prominent trees on the islet.

8.84 Milman Islet (11°10'S., 143°01'E.) lies on the NW end of a

reef which dries, 4.2 miles NNE of Douglas Islet.

8.84 A reef which dries 0.3m, lies 2.2 miles NNW of Milman Islet.

8.84 Sinclair Islet, 1.2m high, lies on the NW end of a drying reef,

3.5 miles N of Milman Island.

8.84 Arnold Islet (11°01'S., 142°59'E.), 4m high and wooded,

lies in the middle of a drying reef, which is always visible, 6.2

miles NNW of Sinclair Islet.

8.84 A reef (10°49'S., 142°55'E.), which dries 1.2m, lies 12.5

miles NNW of Arnold Islet; about 2.7 miles E of this reef is another reef with a small sand bank on its N end.

8.84 South Ledge (10°43'S., 142°44'E.) is an extensive reef that
196 Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 

Pub. 127

lies with its E end 9.7 miles WNW of the small reef above. Tetley Islet, 2.4m high, lies on the S side of the reef, 3 miles from

its E end.

8.84 Many reefs lie between South Ledge and the outer edge of

the barrier reefs, about 70 miles to the E. The area is unsurveyed and is considered dangerous to navigation.

The Great Barrier Reef—Raine Island Entrance

to Anchor Cay

8.85 From Raine Island Entrance, the barrier reef trends in

a general N direction about 136 miles to East Cay, then 5 miles

WNW to Anchor Cay. The reefs appear to be almost continuous, but they are broken with several passes through the reef.

8.85 From the N entrance point of Raine Island Entrance, the outer edge of the barrier reef trends about 7 miles NNW, terminating in a sandbank, 2m high. This sandbank (11°26'S.,

144°00'E.) forms the SE side of Pandora Entrance.

8.85 Pandora Entrance is about 2.2 miles wide and has depths of

20 to 73m. Several drying reefs extend across the channel from

the N side, 2 miles within the entrance. A clear passage, about

1 mile wide, leads through these reefs.

8.85 Between Pandora Entrance and Olinda Entrance, 12.5 miles

NNE, the outer edge of the barrier reef consists of a number of

detached reefs overlapping each other, and from the offing appear as a continuous line of reefs.

8.85 Olinda Entrance is 1 mile wide and is well-marked by the

continuous reef N of it, but it has not been examined and is not

recommended due to the shoals within the entrance.

8.85 Triangle Reef (10°45'S., 143°57'E.), so named from its

shape, lies 30 miles NNW of Olinda Entrance at the end of the

continuous reef.

8.85 Yule Entrance (10°23'S., 143°55'E.) lies 21 miles N of Triangle Reef. The intervening barrier reef is formed by a chain of

detached reefs, which, from the offing, appear as an unbroken

line.

8.85 Yule Entrance is about 1 mile wide and has a small reef,

which breaks, lying nearly in mid-channel. The entrance is

dangerous and is not recommended. The flood current at

springs has been known to attain a rate of 5 knots.

8.86 Flinders Entrance (9°38'S., 144°14'E.) lies between

the extremities of the reefs 46 miles NNE of Yule Entrance,

and detached drying reefs, 7.5 miles NNW, on the E end of

which is Don Cay. Foul ground extends 2.5 miles N from the S

entrance point, with depths of 3.7 to 5.5m extending 2.5 miles

farther. In 1973, a reef was reported 3.5 miles ENE of Don

Cay; there is an extensive shoal, with a depth of 9.1m, between

6 and 8.5 miles ENE of Don Cay. Other dangers may exist in

the entrance.

8.86 Flinders Entrance does not lead to any direct route through

Torres Strait and is only recommended as the best approach to

the Murray Islands.

8.86 The Murray Islands is a group of three islands located 4

miles within the barrier reef, and about 19 miles SSW of Don

Cay. 

8.86 Maer Island (9°55'S., 144°03'E.), the northernmost of the

group, is the largest and rises to a conical hill, 209m high, on

its SW side. The N and E sides of the island are fronted by

reefs between 0.5 and 0.7 mile wide. Detached below-water

patches and reefs lie W of the island.

8.86 Range beacons, in line bearing 145°, are situated on the NW

side of the island. There is a mission and refuge station situated

on the island.

8.86 Dowar Islet, 184m high, lies 1.5 miles SSW of Maer Island;

Wyer Islet lies 1.5 miles S of the same island. The islands are

conspicuous.

8.86 When entering Flinders Entrance care must be taken in

rounding the spit of foul ground extending N from the S entrance point, which is usually marked by tide rips. After rounding the spit, steer S and bring the summit of Maer Island to

bear 223°, avoiding the shoal patch near the middle of the

channel.

8.86 Close N of Maer Island, the tidal currents set E and W, and

attain a rate of 2 knots at springs.

8.86 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in 46m, sand

and shells, 1.5 miles N of Maer Island.

8.86 East Cay (9°24'S., 144°13'E.) and Anchor Cay, 3.5 miles

WNW, lie at the N extremity of the Great Barrier Reef. They

are separated from the detached reefs N of Don Cay by deep

channels 7 to 8.5 miles wide. A 3.7m shoal lies in the channel,

6 miles S of East Cay. There is a shoal, with a depth of 9.1m,

9.5 miles SE of East Cay and a 7.7m patch lies 4 miles ENE of

the cay. A shoal depth of 9m was reported 2 miles E of the SE

extremity of the cay.

Ashmore Reef—Portlock Reefs—Eastern Fields

8.87 Ashmore Reef (10°15'S., 144°25'E.), with its SW extremity located 21 miles E of Yule Entrance, is the farthest S of

a chain of reefs which lies nearly parallel with the Great Barrier Reef and extends about 65 miles NNE. A clear channel between 21 and 28 miles wide lies between this chain of reefs and

the outer edge of the barrier reef.

8.87 Ashmore Reef, an extensive reef which dries, extends 24

miles NNE from its S extremity.

8.87 Boot Reef, a drying reef, lies with its S extremity 10 miles E

of the N extremity of Ashmore Reef. It extends 8 miles N. A

drying reef about 0.7 mile wide lies 3 miles S of the S extremity of Boot Reef. A shoal, with a least depth of 2.4m, lies 5.2

miles S of the same point; in 1989, it was reported that a steep

5m swell ran over this shoal, although the sea at the time was

generally calm.

8.87 Pandora Passage is a deep clear opening, 13 miles wide between Boot Reef and the S end of Portlock Reefs.

Portlock Reefs (9°35'S., 144°50'E.) form the N part of the

chain of reefs extending NNE from Ashmore Reef. Portlock

Reefs extend 18 miles N from the N side of Pandora Passage to

Lagoon Reef. The sea breaks over all the reefs. The S reef in

the group dries and a reef lying 2 miles E of it also dries. Detached reefs lie 4.5 miles W of the N extremity of Portlock

Reefs.

8.87 Lagoon Reef, which dries, lies off the N end of Portlock

Reefs, with a below-water rocky bottom between them. In

1980, there was a stranded wreck on the reef which was radar

conspicuous.

8.87 Eastern Fields (10°07'S., 145°40'E.) is in extensive reef enclosing a lagoon. The reef lies about 100 miles E of Yule Entrance in the Great Barrier Reef.

8.87 Eastern Fields lies in the S approach to the Great Northeast
Sector 8. Australia—Cape Grafton to Cape York 197

Pub. 127

Channel and has an approximate diameter of 15 miles. All

sides of the roughly square-shaped reef are composed of drying

or below-water reefs.

8.87 A drying reef lies 4 miles WNW of the NW extremity of the

reef. Below-water reefs, largely unexamined, lie within 3 miles

W and SW, and 1.5 miles SSE, respectively, of the drying reef.

A drying reef lies 3 miles S of the S extremity of Eastern

Fields. Other dangers are charted in the vicinity.

Adolphus Channel

8.88 Adolphus Channel (10°40'S., 142°35'E.) is the principal passage from the Inner Route to Torres Strait, where it

joins Great North East Channel from the E and Prince of Wales

Channel from the W. The channel is free from dangers within a

distance of 0.7 mile on either side of the recommended track.

Quetta Rock, and a dangerous wreck and a below-water rock,

0.5 and 1 mile NW, respectively, of Quetta Rock, all lie within

0.7 mile of the track.

8.88 Tides—Currents.—In Adolphus Channel, the flood current

sets NW and the ebb current sets SE; both attain a rate of 2 to 4

knots at springs. Strong SE winds will increase the strength

and duration of the NW current and decrease the strength and

duration of SE current.

8.88 There are tide rips and eddies in many places in the channel

when the currents are at their strength, giving the appearance of

foul ground. There is a heavy confused sea off Albany Rock,

when the currents are running strongly.

8.88 The W current, setting toward Mount Adolphus Island from

seaward, meeting the NW current through Adolphus Channel,

causes heavy overfalls off the shoals and salient points. The

currents attain a considerable rate among the island groups at

springs.

8.89 Southwest side.—Albany Rock (10°43'S.,

142°38'E.), 0.8 mile NE of Albany Island, is 26m high and

shows a light. Mai Islet, 48m high, lies close SW of Albany

Rock; Pitt Rock lies close SW of Mai Islet. These three islets

are connected by foul ground and are closely fringed with reefs

that extend nearly 0.1 mile from them.

8.89 Foul ground, with a least depth of 7m, lies 0.4 mile to 1.2

miles SSE of Albany Rock.

8.89 A 6.1 to 11m shoal, with heavy tide rips over it, extends

about 1 mile NW from a position 0.3 mile N of Albany Rock.

8.89 Brush Islet, 21m high, lies 2 miles WNW of the light on Albany Rock. Tree Islet lies 0.1 mile N and Sana Rock, with a

depth of 0.9m, lies 0.3 mile NNE, respectively, from Brush Islet. A shore bank, with a least depth of 0.3m, extends 0.4 mile

E from Tree Islet. Heavy tide rips occur in the vicinity of Sana

Rock.

8.90 Northeast side.—Middle Brother (10°43'S.,

142°41'E.), 5.7m high, lies on the NW end of a drying reef,

which is always visible. South Brother, a rock which dries

2.4m, lies on the SE side of the same reef.

8.90 A narrow steep-to shoal, with a depth of 5.7m on its S extremity, extends 1.5 miles S from South Brother. The Inner

Route lies 0.6 mile SW of the above depth.

8.90 North Brother, 12m high, is a detached steep-to rock that lies

0.8 mile NW of Middle Brother. Although the rock is visible at

a distance of 6 to 8 miles, it is not always conspicuous.

8.90 The Mount Adolphus Islands are a group of high rugged islands, partially covered with stunted trees and scrub, which extend from Pinnacle Peak, 3 miles NNW of North Brother, to

Little Adolphus Island, 3.5 miles NNW.

8.90 Mount Adolphus Island (10°38'S., 142°39'E.), the largest

and farthest SE of the group, rises to a height of 150m at flattopped Mount Adolphus.

8.90 Blackwood Bay indents the W side of Mount Adolphus Island; there are depths of 5.5 to 9.1m in the central part of the

bay. Blackwood Bank, with a least depth of 2.1m, extends

about 1.5 miles NW across the entrance of the bay from a position 0.3 mile NW of the S entrance point. The entrance channels at each end have depths of 7.3 to 10.9m. 

8.90 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be taken in the central

part of Blackwood Bay, in 7.3 to 9.1m, mud.

8.90 Little Adolphus Island (10°36'S., 142°37'E.), 1.2 miles NW

of the N extremity of Mount Adolphus Island, is the farthest N

of the island group. A shore bank, with depths of less than

10.9m, extends about 1.2 miles SW from the island. 

8.90 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken between the abovementioned bank and Lacey Island, which lies 0.2 mile S of Little Adolphus Island, in 9.1 to 10.9m, about 0.3 mile off Lacey

Island.

8.90 Bungaree Shoals, three patches with depths of 9.1, 5.5, and

9.4m, lie 3.5 miles NNW, and 3.5 and 4.2 miles N, respectively, of Little Adolphus Island. These small patches are steep-to.

8.90 There are other islands and rocks in the Mount Adolphus Islands, which may best be seen on the chart.

8.91 Dangers in Adolphus Channel and the N approach.—Quetta Rock (10°40'S., 142°38'E.), a small dangerous patch with a depth of 3.2m, lies 1.2 miles SW of the S

extremity of Mount Adolphus Island. It is marked by tide rips;

tide rips also occur across the Inner Route between 0.7 and 1.5

miles S of Quetta Rock.

8.91 A dangerous wreck lies 0.4 mile NNW of Quetta Rock. A

below-water rock, with a depth of 7.2m, lies 1 mile NNW of

Quetta Rock.

8.91 Mid Rock (10°41'S., 142°36'E.), a shoal patch with a least

depth of 1.8m, lies on the W side of the Inner Route, 2 miles

WSW of Quetta Rock. Its position is usually marked by heavy

tide rips.

8.91 Alpha Rock (10°37'S., 142°31'E.), 18.3m high, lies 4.5

miles N of Cape York. It may be passed at a distance of 0.5

mile on either side and is a good mark when approaching Adolphus Channel.

8.91 Vessels proceeding through Adolphus Channel should follow the recommended track.
Pub. 127

9. Australia—Torres Strait and Great North East Channel

9.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 9 — CHART INFORMATION
201

Pub. 127

SECTOR 9 

AUSTRALIA—TORRES STRAIT AND GREAT NORTH EAST CHANNEL

9.0 Plan.—This sector describes Great North East Channel from

NE to SW. The various channels leading through Torres Strait

are then described from S to N. This is followed by a description of the islands and dangers in the N part of Torres Strait and

by a description of the dangers in the W approach to Torres

Strait.

General Remarks

9.1 Torres Strait lies between the N coast of the Cape

York Peninsula and the S coast of Papua New Guinea; it connects the Coral Sea with the Arafura Sea. The E limit of the

strait is approximately a line joining Cape York and Dauan Island, about 75 miles N. Dauan Island lies about 5 miles off the

coast of Papua New Guinea. The W limit of the strait may be

considered to lie between a point on the coast of Australia,

about 30 miles SW of Cape York, and the mouth of the Bensbach River (9°07'S., 141°02'E.), about 127 miles NNW. The

coast and dangers between the Bensbach River and Dauan Island are described in Pub. 164, Sailing Directions (Enroute)

New Guinea.

9.1 The best and most commonly-used route through Torres

Strait is through Prince of Wales Channel.

9.1 To the N of Jervis Island, 49 miles NNW of Cape York,

Torres Strait is shallow and reef-strewn. There is no known

route through this area for other than small craft with local

knowledge.

9.1 Great Northeast Channel extends about 100 miles SW from

Bramble Cay (9°09'S., 143°53'E.), its NE entrance, to Harvey

Rocks (10°19'S., 142°41'E.). This channel connects the Gulf of

Papua and the Coral Sea with the various channels leading

through Torres Strait and is comparatively free of dangers.

Winds—Weather

9.2 In the E approach to Torres Strait, the Southeast

Trades begin in April, with squalls and rainy weather at first,

but in a week or 10 days the weather becomes more settled.

These trades are strongest from May until August, with steady

winds from the SSE to ESE. The wind is generally fresh and

steady when the moon quarters and unsettled at the time of full

and change. These trades continue until the first or second

week in November, when the wind becomes more regular,

stronger, and from the E, after which there are variable winds

and calms until the latter part of November, and sometimes the

beginning of December.

9.2 In Torres Strait, the Southeast Trades have been observed to

generally be lighter at night than by day. These trades have

been observed to be stronger with a high barometer than on

other occasions, being then accompanied by a thick haze. Little

rain is experienced, and the sky is rarely overcast during this

period.

9.2 The Northwest Monsoon, which commences in December,

may be expected to have strength and some regularity toward

the end of that month. During the months of January and February, the winds are strongest, but decline in strength toward

the end of February until the beginning of March, when they

become variable with cloudy and unsettled weather. The

Northwest Monsoon season is the rainy season; violent thunder

and lightning storms sometimes occur.

9.2 Apart from brief squalls, gales do not occur on an average of

more than 1 day a year in this area and are generally associated

with tropical storms.

9.2 On the S coast of New Guinea, both land and sea breezes are

often the only winds during the transitional periods between

the season of the Southeast Trades and that of the Northwest

Monsoon.

Tides—Currents

9.3 The restricted channels of Torres Strait connect two

areas in which the tides differ greatly. Marked contrast occurs

between the semidiurnal components of the tide in either entrance. During some phases of the moon, it is HW in one entrance at the same time that it is LW in the other entrance. In

consequence, great differences in the levels of the two entrances occur, and the tidal currents through the channels flow from

the high level to the low level.

9.3 The tides at either end of the strait do not differ greatly in

their diurnal component, therefore there are no marked differences in the water levels at either entrance, and high water due

to this component is more or less uniform.

9.3 The tidal rise at Booby Island (10°36'S., 141°55'E.), just S

of Gannet Passage, is as follows: HWS 4m; HWN 3m; LWN

2.1m; LLWS -0.2m. The HHW and the LLW only occur during

certain times of the year so that for the most part, the tides

range between 0.9 and 3.4m above datum.

9.3 High water springs at Twin Island is 2.7m; LWS is 0.4m.

9.3 Automatic telemetric tide gauges have been established at

Booby Island, Goods Island, Turtle Head and Ince Point. Automatic tide gauges broadcast on VHF channel 68 from a station

on Hammond Island. Tidal heights are also available from a

telephone answering service 7-4069-2821. 

9.3 The tidal currents, in contrast with the tides, which have a

relatively large diurnal component, are predominantly semi-diurnal. East of and in the channels in the S part of Torres Strait,

the tidal currents are mainly semidiurnal, but with appreciable

diurnal inequality; diurnal inequality increases from E to W.

West of the channels, diurnal inequality continues to increase,

and at Proudfoot Shoal (10°32'S., 141°28'E.) the tidal currents

are mainly diurnal and rotary.

9.3 The tidal currents in the channels through the S part of

Torres Strait do not depend on, and cannot be referred to, the

local tide. They may, however, be referred very approximately

to the tide at Brisbane Bar. As a rule, the tidal currents set E

while the tide is rising at Brisbane Bar, and W while the tide is

falling.

9.3 The tidal currents turn almost simultaneously in all the chan-
202 Sector 9. Australia—Torres Strait and Great North East Channel 

Pub. 127

nels and in the vicinity E of the channels. West of the channels,

the times become progressively earlier; near Proudfoot Shoal

tides are about 4 hours earlier.

9.3 The direction of the tidal currents in the channels conform to

the direction of the channels. Thus, the tidal currents which

flow E and W in Prince of Wales Channel and in the W entrance of Endeavour Strait, flow N and S, respectively, in the E

entrance of Endeavour Strait between Entrance Island and

Woody Island.

9.3 The rates of the tidal currents are greatest in the most restricted channels and in the narrowest part of these channels.

The rates predicted for Prince of Wales Channel can be regarded as about the greatest likely to be experienced in any channel

normally used for navigation. The rates vary greatly with astronomical conditions.

9.3 Diurnal inequality is great. The weak E tidal current runs

while the tide at Brisbane Bar is rising to LHW, and the strong

W current runs while the tide at Brisbane Bar is falling from

LHW. The strong E current runs during the rise to HHW at

Brisbane Bar, and the weak W current runs during the fall from

HHW at Brisbane Bar.

9.3 When the moon is in high declination near springs, the

strong E and W tidal currents may run at a considerable rate.

When the moon is near the Equator at neaps, the rate is inappreciable.

9.3 The horizontal movement of the water in the channel of

Torres Strait is the combined effect of the current and the tidal

current. When both are strong and setting in the same direction,

their combined rate may be great. Under such conditions, a resultant current of 8 knots has been reported in Normanby

Sound. Under similar conditions, but with the current setting

against the tidal current, there would be little or no horizontal

movement of the water. When the tidal current is weak, but the

current strong, movement may be in one direction continuously

for several days. When the current is weak and the tidal current

strong, regular alternating W and E horizontal movements of

the water may be experienced.

9.3 The currents in the various channels of Torres Strait depend

to a great extent on the direction and strength of the wind. During the period of the Southeast Trades, from March to November, the current sets continuously W. In January and February,

during the period of the Northwest Monsoon, the set through

the strait is E. December may be considered as a transition

month, but E sets can usually be expected during the latter part

of the month. During and after long continuous, high velocity

winds in an almost constant direction, the rate of the current

may be considerable.

9.3 The currents off the SE side of Papua are irregular and little

is known about them, except that they are greatly influenced by

the direction and force of the wind.

9.3 The currents found in Great North East Channel are described with that channel.

Pilotage

9.4 Pilotage is compulsory for vessels 70m in length or

longer and for all laden oil tankers, chemical carriers, and LNG

carriers when navigating through the Inner Route of the Great

Barrier Reef between Cape York (latitude 10°41'S.) and Cairns

Roads (latitude 16°40'S.), or when passing through Hydrographer’s Passage. For more information,see paragraph 7.2 under

the heading “Navigation in the Great Barrier Reef.”

9.4 Vessels with a maximum draft of 12.2m can obtain pilotage

through Gannett Passage, Varzin Passage, and Prince of Wales

Channel.

9.4 Vessels 100m in length or larger and all laden oil tankers,

chemical carriers, and LNG carriers are advised to carry a pilot

when navigating in Torres Strait and the Great North East

Channel between Booby Island (10°36'S., 141°55'E.) and

Bramble Cay (9°09'S., 143°53'E.).

9.4 Pilots are available from Australian Reef Pilots Limited (call

sign Reef Pilots) and Torres Pilots (call sign Torres Pilots).

Both companies maintain comprehensive websites with boarding ground locations.

9.4 Pilots board in the following positions:

1. Eastbound vessels with a draft of 8m or greater

board off Booby Island (10°36.3'S., 141°49.8'E.).

2. Eastbound vessels with a draft of less than 8m board

off Goods Island (10°33.9'S., 142°04.4'E.).

3. Westbound vessels board off Dalrymple Island

(9°34'S., 143°24.5'E.).

9.4 E bound vessels with a draft less than 8m can also request a

pilot at the Booby Island station if so desired. 

9.4 Southbound and Eastbound Vessels.—Vessels requiring

pilotage should give 4 to 5 days notice advising the ETA at the

pilot boarding place, maximum draft, and destination.

9.4 Confirmation or adjustment of the ETA should be sent 24

hours and 6 hours prior to arrival. Contact the respective pilot

station 2 hours before arrival, as follows:

1. Torres Pilots—VHF channel 79. 

2. Reef Pilots—VHF channel 20. 

9.4 Northbound and Westbound Vessels.—If in an Australian

port, advise pilots of pilotage requirements, giving as much notice as possible.

9.4 If coming from an overseas port, advise pilots 4 to 5 days in

advance of pilotage requirements, stating ETA (name of boarding place), maximum draft, and destination. For more information, see paragraph 7.2 under the heading “Navigation in the

Great Barrier Reef.”

9.4 Hydrographer’s Passage.—Requests for pilotage should be

sent 4 to 5 days in advance stating ETA at Blossom Bank and a

confirmation of suitability for land-on helicopter transfer. Vessels must confirm or amend the ETA to the pilotage association

at Mackay 48 hours, 24 hours, and 6 hours before arrival at

Blossom Bank.

9.4 Grafton Passage and Palm Passage.—Requests for pilotage should be sent 4 to 5 days in advance stating ETA at Euston

or Pith Reefs and with a confirmation of suitability for land-on

helicopter transfer at Pith Reef.

9.4 Great North East Channel.—Requests for pilotage should

be sent 4 to 5 days in advance stating ETA and pilot boarding

Australian Reef Pilots

http://www.reefpilots.com.au

Torres Pilots

http://www.torrespilots.com.au
Sector 9. Australia—Torres Strait and Great North East Channel 203

Pub. 127

position, maximum draft, and destination. For more information, see paragraph 7.2 under the heading “Navigation in the

Great Barrier Reef.”

9.4 Note.—Boardings and landings are by launch with the exception of Hydrographer’s Passage and Edward Island Palm

Passage, where only a land-on helicopter can be utilized. Landon helicopters are available at other boarding places by arrangement, depending on aircraft availability and suitability of

the vessel to accept a land-on helicopter. Vessels requiring pilot

boarding by helicopter should request this service when ordering a pilot. Winch-down operations will be introduced when

suitable aircraft are available. As a guide, a clear space of 21m

is the minimum required for land-on helicopter operations.

Some helicopters, however, require larger areas.

9.4 The maximum draft of a vessel transiting the Inner Route

and Torres Strait, taking advantage of the tidal rise, is 12.2m.

The pilotage service requires that vessels maintain an underkeel clearance of 1m in Gannet Passage and Varzin Passage. In

Prince of Wales Channel, vessels with a draft of 11.9m or less

must maintain an underkeel clearance of 1m, while vessels

over 11.9m in draft must maintain an underkeel clearance

equal to 10 per cent of the vessel’s draft at all times.

9.4 Vessels entering or leaving the Inner Route by way of

Grafton Passage, Palm Passage, and Hydrographer’s Passage

are restricted only by any draft limitation at the Australian port

of arrival or departure.

9.4 Vessels are requested to maintain an International Radio

Watch, as well as a watch on VHF channel 16, while in any of

the pilotage waters mentioned above.

9.4 Regulations.—A protective zone had been established in the

Torres Strait to protect the traditional activities of the inhabitants. Fishing by vessels of all nationalities in the zone is regulated by Australia and Papua New Guinea in accordance with

an agreement between them.

9.4 For information regarding the mandatory ship reporting systems and vessel traffic service which cover the Torres Strait region and the Inner Route of the Great Barrier Reef, see

paragraph 7.2.

The Inner Route

9.5 The Inner Route is an intricate well-surveyed channel

inside the Great Barrier Reef that may be termed one of the

great trade highways of the world. The channel extends from

Gannet Passage in Torres Strait, E of Cape York via Adolphus

Channel, and along the Queensland coast to Capricorn Channel. The Inner Route is also accessible from the Coral Sea via

the several passes and openings through the Great Barrier Reef.

9.5 This channel, which is charted as a Two-Way Route, has

been established by local authority, and is not mandatory. It is

meant to indicate the best routes for moderate draft vessels (up

to 9m). Traffic is free to move in both directions along its

length. Caution should be taken while navigating along the

route, taking into account the nature of the waterway, and the

fact that vessels constrained by draft may be met in certain areas. Vessels should also note that the International Regulations

for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972 (72 COLREGS) apply

equally to vessels sailing within or outside of the charted route.

9.5 In accordance with the International Convention for the

Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 (SOLAS, 1974) all vessels should

maintain a watch on VHF channel 16 while sailing along or

near the route.

9.5 Pilotage for the fairway is available from the Queensland

Coast and Torres Strait Pilotage Service (Torres Sydney) by

prior arrangement. Detailed information on pilotage, physical

features, navigational hazards, etc. can be had in the sector pertaining to that area, and on the appropriate chart.

Great North East Channel

9.6 Great North East Channel, which is deep and comparatively free of sunken dangers in the fairway, is the most widely-used channel in approaching Torres Strait from the E.

9.6 There are two entrances leading into Great North East Channel, namely, Bligh Entrance and an entrance N and W of Bramble Cay. Bligh Entrance is the better of the two and lies

between Bramble Cay and Anchor Cay, 19 miles SE. A new

Two-Way Route for medium-draft vessels, which is not mandatory but indicates the best and safest route, has been established

(2004) in Great North East Channel and can best be seen on the

chart.

9.6 Tides—Currents.—A W set has been experienced in Great

North East Channel from Bramble Cay (9°09'S., 143°53'E.) to

Coconut Island (10°03'S., 143°04'E.), with a rate of about 3

knots. A similar set at the same rate has been experienced N of

the Three Sisters Islets (10°12'S., 142°49'E.). It is reported

that during the period of the Southeast Trades, an abnormal

current sets NW across the channel at a rate of about 5 knots.

9.6 The tidal currents in Great North East Channel are governed

by the direction, and their rate by the narrowness of the passages through which they set.

9.6 In the vicinity of Bramble Cay and in the S part of Bligh Entrance, the tidal currents set E and W. However, because of the

proximity of the mouth of the Fly River, about 25 miles NW,

the tidal currents in this area are strong and irregular, especially

during the season of the Northwest Monsoon (rainy season)

and at the change of seasons.

9.6 During the season of the Southeast Trades, the W tidal current is accelerated by the current and is reported to then set toward Bramble Cay. Because of this, several vessels have

shipwrecked on Bramble Cay.

9.6 In the fairway of Great North East Channel, between

Stephens Islet (9°30'S., 143°33'E.) and Dungeness Reef, about

40 miles SW, the tidal currents are diverted into NE and SW

sets by the extensive Warrior Reefs which form the NW side of

the channel. The SW tidal current runs about 2 hours after HW.

In this part of the channel a rate of 1.5 to 2 knots is experienced

at springs.

9.6 Between Saddle Island (10°10'S., 142°41'E.) and Mount

Adolphus, about 28 miles S, the tidal currents attain a rate of

1.5 knots.

9.6 Bligh Entrance (9°15'S., 143°55'E.) lies between Anchor

Cay, the N extremity of the Great Barrier Reef, and Bramble

Cay. The entrance is clear of dangers and has depths of 35 to

66m, sand and shells, and 4 miles S of Bramble Cay there is

yellow clay.

9.7 Dangers on the S side of Bligh Entrance.—Anchor

Cay (9°22'S., 144°07'E.) lies on the NW side of a small reef

which forms the N termination of the Great Barrier Reef. The
204 Sector 9. Australia—Torres Strait and Great North East Channel 

Pub. 127

N side of this reef forms the S side of the outer part of Bligh

Entrance.

9.7 Vessels using this entrance should keep N of a line joining

the below described dangers.

9.7 Laxton Reef (9°24'S., 143°49'E.) is a drying reef. Drying

reefs lie about 2 miles NE and 6 miles NW of Laxton Reef, a

dangerous rock lies about 3.5 miles NNE of Laxton Reef.

9.7 Darnley Island (9°35'S., 143°46'E.) lies 7.5 miles S of

Brown Reef. The island rises to a height of 181m and, in clear

weather, may be seen from a distance of 25 to 30 miles from

seaward. A coral reef, approximately 0.5 mile in diameter, lies

3.2 miles W of Darnley Island.

9.7 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken in Treacherous Bay,

on the N side of the island, in 26 to 27m, about 0.5 mile offshore. The anchorage is protected from SE winds.

9.7 Nepean Islet, 19m high, lies near the center of a reef, 6 miles

WNW of Darnley Island. A depth of 6.7m lies 3.7 miles NNE

of the islet.

9.8 Dangers on the N side of Bligh Entrance.—Bramble Cay (9°09'S., 143°53'E.), 3m high, serves as a good mark

for vessels making Bligh Entrance from the E. The cay is surrounded by a reef which partly dries. Black Rocks, 1m high, lie

3 miles SW of Bramble Cay Light; a racon transmits from the

tower. 

9.8 Anchorage.—Temporary anchorage, in 37m, may be taken

in the lee of Bramble Cay.

9.8 A shoal, with a depth of 7.3m, was reported to lie in position

9°00'S., 145°10'E, 77 miles ENE of Bramble Cay.

9.8 The entrance to Great North East Channel, N and W of

Bramble Cay, lies between Bramble Cay and Parama Island

and Bristow Island off the coast of Papua New Guinea. It

should be borne in mind that the coast of Papua is low and is

not visible more than 10 miles offshore, except for the trees on

the islands. 

9.8 The entrance is nearly 14 miles wide NW and SE between

Bramble Cay and the shoals off the coast of Papua. When using

this entrance, keep as near Bramble Cay as convenient. This

entrance connects with Bligh Entrance SW of Bramble Cay.

9.9 Great North East Channel—Stephens Islet to Coconut Island.—From a position 3.2 miles S of Bramble Cay,

the track extends about 42 miles SW to Dalrymple Islet. From

this position the fairway trends SSW for 30 miles to a position

1.2 miles WNW of Coconut Island. The extensive Warrior

Reefs and Dungeness Reef form the NW side of the channel.

9.9 Tides—Currents.—A W set, with a rate of 3 knots, has

been experienced in Great North East Channel between Bramble Cay and Coconut Island, and Bet Island, the N of the Three

Sisters.

9.9 In approximately mid-channel between Stephens Islet and

Dungeness Reef, Warrior Reefs divert the tidal currents into

NE and SW. The latter current runs for approximately 2 hours

after HW. In this part of the channel, a rate of 1.5 to 2 knots

may be allowed for at springs.

9.9 Stephens Islet (9°30'S., 143°33'E.) lies on the S side of the

recommended track, about 7 miles NW of Nepean Islet. The islet is 38m high and lies on the N side of a drying reef. A village

and mission are situated on the NE side of the islet.

9.9 A conspicuous church, which can only be seen from N,

stands on the N side of the inlet. In 1981, a depth of 6m, with a

shoal area extending 0.5 mile NE from it, was reported to lie

4.5 miles ENE of Stephens Islet.

9.9 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained during SE winds

off the NW side of the reef on which Stephens Islet lies.

9.9 Campbell Islet, 15m high, lies 4.5 miles SW of Stephens Islet, in the middle of a drying reef. A spit, with depths of less

than 5.5m, extends 0.7 mile N from the reef. A depth of 15m

was reported 4 miles E of Campbell Islet.

9.9 A sand cay, 1.2m high, lies on a drying reef on the N side of

the channel, 14 miles NW of Stephens Islet. A similar cay and

reef lie 1.5 miles farther NW.

9.10 Pearce Cay (9°31'S., 143°17'E.), 0.3m high, lies on

the NW side of Great North East Channel, 15 miles W of

Stephens Islet. The channel between the cay and Warrior Reefs

is 3 miles wide.

9.10 Dalrymple Islet (9°37'S., 143°18'E.) lies on the W end of a

drying reef, 5.5 miles S of Pearce Cay.

9.10 A 14.3m patch lies 2 miles WSW of Dalrymple Islet Light,

on the W side of the recommended track.

9.10 Marsden Islet, 15m high, lies on the W side of a drying reef,

6.7 miles SSE of Dalrymple Islet. Keats Islet lies on a reef 4

miles ENE of Marsden Islet.

9.10 The Yorke Islands, 4 miles S of Keats Islet, is comprised of

two islands. Massig Island, the largest of the two, lies on the W

end of a reef; Kodall Island lies on the NE end of the reef, 1.2

miles E of Massig. 

9.10 A village, with a flagstaff, lies on the N side of Massig; a radio mast, 100m high, stands near the center; and an airfield is

situated at the W end of the island. A shoal, with a depth of 1m,

was reported to extend 2 miles NE from a position 1 mile NE

of the NW extremity of Massig Island.

9.10 Smith Cay, 0.3m high, lies on a small drying reef, 4.5 miles

WSW of Massig Island.

9.10 Rennel Island (9°46'S., 143°16'E.), 22m high, lies on a drying reef 6 miles SW of Marsden Islet.

9.11 Warrior Reefs (9°14'S., 143°12'E.) lie with their N

extremity about 26 miles NW of Stephens Islet. Warrior Reefs

are formed by three large reefs that extend 38 miles SSW from

their N extremity and form the NW side of this part of Great

North East Channel. During the Southeast Trades, the E side of

the reefs break heavily. The area N and NW of the reefs to the

Papua coast is unsurveyed.

9.11 Tudu Island (9°48'S., 142°58'E.) lies close off the SW extremity of Warrior Reefs. It is located near the center of a reef

which is 3 miles long in a NNW and SSE direction.

9.11 Dungeness Reef, which dries in places, lies with its N edge

3.2 miles S of Tudu Island, and extends 8.5 miles S. The SE

side of the reef is generally well-defined.

9.11 Basilisk Passage, between the S end of Warrior Reefs and

Dungeness Reef, is 1.5 miles wide. The passage is deep and

clear of dangers, except for a reef which dries 2.7m, which lies

in the fairway of the W entrance, 2.5 miles W of Tudu Island.

9.11 Tides—Currents.—The tidal E current through Basilisk

Passage attains a rate of 5 knots at springs. The Southeast

Trade winds against this current raise a confused sea. The NW

current does not run so strongly.

9.11 Zagai Island, 3.2 miles SW of Tudu Island, forms part of the
Sector 9. Australia—Torres Strait and Great North East Channel 205

Pub. 127

S side of Basilisk Passage.

9.11 Jacobus West Shoal (9°53'S., 143°04'E.) lies in the E entrance to Basilisk Passage, with a least depth of 2.8m lying

about 3.4 miles ESE of the N extremity of Dungeness Reef. A

3.3m patch lies 1 mile WSW of Jacobus West Shoal.

9.11 Dove Islet (10°00'S., 143°02'E.) lies on the NW end of a

drying reef, 6.5 miles SSW of Jacobus West Shoal. An area of

bright green water, which should be avoided, lies 2 miles NE of

the islet. A light stands on the E end of the reef extending from

the islet. The recommended track passes about 1.2 miles E of

the light.

9.11 Arden Islet (9°52'S., 143°10'E.) lies on the E side of the

Great North East Channel, about 8 miles SW of Rennel Island.

A depth of 14.3m is charted on the W side of the channel, 2.7

miles WNW of Arden Islet. A light is shown from the W extremity of Arden Islet.

9.11 A sand cay, which dries 1.5m, is located on the NW side of a

small reef, 2.7 miles SE of Arden Islet.

9.11 Roberts Islet (9°59'S., 143°07'E.), 15m high and wooded,

lies on the NW side of a drying reef, 7.2 miles SSW of Arden

Islet. The recommended track passes about 2 miles NW of the

islet.

9.11 Coconut Island (10°03'S., 143°04'E.) lies on the NW side of

a reef, 4.2 miles SW of Roberts Islet. The reef extends 0.6 mile

W of the island. The recommended track passes 0.8 mile W of

the reef.

9.12 Coconut Island to East Strait Island.—From a position 1.2 miles NW of Coconut Island, the fairway of this part of

the Great North East Channel trends in a general SW direction

for about 12 miles to a position about 2 miles SSE of Bet Reef

Light. The fairway then trends in a general WNW direction for

10 miles to a position about 3.2 miles SW of Bet Islet. From

this position the channel trends in a SSW direction for about 10

miles to a position 2 miles SE of Harvey Rocks, then WSW

17.5 miles to East Strait Island.

9.12 An alternative preferred route, best seen on the chart, continues SW, beyond Vigilant Channel, for about 8 miles, then

heads more WSW between Ackers Shoal (10°18.5'S.,

142°48.8'E.) and Kirkcaldie Reef (10°20'S., 142°50'E.),

which is marked with a racon. The route continues 22 miles towards East Strait Island.

Richardson Reef (10°07'S., 143°03'E.), with a sand cay

1.8m high on its NW side, lies 4.2 miles SSW of Coconut Island.

9.12 Walker Shoal has a depth of 5.2m. The shoal lies on the W

side of the recommended track, 4 miles WSW of Coconut Island.

9.12 The water between Walker Shoal and the NE extremity of

Bet Reef, 6 miles SSW has not been completely examined.

9.12 Bet Reef, 7 miles long from E to W, forms the N side of Vigilant Channel. A light, which is partially obscured by a stranded wreck between the bearings of 054° and 070°, is shown

from the SE side of the reef. Bet Islet, 18m high, is located on

the NW extremity of the reef.

9.12 Panther Shoal, with depths of 10.3 to 15m, extends 2 miles

NW from the W end of Bet Reef.

9.12 Sue Islet (10°13'S., 142°49'E.), 26m high, lies near the NW

extremity of a reef, 3.5 miles S of Bet Islet; the reef extends 2.5

miles ESE from Sue Islet. A shoal, with a depth of 3.6m, extends 0.6 mile NE from the E end of the above reef, and a

shoal, with a least depth of 4.9m, extends 1.2 miles NW from

the NW extremity of the reef.

9.12 Vigilant Channel is about 2.5 miles wide between the S side

of Bet Reef and the N side of the reef surrounding Sue Islet.

Depths of 10.9 to 20.1m are found in the fairway, which is

clear of dangers. The recommended channel favors the Bet

Reef side of the fairway.

9.12 Poll Islet (10°15'S., 142°50'E.), 14m high, lies on the E side

of the recommended track, 2.7 miles S of Sue Islet.

9.12 Ackers Shoal, with a least depth of 0.7m, lies 3.7 miles SSW

of Poll Islet. Depths of 2.2 and 5.2m lie 0.5 mile ENE and

WSW, respectively, of the shoal.

9.13 Moresby Rock (10°11'S., 142°43'E.), small and

steep-to, with a depth of 1.8m, lies on the W side of the recommended track, 6.7 miles WNW of Sue Islet.

9.13 Saddle Island, 48m high, is located 1.5 miles WNW of Moresby Rock; the island is fringed by a drying reef.

9.13 Between Saddle Island and the Mount Adolphus Islands, 28

miles SSW, the flood tidal current sets WSW, and the ebb

ENE. Both attain a rate of 1.5 knots at springs.

9.13 Ninepin Rock (10°14'S., 142°41'E.), a steep-to rock, 6m

high, lies 3.5 miles S of Saddle Island. The rock is square in

shape and conspicuous. 

9.13 Ibis Reefs, two reefs which dry 1.5 and 0.9m, lie 3.7 miles

SSE and 3.5 miles S, respectively, of Ninepin Rock.

9.13 Harvey Rocks (10°19'S., 142°41'E.) is a group of black

rocks, 6m high, which lie on a drying reef. A light is shown

from the reef on which the rocks lie.

9.13 Beagle Rocks, two below-water patches, lie 1.2 miles W of

Harvey Rocks.

9.13 Campbell Reef (10°20'S., 142°29'E.) is a below-water reef

which lies 11.5 miles W of Harvey Rocks Light. A shoal, with

a depth of 8.8m, lies 2.5 miles ENE of the shoal.

9.13 East Strait Island (10°30'S., 142°27'E.), 14m high, lies near

the E end of a reef which extends 0.3 mile W from it. The island lies on the S side of the recommended track, 18 miles SW

of Harvey Rocks. A rear range light is situated on the island,

with the forward light situated approximately 545m E of the

front range, on a reef surrounding the island. 

9.13 The Twin Islands, 1.7 miles N of East Strait Island, consists

of two islands which lie on the E and W ends of a reef which

dries 2.1m in places. The E island is 61m high and is a prominent mark when approaching Prince of Wales Channel from

the E.

Endeavour Strait

9.14 Endeavour Strait, the farthest S and most extensive of

the W channels through Torres Strait, lies between Prince of

Wales Island and the NW side of the Cape York Peninsula.

9.14 Endeavour Strait is entered from the E between Peak Point

and the E extremity of Horn Island, 8.7 mile NW, and from the

W between Cape Cornwall and a position on the mainland 9

miles S.

9.14 Vessels of light draft, with local knowledge, bound for the

Gulf of Carpentaria, use Endeavour Strait in preference to

Prince of Wales, as the saving in distance is about 12 miles.

9.14 Tides—Currents.—At Possession Island, the mean rise at
206 Sector 9. Australia—Torres Strait and Great North East Channel 

Pub. 127

springs is 2.7m. The flood current sets SSW for 7 hours; the

ebb current sets NNE for 5 hours.

9.14 Tidal currents in Endeavour Strait commence and reach their

maximum rates about 40 minutes later than off Hammond

Rock, in Prince of Wales Channel, and except in the more restricted parts of the strait, their rates are not more than about 30

per cent of those N of Hammond Rock.

9.14 The tidal currents over Wallisp Bank and Inskip Bank are irregular, but in the W entrance of Endeavour Strait their main

trend is E and W, the rising tide setting to the W and the falling

tide to the E. At springs, the maximum velocity is 2 knots. At

neaps, and during the strength of the Southeast Trades, the tidal

current is likely to run to the W all day.

9.15 East approach to Endeavour Strait.—Peak Point

(10°43'S., 142°26'E.), the NW extremity of the Cape York Peninsula, lies 5.5 miles WSW of Cape York. The point is clifffaced and rises to Carubaura, 149m high, 0.5 mile S.

9.15 A flat, with least charted depths of 0.3m, extends 1.7 miles

offshore between Cape York and Peak Point. York Island, 84m

high, lies on the E side of the flat, 0.2 mile N of Cape York.

9.15 Horn Island (10°37'S., 142°17'E.), 115m high, lies with its

E extremity 8.7 miles NW of Peak Point. Horned Peak, 115m

high, lies in the NE part of the island and is conspicuous.

9.15 Asp Shoals (10°38'S., 142°22'E.), which break, have a least

depth of 1.2m. They extend 2.5 miles WSW from a position 3

miles ESE of the E extremity of Horn Island.

9.15 Prince of Wales Island (10°41'S., 142°11'E.) lies 1 mile SW

of Horn Island. The island rises to a height of 232m in its W

part. Rattlesnake Point is the SE extremity of the island, and

Cape Cornwall, 6 miles WSW, is the S extremity.

9.15 The boat channel which separates Horn Island from Prince

of Wales Island affords a good passage for small vessels between Endeavour Strait and Port Kennedy. There is a least

depth of 0.9m in the fairway over the bar at the SE end of the

channel. A rock, which dries 3.4m, lies on the bar across the

SE entrance, 0.5 mile S of the S extremity of Horn Island.

9.16 Islands in the E entrance to Endeavour Strait.—

Possession Island (10°44'S., 142°24'E.) lies on the E side of

the strait, with its N extremity 2 miles W of Peak Point. It rises

to a height of 76m near its S end, and is conspicuous because

of the number of hummocks on it.

9.16 A spit, with depths of less than 1.2m, extends 0.7 mile ENE

from Possession Island. A patch, with a least depth of 4.8m,

lies in about mid-channel between Peak Point and the E extremity of Possession Island.

9.16 Dayman Island, 87m high, lies 0.7 mile SSW of Possession

Island, and is reef-fringed. A spit, with depths less than 4.9m,

extends 0.3 mile N from the island. A 4.2m patch was reported

to lie 0.3 mile S of the S end of Dayman Island.

9.16 Meddler Island (10°42'S., 142°23'E.), a reef-fringed island

39m high, lies 0.8 mile WNW of Possession Island.

9.16 Shoals, with depths of 8.5m, lie 1 mile NE and 0.9 mile N,

respectively, of Meddler Island. They are marked by overfalls.

A depth of 10m was reported to lie 1.5 miles NNW of Meddler

Island. A 4.6m patch was reported to lie 0.7 mile NNE of Meddler Island.

9.16 Quoin Island, 42m high, lies 0.7 mile SW of Meddler Island.

A spit extends 0.4 mile NNE from the island.

9.16 The channel between the NW coast of Possession Island, and

Meddler Island and Quoin Island, is 0.7 mile wide, with a least

charted depth of 6.7m in the fairway. Tidal currents set through

in the direction of the channel, and attain a rate of 5 knots at

springs and 3.5 knots at neaps.

9.16 Great Woody Island (Kai-Yelubi Island) (10°42'S.,

142°21'E.), 64m high, lies with its N extremity 1.5 miles

WNW of Meddler Island. The island, which is 64m high, is

fringed by a narrow drying reef. A drying reef extends 0.4 mile

SSW from its S extremity. A shoal, with a depth of 3.6m, lies 1

mile W from the N extremity of the island.

9.16 Little Woody Island (Meggi-Yelubi Island), 47m high, lies

close SW of Great Woody Island. An 8.5m shoal lies 0.4 mile

NW of the island.

9.16 The channel between Great Woody Island and Little Woody

Island is 1 mile wide, with a least depth of 10.7m in the fairway. Tidal currents set through the channel at a considerable

rate.

Entrance Island (Zuna Island) (10°43'S., 142°18'E.) lies

with its E extremity 2.2 miles W of Little Woody Island, and is

separated from Prince of Wales Island by a channel 0.5 mile

wide. There is a least depth of 10.4m in the channel.

9.16 Entrance Island is reef-fringed; the reef extends 0.8 mile SW

from the island. An islet and two above-water rocks lie on the

reef near its center.

9.16 An 8.2m shoal lies 0.5 mile NE, and a small patch, which

dries 0.3m, lies 0.7 mile SW, respectively, of the N extremity of

Entrance Island.

9.16 Chiropo Island, 10.7m high, lies near the N end of a drying

reef, just over 1 mile NW of Entrance Island.

9.16 Gibson Rock (10°44'S., 142°18'E.) has a depth of 0.6m, and

is marked by tide rips. An 6.9m patch lies 0.7 mile S of Gibson

Rock.

9.16 Heroine Rock (10°46'S., 142°19'E.), a coral patch with a

depth of 0.9m, lies 2 miles SSE of Gibson Rock and is marked

by tide rips.

9.17 South side of Endeavour Strait.—From Peak Point

the coast trends in a SSW direction about 14 miles, then W 8

miles to the W limits of Endeavour Strait. In general, the coast

is low and sandy, with several streams flowing into the sea.

9.17 High Island (10°44'S., 142°25'E.), 79m high, is the largest

and highest of several islands and islets that lie on the shore

bank between Possession Island and the mainland.

9.17 Generally speaking, the entire area from High Island to Red

Island, 7.5 miles SSW, is foul and should only be navigated by

small craft with local knowledge.

9.17 Red Island (10°51'S., 142°21'E.) lies on the shore bank, 0.2

mile offshore.

9.17 There is a T-headed wharf, of concrete and wood construction, on the point close E of Red Island. The head of the wharf

is 37m long and has a depth of 4.4m alongside.

9.17 Tidal currents have been reported to attain a rate of 6 knots in

the channel between the point and Red Island.

9.17 Beacons situated on shore about 0.9 mile NE of Red Island

lead from seaward to the wharf. When a vessel is about 0.5

mile from the front beacon, steer SSW to the wharf. Only vessels with local knowledge should approach this area.

9.17 Brady Bank lies with its S extremity 1.2 miles NNW of Red

Island. A shoal patch with a depth of 4.6m, lies close off its S
Sector 9. Australia—Torres Strait and Great North East Channel 207

Pub. 127

extremity. 

9.17 Anchorage.—Anchorage, in 7 to 9m, may be obtained E of

the S end of the bank.

Barn Island (Parau Island) (10°51'S., 142°19'E.), 43m high,

lies 2 miles W of Red Island; the island is reef-fringed. A

patch, with a depth of 4.9m, lies 0.8 mile NNE of Barn Island.

A group of coral heads, with a least depth of 1m, lie almost 0.2

mile NE of the N extremity of Barn Island.

9.17 Mutee Head (10°55'S., 142°15'E.), 61m high, lies 8 miles

SW of Red Island; it is a prominent headland.

9.17 The Jardine River flows into the strait 2.5 miles W of Mutee

Head, and the W limit of Endeavour Strait lies about 1 mile farther W.

9.18 North side of Endeavour Strait.—The N side of Endeavour Strait is formed by the SE coast of Horn Island, Entrance Island, and the SE coast of Prince of Wales Island

between Rattlesnake Point and Cape Cornwall (10°46'S.,

142°11'E.), about 6 miles SW.

9.18 A bight on the SE coast of Prince of Wales Island is divided

into two parts by a peninsula which lies 2.2 miles WSW of

Rattlesnake Point. The bight is filled with drying mud flats and

foul ground.

9.18 An islet lies on the NE end of a bank, with depths of less

than 4.8m, 0.2 mile SSE of Rattlesnake Point.

9.18 Turtle Island, 23m high and reef-fringed, lies on the coastal

bank 0.8 mile SW of Rattlesnake Point. A small islet, 0.9m

high, lies on the E end of a spit, 0.4 mile S of Turtle Island.

9.18 Packe Island (10°45'S., 142°13'E.) is 81m high and is reeffringed except on its E side, where there is a sandy beach. The

island lies close W of the S extremity of the peninsula which

divides the bight.

9.18 Port Lihou, the bight on the W side of the dividing peninsula,

is mangrove fringed except for a distance of 1 mile NE of Cape

Cornwall, where it is cliff-faced.

9.18 Dumaralug, an islet 15m high, lies on a bank 1.2 miles SSW

of Packe Island. Below-water rocks and numerous shoal depths

lie within the 10m curve in the vicinity of Dumaralug islet. The

position of these dangers may best be seen on the chart.

9.18 Eagle Rock (10°47'S., 142°14'E.), 1.5 miles SE of Dumaralug Islet, is below-water. Peebles Shoals, with depths of

4.9m, lie 1.5 miles SW of Eagle Rock. An isolated reef, with a

depth of 3m, lies 0.8 mile NE of Eagle Rock.

9.18 An 8.2m patch lies 2 miles SE of Eagle Rock, and there are

other patches with depths of 10.4 to 11m in this vicinity.

9.19 West approach to Endeavour Strait.—The W approach to Endeavour Strait is encumbered by a bar, which has

several long, narrow, and shallow ridges. Depths of 5.8 to

10.1m are found in the fairway, and a least depth of 7.3m is

found on the approach line.

9.20 South Side of W entrance to Endeavour Strait.—

Between the Jardine River and Slade Point, 13 miles SSW, the

coast consists of low sand hills covered with scrub. Slade Point

is the E entrance point to the Gulf of Carpentaria. For information regarding the Gulf of Carpentaria, see Pub. 175, Sailing

Directions (Enroute) North, West, and South Coasts of Australia.

9.20 Crab Island (10°59'S., 142°06'E.) lies on a drying bank 1

mile W of Slade Point. The coastal bank, which dries in places,

extends 4.7 miles SW from Crab Island.

9.21 North side of W entrance to Endeavour Strait.—

The SW coast of Prince of Wales Island, from Cape Cornwall

to Bampfield Head (10°43'S., 142°07'E.), consists of steep,

rugged bluffs.

9.21 Yule Point (10°46'S., 142°09'E.), 1.7 miles W of Cape Cornwall, rises to a height of 119m, 0.7 mile N of its extremity.

Bampfield Head lies 3.5 miles NNW of Yule Point.

9.21 Rothsay Banks, with depths of less than 5.5m, consists of extensive shoals and sandbanks which extend 14 miles W from

Cape Cornwall. They form the N side of the W approach to Endeavour Strait.

9.22 Islands and dangers in the W approach to Endeavour Strait.—Red Wallis Island (10°51'S., 142°01'E.), 22m

high, lies on a drying coral reef, 10 miles SW of Cape Cornwall. A 6.1m patch lies 1 mile NNE of the island.

9.22 Red Banks, consisting of narrow ridges of sand with depths

of 0.5 to 6.7m, extend about 6 miles W from the W side of Red

Wallis Island.

9.22 Woody Wallis Island (10°53'S., 142°02'E.), partially wooded and 13m high, lies on a drying coral reef about 2 miles SSE

of Red Wallis Island.

9.22 Wallis Banks consists of several banks, with least depths of

0.4m, which extend 7.5 miles W from Woody Wallis Island.

9.22 Inskip Banks, consisting of extensive shallow sand ridges,

which dry in places, occupy the entire area between Wallis

Banks and the coastal bank fronting the mainland of Australia.

A rocky islet, 1.8m high, lies on the N part of these banks in a

position 1 mile SSE of Woody Wallis Island.

9.22 There is a channel, with a least depth of 7m, between the

coastal bank extending from Slade Point and the SE side of Inskip Banks. Another channel between the N and S banks of Inskip Banks has a least depth of 5.8m. Extensive sandy shoals,

which can best be seen on the chart, are located at the SW and

W ends of the two channels. A 1.5m shoal lies 8 miles WSW of

Woody Wallis Island.

9.23 Channels in the W approach to Endeavour

Strait.—The main channel lies between the N side of Red

Banks and the S side of Rothsay Banks. The general depths are

11 to 15.5m; however, in the W entrance, depths of 5.5 to

10.1m are found in the channel.

9.23 The channel between the S side of Red Banks and the N side

of Wallis Banks should only be attempted by small vessels with

local knowledge. A rock, which dries 2m, lies near mid-channel, 0.8 mile SSW of Red Wallis Island. There are several other

patches in the channel which may best be seen on the chart.

9.23 Directions for Endeavour Strait.—Vessels approaching

Endeavour Strait from the E should steer to a position about 1.2

miles N of Great Woody Island. When the summit of Great

Woody Island bears 175°, steer course 220°, passing between

Entrance Island and Gibson Rock. 

9.23 When the N summit of Barn Island bears 093°, vessel should

steer 273°, with the summit of the island astern, passing not

less than 1.7 miles N of Red Wallis Island. When Red Wallis

Island bears 111°, vessels should alter course to 291°. With the

islet astern, continue this course for a distance of 10 miles from
208 Sector 9. Australia—Torres Strait and Great North East Channel 

Pub. 127

the islet, when the bar will have been cleared.

9.23 Vessels approaching Endeavour Strait from W may use the

reverse of the directions.

Prince of Wales Channel and Approaches

9.24 Prince of Wales Channel affords the best passage

through Torres Strait and is recommended for vessels passing

through from either the E or W. The channel lies between

North West Reef and Sunk Reefs, on the N, and Wednesday Island, Hammond Island, and Goods Island, on the S.

9.24 Prince of Wales Channel may be approached from the NE,

SE, or W. The approach from the NE, which is made via Great

North East Channel, and the approach from the SE, which is

made via the Inner Route and Adolphus Channel, can be safely

navigated in daylight and under favorable tidal conditions. The

area between Ince Point, the N extremity of Wednesday Island,

and the SW end of Great North East Channel, may be considered as the critical part of the approach, as shoals of less than

9.1m exist close SE and NW of the recommended track. The

approach from the W is via Gannet Passage, which can be dangerous under poor conditions of sea and tide, as the depths in

the fairway are constantly changing and may be less than charted.

9.24 Tides—Currents.—Throughout Prince of Wales Channel

and its approaches, from the Twin Islands on the E, to a few

miles W of Goods Island on the W, the tidal currents flow at

the times predicted for those of Hammond Rock Light. The

rates diminish as the channel becomes less restricted. The rates

in its E and W entrances are only about 30 per cent of those

predicted in the channel N of the above light. 

9.24 When Gannet Passage, N of Booby Island, is reached, the

rates are comparatively weak and the character of the tidal current is quite different from that of Prince of Wales Channel. In

the vicinity of Harvey Rocks and Saddle Island, the currents in

the E approach to the channel reach their maximum rates about

30 minutes earlier than those of Hammond Rock, and in these

more open waters, the rates are comparatively weak.

9.25 East approach to Prince of Wales Channel.— Twin

Island (10°28'S., 142°27'E.) is a prominent mark when approaching Prince of Wales Channel from the E.

9.25 Marina Rock (10°28'S., 142°23'E.), 3.7 miles W of the light

on Twin Island, is a pinnacle rock with a depth of 2.1m.

9.25 Beresford Shoal, a narrow coral ledge, extends 3.2 miles W

from a position 1 mile NNW of Marina Rock.

9.25 Edwards Rock (10°31'S., 142°26'E.), about 1 mile SSW of

East Strait Island, has a least depth of 2.1m; the rock breaks occasionally. Reeves Shoal, with a least depth of 8.2m, lies 0.7

miles SSE of Edwards Rock.

9.25 Alert Rock (10°30'S., 142°21'E.) lies on a patch 5.5 miles

WNW of East Strait Island; the rock has a depth of 5.5m. The

patch extends 1.5 miles ENE, about 0.5 mile S, and 1.2 miles

WNW, respectively, from Alert Rock. In 1986, it was reported

that there was less water than charted 0.4 mile S of Alert Rock.

A 10.7m patch lies 0.5 mile SW of Alert Rock and is marked

by a buoy. A rock with a depth of 12.2m, lies 0.8 mile SW of

Alert Rock. The dangers listed, including Marina Rock, are

covered by a red sector of Tuesday Islet No. 4 Light. 

9.25 Herald Patches, sand wave formations with depths of 7.6 to

11m, lie with their center about 1.5 miles E of Ince Point.

9.25 Caution.—Herald Patches and Alert Rock lie in sandwave

formations which cause depths to vary from those charted. The

sandwaves trend SE form Herald Patches and NE from Alert

Rock. In addition, rocky outcrops occur in the channel between

them.

9.25 A rock, with a depth of 10.4m, lies close S of the recommended track, 2 miles ENE of Ince Point.

9.25 Wednesday Island (10°31'S., 142°18'E.) forms part of the S

side of Prince of Wales Channel. The island rises to a height of

91m in its S central part, and there is a height of 84m close S of

Ince Point, the N extremity. A transmitting tide gauge has been

established. Tide gauges transmit on VHF channel 68. Tidal

heights are also available from a telephone answering service

(7-4069-2821). A light is shown from Ince Point.

9.25 Hood Bank extends 2.5 miles WSW from a position 0.3 mile

W of Ince Point. It consists of hard sand pinnacles, which dry

in patches, and lies parallel with and about 0.3 mile off the mud

bank which fronts the NW coast of Wednesday Island.

9.26 North West Reef (10°30'S., 142°11'E.), which dries

1.2 to 1.8m, forms the major part of the N side of Prince of

Wales Channel. It extends 9 miles WSW from a position 3.2

miles NW of Ince Point. A bank, with a least charted depth of

4m, extends 1.7 miles E from the E end of the reef. Overfalls

occur between this bank and Ince Point.

9.26 Pilot Knoll, 1 mile SW of the E end of Northwest Reef, has a

depth of 0.5m; the sea breaks over it in a moderate SE wind.

9.26 Duff Rock, with a depth of 1.8m, lies 1 mile WSW of Pilot

Knoll.

9.26 Nardana Patches (10°30'S., 142°15'E.), close N of the recommended track, lies 0.7 mile SSE of Duff Rock. They are two

rocks, with depths of 7.6m, marked by overfalls.

9.26 Pullar Patches (10°31'S., 142°15'E.) lies on the S side of the

recommended track, 0.9 mile SSW of Nardana Patches. There

is a least charted depth of 6.7m.

9.26 Marie Rock, with depths of less than 2m, lies 0.5 mile SW of

Pullar Patches; it is marked by overfalls.

9.26 Hammond Island (10°31'S., 142°12'E.) rises to a height of

152m, 1 mile SSE of Turtle Head, its N extremity. Turtle Head

is cliff-faced and 28m high. A tide gauge is situated close NW

of Turtle Head, and a radio mast, which is the telemeter link

with Booby Island, stands on Turtle Head. Tidal heights for

Turtle Head are broadcast on VHF channel 68 and also available from a telephone answering service (7-4069-2821).

9.26 Race Rock, which dries 0.6m, lies 0.2 mile ENE of Turtle

Head.

9.26 Hammond Rock (10°31'S., 142°13'E.), 9m high, lies on the

S side of the recommended track and about 0.3 mile N of Turtle Head. A light is shown from the rock.

9.26 Caution.—Turtle Head appears as an island from a distance

of 10 miles, and should not be mistaken for Hammond Rock.

9.26 Round Island, 60m high, lies on the coastal reef, 1.5 miles

SW of Turtle Head.

9.27 Goods Island (10°34'S., 142°09'E.) lies 0.6 mile W

of Hammond Island. Tessy Head, the NE extremity of the island, rises to Hester Hill, 67m high, close SE. The NW side of

Goods Island is fringed by a steep-to coral reef. A transmitting

tide gauge has been established on Goods Island. Tide gauges
Sector 9. Australia—Torres Strait and Great North East Channel 209

Pub. 127

transmit on VHF channel 68. Tidal heights are also available

from a telephone answering service (7-4069-2821). 

9.27 Ipili Reef, with some boulders on it, lies 0.5 mile N of Tessy

Head, and Mecca Reef, which dries 0.6m, lies 0.2 mile farther

N on a bank with less than 10m over it. The recommended

track lies about 0.2 mile NW of the bank.

Sunk Reefs (10°32'S., 142°08'E.), with depths of less than

10m, extend 3 miles W from a position 2.2 miles ESE of the W

end of North West Reef. There are several small drying reefs

located on Sunk Reefs.

9.27 Harrison Rock, with a depth of 3.9m, lies 2 miles S of the W

end of North West Reef. The rock is marked on its E side by

overfalls.

9.28 West approach to Prince to Wales Channel.—Booby Island (10°36'S., 141°55'E.), 19m high, lies on the S side of

the W approach to Prince of Wales Channel, about 14 miles

WSW of the W extremity of Goods Island. A light is shown

from the summit of the island.

9.28 Banda Rock, with a depth of 1.8m, lies 0.6 mile ENE of

Booby Island.

9.28 A bank, with depths of less than 11m, extends 4.5 miles SW

from Booby Island, with a 9.7m patch near its outer end.

9.28 Gannet Passage, 1.7 miles NW of Booby Island, leads across

a ridge, with general depths of 9.4m, which connects with the

bank on which Banda Rock lies.

9.28 Caution.—Owing to the unstable bottom in Gannet Passage,

caused by moving sandwaves, the recommended track is

amended from time to time to meet the variations in depths to

those charted. A least depth of 9.8m was obtained in 2002. The

lighted buoys are moved as necessary to meet the changes in

the recommended track.

9.28 Varzin Shoal (10°33'S., 141°55'E.), 3.5 miles N of Booby

Island, has a least depth of 2.7m, rock. It lies on the bank on

the N side of Gannet Passage.

9.28 Varzin Passage lies 4.2 miles N of Booby Island and N of

Varzin Shoal, and is marked by buoys. This passage, established in 1989, is the preferred W approach to Torres Strait.

9.28 Larpent Bank (10°35'S., 142°01'E.), with a least charted

depth of 0.6m, hard sand, extends 4.7 miles E from a position

4.2 miles E of Booby Island.

9.28 Gerard Bank extends ENE 7.5 miles to Friday Island, from a

position 7.2 miles ESE of Booby Island. The bank dries for a

distance of 4 miles W of Friday Island.

9.29 Off-lying dangers in the W approach.—Carpentaria Shoal (10°45'S., 141°03'E.), with a depth of 12.8m, lies

about 51 miles WSW of Booby Island and is marked by a lighted buoy.

9.29 Merkara Shoal, with a least charted depth of 6.4m, lies 16.5

miles NNE of Carpentaria Shoal.

9.29 Glamis Castle Shoal, with a depth of 10.1m, was reported to

lie 31 miles N of Carpentaria Shoal. Careful, but unsuccessfu,l

searches have been made for this shoal.

9.29 Turu Cay (9°49'S., 141°25'E.) is the farthest NE of these

dangers. The cay, about 0.9m high, lies on the NW side of a

reef.

9.29 Deedler Reef, which dries 0.9m, is located 21 miles NNW of

Glamis Castle Shoal.

9.29 Cook Shoal (10°04'S., 141°22'E.), awash, lies 23 miles ENE

of Glamis Castle Shoal.

9.29 Sketty Belle Shoal, below-water, was reported to lie 13 miles

SSE of Cook Shoal. 

9.29 Swan Shoal, with a depth of 3.3m, lies 4.7 miles SE of Sketty Belle Shoal.

9.29 Cook Reef, crescent-shaped and awash, is about 4 miles in

extent. The reef lies 4.5 miles S of Swan Shoal. A shoal patch,

with a least depth of 3m was reported to lie about 2 miles S of

the S edge of Cook Reef.

9.30 Proudfoot Shoal (10°32'S., 141°28'E.), a coral reef

with drying rocks, lies 26 miles WNW of Booby Island Light.

Hockings Patches, 8 miles SE of Proudfoot Shoal, has a least

depth of 8.8m. A depth of 10m lies 5.2 miles S of them.

9.30 Several shoal patches, with depths of 10 to 11m, exist within

a 2.5 mile radius centered 6.5 miles S of Hockings Patches.

The farthest S of these shoal patches lies 2.7 miles N of the W

approach to Torres Strait.

9.30 Bramble Patches (10°30'S., 141°35'E.), a shoal area with a

least depth of 3.4m, lie 6.5 miles E of Proudfoot Shoals.

9.30 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 12m, sand and

shells, about 4.5 miles W of Goods Island.

9.30 Directions.—Vessels bound for Prince of Wales Channel

from the E should follow the recommended track leading

through Great North East Channel. Those coming from the Inner Route via Adolphus Channel should follow the charted recommended track. Vessels approaching Prince of Wales

Channel from the W should proceed via Gannet Passage and

then follow the charted recommended track.

9.30 Caution.—Navigators are warned that the color of water in

Prince of Wales Channel varies during different tidal and

weather conditions. During strong winds, with the tidal current

setting W, much sand is carried in the waters of the channel. At

this time, the channel appears streaky and shoal-encumbered.

In good weather, with the current setting E through the channel, the water is generally clear and the shoal areas can be

readily ascertained.

Normanby Sound

9.31 Normanby Sound, the W and main approach to Thursday Island Harbor, lies between Friday Island and the N end of

Prince of Wales Island on the S, and Goods Island, Hammond

Island, and Thursday Island on the N. It is entered between

Pott Point (10°36'S., 142°09'E.), the W extremity of Friday Island, and Tucker Point, the W extremity of Goods Island, 1.7

miles N. From the W, the sound is easily distinguished by

Goods Island Light. In 1983, there was a least depth of 5m in

Normanby Sound.

9.31 Tides—Currents.—In Bertie Bay, the mean range of the

tide is 3m at springs and is 1.8m at neaps. The times of HW

Booby Island and Booby Island Light
210 Sector 9. Australia—Torres Strait and Great North East Channel 

Pub. 127

and LW are irregular and the duration of the currents is influenced by the prevailing winds.

9.31 Tidal currents have been known to reach 8 knots.

9.32 Friday Island (10°36'S., 142°10'E.) is about 2.2

miles long and rises to a height of 112m, close to its SE extremity. The N side of the island is formed by sand beaches

fronted by drying sand banks, except near its middle where it is

reef-fringed.

9.32 Black Rock, 23m high, lies on a bank 0.2 mile NW of the N

extremity of Friday Island. The bank, with depths of less than

5.5m, extends 0.7 mile WSW from the rock. A 6.4m patch lies

0.3 mile NNW of Black Rock.

9.32 Kunai Island, 3m high, lies 0.2 mile E of Black Rock.

9.32 Ghibber Rock (10°35'S., 142°10'E.) lies in the fairway of

Normanby Sound, 0.2 mile NNE of Black Rock. There is a

clear passage on either side of Ghibber Rock, but the N passage is preferred. When the rock is covered there are strong

tide rips which extend across the S passage to Black Rock.

9.32 Goods Island, on the N side of Normanby Sound, between

Tucker Point and Quoin Point, is fronted by a drying reef.

9.32 A spit, with depths of less than 11m, hard sand and coral, extends 1 mile SW from the SW side of Goods Island.

9.32 Goods Island rises to a hill, 97m high, 0.3 mile NE of Quoin

Point. From Quoin Point to Tessy Head, the SE coast of the island is formed by a sandy beach, fronted by a drying reef.

9.32 Anchorage.—Bertie Bay or Goods Island anchorage lies between the SE side of Goods Island and Wai Weer Islet

(10°34'S., 142°10'E.), 0.8 mile SW. Peile Reef and Brewster

Reef lie on the N side of the bay. The area N of these reefs, between Goods Island and the W end of Hammond Island, is foul

with reefs and sunken dangers.

9.32 Cardale Patch, with a depth of 3.9m, lies 0.6 mile W of Wai

Weer Islet, and may be passed on either side.

9.32 West Wai Weer Reef, which dries 0.3m, extends about 0.4 mile

W from the reef which fringes Wai Weer Islet. A reef, which dries

on its inner part, extends 0.4 mile ESE from Wai Weer. 

9.32 Anchorage may be obtained in the Southeast Trades, 0.7

mile W of Black Rock, in the quarantine anchorage, in 10m,

with the N extremity of Black Rock bearing 098°, and the beacons E of Quoin Point in range. 

9.32 Anchorage may be taken in Bertie Bay, in a depth of 8.2m,

by vessels with local knowledge.

9.33 Brisbane Rock (10°35'S., 142°12'E.), with a depth of

3.1m, lies 0.3 mile NNW of Heath Point, the NE extremity of

Prince of Wales Island.

9.33 Devonshire Rock, with a depth of 5.8m, lies 0.1 mile NE of

Heath Point.

9.33 Tidal currents between Heath Point and Vivien Point, the

SW extremity of Thursday Island, attain rates of 6 to 7 knots,

and at times, 9 knots. When the current is setting against a

strong Southeast Trade, there are tide rips across the channel

which are dangerous to boats.

9.33 Thursday Island Harbor (10°36'S., 142°13'E.) is formed

between Horn Island, Prince of Wales Island, and Thursday Island. The N and S parts of the W coast of Horn Island, which

forms the SE side of the harbor, are mangrove-fringed, with a

sandy beach between, backed by scrub-covered land. Double

Hill, 94m high, rises 0.7 mile inland of the beach.

9.33 Madge Reefs, which dry, consists of several reefs lying

roughly parallel with the W side of Horn Island and extend up

to 0.7 mile offshore. There are passages between the reefs, but

none are navigable.

9.33 Normanby Sound Ledge, with a depth of 5m, lies 0.3 mile

ESE of Vivien Point.

9.33 Hovell Rock (10°36'S., 142°13'E.), a narrow shoal with a

least depth of 3.4m, extends 0.3 mile E from a position 0.6 mile

ESE of Vivien Point.

9.33 Thursday Island (10°35'S., 142°13'E.), on the N side of the

harbor, rises to Milman Hill, 104m high, 0.5 mile WSW of the

E extremity of the island. A prominent radio tower stands on

Milman Hill.

9.33 The E and W ends of Thursday Island are reef-fringed; between which is a sandy beach, fronted by a mud bank covered

with kelp. The coastal bank, with less than 5.5m, extends up to

0.2 mile offshore.

Thursday Island Harbor (10°35'S., 142°13'E.)

World Port Index No. 53300

9.34 Thursday Island Harbor (Port Kennedy) is located between the S side of Thursday Island and the N side of Madge

Reef. The harbor is practically landlocked.

9.34 The port is under the jurisdiction of the Department of

Transport Queensland. The local representative is the harbormaster at Thursday Island Harbor.

9.34 Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds are SE from February to November and NW from November to February.

9.34 Tides—Currents.—The spring rise of the tide is 3m and the

neap rise is 0.6m. It has been reported that there is a great irregularity both at the time of HW and at the height of the tide.

9.34 The flood current on the S side of the harbor attains a rate of

2 to 4 knots, and the ebb off Madge Reefs attain a rate of 4 to 5

knots.

9.34 The currents set strongly over Hovell Rock.

9.34 Depths—Limitations.—There are three channels to the

port. Normanby Sound has a depth of 6.3m; Flinders Passage

has a depth of 3m; and the Boat Channel, available only to vessels of light draft, has a depth of 2.7m.

9.34 There are three piers in Port Kennedy. The Main Jetty, for

general cargo, is the middle jetty, and has an L-shaped head

30m long, with dolphins off each end, and a depth of 3.1m

alongside. A barge ramp is situated inshore of the head.

9.34 The Caltex Jetty, the farthest E, is 23m long at its head and

has a depth of 3.0m alongside. This is a T-shaped pier and oil

terminal. A tank farm is situated at the root of the jetty.

9.34 Engineers Jetty, situated W of the Main Jett,y is 28m long at

its head and has a depth of 4.3m alongside. This berth is utilized primarily by passenger vessels.

9.34 Horn Island Jetty, across the harbor, has a berth 40m in

length, with two dolphins situated just SW. The depth alongside is 4m. Passenger ferries dock here.

9.34 The maximum allowable draft at the port is 5.4m.

Queensland Ports Corporation

http://www.pcq.com.au/html/02_ports.htm
Sector 9. Australia—Torres Strait and Great North East Channel 211

Pub. 127

9.34 Aspect.—The Grand Hotel, with its name in white letters on

the roof, is situated about 0.2 mile NNW of the main jetty, and

the church about 0.3 mile WNW of the hotel, is conspicuous

from the harbor. The hospital buildings on Vivien Point are

conspicuous.

9.34 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels 50m long

and over, except vessels exempted by law, and additionally for

foreign vessels 35m long or more crossing Hovell Bar. Pilotage

is available 24 hours a day for vessels les than 85m and during

daylight hours only for vessels greater than 85m. Pilots come

from Cairns and must be requested at least 72 hours in advance. Pilots will contact the ship on VHF channel 16 about 45

minutes prior to boarding time. 

9.34 Pilots board, as follows:

1. From the E—South of Chapman Reef.

2. From the W—South of Tucker Point on Goods Island.

3. From the S—West of Boat Channel Lighted Buoy. 

9.34 Regulations.—The port is a first port of entry. Customs officers board the vessel at the wharf.

9.34 An underkeel clearance of 1m in draft is required.

9.34 Vessels should maintain a continuous listening watch on

VHF channel 16 when transiting the area

9.34 Signals.—A red pennant displayed at the Post Office flagstaff, at the meteorological station on Green Hill, or from

Goods Island Light Station, indicates that a storm warning has

been received. The radio station near Vivien Point transmits

weather bulletins, navigational warnings, and storm warnings.

9.34 Anchorage.—The most convenient anchorage during the SE

Thursday Island Anchorage

Thursday Island from SE
212 Sector 9. Australia—Torres Strait and Great North East Channel 

Pub. 127

Trades is 0.1 mile N of the E end of Hovell Rock in sand and

mud, over a little clay and granite.

9.34 Vessels of more than 6.7m draft should leave the harbor before LW near spring tides and anchor between Hovell Rock and

Heath Point, in 8 to 9m.

9.34 Vessels are prohibited from anchoring within 0.3 mile E or

W of the Main Jetty, or within 0.1 mile S of it.

9.34 Shallow draft vessels often swing in an opposite direction to

deep-draft vessels, and those in one part of the harbor in an opposite direction to those in another.

9.34 Directions.—Vessels should approach Thursday Island Harbor from the W through Normanby Sound.

Channels North of Prince of Wales Channel

9.35 A number of islands and reefs, with channels between

them lie between Prince of Wales Channel and Jervis Island, 32

miles N.

9.35 Dayman Channel, Simpson Channel, Yule Channel, Bramble

Channel, and Napoleon Passage, which lie parallel to Prince of

Wales Channel, are unsuitable for deep-draft vessels. Banks

Channel (Moa Channel) and Bligh Channel are known to be

shallow and intricate. A light-draft vessel wishing to attempt

any of these channels from either direction, should first send

boats to mark the below-water dangers in the entrances. Even

with this precaution, a vigilant lookout from aloft must be kept,

and in no case should the attempt be made except in good light.

9.35 There is no route for deep-draft vessels N of Jervis Island

(9°57'S., 142°11'E.).

9.35 In all of the above channels, the tidal currents are strong and

uncertain, and there are few marks for fixing a vessel’s position.

9.35 During the period of the Northwest Monsoon, the water in

these channels is frequently so discolored that it is almost impossible to detect the positions of the various reefs and shoals.

9.36 Dayman Channel (10°28'S., 142°12'E.) lies between

North West Reef and South Torres Reef, and is 1 to 2 miles

wide.

Patches, with depths of 2.7 to 5.5m, lie in the W entrance of

the channel.

9.36 The tidal currents are strong and set in the general direction

of the channel.

9.36 South Torres Reef, which dries 3m, is about 8 miles long and

has a greatest width of about 0.8 mile. Depths of less than 5.5m

extend a short distance W from the reef.

9.36 Simpson Channel lies between South Torres Reef and North

Torres Reef. This channel should only be navigated by vessels

with local knowledge.

9.36 North Torres Reef, which dries 3m, lies 1.2 miles N of South

Torres, and foul ground extend 1.5 miles E from North Torres

Reef. The S side of the reef is well defined and steep-to.

9.36 Caution.—White Rocks (10°28'S., 142°02'E.), 7.6m high,

is a group of bare rocks which lies on a drying reef, 5.5 miles

W of South Torres Reef.

9.36 Fantome Reef, with a depth of 4m, lies 6 miles W of White

Rocks. Both Fantome Reef and White Rocks lie on the extensive bank which extends N from Gannet Passage.

9.37 Yule Channel lies between North Torres Reef and

Hawkesbury Island. The W part of the channel is foul with

reefs and sunken dangers. The channel has not been adequately

surveyed, and except in a case of necessity, should not be attempted.

9.37 Hawkesbury Island (10°22'S., 142°08'E.) rises to a ridge of

craggy peaks, 146m high, near the S end.

9.37 Hawkesbury Reefs extend 2 miles N and 8.5 miles E, respectively, from Hawkesbury Island.

9.37 Channel Islet, 27m high, lies on the N edge of the E part of

Hawkesbury Reefs.

9.37 West Island (10°21'S., 142°03'E.) rises to a height of 85m in

its E part. The island lies 3.2 miles W of the N end of Hawkesbury Island.

9.37 West Shoal extends 2.5 miles W from a position close W of

West Island.

9.37 Several dangerous coral patches lie within 3 miles SW and

1.2 miles S of Hawkesbury Island, partly blocking the W entrance of Yule Channel.

9.37 Bramble Channel is bound on the S by the N side of the

shoal enclosing Stonehenge (10°19'S., 142°06'E.) and Tuft

Rock, and by the N edge of Hawkesbury Reef, and on the N by

Long Reef and the bank on which the Duncan Islands lie, at the

W end of Long Reef.

9.37 Long Reef dries and extends 12 miles W from its E extremity. A drying coral reef lies 2 miles SSE of the E extremity of

Long Reef.

9.37 Travers Island, 34m high, lies on a drying reef, 5 miles SE of

Long Reef.

9.37 The Duncan Islands, consisting of five rocky islands, together with numerous islets and rocks, extend 4.7 miles NW from

Spencer Island (10°17'S., 142°06'E.). Spencer Island is moderately high and lies on the S edge of the bank on which the

other Duncan Islands lie.

9.37 Spencer Rock, with a least depth of 1.8m, lies about 0.5 mile

WSW of Spencer Island.

9.37 There are numerous dangers charted in the vicinity of the

Duncan Islands and the W end of Long Reef.

9.38 Banks Channel (Moa Channel) lies between Long

Reef and the Duncan Islands on the S, and the SW side of

Banks Island and Mulgrave Island (Badu Island). South Bank

extends 10 miles W from Mulgrave Island on the N side of

Banks Channel.

9.38 The E part of Banks Channel is wide, well-defined, and, with

one exception, clear of dangers, but rocks, islets, and shoals

render the W entrance intricate and dangerous.

9.38 The tidal currents in Banks Channel set through in the direction of the channel and sometimes attain a rate of 5 knots.

9.38 Banks Island is low on the W and hilly on the E side. Mount

Augustus (10°09'S., 142°19'E.), 380m high, is located on the

NE extremity of the island.

9.38 Mulgrave Island (Badu Island) rises to a height of 200m, 2.7

miles N of Rugged Point (10°11'S., 142°08'E.), its S extremity.

9.38 There are a number of islets and dangers charted 2 miles S

and 4 miles SSE, respectively, from Rugged Point.

9.39 Bligh Channel.—Bligh Channel, known locally as

Alligator Passage, lies between the islets and reefs off the N

side of Mulgrave Island, and the bank that lies 2.7 miles W of
Sector 9. Australia—Torres Strait and Great North East Channel 213

Pub. 127

the NW extremity of Mulgrave Island on the S side, and by

Jervis Reef (Mabuiag Reef) (10°00'S., 142°08'E.) and the numerous shoals and coral reefs which extend S from that reef,

on the N side. The navigable part of the channel is barely 0.2

mile wide at its W entrance.

9.39 As the tidal currents set through the channel at a great rate,

Bligh Channel may not only be considered intricate, but dangerous for those without local knowledge.

9.39 The dangers in the E approach to Bligh Channel are best

seen on the chart.

9.39 Napoleon Passage lies between Jervis Reef on the S side,

and Basilisk Bank (10°00'S., 142°18'E.), Passage Island, Jervis

Island, and the foul ground extending W from the latter island,

on the N side.

9.39 Napoleon Passage is the N passage through the Torres Strait.

The passage has a least width of 0.4 mile, but it has not been

closely examined and numerous dangers lie in it. The tidal currents set strongly through it.

9.39 Napoleon Passage should be attempted only by vessels with

local knowledge and then under the most favorable of conditions.

Jervis Island (Mabuiag Island) (9°57'S., 142°11'E.) rises to

a height of 160m, 0.9 mile N of its S extremity. Shoal water extends about 13 miles W from Jervis Island.

9.39 Orman Reef (9°54'S., 142°15'E.), which has been partially

examined, forms the SE side of the area of unexamined coral

reefs which lie in the N part of Torres Strait, between Jervis Island and the coast of Papua.

9.39 From a position 2 miles N of the E extremity of Jervis Island,

the outer edge of Orman Reef has been traced as extending 4

miles SE, then about 18 miles NE. The reef then turns WNW

for about 13 miles.

9.39 For the coast of Papua, see Pub. 164, Sailing Directions (Enroute) New Guinea.
215

Pub. 127

10. 

New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island

10.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 10 — CHART INFORMATION
217

Pub. 127

SECTOR 10 

NEW ZEALAND—NORTH AND EAST COASTS OF NORTH ISLAND

10.0 Plan.—The descriptive sequence of this sector is from N to

S. The narrative begins with a description of Three Kings Islands, a group lying about 30 miles WNW of Cape Maria Van

Diemen, the NW tip of North Island. The account then continues from this NW extremity with a coastal description to East

Cape. Lastly, the description continues SW from East Cape to

Cape Palliser, the S tip of North Island. The W shore of North

Island, from Cape Maria Van Diemen S to Cape Palliser, is described in Sector 11. 

General Remarks 

10.1 The Dominion of New Zealand is comprised of three

main islands, North Island, South Island, and Stewart Island.

Additionally, the Chatham Islands, the Kermadec Islands, the

Bounty Islands, the Antipodes Islands, Campbell Island, and

the Auckland Islands are also part of New Zealand.

10.1 North Island is hilly and mountainous. Also, there are large

areas of plains. Although North Island was formerly heavily

forested, the density is being reduced.

10.1 Very few rivers in North Island are navigable due to their

speed and the high relief of the country; mostly all are obstructed by bars at their entrances.

10.1 In North Island, mountains occupy 10 per cent of the total

surface. Four volcanic peaks rise to heights greater than

2,000m, as follows:

1. Egmont—2,517m high.

2. Ruapehu—3,056m high.

3. Ngauruhoe—2,290m high.

4. Tongariro—1,968m high.

10.1 Winds—Weather.—On rare occasions, at about 30-year intervals, a tropical storm may cross the N end of New Zealand.

More frequently, a heavy swell is encountered off the N coast

produced by storms at some distance to the N. Local tornadoes

occur occasionally over land, later appearing as waterspouts as

they lead E over the sea.

10.1 Winds are variable in speed and direction over the whole of

New Zealand. Periods of strong winds occur during all seasons. Sea breezes develop during clear summer days in the vicinity of North Island.

10.1 Rough seas are common at all times of the year, especially S

of 40°. Swell is also a feature of the waters around New

Zealand, with heavy swells occurring throughout the year on

10 to 15 per cent of occasions, and during the S winter, this figure increases to 30 to 40 per cent, especially over the ocean to

the E.

10.1 Ice.—Both pack ice and icebergs may be found in the vicinity of New Zealand, although occurrences will be rare.

10.1 Tides—Currents.—On the coasts of New Zealand, the tides

are semi-diurnal, with the greatest range occurring when the

moon is at perigee. On the E side of North Island, tidal currents

set N with a rising tide and S with a falling tide, except in Hauraki Gulf, where the directions are reversed.

10.1 The primary current in that section of the South Pacific

Ocean that affects New Zealand is the East Southern Ocean

Current, between the parallels of 40°S and 60°S. North of

40°S, currents are light and variable.

10.1 The main currents in the vicinity of New Zealand are influenced by the winds and are therefore variable. There is some

predominance of current in a NE direction off the W coasts of

North Island and South Island; this current continues in a

clockwise direction rounding North Cape of North Island, setting SE to East Cape (37°41'S., 178°33'E.). This flow continues as a S set along the E coast, about 55 miles, to the vicinity

of Gable End Foreland. This circulation is reported to be more

apparent in summer and in most parts never exceeds 2 knots,

except N of North Island.

10.1 Seismic Sea Wave Warning System.—The signal to warn

vessels in New Zealand harbors of the approach of seismic sea

waves or tsunamis resulting from earthquakes in any part of the

Pacific is a series of long blasts on sirens. In some harbors, vessels will be warned by the harbormaster. See Pub. 120, Sailing

Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia

for further information.

10.1 Caution.—Volcanic activity was reported (1992) centered in

position 36°22'S, 177°57'E.

10.1 A voluntary code of shipping routes around the New Zealand

coast, to reduce the potential for pollution of the marine environment, has been introduced. For further information, see

Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific Ocean

and Southeast Asia.

The Three Kings Islands

10.2 The Three Kings Islands (34°09'S., 172°06'E.), a

wildlife sanctuary, is a cluster of uninhabited islands that lie

about 32 miles NW of Cape Reinga, the NW tip of North Island. It has been reported that Three Kings Islands are radar

conspicuous at a distance of 28 miles.

10.2 Great Island, the largest of the group, is 294m high, and is

indented on its NW and SE sides, respectively, by Northwest

Bay and Southeast Bay. 

10.2 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents between these islands

attain rates of up to 3 knots and the races frequently give the

appearance of shoal depths.

10.2 Aspect.—King Bank lies about 14 miles NE of Great Island

and has a least depth of 28m. Tide rips show up on the NE side

of the bank. King Bank is located at the SE termination of

North Maria Ridge, which projects about 35 miles NW of

Great Island and ends in Gobey Bank, with a depth of 244m.

10.2 Middlesex Bank, with a least depth of 90m, lies 21 miles

NW of Great Island. Tide rips occur on the NE side of the

bank, which is very steep. Middlesex Bank lies on the South

Maria Ridge, which extends about 35 miles NW of from West

Island. Three Kings Trough is located between North Maria

Ridge and the South Maria Ridge.

10.2 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage in either bay, in depths of 30 to 50m, sand and gravel,
218 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

in fair weather. Additionally, there is an anchorage, with

smooth water during strong NE weather, on the SW side of

Great Island, in depths of 30 to 50m, rock. The bottom between

the different islands, and for a distance of 1 mile off them, is

rock, coral, and patches of coral sand.

10.2 Farmer Rocks, 5m high, lie 0.5 mile E of the NE side of

Great Island. A rocky patch, with a least depth of 2.4m, lies up

to 0.2 mile E of the outer above-water rock off the SE tip of

Great Island. A rock, with a depth of 6.9m, lies 0.2 mile WNW

of Crater head, the NW tip of Great Island.

10.2 South West Island lies about 2.5 miles WSW of Great Island.

Princes Islands extend about 2 miles W of South West Island to

West Island, which is 176m high.

10.2 Directions.—Vessels from the W, bound for Auckland Harbor or a port on the E side of North Island, should identify

Three Kings Islands, which may be passed on either side.

Cape Maria Van Diemen to Hauraki Gulf

10.3 Cape Maria Van Diemen (34°29'S., 172°39'E.), the

NW tip of North Island, appears as an island, and projects 88m

high from a sandy isthmus. This cape has been reported to give

good radar returns at up to 18 miles. Close NW of the cape is a

double islet, named Motuopao, with no safe channel between.

An abandoned prominent lighthouse stands on the islet.

10.3 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents between Cape Maria

Van Diemen and Middlesex Bank, 54 miles NW, attain rates of

1.5 to 4 knots. Races and overfalls are common between Cape

Reinga and Pandora Bank. Between Burt Bank, 19 miles NW

of Cape Maria Van Diemen and Middlesex Bank, the current

sets SW from about 5 hours to 1 hour before HW at Westport,

and NE from about 1 hour to 5 hours after HW at Westport.

About 2 miles SW of Cape Maria Van Dieman, the current sets

SE from about 6 hours to 2 hours before HW at Westport, and

NW from about HW to 5 hours after HW at Westport.

10.3 Cape Reinga (34°25'S., 172°41'E.) lies 4 miles NNE of

Cape Maria Van Dieman; the bight between the two being foul

ground. Cape Reinga is reportedly radar conspicuous at 23

miles.

10.3 Columbia Bank, over which the sea continually breaks, lies

0.5 to 1.5 miles W of Cape Reinga.

10.3 Spirits Bay is entered between Cape Reinga and Hooper

Point, and it is backed by a coast that is steep and cliffy with a

sandy beach. A sandy islet, 9m high, lies 0.3 mile SSE of the

W tip of Hooper Point. This islet is connected to the coast at its

S end by a reef that dries. 

10.3 Pananche Islet, a rock nearly 1m high that is continually

breaking, lies 0.3 mile WSW of Hooper Point. Tidal currents

set strongly between the rock and Hooper Point, causing eddies

and swirls. There is a channel between the rock and the mainland with a depth of 12.8m. 

10.3 The coast between Hooper Point and North Cape, about 9.5

miles E, is rocky, alternating with sandy bays. Its general aspect is that of steep cliffs undermined by the sea, and topped by

scrub-covered tableland.

10.3 Tom Bowling Bay lies 6 miles E of Hooper Point, is backed

by Waikuku Flat, a low neck of marshland and sand dunes.

Waikuku Flat projects across to the E coast and joins the headland of North Cape to the mainland. Surville Cliffs forms the

bold tip of North Cape.

10.3 Tides—Currents.—The flood current sets W, with the ebb

setting E, along the shore between Cape Reinga and North

Cape, attaining rates of 3 knots off Cape Reinga and 1 knot off

North Cape.

10.3 Anchorage.—Spirits Bay affords good anchorage, as charted, with winds from the E to SW to S, in depths of 16.5 to

20.1m, about 1 to 1.5 miles offshore abreast the sandy beach.

With like winds, there is good anchorage in Tom Bowling Bay,

0.5 to 0.7 miles offshore, in depths of 15 to 20m, sand.

10.4 North Cape (34°24'S., 173°02'E.), a bold cliffy headland, is the NE tip of North Island. North Cape has a reddish

appearance from the offing, and has been reported radar conspicuous at 20 miles. Murimotu, a small peaked islet, 93m

high, lies close E of North Cape and is connected to it by a

ledge of rocks. Foul ground projects 0.5 mile NE from the islet,

and a rock, uncovered at LW, lies at its outer end. The N end of

North Island is a peninsula, and from it a sandy neck, 7 miles

wide, extends SE 30 miles. A range of white sand hills, 30 to

91m high, extends nearly the whole length of the neck. 

10.4 The coast from North Cape trends south 6.2 miles to Ohao

Point (Coal Point), a black water-worn bluff and the outer N

entrance point to Parengarenga Harbor.

10.4 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be found, in a depth of

21.9m, about 1 mile offshore off Waikuku Beach. This anchorage is sheltered from winds from the N through W to SSW; a

swell setting in gives warning of the approach of E winds.

10.4 Caution.—North Cape should not be approached to within a

distance of less than 1 mile.

10.5 Parengarenga Harbor (34°32'S., 173°01'E.) is a

small harbor that can only be utilized by small vessels with local knowledge.

10.5 The inner N entrance point of Parengarenga Harbor is

Ngamaru Point, which lies 1.2 miles SW of Ohao Point.

Ngamaru Point is low, sandy, and hard to make out from seaward. The S inner entrance point lies about 0.5 mile S of

Ngamaru Point and is formed by white sand hills. A shoal, with

a depth of 1.2m, lies 1 mile ENE of Ngamaru Point.

10.5 Koteonepore Spit, which breaks, projects about 0.8 mile E

from the S entrance point. The entrance channel to the harbor

lies between this spit and Ngamaru Point; across its outer end

is a bar that usually breaks with an E swell.

10.5 A shoal, with a depth of 1.2m, lies 1 mile ENE of Ngamaru

Point.

10.5 The depths in the entrance are subject to unpredictable

change and local knowledge is essential for entry.

10.5 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, in depths of 12.8 to 14.6m, about 0.3 mile SW of

Ngatehe Point.

10.5 Great Exhibition Bay lies close S of the entrance to Parengarenga Harbor and is notable for a curving sandy beach that

terminates at Paxton Point, about 11.5 miles SSE. Rawawa

Beach projects about 1.2 miles SE from Paxton Point, and in

Henderson Bay, NW of Grenville Point, 5.5 miles SE of Paxton

Point, there is another sandy beach 2 miles long.

10.5 Simmonds Islands, comprised of two islets, lie about 0.5

mile N of Grenville Point. An islet lies about 0.2 mile further

N. Grenville Point is steep and rises to 61m.

10.5 Rangaunu Bay is entered between Grenville Point and Cape
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 219

Pub. 127

Karikari, 12 miles E. General depths of 36.6 to 45.7m lie in the

entrance of Rangaunu Bay; depths of 20m lie within 2 miles of

the coast. A rocky patch, with a depth of 8.2m, lies 6.5 miles

WNW of Cape Karikari.

10.6 Southwest shore of Rangaunu Bay.—The shore between Grenville Point and Perforated Point, 1 mile SSE, recedes to form a small bay with a sandy beach at its head. The

cliffy coast then continues from Perforated Point, 1.2 miles

SSE, to Farmer Point.

10.6 Houhora Bay is entered between Farmer Point and Stanley

Point, 1 mile S. Mount Carmel, 235m high and lying 0.6 mile

W of Stanley Point, is a prominent peakthat is the highest in elevation on this coast.

10.6 Houhora Harbor (34°49'S., 173°09'E.) is entered 0.5 mile

W of Perpendicular Point, which lies SW of Stanley Point. A

sand spit, on which the sea breaks, projects about 0.5 mile ESE

from the S entrance point. Tidal currents attain rates of 4 knots.

Houhora Harbor should only be entered by vessels with local

knowledge.

10.6 Within the narrow entrance, the channel winds through drying flats to the head of the harbor 5.5 miles NW. Pukenui is the

S of the several towns that front the W shore of the harbor,

where there is a wharf. The beaconed channel has a least depth

of 1.8m over the bar, and 4.9m above the bar.

10.6 Anchorage.—Snug anchorage may be obtained by vessels

with local knowledge in Houhora Bay, sheltered from winds

from the N through W to S, in depths of 9.1 to 12.8m.

10.6 Directions.—Recent local knowledge is required for entry to

Houhora Harbor. From a position about 0.4 mile S of Perpendicular Point, vessels entering Houhora Harbor head for Tokoroa Islet and Motuotuna Islet, in line bearing 304°. When

abeam the mole on the N entrance point, vessels should maintain a mid-channel course passing SW of Tokoroa Islet. After

crossing the bar, vessels follow the marked channel on the S

and W shore of the harbor to Pukenui.

10.7 Southeast shore of Rangaunu Bay.—Cape Karikari (34°47'S., 173°24'E.) represents the E entrance point of

Rangaunu Bay. The coast 1.2 miles SSW leads to Taumatara

Point, the S entrance point of Whataru Bay. Above-water and

sunken rocks project 0.2 mile N, 0.3 mile W, and 0.3 mile SW

of Taumatara Point. Maraewhiti Point, from which drying

rocks project 0.3 mile W, lies about 0.7 mile S of Taumatara

Point, and is the N entrance point of Karikari Bay.

Blackney Point (34°52'S., 173°17'E.) lies 6 miles SW of

Maraewhiti Point, and between them there is a sandy beach

backed by sandy ridges covered with scrub and swampy

ground. 

10.7 Puheke is a prominent grass-covered flat-topped hill, 132m

high, lying 2.5 miles E of Blackney Point.

The Awanui River from North

10.8 The Moturoa Islands are made up of four primary islands, together with several islets and rocks, all lying within 3

miles WNW of Cape Karikari. There are several deep channels

within the group, and between them and Cape Karikari, but local knowledge is required to navigate them.

10.8 Staffa Rock, with a depth of 3.4m, lies about 3.5 miles W of

Cape Karikari; the sea seldom breaks over this rock.

10.8 Rangaunu Harbor (34°52'S., 173°17'E.) is entered via the

Awanui River, which flows into the harbor at the head of Rangaunu Bay. This port should not be entered without local

knowledge.

10.8 The entrance channel to the harbor is between Motutara

Rocks, which lie off Blackney Point, and Te Puke te Huri, a

sandy spit that usually breaks and has depths of less than 5m.

Depths in the channel vary from 6 to 10m, except for a 4.5m

patch lying 1 mile SSW of Motutara Rocks.

10.8 Sheigis Rock, above-water, lies on a reef, which dries 2m

and extends 0.3 mile W from the shore, about midway between

Kotiatia Point and Wairakia Point, about 1.5 miles SSE. There

is a depth of 4m, 0.2 mile S of the beacon, close SW of the

leading line.

10.8 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents set in the direction of

the channels and attain rates of up to 3 knots off Kotiatia Point.

10.8 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, in a depth of 11m, about 0.3 mile NW of Scheigis

Rock beacon.

10.8 Directions.—No vessel should attempt to enter this river

without local knowledge. To enter the Rangaunu River, pass

approximately 0.8 mile W of Motutara Rocks on a course of

about 182°. This course leads midway between the spit that

projects about 1.5 miles NW from Kotiatia Point and the E tip

of Te Puke te Huri Spit, about 0.2 mile further NW, over a

depth of about 6m. Course should be changed when the leading

lights come into range bearing 137.7°, keeping them in line,

passing between the lighted beacons in the entrance to about

0.2 mile SW of Sheigis Rock. There is a depth of 4.6m, 0.5

mile S of Sheigis Rock, and a depth of 3.3m, 0.5 mile SW of

the same rocks on the range line. Lesser depths lie close to the

track. When Scheigis Rock Beacon is in line with Kotiatia

Point, bearing about 338°, the vessel should steer 186° to pass

close E of Tohunga Lighted Beacon. From Tohunga Lighted

Beacon, the channel leads generally SSW with a least depth of

about 4.9m, decreasing to 1.1m NE of The Junction. 

10.8 Extensive local knowledge is necessary to proceed past Tohunga Lighted Beacon.

10.9 Cape Karikari (34°47'S., 173°24'E.) is the E entrance point of Rangaunu Bay. Knuckle Point, the NW entrance of Doubtful Bay lies 5.5 miles SE of Cape Karikari.

10.9 Matai Bay lies midway between Cape Karikari and Knuckle

Point and is bisected by a narrow peninsula into two inner

bays, named Ohungahunga and Waikato Bays. Waikato Bay,

the SE bay, is foul; the hills on its E side are remarkably red. 

10.9 A rock, which is steep-to and is covers at HW, lies in the approach to Matai Bay, about 2.5 miles SE of Cape Karikari. A

rock, which dries 2.3m, lies in the approaches to Whangatupere Bay, 0.9 mile NNW of Knuckle Point. A 5.6m shoal lies

1.9 miles S of Knuckle Point.

10.9 Anchorage.—There is an anchorage in Ohungahunga Bay,

in a depth of 9.1m, sand. However, during NE winds this bay is

considered to be unsafe as an anchorage.

10.9 Doubtless Bay is entered between Knuckle Point and

Berghan Point, about 5.7 miles SE. Berghan Point is 170m

high, steep-to on its E side, with a few scattered trees upon it.

There is a flat-topped islet close off the point.

10.9 The N shore of Doubtless Bay, distinguished by its steep,
220 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

rocky nature, is backed by the Rangiawhia Range, 61 to 122m

high, cand overed with scrub, kiwi, and gorse.

10.9 Anchorage.—Good anchorage, sheltered from N winds,

may be found in Doubtless Bay, about 5 miles SW of Knuckle

Point, in a depth of 12.8m, sand and shell. Vessels approaching

this anchorage pass 1.5 miles S of Knuckle Point and 0.7 mile

N of the 6m rocky shoal.

10.9 Caution.—Albert Reef, which lies 2.2 miles WSW of

Berghan Point, is comprised of a rock, 2m high, a rock, which

dries 2.6m, and an 8m patch. All of the above dangers are

steep-to.

10.9 Fair Way Reef, 3.7 miles WSW of Berghan Point, dries

2.6m. A navigable channel, which can be utilized by a vessel

with local knowledge, lies between Albert and Fair Way Reefs

and the E shore of Doubtless Bay. This channel is about 1 mile

wide and has a least depth of about 13.7m. A rocky shoal, with

a depth of 6m, lies 3 miles NW of Fair Way Reef. A shoal, with

a depth of 9m, lies 1.5 miles WSW of Fair Way Reef.

10.10 Mangonui Harbor (34°59'S., 173°32'E.) (World Port

Index No. 55010) is located in the SE part of Doubtless Bay,

and is suitable only for small vessels with local knowledge; the

port is primarily a fishing port. The town of Mangonui is situated on White Point, 0.7 mile SE of Rangikapiti Head

(34°59'S., 173°31'E.)

10.10 An obstruction was reported (1987) to lie in the entrance,

about 0.4 mile ESE of Rangikapiti Head. 

10.10 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents attain a rate of 1 knot in

the entrance, but are stronger off the pier, where tide rips and

overfalls may occur. With strong NW winds, a swell sets into

the harbor.

10.10 Depths—Limitations.—From the harbor entrance, depths

gradually decrease to 4 to 4.9m on the bar. 

10.10 The wharf at Mangonui is L-shaped, with a berthing face

having a length of 35m and depth alongside of 6.1m. General

depths of 7.6 to 8.8m exist WNW of White Point, but shoals

rapidly.

10.10 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage in the fairway of the port, in depths of 5.5 to 9.2m, according to draft; it is advisable to moor. 

10.10 In moderate weather, good anchorage may be found outside

the harbor entrance, in 11 to 12.8m.

10.10 Vessels are cautioned not to anchor in the vicinity of the submarine cable laid across the entrance NW of White Point.

10.10 The coast ESE from Berghan Point to the W entrance of

Whangaroa Bay, 7.5 miles ESE, is mostly bold and cliffy.

Tekura Rocks lie close off the coast, about 1 mile SE of

Berghan Point. Taemaro Bay lies about 0.7 mile S of these high

rocks, but affords no shelter. The entrance to Motukahakaha

Bay lies between Tutonu Point, located 3.2 miles ESE of

Berghan Point, and a point 3.2 miles E of it.

10.11 Whangaroa Bay (34°59'S., 173°45'E.) is entered between Karaui Point, which lies about 1.2 miles E of the E entrance point of Motukahakaha Bay, and a point 6 miles further

ESE.

Kawa Rock (34°58'S., 173°43'E.), on the W side of Whangaroa Bay, is flat-topped and 2m high. Several rocks lie 0.2

mile NW of Kawa Rock.

10.11 Taupo Bay (34°59'S., 173°43'E.) is entered between a point

about 0.5 mile S of Kawa Rock and False Head, about 1.2

miles SE. False Head is a prominent bluff headland. 

10.11 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage in Taupo Bay in W winds, in a depth of 9.1m, 0.3 mile

offshore. Closer in the depths shoal rapidly. The bottom at this

anchorage is mostly sand and fine gravel.

10.11 North Head, the W entrance point of Whangaroa Harbor, lies

1 mile ESE of False Head. South Head, the E entrance point,

lies about 0.5 mile ESE of North Head.

10.11 Caution.—Frenchman Rock, 44m high, lies 3 miles ENE of

South Head. A depth of 11.2m lies 0.3 mile NE of Frenchman

Rock. Arrow Rocks, which lie 2 miles ENE of South Head, are

surrounded by rocks which should be given a wide berth due to

strong tidal currents in this vicinity.

10.11 Stephenson Island, 129m high, lies in the entrance to Whangaroa Bay. Cone Island lies off the NW side of Stephenson Island, and the narrow gap between is blocked by a reef that dries

2.5m, Kawhiti Reef, which dries 0.5m, lies 0.2 mile NW of the

NW tip of Cone Island. Also, three rocks, 13 to 20m high, lie

off the SW side of Stephenson Island. On the W side of the island are two bays blocked by rocks; off the E and NE sides,

several rocks lie close offshore.

10.11 Huahine Shoal, with a depth of 11.7m, lies 3.5 miles NNE of

the NW tip of Stephenson Island.

10.11 Tides—Currents.—Within Whangaroa Bay and off this

part of the coast, the current sets W with the flood and E with

the ebb. A section of this current runs SW through the channel

between North Head and South Head into Whangaroa Harbor

on the flood and NE on the ebb.

10.11 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain good

shelter from S winds anywhere between Stephenson Island and

the coast, in depths of 16.5 to 20.1m. The bottom here is usually sand, stones, or broken shells.

10.11 Taurarga Bay, E of the entrance to Whangaroa harbor, offers

safe anchorage for small vessels, in a depth of 7.5m. A reef,

which dries 1.5m, lies on the E side of the approach, 0.2 mile

WNW of Te Arina Point, the E entrance point.

10.12 Whangaroa Harbor (35°02'S., 173°44'E.) (World

Port Index No. 55000) is a fishing and small craft harbor available to those vessels with local knowledge. The entrance to the

harbor, at the S end of Whangaroa Bay between North Head

and South Head, is through a narrow channel, 0.5 mile long,

with high and steep-to sides. 

10.12 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents within the entrance attain

rates of 1.5 to 2 knots, and in the harbor of 0.5 knot. In the

main channel, N and S of Peach Island, eddies and irregular

currents are not unusual.

10.12 Depths—Limitations.—The least depth in the 0.5 mile long

channel is 16.2m, and within the entrance, depths are mostly irregular. A least depth of 7.8m can be carried as far as the wharf

at Whangaroa, 2.5 miles within the entrance.

10.12 Whangaroa Wharf has a depth of 5m alongside its outer end,

and has berths for two small vessels. This wharf extends NW

from a point abreast the town of Whangaroa.

10.12 The shore immediately E of the entrance of Whangaroa Harbor is indented by Tauranga Bay. Tauranga Bay affords anchorage, in a depth of 7.5m, to those small vessels with local

knowledge.
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 221

Pub. 127

10.12 Aspect.—In the vicinity of the entrance to Whangaroa Harbor, the land is high;the coast is steep and cliffy. Around the

harbor, except for the head, the land is high and steep. Deep

fissures penetrate the shore and cubical masses of rock are

stacked upon each other, particularly at the head of Pekapeka

Bay. St. Peters and St. Pauls, two prominent cupola-shaped

hills, are located on opposite sides of the harbor, about 2.5

miles within the entrance.

10.12 Peach Island, about 108m high, prominent and steep-to, lies

0.7 mile within the entrance.

10.12 Anchorage.—Pekapeka Bay (35°01'S., 173°45'E.) lies on

the W side of the harbor close W of the entrance and affords

the best anchorage. Two rocks, which almost cover at HW and

are each marked by a beacon, lie in Pekapeka Bay. with deep

water between. The E rock lies 0.5 mile W of the harbor entrance and the W rock 0.1 mile further WNW. A shoal bank,

with a least depth of 5.9m at its outer end, projects 0.2 mile N

from the S entrance of Pekapeka Bay. Between this bank and

the above rocks there is a channel 150m wide with depths of at

least 10m.

10.12 Vessels with local knowledge entering Pekapeka Bay pass

about 100m S of the above two rocks and anchor, in a depth of

9.1m, about 0.2 mile W of them. This is a good anchorage out

of the tidal currents and free from eddies. Additionally, there is

anchorage E of the above two rocks, in depths of 12.8 to

14.6m, however, this anchorage is barely out of the tidal currents or swell which runs through the entrance with strong E

winds.

10.12 Vessels with local knowledge can also find anchorage within

one of the three bays on the E side of the harbor entrance, almost out of the tidal currents. A bar, with a depth of 6.2m, obstructs the entrance to the N bay N of Peach Island.

10.12 Secure anchorage was reported in N to NE gales, and also in

SW gales, in a depth of 14.6m, sand and mud, about 0.6 mile

SSW of Peach Island.

10.12 The head of Whangaroa Harbor, S of Red Islet, is shallow

and mud flats dry about 0.5 mile offshore. 

10.13 East Bay lies about 3.2 miles NE of the entrance of

Whangaroa Harbor. A rock, with a depth of less than 2m, lies

in the center of the entrance of East Bay, 0.7 mile SE of

Frenchman Rock.

10.13 Flat Island (34°59'S., 173°52'E.), 30m high and bare, lies

about 2.5 miles E of Frenchman Rock. Although the N tip of

Flat Island has the appearance of a shelving point, there is a

depth of 31m about 0.2 mile off it. A depth of 19.3m lies about

0.5 mile N of Flat Island. Motuekaiti Island, 29m high, lies

halfway between Flat Island and the shore.

10.13 Opounui Point (35°01'S., 173°53'E.), 74m high, is a rocky

headland that lies about 2.2 miles SE of Flat Island. A rock, 1m

high, lies 0.2 mile N of the point.

10.13 The coast SE from Opounui Point, about 1.5 miles to the N

entrance of Matauri Bay, is generally bold and cliffy, and indented with some small sandy coves. The W portion of Matauri

Bay is a beach on which there is generally surf. 

10.13 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, in a depth of 4m, in Matauri Bay. Motuiwi Islet, steep,

flat-topped, and 51m high, lies 1.5 miles SE of the S end of

Matauri Bay.

10.13 The Cavalli Islands are a group of islands which lie about 3.5

miles SE of Flat Island. The group is separated from the shore

SW by Cavalli Passage, which is about 1 mile wide in places.

The largest of the group is Motukawanui Island, which rises to

a height of 177m. 

10.13 Anchorage.—Small vessels with local knowledge can, in

good weather, find anchorage in the sandy bay on the SW side

of Motukawanui. Taheke Rock, with a depth of 8m, lies about

2 miles NE of the N tip of Motukawanui Island. Additionally,

Motukawanui Island is bordered on its N and E sides, within a

distance of 1.5 miles, by a group of high islets with several

rocks among them. A light is shown from the E end of Nukutaunga Islet. Nukutaunga Islet lies 0.7 mile NE of the N tip of

Motukawanui Island.

10.14 Motukawaiti Island (Step Island), which lies about 1

mile S of Motukawanui Island, is steep, rocky, and prominent,

its summit rising to about 115m. The islets of Piraunui and Kahangaro lie 0.7 mile and 0.2 mile W, respectively, of Motukawaiti Island. Between Motukawaiti Island and Motukawanui Island lies a group of islets and rocks making it impassable.

10.14 Cavalli Passage, which is only usable by small vessels with

local knowledge, lies between Motukawanui Island and Motukawaiti Island on the E and the shore to the W. The narrowest

section of this passage lies between the N entrance of Matauri

Bay and a shoal, with a least depth of 2.3m, that projects W

from Piraunui Islet, leaving a channel about 0.1 mile wide,

with a depth of 6m. Mapunanui Reef, which dries and breaks in

strong NW to NE winds, lies in the center of Cavalli Passage,

0.7 mile N of the N entrance point of Matauri Bay.

10.14 Takou Bay (35°05'S., 173°57'E.) is entered between Motuini and Rocky Point, 8 miles SE. This bay affords no shelter.

Foul ground projects 0.4 mile offshore in the vicinity of Rocky

Point. Lion Rock, which from sea has the appearance of a lion

resting, is 50m high and lies near the outer edge of foul ground,

1 mile WNW of Rocky Point. From Rocky Point to Cape Wiwiki, 3.5 miles SE, the shore is cliffy and steep-to with many

small foul coves indenting the coast.

The Bay of Islands

10.15 The Bay of Islands is entered between Cape Wiwiki

and Cape Brett (35°10'S., 174°20'E.), about 10 miles E. The W

part of the Bay of Islands is indented by Te Puna inlet and

Kerikeri inlet. A peninsula projects about 3.5 miles NW from

the S shore of the bay, on the W side of which is Port Russell,

the main anchorage. Vessels with local knowledge and moderate draft can obtain anchorage in the E part of the bay among

the many islands, together with the peninsula extending off the

SE shore. The Bay of Islands area is frequently used for visits

by large cruise vessels during the southern hemisphere summer. These vessels anchor in the shelter of the inner Bay of Islands and run passengers ashore using tenders to Russell

Wharf, Paihia Wharf, or Waitangi Wharf. There are four anchorages located in the inner Bay of Islands. 

10.15 Winds—Weather.—The land breeze is reported to be strong

at times. Strong E and NE winds in front of a depression are reported to raise a sea which breaks heavily over Brampton

Bank, especially during the ebb with heavy freshets from the

river.
222 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

10.15 Tides—Currents.—For the most part, tidal currents within

the Bay of Islands are weak, with the exception of the narrow

entrances to rivers where their rate is 1 to 2.5 knots. Vessels

heading up the coast often experience a set offshore between

Cape Brett and North Cape.

Pilotage.—See the port description for Opau in paragraph

10.23 for details on pilotage. Northland Regional Council, the

Harbor Authority for the Bay of Islands, provides the pilot service and can be reached, as follows:

1. Telephone: 9-438-4639

2. E-mail: mailroom@nrc.govt.nz

10.16 West side of the Bay of Islands.—Cape Wiwiki

(35°09'S., 174°08'E.) is a bold, steep promontory that rises at

Mataka, 0.7 mile SW, to a height of 257m. Mataka is a darkcolored hill that rises abruptly on its N and E sides; the S slope

being grassy nearly to the summit.

10.16 Harakeke Island, 91m high, is high and rugged, being almost

connected to the cape W by rocks and islets. Two rocks, 30m

and 1m high, respectively, lie 0.2 to 0.3 mile NNE of its E tip.

10.16 Tikitiki Islet (Ninepin Islet), 42m high, is a black pinnacle

rock which lies about 0.5 mile ENE of the E tip of Harakeke Island. The passage between the rocks off Harakeke Island and

Tikitiki Islet is about 0.2 mile wide with depths of 19.4m. A

rock, 0.9m high, lies 150m SSW of Tikitiki Islet.

10.16 Howe Point lies 1 mile S of Cape Wiwiki; midway between

them is a round-topped cliffy peninsula, 55m high, that is connected to the shore by a low neck.

10.16 Moturoa Island, 77m high, lies about 2.5 miles SW of Howe

Point. The common approach to either Te Puna Inlet or Kerikeri Inlet is between Howe Point and the E tip of Moturoa Island. The W tip of Moturoa Island is separated from the shore,

0.2 mile W, by Kent Passage, with a depth of 2.4m, which is

used by small vessels with local knowledge.

10.16 Black Rocks, off the eastern end of Moturoa Island, are a

group of black, smooth, and flat-topped rocks, and are 7 to

17m high; a rock, which dries 1.5m, lies 0.1 mile E of the

group.

10.16 A rock, 0.6m high, lies on the N side of the approach, 0.3

mile SW of Howe Point. A shoal, with a depth of about 5.2m,

lies between the rock and the point. Onslow Rock, with a depth

of 5.2m, lies 0.7 mile S of Howe Point.

10.16 Rangihoua Bay (35°11'S., 174°06'E.) is entered about 1.5

miles W of Howe Point. 

10.16 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage between the E entrance point of Rangihoua Bay and

the E entrance point of Wairoa Bay, 0.7 mile WSW, in depths

of 9 to 11m, sand, open to E winds. A cone-shaped islet, 27m

high, lies about 0.7 mile SE of the E entrance point of Wairoa

Bay. A rock, which dries, lies halfway between the islet and the

point.

10.17 The Te Pahi Islands (35°11'S., 174°05'E.) is a group

comprised of four islands, ranging from 36 to 47m high. These

islands lie on a shallow flat along with several rocks. Poraenui

Point, 0.5 mile S of the W entrance of Wairoa Bay, is the S tip

of an isthmus with an isolated hummock on it, 85m high.

10.17 The Brothers, two rocks, lie at the inner part of the approach

to Te Puna and Kerikeri Inlets. The N rock, marked by a beacon, dries 1.2m, and lies 0.2 mile SSW of Poraenui Point, The

S rock, which dries 0.3m, lies 0.1 mile further SSW. A 4.9m

rocky patch lies 100m N of the N rock. Slains Castle, a rock,

lies 0.2 mile W of The Brothers, and has a depth of 2.1m.

10.17 Kerikeri Inlet is entered between Tareha Point and Days

Point, about 1.5 miles SE. The entrance to this inlet is encumbered by Motupapa (Cocked Hat) Island, which is low and

stony. A rocky shoal, with a least depth of 4.6m, projects 0.1

mile E from the E tip of Motupapa. The entrance to the inlet,

which requires local knowledge for use, lies N of Motupapa Island, as the area S of Motupapa is encumbered by extensive

flats and stony patches.

Mataka bearing 195°, distant about 5 miles

The Bay of Islands—Anchorages

Anchorage 

Number Latitude Longitude Charted depth Maximum draft

1 35°15.28'S 174°06.27'E 11.8m 9.44m

2 35°15.09'S 174°05.87'E 12.0m 9.60m

3 35°15.76'S 174°06.62'E 10.0m 8.00m

4 35°16.90'S 174°06.75'E 12.0m 5.50m
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 223

Pub. 127

10.17 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge obtain anchorage, in a depth of 9.1m, mud, about 0.7 mile W of Motupapa

Island. Also, anchorage, in a depth of 12.8m, may be found in

the bay on the W side of Days Point.

10.17 Te Puna Inlet (35°12'S., 174°03'E.) is entered between Poraenui Point and Tareha Point, 1 mile W. 

10.17 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge will find Te Puna Inlet to be a spacious well-sheltered anchorage, with depths

of 9 to 11m for 1 mile within the entrance where it shoals to

7.3m. Additionally, vessels with local knowledge can anchor,

in a depth of 3.7m, within one of the two bays lying 1.5 and 2

miles NW, respectively, of Tareha Point.

10.17 Caution.—A dangerous submerged rock has been reported

(1991) to lie about 0.2 mile S of Tareha Point.

10.18 East side of the Bay of Islands.—Cape Brett

(35°10'S., 174°20'E.) is shaped by Otuwhanga Island, 127m

high, which is separated from the mainland by a narrow boat

passage. From the cape, the land rises in a series of ridges to

Cape Brett Mountain, bush-covered and 361m high, which is

the highest land in the vicinity. The coast 5 miles SW from

Cape Brett is mostly steep, cliffy, and pocked.

10.18 Piercy Island (Motukokako Island), lying about 0.4 mile

NNE of Cape Brett, is a sheer island, 148m high, which is perforated by a hole that is open on ESE and WNW bearings.

Tiheru Island, 42m high, lies close off the S tip of Piercy Island. A rocky shoal, with a depth of 7.9m, lies 0.1 mile WNW

of the NW tip of Cape Brett.

10.18 Bird Rock (Mahenotapuku) lies about 1.7 miles W of Piercy

Island and is generally black, except in summer, when it is colored white by bird guano. This rock is 11m high and mostly

steep-to on all sides except the NW, off which is a rocky patch

with a depth of 13.1m.

10.18 Motutara Rock, a double rock 7m high, lies about 2 miles

SW of Cape Brett. A rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies

0.2 mile SSE of Motutara. Between this and Motutara Rock is

a channel with a depth of 20m.

10.18 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can find anchorage in the S shore of the inlet within one of the deep bays

and creeks. Te Rawhiti Inlet itself affords good sheltered anchorage for vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 11 to

16.5m, good holding ground, however, the entrances to this inlet have considerably less water.

10.18 The Richards Peninsula, 65m high and grassy, is located

about 2 miles SW of the entrance of Deep Water Cove. Steep

rocky islets lie off each of the Richards Peninsula’s three rugged sides. A rock, which dries 1.8m, lies 0.2 mile E of the N islet off the Richards Peninsula. A rock, 1.2m high, lies 0.1 mile

N of the W islet off the Richards Peninsula. Foul ground

projects about 0.2 mile N and SW of this rock.

10.19 Te Rawhiti Inlet (35°14'S., 174°12'E.) is a body of

water which lies about 7 miles SW of Cape Brett and is enclosed and fronted by six islands and the mainland. 

Urupukapuka Island, 109m high, is the largest and E of the

six islands fronting Te Rawhiti Inlet. Its E tip lies 0.4 mile W of

Te Hue Point (35°13.5'S., 174°15'E.), from which it is separated by Albert Channel.

10.19 Hope Reef lies 0.4 mile N of the E tip of Urupukapuka Island; the sea breaks upon it in moderate weather. A 4.3m shoal

patch and a 2.7m shoal patch lie 0.4 mile NE and 40m E, respectively, of the E tip of the island.

10.19 Te Ao Island, 18m high, lies 0.2 mile E of the S tip of Urupukapuka Island. A bank, with depths of less than 5.5m,

projects 0.5 mile SSW of Te Ao Island.

10.19 Paramena Reef, marked by a lighted beacon, lies about 0.7

mile SW of the SW tip of Urupukapuka Island.

10.19 Waewaetorea Island (35°12'S., 174°13'E.), 83m high, and

Okahu Island, 73m high, both lie within 1 mile NW of the NW

tip of Urupukapuka Island. 

10.19 Red Head (35°12'S., 174°12'E.), surmounted by a beacon, is

a conspicuous, steep, red cliff, 77m high, lying on the NW end

of Okahu Island. Two rocks, 1m high, lie close together 0.2

mile WNW of Red Head. 

10.19 Te Nunuhe Rock, awash, lies about 0.6 mile NW of Red

Head. All of the rocks and the islets off Red Head are covered

by the red sector of Fraser Rock Light.

10.19 Motukiekie Island, 81m high, lies about 0.7 mile W of the

NW tip of Urupukapuka Island. Moturua Island, 98m high, lies

SW of Motukiekie Island, from which it is separated by a shallow flat. Pakatahi Island, 14m high, lies near the tip of a reef

that projects 0.3 mile SE from the SE side of Moturua Island.

10.20 Motuarohia Island (35°14'S., 174°10'E.), 81m high,

is a wildlife sanctuary that lies with its E tip 1 mile W of the S

tip of Moturua Island. A spit, with depths of less than 4.6m,

coral and shell, projects 0.3 mile S from the S side of Motuarohia Island.

10.20 Oturori Rock (Capstan Rock), a coral pinnacle which dries,

lies about 1.7 miles WSW of the E tip of Motuarohia Island.

10.20 Anchorage.—Renown Anchorage is situated between Motuarohia Island and Tapeka Point (35°15'S., 174°07'E.). This

anchorage, which requires local knowledge, has depths of 23.8

to 25.6m, fine sand, gravel, and shell and is sheltered from all

but N or NE winds. Additionally, this is the best anchorage for

large vessels.

10.20 Vessels with local knowledge find anchorage, in a depth of

6.9m, 0.5 mile within the entrance of Parekura Bay. Parekura

Bay lies between Wairiki Point (35°15'S., 174°14'E.) and a

point about 0.4 mile SW. Also, Waipiro Bay, a cove on the W

side of Parekura Bay, affords good anchorage, in a depth of

4.6m.

10.20 Motukauri, 39m high, lies on a reef projecting 0.3 mile W

from the W tip of the Orokawa Peninsula, 2.2 miles W of the

W entrance of Parekura Bay.

10.20 Manawaora Bay is entered between the W tip of the Orokawa Peninsula and Tarawatangata Point, 1 mile SSW. A bank

projects 0.6 mile W from Motukauri Island, which lies in the

entrance to Manawaora Bay.

10.20 Anchorage.—Orokawa Bay lies between the S tip of the

Orokawa Peninsula and a point 0.5 mile ESE. Vessels with local knowledge can obtain good anchorage here, in a depth of

5.8m.

10.21 Te Rawhiti Inlet—Entrance Channels.—Albert

Channel is the E entrance into Te Rawhiti Inlet, between Urupukapuka Island and the Richards Peninsula. The channel is

mostly used by small vessels with local knowledge, as the

ground is foul. There are shoal patches in the entrance and a

heavy swell frequently sets in.
224 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

10.21 Another passage to the inlet leads between Urupukapuka Island and the islands NW, and Motukiekie Island SW. This

channel has a navigable width of 0.3 mile over the bar between

Poroporo Island and the rocks SE of Motukiekie Island in

depths of about 5.2m. Within Te Rawhiti Inlet, close S of the

bar, depths increase to 12.8m.

10.21 Directions.—Vessels with local knowledge approaching the

channel between Urupukapuka and the islands NW from the

NW, should proceed in mid-channel between the islands, with

the islet close W of Poroporo Island bearing 144°, to pass 0.1

mile NE of the easternmost of the flat rocks off the SE tip of

Motukiekie Island. When the SE end of Motukiekie Island

bears 285°, steer 195° across the bar. When in depth of 12.8m,

vessels should head for the anchorage (see above), avoiding the

shoal and Paramena Reef, S of Poroporo Island.

10.21 Vessels with local knowledge utilizing the passage between

Motuarohia Island and Moturua Island should enter by heading

for the left tangent of Tokatokahau Point, bearing 134°, and

pass 0.1 mile SW of the drying rock off the SW side of Moturua Island. When the S tip of Moturua Island bears 044°, head

for the anchorage.

10.21 Vessels with local knowledge entering the W entrance to Te

Rawhiti Inlet head for Te Uwhi (35°16'S., 174°11'E.), bearing

125°, passing about 0.5 mile NE of Oturori (Capstan Rock).

When Tokatokahau Point bears 091°, with Te Korowhiti Rock

just open N of it, vessels should alter course E and head for it.

This course leads close S of the shore bank that projects from

the S side of Motuarohia Island. When the right tangent of the

islet close E of Motuarohia Island bears 028°, a vessel should

change course ENE and head for the E end of Poroporo Island,

bearing 073°, and anchor SE of Moturua Island.

10.22 Port Russell (35°16'S., 174°07'E.) is entered W of

Tapeka Point, and leads between it and Brampton Bank. Within

the approaches to Port Russell there are depths of 10 to 20m,

and of 7 to 11m in the anchorages. The port, which requires local knowledge for entry, projects about 2.5 miles SSE to

Veronica Channel, which leads to Opua.

10.22 Manawaora, a low, shelving projection of rocky and swampy

ground, lies about 2 miles W of Tapeka Point. 

10.22 Brampton Bank, with depths of less than 5m, projects about

1 mile E of Manawaora. The bank breaks in moderate swells.

A prominent flagstaff, 45m high, with a monument 0.1 mile

WSW, lies about 1.5 miles S of the N tip of Manawaora.

10.22 The Waitangi River is entered between a point about 1.7

miles S of the N tip of Manawaora and Ti Point (35°16'S.,

174°05'E.), 0.1 mile SW. A directional light leads through the

entrance to Port Russell, between Brampton Bank and Fraser

Rock.

10.22 Kororareka Bay, located on the E shore, is entered between

Kororaeka Point (35°16'S., 174°07'E.) and a point about 0.6

mile SE. The town of Russell is situated on the E side of this

bay. Flagstaff Hill, 98m high, with a prominent flagstaff 0.1

mile NW of the summit, is located 0.4 mile ENE of Kororaeka

Point.

10.22 Anchorage.—The best anchorage for vessels with local

knowledge is in Renown Anchorage. However, with NE winds,

vessels may anchor in the quarantine anchorage, about 0.5 mile

W of Tapeka Point and Kororaeka Point, and clear of the fairway.

10.22 Anchorage is prohibited due to the presence of submarine

cables which lie in an area that extends SW from Russell to the

opposite shore.

10.22 Veronica Channel, which commences about 1.2 miles SW of

Russell, leads to Opua through a channel, about 0.1 mile wide,

with depths of 10.6 to 22m The least available depth over the

extensive bar N of Veronica Channel should be obtained from

Northland Port Corporation (NZ) Ltd. The channel through the

bar is no longer maintained by dredging. In 2003, the channel

had a controlling depth of 5.7m.

Opua (35°19'S., 174°07'E.)

World Port Index No. 55030

10.23 Opua is situated at the SE termination of Veronica

Channel. Opua Wharf is primarily used for small charter operations and local fishing vessels.

Tides—Currents

10.23 Tidal currents of 2 to 3 knots may be experienced in Veronica Channel and off Opua Wharf. The flood current sets off the

wharf; the ebb current sets on the wharf.

Depths—Limitations

10.23 Opua Wharf is 214m long and can accommodate vessels, on

its E side, up to to 198m long and a draft 8.5m; the W side can

accommodate vessels up to 76m long and a draft of 2.5m.

Docking or undocking at Opua can be carried out at all hours.

Vessels that arrive on the flood are generally berthed bow out.

Vessels berthed bow in are subject to draft limitations and undocked only on the flood. The maximum permissible draft in

the approach to Opua Wharf is 8.5m at HW and 6.4m at LW.

Pilotage

10.23 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 100 grt S of a line

from Tapeka Point to Black Rocks. Vessels should send their

ETA 24 hours in advance. Immediately before arriving at Opua

Wharf, vessels should contact Harbor Control on VHF channel

16 or 63 to receive berthing instructions.

10.23 The pilot boards 1 mile N of Fraser Rock Light. In bad

weather, the pilot boards W of the conspicuous flagstaff close

N of Russell. 

Anchorage

10.23 Vessels with local knowledge can obtain restricted anchorage off Opua Wharf. However, the bottom is reported rocky

Location Controlling 

depth

Nature of 

bottom

Entrance to port 4.6m

Shell dredged channel 7.0m Sand and shell.

Outside anchorage 14.6m Coral and shell.

Approach to berth 11.3m Mud and shell.
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 225

Pub. 127

and the holding ground poor. 

10.23 Anchorage is prohibited in the vicinity of the submarine cables that cross the channel about 0.2 mile NW of the head of

the wharf.

Directions

10.23 The Bay of Islands—Approaches to Opua.—Vessels approaching the Bay of Islands from the S of Cape Brett, with local knowledge, should round Piercy Island at a distance of

about 0.5 mile. Course should then be shaped to pass 0.2 mile

N of Bird Rock and 1 mile N of Te Nunuhe Rock. When Motukiekie Island is well open W of the 26m high islet, close SW

of Okahu Island, Te Nunuhe Rock will be passed.

10.23 Vessels entering the Bay of Islands along its W shore should

keep in mind that Howe Point (35°10'S., 174°07'E.) can be approached fairly closely, but the shoal, 0.3 mile SW, must be

avoided. A good mark to remain in mid-channel, between

Howe Point and Onslow Rock, is to keep the S islet of the Te

Pahi Islands in line with the hummock on Poraenui Point, bearing about 251°, keeping that course until Howe Point is in line

with Tikitiki Island astern, when course should be shaped SW.

10.23 Te Puna Inlet.—Vessels with local knowledge pass between

Poraenui Point and The Brothers, passing about 100m off the

point in a depth of 9.1m, and then head to pass 0.1 mile off

Tareha Point. Alternately, vessels can proceed via the channel

between Slains Castle Rock and Tareha Point, passing about

0.1 mile S to The Brothers and then steering 284° for the high

rocky islet (Ti Korangi Islet), 0.3 mile SW of Tareha Point.

This course leads midway between the shoal extending from

Motupapa and Slains Castles Rock; when Tareha Point bears

334°, course should be changed to 353°.

10.23 Port Russell.—Vessels with local knowledge entering Port

Russell should, when about 1.5 miles N of Fraser Rock Light,

change course to make the Waitangi River directional light, and

when about 1 mile SW of Fraser Rock Light, course should be

changed to make Veronica Channel, the Waitangi River, or Kororareka Bay anchorage. Vessels heading to Opua should pass

between the lighted beacons that mark the dredged channel in

the approaches to Veronica Channel, remaining on the 172.5°

range line until 0.5 mile NW of Okiato Point (35°18.4'S.,

174°07'E.). 

10.24 Te Roa Bay (35°14'S., 174°19'E.) is entered about 3.5

miles SW of Cape Brett, and the coast between is cliffy, indented, and rises steeply to bush-covered hills. 

10.24 Motukorari Rock, 6.1m high, lies 0.2 mile SE of the N entrance point of Te Roa Bay. The S entrance of Te Roa Bay is

made up by the E tip of a thin, steep isthmus, 113m high,

which separates the bay from Whangamumu Harbor. Vessels

with local knowledge can find anchorage in the center of Te

Roa Bay, during W winds, in depths of 18.3 to 25.6m, fine sand

and shell. Motukumara Rock, 65m high, lies close E of the S

entrance point of the bay.

10.24 Whangamumu Harbor (35°15'S., 174°18'E.) is entered between the S entrance of Te Roa Bay and the NW tip of the

Whangamumu Peninsula, which is high and grassy. Flat Rock,

23m high, lies about 0.1 mile SE of the N entrance to Whangamumu Harbor, and between them lie several other islets and

dangers. A 12m rocky patch lies about 0.3 mile S of Flat Rock.

10.24 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can find safe

anchorage within a small basin whose entrance lies about 0.5

mile SW of Flat Rock. This anchorage, in depths of 5.5 to

9.1m, is sheltered from all but strong NE winds. The shore

bank projects about 0.2 mile from the beach at the W end of the

basin, and it has depths of less than 5m. Also, there is an abandoned whaling station and ruined pier on the N shore of the basin.

10.24 Caution.—An area in which explosives are dumped lies

about 40 miles NE of Cape Brett.

10.24 Home Point (35°19'S., 174°23'E.), red, steep, and flattopped, represents the E tip of a peninsula, 140m high, that is

connected to the shore by a low neck of marshy ground. Bland

Bay lies about 1.2 miles S of Home Point; it is useless as an anchorage and should not be entered.

10.24 Danger Rock (35°21'S., 174°24'E.) lies about 1.7 miles SE

of Home Point and is a 6.1m high, black, pinnacle rock. This

rock is mostly steep-to, but for a rock close SW of it; there are

depths of 51m 0.3 mile E of Danger Rock.

10.25 Whangaruru Harbor (35°24'S., 174°22'E.) (World

Port Index No. 55040) is well-sheltered, easy of access, and

can accommodate vessels of moderate draft. The entrance to

this harbor lies between Cape Home (35°23'S., 174°23'E.) and

a point 1.2 miles SW.

10.25 Pah Hill, 49m high, lies on low land that separates Whangaruru Harbor from Bland Bay, and it is flat-topped and terraced. Vessels will find Pah Hill to be a good mark to steer for

when anchoring.

10.25 Bland Rocks, 24m high, lie 0.3 mile off the S entrance point

of Whangaruru Harbor to which they are connected to by sunken reefs. A bank, with a depth of 4.6m at its E tip, projects 0.1

mile NE from Bland Rocks. 

10.25 Rugged Point, 18m high and rugged, is located about 0.5

mile NW of Bland Rocks. A rocky islet, 12m high, lies 0.5

mile NW of Rugged Point. This islet is connected to shore by a

ledge which dries.

10.25 Motukowhai Islet is comprised of two islets, 18 and 15m

Opua
226 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

high, with bushes on its summit, lying 1.2 miles NNW of Rugged Point. This double islet, connected to shore at low water, is

a good mark to head for when entering Whangaruru Harbor. 

10.25 Orapa Rock, with a least depth of 0.6m, lies 0.2 mile N of

the Motukowhai Islets. Hongaio Rock, awash, lies about 0.5

mile NE of Orapa Rock.

10.25 Henry Island, 37m high, lies in the entrance to Whangaruru

Harbor about 0.6 mile S of Cape Home. This island and the

reef projecting S from it, provides shelter to the harbor from E

winds.

10.25 Tides—Currents.—Currents attain rates of 0.5 knot in the

narrowest part of the entrance; currents in the anchorage are

barely discernible.

10.25 Directions.—Vessels possessing local knowledge pass N or

S of Henry Island; the S passage is much preferred by large

vessels approaching the outer anchorage. The passage N of

Henry Island is about 0.2 mile wide, with a least depth of 8.5m

in the fairway; the bottom is rocky and uneven.

10.25 To utilize the passage S of Henry Island, vessels should steer

to pass 0.3 mile S of the reefs S of Henry Island, where there is

a depth of 13.8m, and head for Motukowhai Islet, bearing

322°, and anchor, in a depth of about 11m, about 0.3 mile E of

Rugged Point. A more sheltered anchorage, in a depth of about

6.4m, lies about 1 mile above Rugged Point, E of Motukowhai

Island. The channel to this particular anchorage has a depth of

6.1m and is only 0.1 mile wide. Vessel with a draft of more

than 4.3 draft are to pass at least 0.2 mile NE of Bland Rocks

and steer for the gap on Motukowhai Islet on a 329° bearing

until the rocky islet, lying 0.5 mile NW of Rugged Point, bears

182°, when the vessel should keep the islet, astern, on that

bearing or steer for Pah Hill, bearing 002°, and anchor E of

Motukowhai Islet.

10.26 Mimiwhangata Bay (35°27'S., 174°25'E.), located in

the SE part of Whangaruru Harbor, it is entered between Paparahi Point and a point 1 mile E. A spit, with a depth of 6.4m

over its outer end, projects about 0.5 mile NW from Paparahi

Point. Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage in

Mimiwhangata Bay in S winds, in a depth of 11m, about 0.7

mile E of Paparahi Point.

10.26 Rimariki Island (Wide Berth Island) (35°26'S., 174°27'E.)

lies about 1.2 miles E of the E entrance point of Mimiwhangata

Bay and is almost connected to the mainland S by a reef. Foul

ground projects 0.5 mile NW and 0.2 mile E and 1.2 miles S

from Rimariki Island. Motutara Point, 63m high, is the N entrance of Sandy Bay and is located about 5.5 miles S of Rimariki Island. 

10.26 Elizabeth Reef, the N of which dries 2.1m, extends 1.2 miles

NE of Motutara Point. The outer edge of the reef is steep-to. A

rocky 9.1m patch lies about 0.5 mile S of Elizabeth Reef.

10.26 Sandy Bay, which only affords temporary anchorage, lies

between Motutara Point and Otara Point, about 2.5 miles SSE.

This anchorage is only available in smooth water, during offshore winds, in depths of 9 to 18.3m, sand. A reef, which dries

1.8m, lies on the tip of a spit that projects 0.5 mile NE from the

head of Sandy Bay. Dowd Rock, with a depth of less than

1.8m, lies 0.6 mile E of Otara Point; it breaks in any swell.

10.26 Tutukaka Head (South Gable) (35°37'S., 174°33'E.), 92m

high, is the southernmost of three conspicuous gable-shaped

promontories. Tutukaka Head lies about 4 miles SE of Dowd

Rock. The other two gables, North and Middle Gable are 59m

and 82m high, respectively.

10.27 The Poor Knights Islands (35°28'S., 174°44'E.), a

wildlife sanctuary, lie about 12.5 miles NE of Tutukaka Head

and are comprised of two islands, 203m and 215m high, with

several islets and rocks between. These islands are rugged,

cliffy, with scrub-covered summits and are very steep-to, being

mostly clear of off-lying dangers.

10.27 Poor Knights Rocks (High Peak Rocks) are a group of three

pinnacle islets that lie about 4 miles S of the Poor Knights Islands. A rock, which breaks, lies 0.1 mile S of the S islet.

10.27 Sugarloaf Rock, an islet 87m high, lies about 1.5 miles SW

of Poor Knights Rock, with a rock close off its SE side.

10.27 Tutukaka Harbor (35°37'S., 174°33'E.) is only usable by

small vessels with local knowledge and is entered between Tutukaka Head and Rauhomaumau, a cliffy islet, 0.6 mile S. Tutukaka Head is only joined to the shore W by a thin sandy neck

over which the sea breaks. Rauhomaumau Islet, 49m high, lies

on a reef that projects 0.6 mile E from the shore. The inner S

entrance point lies about 0.6 mile NW of Rauhomaumau Islet.

From this position, rocks project 0.2 mile towards the N entrance point, leaving a 0.1 mile wide channel with depths of

8.5m in the center. Phillips Island, 26m high, lies in the W part

of the harbor.

10.27 Directions.—Tutukaka harbor is only usable by small vessels with local knowledge. Due to unpredictable tidal currents

and a heavy swell that sets onto the rocks on the S side of the

entrance, caution must be exercised upon entering the harbor.

Vessels approaching from the S pass about 1 mile off Rauhomaumau Islet and enter in mid-channel between Tutukaka

Head and the outermost above-water rock projecting NE for

the inner S entrance point. The rocks at the entrance shelter the

harbor from E winds.

Entrance to Whangaruru Harbor, bearing about 240°
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 227

Pub. 127

10.27 Anchorage.—Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, in a depth of 7.3m, about 0.3 mile E of Phillip

Island.

10.28 Ngunguru Bay is entered between Motutara Island,

34m high and cone-shaped, and Taiharuru Head, 5 miles SSE.

Submerged rocks project 0.2 mile S from Motutara Islet, and a

4.9m patch lies 0.4 mile SW of the same islet. 

10.28 The entrance to the Ngunguru River lies in the NW part of

Ngunguru Bay, however, it can only be utilized by small vessels with local knowledge in good weather.

10.28 Kumi, a rocky point, projects from the foot of Whakareora, a

cone-shaped hill, about 1.5 mile SW of the N entrance point of

Ngunguru Bay. A reef projects 0.3 mile S from the point.

Taiharuru Head (35°43'S., 174°34'E.) is long and grassy,

rising to a steep knoll, 63m high, at its tip. A sharp coneshaped islet, 30m high, lies 0.3 mile SSE of Taiharuru Head,

and between them are rocks. A rocky 5.5m patch lies about 1.7

miles WNW of Taiharuru Head with rocky heads within 0.3

mile N and 0.6 mile NE. A rock awash, a 7.9m patch, and a

16.4m rocky shoal lie 0.8 mile NW, 0.6 mile NNW, and 1.5

miles E, respectively, off Taiharuru Head.

10.28 Anchorage.—Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, during offshore winds, in depths of 5.5 to 7.3m,

sand, in a cove close outside the entrance to the Ngunguru River. Additionally, Ngunguru Bay affords anchorage in its central

part, during offshore winds, in depths of 9 to 18m, sand.

10.28 Kauri Mountain, 245m high, is a round, grassy hill located

about 3.5 miles SSW of Taiharuru Head.

10.28 Regulations.—In order to avoid risk of pollution and damage to the environment surrounding the Poor Knights Islands

wildlife sanctuary, a mandatory Area to be Avoided has been

created.

10.28 The mandatory Area to be Avoided is bounded to the N by a

line drawn from Cape Brett (35°10'S., 174°20'E.) to a position

5 miles offshore of the Poor Knights Islands, then running SW

and terminating at Bream Head. This area is best seen on the

chart.

10.28 All vessels greater than 45m in length should avoid this area.

Exceptions are made for vessels engaged in fishing and vessels

of the Royal New Zealand Navy. Exceptions are also made for

barges under tow, provided the cargo is not oil or other harmful

liquid substances.

10.28 Bream Head (35°51'S., 174°35'E.) is a conspicuous promontory distinguished by its high, rugged, and bush-covered nature. The land rises to 49m about 0.7 mile W of its tip. A

prominent twin crag forms the summit.

10.28 Caution.—Awarua Rock, awash, lies about 4.5 miles NW of

Bream Head. The Bream Islands, 40 and 27m high, lie between

0.7 and 1 mile N of Bream Head. Bream Rock, which breaks,

lies 0.4 mile ENE of the N and larger island.

10.28 Hen and Chickens Group, a wildlife sanctuary, lie on the E

side of Parry Channel, a wide deep fairway, which separates

them from Bream Head and Bream Bay. The N group, the Marotiri Islands (Marotere Islands), are made up of four islands

and some islets. The highest, Whatupuke, is 241m high, with

Lady Alice Island close W and Coppermine Islet close E.

10.28 The Pinnacles, 433m high and prominent, lie near the SW tip

of Taranga Island, about 4 miles S of the Marotiri Islands.

10.28 Sail Rock, a steep, rocky islet, 138m high, lies about 2 miles

S of the SW point of Taranga Island.

10.28 Bream Bay is entered between Bream Head and Bream Tail,

11.5 miles S.

10.29 North part of Bream Bay—Whangarei Harbor.—

The N shore of Bream Bay between Bream Head and Busby

Head, the E entrance point of Whangarei Harbor, 3 miles W, is

backed by Bream Head Range. Mount Lion, 380m, rises about

2.2 miles W of Bream Head. Smugglers Bay, which lies close

E of Busby Head, is not a good anchorage because of its bottom’s rocky nature.

Whangarei Harbor (35°48'S., 174°26'E.)

World Port Index No. 55050

10.30 Whangarei Harbor, the primary port serving North Island N of a line connecting Bream Tail and Kaipara Harbor,

has the deepest natural entrance in the Dominion. The three

ports within the harbor are at Marsden Point, Portland, and Port

Whangarei. 

10.30 Tides—Currents.—From the Whangarei Harbor entrance

to 2.5 miles above Busby Head, the currents attain a rate of 3

knots; while in the main and upper parts of the harbor the rate

is about 1.5 knots. Information concerning height of tide can be

obtained from the signal station.

10.30 Depths—Limitations.—The deep water reaches into a completely-sheltered basin, where there are four separate berthing

areas. There is a least charted depth of 13.4m on the range line

about 1.5 miles SE of Marsden Point, and a depth of 14.6m

charted on the range line 1.6 miles further SE. For vessels proceeding to Marsden Point cargo berths, the controlling depth is

13m, which includes the swing basin off the berths. For vessels

proceeding to Marsden Jetty berth, the controlling depth is

9.3m. From Marsden Point, a draft of 8.2m may be carried to

One Tree Point. From One Tree Point, dredged cuts with a

depth of 8.1m lead to the Port Whangarei wharves. 

10.30 Marsden Point (35°50'S., 174°30'E.) has two oil jetties

which serve the New Zealand Refining Company, in addition

to the three cargo berths owned by Northport Ltd. at Marsden

Point. 

10.30 Marsden Point No. 1 Jetty is a crude oil berth with the capacity to accommodate vessels of up to 304m in length, with a

maximum draft of 15.2m. Petroleum products are handled at

Marsden Point No. 2 Jetty; the berth can accommodate vessels

having a maximum length of 304m. Tankers of over 125,000

dwt, with maximum drafts of 15.2m at HW, can be accommodated at Marsden Point subject to the harbormaster’s approval. 

10.30 Marsden Point East/West Cargo Wharves handle general and

bulk cargo; each has a length of 180m and an alongside depth

of 13m. Marsden Jetty Berth handles general cargo and can accommodate vessels up to 192m in length; it has a depth of 9m

alongside.

10.30 Port Whangarei (35°45'S., 174°21'E.) handles general cargo, including containers and ro-ro vessels. Main Berth 1 and

NorthPort Ltd.

http://www.northport.co.nz
228 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

Main Berth 2 can each accommodate a vessel having a maximum length of 190m and maximum draft of 9.4m. Main Berth

No. 3 handles bulk cargo and has a length of 155m for vessels

having a maximum length of 200m and a maximum draft of

9.4m. Main Berth No. 4 is 122m in length and effects ship repair and maintenance for vessels having a maximum draft of

4.9m. This wharf is home to New Zealand Yachts.

10.30 Portland Cement Wharf (35°48'S., 174°20'E.), which

serves the Golden Bay Cement Company, is situated about 1.5

miles SW of Limestone Island. The channel from Limestone

Island to the Portland Cement Wharf has a depth of 3m. The

cement wharf lies at the outer end of a 0.6 mile long causeway.

The berth on the E wharf face will accept vessels up to 82m in

length and drafts up to 5.6m.

10.30 Shoal Bay, on the N side of the harbor, is entered between

Darch Point and Reserve Point, 2.5 miles NW. McDonald

Bank, a sand bank which dries, lies in the inner part of Shoal

Bay. Snake Bank, which dries 1.2m, lies in the entrance of

Shoal Bay. 

10.30 Shell Bank, with depths less than 5.5m, projects W from

Snake Bank to the mud flats on the W side of the harbor. Shell

Cut Reach, a dredged cut with a depth of 8.1m, leads through

Shell Bank. A channel, through which a depth of 5.5m can be

carried, lies between McDonald Bank and Snake Bank between Darch Point and Reserve Point.

10.30 Aspect.—The S side of Whangarei Harbor is predominantly

low and swampy, while the N shore has many hills of a considerable height. 

Courtesy of Northland Port Corporation

Marsden Point from NW
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 229

Pub. 127

10.30 Manaia, a prominent mountain, 419m high, with several

prominent pinnacle crags on its summit, lies 1 mile NE of Lort

Point (35°40'S., 174°31'E.). Frenchman Islet, 12.5m high, is

steep, cone-shaped, and almost connected to the SW part of

Busby Head.

10.30 In the refinery on Marsden Point (35°50.5'S., 174°29.6'E.)

there is a conspicuous chimney, 104m high, from which red

obstruction lights are shown and 0.1 mile N, another chimney,

62m high, from which a flare is shown.

10.30 A directional light is shown on Marsden Point for the entrance to Whangarei Harbor.

10.30 Sinclair Point is a low, flat, clay point that is located about

1.5 miles W of Marsden Point. One Tree Point, 9.1m high, lies

1 mile further NW, and the coast between forms a line of clay

cliffs.

10.30 Northwest of One Tree Point, the S shore of the harbor recedes and is low, swampy, and lined by mangroves. A prominent clump of trees is located on a point about 1.5 miles WSW

of One Tree Point.

10.30 Limestone Island (35°47'S., 174°22'E.) is grassy, 65m high,

and has a disused wharf and the conspicuous ruins of a cement

works on its SE side. At Limestone Island, the Whangarei harbor separates. Port Whangarei lies at the W entrance of the

Hatea River, about 1.7 miles N of the E tip of Limestone Island, and the town of Portland, about 1.5 miles SW of the same

point.

10.30 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all merchant vessels

over 100 grt, with the exception of exempted vessels and bulk

cement vessels trading at Portland. Pilotage and tug services to

Port Whangarei and Marsden Point are arranged through

Northport Ltd. Vessels should contact the Harbor Superintendent, Whangarei, giving estimated ETA 72 hours in advance, if

possible, but not less than 24 hours prior arrival. The time

should be confirmed or amended not less than 3 hours prior arrival or original the ETA, whichever is earlier.

10.30 Vessels arriving or departing after 1700 on a working day

should apply for a pilot and berthing or unberthing facilities

before 1400, and confirmed before 1530, on that day. On weekends or public holidays, application must be made before 1400

and confirmed before 1530, on the preceding work day.

10.30 Vessels are not permitted to pass each other in the main

channels up harbor from No. 3 Lighted Buoy, 0.3 mile SSW of

Busby Head, unless special permission has been obtained.

10.30 Pilots board about 2 miles SE of Fairway Lighed Beacon. In

bad weather, pilots board near Frenchman Island. In daylight

only, if requested, they will lead vessels through the outer

channel in the pilot boat or will pilot vessels by signals from

the pilot boat. Vessels carrying hazardous cargo are restricted

from this service. The pilot boat is fitted with VHF. Vessels

over 30,000 dwt berth at HW or SW.

10.30 There is a signal tower and mast about 0.5 mile W of Marsden Point, but cannot be seen until the vessel has rounded

Marsden Point. Whangarei Harbor Radio at Marsden Point is

no longer manned, but a 24 hour watch on VHF channels 16

Courtesy of Northland Port Corporation

Port Whangarei
230 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

and 11 is maintained by the New Zealand Refining Company’s

gate security personnel.

10.30 Anchorage.—The Ruakaka River, whose entrance nearly

dries, empties into the sea about 4 miles SSW of Marsden

Point. A prominent chimney, 125m high, painted in red and

white bands, is situated about 1.5 miles N of the entrance to the

Ruakaka River. 

10.30 Anchorage may be found, in depths of 14.6 to 16.5m, sand,

during offshore winds, S of the entrance to the Ruakaka River.

10.30 Anchorage may be obtained SE of Fairway Lighted Buoy, in

depths of 18.3 to 27.4m, sand, good holding ground. Sheltered

anchorage may be found, in depths of 9.8 to 12.8m, about 0.3

mile NW of Passage Island (35°50'S., 174°30'E.).

10.30 Several prohibited anchorage areas, which are best shown on

the chart, project SE from Marsden Point, and NW and NE and

SE from One Tree Point; several prohibited areas are charted E

of Limestone Island.

10.30 The quarantine anchorage lies in an area bound by an arc of a

circle, radius about 3 miles, centered on Frenchman Island

(35°52'S., 174°32'E.).

10.30 A prohibited area, except by the permission of the harbormaster, surrounds the oil refinery berths at Marsden as follows:

From a position about 0.3 mile NW of Marsden Point in a N direction to the W dolphin; then 030° for 126m; then 120° for 0.5

mile; then 120° for 126m to the E dolphin, then 240° to the

shore. 

10.30 Directions.—The seaward approach is easily made and the

channels through the harbor are well-marked. If proceeding to

Portland, round Wellington Rock and proceed as safe navigation permits to the range lights displayed from Portland Wharf.

10.30 Caution.—Mariners are warned that under certain conditions large swells may reduce the underkeel clearance of vessels in the approaches to Whangarei Harbor. Mariners should

navigate deep draft vessels with caution during high swell conditions.

10.30 A prohibited area, with a radius of 100m, surrounds the special light buoy, which lies halfway between Fairway Lighted

Bouy and No. 1 Lighted Buoy.

10.31 The Mokohinau Islands (35°55'S., 175°08'E.) are a

wildlife sanctuary comprised of four islands and several islets

and above-water rocks. The entire group lies roughly 30 miles

E of Bream Bay and 17 miles E of Taranga Island. Burgess Island, the northernmost island, rises to 110m. A light is shown

from the island. Edith Passage, with a depth of 6.1m, separates

Burgess Island from the middle island. A rocky islet, 39.6m

high, lies 2 miles WNW of the NW end of the westernmost island.

10.31 Two dangerous underwater rocks lie 1.7 miles WSW and

SW from Burgess Island Light.

10.31 Fanal Island, 134m high, cliffy, flat-topped, and bush-covered, lies about 2.2 miles SE of Burgess Island. Sunken rocks,

over the outer end of which there is a depth of 1.2m, projects

0.3 mile from the SE tip of the island. A rock, 24.4m high, lies

0.2 mile off the W side of the island. A below-water reef

projects from the island to within 90m of the rock.

10.31 Simpson Rock, 4.9m high, lies about 4.5 miles SSW of Fanal

Island. A shoal, with a depth of 9.8m, lies 0.7 mile N of Simpson Rock.

10.31 Tides—Currents.—It has been reported that in the vicinity

of the Marotiri Islands and in Cradock Channel, a constant set

in a general 140° direction of variable strength is experienced.

After a strong N wind, this current occasionally attains a rate of

2.5 to 3 knots, particularly in the vicinity of the Mokohinau Islands and Cradock Channel.

10.31 Bream Tail (36°03'S., 174°35'E.) represents the S tip of

Bream Bay; the coast SE to Cape Rodney, about 18 miles long,

is comprised of long sandy beaches. McGregor Rock, with a

swept depth of 5.5m, lies about 1.5 miles E of Bream Tail.

10.31 Te Arai Point lies about 7.5 miles SE of Bream Tail and is

rocky and backed by Te Arai Hill, 78.3m high.

10.31 Cape Rodney (36°17'S., 174°49'E.) is a bold and steep-to

promontory, with a cliffy face that is reported radar conspicuous at a distance of 25 miles.

10.31 Tamahunga (Mount Hamilton) is a conspicuous wooded

peak, with a double summit that rises to 438m, about 5.5 miles

WSW of the Cape.

10.31 Anchoring and fishing are prohibited in a marine reserve area 0.7 mile offshore between Cape Rodney and a position 3

miles WNW.

Hauraki Gulf and Off-lying Islands and Dangers

10.32 Jellicoe Channel, the main N entrance to Hauraki

Gulf, lies between Cape Rodney and Little Barrier Island; it is

deep and clear of dangers. Cradock Channel lies between Little

Barrier Island and Great Barrier Island. Horn Rock lies in Cradock Channel between Great Island and Little Barrier Island.

10.32 The primary E entrance to Hauraki Gulf is through Colville

Channel; it also is mostly clear of dangers. Colville Channel is

entered S of the S tip of Great Barrier Island, between it and

Cape Colville, the NW tip of the Moehau Peninsula. Cape

Colville, because of off-lying dangers, should be given a berth

of 1.5 miles.

10.32 A submarine exercise area is situated in Hauraki Gulf.

10.32 Tides—Currents.—Within Hauraki Gulf, tidal currents set

S with the flood and N with the ebb. However, in close proximity to Cape Barrier and Cape Colville, tidal currents set W with

the flood and E with the ebb, attaining rates of 2 to 3 knots at

springs. North of Channel Island, the currents attain rates of 1

to 2 knots at springs.

10.32 Little Barrier Island (36°12'S., 175°05'E.), a wildlife sanctuary, lies with its SW tip about 12 miles ENE of Cape Rodney,

being separated from it by Jellicoe Channel. This steep, almost

inaccessible island rises to Mount Hauturu, its 722m summit.

Horn Rock, awash, lies 4.5 miles SE of the SE tip of Little Barrier Island. The sea breaks over this rock in any sort of a swell.

10.32 Great Barrier Island is separated from Little Barrier Island to

the W, by Cradock Channel, and affords shelter to Hauraki

Gulf from E winds. This mostly thickly-wooded island rises to

620m near the center. The W shore of the island is pocked with

several bays and harbors, open to W winds, but otherwise affording shelter.

10.33 West shore of Great Barrier Island.—Aiguilles Island (36°02'S., 175°24'E.), 144m high, lies close off the N end

of Great Barrier Island to which it is almost connected to by

rocks. The N tip of this island, Needles Point, has off it several

pinnacle rocks, the highest of which is 79m.

10.33 Miners Head is a prominent cliffy bluff, 286m high, that lies
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 231

Pub. 127

about 4 miles SW of Needles Point. Miners Rocks, with a least

depth of 13.4m, lies about 0.6 mile NW of Miners Head and it

has a strong ripple over it. Within a cove close S of Miners

Head, small craft with local knowledge can obtain anchorage

in good weather, in a depth of 11m.

10.33 Katherine Bay is entered between Ahuriri Point and Maunganui Point, about 2 miles SW. Katherine Bay is unsuitable as

an anchorage except in all but the best circumstances.

10.33 Port Abercrombie (36°10'S., 175°19'E.) is entered about

1.7 miles SSW of Maunganui Point. Green Rock, with a depth

of 14.3m, lies about 0.5 mile WSW of the N entrance point of

Port Abercrombie. Several islands shelter this port from the S,

the largest being Kaikoura Island, which rises to 184m at Mitre

Peak. Nelson Islet and Motuhaku Islet are both bold and steepto, lying about 0.1 mile apart, close W of Kaikoura Island.

10.33 Wellington Head is the bluff W tip of Motuhaku Islet and the

S entrance point of Port Abercrombie. A rock, 1.2m high lies

on the outer end of a spit that projects about 0.5 mile N from

the E tip of Motuhaku.

10.33 Nagle Cove, which lies in the NW part of Port Abercrombie,

has an islet, Oyster Islet, 12m high in the center of its entrance. 

10.33 Karaka Bay lies in the NE part of Port Abercrombie. The

Wood Islets, of which there are two, lie in the entrance of Karaka Bay. 

10.33 Anchorage.—Port Abercrombie is exposed to W winds and,

except for Nagle Cove and Karaka Bay, depths are excessive,

making anchorage difficult. Small vessels with local knowledge might obtain anchorage in Nagle Cove W of Oyster Islet,

in depths of 10 to 20m. An abandoned submarine cable extends

from the W entrance point of Nagle Cove, to S of Kaikoura Island.

10.33 Port Fitzroy (36°11'S., 175°20'E.) is entered via one of two

channels; either the channel off the NE side of Kaikoura Island,

or off the channel off the SW side. While Port Fitzroy is sheltered from most wind, it is subject to strong gusts and squalls

when windy conditions are prevalent. 

10.33 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain good

anchorage, in depths of 11 to 12.8m, near the SW side of Port

Fitzroy, about 0.5 mile S of the SE tip of Kaikoura Island.

10.34 South Channel—Man of War Passage.—The Grey

Group Islands (36°11'S., 175°18'E.) are a group of islets ranging from 18 to 46m high that front the shore between Wellington Head and False Head, 3.2 miles S. Moturako, 34m high, the

N islet, lies about 1 mile SSE of Motuhaku Light. A rock, 1m

high, lies close off the islets NE side. 

10.34 Opakau Islet, 46m high, lies near the center of a patch of foul

ground about 1 mile NE of False Head. The channel between

Great Barrier Island and Opakau Islet is foul. A rock, 41m

high, lies midway between Opakau Islet and False Head. Paget

Rock, which lies in the W entrance to Man of War Passage, is

awash and may be passed on either side.

10.34 Vessels with local knowledge of a moderate size use Man of

War Passage. It is about 100m wide at its narrowest point, with

depths of 14.3m and steep-to.

10.34 Tidal currents set W on the flood and E on the ebb and attain

rates of 1 to 2 knots in the narrow part of the passage.

10.34 False Head (36°13'S., 175°17'E.) represents the NW tip of

Motuiaiko Island, one of the Broken Islands. This promontory,

which rises to 104m, greatly resembles Wellington Head, but

has a wide yellow stripe on the cliff which is conspicuous on E

bearings. Strong tide rips are in evidence close off False Head.

10.34 Rangiahua Island, 49m high, lies close SE of Motutaiko Island to which it is connected by a drying reef. Mahuki Island

lies close S of Rangiahua Island and it is separated from it by a

narrow boat channel.

10.34 Anvil Islet (36°14'S., 175°18'E.) 60m high, cone-shaped,

and prominent, lies close off the S tip of Mahuki Island.

10.34 The channel that separates Mahuki Island, Rangiahua Island,

and Motutaiko Island, also known as the Pig Islands (Broken

Islands), is about 0.2 mile wide, with a least depth of about

7.3m in the fairway. This channel can only be used by small

vessels with local knowledge. Additionally, small vessels with

local knowledge can obtain anchorage off the pebble beach on

the E side of Rangiahua, out of the tidal currents, open to NW

winds that send in a swell.

10.35 The Junction Islands (36°14'S., 175°19'E.) are a

group comprised of four rocky, steep islets that lie about 0.5

mile E of Mahuki Island. A rocky islet, 49m high, lies 0.2 mile

W of the S Junction Island. A rock, which dries 0.3m, lies 0.1

mile SW of the S Junction Island, and a rock, 7m high, lies 0.3

mile NE of the same islet.

The Pigeons (Pirogue Rocks) (36°17'S., 175°20'E.) are three

bare, cone-shaped, and mostly steep-to islets, of which the NW

and highest is 15m high. Three banks, with depths of 22, 24,

and 27m, are located almost halfway between The Pigeons and

the Junction Islands.

10.35 Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain shelter from

N winds in a small bay, known as Bowling Alley Bay, which

lies 0.5 mile NE of the Junction Islands. A 10.1m patch lies

about 0.6 mile ESE of the S entrance point of Bowling Alley

Bay.

10.35 Whangarara Island (Cliff Island) is a steep, yellow, and

wedge-shaped islet, 69m high.

10.35 Whangaparapara Harbor (36°15'S., 175°24'E.) is entered

about 1 mile E of Whangarara Island. This small harbor affords

good shelter to small vessels with local knowledge, except

from winds between the SE and SW. Due to the high land on

either side, this harbor is subject to violent squalls and gusts. 

10.35 Anchorage.—The best anchorage lies near the center of the

harbor, in a depth of about 14.6m, mud and shells, about 0.3

mile N of the NW entrance point.

10.35 Blind Bay is entered about 1.7 miles SE of Whangaparapara

Harbor. Okupu Bay, at the head of Blind Bay, fronts the town

of Okupu. Blind Bay is open to SW winds and is therefore unsuitable as an anchorage. A conspicuous yellow hill, 144m

high, stands close N of the N entrance point of Blind Bay. A

jetty lies close NE of the prominent hill.

10.35 Tryphena Harbor (36°19'S., 175°28'E.) is entered between

Amodeo Rocks and Tryphena Point, from which a light is

shown. Amodeo Rocks are two pinnacle rocks with a depth of

2.4m. These rocks lie on the tip of a spit that projects SSE from

the inner N entrance point.

10.35 Bird Islet, 1m high and flat, lies on outer end of a spit that

projects from the NW part of Tryphena Harbor. The inner

shores of the harbor are comprised of several sandy coves separated by rocky points. Puriri Bay is on the N side of the harbor, and Shoal Bay is on the S.

10.35 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents off Tryphena Harbor
232 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

set N on the flood and SE with the ebb. Several rocks, both

above and below-water, lie within 2 miles SE of the entrance to

Tryphena Harbor. A scrub-covered islet, 89m high, lies 1.7

miles SE of the S entrance point to Tryphena Harbor. The

channel between this islet and the shore is foul.

10.35 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain good

anchorage off the N shore of the harbor between Bird Islet and

the head of the harbor, in depths of 11 to 12.8m, sheltered from

N and W winds. Shoal Bay affords good anchorage, in depths

of 7.3 to 12.8m, sheltered from E and S winds.

10.36 East shore of Great Barrier Island.—Waikaro

Point (36°07'S., 175°26'E.) is located about 5 miles SE of

Aiguilles Island, and the coast between is steep-to, bold, and

cliffy with several indentations. Rangiwhakea Bay represents

the largest indentation lying midway between Aiguilles Island

and Waikaro Point.

10.36 Whangapoua Beach, a sandy bay, is entered between Waikaro Point, which is cliffy with grassy knolls, and a point 1.7

miles further S. Whangapoua Hill, cone-shaped and 239m

high, backs the S entrance point.

10.36 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge, subject to the

swell that rolls in on the beach, can obtain anchorage in Whangapoua Beach in NW to S winds, in depths of about 15.8m,

sand.

10.36 Rakitu Island (36°08'S., 175°30'E.), is the only off-lying island of any consequence off the E shore of Great Barrier Island. This island, which is steep-to, bold, and cliffy, lies nearly

3 miles E of Waikaro Point. 

10.36 Several drying rocks project up to 0.3 mile off the N and NE

sides of the island. A rock, 37m high, which is steep-to, lies

about 0.2 mile SE of the SE tip of Rakitu Island. A 12.2m

patch lies about 0.2 mile further E. Two steep-to islets, 13 and

20m high, lie 1 mile ENE and 0.7 mile SSE, respectively, of

the SE tip of Rakitu Island.

10.36 Whakatautuna Point (36°11'S., 175°30'E.) lies about 4

miles SE of the S entrance point of Whangapoua Bay. The

coast, about 5.5 miles S of Whakatautuna Point, is rocky and

broken, and is indented by several small unusable bays. An area where anchoring and fishing is prohibited, which is best

shown on the chart, lies SE of Whakatautuna Point.

10.36 Cape Barrier (36°21'S., 175°32'E.) is the S tip of Great Barrier Island, and the land which backs this cape rises steeply to

Ruahine, 401m high. Tide rips off Cape Barrier should be given a berth of at least 2 miles by small vessels in bad weather. 

10.36 Cuvier Island, which is a wildlife sanctuary, lies about 12

miles SE of Cape Barrier. This island, which lies in the E approach to Colville Channel, rises to 229m as a wooded summit

on its NW side. A monument stands at a height of 58m on a

small islet in the cove NW of the light. A rock, which dries

1.5m, lies 0.2 mile SW of the light.

10.37 West shore of Hauraki Gulf.—Omaha Bay

(36°19'S., 174°50'E.) is entered between Cape Rodney and

Tokatu Point, 5.5 miles SSE. Little Omaha Bay lies at the head

of Omaha Bay. Vessels with local knowledge obtain anchorage, during offshore winds, in depths of 9 to 16.5m, sand.

However, this anchorage is open during E winds which send in

a heavy swell.

10.37 Panetiki Island lies about 0.7 mile S of Cape Rodney. An

8.2m shoal lies about 0.5 mile E of Panetiki Island.

10.37 Omaha Cove, located in the NW portion of Omaha Bay, is

entered S of Panetiki Island.

10.37 Whangateau Harbor is a creek in the NW corner of Little

Omaha Bay, but no attempt should be made to enter, due to

shoaling in the entrance.

10.37 Takatu Point (36°22'S., 174°52'E.) which rises to 95m close

W, forms the extremity of the Tawharanui Peninsula. There are

very strong tide rips off this point. Flat Rock lies in the approaches to Kawau Bay about 5.5 miles SSE of Takatu Point.

Flat Rock is about 1.2m high and steep-to. A shoal, with a least

depth of 2.7m, lies 0.2 mile SW of Flat Rock. Vessels can pass

on either side of the rock and shoal, but not between them.

Rocky patches, with depths of 9.1m and 13.7m, lie about 0.4

and 0.9 mile SE of Flat Rock. Tarapunga Rock, with a depth of

12m, lies 1 mile W of Flat Rock.

10.38 Kawau Island (36°25'S., 174°51'E.), mostly hilly and

wooded, rises to Grey Heights in its SE part to 180m. The E

shore of the island is steep, cliffy, and fronted by rocks to a distance of 0.2 mile offshore. Slip Island, 15m high, lies on a bank

with a depth of 2.2m, which projects 0.3 mile NE to Fairchild

Reef. Nelson Rock, with a depth of 2.9m, lies 0.7 mile NNE of

Kawau Point. A 6.5m shoal lies 0.2 mile NW of Nelson Rock.

10.38 Burgess Bay, which indents the S part of the E shore of

Kawau Island, affords good anchorage for small vessels with

winds between SW and NW.

10.38 Kawati Point forms the N tip of Kawau Island. The entrance

to North Cove lies between Beaumont Point, 1.2 miles SW of

Kawati Point, and Edwards Point, 0.4 mile SW. Pembles Islet,

9.1m high and marked by a light which is partially obscured by

trees from SE through SW, lies 0.2 mile NW of Beaumont

Point. Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage in the cove sheltered from all but W winds, in depths of 3.7

to 7.3m, mud.

10.38 Bon Accord Harbor (36°25'S., 174°49'E.) indents the W

shore of Kawau Island and is entered between Accord Point

and Momona Point, 0.6 mile S. The entrance to the harbor, between two banks projecting from the entrance points, is about

0.3 mile wide. 

10.38 Peaked Rocks, which lie about 0.2 mile S of Momona Point,

are prominent and marked by a beacon.

10.38 Anchorage.—Upon entering the harbor, vessels should give

Accord Point a berth of 0.2 to 0.3 mile. There is a least depth of

7.3m in the approach to the anchorage. The best berth lies in

mid-channel, in a depth of 9m, about 0.4 mile within the entrance, with Martello Rock just open W of Momona Point. 

10.38 Kawau Point represents the SE tip of Kawau Island. Little

Markham Islet, 30m high, and Challenger Island, 46m high, lie

close off this point.

10.38 Kawau Bay is fronted by Kawau Island and is entered between Tokatu Point and Mullet Point, 6 miles SW. This bay affords anchorage, in depths of 6 to 9m. Additionally, this bay

can be reached by five separate entrance channels.

10.38 The N shore of the bay from Tokatu Point leads WSW for

6.5 miles to the entrance of the Matakana River. A rocky reef,

which dries 1.2m, lies 0.7 mile E of the N entrance point of the

river. The resort of Sandspit is situated about 0.7 mile within

the river entrance. There is a jetty at Sandspit with a depth of

7.4m alongside. About 1.5 miles S of the mouth of the Mataka-
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 233

Pub. 127

na River are prominent white cliffs, 43m high. A rock, with a

depth of less than 1.8m, lies 0.1 mile E of the S entrance point

of Martins Bay, 1.5 miles SSW of Mullet Point.

10.38 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents set W through the N

channel, with the flood at a rate of 1 to 1.5 knots, between the S

side of the Tawharanui Peninsula and the N tip of Kawau Island. This current turns S through the channel between Kawau

Island and the Mayne Islands, between Edwards Point and

Mullet Point, and then through the Inner Channel. The current

sets S on the E side of Kawau Island with the flood, and attains

a rate of 1 knot between Kawau Point and Flat Rock. The current sets N on both sides of Kawau Island with the ebb, and E

through North Channel, where it attains a rate of almost 2

knots at springs In Rosarioh Channel and South Channel, the

currents sets W with flood and E with the ebb, with rates of 0.5

knot at springs.

10.39 Entrance channels to Kawau Bay.—North Channel

is about 0.4 mile wide between the coastal banks and has

depths less than 9.1m on either side. Maori Rock, which dries

1.1m, lies about 1 mile SW of Tokatu Point. A detached 2.9m

patch lies 0.4 mile WSW of Maori Rock. Fairchild Reef, awash

at HW, lies on the S side of North Channel. The area between

this reef and Slip Islet is foul. A shoal, with a depth of 6.5m,

lies nearly 0.3 mile off the NE coast of Kawau Island.

10.39 Sunk Kelp Rock, with a depth of 3.5m, lies almost 0.2 mile

WNW of Kawati Point. Iris Shoal, with a depth of 6.5m, lies

about 1.2 mile WSW of Kawati Point.

10.39 The Mayne Islands are two small, wooded islands that lie in

the entrance to Kawau Bay. Eclipse Shoal, with a least depth of

3m, lies about 0.5 mile E from the N Mayne Island.

10.39 Directions—North Channel.—Vessels approaching from

the N should give Tokatu Point (36°22'S., 174°52'E.), the tip

of the Tawharanui Peninsula, a berth of at least 0.7 mile, and

bring Mount Taylor, the highest hill on the NW part of Kawau

Island, to bear 219°, and steer for it on that bearing until Kawati Point bears 266°. Vessels approaching from the E should

bring Kawati Point to bear 266°, and head for it on that bearing

until Mount Taylor bears 219°, or Fairchild Reef bears 246°,

distance 0.5 mile. From this position vessels should steer 277°

until Pembles Islet is in line with Edwards Point, bearing 201°.

Vessels proceeding to Bon Accord Harbor should steer 209°

which clears the rocks off Kawati Point, and then through the

middle of the channel between Iris Shoal and Kawau Island.

Vessels proceeding to Kawau Bay steer 251°, anchoring as

convenient, in depths of 6.3 to 11m, fine sand, mud, and broken

shell. The channel N of Maori Rock should only be utilized by

small vessels of light draft in good weather with extensive local

knowledge.

10.39 Kawau Bay—South entrance channels.—Rosario Channel

is about 0.2 mile wide, with a depth of about 6.2m, and leads

between the SW tip of Kawau Island, on the E, and Beehive Islet and Albert Shoal, on the W.

10.39 Passage Reef, Beehive Islet, and Albert Shoal all lie on a

bank that projects W from the SW end of Kawau Island. Beehive Islet, 21m high and cone-shaped, is bordered by a white

sandy beach.

10.39 Martello Rock, bordered by a reef and resembling a circular

tower, lies about 0.5 mile W of Peaked Rocks.

10.39 South Channel lies between Passage Reef and the N side of

Motuketekete Island; it is 0.5 mile wide, with depths of 11 to

22m in the fairway.

10.39 Motuketekete Island is the NE of the three islands that lie between 1.5 and 3 miles SW of Elizabeth Point, the SW tip of

Kawau Island. The middle island, Moturekareka, is joined to

the SW island, Motutara, by a drying reef.

10.39 lanche Channel, between Motuketekete Island and Moturekareka Island, is about 0.1 mile wide, with a depth of 11m.

10.40 Motuora Island (36°30'S., 174°48'E.) lies nearly 4

miles SW of Elizabeth Point and is 68m high and conspicuous.

The NE and E sides of the island are cliffy, while the W side

has a sandy beach.

10.40 Inner Channel is bordered by Motutara Island and Motuora

Island, on the E, and Te Haupa and the mainland N, on the W.

This channel is mostly clear of dangers and has depths of 15m

in the fairway. There is a channel, usable by small craft only,

between Te Haupa and the mainland with a least depth of 6.4m.

10.40 Directions—South Channel.—Vessels should approach

Rosario Channel with Peaked Rocks bearing 329° and steer

through on that bearing until the point 1 mile W of Mullet

Point is just open N of Mullet Point, bearing 286°. This leads N

of the shoals off Beehive Islet in a least depth of 6.8m. Vessels

should then pass either side of Martello Rock, keeping at least

0.1 mile off.

10.40 Vessels approaching South Channel should do so with the

right tangent of Mullet Point, bearing 313°, which leads 0.3

mile N of Motuketekete Island and S of Albert Shoal. When

the W tip of Rabbit Island opens W of Takangaroa Island, bearing 357°, vessels should steer on that mark until Mullet Point

bears 285°, then passing midway between Takangaroa Island

and Martello Rock and into Bon Accord Harbor.

10.40 Inner Channel has a least width of about 1 mile between Albert Shoal and Mullet Point. Vessels should steer with the W

end of Rabbit Island open W of Takangaroa Island, bearing

more than 357°, until Mullet Point bears 285°, when course

should be changed for either Kawau Bay or Bon Accord Harbor.

10.41 Mahurangi Harbor is entered between Sadler Point

and South Head (36°31'S., 174°44'E.), about 0.7 mile SSW. In

the approach between South Head and Te Haupa Island, depths

vary from 6.6 to 9.6m. However, within the entrance depths in

the fairway increase sharply to over 12m, and 0.5 mile N of

South Head is a depth of 19.4m.

10.41 Pudding Island, conical and 18m high, lies on the outer end

of a reef which projects 0.2 mile NE from South Head. Casnell

Island, 46m high, lies on the E side of the channel about 1.5

miles N of South Head. A drying rock and sand spit connects

this islet to the shore N. Above Casnell Island, the channel becomes narrow and shoal.

10.41 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be found, in a depth of 14m,

0.2 mile WSW of the S tip of Sadler Point. In this position tidal

currents do not exceed 1 knot. Additionally, anchorage may be

obtained, in a depth of 10.3m, 0.1 mile W of the boat landing

0.3 mile N of Casnell Island.

10.41 Directions.—Vessels heading for Mahurangi Harbor should

pass S and W of Te Haupa Island. A 67m summit, 0.3 mile N

of Casnell Island, in line with the W tip of Sadler Point, bearing 340°, leads midway between Te Haupa Island and Pudding
234 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

Island.

10.42 Waiwera Bluff (36°32'S., 174°43'E.) lies about 1.5

miles SSW of South Head, and is conspicuous rising to a

height of 148m.

10.42 Whangaparaoa Bay is entered between the Waiwara River

entrance and Huaroa Point, 6.7 miles ESE. The Orewa River

empties into Whangaparaoa Bay, 3.5 miles S of the Waiwara.

Except for Orewa Beach, N of the mouth of the Orewa River,

the shore of Whangaparaoa Bay is mostly bold and cliffy with

a rocky foreshore.

10.42 A spit, with depths of less than 5.5m, projects about 0.6 mile

N from a point about 0.5 mile W of Huaroa Point. Wellington

Rock, with a depth of 2.5m, projects about 1.2 miles WNW of

Huaroa Point.

10.42 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be found, in depths of 7.3 to

9.1m, during offshore winds, S of Mahurangi Islet. While the

holding ground is good, the anchorage is open to winds from

the NNE through S. Also, anchorage may be found in Whangaparaoa Bay, in depths of 9.1 to 20.1m, sheltered from W and S

winds. Strong NE winds send in a heavy sea that makes this anchorage untenable.

10.42 Tiritiri Matangi Island, 79m high and with a barren appearance, lies about 2 miles E of Huaroa Point and is separated

from that point by Whangaparaoa Passage. This passage is free

of dangers, with depths from 22 to 31m. Tidal currents set S

with the flood and N with the ebb attaining a rate of less than 1

knot. 

10.42 A prohibited anchorage area, best seen on the chart, lies in

the passage.

10.42 Wooded Islet, 27m high with a bare islet close N, lies 0.2

mile NE of the N tip of Tiritiri Matangi Island. Several rocks

that dry, project 0.2 mile NE of Wooded Islet. Shag Rock, a

peaked rock 6m high, lies 0.7 mile NE of the light of Tiritiri

Matangi Island.

10.42 Shearer Rock, steep-to and with a depth of 0.6m, lies 1 mile

E of the light. Another rock, with a swept depth of 7m, lies 0.4

mile SE of Shearer Rock. Ballons Rock, with a depth of 1.8m,

and a rock 0.1 mile SE of it, lie about 0.2 mile W of the N end

of the island.

10.42 Karepiro Bay (36°39'S., 174°45'E.) is entered between a

point about 4 miles WSW of the SE tip of the Whangaparoa

Peninsula and Piripiri Point, 1.5 miles SW. Toroa Point, cliffy

and about 40m high, lies about 2 miles SSE of Piripiri Point.

Rocks, which dry, project 0.1 mile from it. 

10.42 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be found in Karepiro Bay, in

depths of 7.3 to 11m, mud, during N and W winds. Torbay Bay,

lying 0.5 mile S of Toroa Point, is encumbered by several drying and below-water rocks.

Approaches to Auckland Harbor

10.43 Auckland Harbor is accessible to vessels with drafts

to 11.6m. Additionally, there is anchorage in the inner harbor,

good holding ground, in depths of 9.1 to 21.9m.

10.43 There are four approach channels to Auckland Harbor between the off-lying islands and the mainland of North Island.

The NW approach is through Rangitoto Channel, between

Rangitoto Island and the mainland. Rangitoto Channel is the

only channel which can accommodate vessels to 11.6m, while

the other channels are limited by a least depth of 4m in the fairway in Motukorea Channel.

10.43 The N approach to Auckland is through Motuihe Channel.

The NE approach is through Waiheke Channel; the SE approach is through Ponui Passage.

10.43 Rangitoto Channel—Approach.—The Noises are a group

of islands that lie on a bank, with depths less than 5.5m, that

are located about 10 miles E of Toroa Point. The NW of The

Noises, Motuhoropa Island, is 55m high.

10.43 Rakino Island, SW of The Noises, rises to 69m. A rock, with

a depth of 3.7m, lies about 0.4 mile NW of its W tip. The Three

Sisters Islets, 25m high, lie about 0.3 mile S of the same point.

South Islet, 11m high, lies 0.1 mile S of the S tip of Rakino Island. Awash Rock, which dries, lies 0.2 mile SSE of South Islet.

10.43 Motutapu Island lies SSW of Rakino Island and is separated

from it by the 0.5 mile wide Rakino Channel. A drying reef,

with a rock 18m high at its outer end, projects about 0.6 mile N

from the NW tip of Motutapu Island.

10.43 Rangitoto Island (36°47'S., 174°52'E.) lies close W of Motutapo Island and is connected to it by a drying sand bank, Gardiner Gap. Rangitoto Island presents a conspicuous mark

visible for 30 miles, as it is covered with stunted pohutukawa,

manuka, and scrub, rising to a height of 259m, with a crater

summit on which there are three nipples.

10.43 Aspect.—There are four groups of four red obstruction

lights shown from the radio masts of the National Broadcasting

Station, 10 miles WSW of Rangitoto Lighted Beacon. These

lights are visible from sea between Rakino Island and Tiritiri

Matangi Island.

10.43 A pinnacle rock, with a depth of 0.9m over it, lies about 0.7

mile S of Rangitoto Lighted Beacon. Duder Spit, with depths

of 6.1 to 11m over it, projects about 0.7 mile NW from the

rock. A rocky spit, with depths less than 5m over it, projects

from the SW tip of Rangitoto Island almost to the E edge of

Rangitoto Channel.

10.44 West side of Rangitoto Channel.—Takapuna Beach

fronts the town of Takapuna; about 0.3 mile NW of the cable

beacon on the beach is a church with a red tower. A rocky

bank, with depths less than 5.5m, projects 0.2 mile off this

shore.

10.44 Takapuna Head (36°49'S., 174°48.4'E.) is 18m high and

surmounted by a house with a turret on it. Rough Rock, with a

depth of 2.6m, lies about 0.6 mile E of Takapuna Head.

10.44 East shore of Rangitoto.—A bank, with depths less than

5.5m, joins the S tip of Rangitoto Island with the mainland S.

Bean Rocks lie near the W edge of the S part of this bank,

about 1.5 SE of Takapuna Head.

10.45 Motuihe Channel—Approaches.—This channel is

approached between Motuhoropapa Island and Thumb Point,

the NE tip of Waiheke Island, 10.5 miles ESE.

10.45 David Rocks, the highest being 19.8m, lie on the N end of a

chain of above and below-water rocks surrounded by foul

ground, about 3 miles NE of Rakino Island. Maria Island, 29m

high, is the highest on this region of foul ground. Ahaaha

Rocks, which dry, lie about 1.2 miles ENE of David Rocks. 

10.45 D’Urville Rocks lies about 2.7 miles SE of Ahaaha Rocks.

The NW ends of Motuihe Island and Waiheke Island, in line
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 235

Pub. 127

bearing 236°, leads 0.2 mile SE of the above rocks. The NW

end of Waiheke Island, bearing 225°, with the NW end and

neck of Motuihe Island well open NW, leads about 0.5 mile

NW of the rocks. A rocky shoal, with a swept depth of 4.6m,

lies about 1.5 miles SW of D’Urville Rocks.

10.45 Waiheke Island (36°48'S., 175°05'E.), whose N coast forms

the S side of the approach to Motuihe Channel, is indented,

grassy, with rounded hills rising to Maunganui Hill, 230m

high. 

10.45 Gannet Rock, 27m high, lies about 1 mile N of Thumb Point,

the N point of Waiheke Island. Onetangi Bay is entered about 5

miles SW of Thumb Point; however, it is open N. There is a

sandy beach at the head of the bay, behind which is the town of

Onetangi.

10.45 Motuihe Island, 62m high and grassy with many trees, lies

about 3 miles SW of the NW tip of Waiheke Island. A wharf

lies on the S side of the NW point of Motuihe Island. A dangerous rock is located about 150m NW of Motuihe Wharf. Two

rocks, with swept depths of 4.9m and 5.8m, lie 0.4 and 0.6 mile

SE, respectively, of the S tip of Motutapu Island, at the S end of

Motuihe Channel.

10.45 Onhanaki and Matiatia are two small bays that indent the N

part of the W side of Waiheke Island. There is a wharf at Matiatia Bay.

10.45 Sergeant Channel, lying between the E shore of Motuihe Island and the W shore of Waiheke Island, is separated into two

parts by a rocky ledge which dries. Papakohatu Islet, 10.4m

high, lies upon this rocky ledge. Between this islet and the W

shore of Waiheke Island, there are several shoals with depths of

3.3m and less in the fairway. The fairway of the W channel is

0.2 mile wide, with a least depth of 7.9m.

10.45 Motukorea Channel joins Motuihe Channel and Tamaki

Strait with the approaches to Auckland Harbor; it has a least

depth of 3m over the bar S of Rangitoto Island.

10.45 Islington Bay, on the N side of the channel, lies between Motutapu Island and Rangitoto Island. There are two small piers

on the W side of this bay near the entrance and another small

jetty on the W side near the head. Anchorage here is accomplished with the permission of Naval authorities only.

10.45 Browns Island (36°50'S., 174°54'E.) is located about 4

miles SW of Motuihe Island and lies on the SE part of the

bank, with depths less than 5.5m, that joins Rangitoto Island

with the mainland S. A reef, with depths less than 1.8m, connects Browns Island with Musick Point on the mainland S.

10.45 West Tamaki Head is located on the mainland, about 1.5

miles SW of Browns Island. The shore in this vicinity is mostly

cliffy, and is fronted by a rocky bank. A prominent water tower

stands about 0.4 mile WSW of West Tamaki Head.

10.45 Waiheke Channel lies between Waiheke Island and an archipelago of islands and islets to the E, and leads to Tamaki Strait

at its SW end. This channel has depths of 6m in its SW section.

10.46 West side of Waiheke Channel.—Kauri Point

(36°46'S., 175°12'E.) is the NE tip of Waiheke Island. From

this point the coast leads about 1 mile SW to the E entrance

point of a bay. 

10.46 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, in a depth of 12m, 0.6 mile W of this point. There is a

small jetty in Waiti Bay, close W of the above E entrance point,

and a small wharf in Man O War Bay, entered about 1.5 miles

SW of the same point.

10.46 Taniwhanui Point (36°49'S., 175°10'E.) lies about 2 miles

SW of the above E entrance point of the unnamed bay; the

shore 1.5 miles S is pocked by numerous small bays.

10.46 Pakatoa Island, located on the E side of Waiheke Channel, is

56m high. A reef with a conspicuous rock, 3.7m high, near its

outer end projects 0.2 mile NNE of the N tip of the island.

Frenchmans Cap, cone-shaped and steep-to, projects 0.5 mile

SW of Pakatoa Island. Tarahiki, 58m high, 1.5 miles ENE of

Pakatoa, is bare and grey with a jagged outline. This islet is located upon a rocky bank with shoals lying 0.7 mile SW and S

of it.

10.46 Sunday Rock, with a depth of 1.5m, lies about 0.4 mile E of

the SE end of Waiheke Island. There is clear passage on either

side of this rock. Ponui Island rises to 173m high and is mostly

covered with scrub. Reefs, with rocks, project 0.3 mile from

the N side of the NE end of Ponui Island. A beacon lies on the

S side of Ruthe Passage, separating Poinui Island from Rotoroa. Ruthe Passage should only be used by vessels with local

knowledge. There are three conspicuous white wind generators, each about 24m high, on a hill at the N end of Ponui Island.

10.46 Tides—Currents.—Currents in Waiheke Channel set S with

the flood and N with the ebb.

10.47 Tamaki Strait.—Tamaki Strait is located between

Waiheke Island, to the N, and the mainland of North Island, to

the S. This strait affords excellent anchorage as well as smooth

water during W winds. There are general depths in this strait of

from 3 to 9m.

10.47 Whakakaiwhara Point (36°54'S., 175°06'E.) is a rocky

point, 89m high, that is located about 4.5 miles W of the S tip

of Ponui Island. From this point, the S shore of Tamaki Strait

trends about 6 miles WNW to Motukareka, a flat-topped island, 21m high. Motukareka is joined to the shore S by a drying ledge.

10.47 The N side of Tamaki Strait is formed by the S coast of

Waiheke Island, which is indented by 7 small bays. Passage

Rock lies off the entrance to Te Matuku Bay, the easternmost

of the Seven Bays.

10.47 Tides—Currents.—When the tide at Auckland is rising,

currents run into Tamaki Strait through the channels at either

end, attaining a rate of about 2 knots in the narrows at springs.

When the tide is falling at Auckland, the currents flow out of

the strait through the channels at either end. In the central part

of the strait, currents are not discernible.

10.47 Sandspit Passage (36°54'S., 175°11'E.), located between

the S end of Ponui Island and Pauhenehene Spit (Sandspit),

forms the SE approach to Tamaki Strait. This passage is about

0.1 mile wide between the banks, with depths of less than 5.5m

on either side. Sandspit Passage should not be attempted without local knowledge.

10.47 Caution.—A prohibited area 1 mile in radius is centered on

the explosives jetty at Koherurahi Point (36°55'S.,

175°08'E.).

10.48 The Tamaki River is entered S of Browns Island, between Musick Point and West Tamaki Head. This river runs

about 8 miles S to Otahuhu. Also, there is a bar in its entrance,

over which there is a maximum depth of 1.8m, after which the
236 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

channel deepens.

10.48 The Panmure Bridge spans the Tamaki River roughly 5 miles

from its entrance; it has a safe vertical clearance of 8m in the

center of the navigation span and a depth of 8.2m in the fairway under the bridge. 

10.48 The Pakuranga Bridge, with a safe vertical clearance of 14m,

crosses the river 0.2 mile above the Panmure Bridge. 

10.48 Small vessels with extensive local knowledge can obtain anchorage in the river about 0.5 mile SE of Sandy Point

(36°52'S., 174°53'E.), in depths of 7.3 to 9.1m. 

10.48 A submarine cable is laid across the river 0.1 mile S of

Sandy Point; anchorage is prohibited within 61m of the cable.

Auckland Harbor (36°50'S., 174°47'E.)

World Port Index No. 55060

10.49 Auckland Harbor is located close within the mouth of

the Waitemata River and can accommodate vessels with drafts

to 11.6m. This port, which may be entered day or night, has facilities for tankers, container ships, and ro-ro vessels.

10.49 The port of Auckland is under the jurisdiction of the Auckland Harbor Board. 

10.49 The city of Auckland lies on a thin neck of land that divides

the Waitemata River, on the N, from Manukau Harbor, on the

S. This city is known locally as the Queen City.

Winds—Weather

10.49 Fog may be experienced from May to September.

Tides—Currents

10.49 At the entrance, tidal currents attain a velocity of 0.5 knot at

neaps and 1.5 knots at springs. In Rangitoto Channel and anchorages, 1 knot at neaps and 2 knots at springs may be experienced. In the approaches to the wharves, the rate of the current

varies considerably, and as much as 1.5 knots at neaps and 3

knots at springs may be encountered. Caution should therefore

be exercised when maneuvering in the vicinity of the wharves.

10.49 Both flood and ebb currents along the shores in the harbor

begin to run from 30 to 40 minutes earlier than in midstream

and, in the vicinity of the main wharves, may begin approximately 2 hours earlier at spring tides. Near the main wharves,

Fergusson Container Terminal influences the flood current

considerably at certain stages of the tide. Therefore, vessels

should inquire as to the best time to come alongside or leave

the main wharves.

Depths—Limitations

10.49 The Commercial Harbor lies on the S side of Auckland Harbor and is bordered on the E by Fergusson Container Terminal

and on the W by Wynyard Wharf, 1.2 miles W. 

10.49 Fergusson Container Terminal has a tanker berth with three

dolphins, on its E side and Fergusson Wharf, for container traffic, on its W side. The tanker berth can accommodate vessels

with a length of 183m and a draft of 10m. Tankers usually

berth starboard side-to at SW; they can undock at any time.

Fergusson Wharf is 580m long, with a dredged depth of 11.6m. 

10.49 Freyberg Wharf lies 0.1 mile W of Fergusson Wharf. The E

wharf is 210m long and has depths alongside of 8.3 to 10m.

The W side is 216m long and has alongside depths of 8.5 to

12m.

10.49 Jellicoe Wharf lies about 0.1 mile W of Freyberg Wharf and

can accommodate vessels up to 259m long on its E or W side.

Drafts up to 10.1m are accepted alongside.

10.49 Bledisloe Terminal, about 0.1 mile W of Jellicoe Wharf, has

two berths with stern ro-ro facilities. No. 1 Berth, the inner

berth, is 137m long, with dredged depths of 7.5 to 10m. No. 2

Berth, the outer berth, is 224m long, with depths of 9 to 10m.

No. 3 Berth can accommodate vessels having a maximum

length of 259m, with a maximum draft of 10.5 to 12.5m.

10.49 Marsden Wharf can accommodate vessels up to 91m, with

drafts to 7.5m, on its W side. The E side is 198m in length and

has depths from 3 to 5m alongside.

10.49 Captain Cook Wharf lies close W of Marsden Wharf. The E

side is 247m in length and has depths alongside of 6.5 to 10m.

The W side is 231m in length and has depths of 8.5to 12m

alongside.

10.49 Queens Wharf lies about 100m W of Captain Cook Wharf.

The wharf has dredged depths of 8.5 to 12m alongside its E

side and 7 to 13m alongside its W side.

10.49 The basin between Queens and Princes Wharves is dredged

to depths of 7 to 11m.

10.49 Princes Wharf, lying 0.1 mile W of Queens Wharf, has

dredged to depths of 7 to 13m on its E side; depths alongside

its W side are no longer maintained by dredging, but were last

reported to be from 9 to 10m.

10.49 Hobson Wharf, lying close W of the root of Princes Wharf,

can accommodate vessels with drafts to 5.8m on its E side and

5.5m on its W side. A viaduct, with an opening 13.7m wide

spanned by a lifting bridge, lies between the root of Hobson

Wharf and the root of Wynyard Wharf, 0.3 mile W. There are

depths alongside the N part of the viaduct of 3.4 to 4.3m. Wynyard Wharf is dredged to depths of 7 to 13m.

10.49 The Bulk Cement Wharf, situated on the W side of the reclamation, has a limiting draft of 5.5m alongside. On the N side of

the Waitemata River is Chelsea Bulk Sugar Wharf (36°49'S.,

174°43'E.), which is 95m long and can accommodate vessels

with 9.4m drafts.

10.49 All wharves in the commercial port, except Fergusson

Wharf, the ro-ro berths, Kings Wharf, Marsden Wharf, Hobson

Wharf, and Wynyard Wharf, are joined to the main railway

system. Vessels may leave berths at night. Cargo vessels are

not normally berthed at night, but when possible are berthed

before 0800. Vessels are advised to use tugs for berthing. Berthing is carried out at most stages of the tide.

Aspect

10.49 The Waitemata River can be navigated by vessels with drafts

to 6.1m nearly to Herald Island (36°47'S., 174°40'E.). Located on the N shore, between Birkenhead Wharf and Kauri

Point (36°50'S., 174°43'E.), is a conspicuous chimney at the

sugar works at Chelsea. There are also mooring buoys, used to

 Ports of Auckland 

http://poal.co.nz
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 237

Pub. 127

assist is berthing, moored E and W of the wharf.

10.49 Torpedo Bay indents the SW side of North Head. A monument and a clock tower stand at the head of Torpedo Bay.

10.49 Prominent objects in Auckland include the War Museum, the

general hospital, the tower of the University College, and the

square tower of St. Mathew Church, situated about 1 mile SW,

1.2 miles WSW, and 1.5 miles W, respectively, of Point Resolution (36°51'S., 174°48'E.).

10.49 The entrance to Shoal Bay, a large expanse of mud flats and

shallow water, lies between Stanley Point and Stokes Point

(36°50'S., 174°45'E.). Both Stokes and Stanley Points can be

distinguished by a conspicuous fir tree near their respective

tips. Two flagstaffs stand NE of Stokes Point.

10.49 The Auckland Harbor Bridge is comprised of seven spans on

six concrete piers. The maximum vertical clearance under the

main navigational span is 42m for 61m either side of center. At

night, the center part of the main navigational span is indicated

by an orange light, a green light, and a red light, disposed vertically. Red obstruction lights are shown about these lights.

10.49 There is a prominent clock tower on the Ferries Building,

close to the root of the Ferries Wharf. Five white lights mark

the end of the Bulk Cement Wharf. Six prominent concrete silos, each 32m high, stand near the jetty. A large green and red

neon sign is shown above the E end of the silos.

Pilotage

10.49 Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 500 grt entering

or leaving Auckland Harbor S of latitude 36°46'S, except for

those exempt by law. Vessels are either met at the Outer Boarding Area 3 miles NNE of Rangitoto Light in position

36°44.2'S, 174°50.5'E, or at the Inner Boarding Area 1.5 miles

NNE of Rangitoto Light in position 36°45.1'S, 174°49.8'E. If

the pilot cannot board, the pilot boat will lead to more sheltered

water where boarding may be attempted or may lead the vessel

in from the pilot boat. 

10.49 Inbound vessels with a draft of 10.5m or greater, or more

than 200m in length, must have a pilot embark before passing

the Outer Boarding Area. 

10.49 Vessels should request pilotage through the Harbormaster,

Auckland at least 24 hours in advance, confirming at least 4

hours prior to arrival. If the vessel’s ETA is to be altered, a

Courtesy of Ports of Auckland Ltd.

Auckland Harbor from W
238 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

message must be sent at least 4 hours in advance of the vessel’s

new ETA.

10.49 Tankers must arrive at the pilot boarding place not later than

30 minutes before sunset.; otherwise berthing is postponed until the following morning. Other vessels with drafts not greater

than 11m can enter at any time. Vessels of deeper draft must

await HW.

10.49 Departing vessels should request the pilot 2 hours in advance.

10.49 A radar station, with the scanner placed just E of the signal

station on Mount Victoria, offers advisory information on a

vessel’s position in the approaches to Auckland. The information, available from the signal station, is given as a range and

bearing from the signal station.

Regulations

10.49 All vessels over 40m long entering the port of Auckland

must contact harbor control on VHF channel 12 for arrival instructions when passing the following reporting points:

a. 36°38.5'S, 174°56.0'E.

b. 36°36.7'S, 174°51.5'E.

c. 36°45.0'S, 174°58.3'E.

d. 36°49.5'S, 174°57.6'E.

10.49 The quarantine and explosives anchorage lies on the E side

of Rangitoto Island. Vessels awaiting medical examination

should anchor within the charted area off Commercial Harbor.

10.49 Vessels proceeding under the Auckland Harbor Bridge must

have a pilot aboard. Traffic is restricted to one-way travel within 0.7 mile of the bridge, with the vessel stemming the tide giving way to all other vessels.

10.49 No person or craft may pass through the following areas

without the authority of the Queens Harbormaster, Auckland:

1. Calliope Dock Area.

2. Ngataringa Bay.

3. Onetaunga Bay(Defense Area).

4. Islington Bay.

10.49 A Fast Ferry Zone, best seen on the chart, has been established (2005) in the vicinity of Otahuhu Point (36°47'S.,

174°55'E.). No vessel may impede the passage of a Fast Passenger Ferry, identified by an orange flashing light, within this

zone. Anchoring and fishing are prohibited within the Fast Ferry Zone.

Signals

10.49 A signal station, painted white, stands on Mount Victoria, 3

miles SSW of Rangitoto Light. Vessels can communicate with

the station day or night either visually or by blinker light or via

VHF. A continuous listening watch is maintained on 2182 kHz

and VHF channel 16.

10.49 When the wind in Auckland Harbor and/or Hauraki Gulf is

expected to gust over 33 knots, the following visual signals are

displayed by day at the signal station: 

1. Black cone, point up—Wind expected from the N sector.

2. Black cone, point down—Wind expected from the S

sector.

Anchorage

10.49 Four charted anchorage berths lie in the approaches to Rangitoto Channel, N of the pilot boarding ground. Depths at the

anchorage range from 11m to 18.3m, good holding ground reported. Anchorage berths lie off Commercial Harbor and offer

depths of 12.7 to 15.3m, sand and shells, as indicated on the

chart.

10.49 Explosives anchorages are situated SE of Rangitoto Island

and E of the Fergusson Container Wharf. 

10.49 Several prohibited anchorages lie in the approaches to, and

the waters of Auckland Harbor, and are best seen on the appropriate chart.

Directions

10.49 Rangitoto Channel.—Rangitoto Channel can be approached from a position about 3 miles E of Tiritiri Matangi Island within the white sector of Auckland Approach Direction

Light, bearing between 214.5° and 217.5°. When Buoy A is

abeam to port, vessels should change course S, at night taking

care to keep within the white sector of Bean Rocks Light, and

when Rangitoto Channel lights come into range, bearing

142.2° with the rear range light showing white, vessels should

steer on this alignment; then, be guided by the buoys and lights

to the harbor. The white sector of Bean Rocks Light seen over

the stern is an excellent steering aid when approaching Commercial Harbor.

10.49 Mariners are cautioned that navigational and ship’s lights are

often difficult to make out because of bright shore lighting.

10.49 Those vessels utilizing Motuihe Channel to Motukorea

Channel should pass midway between Maria Island and the

beacon on D’Urville Rocks. Then vessels should steer 227°

and pass NW of the dangers that lie off the NW part of Motuihe Island. Then pass between the W edge of the foul ground

off the NW side of Motuihe Island and the 4.9m and 5.8m

rocks located 0.8 miles W of the N point of the island. Then

from a position SE of the S tip of Motutapu Island vessels

should steer for Browns Island Lighted Beacon bearing 225°,

until the SE end of Cheltenham Beach is in line with the flagstaff on Mount Victoria bearing 263°, which leads over the bar

and, when Bean Rocks Light bears 205°, steer for the entrance

of the harbor.

10.49 Waiheke Channel—Tamaki Strait.—Vessels with local

knowledge entering Waiheke Channel pass halfway between

the prominent rock N of Pakatoa Island and the shore of

Waiheke Island, remaining in the middle of the fairway until

they steer abeam of Finger Point. From this position a vessel

should steer to pass 0.2 mile off the shore of Waiheke Island to

avoid Sunday Rock, until abeam of the SE tip of the island.

Course should then be shaped to pass 0.2 mile SE of Passage

Rock. When Passage Rock bears N, head for Maraeta Point

(36°53'S., 175°02'E.), bearing 261°, to avoid the 5.5m shoal

SW of Passage Rock. Vessels should then head for Park Point,

bearing 300°, with Pauhenehene Spit Light (Sandspit Light)

(36°54'S., 175°11'E.) bearing 120°, astern, until they can steer

for Browns Lighted Beacon, bearing 281°, and when abeam

the S part of Motuihe Island, steer 310°, and proceed as directed above.
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 239

Pub. 127

10.49 Tamaki Strait—Southeast approach.—Vessels should approach Sandspit Passage with Pauhenehene Spit Light

(36°54'S., 175°11'E.), bearing 305°, until within about 0.2 mile

of it; then steer to pass about 150m NE of it and keep in the

fairway between the dangers on either side until about 0.8 mile

NW of Pauhenehene Spit Light, when they should steer in that

direction with it astern, bearing 123°. When Browns Island

Lighted Beacon bears 281°, a vessel should steer for it on that

bearing and proceed as directed above. This passage should not

be used without local knowledge.

East Shore of Hauraki Gulf

10.50 Cape Colville (36°28'S., 175°21'E.) is the NW extremity of the Moehau Peninsula. The Moehau Range and the

Cormandel Range, high and wooded, project NW through this

peninsula rising abruptly from the sea.

10.50 Port Jackson, entered between Cape Colville and Kaiiti

Point, 1 mile SW, affords good anchorage, as charted, in depths

of 11 to 12.8m, available only during SE winds. A sandy beach

forms the head of this bight. A rock, which dries 0.9m, lies 0.2

mile NW of Kaiiti Point.

10.50 The coast, SE from Kaiiti Point, leads for almost 10 miles to

Colville Bay, and it is bold, cliffy, and densely wooded.

10.50 Colville Bay, entered between Tokotarea and Te Whau

Points, is small, open W, shallow, and dries some distance from

its head. The coast leads S from Colville Bay, about 5.5 miles,

to Hautapu Point.

10.50 The Motukawao Group are a chain of islets and dangers

whose NW part, Motupotaka Rocks, lies 3.5 miles WSW of Te

Whau Point. This chain extends about 5 miles SE from Motupotaka Rocks, which are steep-to. The channels between the islands are deep.

10.50 The shore between Hautapu and the SW end of a narrow

peninsula, 3.5 miles SSE, is indented by two bays with boulder

beaches at their heads. Kikowhakarere, the S of these bays, is

fronted by several islands. Two channels lead between these islands and the mainland. The N channel, Hautapu Channel, is

entered between Hautapu Point and Hautapu Rocks (36°44'S.,

175°25'E.), 1 mile SW. This channel is clear of dangers and

recommended for use. The S channel, Waimate Channel, is entered between the S end of Waimate Island and Motutapere Island, and it is clear of dangers and deep.

10.50 Waimate Island lies about 3 miles S of Hautapu Island. A

rock, which dries, lies 0.3 mile W of the NW end of Waimate

Island.

10.50 Motutapere Island, densely wooded and prominent, lies with

its dome-shaped summit about 0.4 mile SE of the SE end of

Waimate Island.

10.50 Anchorage may be found, in a depth of 14.6m, mud, about

0.4 mile E of the E side of Waimate. Anchorage may be found,

in depth of 11m, about 0.4 mile NE of the N tip of Motupere

Island.

10.51 Coromandel Harbor (36°48'S., 175°28'E.) projects

NE about 4 miles between Whanganui Island on the NW and

the mainland on the SE. 

10.51 Castle Rock Hill, 520m high, is located about 3 miles E of

the head of the harbor; its square rock summit is a good mark

for identifying Coromandel Harbor.

10.51 Tawhiti Rock, with a depth of 3.5m over it lies about 0.3

mile WSW of Tawhiti Point, the SW end of Whanganui Island.

Cow Islet, 30m high and bare, lies about 1.5 miles WSW of

Tawhiti Point. Calf Islet, 10.7m high, lies on a bank with

depths of less than 9.1m over it, which projects 0.4 mile S of

Cow Islet.

10.51 Rangipukea Island (36°50'S., 175°25'E.) is a rocky island

whose N end is a steep-to cliff on the edge of which there is a

prominent overhanging bush. A reef, that dries, projects 0.1

mile S from the S end of the island, and it is marked on its W

side by a beacon. Shoals, with depths of 10.9 and 14.9m, lie 0.7

mile W and WNW, respectively, off the S tip of Rangipukea Island.

10.51 Directions.—Vessels with local knowledge entering Coromandel Harbor should pass halfway between Tawhiti Rock and

Cow Islet, or between Calf Islet and Rangipukea Island. Either

passage is free of dangers with depths of at least 14.6m. 

10.51 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage within Coromandel Harbor, in depths of not less than

6.7m, as far in as the SE tip of Whanganui Island. At this anchorage the holding ground is good and several moderate gales

have been ridden out in about 6.4m, about 0.2 mile E of the SE

tip of Whanganui Island.

10.51 Te Kouma Harbor (36°49'S., 175°26'E.) is sheltered by

Rangipukea Island and is the next bight S of Coromandel Harbor. A rock, awash, lies in the center of the inner part of Te

Kouma Harbor. Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, in a depth of 6.4m, about 0.5 mile within the entrance.

However, 0.2 mile further in, the head of the harbor is shoal.

10.51 Wekarua Islet is located about 0.5 mile SSE of Rangipukea

Harbor. An islet, 50m high, lies 0.1 mile E of Wekaura. A rock

lies midway between Wekarua and the islet. Shoals, with

depths of 6m and 7.4m, lie 0.3 and 0.9 mile W, respectively, of

the island.

Firth of Thomas

10.52 East shore.—Deadmans Point (36°51'S.,

175°24'E.), the E entrance point of the Firth of Thames, lies

about 3 miles S of Cow Islet and reaches an elevation of 194m.

10.52 Rocky Point is located about 16 miles SE of Deadmans

Point. A conspicuous white water tank stands near the N end of

the village of Tararu, about 0.7 miles SSE of Rocky Point. The

prominent twin peaked summit of Maumaupaki, 818m high, in

the Coromandel Range, may be seen upon passing the town of

Tapu, about 7.2 miles N of Rocky Point. As long as the twin

peaked summit is open, the firth is comparatively deep, but

when it closes in a vessel will be near the 5.5m bank.

10.53 West shore.—Ruakura Point (36°56'S., 175°11'E.)

lies 1.7 miles S of the S tip of Ponui Island, which was previously described in paragraph 10.46. The coastal bank, with

depths less than 5m, and upon which the sea breaks with a N

swell, projects about 1 mile NE of Orere Point. Orere Point lies

3 mile ESE of Ruakura Point. Rocks lie near the edge of the

bank. Titokarua Reef dries 1.2m and extends about 0.5 mile E

from Orere Point and it is marked by a beacon on its W side.

10.53 From Orere Point, the shore trends SE for 2.5 miles to

Waimangu Point. Midway between these two points is a rock,

with a depth of less than 1.8m, lying 0.3 mile offshore. At
240 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

Wharekawa, 4 miles S of Waimangu Point, is a small camber

where lighters load gravel. The camber has a depth of 1m

alongside its S side; the beached hulk of a wooden mine

sweeper, conspicuous from sea, provides shelter from the S.

10.53 Caution.—Due to the inshore fishing that is done in the

Firth of Thames, vessels should be on the lookout for the presence of fishing gear, marker buoys, etc.

10.54 Head.—The entire head of the Firth of Thames is

bordered by mangroves and is fronted by a drying mud flat that

extends up to 2.2 miles offshore. The river entrances are not

easily made out from the offing. Navigation of the various rivers should not be attempted without extensive local knowledge.

10.54 There are no known dangers in the Firth of Thames beyond 1

mile offshore, except at the head of the firth, which is very

shallow.

10.54 Anchorage can be found practically anywhere in the Firth;

however, it provides little or no shelter from S or SW winds.

Some shelter from E or SE winds may be found near the E

shore.

Cape Colville to East Cape

10.55 Cape Colville (36°28'S., 175°21'E.), the NW tip of

the Moehau Peninsula, was previously described in paragraph

10.50. A conspicuous cone-shaped bluff, 217m high, lies about

3.2 miles E of Cape Colville.

10.55 Square Top Island lies on the outer edge of a spit projecting

0.7 mile NNW from the cone-shaped bluff. A shoal, with a

depth of 7m, lies 0.4 mile W of Square Top Island. A 19.5m

patch lies 0.7 mile NW of the island.

10.55 Te Anaputa, a cliffy point, stands about 8 miles SE of Square

Top Island and forms the N entrance point to Waikawau Bay.

Waikawau Bay is entered between Te Anaputa and Haupapa

Point, 3.5 miles SSE. A rock lies 0.1 mile off Haupapa. Rocks

project 0.6 mile N of a point 0.4 mile W of Haupapa. 

10.55 Waikawau Bay affords anchorage for vessels with winds

from the W and S quarters. A rocky shoal, with a depth of

12.8m, lies nearly 1 mile NE of Haupapa Point.

10.55 Kennedy Bay, entered about 5 miles SE of Haupapa, affords

anchorage, in depths of 5.5 to 9.1m, during winds from the N

to S, through W. During strong E and NE winds, the sea breaks

across the center of the bay. A rock, awash, lies 0.3 mile E of

Anarake, the SE entrance point of Kennedy Bay.

10.55 The shore between Anarake and Te Rehutae, the sheer NW

entrance point to Whangapoua Harbor, 2.5 miles SE, is distinguished by two sandy beaches separated by a prominent grasscovered, conical hill, 72m high.

10.55 Whangapoua Harbor has a depth of 0.6m over the bar and is

only available for boats with extensive local knowledge.

Mahinapua Bay (Opito Bay)(36°43'S., 175°48'E.) is entered between Tokarahu Point and Opito Point, 2 miles SE. 

10.55 Anchorage may be found in this sandy bay during winds

from the NW through W to SE. A section of Tokarahu Point is

nearly severed and several rocks lie NE and E of it. A reef lies

0.5 mile S of the point and extends 0.2 mile offshore.

10.55 Rabbit Island lies 0.2 mile N of Opito Point; the passage between is foul. Sunk Rock, awash, lies 0.2 mile E of Rabbit Island. A rock, which dries 0.9m, lies 0.2 mile SSE of Sunk

Rock. Koruenga Island (Motukoruenga Island), 52m high and

steep, lies 1 mile SE of Sunk Rock. Needle Rock, 77m high

and perpendicular, lies 0.3 mile SE of Koruenga Islet. A perforation in this rock is open on NW and SE bearings. A rock, 6m

high, lies between Koruenga Islet and Needle Rock.

10.56 Off-lying islands and dangers.—Hole in the Wall is

a passage with a least depth of 22m that lies between the Mercury Islands and the mainland. Mariners are warned that passage through Hole in the Wall should not be attempted without

local knowledge.

10.56 The Mercury Islands, a group of islands lying on the NE side

of Hole in the Wall, is comprised of three main and several

smaller islands with rocks and reefs between.

10.56 Great Mercury Island (36°36'S., 175°47'E.) is the NW and

largest of this group. From the NE, it presents a prominent

white cliffy face from its summit, Mohi Mountain, which is

230m high. The NW shore of this island is darker in color and

joined to the SE part by a low, narrow neck. Reefs project 0.5

mile N from the NW tip, and Never Fail, a rock 3m high and

steep-to, lies 0.6 mile NE of the N tip of the island.

10.56 Anchorage may be found in a bay on the W side of Great

Mercury Island during good weather, in a depth of 22m, sand.

The Sisters Rocks, 23m and 24m high, lie 0.5 mile S and 0.5

mile SSE of Maunganui, the N entrance point of the bay. Reefs

lie between The Sisters and the point. 

10.56 A rock, with a swept depth of 16.4m, lies 1.2 miles SW of

Maunganui. A reef, with a depth of 5.2m over its outer end,

projects 0.4 mile S of the SW tip of Great Mercury Island. A

shoal, with a depth of 20m, lies nearly 2 miles SW of the same

point.

10.56 Red Mercury Island, a wildlife sanctuary, is the easternmost

of this group and rises to a height of 154m in its N part. This island is covered with dense scrub and has a reddish appearance

when seen from N. It has been reported that this island gives

good radar returns at up to 19 miles.

10.56 Richards Rock, which dries 0.6m, lies 1.7 miles N of the

summit of Red Mercury Island. This rock is steep-to on all

sides and breaks when there is a swell. A rocky bank, with a

depth of 17.7m, lies 0.7 mile NW of Richards Rock. Rocky

shoals, with depths of 5.5m and 20.1m, lie 1.2 and 2 miles SE

of the SE end of Red Mercury Island. Within about 1 mile W of

the W side of Red Mercury Island is Double Islet, which are

two islets joined together by a boulder isthmus. Several rocks

and islets lie between Red Mercury Island and Great Mercury

Island and are best seen on the chart. The passages between the

islands of this group require extensive local knowledge.

10.56 Ohinau Island, the S island of the Mercury Group, is 101m

high, cliff-bound, and covered with dense scrub. A 12.5m bank

lies 1.5 miles E of the S tip of Ohinau. A 24m bank lies 0.7

mile SE of the S tip of Ohinau. Flat Island, a rock 5m high, lies

0.7 mile NW of the N tip of Ohinau. Black Rocks, a rocky islet

in two parts, 27m high, lies 0.7 mile N of Flat Island. Reefs and

rocks, best shown on the chart, surround Black Rocks.

10.56 Old Man Rock, mostly steep-to, lies 1.7 miles NW of

Ohinau Island on the NE side of Hole in the Wall. This rock is

64m high, perpendicular, and covered with sparse vegetation.

A rock, which dries 1.8m, lies about 150m SE of Old Man

Rock.

10.56 Danger Rocks, 5m high, lie 1.5 miles NE of the N end of

Ohinau Island. Whale Rock, 8m high, lies 2.7 miles NE of
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 241

Pub. 127

Ohinau. An 11.6m patch lies 1 mile W of Whale Rock. Cobra

Rock, a pinnacle, with a depth of 6.1m, lies about 3 miles ENE

of Whale Rock.

10.57 Mercury Bay (36°47'S., 175°49'E.) is entered between Motukoranga Island and South Sunk Rock, about 4.2

miles S. This bay affords anchorage, during W winds, in sandy

bays on the N and S shores. The N shore of the bay is wooded;

the S shore is mostly barren and covered with scrub.

10.57 North shore.—Motukoranga Island, 107m high, lies about 3

miles WSW of Ohinau Island. A rocky pillar, 32m high, lies

close off its SE side. The Twins, two cone-shaped rocks, lie 1.2

miles SW of Motukoranga Island. These rocks are steep-to except for a rock, with a depth of 1.5m, 100m NW of the NW

rock.

10.57 Matapaua Bay lies about 1 mile W of Motukoranga Island

and is used by fishermen for shelter. Mahungarape Island, 43m

high, is a steep, rocky island with bushes on top.

10.57 Maungatawhiriri, 302m high, is a conspicuous triple-peaked

hill located about 4.5 miles SW of Motukoranga Island.

10.57 South Shore.—Motukorure Island (Middle Island), 54m

high, lies about 1 mile SE of Mahungarape, and a reef projects

0.2 mile off its NE side and 0.1 mile off its S side; the W side

being steep-to. Two patches, with depths of 7.4 and 12.8m, lie

about 1.5 miles E of Motukorure Island. A rocky patch, with a

depth of 12.5m, lies 0.3 mile SE of the same island.

10.58 Cook Bay, which indents the S shore, is entered between Shakespeare Cliff (36°50'S., 175°44'E.) and Cook

Bluff, about 1.7 miles E by N. Shakespeare Cliff is white in

color and 75m high. Pandora Rock, with a depth of 1.8m, lies

0.3 mile NW of the NW part of Shakespeare Cliff. A chain of

rocks lie between it and the cliff.

10.58 Tides—Currents.—For the most part, tidal currents in Mercury Bay are weak, seldom exceeding 0.3 of a knot. West of a

line NNW from Shakespeare Cliff the current has a clockwise

rotary motion on the ebb and is fairly strong in shallow depths

in the SW extremity of the bay.

10.58 In the entrance to Whitianga Harbor, the flood current was

observed to obtain a rate of 1.5 knots with the ebb reaching 2.2

knots at springs. However, these rates will vary with the

amount of fresh water coming down the river. Additionally, it

was reported that a rate of 7 knots was common at springs.

10.58 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge anchor on either

side of Motukorure Island, in depths of 12 to 20m. Vessels can

also anchor off Shakespeare Cliff, in a depth of 5.8m, with the

cliff bearing between 173° and 195°. Vessels should not anchor

further in because of Pandora Rock and attending dangers. Also, anchorage may be found, in a depth of 7.3m, with Moturoa

Islet just open of Cook Bluff, bearing 077°.

10.59 Motueka (36°49'S., 175°48'E.) is a steep and broken

islet, 87m high. Foul ground extends off its N shore and it is almost connected to the mainland S by foul ground. Moturoa Islet (Tower Rock) is a prominent pillar-shaped rock, 57m high,

lying 0.5 mile NE of Motueka Islet. This islet is surrounded

with foul ground. An 8.2m shoal lies halfway between Motueka Islet and Moturoa Islet.

10.59 South Sunk Rock, which usually breaks, lies about 0.7 mile

ENE of Motueka Islet.

10.59 Mahurangi Islet, 78m high, lies 0.5 mile S of South Sunk

Rock, and it is long and grassy. Between Mahurangi and Hereheretaura Point, 0.5 mile S, are several islets, rocks, and other

dangers that are best shown on the chart.

10.59 Whitianga Harbor is entered at the SW part of Mercury Bay

between Whakapenui Point, a cliffy point on which there are

fir trees, and Hukihuki Point, which is low. This harbor can

only be entered by small vessels with extensive local knowledge.

10.59 Whitianga Wharf is T-shaped and stands on Hukihuki Point.

This wharf is 33.5m long with depths of 2.7m alongside the N

end and 9m alongside the S end. There are depths 5 to 8.5m in

the channel off the wharf.

10.59 Directions.—Vessels approaching Mercury Bay from the

NW should pass either N or E of the Mercury Islands or

through Hole In The Wall. When proceeding N or E of the

Mercury Islands, Richards Rock (36°35'S., 175°56'E.) and

Cobra Rock (36°41'S., 175°59'E.) should be passed with caution.

10.59 Hole In The Wall, the inner passage, is entered halfway between Great Mercury Island and Tokarahu Point. A vessel

should then head for the SW end of Ohinau Island, bearing

137°, and open NE of Old Man Rock. When about 1 mile away

from Old Man Rock, change course to pass about 0.2 mile SW

of it, keeping Needle Rock bearing about 171°, on which bearing the perforation in it is closed so as to pass E of Sunk Rock.

When S of Old Man Rock, vessels should head to pass between

Ohinau Island and Needle Rock by giving the latter a berth of

at least 0.2 mile. Vessels should then proceed into Mercury

Bay, passing E of The Twins and between Mahungarape Island

and Motukorure Island.

10.59 Vessels entering Mercury Bay from the S should not change

course W until Cook Bluff bears about 250°, and is open N of

Moturoa Islet. This course clears Sunk Rock; a vessel can then

steer to pass S of Motukorure Islet, taking care to avoid the foul

ground N of Moturoa Islet.

Photo copyright Data Concepts (used by permission).

Shakespeare Cliff
242 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

The Bay of Plenty

10.60 The Bay of Plenty lies between Mercury Bay and

Cape Runaway, a distance of about 110 miles ESE. This bay

has within it many islands and rocks and reefs. The most offlying of the islands is White Island, which lies about 37 miles

W of Cape Runaway. The only anchorage of any importance is

Tauranga Harbor, as it is the only one that affords shelter to

large vessels.

10.60 West shore—Bay of Plenty.—Te Huruhuru Point lies about

10 miles SSE of the S entrance of Mercury Bay; the coast between is pocked with sandy bays separated by cliffy points. Te

Huruhuru Point, which is 178m high, and almost blocks the entrance to the Tairua River, consists of two nipple-shaped hills

lying E and W of each other at the SE tip of a low, narrow,

sandy neck.

10.60 The Tairua River empties out into the sea between Te Huruhuru Point and Royal Billy Point, a low pine-covered point, 0.2

mile W. There is a depth of 1.2m over the bar, which breaks

with an E swell. The channel is narrow, constantly changing,

with depths of 1.2 to 5.6m as far as the wharf, 0.7 mile within

the entrance. A smaller wharf lies 0.5 mile NW of Te Huruhuru

Point.

10.60 Off-lying islands.—Castle Island, 61m high, lies 3.7 miles

ESE of Hereheretaura (36°50'S., 175°49'E.); it is high, rocky,

and steep-to.

10.60 Shoe Island, 124m high, lies 1.7 miles ENE of Te Huruhuru

Point. This island, when bearing about NE or SE, has the appearance of a shoe. Two black rocks lie about 0.7 mile E of

Shoe Island. Shoal patches, with depth of 20m and 27.9m, lie

0.8 mile and 2.2 miles NNE, respectively, of Shoe Island. A

shoal, with a depth of 22.2m, lies 3 miles NNE of the island.

10.61 Slipper Island (37°03'S., 175°57'E.) lies about 4.5

miles ESE of Te Huruhuru Point. The N tip rises steeply to a

conspicuous summit, 141m high. The S end of the island is undulating and low. Penguin Island and Rabbit Island, joined by

rocks that dry, lie off its S end. A rock, 14m high, lies 0.4 mile

S of Rabbit Island. Shoals, with depths of 11m and 12.9m, lie

0.5 mile NE and 0.7 mile N, respectively, of Slipper Island

Light. A shoal, with a depth of 7.5m, lies 0.4 mile SE of Rabbit

Island. 

10.61 Roller Patch, with a depth of 6.9m, lies 0.8 mile NW of Slipper Island, and breaks with strong NE gales. Blind Rock, with

a depth of 0.9m, lies 1 mile SW of Slipper Island and seldom

breaks. A shoal, with a depth of 13m, lies 0.5 mile W of Blind

Rock. 

10.61 Shoals, with depths of 8.4m and 10m, lie 0.2 mile and 0.5

mile NNE, respectively, of Blind Rock,. Watchman Rock, 10m

high, lies 0.4 mile S of Blind Rock. A sandy patch, with a

depth of 8.9m, lies 1.2 miles SW of the rock.

10.61 Anchorage may be obtained W of the S end of Slipper Island, in a depth of not less than 8m, during a SE gale. With

strong N winds, a heavy swell sets into this anchorage.

10.61 Directions.—Vessels proceeding N inside Slipper Island

should pass not less than 0.2 mile W of the rock, 14m high, S

of Rabbit Island. Then proceed to pass W of Watchman and

Blind Rocks, keeping 0.8 mile off the mainland coast.

10.61 The Aldermen Islands are a wildlife sanctuary that lie about

10 miles ENE of Slipper Island. All of this group of four islands and several prominent islets and rocks are steep and

rocky. The islands are covered in dense vegetation. Around the

Aldermen Islands, foul ground extends up to 0.3 mile offshore

in places. Vessels should navigate with caution as shoals rise

abruptly from the sea bed. Vessels without local knowledge are

advised to remain in depths greater than 50m in the vicinity of

these islands. A shoal, with a depth of 8m, lies 1.5 miles SE of

the southernmost of the Aldermen Islands, and a 26m patch

lies 1 mile further SSE.

10.61 Whangamata Harbor, utilized by small craft only, is entered

about 10 miles SSW of Slipper Island. There is a depth of 2.9m

over the bar.

10.61 For a distance of about 10 miles SSE of the entrance to the

Otahu River (37°14'S., 175°53'E.), the shore is composed of

scrub-covered steep-to cliffs, with occasional low-lying parts

containing sandy beaches with streams. Te Keho (37°19'S.,

175°54'E.), a conspicuous peak, 312m high, stands 1.5 miles

inland. Bowentown, with a jetty on its W side, stands on the E

side of two conspicuous hills, each 92m high, on the N entrance point of Katikati Entrance.

10.62 Mayor Island (37°17'S., 176°15'E.), a wildlife sanctuary, lies about 17 miles NE of the entrance to Katikati Harbor. The summit, 358m high, is at the N end of a high, wooded,

conspicuous ridge of hills on the W side of the island. Large

blocks of obsidian crop up in parts of the island giving it a remarkable glistening appearance when reflecting the suns rays.

At the S end of the island are the remains of an old Pah or

Maori fort. Good landing may be obtained in a deep bay E of

the fort, except in strong E winds, when fair landing may be effected on the W side of the island at the S end of a dark, sandy

beach. Mayor Island has been reported to give good radar returns up to 23 miles.

10.62 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be found, sheltered from E

winds, off a bight on the W side of the island, in a depth of

18.3m, with the N and S tangents of the island bearing 016°

and 158°, respectively. 

10.62 In calm weather, anchorage can be obtained, in depths from

18.3 to 36.6m, in positions 0.3 to 0.5 mile offshore, at almost

any point around the island. A rock, with a depth of 3m, lies

0.5 mile NNW of the NE end of Mayor Island. Tuhua Rocks,

awash, lie about 1 mile E of the SE end of the island.

10.62 Penguin Shoal, with a depth of 10m, lies 9 miles SSE of

Mayor Island. Pudney Rock, with a depth of 19.2m, lies 4.5

miles SW of Penguin Shoal.

10.62 Katikati Entrance, only used by small vessels with local

knowledge, is located between Bowentown and the N end of

Matakana Island, 0.2 mile S. This entrance represents the N entrance to Tauranga Harbor and extensive sand banks, parts of

which dry, project for about 1 mile E on both sides of the entrance. Between the outer sections of these banks is a sand bar,

1.2 miles E of the entrance, with depths of 1.2 to 1.5m. This

sand bar breaks heavily with an E swell and with fresh onshore

winds, making the approach very dangerous during the ebb. In

the channel close W of the narrows, the incoming current attains a rate over 2.5 knots and the outgoing current a rate of 3

knots at springs.

10.62 A boat channel, which dries and across which is a power cable, connects Katikati Entrance with Western Entrance. The cable is overhead, except for a 75m wide gap, where it is buried. 
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 243

Pub. 127

10.62 Depths on the bar are subject to frequent change. It is dangerous to cross the bar without recent local knowledge.

10.62 Directions—Katikati Entrance.—Small vessels with local

knowledge entering this channel over the bar keep Transit Hill,

a scrub-covered hill, 250m high, lying about 3 miles W of Bowentown, in line with the point about 0.3 mile W of that town,

bearing about 273°. 

10.62 Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage

about 1.7 miles SW of Katikati Entrance, abeam Ongare Point,

in depths of 7.3 to 8.5m. Vessels should not anchor in Katikati

Entrance as currents are strong and the shifting nature of the

sandy bottom may cause the anchor to drag.

Tauranga (37°39'S., 176°11'E.)

World Port Index No. 55080

10.63 Tauranga Harbor represents the only harbor between

Mercury Bay and Wellington that affords shelter to vessels of

moderate draft in all winds. Mount Maunganui, on the E side

of the entrance, is a conspicuous flat-topped hill, with steep,

rocky slopes covered with thick scrub that rises abruptly from

the sandy shore to an elevation of 231m. From sea, Mount

Maunganui appears as an island.

10.63 The W side of the entrance to the harbor is formed by undulating sand hills which front pine tree plantations at the SE end

of Matakana Island. A pilot cut has been dredged through the

bar, which lies at the entrance approaches to the harbor, to a

depth of 10.1m over a width of 366m. No. 1 Reach Range

Lights lead through the center of the dredged channel. 

10.63 Local magnetic anomalies may be experienced in the vicinity of Tauranga when in depths of less than 30m.

10.63 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Tauranga is 2.0m at

springs, 1.3m at neaps.

10.63 The tidal currents at the entrance and in the channels leading

to the wharves can be greatly affected by prevailing weather

conditions. Ebb and flood tiges flow approximately 3 knots at

neaps and 5 knots at springs through the entrance channel.

10.63 The flood current sets W from the approaches to No. 1

Reach until reaching the vicinity of North West Rock, where it

joins a S set making into No. 2 Reach. It begins about 30 minutes after the Auckland LW tidal predictions. This S set continues until abeam of Pani Pani Point, where it fans out into the

harbor. In the vicinity of Pani Pani Point, the currents attain

rates of up to 4 knots at springs. In No. 3 Reach, the flood runs

in the general direction of the channel and rates up to 0.5 knots

can be experienced during spring tides. In Cutter Channel the

flood runs in the general direction of the channel and then into

the Maunganui Roads. At Berth No. 1 and Berth No. 2, a set is

felt onto them. In Cutter Channel and Maunganui Roads, the

flood current attains rates of 0.8 to 1.5 knots at springs.

10.63 The ebb current sets out of No. 1 Reach in a NE direction until reaching the vicinity of North Rock, where it leads in an E

direction. It begins about 30 minutes after Auckland HW tidal

predictions. The current attains rates up to 3 knots at springs;

the SW current is of short duration and is barely discernible at

times.

10.63 In No. 2 Reach, the ebb begins to run N along the E side

about 30 minutes before the turn of the tide. During spring

tides, the ebb sets up overfalls over the rock shoal lying 295°,

0.2 mile from Stony Point Light.

10.63 In No. 3 Reach, Cutter Channel, and Maunganui Roads, the

ebb current runs opposite to the flood current described above.

10.63 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels entering, departing, or

transiting Tauranga Harbor are limited to a length of 225 to

229m, at the harbormaster’s discretion. The maximum draft

permitted while in the waters of the port is 10.7m at HW and

9.2m at LW.

10.63 Mount Maungauni Wharf, divided into N and S sectors, has

a total length of 2,055m between them, with dredged depths of

10.4 to 12.5m alongside. The wharf offers 14 berths. A tanker

berth, situated about 0.2 mile S of the S end of Mount Maungauni Wharf, has a dredged depth of 13m alongside.

10.63 On the W side of Stella Passage is Sulphur Point Wharf, with

three berths, each with a dredged depth of 14.5m alongside.

10.63 The port’s entrance channel, which leads through Matakana

Bank, is segmented into No. 1 Reach, No. 2 Reach, and No. 3

Reach. Cutter Channel leads to Maunganui Roads. No. 3

Reach was dredged to a depth of 10.4m.

10.63 Western Channel, which leads W from Cutter Channel towards Rangiwaea Island, is shoal and was closed to navigation

in 1983.

10.63 Stella Passage, the continuation S of Maunganui Roads,

leads S through Town Reach to the Railway Wharf at Tauranga. There was a least depth of 3.4m on the Town Reach range

line in 1980.

10.63 Aspect.—A bar, which breaks during N and E gales, fronts

the entrance channel between Matakana Bank and Mount

Maunganui. Mount Maunganui, conspicuous with steep, rocky

sides, rises to a height of 231m. Stony Point lies 0.4 mile SSW

of the summit, with a reef projecting 100m from it. North West

Rock, 15m high, with a light on it, projects from the coast

about 0.3 mile WNW of the summit.

10.63 The signal station, a prominent octagonal building painted

white, is situated about 0.6 mile ESE of the mountain top. The

building has a flag staff, and a radio tower stands close by.

10.63 Red obstruction lights are shown from radio masts situated

0.6 mile and 3 miles SE of the mountain top.

10.63 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 100

grt. The pilot boards 3 miles NE of North Rock Light. If the pilot cannot board because of bad weather, then the pilot vessel

will lead the vessel into smoother waters and board. Inbound

vessels must give 24 hour notice via radio of this ETA. Vessels

bound from Auckland or other close ports should send their

ETA immediately after departure, requesting a pilot at this

time. A second message confirming or amending the first is to

be sent 4 hours prior to arrival, but if the vessel is ahead of

schedule, the confirming message should be sent 4 hours in advance of her new ETA. Vessels arriving on weekends should

provide an ETA to the harbormaster before 1600 on Friday. All

communications should be addressed to Harbormaster, Tauranga.

10.63 Regulations.—Berthing or unberthing is usually accomplished by vessels other than tankers in daylight, or at night if

the weather is good. Loaded tankers are handled in daylight

 Port of Tauranga 

http://www.port-tauranga.co.nz
244 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

only and may depart at night only if completely discharged and

gas free.

10.63 Vessels entering at HWS dock on the ebb current, while

those entering at LWS berth at Maunganui Wharf at slack water, or at Railway Wharf on the flood. Those not possessing extensive local knowledge should only enter at slack water.

10.63 Departing vessels equipped with a radiotelephone must advise the signal station when clear of the harbor limits. Vessels

should contact Tauranga Port Radio when passing A Beacon

(37°36.1'S, 176°10.7'E) both inbound and outbound. 

10.63 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be found outside the entrance, in depths of 20.1 to 21.9m, about 1.5 miles NE of

Mount Maunganui. A prohibited anchoring and fishing area,

best shown on the chart, lies NE of Mount Maunganui.

10.63 The quarantine anchorage lies 3.2 miles, bearing 075° from

Mount Maunganui Light. Anchor berths, numbered 1 through

3 and best seen on chart, lie 3 miles off the shoreline S of North

Rock Light. 

10.63 Anchorage is prohibited off Mount Maunganui Wharf and in

the channels leading to it. However, with the permission of the

harbormaster, there are times when this prohibition is waived.

10.63 Vessels are advised not to anchor in the channel W of Stony

Point Light as the ground is foul.

10.63 Directions.—Tauranga Harbor should only be entered near

the time of SW. Vessels should steer for Mount Maunganui,

bearing 195°, until No. 1 Reach Range Lights are in line, and

can be steered for. Stay on this range until Stony Point Light is

open W of the shore SW of Mount Maunganui, and course can

be changed to bring No. 2 Reach Range Lights into alignment.

When the Cutter Reach range is in alignment, alter course onto

the range line, and proceed to Maunganui Roads. If proceeding

to Railway Wharf, steer through Stella Passage, being guided

by the buoys and lights, until the Town Reach Range Lights

can be steered for. These lights lead to the wharf.

10.63 Vessels entering the harbor against the ebb current must

make full allowance for it off Stony Point Light. This ebb current tends to take a vessel N and inshore, and this inclination is

more pronounced during strong W winds. Those vessels entering on a strong flood current should make their turn earlier

from No. 2 Reach on to Cutter Channel Range, taking care to

avoid the coastal bank W of Stony Point.

10.63 Caution.—Local magnetic anomalies may be experienced

in depths of less than 30m in the approaches to Tauranga

10.63 The approaches to Tauranga are dangerous to navigation during strong NE winds and swells. Dangerous breaking seas can

be expected, particularly during an ebb tide.

10.64 Otanewainuku Mountain, 639m high, lies about 13

miles S of Tauranga, and from it a prominent flat-topped range

of hills, 305m high, projects NW.

10.64 Town Point (37°45'S., 176°28'E.), which lies 16 miles SE of

Tauranga Harbor entrance, is a sheer grass-topped cliff rising

gradually to two summits. The white cliffs forming the E side

of Town Point are conspicuous. Town Shoals, with depths less

than 5.5m, extend about 2 miles N from Town Point. Shoals,

with depths of 19.2, 20, and 18.9m, lie 2.2 miles N, 2.5 miles

NE, and 2.2 miles NE, respectively, of Town Point. Town Point

should not be approached within a distance of 2 miles.

10.64 Motiti Island (37°38'S., 176°25'E.), 64m high in its NE part,

is faced with cliffs and grass-covered. The NE and E sides are

fronted by a ledge of rocks. Motiti Spit, with depths less than

5.5m, projects about 1 mile SW from the S tip of Motiti Island.

Matatapu Rocks, 1.8m high, lie about 0.5 mile SE of the S tip

of Motiti Island.

10.64 Okaparu Reef and Brewis Shoal lie on a bank with general

depths of 18.3m and 36.6m. Okaparu Reef, which breaks only

with a heavy swell and during NE and N gales, has within it

two rocks with depths less than 1.8m. A 5.8m shoal lies 0.4

mile SE of Okaparu Reefs.

10.64 Astrolabe Reef (37°32'S., 176°26'E.), a flat rock which

dries 1.5m, lies about 4 miles N of the N end of Motiti Island.

Astrolabe Reef appears, in calm weather, as a boat.

10.64 Motuhaku Island (Schooner Island), 15m high, lies about 6.2

miles SE of Astrolabe Reef.

10.64 Motunau Island, 45m high, is rocky and mostly steep-to except off its S side. Motunau Patch, 0.5 mile S of Motunau Island, is comprised of two close together rocky heads with a

least depth of 5.5m. Tokeroa Shoal, a rocky shoal with a depth

of 4m, lies 1.5 miles SW of Motunau Island.

10.64 Caution.—The passages between Motunau Patch, Tokeroa

Shoal and Motunau Island should not be used for navigation.

10.65 Te Pareoterawahirua (Te Para), 228m high and conspicuous, stands about 8 miles SE of Town Point. A dangerous

below-water rock lies 4.5 miles SE of Town Point. Mount

Edgecumbe, 821m high and prominent, rises from the plain

about 18.5 miles SE of Te Pareoterawahirua.

10.65 Matata (37°54'S., 176°45'E.) is situated at the E termination

of white cliffs, 183m high. From Matata to the entrance of the

Whakatane River, about 13 miles ESE, the shore is formed by

low scrub-covered sandhills backed by an extensive plain intersected by canals.

10.65 The Rurima Islands is the largest of a cluster of islets and

rocks, above-water and awash, that stand on the NE part of a

bank with depths less than 18.3m. This bank projects about 7

miles NE from the shore near Matata. These rocks should be

given a wide berth. Those vessels using the channel between

Rurima Rocks and the shore should keep nearer the shore as it

shelves gradually. This channel has depths from 12.8 to 14.6m.

Motuhora (Whale Island) (37°52'S., 176°58'E.), which lies

nearly 5 miles E of Rurima Rocks, is conspicuous and appears

bell-shaped from sea. On the SW side of this island, abeam the

anchorage and E of a sandy beach, there is a gully where there

are boiling springs.

10.65 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage off the SW side of

Motuhora Island; the best position being in 12.8m, mud, with

the SW end of the island bearing 335°, the SE bearing 080°.

With good ground tackle, a gale could be ridden out here as the

holding ground is good.

10.65 Gales mostly begin from the N and veer through W to SW,

bringing a heavy sea into the anchorage. However, a vessel

should not anchor too close in, as when the wind gets round to

the SW there would not be enough room to veer or weigh if

necessary. This is the only area in the Bay of Plenty, between

Tauranga and Cape Runaway, that affords shelter in a NE gale.

10.65 Caution.—Shoals are reported to exist between the W end

of Motuhora Island and the Rurima Islands.

White Island (Whakaari Island) (37°32'S., 177°11'E.),

which lies almost centered in the Bay of Plenty, is rugged, barren, with an active volcano. The Volkner Islets lie 3.5 miles
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 245

Pub. 127

NW of the summit of White Island and are steep, rocky and inaccessible. Both the Volkner Islets and White Island lie upon a

bank with depths of 47.5 to 179.2m. Off the N and E coast of

White Island, many pinnacle rocks rise from the sea bed.

10.65 Caution.—Rumble Three Seamount, with a depth of 119m,

lies about 125 miles NE of White Island.

10.66 The Whakatane River is entered W of Kohi Point

(37°56'S., 177°01'E.), the NE entrance point. The entrance

channel to the river, marked by beacons, lies between large

boulder rocks, which dry. The bar, which breaks right across

under certain conditions of weather, should not be attempted

without extensive local knowledge. The depth on the bar at

HWS is seldom less than 2.1m.

10.66 Anchorage may be found, in a depth of 18.3m, about 1.5

miles NNW of Kohi Point; the holding ground is reported

good, comprised of fine silty sand. This anchorage, while not

providing shelter during strong onshore winds, does afford

some security in moderately bad weather.

10.66 Opotiki Harbor is entered through the Opotiki River, about

13 miles E of Kohi Point, which is about 0.1 mile wide. The

bar, which has a depth of about 0.3m, frequently shifts. The

river is no longer considered to be navigable. There is anchorage, 1.2 miles N of the entrance to the river, in a depth of

12.8m.

10.66 Opape Point (37°58'S., 177°21'E.), lying 7 miles E of Opotiki Harbor, is the place on the coast where the sandy beach is

backed by low sand hills, which extend from Town Point. Haurere Point lies 1 mile NE of Opape Point and is fronted by

rocky ledges. Several peaks stand on Haurere Point.

10.66 Pehitari Point lies 2.5 miles NE of Haurere Point, and it is a

bold bluff, 165m high. The shore NE for 19 miles from Pehitari

Point is comprised of sand and shingle beaches separated by

rocky points.

10.66 Omaio Bay is entered between Pokahinu Point and Motunui

Islet (37°47'S., 177°39'E.), 2 miles NE. Vessels can obtain

good anchorage in Omaio Bay, in a depth of 16.5m, mud, with

Motunui bearing 027°, distance 0.4 mile. Strong winds from

the NW quadrant have been ridden out here, but, it is not recommended.

10.67 Te Kaha Point (37°45'S., 177°40'E.) lies 3 miles

NNE of Motunui and it is a low, flat point with the town of Te

Kaha on it. The church at Te Kaha is conspicuous. Rocks

project 0.3 mile W of Te Kaha Point; they should be given a

wide berth. Te Paraua is a prominent 375m high hill, bare on its

seaward side, located about 8.5 miles NE by E of Te Kaha

Point.

10.67 Whangaparaoa Roads is entered between Orete Point, which

is low and flat, and Cape Runaway, 5.5 miles NE. The shore

2.5 miles E of Orete Point is comprised of a rocky foreshore

with patches of sand. White cliffs, 24m high, distinguish the

shore a further 1.5 miles NNE. From the NE end of the cliffs, a

sand and shingle beach projects 1.5 miles NE to the mouth of

the Whangaparaoa River. From here, the rocky shore continues

to Cape Runaway. Foul ground projects 0.5 mile offshore from

the N part of the white cliffs, while the S side of the roads is

fronted by a rocky bank.

10.67 Cape Runaway (37°32'S., 177°59'E.), the E entrance point

of the Bay of Plenty, is dark, oval, and appears from sea as an

island. Cape Runaway is reportedly radar conspicuous at 14

miles. There is always a swell off the cape and tidal currents in

its vicinity are strong; therefore, vessels should give Cape Runaway a wide berth.

10.67 Whangaparaoa Road affords anchorage in its S part, sheltered from W and SW winds, in depths of 12.8 to 20.1m, fine

sand and mud, with Orete Point bearing 267°, distant 1 mile.

With N winds, a long swell sets in. 

10.67 Additionally, there is anchorage, during NE and SE winds, 2

miles S of Cape Runaway. Large vessels should not approach

the shore within a depth of 22m and should anchor about 1

mile W of a 164m high cone-shaped hill, lying 0.5 mile NW of

the mouth of the Whangaparaoa River. Northwest and W winds

send a heavy sea into the anchorage. 

10.68 Hikurangi (37°55'S., 178°04'E.), 1,753m high, lies

about 23 miles S of Cape Runaway. This prominent peak is the

highest land on the peninsula. On W bearings, the peak appears

as two distinct peaks close together. 

10.68 Honokawa, 1,328m high, has a triple summit and is located

4.5 miles NW of Hikurangi.

10.68 The shore, 16 miles E from Cape Runaway to Matakaoa

Point, is backed by hills that are steep and densely wooded.

Lottin Point, lying 9 miles E of Cape Runaway, is 149m high,

prominent, and appears yellow from sea. Patangata, 282m

high, stands about 1.5 miles W of Matakaoa Point, and is conspicuous from N.

10.68 Caution.—Due to the presence of a continual swell and

strong tidal currents, this section of coast should be given a

wide berth.

10.68 Hicks Bay is entered between Matakaoa Point and Te Koau

Point, about 2 miles S. Te Koau Point is steep with a conspicuous pillar of rock on its summit.

10.68 The N and S shores of Hicks bay are steep and mostly faced

with cliffs; the head of the bay is sandy. A wharf, 46m long,

lies on the N shore of Hicks Bay. The town of Hicks Bay,

where there is a prominent church, stands near the S end of the

beach.

10.68 Hicks Bay affords good shelter from winds from the W. A

vessel of about 1,000 grt anchored, in a depth of 16.5m, blue

clay, with the pier head bearing 311°, Matakoa Point bearing

056°, and the church bearing 208°. From this position, which is

reported to have the best holding ground, the water shoals

gradually towards the head of the bay. 

10.68 Vessels can find shelter from SE winds by anchoring under

the lee of Te Koau Point, however, should a gale come up it is

advisable to put to sea or proceed to Whangaparaoa Road.

Northeast gales, which generally commence from the E and

gradually freshen, give sufficient warning, as the swell comes

in a day or two before.

10.68 Kawa Kawa Roads lies off the sandy beach that projects E

for 3.5 miles from the inner part of Te Koau Point to the mouth

of the Awatere River. Kawa Kawa Roads affords some shelter

during SE winds, in depths of 16.5 to 21.9m, about 1.5 miles

NW of the entrance to the Awatere River and 1 mile offshore.

10.68 Aspect.—Paoneone Hill (Table Hill), 268m high and prominent, lies about 1.7 miles SW of the entrance to the Awatere

River. Oukeamaru, 992m high and prominent, stands 6.5 miles

WSW of this entrance. For about 2.5 miles E of the entrance to

the Awatere River, the shore is comprised of conspicuous white
246 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

cliffs, 122 to 152m high. 

10.68 Horoera Point (37°38'S., 178°29'E.), with Maungakaka its

summit, is prominent and lies about 2.5 miles E of the E end of

the white cliffs.

10.69 East Cape (37°41'S., 178°33'E.) is the E point of

New Zealand and is very mountainous. East Cape is comprised

of a remarkable white clay sand, with rocks projecting E from

it. The summits of five distinct ranges backed by the snowcapped Hikurangi, 27 miles SW, visible from sea in good

weather.

10.69 Tides—Currents.—In the vicinity S of East Cape, the current sets N with the flood, and after rounding the cape, WNW

along the coast at a rate of about 1 knot. Off East Island and in

the channel W of the island, the rate becomes much greater and

causes heavy tide rips.

10.69 At East Cape, SE winds are common and are said to be

strong at times. Violent squalls from the mountains are to be

expected during SW gales in the roadsteads between Cape

Runaway and East Cape. Winds on either side of East Cape are

often very different, even when strong. The strong W winds in

the Bay of Plenty suddenly fail when passing S of the Cape; the

distinct wind line being shown on the surface of the water.

10.69 East Island lies about 1 mile E of East Cape and is 127m

high, conspicuous, and steep. Vessels should pass about 2

miles E of the island. There are two shoal patches off East

Cape, coupled with the strong tidal currents, which make passage between the Cape and the island dangerous. Strong tide

rips occur about 3 miles ENE of East Island.

10.69 A bank, with depths less than 183m, projects about 25 miles

NE from East Cape. Ranfurly Bank lies on the E part of this

bank. The tide rips are heavy over these banks, and a constant

current has been experienced setting at a rate of 3 to 4 knots,

and at times of 5 to 6 knots, causing, with a wind, a very heavy

sea. Both the strong current and the heavy sea were found only

on the banks.

10.69 A depth of 19m lies 23.5 miles ENE of East Cape Light.

East Cape to Cape Palliser

10.70 The E coast of North Island, S from East Cape to

Cape Palliser, has many dangers within 3 miles of it as well as

a heavy surf upon it, making approaches difficult except in fine

weather. Off this section of shore the bottom is green mud outside the 50m line and fine sand within. When navigating off

this coast, advantage may be taken of the tidal currents by

standing offshore or inshore.

10.70 Tides—Currents.—Off the coast between East Cape and

Gable End Foreland, the tidal currents set N with the flood and

S with the ebb, at rates from 0.5 to 1 knot. Their influence is

not felt at more than 5 miles offshore. There is a constant current that sets S at a rate of about 1 knot, outside of the 183m

curve, but it is dependent on the force and direction of wind.

10.70 The Waiapu River empties out into the sea about 6 miles

SSW of East Cape. Pouhautea, a prominent hill, 130m high,

which generally appears dark from sea, lies on the S side of the

entrance.

10.70 Wharariki Point, which lies about 3.5 miles SW of the entrance to the Waiapu River, is a conspicuous rounded rocky

point. Eclipse Rock, lying 0.7 mile NE of Wharariki Point,

breaks only in a moderate swell, but there is a swirl over it in

good weather. This rock is the N end of the foul ground extending off the point.

10.70 Anchorage may be taken, with offshore winds, in depths of

12.8 to 14.6m fine sand, on either side of the Waiapu River entrance, 1 mile offshore.

10.70 Caution.—Depths shallower than charted may exist from

East Island to Wharariki Point out to the 20m contour.

10.70 Tuparoa is a brown-colored hill, 282m high, that has a

unique cleft in its E side, similar to those on Wharariki Point.

10.70 Kaimoho Head, a rounded bluff, lies 7 miles SSW of

Wharariki Point. Otua, a conspicuous summit, 505m high,

stands 2.5 miles W of the head. Anvil Summit, a prominent

hill, lies about 2.7 miles SW of Kaimoho Head.

10.70 Open Bay is entered between Matahau Point and Te Tara

Head, 4 miles S. Te Tara Head rises to a sharp summit and it is

bold and cliffy. Several detached rocks lie close off the head. 

10.70 Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage in

Open Bay inside the ridge in the NW part of Open Bay. However, the most sheltered anchorage is in a depth of 14.6m, about

0.5 mile NW of Te Tara Head. Southeast gales can be ridden

out in safety here.

10.71 Tokomaru Bay (38°08'S., 178°22'E.) is entered between Kotunui Point and Mawhai Point, 4 miles S. There is a

pier in Waima Cove on the N side of the bay. This pier has

depths of 3.7 to 4.9m alongside each side at the outer end. In

1984, the pier was in a state of disrepair. Hikutu Rock, a rocky

patch, the top of which is formed by two isolated rocks, awash,

lies almost in the center of the bay.

10.71 Good anchorage may be found, in a depth of 22m, about 0.5

mile S of the pierhead. Large vessels anchoring at night should

not proceed inside a depth of 25.6m.

10.71 Anaura Bay is entered between Morahahi Head and Motuoroi Island (Anaura Island), 1.5 miles S. This bay has a sandy

beach at its head and is bordered on its N side by rocks. In

1769, Captain Cook landed at Anaura, located at the S end of

the bay.

10.71 Marau Point, a prominent rounded bluff of light color, lies

2.5 miles SSE of the E end of Motuoroi. Steep cliffs line the

points N side and steep grassy slopes its S side. Takamapuhia

Reef, steep-to and which usually breaks, lies 1 mile ESE of

Marau Point. Tokatea Rocks, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lie

0.4 mile SSW of the S part of Marau Point.

10.71 The N entrance point of Tolaga Bay is sheer on its S side,

168m high, white, and conspicuous. Motuheka lies 0.4 mile

NE of the N entrance of Tolaga Bay and it is surrounded by

rocks. Tatara Reef, which dries and usually breaks, lies 1.5

miles NE of the N entrance point. A rocky patch lies about 1

mile N of Tatara Reef.

10.71 There is anchorage in the center of Anaura Bay during offshore winds, in depths of 12.8 to 14.6m. However, E winds

send a heavy swell into this anchorage.

10.71 Titirangi, 343m high and conspicuous, stands 1.2 miles SSW

of the S entrance point of Tolaga Bay. Mitre Rocks lie 0.2 mile

N of the N end of Pourewa Island. The easternmost of these

rocks is shaped as a beehive. Both Mitre Rocks and Pourewa

Island are honey-combed with caves. 

10.71 A 7m rocky patch lies about 0.5 mile NE of the E Mitre

Rock. There is a jetty that projects from the SW corner of Tola-
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 247

Pub. 127

ga Bay. This jetty is about 0.3 mile long, with a least depth of

4.9m alongside. Small coasters with local knowledge use this

facility.

10.71 Anchorage may be found in Tolaga Bay during winds from

the W semicircle; the best berth being in a depth of 12.8m,

about 0.7 mile from the N entrance point of the bay, with Marau Point just shut in. Vessels should anchor well inside the line

joining the entrance points of the bay, as the holding ground

between them is reported poor.

10.72 Gable End Foreland (38°32'S., 178°18'E.) was so

called by Captain Cook because of its prominent triangular

face resembling the whitewashed gable of a house. This appearance is less pronounced within 3 miles of land, but from a

greater distance to the E it is very noticeable. Also, this point

has been reported to give good radar returns at up to 19 miles.

Gable End Foreland should not be approached nearer than 1.5

miles. Gable Rocks, with a depth of 1.2m, lie 1 mile N of the

Foreland. Gable Islet lies 0.4 mile SW of Gable End Foreland,

connected to it by a narrow ridge of rocks. A rock, with a depth

of 18.9m, lies about 4.5 miles ENE of Gable Islet. The shore

between Gable End Foreland and Tatapouri Point, 10 miles

SW, should not be approached within a depth of 37m.

10.72 Whangara Island lies 3.5 miles SW of Gable End Foreland

and is connected to the shore by a ledge of rocks that dry.

Small vessels with local knowledge anchor close N of the island, but have to put to sea when the wind shifts SE. Monowai

Rocks, which seldom break, lie about 2 miles SE of Whangara

Island, and are two pinnacle rocks with a least depth of 5.5m.

A 12.8m shoal lies 0.5 mile SSE of Monowai Rocks.

10.72 Ariel Bank lies about 10.5 miles SE of Gable End Foreland,

and it has depths of less than 37m. Ariel Rocks is the shallowest part of this bank, and it has a least depth of 0.9m, which

breaks in bad weather. A 5.8m patch lies about 0.7 mile SW of

the shallowest part of Ariel Rocks. Penguin Rock, with a depth

of 10.4m, lies about 1.7 miles S of the N end of the bank. An

11.9m patch lies 3 miles SE of Ariel Rocks.

10.72 Caution.—Mariners should be advised that the depths E of

Ariel Bank are very irregular and with any wind there is a confused sea. Therefore, vessels should pass either well inside or

well outside it in depths of over 183m. 

10.72 Additionally, mariners should exercise considerable caution

when navigating off the coast between Gable End Foreland and

Poverty Bay during the summer season, because of the heavy

smoke created by the burning of the bush and undergrowth.

This smoke, which quickly settles to sea level about 6 miles

offshore, brings visibility down to less than 0.2 mile. This

smoke generally comes over at noon, lifting at night.

10.73 Tuaheni Point (38°43'S., 178°04'E.), light gray in

color, rises to a height of 121m and should be given a berth of

at least 2.5 miles. A submerged reef projects 0.5 mile SSE

from it and Tuaheni Rocks, which breaks only in bad weather,

extend about 1 mile SE from the outer end of this reef. In this

vicinity the sea is usually confused and discolored because of

the unevenness of the bottom within the 20m curve. Cooper

Bank lies about 2.2 miles ESE of Tuaheni Point.

Poverty Bay (38°44'S., 178°02'E.) is entered between Tuaheni Point and Young Nicks Head, about 5.5 miles SW. The

port of Gisborne lies on the N side of the bay and is described

in paragraph 10.75. The first place that Captain Cook landed in

New Zealand was in this bay near the Turanganui River

(38°40'S., 178°01'E.). A monument marks the landing spot.

10.73 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents outside of Poverty

Bay set N with the flood and S with the ebb, with the S set being the more prominent; their influence is felt up to 10 miles

offshore. The rates of the currents average about 1 knot, but it

is affected by wind. Within Poverty Bay, tidal currents are negligible.

10.74 Northeast shore of Poverty Bay.—Tuamotu Island,

42m high, is light gray in color, and lies 1 mile W of Tuaheni

Point. A reef, that dries, connects the island with the mainland

N. Also, a reef extends almost 0.5 mile S from the island. This

NE shore of Poverty Bay is encumbered by foul ground and

rocky ledges that project up to 0.5 mile offshore in places.

10.74 Waihora Rocks are two pinnacles, nearly 0.1 mile apart, that

lie 1 mile W of Tuamotu Island. A buoy is moored W of the W

rock. Pinnacle Rocks, with swept depths of 8.5m and 10.1m,

lie about 1 mile WSW of Pah Hill, 1 mile NNE of Tuamotu Island.

10.74 The Foul Grounds, an area of very uneven depths more than

0.8 mile in extent NW and SE, on which are several rocks with

sandy bottom between, is located abreast of and 1 mile distant

from the entrance to Gisborne Harbor. Temoana Rock, which

lies 0.2 mile from the SE end of The Foul Grounds, is the middle of three pinnacle rocks, each of which has a depth of 6.4m.

The N of the three rocks is Hawea Rock. Tokomaru Rock, 0.3

mile NW of Temoana Rock, has a depth of 5.5m. Two rocks,

with a depth of 5.8m and 5.2m, lie 0.1 mile and 0.2 mile NE,

respectively, of Tokomaru Rocks.

10.74 Anchorage.—Gisborne Roads lies in the NE part of Poverty

Bay, and it is exposed to SE winds which even when light, send

a heavy sea into the anchorage.

10.74 The best anchorage in the bay, during S gales, is in a depth of

18.3m with Young Nicks Head bearing 185°, and a beacon 1.2

miles SW of the Waipoa River Entrance bearing 260.7°.

Gisborne (38°41'S., 178°01'E.)

World Port Index No. 55110

10.75 Gisborne lies S and E of the entrance to the Turanganui River on the N side of Poverty Bay. Gisborne has berths for

general, bulk, and oil cargo. A breakwater projects about 0.3

mile SW from the S entrance point of the harbor. A rubble bed

projects about 122m further in the same direction from the end

of the breakwater, with a depth of 2.4m. A training wall extends along the NW boundary of the harbor.

10.75 Vessels should not proceed further up to the entrance channel

than the buoys marking The Foul Grounds until signaled to do

so. The roadstead is exposed to SE winds which, even when
248 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

light, send a heavy sea and swell into the anchorage.

10.75 Tides—Currents.—The mean tidal rise for Gisborne is

1.4m at springs and 1.2m at neaps. Currents in the approaches

do not appear to be a hindrance.

10.75 Depths—Limitations.—A 91m wide channel, about 1 mile

long, which was dredged (2004) to a depth of 10.1m, leads into

the harbor and passes NW of The Foul Grounds to the entrance

of Kaiti Basin. The largest vessel handled in the port has a

length of 200m and a draft of 8.5m.

10.75 The smallest wharf is 95m in length; the largest wharf is

213m long. Berth No. 1 through Berth No. 6 have alongside

depths of 5.8m. Berth No. 7, which serves as a tanker facility,

has alongside depths of 9.7m.

10.75 The swell setting into the harbor sometimes causes vessels to

surge alongside the dock.

10.75 Aspect.—Gisborne, lying on both banks of the Turanganui

River and its tributaries, is the capital of the Poverty Bay district.

10.75 Cooks Monument and a lookout flagstaff stand close E and

0.2 mile E of the root of the breakwater. Another monument

stands about 0.1 mile NNE of the lookout flagstaff.

10.75 Outer Range Lights, in line bearing 332°, are shown from a

position about 1.5 miles W of the entrance to the Turanganui

River. These lights lead through Poverty Bay to Gisborne

Roads. The inner harbor leading lights, in line 054.6°, lead

from W of The Foul Grounds to the mouth of the Taranganui

River. Breakwater Light is shown from a white steel tower situated at the end of the breakwater. The end of Butlers Wall, lying on the N side of the dredged channel, is illuminated by a

shielded light at night.

10.75 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of 100 grt and

over. Requests for pilotage and tugs should be sent along with

the vessel’s ETA at least 24 hours in advance or by 1600 on

Friday when the ETA falls between 1700 on Friday and 0800

the following Monday.

10.75 Pilots board 3 miles S of Breakwater Light in position

38°43.5'S, 178°01.4'E. 

10.75 The berth allocated to a vessel will be given from the signal

station by VHF or by visual signaling. On arrival, ships must

establish communication with the signal station to notify their

maximum draft and obtain the latest depth in the channel; they

must not enter the harbor until they have received permission

to do so and have been allocated a berth.

10.75 Regulations.—Vessels less than 175m may enter, berth, undock, or dock during the hours of darkness. Vessels between

Gisborne Harbor from SE

 Eastland Port Limited—Gisborne 

http://www.eastland.co.nz/Port/index.asp
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 249

Pub. 127

175 and 200m long are berthed during daylight hours only, but

may depart during darkness. Weather and sea conditions may

affect these movements.

10.75 Signals.—A signal station lies on the breakwater, but a continuous watch is not maintained. A vessel making the port

should notify the harbormaster of approximate time of arrival,

when arrangements will be made for a berthing officer to be in

attendance at the signal station 1 hour prior to arrival time. Vessels can communicate via VHF or Morse code by blinker light.

10.75 Entrance signals are displayed from the signal station yardarm. During daylight, failing contact by radio or visual signaling, a black ball shall mean “port closed.” At night, a red light

will be shown.

10.75 The number of the berth a vessel is to occupy will be signaled from the signal station; exempted vessels may proceed

into the harbor on receipt of this signal.

10.75 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained SW of The Foul

Ground.

10.75 The quarantine anchorage lies in the position 30°40.8'S,

177°59.9'E.

10.75 Directions.—Vessels approach Gisborne Harbor with the

Outer Range Lights in line bearing 332°, which leads about 0.5

mile SW of The Foul Grounds. When the Inner Range Lights

come into line, bearing 054.5°, vessels should change course

NE and steer for them. At night, when the green sector of the

Inner Range lights bears 054.5°, a vessel should proceed as

above.

10.76 West shore of Poverty Bay.—The shore W of the

Outer Range Lights to the Waipaoa River, about 3.5 miles, is

comprised of a sandy beach backed by low, flat ground.

10.76 Young Nicks Head (38°46'S., 177°58'E.), SW entrance

point of Poverty Bay, is conspicuous for its white cliffs. 

10.76 Kuri Banks has depths less than 18.3m; a least depth of

10.7m lies near its S end, nearly 1 mile ENE of Young Nicks

Head.

10.76 Directions.—Vessels should avoid Kuri Banks, passing E

and NE of these banks in depths of more than 18.3m. At night,

vessels bound for Poverty Bay from the S, should not alter

course NW until making the Gisborne Outer Range Lights, in

line bearing 332°, when they should be headed for. This course

leads about 1.2 miles E of the 10.7m patch mentioned above.

10.76 The neck of the Mahia Peninsula lies about 20 miles S of

Young Nicks Head and the coast between is bold and backed

by hills. 

10.76 Anchorage.—There is anchorage during SW winds, in a

depth of about 18.3m, about 1 mile off Pukenui Beach, which

forms the E side of the neck joining the Mahia Peninsula to the

mainland. Mungawhio Lake is entered at the S end of Pukenui

Beach. When in flood, this lake gives the peninsula the appearance of an island.

10.76 Whangawehi Road, which lies about 2 miles E of the entrance to Mungawhio Lake, affords anchorage during S and W

winds, in a depth of 18.3m, mud. However, vessels should

leave this anchorage if the wind becomes easterly.

10.77 Table Cape (39°06'S., 178°00'E.), marked by a light,

is the E termination of the Mahia Peninsula and the off-lying

coast is foul. Numerous rocks and shoals lie off this section of

coast and they are best shown on the chart.

10.77 A conspicuous radio mast, 94m high and painted in red and

white bands, lies about 2.2 miles W of Table Cape.

10.77 Portland Island lies 1 mile S of the S end of the Mahia Peninsula and its flat summit rises to a height of 91m. Small vessels

with local knowledge use the 0.2 mile wide channel, with

depths of 5.5m in the middle, between the peninsula and the

mainland. Tidal currents in the channel attain rates up to 2

knots.

10.77 A submarine power cable is laid from the S end of the Mahia

Peninsula and the NW side of Portland Island; anchoring and

fishing is prohibited in the vicinity. A spit, with depths less

than 11m, projects about 0.7 mile SW from the S end of Portland Island. A 10.1m patch lies about 0.5 mile ESE of the outer

end of the spit. Overfalls have been observed 2 miles S of Portland Island. The S tip of Portland Island should be given a wide

berth.

Hawke Bay

10.78 Hawke Bay is entered between Portland Island and

Cape Kidnappers, about 40 miles WSW. The shore N of

Hawke Bay is mountainous and there are wooded valleys at

Wairda, Mohaka, and Iangoio Bluff on the NW side of the bay.

South of Iangoio Bluff are impassable white cliffs, backed with

undulating downs, which are curious for the great regularity of

the rises and hollows.

10.78 Winds—Weather.—West winds prevail but sudden southeasters require caution. Southwest gales give warning by an

overcast sky, and are violent, especially in winter. The heaviest

W gales occur from September to November, with a low barometer, but generally good weather. The black northeasters

blow from March to May. The wind comes on very gradually,

shifting from the N to E and SE with a falling barometer, and

blowing very hard between the NE and SE, accompanied by

rain and a heavy sea.

10.78 The ordinary summer wind is a fine northeaster, with hazy

weather, setting in about 1000 and dying away at sunset, being

succeeded by a land wind. Rain falls with N winds and the

black northeasters, and often with SW winds; sometimes dry

southeasters last for many days.

10.78 Northwest winds are frequent in Hawke Bay, while the wind

is NE at Long Point.

10.78 The climate is generally mild, but is hot and dry along the

shore. Rainfall is slight, but increases inland and in the bush

districts.

10.78 Tides—Currents.—For the most part, tidal currents are

negligible in Hawke Bay, but strong in the entrances to rivers.

The flood current sets N and the ebb current sets S.

10.78 Anchorage.—The primary anchorages for Hawke Bay lie

off Long Point on the W side of the Mahia Peninsula, at Ahuriri, and at Cape Kidnappers. Long Point affords shelter during

NE and SE winds, while Cape Kidnappers affords shelter in

SW gale.

10.78 Caution.—Ritchie Banks lies roughly 30 miles SE of Portland Island; it has depths of 249 to 732m.

10.78 Lachlan Ridge has depths of 68 to 146m and it lies, with its

NE end, about 10 miles S of the S tip of Portland Island, extending 10 miles SW. Lachlan Banks, with depths of 91 to

161m, lie about 24 miles SW of Portland Island.
250 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

10.79 Northeast shore of Hawke Bay.—Long Point

(39°10'S., 177°49'E.) forms the only major projection along

the W side of the Mahia Peninsula. Black Reef lies about 4.5

miles SSE of Long Point. Small vessels with local knowledge

can obtain anchorage under Black Reef, but it affords only partial shelter.

10.79 Long Point Anchorage is sheltered from E winds. During S

winds, it is necessary to get close inside Long Point, until an

opening or cleft shows itself, anchoring in a depth of 12.8m,

with Long Point bearing 248°. However, shelter should not be

taken here in bad weather as the holding ground is bad and the

bottom rocky.

10.79 The Wairoa River (39°02'S., 177°25'E.) empties out into the

bay on the N shore of Hawke Bay. Vessels can anchor off the

Wairoa River or the Mohaka River, 11 miles SW. However, this

anchorage can only be used in good weather as a heavy swell

sets into the bay. On the approach of a S wind, the sea occasionally breaks in a depth of about 22m.

10.80 Southwest shore of Hawke Bay.—Cape Kidnappers (39°39'S., 177°05'E.), the SW entrance point of Hawke

Bay, is high with white cliffs composed of clay on either side

of it, and a notable white pinnacle rock, 41m high, lying close

off it. The conspicuous chimney of the Awatoto Fertilizer

Works, and a mast, 27m high, stands about 0.7 mile N of the

entrance of the Ngaruroro River and the Tutaekuri River.

10.80 There is anchorage, in depths of 9.1 to 12.8m, about 4 miles

NW of Cape Kidnappers and partly sheltered from SE and S

winds by Black Reef (39°38'S., 177°05'E.).

10.80 Caution should be exercised approaching this anchorage, as

a submarine pipeline extends about 1.5 miles offshore from a

position about 0.5 mile NNW of the Tukituki River entrance.

The pipeline is marked by range beacons. Additionally, two

buoys are moored about 0.2 mile apart off the seaward end.

Anchoring and fishing are prohibited between the buoys, or in

the vicinity of the pipeline; a pipeline also extends 0.8 mile

seaward from the fertilizer works.

10.80 When approaching the above anchorage, the point NW of

Cape Kidnappers should be kept open W of the cape; caution

should be exercised with a wind shift N of E, as a heavy swell

sets into the anchorage making it untenable.

Napier Harbors (39°29'S., 176°54'E.)

World Port Index No. 55130

10.81 Napier Harbors is comprised of Napier Road; Breakwater Harbor, where all cargo handling takes place; and Inner

Harbor (Port Ahuriri), which is used by small vessels only. The

Breakwater Harbor has nine overseas berths.

10.81 Tides—Currents.—The mean spring range at Napier Harbor is 1.8m, the mean neap range is 1.2m.

10.81 In Napier Road and the surrounding waters, the tidal currents

set NW with the flood and SE with the ebb. At springs, in the

entrance channel and approach to the berths, a rate of 1 knot

may be experienced.

10.81 When SE conditions prevail, a NE set of up to 1 knot may be

experienced across the entrance to Breakwater Harbor.

10.81 Depths—Limitations.—The controlling depths at MLWS

are 12m in the outer fairway, 11.6m in the inner fairway, and

11.2m in the approaches to berths. The maximum permissible

draft in the dredged channel and alongside the wharves is

10.4m. The bottom in the approaches, fairways, and alongside

the wharves is sand and mud.

10.81 A survey in April 2005 showed changes to the currently

charted dredged areas. Mariners should contact the port authorities for the latest information.

10.81 Pilotage and towing services are available 24 hours for both

daylight and nighttime arrivals and departures. 

10.81 Alpha Wharf extends between the roots of Higgins Wharf

and Geddis Wharf and can accommodate vessels with lengths

to 50m and drafts of 5.5m.

10.81 Aspect.—The bold white cliffs of Ahuriri Bluff, 100m high,

are conspicuous from sea. This bluff is the NE end of a group

of hills which, rising from low land, forms a peninsula that appears as an island and is named Scinde Island.

10.81 Two sets of range lights are shown on the W shore of Napier

Road, 2.7 miles NW of Ahuriri Bluff. A red occulting obstruction light is occasionally shown from a pole 3.5 miles NW, and

an aero light is occasionally shown at the airfield 2.5 miles

WNW, respectively, of Ahuriri Bluff. Three radio masts stand

about 0.3 mile S of the airfield light.

10.81 Large pulp and fertilizer sheds behind are conspicuous from

sea and are situated within almost 0.2 mile NE of Ahuriri

Bluff.

10.81 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 40m in

length.

10.81 Vessels must advise the harbormaster of their ETA at least 24

hours in advance; changes in the ETA must be sent at least 2.25

hours in advance. Final confirmation of the ETA should be sent

by 1615 (Monday through Friday) or by 0845 (Saturday, Sunday, and holidays) local time.

 Port of Napier 

http://www.portofnapier.co.nz

Napier Harbors Berthing Information

Wharf Dredged depth 

(2003)

Max. vessel 

length

Max. 

draft Remarks

Kirkpatrick Wharf 12.2m 281m 11.0m Containers

Herrick Wharf

East berth 10.4m 180m 9.0m Tankers

West berth 10.7m 190m 9.8m Tankers
Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 251

Pub. 127

10.81 All inbound vessels should contact Napier Harbor Radio 1

hour prior to arrival on VHF channel 16 for confirmation of pilot boarding position and time.

10.81 Pilot Boarding No. Station 1 is situated S of Anchorage

Berth No. 1, in position 39°28.4'S, 176°58.9'E. In very heavy

swell conditions, vessels approaching should do so with caution and may be directed by Napier Harbor Radio to Pilot

Boarding Station No. 2.

10.81 Pilot Boarding Station No. 2 is situated SSE of Anchorage

Berth No. 2, in position 39°25.1'S, 176°58.6'E. Inbound vessels with a draft greater than 7.3m shall proceed to this station

unless otherwise directed. 

10.81 Pilots will disembark outbound vessels at the outer end of

the dredged entrance channel.

10.81 Regulations.—The quarantine anchorage is in the vicinity

of Anchorage Berth No. 1.

10.81 Anchorage.—Napier Road lies NW of Ahuriri Bluff. This

roadstead affords shelter from S, SW, and NW winds, and from

the ordinary summer NE sea breezes. Strong NE winds, accompanied by overcast thick weather, which blow on the E

sides of deep depressions, give ample warning of their approach. A heavy swell is often felt here, even with strong offshore winds.

10.81 There are two numbered anchoring berths. Anchorage Berth

No. 1, situated about 3 miles ENE of the breakwater head, has

a depth of 20m, sand and mud. Anchorage Berth No. 2, situated on the alignment of the N range lights and about 4.5 miles

NE of Ahuriri Bluff, has a depth of 20.1m, sand.

10.81 Directions.—Vessels approaching from SE should, when 3

miles ENE of Ahuriri Bluff, head to pass about 1.2 miles N of

the bluff with the S range lights in line, bearing 282°, passing

close S of South Pania buoy, anchoring as required.

10.81 Vessels proceeding to Breakwater Harbor should adhere to

the above directions until the head of the breakwater bears

about 180°, when course should be changed to head for the direction light 0.7 mile E of the entrance to Inner Harbor, bearing

193°. When Breakwater Harbor Range Lights come into line,

course should be changed to 168° on the range line through the

outer part of the dredged entrance channel. The W limit of the

dredged Breakwater Harbor approach channel is marked by

two neon lights, exihibited on reclaimed land, in line bearing

171°. 

10.81 Vessels approaching Napier Road from the NE must remain

NW of North Pania buoy. The N set of range lights on the W

Geddis Wharf

East berth 9.7m 158m 9.2m Bunkers

West berth 10.7m 168m 9.7m

Higgins Wharf

North berth 11.8m 190m 11.0m Bulk cargo

South berth 11.6m 190m 11.3m Tankers and bunkers

Cassidy Quay

No. 1 Wharf 11.7m 250m 11.3m Bulk and break bulk cargo

Napier from E

Napier Harbors Berthing Information

Wharf Dredged depth 

(2003)

Max. vessel 

length

Max. 

draft Remarks
252 Sector 10. New Zealand—North and East Coasts of North Island 

Pub. 127

side of Napier Road, in line bearing 250°, leads about 0.4 mile

NW of North Pania Buoy (41°22'S., 175°49'E.).

10.81 Caution.—Mariners should be wary of the bottom charted

between Castle Point (40°54'S., 176°14'E.) and Cape Palliser,

as due to its pinnacle nature it cannot be ascertained that all

dangers have been discovered. Therefore, large vessels navigating off this portion of coast should keep in depths greater

than 55m. 

10.81 A submarine exercise area exists between 20 and 60 miles

from the coast and extending from abreast Bare Island to

abreast Castle Point.

10.82 The coast, roughly 145 miles SW between Cape Kidnappers and Cape Palliser, does not afford shelter nor anchorages off it. The only prominent feature off the N part of this

coast is the white cliffs 1 mile N and a patch of sand 22 miles

SW, respectively, of Cape Turnagain. On the S part of this

coast, the notable features include the buildings about 2.7 and

10 miles NE of Honeycomb Rock.

10.82 Bare Island, 92m high, lies about 1.2 miles ENE of Te Wainohu, a point lying about 12.5 miles SSW of Cape Kidnappers.

Foul Ground extends 0.7 mile NE from Te Wainhou. Foul

Ground projects 0.4 mile SW, and a reef, with a depth of 7m

over its outer end, extends about 1 mile N, respectively, from

Bare Island. Capstan Rock, 1.5m high, lies 0.5 mile SW of

Bare Island. A submerged rock, over which the sea breaks, lies

0.7 mile SE of the S end of the island. A channel, with a depth

of 7.6m, is situated between the foul ground projecting off Te

Wainohu and the rocks projecting off the W side of Bare Island. Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage

off the W side of Bare Island.

10.82 Cape Turnagain (40°30'S., 176°37'E.), 290m high, is a

well-marked cliffy promontory that appears as a prominent

white bluff from the N, and as a tableland from the S. The

shore between Cape Kidnappers and Cape Turnagain should

not be approached within a distance of 1.5 miles. Cooks Tooth,

a conspicuous rocky outcrop, stands on a high ridge 7 miles N

of Cape Turnagain. A 64m bank lies about 5 miles SE of Cape

Turnagain. North and South Madden Banks, with depths of

187m and 165m, respectively, lie 28 miles ENE and 20 miles

ESE of Cape Turnagain.

10.83 Castle Point (40°55'S., 176°13'E.) is a bluff promontory that is almost separated from the mainland; on S bearings

the point resembles a square tower on the end of a low point. 

10.83 Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage,

with winds from SSW to W to NNW, in a depth of 7.3m, about

0.2 mile NW from the point. However, if the wind backs S of

SSW this anchorage must be left.

10.83 Uruti Point stands 15 miles SSW of Castle Point and is remarkable for the land behind the point being lower and more

open-featured than on any part of the coast between Cape Kidnappers and Cape Palliser. A bank, with a depth of about

25.6m, lies about 3.7 miles SE of Uruti Point.

10.83 Flat Point, low with a sandy tongue extending from it, lies

8.5 miles SW of Uruti Point and between the shore is mostly

rocky. A prominent white building stands 0.5 mile N of the

point. Foul ground with rocks, best seen on the chart, project

offshore from this part of the coast.

10.83 Honeycomb Rock (41°22'S., 175°49'E.) is a high limestone

rock lying 10 miles SW of Flat Point; a conspicuous white

building stands 2.7 miles NNE of it.

10.83 Mount Adams, 663m high, stands about 10 miles WSW of

Flat Point and can be made out from the higher peaks behind

by its remarkable cone-shaped summit.

10.83 Kahau Rocks, the highest being 6.7m high, lie about 2 miles

ENE of Honeycomb Rock. Small vessels with local knowledge

can anchor under the lee of this reef during N winds, but they

must leave this anchorage at first sign of a S wind.

10.84 Cape Palliser (41°37'S., 175°17'E.) represents the S

end of North Island and has been reported to give good radar

returns up to 23 miles. From a distance this cape appears bold,

however, upon approach, two low shelving points are seen to

project. Mangatoetoe and Mount Barton (Mount Hugh) are the

highest S summits of the Aorangi Range that end in Cape Palliser and rise about 2 and 4.5 miles NE of the Cape. A reef,

partly above-water and awash, with sunken rocks at its outer

end, extends S about 0.7 mile from the E of the two low shelving points. Black Rocks, 4.6m high, extend S 0.5 mile from the

W point, located 2 miles WNW of Cape Palliser. 

10.84 The 20m curve projects S from Cape Palliser in the form of a

spit for about 1.7 miles. Strong tide rips are present in the vicinity of the spit, which should not be approached within 3

miles. 

10.84 Winds—Weather.—In the vicinity of Cape Palliser SW,

NW gales are common. Beginning with a N wind, the squalls

blow out of the valleys with great violence. When the wind

backs W, it usually moderates; soon afterwards the barometer

rises and SW and S gales follow.

10.84 Caution.—A submarine exercise area lies centered about 20

miles SSW of Cape Palliser. 

10.84 An explosives dumping ground lies centered about 17 miles

SW of Cape Palliser.
253

Pub. 127

11. 

New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook 

Strait

11.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 11 — CHART INFORMATION
255

Pub. 127

SECTOR 11 

NEW ZEALAND—WEST COAST OF NORTH ISLAND, INCLUDING COOK STRAIT

11.0 Plan.—This sector describes the W shore of North Island

from Cape Maria Van Diemen to Cape Palliser, and includes

the narrative of Cook Strait. The description of Cook Strait includes the NE coast of South Island from Cape Farewell to

Cape Campbell. The descriptive sequence is from N to S.

11.0 Caution.—A voluntary code of shipping routes around the

New Zealand coast, to reduce the potential for pollution of the

marine environment, has been introduced. For further information, see Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific

Ocean and Southeast Asia.

Cape Maria Van Diemen to Cape Egmont

11.1 Cape Maria Van Diemen (34°29'S., 172°39'E.), a

promontory, 88m high, is located nearly 3.5 miles SW of Cape

Reinga, which is described in paragraph 10.3.

11.1 Due to the great sand drift from the W, a large part of this

coast is combined with fine yellow sand for some miles inland.

11.1 Pandora Bank, comprised of fine sand and which often

breaks, lies centered about 5 miles SW of Cape Maria Van Diemen. This bank has a least depth of about 6m lying nearly 5

miles SW of the Cape. During strong S and W weather, seas

break heavily over this bank and vessels should pass about 10

miles W to avoid the confused seas which develop.

11.1 During good weather, vessels may make a safe passage between Pandora Bank and the mainland, where there is a least

depth of 29m. During adverse weather conditons, mariners are

advised to pass at least 2 miles to seaward of the 100m depth

contour when navigating in the vicintity of Pandora Bank.

11.1 Twilight Beach (34°30'S., 172°42'E.) projects 1.5 miles SSE

from a position 2 miles ESE of Cape Maria Van Diemen. Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage 1 mile off this

sandy beach, in a depth of 30m, fine gray sand, protected from

winds from the N to ESE. This anchorage is untenable with

winds and swell from other directions.

11.1 Motupia Islet, which is rocky, is located about 11 miles SE

of Cape Maria Van Diemen. Except in very good weather or

with E winds, heavy rollers run into the channel between the

islet and the coast. The Bluff, detached from the coast at HW,

is a rocky promontory standing 7 miles SE of Motupia Islet.

Hukatere, a prominent cone-shaped hill covered with scrub,

stands 16 miles SE of The Bluff, and it has a forestry lookout

upon its summit.

11.1 Ahipara Bay, entered about 15 miles S of Hukatere, has as its

W entrance point Tauroa (Reef) Point. A reef that breaks

projects 1 mile W from the point. North Ahipara Bank and

South Ahipara Bank lie about 13.5 miles NW and 8 miles W,

respectively, of Tauroa Point. Local vessels anchor, in a depth

of 9m, sand, about 2.7 miles E of Tauroa Point and nearly 1

mile offshore. Ahipara Bay is sheltered from SW, SE and NE

winds; but gales from the NE shift to NW.

11.1 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Cook Strait run quite

quickly attaining rates of 5 knots and upwards at springs.

When the wind runs against the tidal currents, a troubled sea is

raised, and with heavy gales the strait may be dangerous even

for large vessels. The sea caused under these conditions is not

as heavy on the W as on the E side of the strait. Local vessels,

when bound through the narrow part of the strait against a S

gale, stay as much as possible in mid-channel and usually navigate during the last quarter of the S current.

11.1 High water on the W side of Cook Strait occurs about 5

hours later than on the E side, so that when it is HW on one

side, it is nearly LW on the other. The tidal currents are occasioned by these differences in level. If in addition, meteorological conditions are such that mean sea level is raised on one

side of the strait, then the flow from the other side will be considerably increased in strength and duration, while the flow

from the other side is correspondingly reduced, or under extreme conditions, even reversed.

11.1 During NW or SE gales, or winds of long duration from other directions, the flow in the strait is affected by the drift current raised from them. The duration and rate of the NW flow

will be increased, and those of the SE current correspondingly

reduced by SE winds, while NW winds will have the reverse

effect.

11.1 In the center of the narrowest part of the strait, between

Cape Terawhiti (41°17'S., 174°37'E.) and Perano Head, N

current begins 4 hours before HW on the shore in that part of

the strait, and runs for 6 hours; the S current then runs for the

same period. The rate of both currents is 1 to 3.5 knots, but

during spring tides and gales, the current setting with the wind

may attain rates of up to 5 knots. Heavy tide rips are experienced in this area, where there is an uneven bottom, depths

varying from 160 to 400m, sand.

11.1 Off the shore between Cape Terawhiti and Sinclair Head, 7

miles SE, currents attain a rate of 5 knots during springs and

after strong NW gales, the S current sometimes attains a rate of

6 knots. Tide rips project 2 or 3 miles off this shore. This shore

should therefore be given a wide berth to avoid being set onto

one of the detached dangers.

11.1 At the S entrance to Cook Strait, the N current begins 3

hours before HW on the shore in that part of the strait and runs

for 6 hours. The S current runs for the same period. 

11.1 A cold bottom current, probably from the S or sub-Antarctic,

appears to run underneath into the deep submarine canyons of

Cook Strait. This current is forced to the surface by meeting the

steep slopes near the 200m curve. The forcing of this current to

the surface may have some influence on the broken water experienced in Cook Strait as well as modifying tidal currents. Off

Turakirae Head (41°25'S., 174°55'E.), there is a strong set

WNW which projects for 2 miles to sea.

11.1 East of Sinclair Head and inside a line between it and Baring

Head, the tidal currents are negligible and usually there is an

eddy with the N current setting E along the shore towards the

entrance to Wellington Harbor.

11.1 There are overfalls 6 to 7 miles SW of Sinclair Head and the

heavy rips that occur during springs are dangerous to small

craft.
256 Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 

Pub. 127

11.1 The tidal currents in and around Cook Strait are unreliable,

and masters are warned to exercise every precaution when navigating in the vicinity. The currents often run in one direction

for 8 to 10 hours; it has been found that the opposite current is

much weaker and, in some cases, hardly noticeable. The maximum rates which are usually attained at springs are also liable

to be experienced at any other time. In the vicinity of Karori

Rock and Cape Terawhiti, a rate of up to 7 knots is frequently

experienced, but as a rule it does not last for more than about

an hour. Small vessels are warned to keep well clear of tide

rips, as they may lose steerage way and may in extreme cases

capsize.

11.1 Additionally, vessels are cautioned not to approach the land

in thick weather, unless certain of their position. The influence

of strong gales on the tidal currents is felt when the disturbance

is from 24 to 48 hours away, and the influence of the current

caused by the winds may prolong or retard the duration of the

tidal current by up to 3 hours.

11.1 The tidal current 5 miles off Tauroa Point sets SSE before

HW at Westport and NNW after HW, at a rate of about 0.2

knot, the stronger flow being closer inshore. Within Ahipara

Bay, tidal currents are barely felt. A NW current of about 0.5

knot runs off Tauroa Point.

11.1 Herekino Harbor is entered about 9 miles SE of Tauroa

Point, but it is small and dangerous and seldom used except by

small craft in good weather with local knowledge. Over the N

entrance point are sandhills dotted with green patches and from

the S head, bare hills rise to a height of 244m continuing and

increasing to over 335m high at Whangape, 5.5 miles SE, with

a table-shaped summit and deep ravines than can be seen from

sea.

11.1 Whangape is a small port with bold entrance heads that can

only be used by small vessels with extensive local knowledge

because of the ever changing channel over the bar. At Whangape, 2 miles within the entrance, there are three wharves with

depths of 1.5 to 3.7m alongside.

Hokianga Harbor

11.2 Hokianga Harbor (35°32'N., 173°22'E.), the N port

on the W shore of North Island,can be utilized by vessels of

moderate tonnage with local knowledge. This harbor projects

in a NE direction for about 20 miles between wooded ranges,

whose steep sides approach the banks at distances of 4 to 10

miles. These mountain ranges are from 457 to 610m high, and

Maungataniwha, the highest point of a sharp-peaked mountain,

at the head of the Mangamuka River, is 655m high.

11.2 Fog or mist is experienced during night or early morning in

the upper reaches of the harbor.

11.2 Tides—Currents.—On the outer coast, the flood current

runs to the S while the ebb current runs to the N. About 3 miles

offshore, the current’s strength is 2 knots; about 6 miles offshore it attains a rate of 1 knot. In the entrance to the harbor

tidal currents attain a rate of 3 to 4 knots. Inside the heads, the

rate is 2 to 3 knots while in The Narrows it may be as much as

4 knots. The ebb current sets directly on to South Head and in

leaving the harbor due allowance must be made for clearing it.

11.2 Depths—Limitations.—Hokianga Harbor is navigable by

vessels of moderate draft for about 13 miles above the entrance

to Kohukohu, about 1 mile above The Narrows and has few obstructions when inside the bar. Depths outside the bar decrease

rapidly.

11.2 The bar is located about 1.5 miles outside of the heads of the

harbor. Between the heads, within the bar, there are depths of

18.3 to 42m, but there are dangers on the N side of the channel

which narrow it down considerably.

11.2 Caution.—The bar is liable to frequent change. It is dangerous for mariners without local knowledge to attempt to cross it.

In 1980, there was a least depth of 5.2m in the channel across

the bar, about 1 mile WNW of South Head.

11.3 West side.—North Head (35°31'S., 173°22'E.) represents the end of conspicuous yellow sandhills forming the S

tip of the W side of Hokianga Harbor. Vessels approaching

Hokianga Harbor should take care to ensure the proper latitude,

that is, by positively identifying North Head, as the appearance

of this port from sea greatly resembles those of other small

ports N. South of North Head, no sandhills are to be seen till S

of Maunganui Bluff, which falls abruptly to the sea 18 miles

SE of Hokianga Harbor. On a fairly clear day, Maunganui Bluff

will be seen from a vessel approaching from the N or W long

before reaching the entrance to the harbor. The old signal station stands on South Head.

11.3 The harbor bottom is primarily mud, except near the entrance, where Middle Bank is composed of hard sand. For

about 5 miles above the entrance the bottom is sandy, caused

by the great sand drift from W.

11.3 White cliffs comprised of clay, 4.6 to 9.1m high, falling perpendicularly to the HW mark, are common to both sides of the

river’s banks. Large iron sandstone boulders project along the

shore, with some of them nearly round and 9.1m high.

11.3 Northwest Reef, with a least depth of 2.4m, lies about 0.6

mile SW of North Head. A spit, with depths less than 5.5m,

projects 0.5 mile S from North Head.

11.3 Middle Bank, with a least depth of 0.3m, lies in mid-channel

and extends N for about 1 mile from a position about 0.5 mile

ENE of North Head.

11.3 Kawehitiki Point lies on the W side of the harbor, 2.2 miles

N of North Head. Rangi Point lies 1.5 miles N of Kawehitiki

Point. A few buildings stand close S of Rangi Point.

11.3 Te Karaka Point, lying 3.5 miles NNE of Kawehitiki Point is

the E entrance of Waireia Creek, which dries. Between Kawehitiki Point and Te Karaka Point, shoal water, with depths less

than 4.9m, projects from the W shore of the harbor as far as the

line joining the two points.

11.3 Gilbeys Rock, with a depth of 3m, lies in the center of the

fairway, 0.6 mile SSE of Te Karaka Point. 

11.3 Between Te Karaka Point and Motukauri Point, 1.5 miles

NE, the harbor turns E. Matawhera Point, on the N side of the

harbor, lies about 3 miles E of Motukauri Point, and it is steepto. Motukaraka Wharf, which dries, lies 0.1 mile N of the E entrance point of the Tapuwae River, about 0.8 mile N of

Matawhera Point. A church with a prominent spire, stands 0.1

mile NW of Motukaraka Wharf. Long Wharf, with a depth of

3.7m alongside, lies 1.5 miles E of Motukaraka Wharf. Shoal

water projects from the shore to a line joining the two wharves.

11.3 The Narrows (35°23'S., 173°32'E.), 0.1 mile wide at their

SW end, continue 0.7 mile NE where the harbor opens out

again. Takataka Rock, from which a light is shown, lies 0.1

mile S of the N entrance point of the upper entrance to The
Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 257

Pub. 127

Narrows. This rock is steep-to on its S side and is just covered

at HW.

11.3 Kohukohu lies on the W shore of the harbor, 1 mile NE of

Takataka Rock. There is a concrete wharf at Kohukohu, with a

depth of 0.3m alongside. The center of the fairway, between

Takataka Rock and Kohukohu, which shoals to a depth of

4.6m, lies about 0.3 mile from the W shore. There are depths of

3m very close to the fairway on either side. Off Kohukohu, the

center of the fairway lies 0.2 mile off the wharf and has a depth

of 8.8m, mud and sand.

11.3 Motiti, a low sandy islet, lies 0.5 mile NE of Kohukohu and

marks the limit of how far up vessels can proceed. The Mangamuka River is entered between Kohukohu and Motiti.

11.4 East side.—Outer South Head (35°33'S., 173°22'E.)

lies about 0.5 mile SSW of South Head, the S entrance point of

the harbor. Three shoal patches, with depths of 13.7 to 16.5m,

lie about 1.2 miles SSW of Outer South Head.

11.4 Waiarohea Stream (35°31'S., 173°23'E.) empties out into

Hokianga Harbor, about 1.5 miles NE of South Head. Foul

ground projects on each side of its mouth frequently causing a

race. There is an L-shaped wharf at Opononi, 0.7 mile N of the

entrance to Waiarohea Stream.

11.4 Koutu Point lies 2 miles N of Opononi Wharf. Mahena Island lies in a bay 0.7 mile NE of Koutu Point, with drying

rocks between it and Kouwarre Point, 0.6 mile N.

11.4 Onoke Bank, with a least depth of 0.3m, projects nearly 0.5

mile offshore between Kouwarre Point and Onoke Point, 2

miles further NNE. A jetty, which dries, stands 0.1 mile E of

Onoke Point. The entrance to the Whirinaki River lies 0.5 mile

NE by E of Onoke Point; there is a depth of 0.3m in the river’s

entrance.

11.4 The Omanaia River is entered about 0.3 mile S of

Matawhera Point (35°24'S., 173°29'E.). There is a depth of

1m in the entrance to the river. A drying bank projects about

1.5 miles SW from the E entrance point of the river. A ferry

ramp lies on the E entrance point of the Omanaia River on

which is the town of Rawene. Close W of the ferry ramp is Rawene Wharf, which is L-shaped, with depths of 0.9 to 1.2m

alongside.

11.4 Motukiore Islet lies in the entrance to the Perunui River on

the E side of the harbor, 0.5 mile SE of the N end of The Narrows. Ruapapaka Islet (35°21'S., 173°35'E.) lies in the entrance to the Waihou River, about 1.5 miles E of Motiti Islet.

11.4 Horeke Jetty, with a depth of 4.9m alongside, lies on the S

bank of the Waihou River, about 0.4 mile SE of Ruapapaka Islet. Another jetty lies 0.2 mile E of Horeke jetty.

11.4 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be found by vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 5.5 to 7.3m, off Opononi

(35°30'S., 173°23'E.), about 0.4 mile WSW of the wharf.

11.4 Larger vessels can anchor about 0.5 mile NW of the wharf,

in depths of 11 to 14.6m. Additionally, there is anchorage, in

depths of 5.5 to 9.1m, good holding ground, in mid-channel

above Rawene. 

11.4 Anchorage is prohibited within 100m of the submarine cable

laid between the town of Rawene (35°24'S., 173°30'E.) and the

shore NNE.

11.4 Anchorage may be found, in a depth of 8.2m, 0.2 mile SE of

Kohukohu Wharf.

11.4 Anchorage is prohibited in the vicinity of the submarine cable that lies between 0.5 and 1.2 miles S of the Mangamuka

Bridge, situated about 7 miles above the entrance to the Mangamuka River.

11.4 Overhead cables, with a minimum clearance of 31m above

MHWS, span The Narrows about 0.2 mile above their S entrance.

11.4 Directions.—A vessel with local knowledge approaching

Hokianga Harbor should bring South Head to bear 100° and

cross the bar on this bearing. The most opportune time for entry is at half flood. Should the first of the ebb be making and

the bar appears passable, it should be kept in mind that there is

a tidal current running at a rate of 4 knots to contend with, that

sets on to South Head.

11.4 The bar generally breaks and a continual swell from W

breaks on the beach. Vessels should be prepared when crossing

the bar for shipping a sea; three rollers are usually experienced

before the bar is passed. Often, the lapse of an hour may make

the bar unworkable, and although the weather inside may be

perfectly calm, a heavy sea may be running on the bar.

11.4 On account of the frequent changes of the bar, information

should be secured in advance at some other New Zealand port;

a telegram to the harbormaster at Hokianga will secure the latest bearings for the channel.

11.4 Vessels should pass South Head at a distance of 244m, when

South Head bears 180° she should steer to make good a course

of 116° until South Head bears 261°, and when she should

change course NE and make good a course of 045°. Care

should be taken to avoid the rocky foreshore surrounding South

Head.

11.4 When North Head bears 282° vessels should change course

N and head for Kawehitiki Point, bearing 006°, until Opononi

Wharf bears 070°, she should haul slightly E and head for the

center of Motukauri Point, bearing 018°, until abeam Te Karaka Point. This course passes 0.1 mile W of a drying rock near

the entrance to Waiarohea stream and 0.3 mile off Opononi

Wharf. A shoal W of Opononi is crossed in a depth of 4m. A

deeper channel lies W of Middle Bank, but it is only about 0.1

mile wide. It has depths from 10 to 20.1m. This course also

passes about 0.1 mile W of Gilbeys Rock.

11.4 From abeam of Te Karaka Point vessels should steer to make

good a course of 352° until Onoke Point bears 066°; then steering for Motukauri Point, bearing 030°. When Onoke Point

bears 140° a mid-channel course should be made until 0.2 mile

SSE of Matawhera Point. From this position make good a

course of 038° until Motukaraka Church Spire bears 310°,

when course should be changed to head for the S entrance

point of The Narrows, bearing 088°. Then steer a mid-channel

course through The Narrows. From a position at the N end of

The Narrows, 100m SE of Takataka Rock Light, make good a

course of 053°; when Motiti Islet bears 010°, steer for it and

this leads to the anchorage SE of Kohukohu Wharf.

11.4 Outbound vessels will find that after a bad bar it is generally

the last quarter flood before it is fit to be worked. In such cases,

the sea is usually very heavy on the first of ebb and vessels are

not allowed to leave at this time. Vessels of more than 5.2m

draft should not go below Opononi anchorage until 0.7 flood.

11.5 Maunganui Bluff (35°45'S., 173°34'E.) is a conspicuous heavily-wooded landmark that rises immediately over the

sea to a height of 483m, about 18 miles SE of Hokianga Har-
258 Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 

Pub. 127

bor. Maunganui Bluff, can be distinguished a long distance

from seaward. The shore between Hokianga Harbor and the entrance to Kaipara Harbor, 64 miles SE, is comprised of cliffs

bordered, except at the base of Maunganui Bluff, by a hard

sandy beach. There is a break in the cliffs for 2 miles S from

Maunganui Bluff, when they again commence and extend uninterruptedly in a straight line for 35 miles, or to within 8 miles

of the North Head of Kaipara Harbor. These cliffs are topped

with sandy hillocks which reach but a short distance inland,

backed by a range of moderate height parallel with the coast.

11.5 The villages of Baylys Beach and Glinks Gully, lying about

14.5 and 24 miles SE of Maunganui Bluff, are conspicuous. At

night, the lights from these villages provide useful marks on

this otherwise featureless stretch of shore.

Kaipara Harbor

11.6 Kaipara Harbor (36°25'N., 174°09'E), 28.5 miles

SE of Maunganui Bluff, is one of the most extensive inlets in

New Zealand. The entrance to Kaipara is encumbered with

navigational hazards, as is the case with most ports on the W

coast of North Island, but once within it affords good security

for a number of vessels of moderate size. Kaipara Harbor

should not be entered without extensive local knowledge. 

11.6 The bar at the entrance is frequently shifting and depths

shown on the chart cannot be relied upon. At various distances

within The Heads, four rivers, the Wairoa River, the Otamatea

River, the Oruawaru River, and the Kaipara River, branch off in

different directions winding through some of the most fertile

land in New Zealand. These rivers are navigable for many

miles by vessels of moderate tonnage with local knowledge.

11.6 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents outside of Kaipara

Harbor follow the direction of the shore, setting S with the

flood and N with the ebb. However, when the current strikes

the outer banks, both currents set directly over them as well as

through the channel.

11.6 The tidal currents vary in strength according to winds and

freshets. These currents are strongest between Tory Shoal and

North Sandspit, and off the N shore, until reaching the first

white cliffs in the Wairoa River, when the influence of the Otamatea River and the Oruawaru River may be said to cease. Currents at springs may run at 5 knots, but during freshets and

strong gales, attain rates of 6 or 7 knots. In the Kaipara River,

up to the first anchorage, springs run 3 knots; above the first

anchorage, springs run at not more than 2 knots.

11.6 In the upper parts of the Wairoa River, above the watering

place, the current runs 3 knots and continues at that strength

until near the head of the river. The tidal currents of the river

follow the courses of the channels. Above Dargaville, a bore of

considerable strength carries up the first of the flood, breaking

upon the N bank. 

11.6 Winter fogs are common, especially in the Wairoa River.

These fogs usually first appear on the flats, but quickly extend

to the river. Additionally, they generally develop at night, clear

a few hours after sunrise and may be dense at times.

11.6 Depths—Limitations.—The bar channel lies between the

W end of North Spit and the W extremity of Outer Southern

Shoal. The shoals bordering the entrance channel shift. South

of North Head, Tory Shoal, which breaks except in very good

weather, is extending W. Outer Southern Shoal and the extension of North Spit break only in moderate to rough weather.

The bottom is very irregular, the depths varying from 5.8 to

45.7m, and there is a very heavy breaking sea during W gales.

11.6 The Kaipara River is entered between South Head and Te

Ngaio Point, 3 miles NE, and has a least depth of 1.1m. This

river is best navigated near LW when the banks are uncovered.

Helensville lies at the head of navigation of the Kaipara River;

there are some small wharfs there.

11.6 The Wairoa River is full of shifting sand banks with a channel between. In 1964, vessels drawing less than 3.7m could

proceed up to Ruawai, situated on the E bank of the river 16

miles above Pouto.

11.6 The Otamatea River is entered between The Bluff (36°16'S.,

174°15'E.), lying 7 miles NNE of Pouto Point and a point 1.2

miles E. This river is navigable for vessels with local knowledge of 500 grt to the loading ground where there is a depth of

4.6m. There is a jetty at Tinopai, lying about 0.5 mile ENE of

The Bluff.

11.6 The Arapaoa River empties out into the Otamatea River, on

the N side, and the Whakaki River, on the S side, about 3.5

miles above The Bluff. The Arapaoa River can be used by vessels with local knowledge with drafts to 5.2m, but they will be

aground at LW.

11.6 The Oruwharo River is entered between Motukamara Point,

a narrow point 52m high, and a steep scrub-covered hill, 125m

high, 0.7 mile S. The town of Port Albert lies about 7 miles E

of Motukamara Point.

11.6 Aspect.—A good lookout should be maintained from the

masthead for the breakers on North Spit and Southern Shoals,

which will usually be seen long before the distinctive features

of the land are visible. Good marks for identifying the entrance

to Kaipara Harbor are the shifting sand hills inland of North

Head, which has patches of scrub on their ridges and end

abruptly in a sand cliff on their seaward side. The land S of

Kaipara Harbor is higher than that N. Pukitu, a large green triangular tuft, will be seen on the top of a shifting sand range, lying 5 miles S of South Head Light. In clear weather, dark hills

on the E shores of the harbor mouth will be seen through the

entrance. 

11.6 Mount Wakahurangi (36°19'S., 174°18'E.) a conspicuous

peak, 145m high, is located at the entrance to the Oruawharo

River, 8 miles NE of the heads.

11.6 The old lighthouse, lying 3.5 miles E of North Head, is a

white tower, 12m high, with a white cupola. A flagstaff, 27.4m

high, stands in front of Pouto.

11.6 South Head is a red cliff, 39m high, whose summit is treelined. This head can be passed at a distance of about 0.3 mile.

11.6 Aotea Cliffs, white, conspicuous, and 29m high, stand

roughly 11 miles SE of South Head Light.

11.6 Pilotage.—Mariners intending to enter Kaipara Harbor

should obtain the latest information from the Superintendent,

Marine Department, Auckland before attempting to enter the

port. 

11.6 Because of the shifting nature of the shoals, mariners should

head for the anchorage off Pouto, lying 2.7 miles NE of

Kaipara Head, and try to obtain the services of an individual

with local knowledge. In 1965, all buoys in Kaipara Harbor

were withdrawn and channels were marked by beacons.

11.6 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained by vessels with

local knowledge, in depths of 12.8 to 16.5m, about 0.6 mile N
Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 259

Pub. 127

of Aotea cliffs. Reportedly, this above anchorage is the safest

in the river.

11.6 The recommended anchorages in the Wairoa River lie in the

following places:

a. 5.6 miles S of Pouto.

b. 1.2 and 2.2 miles above Pouto.

c. 1.5 miles N of Ru Point.

d. 0.9 mile WNW of Sail Point.

e. 0.8 mile off Ruawai.

f. 0.6 mile SE of Dargaville Wharf, 0.7 mile below the

road bridge.

11.6 Directions.—Kaipara Harbor should not be entered without

extensive local knowledge. Vessels are cautioned against getting too close in to the land before daylight especially with a

SW wind and swell. Except in an emergency, vessels should

not anchor outside the heads. No vessel should cross the bar

unless a safe anchorage can be found inside Kaipara Head, 4.5

miles E of North Head or South Head, before dark. Vessels entering should exercise caution after passing Tory Shoal, as both

flood and ebb currents set toward the N shore. Many of the

shoals lying above a line joining Kaipara and South Heads are

frequently shifting and require extensive local knowledge for

passage.

11.6 Rangitira Beach, which projects 24 miles SE from the S entrance point of Kaipara Harbor, is comprised of hard sand. This

beach is backed by low sand hills, and at its S end is the town

of Muriwai Beach. This town represents the only landmark on

this otherwise featureless stretch of shore.

11.6 Caution.—Anchoring and fishing are prohibited in an area,

best shown on the chart, off Rangatira Beach due to the presence of telegraph cables.

11.6 From Oaia Islet, lying 1 mile SW of Muriwai Beach, to

Manukau Harbor the shore is rugged and cliffy broken only occasionally by sandy bays and beaches.

11.6 Lion Rock (36°57'S., 174°28'E.) lies about 7 miles SSE of

Oaia Islet and fronts the town of Piha. About 1 mile S of Lion

Rock the cliffs at Te Ahu Point rise to a height of about 213m,

and about 1.5 miles SSE of the Point is Mount Zion, 294m

high.

Manukau Harbor (Onehunga Harbor) 

(36°55'S., 174°30'E.)

World Port Index No. 55230

11.7 Manukau Harbor (Onehunga Harbor) is an extensive

inlet located on an exposed coast with a shifting bar, on which

there are banks and shoals, extending 5 miles to seaward of the

entrance covering an area of 152 square miles with a waterfront of 240 miles, and provides access from the W coast to the

Auckland District.

Using Wairopa Channel, access can be gained to the port of

Onehunga. Papakura Channel gives access to Papakura and

Drury. Waiuku Channel gives access to Waiuku. There is a cargo service between Onehunga and other New Zealand and Pacific Island ports. 

Winds—Weather

11.7 The prevailing winds are from the NW to SW, and it seldom

blows a gale from the S, the wind moderating as it draws from

SW toward S.

11.7 Easterly gales are not frequent, and generally shift suddenly

to the NW, in a violent squall, with very heavy rain, working to

the W with a rising barometer.

11.7 A falling barometer indicates a change of wind to the N, with

rain; but when it rises above 1016mb, say about 1026mb, and

the land appears nearer than usual, a change of wind to the E

may be expected. A clear, cloudless night is also is an indication of a change being at hand, and if accompanied with heavy

dew, the wind will in most cases come from the NE quarter; but

when lightning is seen to the W, in dark, cloudy weather, a

blow may be expected from the SW.

Tides—Currents

11.7 The tidal rise at Onehunga is 4.1m at MHWS; MLWN rise

3m.

11.7 On the outer coast the tidal currents set S with the flood and

N with the ebb. The tidal currents on the bar attain rates from 1

to 2 knots. Within the inlet the currents, follow the direction of

the channels running at a rate of 2.2 knots at springs. 

11.7 There is a strong set towards the N bank soon after crossing

the bar with the ebb. Otherwise, currents are not strong on the

banks even when they are well-covered. In the narrow part of

the channel off Paratutai, the currents run at a mean spring rate

of 2.7 knots. Above Puponga Point, in both Wairopa Channel

and Waiku Channel, the average rate at springs is 2.5 knots.

Depths—Limitations

11.7 Depths of water in the bar area are unstable. All vessels

should contact Manukau Harbor Radio for the latest information. Depths shown on the chart cannot be relied upon and vessels should not attempt to enter without extensive local

knowledge. The bar breaks in heavy weather

11.7 The bar at the entrance to Manukau Harbor breaks with a

slight W swell. Inside the bar the channels are generally plainly

visible, except when there is no swell, as the banks on either

side break. There are frequently large areas of disturbed water

caused by the tide in the channel.

11.7 Mariners are cautioned that, as the depths on Manukau Bar

are subject to frequent change, it is dangerous to attempt to

cross it without local knowledge.

11.7 Middle Deep, located between Nort Bankh and South Bank,

leads from W into the harbor entrance off South Head. The seaward end of the deep is obstructed by Western Shoals, which

lie on the outer part of the bar. Passage across this part of the

bar may be practicable and may afford the better approach

from time to time.

11.7 South Channel leads from S across the inner part of the bar

into the harbor entrance, but does not maintain a constant depth

and is not recommended by the Port Authority. 
260 Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 

Pub. 127

11.7 The Harbor Authority strongly advises against entry and departure at night.

11.7 The maximum acceptable draft is 4.9m.

11.7 There are small jetties at Cornwallis and Grahams Beach.

11.7 Inner channels.—In Manukau Harbor, E of Puponga Point

(37°01'S., 174°36'E.), there is a junction where the four primary channels come together, being separated by sand banks.

Wairopa Channel projects along the N shore of Manukau, the

N channel, is considered to be the most significant of the four.

11.7 Strong tide rips have been reported (1995) to extend at least

200m seaward between Puponga Point and Lady Bell Point.

11.7 Generally, these channels are straight and having dry banks

on either side at LW, afford sheltered anchorage for those vessels with local knowledge. The sweeping flats between the four

channels could be used by boats according to the tides, and, unlike the banks outside, the smoothest water is over them, with

the tidal currents following the channels. The banks are usually

covered after the first quarter flood, but their height vary. The

bottom in all four of the channels is green sand and mud, good

holding ground. The banks are comprised of soft mud, sand,

and shells.

11.7 Wairopa Channel projects along the N shore of Manukau

Harbor from E of Puponga Point roughly NE to Onehunga, a

suburb of Auckland.

11.7 A flat projects about 0.5 mile offshore fronting the village of

Cornwallis, which is situated on the shore between Puponga

Point and Mill Point, nearly 2 miles NE. From abeam Mill

Point there is a channel to Shag Point, 3 miles NE, with depths

of 5.8 to 11m. Northeast of Shag Point, Wairopa Channel is

separated into two parts by Motukaraka Bank. The S or primary channel to Onehunga is narrow with depths of 2.1 to 7.3m.

Off Cape Horn, where the N and S channels rejoin, there is a

least depth of 3.3m.

11.7 A wharf stands on the W side of Wairopa Channel, 0.6 mile

N of Puponga Point. A monument, 115m high, stands 0.1 mile

N of Puponga Point. Another monument stands about 1 mile

NW of Puponga Point.

11.7 An oil pipeline crosses Wairopa Channel in approximate position 36°56'18"S, 174°45'24"E.

11.7 Onehunga Wharf, from which a light is shown, is 293m

long, with dredged depths of 3.4 to 5m alongside the S side.

The Mangere Bridge, and a connecting causeway, cross the

harbor E of the wharf. Two conspicuous silos and a prominent

pylon stand close W of the N end of the bridge.

11.7 Purakau Channel is entered about 1 mile E of Puponga Point,

and it has a least depth of about 0.9m 6 miles NE from its entrance.

11.7 Papakura Channel is entered SE of Purakau Channel. This

channel leads E for 12 miles to Te Pau, the N entrance of

Pahurehure Inlet separated from Purakau Channel N, by

Karore Bank and from the shore S, by Poutawa and Hikihiki

Banks. This channel has depths ranging from 5.8 to 25.6m.

11.7 An LPG terminal is situated on the N side of Papakura Channel, 10.5 miles E of Puponga Point. The channel as far as the

terminal is marked by lighted beacons.

11.7 Waiuku Channel is the S of four channels leading through

Manukau Harbor.

Aspect

11.7 Whatipu (North Head) and South Head are easily discernible

from sea. North of Whatipu, the land is covered by an extensive forest, while that S, presents a bold barren face of brown

sandy soil; with parts being scrub-covered.

11.7 When approaching from the W, the most prominent landmarks first visible include the three cone-shaped peaks near

Whatipu. One of these peaks is the summit of Paratutai Islet,

which is joined to Whatipu by a causeway. 

11.7 Ninepin Rock, about 0.4 mile WSW of Paratutai Islet, is easily made out due to its cone-shaped appearance. Cutter Rock,

white with an orange central patch, is 27m high and stands 0.3

mile N of Ninepin Rock. On the S side of the harbor entrance,

about 2.2 miles S of South Head Signal Station, are some conspicuous trees.

11.7 Dry Rock, which dries 0.3m, lies about 0.3 mile N of the signal station, on the S side of the fairway.

11.7 Huia Banks (37°02'S., 174°35'E.), with a least depth of 4m,

extends from a position close W of Puponga Point, about 2.5

miles WSW.

Pilotage

11.7 Pilotage is not compulsory for merchant vessels. However, if

desired, arrangements can be made with the Harbormaster,

Auckland to supply a pilot if required. Pilots will board vessels

off Te Priau, located about 2 miles NE of South Head Main

Light, S of Huai Banks. Whether or not a pilot is embarked,

constant radiotelephone watch must be kept with the Officerin-Charge, Onehunga, for traffic information, conditions in the

harbor, and berthing instructions.

Regulations

11.7 All vessels over 500 tons must contact Manukau Harbor Radio on VHF channel 11 for arrival and departure instructions

when passing the following reporting points:

a. 37°05.3'S, 174°25.3'E (inbound and outbound).

b. 37°02.3'S, 174°34.0'E (inbound and outbound).

c. 37°00.1'S, 174°36.8'E (outbound).

Signals

11.7 A signal station and mast stand on South Head, about 0.6

mile NNE of South Head Main Light. Communication can be

established via VHF channels 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 16 (call

sign: ZLEF). Phone contact can be made with the signalman at

9-235-1013 for the latest conditions. Vessels equipped with radiotelephone must maintain contact with the signal station

while working the bar. Weather conditions permitting, information regarding bar conditions will be supplied on request to

the signal station. However, this information can only be used

as a guide, as the station lies 5 miles from the bar and is 244m

high.

11.7 Listening watches are maintained, as follows:

a. 0800-0830—2012 kHz; 2182 kHz; VHF channel 16.
Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 261

Pub. 127

b. 0830-0900—2012 kHz; VHF channels 11 and 16.

c. 1800-1830—2012 kHz; 2182 kHz; VHF channel 16.

d. 1830-1900—2012 kHz; VHF channel 16.

11.7 All other times are by arrangement. 

11.7 Should a vessel be crossing the bar during the scheduled

watch periods, the signalman will be working on 2012 kHz

with that vessel and not listening on 2182 kHz or VHF channel

16.

11.7 A fixed red light, which may be observed upon rounding

Puponga Point,lying 3.5 miles NE of the signal station, will be

shown at night from the signal station when the bar is unsafe

for vessels to proceed to sea. New Zealand authorities advise

on observing this light that vessels should come to anchor.

Anchorage

11.7 Vessels with local knowledge after crossing the bar are not

advised to anchor until after rounding Puponga Point, if proceeding to Onehunga; or after rounding Kauri Point, located

1.5 miles SE of Puponga Point, if proceeding to the S.

11.7 After rounding Puponga Point, vessels should pass W of Te

Tau Bank, which lies between Wairopa Channel and Purakau

Channel, where good anchorage can be found, in a depth of

7.3m, about 0.2 mile E of the head of Cornwallis Wharf

(37°01'S., 174°36'E.).

11.7 The anchorage above Cape Horn (36°56'S., 174°44'E.) is

wider than that close off the lower end of Onehunga, where

there is a pool, with a depth of 7.3m. The usual anchorage lies

about 1.5 miles below Onehunga Wharf, in a depth of 4.6m.

11.7 Anchorage may be found by vessels with extensive local

knowedge at the E terminus of Papakura Channel within the

heads at Te Pua, in a depth of 8.2m.

11.7 Anchorage is prohibited within 100m of a submarine pipeline laid in a 152° direction across Wairopa Channel, 1 mile W

of Onehunga Wharf.

11.7 A prohibited anchoring and fishing area lies within an area

projecting 2 miles from Destruction Gully front beacon, in a

182° direction, with a width of about 150m. Destruction Gully

lies about 1.2 miles NE from Paratutai Island (37°03'S.,

174°31'E.).

11.7 Anchoring and fishing are prohibited within an area adjacent

to Auckland Airport which is situated N of Papakura Channel.

Directions

11.7 Vessels planning a voyage here are encouraged to contact the

local authorities for the latest information and channel depths.

On no occasion should a vessel attempt to enter or depart without contacting the signal station for information and advice; attempting to enter or leave after dark is not recommended.

11.7 In 1983, a vessel entering from seaward was advised to keep

in depths of at least 37m to clear the banks extending up to 5.5

miles offshore. South Channel was entered from a position

about 5 miles SW of South Head Light. A line of breakers,

which breaks in moderate seas, lies 0.5 mile W and parallel to

the channel.

11.7 The harbor entrance bar breaks with a slight W swell. Inside

the bar the channels are easily seen, as the banks bracketing

them break.

11.7 Outbound vessels are advised to keep on the N side of the

fairway after passing Huia Banks.

Caution

11.7 A survey of South Channel was carried out by New Zealand

authorities in 1991. Mariners are warned that the bar remains

unstable, depths are liable to change, and the channel may be

closed to vessel traffic. The Officer-in-Charge, Onehunga, and

the Signalman, South Head, will advise mariners of the situation.

11.7 Depths over Western Shoals and in South Channel are obtained by periodic survey and are promulgated together with

advice as to where the best water is to be found, in New

Zealand Temporary Notices to Mariners; the latest notice

should always be consulted before calling at Manukau Harbor.

Copies of the surveys are available from the Harbormaster,

Auckland, or from the Officer-in-Charge, Onehunga.

Manukau Harbor to Port Taranaki

11.8 The Waikato River (37°24'S., 174°45'E.), one of the

largest in New Zealand, rises in Tongariro Mountain near the

center of North Island. This river has a shifting bar and is available only to small vessels with extensive local knowledge. The

shore from the Waikato River, 24 miles NNW to South Head,

is comprised of a bold, barren face of brown sandy soil covered

in scrub.

11.8 The N entrance point of the Waikato River is made up of

sand hills NE of which is forestland. The S entrance point is also formed of sand hills and rises steeply 0.7 mile inland to

scrub-covered hills, about 166m high. The village of Port

Waikato is situated on the S bank of the river, about 2 miles SE

of the S entrance point.

11.8 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents attain rates of 4 knots in

the entrance, and 2.5 knots above Port Waikato.

11.8 Due to the changing nature of the bar and shoreline at the entrance to the river, the positions of the beacons cannot be depended upon.

11.8 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge and drafts from

3 to 4m can obtain anchorage close in off Port Waikato. The

bottom here is hard, coarse, black and white sand mixed with

pumice, and under this is mud.

11.9 Rangitoto Point (37°48'S., 174°51'E.) stands about

22 miles SSE of the mouth of the Waikato River; it represents

the N entrance point of Raglan Harbor. Kapiapia Rock, 6m

high, is a black rock that is located about 14 miles NNW of

Rangitoto Point and nearly 1.5 miles offshore. A rock, with a

depth of 2.8m, was reported (1997) to lie about 2.6 miles SW

of Kapiapia Rock.

Raglan Harbor (37°48'S., 174°50'E.) is entered between

Rangitoto Point and a point 0.2 mile S. New Zealand authorities advise that the alignment of the directional light (leading

through the entrance of the harbor) may be altered because of

the periodical shifting of the main channel. Depths on the bar

are subject to frequent change and it is dangerous for mariners

without local knowledge to attempt to cross it. Mariners without local knowledge are advised to contact the harbormaster by

radiotelephone, through Auckland Coast Radio Station (ZLD),

before attempting to enter the harbor.
262 Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 

Pub. 127

11.9 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents within the heads attain a

rate of from 2.5 to 4 knots. At the anchorage, 0.2 mile NNE of

Raglan Wharf, a rate of 1.5 to 2 knots is experienced.

11.9 Depths—Limitations.—In approaching this harbor, the

depths shoal from a depth of 14.6m, which is found about 2

miles offshore, to a depth of 1.4m on the bar; the channel then

deepens to a depth of 6.3 between the heads, but close within

them is an inner bar with a least depth of 2.7m.

11.9 The town of Raglan lies on the S side of the harbor on the E

side of the mouth of the Opoturu River. Raglan Wharf, 45.7m

long, with a depth of 3m alongside, lies at the NE corner of the

town, about 0.4 mile SSE of Tokatoka Point (37°47.4'S.,

174°52.6'E.).

11.9 Aspect.—Upon close approach, the entrance to Raglan Harbor can be identified by remarkable gray, bare, sand hills which

rise from Rangitoto Point towards Horea, 149m high, 1 mile

NE. The S entrance point to Raglan Harbor, which lies about

0.2 mile S of Rangitoto Point, is low, rising to South Head,

80m high, and grass-covered, 0.5 mile SW. A black post stands

on the S entrance point. A monument stands about 0.2 mile SE

of the post.

11.9 Manu Bay lies about 1.7 miles SW of Rangitoto Point, and a

swell usually breaks on the rocks in the bay. Tattooed Rocks,

with a depth of 0.8m, stand off the E entrance of Manu Bay.

Bryant Home, with a white gable and a conspicuous flagstaff,

stands on a cliff 1 mile SSW of South Head.

11.9 A red beacon stands on a drying rock in the entrance to the

Opoturu River, on the S side of the harbor, about 1 mile E of

Rangitoto Point. Three prominent pine trees stand on the E entrance point of the river.

11.9 A submarine cable is laid across Raglan Harbor in a N-S direction, about 0.2 mile E of the entrance to the Opoturu River.

11.9 Raglan Wharf, with a length of 46m and alongside depths of

about 3m, stands at the NE corner of the town.

11.9 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory. There is a part-time

harbormaster.

11.9 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can anchor virtually in any part of this harbor. There is good anchorage 0.2

mile NNE of Raglan Wharf, in a depth of about 3.7m. Farther

SE the holding ground is poor, mud over smooth rock.

11.9 Directions.—Raglan Harbor should not be entered without

local knowledge. Contact the Harbormaster via VHF radiotelephone through Auckland Coast Radio Station (ZLD) before attempting to enter.

11.9 Generally, vessels do not proceed beyond Raglan Wharf, 2

miles within the entrance. When about 0.5 mile within the entrance, when the range lights on the S entrance point are in line

bearing 234°, astern, steer NE, then head for Tokatoka Point

Light bearing 056°, at night, keeping within the white sector. In

1978, there was a least depth of 2.4m on this track, 0.5 mile

SW by W of Tokatoka Point. When about 0.2 mile from Tokatoka Point and when Raglan Wharf bears 128°, change course

for the anchorage or the wharf.

11.10 Jackson Reef (Patuatini Rock) (37°53'S., 174°43'E.)

is located about 1.7 miles NW of Papanui Point (Waipapa

Point). This reef breaks in heavy W gales.

11.10 Gannet Island (Karewha), 13m high, and white with guano

from the sea birds, is a wildlife sanctuary situated about 10.5

miles WSW of Papanui Point.

11.10 Tides—Currents.—Off this portion of coast the N current,

with the flood from Cook Strait, meets the S current, with the

flood from off Manukau Harbor, in the vicinity of Gannet Island.

11.10 Aotea Harbor (38°01'S., 174°48'E.) is entered about 8 miles

S by E of Papanui Point, and it is used only by those vessels

with extensive local knowledge. From sea the entrance to this

restricted inlet appears as a large gap in the sand hills on either

side. The river freshets, and W gales, possibly vary the configuration of the spit and depths in the channel, thus necessitating

the use of a pilot.

11.10 Aotea Reef lies about 1.5 miles NNW of Potahi Point, the N

entrance point of Aotea Harbor.

11.10 Tides—Currents.—Between the heads of Aotea Harbor,

currents attain rates of 3 to 5 knots, and at the anchorage off the

red cliffs, 1.5 miles E of Potahi, a rate of 2 to 4 knots.

11.11 Kawhia Harbor (38°05'S., 174°47'E.), which can

only be utilized by those vessels with extensive local knowledge, is entered over a constantly shifting bar and between

Tauratahi on the N side and Opapaka Point, 0.5 mile SW. Opapaka Point is 33.5m high with a conspicuous yellow patch on

it.

11.11 The approach can be made out from sea by Pirongia Mountain, which is located 15 miles inland, rising in notched peaks

to a height of 960m. There are depths of 5.5 to 16.5m between

the bar and the town of Kawhia. Kawhia lies 2.2 miles ENE of

Tauratahi, and there is a wharf there with a least depth of 3m

alongside.

11.11 The entrance channel, between shallow or drying banks on

both sides, is narrow and tortuous and had a least depth of

about 2m in 1984, over a bar which lies 1.5 miles NW of Tauratahi Point. The bar is subject to unpredictable change and

should not be attempted without recent local knowledge.

11.11 A dangerous wreck lies near the N side of the entrance to the

channel.

11.11 Aspect.—The fairway to Kawhia is about 0.1 mile wide and

it lies between sandbanks. The banks dry and are usually

marked by tide rips.

11.11 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents within the heads attain a

rate of 3 to 5 knots and within the entrance of 2 knots. The ebb

current sets in a WSW direction over South Bank, and the

flood in the opposite direction. The flood within the entrance

sets SE over the banks toward Te Motu island, 1.7 miles SE of

Tauratahi. At Kawhia Wharf, the flood has been observed to

continue for about 1 hour after HW. The ebb sets off the wharf.

11.11 Directions.—Kawhia Harbor should not be entered without

extensive local knowledge.

11.11 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage 0.5 mile above Matatua Point (38°04'S., 174°50'E.),

in a depth of 7.3m.

11.11 Within Kawhia Harbor, when the tide is out, the channels

leading to Oparau, Kauri, Awaroa, Rakaunui, and the WaiharaKeke River are all plainly made out.

11.11 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in the S part

of the harbor rounding Opapaka Point at less than 100m off,

and keeping along the S shore for about 0.5 mile.

11.11 Approaching from the W, vessels should head for Pirongia

Mountain (38°00'S., 175°08'E.) until Albatross Point shuts in

the land S of it, when the vessel will be about 5 miles offshore.
Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 263

Pub. 127

During SW winds and with the ebb, there is a heavy sea off Albatross Point; vessels should give it a wide berth.

11.11 No directions are given for crossing the bar as local knowledge is required. After crossing the bar, when Opapaka Point is

abeam, a vessel should alter course as required for the N channel towards Matatua Point.

11.12 Albatross Point (38°07'S., 174°41'E.) is bare and

steep, rising to 183m at Taungatara, about 0.3 mile S of the

point. Albatross Point lies about 4.2 miles WSW of Urawhitiki

Point and the shore between forms a bay where anchorage can

be found, in depths of 7.3 to 14.6m, in good weather, with offshore winds, sandy bottom. A black mooring buoy stands 0.7

mile ESE of Albatross Point.

11.12 Taharoa Ironsand Terminal (38°10'S., 174°41'E.) (World

Port Index No. 55225) is situated 4 miles S of Albatross Point

and is comprised of a Single Point Mooring (SPM), 11m in diameter, painted orange, moored in a depth of 29.3m. Submarine pipelines connect the SPM to the shore E.

11.12 Taharoa Light is shown from a tower, painted red, 16m high,

3.5 miles SSE of Albatross Point. A fixed red obstruction light

is shown from the tower. The pumping station stands 0.5 mile

SSE of Taharoa Light. Close E of the pumping station is the

ironsand stockpile and 4 prominent black towers about 20m

high. Floodlights illuminate these towers at night. The port operations office, a small cream-colored building, stands on a

sand hill at a height of 30.5m, 0.1 mile N of Taharoa. A framework tower, painted in red and white bands, stands close S of

the office. A red light is occasionally shown from the tower.

11.12 Range beacons, in line bearing 158°, lead about 0.5 mile E of

the SPM, and are shown from a position roughly 4 miles S of

Taharoa Light.

11.12 An area prohibited to anchoring and fishing lies in close

proximity to the SPM and is bound by the following approximate positions:

a. The shore at 38°10'S, 174°42'E.

b. 38°10'S, 174°40'E.

c. 38°11'S, 174°40'E.

d. The shore at 38°11'S, 174°42'E. 

11.12 Vessels, other than those bound for the offshore terminal,

should remain outside the limits of the port area.

11.12 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and pilots embark and

disembark via helicopter. Vessels can be berthed by day and at

night. Berthing during darkness is dependent on suitable

weather.

11.12 Vessels arriving should turn towards the wind about 3 miles

WNW of the SPM and await the pilot.

11.13 The shore between Albatross Point and Port Taranaki,

about 69 miles SSW, is devoid of any anchorage or shelter, except in the small rivers which are used by small coasters with

local knowledge in good weather.

11.13 Tirua Point (38°23'S., 174°38'E.), which shows as a yellow

cliff from the N, lies about 17 miles S of Albatross Point. Tokamapuna Rock, awash, lies about 11.5 miles S of Albatross

Point. Piritoki Reef stands about 1 mile N of Tirua Point.

Whareorino Mountain rises to 648m, about 3 miles ESE of

Tirua Point.

11.13 The Mokau River lies about 19 miles S of Tirua Point; the

bar at its entrance has a depth of about 0.9m. Small local vessels can cross the bar under favorable conditions, and there is

good anchorage within. The N entrance point of the river is

comprised of sand dunes; the S entrance of cliffs. Epiha Rocks

lie almost 0.2 mile W of the S entrance point, with foul ground

between.

11.13 The shore S of the Mokau River is comprised of yellow

sandstone cliffs, about 30.5m high, on which the constant action of the sea has produced a unique effect by isolating portions of projecting points, wearing them into pillars of

incredible shapes.

11.13 White Cliffs (38°52'S., 174°33'E.), prominent and 243m

high, stand about 10.5 miles S of the entrance of the Mokau

River.

11.13 The Waitara River lies about 17 miles SW of White Cliffs;

its entrance forms the S entrance point of North Taranaki

Bight. The entrance points to the river are made up of dark rock

which distinguishes them from the surrounding shoreline. At

night, the lights of the town of Waitara are a useful mark. A directional light is shown on a shed 0.6 mile inside the entrance

to the river.

11.13 A bar, with a depth of about 0.6m, fronts the river’s entrance,

and no vessel should cross it without extensive local knowledge. The bar is sheltered from the prevailing SW swell by the

reefs W, but it is exposed NW. Whenever there is a swell off the

entrance, breakers occur on the bar. A directional light, showing white, leads over the bar into the river.

11.13 Tides—Currents.—Outside the bar, tidal currents set E

with the flood and W with the ebb. They attain rates from 1 to 2

knots. In the entrance, the flood attains a rate of from 2 to 3

knots; the ebb attains a rate of from 3 to 4 knots.

11.13 Aspect.—An aero light is shown 2.5 miles WSW of the entrance to the Waitara River. Prominent radio masts, from which

red obstruction lights are shown, stand about 3 miles SSW and

5.2 miles SW, respectively, of the entrance to the Waitara River.

Port Taranaki (39°03'S., 174°02'E.)

World Port Index No. 55210

11.14 Port Taranaki (New Plymouth) is one of the few harbors on the W shore of North Island that can accommodate a

vessel of moderate size. The approach to the port is considered

safe, easily navigable, and has no bar. The port is protected by

breakwaters. Three wharves are situated to the W of the breakwaters. There is a sand bank around the head of, and along the

main breakwater, which is liable to alteration and is being continually dredged.

11.14 Crude oil condensates from the Maui Gas Field and the

Kapuni Gas Field are shipped out of the port to Marsden Point

refinery on the E coast. Port Taranaki is also a fishing port and

a base for vessels servicing the gasfield installations.

11.14 Coastal vessels may enter, berth, unberth, or depart at any

time. Overseas vessels are not berthed during the hours of

darkness. The nature of the bottom at the port entrance and in

Port Taranaki (Westgate)

http://www.westgate.co.nz
264 Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 

Pub. 127

the approach channel is mud and sand; alongside the berths it is

mud.

11.14 The city of New Plymouth lies about 2 miles E of the port.

11.14 Winds—Weather.—During the summer season, November

to February, regular land and sea breezes prevail; the latter

from the SW. In the winter season the weather is variable, with

frequent SE winds and clear weather. Gales are reported to be

strongest during autumn and spring; these are from points W.

Mount Egmont is usually clearly visible when winds are from

this quarter.

11.14 In the roadstead lying N and NW of the main breakwater,

strong winds may be experienced between SW to N to ENE. A

heavy swell is reported to precede the arrival of this wind.

11.14 Tides—Currents.—The flood current sets W and the ebb E;

both attain rates of about 1 knot and are much influenced by

winds. There are strong wind influenced currents in the offing.

A NE current sometimes sets along the shore at 1.5 knots.

11.14 During January, February, and March with E weather, an inshore current sets SW; in the offing it sets S with a rate of 1 to

1.5 knots.

11.14 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels having a maximum draft of

10m, a maximum length of 225m, and a maximum beam of

35m may be accommodated at Port Taranaki. The maximum

draft may be exceeded upon consultation with the harbormaster.

11.14 There are three main wharves at Port Taranaki; from S to N

they are Blyde Terminal, Newton King Tanker Terminal, and

Moturoa Wharf. A buoy lies 0.1 mile E of the head of Blyde

Wharf, marking the S limit of the deep water in the harbor; vessels should not approach within 30m of the buoy. 

11.14 Blyde Terminal is an intergrated cargo handling facility.

Containers as well as general and refrigerated cargo is handled

here. The terminal is420m long on its N side and 80m long on

its SE side.

11.14 Vessels of up to 225m in length, having a beam of up to

32.3m, and a deep draft of 10m, can be accommodated at Berth

No. 1 and Berth No. 2, which are situated on the N side of the

terminal. Vessels of up to 78m in length, having a beam of

20m, and a 6.5m draft, can berth at Blyde No. 3, situated on the

SE side of the terminal.

11.14 At the root of the main breakwater there is a heavy lift berth,

122m in length, with a dredged depth alongside of 7m. The

berth is also used by oil field supply vessels and fishing vessels.

11.14 Newton King Tanker Terminal offers bulk petroleum facilities, as well as LPG loading equipment.

11.14 The terminal pier is 302m long. No. 1 Berth, on the N side,

and can accommodate vessels with a maximum length of

212m, with a dredged depth alongside of 10m. No. 2 Berth, on

the S side, can accommodate vessels with a maximum length

of 212m long with a dredged depth alongside of 10m.

11.14 Moturoa Wharf, the N wharf, generally handles dry bulk cargo. The urea loader is one of the most noticeable features of the

port. Vessels of up to 98m in length, having a 20m beam and a

deep draft of 6.0m, can be accommodated at Moturoa Berth

No. 1. Vessels of up to 196m in length, having a maximum

beam of 32.3m and a deep draft of 9.8m, can be accommodated

at Moturoa Berth No. 2. Vessels of up to 75m in length, having

a maximum beam of 20m and a deep draft of 5.5m, can be accommodated at Moturoa Berth No. 3.

11.14 Aspect.—The Sugar Loaf Islands are made up of two conspicuous islands; Moturoa is the SE island and Saddleback is

the NW island. Both islands are wildlife sanctuaries. Moturoa

is a prominent cone-shaped island. Saddleback is, as its name

implies, saddle-backed, with a conspicuous cone-shaped summit. Three rocks, the highest being 12.2m high, lie close off the

S end of Moturoa, with Lion Rock lying further S. Corinna

Rocks, two pinnacles, lie close off the N end of Moturoa.

11.14 The approach from sea can be easily identified by the Sugar

Loaf Islands, described above, as well by Paritutu, a prominent

dome-shaped hill, 152m high, and Mount Egmont, lying some

14.5 miles S of Paritutu.

11.14 Upon close approach, a radio mast, from which red obstruction lights are shown, lying about 4.2 miles ENE of the head of

the breakwater, is prominent. Additional landmarks include a

church spire, a hotel, a chimney, and a radio tower lying 1.7

miles and 1.2 miles ENE, 1.5 miles SE, and 1 mile S, respectively, from the breakwater head. A conspicuous chimney

stands 0.2 mile WSW of Mikothai Light.

11.14 The shore fronting the town of New Plymouth is rocky; foul

ground projects up to 0.7 mile offshore in spots, breaking in a

moderate to heavy swell. Seaward of the foul ground there is

an uneven bottom of sand, stones, and rock ledges.

11.14 Shoaling was reported (1990) E and S of the head of the

main breakwater.

11.14 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 100m

in length or over 100 grt. Vessels requiring a pilot on arrival

should send their ETA 24 hours in advance. All messages can

be addressed Harbormaster, New Plymouth. At least 2 hours

notice must be given before sailing.

11.14 Pilots board in position 39°00.9'S, 174°02.8'E. Pilots disembark from outbound vessels inside the breakwater heads. 

11.14 Signals.—The port is equipped with both medium frequency

SSB and VHF radiotelephone. Instructions for berthing are

given by VHF or medium frequency radiotelephone. Vessels

must not attempt to enter the port unless instructions are received by radiotelephone or a pilot is on board.

11.14 Anchorage.—Taranaki Roads affords anchorage W of the

harbor approach leading line; the recommended berth indicated

on the chart is 1 mile N of the head of the main breakwater ,in a

depth of about 24m, sand and mud, good holding ground.

Port Taranaki
Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 265

Pub. 127

Heavy swell may develop in the roadstead.

11.14 Quarantine anchorage may be found in the navigable waters

enclosed by an arc of a circle, radius 2 miles, centered on

Mikotahi Light (39°03'S., 174°02'E.), clear of the range line

or in such a position as directed by the harbormaster.

11.14 Directions.—Vessels approach the port with the range lights

in line. The heads of main and lee breakwaters slope outward

under water and vessels should not approach within 120m of

the breakwaters.

11.14 Caution.—Shoaling was reported (1990) E and S of the

head of the main breakwater. A significant surge can develop in

the port during periods of strong winds preceding storms.

Cape Egmont to Cape Palliser, including Cook

Strait

11.15 Cape Egmont (39°17'S., 173°45'E.), a generally featureless projection, lies about 18 miles SW of Port Taranaki;

the shore between is low, rocky, with sand or shingle beaches.

Urupa Memorial stands about 5.2 miles NE of the cape.

11.15 Mount Egmont is not the highest peak in New Zealand, but it

is certainly the most prominent, rising to a perfect cone,

2,516m high. This peak presents the same appearance from all

bearings. Its summit, an extinct crater, is flat, and above

1,829m, it is always snow-covered. Pouakai, 1,398m high, is a

saddle-shaped spur NW of Mount Egmont. Fanthams Peak,

1,961m high, lies about 1 mile S of Mount Egmont.

11.15 South Taranaki Bight is formed between the town of

Opunake (39°27'S., 173°51'E.) and the entrance to the Patea

River, about 35 miles SE. The shore of this bight is faced with

cliffs about 30m high. A gas production station, with two towers 39m high, stands 1 mile inland, 3.5 miles NNW of

Opunake; a conspicuous flare is burnt from one of the towers.

Opunake Bay, which fronts the town of Opunake, is only suitable for small vessels with less than 3m draft. A prominent water tower marked by a red light stands at Hawera (39°36'S.,

174°17'E.).

11.15 Caution.—Petroleum exploration rigs, gas production platforms, and floating production, storage and off-loading installations (FPSO) are found SW of Cape Egmont in the Maui Gas

Field, where the Maui A and Maui B gas production platforms

are in operation. Maui A stands 22 miles SW of Cape Egmont;

gas pipelines connect the platform to the shore ENE and from

the platform to Maui B, a production platform standing 9 miles

SW. A 135,000 ton tanker, the Whakaaropi, is permanently

moored about 1 mile SW of Maui B and serves as an FPSO.

Unauthorized navigation is prohibited within 500m of the platforms and FPSO. These pipelines contain flammable gas and a

vessel damaging them would face a certain fire hazard. As

charted, anchoring and fishing are prohibited within the vicinity of the pipeline. Additionally, flaring of gas takes place from

time to time from Maui A platform. Unlighted buoys and other

obstructions may lie near the platforms; construction operations are underway in the vicinity of Maui B. Supply and

service vessels may be operating in the vicinity of both platforms. Vessels are recommended to give platforms and the FPSO a berth of at least 2.5 miles. 

11.15 Patea Banks, with a least depth of 15.2m, lie about 5 miles

W of the Patea River Entrance.

11.15 North Trap and South Trap, with depths of 6.4m and 7.8m,

lie on Whenuakura Spur, about 5 and 6 miles SSE of the entrance to the Patea River. Graham Bank, with a least depth of

11m, lies about 8.5 miles SSW of Patea River Light.

11.15 The Rolling Ground, a detached shoal with a least depth of

16.5m, lies 16 miles WSW of Patea Light.

11.16 Patea Harbor (39°47'S., 174°29'E.) (World Port Index No. 55190), which can only be utilized by very small vessels with local knowledge, is no longer used by coastal vessels.

The entrance to the Patea River should not be approached at

night inside the 10m curve.

11.16 The entrance to the Patea River is comprised of scrub and lupin-covered cliffs, about 30m high, from which breakwaters

project. Inside the bar, the river is navigable as far as the town

bridge, 1 mile above the entrance. The width between the

breakwaters is 67m. An overhead cable crosses the river 0.2

mile within the entrance. The wharves lie on the E bank below

the bridge.

11.16 A prominent white water tank stands at a height of 60m at

the NW end of Patea, and a radio tower on Bluff No. 2, at a

height of 353m, stands about 8 miles N of the town.

11.16 The bar at the entrance to the Patea River extends only a

short distance seaward of the LW mark on the coast. The bar is

exposed to the prevailing W winds from which heavy seas are

experienced. There is a depth of about 2.7m on the bar at HWN

and 4m at HWS. Freshets occur from June to August.

11.16 Tides—Currents.—Outside of the bar it is reported that the

flood runs for 5 hours; the ebb runs for for 7 hours. Higher

tides can be expected with N winds, and the reverse with S

winds. Tidal currents set parallel to the coast and the set is considerable during W, S, and SE winds.

11.16 Anchorage.—From 1 to 2 miles offshore the bottom is composed of fine sand, with occasional patches of rock. In moderate weather, vessels can anchor, in depths of 11 to 18.3m. An

anchor buoy is necessary due to the bottom being foul in spots. 

11.16 The shore in this vicinity is nondescript. Patea water tank

can be seen at a distance of 15 miles. A small water tank near

the W end of a group of houses at Beach Camp, 7.5 miles ESE

of the Patea River Entrance, is prominent in the afternoon sun.

11.16 Caution.—Submarine pipelines may exist up to 7 miles SE

of the Patea River Entrance.

Wanganui Harbor (39°57'S., 174°59'E.)

World Port Index No. 55180

11.17 The port of Castlecliff is situated at the mouth of the

Wanganui River. The city of Wanganui lies on the N bank of

the river, about 4 miles from Castlecliff. The entrance to Castlecliff is between two moles, the outer parts of which project

in a SW direction for about 305m and are about 183m apart. A

timber training wall, 145m long, in ruins, runs from the South

Mole in a W direction, beginning at a position 227m from the

mole end. The distance between the end of this wall and the N

mole is about 129m. There is a sand bar off the entrance, with

depths varying from 1.8 to 3.5m below chart datum. The town

channel is closed to shipping.

11.17 Local deflection of the magnetic compass is reported to occur in the vicinity of the Waitotara River.

11.17 Tides—Currents.—Off the coast adjacent to the harbor, the
266 Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 

Pub. 127

current sets N with the flood and S with the ebb at a rate of 1 to

2 knots. When approaching the entrance to the port, the current

is much influenced by the direction of the wind. It has been

found that the current sets to the S during and for a period of

time after a W wind has been blowing. Rates from 2 to 3 knots

at neaps and 3 to 5 knots at springs have been observed at the

entrance and in the channel up to the wharves. All information

regarding bar conditions and tides is relayed by radiotelephone

or VHF.

11.17 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels may enter, berth, unberth,

or depart during the hours of darkness. A vessel, 125m in

length, drawing 5.2m can berth alongside. The nature of the

bottom in the channel is sand, and within the swinging basin,

mud. Shoaling has been reported (1993) in the swinging basin

and the basin now includes drying areas and reduced depths

alongside. The harbormaster should be contacted for the latest

information.

11.17 This harbor should not be entered without local knowledge.

11.17 Castlecliff Swinging Basin is formed on its N side by

wharves, numbered 1 to 3, which afford seven berths, numbered 1 to 7, with an overall length of 579m and depths of 3 to

5.2m alongside. The swinging basin is dredged to a depth of

3m.

11.17 The channel, E of Castlecliff Swinging Basin, leading to

Wanganui is closed to shipping. Depths over the bar range

from 2.7 to 3.5m, sand.

11.17 Aspect.—Mount Egmont and Mount Ruapehu, lying 84

miles E of Cape Egmont, which was previously described in

paragraph 11.15, are distinctly visible from sea. Taupiri, a

sharp double-peaked hill, 16 miles inland, in line with Mount

Ruapehu, bearing 038°, leads directly to the entrance. When

the mountains cannot be seen, the Seven Hummocks, a conspicuous range of hillocks lying 12.5 miles NNW of the rivers

entrance are a good guide.

11.17 About 2 miles N of the rivers entrance, the shore changes

from cliffs to low sand hills. Landguard, a prominent bluff 37m

high, lies on the S side of the river about 1.6 miles ESE of the S

entrance point of the Wanganui River.

11.17 Durie Hill War Memorial Tower (39°56'S., 175°04'E.),

114m high, lies about 2 miles NE of Landguard, 3 miles E of

Castlecliff, and is plainly visible from sea in clear weather. The

water tower on Bastia Hill, close N of the War Memorial, is

151.2m high and the most conspicuous object on the skyline

from the anchorage.

11.17 The white surf club, on the beach 0.6 mile NW of the N entrance point of the Wanganui River, is prominent.

11.17 Red obstruction lights are shown from a mast, 53m high,

about 0.6 mile SE of Landguard. Red lights are shown from another mast 2.2 miles ENE of Landguard.

11.17 Pilotage.—According to the Wanganui Harbor Board Bylaws, there are two types of pilotage in Wanganui; pilotage and

special pilotage.

11.17 Pilotage is the service whereby vessels are directed by radiotelephone from the harbormaster and is compulsory. Masters

should not attempt to enter without first receiving from the harbormaster permission to do so as well as directions regarding

prevailing depths, bar conditions, etc.

11.17 Special Pilotage involves the actual boarding of a pilot and it

is not compulsory except in certain circumstances when required by the harbormaster. However, vessels may request a pilot. A pilot will board about 2 miles SW of the harbor entrance.

At least 4 hours notice prior ETA should be given via radio to

the harbormaster to obtain services of a pilot. The pilot boat is

a red and blue launch, 17m in length, with a high wheel house

amidships, equipped with radiotelephone. The launch assists

vessels to berth.

11.17 Signals.—A signal station, although still visable is not used,

lies on the summit of Castlecliff. Vessels can communicate via

radiotelephone or VHF with the harbormaster. All information

regarding bar conditions, tides, and berthing is communicated

via radiotelephone or VHF. The harbormaster may be contacted by phone at 6-344-7684 or cell phone 274-425-489 when

the VHF is not being monitored.

11.17 Anchorage.—Vessels can obtain anchorage outside the bar,

in a depth of about 12.8m, 0.8 mile WSW of the river entrance,

on the alignment of the anchorage lighted beacons, with the

light on North Mole Head in line with the entrance rear leading

lighted beacon, bearing 063.5°. Should winds become strong

from a S or W direction, it is recommended that masters shift

berth further seaward.

11.17 Quarantine anchorage in the roadstead may be found, in a

depth of 18m, with the signal station flagstaff bearing 061°, or

in a position within port limits as directed by the harbormaster

according to wind directions.

11.17 Directions.—In moderate weather, vessels with local knowledge can approach safely within signaling distance, and then, if

necessary to wait for the tide, anchor, in depths of 11 to 16.5m,

1 to 2 miles from the bar.

11.17 A vessel upon receiving permission to enter should normally

steer with the bar range beacons in line until nearing the end of

the North Mole, when course should be changed to pass close

off the North Mole. When abeam of the beacon on the North

Mole, 0.3 mile ENE of the head of the mole, course should be

changed for the wharves. Mariners should pay particular attention to any instructions which may be given by radiotelephone.

11.18 The shore between the mouth of the Wanganui River

and the mouth of the Rangitikei River, 23 miles SE, is a sandy

beach backed by low drifting sand dunes with patches of marram grass. The Rangitikei River is only used by small local

craft.

11.18 The Manawatu River lies 11 miles S of the Rangitikei River

and is distinguished by the Foxton Beach Surf Club tower and

a group of radio masts, showing red lights, situated 0.5 mile N

and 5.5 miles NE, respectively, of the river’s entrance. About 3

miles E of the rivers entrance, on the N bank, is a prominent

group of trees on the W side of the town of Foxton, which has

not been used by shipping for years.

Cook Strait

11.19 The description of Cook Strait which follows begins

with the E side from Kapiti Island (40°51'S., 174°55'E.), SW

to Wellington, and then SE to Cape Palliser; this is followed by

a descriptive narrative of the W side of Cook Strait, from Cape

Farewell (40°30'S., 172°41'E.) E by S to Stephens Island (including Tasman Bay), and then SE to the Brothers, and finally

S to Cape Campbell (41°44'S., 174°16'E.).

11.19 For the most part there are only a few off-lying rocks in

Cook Strait. The W side affords many secure harbors that are
Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 267

Pub. 127

easy to access in NW or SE gales, which are the only violent

winds. When passing through the strait, vessels generally keep

to the W side where the land is high.

11.19 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in and around Cook

Strait are unreliable, and masters are warned to exercise every

precaution when navigating in the vicinity. The currents often

run in one direction for 8 to 10 hours, while cases have been reported of them going for 18 hours and more. When the currents

have been running in one direction, for 8 to 10 hours, it has

been found that the opposite current is much weaker, and in

some cases, hardly noticeable. The maximum rates shown on

the chart, which are usually attained at springs, are also liable

to be experienced at any other time. In the vicinity of Karori

Rock and Cape Terawhiti, a rate of up to 7 knots is frequently

experienced, but as a rule it does not last for more than about 1

hour. Small vessels are warned to keep well clear of tide rips,

as they may lose steerage way, and may in extreme cases, capsize.

11.19 Additionally, vessels are cautioned not to approach the land

in thick weather, unless certain of their position. The influence

of strong gales on the tidal currents is felt when the disturbance

is from 24 to 48 hours away, and the influence of the current

caused by the winds may prolong or retard the duration of the

tidal currents by from 1 to 3 hours.

11.19 Tidal currents in the strait run quite quickly, attaining rates of

5 knots and upwards at springs. When the wind runs against

the tidal currents, a troubled sea is raised and with heavy gales

the strait may be dangerous even for large vessels. The sea

caused under these conditions is not as heavy on the W as on

the E side of the strait. Local vessels, when bound through the

narrow part of the strait against a S gale, stay as much as possible in mid-channel, and usually navigate during the last quarter

of the S current.

11.19 High water on the W side of Cook Strait occurs about 5

hours later than on the E side, so that when it is HW on one

side it is nearly LW on the other. The tidal currents are occasioned by these differences in level. If in addition, meteorological conditions are such that mean sea level is raised on one

side of the strait, then the flow from the other side will be considerably increased in strength and duration, while the flow

from the other side is correspondingly reduced or, under extreme conditions, even reversed. 

11.19 During NW or SE gales, or winds of long duration from other directions, especially the former, the flow in the strait is affected by the drift current raising from them. The duration and

rate of the NW flow will be increased, and those of the SE corresponding reduced by SE winds, while NW winds will have

reverse effect.

11.19 In the center of the narrowest part of the strait, between

Cape Terawhiti (41°17'S., 174°37'E.) and Perano Head, N

current begins 15 minutes before Wellington or 4 hours before

HW on the shore in that part of the strait, and runs for 6 hours;

the S current then runs for the same period. The rate of both

currents is from 1 to 3.5 knots, but during spring tides and

gales the current setting with the wind may attain rates up to 5

knots. Heavy tide rips are experienced in this area, where there

is an uneven bottom, depths varying from 146 to 366m, sand.

11.19 Off the shore between Cape Terawhiti and Sinclair Head, 7

miles SE, currents attain a rate of 5 knots during springs and

within 1 mile of the Cape, after strong NW gales, the S current

sometimes attains a rate of 6 knots. Tide rips project 2 or 3

miles off this shore. This shore should therefore be given a

wide berth to avoid being set onto one of the detached dangers.

11.19 At the S entrance to Cook Strait, the N current begins 3

hours before HW on the shore in that part of the strait and runs

for 6 hours. The S current runs for the same period.

11.19 A cold bottom current, probably from the S or subantarctic,

appears to run underneath into the deep submarine canyons of

Cook Strait. This current is forced to the surface by meeting the

steep slopes near the 183m curve. The forcing of this current to

the surface may have some influence on the broken water experienced in Cook Strait as well as modifying tidal currents. Off

Turakirae Head (41°25'S., 174°55'E.), there is a strong set

WNW which projects for 2 miles to sea.

11.19 East of Sinclair Head and inside a line between it and Baring

Head, the tidal currents are negligible and usually there is an

eddy with the N current setting E along the shore towards the

entrance to Wellington Harbor.

11.19 There are overfalls 6 and 7 miles SW of Sinclair Head and

the heavy rips that occur during springs are dangerous to small

craft.

11.19 Caution.—Ferries regularly transit Cook Strait between

Wellington Harbor (41°21'S., 174°50'E.) and the entrance to

Tory Channel (41°13'S., 174°19'E.).

Fishermens Rock, a pinnacle with a depth of 9.4m, is located

about 19 miles SW of Kapiti Island. Fishermens Rock should

be given a wide berth by vessels of deep draft. Tide rips project

NNE and SSW of the rock.

11.19 The Cook Strait Cable Protection Zone (CPZ) protects vital

submarine cable links between the North Island and South Island. Anchoring and fishing are prohibited in the CPZ. The area is patrolled to ensure compliance and failure to comply may

lead to substantial fines and vessel seizure. Further information

on the CPZ can be found on the Transpower New Zealand web

site under “Publications.”

11.19 A magnetic anomaly is reported to exist in the vicinity of the

Cook Strait submarine cables.

Cook Strait—East Side

11.20 Kapiti Island (40°52'S., 174°55'E.), wooded and

mountainous, and which has an observation tower on the summit at an elevation of 529m, lies about 3.5 miles NW of the entrance to the Waikanae River. Kapiti No. 2, the highest peak on

the island, is 255m high. A wildlife sanctuary, the W side of

the island, is precipitous; the E side rises more gradually from

the beach.

11.20 Rauoterangi Channel separates Kapiti Island from the mainland E; it has general depths of 37 to 69m in it. For the most

part, the channel is clear of dangers except for the reefs projecting from the islets forming Entry Anchorage. Tarapunga

Shoal, with a least depth of 11m, extends between 0.7 and 1.2

miles SSW of Taharirimongo Point, the S tip of Kapiti Island.

The channel between the reef and the island has depths of 33 to

64m.

Transpower New Zealand

http://www.transpower.co.nz
268 Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 

Pub. 127

11.20 Kurukohatu Point, the NE point of Kapiti Island, is a low,

round, flat, shingle point. There is shelter from NW winds for

small vessels in Waiorua Bay on the S side of Kurukohatu

Point. However, vessels should not lie here with any sign of a

SE gale.

11.20 Tides—Currents.—In Rauoterangi Channel, both the N and

S currents are affected by local weather conditions; a S gale increases the N current, while a strong NW wind increases the S

current.

11.20 Caution.—In heavy W weather, a steep sea develops 0.5

mile off Taharirimongo Point; it is dangerous to small vessels.

Tide rips, formed by the wind against the current, lie about 0.3

mile E of Kurukohatu Point, and these should be avoided by

small craft.

11.21 Entry Anchorage (40°53'S., 174°55'E.), available to

those vessels with local knowledge, is entered at the SE end of

Kapiti Island through an opening formed by three cone-shaped

islets with reefs projecting off them. This anchorage is protected from the SW by the islets and reefs, and from the NW by

Kapiti Island. The E side of Entry Anchorage is formed by Passage Rocks and Tokomapuna Islet, and surrounding reefs. Passage Rocks, with depths less than 1.8m, marked by kelp, lie

halfway between Tokomapuna Islet and Kapiti Island, at the

NW end of a spit of foul ground projecting 0.4 mile NW from

Tokomapuna Islet. The channel between Passage Rocks and

Kapiti Island has a least depth of about 6.7m. Tokomapuna Islet, 11m high, lies about 0.4 mile SE of Passage Rocks and a

reef of above-water and sunken rocks projects 0.6 mile S from

it. The W side of Entry Anchorage is formed by Motungarara

Islet and Tahoramaurea Islet, which are bordered by reefs. A

monument stands on the N end of Motungarara Islet, the N of

the two islets. Between Motungarara Islet and Kapiti Island is a

channel with a depth of 4.3m in it.

11.21 Anchorage.—Vessels approaching Entry Anchorage, with

local knowledge, pass between the end of the reefs projecting S

of Tokomapuna Islet and Tahoramaurea Islet. The depths at

Entry Anchorage range from 22 to 31m, sand and broken

shells.

11.22 The Waikanae River (40°52'S., 175°00'E.) is located

on the mainland cross-channel from Kapiti Island. The towns

of Waikanae Beach, Paraparaumu Beach, with Raumati S of it,

stand 1.5 miles NE, 1.5 miles SW, respectively, of the rivers

entrance. An aircraft light is occasionally shown from an airfield between Paraparaumu Beach and Raumati. A prominent

white statue, 73m high, occasionally floodlit, stands 1 mile

SSE of the airfield.

11.22 Hunter Bank (40°58'S., 174°49'E.), with a depth of 16.8m,

rock, lies about 5.5 miles SW by S of the S end of Kapiti Island.

11.22 The shore between Wairaka Point and Te Rewarewa Point,

the N entrance to Porirua Harbor, is high and cliffy. A reef with

a rock that dries, projects about 0.3 mile W of Te Rewarewa

Point. A reef projects 0.4 mile N from Wairaka Point.

11.23 Porirua Harbor (41°05'S., 174°50'E.) is entered between Te Rewarewa Point and the N end of an isthmus, 1.5

miles SE. The entrance to the harbor is obstructed by a bar with

a depth of 1.5m. Small vessels with local knowledge drawing

2.4m can cross the bar at 0.7 flood, in all but heavy W weather.

11.23 In good weather, with offshore winds, vessels with local

knowledge can obtain temporary anchorage in the bay close

within Te Rewarewa Point, but they should proceed to sea

when the wind shifts NW, and find anchorage further S, either

under Mana Island or in Cook Strait.

11.23 Aspect.—Mana Island fronts the harbor; its NW end is flattopped and covered with pasture land. The N and W sides are

steep with rocks offshore; the E side is sloping. A concrete jetty lies 0.2 mile SW of Single Point, which projects midway

along the E shore of Mana Island, kelp lies off Shingle Point.

South Point, the SW end of Mana Island, is fronted by a shingle beach. A 8.8m patch lies about 0.4 mile SSW of South

Point.

11.23 The Bridge, a rocky bar with depths of 4 to 8.8m, connects

the SE part of Mana Island to the mainland. There is generally

a heavy tide rip on it, and currents attain rates to 3 knots.

11.23 A conspicuous radio mast, showing red lights, stands about

0.3 mile S of the N end of the peninsula forming the S side of

the entrance to Porirua Harbor. Mount Cooper, 105m high,

stands about 0.6 mile SW of the N end of the peninsula. Another conspicuous radio mast, showing red lights, stands about 0.2

mile E of Mount Cooper.

11.23 A rock, about 0.9m high, stands on the NW end of foul

ground about 0.4 mile N of the N end of the peninsula. Another

rock, 0.8m high, stands close E. These dangers are marked by

the red sector of the light on Goat Point (41°05'S., 174°52'E.),

about 1.7 miles SE of Te Rewarewa Point. A conspicuous reservoir stands on Walker Hill, 96.6m high, about 0.2 mile E of

Goat Point. Another conspicuous reservoir stands 1.2 miles

further S.

11.23 Within the bar there are depths of 1.8 to 11.2m off the town

of Mana, on the E shore, where the harbor divides; Porirua

Harbor projects SSW for about 1.7 miles at the head of which

is the town of Porirua East.

11.23 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, sheltered from NW winds, 0.3 mile off the S side of

Mana Island, W of The Bridge, close E of the 8.8m patch off

South Point, in a depth of about 18.3m, coarse sand. Vessels

have ridden out strong NW gales here. Additional anchorage

may be found NE of The Bridge, in depths of 9.1 to 14.6m, in

the entrance to Titahi Bay.

11.23 Anchoring and mooring areas, which are allocated by the

harbormaster, lie on both sides of the fairway leading E towards Paremata Road.

11.23 Directions.—This port should not be entered without extensive local knowledge. The entrance range, consisting of Goat

Point Light, a beacon close E, and the conspicuous reservoir on

Walker Hill, all in line bearing 100°, lead through the entrance

channel that lies between the N end of the peninsula on the S

side and the 1.5 and 1.8m shoals. At night, vessels should approach the harbor steering in the white sector of Goat Point

Light. This course should be held until roughly 0.2 mile W of

Goat Point, when leading beacons at Paremata come into range

bearing 171.2°, when course should be changed S to head for

them. At night, vessels should keep in the narrow white sector

of Paremata Light, which leads to the junction of Porirua Harbor and Golden Gate.

11.24 Ohau Point (41°14'S., 174°39'E.) lies about 11 miles
Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 269

Pub. 127

SSW of Mana Island; the shore between consists of cliffs fronted

by scattered rocks. An 18.3m shoal lies 1.5 miles NE of Ohau

Point and there is a 4.2m shoal 0.6 mile W of the first shoal. A

dangerous rock lies 0.5 mile ENE and a rock, with a depth of less

than 1.8m, lies about 0.7 mile W, respectively, of Ohau Point.

11.24 Cape Terawhiti (41°17'S., 174°37'E.) is a conspicuous bold

promontory that rises steeply from the sea to a height of 458m

in an almost semi-circular hill, about 1.2 miles NNE of the S

end of the cape. From N and S the cape’s outline is convex and

well-marked. Southeast of Cape Terawhiti to Sinclair Head, the

shore is mostly bold and cliffy. Several peaks are located along

this section of shore including Outlook Hill, 534m high, which

has a radar tower 14m high on the summit, lying about 2 miles

SE of Cape Terawhiti; Te Kopahou, 484m high; and Hawkins

Hill, with a radar scanner standing at an elevation of 495m

about 0.2 mile SW of it, about 1.2 miles N and 2.2 miles NNE,

respectively, of Sinclair Head.

11.24 Caution.—Abnormal variation may be experienced in shallow water in close proximity to the submarine power cables

laid across Cook Strait between Cape Terawhiti and Fighting

Bay, on South Island. As charted, anchoring and fishing are

prohibited in the vicinity of these cables.

11.24 Luna Rock is steep-to with a depth of less than 1.8m, and it

lies about 1 mile NW of Karori Rock (41°21'S., 174°39'E.).

To pass SW of Luna Rock a vessel should keep the tower on

Karori Rock bearing not more than 110°. Thoms Rock, which

dries, lies about 1 mile SE of Karori Rock. The ground is foul

between Thoms Rock and the shore NE. A rock, with a depth

of 7.3m, lies 0.4 mile SW of Thoms Rock and 1.5 miles off the

coast. There are tide rips in the vicinity of this rock, especially

during the NW current.

11.24 Cape Terawhiti, well open W of Karori Rock, bearing about

335°, leads SW, and Pencarrow Light, about 6 miles E of Sinclair Head, well open S of that head, bearing about 086°, leads

S of Thoms Rock and the 7.3m rock.

Wellington Harbor (41°21'S., 174°50'E.)

World Port Index No. 55150

11.25 Wellington Harbor, previously known as Port Nicholson, is landlocked, with depths varying from 11.3 to 22m. The

main entrance, which leads into the harbor, is clear of known

dangers and has no bar. All vessels may enter or leave during

the hours of darkness; berthing is carried out at any state of the

tide.

11.25 The main entrance to Wellington Harbor lies between Barrett

Reef and the shore E. South winds occasionally send a heavy

sea and swell into this passage which, in gales, sometimes

breaks right across.

11.25 A reef, on the center of which lies Steeple Rock, 9.1m high

and prominent, projects about 0.4 mile N of Dorset Point. A

wreck, with a depth of 8.2m, stands about 0.5 mile NW of

Steeple Rock Light.

Tides—Currents

11.25 Outside of the harbor entrance, on the range line, from

abeam Baring Head till abeam Pencarrow Head, a W set on

both the flood and ebb will frequently be experienced, which

may set a vessel to the W of the entrance, or on the wrong side

of a vessel leaving the harbor which may be blocking the range

on the way out of the harbor. In the narrows at the entrance the

rate of the tidal currents rarely exceeds 0.7 knot, and within the

port it is less. After heavy rain a considerable freshet sets out of

the Hutt River, in the NE part of the harbor. The level of the

water is influenced by winds, strong S winds raising and N

winds lowering it.

Depths—Limitations

11.25 As stated above, the maximum draft permissible under conditions of moderate sea swell is 9.7m plus the height of the

tide. The maximum draft permitted alongside any wharf is

11.0m, except for berthing at certain wharfs; there is no limit

on length.

11.25 The Main Port is situated on the W side of Wellington Harbor and is comprised, from N to S, of the Tranz Rail Inter-Island Terminal, Aotea Quay, Container Terminal Wharf, Kings

Wharf, Glasqow Wharf, Inter-Island Wharf, Topcat Berth,

Queens Wharf, and Taranaki Street Terminal.

11.25 Aotea Quay Wharf is comprised of six numbered berths.

General cargo is worked here. The berths average 183m in

length and have no length restrictions. Berth No. 1 to Berth No.

6 can accommodate tankers from 5.1 to 9.1m draft.

11.25 The Centreport Container Terminal, lying S of Aotea Quay

breastwork, affords two container berths each 293m long and

can accommodate vessels with no length restrictions and maximum drafts from 10.7 to 11.0m. 

11.25 Lambton Harbor, which fronts the city of Wellington, has

general depths of 11 to 18.3m. The harbor lies just S of the

container terminal.

11.25 Kings Wharf has a length of 251m and a depth of 9.4m

alongside. It houses one of the largest cold storage areas on

North Island. 

11.25 Glasgow Wharf has three berths. Berth No. 1 has a length of

84m and a depth of 4.7m alongside. Berth No. 2 has a length of

218m and a depth of 9.3m alongside. Berth No. 3 has a length

of 240m and a depth of 9.3m alongside. Ro-ro vessels are

worked at Glasgow Wharf.

11.25 The Inter-Island Wharf has two berths. Berth No. 2 is 150m

in length and has a depth 7.8m of alongside. The berth is dedicated to ro-ro service. Berth No. 3 has a length of 213m and a

depth of 9.3m alongside. 

11.25 Waterloo Quay is used for a high speed ferry that carries

both passengers and cars. The quay has a length of 99m and

has a depth of 7.0m alongside. 

11.25 The Queens Wharf can handle vessels 200m in length and

7.4m draft. An area of reclaimed land fronts Custom House

Quay N of the inner T-head of Queens Wharf.

11.25 The Taranaki Street Terminal, for ro-ro vessels, can accommodate vessels with a maximum length of 152m and a maximum draft of 7.4m. At the S end of the wharf, there is a 35 ton

ro-ro link span. Taranaki Street Breastwork Quay, extending E

from the root of the wharf, is 233m in length and can accomCentrePort New Zealand

http://www.centreport.co.nz/centreport
270 Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 

Pub. 127

modate a ship of 220m in length, drawing 7.5m. Between

Taranaki Street Wharf and Queens Wharf is an area of reclaimed land.

11.25 The Overseas Passenger Terminal (OPT) lies about 0.8 mile

WSW of Jerningham Point. A boat harbor stands E of the

wharf. The OPT Berth No. 3 has a length of 259m and a depth

of 9.2m alongside.

11.25 Evans Bay is entered between Halswell Point and Jerningham Point, 1 mile West. North gales send a choppy sea into the

bay. Halswell Point, the N tip of the peninsula forming the W

side of Wellington Harbor, is distinguished by a prominent

white monument lying close within it.

11.25 The Burnham Oil Facility, situated at the S end of Evans

Bay, about 0.5 mile from its head, is comprised of three berthing areas. These areas are the Burnham Wharf, Miramar

Wharf and the Incinerator Jetty. 

11.25 Burnham Wharf, situated near Wellington International Airport, has a total length of 257m and can accommodate tankers

with unlimited lengths and a maximum draft of 8.2m.

11.25 Miramar Wharf offers two berths. The W wharf, 170m in

length, will accommodate tank vessels of unlimited length and

drafts of 8.7m. The E face handles vessels with a maximum

length of 150m and a maximum draft of 5.0m. 

11.25 Point Howard Wharf, 163m long, is joined to Point Howard,

the N entrance to Lowry Bay. The wharf is used for recreation;

the wharf is exposed and can only be used in good weather.

11.25 The Seaview Wharf, with a T-head 250m long, extends 0.3

mile SSW from Point Howard. There is a depth of 11.1m

alongside the W side of the T-head. Petroleum products are

worked at the Seaview Wharf.

11.25 The Hutt River discharges into the NE portion of Wellington

Harbor. The towns of Hutt and Petone lie on its E and W sides,

respectively. There is a wharf at Petone, about 1.5 miles WNW

of the Hutt River entrance.

Aspect

West side of Wellington Harbor.—Owhiro Bay (41°20'S.,

174°46'E.) lies about 2 miles ENE of Sinclair Head, and sunken rocks and rocks that dry project 0.2 mile S from its W entrance point. There is a sandy beach at the head of the bay.

Taputeranga Islet, fringed with rock, lies in the entrance to Island Bay, 0.7 mile E of Owhiro Bay. There is a jetty on the W

side of the head of Island Bay.

11.25 Lyall Bay, which is unfit as an anchorage because of reefs

projecting off its entrance point and the abandoned submarine

cables which exist in the bay, and of its being open to S gales,

lies about 1.2 miles E of Taputeranga Island. Luhrs Rock,

awash, lies 0.3 mile SSE of the W entrance of Lyall Bay, and

reefs and a rock lie between. The sea breaks on Luhrs Rock in

moderate weather, and also on some of the patches on the W

side of Lyall Bay.

11.25 Palmer Head (41°20'S., 174°49'E.) forms the W entrance

point of Wellington Harbor. West Ledge is a reef comprised of

large boulders, some of which are above water, that project

about 0.5 mile SSW of Palmer Head. The W side of Wellington

Harbor is formed by a moderately high peninsula of which

Palmer Head is the S tip. A conspicuous monument, which

consists of a white, cylindrical tower, 8m high, stands close N

of Palmer Head. Beacon Hill is the highest point of the S part

and Mount Crawford, 2 miles N, is the highest point of the N

part. A prominent prison building stands on Mount Crawford.

The peninsula appears as an island from sea.

11.25 Dorset Point lies about 1 mile NE of Palmer Head, and a

rocky reef extends SE from it. Barrett Reef, mostly steep-to, is

comprised chiefly of above-water rocks, and lies about 0.7

mile E of Palmer Head. Outer Rock, 3.4 high, lies near the S

end of Barrett Reef. A rock, with a depth of 4.3m, lies near the

N end of Barrett Rock. A depth of 9.1m lies about 0.2 mile E of

the rock. A heavy sea rolls over Barrett Reef in S weather. A

depth of 4.7m lies at the N tip of Barrett Reef.

11.25 Chaffers Passage, which leads W and N of Barrett Reef, has

a least depth of about 9.8m in the fairway. A wreck, with a

depth of 9.8m, lies in Chaffers Passage, about 0.7 mile ENE of

Palmer Head.

11.25 Worser Bay is entered between a point lying about 0.5 mile

N of Dorset Point and a point 1 mile further NNW. This bay affords excellent anchorage with good holding ground of stiff

mud, however, a swell sets into the bay. There is a small wharf,

with a depth alongside of 4.9m, in the SW corner of the bay

called Seatoun Wharf. Falcon Shoals, with a least depth of

7.9m, lie 1 mile N of Steeple Rock. A lighted buoy marks their

NE extremity.

East side of Wellington Harbor.—Turakirae Head

(41°26'S., 174°55'E.) is a bold promontory that forms the W

entrance point of Palliser Bay. The Rimutaka Mountains

project NE from the head. When seen from quite a distance E,

Turakirae Head looks to end in a bold, abrupt convexity, however, on close approach a low sandy point projects from its

base.

11.25 Palliser Bay is entered between Turakirae Head and Te Hamenga (41°32'S., 175°11'E.), about 13.5 miles ESE. Due to

poor holding ground and S exposure, this bay is unsuitable for

shelter. From Te Hamenga, the shore projects about 6.5 miles

SE to Cape Palliser, which is described in paragraph 10.84.

11.25 Baring Head lies 3 miles NW of Turakirae Head and is a flat

table point, 166m high. Drying rocks and above-water rocks

extend up to 0.5 mile offshore off this part of coast necessitating giving Baring Head a wide berth. Arabella Rock, a steep-to

pinnacle with depths of 4.4m, on which the sea breaks, lies

near the N end of a rocky ledge, about 0.6 mile NW of Baring

Head.

11.25 Baring Head, bearing less than 102°, leads S, and Pencarrow

Head, bearing more than 000°, leads W of Arabella Rock. At

night, Pencarrow Light leads W of Arabella Rock.

11.25 An 8m shoal lies about 0.3 mile SW of Pencarrow Head.

11.25 Pencarrow Head represents the E entrance point of Wellington Harbor, and submerged and drying rocks project 0.2 mile

from it. This E side of the entrance is mostly high and lacking

any notable features. Rocks project about 0.1 mile off the

points and a boulder reef fronts the shore about 3.5 miles to

Point Arthur. From this point the shoreline changes to a sandy

beach backed by low sandhills around Robinson Bay.

11.25 Ward Island, 28m high and yellow, lies near the N edge of a

bank extending NW from Point Arthur. Hope Shoal lies on the

W edge of this bank.

11.25 Somes Island lies with its S end about 2 miles N of Hope

Shoal Light. Mokopuna Island, a wildlife sanctuary, lies on a

reef N of Somes Island. There is a pier on the SE side of the island.
Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 271

Pub. 127

Pilotage

11.25 Pilotage in Wellington harbor is compulsory N of Point Gordon for all vessels exceeding 200 grt. The pilot vessel is not

usually on station outside the entrance, and all vessels requiring a pilot are required to give 24 hours notice by radio of expected ETA; confirming or amending 4 hours before arrival.

All communications should be addressed to Harbormaster,

Wellington.

11.25 Should it not be possible to give prior notice of ETA, it may

be up to 1.5 hours after a vessel is sighted by the signal station

on Beacon Hill before a pilot can board the vessel.

11.25 Pilots are transferred by either launch or helicopter which

transfers pilots by winching. A 1 hour confirmation to Wellington Harbor Radio is required to establish whether a helicopter

or pilot vessel will be used. Pilots usually board about 2.5

miles SW of Pencarrow Head, but in the event of heavy S

weather, it may be necessary to board or disembark the pilot in

smooth water. The pilot boat is equipped with radiotelephone.

Vessels are notified of their berths by the outer signal station.

Regulations

11.25 The quarantine anchorage is situated on the E side of Somes

Island. The vessel will be boarded within the charted area off

Lambton Harbor.

Signals

11.25 Wellington Harbor Control may be contacted on VHF channel 14 or 16. Vessels are also required to maintain a listening

watch on channels 14 and 16 if practicable, while within the

waters of the port.

11.25 The outer signal station is situated on Beacon Hill on the W

side of Main Entrance, about 1 mile NNE of Palmer Point. A

continuous visual watch is maintained and vessels can communicate via the International Code of Signals by blinker light or

radiotelephone.

11.25 If a vessel is sighted standing into danger by Beacon Hill or

Pipitea Wharf signal station, and whose attention cannot be attracted by radiotelephone or Morse flash “U,” then a danger

signal will be fired. This signal flare will rise to about 122m, its

course being marked by a smoke flare trail. At the zenith of its

flight, a loud explosion and a brilliant flash will occur. Prior to

and following the firing of the signal, the morse letter “U” will

be flashed at the vessel and sustained until action is taken.

Anchorage

11.25 Good anchorage may be found in the harbor sheltered from

the prevailing winds from the NNW and SSE; the bottom being

blue clay, silt, sand, and shells.

11.25 The inner, outer, quarantine, and explosives anchorage

grounds are all best shown on the chart.

11.25 New Zealand authorities advise that when anchoring, especially in a light condition, to drop two anchors in an E and W

direction, veering from 75 to 90 shots of cable, as it frequently

blows hard with heavy gusts of wind off the high land that surrounds the harbor, causing a vessel to sheer about. In very

strong winds a vessel will lie much easier by having both anchors down.

11.25 Anchorage is prohibited within 150m of the jetty lying on

the NE side of Somes Island.

Directions

11.25 With Pencarrow Head Light bearing 022°, and about 1.7

miles distant, bring the main entrance range lights into alignment. Continue on this range, or slightly to the E of it if there is

outbound traffic, until Steeple Rock Light is abeam to port.

Then steer 005° with Somes Island Light on the starboard bow

until Point Jerningham opens clear of Point Halswell. When in

this position, steer 310° until Point Halswell is abeam, then

change course for the wharves or anchorages.

11.25 Masters are warned that they must keep on their starboard

hand of the channel, inbound and outbound. Vessels entering

the harbor should give Point Halswell a wide berth to allow

vessels leaving Lambton Harbor sufficient sea room. All vessels may enter or depart during the hours of darkness.

Cook Strait—West Side

11.26 Cape Farewell (40°30'S., 172°41'E.) is the N extremity of South Island and appears on SW bearings as an isolated

cliff, which ends in steps W. The land behind the cape rises to a

brush-covered summit, 318m high, about 2.7 miles SSW. The

Archway Islands is comprised of four islets, the highest being

63m high. These islands front Wharariki Beach close SW of

the cape. 

11.26 Farewell Spit, which projects about 20 miles ESE from Cape

Farewell and is marked by a light, is steep-to on its S side and a

large part of its E end is covered at HW. The section of the spit

that is always above water extends roughly 15 miles from Cape

Farewell and is comprised of drifting sand dunes with patches

of manuka scrub, marram grass, interspersed with many fresh

water lagoons. The S side of Farewell Spit is comprised of

Steep-to Shoal, which dries 1.8m.

11.26 Caution.—Shoaling has been reported up to 6 miles SE of

the light on Farewell Spit.

11.26 Golden Bay is entered between Bush End Point, at the E end

of Farewell Point, and Separation Point, 14 miles S. The W and

S sides of the bay are backed by high land covered with bush.

General depths of 18.3 to 36.6m exist in Golden Bay, and it affords shelter during winds in the W semi-circle over its whole

expanse.

Golden Bay

11.27 Northwest shore.—Tasman Corner, lying about 4

miles S of Abel Head, affords good anchorage, in depths of

12.8 to 14.6m, sheltered from E winds by Steep-to Shoal. The

islet of Able Head, 43.3m high, is joined to the shore by a drying sand bank, and lies on the S side of the inner end of Farewell Spit.

11.27 Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, in

depths of 9.1 to 14.6m, mud, good holding ground, off the

mouth of the Aorere River, which enters the SW corner of Ruataniwha Inlet.

11.27 Mount Burnett, 637m high, with a double rounded peak, is
272 Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 

Pub. 127

the most prominent mountain on the W side of the bay.

11.28 Southeast side.—Separation Point is a small, cliffy

promontory joined by a neck to the high land rising close behind it.

11.28 Wainui Inlet is entered about 3 miles W of Separation Point;

there is a sandy beach at its head and dries a short distance inside the heads. The Tata Islands lie close W of the W entrance

point of the inlet. Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain confined anchorage under the lee of the of the S island.

11.28 Abel Tasman Memorial stands about 1.5 miles SW of the W

entrance point of Wainui Islet.

11.28 Tarakohe Harbor (40°51'S., 172°54'E.) is located 1.5 miles

SSW of Abel Tasman Point.

11.28 The harbor is formed between two breakwaters which extend

about 0.3 mile NW from the coast. Moles extend from the middle of the inner sides of both breakwaters, dividing the harbor

into outer and inner parts. A wharf is situated in the NE corner

of the inner part. At the root of the wharf is Golden Bay Cement Company’s works, with a chimney.

11.28 Vessels bound for Tarakone direct from overseas ports

should give as much notice as possible of their arrival to enable

port officials to be made available from Nelson.

11.28 Permission to berth in Tarakohe should be requested of the

harbormaster at least 12 hours in advance of arrival. Vessels

berth bows out, whenever practicable, a harbor service craft

equipped with radiotelephone is available to assist.

11.28 Depths—Limitations.—The wharf is 120m in length. Two

bulk cement loading towers stand on the wharf. The harbormaster’s office is in the base of the outer tower. There is a minimum charted depth of 4.3m in the approach to the wharf.

11.28 The Motupipi River empties out into Golden Bay midway

between the town of Tarakohe, lying about 0.5 mile SW of the

wharf, and the entrance to the Takaka River, about 3.5 miles W.

Vessels with local knowledge can obtain good anchorage, during S and E winds off the mouth of the Motupipi River, in a

depth of 7.3m, about 1.5 miles offshore. The sands dry almost

1 mile from the river’s mouth.

11.28 The Takaka River empties into the bay through a delta of low

scrub and rush-covered islands. The E entrance point is bush-covered. Rangihaieta Head, the NW entrance point, is of limestone

formation, 50.3m high, and bare on the W side. A radio mast,

16.2m high, stands about 1 mile S of Rangihaieta Head. 

11.28 Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage off the

mouth of the river, in depths of 7.3 to 12.8m, with the outer

beacons in range.

11.28 The entrance of the Onekaka River lies about 5 miles NW of

Rangihaieta Head.

11.28 Parapara Inlet is entered about 2.2 miles NNW of the entrance of the Onekaka River. The S entrance is a low, narrow

isthmus. The inlet can only be used by small vessels with local

knowledge. There is good anchorage, in depths of 9.1 to

14.6m, off the entrance to Parapara Inlet.

11.28 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory. A 12 hour notice is

required for a pilot; at least 7 days notice is required for large

vessels. The pilot boards 2 miles from the harbor on the entrance leading line.

11.28 Directions.—A vessel should bring the main range lights in

line bearing 139° and steer on that line between the breakwater

until the wharf approach range lights are in line bearing 123.5°,

which alignment leads to the wharf.

Tasman Bay

11.29 Tasman Bay is entered between Separation Point and

the NW end of D’Urville Island, 40 miles E. The land at the

head of the bay is low with some conspicuous white cliffs.

However, both sides of the bay are mountainous.

11.29 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents along the shores of

Tasman Bay attain rates of 0.2 knot to 1 knot. A S current of almost 1 knot generally prevails during strong N winds.

Tasman Bay—West Side

11.30 Awaroa Bay is a shallow indentation that is entered

between a point about 2.5 miles SSE of Separation Point and a

point about 2.5 miles further SSE. A 4.3m rocky patch lies in

the center of the bay, about 1 mile SSE of the N entrance point.

The bay affords anchorage, in a depth of 18.3m, in moderate

weather with offshore winds.

11.30 The shore between Awaroa Head, the S entrance point of

Awaroa Bay, and Abel Head, about 0.7 miles ESE and then for

1.7 miles S to Reef Point, is rocky, steep, and bush-covered.

Abel Head is notable for a white patch on its NE side.

11.30 Tonga Roadstead lies between Reef Point and Foul Point,

about 1.2 miles S. In the NW corner of the roadstead is a sandy

beach. Tonga Island, 76.8m high, steep and rock-fringed, lies

about 0.5 mile SE of Reef Point. Whale Rock, awash, marked

by a beacon, lies 0.5 mile SE of Foul Point.

11.30 Anchorage, in a depth of 13m, may be obtained during offshore winds, about 0.4 mile W of Tonga Island.

11.30 Several rocks lie about 0.5 mile offshore between Foul Point

and North Head, about 2 miles S. Bark Bay Reef (Big Reef),

which dries at 1.2m, lies about 0.7 mile SSE of Foul Point,

with Pinnacle Islet about 0.7 mile SSW of the reef. A rock,

awash, stands close NE of Pinnacle Islet. Due to the many dangers lying off this section of coast, vessels should not approach

within 2 miles of it.

11.30 Torrent Bay is entered between North Head and Pitt Head,

0.6 mile SSE. An islet lies close NE of Pitt Head. Vessels with

local knowledge can obtain good anchorage in the outer part of

Torrent Bay, in depths of 11 to 12.8m, during offshore winds.

The S part of Torrent Bay affords good shelter for small vessels, in depths of 5.5 to 6.4m, except during NE winds.

11.31 Astrolabe Roadstead affords snug anchorage with offshore winds and lies between Adele Island and the shore W.

11.31 Hapuka Reef, which dries 1.2m and is comprised of several

pinnacles, lies about 0.5 mile E of Te Karitu Point. A narrow

channel, with a depth of 11m, lies between the reef and the

mainland.

11.31 Fisherman Island, 40.8m high and rocky, lies about 0.4 mile

S of the SW end of Adele Island. A rock, awash, lies close SE

of Fisherman Island.

11.31 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, in a depth of 11m, about 0.4 mile SW of Te Karitu

Point. Within the N approach to Astrolabe Roadstead, between

Hapuka Reef and Six Foot Rock, there is a depth of 14.6m. The

narrow channel between Six Foot Rock and Jules Point, 0.2

mile SSW, has a similar depth.
Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 273

Pub. 127

11.31 The S approach to Astrolabe Roadstead, between the S tip of

Adele Island and Fisherman Island, has a least depth of about

4.3m. This passage is narrowed by a sandspit, that dries, extending from the W side of Adele Islet. Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain sheltered anchorage off the NW

shore of Adele Island.

11.31 The Motueka River empties out into the bay through a delta

about 6.2 miles SSW of Adele Islet, and it is not navigable.

11.31 Caution.—The entrance to the Motueka River has been mistaken several times for the entrance to Port Motueka and mariners should exercise caution.

11.32 Port Motueka (41°08'S., 173°01'E.), which should

only be used by vessels with local knowledge, is a fishing port

entered through a channel between the N end of Jacketts Island

and the mainland N. A training wall projects 0.3 mile ENE

from the N end of Jacketts Island. In 1983, the wall was in poor

condition. A sand bar, that dries, which is subject to change,

lies parallel with and off the entrance to the port. A wharf lies

on the N shore, close within the entrance of Port Motueka.

11.32 Moutere Bluff (41°13.5'S., 173°05'E.), about 64m high, lies

about 5 miles SSE of the entrance to Port Motueka and is notable for prominent white cliffs.

11.32 Mapua Harbor, entered about 2.5 miles SSE of Moutere

Bluff, can only be used by small vessels with local knowledge.

Tasman Bay—East Side

11.33 Nile Head (40°44'S., 173°52'E.) represents the NW

tip of D’Urville Island, whose W side comprises the E side of

Tasman Bay.

11.33 Two Bay Point lies about 6 miles SSW of Nile Head and the

shore between is rocky and steep.

11.33 Greville Harbor, entered between Two Bay Point and

Ragged Point, does not provide protection from NW gales to

large vessels. Araiawa Rock, 21.3m high, lies about 0.2 mile

NW of Ragged Point. A rock, with a depth of 0.6m, lies about

0.2 mile ENE of Araiawa Rock. Within Greville Harbor there

are depths of 11 to 18.3m. The ESE arm of the harbor, which is

almost closed by boulder spits on either side of the entrance,

has general depths of 12.8 to 27.4m. The boulder spit on the N

side of the entrance to this arm is marked by a beacon. An

overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 37.5m,

spans the harbor near the boulder spits.

11.33 The shore between Ragged Point and Okarewa, about 4

miles S, is precipitous. Rahonui, an islet 19.2m high, lies about

0.7 mile NNW of Okarewa Point. Hapuka Islet lies close S of

Okarewa.

11.33 Manawakupakupa Bay, which is unsurveyed, is entered between Hapuka Islet and the northernmost of Paddock Rocks,

which lie on a spit of foul ground extending 1.2 miles NNW

from a position about 1 mile N of Sauvage Point (40°57'S.,

173°46'E.).

11.33 Current Basin lies between the S end of D’Urville Island and

Okuri Point, 1 mile S on the mainland. The entrance is obstructed by several rocks and dangers including Hope Rock and

the Beef Barrels, which are all best shown on the appropriate

chart.

11.33 The channel through Current Basin is available to vessels

with local knowledge only.

11.34 French Pass (Te Aumiti) (40°55'S., 173°50'E.) joins

Current Basin with Admiralty Bay and local knowledge is essential for its use.

11.34 An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 80m,

spans the channel from Reef Point to Channel Point.

11.34 A reef, that dries, projects about 0.2 mile S from Reef Point

(40°55'S., 173°50'E.), and Fisherman Pass, a narrow boat channel, leads through the reef close S of the Point. A channel,

100m wide, leads between the S end of the above reef and

Channel Point on the mainland. There are general depths of

18.3 to 27.4m in French Pass, and apparently depths of at least

11m in the fairway into Admiralty Bay.

11.34 Middle Bank, with a least depth of 2.7m, broken white

shells, lies 0.3 mile SW of Channel Point. A bank, with a least

depth 3.7m, stones, lies about 0.3 mile ENE of Reef Point.

There is a least depth of 11m between the bank and Collinet

Point, and a similar depth in the channel between it and Reef

Point.

11.34 Masters of vessels are cautioned against taking a vessel

through the pass against the current, as not only does a vessel

sometimes not answer its helm, owing to the eddies acting on

her bow, but there is danger of meeting a vessel coming from

the opposite direction, which is not visible in sufficient time to

prevent collision. Powered vessels of moderate size can, with

prudence, pass through at slack water or with the tidal current

and so save some 15 miles of distance and avoid the heavy

cross sea that is frequently met N of D’Urvilles Island and

Stephens Island. Local knowledge is highly desirable.

11.34 These currents attain rates of from 5 to 7 knots and do not set

directly through the narrow channel, but rather across, with the

flood current setting in a SW direction as far as the narrows

and then along the shore between Channe Pointl and Rock Cod

Point. The ebb current sets in the opposite direction. Slack water lasts about 20 minutes. The extraordinary irregularity of the

bottom, together with the narrowness of the channel, accounts

for the many eddies.

11.34 Care must be taken to prevent a vessel being swung round

onto Collinet Point by the eddies.

11.34 Caution.—All vessels intending to transit French Pass are to

give warning 10 minutes before reaching the narrows on VHF

channels 16 and 65.

11.35 The shore between Okuri Point and Kakaho, about 5.5

miles SW, is rocky and precipitous. The summits of the peaks

in this vicinity are scrub-covered.

11.35 Croisilles Harbor (41°03'S., 173°37'E.) is entered between

Kakaho and Cape Soucis, 3.5 miles WSW. Croisilles Harbor is

relatively easy to enter and offers good shelter in all weathers.

Additionally, it is the best harbor of refuge on the E side of Tasman Bay for large vessels in NW gales.

11.35 Caution.—Motuanauru Islet, 112m high, lies close within

the W limit of foul ground projecting nearly 2 miles W and 1.5

miles SW of Kakaho. Otuhaereroa Islet, 99m high, lies midway between it and Kakaho. The SW limit of the foul ground is

marked by Moukirikiri Islet, 28.6m high and conical. All of the

above islets are brush-covered. The above foul grounds W end

should be given a berth of about 0.7 mile.

11.35 Squally Cove lies at the head of Croisilles Harbor and affords excellent anchorage for vessels with local knowledge in

bad NW weather, in a depth of 12.8m.
274 Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 

Pub. 127

11.35 The shore SW from Cape Soucis, about 9.5 miles to Pepin

Island, has no known off-lying dangers. Stuart Hill rises to

400m in the central part of Pepin Island; the island is steep,

rocky, and conspicuous.

11.35 The W portion of Delaware Bay is formed by the E coast of

Pepin Island. Ataata point is the W entrance point of Delaware

Bay and the shore, about 2.5 miles SW to Glenduan, is rocky

and steep. Two prominent land slips, which are light-colored,

lie about 2 miles SW of Pepin Island.

Nelson Harbor (41°16'S., 173°17'E.)

World Port Index No. 55290

11.36 Port Nelson lies in the SE part of Tasman Bay. The

harbor is formed on the NE by Boulder Bank, a narrow bank

which almost covers at HW, and by Haulashore Island on the

SW. 

Tides—Currents

11.36 In the entrance channel approaches to berths and alongside

wharves, the tidal rate at neaps is 3 to 4 knots and 5 to 6 knots

at springs. The neap range was 1.8m and the spring range was

3.4m.

11.36 In 1976, it was reported that in Main Channel and at Main

Wharf, the current attained a rate of 4 knots at springs; no current was experienced for a 30 minute period, 15 minutes either

side of HW and LW. At McGlashen Quay and in the basin, the

current experienced was less than 1 knot.

11.36 The incoming current sets onto the W end of McKellar

Quay; the outgoing current sets off the quay and also sets onto

the N end of Brunt Quay and the whole of Main Wharf.

Depths—Limitations

11.36 The main entrance had a controlling depth of 8.2m in 2003.

The dredged approach and entry channel has a maintained

depth of 7.9m. Inner Channel and approaches to berths have a

dredged depth of 7.3m. The NW and NE limits of the dredged

area are marked by piles, from which lights are shown.

11.36 Although the harbor is dredged, shoaling occurs along the

edges of Main Entrance Channel, in dredged areas within the

harbor, and alongside the wharfs; mariners should obtain the

latest depths from the Harbormaster.

11.36 Entering and leaving is governed by draft and stage of the

tide. Vessels are berthed and unberthed at all stages of the

flood, depending on draft. Vessels may enter, berth, unberth, or

leave during the hours of darkness.

11.36 Vessels wishing to enter Port Nelson are not berthed in a

strong wind. The maximum dimensions for entering Port Nelson are a length of 200m, a beam of beam 32.5m, a draft for

cargo vessels of 9.2m, and a draft for tanker vessels of 7.9m.

The above length and drafts may be exceeded only at the discretion of the harbormaster.

11.36 The main entrance is formed by South Mole, which projects

about 0.1 mile NW from the N end of Haulashore Island, and a

wall, about the same length on the NE side, parallel to and 0.2

mile NE of South Mole.

11.36 Main Wharf lies almost midway along the SE part of the

dredged area. At Berth No. 4 and Berth No. 5, tankers up to

174m long, with drafts up to 7.9m,can be accommodated. Main

Wharf, which is T-shaped, has three berths on the outer face

and two berths on the inner face. Berth No. 3, Berth No. 4, and

Berth No. 5, which lie on the outer face of the NE and SW

arms, have a total berthage length of 1,618m and depths ranging from 7.6 to 9.8m alongside. Berth No. 6 and Berth No. 7,

which lie on the inner face of the SW arm, have a total berthage

length of 519m, with a depth 6.1m alongside.

11.36 Brestwork Wharf, lying SW of Main Wharf, is comprised of

Berth No. 8, Berth No. 9, Berth No. 10, and Berth No. 11, having a total berthage length of 180m, with alongside depths

ranging from 1.5 to 4.3m

11.36 McGlashen Quay, lying NE of Main Wharf, has two available berths, North and South, with a total berthage length of

335m and a depth of 9.8m alongside.

11.36 Kingsford Quay, lying NE of McGlashen Quay, is comprised

of an outer and inner berth and has a total berthage length of

259m, with depths ranging from 6.4 to 9.14m alongside.

11.36 Brunt Quay, lying opposite McGlashen Quay, has a total berthage length of 137m and a dredged depth of 9.7m alongside.

Aspect

11.36 The main entrance to the harbor lies between the S end of a

bank and the N edge of the island. A rubble mole projects

about 0.1 mile NW from the NW end of Haulashore Island. Local magnetic anomalies may be experienced in the vicinity of

Nelson.

11.36 Boulder Bank, which forms the NE side of the harbor, is narrow and nearly covered at HW. There are five patches on this

bank, called islands. The Old Lighthouse, a white cement silo

just E of Breastwork Wharf, and the Cathedral, standing on a

hill about 1.5 miles SE of Main Entrance, are all conspicuous.

Port Nelson

 http://portnelson.com

Courtesy of Port Nelson

Nelson Harbor
Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 275

Pub. 127

11.36 Range lights are shown for the approach to the main entrance. Two red obstruction lights are shown from a mast, 6.7m

high, which stands on the mainland 0.7 mile SW of the rear

range light. Range lights are also shown for main entrance. Additional range lights are shown near the N end of Haulashore

Island. These lights indicate the turning point for vessels leaving the harbor.

Pilotage

11.36 Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of 100 grt or over. Vessels

should radio their ETA to the Harbormaster, Nelson at least 24

hours in advance, confirming 4 hours prior to arrival. If the vessel is to arrive on a weekend, pilotage should be ordered by

1500 on Friday. The pilot boat, painted orange, will meet vessels about 2 miles off the channel entrance.

11.36 A vessel, 115.8m in length and maximum draft of 5.8m, can

berth or unberth at any time. Larger vessels berth and unberth

on a rising tide, day or night, the time depending on draft, and

are usually berthed bow out. Such vessels should arrive as early

on a rising tide as possible. Vessels are not berthed in a strong

wind.

11.36 Pilots board vessels about 3 miles seaward of the main entrance by high speed launch, 12m in length.

Signals

11.36 There is a radiotelephone at the harbor board office situated

near the wharves. The call sign is Nelson Harbor Radio, frequency 2162 kHz, as well as VHF channels 12 and 16. A red

flag by day or a red light at night, shown at the berth allocated,

indicates the position abeam where the vessel’s bridge should

be placed.

Anchorage

11.36 Vessels are not permitted to anchor inside the harbor without

the authority of the harbormaster.

11.36 Offshore anchorage is available with Boulder Bank Disused

Lighthouse, bearing 157°, distant 2.1 miles; quarantine anchorage may be taken with the lighthouse bearing 159° at the same

distance. There is a depth of 11m at each of the anchorges.

11.36 Bolton Hole, about 0.4 mile W of the SE end of Haulashore

Island, affords anchorage sheltered by the bar, and can be approached in a least depth of 2.4m.

11.36 In 1982, shoaling had occurred on the bank NW and W of

Bolton Hole, and some parts of the bank dry.

11.36 There is anchorage, in a depth of about 12m, mud, with Port

Nelson Landfall Light bearing 144°, distant 2.5 miles. Deepdraft vessels can anchor farther to seaward.

11.36 The quarantine anchorage lies about 0.1 mile SE of the

above anchorage.

Directions

11.36 Mariners should be advised that the Boulder Bank blocks the

lights of Port Nelson from small vessels.

11.36 Vessels approaching Port Nelson should steer for the anchorage, avoiding the SW side of Tasman Bay, off which banks

project some 4 miles. A vessel should not head for Nelson Harbor in strong NW winds, but should instead seek shelter in

Croisilles Harbor until it moderates.

11.36 Vessels should bring the outer range beacons in line bearing

164.7°; at night, keep in the white fixed sector of the front

light. This above course should be maintained until the main

entrance range lights are in line bearing 135.5°, which alignment leads through the main entrance. This alignment should

be maintained until the inner range lights are in line bearing

about 269°, astern. When Main Entrance front range light bears

221°, alter course NE towards the wharves.

11.36 Vessels of moderate size should enter the harbor at the end of

the flood and let go an anchor under foot to assist in swing,

weighing it before going alongside.

Caution

11.36 Great care should be exercised when berthing due to the uncertainty of the tidal currents, particularly at Main Wharf and

off the N end of Brunt Quay. Vessels usually berth at Main

Wharf stemming the tide, i.e. port side-to when the tide is

flooding or starboard side-to when the tide is ebbing. 

11.36 Trees on Haulashore Island partially obscure the rear leading

light from the N. 

D’Urville Island—North Shore

11.37 D’Urville Island’s W coast forms part of the E shore

of Tasman Bay, which is described in paragraph 11.33. D’Urville Island projects boldly from the coast and it is mountainous and wooded. The island is separated from the coast by

French Pass, described in paragraph 11.34, and Current Basin,

described in paragraph 11.33.

11.37 Port Hardy (40°45'S., 173°54'E.) is entered between Nile

Head and Victory Islet, about 2 miles E. Fleet Rocks project S

from Victory Islet almost to D’Urville Island. Nelson Monument stands nearly in the center of the entrance to Port Hardy;

this high rock has deep passages on either side. Roughly 2.5

miles within the entrance the port separates into a Eas Arm and

South Arm. Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, in a depth of 25.6m, in South Arm. In bad weather, a confused sea sets up at the entrance. The tidal currents set directly

across the entrance, setting W with flood and E with the ebb.

An abandoned submarine cable lies across the entrance to

South Arm, extending about 1.2 miles SW from Castlehead, a

promontory that lies about 2.5 miles S of Nelson monument. A

submarine cable, marked at each end by a beacon, is laid between Castlehead and the shore SE.

11.37 Cape Stephens (40°42'S., 173°57'E.) is the N end of D’Urville Island and it is 184.4m high. Stephens Island lies about 2

miles NE of Cape Stephens and the W side of it is formed by a

cliff, 244m high. In the vicinity N of Stephens Island, the tidal

currents attain a rate of from 0.5 to 2.5 knots. 

11.37 Stephens Island Passage lies between Cape Stephens and

Stephens Island, and the area between is encumbered by rocks

and dangers best shown on the chart. This area is extremely

turbulent and liable to strong tide rips, eddies, and overfalls.

During the E ebb tide current, turbulence occurs east of a line

joining Cape Stephens and Stephens Island, while on the W

flood tide current, turbulence occurs west of the line.

11.37 Stephens Island Passage should not be used except by small
276 Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 

Pub. 127

vessels with extensive local knowledge, as the area has not

been closely surveyed and tidal currents are strong.

11.37 Directions.—Vessels bound into Cook Strait from the W

side of South Island make landfall S of Cape Farewell, remaining about 3 miles offshore. From a location about 3 miles N of

Cape Farewell, vessels should head for a position about 6 miles

N of Bush End Light, allowing for tidal currents, then steer to

pass a suitable distance N of Stephens Island. D’Urville Island

and Stephens Island are visible from off the end of Farewell

Spit and usually from a greater distance in clear weather.

11.37 Vessels bound for Tasman Corner should proceed as directed

above and round Farewell Spit at a distance of about 3 miles.

Then vessels should steer for Separation Point, bearing 219;

when Mount Burnett bears 271°, steer for it on that bearing.

When the islet off Puponga Point bears 354°, vessels should

change course N and steer for it which leads to the anchorage.

11.38 The Rangitoto Islands (40°46'S., 173°59'E.) is comprised of three islands lying close together. The N of this

group, Whakaterepapnui, is 224m high and bare. Tinui, the S

island, is 151m high and is notable for scrub on its E side.

Tinui Island’s NE corner is almost joined to Puangiangi Island,

close NE, by foul ground. A rock, which does not cover, lies

close off the NE end of Tinui Island.

11.38 Mount Ears (40°48'S., 173°55'E.), 460m high, is a remarkable double-peaked mountain.

11.38 Rangitoto Road lies between Tinui Island and D’Urville Island; it affords a convenient anchorage during winds from the

N through W to S. The anchorage is in the S part of the road,

about 0.3 mile offshore. However, the depths here are rather

great, from 21.9 to 25.6m close inshore. The anchorage is approached S of Tinui Island.

11.38 The tidal currents between D’Urville Island and Rangitoto

Island attain rates of from 1 to 3 knots, setting N with the flood

and S with the ebb.

11.38 Whareata Bay (40°49'S., 173°56'E.), with a shingle beach

at its head, lies between Simpson Point and Halfway Point,

which is 207.9m high. Small vessels with local knowledge can

obtain excellent sheltered anchorage, in a depth of 18.3m.

11.38 Admiralty Bay (40°52'S., 173°57'E.) is entered between

Bonne Point, the N tip of the D’Urville Peninsula, and Clay

Point, about 3.5 miles ESE. A reef extends 0.2 mile ENE from

Bonne Point.

11.38 Caution.—Jag Rocks are a group of rocks which lie about 4

miles E of Tinui, S of the Rangitoto Islands. The Trio Islets, a

wildlife sanctuary, lie about 4.5 miles SW of Jag Rocks. 

11.39 Stewart Island, 29.6m high, lies on a bank of foul

ground about 3.5 miles W of Clay Point. A submerged rock

lies about 0.2 mile N, and a 10.1m patch, 0.2 mile W of Stewart

Island. Rabbit Island (Anatakupu Island), 26m high, lies about

1.5 miles WSW of Stewart Island.

11.39 Catherine Cove, with steep-to shores, is entered between the

S end of the D’Urville Peninsula and a point roughly 1 mile W.

A remarkable bare cone, 174m high, lies midway along the

peninsula. The D’Urville Peninsula is joined to D’Urville Island by a low isthmus. Catherine Cove affords excellent anchorage for those vessels with local knowledge. The cove has

depths of 16 to 40m; the holding ground being mud and shells.

11.39 Kapowai Harbor (Woodman’s Homestead Cove), is located

1.2 miles WSW of Rabbit Island. A light is shown from a tower on the SW entrance point of the harbor. A wharf in the harbor affords the main transport link between D’Urville Island

and the mainland.

11.39 Morrisons Cove (Ngamuka Bay), about 2 miles SW of Rabbit Island, affords good temporary anchorage to vessels with

local knowledge N of the 3.7m bank lying E of Reef Point.

11.39 Elmslie Bay lies close SE of Collinet Point (40°55'S.,

173°51'E.). There is a wharf, with depths of 2.1 to 4m alongside, at the head of the bay.

11.39 The inner section of Admiralty Bay is entered between Clayface Point (40°56'S., 173°51'E.) and Whangapoto Point, about

2.2 miles E. This part of Admiralty Bay has not been completely surveyed. There are general charted depths of 33 to 51m in

this section.

11.39 A submarine telephone cable crosses the NW corner of

Catherine Cove.

Pelorus Sound

11.40 Pelorus Sound (40°56'S., 174°04'E.) is entered between Paparoa and Culdaff Point, the NE end of Forsyth Island, about 3.2 miles SE. For the most part, except at the head

of the main branch, the general aspect of the land surrounding

Pelorus Sound is mountainous, rising to heights of 610 to

915m, and is covered with dense forests.

11.40 Pilotage is not compulsory in Pelorus Sound, but can be arranged with the harbormaster at Picton.

11.40 There are general depths in Pelorus Sound of 18.3 to 91.4m,

decreasing at the heads of the various arms.

11.40 Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds blow up the

reaches from sea. Southeast winds, accompanied by heavy

rains and violent gusts, are common and have been observed to

last about 2 days.

11.40 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents attain rates of 3 knots

in the main reaches of Pelorus Sound, but they are hardly felt in

the anchorages. There are strong tide rips around the Chetwode

Islands and Sentinel Rock.

11.41 The Chetwode Islands (40°54'S., 174°05'E.) are

comprised of two steep, rugged islands joined by a reef. These

islands lie on the E side of Te Kakaho Channel, on the N side

of entrance to Peloris Sound. Nukuwaita, the SW island, has

two remarkable sharp peaks, 231 and 234m high. The N side of

the island is bare; the S side scrub-covered. A rock, with a

depth of less than 1.8m, is reported to lie 0.2 mile NE of the W

extremity of the island. Ninepin Rock lies close within the outer end of a reef, which projects about 0.5 mile SSW from the

SW end of the island. The Haystack, 35.4m high, lies on the

outer end of a spit of foul ground, about 1.7 miles ENE of

Ninepin Rock, with Pelorus Rock, below-water, halfway between The Haystack and Nukuwaita. Hinemoa Rocks, with a

least depth of 0.6m, lie about 1 mile W of the N end of Nukuwaita.

11.41 Te Kakaho (40°54'S., 174°06'E.), the NE island, steep, bare,

and rugged has two summits, the N and higher of the two is

178.6m high. A drying reef extends 0.4 mile NE from the N

end of the island. Sentinel Rock, 35m high, lies about 1.7 miles

E of Te Kakaho Island.

11.41 Witts Rocks, with a swept depth of 9.1m, lies 8.5 miles ENE
Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 277

Pub. 127

of the N end of Te Kakaho Island. McManaway Rock, with a

swept depth of 9.1m, lies about 4 miles S of Witts Rock.

11.42 Outer part of Pelorus Sound.—Waitata Reach represents the outer part of Pelorus Sound between its entrance

and Maud Island, 9.5 miles SW.

11.42 West Entry Point, located on the N side of Pelorus Sound, is

long and narrow and comprised of clay.

11.42 Forsyth Island, 352m high in its S part, lies on the E side of

the entrance to Pelorus Sound. The shores of the island are

formed of low cliffs. Allen Strait separates the S end of the island from the mainland and it is unexamined. An overhead cable, with a vertical clearance of 54m, spans the channel, and a

submarine cable is laid across the channel. Duffers Reef

projects 0.7 mile WSW of the NW end of Forsyth Island. Several rocks lie on the reef; the outermost being 21m high.

11.42 Forsyth Bay, largely unexamined, is entered between Duffers Reef and East Entry Point. The NE corner of Forsyth Bay

is known as Orchard Bay, and it has depths of 29 to 33m. Sunday Bay, which lies close S, has a small wharf.

11.42 Bird Island, 30m high, lies 1.2 miles WNW of Allen Strait.

A depth of 8.8m exists 0.4 mile E of Bird Island. Sugar loaf Islet is 17.4m high, and it lies about 0.7 mile SE of Bird Island.

11.42 Ketu Bay, entered about 1.7 miles WSW of East Entry Point,

has general depths of 11 to 33m.

11.42 Richmond Bay, the next indentation SW, is entered between

Tapipi and The Reef, about 1.5 miles SSW. Vessels with local

knowledge can obtain anchorage at the head of the bay, in a

depth of 26m.

11.42 Port Ligar, situated on the NW side of Waitata Reach, is entered between West Entry Point and Danger Point, 1.2 miles W.

Cape Horn, located at the head of the bay, divides Te Kopi, a

bay, E from Homestead Bay, SW.

11.42 Waihinau Bay is entered between Danger Point and Burnt

Point. Foul ground projects about 0.4 mile S from Danger

Point. Keep Clear Rock (Kainoki), awash and steep-to, lies

about 0.2 mile S of the outer limit of foul ground. Waihinau

Bay affords good anchorage for these vessels with local knowledge; the squalls in it not being as strongly felt as in those bays

on either side.

11.42 Waitata Bay lies between Boat Rock, which is white, and

Kaiaua, a yellow point, about 1 mile further SW. This bay is

clear of dangers and has depths of 20 to 27m.

11.42 Hallam Cove and Fitzroy Bay, located at the NW end of

Tawhitinui Reach, are entered between Sheep Point and Camel

Point, 1 mile S. In the past, small vessels have found shelter

here.

11.42 Tawhitinui Reach is entered on either side of Maud Island

from Waitata Reach. Tennyson Inlet forms the SW arm of the

reach, entered between Camel Point and Cregoe Point, 1.5

miles SE. A village, with a T-headed wharf, lies at the head of

Brighton Bay, about 1.2 miles E of Cregoe Point.

11.42 Tawhitinui and Kauauroa Bays lie on the N side of

Tawhitinui Reach, between Tapapa Point and Whakamawahi

Point (41°03'S., 173°59'E.), about 2 miles SE. The former bay

affords good anchorage.

11.42 Clova Bay lies in the S part of Pelorus Sound and is entered

about 3 miles SE of Whakamawahi Point. Clova Bay is surrounded by land which is relatively bare. Manaroa, a village

with a wharf close W, lies at its head. A vessel, 49m long, has

anchored in Clova Bay, in a depth of 12.8m, with ample swinging room.

11.42 Crail Bay, the S branch of the inlet of which Clova Bay is the

SE branch, affords excellent anchorage.

11.42 Popoure Reach is entered between Tawero Point and Opaniaputa Point (41°05'S., 174°00'E.), about 1.5 miles SE. The

Bays on the W side of Popoure Reach afford better anchorage

than those on the E side. Popoure Reach extends about 7 miles

SW. Hikapu Reach projects about 5 miles S from the S end of

Popoure Reach.

11.42 Kenepuru Sound projects 12 miles ENE from the SE side of

Hikapu Reach. The central part of the Sound is known as Conniston Water. Public wharfs, with road access, are situated in

Te Mahia and Portage Bays, on the S side of Kenepuru Sound

and in Waitaria Bay, on the N side. There is a boat channel,

with a depth of 1.5m at HW, between the mainland and an island, 158m hig,h N of Portage Bay.

Guards Bay

11.43 Guards Bay (40°57'S., 174°08'E.) is entered between

Culdaff Point and Alligator Head, about 4 miles ESE; the bay

affords shelter in all but NW winds. Close within the entrance

the bay is a bank, with depths of 12.8 to 18.3m.

11.43 Forsyth Island forms the W side of Guards Bay. Lord Ashley

Bay is the first indentation SSE of Culdaff Point. Yellow Point,

1.5 miles S of Culdaff Point, divides Lord Ashley Bay N from

Annie Bay. Tawaroa Point, a cliffy projection, extends from the

S part of Guards Bay forming the E entrance of Anakoha Bay

and the W entrance point of Titirangi Bay. A submarine cable

is laid across Anakoha Bay, 0.5 mile from the head. Titirangi

Bay has a sandy beach at its head, with a rocky outcrop in the

center of the beach.

11.43 Motungarara Island (Titi Island)(40°57'S., 174°10'E.),

105m high, lies in the entrance to Guards Bay, about 1.2 miles

NNW of Alligator Head. A reef of rocks, which dries 1.8m,

projects 0.3 mile ESE from its E end.

11.43 Anchorage.—Anakoha Bay and Titirangi Bay afford good

anchorage, in depths of 13.7 to 27.4m. There is anchorage on

the W part of the 13.7 to 18.3m bank, under the E side of Forsyth Island. During SE winds, anchorage may be found on the

S end of the above bank, off the E entrance point of Titirangi

Bay, in a depth of 16.5m.

11.44 Port Gore (41°02'S., 174°14'E.) is entered between

Cape Lambert and Cape Jackson, about 3.5 miles E. The land

surrounding Port Gore is mostly high, covered with scattered

scrub. There are general depths in Port Gore ranging from 15.6

to 33m.

11.44 Jackson Head Rock lies about 0.3 mile and Walker Rock

about 0.9 mile, NE of Cape Jackson. McManaway Rock, a pinnacle with a swept depth of 9.1m, lies about 3.5 miles N of

Cape Jackson.

11.44 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents around Cape Jackson are

rapid and there is little slack water. A strong eddy is formed

during the flood on the W side of the Cape.

11.44 Anchorage.—There is anchorage, in a depth of 20.1m, gray

mud, about 0.5 mile offshore on the E side of Port Gore. Good

shelter may be found in the SE corner of Port Gore, in a depth of

27.4m, good holding ground. Melville Cove, in the SW portion of
278 Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 

Pub. 127

Port Gore, affords anchorage, in a depth of 22m, about 0.2 mile

from its head. Melville Cove affords better shelter.

11.44 Caution.—A dangerous wreck, with a depth of 11.2m, lies

about 0.6 mile SE of the E entrance point of Melville Cove. 

11.44 The area of Port Gore, bounded by Cape Lambert

(40°59.5'S., 174°13.5'E.) to Cape Jackson (40°59.5'S.,

174°19.0'E.), is prohibited to all navigation. Vessels intending

to navigate within the waters of Port Gore should apply to the

Marlborough Harbor Board for a permit.

11.45 Queen Charlotte Sound, known locally as Totaranui,

lies between Cape Jackson and Cape Koamaru, 6.5 miles SSE.

This extensive sound is pocked with many coves and bays,

many of which afford secure anchorage.

11.45 The aspect of the land on either side of the sound is high and

mostly covered with isolated scrub, rising on the N side to

heights from 457 to 610m. On the S side of the Sound, Arapawa Island rises to 559m near its SE end.

11.45 The town and harbor of Picton, which are described paragraph 11.50, lie about 4 miles E of the head of Queen Charlotte

Sound.

11.45 Caution.—Mariners are advised that Queen Charlotte

Sound is subject to heavy gusts off the high land and from the

mountain gullies during strong winds in Cook Strait. These

squalls give little or no warning and caution is necessary.

11.46 Cook Rock (41°03'S., 174°26'E.) lies about 5.2 miles

SE by E of Cape Jackson, and it is awash. There are usually

tide rips on and around Cook Rock; in strong winds it breaks

before LW. When visible, Cook Rock resembles a whales back.

A rocky patch, with depths of 11.8 to 17.7m, lies about 0.7

mile SSW of Cook Rock.

11.46 The Brothers are comprised of two scrub-covered islands lying about 2.7 miles ESE of Cape Koamaru, and they should be

given a berth of about 1 mile. There is no passage between The

Brothers. The channel between the S island of this group and

the shore S of Cape Koamaru, while deep, is not recommended.

11.46 Awash Rock, which is steep-to, lies about 3.2 miles SSW of

The Brothers.

11.46 Tides—Currents.—Currents in the general locale of The

Brothers are strong with heavy tide rips. Off the entrance to

Queen Charlotte Sound, the tidal currents set across the entrance with considerable strength on both entrance points.

Within the sound, currents attain rates from 0.5 knot to 1 knot,

except at the W entrance to Tory Channel, where they attain

rates of from 1 to 3 knots.

11.46 The flood current, which enters Queen Charlotte Sound via

Tory Channel, flows out towards Long Island, about 4.5 miles

within the entrance, until it joins the main flood or N current of

the Sound. The rate of the current between Motuara Island and

Long Island is 0.5 to 1.5 knots. In the sound W of the W entrance to Tory Channel, tidal currents are weak.

West side of Cook Strait, in four parts
Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 279

Pub. 127

Queen Charlotte Sound

11.47 North side.—Kempe Point (41°02'S., 174°19'E.) lies

about 2.5 miles SSW of Cape Jackson and represents the N entrance point of Anakatata Bay. At the head of this bay is a

wharf. Kaikanohi, the S entrance of this bay, is formed by yellow cliffs, 18.3m high.

11.47 Ships Cove (Meretoto) is entered about 4.2 miles SSW of

Kempes Point, between Te Ahitaore and Ekiera. Cooks Monument stands near a public wharf at the head of Ships Cove. The

shores of this cove are rocky and steep-to.

11.47 Bare Ridge, on the S side of hips Cove, has a bare yellow

summit, 403m high.

11.47 While Ships Cove has more attractive depths than other locations in the sound, it is not as sheltered as other places further

in and it is more prone to heavy squalls and gusts during strong

winds from the high land. 

11.47 Anchorage may be found in Ships Cove, subject to the

above, in a depth of 18.3m, about 0.4 mile E of Cooks Monument.

11.47 Motuara Island, which fronts Ships Cove, has two summits

and it is bush-covered. Cooks Cairn stands on the S summit. A

submerged rock lies about 0.5 mile N of the N end of the island. The pilot ground lies about 0.5 mile E of the S tip of Motuara Island.

11.47 During SE gales, good anchorage may be found, in a depth

of 13.7m, mud, 0.7 mile E of the S end of Motuara.

11.47 Endeavour Inlet is entered between Scott Point and Edgecombe Point, 1.2 miles SW. The NW arm of Endeavour Inlet is

known as Big Bay. 

11.47 Anchorage has been obtained in Big Bay, by a vessel 49m

long, in a depth of 22m, but the vessels stern swung into a

depth of 5.2m.

11.47 Dryden Bay (41°10'S., 174°12'E.) lies midway between

Edgecombe Point and Kurakura Point, 1.7 miles S.

11.47 The Bay of Many Coves (Miritu) lies between Snake Point,

which is located about 2 miles SW of Kurakura Point, and Bull

Head, 0.7 mile SW. Snake Point is the end of a pine-covered

isthmus.

11.47 Ruakaka Bay lies between West Head, lying 0.7 mile WSW

of Bull Head, and Ngatakore Point, 1 mile W, and is deep except for a dangerous reef which extends 90m from the W

shore, 1 mile within the entrance. Luke Rock, with a depth of

0.6m, lies in the entrance to Ruakaka Bay.

11.47 Tahuahua Bay (Blackwood Bay) is the next indentation W of

Ruakaka Bay. Perano Shoal, with a depth of 4.6m, lies in the

entrance to this bay.

11.47 The remainder of the N shore of the sound is indented by six

main bays; these are best seen on the chart.

11.48 South side.—Cape Koamaru (41°05'S., 174°23'E.),

which rises to 146m, is the N end of Arapawa Island and the E

entrance point of Queen Charlotte Sound. White Rocks, lying

1.2 miles NW by W of the Cape, consist of a ridge of peaked

rocks with a channel on either side. Stella Rock, with a depth

of 1.8m, lies 0.5 mile W of Cape Koamaru. A steep-to rock,

with a depth of 11m, lies 0.3 mile N of Stella Rock.

11.48 The Twins are comprised of two rocks, 17.7m, surrounded

by kelp.

11.48 Caution.—The channel between White Rocks and Cape Koamaru should not be used without local knowledge.

11.48 Motungarara Island, 41m high, lies 0.5 mile S of The Twins.

Submerged rocks extend NE and SE from the SE end of the island. A depth of 4m lies close off the NW end of the island,

and the island is surrounded by kelp.

11.48 Long Island, 151m high in its central part, is steep and bushcovered. Kokomohua Island lies close NE of the NE end of

Long Island and it is almost connected to it by rocks. A spit extends 0.3 mile NE from the N end of Kokomohua Island. A

13.4m patch lies 0.3 mile ENE from the end of the spit. The

passage between the E shore of Long Island and the NW shore

of Arapawa Island is nearly 1 mile wide, with depths ranging

from 21.9 to 51.2m over a mud bottom.

11.48 East Bay, which indents the NW shore of Arapawa Island,

lies between Clark Point and the NW end of Pickersgill Island,

which is scrub-covered and 185.6m high. A reef projects 0.2

mile NW from the NW end of the island.

11.48 Blumine Island (Oruawairua), 289m high at its center, lies

with it NE end about 1.2 miles W of the NW end of Pickersgill

Island. Patten Passage separates the island from the shore SE; it

has a depth of 27.4m in the fairway.

11.49 Hawes Rock (41°12'S., 174°13'E.), with a depth of

3.3m, lies about 0.3 mile SW from the SW end of Blumine Island, with foul ground between. A dangerous rock lies close

NE of Hawes Rock.

11.49 Directions.—Queen Charlotte Sound may be approached on

either side of Cook Rock, but the 11.9m rock SSW of it should

be avoided. Cape Jackson, bearing less than 286°, or Alligator

Head, open N of that Cape, leads N of Cook Rock.

11.49 The Brothers Light, bearing more than 180°, leads E and

White Rocks, well open E of Long Island, bearing 229°, leads

0.5 mile NW of Cook Rock. There is a clear channel, about 2

miles wide, S of the 12m rock. A vessel proceeding by this passage, if from the S, should keep The Brothers Light bearing

less than 354° until she has passed Awash Rock. Vessels should

pass at least 1 mile E of The Brothers, then N of Cape Koamaru, N and W of White Rocks and on either side of Long Island.

Vessels without local knowledge should not pass E of Long Island.

11.49 Dieffenbach Point lies on the W side of the W entrance to

Tory Channel, about 3.5 miles SW of Hawes Rock.

Picton Harbor (41°17'S., 174°00'E.)

World Port Index No. 55300

11.50 Picton Harbor lies at the head of Queen Charlotte

Sound; it is the chief port of the Marlborough District. There

are two approaches to Picton Harbor, one by entering Queen

Charlotte Sound and the other via Tory Channel.

11.50 Tides—Currents.—The neap rise is 0.6m; the spring rise

1.4m.

11.50 Off the NE entrance to Queen Charlotte Sound the tidal currents set across the entrance with considerable strength. In the

Port Marlborough

http://www.portmarlborough.co.nz
280 Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 

Pub. 127

sound, tidal currents attain rates of from 0.5 to 1 knot, except at

the W entrance of Tory Channel, where they attain rates of

from 1 to 3 knots. The flood current, which enters the sound by

Tory Channel, flows out towards Long Island, where it joins

the main N flood current through Cook Strait. The rate of currents between Motuara and Long Island is 0.5 to 1.5 knots. In

the Sound W of the W entrance to Tory Channel, the tidal currents are weak.

11.50 At the E entrance to Tory Channel, the tidal currents attain

rates from 5 to 7 knots; about 1.5 miles within the entrance the

tidal currents attain rates from 2 to 4 knots; and in the remainder of Tory Channel the tidal currents attain rates from 1 to 3

knots.

11.50 During periods of spring tides, low-powered vessels without

local knowledge should avoid using the Tory Channel entrance.

11.50 During strong winds in Cook Strait, Queen Charlotte Sound

is subject to heavy gusts of wind which sweep off the high land

and out of the mountain gullies; giving little or no warning of

their approach.

11.50 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels up to a maximum draft of

18.3m can enter Queen Charlotte Sound; there are no length or

beam restrictions.

11.50 Vessels up to a maximum length of 201m, depending on the

vessel’s draft, can enter Picton. the maximum draft restrictions

are 11m aft and 8 to 10m forward, depending on the vessel’s

length. There are no beam restrictions.

11.50 All vessels may enter, berth, unberth, or leave at anytime,

subject to prior arrangement with the harbormaster.

11.50 Waitohi Wharf, a ferro-concrete wharf, lies at the SW side of

the port; it is 240m long, with 226m of berthage on each side.

There are reported depths alongside from 8 to 11m.

11.50 Ferry Berth No. 1 and Ferry Berth No.2 lie just S of the

Waitohi Wharf. Ferry Berth No. 1 can accommodate vessels

with a maximum length of 120m and a maximum draft of

7.5m. Ferry Berth No. 2 can accommodate vessels with a maximum length of 160m and a maximum draft of 7.5m. These

berths serve both road and rail traffic and make up the Inter-island Ferry Terminal.

11.50 The Waimahara Wharf is situated adjacent to Picton on the

W shore of Shakespeare Bay. The wharf is 200m in length and

has a depth of 16m alongside. Lumber and bulk products are

worked here. 

11.50 Aspect.—Picton Harbor lies on the E side of a double bay

divided by wooded steep-sided promontory whose N end is

Kaipupu Point. The W indentation is known as Shakespeare

Bay. The W shore of the bay is formed by steep cliffs rising to

a wooded ridge, 184m high. Situated at the neck of the promontory, dividing the bay, is a chimney and freezing works.

11.50 Mabel Island (41°16'S., 174°01'E.), 30m high, fronts the

wooded promontory and is marked by a light on its S end.

11.50 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 500

grt within the entire Queen Charlotte Sound and Tory Sound.

Pilots board 0.5 mile E of Motuara Island Light.

11.50 Application for a pilot must be made 24 hours and 4 hours

prior to the ETA. Vessels arriving at night or during the weekend should apply for a pilot no later than 1530 on the last previous working day.

11.50 Regulations.—The following regulations apply to vessels

greater than 500 grt.

1. During the hours of darkness vessels should not pass

each other S of 41°16'S.

2. Vessels entering or leaving Picton Harbor are to proceed at a speed not exceeding 12 knots while the vessel is S

of Mabel Island Light.

3. Vessels may not berth or unberth at Waitohi Wharf

when wind speeds in excess of 30 knots are being experienced without the permission of the harbormaster.

11.50 Due to the heavy ferry traffic in Tory Channel, all foreign

vessels are advised to use the N entrance to Queen Charlotte

Sound.

11.50 Security Areas have been established enclosing the Waimahara and Picton wharves. All vessels entering these security areas must contact Picton Harbor Radio on VHF channel 19 and

identify themselves.

11.50 Signals.—All vessels entering or departing the port are required to advise Picton Harbor Radio of their movements.

11.50 A blue flashing light is shown from Waitohi Wharf when

large vessels are maneuvering at Picton wharves. Due to colored background lights, vessels approaching at night from the

N will encounter difficulty in distinguishing vessels moving in

the wharf area. 

11.50 Anchorage.—Except during strong NW winds, there is

good anchorage N of Mabel Island, in 29.3m, mud, for vessels

of all sizes. The quarantine anchorage lies W of Mabel Island.

11.50 Anchorage is prohibited in the fairway NE of Mabel Island,

and in that area of Picton Harbor E and S of Mabel Island.

Tory Channel and Approaches

11.51 Perano Head (41°12'S., 174°22'E.) represents the SE

end of Arapawa Island and it is a remarkable, bold, rugged cliff

that rises about 0.7 mile N to a bush-covered mountain, 559m

high. Ruakawa Rock, steep-to and bush-covered, is 61m high

and connected to the head N by a reef.

11.51 The shore N of Perano Head is cliff-faced and steep-to. Between Perano Head and East Head, the E entrance point of the

E entrance to Tory Strait, about 2.2 miles WSW, the shore

forms a cliff-faced bay.

11.51 Tory Channel is entered between East Head and West Head

through an entrance about 0.2 mile wide at its narrowest part.

Picton Ferry Berth
Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 281

Pub. 127

Tory Channel, from its entrance, runs about 3.5 miles SW then

4.5 miles W to its junction with Queen Charlotte Sound.

11.51 Regulations.—The use of a pilot in Tory Channel is compulsory and requests should be made at least 4 hours in advance. Vessels arriving at night or over a weekend should

request a pilot before 1530 on the previous workday. Pilots

board vessels off the E entrance to Tory Channel about 1 mile

SE of West Head.

11.51 In addition to the requirements of the above, the navigational

instructions described beolow apply to vessels of more than

250 grt within the waters of Queen Charlotte Sound and Tory

Channel.

11.51 Vessels may only use Tory Channel with the permission of

the harbormaster. This permission is dependent on traffic in the

channel and weather conditions.

11.51 New Zealand Railways operates a regular rail ferry service

between Wellington and Picton, and rail ferry vessels may be

encountered in Tory Channel, at any time. Caution should be

exercised at all times and in particular while navigating Tory

Channel and Tory Channel E entrance.

11.51 Vessels operating at speeds less than 15 knots and intending

to transit Tory Channel shall make an “All Ships” broadcast, as

follows:

1. Inbound vessels:

a. When on an arc with a radius of 3 miles, centered

on East Head Light (41°12.6'S, 174°19.4'E), transmit on

VHF channel 19 advising all vessels of intentions to transit inbound and provide an ETA at the Controlled Navigation Zone boundary, as well as at East Hea,d using the

vessel’s anticipated speed.

b. Any confirmation or amendment to the ETA should

be made at intervals not to exceed 10 minutes.

2. Outbound vessels:

a. When abeam of Clay Point East Light (41°14.2'S,

174°15.2'E), transmit on VHF channel 19 advising all vessels of intentions to transit outbound and provide an ETA at

the Controlled Navigation Zone boundary, as well as at East

Head, using the vessel’s anticipated speed.

b. Any confirmation or amendment to the ETA should

be made at intervals not to exceed 10 minutes.

11.51 Vessels operating at speeds of 15 knots or greater and intending to transit Tory Channel shall make an “All Ships” broadcast

not less than 10 minutes before reaching the following:

1. Inbound vessels—The point formed by the intersection of the line of the leading lights and the seaward arc of a

circle, with radius of 0.6 mile, centered on West Head Light

(41°12.8'S, 174°18.9'E).

2. Outbound vessels—A line drawn in the direction of

320° from Scraggy Point Light (41°12.9'S, 174°18.3'E). 

11.51 The local repeater station operated on VHF channel 63 and

is most likely to be monitored by small craft.

11.51 Picton Harbor Radio will keep all vessels advised of any

known movements of other vessels.

11.51 All vessels entering or leaving Tory Channel, whether in

sight of one another or not, are required to establish radio contact with any other vessel which is likely to be approaching the

E entrance at approximately the same time.

11.51 Where it is established that two vessels are likely to pass

each other in the vicinity of Tory Channel E entrance, the outbound vessel shall have priority and the inbound vessel shall

wait clear of the entrance until the outbound vessel is clear.

This requirement shall not apply where the master of the outbound vessel has advised the inbound vessel to proceed inward. Under such conditions, the outbound vessel shall not

proceed seaward of a line drawn in a 320° direction from

Scraggy Point Light, until the inbound vessel has cleared the

entrance.

11.51 Under normal operating circumstances, the following are the

minimum distances which vessels are required to maintain off

the points of land designated:

11.51 Caution.—Failure to receive any radio communication

should not be construed by any vessel as confirmation that the

E entrance to Tory Channel is+ clear and the entrance should

be approached with due caution at all times.

11.51 At the E entrance to Tory Channel, the tidal currents attain a

rate of 5 to 7 knots; at about 1.5 miles within the entrance, the

tidal currents attain a rate of 2 to 4 knots; in the remainder of

the channel, the tidal currents attain a rate of 1 to 3 knots. Vessels without local knowledge which are low-powered should

not use the E entrance of Tory Channel at springs.

11.52 Okukari Bay (41°12'S., 174°19'E.) is entered about

0.7 mile WNW of East Head, and it is too open for adequate

anchorage. An old whaling station stands 0.4 mile WSW of the

W entrance point of the Bay.

11.52 White Rocks (41°13'S., 174°17'E.), which lie above water,

lie about 0.7 mile WSW of the W entrance of Okukari Bay.

White Rocks separate Te Awaiti Bay from Jacksons Bay. 

11.52 Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, in a

depth of 12.8m, E of White Rocks in Te Awaiti Bay.

11.52 Oyster Bay (41°15'S., 174°15'E.) is entered between Motukina Point and Tiu Point, 0.4 mile W. Vessels with local

knowledge can find sheltered anchorage well within this bay,

in a depth of 10.1m, mud bottom, although space is restricted

by marine farms.

11.52 An unnamed bay lies on the N side of Tory Channel; it is the

largest indentation on the N side. A shoal, with a depth of

2.7m, blocks most of the center of this bay. Ngaruru Bay indents the W side of this bay.

11.52 An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 89m,

spans Tory Channel just E of Arrowsmith Point. Reports are

that the cable generates a false radar target which can be taken

for a vessel underway.

11.52 Anapua Bay, the largest indentation of the S side of Tory

Channel, lies between Katoa Point and a point nearly 0.5 mile

W. Opua Bay and Missionary Bay lie at the head of Anapua

Point of land Inbound Outbound

Te Uira-Kapapa Point 0.1 mile 0.2 mile

Arrowsmith Point 0.2 mile 0.1 mile

Ruaomoko Point 0.1 mile 0.2 mile

Dieffenbach Point 0.4 mile 0.2 mile

Double Point 0.4 mile 0.2 mile

The Snout. 0.3 mile 0.1 mile

Picton Point 0.3 mile 0.1 mile
282 Sector 11. New Zealand—West Coast of North Island, including Cook Strait 

Pub. 127

Bay. A shoal, comprised of mud and shells, with a depth 9.4m,

lies centered close within the entrance.

11.52 Directions.—From the SE side of Cook Strait, vessels

bound for the E entrance of Tory Channel should head for the

485m high summit of Arapawa Island. The aspect of the land

off this approach, S of the entrance, appears as a chalky cliff,

gradually sloping down to West Head. The land N of the entrance is higher, but less steep.

11.52 Vessels with local knowledge, bound for Picton through Tory

Channel with the W current, should head for the range lights

shown from the W shore of Okukari Bay. However, against the

E current, vessels should keep to the S side to avoid its

strength, until abeam Jackson Bay. After passing Jackson Bay,

the full force of the current will be on the port bow, unless a

course change is made so as to meet it end on.

11.52 A vessel outbound through Tory Channel, should when N of

Scraggy Point, steer for the directional light on East Head,

bearing 093°, at night, keeping within the white sector. The

vessel should then bring the leading lights in Okukari Bay into

line and steer SE through the entrance, between West Head and

East Head on the alignment of the lights, astern, bearing

311.7°.

11.52 Caution.—Low-powered vessels without local knowledge

should not use the E entrance of Troy Channel at spring tides.

11.53 Cloudy Bay is entered between Rununder Point and

White Bluffs, 14.5 miles SSW. The shore N from Rununder

Point is bare, rugged, cliffy and indented; rocks lie up to 0.5

mile off the points.

11.53 Fighting Bay is entered about 1.5 miles WSW of Rununder

Point. A village lies behind a small beach in a break in the

cliffs at the head of the bay. The shore between West Head and

Robertson Point, the E entrance point of Port Underwood,

should not be approached closer than 1 mile. 

11.53 A cable area where anchoring and fishing are prohibited lies

off Fighting Bay; it is best seen on the chart.

11.53 Cloudy Bay affords good anchorage out of the tidal currents

about 2 miles offshore, in general depths of 12.5 to 16.5m.

11.53 The land, with its adjacent mountain ranges, gives such protection that light winds, smooth water, and clear weather are

usual in the bay, while heavy gales from NW to S are blowing

in the middle and on the E shores of the strait.

11.53 This anchorage is of great benefit to vessels unable in S gales

or thick weather to make Pencarrow Head, for Wellington, or

for those being in ballast and light, who consider it imprudent

to run down on a lee shore.

11.53 Generally, the weather improves W of the line joining Cape

Campbell and Tory Channel and as the anchorage is approached.

11.53 Cape Campbell Light is rarely obscured by thick weather at

night; White Bluffs can nearly always be seen some miles off.

11.53 Caution.—Mariners are advised that deviations of the compass may be experienced in shallow waters in close proximity

to the submarine power cables.

11.54 Port Underwood (41°20'S., 174°08'E.), an inlet entered between Robertson Point and an unnamed point about 1.5

miles WSW, is a good and spacious harbor usable in any

weather. This inlet is separated into two arms by an isthmus

with each arm forming a separate and well-sheltered harbor.

Additionally, the inlet is indented by several coves affording

sheltered anchorage. The land around the port is mountainous.

11.54 Coombe Rocks, above water, project about 0.2 mile off a

point 1.7 miles E of Robertson Point. Tomikoko Rocks lie

about 0.7 mile E from Robertson Point.

11.54 Pipi Bay is entered about 1 mile NE of Robertson Point and Horahora-Kakahu Islet lies close off the N entrance point of this bay

to which it is connected to by a reef of above-water rocks. 

11.54 Anchorage.—Anchorage, in a depth of 11.6m, may be

found in Pipi Bay.

11.54 The Knobbys, a group of above-water rocks, lie about 3.2

miles NE of Robertson Point and they extend about 0.3 mile W

from the N entrance of Tumbledown Bay. 

11.54 Tumbledown Bay affords anchorage, in depths of 14.6 to

16.8m.

11.54 Hakana Bay lies in the NE pocket of the inlet; it affords anchorage, in a depth of about 10.4m.

11.54 Oyster Bay is the largest indentation on the W side of the inlet; it affords anchorage, in depths of 7 to 9.1m.

11.55 White Bluffs (41°33'S., 174°09'E.), which are remarkable and white-faced, rise boldly from the sea and are

267m high and bush-covered. Reefs project from White Bluffs.

The town of Blenheim, where there is a radio mast and several

aero lights, is situated about 9.5 miles WNW of White Bluffs.

11.55 A good anchorage may be found, in about 27m, with White

Bluffs bearing 155°, at a distance of 5 miles.

11.55 The Awatere River empties out into the sea about 3 miles

SSE of White Bluffs; it has a depth of 1.5m at high water over

the bar.

11.55 Clifford Bay lies between the entrance to the Awatere River

and Cape Campbell, 9 miles SE. The shore of the N part of the

bay is faced with cliffs. Abandoned submarine cables exist in

the N part of Clifford Bay. 

11.55 Anchorage may be found in the S part of Clifford Bay during

S winds in two locations lying 1 mile and 30 miles WNW of

Cape Campbell, sand, in depths of 7.3m and 6.7m, respectively.

11.55 Cape Campbell (41°44'S., 174°16'E.) represents the SW entrance point of Cook Strait ; it lies about 47 miles WSW of Cape

Palliser. Cape Campbell and the shore in its proximity should not

be approached closer than 3 miles, as it is encumbered by numerous reefs and rocks, many of which dry, lying up to 2 miles offshore. From the N, two yellowish peaked cliffs rise steeply to

Mount Tako, a rounded summit 195.1m high, lying about 1.2

miles SW of the cape. Vessels bound for Wellington from the S

should take departure from Cape Campbell.
283

Pub. 127

12. 

New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island

12.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 12 — CHART INFORMATION
285

Pub. 127

SECTOR 12 

NEW ZEALAND—WEST AND EAST COASTS OF SOUTH ISLAND

12.0 Plan.—This sector describes the W and E coasts of South Island, excluding Cook Strait, which is described beginning in

paragraph 11.19. The narrative begins with a description of the

W shore of South Island from Cape Farewell SW to Foveaux

Strait. The E shore is the described from Cape Campbell, the

NE extremity of South Island, to the E entrance of Foveaux

Strait.

General Remarks

12.1 The W shore of South Island from Cape Farewell,

which is described in paragraph 11.26, SSW to the entrance of

Milford Sound (44°34'S., 167°47'E.), is largely unfriendly and

unremarkable affording little shelter. The only harbors along

this stretch of coast, Westport and Greymouth, become impassable during heavy W weather.

12.1 The generally featureless aspect of this coast changes somewhat between Cape Foulwind, about 94 miles SW of Cape

Farewell, and Cascade Point, about 196 miles further SW.

However, two readily identifiable marks are the gorge of the

Grey River and Mount Cook. The gorge of the Grey River,

from the S, appears as a well-defined cut in a steep coast.

Mount Cook, the highest peak in New Zealand, lies 80 miles

SW of the river’s mouth. Mount Cook is a remarkable snowclad summit of the Great Southern Alps, and it will be seen,

from the W, in two separate peaks, the higher, Mount Cook, the

lower, Mount Tasman. The bases of these mountains are usually enveloped in clouds.

12.1 A prominent bare ridge, 237m high, lies about 3.7 miles SW

of Cape Farewell; there is a landslip at its N end.

12.1 Except for the approaches to Westport and Greymouth,

charts of the W coast of South Island, from the Karamea River

to Charles Sound, are based on old and imperfect surveys.

Mariners without local knowledge should exercise caution

when navigating in sparsely sounded areas, particularly when

approaching the coast in depths less than 37m.

12.1 Winds—Weather.—The SW winds on this part of the coast

generally shift to the W and draw into Cook Strait after passing

Cape Farewell.

12.1 Tides—Currents.—The tide rises highest with E winds and

lowest with W winds. The flood current begins 3 hours before

HW and runs to the SW, parallel with the coast, as far as West

Haven Inlet, at a rate of 0.5 to 2 knots. The ebb current begins 3

hours before LW. South of Cascade Point, between September

and November, a SW set which attains a rate of 1 knot predominates.

12.1 Caution.—A voluntary code of shipping routes around the

New Zealand coast, to reduce the potential for pollution of the

marine environment, has been introduced. For further information, see Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific

Ocean and Southeast Asia.

South Island—West Coast

12.2 Whanganui Inlet is entered between Bar Point and

South Cone Head; the entrance is easily recognized as both entrance points are conspicuous. South Cone Head shows up as a

yellow, cliffy, and cone-shaped summit, 203m high. A bar,

with a depth of 1.8m, which has not been thoroughly investigated, fronts the entrance. 

12.2 Anchorage.—Anchorage for small vessels with local

knowledge, but which is accessible only in moderate to good

weather, is available, in a depth of 7.3m, about 1 mile above the

entrance.

12.2 Grey Cliffs, with a prominent landslide scar in the middle,

lies about 12 miles SW of the entrance to Whanganui Inlet; the

shore between is rocky with sandy beaches backed by high,

rough, broken ground covered with bush.

12.2 Kahurangi Point (40°46'S., 172°13'E.) is scrub-covered,

with a remarkable white patch on its N face. A submerged rock

lies about 0.5 mile WNW of the point and depths of less than

11m extend about 1 mile N from the point.

Caution.—Paturau Bank, comprised of patches with depths

of 34.7 to 36.6m, lies about 11 miles W of the entrance to

Whangerai Inlet. Paturau Shoal, with a depth of 9.7m, lies

about 5.5 miles ESE of Paturau Bank.

12.2 Kahurangi Shoals, with a least depth of about 7.6m and

Stewart Rock at its center, lies about 5.5 miles NNW of

Kahurangi Point. In rough weather, this shoal breaks heavily.

12.3 Rocks Point stands about 6 miles SW of Kahurangi

Point; it forms the N entrance of Big Bay (Seal Bay). Big Bay

is entered between Rocks Point and Steep Point, 2.2 miles SW. 

12.3 Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, in

a depth of about 7.3m, about 1 mile S of Rocks Point. A reef

extends about 0.4 mile NW from Rocks Point.

12.3 Wekakura Point lies about 10 miles SW of Kahurangi Point;

the shore between is reef-fringed with shingle beaches in spots,

backed by high ground with many gorges covered with vegetation.

12.3 Karamea Bight lies between Wekakura Point and Cape Foulwind, 59 miles SSW.

12.3 The Karamea River (41°15'S., 172°06'E.) empties out into

the bight about 20.5 miles S of Wekakura Point. A conspicuous

clearing stands about 3 miles NE of the river’s mouth. The

Karamea River is exposed to heavy seas from the W which

break a considerable distance offshore. Vessels should not attempt to enter the river without extensive local knowledge. The

bar is subject to changes in depths and direction. Because of

shoaling in the entrance, the port was shut down.

12.3 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be found in good weather, in

a depth of 11m, about 2 miles off the entrance to the river.
286 Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 

Pub. 127

12.3 Little Wanganui Head lies about 9 miles SW of the entrance

to the Karamea River; it forms the S entrance of the Little Wanganui River. From the head, a prominent line of cliffs rise to

heights of almost 457m, extending about 9.5 miles SW to the

entrance of the Mokihinui River.

12.4 Old Man Rock, 29m high, stands nearly 5 miles SW

of Little Wanganui Head. The sandy beach fronting this stretch

of shore is covered with rocks from landslips.

12.4 The Mokihinui River empties out into the sea about 5 miles

SW of Old Man Rock; it has a depth of 3 to 3.7m over the bar

at HWS; 2.4 to 3m at neaps. Depths within the bar range from

1.8 to 2.1m at LW and local knowledge is essential for entry.

12.4 The Waimangaroa River empties out into Karamea Bight

about 13 miles SW of the Mokihinui River. The town of Denniston, from which powerful lights are shown, lies about 3.5

miles SE of the river’s entrance. A prominent TV mast, marked

by red lights, stands on the summit of Mount Rochfort, 3.5

miles SW of Denniston.

12.4 Buller Bay (41°45'S., 171°32'E.) lies between the entrance

of the Buller River and Cape Foulwind, about 5.5 miles WSW.

From the entrance to the river, the shore for about 4 miles is

fronted by a beach backed by low, swampy ground, with patches of gorge and scrub; then to Cape Foulwind it is comprised of

sandy cliffs. Three conspicuous white chimneys, each 60m

high, and two white silos of a cement works, at which powerful

lights are shown, stand about 1.5 miles E of Cape Foulwind.

Westport Harbor (41°44'S., 171°36'E.)

World Port Index No. 55450

12.5 Westport Harbor lies at the mouth of the Buller River

and it has a bar at its entrance. The entrance is formed by two

breakwaters about 155m apart; farther in are three training

walls. Vessels must not enter the port until clearance is given.

12.5 Dredging at the entrance bars can be expected day and night.

Care must be taken to avoid fouling the dredge moorings. Masters should exercise caution in using anchors in the vicinity of

the cement silos, as permanent moorings of heavy chains may

be laid across the river bed at any point.

12.5 Passage over the bar is considered impracticable when the

river is in flood or during a NW gale. In bad weather, the sea

breaks heavily over the outer part of the bar.

12.5 Tides—Currents.—A N or E set may be experienced up to

1 mile offshore and attains a rate of 1 to 3 knots, while off the

bar the flood sets W and the ebb sets E. The rate of the current

is least about the time of HW and during 1 to 2 hours before

and after HW. Meteorological effects may cause the above

rates to be increased by as much as 2 knots. During river freshets, which may occur any time of the year, the river current in

the harbor attains a rate of 8 to 10 knots. The tides rise highest

with E winds and lowest with W winds.

12.5 Currents set across the bar according to the direction and

force of the wind. Strong winds from the W and SW cause E

sets with rates of up to 6 knots; E winds cause sets to the W

with less effect.

12.5 The rise and fall of tide can be 3.6m. 

12.5 Depths—Limitations.—Information regarding bar conditions and tides is communicated via blinker light, VHF radiotelephone, or facsimileupon request from the harbormaster.

12.5 Depths over the sand and shingle bar at the harbor entrance

vary between 3.6m after heavy freshets, and 1.8m during extended spells of dry weather. It is dangerous for mariners without recent local knowledge to attempt to cross the bar. When

weather conditions permit, dredging may take place on the bar

as required. The harbor tide gauge shows automatically the

depth over the bar and also records the scend.

12.5 The bar is only impracticable with a heavy NW gale or with

a freshet in the river. With W winds a strong E set is experi-

 Westport Harbor 

http://www.westportharbour.co.nz

Courtesy of David Barnes, Port Manager, Westport Harbor

Westport Harbor Entrance

Courtesy of David Barnes, Port Manager, Westport Harbor

Westport Harbor—Crane Wharf
Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 287

Pub. 127

enced across the entrance, which, with the beam sea, make it

difficult to keep on the range line. With NE winds, there is occasionally a W set across the entrance, but of less strength than

the above. In bad weather, the sea breaks heavily over the bar.

12.5 There are sufficient depths in the river for all vessels that can

cross the bar. Vessels up to 120m in length can turn in the harbor at HWN provided they do not draw more than 5.4m forward. Vessels up to 130m in length can use the port, but there is

only swinging room if drawing not more than 4.9m forward.

12.5 All vessels may, depending on the weather, bar, and draft

conditions, enter, berth, or depart during hours of darkness.

Vessels berth or unberth at or near HW.

12.5 Crane Wharf is a wooden type with a total berthage of 670m

and depths of 5.8m alongside. There are six berths numbered

sequentially from the N.

12.5 Merchandise Wharf, also wooden, lies 0.1 mile S of Crane

Wharf; it is 213m long, with depths of 4.3 to 5.2m alongside.

The bottom at both wharves is shingle.

12.5 Vessels berthing at Crane Wharf should be prepared for an

upriver set during the flood, and a set onto the wharf at the seaward end and off the wharf at the upriver end.

12.5 Vessels up to 91m long lie at the wharves with their heads

upriver. Vessels over 91m in length have to be swung before

loading.

12.5 Aspect.—The Westport Harbor entrance faces N. Westport

Airfield lies behind the E end of Carters Beach. The control

tower and three radio masts stand on the W side of the airfield.

Three conspicuous white chimneys, each 61m high, and two

white silos of a cement works, at which powerful lights are

shown, stand about 1.5 miles E of Cape Foulwind, which is described in paragraph 12.6, about 4 miles W of Westport.

12.5 The hospital chimney, 22m high, which is prominent, lies 1.5

miles SSE of the entrance to the Buller River. A clock tower

stands nearly 0.5 mile SW of the chimney.

12.5 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels greater than

100 grt and/or with a draft of 3m or more.

12.5 Pilots board vessels in position 41°42.1'S, 171°33.1'E. In the

event of a pilot being unable to board, a vessel will be led

through the bar. 

12.5 Regulations.—Mariners are advised they must keep at least

1 mile off the entrance until making their approach to cross the

bar. New Zealand authorities advise that the master of any vessel which touches the bar when outbound shall inform the harbormaster by radiotelephone, VHF channel 14, or blinker light,

after the vessel is clear of the bar. This signal will be acknowledged by the harbormaster.

12.5 All vessels should notify the harbormaster of their intention

to enter 12 hours before arrival. No vessel must attempt to enter the port until authority to do so is received from the signal

station.

12.5 Advice from the harbormaster on bar conditions, depth of

water, and the recommended route across the bar is available

24 hours by telephone 3-788-8086 or mobile 21-959-279.

12.5 Signals.—A signal station, comprising a square concrete

building fitted with a white signal mast, lies about 0.1 mile

within the head of the W breakwater. Vessels can communicate

with the station by blinker light or radiotelephone. The call

sign is Westport Harbor.

12.5 There is a radar surveillance service at Westport and masters

of vessels equipped with radiotelephone may request from the

harbormaster’s office, during conditions of restricted visibility,

particulars of their bearing and range, as shown on the radar

screen.

12.5 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor in Buller Bay, in depths

from 18.3 to 23.7m. A recommended berth lies 2 miles N of

the signal station. However, caution must be exercised as there

is poor holding ground E of the entrance to the harbor and in

the SW part of Buller Bay. Vessels should be prepared to proceed to sea directly if winds come up from the W to N quarter;

the anchorage in Buller Bay is unsafe during NW gales. A falling barometer and lightning W and SW of Westport are good

indications of deteriorating weather.

12.5 The Quarantine Anchorage is bound by the arc of a circle,

radius 2 miles, centered on the signal station or in such position

as directed by the harbormaster.

12.5 Directions.—When within about 2.2 miles of the harbor entrance or on the harbormaster’s advice, bring the main range

lights into alignment. At night, wharf working lights, close to

the line of the range lights, will be extinguished when the vessel has notified intention to enter.

12.5 After passing between the breakwater heads, vessels should

then head for the inner range lights. By day, the wharves may

be steered for when about 0.9 mile within the entrance, and at

night, when the inner light on the E training wall changes from

white to green. The directional light shown below the Main

Harbor Light is directed so that its white sector indicates the

best water over the bar.

12.6 Cape Foulwind (41°45'S., 171°28'E.), a conspicuous

promontory, lies about 5.7 miles WSW of the entrance to the

Buller River. The cape is faced by cliffs 40 to 52m high, and it

is a salient promontory, off which several reefs and rocks lie.

Cape Foulwind Light is prominent. A radio mast showing red

lights stands close S of the light. Three Steeples, a group of

rocks, the highest being 91m high, lie 1.7 miles N by E of Cape

Foulwind Light; the area between is encumbered by rocks and

shoals. Black Reef lies 0.5 mile S of Three Steeples. A rock,

3m high, lies about 0.6 mile SSW of Black Reef.

12.6 Bucklands Peaks, 1,309m high, rise at the N end of Paparoa

Range, about 10.5 miles SE of Cape Foulwind. The higher

summits of the Paparoa Range are snow-covered. From Cape

Foulwind, the shore trends SSW for about 44 miles to the entrance to the Grey River, where the town and port of Greymouth are situated.

12.6 Perpendicular Point (42°06'S., 171°20'E.) lies about 21

miles SW of Cape Foulwind and is rock-fringed and bold, rising abruptly from the sea to a height of 366m. A range of

mountains, with unusual jagged outlines, backs the shore, making this part of the shore very remarkable.

12.6 Caution.—Several dangers exist within an 8.5 mile radius of

Perpendicular Point; caution should be exercised while navigating in this area.

12.6 Point Elizabeth (42°23'S., 171°13'E.), 35.4m high, represents the N end of the Twelve Apostles Range. From this notable limestone double bluff, 4 miles SSW, the shore is formed

by a shingle beach. The shore 6.7 miles NNE from Point Elizabeth to Seventeen-Mile Bluff is formed by a shingle beach interspersed with reef-fringed stretches and backed by steep

bush-covered hills.
288 Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 

Pub. 127

12.6 There are two lights shown about 0.2 mile N of Seventeen

Mile Bluff, and these should not be mistaken for the lights at

Greymouth.

12.6 Tides—Currents.—Between Cape Foulwind and Jacksons

Bay, about 180 miles SW, the currents are affected by the prevailing winds. Northerly and NW winds raise the general level

of the sea about 0.5m; while S and SW winds lower it about the

same amount.

Greymouth Harbor (42°26'S., 171°13'E.)

World Port Index No. 55440

12.7 Greymouth Harbor, located on the S bank of the Grey

River, has a bar at the entrance. This port is primarily used by

coastal traffic. Mariners are warned not to enter Greymouth

Harbor without first contacting the Greymouth Harbor Board

by radio in order to ascertain the condition of depths on the bar

and in the harbor. The principal exports are coal, timber, tuna,

and ilmenite.

12.7 Tides—Currents.—There is a considerable set into the tidal

lagoons at certain stages of the tides. As the current sets onto

the wharf, where it curves, care must be taken when going

alongside that the vessel is not swept on the wharves. The current attains rates of 2 knots at springs and 1.5 knots at neaps.

12.7 Vessels can experience a S set close to the harbor entrance.

12.7 Freshets, rising to a rate of more than 10 knots, are not infrequent in the Grey River, and 12 to 24 hours warning can usually be given. Vessels berth head upriver and, if alongside during

a freshet, it is the practice to lay out extra lines forward and go

ahead on main engines with revolutions for about 7 knots.

12.7 Depths—Limitations.—Depths over the sand bar change

frequently, but vessels up to 5.5m draft, 109m in length, and

15.2m beam can enter the river under favorable conditions at

MHWS.

12.7 Vessels may berth alongside or leave any wharf by day or

night. The nature of bottom alongside all berths is shingle.

12.7 During dry weather, especially after SW winds, the bar is

subject to silt up completely, but there is always a depth of at

least 2.4m over it at LW. At such times, if there is any swell

running outside, the bar quickly becomes unworkable and remains that way until the swell subsides or a freshet in the river

washes the bar away.

12.7 There are dredged depths of 5.5m at the wharf which is

130m in length.

12.7 A dredge is frequently underway in the harbor; moorings

may be laid out in several directions and care must be exercised

when navigating in its vicinity.

12.7 Richmond Wharf, consisting of Berth No. 1 and Berth No. 2,

has a length of 573m and depths of 5.2 to 6.1m alongside. 

12.7 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but it is dangerous

for mariners without recent local knowledge to attempt to cross

the bar. If pilotage is required, vessels should forward their

ETA 48 hours in advance of arrival at the port roadstead. Before attempting entry, contact must be established with Harbor

Supervisor. The pilot boarding position is within 3 miles of the

harbor entrance. Vessels wishing to enter or requiring assistance should contact Taupo Maritime Radio (ZLM).

12.7 Signals.—A disused signal station and flagstaff stand near

the head of the S breakwater. Information regarding bar conditions, tides, and berths is communicated to ships by radiotelephone. 

12.7 A red flag by day or a red light at night indicates the position

on the wharf where a vessel’s bridge should be placed alongside.

12.7 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage, in depths of 18.3 to

27.4m, about 3 miles W of the entrance of the Grey River. Vessels seldom anchor off Greymouth, as the roadstead is exposed

to the prevailing wind.

12.7 The Quarantine Anchorage lies in the roadstead enclosed in

a circle, with a radius of 2 miles from the signal station or

where harbor authorities direct.

12.7 Directions.—The harbor should not be entered without local

knowledge.

12.7 Vessels entering the harbor must guard against the general N

set of the current outside. It is preferable to enter the harbor

just after HW.

12.7 Vessels approach the Grey River with the range lights on

Richmond Wharf in line, bearing 128.2°. The vessel should

then pass between the breakwater heads, staying in the channel, which leads to the wharves.

12.7 The shore between Greymouth Harbor and Abut Head, about

58 miles SW, is mostly low, sandy, and featureless.

12.7 Caution.—Depths on the bar at the harbor entrance are subject to frequent change and it is dangerous for mariners without

recent local knowledge to attempt to cross it. Mariners should

contact the Grey District Council to ascertain the latest bar and

harbor depths. A quick flashing blue light may be shown from

the flagstaff on the S breakwater to warn that the bar is considered dangerous to cross. 

12.7 Thick fog and strong winds can occur between the Grey River Gorge and the harbor entrance after a cool night. Generally,

the range lights and beacons will be obscured by fog.

12.8 The Hokitika River (Brunner River) (42°43'S.,

170°59'E.), with the town of the same name on the N side of

the river’s entrance, is navigable by shallow draft vessels with

local knowledge for about 0.7 mile within the bar. The bar is

frequently shifting its position and varying in depth. During W

gales, a heavy sea rolls in on this shore. Sometimes even in

good weather a heavy W swell rolls in, the effect of gales in the

offing which do not reach the coast.

12.8 The harbor is no longer in use and all navigational aids have

been removed. Red lights, shown from radio masts, stand on

the S side of the river entrance. Two additional radio masts

stand 0.2 mile SW of the above.

12.8 Ruatapu village, where there is a church, lies about 5.5 miles

SSW of the entrance to the Hokitika River. The Mikonui River

empties out into the sea about 2.7 miles SW of the entrance to

the Totara River. Mount Greenland, 904m high, and Mount

Rangitoto, 1,125m high, both heavily forested, rise 4.7 miles

SE and 6.5 miles SSE, respectively, of the entrance to the

Mikonui River.

12.8 Bold Head (42°56'S., 170°42'E.), a bush-covered bluff,

142.3m high, prominent from the NE or SW, lies about 3.2

miles SW of the entrance to the Mikonui River.

12.8 The Wanganui River is entered through a narrow entrance

about 12 miles SW of Bold Head and it is only used by small

vessels with extensive local knowledge. A rather remarkable

hill or headland close to the coast rises over the S bank of this
Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 289

Pub. 127

river.

12.8 An ODAS buoy lies 22 miles NW of Wanganui Bluff.

12.8 Abut Head (43°06'S., 170°16'E.) is a strikingly bold headland, 51m high, that is fringed with rocks.

12.8 Waitahi Bluff (Waitaki Bluff), 44.5m high and white, lies

about 2.7 miles SSW of Abut Head.

12.8 Okarito Harbor lies at the entrance of the Okarito Lagoon; it

is only used by small craft with extensive local knowledge, as it

is subject to extensive changes and it is occasionally completely closed. The tidal currents in the harbors entrance run quite

strongly. The holding ground in the offing is very poor. At the

village of Okarito there is a monument at the foot of a tree-covered hill on the S side of the lagoons entrance.

12.8 Kohuamarua Bluff (43°14'S., 170°10'E.) is a remarkable

bush-covered promontory, 173m high, that lies about 1.7 miles

SW of the entrance to the Okarito Lagoon.

12.9 The Wekeka River (43°26'S., 169°48'E.) is entered

NE of Cooks Bluff. Cooks Bluff is very conspicuous and easily

made out as it rises steeply from its inland side, ending in Malcolms Knob, a cliff, 129m high. The shore between Cooks

Bluff and Karangarua Bluff, a yellow cliff, 51.2m high, about

2.5 miles SSW, is formed by sandy beaches, backed by steep,

forested land. Between Karangarua Bluff and Tititira Head, 16

miles SW, the shore is indented by several indentations. The

projecting bluffs, which separate the indentations, have the appearance from sea of islands lying close offshore. Mount Tasman and Mount Cook, the highest peaks of the Great Southern

Alps, lie about 20 miles ESE of Karangarua Bluff.

12.9 Bruce Bay is entered between Makawhio Point and Heretanewha Point, 4.2 miles WSW. Heretanewha Point is a bold,

rocky promontory that is reef-fringed. Small vessels with local

knowledge can obtain anchorage in Bruce Bay, in a depth of

5.5m, hard speckled sand. This anchorage, lying close in under

Heretanewha Point, is sheltered from moderate S winds. However, during S or SW gales, a heavy sea comes in making it untenable. In general, Bruce Bay resembles Jacksons Bay, about

45 miles farther WSW.

12.9 The Paringa River empties out into the sea on the E side of

Tititira Head (43°37'S., 169°26'E.). Small vessels with local

knowledge can cross the bar of this river, over which there are

depths of 1.5 to 3m, but they cannot proceed farther than 0.1

mile within the entrance.

12.9 The shore, 11.2 miles WSW from Tititira Head to Arnott

Point, is cliffy and tree-covered. Several rocks, best shown on

the chart, project off this section of shore.

12.9 Tauperikaka Point is located 3.2 miles SW of Arnott Point. A

rocky shoal, with a depth of 6.6m, lies 5.7 miles WSW of Tauperikaka Point.

12.9 The Haast River (43°51'S., 169°03'E.), 7 miles SW of Tauperikaka Point, is entered about 5 miles SW of the entrance of

the Waita River, and there is a depth of 1.8 to 4.3m over the bar

at HW. However, the channel is ever shifting due to freshets.

12.9 Alhambra Rock, 3.4m high, lies 1.5 miles W of the Haast

River entrance, the sea breaks heavily on this rock in bad

weather.

12.10 The Open Bay Islands, made up of Taumaka Island

and Popotai Island, lie at the N limit of foul ground that

projects NE from Mussel Point. These above islands are joined

at LW by a rocky ridge. Bignell Reef, which dries, lies about

0.5 mile ENE of Taumaka Island; An islet, 0.4m high, lies

about 1 mile further ENE. Vessels should give the Open Bay

Islands a berth of about 3 miles; passage S of these islands exists, but shoals, with a least depth of 2.7m, lie between 1 mile

N and 2 miles NNW of Mussel Point, and it requires extensive

local knowledge. Several dangers, best seen on the chart, lie W

of the Open Bay Islands.

12.10 Tides—Currents.—With N winds, a strong current sets S

between the Open Bay Islands and the mainland, attaining

rates of 3 knots.

12.10 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain sheltered anchorage off the Open Bay Islands. The best berth is in a

depth of 9.1m, rock, E of Taumaka Island. Vessels approach

this anchorage with the town of Okuru bearing about 198°;

when Taumaka Island bears about 275°, course should be

changed W for the anchorage.

12.11 Mount Mclean (44°01'S., 168°45'E.) is a conspicuous cone-shaped forested hill that rises from the low ground.

The Waiatoto River, and the Arawata River, lying about 5.5

miles WSW of Mussel Point, can be used by small vessels with

local knowledge, but they are subject to extensive changes and

can only be navigated a short distance above their bars.

12.11 Jacksons Bay (43°59'S., 168°40'E.) lies between the entrance of the Arawata River and Jacksons Head, about 3.5

miles NW. Jackson Head, both bold and conspicuous, is joined

to the mainland by a low narrow neck, and it is easily made out

from any direction. Several islets lie off Jacksons Head; there is

a dangerous rock 0.3 mile NE of the headland.

12.11 A rocky shoal, with a depth of 10m, lies 7 miles NE of Jacksons Head.

12.11 Jacksons Bay affords good protection from S or W winds

and some shelter even from those from the NNW. It has been

reported that even with gales from the N to NE, the anchorage,

in 7.3m or 9.1m, is safe. Because the sea breaks in a depth of

about 12.8m; only the swell is felt inside that depth. In heading

for the anchorage, Jacksons Head should be passed at a distance of about 2 miles on a S course with the Arawata River entrance bearing 180°, and the bay then entered from the E.

Small vessels can find anchorage, in a depth of about 8m, blue

clay, E of a wharf situated 1 mile SSW of Jacksons Head, at the

village of Jacksons Bay.

12.11 There is no difficulty in leaving Jacksons Bay at the beginning of a NW gale. North gales are usually preceded by a swell

setting into the bay, and generally begin from the NNE with

clear weather, shifting to NW with heavy squalls and thick

rain; from this point the gale is most severe, and if disposed to

last, will shift around again to the N. A shift to the SW is generally preceded by a lull with heavy rain; at the latter point it

again blows hard, but the gale is then of short duration, and

soon subsides into a moderate breeze, with good weather.

Gales are not frequent here in summer, though their directions

are much the same; SW and WSW winds then prevail.

12.11 With the exception of the roadstead under Cape Foulwind,

Jacksons Bay is the N anchorage on this coast where shelter

can be found for large vessels during S winds.

12.11 Depths—Limitations.—Jacksons Bay Wharf is L-shaped,

61m long, with a least depth alongside of 3.7m and a height of

4.5m. The wharf is of wooden construction and the outer face
290 Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 

Pub. 127

is protected by spring piling. At the root of the wharf, on the inner side, there is a landing place. The wharf has been reported

to be in need of repair.

12.11 The wharf should be approached from the E. When berthing,

care should be taken to avoid small craft moorings which lie

off the outer face.

12.12 Cascade Point (44°01'S., 168°21'E.) is a cliffy projecting bluff which lies about 12.5 miles WSW of Jacksons

Head. The bare face of Cascade Point is striped by numerous

waterfalls which, after rain, are visible for quite a distance. A

notable dome-shaped peak rises close S of the point.

12.12 Caution.—A heavy swell usually sets on shore between

Jacksons Head and Cascade Point.

12.12 Barn Bay lies about 5 miles SW of Cascade Point; near its

head it is encumbered by several rocks and islets. The land immediately over this part of the coast is steep and backed by

lofty and rugged mountain ranges. Barn Bay has a well-defined

peak rising over its S entrance point.

12.12 Awarua Point (44°16'S., 168°03'E.), the NE entrance point

of Awarua Bay, lies about 20 miles SW of Cascade Point. Several dangers, best shown on the chart, lie off this section of

coast.

12.12 Awarua Bay (Big Bay) is entered between Awarua Point and

an unnamed point about 4.5 miles SSW. Long Reef extends 0.5

mile WNW from the S entrance point; the sea breaks 1.5 miles

N of that point.

12.12 Martin Bay lies on the S side of the S entrance point of

Awarua Bay. The Hollyford River, flowing out of Lake McKerrow, enters the sea at the N end of Martin Bay. The entrance to

the lake has a depth of 1.2m and is about 46m wide, thus limiting its use to small craft with local knowledge.

12.12 Kaipo Bay lies close S of Martins Bay; there are several islets lying off its S side. A rock, 46m high, lies 5.2 miles SW of

the entrance to the Kaipo River; it is a good landmark.

12.12 Yates Point, the NE entrance point of Milford Sound, lies

nearly 2.7 miles SW of the above rock. Between Yates Point

and Dale Point, about 6.5 miles S, the shore is made up of high

wooded slopes fronted by a succession of sandy or shingle

bays, with several rocks and foul ground lying off it. 

The Sounds

12.13 The Sounds represent the only natural harbors along

the W shore of South Island. These 13 sounds or inlets indent

the SW shore of South Island between the parallels of 44°35'S

and 46°10'S. To a vessel approaching this part of South Island

from sea, the aspect of the shore is very similar. Therefore, unless a vessel knows its particular position accurately,it will experience difficulty distinguishing the entrance of a particular

sound. Also, the smaller inlets, when seen from a distance of 4

or 5 miles, have more the look of ravines between high and

rugged mountains rather than harbor entrances.

12.13 In moderately clear weather, the shore can be made with

confidenc,e as the entrances are somewhat equidistant from

each other and all trend in a general E direction.

12.13 One of the more notable features of The Sounds is their great

depth of water. Soundings can rarely be obtained under 146m,

and frequently much greater depths are found.

Milford Sound
Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 291

Pub. 127

12.13 The prevailing winds on this coast are from the NW to SW;

the former frequently bring rain and thick weather. As the

shore is approached, the NW winds generally veer to the N;

SW winds are fine and clear. Rain is common occurrence and

often lasts for several days with no intermission. As The

Sounds are enclosed by mountains of such magnitude, except

for about 2 hours before and after noon, the sun is rarely visible.

12.13 Caution.—Due to the imperfect nature of the surveys of the

area covered by the charts, mariners without local knowledge

should exercise caution in depths less than 100m. Most of the

offshore islands are wildlife sanctuaries and in many cases

landing is prohibited without a permit.

12.14 Milford Sound (44°34'S., 167°47'E.) represents the

northernmost of The Sounds and it is deep throughout. The

mountains which encompass Milford Sound are the highest on

the coast.

12.14 Aspect.—Pembroke Peak, 2,045m high and always snowcovered, rises over its N side about 3 miles inland. Llawrenny

Peaks are prominent, saddle-shaped, and snow-covered mountains; they lie on The Sounds S side. Tutoko Peak, 2,756m

high, is a well-defined cone lying conspicuously, 6.5 miles E of

Pembroke Peak.

12.14 Mitre Peak, 1,675m high, rising abruptly over the S side of

The Sounds, is one of the more notable features in this vicinity.

A dome-shaped mountain lies opposite Mitre Peak; it is nearly

devoid of vegetation, and due to its unique color looks like a

mountain of metal.

12.14 From sea, The Sounds entrance resembles that of a bay and

vessels with local knowledge should only enter it on a clear

day.

12.14 Brig Rock, 2m high, and surrounded by a reef of rocks, lies

about 3 miles N of St. Anne Point, the S entrance point of Milford Sound. The ground, on which there are rocks, awash, between Brig Rock and the shore E, is foul. A depth of 5.5m was

reported to lie about 1 mile ENE of St. Anne Point.

12.14 A bank, with a least charted depth of 14.1m, extends 1 mile

from the coast, 4 miles S of Yates Point.

12.14 Anita Bay is entered between Fox Point, with an islet lying

close off it and Greenstone Point, about 0.5 mile SE. 

12.14 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain convenient anchorage, in depths of 21.9 to 32.9m, about 0.1 mile

SW of Fox Point. At this anchorage, vessels will be sheltered

from NW winds, but with N winds, a swell rolls around the

point. A bank, with a least charted depth of 14.1m, extends 1

mile from the coast, 4 miles S of Yates Point.

12.14 From Anita Bay, The Sounds extends in a funnel shape to the

SE for 1.5 miles to Dale Point, where it narrows and barely exceeds 0.5 mile in width, with towering perpendicular cliffs rising on either side. The depths in mid-channel are 120m. From

Dale Point, The Sounds leads in an E and SE direction for 6.5

miles between cliffy walls, the breadth varying from 0.2 to 0.7

mile. At 0.1 mile from the highest cliffs on the N shore, near a

large waterfall, a sounding of 428m, mud, was obtained. At 4

miles above Dale Point, on the N shore, lies Harrison Cove, a

confined deep-water cove. The E bight of this cove is subject to

williwaws during NW gales; the W bight is free from these

squalls. In 1975, a tree and a stake set in concrete close S, and

fitted with white reflectors, formed a range on which to anchor.

12.14 The head of Milford Sound ends in two basins separated by

Separation Tongue, fronted by boulder bank, steep-to, and covered at HW. Fresh Water Basin, the N basin, now dries except

for a shallow channel leading to a jetty in the NE corner of the

basin. Deep Water Basin, at the head of Milford Sound, has a

maximum depth of 53m. It is approached from the N by a

channel dredged to a depth of 2.7m.

12.14 Caution.—Much of Doubtful Sound SE of Dale Point is a

marine reserve.

12.15 Bligh Sound (44°46'S., 167°29'E.) is entered between

Tommy Point and Chasland Head, about 2 miles SW. Foul

ground is reported to extend 0.5 mile from the shore between

Tommy Point and Jagged Rocks, 2.5 miles ENE.

12.15 Two conspicuous peaks, Mount Longsight, 1402m high, lying 3.2 miles E of Tommy Point, and Table Mountain, about

0.7 mile WSW of Mount Longsight, are good marks for identifying the entrance of Bligh Sound.

12.15 Bligh Sound has three reaches; the outer, which is 2 miles

wide at its entrance, extends SE for 3.7 miles and narrows

gradually to Turn-Round Point on the S side, where the channel is only 0.2 mile across and known as Cloudy Pass. The second reach then continues SSW for about 4 miles to Evening

Point. The third reach continues for about 2.2 miles to Bounty

Haven.

12.15 Anchorage.—Amazon Cove, lying 0.7 mile NE of Evening

Point, affords anchorage for small craft with local knowledge.

There is also good anchorage for those vessels with extensive

local knowledge, off the head of Bounty Haven, in a depth of

21.9m, close to a stony flat, through which flows the Pitt River.

Rugged, lofty mountains rise steeply from either shore. A vessel of 1,200 grt anchored, in a depth of 29.3m, about 0.7 mile

WNW of the entrance to the Pitt River, abreast a waterfall on

the N side.

12.15 Clio Rock, which is steep-to, with a depth of 2.7m, lies on

the SE side of the second reach of Bligh Sound, midway between Turn-Round Point and Evening Point. Between Clio

Rock and the shore S are two more steep-to submerged rocks.

12.16 George Sound (44°50'S., 167°22'E.) has its entrance

about 6.5 miles SW of Bligh Sound; the shore between is steep

and slightly indented. A depth of 11.9m was reported in the

middle of the entrance to George Sound.

12.16 Because of this sound’s width, and the tendency of the winds

to generally blow with more steadiness, it is easier than most to

enter or leave. George Sound is surrounded by mountains with

a rugged and precipitous nature.

12.16 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain good

anchorage in Anchorage Cove, in a depth of 27.4m, on the E

side of the sound at the head of the first reach. With NW gales

a swell sets in. The head of this cove is a sandy beach.

12.16 A vessel of 4,800 grt anchored, in a depth of 53m, in George

Sound’s SW arm, about 0.5 mile from an islet, and 0.7 mile

from the arms head, There is good anchorage in the SE arm, in

about 27.4m, with the anchor being dropped as the waterfall is

seen.

12.16 The shore SW from the entrance of George Sound, about

13.5 miles SW to Caswell Sound, is steep and rocky, affording

no shelter, and indented only by Looking Glass and Two

Thumb Bays. Looking Glass Bay is sandy with a beach of
292 Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 

Pub. 127

large boulders at its head; Two Thumb Bay is blocked by

rocks.

12.17 Caswell Sound is entered through a passage roughly

0.3 mile wide. Styles Islet lies close N of McKerr Point, the S

entrance point of Caswell Sound. A small reef, awash, lies

close off the N end of the islet, between it and a submerged

rock, over which the sea breaks in heavy weather, about 0.3

mile NNE, lies the entrance. A narrow bank, with depths of 40

to 80m, stretches part way across the entrance from Styles Islet. However, close within the entrance there is no bottom at a

depth of 240m. To the S of Styles Island is a boat channel.

12.17 From the entrance, the sound leads 1.5 miles SE to Hansard

Point, on the N shore. As in other sounds the shores are very

steep and depths are great.

12.17 Boat Rock, awash at HW, lies about 6 miles ESE of the

Sounds entrance, and it is surrounded by a sandbank. 

12.17 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage E of Boat Rock, in a depth of 7.3m, but the bank is

very steep. There are general depths above Boat Rock of 40 to

160m; the head of Caswell Sound is a shallow flat.

12.17 The shore between Caswell Sound and Charles Sound, about

3 miles SW, is very rugged. Nugget Point lies about halfway

between the sounds, with a ridge of high rocks extending 0.3

mile off it. Even under good conditions, this section of coast

should be given a berth of at least 1 mile.

12.18 Charles Sound is entered about 4 miles SW of

Caswell Sound and there are depths in the entrance of 70 to

101m, increasing within to 186m. In the E and SE arms there

are depths of 26 to 92m. Turn Peak, lying between Charles

Sound and Nancy Sound, is a good mark for making out the

entrance. A rock, with a depth less than 1.8m, lies close off the

NE shore 0.7 mile within the entrance to the Sound.

12.18 Eleanor Islet lies at the entrance of Emelius Arm; there is a

deep water channel on either side. Gold Arm, the SE arm of the

sound, has Fanny Islet and Catherine Islet lying within 2 miles

of its head. 

12.18 Anchorage.—Vessels with extensive local knowledge can

obtain anchorage, in depths of 25.6 to 36.6m, above Fanny Islet

and Catherine Islet. However, this anchorage is not convenient

and vessels seeking haven should not attempt to enter, as Nancy Sound and Caswell Sound are preferable.

12.19 Nancy Sound lies about 4.5 miles SW of Charles

Sound; there are two boulder beaches between. Turn Peak is a

conspicuous sharp-peaked mountain rising over the N side of

Nancy Sound. This peak, which can be seen from sea and presents the same appearance from any direction, affords an accurate means of identifying the entrance of Nancy Sound. When

within 5 or 6 miles of the sound’s entrance a notable red patch,

caused by a landslip, will be seen on the high land close N of

the entrance. Also, a white patch, similarly caused, on the lower part of the cliffs N and S of the entrance will be seen. Two

rugged islets lie 0.2 mile N of Anxiety Point, the S entrance

point of the sound. A submerged rock, whose position is approximate, lies 0.5 mile W of the Anxiety Islets. Entrance Islet,

15.2m high and flat-topped, lies close W of Burnett Point, the

N entrance point of the Sound. 

12.19 The main entrance channel lies S of Entrance Islet; it is

about 0.3 mile wide with a depth of 14.6m in mid-channel. A

bar, with depths of 60 to 80m, extends across the entrance to

this sound; however, it does not continue sufficiently far to allow vessels to utilize it for anchoring.

12.19 Nancy Sound projects 1.2 miles E to Sweep Point, on the S

shore, and then 5 miles SE to Bend Point, on the N shore. A

small islet lies close W of Bend Point. 

12.19 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, in a depth of 27.4m, about 0.5 mile S of the islet, in Heel

Cove, 100m from the stony beach. Additional anchorage may be

found off the head of Toe Cove, in depths of 18.3 to 31.1m.

12.20 Thompson Sound is entered between Shanks Head

and Colonial Head, about 3.5 miles SW of Nancy Sound. Thompson Sound projects about 10 miles SSE to its junction with

Doubtful Sound and Bradshaw Sound. 

12.20 The entrance to Thompson Sound is mostly free from dangers, except for a rock, with a depth of 3.7m, lying about 0.7

mile S of Shanks Head, and three rocks, close to the E shore,

with depths of less than 1.8m, lying between 7 and 7.5 miles S

of Shanks Head, and three rocks, close to the E shore, with

depths of less than 1.8m, lying between 7 and 7.5 miles S of

Shanks Head. There are depths of 120 to 160m in the entrance

of Thompson Sound.

12.20 A peninsula, indented on its N and S sides by small coves,

lies about 3.2 miles S of Shanks Head. The N cove, Neck Cove,

is blocked by rocks and it is exposed. The S indentation, Deas

Cove, though small, affords sheltered anchorage, in depths

ranging from 11 to 29.3m. On the W side of Deas Cove, the

cliffs are steep-to, but the E side is fronted by a bank that extends offshore. There is anchorage for vessels with local

knowledge, in a depth of 18.3m, about 0.1 mile off the sandy

beach at the head of Deas Cove.

12.21 Bradshaw Sound is entered at the S end of Thompson

Sound, between Richards Point and Evans Head, nearly 1 mile

SSE. Between Sharp Head, lying 4.5 miles ENE of Richards

Point, and Macdonell Island, about 1 mile further ENE, there is

a bay where anchorage may be found. This anchorage lies

about 0.1 mile WNW of the NW point of Macdonell Island, in

a depth of 29.3m.

12.21 Precipice Cove, which lies E of Macdonell Island, is bound

by high cliffs. There is a depth of 9.1m in the entrance, lying

between Macdonell Island and an islet lying close N of Gardener Head.

12.21 Gaer Arm, the SE arm of Bradshaw Sound, projects about 3

miles SSE from its entrance, between Gardener Head and Glyn

Point, about 1 mile SW. A rock was reported to lie about 0.5

mile WSW of Gardener Head. Vessels with local knowledge

can obtain anchorage at the head of Gaer Arm in Shoal Cove.

This anchorage, in depths of 11 to 25.6m, lies about 0.5 mile W

of the three islets, lying about 1 mile from the arms head.

12.22 Doubtful Sound (45°16'S., 166°51'E.) is separated

from Thompson Sound, to the NE, by Secretary Island. Its entrance, between Nea Island and Febrero Point, 2 miles SW,

with high mountains on either side, presents a wide opening

from sea. This entrance is easily made out from a considerable

distance. All Round Peak and Mount Grono, on Secretary Island, are prominent. Hares Ears, lying 0.3 mile N of the Febre-
Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 293

Pub. 127

ro Point, are two notable peaked rocks. Upon close approach,

the Nea Islets will be seen projecting 1 mile S from the N entrance point. Also, from the offing, Solitary Cone, lying nearly

14 miles SW of the entrance to Doubtful Sound, is conspicuous.

12.22 Doubtful Sound projects about 17.5 miles SE with three

arms that each project SW, named, First Arm, Crooked Arm,

and Halls Arm; these areas are all marine reserves.

12.23 Islands and dangers within Doubtful Sound.—The

Shelter Islands (45°17'S., 166°53'E.) represent a rocky group

that lie about 2 miles SSE of the N entrance point of Doubtful

Sound and the Nea Islets. A reef, awash, lies 0.2 mile SW of

the N Nea Islet. There is a channel, with a least depth of 24m,

through the middle of the Shelter Islands. However, this channel and the channel between the Shelter Islands and Bauza Island, close S, is not recommended.

12.23 Bauza Island lies in the center of Doubtful Sound, roughly 2

miles within the entrance, and there is deep water on either

side. The S channel, Gaol Passage, is the better channel, as it is

wider and deeper.

12.23 Snug Cove, located at the head of First Arm, affords anchorage, in a depth of 22m, about 0.2 mile from the beach at its

head.

12.23 Blanket Bay, which affords anchorage for small vessels with

local knowledge, indents the S shore of Secretary Island.

12.23 Common Head is the SE end of Secretary Island; between it

and Wood Head, 1.2 miles SE, is a channel leading to Thompson Sound. Seymour Islet, with a smaller islet off its N side,

lies in this channel. Omapere Rock, with a depth of 1.5m and

steep-to, lies about 0.3 mile SSW of Common Head. Tidal currents are reported strong between the rock and Seymour Islet.

12.23 Malaspina Reach represents the main part of Doubtful

Sound; it is deep throughout, affording no anchorages.

12.23 Crooked Arm (45°22'S., 167°03'E.) is entered between

Ransom Head and Kellard Point through an entrance nearly 0.5

mile wide. Vessels with extensive local knowledge can obtain

anchorage at the head of Crooked Arm, in Haulashore Cove, in

a depth of 22m, within 0.3 mile of the beach.

12.23 Deep Cove is located at the head of Malaspina Reach, about

6.5 miles SE of the entrance of Crooked Arm. Halls Arm extends about 4.5 miles SW from the entrance of Deep Cove. The

N side of Deep Cove is formed by a precipice, with waterfalls

on each side of the cove and at its head. No anchorage is available in Deep Cove. 

12.23 A wharf, about 41m long, with a dolphin and bollard off

each end, lies on the W side of the cove. There is a depth

alongside the wharf of 14m.

12.23 Halls Arm is entered between Davidson Head and a small

cliffy isthmus; depths within are great. A stretch of beach made

of sand and shingle extends along the SE side of this arm.

Matai Island lies close to the NE shore of Malaspina Reach,

about 1 mile SE of Wood Head. 

12.23 Fergusson Islet lies in mid-channel about 0.7 mile W of Solitary Cone (45°24'S., 167°07'E.). Elizabeth Island lies close

SE of Fergusson Islet; its N end is reported to extend 0.2 mile

further than charted. Vessels normally pass W of Fergusson Islet and Elizabeth Island. The passage E of these islands has not

been surveyed.

12.23 Rolla Islet fronts the entrance to Deep Cove, about 0.2 mile

NW of its W entrance point. Tarawera Rock lies between the

islet and the point, and it has a depth less than 1.8m. A reef,

awash, lies in the entrance to Halls Arm, about 0.6 mile SW of

Rolla Islet.

12.24 Peninsula Point (45°22'S., 166°46'E.) is a salient

point that lies about 6 miles SW of the entrance to Doubtful

Sound; the shore between is steep, cliffy, and overlooked by

high mountains. From Peninsula Point, the shore heads 1 mile

S to Castoff Point, the N entrance point of Daggs Sound.

12.24 Daggs Sound is entered between Castoff Point and Towing

Head, 1.5 mile SW. The sound leads about 4.5 miles SE from

its entrance, where it divides into a NW arm and a SE arm.

12.24 Anchorage Arm, the NW arm, is entered between Otago

Point and Seventy Fathoms Point, 0.5 mile E. The SE arm is

entered between Seventy Fathoms Point and Schooner Point,

0.1 mile S. In the entrance and for 1.2 miles within it, there are

depths of 31 to 55m. However, as the channel narrows, about 2

miles within the entrance, depths increase to 100 to 184m.

12.24 Vessels with local knowledge can obtain good anchorage at

the head of Anchorage Arm, in depths of 22 to 33m, mud,

about 0.2 mile off a sandy beach.

12.24 The Towing Islets lie on a spit of foul ground extending

about 0.3 mile NW from Towing Head. Four Fathom Bank,

with a least depth of 7.3m, lies in mid-channel, about 2 miles

within the entrance. A steep-to rock, with a depth of 2.7m, lies

about 0.2 mile WNW of Schooner Point.

12.24 Breaksea Sound, fronted by Breaksea Island, is entered

about 13 miles SW of Daggs Sound and it is joined with Dusky

Sound S by Acheron Passage. The entrance to Breaksea Sound

is narrow and bound by high land, making identification difficult until close upon it.

12.24 The recommended channel into the sound lies N of Breaksea

Island. It is about 1 mile wide and apparently free from dangers

in mid-channel, except for a 5.5m shoal reported to lie about

0.5 mile SSE of Oliver Point. The channel between Breaksea

Island and the four small islets S of Breaksea Island is not recommended, as it is narrow and encumbered by dangers.

12.24 The Gilbert Islands are two distinct groups more than 0.5

mile apart projecting off the NE shore of Resolution Island

(45°41'S., 166°39'E.). The only anchorage among these islands

is in Stevens Cove, which lies on the W side of the S entrance

point to Breaksea Sound. At this anchorage, a vessel of moderate size with local knowledge can find anchorage, in a depth of

7.3m, with its stern secured to trees. This anchorage is approached between the two E Gilbert Islands.

12.24 Entry Island lies about 1 mile E of the E Gilbert Islands. A

submerged rock was reported to lie in the channel SW of Entry

Island. From the vicinity of Entry Island, Acheron Passage

leads 8.5 miles S to Dusky Sound, between the E coast of Resolution Island and the mainland. Alternately, from E of Entry

Island, Breaksea Sound continues ENE for about 8 miles to

Chatham Point, where it separates into a NE and E arm known,

respectively, as Vancouver Arm and Broughton Arm. Foul

ground was reported to extend 0.2 mile NW of the shore NE of

Chatham Point.

12.24 Anchorage.—Good anchorage may be found, by vessels

with local knowledge, about 3 miles E of Entry Island in Beach

Harbor fronted by the Harbor Islands, which form its NW side.

There is confined well-sheltered anchorage, in a depth of
294 Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 

Pub. 127

21.9m, off a sandy beach between the S Harbor Island and the

mainland. This anchorage may be approached either S of the S

Harbor Island or around the N end of the N island, which is the

better passage.

12.24 A vessel of 1,000 grt found sheltered anchorage, in a depth

of 31.1m, mud, off the head of Broughton Arm, with 0.1 mile

of swinging room.

12.25 Resolution Island (45°41'S., 166°39'E.) separates the

entrance of Breaksea Sound from that of Dusky Sound. The

Five Fingers Peninsula, joined to the NW shore of Resolution

Island by a narrow neck of land, extends about 8 miles SW

from the island. Five Fingers Point, the SW end of the peninsula, is easily made out from the N. Several high pointed rocks

project 0.4 mile SSW from the point, and when seen from various directions, appear as the fingers of a hand. An islet, 21.3m

high, lies about 1.7 miles NNW of Five Fingers Point. A reef,

with above and below-water rocks, lies about 0.3 mile SW of

the islet. A rock, awash, over which the sea breaks, lies about

0.7 mile SW from the islet. This rock should be given a berth

of at least 1.5 miles.

12.25 Dusky Sound is entered between Five Fingers Point and

South Point, about 4.5 miles S; it is encumbered with many islets and rocks, most of which are visible.

12.25 Aspect.—When approaching from the S, Chalky Island is a

good guide to the entrance. West Cape, which will appear as a

well-defined projecting point of moderate height, dropping a

short distance within its extremity and then rising again with a

gradual slope towards the high land, is a good mark.

12.25 Approaching from the N, Five Fingers Point is a good landmark.

12.25 Southwest winds roll a heavy sea into the entrance, but it is

broken by the numerous islands; smooth water is found at a

short distance within.

12.26 Anchor Island (45°46'S., 166°30'E.), lying in the entrance to Dusky Sound, is encompassed by many islets and

dangers, many of which are best seen on the chart.

12.26 From the W to E, the Seal Islands, the Many Islands, Stop Island, and the Passage Isles are groups that lies within 1 mile of

the S shore of Anchor Island. Thrum Cap and No Mans Islet lie

about 1.5 miles S of the E summit of Anchor Island. An abovewater rock lies 0.2 mile WNW of No Man islet. Several rocks

and islets extend nearly 0.5 mile off the NE and N shores of

Anchor Islet. The westernmost of these islands is the Petrel Islands. Parrot Island lies about 1.7 miles NNE of Small Petrel

Island, the northernmost of the group. 

12.26 A rock, with a depth of 4.6m, lies about 1 mile SW of Parrot

Island. An islet lies midway between the NE end of Anchor Island and Pidgeon Island. A reef extends 0.2 mile S of the islet

and a rock, which dries, lies upon a patch of foul ground extending 0.3 mile NE from the islet.

12.27 North side of Dusky Sound.—Anchor Island Harbor (45°46'S., 166°32'E.) lies almost in the center of Anchor

Island; it affords good sheltered anchorage.

12.27 Directions.—Vessels with local knowledge entering via the

W passage may pass on either side of Entry Islet, lying about

2.4 miles E of Five Finger Point. If entering N of Entry Islet,

the SW end of Large Petrel Islet should be kept close aboard to

avoid a submerged rock, with a depth of 3.7m, lying in midchannel. Then she should pass on either side of an above-water

rock lying almost in the middle of the harbor, 0.4 mile E by S

of Entry Islet. Then the vessel should steer SE for the entrance

and anchor, in a depth of 29.3m, about 0.1 mile offshore.

12.27 The passage from the E is wider, but it was reported that a

7.3m shoal lay about 0.1 mile E of the SE end of Large Petrel

Islet.

12.27 Facile Harbor, lying on the N side of Dusky Sound, is a

deep-water anchorage, formed by the W side of Resolution Island and by Parrot Islet and Pigeon Islet on the S.

12.27 The entrance to Facile Harbor lies about 4.5 miles NE of

Five Fingers Point. There is safe anchorage in Facile Harbor, in

depths of 27.4 to 60m.

12.27 A ledge of rocks, with a depth of 2.7m, lies in the center of

the entrance to a cove in the NE corner of Facile Harbor. This

cove is only available to small vessels with extensive local

knowledge through a passage, 26m wide, on the W side of the

ledge of rocks; the E passage is too narrow and crooked for

navigation.

12.27 Cormorant Cove and Goose Cove lie in the bight N of Facile

Harbor. Cormorant Cove affords snug anchorage, in moderate

depths ranging from 20 to 24m. An islet lies 0.1 mile off the N

entrance point of Cormorant Cove; a submerged rock lies 0.2

mile further NNW.

12.27 Directions.—Vessels entering Dusky Sound bound for Facile Harbor do so between Five Fingers Point and Anchor Island. The channel appears clear of dangers until within 1 mile

of Parrot Island, where a 4.6m rock lies about 1 mile SW of

that island. To clear this rock, keep the E summit of Anchor Island in line with the islet, about 1 mile NW of it, bearing 152°.

This course leads NE of the rock.

12.27 The NW end of the islet off Whidbey Point (45°42'S.,

166°33'E.) in line with the SE end of the islet, 0.7 mile NE of

it, bearing 045°, leads midway between the rock lying 1 mile

SW of Parrot Island and the Five Fingers Peninsula.

12.27 In leaving Facile Harbor it will often be convenient, with W

winds, to pass between Parrot Island and Pigeon Island. This

channel is about 0.1 mile wide with depths of 9.1 to 16.5m.

12.28 Duck Cove (45°44'S., 166°40'E.) indents the S shore

of Resolution Island; it lies about 2.7 miles ENE of Fixed

Head. Fixed Head is the W end of an islet that lies about 1 mile

ESE of Anchor Point, the E extremity of Anchor Island. The E

entrance of Duck Cove, Porpoise Point, is reported to have a

submerged rock and a rock, awash, lying 0.3 mile WNW and

0.1 mile SW, respectively, of it. In 1984, a 3.7m shoal was reported to lie 0.5 mile NW of Porpoise Point.

12.28 Duck Cove is easy to access and affords convenient anchorage under most circumstances. Mountains rise on either side of

Duck Cove to heights of almost 914m and are separated at its

head by a valley.

12.28 Bowen Channel lies between Resolutio Island and Long Island, E of Porpoise Point.

12.28 Acheron Passage is the channel that joins Dusky Sound with

Breaksea Sound, lying between the E shore of Resolution Island and the mainland. Acheron Passage is entered about 3

miles NE of Porpoise Point, between Passage Point and a point

about 0.5 mile W. The Front Isles lie about 0.7 mile SSW of

Passage Point. A submerged rock lies about 1 mile SSE of Pas-
Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 295

Pub. 127

sage Point. The Shag Isles lie about 1.7 miles SE of Passage

Point. A submerged rock was reported to lie about 2.2 miles E

of Passage Point.

12.28 The aspect of both sides of Acheron Passage is that of high,

steep, sheer-sided, and forested mountains rising to heights of

nearly 1,219m. The depths in this passage are quite great, however, there are several places where temporary anchorage can

be found.

12.28 Temporary anchorage may be found in a small sandy bight

close N of Passage Point, in a depth of 23.8m. However, it is

exposed to SW winds and cannot be recommended when other

shelter can be obtained. Anchorage may be found by vessels

with local knowledge on the W side of Acheron Passage, about

2.5 miles NW of Passage Point, in depths 16.5 to 21.9m. Occasional Cove affords anchorage near the N entrance of Acheron

Passage; the entrance to Breaksea Sound is just shut in from

this anchorage.

12.28 Wet Jacket Arm extends ENE from about the middle of

Acheron Passage, 3.5 miles N of Passage Point. Vessels with

local knowledge can obtain anchorage near the head of this

arm, in depths of 18.3 to 32.9m. In 1975, anchorage was found,

in 38.4m, sand and mud, between Oke Island and the bay N.

Oke Island lies about 5 miles within the entrance of Wet Jacket

Sound.

12.28 Directions.—Vessels with local knowledge entering by the

N passage, after passing Anchor Island, should steer through

the channel between its E end and Resolution Island. Known

dangers in this passage include the rocks on each side of the islet midway between Parrot Island and the E end of Anchor Island, Anchor Point, and the 16.5m shoal lying midway

between Anchor Point and the Useless Isles. Anchor Point

should be given a berth of at least 0.1 mile.

12.29 South side of Dusky Sound.—South Point

(45°49'S., 166°28'E.) is the S entrance point of Dusky Sound

and the bay close E of the point is unsurveyed. A reef of rocks

lies about 3 miles ENE of South Point.

12.29 Caution.—The inshore area between South Point and Cape

Providence has not been fully surveyed. Deep draft vessels

should remain seaward of the 100m curve and avoid areas

which shoal to less than 100m.

12.29 Pickersgill Harbor lies 5 miles ENE of South Point; Crayfish

Islet lies close off its W entrance point. The best channel to enter the harbor lies E of Crayfish Island, avoiding the foul

ground that extends about 0.1 mile NNE from the harbor’s

head and the foul ground projecting 100m S from the SE end of

Crayfish Islet. This entrance channel is about 100m wide and

within it, about 0.1 mile offshore, there is confined anchorage

for vessels with local knowledge, in a depth of 27.4m.

12.29 Cascade Cove is entered E of Wales Point, about 1 mile E of

Crayfish Islet. Heron Islet lies in the middle of the coves entrance. A submerged rock and an above-water rock lie midway

between Heron Islet and the shore SE. A rock, with a depth of

3.7m, lies about 1.5 miles SW of Heron Islet. Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage E of the rock, in depths of

21.9 to 27.4m. The head of Cascade Cove ends in a sandy

beach.

12.29 There are three main islands that front this S shore of Dusky

Sound, namely, Indian Island, Long Island, and Cooper Island.

These three islands, which extend from off Cascade Cove to

nearly the head of the sound, have deep-water channels both N

and S of them. 

12.29 The channel S of the islands is known as Cook Channel. The

channels between the islands are encumbered with many dangers. Nine Fathoms Passage, with depths of 4.6m and 100m

wide, lies between the E end of Cooper Island and the shore S.

Rocks line both sides of this passage.

12.29 The head of Dusky Sound ends in two coves, the N, Supper

Cove, and the S, Shark Cove. Vessels with extensive local

knowledge can obtain anchorage in either of these two coves.

12.29 Directions.—Vessels with local knowledge entering Dusky

Sound via the S passage from the W, should enter with the S

side of Anchor Island in line with the 457m summit near the

center of Long Island, bearing about 089°. This course leads

about 1.5 miles N of the rock, awash, lying about 2.7 miles

WNW of South Point. When Five Fingers Point bears 030°,

vessels should change course SE and pass midway between the

Seal Islands and the shore S.

12.29 Vessels approaching from the SW should steer with the

414m summit of Anchor Island in line with Mount Clerke,

bearing about 056°, which leads about 1.2 miles SE of the rock

awash. Having entered the sound, vessels should keep to the S

shore until reaching Thrum Cap, when course should be

changed N to avoid the rock off the W side of Indian Island,

when course can then be made for the entrance to Duck Cove.

12.30 Cape Providence (46°01'S., 166°28'E.) lies about 12

miles S of South Point and the intervening shore is high. This

shore should be given a berth of at least 2 miles, as shoal

ground is reported to lie 1 mile off it. Sugarloaf, an above-water rock, lies close off the cape. Foul ground projects SW of the

Cape. A 29.3m shoal, whose position is approximate, lies

about 6 miles SSW of Cape Providence. 

12.30 A bank, with depths less than 183m, lies centered about 14

miles SW of the Cape. A depth of 23.7m was reported about

17.5 miles WSW of Cape Providence. A depth of 33m lies

about 13 miles W of Cape Providence in approximately

46°00'S, 166°10'E. A rock was reported to lie roughly 1.2

miles SSW of Cape Providence.

12.30 Chalky Inlet (Dark Cloud Inlet) is entered between Cape

Providence and Gulches Head, 6.5 miles SE.

12.30 Chalky Island, which lies in the entrance to the inlet, is notable for its white cliffs; they serve to indicate the inlets entrance.

Drop Point is the NE end of Chalky Island; Pinnacle Rock,

along with several other rocks, extend 0.2 mile E and N from it.

Sealers Bay indents the N shore of the island, and Bay Rock

lies in its entrance. There are rocks on either side of the bay

and kelp in its entrance. 

12.30 Finger Rocks and Zero Nugget lie close off the N end of

Chalky Island. A rock, with a depth of 11m, over which the sea

breaks, lies about 1 mile W of Zero Nugget. The Passage Islands lie N of Chalky Island, separated from it by Bad Passage.

The larger of the two Passage Islands is rock-fringed.

12.30 Great Island, lying N of the Passage Islands and separated

from it by Return Channel, is joined to the mainland NW by a

sandy bar. Return Rock, a pinnacle with a depth of 1.5m, lies

off the S end of Great Island.

12.31 Table Rock (46°06'S., 166°32'E.), brown, low, box-
296 Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 

Pub. 127

like, and conspicuous lies about 2 miles SSW of the SE end of

Chalky Island. A shoal, with a depth of 4.6m, lies about 0.7

mile ENE of Table Rock. A depth of 7.3m exists about 1 mile

NNE of Table Rock; the charted position is approximate.

12.31 Balleny Reef, which breaks heavily, lies about 2.5 miles SE

of Chalky Point, the SE end of Chalky Island. Broke-adrift Passage lies between the reef and Gulches Head; it has an irregular

rocky bottom.

12.31 A 9.1m shoal was reported to lie 1.5 miles S of Gulches

Head. A depth of 12.2m lies 0.3 mile S of this position; two

7.3m shoals were reported to lie about 1.2 miles W and 1.5

miles WNW of the same head, but their existence is doubtful.

A rock, awash, lies 0.3 mile S of the head.

12.31 Chalky Island divides the entrance of Chalky Inlet into Western Passage and Eastern Passage.

12.31 Vessels with local knowledge using Western Passage should

give Cape Providence a berth of about 2 miles so as to avoid

the dangers S and SW of it. Care should also be taken to avoid

the 11m rock lying 1 mile W of Zero Nugget. Vessels generally

steer a NE course through Western Passage fairway until Return Channel opens, taking care when rounding Great Island to

avoid Return Rock.

12.31 Eastern Passage, which lies between the SE point of Chalky

Island and Gulches Head, about 2.5 miles SE, is the preferred

channel into Chalky Inlet for vessels with local knowledge approaching from S, entering through Broke-adrift Passage or between Chalky Point and Table Rock. The E shore of Chalky

Island should be given a good berth. Care must be taken to

avoid the 7.3m patch that was reported to lie about 0.7 mile S

of Chalky Point.

12.31 Caution.—Floats marking the positions of crayfish pots are

found throughout the inlet; heavier concentrations in the bays

and fjords are used as shipping stations. Crayfish pot floats can

often be encountered over rocky features well offshore.

12.32 South Port (46°03'S., 166°38'E.) is entered between

the Garden Islets and Reef Point through an entrance narrowed

by islets and rocks to less than 0.1 mile. Outer Rock, awash,

lies in the center of the entrance at the NE tip of foul ground

extending E from the Garden Islets. Foul ground projects SW

from Reef Point.

12.32 Anchorage Cove, lying close SE of Reef Point, affords sheltered anchorage, in depths of 16.5 to 25.6m.

12.32 Directions.—Entering South Port to anchor via Eastern Passage, vessels should pass N of the Garden Islets and Outer

Rock, then head up the bay keeping within 0.1 mile of the E

shore. The submerged rock lying W of Reef Point may be

passed close to, however, if it is not seen, then Reef Point must

be kept within less than 0.1 mile until this rock is passed. When

changing course into Anchorage Cove, Reef Point must not be

rounded closely.

12.32 Those vessels entering by Western Passage, when Return

Channel is open, will see Stripe Head lying 1 mile N of Reef

Point; course should be shaped midway between it and the

Garden Islets. As soon as the rock, awash, in the entrance is

passed, vessels should proceed as directed above.

12.32 North Port (45°59'S., 166°36'E.) lies between the NE end of

Great Island and Little Island. Ship Entrance, S of Little Island,

is about 100m wide and steep-to on either side. 

12.32 Vessels with local knowledge can obtain landlocked anchorage, in a depth 25.6m, mud, about 0.1 mile W of Little Island.

Care must be taken to avoid the rock, awash, about 0.1 mile E

of the anchorage.

12.32 Edwardson Sound, the NE arm of Chalky Inlet, is bound on

either side by steep and rugged mountain ranges. There are

depths exceeding 183m in its central part. In 1984, a dangerous

rock was reported to lie about 100m off Divide Head, the E entrance point. The sound terminates in Lake Cove, where there

are moderate depths for anchorage.

12.32 Cunaris Sound, the E arm of Chalky Inlet, is deep with the

Small Craft Harbor Islets lying near the center of its entrance.

Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage on

the SW side of the Small Craft Harbor Islets in a cove, in a

depth of 14.6m.

12.32 Caution.—Some shoaling is evident in the area S and E of

the islands. It is in this area of shoals that a pinnacle, with a

minimum depth of 2.1m, rises from surrounding depths of

30m. This shoal appears with very little warning close to deep

water. Large vessels or those without local knowledge should

pass N of the islands when proceeding to Cunaris Sound.

12.33 Preservation Inlet represents the southernmost of The

Sounds that indent the SW shore of South Island; it is entered

between Gulches Head and Puysegur Point. Gulches Head rises to a height of 85m at its E end, from which a reef projects

about 0.2 mile SE. A 9.1m and a 12.2m shoal lie about 1 mile S

of Gulches Head.

12.33 Vessels approaching Preservation Islet from the S should

have little trouble identifying it as it is the first opening seen.

12.33 Balleny Reef lies about 1 mile SSW of Preservation Inlet.

Caution should be exercised while navigating into the inlet

when approaching from the SSW due to shoals, which consist

of isolated rock outcrops rising from a sandy bottom, extending off the S and E sides of the reef.

12.33 Treble Mount (46°01'S., 166°43'E.) has the appearance

from the W of twin peaks and provides a good mark for identifying the entrances of Chalky Inlet and Preservation Inlet.

12.33 Tides—Currents.—The flood current is barely felt in Preservation Inlet. This current runs E between Gulches Head and

Balleny Reef, setting SE across the entrance. The ebb current

sets SW out of the inlet. Both the flood and the ebb attain rates

of about 1 knot.

12.33 Coal Island fronts the SE part of Preservation Inlet and it is

joined to the mainland SE by a shallow bank. Steep-to Islet is

joined to the NE end of Coal Island by a reef. A dangerous

steep-to reef, over which the sea does not always break, lies

nearly 1 mile NNW of Pinnacle Rock, at the N end of Coal Island.

12.33 The Spit Islets are a group of islets and rocks lying about 1.5

miles N of Pinnacle Rock. This group is joined to the mainland

NNE by a drying sandspit.

12.33 Cavern Head (46°05'S., 166°40'E.) is a rugged and broken

point on which a swell is always breaking. Several rocks,

above-water and submerged, lie W of the head.

12.33 The Cording Islets are a chain of islets and rocks that lie in

the fairway about 1.5 mile ENE of Cavern Head. The channels

through this group can only be used by vessels with extensive

local knowledge. An above-water rock lies on the end of a reef

that extends about 0.3 mile S from the SE Cording Islet. Whale

Rock, lying about 1 mile SE of Cavern Head, is awash and
Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 297

Pub. 127

steep-to.

12.34 North side of Preservation Inlet.—The shore E between Gulches Head and Cavern Head, about 5 miles NE,

forms a bay with a sandy beach at its head.

12.34 Welcome Road, which fronts Prices Beach, affords temporary shelter during NW winds in depths of 11 to 16m.

12.34 Cuttle Cove (46°04'S., 166°41'E.) lies about 1 mile NNE of

Cavern Cove; it affords sheltered anchorage for small vessels

with local knowledge, in depths of 9 to 11m, between the shore

and Single Tree Islet. A 5.5m patch lies between Single Tree

Islet and the S entrance point of Cuttle Cove. Brokenshore Bay

lies NE of Cuttle Cove separated from it by Bounding Point. A

crescent-shaped islet lies off its E entrance point. A submerged

rock lies midway between this islet and the largest of the Cording Islets.

12.35 South side of Preservation Inlet.—Otagos Retreat

(46°09'S., 166°38'E.) is entered E of the S tip of Coal Island,

between it and the mainland. Small vessels with extensive local

knowledge can obtain anchorage in the entrance, in depths of

14.6 to 16.5m. Also, good anchorage may be found inside Otagos Retreat, in a depth of 7.3m, in calm water. About 1 mile

within the entrance of Otagos Retreat, a bar of sand extends

across the channel.

12.35 Fishing Bay is formed between the NE end of Coal Island

and Steep-to Island, close NE and joined to it by a reef. Small

vessels with extensive local knowledge can obtain anchorage

in Fishing Bay, in depths of 11 to 18.3m, about 0.1 mile off the

NW side of the reef, but the anchorage cannot be recommended as depths decrease rapidly as it is approached.

12.35 Revolver Bay (46°05'S., 166°45'E.) is entered about 2.7

miles ENE of the N end of Steep-to Island; it has moderate

depths. Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, in

depths of 21.9m, 0.2 mile from its head on the W side. A depth

of 0.4m was reported to lie in the middle of the bay, about 0.25

mile from its head.

12.35 Long Sound is entered NE of Revolver Bay; it projects about

13 miles NE from its entrance at Narrow Bend (46°04'S.,

166°46'E.). Harries Bay lies about 2 miles within the sound’s

entrance, close N of Sandy Point. This bay is deep, but vessels

with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, in a depth of

27.4m, 0.1 mile from the beach. Shoal water projects 0.1 mile

off Sandy Point. A rock, with less than 1.8m, lies 0.2 mile NW

of Sandy Point.

12.35 Jane Coves lies 2 miles NNW of Sandy Point. Trevaccoon

Head is a high, cliffy promontory about 2.5 miles NE of Jane

Coves, with Last Cove about 0.7 mile further NE. Small vessels with extensive local knowledge might find shelter in Last

Cove.

12.35 Only islands lie above 3 miles SW of the head of Long

Sound. Vessels with local knowledge might find shelter inside

these islands.

12.36 Marshals Rock (46°10'S., 166°38'E.), flattopped and

conspicuous, lies about halfway between Puysegur Point, the S

entrance point of Preservation Inlet, and Windsor Point, 3

miles SSE. Submerged rocks lie N and S of Marshalls Rock.

12.36 Long Reef Point (46°13'S., 166°41'E.) represents the SW

end of South Island, and 27 miles E to Sand Hill Point the

shore is low, rocky, and unexamined. Mount Aitken, 1189m

high, backs this stretch of shore about 14 miles ENE of Long

Reef Point.

12.36 The Green Islets, which are green in color and rock-fringed, lie

close off a point, 88m high, about 4.5 miles ESE of Long Reef

Point. The Big River empties out into the sea about 0.5 mile NW

of Price Point and the river may be made out by the gap in the

mountains caused by its large valley. Reefs are reported to project

1 mile off the coast between Price Point and Long Point.

12.36 Sand Hill Point (46°15'S., 167°21'E.) is comprised of sand

dunes backed by bush and it is 17.4m high. A detached reef,

awash, lies with its seaward end about 1.2 miles SSE of Sand

Hill Point.

12.36 Tewaewae Bay is entered between Sand Hill Point and Pahia

Point, about 15 miles ESE. In S or heavy SW gales, the sea

breaks all over this bay.

12.36 Mid Bay Reef, which breaks occasionally, lies almost in the

center of the bays entrance. Tewaewae Bay is largely unsurveyed and it is unsuitable for anchorage except in its W part. A

heavy swell rolls in from the S, even with E or W winds.

12.36 Mussel Beach, at the S end of which is Port Craig, lies about

3 miles NNE of Sand Hill Point. Timber is loaded in good

weather conditions about 1 mile NNE of Port Craig. Vessels

anchor in a depth of about 8.2m.

Foveaux Strait

12.37 Foveaux Strait separates South Island from Stewart

Island; it has a navigable width of not less than 10 miles.

12.37 The N shore of the strait, from Bluff Harbor to the W entrance of Tewaewae Bay, a distance of nearly 50 miles, is

fringed with islets and reefs. Ruapuke Island lies almost in the

center of the strait and is almost encompassed on all sides by

islets, reefs, and tide rips, making the approach from E somewhat difficult to someone not familiar with the strait.

12.37 Local magnetic anomalies.—The normal magnetic variation may be decreased by up to 3° in the W approaches to and

in the W entrance of Foveaux Strait. In coastal waters of the

strait, further anomalies exist. In open waters and at the E end

of the strait, the normal variation may be increased or decreased by up to 1°, while in the area 5 to 10 miles S of Ruapuke Island, it may be increased by up to 2°.

12.37 Winds—Weather.—Irrespective of local influences, the

prevailing winds on the S shore of New Zealand are from the

NW through SW. Gales are frequent from this quadrant; however, those from NW are frequent in all seasons. There have

been times when a gale will blow for many days with lulls only

a few hours long.

12.37 Tides—Currents.—The flood current sets through Foveaux

Strait from the W to E, and is strongest between Bluff Harbor

and Ruapuke Island, attaining a velocity of 1 to 3 knots. This

current influence is felt as far as Long Point, 45 miles E of Ruapuke Island. Between Stewart Island and Ruapuke Island, the

flood sets SE running parallel to the shores of the former. The

ebb runs exactly opposite to the flood current.

12.37 The E current running between Pahia Point and the N extremity of Stewart Island, begins to run from 30 minutes to 2

hours after LW by the shore. The turn of the current and duration of SW is dependent upon the direction of the wind, with W

winds advancing the time the tide turns. At the E entrance to
298 Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 

Pub. 127

the strait the E current begins to run about 3 hours after LW by

the shore. Both currents run for about 6 hours.

12.37 Along the NE coast of Stewart Island, the SE current runs for

1 hour 20 minutes after HW at Port William, which is situated

about 13 miles SE of Black Rock Point, the N extremity of this

island.

12.37 The strength of the tidal current varies from 0.5 to 2.5 knots;

in the narrowest part of the strait, between Ruapuke Island and

Bluff Harbor, they sometimes attain a rate of 3 knots.

12.37 With the flood, the current coming from S strikes the S end

of Stewart Island and divides. One part runs N along its W side

and then E through Foveaux Strait; the other sets NE along the

S side of the island, as far as Port Adventure, at its SE end,

where the currents meet again and flow E. With the ebb, the

current takes a contrary direction, splitting near Port Adventure; it sets NW through Foveaux Strait, down the W side of

the island, and SW along the S side as far as Southwest Cape,

the SW extremity of the island.

12.37 The strength of the currents off the coast is from 0.5 to 1.5

knots, except in the narrow passages; thus, inside the group of

islands off Port William (46°51'S., 168°05'E.) and Paterson

Inlet, about 3.5 miles S of Port William, they attain a rate of 1

to 3 knots, and in the passage between Southwest Cape and Big

South Cape, about 2.7 miles NW, 4 knots during springs.

12.37 Directions.—The directions for both the E and W approaches to Foveaux Strait will be found at the end of the narrative of

the strait. The descriptive sequence is divided into two parts,

the N side and the S side. The description of the N side begins

with Centre Islet, SE to Waipapa Point, including Ruapuke Island. The description of the S side begins with Solander Island,

then Stewart Island, and other off-lying islands that comprise

the S side of Foveaux Strait.

12.37 Caution.—Because of the unique pinnacle formation of underwater features in these waters, other dangers may exist, in

addition to those shown on the chart. Mariners without local

knowledge should exercise caution in depths less than 100m W

of 167°48'E. To the E of this longitude, deep-draft vessels off

the recommended tracks are advised to remain in depths greater than 30 fathoms. Vessels navigating in unfrequented waters

of less depth should keep a good lookout for surface disturbances or unusual soundings which might indicate possible

danger.

12.38 North side of Foveaux Strait—Centre Island

(46°27'S., 167°51'E.) lies about 10.5 miles SE from Pahia

Point; it lies close to the S limit of islets and reefs projecting

off the N shore of the Strait. Centre Island is a good mark for

avoiding these dangers. Midway between the island and shore

N are two reefs. Hapuka Rock, 0.3m high, lies about 1 mile

SW of the W end of Centre Island. Fish Reef, over which the

sea breaks, lies about 6 miles WNW of Centre Island; it is

steep-to on its S side.

12.38 Escape Reefs lie on a bank about 4 miles ESE of Centre Island. Rocks surround the bank. A foul area, best shown on the

chart, lies NNW of Escape Reefs.

12.38 Howells Point, the E entrance point of Colac Bay, is cliffy

with sand hills, 35m high, on its S side. 

12.38 Pig Island, 8.2m high, lies about 2.5 miles SW of Howells

Point, the shore between being foul. Pig Island is surrounded

by rocks.

12.38 Local magnetic anomalies.—The normal magnetic variation is increased by up to 6° or decreased by up to 8° NE of

Centre Island.

12.38 Caution.—It is recommended that vessels not pass within

the 37m curve off this section of coast as the dangers are numerous. Fish Reef should be given a berth of at least 2 miles.

Centre Island and Escape Reefs should be given a berth of at

least 3 miles.

12.38 New River Harbor is entered between Entrance Point and

Steep Head, about 2 miles SW. A shifting bar, with a depth of

2.7m, lies between a sand spit, on which there are heavy breakers, and Steep Head. Inside the bar there are depths of 3.7 to

4.3m. New River Harbor can only be used by small vessels

with extensive local knowledge as there are rapid tidal currents

and a shifting bar and channel. The town of Invercargill lies on

the E shore of New River Harbor, about 7 miles above the entrance.

Bluff Harbor (46°36'S., 168°21'E.)

World Port Index No. 55400

12.39 Bluff Harbor lies on the NE side of Bluff Hill in

Foveaux Strait; Bluff is the only deep-water port S of Port

Chalmers. The harbor is sheltered from prevailing W winds.

Bluff is the harbor for the town of Invercargill.

12.39 The safest time to enter the harbor is at high water. Strict attention should be paid to information from the signal station on

Stirling Point. No vessel should attempt to enter without a pilot

unless in possession of local knowledge.

12.39 The available space for anchorage is narrow and confined;

for vessels of moderate size, it does not extend much above 1

mile NW of the entrance.

12.39 Winds—Weather.—Fogs are not frequent but may be expected during spring and autumn.

12.39 Tides—Currents.—The port of Bluff is a tidal port; major

shipping movements occur only at slack water. Off Stirling

Point, in South Channel, the ebb current attains a rate of 5 to 6

knots; the flood current attains a rate of 3 to 4 knots. Between

Tiwail Point and Burial Point, both the ebb and flood currents

attain a rate from 5 to 7 knots. Both currents are weak off Main

Wharf, but the ebb attains a rate of 1 knot. In deep waters NE

of Middle Bank, the flood attains a rate of 5 to 6 knots, the ebb

4 to 5 knots. The currents run evenly in the direction of the

channel, with heavy tide rips off Stirling Point and Channel

Rocks.

12.39 Depths—Limitations.—Two channels are used for approaching Bluff Harbor. The S channel has a minimum depths

of 12.5m. The N channel has a minimum depth of 7.2m. The

maximum dimensions for vessels entering the port are a length

of 198m and an overall beam of 29m. 

12.39 The maximum permissible draft in the entrance channel is

9.7m at HW and 7.0m at LW; the HW draft may be increased

to 10m, depending on the height of tide. Vessels drawing 9.7m

 South Port NZ 

http://www.southport.co.nz
Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 299

Pub. 127

can be accommodated at the E end of the Town Wharf and Island Harbor; vessels of maximum channel draft can berth at

Smelter Wharf. Vessels may enter, berth, unberth, or depart

during hours of darkness in good weather only.

12.39 The Main Wharf, sometimes called Town Wharf, is 552m

long. Berths are numbered 11, 12, and 14 from the E. Oil tankers berth at No. 11; bitumen tankers berth at No. 12. Bulk fertilizer is also discharged at the Main Wharf. On the S side of

the wharf, the W part is used for berthing by the fishing fleet.

12.39 At Island Harbor there are nine berths, numbered as shown

on the chart, except for No. 7 and No. 8, which are situated on

the NE side of reclaimed land N of No. 5. The maximum size

of vessel that can be accommodated and normal use of each

berth is given in the accompanying table.

12.39 The height of all the berths is 4.4m above MLWS, except

No. 8 Berth, which has a height of 3.8m.

12.39 Tiawa Wharf lies cross channel from Main Wharf and Island

Harbor. Vessels up to 11m draft and lengths to 225m may enter

to berth, depending on tide. An aluminum smelter is situated at

the berth. The road access to the wharf is 1200m from the

shoreline.

12.39 Dog Island, which lies in the SE approach to Bluff Harbor, is

fringed by a reef of rocks outside which are thick beds of kelp.

The sea breaks heavily on its N and E sides. When passing to

the E of Dog Island it should be given a berth of 3.5 miles;

when passing to the S and W a berth of more than 1 mile.

12.39 A depth of 14.6m lies about 1.5 miles W of Dog Island.

12.39 Old Man Rock, over which the sea breaks, lies on the edge of

kelp extending N of Dog Island. The Dogs Tongue is a rocky

ridge that extends ENE from Dogs Island. A spit, with depths

of 6.1m near the outer end, extends about 3.2 miles E from the

E end of Dog Island.

12.39 Dog Island, which lies in the SE approach to Bluff Harbor, is

fringed by a reef of rocks outside which are thick beds of kelp.

The sea breaks heavily on its N and E sides. When passing to

the E of Dog Island, it should be given a berth of 3.5 miles;

when passing to the S and W of Dog Island, a berth of more

than 1 mile should be given.

12.39 A depth of 14.6m lies about 1.5 miles W of Dog Island.

12.39 Old Man Rock, over which the sea breaks, lies on the edge of

kelp extending N of Dog Island. The Dogs Tongue is a rocky

ridge that extends ENE from Dogs Island. A spit, with depths

of 6.1m near the outer end, extends about 3.2 miles E from the

E end of Dog Island.

12.39 Aspect.—There are two ways to enter Bluff Harbor, via

South Channel or North Channel. South Channel is preferred,

as North Channel is not buoyed and depths within it are less.

12.39 The Bluff, a headland, with a height of 261m at Bluff Hill,

about 3 miles SE of Shag Rock, forms a prominent feature in

contrast to the level land in its vicinity, and, for vessels making

Foveaux Strait from E. The headland is covered with scattered

scrub and rocky outcrops on its W side and is bush-covered on

its E side; it is connected to the mainland at its NW end by a

low, narrow isthmus.

12.39 From Stirling Point (46°37'S., 168°22'E.), the shore surrounding The Bluff projects about 0.6 mile NNW to Burial

Point, where the War Memorial lies. The wharfs front the town

of Bluff; the Island Harbor wharves lie close NW.

12.39 A bank, with a least charted depth of 12.2m, lies about 0.5

mile off the entrance to South Channel in the white sector of

the Entrance Light, between the bearings of 342° and 077.5°.

12.39 Entrance Shoal lies about 0.5 mile ESE of Stirling Point; it

forms the E side of South Channel. With a heavy sea running,

the shoals in the vicinity of Stirling Point form a mass of broken water with heavy breakers. Therefore, vessels should keep

outside of the 10m curve.

12.39 Davey Shoal, with a least depth of 4.6m, lies on the E side of

South Channel, about 0.4 mile S of Tiwai Point.

12.39 Channel Rocks, with a least depth of 3.7m, lie on the S side

of the fairway, about 0.2 mile SW of Tiwai Point. Tiwai Point

and its vicinity are fringed by foul ground, as best seen on the

chart.

12.39 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over

100grt. Pilots board vessels from a launch equipped with VHF,

1.5 miles SSW of the Entrance Light and within its white sector. Vessels, other than those exempt from pilotage, must not

proceed beyond the Entrance Light without a pilot. Vessels

should send their ETA 24 hours prior to arrival, confirming 4

hours in advance.

12.39 Pilots usually board vessels, except in bad weather, between

30 minutes and 1 hour before slack water, day or night. Tankers

are generally berthed during daylight hours only. Arrangements regarding boarding will be made via radio or visual signal from the signal station or pilot launch.

12.39 In heavy W weather, a safe boarding area for the pilot, lying

nearly 5.5 miles ENE of Dog Island Light, is sometimes used.

Arrangements for the use of this anchorage will be made by radiotelephone or blinker light.

12.39 Coastal pilots, licensed to pilot vessels between the entrance

to Otago Harbor and Milford Sound, including the sounds and

coasts and harbors of Stewart Island, can be obtained with 24

hours notice.

12.39 Vessels stopping to pick up a pilot are warned not to approach the 10m curve too closely nor enter the red sector of the

Entrance Light when within 1 mile of the light, especially durBluff Harbor—Berth Information

Berth Length Draft Use

1 160m 8.0m Fishing industry

2 190m 8.0m Bulk grain

2X 70m 6.0m

3 213m 10.2m Ro-ro and break bulk

3A 153m 9.2m Sulfuric acid

4 213m 10.2m Timber

5 213m 10.2m General cargo

6 135m 7.7m Supply and fishing

7 100m 9.2m

8 230m 10.2m Wood chips, coal, and 

grain

11 210m 9.7m Petroleum products

12 183m 8.0m Bitumen

14 183m 8.0m
300 Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 

Pub. 127

ing the flood as the current sets strongly onto Entrance Shoal.

12.39 Signals.—The signal station at Stirling Point is no longer

manned; vessels about to enter the harbor should ascertain

whether an outbound vessel is in the entrance channel by contacting Bluff Harbor Radio. A continuous listening watch on

VHF channel 16 is maintained by Bluff Harbor Radio.

12.39 Anchorage.—In good weather, vessels waiting for the tide

to enter Bluff Harbor may obtain anchorage, in a depth of

about 21.9m, about 2 miles WNW of Dog Island. A good anchorage for vessels delayed longer than 6 hours awaiting to enter Bluff Harbor lies about 5 miles E of Dog Island, in depths

of 14.6 to 18.5m.

12.39 Shelter from severe weather may be obtained off Otaku Point

under the lee of Stewart Island, less than 20 miles from the

Bluff in 26m, with Saddle Point beacon bearing 324° or off

Half Moon Bay in 12.8 to 16.5m. Anchorage can be found anywhere offshore between these points, with the quietest anchorage being found off the long beach adjacent to the Murray

River.

12.39 The quarantine anchorage is an area enclosed by an arc of a

circle, radius 3 miles, centered on Stirling Point, or other such

area as indicated by the harbor authorities.

12.39 The explosives anchorage, as charted, for vessels carrying

more than 5 tons of explosives, lies about 1 mile NNE of Dog

Island. The recommended approach route is NW of the island.

Reports have it that the harbormaster may designate explosives

anchorages other than those charted and should be consulted

on the matter.

12.39 An abandoned submarine telegraph cable lies between Dog

island and the shore N.

12.39 Directions.—South Channel has a least depth of 8.8m on the

leading line, but depths of 5.5m or less lie close NE of the line

between Lighted Beacon No. 2 and Lighted Beacon No. 3; in

addition, a vessel’s draft is restricted owing to the strong tidal

current off Channel Rocks. North Channel has a least depth of

6.1m in the fairway. 

12.39 Vessels normally enter the channels so as to berth at SW,

bows W. Vessels drawing 6.7m or more should enter South

Channel at HW. If entering with a strong flood tidal current,

great care must be exercised, especially when rounding the

lighted beacon 0.2 mile N of Burial Point, as, if the bow gets

into SW with the stern in the full strength of the tide, a vessel

may be turned right around.

12.39 Caution.—Vessels should make due allowance for the

strong currents present in the approach channels to the harbor.

12.39 An abnormal magnetic variation exists in the area between

Island Harbor and Smelter Wharf.

12.39 Toetoes Bay (46°38'S., 168°41'E.) lies between Bushy Point

and Waipapa Point, 14 miles ESE. Bushy Point, from which a

light is shown, is low and has a conspicuous patch of scrub upon it.

12.40 East and south shores of Ruapuke Island.—Ruapuke Island (46°46'S., 168°31'E.) lies almost in the center of

the E entrance to Foveaux Strait and, except for its NW side,

dangers almost surround it. The center of the island is flat with

a height of 41m, and there are hummocks on its N, S, and W

ends. Also, the island is covered with stunted trees.

12.40 North Head (46°44'S., 168°32'E.), the N end of Ruapuke Island, is a cliffy promontory rising to a hummock, 62m high.

There is a heavy tide race around North Head. Seal Rocks, the

highest being 7.3m, with submerged rocks N and S of them, lie

near the outer end of a sandy ridge, with depths less than 9.1m,

which extends about 3 miles E from North Head. In heavy

weather the sea sometimes breaks over the E part of the sandy

ridge.

12.40 Foul ground extends up to 0.7 mile offshore between North

Head and Observation Bluff, the E extremity of Ruapuke Island. Green Island, with a flat top, lies near the outer edge of a

spit which extends about 1.7 miles E from Observation Bluff,

Two islets lie between Green Island and the Bluff. A submerged rock lies about 0.7 mile NNW of Green Island. There

is a depth of 2.7m between the above islets and Green Island.

12.40 Toby Rock, below-water, lies about 4 miles E of North Head;

it is the most dangerous rock in this vicinity, due to it not being

marked by kelp as are many of the other dangers. Fairchild

Rock, with a depth of 4.6m, lies about 5.5 miles E of North

Head, and a 4.9m patch lies about 1 mile ENE of it. These dangers, off the E shore of Ruapuke Island, should be approached

with great caution.

12.40 The Breaksea Isles, comprised of two islets, are located over

1 mile SW of Green Island; they lie upon a reef surrounded by

rocks.

12.40 The South Islets lie on a reef that projects about 0.5 mile S

from South Point, the S end of Ruapuke Island. Depths of less

than 9.1m project about 1 mile SSE of the end of the spit.

Rocks project about 0.5 mile W from the W side of South

Point. Kelly Rock, with a depth of 11m, lies about 1.7 miles

SSW of South Point.

12.40 Henrietta Bay indents the SW shore of Ruapuke Island; foul

ground projects 0.4 mile from its head.

12.40 The Hazelburgh Group lies on the S side of a bank with

depth less than 11m. A 10.7m patch lies 0.7 mile S of the W

end of the group.

12.40 Half Passage Rock, 16.2m high, with two drying rocks SE,

lies about 1.2 miles W of the W end of the Hazelburgh Group.

Two submerged rocks lie between the Group and Half Passage

Rock.

12.40 Fife Rock lies about 1.7 miles NNW of Half Passage Rock.

Lachlan Shoals, two separate groups, lie at the W limits of the

shoals lying off the W side of Ruapuke Island. A 14.6m patch

lies about 2.7 miles SW of Half Passage Rock. Several rocks,

best seen on the chart, lie in the N approaches to Henrietta Bay. 

12.40 Caution.—Vessels navigating in the vicinity of Ruapuke Island should maintain a good lookout. Unless a vessel is intending to anchor, Rupapuke Island should be given a wide berth.

The passages between the many small islets and rocks should

be left to small vessels with extensive local knowledge.

12.41 Northwest shore of Ruapuke Island.—Caroline Bay

lies in the S part of the bight formed by North Head and a point

about 2.2 miles SW. White Islet lies on a spit, with depths less

than 11m, off the S entrance point of the bight. A 9.4m patch

lies about 0.5 mile NW of White Islet. A bank, with a depth of

12.5m near its S end, lies about 1 mile W of White Islet. 

12.41 Lagoon Bay is entered between White Island and the W

point of Ruapuke Island. Tupis Island, 18.3m high, lies close

off the S entrance point of the bay. Shoal water extends 0.3

mile NW from the islet.

12.41 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge, approaching
Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 301

Pub. 127

from the E and intending to anchor off Ruapuke Island, should

pass from 5 to 6 miles S of Waipapa Point and when S of it the

island will be generally seen. Green Island and Seal Rocks become visible from 6 or 7 miles. When about 0.5 mile from

Green Island, vessels should pass around its N end, passing

midway between it and the submerged rock about 0.5 mile

NW, anchoring, in a depth of about 11m, sand, 0.4 mile W of

the N end of Green Island. Vessels should not proceed closer

inshore, due to the foul ground that projects off the E shore of

Ruapuke Island. Additionally, vessels should not attempt to

reach the anchorage via S and W of Green Island, as depths are

shoal SW of the island. With W or SW winds this anchorage is

relatively secure, but with S winds a swell rolls in which may

break over the islets that shelter it from that direction. Vessels

should not lie here in E winds.

12.42 South side of Foveaux Strait.—The S side of

Foveaux Strait is formed, from the W to E, by the Solander Islands, Stewart Island, and Ruapuke Island.

12.42 The Solander Islands (46°34'S., 166°53'E.) lie upon a bank

with depths less than 100m. The E and larger of the islands rises almost sheer from the sea and has a notable peaked summit,

335m high. In clear weather this peak can be seen about 40

miles. It is wooded with the exception of its NE end which is a

bare, white rocky face. There is a deep cave on the E side of the

island and a large arch on its S end. Three rocks lie close off

the N side of the E island, the easternmost being 7.6m high.

Several large rocks lie off the S side. It was reported that there

were signs of submerged rocks lying farther S.

12.42 The W Solander Island, lying about 1.2 miles W of the E island, has a barren appearance, attaining a height of about

152m. This island is guanocovered.

12.42 Stewart Island (47°00'S., 168°00'E.), whose NE shore

forms a major part of the S side of Foveaux Strait, is partly

mountainous and thickly wooded. The shores of this island are

fringed with many islets and rocks over which seas break.

12.42 An irregular mountain ridge, of which Mount Anglem is the

highest peak, extends along Stewart Island’s NE shore. The S

end of Stewart Island is very mountainous though it doesn’t attain the heights in the N part. Frazer Peaks, 427m high, and

Smiths Lookout, 536m high, are prominent, bare granite peaks,

lying 7.5 and 3 miles NE, respectively, of Southwest Cape.

12.43 West side of Stewart Island.—Rugged Point

(46°43'S., 167°44'E.) is the NW end of Stewart Island. The

Rugged Islets, a group of high, black, craggy rocks, worn by

the sea, extend 1.5 miles NW from the point. Heavy tide rips

extend from a distance seaward of the islets and depths of 44 to

55m have been found rounding them at a distance of 0.5 to 1

mile.

12.43 North Red Head is located 2 miles SSW of Putatara Point.

About midway between the headland and a point 2.5 miles S, a

reef, with rocks above and below water, extends about 0.8 mile

from the coast.

12.43 Red Head Peak, a conspicuous bold and rocky peak, rises

close behind the coast about 3 miles S of Rugged Point.

12.43 Codfish Island lies with its NW end about 4 miles W of Red

Head and it is moderately high and flat-topped. High Rock,

with submerged rocks close N and S of it, lies midway between

Codfish Island and the shore E.

12.43 Sealers Bay, lying in the NE part of Codfish Island, affords

confined anchorage, sheltered from W winds, in depths of 11

to 14.6m. The entrance points to this bay are rock-fringed.

12.43 Mason Bay is entered about 8.5 miles SE of Codfish Island

between Mason Head and the Ernest Islands, about 5 miles

SW. The NE end was reported to dry 1 mile. Look-Out-ForReef, nearly awash, lies about 3.5 miles WSW of Mason Head.

A dangerous rock, over which the sea seldom breaks, lies about

3 miles W of Richards Point. Shoaling was reported between

the point and the rock.

12.43 The Ernest Islands are two red cliffy islands that lie close together and are almost joined to the mainland by a sandy neck.

12.43 Mason Bay affords anchorage, in depths of 5.5 to 7.3m, in its

S part, sheltered from W and NW winds. A heavy sea rolls into

this bay from the N.

12.43 The Mutton Bird Islands front the SW part of Stewart Island.

There are clear passages among the Mutton Bird Islands, but

the tidal currents run at a great speed making these unsurveyed

passages hazardous. There are heavy tide rips at the N end. The

Boat Group is the northeasternmost of these islands and is

made up of three islets. The Brothers, two islets with a submerged rock about 0.5 mile N of them, lie about 1.7 miles S of

the S islet of the Boat Group.

12.43 Mokinui Island (Moggy Island), the westernmost of the Mutton Bird Islands, is rock-fringed. A submerged rock, whose position is approximate, was reported to lie about 1 mile SW of

the S end of the island. Wedge Island is the SW of the Mutton

Bird Island, lying about 7 miles WNW of Southwest Cape,

with Hidden Island, Long Island, and Evening Island between.

A reef, on which there are above-water rocks, projects about

1.5 miles SW from the S end of Hidden Island. A patch of foul

ground was reported to lie about 1 mile WNW and a 14.6m

patch, the position of which is approximate, lies about 1 mile

NNE of the N end of Hidden Island. Foul ground projects SW,

about 1.5 miles, from the S end of Hidden Island.

12.43 Long Island, the largest island off this section of shore, is

rock-fringed. An islet lies close off its N end. Evening Island

lies close S of Long Island. A submerged rock lies about 0.5

mile SE of Evening Rock. There are strong tide rips in this vicinity.

12.44 South coast of Stewart Island.—Southwest Cape

(47°17'S., 167°29'E.) is the promontory that forms the SW end

of Stewart Island and the land in close proximity is high and

bold, with a steep, rugged shore. There are strong tide rips

close E of the cape.

12.44 Wilson Bay is entered about 5.5 miles E of Southwest Cape

and it is exposed with tide rips in its entrance. Small vessels

with local knowledge can obtain shelter in Burial Cove on the

W side of the bay, about 1.5 miles NNE of its W entrance

point.

12.44 Port Pegasus (47°12'S., 167°42'E.), which presents a broken

appearance from sea, is fronted by three islands, Noble Island,

Anchorage Island, and Pearl Island. Port Pegasus has several

entrances requiring local knowledge for use. Acheron Passage,

off the NW shores of Noble Island and Anchorage Island, joins

the North Arm to the South Arm.

12.44 The main entrance channel, known as Broad Passage, lies

between Anchorage Island and Pearl Island, and leads into

North Arm. It has a least width of about 0.4 mile, with depths
302 Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 

Pub. 127

ranging from 32 to 47m in the fairway, and is free from dangers. Several rocks lie off the NE end of Anchorage Island.

12.44 Narrow Passage lies between the SW side of Noble Island

and the mainland W. Pigeon House Hill, on the SW side of the

passage, is notable. Rocks fringe the S side of Noble Island.

Narrow Passage has depths ranging from 22 to 31m in the fairway.

12.44 Whale Passage is the NE passage leading between the NE

shore of Pearl Island and the mainland. It has a least depth of

9.1m in the fairway and a least width of 135m. Orphans Rock

lies 0.2 mile E of the entrance, with a submerged rock about

0.1 mile further S.

12.44 The NW shore of South Arm is indented by Sylvan Cove,

Shipbuilders Cove, and Islet Cove. The SE side of South Arm

is indented by Fright Cove. An islet, 15m high, lies in the entrance to South Arm. Micrometer Rock, above-water and surrounded by kelp, lies about 0.1 mile W of the islet. A shoal,

with a depth of 3.7m, lies about 0.2 mile NW, and a submerged

rock, marked by kelp, lies about 0.3 mile SW, respectively, of

Micrometer Rock. 

12.44 Anchorage may be found, in depths of 21.9 to 25.6m, midway between Micrometer Rock and Noble Island. The entrance

to Shipbuilders Cove is encumbered with foul ground and

rocks. A submerged rock, marked by kelp, lies about 0.3 mile E

of the S entrance point of Shipbuilders Cove.

12.44 Acheron Anchorage (47°11'S., 167°41'E.), lying between

the NW shores of Anchorage Island and Noble Island, and the

mainland, is about 0.2 mile wide. The NE end of this anchorage is partially blocked by Tremulous Island and several islets

and dangers NE to the mainland. Steamer Pass leads S of

Tremulous Island; it is about 100m wide, with a depth of

12.8m in the fairway. Vessels with local knowledge can obtain

sheltered anchorage, the best in Port Pegasus, in Acheron Anchorage, in depths of 16.5 to 20.1m, mud.

12.44 North Arm is fronted by Pearl Island; it has depths 21.9 to

47m. An islet, surrounded by kelp, lies near the head of this

arm. Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, in a

depth of 21.9m, close W of the above islet.

12.45 The Lords River (47°07'S., 168°08'E.) is entered between Surf Head and John Point, about 0.4 mile E. It is navigable by vessels with local knowledge for about 1 mile within its

entrance, in depths 7.3 to 37m.

12.45 Owen Island is the largest of a group of rocky islands extending SE from John Point that aid in identifying the entrance

of the Lords River. A 5.5 patch and a 0.9m patch, both marked

by kelp, lie in the middle of the fairway about 0.4 mile and 0.5

mile NW of the NE end of Surf Head. Small vessels with local

knowledge can obtain anchorage about 0.4 mile within the entrance, in a depth of 11m. The Lords River has not been extensively surveyed.

12.45 North Trap (47°22'S., 167°55'E.) fronts the S shore of

Stewart Island, lying about 17.5 miles SW by S of the entrance

to the Lords River, and is comprised of a reef of above and below-water rocks. A rock, 1.5m high, stands near the W end of

the reef, and a rock, 0.9m high, near its E end, give North Trap

the look of an overturned boat. Boomerang Breaker was reported to lie about 7 miles SSW of North Trap.

12.45 South Trap, a reef of above-water rocks, 1.2 to 1.8m high,

and below-water rocks, lies about 10.5 miles S by W of North

Trap. There are heavy breakers over this reef. Breakers have

been reported E of North Trap and South Trap in bad weather.

Due to the unsurveyed nature of the area in the vicinity of these

reefs and of strong tidal currents, they should be given a wide

berth.

12.45 The Snares Islands (48°00'S., 166°34'E.) are a bold group

of bird-covered islands lying about 57 miles SW of Southwest

Cape. The Snares Islands are an excellent landmark when approaching from the W. Also, these islands should be made the

point of departure when passing S of Stewart Island. The

Snares were reported to lie 1.7 miles ESE of their charted position.

12.45 Northeast Island, 189m high on its S side, is covered with

scrub and is mostly steep, except on its NE side. The island is

made up of rough, coarse granite showing, in places, a pink or

red tint covered with dark peat. Broughton Island lies close S

of Northeast Island. A group of rocks lies midway between

Broughton Island and Alert Stack.

12.45 The Snares are surrounded by deep water and there is no anchorage, except for vessels with local knowledge, close under

and E of Northeast Island.

12.45 The Snares have been designated as a nature reserve. Landing is by permit only.

12.45 Vancouver Rock, over which the sea breaks, lies nearly 2

miles SW of Northeast Island. Four islets, forming a rugged

ridge of barren rocks, extend up to 1 mile SW of Vancouver

Rock.

12.46 Northeast coast of Stewart Island.—Black Rock

Point (46°41'S., 167°52'E.) is the N end of Stewart Island, and

close W of it is a remarkable white sandy patch. Foul ground

extends NW from the point. The Bishop and Clerk Islets lie

nearly 3 miles WNW of Black Rock Point, with a shoal area

lying between them. Strong tide rips exist over the E side of

Bishop and Clerk Islets as well as over the shoal. An abovewater rock lies between the shoal area and Black Rock Point.

12.46 Between Saddle Point (46°43'S., 167°59'E.) and Gull Rock,

a white rock, 4.6m high, lying close offshore about 5.2 miles

SE, sheltered anchorage may be found. A 14.6m patch lies 0.7

mile NNE of Gull Rock. A notable sandy patch lies about 0.8

mile S of Gull Rock. Newton Rock, with a depth of 1.8m, lies

about 1.2 miles E of Gull Rock and it is steep-to, and seldom

breaks. Banks extend NW and SE from Newton Rock.

12.46 Local magnetic anomaly.—Off Saddle Point, the normal

magnetic variation is decreased by 4°.

12.46 In moderate weather, vessels can obtain anchorage between

Gull Rock and Port William, about 1 mile offshore, taking care

to avoid the charted dangers.

12.46 West Head is the N entrance point of Port William. A rocky

shoal, with a depth of 7.3m, lies about 1.2 miles N and a 16.5m

patch lies about 0.6 mile NE, respectively, of West Head.

12.46 Port William (46°51'S., 168°05'E.) is entered between the S

end of West Head and Cultivation Head, about 0.7 mile S.

Wooding Bay, in the S part of Port William, lies between Cultivation Head and Dark Head, about 0.5 mile WNW. Port William is a well-sheltered harbor.

12.46 The entrance to Port William is narrowed by foul ground

projecting from each entrance point. Pender Rock, submerged

and marked by kelp, lies on the outer end of a spit of foul

ground that extends about 0.3 mile SE from West Head. Depths
Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 303

Pub. 127

less than 5.5m project about 0.3 mile N from Cultivation Point.

12.46 Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage in

the N part of Port William, while larger vessels can lie about

0.2 mile S of West Head, in depths of 9.1 to 11m.

12.46 East Head (46°51'S., 168°08'E.) lies about 1.2 miles E of

Cultivation Head and the shore between is indented by Lee

Bay. Garden Mound, 179m high, stands about 0.7 mile SSW of

East Head. A bank, with depths less than 5.2m, lies in the center of Lee Bay. A rock, with a depth of 4.6m, and marked by

kelp, lies about 0.2 mile WNW, and a bank, with depths from 8

to 10.7m, lies over 0.5 mile NNW, respectively, of East Head.

12.47 Off-lying islands and dangers.—There are three

groups of islands that lie within 6.5 miles of Port William, the

North Isles, the Mutton Bird Islands, and the Fancy Group.

These groups form a chain of barren islands and craggy rocks,

with strong tidal currents and rips among them. Therefore, this

chain should not be approached closely.

12.47 The North Isles, the northernmost group, lie about 5 miles

ENE of East Head. North Islet, 43m high, and Pikomamaku Islet, 36m high, 0.3 mile SSE, are connected by a reef of above

and below-water rocks. Zero Rock, above-water, lies 0.1 mile

ENE of the N end of North Islet. Rocks, with depths of 8.8m

and 5.2m, lie about 1 mile ESE and 0.7 mile NE, respectively,

of Pikomamaku Islet. Wairau Shoal, with a depth of 9.1m, lies

about 1.7 miles E by S of North Islet.

12.47 The Mutton Bird Islands are made up of three islands and

some islets and rocks lying SW of the North Isles. Motunui Islet, the N islet of the group, is 55m high. Pukeokaoka Island,

57m high, lies 0.3 mile S of Motunui Island and Herekopare Island, 54.2m high, lies 1 mile SSE of Pukeokaoka Island. A reef

connects the islands. Mary Higgins Rock, 1.8m high, lies nearly 1 mile NNE of Herekopare Island. Polybank Shoal, with a

depth of 6.1m, lies 1.2 miles W and Fish Rock lies nearly 1.7

miles WSW, respectively, of Pukeokaoka Island. A shoal, with

a depth of 12.8m, lies 0.2 mile SW of Fish Rock. Fast Rock lies

1.2 miles SSW of Herekopare Island. Several rocky patches lie

about 1.5 miles ENE of Fast Rock.

12.47 The Fancy Group, the southernmost of the islands lying off

Port William, is made up of two separate groups with a narrow

channel between. The N group is made up of Bunker Islet and

three islets NW of it; the S group contains Kanetoi Islet, 14

high. A 17.7m patch lies about 1 mile NNE of Kanetoi Island.

12.47 Abbot Passage separatesthe Fancy Group from Bench Island,

96m high, about 2.5 miles SW. Flat Rock, 24m high, lies about

0.3 mile ENE of the NE end of Bench Island. The Twins are

two notable rocks, 34m high, that lie 0.2 mile E of the SE end

of Bench Island, with rocks between. Passage Islet, 20m high,

lies about 1 mile W of the SW end of Bench Island in Carter

Passage, upon a bank with depths less than 11m. An 18.3m

patch lies about 1 mile SSE of Passage Islet.

12.48 Horseshoe Bay (46°52'S., 168°09'E.) is entered about

1.5 miles NNW of Ackers Point, with a sandy beach at its

head. Rocks fringe the shore on either side, with submerged

rocks off the N side of the head of this bay, where there is a jetty. A bank, with a depth of about 7.6m, lies close outside the

entrance of the bay. Vessels with local knowledge can obtain

anchorage, in depths of 9.1 to 11m, during offshore winds.

12.48 Half Moon Bay (46°53'S., 168°09'E.) is the next indentation

S from Horseshoe Bay and is separated from it by a peninsula,

102m high. This bay is encumbered with several rocks; foul

ground projects up to 0.2 mile from its head. The town of Oban

stands at the head of the bay.

12.48 A submerged rock lies about 0.1 mile SSW of the N entrance

point of the bay, and a rock, 3m high, from which foul ground

projects about 0.1 mile WNW, lies about 0.3 mile further SSW.

Submerged rocks lie up to 0.4 mile SW of the 3m high rock.

12.48 Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage in Half

Moon Bay during offshore winds, in depths of 12.8 to 16.5m.

12.48 Oban (46°53'S., 168°08'E.), the only port and principal town

of Stewart Island, is situated at the head of Half Moon Bay.

12.48 Depths—Limitations.—At the N end of Oban there is a ferry wharf, with a depth of about 5m alongside the S face. Vessels can berth on this face, at the outer end, but are required to

move for ferries. A scend may be experienced at the wharf,

which is untenable in heavy E weather.

12.48 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots may be obtained

from Bluff Harbor.

12.48 The signal station maintains listening watch at 0900, 1200,

and 1500. The call sign is Half Moon Bay (ZLRZ), 2045 kHz.

12.48 Directions.—A vessel bound for Oban should keep about

0.1 mile off the S shore of Half Moon Bay, until 0.7 mile within the entrance; then it should pass about 50m S of the 3m high

rock, not less than 40m N of the lighted beacon, and N of the

beacon; then to the wharf.

12.49 Paterson Inlet is entered between Ackers Point

(46°55'S., 168°12'E.) and Anglem Point, nearly 2 miles SE.

The N and S shores of the inlet are formed by high irregular

land.

12.49 Rakeahua (46°57'S., 167°53'E.) is a conspicuous domeshaped mountain, 676m high, whose summit may be seen from

just about all directions in clear weather.

12.49 There is a least depth of 12.2m in the fairway on the range

line E of Native Island, which lies about 1.2 miles SSW of

Ackers Point. Further within the entrance, there are depths of

12.8 to 23.7m in the channel that leads N of Ulva Island

(46°56'S., 168°08'E.). The channel S of Ulva Island has a least

depth of 14.9m in the fairway.

12.49 Native Island (46°55'S., 168°09'E.), 75m high, lies in the

entrance to Paterson Inlet and it is almost connected to the

shore NW by reefs and foul ground. A 7.6m patch, over which

during E winds the sea occasionally breaks, lies near the limit

of the coastal bank, about 0.5 mile NE of the E end of Native

Island. Ulva Island, rock-fringed, lies about 1.5 miles SW of

Native Island and it is about 88.1m high. 

12.49 An islet, 19m high, lies about 0.5 mile SW of the W end of

Ulva Island and the shore between is encumbered with rocks.

Sydney Cove lies in the center of the N side of Ulva Island and

it is sandy with a rock close off its W entrance point. A bank,

with a least depth of 8.2m, lies between Ulva Island and Native

Island.

12.50 North shore.—Iona Islet (46°54'S., 168°07'E.), 49m

high, lies about 1 mile WNW of Native Island and fronts Golden Bay, where there is a wharf. An islet, 11m high, lies about

1.7 miles W of Iona Islet.

12.50 Kaipipi Bay is entered between Prices Point and the mainland N. The peninsula, of which Prices Point is the E tip, is
304 Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 

Pub. 127

fringed with rock on its N side. Foul ground extends about 0.5

mile from the bays head. West of Kaipipi Bay the inlet narrows

and depths decrease.

12.50 Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage in Sydney Cove, but not during E winds. Anchorage may be found by

vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 20 to 22m, mud and

sand, about 1.2 miles E of Prices Point.

12.51 South shore.—Anglem Point (46°55'S., 168°12'E.),

the SE entrance point of Paterson Inlet and the N end of the

Bradshaw Peninsula, has upon it a prominent clump of trees. A

reef, upon which there is a rock 1.5m high, extends about 0.1

mile N from Anglem Point. Another reef, which dries 1.8m,

lies almost 0.7 mile WSW of Anglem Point. A 3.7m patch lies

about 0.7 mile SW of the drying reef, with another reef close

SW.

12.51 Glory Cove (46°58'S., 168°10'E.), located at the root of the

Bradshaw Peninsula, is entered between Little Glory and Isle

Point, an islet forming the SW entrance point.

12.51 Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage off the

W side of the Bradshaw Peninsula, in depths of 18 to 22m, off

Old Neck. Glory Cove is the best anchorage in Paterson Inlet,

in depths of 7.3 to 11m, stiff mud, good holding ground.

12.51 Southwest Bay, known locally as Glory Harbor, is entered

between the Boat Passage Islets, a group of islets and rocks lying 0.2 mile WNW of Islet Point, and Bravo Islet, 1 mile W.

Bravo Islet is joined to the mainland by a thin strip of land.

Five islets lie on the coastal bank N of Bravo Islet. 

12.51 Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage, in

depths of 23 to 25m, in Southwest Bay, about 1.5 miles from

its head or, in 9.1 to 11m, mud, 0.5 mile from its head. Swinging room is limited in Southwest Bay.

12.51 Abraham Bay is entered about 4 miles SW of Ulva Island. It

has a depth of 7.3m in its entrance gradually shoaling to a

sandy beach at its head. Pryse Peak rises to a height of 350m

along the W side of Abrahams Bay.

12.51 Directions.—Vessels with local knowledge entering Paterson Inlet from N should remain W of the off-lying islands, and

when off Port William head for Ackers Point Light, bearing

174.5°. This course passes about 2.5 miles W of Motunui Island and about 0.5 mile W of Fish Rock. When Herekopare Island is abeam to port, distance 2.7 miles, change course to

132°, heading for the W end of Bench Island. Remain on this

course until the E end of Ulva Island comes into range with the

NW end of Groper Island, bearing 212.2°, when course should

be changed to enter the fairway passing about 4 mile E of Native Island. When a tangent of the N shore of Ulva Island bears

100°, steer for it passing S of the bank S of Native Island, then

steering about WNW remaining in the fairway midway between Ulva Island and Iona Island, passing about 0.5 mile S of

the latter. Then shape course for the anchorages situated about

1.2 miles E or 1 mile SW of Prices Point. Vessels with local

knowledge approaching Paterson Inlet from the S proceed either through Carter Passage or Abbot Passage.

12.51 Local magnetic anomaly.—The normal magnetic variation

is decreased by about 6° in the channel between Anglem Point

and Passage Islet.

12.51 The shore between Anglem Point and East Cape, about 5.5

miles S, is formed by bold headlands fringed by rock affording

no shelter.

12.51 A rock, with less than 1.8m, lies 0.4 mile offshore 3.2 miles

S of Anglem Point.

12.52 Port Adventure (47°04'S., 168°11'E.) indents the SE

shore of Stewart Island and is entered between Stirling Head

and Shelter Point, about 1.7 miles SSE.

12.52 Stirling Head is steep and cliffy rising to a height of 126.8m

about 2.5 miles WNW. A reef extends about 0.5 mile S from

the point.

Weka Islet lies near the center of a reef which projects about

0.6 mile E from Stirling Head. Weka Reef, covered but always

breaks, lies about 1.5 miles E of Stirling Head. Theresa Rock,

submerged, lies about 0.5 mile E of Weka Reef. A 13.7m patch

lies about 0.5 mile WNW of Weka Reef.

12.52 Wreck Reef lies just above water about 2 miles E of Shelter

Point, and the sea usually breaks heavily over it. A shoal, with

a depth of 7.9m, lies almost 1 mile NNE of Wreck Reef.

Entrance Island (Tia Island) (47°05'S., 168°13'E.) lies in

the middle of the entrance to Port Adventure. Its W extremity

is known as Memory Point. Dangerous Rocks lie within 0.2

mile E and SE of the E end of Entrance Island; a reef extends

about 0.4 mile N from Memory Point.

12.52 Passage Rock, surrounded by kelp, lies about 0.4 mile NNE

of East Point, the S entrance point of Port Adventure. A depth

of 9.1m was reported to lie close E by N of Passage Rock.

12.52 The Breaksea Islands are a chain of barren craggy islets and

rocks lying within about 1.5 miles SW of Shelter Point. These

rocks form a barrier to the heavy swell which rolls along the

SE side of Stewart Island.

12.52 The S shore of Port Adventure has several rocks, marked by

kelp, lying off it. A sunken rock, with a depth of 2.7m, lies

nearly 1.2 miles WNW of East Point.

12.52 The NW shore of Port Adventure is indented by Oyster Cove

in the NW part and North Arm in the N part, with Redsand

Cove and White Beach and an unsurveyed cove between. A

rocky islet lies in the entrance to North Arm; the Redsand

Coves entrance is filled with kelp.

12.52 Directions.—Port Adventure should not be entered without

local knowledge. The best passage into Port Adventure lies N

of Entrance Island, between it and Stirling Head. It is barely

800m wide, with depths of 28 to 40m, except for a 6m patch

and reef extending NW from Memory Point. The passage S of

Entrance Island is encumbered by Passage Rock, as well as a

reported depth of 9.1m in the passages center.

Directions for Foveaux Strait

12.53 Vessels entering Foveaux Strait from the W should

make for the Solander Islands (46°34'S., 166°54'E.), the largest of which is an excellent landmark. An approximate but

helpful guide to determining a vessels longitude in the approach is the tongue, with depths less than 183m, projecting S

from the bank about 26.5 miles SW of Cape Providence

(46°01'S., 166°20'E.). By arranging to pass Ruapuke Island by

daylight, vessels may make the passage without difficulty.

12.53 The only port on the N shore of Foveaux Strait suitable for

vessels of large size is Bluff Harbor.

12.53 On the SW side of the strait there are several anchorages and

harbors, which are always accessible and safe, and where vessels can wait for an opportunity to enter Bluff harbor.
Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 305

Pub. 127

12.53 Caution.—Owing to the exceptional pinnacle formation of

underwater features in these waters, it cannot be certain that all

dangers have been discovered. Deep-draft vessels off recommended or recognized routes are advised to keep in greater

depths than 55m. Vessels navigating in unfrequented waters of

less depth should keep a lookout for surface disturbances or

unusual soundings which may indicate potential danger.

12.53 Vessels approaching Foveaux Strait from the E have two viable choices, that is, to pass N or S of Ruapuke Island

(46°46'S., 168°31'E.). The passage N of the island is the recommended route for deep-draft vessels.

12.54 North Passage.—Vessels passing along the S shore

of South Island at a distance of 4 or 5 miles will, in clear

weather when abeam of Slope Point, see The Bluff. The Bluff

is a conspicuous lone hill which looks like a small islet rising

from the W side of the entrance of Bluff Harbor.

12.54 When in a position about 4 miles S of Waipapa Point

(46°40'S., 168°51'E.), vessels should head for Bushy Point

Light, bearing about 298°. Vessels in this vicinity should allow

for the tidal currents that attain 1 knot. When the N end of Ruapuke Island bears about 242°, vessels should bring Waipapa

Light astern bearing about 083°, or steer for Mount Anglem

(46°45'S., 167°55'E.) bearing about 263°, which leads about

2.7 miles S of Dog Island. In this area tidal currents attain rates

from 0.5 to 2.2 knots. When The Bluff is on a NNW bearing,

course should be changed WNW to pass about 4 miles N of

Stewart Island and halfway between Solander Island and the

mainland N.

12.55 South Passage.—Vessels from the E bound to any of

the ports of Stewart Island would probably pass S of Ruapuke

Island, giving it a berth of about 4 miles and passing 2 miles S

of the Hazelburgh Group. The NE side of this S channel is bordered by the Hazelburgh Group, Half Passage Rock, and

Lachlan Shoals; the SW side is formed by the Fancy Group, the

Mutton Bird Islands, and the North Isles. Vessels should steer

through this passage in mid-channel. Then, if proceeding

through Foveaux Strait, head to pass about 4 miles N of Stewart Island and proceed as above under North Passage.

South Island—East Coast

12.56 Cape Campbell to the Kaikoura Peninsula.—From

Cape Campbell, the coast trends in a SSW direction for about

30 miles to the Kaikoura Peninsula. Several rivers flow into the

sea on this coast and there are a few indentations.

12.56 All dangers along the coast appear to be contained within the

37m curve, which lies 1.7 miles off Cape Campbell and up to 3

miles off the coast in other places.

12.56 Caution.—Owing to the pinnacle nature of the underwater

rocks off the coast of New Zealand, it can not be certain that all

dangers have been discovered. Deep-draft vessels, when off

recommended routes, are advised to keep in depths greater

than 55m. Vessels navigating in unfrequented waters of less

depth should keep a lookout for uncharted dangers.

12.56 Shepherdess Reef (41°45'S., 174°18'E.) lies 1.5 miles SE of

Cape Campbell Light on an extensive foul area; the reef dries

in places.

12.56 The Flaxbourne River enters the sea 8 miles S of Cape

Campbell.

12.56 A 5.5m rocky patch lies on the 30m line, about 3 miles NE of

the mouth of the Flaxbourne River.

12.56 Anchorage may be taken, in depths of 14.6 to 18.3m, in

Welds Anchorage, 0.4 mile E of the reef at the entrance to the

Flaxbourne River.

12.56 The coast from the Flaxbourne River to the Clarence River

(42°10'S., 173°55'E.) is formed by sand and shingle beaches,

with rocky points and steep spurs descending from the mountains.

12.56 Mount Tapuaenuka (41°39'S., 173°40'E.) rises to a height

of 2,884m, about 15 miles NW of the mouth of the Clarence

River. The mountain ranges on this coast rise to numerous

sharp and rugged peaks. A break in the mountain range formed

by the Clarence River has the appearance of a harbor when

seen from the offing.

12.56 Waipapa Point (42°12'S., 173°52'E.) lies about 3.7 miles

SSW of the entrance to the Clarence River.

12.57 Point Kean (42°26'S., 173°43'E.), 14.5 miles SSW of

Waipapa Point, is the E extremity of the Kaikoura Peninsula.

The peninsula rises to a height of 106m about 1 mile W of the

point.

12.57 Ingles Bay is formed on the N side of the peninsula. Davidson Rocks, awash at LWS, lie 0.7 mile offshore, a little over 1.5

miles NNW of Point Kean. Nine Pin Rocks and Saint Kilda

Rocks lie 1 mile and 0.6 mile NNW, respectively, of the same

point.

12.57 Anchorage in Ingles Bay may be taken, in 18.3 to 20.1m, 0.7

mile N of the light on Point Kean. This anchorage is about 0.2

mile NE of Saint Kilda Rocks.

12.57 Lynch Reef extends 0.3 mile NE from Point Kean. Fyffe

Cove is formed between this reef and Observation Point 0.7

mile NW.

12.57 The Kaikoura Peninsula (42°25'S., 173°42'E.) is a hummocky tongue of land that is reported to give good radar returns up to 23 miles.

12.57 Caution.—The Kaikoura Peninsula should only be approached during daylight hours in good visibility, unless the

vessel has recent local knowledge.

12.58 The Kaikoura Peninsula to Point Gibson.—The

coast for a distance of 11 miles S of Kaikoura Peninsula forms

a continuous bight, then continues SSW for about 21 miles to

Point Gibson.

12.58 Atia Point (42°26'S., 173°41'E.) is the S extremity of the

Kaikoura Peninsula. South Bay is formed between Atia Point

and Baxter Reef, 0.6 mile WNW. Cone Rock lies 0.3 mile offshore, 0.2 mile SW of Baxter Reef.

12.58 Gooch Bay lies between the SW extremity of Baxter Reef

and Pinnacle Rock, 4.5 miles WSW. Gooch Bay affords achorage, sheltered from all winds except those from the SE to S, in

14.6 to 16.5m, good holding ground, about 1 mile WNW of

Atia Point.

12.58 Haumuri Bluffs (42°34'S., 173°31'E.) lie about 7 miles S of

Pinnacle Rock. The bluffs are 177m high and are bare. Rocks,

3m high, lie 1 mile offshore, close inside the 20m curve, 2 mile

N of Haumuri Bluffs.

12.58 The Conway River flows into the sea about 4 miles S of Hau-
306 Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 

Pub. 127

muri Bluffs through a narrow channel. The land on either side

of the entrance is low and flat.

12.58 From the entrance of the river to the Waiau River, 10.5 miles

SSW, the coast is fronted by cliffs about 30m high. Mount Wilson, 643m high, rises 5 miles SW of the entrance to the Conway River.

12.58 Bushett Shoal, with a least depth of 3.6m, lies 3 miles offshore, 5.5 miles SSE of the Conway River entrance. Bushett

Rocks (42°43'S., 173°30'E.), with a depth of 3.6m, marked by

kelp, lie about 1 mile S of Bushett Shoal. Both dangers are

steep-to and lie close inside the 50m line.

12.58 Between the entrance to the Waiau River and the town of

Gore Bay, 5.5 miles SSW, the coast is steep and bare. Shag

Rock (42°49'S., 173°21'E.), 34m high, is located close to the

shore, 2.2 miles SSW of the Waiau River entrance.

12.58 Point Gibson (42°53'S., 173°19'E.) lies 1.5 miles SSE of

Gore Bay. Port Robinson is situated in the bight on the NW

side of the point.

12.59 Point Gibson to Steep Head.—From Point Gibson,

the coast trends in a SSW direction for 14.5 miles to Motunau

Island. A bight, that is indented about 15 miles, lies between

Motunau Island and the Banks Peninsula, about 37 miles S.

Steep Head is the E extremity of the Banks Peninsula.

12.59 The Hurunui River flows into the sea 2.2 miles SSW of Point

Gibson, and Sail Rock (42°58'S., 173°13'E.) lies close off a

projecting cliffy coast 4 miles SSW of the Hurunui River.

About 8 miles farther SW Motunau Island rises to a height of

34m. A light is situated on a point 1 mile N of Motunau Island.

Montunau Island lies about 0.6 mile S of the entrance to the

Montunau River, and is connected to it by reefs.

12.59 Pegasus Bay is nearly 40 miles wide, N and S; its N shore

from Motunau Island to Double Corner, 12 miles SW, is cliffy,

with a sand and stone beach at LW. Four miles WSW of Motunau Island are two shallow patches extending 1 mile from

shore which should be avoided.

12.59 Caution.—An area in which explosives are dumped is centered 42 miles ESE of Motunau Island.

12.59 From Double Corner, the coast trends in a S direction to

Godley Head (43°35'S., 172°49'E.), about 27 miles distant.

Five rivers run into the sea along this sandy beach.

12.59 The general depths of water across the mouth of Pegasus

Bay is 37m, shoaling gradually to 11 to 13m, about 1 mile

from the beach.

12.59 From Cape Campbell to the Banks Peninsula, a distance of

130 miles, there is no place of shelter, with the exception of

temporary anchorage in good weather. Deep-draft vessels are

recommended not to approach the coast nearer than 3 miles.

12.59 Tides—Currents.—Currents on this part of the coast generally set N, but occasionally after S winds it has been found to

run in the opposite direction. Inshore the flood current sets to

the N and the ebb to the S, both at a rate of 1 knot.

12.59 The Banks Peninsula (43°45'S., 173°00'E.) is formed by a

mass of rugged, and in parts, densely-wooded mountains

which rise to a height of 913m. It is bound by a coast which is

exceedingly broken and indented with numerous bays and

coves. The peninsula has been reported to give good radar returns up to 26 miles.

12.59 Godley Head, in the SW corner of Pegasus Bay, is a perpendicular cliff of dark-red color, and has been reported to give

good radar returns to 19 miles.

Port Lyttelton (43°36'S., 172°43'E.)

World Port Index No. 55320

12.60 Port Lyttelton, the port of Christchurch, is entered between Godley Head and Adderly Head, about 1 mile SE. The

harbor area was formed by the crater of an extinct volcano. The

harbor extends about 8 miles WSW and is the principal import

port for South Island. The port area has more than a half dozen

finger piers, lying in a well protected basin. 

12.60 The port is under the jurisdiction of Lyttelton Harbor Board.

12.60 Tides—Currents.—Mean spring tides rise about 2.7m and

mean neaps ides rise about 2.3m. The tides are irregular, both

at springs and neaps, and are greatly affected by the wind.

12.60 Currents generally attain rates between 0.2 knot and 1 knot

in the approaches, anchorages, and channels of the port. A S

set may be experienced off the entrance moles.

12.60 Depths—Limitations.—Port Lyttelton lies with its outer

harbor about 4 miles within the entrance between Godley Head

and Adderly Head. The approach channel, which is entered

about 1 mile ESE of Goodley Head, is maintained at a dredged

depth of 11.6m; a depth of 10.5m is maintained in the greater

part of the harbor, except in the NW part where there are

depths of less than 9.1m.

12.60 Vessels up to 293m in length, with a beam of 32m and drafts

of 12.2m at HW, may use the port. Facilities for handling bulk

petroleum, grain, dry bulk, containers, cattle, and ro-ro cargo,

as well as breakbulk commodities, are available. A drydock

and slipway are also found in the port. Depths alongside the

piers range from 7.0 to 12.2m.

12.60 Aspect.—The N shore of Port Lyttelton from Godley Head

 Lyttelton Port Company Limited 

http://www.lpc.co.nz

Port Lyttleton—Berth Information

Berth Length Draft Use

1 140m 9.5m General cargo and ro-ro

2E 270m 11.3m General and bulk

2W 169m 10.5m General and bulk

3E 195m 10.0m

3W 223m 10.7m

4E 148m 11.0m Ro-ro

4W 170m 9.2m Ro-ro

7E 187m 9.9m Containers

7W 200m 9.7m Ro-ro

Oil 202m 12.0m LPG

Cattle 60m 7.0m Livestock
Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 307

Pub. 127

to Sticking Point is indented with small bays backed by cliffs

rising to a bare tableland, which rises to Mount Pleasant, 498m

high, 1.2 miles NNW of Sticking Point; there is a flagstaff on

the cliff top about 0.3 mile WNW of the same point.

12.60 On the S side of the harbor are Little Port Cooper, Camp

Bay, and Purau Bay. Mount Evans, 702m high, rises 1.2 miles

S of the head of Camp Bay.

12.60 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 100

nrt and is available 24 hours. Vessels should forward their ETA

and maximum draft 24 hours and 4 hours prior to arrival. Vessels should not enter before receiving instructions from the signal station.

12.60 The pilot boards in position 43°35'00"S, 172°51'12"E. Large

bulk vessels may be boarded by helicopter.

12.60 Vessels awaiting a pilot may anchor 1.5 miles E of Godley

Head, in 16 to 18m.

12.60 Regulations.—The quarantine anchorage is off Camp Bay.

12.60 Signals.—Berthing signals are given by radio or signal light.

No vessel is to enter and take up a berth unless signaled to do

so from the signal station near the head of Gladstone Pier.

12.60 Anchorage.—In good weather, vessels awaiting pratique or

the pilot may anchor, in depths of 15 to 16m, soft mud, about

1.5 miles seaward of Godley Head. Vessels drawing less than

8.5m, and with the harbormaster’s permission, may anchor ,in

depths of 10.6m, soft mud, off Camp Bay, clear of the dredged

channel. Vessels should anchor on the range shown from the

SW corner of the bay, but no further W than a line drawn 345°

from the rear beacon.

12.60 As the holding ground throughout the area is soft mud, local

authorities recommend anchoring with a long scope of cable,

with a second anchor ready.

12.60 Directions.—Herbert Peak (43°41'S., 172°47'E.), the highest peak on the Banks Peninsula, is an excellent mark for vessels approaching from the N.

12.60 A vessel approaching from the S should keep at least 1.5

miles offshore after rounding the peninsula, until Lyttelton becomes visible.

12.60 The approach channels are well-marked by ranges, lights,

and buoys.

12.60 Caution.—Several Submarine Exercise Areas are charted in

the waters of, and off Pegasus Bay; vessels are encouraged to

exercise the appropriate discretion when approaching the area

from seaward.

12.60 A submarine pipeline extends across the channel about 0.5

mile W of the Inner harbor entrance, and is best seen on the appropriate chart.

12.60 Local authorities sometimes recommend dropping an anchor

off the dock and that additional lines be used to control surging

along the dock.

12.60 Christchurch, the capital city of the Canterbury provincial

district, is situated on the plains about 2.5 miles NW of Lyttelton.

12.61 Port Levy (43°37'S., 172°50'E.) lies on the N coast of

the Banks Peninsula, and is entered between Adderly Head and

Baleine Point, about 1 mile E. A reef, with Beacon Rock at its

Port Lyttelton
308 Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 

Pub. 127

outer end, extends about 0.1 mile NE from the E extremity of

Baleine Point. The port recedes about 3.7 miles SSW from its

entrance.

12.61 Pigeon Bay is entered between Pigeon Point (43°37'S.,

172°55'E.), 2.5 miles SE of Beacon Rock, and Wakaoa Point,

0.8 mile E.

12.61 Anchorage may be taken about 1.7 miles within the entrance

of Pigeon Bay, in 9.1m, good holding ground.

12.61 Between Pigeon Bay and Steep Head (43°44'S., 173°08'E.),

11 miles SE, the coast is indented by several small bays and

bights.

12.61 Steep Head is a sheer cliff about 91 to 122m high. Le Bons

Peak, 499m high, rises 2.5 miles W of the light on Steep Head.

The peak is conspicuous from the E.

12.62 The Banks Peninsula to Jacks Point.—Between

East Head (43°46'S., 173°08'E.), 1 mile S of Steep Head, and

Akaroa Head, 11 miles SSW, the coast is rocky and indented

with numerous narrow bays. The cliffs on the projecting points

are 183m high. Pompeys Pillar, a remarkable columnar rock,

lies close to the coast, 6 miles SSW of East Head. Stony Bay

Peak rises to a height of 805m, 6.5 miles SSW of East Head.

12.62 Akaroa (43°48'S., 172°58'E.) (World Port Index No. 55330)

stands on the E side of the harbor, 6 miles within the entrance.

The harbor is entered between Te Ruahine, the W extremity of

Akaroa Head, and Timutimu Head, 1 mile WSW. The Long

Boat, a rock about 1.2m high, lies 0.1 mile SE of Te Ruahine,

and foul ground extends 0.2 mile S of Timutimu Head.

12.62 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor in Akaroa Harbor above

Nine Fathom Point, which lies on the E shore 2.5 miles within

the entrance. Anchorage may be taken, in 7.3m, mud, 0.7 mile

W of the wharf situated S of the town.

12.62 Caution.—During strong SW winds, there is a heavy cross

sea at the entrance to Akaroa Harbor, with violent baffling

squalls caused by the high precipitous nature of the shores.

12.62 Timutimu Head (43°54'S., 172°57'E.) is a perpendicular

cliff of a dark gray color, 159m high. On the W side of

Timutimu Head the cliffs are about 183m high, decreasing to

about 76m, about 5.5 miles W. About 4 miles W of these cliffs,

the rugged and imposing coast line is succeeded by a low cliffy

and shingle shore.

12.62 Ninety-miles Beach begins at the SW extremity of the Banks

Peninsula and trends in a SW direction to Timaru, about 75

miles distant. The first 15 miles is a narrow strip of shingle

beach about 0.5 mile wide. From this point for a distance of

about 55 miles the coast is composed of low cliffs from 6.1 to

12.2m high, fronted by shingle beach.

12.62 Several rivers flow into the sea on this coast, after traversing

the plains from the hills 25 miles inland.

12.62 Tides—Currents.—An onshore current is experienced toward Ninety-miles Beach, between the Banks Peninsula and

Timaru, especially after SE winds.

12.62 Caution.—Canterbury Bight is formed between the Banks

Peninsula and Timaru. This bight has only been partially examined and, within a distance of 3 to 5 miles from the coast, is unsurveyed, except in the approach to Timaru Harbor.

Timaru Harbor (44°23'S., 171°16'E.)

World Port Index No. 55350

12.63 Timaru Harbor, an artificial harbor, is formed by

North Mole Wharf on its W side, with Outer North Mole and

Inner North Mole projecting SE from it, and on the E side by

Eastern Extension Mole, with East Mole extending N from its

root.

12.63 A spur breakwater has been reported to be under construction on the seaward side of the Eastern Extension Mole, extending in a 100° direction for 149m. The new spur breakwater

will be of similar width to the existing Eastern Extension Mole.

12.63 The harbor is under the jurisdiction of Timaru Harbor Board.

The town of Timaru is situated at the head of the harbor.

12.63 Tides—Currents.—The MHW interval at Timaru is 3 hours

37 minutes. Springs rise 2.2m, neaps rise 2m.

12.63 Tidal currents may attain rates up to 1 knot.

12.63 Depths—Limitations.—There is a least depth of 9.9m, hard

sand, in the approach to the dredged channel at the entrance to

the harbor. The dredged channel is maintained at a depth of

9.9m. The swinging basin in the inner harbor, and all wharfs

except North Mole Wharf and the N side of No. 3 Wharf, are

maintained at this depth. The bottom in the dredged channel is

mud and sand; the bottom at the wharves is mud.

12.63 The maximum permissible draft in the entrance channel is 8

to 10m, which may be increased to 10m at the harbormaster’s

discretion. Ships up to 228m in length can be accommodated.

Ships of 8.4m draft are berthed at any state of the tide.

12.63 Six berths are available for the handling of petroleum, container, ro-ro, fish, and bulk solid cargoes. Alongside depths

range from 8.8 to 10.4m.

12.63 Aspect.—A silo, 37m high; a chimney; and a floodlight tower stand about 1 mile SSW of the head of Eastern Extension

Mole.

12.63 The War Memorial Light is shown from a flagstaff about 0.4

PrimePort Timaru

http://www.primeport.co.nz

Timaru Port Facilities 

Berth Depth Max. 

Length

Remarks

No. 1 Ext. 10.6m 200m Bulk liquids and 

logs

No. 1 East 8.6m 100m Fish

No. 1 8.5m 200m Reefer export and 

bulk chemicals

No. 2 North 10.5m 190m Grain

No. 3 South 10.5m 190m Fish

North Mole 11.0m 200m Containers

Fish Wharf 10.0m 90m Fish
Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 309

Pub. 127

mile S of the Signal Station. A tower is situated on the W side

of North Mole Wharf. There is a radar station on a cliff at the

head of the harbor.

12.63 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and should be ordered

through the harbormaster, also stating the vessel’s ETA and

maximum arrival draft, by 1320 on the last working day prior

to arrival, confirming when in radio range of the signal station.

The signal station maintains a radio watch on a fixed schedule.

12.63 The pilot boarding area is 1 mile E of Fairway Beacon. Vessels should remain 2.5 miles to seaward of the Eastern Extension Mole and S of the transit of the leading lights. Pilots

usually disembark from departing vessels when abeam of Eastern Extension Molehead.

12.63 Regulations.—The quarantine anchorage is reported to be

anywhere along a line bearing 265° from Eastern Extension

Molehead, 1.5 to 2.5 miles off the structure. Due to the exposed nature of the anchorage, vessels are usually boarded at

the wharves.

12.63 Vessels may not enter the harbor without the permission of

the signal station.

12.63 Signals.—The signal station is situated at the SW end of No.

1 Wharf in the Harbor Board Building, and communicates by

radiotelephone.

12.63 The signal station monitors 2162 kHz and VHF channel 16,

15 minutes before the hour, every 4 hours commencing at

0345. Communications may be established outside the schedule by prior arrangement.

12.63 A red flag by day or a red light at night indicates the vessels

assigned berth.

12.63 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor, in 12.8m, sand, not less

than 1 mile ESE of the Eastern Extension Mole.

12.63 Directions.—Vessels should approach the harbor on the outer range shown from Benvenue Cliff. When the light structure

at the head of East Mole is in line with the light at the base of

No. 2 Wharf, change course to pass through the middle of the

harbor entrance. Take care to pass S of the alignment of lights

shown from No. 3 Wharf, as it marks the limit of the dredged

channel.

12.63 Caution.—Due to smoke and haze experienced in the harbor, at times the navigational lights may be obscured. Floodlights, which may be seen at a considerable distance, may

make it difficult to distinguish the harbor lights on some bearings. A vessel approaching from the S will find that Eastern

Extension Mole Light is clear of such interference.

12.64 Patiti Point to Cape Wandrow.—Patiti Point

(44°25'S., 171°16'E.), 1.7 miles S of Timaru Harbor, sandy and

10.7m high, can be recognized by the pine trees on it. Reefs of

rock and kelp extend 0.5 mile off Patiti Point and should be

given a wide berth.

Tuhawaiki Point (44°27'S., 171°16'E.), a low cliff 13.4m

high, is located 2 miles S of Patiti Point. Foul ground extends

0.3 mile offshore from the point.

12.64 Between Tuhawaiki Point and the entrance of the Waitaki

River, about 30 miles S, the coast is fronted by a shingle beach,

with several streams intervening. From the Waitaki River, the

coast trends 13 miles SSW to Cape Wanbrow. This coast is low

and cliffy with a shingle beach. A radio mast, 70m high, stands

about 0.5 mile WSW of the entrance to the Waitaki River.

12.64 Mount Studholme, 1,082m high, located 19 miles SW of Tuhawaiki Point, is the highest summit in this area.

12.64 Cape Wanbrow (45°07'S., 170°59'E.), is faced with cliffs

about 31m high and rises to a height of 142m, 0.7 mile NW.

12.64 Between Cape Wanbrow and South Head, its N extremity,

0.6 mile distant, the cliffs are 31 to 73m high.

12.64 Oamaru Harbor (45°07'S., 170°59'E.), on the N side of

Cape Wanbrow, is formed by a breakwater on the E side and a

mole on the N side, and is under the jurisdiction of the Oamaru

Harbor Board.

12.64 Mariners are warned that Oamaru Harbor is closed to shipping and is dangerous to small craft because of extensive shoaling in the entrance.

12.65 Cape Wanbrow to Cornish Head.—From Cape

Wanbrow the coast trends in a SSW direction for 32 miles to

Cornish Head. This coast is indented with several bays, and the

mountain ranges approach the coast in several places.

12.65 From Cape Wanbrow to Kakanui Point (45°09'S.,

170°54'E.), about 5.5 miles S, the coast is formed by a beach

backed by low cliffs. A monument stands on a hill 91m high,

about 4 miles W of Cape Wanbrow.

12.65 Middle Shoal, with a least charted depth of 15.9m, lies 2.5

miles SE of Cape Wanbrow.

12.65 Lookout Bluff (45°16'S., 170°52'E.), 5 miles SSW of Kakanui Point, 111m high, forms the N point of Moeraki Bay;

Moeraki Point, 5 miles S, is the S extremity.

12.65 Kelp Reef, nearly 3 miles long and covered with kelp, extends nearly across the entrance to Moeraki Bay and lies 1.5

miles off the sandy beach. Above and below-water rocks extend about 0.7 miles N of Moeraki Point.

12.65 Moeraki Point (45°21'S., 170°52'E.) is the N extremity of a

peninsula which attains an elevation of 153m. The town of Moeraki is situated on the N side of the peninsula, 1 mile W of the

point.

12.65 Mount Miserable rises to a height of 885m, 11 miles NW of

Moeraki Point.

12.65 Katiki Point (45°24'S., 170°52'E.) is located 2.2 miles S of

Moeraki Point. A bay, foul, lies between Katiki Point and Shag

Point, 5 miles SSW.

Courtesy of PrimePort - Timaru

Timaru Harbor—North Mole
310 Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 

Pub. 127

12.65 Fish Reef, which dries, and is well-marked by kelp at other

times, lies with its N extremity 1.2 miles SE of the light on Katiki Point.

12.65 Danger Reef lies 1.2 miles offshore, about 2 miles S of Shag

Point. The dangerous rock on the S end of the reef is marked

by kelp.

12.65 Between Shag Point (45°28'S., 170°50'E.) and Cornish

Head, 10.5 miles SSW, the coast is generally steep with patches of scrub on the hills within it.

12.65 Cornish Head (45°37'S., 170°42'E.), sheer on its S side, rises to an elevation of 164m; its E fall is tree and scrub-covered.

12.65 Ahuriri Rock lies 0.8 mile from shore, 2 miles NE of Cornish Head; the rock is sometimes marked by kelp.

12.65 Caution.—Vessels should not approach the coast between

Shag Point and Cornish Head within 2.5 miles, as it has not

been fully examined and is considered to be foul.

12.66 Cornish Head to Cape Saunders.—From Cornish

Head, the coast recedes about 1 mile and forms Waikouaiti

Bay. Karitane Point (45°38'S., 170°40'E.), a cliffy peninsula

41m high, about 1.5 miles SSW of Cornish Head, is the S entrance point of the bay. Anchorage may be taken in the bay, in a

depth of 11 to 12.8m, sand.

12.66 Shag Rock, 9.1m high, lies close E of Karitane Point. Shoals,

with depths of 6.4 and 10.7m, and rocks, awash, lie about 0.2

mile NE, 0.4 mile E, and 0.4 mile S, respectively, of Shag

Rock.

12.66 Blueskin Bay lies between Karitane Point and Heyward

Point, about 7 miles S. The shore of the bay from Karitane

Point to Warrington, about 5.5 miles SW, is steep and scrubcovered, rising to Hammond Hill, 435m high, 1.5 miles inland.

A sandy spit extends 1.5 miles S from Warrington; a mud flat is

formed behind the spit. A hill, 184m high, is located 1 mile S

of the sand spit. The coast from the hill to Heyward Point, 3.7

miles ESE is indented by a bay, and the coast is formed by

sandy bays, separated by high rocky points.

12.66 Anderson Rocks, with a depth of 4.5m, lies 0.3 mile E of the

light on Heyward Point.

12.66 Depths—Limitations.—A general description has been given of the coast between the Banks Peninsula and Otago Harbor,

a distance of 150 miles. A reference to the chart will show that

for 120 miles of the distance, or as far as Moeraki Bay, it is free

from danger to within 2 miles of the shore, but that Timaru

Harbor should be approached with caution. The bank of soundings is well-defined, and knowing the latitude, a vessels position on approaching the land may be determined with tolerable

accuracy. North of Moeraki Bay, from 91 to 110m, sand, will

be found at a distance of 30 miles from the coast, and about

55m at half that distance, decreasing gradually to 18.3m which

is found at 3 miles from the shore, where the bottom is chiefly

gravel and stones.

12.66 Between Lookout Bluff and Otago Harbor, the only dangers

are Kelp Reef, which lies across the entrance of Moeraki Bay,

Fish and Danger Reefs, and Ahuriri Rock; all these, excepting

Ahuriri Rock, are either visible or their positions marked by

kelp, and do not lie more than 2 miles from the coast.

12.66 South of Moeraki Bay, the deep water approaches nearer to

the coast; at the distance of 15 miles offshore there are depths

of 110m, sand and coral, and at 30 miles distant no bottom was

found at 732m; at 2 miles from the coast the depth is from 27

to 33m.

12.66 Immediately E of Otago Harbor, the 183m curve does not

extend beyond about 15 miles from the land, and within that

distance it shoals rather rapidly to a depth of 55m. Soundings

of 26m will be obtained within 2 miles of the entrance.

12.66 Caution.—Local authorities recommend that deep-draft

vessels keep to depths greater than 55m, in the waters between

Cornish Head and Waipapa Point (46°40'S., 168°51'E.). Due

to the pinnacle contour of the bottom, vessels in unfrequented

waters within this area, and in depths of less than 55m should

keep a good lookout for surface disturbances, or unusual

soundings which may indicate potential danger.

Otago Harbor (45°49'S., 170°37'E.)

World Port Index No. 55370

12.67 Otago Harbor contains three separate ports. Port

Chalmers and Ravensbourn, stand 4.7 and 9 miles within the

entrance, respectively; Dunedin stands at its head, about 3

miles W of Ravensbourne. These ports serve the Dunedin and

Central Otago Districts.

12.67 The harbor is under the jurisdiction of the Otago Harbor

Board.

12.67 Tides—Currents.—The MHW interval at Taiaroa Head is 3

hours 9 minutes; at Port Chalmers it is 3 hours 34 minutes; and

at Dunedin it is 4 hours 3 minutes. The mean range of the tide

is 1.5m; the spring range is 1.8m. At Dunedin, the flood lasts 5

hours 40 minutes while the ebb lasts 6 hours 30 minutes.

12.67 The average interval of SW at Port Chalmers is 10 minutes;

at Dunedin it is 10 minutes.

12.67 The greatest strength of the tide is in the narrow passage

abreast Harrington Point, where the ebb runs from 2 to 3 knots

and the flood somewhat less; on the bar the greatest rate is 2 to

3 knots.

12.67 There is little interval of SW at the entrance of the harbor.

The flood runs 5 hours 20 minutes; the ebb runs 7 hours 0 minutes, with the latter beginning at 40 minutes after HW and the

former beginning 1 hour 40 minutes after LW. In the upper part

of the port, the ebb and flood are of about the same duration,

with the greatest velocity being 2 knots on the ebb and 1.5

knots on the flood.

12.67 The tidal current runs strongly through Victoria Channel.

12.67 Depths—Limitations.—Otago Harbor, entered between

Heyward Point and Taiaroa Head, 1.7 miles SE, comprises a

narrow inlet of water with a navigable width of 91 to 388m,

and dredged depths of 12.5m for 6 miles to Port Chalmers, and

a dredged channel known as Victoria Channel, with a least

depth of 7.3m and a least width of 73m, for another 7 miles to

Dunedin. The three ports are divided between the Lower Harbor and the Upper Harbor. A training wall protects the SE side

of Victoria Channel. The basin off the Harbor Office in Dunedin was reported to be shoaling.

12.67 A sand spit, with a least charted depth of 6.4m, extends

Port Otago Limited

http://www.portotago.co.nz
Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 311

Pub. 127

about 1 mile N from Taiaroa Head.

12.67 The container terminal at Port Chalmers has four berths. The

George Street (inner and outer) berths are 600m long and have

a maximum draft of 12.5m. The Beach Street Forestry berth is

412m in length and has a maximum draft of 11.8m. 

12.67 The wharf at Ravensbourne, in the upper harbor, offers a Tberth with a length of 149m and is able to accept vessels with

drafts of 8m alongside. Bulk commodities are handled here.

12.67 The channel between Port Chalmers and Dunedin is capable

of handling vessels of up to 8m draft and 190m long. Dunedin

is situated at the head of the inlet. Tankers, 184m in length and

cargo vessels up to 178m in length, can be accommodated in

Dunedin, in daylight only. The maximum draft permissible is

8m at HW and 6.4m at LW. A dedicated LPG discharge facility

is situated at the NE end of Dunedin Harbor. The maximum

draft at this berth is 5.5m. Leith Wharf, which can handle ro-ro

vessels, can accommodate vessels up to 180m in length, with a

draft of 7.7m. Victoria Wharf is 183m in length and can handle

vessels with a draft of 8.0m. Rattray Wharf is 426m in length,

with a depth of 5.4m alongside. Cross Wharf has a length of

137m and a depth of 5.2m alongside. Birch Street Wharf has a

length of 310m and a depth of 6.6m alongside.

12.67 An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of

51.2m, spans Victoria Channel about 0.7 mile S of Port Chalmers. Submarine cables cross the channel at several points and

are best seen on the chart.

12.67 Aspect.—When this harbor is seen from the N and E, it may

be identified by the gap in the coast; in hazy weather it may be

identified by a bank of dazzling white sand heaped at the base

of the steep cliffs forming the W entrance head. From the offing this bank of sand is often mistaken for breakers over the

bar.

12.67 The approach from the S is well-defined by Cape Saunders

and Mount Charles.

12.67 Taiaroa Head, the E entrance point of the harbor, is a bold

dome-shaped rocky headland, with an elevation of 75m; a flagstaff is situated on its summit. A radiobeacon is situated on Taiaroa Head.

12.67 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The vessel’s ETA at the

boarding position must be provided to the harbormaster 12

hours in advance and confirmed 4 hours before arrival.

12.67 Pilot boarding areas, Alpha and Bravo, are situated about 3.4

and 2.4 miles NE of Heyward Point. A vessel approaching the

entrance should keep a good offing, especially with heavy E

weather, which causes the sea to break heavily over the spit extending N from Taiaroa Head, and raises a confused sea in the

channel.

12.67 Regulations.—Vessels requesting pratique will be boarded

at the dock.

12.67 Any vessel wishing to enter, exit, or transit the waters of the

Otago Harbor—Dunedin
312 Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 

Pub. 127

port must obtain permission from the Otago Harbor Control.

12.67 Signals.—The Signal Station, which is situated on Taiaroa

Head, has been decommissioned (2002) and replaced by Otago

Harbor Control, which is based in Port Chalmers. Surveillance

of the port and approaches is by radar, camera, and VHF radio

systems, with remote relay of data from sites on the Otago Peninsula back to Otago Harbor Control. Vessels should obtain

permission to enter the port and will be advised of port movements and, upon request, berth information and the sea state at

the entrance.

12.67 Otago Harbor Control can be contacted on VHF channel 16;

the working frequency is VHF channel 14. It can also be contacted by telephone at 64-03-4729882.

12.67 When sea conditions at the entrance area are considered hazardous for small craft due to breaking sea on the bar, a flashing

red light is exhibited from the mast head on top of the station.

This signal does not necessarily indicate the port is closed;

however, it is recommended that all vessels contact Otago Harbor Control for sea condition details when the light is on or at

any time when in doubt. Conversely, the fact that the light is

not showing does not mean that the entrance area is not hazardous and great care must be taken by navigators at all times

when navigating in the entrance area. 

12.67 Anchorage.—The recommended outer anchorage, which is

considered safe in nearly all winds except in an E gale, is in

24m, sand and mud, about 1.2 miles NE of Heyward Point

Light. There is no anchorage inside the port, but in an emergency, a vessel might find anchorage in the swinging basin off

Port Chalmers.

12.67 Anchorage is restricted in the approach to Otago for a distance of 4 miles N of Taiaroa Head. The restricted area is best

seen on the chart.

12.67 Directions.—No vessel should attempt to enter Otago Harbor without the permission of the Signal Station, or without local knowledge.

12.67 Vessels approaching from seaward should keep well offshore, especially in E gales, as a heavy sea is raised in the vicinity of the entrance channel. Approach Heyward Point Light

between the bearings of 127° and 258°, but do not alter course

for the entrance channel until Taiaroa Head Light bears less

Otago Harbor—Port Chalmers
Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 313

Pub. 127

than 175°. Passing W of the entrance lighted beacon, steer onto

the fixed white sector of the directional light shown from TeU-Mukuri Point (45°48'S., 170°43'E.), then into the dredged

channel for the various docks and loading places detailed

above. The channel above the entrance is well-marked, but requires extensive local knowledge, therefore, no directions are

given.

12.67 Caution.—The directional light mentioned above shows a

fixed white light outside the outer boundaries for the fixed

green and red sectors shown on the chart. Mariners should insure that they have passed through either of the fixed colored

sectors before changing course for the channel entrance.

12.68 Cape Saunders to Quoin Point.—Cape Saunders

(45°53'S., 170°44'E.), a bold headland 6.5 miles S of Taiaroa

Head, is the SE extremity of the Otago Peninsula, which forms

the S side of Otago Harbor. Mount Charles, 1.2 miles N of the

cape, rises to a height of 406m.

12.68 Hydra Rock, with a depth of 5.2m, lies near the 20m curve 3

miles NNE of Cape Saunders.

12.68 Caution.—An area in which explosives are dumped is centered 21 miles ESE of Cape Saunders.

The coast from Cape Saunders trends SW and then S, curving toward Quoin Point, a rounded projection, 30 miles distant.

The intervening coast forms a bight, the land being moderately

high and in some parts thickly wooded.

12.68 Black Head (45°56'S., 170°26'E.), a remarkable rocky head,

127m high, is located 10.5 miles WSW of Cape Saunders

Light. Saddle Hill, known by its shape, rises to a height of

476m, 3.5 miles WNW of Black Head.

12.68 From Black Head the coast is low, with a shingle beach, for

12 miles to the Taieri River. From the Taieri River, for a distance of 2.2 miles SSW, the coast is fringed with reefs. Quoin

Point lies about 6 miles S of the river.

12.68 Gull Rocks (45°54'S., 170°39'E.) lie close off a cliffy head,

3.7 miles WSW of Cape Saunders Light. Tow Rock, 3.7m

high, lies about 0.4 mile S of Gull Rocks.

12.68 White Islet, 12.8m high, lies 1 mile off the coast 6.5 miles

WSW of Tow Rock. Green Islet, 41m high, lies a similar distance offshore, 4.5 miles WSW of White Islet.

12.68 Taieri Islet, 30m high, lies off the mouth of the Taieri River.

Submerged rocks extend about 0.5 mile E from the islet, and

similar rocks lie between the islet and the coast to the SW.

12.68 A 5.5m rocky patch was reported to lie about 4.5 miles ENE

of Quoin Point.

12.69 Quoin Point to Waipapa Point.—Cooks Head

Rock (46°12'S., 170°05'E.), a remarkable feature, stands on

the coast 4.7 miles SW of Quoin Point.

12.69 Australian Reef extends about 1 mile offshore from a position 6.2 miles SW of Cooks Head Rock.

12.69 A detached 4.9m shoal lies about 3.7 miles SW of Australian

Reef and about 1 mile offshore. Foul ground extends from the

coast to the reef. 

12.69 Molyneux Bay is entered between a point 5 miles SW of

Australian Reef and Nugget Point (46°27'S., 169°49'E.), about

8.5 miles SSW. Kaitangata, a tree covered summit, 213m high,

rises 1.7 miles NW of the bays N entrance point.

12.69 Nugget Point is a bold projecting headland covered with

scrub, that is the termination of a prominent ridge which rises

to a height of 220m, 1.2 miles inland.

12.69 Anchorage may be taken in Molyneux Bay, with offshore

winds, in a depth of 14.6m, about 3 miles N of Nugget Point.

Care should be taken to anchor clear of the reef which extends

1 mile N and 0.5 mile E of Campbell Point.

12.69 From Nugget Point, the coast trends SW for a distance of

12.5 miles to Long Point (46°35'S., 169°35'E.), which has a

height of 65m, and a hill, 234m high, rises about 2 miles N of

Long Point.

12.69 The intervening coast between Nugget Point and Long Point

is broken, with some off-lying islets and reefs lying near the

shore.

12.69 False Islet, a small bare promontory, 60m high, lies 3.5 miles

SW of Nugget Point; it is connected to the mainland by a sandy

isthmus.

12.69 White Head (46°31'S., 169°42'E.), about 3.5 miles SW of

False Islet, is a bold cliff which rises to a height of 122m. Hinahina Hill, 376m high, rises 3 miles W of White Head.

12.69 The coast from White Head for a distance of about 4 miles

SW is formed by cliffs from 61 to 183m high.

12.69 Long Point is steep-to, with the 55m curve lying about 0.6

mile off the point. Approaching from the N, the tidal currents

of Foveaux Strait begin to be felt in this vicinity.

12.70 The Tautuku Peninsula (46°37'S., 169°26'E.) lies 6

miles WSW of Long Point; the peninsula is 30m high.

12.70 Tautuku Bay, with a sandy beach backed by low scrub, is

formed on the N side of the Tautuku Peninsula. A river enters

the sea in the SW corner of the bay.

12.70 There is anchorage in Tautuku Bay, in depths of 13 to 17m,

during W and NW winds, but it is exposed in other directions.

12.70 Chaslands Mistake, 145m high, a prominent black headland,

lies 3.7 miles WSW of the Tautuku Peninsula.

12.70 Between Chaslands Mistake and The Brothers Point, 6.5

miles WSW, the coast forms a bight, and near its center there is

a small rocky headland from which The Sisters, a reef, extends

0.4 mile SE.

12.70 The Brothers Point (46°40'S., 169°12'E.) is 54m high; a

reef extends 0.4 mile SE from the point.

12.70 South Head lies 4 miles W of The Brothers Point. The tidal

currents of Foveaux Strait slacken considerably off this part of

the coast, and the NE current runs for a longer period.

12.70 Between South Head and Waipapa Point, nearly 11 miles W,

the coast should not be approached by small craft, except in

good weather, due to the irregular tidal currents.

12.70 Slope Point (46°41'S., 169°00'E.), 4.5 miles WSW of South

Head, is the S extremity of South Island. This is a high and

bare point, with the sea breaking on a sunken ridge about 1

mile off it. A light is situated on the point.

12.71 Waipapa Point (46°40'S., 168°51'E.) lies 6.2 miles

W of Slope Point; it is low and sandy, sloping gradually to the

sea from the mountains to the NE. Foul ground extends in a

SSE direction from the point. There are depths of 4.6m and

9.1m, 1 and 2 miles SSE, respectively, of the point. A rocky

ridge, with a least depth of 18.3m, lies about 4 miles SSW of

the light on Waipapa Point. The sea is reported to break heavily

in depths of 12.2 to 18.3m off this point.

12.71 Toetoe Bay lies between Waipapa Point on the E and Bushy
314 Sector 12. New Zealand—West and East Coasts of South Island 

Pub. 127

Point on the W, a distance of 14 miles WNW.

12.71 The Mataura River, which drains a large extent of the country, flows into the sea 5 miles NNW of Waipapa Point.

12.71 For a distance of 3 miles NNW of Waipapa Point, the coast is

formed by low, grass covered hills, and is fronted by foul

ground extending 0.8 mile offshore.

12.71 Fortrose, a town, stands on the E bank of the Mataura River. The

entrance to the river has a shifting bar with a depth of 0.6m.

12.71 Between Fortrose and Bushy Point, 11.5 miles W, the coast

is low, sandy, and backed by an extensive plain.

12.71 Bushy Point (46°36'S., 168°31'E.), which is low, can be

identified by the light and a prominent patch of scrub.
315

Pub. 127

13. 

New Zealand—Off-lying Islands

13.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 13 — CHART INFORMATION
317

Pub. 127

SECTOR 13 

NEW ZEALAND—OFF-LYING ISLANDS

13.0 Plan.—This sector describes the off-lying islands, which include the Kermadec Group, the Chatham Islands, the Bounty

Islands, the Antipodes Islands, Campbell Island, the Auckland

Islands, and Macquarie Island. The arrangement is in the order

of the islands given above. 

General Remarks

13.1 The term New Zealand generally applies to the three

principal islands; the off-lying islands are referred to by name.

13.1 The New Zealand Government maintains a depot of provisions and clothing at the Kermadec Group, the Chatham Islands, the Bounty Islands, the Antipodes Islands, Campbell Island, the Auckland Islands, and Macquarie Island for the use of

shipwrecked mariners.

13.1 Winds—Weather.—The climate in the Kermadec Islands is

mild most of the time and slightly warmer than that in the N

part of New Zealand. There is no frost, rainfall is plentiful but

not excessive. In the winter, SW and W winds will prevail, and

NE and E in the summer. Strong gales are experienced in winter.

13.1 Typhoons commencing at the SE and backing to the NE have

been experienced in January and February, although they are

rare.

13.1 Caution.—A voluntary code of shipping routes around the

New Zealand coast, to reduce the potential for pollution of the

marine environment, has been introduced. For further information, see Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific

Ocean and Southeast Asia.

The Kermadec Group

13.2 The Kermadec Group (30°00'S., 178°00'W.) are a

rocky group lying about 445 miles NE from North Cape of

New Zealand and 52 miles SSW of Curtis Island. They are a

New Zealand dependency administered by the New Zealand

Land and Survey Department for the preservation of inherent

flora and fauna.

13.2 The principal islands are Raoul Island (Sunday Island);

Macaulay Island and Curtis Island, the two central islands; the

Herald Islets; and L’Esperance Rock (French Rock), which is

the S islet of the Kermadec Group. The islands are volcanic.

There is plentiful rainfall and the climate is mild and pleasant. 

13.2 National Nature Reserves.—All the islands of the Kermadec Group are nature reserves and cannot be visited without a

landing permit from the New Zealand Department of Conservation. Raoul Island is the most robust of the islands and visitor

permits are available to those with a genuine interest in its natural and cultural history. The other islands are extremely fragile and cannot withstand even low numbers of visitors. Permits

to land are only given to people for work which will assist either the management or understanding of the island’s ecosystems.

13.2 Marine Reserve.—The waters around the Kermadec Islands

and rocks, out to the edge of the Territoral Sea Limit (12 miles)

are a marine reserve.The following regulations apply:

1. All fishing and other extractive activities are prohibited.

2. Activities that interface with or disturb marine life are

also prohibited.

3. Vessels visiting the islands may anchor if they exercise care.

4. It is an offense to discharge any toxic pollutant or rubbish into the reserve.

5. Fines of up to $200,000 and/or six months imprisonment may apply under the Marine Reserves Act 1971 for any

offences committed. 

13.2 Caution.—The Kermadec Group is being uplifted. In recent

times, Curtis Island and Cheeseman Island have been raised

about 18m. There may be less water than charted in the vicinity

of the islands.

13.2 The Kermadec Group and surrounding seas lie in an area of

known volcanic activity. In 1979, a submarine volcano, with a

depth of 117m, was reported in position 25°53'S, 177°11'W,

about 200 miles NNE of Raoul Island.

13.2 Numerous depths less than 200m, possibly resulting from

volcanic activity, are charted within 240 miles of Raoul Island.

The shallowest of these depths may indicate or constitute hazards to shipping; they are 40m, reported 1959, and 22m, reported 1960, charted 10 miles apart, 90 miles NNE; 30m, reported

1983, 47 miles NNE; and a depth of 4m, existence doubtful,

110 miles S.

13.3 Raoul Island (Sunday Island) (29°16'S., 177°57'W.)

is regarded as the most important in the Kermadec Group and

the most habitable. It is about 15 miles in circumference, with

its highest peak toward the E at 516m. There are four crater

lakes or swamps, and at least two of them contain fresh water,

which is not potable. The island is visited every 6 months by a

supply vessel. New Zealand naval ships and aircraft land or

parachute mail in on an irregular basis. In July 1937, a meteorological reporting station was established on a plateau 40m

above sea level on the N coast of Raoul, just off Fleetwood

Bluff and across the island from the former Denham Bay settlement. The only present inhabitants are New Zealand personnel on Raoul Island, who man this station which is maintained

by the New Zealand Ministry of Transportation.

13.3 Denham Bay, on the W side of the island, is 3 miles across

from Smith Bluff, which form the entrance points and recedes

1.2 miles. 

13.3 Anchorage.—Anchorage is found in West Anchorage, in

21.9m, 0.5 mile outside the entrance points. Other anchorages

close-in of Raoul Island are best seen on the chart, as well as

the dangers that exist in and about Denham Bay.

13.3 The Herald Islets (29°15'S., 177°52'W.), comprised of two

groups of islands and islets, are located 1 to 2 miles NE of

Raoul Island. The islets are composed of mostly bare rocks and

are the breeding places of sea birds. Meyer Island, 1.2 miles
318 Sector 13. New Zealand—Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 127

NE of Raoul Island, is the largest and is 67m high, and covered

with bush. There is a small boat harbor on the W side of this island.

13.4 Macauley Island, the second largest of the Kermadec

Group, is almost circular in outline, about 1.5 miles in diameter. It lies about 60 miles SSW of Raoul Island and is about

238m high. The soil on this island is mostly dark volcanic

loam, covered with fine smooth grass.

13.4 The coasts are high, with sheer cliffs which can be ascended

at the lava cascade, located on the NE side of the island.

Macauley Island is uninhabited and is not regularly visited.

13.4 Anchorage.—Anchorage is obtainable when weather conditions are suitable, about 0.4 mile NNW of the NE extremity of

Haszard Islet, and about 0.1 mile offshore, in depths of 38.4 to

51.2m. A close examination of Haszard Islet will indicate most

sides are fringed by a reef and submerged rocks in places.

13.4 Caution.—Mariners are warned that when in shallow water

in the vicinity of the Curtisy Island and Macauley Island, compasses may be affected by local magnetic influences.

13.5 The Curtis Islands (30°30'S., 178°35'W.) are two remarkable rocky islands known as Curtis Island and Cheeseman

Island, separated by Stella Passage, which is about 0.3 mile

wide with a least depth of 18.3m. These islands of the Kermadec Group lie about 19 miles SSW of Macauley Island and are

reported to lie about 5 miles S of their charted position. Curtis

Island, the E and larger, is oval-shaped and about 0.5 mile in

extent, giving a good radar return up to 28 miles. The island

rises in sheer cliffs from parts of which steam issues. In the N

part of the island there is a volcanic crater the floor of which is

only 10m above sea level and is formed by a fragile crust over

boiling mud; a stream of hot water flows from the crater

through a breach in its N side into the sea. At the SE end of the

island there is a large chasm. The volcano was active in 1899

and again, to a lesser extent, in 1936. In 1973, Curtis Island

was found to lie 2.7 miles SSE of its charted position.

13.5 Landing by boat is possible on the NE side of Curtis Island,

and landings have been made on the SW sides of both islands.

Walking on Curtis Island is dangerous due to extensive burrowing by the large bird population.

13.5 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained with suitable

weather conditions at the N end of Stella Passage, between 0.1

mile N and 0.2 mile NW of the N extremity of Curtis Island, in

depths of from 21.9 to 23.8m.

13.5 Caution.—Navigation of Stella Passage is not recommended.

13.6 L’Esperance Rock (31°26'S., 178°55'W.) lies 52

miles SSW of Curtis Island. It is about 70m high and covers 15

hectares; it is bare and desolat,e with very steep sides, and only

useful as a landmark for Havre Rock, which is a danger.

13.6 Landing can be made by boat on the E side of L’Esperance

Rock, but only in very good weather.

13.6 Havre Rock is located about 5 miles NNW of L’Esperance

and is awash; it is reported the sea breaks over it in heavy

Macauley Island from NE

Curtis Island and Cheeseman Island from N
Sector 13. New Zealand—Off-lying Islands 319

Pub. 127

weather, although there are conflicting reports as to whether

this actually occurs. In any case, the mariner should give these

rocks a wide berth and allow for the fact that the rock has been

reported to lie 6.5 miles, bearing 311° from L’Esperance Rock.

13.6 Caution.—A dangerous reef was reported in 1955 in position 35°24'S, 176°17'W. This area should be avoided.

13.6 Breakers were reported (1960) in about 39°27'S, 162°27'W,

about 620 miles ENE of the Chatham Islands.

13.6 The Star of Bengal Bank, with a least reported depth of 48m,

lies about 64 miles SSW of L’Esperance Rock; a depth of 57m

has been reported to lie about 40 miles SSW of the bank.

Depths of less than 300m lie within 20 miles of the bank.

13.6 In 1983, depths of 48m and 57m were reported to lie about 5

miles S and 45 miles SSW of the bank, respectively.

The Chatham Islands

13.7 The Chatham Islands (44°00'S., 176°30'W.), two in

number, occupy a space 55 miles N and S and 50 miles E and

W. Chatham Island is the largest, with its NW extremity lying

about 370 miles ESE of Cape Palliser, the S extremity of North

Island, New Zealand.

13.7 Pitt Island lies SE of Chatham Island and extends 8 miles in

a N and S direction with numerous islets and rocks surrounding

it.

13.7 The Chatham Islands are so remote from other land masses

that heat and cold are both moderated by sea breezes; showers

fall at least a few hours every week. In May, June, and July the

climate is mild and agreeable, with the temperature ranging

from 7° to 16°C during the day. Mist is frequent, but not of

long duration. Prevailing winds are NE and SW.

13.7 The effect of the tidal currents may be experienced 10 to 15

miles from the Chatham Islands. The flood splits at the S extremity and travels N along the E and W sides to join again at

the N end; similarly the ebb divides at the N extremity, and rejoins at the S end.

13.7 The coasts of the Chatham Islands have not been closely examined and should not be approached within 3 miles, except by

vessels with local knowledge. As another precautionary measure, it is reported that obstructions to navigation may exist off

Cape Young for a distance of about 4 miles.

13.7 Aspect.—The island is of irregular shape with a land area of

70,612 hectares indented on its E and W coast by Hanson Bay

and Petre Bay, respectively. The island attains an elevation of

283m near its S end. The general aspect is that of beautiful rolling downs covered with grass and patches of fern and spotted

by several lakes on the island. Prominent from the W approach

to the island is Maunganui Hill, rugged and 179m high. Mount

Dieffenbach, E of Maunganui, has a sharp peaked summit and

is very conspicuous.

13.7 Petre Bay, on the W side of Chatham Island, is about 11

miles wide and extends about 10 miles to the NE. The entrance

is between Durham Point, where a light is shown, and Somes

Point. On the SE and N sides of the bay are situated the anchorages of Waitangi Bay and Port Hutt.

13.7 Red Bluff, 74m high, forms the N entrance of Waitangi Bay.

A group of shoals, with depths of 11 to 12.8m, lie 1.2 miles

NNE of Point Weeding; there is a 7.9m shoal 0.4 mile farther

N. In heavy weather, the sea breaks on these shoals. A light is

situated on the summit of Weeding Point.

13.8 Port Waitangi (43°57'S., 176°31'W.) is the administrative center of the Chatham Islands. The Resident Government Agent resides here. There is a T-head pier at the port,

with an alongside depth of 5.8m at its head. There is a prominent shed situated at the root of the jetty. Landing on the beach

is not practical and the anchorage is unsafe in W gales. 

13.8 Tides—Currents.—The tide rises 2.2m at springs, and 0.9m

at neaps. The time of HW or LW is roughly 42 minutes fast at

Lyttelton. 

13.8 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

8.2m, about 0.2 mile NE of Point Hanson, but a mariner should

be wary of a high, breaking sea that rolls into this anchorage

with a NW or W gale; the bottom is sand.

13.8 The River Nairn flows into the sea at the head of Port Waitangi. The meeting of the river and sea causes discoloration

along the W side of the bay. There is a prominent road bridge

at the river mouth.

13.9 The coast from Waitangi N is a sandy beach for 3

miles and is then broken by Red Bluff. This beach continues

until the coast turns W, and from there to Somes Point, the

shore is broken and rocky, the entrance to Port Hutt being 8.5

miles E of Somes Point.

13.9 Port Hutt (Whangaroa) is sheltered in all directions, but there

exists a heavy sea at the entrance when it is under the influence

of strong W and S winds. Maunganui Mount appears in line

with Tawhirikoko Mount bearing about 310° from the entrance

to Port Hutt. This is a useful aid when identifying this entrance,

as there are bays E which, like Port Hutt, have sandy beaches at

their heads.

13.9 There are several freezing establishments where blue cod is

packed and sent to New Zealand markets in good condition.

There is ship communication between Port Hutt and Lyttelton,

New Zealand bimonthly, and more frequently during the first

three months of the year.

13.9 The sea breaks heavily on the reefs and rocks, which extend

about 0.2 mile from each of the entrance points. It is also reported that a patch of kelp usually stretches partly across the

entrance from Napper Reef, but there is a depth of 20m where

it lies. The outer edge of the kelp marks the deep water off

Point Gordon, on the W side within the harbor.

13.9 A rock, which breaks with a W swell, lies in the W approach

to Port Hutt. From this rock, the W entrance point of Ocean

Bay bears approximately 030° and Matikitaki Hill bears approximately 342°.

13.9 Tides—Currents.—The mean spring range here is 0.7m.

13.9 Anchorage.—The anchorage is in depths of 8 to 9m, with

Port Gordon bearing 180° and the island off Evans Point bearing 105°.

13.9 A large vessel should moor or anchor farther out, if intending

to stay any time, as there is scarcely swinging room at single

anchor, unless the anchor is dropped exactly in the center of the

harbor.

13.10 Ocean Bay (43°50'S., 176°46'W.), located 3.5 miles

W of Port Hutt, provides anchorage, in 7.3 to 10.9m, at its head

from all W and S winds round to SE. The bottom is rocky and

the holding capabilities may be unreliable.

13.10 Cuba Channel, the best approach to Port Hutt in Petre Bay

from the W, is about 3 miles wide between Somes Point and
320 Sector 13. New Zealand—Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 127

West Reef. Depths of 31 to 65.8m were found when passing

through the middle of this channel and it appears it is free of

dangers.

13.10 West Reefs lie about 1.5 miles SW of Somes Point. Foul

ground, which breaks, extends out to the E, SE, S, and SW. It

should be noted that foul ground is reported to extend farther to

the SW than charted. The mariner may observe the sea breaking on West Reefs from a distance of several miles.

The coast trending NE from Somes Point to Alison Point appears to be fringed with rocks and therefore should not be approached nearer than 1 mile. From the E of Alison Point off

Waitangi West, there is reported to be good anchorage with offshore E winds. Although conditions here are ideal for anchorage, there is a submerged rock about 0.2 mile offshore about

midway between Alison Point and Waitangi West. Between

Alison Point and Mohau Point, 3 miles NE, the coast indents

forming a bay with foul ground extending about 2 miles WSW

of Mohau Point.

13.10 Cape Pattison, at the foot of Maunganui Hill, is formed by a

level beach backed by a sheer cliff, 30.5m high.

13.10 Foul ground lies up to 5 miles N, 6 miles NE, and 5 miles

NNW of Cape Young. Several isolated patches, with depths

ranging from 5.5 to 27m, lie roughly on a line extending from

North West Reef, to The Sisters, and the N end of the foul

ground protruding from Cape Young. The bay between Cape

Pattison and Cape Young, 8.2 miles ENE, consists of a sandy

beach and is backed by wooded hills. In the middle of this bay,

four needle-shaped rocks, known as Nagatikitiki, lie about 0.1

mile offshore.

13.10 Caution.—Northwest Reef, the outer danger, whose position is doubtful, lies about 16 miles NW of Cape Young.

13.10 The Sisters (Rangitutabi), lying about 10.5 miles NW of

Cape Young, consist of three small rocky islands, close together, flat-topped, with steep sides and covered with meager

brushwood and frequented by birds.

13.10 A 12.8m patch, the charted position of which is approximate,

lies about 3.5 miles S of the Sisters.

13.10 In 1981, a depth of 25m was reported to lie 12.5 miles ENE

of Point Munning.

13.11 From Cape Young, the coast extends about 18.5 miles

E to Munning Point, the NE extremity of Chatham Island.

Again, as with other parts of the N Chatham Island coast, there

is a broad beach backed by low wooded hills, but in this stretch

of coast, there are numerous scattered rocks, which dry, off of

which are regular depths of 36.6 to 45.7m, about 2 or 3 miles

offshore.

13.11 Kaingaroa Light is shown from the summit of a hill 1.5 miles

W of Munning Point.

13.11 Kaingaroa Bay (Skirmish Bay) (43°44'S., 176°16'W.) has

its entrance obstructed by rocks. The Lure, the outermost

danger, is a rocky patch which lies in a position bearing 303°,

1.5 miles from Pukerakei Light (43°44.1'S., 176°14.4'W.).

This danger is covered, but occasionally the sea does break on

it. Rocks, mostly visible, extend to the middle of the entrance

from the W point and terminate in a sunken rock. A sunken

rock, over which the sea breaks occasionally, lies about 0.2

mile NW of the E entrance point.

13.11 Range beacons at the head of Kaingaroa Bay, in line bearing

169.5°, lead into the harbor, passing close E of the 4m rock on

the W side of the entrance. Facilities in the harbor are confined

to a wharf, about 122m long, which projects into the harbor

from a fish factory, situated 0.1 mile S of the W entrance point.

13.11 Munning Point is a low rocky point with wooded land behind it. Te Wakaru Islet is connected with the point by rocks,

which dry at LW, with reefs extending nearly 1 mile seaward.

13.11 A depth of 23m has been reported about 17 miles NE, and a

depth of 25m lies about 12 miles NE of Munning Point.

13.12 Okawa Point (43°46'S., 176°14'W.) lies 3 miles S of

Te Wakaru, where the coast recedes to form a bay. At the head

of the bay lies a sandy beach. Rocks, above and below-water,

lie up to 1.5 mile off the beach which is backed by low wooded

hills.

13.12 Hanson Bay, on the E side of Chatham Island, is formed between Okawa Point and Cape Fournier, 17 miles S. This bay

has not been examined, but fisherman knowledgeable of this

coast report there are no dangers 1 mile offshore. There are

many reefs in the bay and frequently there is a heavy surf.

13.12 Anchorage.—There is anchorage in the N part of Hanson

Bay, W of Okawa Point, but is subject to E winds that will set

in suddenly. With SW winds, shelter may be obtained at Ouwenga, N of Cape Fournier.

13.12 Old Man Reef (44°01'S., 176°21'W.), on which the ground

is foul, extends over 1 mile NNE from a position about 2 miles

NW of Cape Fournier. Ouwenga, a village, lies close W of the

reef. 

13.12 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained under the lee of

this reef, in 10.9m, about 0.7 mile from the shore, sand and

mud bottom. This anchorage is marked by leading lights,

which when in line bearing 142°, guide the mariner W of Old

Man Reef.

13.13 Cape Fournier (44°03'S., 176°20'W.) is a wooded

hilly promontory, about 101m high, with reefs projecting nearly 2 miles E. Foul ground extends up to 2.5 miles E and 2 miles

NE of Cape Fournier. Foul ground extends up to 3 miles off the

coast between Cape Fournier, and Cape L’Eveque.

13.13 Bertier Islet (Forty Fours Islet) (Motuhara Islet) lies 22 miles

E of Cape Fournier. It is a flat-topped islet, about 46m high,

surrounded by four rocks, above-water, which lie no more than

0.2 mile E of the principal islet.

The S side of Chatham Island, between Cape Fournier and

Cape L’Eveque (44°07'S., 176°35'W.), becomes abrupt and

precipitous, with a mean elevation of about 183m and the land

above the cliff taking on a level and wooded aspect.

13.13 From Cape L’Eveque, the coast turns sharply to the WNW

and extends in that direction a distance of 7 miles to Durham

Point. 

13.13 Caution.—Dangers found in this stretch of the coast are a

rock, with a depth of less than 2m, which lies 0.7 mile bearing

350° from the W projection of Gap Point (44°04'S.,

176°40'W.) and foul ground, with rocks awash, extending

about 1.5 miles offshore between Kiringe and the outer end of

Jenny Reef (44°00'S., 176°43'W.).

13.14 Pitt Strait separates Pitt Island from Chatham Island

and is apparently free from dangers, with the exception of Sentry Reef (44°12'S., 176°34'W.), an area of breakers about 4.5

miles E of Sentry Reef, another area of breakers about 6.7
Sector 13. New Zealand—Off-lying Islands 321

Pub. 127

miles SW of Cape L’Eveque, and those rocks lying off the W

and SW sides of Pitt Island which are steep-to. Vessels should

favor the S side when navigating Pitt Strait.

Pitt Island (Rangiauria Island) (44°17'S., 176°13'W.) lies

about 12 miles SE of the S side of Chatham Island. At Whihere (44°17'S., 176°15'W.), the island is highest at 241m. The

island is thickly wooded and has a very fertile soil. European

fruits grow and thrive; wheat is also cultivated, but not in sufficient quantities for exportation. The island is surrounded by

numerous islets and rocks. Moutapu Point is the N extremity of

Pitt Island and is marked by a light.

13.14 Anchorage.—Anchorage is good 1 mile WSW of Moutapu

Point in Flower Pot Bay, in a depth of 21.9m, sand, but the anchorage is only in an area about 0.3 mile from the head of the

bay. Elsewhere, the bottom was found to be rocky and extremely foul with kelp.

13.14 On the W side of the island there is good anchorage, in

Waihere Bay with N and E winds, in 21.9 to 27.4m.

13.14 Good anchorage will be found in Whaihere Bay during E

winds, with Round Rock (44°22'S., 176°20'W.) just shut in by

the SW point of the bay. A vessel should exercise caution when

leaving the anchorage on a change in direction of wind to avoid

the reef off Rabbit Islet.

13.14 Anchorage is available off the NE coast of the island, close

SE of Kokope Islet, 1 mile NW of Kahuitara Point, in a depth

of 20m.

13.14 Glory Bay, located on the E side of Pitt Island, provides an

anchorage formerly frequented by whalers, where vessels may

ride well-sheltered from the effects of W gales.

13.15 From Mangere Island (44°16'S., 176°17'W.), on the

W side of Pitt Island, a remarkable group of islets extends

about 4 miles to the WSW; the first, closely adjoining Mangere

Island, is known as Fort Islet. Sail Rock, the W extremity of

this group, has an extraordinary resemblance to a boat with a

gigantic lug sail.

13.15 In 1975, depths of 12.8 to 14.6m, marked by breakers in

heavy weather, were reported to lie between 4 and 5

milesWSW of Sail Rock.

13.15 Northeast Reef lies about 1.2 miles E of Kahuitara, the E extremity of Pitt Island.

13.15 Star Keyes (Motuhope) are a group of five islets with Round

Islet, the largest, lying about 6.5 miles ENE of Kahuitara.

13.15 Eastern Reef (Ahuru) is about 10 miles SE of Round Island.

Numerous shoals lies between Star Keyes and the NE side of

Pitt Island.

13.15 Rangatira Island (Southeast Island) lies 2.5 miles ENE of the

S point of Pitt Island, with Passage Reef in the channel between. This unimportant island, which rises to 207m, is surrounded with rocks and reefs, the positions of which may only

be approximate.

13.15 The Pyramid (44°26'S., 176°12'W.), a rock 172m high, is

located S of Pitt Island.

13.15 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents are felt at a distance

of 10 to 15 miles from Chatham Island. The flood splits at the

S extremity and runs N along the E and W sides to join again at

the N end; similarly the ebb divides at the N extremity and rejoins off the S end.

The Bounty Islands

13.16 The Bounty Islands (47°41'S., 179°03'E.) are a bare

and rugged group of uninhabited islands lying about 360 miles

ESE of the entrance to Otago Harbor, New Zealand. A deep

channel breaks up some 20 islets and rocks into an Eastern

Group and a Western Group, facing N in shape. The islands

range in elevation from 3 to 88m, showing marks of severe marine erosion. 

13.16 There are no indentations which afford even moderate shelter over this group, which occupies an area of about 3 miles E

and W and 2 miles N and S. These islands were reported

(1973) to lie 3.4 miles, bearing 193° from their charted positions.

13.16 These islands have been declared a wildlife sanctuary. Landing is by permit only.

13.16 The principal island lies NE of the Western Group, standing

88m high, with an inlet on its E side and another on the W. At

about 2 miles, bearing 233° from the summit of this island, is a

rock nearly awash, and the sea breaks heavily on a reef which

extends nearly 0.5 mile NE of the rock. Breakers have been

seen 0.5 mile N of this reef.

13.16 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in 42m, between

the N part of the principal island of the Western Group and

those W of it.

13.16 Caution.—Great care should be observed in approaching

the Bounty Islands in thick weather, as the off-lying rocks do

not always break.

13.16 Norman Rocks, a dangerous group of sunken rocks, lie about

3.5 miles NW of the Western Group; Rosario, a sunken rock,

lies about the same distance SW of the same group.

The Antipodes Islands

13.17 The Antipodes Islands (49°40'S., 178°50'E.), about

115 miles S of the Bounty Islands and about 400 miles ESE of

the entrance to Otago Harbor, New Zealand, are uninhabited.

Its coasts are bold and precipitous, and appear to be entirely

volcanic. The surface forms a rough and undulating plateau

and slopes up from the NE and S cliffs towards the W; the

highest point is Mount Galloway, 402m high, on the top of

which a lake is said to lie.

13.17 The large island is about 5 miles in length, N and S and tapering to its N extremity. There are no openings in the coast of

the main island, except Ringdove Bay and Depot Anchorage.

13.17 These islands have been declared a wildlife sanctuary. Landing is by permit only.

13.17 Depot Anchorage (49°40'S., 178°50'E.) is an open bay between North Cape and Reef Point, with anchorage in 18 to

29m. Holding ground is only fair due to the characteristics of

the bottom. It is a thin layer of black sand covering rock.

13.17 Ringdove Bay (49°42'S., 178°50'E.), on the SE side of the

large island S of Leeward Island, is reported to have good anchorage, in about 36.5m. There was smooth water in this bay

when a heavy SW swell was running outside.

13.18 Bollons Island (49°38'S., 178°50'E.) is a double island rising to 152m, whose two sections are connected by an

extraordinary arch. Bollons Island appears to be part of an extinct crater, broken down on its W side. This island was report-
322 Sector 13. New Zealand—Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 127

ed to lie 0.3 mile, bearing 165° from its charted position and

that the coast line was inaccurate. There is a deep channel between Bollons Island and the main island, but it is reported to

be inaccessible except in the finest weather.

13.18 The main island is surrounded by hazards. A reef, having a

rock about 1.5m high near its extremity, extends about 0.5 mile

from the SW side of the island; South Islet lies at the S extremity. The Windward Islands lie off the NW point. Ordes Lees Islet lies close off the middle of the NW side of the principal

island.

13.18 Tides—Currents.—The mean HW interval in the Antipodes Islands is 3 hours 20 minutes. The mean range of tide is

1.4m, and the spring range is 1.6m.

13.18 Two streams of fresh water were found, one emptying into

the sea on the NE side of the island and the other emptying into

the sea on the NW side of the island.

Campbell Island

13.19 Campbell Island (52°33'S., 169°13'E.) is about 440

miles S of the entrance to Otago Harbor and about 148 miles

SE of the Auckland Islands. This island is mountainous and,

like the Auckland Islands, it is of volcanic origin. The coasts of

the Campbell Islands are bold and the rocks and islets are of

fantastic forms. The hills are steep and rugged, rising to elevations of 198 to 570m, the highest point of which is in Mount

Honey, located S of Perseverance Harbor.

13.19 This island is a wildlife sanctuary. Landing is by permit only.

13.19 The weather on the island is temperate. Snow never lies on

the ground for more than 3 days. In December and January, the

temperature averages 26°C. In July, the weather is mild, with

temperatures not falling below 3°C in the valleys.

13.19 Gales are frequent on the island and continue with persistence. They generally originate from the N with a falling barometer, veer to the W and WSW, and become very severe. 

13.19 The current generally sets E.

13.19 Northeast Harbor indent the E side of the island; South Harbor indents the E side of the island. The other shores are scattered with islets and rocks affording no shelter.

13.19 Northeast Harbor (Penquin Bay), located 4 miles N of South

Harbor, may be identified by Cossack Rock, a small round island 0.2 mile E of the N entrance point of the harbor. The harbor extends SW for 2 miles and increases in width toward the

head, terminating in two creeks, where a fine valley with a

large stream flows into the sea.

13.19 Anchorage.—Anchorage is obtained in all parts of Northeast Harbor, in 10 to 25.6m. East winds seldom blow in Northeast Harbor.

13.20 Smooth Water Bay, which is unsurveyed, lies between

a point about 0.7 mile S of the S entrance of Northeast Harbor

and East Cape, about 1.7 miles SSE.

13.20 East Cape is a dark, sheer bluff, about 91m high. From this

bluff to Erebus Point, the NE entrance point of South Harbor,

the coast is foul.

South Harbor (Perseverance Harbor) (52°33'S., 169°09'E.)

is entered between Erebus Point and South Point, where there

is a 0.5 mile wide opening. The harbor extends about 4.5 miles

W to Garden Cove at its head. The shores on either side are

steep and rise abruptly to heights between 244m and 274m.

Mount Lyall, the highest hill seen from the harbor on the N

side, reaches to an elevation of 413m. The hills have a more

desolate appearance than those of the Auckland Islands, being

less wooded, and ,although trees exist in sheltered places, they

nowhere attain so great a height as in those islands.

13.20 Range beacons lead into the harbor. The first two, in line

bearing 299.5°, lead through the entrance and N of Terror

Shoal; the second two beacons, in line bearing 262°, lead to the

anchorages. The inner limit of the anchorage is reached

through two beacons in range 015°.

13.20 Lights are shown from the two entrance ranges. In the outer

part of the harbor the water is too deep for convenient anchorage, but in the inner part which is almost landlocked, there is

abundant room for a number of vessels to anchor in very fine

sand and silt cover, with a fine mud base.

13.20 A New Zealand Government meteorological station, with a

small jetty for boats, is situated in the N part of the harbor.

13.21 South coast of Campbell Island.—Jacquemart Islet,

about 183m high, lies about 0.5 mile SSW of the S extremity of

Campbell Island, which is also the W entrance of Monument

Harbor. Breakers mark the S end of Jacquemart Islet.

13.21 La Botte (52°37'S., 169°09'E.), an above-water rock with a

similar rock S of it, lies between the W entrance point of Monument Harbor and Jacquemart Islet.

13.21 The coast in the vicinity of Monument Harbor and Southeast

Harbor presents a desolate and storm beaten appearance; these

bays afford no shelter.

13.22 Northwest coast of Campbell Island.—North West

Bay lies between Currejolles Point and the W extremity of

Campbell Island, about 6 miles SW. 

13.22 Courrejolles Point, the NW extremity of Campbell Island, is

a vertical promontory, about 244m high, joined to the island by

a low neck. An island lies close-by the point, where strong tide

rips occur in the passage between.

13.22 Caution.—Dangers consist of above-water rocks which extend out from the coast at the foot of Mount Azimuth and beyond. Dent Island, rising up to 183m, lies about 1.7 miles ENE

of the W extremity of the island.

The Auckland Islands

13.23 The Auckland Islands (50°40'S., 166°10'E.) are located about 250 miles SSW of Bluff Harbor, New Zealand. The

islands form a group, 28 miles long, nearly N and S and about

16 miles broad, separated by narrow channels. The land is

mountainous, culminating in the S at a height of 668m at Adams Island.

13.23 These islands have been designated as wildlife sanctuaries.

Landing is by permit only.

13.23 The weather in these islands is temperate. Snow never lies on

the ground for more than 3 days. In December and January, the

temperature averages 26°C. In July, the weather is mild, with

temperatures not falling below 3°C in the valleys.

13.23 Gales are frequent on the islands and continue with persistence. They generally originate from the N with a falling barometer, veer to the W and WSW, and become very severe. 

13.23 The current generally sets E.

13.23 The E part of the main island is deeply indented; the W side
Sector 13. New Zealand—Off-lying Islands 323

Pub. 127

is unbroken, having no openings except the narrow separation

of Adams island; in fact, the W side of the main island forms a

continuous perpendicular wall from 61 to 243m high.

13.24 Northeast side of Main Island.—Bristow Rock, an

off-lying sunken rock lying N of Enderby Island, lies directly

in the shipping lane rounding the N end of the group. This rock

only breaks occasionally and with a heavy swell; the position is

somewhat doubtful.

13.24 Heavy overfalls occur within the vicinity of the rock.

13.24 Enderby Island (50°30'S., 166°18'E.) is a government reserve forming a tableland of about 480 hectares, covered with

scrub; the remainder consistis of fluctuating swampy terrain attaining an elevation of 46m. 

13.24 Tides—Currents.—The tide rips off the N point of Enderby

Island can extend out to the NE for as many as 12 miles. The

mariner not familiar with these waters could be made uneasy

by this appearance. The flood current sets NNE; the ebb current sets S.

13.24 Anchorage.—Anchorage is on the S side of the island, 1.7

miles from its E extremity, but should be used only as a temporary anchorage, being protected from all winds except those

from the SE. The holding ground is of tenacious clay.

13.25 The entrance to Port Ross Harbor (Sarah’s Bosom

Harbor) (50°32'S., 166°14'E.), at the NE end of the Auckland

Islands, is located between Enderby Island on the N and Ewing

Island on the S. In the approach to Port Ross, the N end of Ewing Island, in range with Butterfield Point, the W extremity of

Enderby Island, leads outside the reef that connects Dundas Islet and Green Islet. This reef, covered in parts at HW, generally

shows breakers extending 1 mile NE.

13.25 The entrance to Port Ross is 1 mile wide, with depths of 20

to 36.5m. The harbor extends nearly 7 miles to the SW; a depth

of 12.8m is found about 1 mile from its head. This large inlet

contains several bays, surrounded by basaltic rocks, which are

easy of approach.

13.25 As previously stated, the E coast of the Auckland Islands is

heavily indented. Trending S and all open to the E are Chamber

Inlet, Granger Inlet, and Griffith Inlet, between Kekeno Point

and Smith Harbor. Northeast of these inlets, a danger exists in

Blanche Rock (50°37'S., 166°20'E.). Breakers were seen when

passing Blanche Rock. Kelp has been reported to lie up to 2.2

miles SE of the island.

13.26 Smith Harbor (Saddle Hill Inlet) indents the coast

about 7 miles S of Kekeno Point. It extends W and S for 1.5

miles. At the entrance of Port Ross, with strong W winds,

squalls of great violence blow down from the hills.

13.26 A remarkable feature marking the N part of Port Ross is

Deas Head, formed of basaltic columns rising to 91m.

13.26 Shoe Islet (50°32'S., 166°14'E.) lies in the middle of Port

Ross off the entrance to Terror Cove. The islet is very prominent, picturesque, bold, steep-to, and highly magnetic.

Banaba Island (Ocean Island) (50°32'S., 166°16'E.) lies

about 0.7 mile W of Ewing Island and is connected by shoal

water with Tucker Point, the SE point of the harbor. The island

has been reported to give good radar returns up to 23 miles.

13.26 Laurie Harbor, at the head of Port Ross, is more secure than

either Erebus Cove or Terror Cove, and is almost landlocked.

Good water may be obtained from a waterfall in the stream on

the SE side of the harbor, which is about 2 miles long in a SW

direction, with an average breadth of 0.4 mile to its head. It has

a least depth of 0.2 mile and forms a good harbor for small vessels. 

13.26 The anchorage is in the inner part, in depths of 5.5 to 16.5m,

landlocked and safe. The head of the inlet, as depicted on the

chart, is no more than 0.1 mile off the N shore of Norman Inlet. 

13.27 Norman Inlet (50°44'S., 166°10'E.) extends about 4

miles W, where the entrance with a depth of 36.5m is rather

difficult to distinguish from seaward, but a flat-topped, steepsided hill, bearing 256°, will bring the mariner to it. The land

on both sides of this inlet is high. 

13.27 Shag Rock (50°43'S., 166°13'E.), a large black flat rock,

about 3.1m above water, lies 0.7 mile N of this entrance. Halfway up the inlet, a bank of kelp 0.3 mile in breadth, on which a

depth of 21.9m was obtained in the fairway, stretches straight

across the harbor. This bank has 10.9m within 50m of the S

side and 14.6m at the same distance from the N side.

13.27 A vessel may anchor on this bank; there is also a perfectly

landlocked anchorage, in depths of 12.8 to 21.9m, at the head

of this inlet, where there is a width of about 0.2 mile.

13.27 Hanfield Inlet (50°44'S., 166°14'E.) consists of two arms

separated by Middle Head. There is anchorage in North Arm,

in 12.8m, about 0.2 mile NE of Middle Head; in South Arm,

anchorage is availablr, in 21.9m, about 0.5 mile above Middle

Head. The holding ground S of Middle Head is not good.

13.27 The E side of the Auckland Islands to Carney Harbor continues with a succession of small inlets. The important inlets have

been stated along this part of the coast.

13.27 Archer Rock (50°50'S., 166°17'E.) is a conspicuous steep,

isolated rock, standing about 15.2m high, located in the center

of a wide bay, N of Cape Bennett, 3 miles NNE of the E entrance of Carnley Harbor.

13.28 Carnley Harbor—East entrance.—The E entrance

of Carnley Harbor extends about 6 miles W to the S extremity

of the Musgrave Peninsula. It opens between Cape Farr, the E

extremity of Perpendicular Head, and Gilroy Head. At the

Musgrave Peninsula, an irregular inlet runs N and NW into

Auckland Island, the W branch of which forms Musgrave Harbor and the E North Arm; the latter is a fine basin which will

accommodate several vessels. The E entrance to Carnley Harbor is exposed to a heavy ocean swell with an outgoing current.

The land on both sides is high and precipitous and, when the

wind is not blowing either directly in or out, it often comes

from all quarters in violent gusts. Within the E entrance points,

there is a depth of 47.5m; no anchorage is available until 6

miles inside.

Adams Island (South Island) (50°53'S., 166°04'E.) is the

southernmost of the Auckland Islands, rising to an elevation of

668m above the sea in Mount Dick on the SW side of the island. The S coast of this island is composed of sheer cliffs with

only one small indentation, Fly Harbor, near its E end; this harbor affords shelter inside of a remarkable bar of kelp which

crosses the harbor at its entrance.

13.28 Caution.—Mariners are warned that in the vicinity of Carney Harbor, the compass may be affected, when in shallow water, by local magnetic forces.
324 Sector 13. New Zealand—Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 127

13.29 Carnley Harbor—West entrance.—The narrow entrance opening between South West Cape and Embrasure Point

is also known as the SE entrance point to Western Arm. This

channel is only suitable for small vessels; there is a large whirlpool, in the narrowest part, W of Monumental Island. At this

point in the passage, the channel is only about 90m wide and

depths will vary from 6.4 to 23.8m, causing a dangerous rip,

inside of which the water is smooth.

13.30 West side of Main Island.—The stretch of coast

from South West Cape to Black Head (50°31'S., 166°08'E.),

its N extremity, forms a continuous perpendicular wall of cliffs,

which for miles reaches an elevation of not less than 183m and

will rise about 866m.

13.30 From Bristow Point to North West Cape, the coast forms

Deep Bight, where remarkable pointed rocks form along a

coast line which is foreboding and desolate.

13.30 Caution.—Sugarloaf Rocks, an above and below-water danger, lies about 1.2 miles E of the E extremity of Disappointment Island.

13.30 Several pinnacle islets and rocks, some of the rocks awash,

have been seen in the N part of Deep Bight between Disappointment Island and the main island, NE and E.

13.31 Disappointment Island (50°37'S., 166°01'E.) lies

just outside the line between Northwest Cape and Bristow

Point. The island, 315m high, presents the appearance of three

sugarloaf hills when seen from a distance. The island is high,

rocky, and generally inaccessible.

13.31 A strong current sets between Disappointment Island and the

main island; the passage, although it has depths of 73.2m, is

only suitable for boats even in excellent weather.

13.31 Disappointment Island is reported to lie 0.3 mile S of its

charted position relative to the main island.

Macquarie Island

13.32 Macquarie Island (54°45'S., 158°40'E.) lies about

340 miles SW of the Auckland Islands, the nearest major island. The island, with an area of 46 miles, lies with North

Head (54°28.4'S., 158°58'E.), its N extremity, 795 miles SE of

Tasmania. Macquarie Island is under the government of Tasmania and are sometimes known as the Subantarctic Islands of

New Zealand.

Macquarie Island is about 18 miles long in a N-S direction,

with a maximum width of 3 miles, and rises to its maximum elevation at Mount Hamilton, 433m high, near Point Hurd, the S

extremity.

13.32 The general appearance of the island is barren in the extreme

and it is almost surrounded by rocky ledges and reefs, making

landing difficult; the coast is dangerous for a vessel to approach closely.

13.32 Macquarie Island does not have any well-defined bays for

good anchorage, but there are a few open roadsteads in which

shelter can be obtained under the lee of the hills.

13.32 This island is continually struck by high winds, with overcast

skies and frequent precipitation, in the form of either rain or

snow. The wind is W and NW most of the year, at about 20

knots. 

13.32 The island is often obscured by mist or very low clouds and

caution is advised when approaching land as soundings are unreliable.

13.32 The Australian National Antarctic Research Expeditions

(ANARE) established a scientific station at Buckles Bay. The

station includes auroral geophysical observatories and has radio and meteorological facilities. Emergency accommodations

are available for 20 people. A doctor and medical facilities are

available. Six outstations provide shelter for a limited number

of people. The stations contain radio for communications with

ANARE at Buckles Bay, but a listening watch is not maintained unless the huts are known to be occupied.

13.32 North Head is the N extremity of the island. Wireless Hill is

the summit of the peninsula of which North Head is the extreme and on the neck of the peninsula is the previously-described meteorological station. The station is conspicuous,

with its brightly covered buildings and a group of 18m high radio antennas.

13.32 Elliott Reef, a line of above and below-water rocks, extends

N of North Head, where apparently there are no known dangers

more than 0.3 mile outside the outermost rock.

13.32 Hasselborough Bay, on the N end of the island, is about 0.7

mile deep and affords shelter from E or SE winds, but rocks

and shoal water extend in most places for a distance of 0.3 to

0.4 mile from the shore. A vessel must steer up the middle of

the bay for the two small hummocks on the low isthmus and

should anchor, in 22m, 0.4 mile WSW of Anchor Rock and not

proceed farther into the bay.

13.33 Buckles Bay (54°29'S., 158°58'E.) is a small cut on

the SE side of the isthmus connecting Wireless Hill to the main

part of the island. Kelp extends about 0.3 mile offshore, but except for the kelp, the bay is apparently clear of dangers.

13.33 A set of range lights, in line bearing 296°, reportedly stands

0.5 mile SSW of Wireless Hill. In 1983, when requested, the

rear light showed a flashing red characteristic, while the front

light showed a flashing green or white light. Authorities disagree as to the best anchorage available in the bay. In 1979, a

vessel 134m in length anchored on the alignment and about 0.6

mile off the beacons. The vessel reported that soundings approaching the anchorage shoaled regularly after crossing the

Disappointment Island

N end of Macquarie Island from SE, distant 4 miles
Sector 13. New Zealand—Off-lying Islands 325

Pub. 127

200m curve. Anchorage S of the range line is not recommended.

13.33 Besides Wireless Hill, the Expedition Hut, painted red and

white stripes, is a good landmark for making the anchorage.

13.33 Tides—Currents.—In Buckles Bay and along the E side of

the island, the current sets to the S with a flood tide and to the

N with an ebb tide, at a maximum rate of 1.5 knots.

13.33 This part of the coast will provide sheltered anchorage in

good weather. 

13.33 There is anchorage with shelter from W winds near Nuggets

Point (54°31'S., 158°58'E.); landing can be made only in calm

weather. Sandy Bay (Ballast Bay) will afford anchorage sheltered from W winds.

13.34 Waterfall Bay (54°40'S., 158°55'E.) will provide

temporary anchorage in good weather.

13.34 Lusitania Bay lies on the E side of the island, 4 miles N of

Hurd Point, the SE extremity of the island. On the beach are

the remains of two large red iron boilers which afford a good

mark.

13.34 The S coast of Macquarie Island rises sharply in a series of

three mountains with sheer cliffs surmounting Hurd Point

(54°46'S., 158°53'E.).

13.34 Southeast Reef lies 0.5 mile SE of a small islet located close

off Hurd Point. There are heavy tide rips off Hurd Point and

Southeast Reef. A number of above and below-water rocks, lie

within 1.2 miles of the island. Two submerged rocks, the existence of both of which is doubtful, are charted 3 miles S of

Hurd Point and 1.2 miles SW of South-West Point (54°45'S.,

158°48'E.). A rock, which breaks, has been reported to lie

about 1.5 miles S of South West Point. 

13.34 On the S coast, the bays are scattered with rocks and are futile as anchorages; however, in 1982, a vessel anchored, in a

depth of 26m, 0.5 mile WSW of Hurd Point.

13.34 Caroline Cove (54°44'S., 158°49'E.), located near the S end

of Macquarie Island, affords shelter for small craft during E

winds, but is exposed to W winds; the cove is burdened with

rocks, but there is a 75m wide channel leading to a deep basin.

13.35 Sandell Bay is entered between Cape Toucher, 3.5

miles N of Caroline Cove and Davis Point, 1.5 miles farther

NE. 

Bauer Bay opens and is entered 3.5 miles S of Handspike

Point (54°29'S., 158°54'E.).

13.35 Langdon Bay and Half Moon Bay indent the coast 1.5 and 3

miles N, respectively, of Bauer Bay.

13.35 Caution.—The Bishop and Clerk Islands consist of a chain

of barren islets and rocks lying about 21 miles SSW of Macquarie Island. The highest island of this group, near the S end,

is about 43m high. These islands, extending in a N and S direction, are connected with Macquarie Island by a submarine

ridge which extends farther to the S. Depths of less than 18.2m

have been reported to lie within 1.5 miles of the Bishop and

Clerks Islands’ charted position.

13.35 These islets and rocks, including Judge Island (54°21'S.,

159°01'E.), lie 8.5 miles N of North Head. A submarine ridge

also connects these islands with Macquarie Island.

13.35 A rock, awash, lies in approximate position 54°18.5'S,

159°02.1'E. Another rock, awash, lies in approximate position

54°19.1'S, 159°1.8'E. A third rock, awash, lies in approximate

position 54°20.3'S, 159°01.4'E.

13.35 A depth of 34m is reported to lie 5.7 miles SW; depths of

37m and 60m are reported to lie 6.5 miles and 7 miles SSW, of

the Bishop and Clerk Islands.

13.35 Judge Island and the Bishop and Clerk Islands were reported

(1982) to lie 1.2 miles further SW than charted.
327

Pub. 127

How to use the Index—Gazetteer

Geographic names of navigational features are generally those used by the nation having sovereignty and are listed

alphabetically. Diacritical marks, such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to specific letters in certain foreign

languages, are not used in the interest of typographical simplicity.

Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political status of an area by the United States

Government. Positions are approximate and are intended merely as locators to facilitate reference to the charts.

To use as a Gazetteer note the position and Sector number of the feature and refer to the Chart Information diagram for the

Sector. Plot the approximate position of the feature on this diagram and note the approximate chart number.

To use as an Index of features described in the text note the paragraph number at the right. To locate this feature on the best

scale chart use the Gazetteer procedure above. 

Index—Gazetteer

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

A

A.N.L. WHARF 27 27 S 153 03 E 5.32

ABBOT BAY 19 51 S 147 57 E 7.40

ABINGTON REEF 18 05 S 149 37 E 6.17

ABUT HEAD 43 06 S 170 16 E 12.8

ACHERON ANCHORAGE 47 11 S 167 41 E 12.44

ACHERON LEDGE 35 44 S 150 15 E 4.8

ACKERS POINT 46 55 S 168 12 E 12.49

ACKERS SHOAL 10 19 S 142 49 E 9.12

ADAMS ISLAND 50 53 S 166 04 E 13.28

ADMIRALTY BAY 40 52 S 173 57 E 11.38

ADMIRALTY ISLANDS 31 30 S 159 05 E 5.4

ADOLPHUS CHANNEL 10 40 S 142 35 E 8.88

AIGUILLES ISLAND 36 02 S 175 24 E 10.33

AKAROA 43 48 S 172 58 E 12.62

AKENS ISLAND 22 21 S 150 17 E 7.10

ALARM REEF 21 07 S 150 15 E 7.20

ALBANY ROCK 10 43 S 142 38 E 8.89

ALBATROSS ISLET 40 23 S 144 39 E 3.33

ALBATROSS POINT 38 07 S 174 41 E 11.12

ALERT ROCK 10 30 S 142 21 E 9.25

ALPHA ROCK 10 37 S 142 31 E 8.91

AMITY POINT 27 24 S 153 27 E 5.29

ANCHOR CAY 9 22 S 144 07 E 9.7

ANCHOR ISLAND 45 46 S 166 30 E 12.26

ANCHOR ISLAND HARBOR 45 46 S 166 32 E 12.27

ANCHORAGE ISLETS 19 54 S 158 28 E 6.11

ANDERSON BAY 40 57 S 147 27 E 3.6

ANDERSON REEF 15 47 S 145 48 E 8.12

ANGLEM POINT 46 55 S 168 12 E 12.51

ANTIPODES ISLANDS 49 40 S 178 50 E 13.17

ANVIL ISLET 36 14 S 175 18 E 10.34

AOTEA HARBOR 38 01 S 174 48 E 11.10

APOLLO BAY 38 45 S 143 41 E 1.25

AQUILA ISLET 21 58 S 149 35 E 7.12

ARCH ISLET 43 17 S 147 11 E 3.54

ARCHER POINT 15 36 S 145 20 E 8.25

ARCHER ROCK, 50 50 S 166 17 E 13.27

ARDEN ISLET 9 52 S 143 10 E 9.11

ARKWRIGHT SHOAL 26 33 S 53 07 E 5.33

ARNOLD ISLET 11 01 S 142 59 E 8.84

ARTHUR POINT 22 08 S 150 04 E 7.10

ARTHURS SEAT 38 21 S 144 57 E 1.28

ASHMORE REEF 10 15 S 144 25 E 8.87

ASP SHOALS 10 38 S 142 22 E 9.15

ASTROLABE REEF 37 32 S 176 26 E 10.64

ATIA POINT 42 26 S 173 41 E 12.58

AUCKLAND HARBOR 36 50 S 174 47 E 10.49

AUCKLAND ISLANDS 50 40 S 166 10 E 13.23

AUKLAND POINT 23 50 S 151 15 E 5.46

AVON ISLES 19 30 S 158 15 E 6.13

AWARUA POINT 44 16 S 168 03 E 12.12

B

BABEL ISLAND 39 57 S 148 20 E 2.22

BADGER HEAD 41 06 S 146 39 E 3.18

BAFFLE CREEK 24 31 S 152 04 E 5.44

BAILEY ISLAND 21 02 S 149 33 E 7.26

BAIT REEF 19 49 S 149 04 E 7.20

BALACLAVA ISLAND 23 32 S 150 56 E 5.51

BALL'S PYRAMID 31 46 S 159 14 E 5.4

BALLINA 28 51 S 153 34 E 5.25

BAMPFIELD HEAD 10 43 S 142 07 E 9.21

BAMPTON ISLAND 19 07 S 158 36 E 6.14

BAMPTON REEFS 19 18 S 158 40 E 6.14

BANABA ISLAND 50 32 S 166 16 E 13.26

BANKS PENINSULA 43 45 S 173 00 E 12.59

BARE BLUFF 30 10 S 153 12 E 5.21

BARN ISLAND 10 51 S 142 19 E 9.17

BARNES BAY 43 08 S 147 20 E 3.61

BARRAGGA POINT 36 30 S 150 04 E 4.5

BARROW POINT 14 22 S 144 39 E 8.42

BARUNGUBA ISLAND 36 15 S 150 14 E 4.6

BARWON HEAD 38 18 S 144 30 E 1.27

BASILISK BANK 10 00 S 142 18 E 9.39

BASKET BAY 43 12 S 147 51 E 3.73

BASS HILL 38 29 S 145 33 E 2.4

BASS ISLET 34 28 S 150 57 E 4.17

BASS PYRAMID 39 49 S 147 15 E 2.14

BASTION POINT 37 34 S 149 45 E 2.42

BATE BAY 34 03 S 151 11 E 4.21

BATEMAN BAY 35 44 S 150 12 E 4.8

BATHURST HEAD 14 15 S 144 15 E 8.52

BATTERY ISLET 40 27 S 148 11 E 2.25

BATTERY POINT 42 53 S 147 20 E 3.66

BAY OF FIRES 41 02 S 148 20 E 3.84

BAY ROCK 19 07 S 146 45 E 7.43

BEACH HILL 19 44 S 147 35 E 7.41

BEAUTY POINT 41 09 S 146 49 E 3.13

BEDWELL GROUP 21 50 S 149 48 E 7.16

BEE REEF 15 38 S 145 26 E 8.19

BELL BANK 13 27 S 143 37 E 8.56

BELL BAY 41 08 S 146 52 E 3.14

BELL CAY 21 46 S 151 15 E 7.3

BELL POINT 38 53 S 146 00 E 2.5

BELL REEF 40 23 S 144 05 E 1.22

BELLAMBI POINT 34 22 S 150 56 E 4.19

BEN BUCKLER 33 54 S 151 17 E 4.23

BENNETT ISLET 19 55 S 158 22 E 6.12

BENSBACH RIVER 9 07 S 141 02 E 9.1

BERMAGUI INLET 36 25 S 150 04 E 4.6

BEVERLY GROUP 21 29 S 149 53 E 7.18

BEWICK ISLAND 14 26 S 144 49 E 8.41

BICHENO 41 52 S 148 18 E 3.82

BINGE-BINGE POINT 36 01 S 150 10 E 4.7

BIRD ISLET 22 10 S 155 28 E 6.3

BLACK HEAD 38 33 S 145 28 E 2.4

BLACK HEAD 45 56 S 170 26 E 12.68

BLACK HEAD 50 31 S 166 08 E 13.30

BLACK JACK ROCKS 43 02 S 147 29 E 3.68

BLACK PYRAMID 40 29 S 144 21 E 1.23

BLACK REEF 39 38 S 177 05 E 10.80

BLACK ROCK POINT 46 41 S 167 52 E 12.46

BLACK ROCKS 12 12 S 143 55 E 8.75

BLACKMAN BAY 42 52 S 147 51 E 3.77
328 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 127

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

BLACKNEY POINT 34 52 S 173 17 E 10.7

BLANCHE ROCK, 50 37 S 166 20 E 13.25

BLIGH ENTRANCE 9 15 S 143 55 E 9.6

BLIGH POINT 39 45 S 147 51 E 2.16

BLIGH SOUND 44 46 S 167 29 E 12.15

BLINKING BILLY POINT 42 55 S 147 22 E 3.64

BLUE ROCKS POINT 40 06 S 147 57 E 2.17

BOBARDT POINT 13 11 S 143 31 E 8.57

BOLD HEAD 40 03 S 144 06 E 1.20

BOLD HEAD 42 56 S 170 42 E 12.8

BOLLONS ISLAND 49 38 S 178 50 E 13.18

BOLT HEAD 12 15 S 143 06 E 8.72

BON ACCORD HARBOR 36 25 S 174 49 E 10.38

BONNET ISLAND 42 13 S 145 14 E 3.39

BOOBY ISLAND 10 36 S 141 55 E 9.28

BOOBY REEF 21 01 S 158 34 E 6.10

BOTANY BAY 34 00 S 151 14 E 4.22

BOUGAINVILLE REEF 15 30 S 147 07 E 6.26

BOULDER POINT 38 24 S 142 09 E 1.6

BOULT REEF 23 45 S 152 17 E 5.42

BOUNTY ISLANDS 47 41 S 179 03 E 13.16

BOW REEF 13 18 S 143 40 E 8.61

BOWDEN REEF 19 03 S 147 56 E 7.5

BOWLING GREEN BAY 19 22 S 147 15 E 7.42

BOYDONG CAYS 11 28 S 143 01 E 8.84

BOYNE ISLAND 23 55 S 151 20 E 5.46

BRAMBLE CAY 9 09 S 143 53 E 9.8

BRAMBLE COVE 43 20 S 146 00 E 3.45

BRAMBLE PATCHES 10 30 S 141 35 E 9.30

BRAMSTON POINT 17 15 S 145 59 E 7.55

BREAM HEAD 35 51 S 174 35 E 10.28

BREAM TAIL 36 03 S 174 35 E 10.31

BREMNER POINT 19 09 S 146 52 E 7.43

BRIG ROCKS 40 06 S 144 02 E 1.19

BRISBANE 27 28 S 153 04 E 5.32

BRISBANE ROCK 10 35 S 142 12 E 9.33

BROAD SOUND 22 12 S 149 45 E 7.11

BROAD SOUND CHANNEL 22 07 S 150 17 E 7.11

BROKEN BAY 33 34 S 151 22 E 5.7

BROOMFIELD ROCK 14 12 S 144 39 E 8.34

BROUGHTON ISLANDS 32 37 S 152 19 E 5.14

BROULEE ISLAND 35 52 S 150 11 E 4.7

BROWNS ISLAND 36 50 S 174 54 E 10.45

BRUNNER RIVER 42 43 S 170 59 E 12.8

BRUNSWICK RIVER ENTRANCE 28 32 S 153 32 E 5.26

BRUNY ISLAND 43 18 S 147 18 E 3.56

BRUSH ISLAND 35 32 S 150 25 E 4.9

BUCHAN POINT 16 44 S 145 40 E 8.13

BUCKLES BAY 54 29 S 158 58 E 13.33

BULK GRAIN PIER 38 07 S 144 22 E 1.44

BULL BAY 43 05 S 147 22 E 3.62

BULLER BAY 41 45 S 171 32 E 12.4

BULLI POINT 34 20 S 150 57 E 4.19

BULLOCK POINT 43 11 S 146 59 E 3.53

BUNDABERG 24 52 S 152 21 E 5.40

BUNKER GROUP 23 50 S 152 21 E 5.41

BURDEKIN ROCK 19 08 S 146 42 E 7.45

BURKITT ISLET 13 56 S 143 45 E 8.59

BURLEIGH HEADS 28 05 S 153 27 E 5.28

BURNETT POINT 43 26 S 147 02 E 3.51

BURNIE 41 03 S 145 55 E 3.23

BURRUM RIVER 25 11 S 152 35 E 5.38

BUSHETT ROCKS 42 43 S 173 30 E 12.58

BUSHY POINT 46 36 S 168 31 E 12.71

BUSTARD HEAD 24 01 S 151 46 E 5.44

BYRON BAY 28 38 S 153 37 E 5.26

C

CAIRNCROSS ISLETS 11 15 S 142 56 E 8.82

CAIRNS 16 56 S 145 47 E 8.14

CALLE-CALLE BAY 37 04 S 149 56 E 4.5

CAMPBELL ISLAND 52 33 S 169 13 E 13.19

CAMPBELL POINT 13 32 S 143 35 E 8.56

CAMPBELL REEF 10 20 S 142 29 E 9.13

CAPE BARREN 40 26 S 148 29 E 2.24

CAPE BARRIER 36 21 S 175 32 E 10.36

CAPE BEDFORD 15 14 S 145 20 E 8.28

CAPE BERNIER 42 44 S 147 57 E 3.77

CAPE BOUGAINVILLE 42 31 S 148 00 E 3.80

CAPE BOWEN 14 31 S 144 40 E 8.42

CAPE BOWLING GREEN 19 18 S 147 26 E 7.41

CAPE BRETT 35 11 S 174 20 E 10.18

CAPE BRIDGEWATER 38 24 S 141 24 E 1.3

CAPE BRUNY 43 30 S 147 09 E 3.57

CAPE BYRON 28 38 S 153 38 E 5.26

CAPE CAMPBELL 41 44 S 174 16 E 11.55

CAPE CAPRICORN 23 29 S 151 14 E 5.47

CAPE CLEVELAND 19 11 S 147 01 E 7.42

CAPE CLINTON 22 32 S 150 48 E 5.53

CAPE COLVILLE 36 28 S 175 21 E 10.50

CAPE CORNWALL 10 46 S 142 11 E 9.18

CAPE DIRECTION 12 51 S 143 32 E 8.58

CAPE DROMEDARY 36 18 S 150 08 E 4.6

CAPE EDGECUMBE 19 59 S 148 16 E 7.39

CAPE EGMONT 39 17 S 173 45 E 11.15

CAPE ELIE 40 43 S 145 04 E 3.29

CAPE FAREWELL 40 30 S 172 41 E 11.26

CAPE FLATTERY 14 57 S 145 21 E 8.29

CAPE FLATTERY HARBOR 14 57 S 145 21 E 8.36

CAPE FLINDERS 14 08 S 144 14 E 8.47

CAPE FOULWIND 41 45 S 171 28 E 12.6

CAPE FOURNIER 44 03 S 176 20 W 13.13

CAPE FRANKLAND 39 52 S 147 45 E 2.16

CAPE GRAFTON 16 52 S 145 55 E 8.2

CAPE GRENVILLE 11 58 S 143 14 E 8.77

CAPE GRIFFITH 12 41 S 143 25 E 8.70

CAPE GRIM 40 41 S 144 41 E 3.35

CAPE HAWKE 32 13 S 152 34 E 5.15

CAPE HAWKE HARBOR 32 10 S 152 30 E 5.16

CAPE HILLSBOROUGH 20 54 S 149 03 E 7.28

CAPE HOME 35 23 S 174 23 E 10.25

CAPE HORN 36 56 S 174 44 E 11.7

CAPE HOWE 37 30 S 149 59 E 2.43,

4.2

CAPE JACKSON 40 59 S 174 19 E 11.44

CAPE KARIKARI 34 47 S 173 24 E 10.7

CAPE KEPPEL 23 27 S 151 03 E 5.49

CAPE KERAUDREN 40 24 S 144 47 E 1.22

CAPE KIDNAPPERS 39 39 S 177 05 E 10.80

CAPE KIMBERLEY 16 17 S 145 29 E 8.17

CAPE KOAMARU 41 05 S 174 23 E 11.48

CAPE L'EVEQUE 44 07 S 176 35 W 13.13

CAPE LAMBERT 40 59 S 174 13 E 11.44

CAPE LIPTRAP 38 55 S 145 55 E 2.5

CAPE MANIFOLD 22 41 S 150 50 E 5.53

CAPE MARIA VAN DIEMEN 34 29 S 172 39 E 10.3

CAPE MELVILLE 14 10 S 144 31 E 8.44

CAPE NATURALISTE 40 51 S 148 13 E 3.2

CAPE NELSON 38 26 S 141 33 E 1.4

CAPE NORTHUMBERLAND 38 04 S 140 40 E 1.1

CAPE OTWAY 38 52 S 143 31 E 1.13

CAPE PALLISER 41 37 S 175 17 E 10.84

CAPE PALMERSTON 21 32 S 149 29 E 7.22

CAPE PATTERSON 38 41 S 145 36 E 2.4

CAPE PATTON 38 42 S 143 50 E 1.26

CAPE PILLAR 43 14 S 148 02 E 3.75

CAPE PORTLAND 40 44 S 147 56 E 3.5

CAPE PROVIDENCE 46 01 S 166 28 E 12.30

CAPE QUEEN ELIZABETH 43 15 S 147 26 E 3.62

CAPE RAOUL 43 14 S 147 48 E 3.73

CAPE REINGA 34 25 S 172 41 E 10.3

CAPE RODNEY 36 17 S 174 49 E 10.31

CAPE RUNAWAY 37 32 S 177 59 E 10.67

CAPE SAUNDERS 45 53 S 170 44 E 12.68

CAPE SCHANCK 38 30 S 144 53 E 2.2

CAPE SIDMOUTH 13 25 S 143 36 E 8.56

CAPE SIR JOHN 40 25 S 147 59 E 2.23

CAPE SORELL 42 12 S 145 10 E 3.37

CAPE ST. VINCENT 43 19 S 145 50 E 3.42

CAPE STEPHENS 40 42 S 173 57 E 11.37

CAPE SURVILLE 42 57 S 148 00 E 3.76

CAPE TERAWHITI 41 17 S 174 37 E 11.24

CAPE TOURVILLE 42 07 S 148 21 E 3.81

CAPE TRIBULATION 16 05 S 145 29 E 8.17

CAPE TURNAGAIN 40 30 S 176 37 E 10.82

CAPE UPSTART 19 42 S 147 45 E 7.41

CAPE WANBROW 45 07 S 170 59 E 12.64

CAPE WELLINGTON 39 04 S 146 29 E 2.29

CAPE WEYMOUTH 12 37 S 143 26 E 8.71

CAPE WICKHAM 39 35 S 143 57 E 1.16

CAPE WIWIKI 35 09 S 174 08 E 10.16

CAPE WOOLAMAI 38 34 S 145 22 E 2.3
Index—Gazetteer 329

Pub. 127

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

CAPE YORK 10 41 S 142 32 E 8.80

CAPEL BANK 25 16 S 159 27 E 5.6

CARDWELL 18 15 S 146 02 E 7.50

CARLISLE ISLAND 20 47 S 149 17 E 7.26

CARNARVON BAY 43 09 S 147 51 E 3.74

CAROLA CAY 19 06 S 152 23 E 6.8

CAROLINE COVE, 54 44 S 158 49 E 13.34

CAROLINE ROCK 12 39 S 143 32 E 8.73

CARPENTARIA SHOAL 10 45 S 141 03 E 9.29

CASCADE POINT 44 01 S 168 21 E 12.12

CASTLE POINT 40 54 S 176 13 E 10.81

CASTLE POINT 40 55 S 176 13 E 10.83

CATARAN BAY 20 10 S 149 02 E 7.32

CATHERINE HILL BAY 33 09 S 151 38 E 5.9

CATO ISLAND 23 15 S 155 32 E 6.2

CAVERN HEAD 46 05 S 166 40 E 12.33

CELEBRATION REEF 13 17 S 143 42 E 8.64

CENTRE ISLAND 46 27 S 167 51 E 12.38

CHALLENGER BAY 18 44 S 146 34 E 7.47

CHANNEL BAY 42 15 S 145 14 E 3.39

CHANNEL ROCK 14 08 S 144 29 E 8.44

CHANNEL ROCK 43 07 S 147 17 E 3.54

CHAPMAN ISLET 12 53 S 143 36 E 8.62

CHARLOTTE COVE 43 16 S 147 09 E 3.52

CHARON POINT 22 23 S 149 49 E 7.12

CHATHAM ISLANDS 44 00 S 176 30 W 13.7

CHELSEA BULK SUGAR WHARF 36 49 S 174 43 E 10.49

CHESTER RIVER 13 42 S 143 33 E 8.55

CHETWODE ISLANDS 40 54 S 174 05 E 11.41

CHEVIOT ISLAND 22 05 S 150 40 E 7.14

CHIMMO SHOAL 11 48 S 143 15 E 8.83

CHURCH ROCK 40 49 S 144 35 E 3.36

CIRCULAR HEAD 40 46 S 145 18 E 3.26

CLACK REEF 14 04 S 144 14 E 8.48

CLAREMONT POINT 14 00 S 143 41 E 8.55

CLARENCE HEAD 29 29 S 153 22 E 5.22

CLARENCE PEAK 29 34 S 153 15 E 5.22

CLARENCE RIVER 42 10 S 173 55 E 12.56

CLAYFACE POINT 40 56 S 173 51 E 11.39

CLEFT ISLAND 39 10 S 146 18 E 2.9

CLEVELAND POINT 27 31 S 153 17 E 5.32

CLIFF ISLANDS 14 14 S 143 47 E 8.53

CLIFFY ISLAND 38 55 S 146 42 E 2.32

CLONMEL ISLAND 38 45 S 146 40 E 2.35

CLOUDY BAY 43 29 S 147 13 E 3.57

CLUMP POINT 17 52 S 146 08 E 7.51

COAL CLIFF 34 15 S 150 59 E 4.19

COASTER CHANNEL 21 26 S 149 32 E 7.22

COATES REEF 17 12 S 146 22 E 7.7

COBB BLUFF 38 27 S 145 26 E 2.3

COBRA ROCK 36 41 S 175 59 E 10.59

COCKBURN REEF 11 50 S 143 19 E 8.83

COCKLE BANK 40 48 S 148 11 E 3.2

COCONUT ISLAND 10 03 S 143 04 E 9.11

COCONUT POINT 21 36 S 149 28 E 7.22

COFFS HARBOR 30 18 S 153 08 E 5.20

COLCLOUGH REEF 13 05 S 143 44 E 8.67

COLLINET POINT 40 55 S 173 51 E 11.39

COMBE POINT 14 15 S 144 13 E 8.52

CONICAL ROCK 15 08 S 145 20 E 8.28

COOK ROCK 41 03 S 174 26 E 11.46

COOK SHOAL 10 04 S 141 22 E 9.29

COOKS HEAD ROCK 46 12 S 170 05 E 12.69

COOKTOWN 15 28 S 145 15 E 8.27

COOLANGATTA MOUNT 34 51 S 150 43 E 4.15

COOPER POINT 17 24 S 146 04 E 7.54

COQUET ISLAND 14 33 S 144 59 E 8.41

CORDELIA ROCKS 19 00 S 146 41 E 7.46

CORINGA ISLETS 16 58 S 150 00 E 6.18

CORNELIAN BAY 42 51 S 147 19 E 3.67

CORNER INLET 38 51 S 146 34 E 2.34

CORNISH HEAD 45 37 S 170 42 E 12.65

CORNWALLIS WHARF 37 01 S 174 36 E 11.7

COROMANDEL HARBOR 36 48 S 175 28 E 10.51

COWAN-COWAN POINT 27 08 S 153 22 E 5.30

COWLISHAW REEF 15 32 S 145 19 E 8.26

COWPER POINT 39 50 S 144 08 E 1.20

COX BIGHT 43 30 S 146 15 E 3.46

CRAB ISLAND 10 59 S 142 06 E 9.20

CRAGGY ISLAND 39 41 S 147 41 E 2.14

CRAYFISH POINT 42 57 S 147 21 E 3.64

CREECH REEF 13 38 S 144 06 E 8.66

CRIB POINT 38 21 S 145 13 E 2.3

CROCODILE HEAD 35 05 S 150 51 E 4.14

CROISILLES HARBOR 41 03 S 173 37 E 11.35

CROOKED ARM 45 22 S 167 03 E 12.23

CROOKHAVEN BIGHT 35 00 S 150 49 E 4.15

CROPPIES POINT 40 49 S 147 36 E 3.5

CROWDY HEAD 31 51 S 152 45 E 5.16

CURACOA ISLAND 18 40 S 146 33 E 7.48

CURLEW ISLAND 21 36 S 149 48 E 7.17

CURTIS ISLAND 39 28 S 146 39 E 2.11

CURTIS ISLANDS 30 30 S 178 35 W 13.5

CUTTLE COVE 46 04 S 166 41 E 12.34

CUVIER BAY 40 28 S 144 45 E 3.32

D

D'ENTRECASTEAUX CHANNEL 43 36 S 147 09 E 3.48

DALRYMPLE ISLET 9 37 S 143 18 E 9.10

DANGER POINT 28 09 S 153 33 E 5.27

DANGER POINT 38 03 S 140 48 E 1.2

DANGER RIDGE 21 00 S 154 21 E 6.7

DANGER ROCK 35 21 S 174 24 E 10.24

DARNLEY ISLAND 9 35 S 143 46 E 9.7

DART BANK 43 12 S 147 42 E 3.72

DART REEF 17 24 S 48 11 E 6.24

DAVY PATCHES 14 20 S 144 43 E 8.34

DAWSON ISLETS 35 35 S 150 21 E 4.9

DAYMAN CHANNEL 10 28 S 142 12 E 9.36

DAYMAN POINT 16 23 S 145 25 E 8.16

DEADMANS POINT 36 51 S 175 24 E 10.52

DEAL ISLAND 38 30 S 147 19 E 2.8

DECAPOLIS REEF 14 51 S 145 16 E 8.37

DENISON CANAL 42 54 S 147 48 E 3.70

DENT ISLAND 20 22 S 148 56 E 7.31

DEPOT ANCHORAGE 49 40 S 178 50 E 13.17

DERRY REEF 13 01 S 143 51 E 8.67

DEVONPORT 41 11 S 146 22 E 3.19

DIAMOND HEAD 31 44 S 152 48 E 5.17

DIAMOND ISLETS 17 25 S 151 00 E 6.17

DIANE BANK 15 46 S 149 43 E 6.21

DIGBY ISLAND 21 30 S 149 54 E 7.18

DISAPPOINTMENT ISLAND 50 37 S 166 01 E 13.31

DISASTER BAY 37 16 S 149 58 E 4.2

DOLPHIN REEF 12 34 S 143 31 E 8.74

DOME ISLAND 22 25 S 150 45 E 5.55

DONOVAN POINT 16 01 S 145 27 E 8.24

DOUBLE HEAD 23 10 S 150 48 E 5.53

DOUBLE ISLAND POINT 25 56 S 153 12 E 5.34

DOUBLE POINT 17 39 S 146 09 E 7.52

DOUBTFUL SOUND 45 16 S 166 51 E 12.22

DOVE ISLET 10 00 S 143 02 E 9.11

DOVER 43 19 S 147 01 E 3.52

DRAKE SHOALS 13 26 S 143 42 E 8.64

DROMONA 38 20 S 143 57 E 2.2

DRU POINT 43 02 S 147 17 E 3.55

DRYDEN BAY 41 10 S 174 12 E 11.47

DUCK COVE 45 44 S 166 40 E 12.28

DUKE ISLANDS 21 58 S 150 08 E 7.15

DUNALLEY 42 53 S 147 49 E 3.71

DUNALLEY BAY 42 55 S 147 47 E 3.70

DUNK ISLAND 17 57 S 146 10 E 7.51

E

EAGLE ROCK 10 47 S 142 14 E 9.18

EAST CAPE 37 41 S 178 33 E 10.69

EAST CAY 9 24 S 144 13 E 8.86

EAST HEAD 43 46 S 173 08 E 12.62

EAST HEAD 46 51 S 168 08 E 12.46

EAST POINT LEDGE 23 52 S 151 24 E 5.47

EAST SANDY POINT 40 56 S 147 21 E 3.6

EAST STRAIT ISLAND 10 30 S 142 27 E 9.13

EASTERN FIELDS 10 07 S 145 40 E 8.87

EASTERN LIGHT 38 21 S 144 56 E 1.30

EASTERN PROJECTION 21 15 S 155 50 E 6.5

EBORAC ISLAND 10 41 S 142 32 E 8.80

EDDYSTONE POINT 41 00 S 148 21 E 3.2

EDEN 37 04 S 149 56 E 4.4

EDEN REEF 14 05 S 143 55 E 8.51

EDGECUMBE BAY 20 05 S 148 22 E 7.38
330 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 127

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

EDGELL BANK 22 53 S 151 47 E 5.43

EDWARD ISLAND 20 15 S 149 10 E 7.32

EDWARDS ROCK 10 31 S 142 26 E 9.25

EEL REEF 12 30 S 143 26 E 8.74

EGG ROCK 23 12 S 151 06 E 5.50

EGMONT REEF 16 31 S 145 32 E 8.15

ELAMANG ISLET 21 28 S 149 39 E 7.19

ELEANOR CREEK 18 52 S 146 17 E 7.45

ELECTRONA 43 04 S 147 16 E 3.55

ELIZABETH REEF 29 56 S 159 02 E 5.5

ELLIOT HEADS 24 56 S 152 30 E 5.38

ENDEAVOR LIGHT 34 00 S 151 14 E 4.22

ENDEAVOUR REEF 15 47 S 145 35 E 8.19

ENDERBY ISLAND 50 30 S 166 18 E 13.24

ENTRANCE ISLAND 10 43 S 142 18 E 9.16

ENTRANCE ISLAND 47 05 S 168 13 E 12.52

ENTRY ANCHORAGE 40 53 S 174 55 E 11.21

ERITH ISLAND 39 27 S 147 18 E 2.13

EUSTON REEF 16 41 S 146 15 E 8.7

EVANS HEAD 29 08 S 153 28 E 5.22

EVANS RIVER ENTRANCE 29 07 S 153 26 E 5.23

EVES REEF 13 58 S 144 34 E 8.49

EYE REEF 14 54 S 145 29 E 8.31

F

FAHEY REEF 14 04 S 143 51 E 8.51

FAIR CAPE 12 24 S 143 16 E 8.71

FALSE CAPE 16 52 S 145 51 E 8.13

FALSE HEAD 36 13 S 175 17 E 10.34

FAMILY ISLANDS 18 02 S 146 12 E 7.51

FANTOME ISLAND 18 42 S 146 31 E 7.48

FIFE ISLAND 13 39 S 143 43 E 8.61

FIN REEF 16 36 S 146 10 E 8.8

FINGAL HEAD 28 12 S 153 34 E 5.27

FINLAYSON POINT 20 53 S 148 57 E 7.28

FIRST POINT 33 29 S 151 27 E 5.8

FIRST RED ROCKY POINT 13 04 S 143 31 E 8.57

FIRST STONY POINT 12 23 S 143 15 E 8.72

FIRST THREE MILE OPENING 13 28 S 144 01 E 8.66

FITZROY ISLAND 16 56 S 145 59 E 7.56

FITZROY RIVER 23 30 S 150 55 E 5.51

FIVE MILE BLUFF 41 01 S 146 52 E 3.8

FLAGSTAFF HILL 34 28 S 150 52 E 4.19

FLAGSTAFF POINT 34 25 S 150 55 E 4.18

FLAT ISLAND 34 59 S 173 52 E 10.13

FLAT ISLAND PASSAGE 21 59 S 149 37 E 7.12

FLAXMAN HILL 38 33 S 142 55 E 1.10

FLINDERS BAY 42 59 S 147 50 E 3.71

FLINDERS BREAKWATER JETTY 38 29 S 145 02 E 2.3

FLINDERS ENTRANCE 9 38 S 144 14 E 8.86

FLINDERS GROUP 14 10 S 144 15 E 8.46

FLINDERS ISLAND 14 11 S 144 15 E 8.47

FLINDERS PASSAGE 18 55 S 148 00 E 7.5

FLINDERS PEAK 37 57 S 144 25 E 1.28

FLINDERS REEF 43 01 S 147 50 E 3.71

FLINDERS REEFS 17 35 S 148 24 E 6.22

FLORA PASSAGE 17 00 S 146 21 E 7.8

FLORA POINT 35 00 S 150 43 E 4.13

FLORA REEF 16 45 S 147 45 E 6.25

FLUTED CAPE 43 22 S 147 23 E 3.62

FLY POINT 10 45 S 142 36 E 8.80

FLY REEF 14 30 S 145 10 E 8.34

FLYING FISH POINT 17 30 S 146 05 E 7.54

FLYING SCUD ROCK 43 53 S 146 59 E 3.48

FORRESTER REEF 15 10 S 145 30 E 8.20

FORSBERG POINT 15 40 S 145 20 E 8.25

FORT DENNISON 33 51 S 151 13 E 4.24

FORTH RIVER 41 09 S 146 15 E 3.20

FRANKLAND ISLANDS 17 13 S 146 05 E 7.55

FRASER ISLAND 25 11 S 153 10 E 5.34

FREDERICK HENRY BAY 42 55 S 147 35 E 3.68

FREDRICK REEFS 20 58 S 154 24 E 6.7

FRENCH PASS 40 55 S 173 50 E 11.34

FRENCHMAN ISLAND 35 52 S 174 32 E 10.30

FRESHWATER POINT 21 25 S 149 20 E 7.22

FRIDAY ISLAND 10 36 S 142 10 E 9.32

G

GABLE END FORELAND 38 32 S 178 18 E 10.72

GABO ISLAND 37 34 S 149 55 E 2.42

GAP POINT 44 04 S 176 40 W 13.13

GATCOMBE HEAD 23 53 S 151 23 E 5.46

GEELONG 38 09 S 144 22 E 1.44

GEORGE POINT 20 04 S 148 34 E 7.38

GEORGE SOUND 44 50 S 167 22 E 12.16

GEORGES BAY 41 19 S 148 17 E 3.83

GERANIUM PASSAGE 17 42 S 146 30 E 7.7

GERTRUDE REEF 13 10 S 143 40 E 8.64

GHIBBER ROCK 10 35 S 142 10 E 9.32

GIBSON ROCK 10 44 S 142 18 E 9.16

GIPPS LAND LAKES 37 53 S 147 58 E 2.27

GISBORNE 38 41 S 178 01 E 10.75

GLADSTONE 23 55 S 151 23 E 5.46

GLENELG RIVER 38 04 S 140 59 E 1.2

GLORY COVE 46 58 S 168 10 E 12.51

GLOUCESTER ISLAND 20 00 S 148 27 E 7.38

GOAT POINT 41 05 S 174 52 E 11.23

GODLEY HEAD 43 35 S 172 49 E 12.59

GOLDSMITH ISLAND 20 41 S 149 09 E 7.27

GOODS ISLAND 10 34 S 142 09 E 9.27

GOODWIN SHOAL 22 55 S 151 44 E 5.42

GOODWOOD ISLAND 29 24 S 153 19 E 5.22

GOOSE ISLAND 40 18 S 147 48 E 2.18

GRAFTON PASSAGE 16 40 S 146 12 E 8.6

GRANT POINT 41 16 S 148 20 E 3.84

GRASSY ISLAND 20 09 S 148 37 E 7.37

GREAT DETACHED REEF 11 45 S 144 00 E 8.76

GREAT KEPPEL ISLAND 23 10 S 150 58 E 5.50

GREAT MERCURY ISLAND 36 36 S 175 47 E 10.56

GREAT OYSTER BAY 42 12 S 148 10 E 3.81

GREAT PALM ISLAND 18 45 S 146 38 E 7.47

GREAT SANDY ISLAND 25 11 S 153 10 E 5.34

GREAT SANDY STRAIT 25 30 S 152 59 E 5.36

GREAT TAYLOR BAY 43 25 S 147 09 E 3.58

GREAT WOODY ISLAND 10 42 S 142 21 E 9.16

GREEN BLUFF 30 07 S 153 13 E 5.21

GREEN HEAD 42 56 S 147 40 E 3.69

GREEN ISLAND 16 46 S 145 58 E 8.8

GREY GROUP ISLANDS 36 11 S 175 18 E 10.34

GREYMOUTH HARBOR 42 26 S 171 13 E 12.7

GUARDFISH CLUSTER 21 35 S 149 51 E 7.17

GUARDS BAY 40 57 S 174 08 E 11.43

GULL ROCKS 45 54 S 170 39 E 12.68

GUMBRELL ISLAND 20 06 S 148 36 E 7.37

GUTHRIE SHOAL 23 03 S 151 51 E 5.42

H

HAAST RIVER 43 51 S 169 03 E 12.9

HALF MOON BAY 43 01 S 147 24 E 3.65

HALF MOON BAY 46 53 S 168 09 E 12.48

HALLY BAYLEY SHOAL 40 49 S 144 23 E 3.36

HAM REEF 13 02 S 143 52 E 8.66

HAMMOND ISLAND 10 31 S 142 12 E 9.26

HAMMOND REEF 12 56 S 143 33 E 8.58

HAMMOND ROCK 10 31 S 142 13 E 9.26

HANDSPIKE POINT 54 29 S 158 54 E 13.35

HANFIELD INLET 50 44 S 166 14 E 13.27

HANNAH ISLET 13 52 S 143 43 E 8.60

HANNIBAL ISLANDS 11 35 S 142 57 E 8.81

HARRIER REEF 15 08 S 145 42 E 8.22

HARRINGTON INLET 31 53 S 152 41 E 5.16

HARVEY ROCKS 10 19 S 142 41 E 9.13

HAUMURI BLUFFS 42 34 S 173 31 E 12.58

HAUTAPU ROCKS 36 44 S 175 25 E 10.50

HAVANNAH ISLAND 18 50 S 146 33 E 7.46

HAWERA 39 36 S 174 17 E 11.15

HAWES ROCK 41 12 S 174 13 E 11.49

HAWKESBURY ISLAND 10 22 S 142 08 E 9.37

HAWKINS POINT 19 11 S 146 51 E 7.43

HAY ISLAND 13 40 S 143 41 E 8.61

HAY POINT 21 18 S 149 18 E 7.22

HAYMAN ISLAND 20 03 S 148 53 E 7.33

HAZEL REEF 12 16 S 143 18 E 8.74

HEATH REEF 13 29 S 143 41 E 8.61

HEBE REEF 41 03 S 146 45 E 3.9

HELSDON REEF 14 57 S 145 29 E 8.20
Index—Gazetteer 331

Pub. 127

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

HENNING ISLAND 20 19 S 148 56 E 7.31

HERALD CAYS 16 56 S 149 13 E 6.19

HERALD ISLAND 19 02 S 146 38 E 7.46

HERALD ISLAND 36 47 S 174 40 E 10.49

HERALD ISLETS 29 15 S 177 52 W 13.3

HERALD PASSAGE 17 24 S 151 58 E 6.16

HERALD'S BEACON ISLET 17 25 S 155 52 E 6.9

HERALD'S SURPRISE 17 20 S 148 26 E 6.24

HERBERT PEAK 43 41 S 172 47 E 12.60

HEREHERETAURA 36 50 S 175 49 E 10.60

HEROINE ROCK 10 46 S 142 19 E 9.16

HERVEY BAY 24 55 S 152 52 E 5.38

HIGH ISLAND 10 44 S 142 25 E 9.17

HIGH ISLAND 17 09 S 146 01 E 7.55

HIGH PEAK ISLAND 21 57 S 150 42 E 7.14

HIGHFIELD POINT 40 45 S 145 18 E 3.28

HIKURANGI 37 55 S 178 04 E 10.68

HILDER REEF 14 26 S 145 24 E 8.33

HILLIARD HEAD 43 23 S 145 55 E 3.43

HINCHINBROOK ISLAND 18 22 S 146 15 E 7.49

HIPPOLITE ROCKS 43 08 S 148 03 E 3.76

HIPPOLYTE ROCKS 43 08 S 148 03 E 3.76

HIXSON CAY 22 21 S 152 40 E 7.3

HOBART 42 53 S 147 20 E 3.66

HOGAN ISLAND 39 13 S 146 59 E 2.12

HOKIANGA HARBOR 35 32 S 173 22 E 11.2

HOKITIKA RIVER 42 43 S 170 59 E 12.8

HOLDSWORTH ROCK 13 46 S 143 36 E 8.55

HOLMES REEF 16 28 S 147 58 E 6.25

HOME ISLANDS 11 59 S 143 17 E 8.77

HOME POINT 35 19 S 174 23 E 10.24

HONEYCOMB ROCK 41 22 S 175 49 E 10.83

HOOK ISLAND 20 06 S 148 55 E 7.32

HOOK PEAK 20 06 S 148 56 E 7.32

HOPE BEACH 43 02 S 147 27 E 3.68

HOPE ISLAND 43 20 S 147 03 E 3.51

HOPE ISLANDS 15 44 S 145 28 E 8.25

HOPE REEF 16 32 S 146 08 E 8.9

HORN ISLAND 10 37 S 142 17 E 9.15

HORNBY LIGHT 33 50 S 151 17 E 4.24

HOROERA POINT 37 38 S 178 29 E 10.68

HORSESHOE BAY 46 52 S 168 09 E 12.48

HOTSPUR ISLETS 21 29 S 150 16 E 7.14

HOUHORA HARBOR 34 49 S 173 09 E 10.6

HOVELL ROCK 10 36 S 142 13 E 9.33

HOWE POINT 35 10 S 174 07 E 10.23

HOWICK ISLAND 14 30 S 144 58 E 8.41

HUIA BANKS 37 02 S 174 35 E 11.7

HUMMOCKY ISLAND 23 24 S 151 09 E 5.49

HUMPY POINT 20 20 S 148 51 E 7.35

HUNTER BANK 40 58 S 174 49 E 11.22

HUNTER ISLAND 40 30 S 144 45 E 3.31

HUNTER POINT 11 30 S 142 50 E 8.78

HUON RIVER 43 15 S 147 05 E 3.52

HURD POINT 54 46 S 158 53 E 13.34

HUTCHISON ROCK 23 15 S 155 36 E 6.2

HYDROGRAPHERS’S PASSAGE 19 47 S 150 24 E 7.21

HYTHE 43 26 S 146 59 E 3.50

I

ILES DES PHOQUES 42 25 S 148 10 E 3.80

ILUKA 29 25 S 153 21 E 5.22

INDIAN HEAD 15 23 S 145 17 E 8.27

INDIAN HEAD 25 00 S 153 22 E 5.34

INDIAN HEAD 31 44 S 152 48 E 5.17

INGOT ISLANDS 20 43 S 149 08 E 7.27

INGRAM ISLAND 14 24 S 144 52 E 8.34

INSCRIPTION POINT 34 00 S 151 13 E 4.22

INSET REEF 12 15 S 143 16 E 8.74

INSKIP POINT 25 49 S 153 04 E 5.34

IONA ISLET 46 54 S 168 07 E 12.50

IRENE REEF 15 39 S 145 43 E 8.22

IRONSTONE POINT 42 58 S 147 45 E 3.71

ISLAND HEAD 22 20 S 150 40 E 5.56

ISLAND POINT 16 29 S 145 28 E 8.15

ISTHMUS BAY 43 15 S 147 19 E 3.60

J

JABIRU SHOALS 23 21 S 151 05 E 5.50

JACKSON REEF 37 53 S 174 43 E 11.10

JACKSONS BAY 43 59 S 168 40 E 12.11

JACOBUS WEST SHOAL 9 53 S 143 04 E 9.11

JANE TABLE HILL 14 30 S 144 08 E 8.53

JENNY REEF 44 00 S 176 43 W 13.13

JERVIS BAY 35 07 S 150 48 E 4.13

JERVIS ISLAND 9 57 S 142 11 E 9.39

JERVIS REEF 10 00 S 142 08 E 9.39

JEWELL REEF 14 23 S 145 22 E 8.33

JOAN REEF 13 57 S 144 21 E 8.50

JUBILEE REEF 13 10 S 143 46 E 8.67

JUDGE ISLAND, 54 21 S 159 01 E 13.35

JUNCTION ISLANDS 36 14 S 175 19 E 10.35

K

KAHURANGI POINT 40 46 S 172 13 E 12.2

KAIKOURA PENINSULA 42 25 S 173 42 E 12.57

KAINGAROA BAY 43 44 S 176 16 W 13.11

KAIPARA HARBOR 36 25 S 174 09 E 11.6

KAI-YELUBI ISLAND 10 42 S 142 21 E 9.16

KAKANUI POINT 45 09 S 170 54 E 12.65

KAPITI ISLAND 40 52 S 174 55 E 11.20

KARAMEA RIVER 41 15 S 172 06 E 12.3

KAREPIRO BAY 36 39 S 174 45 E 10.42

KARITANE POINT 45 38 S 170 40 E 12.66

KARORI ROCK 41 21 S 174 39 E 11.24

KATIKI POINT 45 24 S 170 52 E 12.65

KAURI POINT 36 46 S 175 12 E 10.46

KAURI POINT 36 50 S 174 43 E 10.49

KAWA ROCK 34 58 S 173 43 E 10.11

KAWAU ISLAND 36 25 S 174 51 E 10.38

KAWHIA HARBOR 38 05 S 174 47 E 11.11

KELSO BANK 24 16 S 159 27 E 5.6

KEMP ROCKS 12 26 S 143 22 E 8.71

KEMPE POINT 41 02 S 174 19 E 11.47

KENN REEFS 21 16 S 155 48 E 6.5

KEPPEL BAY 23 22 S 151 00 E 5.48

KERMADEC GROUP 30 00 S 178 00 W 13.2

KEYSER ISLAND 20 32 S 149 05 E 7.30

KIAMA HARBOR 34 40 S 150 53 E 4.16

KILT SHOAL 40 14 S 148 01 E 2.19

KING ISLAND 14 06 S 144 20 E 8.46

KING REEF 17 47 S 146 10 E 7.51

KINGSTON 29 04 S 167 57 E 5.2

KINGSTON BAY 42 59 S 147 19 E 3.64

KIRKCALDIE REEF 10 20 S 142 50 E 9.12

KOHERURAHI POINT 36 55 S 175 08 E 10.47

KOHI POINT 37 56 S 177 01 E 10.66

KOHUAMARUA BLUFF 43 14 S 170 10 E 12.8

KOLAN RIVER 24 40 S 152 12 E 5.44

KORORAEKA POINT 35 16 S 174 07 E 10.22

KOROROIT CREEK 37 52 S 144 52 E 1.37

L

L'ESPERANCE ROCK 31 26 S 178 55 W 13.6

LA BOTTE 52 37 S 169 09 E 13.21

LACHLAN ISLET 42 39 S 147 58 E 3.78

LADY BAY 38 24 S 142 29 E 1.9

LADY ELLIOT ISLET 24 07 S 152 43 E 5.41

LADY JULIA PERCY ISLAND 38 25 S 142 00 E 1.6

LAGOON BAY 42 53 S 147 58 E 3.76

LAKE MACQUARIE ENTRANCE 33 05 S 151 40 E 5.8

LAKES ENTRANCE 37 54 S 147 58 E 2.38

LANSDOWN REEF 12 49 S 143 33 E 8.70

LARPENT BANK 10 35 S 142 01 E 9.28

LAUNCESTON 41 27 S 147 07 E 3.17

LAVINIA POINT 39 40 S 144 06 E 1.21

LAXTON REEF 9 24 S 143 49 E 9.7

LEICESTER ISLAND 22 16 S 150 27 E 7.10

LIGHTHOUSE POINT 38 51 S 146 29 E 2.31

LIHOU REEF AND CAYS 17 22 S 151 45 E 6.16

LIMEBURNERS CREEK 38 05 S 144 24 E 1.44

LIMEBURNERS POINT 38 09 S 144 23 E 1.44

LIMESTONE ISLAND 35 47 S 174 22 E 10.30

LINDEMAN GROUP 20 30 S 149 05 E 7.30
332 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 127

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

LINDEMAN ISLAND 20 27 S 149 02 E 7.30

LINDEN BANK 16 18 S 146 00 E 8.12

LINDISFARNE BAY 42 51 S 147 21 E 3.67

LINDQUIST ISLAND 17 39 S 146 09 E 7.52

LINNE ISLAND 20 40 S 149 11 E 7.27

LINNET REEF 14 47 S 145 21 E 8.38

LION ROCK 36 57 S 174 28 E 11.6

LITTLE ADOLPHUS ISLAND 10 36 S 142 37 E 8.90

LITTLE BARRIER ISLAND 36 12 S 175 05 E 10.32

LITTLE DOG ISLAND 40 15 S 148 18 E 2.20

LITTLE DRAGON BEACON 41 10 S 146 54 E 3.14

LITTLE GRASSY BAY 40 04 S 144 04 E 1.19

LITTLE NORFOLK BAY 43 02 S 147 51 E 3.71

LIZARD ISLAND 14 40 S 145 28 E 8.38

LLEWELLYN REEF 23 42 S 152 11 E 5.42

LLEWELLYN SHOAL 21 00 S 149 19 E 7.28

LONG BAY 43 08 S 147 52 E 3.75

LONG ISLAND 19 52 S 158 19 E 6.12

LONG ISLAND 20 22 S 148 52 E 7.34

LONG ISLAND 40 22 S 148 00 E 2.19

LONG ISLAND PASSAGE 19 51 S 158 17 E 6.12

LONG POINT 33 45 S 151 19 E 5.7

LONG POINT 39 10 S 177 49 E 10.79

LONG POINT 41 45 S 148 18 E 3.82

LONG POINT 46 35 S 169 35 E 12.69

LONG REEF POINT 46 13 S 166 41 E 12.36

LOOKOUT BLUFF 45 16 S 170 52 E 12.65

LOOKOUT HEAD 40 34 S 148 07 E 2.26

LOOKOUT POINT 14 50 S 145 14 E 8.37

LOOP ISLET 19 58 S 158 28 E 6.11

LORD HOWE ISLAND 31 33 S 159 05 E 5.3

LORDS RIVER 47 07 S 168 08 E 12.45

LORNE 38 33 S 143 59 E 1.26

LORT POINT 35 40 S 174 31 E 10.30

LOW HEAD 41 03 S 146 47 E 3.8

LOW ISLETS 16 23 S 145 34 E 8.16

LUCINDA POINT 18 31 S 146 20 E 7.49

M

MAATSUYKER GROUP 43 38 S 146 19 E 3.46

MABEL ISLAND 41 16 S 174 01 E 11.50

MABUIAG ISLAND 9 57 S 142 11 E 9.39

MABUIAG REEF 10 00 S 142 08 E 9.39

MACDONALD REEF 13 33 S 143 39 E 8.61

MACKAY 21 09 S 149 13 E 7.25

MACKAY REEF 16 03 S 145 39 E 8.4

MACLEAR ISLAND 14 13 S 144 15 E 8.47

MACQUARIE HARBOR 42 13 S 145 14 E 3.38

MACQUARIE ISLAND 54 45 S 158 40 E 13.32

MAER ISLAND 9 55 S 144 03 E 8.86

MAGDELAINE CAYS 16 36 S 150 20 E 6.19

MAGNETIC ISLAND 19 09 S 146 50 E 7.43

MAGNETIC PASSAGE 18 30 S 147 15 E 7.6

MAHINAPUA BAY 36 43 S 175 48 E 10.55

MANGERE ISLAND 44 16 S 176 17 W 13.15

MANGONUI HARBOR 34 59 S 173 32 E 10.10

MANLEY PIER 33 48 S 151 17 E 4.24

MANLEY POINT 33 49 S 151 17 E 4.24

MANSELL ISLAND 20 28 S 149 08 E 7.30

MANUKAU HARBOR 36 55 S 174 30 E 11.7

MARAETA POINT 36 53 S 175 02 E 10.49

MARGATE 43 02 S 147 16 E 3.55

MARIA ISLAND 42 40 S 148 04 E 3.77

MARINA ROCK 10 28 S 142 23 E 9.25

MARION REEF 19 05 S 152 17 E 6.8

MAROOCHY RIVER 26 39 S 153 05 E 5.33

MARSDEN POINT 35 50 S 174 30 E 10.30

MARSHALS ROCK 46 10 S 166 38 E 12.36

MARTHA POINT 38 18 S 144 59 E 1.30

MATATA 37 54 S 176 45 E 10.65

MATATUA POINT 38 04 S 174 50 E 11.11

MATAWHERA POINT 35 24 S 173 29 E 11.4

MAUNGANUI BLUFF 35 45 S 173 34 E 11.5

MAYOR ISLAND 37 17 S 176 15 E 10.62

MCHAFFIE POINT 38 28 S 145 10 E 2.3

MEABURN ROCK 17 34 S 146 10 E 7.54

MEDDLER ISLAND 10 42 S 142 23 E 9.16

MEGAERA REEF 14 29 S 144 58 E 8.34

MELANIE ROCK 14 06 S 144 34 E 8.49

MELBOURNE 37 50 S 144 56 E 1.37

MELLISH REEF 17 24 S 155 51 E 6.9

MERCURY BAY 36 47 S 175 49 E 10.57

MERCURY PASSAGE 42 40 S 148 00 E 3.78

MEREDITH POINT 42 33 S 148 55 E 3.78

MID ROCK 10 41 S 142 36 E 8.91

MIDDLE BANK 41 03 S 146 47 E 3.11

MIDDLE BELLONA REEFS 21 25 S 158 25 E 6.10

MIDDLE BROTHER 10 43 S 142 41 E 8.90

MIDDLE ISLAND 38 24 S 142 28 E 1.9

MIDDLE REEF 12 31 S 143 23 E 8.71

MIDDLE SHOALS 21 57 S 149 44 E 7.12

MIDDLETON 43 14 S 147 16 E 3.54

MIDDLETON REEF 29 28 S 159 04 E 5.6

MIKOTAHI LIGHT 39 03 S 174 02 E 11.14

MILES REEF 14 32 S 144 55 E 8.40

MILFORD SOUND 44 34 S 167 47 E 12.14

MILMAN ISLET 11 10 S 143 01 E 8.84

MIMIWHANGATA BAY 35 27 S 174 25 E 10.26

MINERVA SHOAL 20 55 S 159 22 E 6.10

MISSIONARY BAY 43 11 S 147 19 E 3.60

MOERAKI POINT 45 21 S 170 52 E 12.65

MOKOHINAU ISLANDS 35 55 S 175 08 E 10.31

MOLINEUX POINT 33 59 S 151 13 E 4.22

MOLLE ISLAND 20 16 S 148 50 E 7.35

MONKHOUSE POINT 15 30 S 145 17 E 8.26

MONTAGUE ISLAND 36 15 S 150 14 E 4.6

MOODY REEF 12 05 S 143 16 E 8.74

MOOLOOLABA HARBOR 26 41 S 153 08 E 5.33

MOON ISLET 33 05 S 151 40 E 5.9

MOORE REEFS 16 00 S 149 09 E 6.21

MORDIALLOC 38 01 S 145 05 E 1.37

MORESBY ROCK 10 11 S 142 43 E 9.13

MORETON BAY 27 20 S 153 15 E 5.30

MORETON ISLAND 27 12 S 153 24 E 5.29

MORIARTY ROCKS 40 35 S 148 17 E 2.26

MORRIS ISLAND 13 30 S 143 43 E 8.64

MOTITI ISLAND 37 38 S 176 25 E 10.64

MOTUAROHIA ISLAND 35 14 S 174 10 E 10.20

MOTUEKA 36 49 S 175 48 E 10.59

MOTUHORA 37 52 S 176 58 E 10.65

MOTUNGARARA ISLAND 40 57 S 174 10 E 11.43

MOTUNUI ISLET 37 47 S 177 39 E 10.66

MOTUORA ISLAND 36 30 S 174 48 E 10.40

MOUNT ADOLPHUS ISLAND 10 38 S 142 39 E 8.90

MOUNT ANGLEM 46 45 S 167 55 E 12.54

MOUNT AUGUSTUS 10 09 S 142 19 E 9.38

MOUNT BARKLY 37 53 S 147 58 E 2.37

MOUNT BEERWAH 26 54 S 152 53 E 5.31

MOUNT CHAPPELL ISLAND 40 16 S 147 56 E 2.18

MOUNT DOUBLEDUKE 29 17 S 153 11 E 5.22

MOUNT EARS 40 48 S 173 55 E 11.38

MOUNT ELIOT 19 29 S 146 58 E 7.42

MOUNT KINCAID 38 11 S 141 22 E 1.3

MOUNT LA PEROUSE 43 30 S 146 46 E 3.47

MOUNT LEEPER 17 35 S 146 06 E 7.54

MOUNT MCLEAN 44 01 S 168 45 E 12.11

MOUNT MUNRO 40 22 S 148 07 E 2.23

MOUNT RUMNEY 42 52 S 147 27 E 3.68

MOUNT SINGAPORE 38 47 S 146 27 E 2.34

MOUNT TAPUAENUKA 41 39 S 173 40 E 12.56

MOUNT VEREKER 38 58 S 146 22 E 2.6

MOUNT WAKAHURANGI 36 19 S 174 18 E 11.6

MOUNT WARRNAMBOOL 38 19 S 142 44 E 1.9

MOUNT WILLIAM 40 55 S 148 11 E 2.26

MOURILYAN HARBOR 17 36 S 146 08 E 7.53

MOUTERE BLUFF 41 13 S 173 05 E 11.32

MUD ISLAND 27 20 S 153 15 E 5.30

MURDERING POINT 17 46 S 146 07 E 7.51

MURDOCH POINT 14 37 S 144 55 E 8.40

MURRAY RIVER 18 05 S 146 02 E 7.51

MUSSELROE BAY 40 49 S 148 09 E 3.2

MUTEE HEAD 10 55 S 142 15 E 9.17

MYRMIDON REEF 18 15 S 147 22 E 7.6

N

NAMBUCCA HEADS 30 39 S 153 01 E 5.20

NAPIER HARBORS 39 29 S 176 54 E 10.81

NARDANA PATCHES 10 30 S 142 15 E 9.26

NARES ROCKS 40 35 S 144 41 E 3.33

NARROW BEND 46 04 S 166 46 E 12.35
Index—Gazetteer 333

Pub. 127

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

NATIVE ISLAND 46 55 S 168 09 E 12.49

NELSON HARBOR 41 16 S 173 17 E 11.36

NEPEAN ISLAND 29 07 S 167 56 E 5.2

NEREUS REEF 20 07 S 160 28 E 6.15

NEW REEF 13 06 S 143 39 E 8.65

NEW YEAR ISLAND 39 40 S 143 50 E 1.17

NEW ZEALAND STAR BANK 37 47 S 149 44 E 2.42

NEWCASTLE HARBOR 32 55 S 151 47 E 5.11

NEWTON ISLAND 14 30 S 144 55 E 8.41

NIGHT ISLAND 13 10 S 143 34 E 8.61

NIGHT ISLET 40 29 S 148 01 E 2.25

NILE HEAD 40 44 S 173 52 E 11.33

NINEPIN ROCK 10 14 S 142 41 E 9.13

NINTH ISLAND 40 50 S 147 16 E 3.7

NOBBYS HEAD LIGHTHOUSE 32 55 S 151 48 E 5.11

NOBLE ISLAND 14 30 S 144 46 E 8.42

NOEL BANK 20 32 S 158 34 E 6.10

NOGGIN PASSAGE 17 13 S 146 25 E 7.7

NOOSA RIVER 26 25 S 153 04 E 5.34

NORAH HEAD 33 17 S 151 35 E 5.8

NORFOLK BAY 42 58 S 147 47 E 3.70

NORFOLK ISLAND 29 02 S 167 57 E 5.2

NORMAN COVE 43 22 S 145 57 E 3.43

NORMAN INLET 50 44 S 166 10 E 13.27

NORMAN REEF 16 25 S 146 00 E 8.11

NORMANBY ISLAND 17 12 S 146 05 E 7.55

NORTH BAMPTON REEF 19 03 S 158 43 E 6.14

NORTH BAY POINT 14 16 S 144 36 E 8.43

NORTH CAPE 34 24 S 173 02 E 10.4

NORTH CAY 16 09 S 150 01 E 6.20

NORTH DIRECTION ISLAND 14 45 S 145 31 E 8.31

NORTH HEAD 35 31 S 173 22 E 11.3

NORTH HEAD 46 44 S 168 32 E 12.40

NORTH HEAD 54 28 S 158 58 E 13.32

NORTH ISLET 42 34 S 148 04 E 3.78

NORTH MOLLE ISLAND 20 13 S 148 49 E 7.36

NORTH PALM ISLAND 18 33 S 146 30 E 7.48

NORTH PANIA BUOY 41 22 S 175 49 E 10.81

NORTH PASSAGE 16 13 S 150 01 E 6.20

NORTH POINT 33 48 S 151 19 E 5.7

NORTH POINT 39 43 S 148 56 E 2.16

NORTH POINT LIGHT 27 02 S 153 27 E 5.30

NORTH POINT PASSAGE 22 02 S 149 53 E 7.12

NORTH PORT 45 59 S 166 36 E 12.32

NORTH REEF 17 27 S 148 20 E 6.23

NORTH REEF 23 11 S 151 54 E 5.42

NORTH SOLITARY ISLAND 29 56 S 153 24 E 5.22

NORTH TRAP 47 22 S 167 55 E 12.45

NORTH WEST BAY 43 03 S 147 17 E 3.54

NORTH WEST HEAD 43 00 S 147 38 E 3.69

NORTH WEST REEF 10 30 S 142 11 E 9.26

NORTH WEST SOLITARY ISLAND 30 01 S 153 16 E 5.21

NORTHEAST BAMPTON REEF 19 06 S 159 03 E 6.14

NORTHEAST CAY 21 38 S 153 46 E 6.6

NORTHERN SMALL DETACHED REEF 12 25 S 143 49 E 8.68

NORTHWEST BELLONA REEF 20 52 S 158 28 E 6.10

NORTHWEST POINT 19 37 S 158 13 E 6.13

NOTCH POINT 21 44 S 149 29 E 7.22

NUBEENA 43 06 S 147 45 E 3.72

NUGGET POINT 46 27 S 169 49 E 12.69

NUGGETS POINT 54 31 S 158 58 E 13.33

NYMPH ISLAND 14 39 S 145 15 E 8.39

O

OAMARU HARBOR 45 07 S 170 59 E 12.64

OBAN 46 53 S 168 08 E 12.48

OBERON POINT 39 05 S 146 19 E 2.7

OBREE POINT 15 46 S 145 22 E 8.24

OBREE REEF 13 59 S 143 41 E 8.55

OBSERVATORY CAY 17 08 S 152 06 E 6.16

OBSERVATORY CAY 21 02 S 154 23 E 6.7

OBSERVATORY CAY 21 24 S 158 51 E 6.10

OCEAN BAY 43 50 S 176 46 W 13.10

OCEAN ISLAND 50 32 S 166 16 E 13.26

OKAWA POINT 43 46 S 176 14 W 13.12

OKEHAMPTON BAY 42 32 S 147 58 E 3.80

OKIATO POINT 35 18 S 174 07 E 10.23

OKUKARI BAY 41 12 S 174 19 E 11.52

OLD MAN REEF 44 01 S 176 21 W 13.12

OLRY REEF 21 26 S 159 34 E 6.10

OMAHA BAY 36 19 S 174 50 E 10.37

ONE MILE OPENING 14 28 S 145 31 E 8.33

ONEHUNGA HARBOR 36 55 S 174 30 E 11.7

OPAL REEF 16 14 S 145 53 E 8.12

OPANIAPUTA POINT 41 05 S 174 00 E 11.42

OPAPE POINT 37 58 S 177 21 E 10.66

OPITO BAY 36 43 S 175 48 E 10.55

OPONONI 35 30 S 173 23 E 11.4

OPOUNUI POINT 35 01 S 173 53 E 10.13

OPUA 35 19 S 174 07 E 10.23

OPUNAKE 39 27 S 173 51 E 11.15

ORCHID POINT 12 51 S 143 27 E 8.69

ORMAN REEF 9 54 S 142 15 E 9.39

OSBORNE REEF 13 03 S 143 38 E 8.65

OSPREY REEF 13 55 S 146 36 E 6.27

OTAGO 45 49 S 170 37 E 12.67

OTAGOS RETREAT 46 09 S 166 38 E 12.35

OTAHU RIVER 37 14 S 175 53 E 10.61

OTAHUHU POINT 36 47 S 174 55 E 10.49

OTTERBOURNE ISLAND 22 02 S 150 18 E 7.15

OUTER NORTH HEAD 33 49 S 151 18 E 4.24

OUTER NORTH HEAD 43 04 S 147 38 E 3.69

OUTER SOUTH HEAD 35 33 S 173 22 E 11.4

OVERFALL ROCK 21 16 S 149 38 E 7.15

OWHIRO BAY 41 20 S 174 46 E 11.25

OYSTER BAY 41 15 S 174 15 E 11.52

P

PACKE ISLAND 10 45 S 142 13 E 9.18

PADDYS ISLET 41 24 S 148 18 E 3.83

PAGET CAY 19 15 S 152 21 E 6.8

PALM PASSAGE 18 19 S 147 00 E 7.6

PALMER HEAD 41 20 S 174 49 E 11.25

PALMER POINT 17 10 S 145 58 E 7.56

PALUMA SHOAL 11 55 S 143 18 E 8.81

PANCAKE CREEK 24 01 S 151 44 E 5.44

PAPUAN PASS 15 46 S 145 49 E 8.21

PARATUTAI ISLAND 37 03 S 174 31 E 11.7

PARAU ISLAND 10 51 S 142 19 E 9.17

PARENGARENGA HARBOR 34 32 S 173 01 E 10.5

PARKER REEF 20 33 S 149 45 E 7.20

PARRY ROCK 13 15 S 143 38 E 8.61

PARTRIDGE ISLE 43 24 S 147 06 E 3.58

PASSAGE ISLAND 35 50 S 174 30 E 10.30

PASSAGE ISLET 19 55 S 158 22 E 6.12

PASSAGE PATCH 22 22 S 150 23 E 7.10

PATEA HARBOR 39 47 S 174 29 E 11.16

PATITI POINT 44 25 S 171 16 E 12.64

PATUATINI ROCK 37 53 S 174 43 E 11.10

PAUHENEHENE SPIT LIGHT 36 54 S 175 11 E 10.49

PEAK ISLAND 23 21 S 150 56 E 5.50

PEAK POINT 10 43 S 142 26 E 9.15

PEARCE CAY 9 31 S 143 17 E 9.10

PEARL BAY 22 25 S 150 42 E 5.55

PEARL POINT 37 47 S 148 53 E 2.40

PEARL REEF 15 43 S 145 48 E 8.22

PEARN ROCK 11 25 S 142 56 E 8.81

PEDRA BLANCA 43 52 S 146 59 E 3.48

PEKAPEKA BAY 35 01 S 173 45 E 10.12

PELICAN ISLAND 13 55 S 143 50 E 8.63

PELICAN ISLAND 23 15 S 150 52 E 5.50

PELICAN ISLET 33 04 S 151 38 E 5.9

PELICAN ISLET 43 27 S 146 58 E 3.50

PELORUS ISLAND 18 33 S 146 30 E 7.48

PELORUS SOUND 40 56 S 174 04 E 11.40

PENINSULA POINT 45 22 S 166 46 E 12.24

PERANO HEAD 41 12 S 174 22 E 11.51

PERCY ISLETS 21 39 S 150 19 E 7.14

PERKINS BAY 40 46 S 145 10 E 3.28

PERPENDICULAR POINT 42 06 S 171 20 E 12.6

PERSEVERANCE HARBOR 52 33 S 169 09 E 13.20

PETHEBRIDGE ISLETS 14 44 S 144 06 E 8.39

PETRICOLA SHOAL 14 38 S 145 28 E 8.38

PICKERING POINT 38 24 S 142 28 E 1.8

PICTON HARBOR 41 17 S 174 00 E 11.50

PIERSON POINT 43 03 S 147 21 E 3.55

PIG HEAD POINT 40 16 S 148 07 E 2.19

PIGEON POINT 43 37 S 172 55 E 12.61

PINE COVE 42 12 S 145 22 E 3.40

PINETREES POINT 22 20 S 150 38 E 5.56
334 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 127

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

PINNACLE POINT 20 03 S 148 58 E 7.32

PIONEER BAY 20 14 S 148 42 E 7.37

PIONEER POINT 20 14 S 148 46 E 7.36

PIPER REEF 12 15 S 143 14 E 8.72

PIPON ISLETS 14 07 S 144 31 E 8.46

PIPON SHOALS 14 06 S 144 32 E 8.46

PIRATES BAY 43 01 S 147 56 E 3.76

PIROGUE ROCKS 36 17 S 175 20 E 10.35

PIRONGIA MOUNTAIN 38 00 S 175 08 E 11.11

PITH REEF 18 12 S 147 02 E 7.6

PITT ISLAND 44 17 S 176 13 W 13.14

PLANTATION CREEK 19 32 S 147 30 E 7.41

PLATYPUS BAY 24 57 S 153 09 E 5.38

POINT ABEONA 38 05 S 144 24 E 1.44

POINT BAILLY 42 21 S 148 01 E 3.80

POINT COOK 37 56 S 144 48 E 1.38

POINT DANGER 38 24 S 141 39 E 1.4

POINT ELIZABETH 42 23 S 171 13 E 12.6

POINT GELLIBRAND 37 52 S 144 54 E 1.37

POINT GEORGE 38 08 S 144 42 E 1.32

POINT GIBSON 42 53 S 173 19 E 12.58

POINT GILLIBRAND 37 52 S 144 54 E 1.37

POINT GRANT 38 31 S 145 07 E 2.3

POINT HENRY 38 08 S 144 25 E 1.43

POINT HIBBS 42 37 S 145 15 E 3.41

POINT HICKS 37 48 S 149 16 E 2.40

POINT HOME LOOKOUT 42 33 S 147 57 E 3.79

POINT KEAN 42 26 S 173 43 E 12.57

POINT LILLIAS 38 06 S 144 27 E 1.41

POINT LONSDALE 38 18 S 144 37 E 1.28

POINT LOOKOUT 27 26 S 153 33 E 5.28

POINT NEPEAN 38 18 S 144 39 E 1.28

POINT ORMOND 37 50 S 144 56 E 1.36

POINT PERPENDICULAR 35 06 S 150 49 E 4.14

POINT PLOMER 31 18 S 152 59 E 5.19

POINT RESOLUTION 36 51 S 174 48 E 10.49

POINT RICARDO 37 49 S 148 38 E 2.39

POINT RICHARDS 38 07 S 144 38 E 1.44

POINT RONALD 38 43 S 143 09 E 1.12

POINT SMYTHE 38 39 S 145 44 E 2.4

POINT STEPHENS 32 45 S 152 12 E 5.12

POINT WILSON 38 06 S 144 30 E 1.41

POLL ISLET 10 15 S 142 50 E 9.12

POOR KNIGHTS ISLANDS 35 28 S 174 44 E 10.27

PORIRUA HARBOR 41 05 S 174 50 E 11.23

PORPOISE HEAD 27 57 S 153 26 E 5.28

PORPOISE SHOAL 24 38 S 153 09 E 5.35

PORT ABERCROMBIE 36 10 S 175 19 E 10.33

PORT ADVENTURE 47 04 S 168 11 E 12.52

PORT ALBERT 38 40 S 146 42 E 2.35

PORT ALBERT WHARF 38 40 S 146 41 E 2.35

PORT ALMA 23 36 S 150 52 E 5.52

PORT CAMPBELL 38 37 S 142 59 E 1.11

PORT CLINTON 22 32 S 150 46 E 5.54

PORT CURTIS 23 55 S 151 23 E 5.46

PORT ESPERANCE 43 20 S 147 03 E 3.51

PORT FAIRY 38 23 S 142 15 E 1.7

PORT FITZROY 36 11 S 175 20 E 10.33

PORT GORE 41 02 S 174 14 E 11.44

PORT HACKING 34 04 S 151 09 E 4.20

PORT HACKING POINT 34 05 S 151 10 E 4.19

PORT HARDY 40 45 S 173 54 E 11.37

PORT HUON 43 10 S 146 59 E 3.53

PORT KEMBLA 34 28 S 150 55 E 4.17

PORT LATTA 40 51 S 145 23 E 3.25

PORT LEVY 43 37 S 172 50 E 12.61

PORT LYTTELTON 43 36 S 172 43 E 12.60

PORT MACQUARIE 31 26 S 152 55 E 5.18

PORT MOLLE 20 19 S 148 51 E 7.35

PORT MOTUEKA 41 08 S 173 01 E 11.32

PORT NEWRY 20 51 S 148 56 E 7.28

PORT OF BOWEN 20 01 S 148 15 E 7.38

PORT OF HAY POINT 21 16 S 149 19 E 7.23

PORT OF INNISFAIL 17 31 S 146 02 E 7.54

PORT OF LUCINDA 18 31 S 146 20 E 7.50

PORT OF MARYBOROUGH 25 53 S 152 43 E 5.39

PORT PEGASUS 47 12 S 167 42 E 12.44

PORT PHILLIP 38 18 S 144 38 E 1.28

PORT ROSS HARBOR 50 32 S 166 14 E 13.25

PORT RUSSELL 35 16 S 174 07 E 10.22

PORT SORELL 41 08 S 146 33 E 3.18

PORT STEPHENS 32 43 S 152 12 E 5.13

PORT STEWART 14 05 S 143 41 E 8.54

PORT TARANAKI 39 03 S 174 02 E 11.14

PORT UNDERWOOD 41 20 S 174 08 E 11.54

PORT WAITANGI 43 57 S 176 31 W 13.8

PORT WILLIAM 46 51 S 168 05 E 12.46

PORTLAND 38 21 S 141 37 E 1.5

PORTLAND WHARVES 35 48 S 174 20 E 10.30

PORTLOCK REEFS 9 35 S 144 50 E 8.87

POSSESSION ISLAND 10 44 S 142 24 E 9.16

POTT POINT 10 36 S 142 09 E 9.31

POTTER REEF 17 40 S 146 34 E 7.7

POVERTY BAY 38 44 S 178 02 E 10.73

POYNTER ISLAND 21 50 S 149 48 E 7.16

PRATT ROCK 16 09 S 145 37 E 8.4

PRIME SEAL POINT 40 02 S 147 46 E 2.17

PRINCE OF WALES BAY 42 50 S 147 18 E 3.67

PRINCE OF WALES ISLAND 10 41 S 142 11 E 9.15

PROMISE BAY 42 11 S 148 16 E 3.81

PROUDFOOT SHOAL 10 32 S 141 28 E 9.30

PROVIDENTIAL CHANNEL 12 36 S 143 49 E 8.68

PRUDHOE CHANNEL 21 23 S 149 43 E 7.19

PRUDHOE ISLAND 21 19 S 149 40 E 7.19

PRUDHOE SHOAL 21 19 S 149 41 E 7.19

PUKERAKEI LIGHT 43 44 S 176 14 W 13.11

PULLAR PATCHES 10 31 S 142 15 E 9.26

PULLEN REEFS 15 15 S 145 35 E 8.22

PUPONGA POINT 37 01 S 174 36 E 11.7

PYRAMID ROCK 38 32 S 145 13 E 2.3

PYRMONT BRIDGE 33 52 S 151 12 E 4.24

Q

QUETTA ROCK 10 40 S 142 38 E 8.91

QUEUE REEF 11 56 S 143 22 E 8.74

QUOIN ISLAND 22 34 S 150 48 E 5.53

R

RABBIT ISLAND 38 55 S 146 30 E 2.30

RAGLAN HARBOR 37 48 S 174 50 E 11.9

RAINBOW CHANNEL 27 27 S 153 25 E 5.29

RAINE ISLAND 11 36 S 144 01 E 8.76

RAKEAHUA 46 57 S 167 53 E 12.49

RAKITU ISLAND 36 08 S 175 30 E 10.36

RALPH BAY 42 57 S 147 26 E 3.65

RAME HEAD 37 47 S 149 28 E 2.41

RANGAUNU HARBOR 34 52 S 173 17 E 10.8

RANGIAURIA ISLAND 44 17 S 176 13 W 13.14

RANGIHOUA BAY 35 11 S 174 06 E 10.16

RANGIKAPITI HEAD 34 59 S 173 31 E 10.10

RANGIPUKEA ISLAND 36 50 S 175 25 E 10.51

RANGITOTO ISLAND 36 47 S 174 52 E 10.43

RANGITOTO ISLANDS 40 46 S 173 59 E 11.38

RANGITOTO POINT 37 48 S 174 51 E 11.9

RAOUL BAY 43 13 S 147 46 E 3.73

RAOUL ISLAND 29 16 S 177 57 W 13.3

RAPER SHOAL 26 46 S 153 10 E 5.33

RAPID HORN 14 01 S 146 42 E 6.27

RATTLESNAKE ISLAND 19 02 S 146 37 E 7.46

RATTLESNAKE POINT 15 50 S 145 23 E 8.24

RAWENE 35 24 S 173 30 E 11.4

RECHERCHE BAY 43 33 S 146 55 E 3.48

RED BLUFF 37 52 S 148 04 E 2.38

RED HEAD 35 12 S 174 12 E 10.19

RED ISLAND 10 51 S 142 21 E 9.17

RED POINT 14 33 S 144 46 E 8.42

RED POINT 37 06 S 149 57 E 4.3

RED POINT 38 33 S 145 22 E 2.3

RED WALLIS ISLAND 10 51 S 142 01 E 9.22

REDHEAD 33 01 S 151 44 E 5.10

REEF POINT 40 55 S 173 50 E 11.34

REGINALD POINT 38 46 S 143 16 E 1.12

REID ROCKS 40 15 S 144 10 E 1.22

RENNEL ISLAND 9 46 S 143 16 E 9.10

REPULSE BAY 20 35 S 148 48 E 7.29

RESOLUTION ISLAND 45 41 S 166 39 E 12.25

RESTORATION ROCK 12 37 S 143 28 E 8.71

REVOLVER BAY 46 05 S 166 45 E 12.35

REYNARD ISLAND 19 14 S 158 58 E 6.14

RIB REEF 18 28 S 146 52 E 7.6
Index—Gazetteer 335

Pub. 127

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

RIBBON REEF 14 56 S 145 42 E 8.21

RICHARDS POINT 23 59 S 151 38 E 5.45

RICHARDS ROCK 36 35 S 175 56 E 10.59

RICHARDSON REEF 10 07 S 143 03 E 9.12

RICKETTS POINT 38 00 S 145 02 E 1.36

RIEDLE BAY 42 41 S 148 05 E 3.77

RIMARIKI ISLAND 35 26 S 174 27 E 10.26

RINGDOVE BAY 49 42 S 178 50 E 13.17

RIVER DON 41 10 S 146 20 E 3.20

RIVER INGLIS 40 59 S 145 44 E 3.24

ROBERTS ISLET 9 59 S 143 07 E 9.11

ROCK COD POINT 42 50 S 147 19 E 3.67

ROCKINGHAM BAY 18 08 S 146 07 E 7.51

ROCKY CAPE 40 51 S 145 31 E 3.24

ROCKY ISLET 12 35 S 143 25 E 8.71

RODDA REEF 13 55 S 144 21 E 8.66

RODONDO ISLAND 39 14 S 146 23 E 2.10

ROMA POINT 20 17 S 148 50 E 7.35

ROONEY POINT 24 49 S 153 07 E 5.38

ROSEVEARS 41 19 S 147 00 E 3.10

ROUND HEAD 20 29 S 148 54 E 7.34

ROUND HILL 14 48 S 145 01 E 8.39

ROUND HILL HEAD 24 10 S 151 53 E 5.44

ROUND HILL POINT 41 04 S 145 57 E 3.22

ROUND MOUNTAIN 13 34 S 143 31 E 8.55

ROUND ROCK 44 22 S 176 20 W 13.14

ROUNDISH ISLET 22 03 S 149 37 E 7.12

ROYAL GEORGE SHOAL 38 16 S 144 42 E 1.33

RUAKURA POINT 36 56 S 175 11 E 10.53

RUAPAPAKA ISLET 35 21 S 173 35 E 11.4

RUAPUKE ISLAND 46 46 S 168 31 E 12.40

RUGGED POINT 10 11 S 142 08 E 9.38

RUGGED POINT 46 43 S 167 44 E 12.43

RUNDLE ISLANDS 23 32 S 151 17 E 5.47

RUSSELL ISLAND 17 14 S 146 06 E 7.55

S

SADDLE ISLAND 10 10 S 142 41 E 9.6

SADDLE POINT 46 43 S 167 59 E 12.46

SAIL ROCK 42 58 S 173 13 E 12.59

SAND HILL POINT 46 15 S 167 21 E 12.36

SAND ISLET 14 31 S 144 51 E 8.40

SAND PATCH POINT 37 44 S 149 36 E 2.41

SANDON BLUFFS 29 40 S 153 20 E 5.22

SANDSPIT LIGHT 36 54 S 175 11 E 10.49

SANDSPIT PASSAGE 36 54 S 175 11 E 10.47

SANDY BAY 42 54 S 147 20 E 3.64

SANDY CAPE 24 42 S 153 16 E 5.35

SANDY CAPE 41 25 S 144 45 E 3.36

SANDY CAPE SHOAL 24 35 S 153 20 E 5.35

SANDY POINT 36 52 S 174 53 E 10.48

SANDY POINT 38 25 S 145 14 E 2.3

SANDY SHOALS 21 50 S 149 33 E 7.22

SARAH'S BOSOM HARBOR 50 32 S 166 14 E 13.25

SATELLITE ISLAND 43 19 S 147 13 E 3.60

SATELLITE REEF 16 26 S 145 41 E 8.3

SAUMAREZ REEFS 21 48 S 153 42 E 6.6

SAUVAGE POINT 40 57 S 173 46 E 11.33

SCAWFELL ISLAND 20 52 S 149 37 E 7.26

SCRUB POINT 38 17 S 145 17 E 2.3

SEAFORTH ISLAND 20 28 S 149 02 E 7.30

SEAL POINT 40 07 S 143 58 E 1.19

SEAL ROCKS 23 57 S 151 29 E 5.45

SEALERS COVE 39 01 S 146 27 E 2.30

SECOND LUMP 23 21 S 150 56 E 5.50

SENTRY REEF 44 12 S 176 34 W 13.14

SETTLEMENT POINT 40 01 S 147 52 E 2.16

SEVEN MILE BEACH 42 51 S 147 33 E 3.69

SHAG POINT 45 28 S 170 50 E 12.65

SHAG ROCK 42 49 S 173 21 E 12.58

SHAG ROCK, 50 43 S 166 13 E 13.27

SHAKESPEARE CLIFF 36 50 S 175 44 E 10.58

SHANKS ISLETS 43 21 S 145 57 E 3.44

SHARK REEF 14 17 S 146 56 E 6.27

SHARP POINT 10 58 S 142 43 E 8.79

SHELLBACK ISLAND 38 58 S 146 14 E 2.7

SHELTER ISLANDS 45 17 S 166 53 E 12.23

SHEPHERDESS REEF 41 45 S 174 18 E 12.56

SHERRARD ISLETS 12 59 S 143 37 E 8.65

SHIP ROCK 23 25 S 151 11 E 5.49

SHOALWATER BAY 22 23 S 150 23 E 7.10

SHOE ISLET 50 32 S 166 14 E 13.26

SHORTLAND BLUFF 38 17 S 144 39 E 1.32

SIM REEF 14 49 S 145 17 E 8.37

SINGLE ROCK ENTRANCE 12 01 S 143 56 E 8.75

SINGLETON PATCH 14 10 S 144 35 E 8.43

SIR JAMES SMITH GROUP 20 38 S 149 08 E 7.27

SISTERS POINT 38 22 S 142 19 E 1.8

SKELETON CAY 19 27 S 158 57 E 6.14

SKIRMISH BAY 43 44 S 176 16 W 13.11

SKIRMISH POINT 27 05 S 153 12 E 5.30

SLADE POINT 21 04 S 149 14 E 7.28

SLIPPER ISLAND 37 03 S 175 57 E 10.61

SLOOP ROCK 42 17 S 145 11 E 3.41

SLOPE POINT 46 41 S 169 00 E 12.70

SLOPING HUMMOCK 24 50 S 152 25 E 5.40

SMOKY CAPE 30 56 S 153 05 E 5.19

SMYTHE SHOALS 21 44 S 149 52 E 7.16

SNAKE ISLAND 38 05 S 144 28 E 1.41

SNARE PEAK ISLAND 21 06 S 149 56 E 7.26

SNARES ISLANDS 48 00 S 166 34 E 12.45

SOLANDER ISLANDS 46 34 S 166 54 E 12.42

SOLITARY CONE 45 24 S 167 07 E 12.23

SOUTH BARNARD ISLANDS 17 45 S 146 10 E 7.51

SOUTH BRIG ROCK 40 06 S 144 02 E 1.19

SOUTH CHANNEL PILE 38 20 S 144 51 E 1.31

SOUTH DIRECTION ISLAND 14 50 S 145 31 E 8.31

SOUTH EAST CAPE 43 38 S 146 52 E 3.48

SOUTH EAST POINT 39 08 S 146 25 E 2.8

SOUTH ELBOW 19 59 S 158 29 E 6.11

SOUTH EVANS REEF 29 12 S 153 26 E 5.22

SOUTH GABLE 35 37 S 174 33 E 10.26

SOUTH HARBOR 52 33 S 169 09 E 13.20

SOUTH HEAD 20 19 S 148 52 E 7.35

SOUTH HEAD 36 31 S 174 44 E 10.41

SOUTH ISLAND 50 53 S 166 04 E 13.28

SOUTH ISLET 16 18 S 149 59 E 6.20

SOUTH LEDGE 10 43 S 142 44 E 8.84

SOUTH PASSAGE 16 16 S 149 59 E 6.20

SOUTH POINT 45 49 S 166 28 E 12.29

SOUTH PORT 43 27 S 146 58 E 3.49

SOUTH PORT 46 03 S 166 38 E 12.32

SOUTH PORT LAGOON 43 29 S 146 58 E 3.49

SOUTH RIORDAN SHOAL 29 00 S 153 30 E 5.24

SOUTH SOLITARY ISLAND 30 12 S 153 16 E 5.21

SOUTH WEST CAPE 43 35 S 146 02 E 3.46

SOUTH WEST ISLAND 39 32 S 147 08 E 2.13

SOUTHEAST ELBOW 21 55 S 153 35 E 6.6

SOUTHPORT ISLET 43 29 S 147 01 E 3.66

SOUTHWEST CAPE 47 17 S 167 29 E 12.44

SOUTHWEST CAY 21 50 S 153 30 E 6.6

SOUTHWEST ISLET 16 57 S 149 55 E 6.18

SOUTH-WEST POINT 54 45 S 158 48 E 13.34

SPENCER ISLAND 10 17 S 142 06 E 9.37

SPERM WHALE HEAD 37 59 S 147 43 E 2.37

SPITFIRE REEFS 16 01 S 145 38 E 8.19

SPLIT POINT 38 28 S 144 06 E 1.27

SPLIT SOLITARY ISLAND 30 14 S 153 11 E 5.21

SPRING BAY 42 33 S 147 56 E 3.79

SPRING COVE 33 49 S 151 17 E 4.24

SPUR REEF 16 24 S 146 03 E 8.9

ST. BEES ISLAND 20 55 S 149 27 E 7.26

ST. GEORGE HEAD 35 12 S 150 42 E 4.12

ST. HELENS 41 19 S 148 15 E 3.83

ST. HELENS POINT 41 17 S 148 21 E 3.83

ST. PATRICKS FORELAND 41 35 S 148 20 E 3.82

STANLEY 40 46 S 145 17 E 3.27

STEEP HEAD 43 44 S 173 08 E 12.61

STEEP ISLAND 22 02 S 150 27 E 7.14

STEPHENS ISLET 9 30 S 143 33 E 9.9

STEWART ISLAND 47 00 S 168 00 E 12.42

STEWART PENINSULA 20 47 S 148 50 E 7.29

STIRLING POINT 46 37 S 168 22 E 12.39

STOKES POINT 36 50 S 174 45 E 10.49

STOKES POINT 40 10 S 143 55 E 1.18

STONEHAVEN ANCHORAGE 20 06 S 148 53 E 7.33

STONEHENGE 10 19 S 142 06 E 9.37

STORM BAY 43 08 S 147 31 E 3.72

STRAHAN 42 10 S 145 20 E 3.40

STRIPE POINT 20 19 S 148 49 E 7.35

STRONG TIDE PASSAGE 22 20 S 150 32 E 5.56

SUE ISLET 10 13 S 142 49 E 9.12
336 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 127

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

SUGARLOAF POINT 32 27 S 152 32 E 5.14

SUNDAY ISLAND 29 16 S 177 57 W 13.3

SUNK REEFS 10 32 S 142 08 E 9.27

SURREY RIVER 38 16 S 141 42 E 1.6

SVENOR POINT 43 12 S 145 45 E 3.41

SW EXTREME 21 17 S 155 43 E 6.5

SWAIN REEFS 22 00 S 152 30 E 7.3

SWAN ISLAND 38 15 S 144 41 E 1.32

SWAN ISLAND 40 44 S 148 06 E 3.3

SWAN POINT 38 15 S 144 42 E 1.34

SWANSEA 42 09 S 148 05 E 3.81

SWINGER REEF 15 15 S 145 32 E 8.20

SWITZER REEF 14 22 S 144 45 E 8.34

SYDNEY 33 52 S 151 12 E 4.24

SYDNEY HARBOR BRIDGE 33 51 S 151 13 E 4.24

T

TABLE CAPE 39 06 S 178 00 E 10.77

TABLE CAPE 40 57 S 145 44 E 3.24

TABLE ROCK 46 06 S 166 32 E 12.31

TACKING POINT 31 29 S 152 56 E 5.17

TAHAROA IRONSAND TERMINAL 38 10 S 174 41 E 11.12

TAIHARURU HEAD 35 43 S 174 34 E 10.28

TAKAPUNA HEAD 36 49 S 174 48 E 10.44

TAKATU POINT 36 22 S 174 52 E 10.37

TAKOU BAY 35 05 S 173 57 E 10.14

TANIWHANUI POINT 36 49 S 175 10 E 10.46

TANNADICE ROCK 12 40 S 143 31 E 8.73

TAPEKA POINT 35 15 S 174 07 E 10.20

TARAKOHE 40 51 S 172 54 E 11.28

TARANNA 43 03 S 147 52 E 3.71

TASMAN HEAD 43 31 S 147 18 E 3.57

TATHRA HEAD 36 43 S 149 59 E 4.5

TAUPO BAY 34 59 S 173 43 E 10.11

TAURANGA 37 39 S 176 11 E 10.63

TAUTUKU PENINSULA 46 37 S 169 26 E 12.70

TE AUMITI 40 55 S 173 50 E 11.34

TE HAMENGA 41 32 S 175 11 E 11.25

TE HUE POINT 35 13 S 174 15 E 10.19

TE KAHA POINT 37 45 S 177 40 E 10.67

TE KAKAHO 40 54 S 174 06 E 11.41

TE KOUMA HARBOR 36 49 S 175 26 E 10.51

TE PAHI ISLANDS 35 11 S 174 05 E 10.17

TE PUNA INLET 35 12 S 174 03 E 10.17

TE RAWHITI INLET 35 14 S 174 12 E 10.19

TE ROA BAY 35 14 S 174 19 E 10.24

TE UWHI 35 16 S 174 11 E 10.21

TELEGRAPH POINT 37 33 S 149 54 E 2.42

TE-U-MUKURI POINT 45 48 S 170 43 E 12.67

THE BLUFF 36 16 S 174 15 E 11.6

THE BROTHERS POINT 46 40 S 169 12 E 12.70

THE DOUGHBOY 39 35 S 143 58 E 1.21

THE NARROWS 35 23 S 173 32 E 11.3

THE PIGEONS 36 17 S 175 20 E 10.35

THE PIGSTIES 43 33 S 146 54 E 3.48

THE PYRAMID 44 26 S 176 12 W 13.15

THE YELLOW BLUFF 43 08 S 147 24 E 3.62

THOMAS ISLAND 20 33 S 149 07 E 7.30

THOMPSON POINT 17 32 S 146 05 E 7.54

THORPE POINT 11 55 S 143 09 E 8.78

THREE HUMMOCK ISLAND 40 25 S 144 55 E 3.30

THREE ISLES 15 07 S 145 25 E 8.28

THREE KINGS ISLANDS 34 09 S 172 06 E 10.2

THREE SISTERS ISLETS 10 12 S 142 49 E 9.6

THRUSH REEF 11 43 S 143 11 E 8.83

THURSDAY ISLAND 10 35 S 142 13 E 9.33

THURSDAY ISLAND HARBOR 10 35 S 142 13 E 9.34

TI POINT 35 16 S 174 05 E 10.22

TIA ISLAND 47 05 S 168 13 E 12.52

TIJOU REEF 13 10 S 143 57 E 8.66

TIMANDRA BANK 23 26 S 151 00 E 5.49

TIMARU HARBOR 44 23 S 171 16 E 12.63

TIMUTIMU HEAD 43 54 S 172 57 E 12.62

TIRUA POINT 38 23 S 174 38 E 11.13

TITI ISLAND 40 57 S 174 10 E 11.43

TITITIRA HEAD 43 37 S 169 26 E 12.9

TOBIAS SPIT 17 08 S 146 00 E 7.55

TOETOES BAY 46 38 S 168 41 E 12.39

TOKATOKA POINT 37 47 S 174 52 E 11.9

TOKATU POINT 36 22 S 174 52 E 10.39

TOKOMARU BAY 38 08 S 178 22 E 10.71

TOLLGATE ISLANDS 35 45 S 150 16 E 4.8

TOMS CAP 38 20 S 146 48 E 2.36

TONGUE POINT 20 14 S 149 01 E 7.31

TORTOISE HEAD 38 25 S 145 16 E 2.3

TORY CHANNEL 41 13 S 174 19 E 11.19

TOWER HILL 38 19 S 142 23 E 1.7

TOWN POINT 37 45 S 176 28 E 10.64

TOWNSVILLE 19 15 S 146 50 E 7.44

TOWRADGI POINT 34 23 S 150 55 E 4.18

TRANMERE 42 55 S 147 25 E 3.65

TREBLE ISLET 21 36 S 149 50 E 7.17

TREBLE MOUNT 46 01 S 166 43 E 12.33

TREFOIL ISLAND 40 38 S 144 41 E 3.34

TREGROSSE REEFS 17 47 S 150 37 E 6.17

TRIANGLE REEF 10 45 S 143 57 E 8.85

TROUSERS POINT 40 13 S 148 01 E 2.17

TRYPHENA HARBOR 36 19 S 175 28 E 10.35

TUAHENI POINT 38 43 S 178 04 E 10.73

TUDU ISLAND 9 48 S 142 58 E 9.11

TUHAWAIKI POINT 44 27 S 171 16 E 12.64

TUNNEL BAY 43 12 S 147 44 E 3.72

TURAKIRAE HEAD 41 25 S 174 55 E 11.19

TURAKIRAE HEAD 41 26 S 174 55 E 11.25

TURANGANUI RIVER 38 40 S 178 01 E 10.73

TURTLE GROUP 14 43 S 145 12 E 8.39

TURU CAY 9 49 S 141 25 E 9.29

TUTUKAKA HARBOR 35 37 S 174 33 E 10.27

TUTUKAKA HEAD 35 37 S 174 33 E 10.26

TWILIGHT BEACH 34 30 S 172 42 E 11.1

TWIN ISLAND 10 28 S 142 27 E 9.25

TWOFOLD BAY 37 04 S 149 56 E 4.3

TYDEMAN REEF 13 59 S 144 31 E 8.50

TYNEMOUTH ISLAND 22 00 S 150 08 E 7.15

U

ULLADULLA HARBOR 35 22 S 150 30 E 4.10

ULVA ISLAND 46 56 S 168 08 E 12.49

ULVERSTONE 41 10 S 146 10 E 3.21

UNDERWOOD SHOAL 14 35 S 145 28 E 8.38

UNISON REEF 14 18 S 144 41 E 8.34

UPOLU CAY 16 40 S 145 56 E 8.3

URANGAN 25 18 S 152 53 E 5.39

URCHIN SHOAL 18 20 S 147 05 E 7.6

USSHER POINT 11 10 S 142 48 E 8.79

V

VANSITTART ISLAND 40 16 S 148 18 E 2.20

VARZIN SHOAL 10 33 S 141 55 E 9.28

VENTENAT POINT 43 21 S 147 12 E 3.59

VERNON ROCKS 21 28 S 150 19 E 7.14

VIKING REEF 11 36 S 143 00 E 8.84

W

WAEWAETOREA ISLAND 35 12 S 174 13 E 10.19

WAI WEER ISLET 10 34 S 142 10 E 9.32

WAIAROHEA STREAM 35 31 S 173 23 E 11.4

WAIHEKE ISLAND 36 48 S 175 05 E 10.45

WAIKANAE RIVER 40 52 S 175 00 E 11.22

WAIKARO POINT 36 07 S 175 26 E 10.36

WAIKATO RIVER 37 24 S 174 45 E 11.8

WAIPAPA POINT 42 12 S 173 52 E 12.56

WAIPAPA POINT 46 40 S 168 51 E 12.71

WAIRIKI POINT 35 15 S 174 14 E 10.20

WAIROA RIVER 39 02 S 177 25 E 10.79

WAIWERA BLUFF 36 32 S 174 43 E 10.42

WALKER ISLAND 40 36 S 144 56 E 3.29

WANGANUI HARBOR 39 57 S 174 59 E 11.17

WAPPARABURRA 23 10 S 150 58 E 5.50

WARDEN HEAD LIGHT 35 22 S 150 30 E 4.9

WARRIOR REEFS 9 14 S 143 12 E 9.11

WARRNAMBOOL HARBOR 38 24 S 142 29 E 1.9

WASP REEF 13 02 S 143 33 E 8.57

WATERFALL BAY 54 40 S 158 55 E 13.34

WATERHOUSE POINT 40 49 S 147 40 E 3.5

WATERWITCH PASSAGE 14 11 S 144 53 E 8.35
Index—Gazetteer 337

Pub. 127

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

WATERWITCH POINT 39 57 S 143 51 E 1.18

WATERWITCH REEF 13 09 S 143 37 E 8.62

WEDGE BAY 43 07 S 147 42 E 3.72

WEDGE ISLAND 43 08 S 147 40 E 3.72

WEDGE LIGHT 38 17 S 144 42 E 1.31

WEDNESDAY ISLAND 10 31 S 142 18 E 9.25

WEKEKA RIVER 43 26 S 169 48 E 12.9

WELLINGTON HARBOR 41 21 S 174 50 E 11.25

WELSHPOOL 38 51 S 146 34 E 2.34

WERRIBEE RIVER 37 59 S 144 41 E 1.40

WEST HEAD 38 29 S 145 02 E 2.2, 2.3

WEST HEAD 41 04 S 146 42 E 3.9

WEST HILL ISLAND 21 50 S 149 29 E 7.22

WEST ISLAND 10 21 S 142 03 E 9.37

WEST ISLET 22 12 S 155 10 E 6.4

WEST MOLLE ISLAND 20 15 S 148 49 E 7.36

WEST POINT 21 52 S 159 25 E 6.10

WEST POINT 40 57 S 144 38 E 3.36

WEST SISTER ISLAND 39 42 S 147 55 E 2.15

WESTERN PORT 38 21 S 145 14 E 2.3

WESTPORT HARBOR 41 44 S 171 36 E 12.5

WHAKAARI ISLAND 37 32 S 177 11 E 10.65

WHAKAKAIWHARA POINT 36 54 S 175 06 E 10.47

WHAKAMAWAHI POINT 41 03 S 173 59 E 11.42

WHAKATAUTUNA POINT 36 11 S 175 30 E 10.36

WHALE HILL 13 29 S 143 32 E 8.56

WHALE ISLAND 37 52 S 176 58 E 10.65

WHANGAMUMU HARBOR 35 15 S 174 18 E 10.24

WHANGAPARAPARA HARBOR 36 15 S 175 24 E 10.35

WHANGAREI 35 45 S 174 21 E 10.30

WHANGAREI HARBOR 35 48 S 174 26 E 10.30

WHANGAROA BAY 34 59 S 173 45 E 10.11

WHANGAROA HARBOR 35 02 S 173 44 E 10.12

WHANGARURU HARBOR 35 24 S 174 22 E 10.25

WHAREATA BAY 40 49 S 173 56 E 11.38

WHARTON REEF 14 08 S 144 00 E 8.48

WHIDBEY POINT 45 42 S 166 33 E 12.27

WHIHERE 44 17 S 176 15 W 13.14

WHITE BLUFFS 41 33 S 174 09 E 11.55

WHITE CLIFF POINT 16 39 S 145 34 E 8.15

WHITE CLIFFS 38 22 S 144 49 E 1.30

WHITE CLIFFS 38 52 S 174 33 E 11.13

WHITE HEAD 46 31 S 169 42 E 12.69

WHITE ISLAND 37 32 S 177 11 E 10.65

WHITE ROCK 42 25 S 148 10 E 3.80

WHITE ROCKS 10 28 S 142 02 E 9.36

WHITE ROCKS 22 12 S 150 15 E 7.10

WHITE ROCKS 41 13 S 174 17 E 11.52

WHITSUNDAY GROUP 20 15 S 149 00 E 7.31

WHITSUNDAY ISLAND 20 15 S 149 00 E 7.31

WIDE BERTH ISLAND 35 26 S 174 27 E 10.26

WIGTON ISLAND 20 44 S 149 28 E 7.26

WILLIS ISLETS 16 14 S 150 00 E 6.20

WILMOT COVE 42 53 S 147 58 E 3.76

WILSON REEF 13 57 S 144 24 E 8.50

WINDANG ISLAND 34 33 S 150 53 E 4.16

WOLLON GONG HARBOR 32 45 S 150 54 E 4.18

WOLLONGONG HEAD POINT 34 25 S 150 55 E 4.18

WOMBAT POINT 40 27 S 148 08 E 2.23

WOODBRIDGE 43 10 S 147 15 E 3.54

WOODY WALLIS ISLAND 10 53 S 142 02 E 9.22

WOOLI RIVER 29 53 S 153 16 E 5.22

WOOLI WOOLI RIVER 29 53 S 153 16 E 5.22

WOOLNORTH POINT 40 38 S 144 44 E 3.28

WRECK BAY 12 08 S 143 52 E 8.75

WRECK BAY 35 12 S 150 42 E 4.12

WRECK REEFS 22 11 S 155 20 E 6.3

WRIGHT ROCK 39 36 S 147 32 E 2.14

WYBORN REEF 10 49 S 142 45 E 8.82

WYE REEF 12 49 S 143 37 E 8.65

Y

YEPPOON INLET 23 08 S 150 45 E 5.53

YONGE REEF 14 36 S 145 37 E 8.32

YOUNG NICKS HEAD 38 46 S 177 58 E 10.76

YOUNG REEF 12 08 S 143 13 E 8.72

YULE DETACHED REEF 11 58 S 143 58 E 8.75

YULE ENTRANCE 10 23 S 143 55 E 8.85

YULE POINT 10 46 S 142 09 E 9.21

YULE POINT 16 35 S 145 31 E 8.15

YULE ROAD 27 05 S 153 20 E 5.32

Z

ZENITH REEF 12 46 S 143 36 E 8.73

ZODIAC CAY 21 07 S 152 40 E 7.3

ZUIDPOOL ROCK 43 20 S 147 10 E 3.59

ZUNA ISLAND 10 43 S 142 18 E 9.16